Osha 1910 General Industry PDF

29
Parts 1900 to 1910.999

Revised as of July 1, 2002
Labor
Containing a codification of documents

of general applicability and future effect
As of July 1, 2002
With Ancillaries
Published by
Office of the Federal Register
National Archives and Records
Administration
A Special Edition of the Federal Register
VerDate jun<06>2002 10:01 Jul 17, 2002 Jkt 197107 PO 00000 Frm 00001 Fmt 8091 Sfmt 8091 Y:\SGML\197107F.XXX pfrm15 PsN: 197107F
U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE
WASHINGTON : 2002
For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office

Internet: bookstore.gpo.gov Phone: (202) 512-1800 Fax: (202) 512-2250
Mail: Stop SSOP, Washington, DC 204020001
Table of Contents
Page
Explanation ................................................................................................ v
Title 29:
Subtitle BRegulations Relating to Labor (Continued)
Chapter XVIIOccupational Safety and Health Administration,

Department of Labor ................................................................... 5
Finding Aids:
Material Approved for Incorporation by Reference ............................ 923
Table of CFR Titles and Chapters ....................................................... 933
Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR ......................... 951
List of CFR Sections Affected ............................................................. 961
iii
VerDate Aug<2,>2002 01:19 Aug 10, 2002 Jkt 197107 PO 00000 Frm 00003 Fmt 8092 Sfmt 8092 Y:\SGML\197107F.XXX pfrm17 PsN: 197107F
Cite this Code: CFR
To cite the regulations in

this volume use title,
part and section num-
ber. Thus, 29 CFR
1902.1 refers to title 29,
part 1902, section 1.
iv
Explanation
The Code of Federal Regulations is a codification of the general and permanent
rules published in the Federal Register by the Executive departments and agen-
cies of the Federal Government. The Code is divided into 50 titles which represent
broad areas subject to Federal regulation. Each title is divided into chapters
which usually bear the name of the issuing agency. Each chapter is further sub-
divided into parts covering specific regulatory areas.
Each volume of the Code is revised at least once each calendar year and issued
on a quarterly basis approximately as follows:
Title 1 through Title 16..............................................................as of January 1
Title 17 through Title 27 .................................................................as of April 1
Title 28 through Title 41 ..................................................................as of July 1
Title 42 through Title 50 .............................................................as of October 1
The appropriate revision date is printed on the cover of each volume.
LEGAL STATUS
The contents of the Federal Register are required to be judicially noticed (44
U.S.C. 1507). The Code of Federal Regulations is prima facie evidence of the text
of the original documents (44 U.S.C. 1510).
HOW TO USE THE CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS
The Code of Federal Regulations is kept up to date by the individual issues
of the Federal Register. These two publications must be used together to deter-
mine the latest version of any given rule.
To determine whether a Code volume has been amended since its revision date
(in this case, July 1, 2002), consult the List of CFR Sections Affected (LSA),
which is issued monthly, and the Cumulative List of Parts Affected, which
appears in the Reader Aids section of the daily Federal Register. These two lists
will identify the Federal Register page number of the latest amendment of any
given rule.
EFFECTIVE AND EXPIRATION DATES
Each volume of the Code contains amendments published in the Federal Reg-
ister since the last revision of that volume of the Code. Source citations for
the regulations are referred to by volume number and page number of the Federal
Register and date of publication. Publication dates and effective dates are usu-
ally not the same and care must be exercised by the user in determining the
actual effective date. In instances where the effective date is beyond the cut-
off date for the Code a note has been inserted to reflect the future effective
date. In those instances where a regulation published in the Federal Register
states a date certain for expiration, an appropriate note will be inserted following
the text.
OMB CONTROL NUMBERS
The Paperwork Reduction Act of 1980 (Pub. L. 96511) requires Federal agencies
to display an OMB control number with their information collection request.
Many agencies have begun publishing numerous OMB control numbers as amend-
ments to existing regulations in the CFR. These OMB numbers are placed as
close as possible to the applicable recordkeeping or reporting requirements.
OBSOLETE PROVISIONS
Provisions that become obsolete before the revision date stated on the cover
of each volume are not carried. Code users may find the text of provisions in
effect on a given date in the past by using the appropriate numerical list of
sections affected. For the period before January 1, 1986, consult either the List
of CFR Sections Affected, 19491963, 19641972, or 19731985, published in seven sep-
arate volumes. For the period beginning January 1, 1986, a List of CFR Sections
Affected is published at the end of each CFR volume.
INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE
What is incorporation by reference? Incorporation by reference was established
by statute and allows Federal agencies to meet the requirement to publish regu-
lations in the Federal Register by referring to materials already published else-
where. For an incorporation to be valid, the Director of the Federal Register
must approve it. The legal effect of incorporation by reference is that the mate-
rial is treated as if it were published in full in the Federal Register (5 U.S.C.
552(a)). This material, like any other properly issued regulation, has the force
of law.
What is a proper incorporation by reference? The Director of the Federal Register
will approve an incorporation by reference only when the requirements of 1 CFR
part 51 are met. Some of the elements on which approval is based are:
(a) The incorporation will substantially reduce the volume of material pub-
lished in the Federal Register.
(b) The matter incorporated is in fact available to the extent necessary to
afford fairness and uniformity in the administrative process.
(c) The incorporating document is drafted and submitted for publication in
accordance with 1 CFR part 51.
Properly approved incorporations by reference in this volume are listed in the
Finding Aids at the end of this volume.
What if the material incorporated by reference cannot be found? If you have any
problem locating or obtaining a copy of material listed in the Finding Aids of
this volume as an approved incorporation by reference, please contact the agency
that issued the regulation containing that incorporation. If, after contacting the
agency, you find the material is not available, please notify the Director of the
Federal Register, National Archives and Records Administration, Washington DC
20408, or call (202) 5234534.
CFR INDEXES AND TABULAR GUIDES
A subject index to the Code of Federal Regulations is contained in a separate
volume, revised annually as of January 1, entitled CFR INDEX AND FINDING AIDS.
This volume contains the Parallel Table of Statutory Authorities and Agency
Rules (Table I). A list of CFR titles, chapters, and parts and an alphabetical
list of agencies publishing in the CFR are also included in this volume.
An index to the text of Title 3The President is carried within that volume.
The Federal Register Index is issued monthly in cumulative form. This index
is based on a consolidation of the Contents entries in the daily Federal Reg-
ister.
A List of CFR Sections Affected (LSA) is published monthly, keyed to the
revision dates of the 50 CFR titles.
vi
REPUBLICATION OF MATERIAL
There are no restrictions on the republication of material appearing in the
Code of Federal Regulations.
INQUIRIES
For a legal interpretation or explanation of any regulation in this volume,
contact the issuing agency. The issuing agencys name appears at the top of
oddnumbered pages.
For inquiries concerning CFR reference assistance, call 2025235227 or write
to the Director, Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records
Administration, Washington, DC 20408 or email info@fedreg.nara.gov.
SALES
The Government Printing Office (GPO) processes all sales and distribution of
the CFR. For payment by credit card, call 2025121800, MF, 8 a.m. to 4 p.m.
e.s.t. or fax your order to 2025122250, 24 hours a day. For payment by check,
write to the Superintendent of Documents, Attn: New Orders, P.O. Box 371954,
Pittsburgh, PA 152507954. For GPO Customer Service call 2025121803.
ELECTRONIC SERVICES
The full text of the Code of Federal Regulations, The United States Govern-
ment Manual, the Federal Register, Public Laws, Public Papers, Weekly Compila-
tion of Presidential Documents and the Privacy Act Compilation are available
in electronic format at www.access.gpo.gov/nara (GPO Access). For more infor-
mation, contact Electronic Information Dissemination Services, U.S. Govern-
ment Printing Office. Phone 2025121530, or 8882936498 (tollfree). Email,
gpoaccess@gpo.gov.
The Office of the Federal Register also offers a free service on the National
Archives and Records Administrations (NARA) World Wide Web site for public
law numbers, Federal Register finding aids, and related information. Connect
to NARAs web site at www.nara.gov/fedreg. The NARA site also contains links
to GPO Access.
RAYMOND A. MOSLEY,
Director,
Office of the Federal Register.
July 1, 2002.
vii
THIS TITLE
Title 29LABOR is composed of nine volumes. The parts in these volumes are
arranged in the following order: parts 099, parts 100499, parts 500899, parts 900
1899, parts 19001910.999, part 1910.1000End, parts 19111925, part 1926, and part 1927
to end. The contents of these volumes represent all current regulations codified
under this title as of July 1, 2002.
The OMB control numbers for title 29 CFR part 1910 appear in 1910.8. For
the convenience of the user, 1910.8 appears in the Finding Aids section of the
volume containing 1910.1000 to the end.
Redesignation tables appear in the Finding Aids section of the eighth volume.
Subject indexes appear following the occupational safety and health standards
(part 1910), and following the safety and health regulations for: Longshoring (part
1918), Gear Certification (part 1919), and Construction (part 1926).
ix
x
CFRORDR.FRM</GPH>
Title 29Labor
(This book contains parts 1900 to 1910.999)
Part
SUBTITLE BREGULATIONS RELATING TO LABOR (CONTINUED)
CHAPTER XVIIOccupational Safety and Health Administra-

tion, Department of Labor ................................................. 1902
CROSS REFERENCES: Railroad Retirement Board: See Employees Benefits, 20 CFR chapter II.
Social Security Administration, Department of Health and Human Services: See Employ-
ees Benefits, 20 CFR chapter III.
Other regulations issued by the Department of Labor appear in 20 CFR chapters I, IV and
V, VI, VII; 29 CFR subtitle A, chapters II, IV, V, XXV; 41 CFR chapters 50, 60, and 61. For
Standards for a Merit System of Personnel Administration: See 5 CFR part 900.
VerDate Aug<2,>2002 08:14 Aug 03, 2002 Jkt 197107 PO 00000 Frm 00001 Fmt 8008 Sfmt 8008 Y:\SGML\197107T.XXX pfrm72 PsN: 197107T
Subtitle BRegulations
Relating to Labor
(Continued)
CHAPTER XVIIOCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND
HEALTH ADMINISTRATION, DEPARTMENT OF
LABOR
Part Page
19001901[Reserved]
1902 State plans for the development and enforcement
of State standards ................................................ 7
1903 Inspections, citations and proposed penalties ......... 27
1904 Recording and reporting occupational injuries and
illnesses ................................................................ 43
1905 Rules of practice for variances, limitations, vari-
ations, tolerances, and exemptions under the
Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and
Health Act of 1970 ................................................. 66
1906 Administration witnesses and documents in pri-
vate litigation [Reserved]
1908 Consultation agreements ........................................ 77
1910 Occupational safety and health standards .............. 88
Subject index for 29 CFR part 1910Occupational
safety and health standards ................................. 890
PARTS 19001901 [RESERVED] 1902.35 Effect of certification.
BASIS FOR 18(E) DETERMINATIONS
PART 1902STATE PLANS FOR THE 1902.36 General provisions.
DEVELOPMENT AND ENFORCE- 1902.37 Factors for determination.
MENT OF STATE STANDARDS PROCEDURES FOR 18(E) DETERMINATION
Subpart AGeneral 1902.38 Evaluation of plan following certifi-
cation.
Sec. 1902.39 Completion of evaluation.
1902.1 Purpose and scope. 1902.40 Informal hearing.
1902.2 General policies. 1902.41 Decision.
1902.42 Effect of affirmative 18(e) deter-
Subpart BCriteria for State Plans mination.
1902.43 Affirmative 18(e) decision.
1902.3 Specific criteria. 1902.44 Requirements applicable to State
1902.4 Indices of effectiveness. plans granted affirmative 18(e) deter-
1902.5 Intergovernmental Cooperation Act minations.
of 1968. 1902.45 [Reserved]
1902.6 Consultation with the National Insti- 1902.46 Negative 18(e) determination.
tute for Occupational Safety and Health.
PROCEDURE FOR RECONSIDERATION AND REV-
Subpart CProcedures for Submission, OCATION OF AN AFFIRMATIVE 18(E) DETER-
Approval and Rejection of State Plans MINATION
1902.10 Submission. 1902.47 Reconsideration of an affirmative

18(e) determination.
PROCEDURE FOR PROPOSED OR POSSIBLE 1902.48 The proceeding.
APPROVAL OF PLAN 1902.49 General notice.
1902.50 Informal hearing.
1902.11 General notice. 1902.51 Certification of the records of a
1902.12 Opportunity for modifications and hearing.
clarifications. 1902.52 Decision.
1902.13 Informal hearing. 1902.53 Publication of decisions.
1902.14 Formal hearing.
1902.15 Certification of the record of a hear- AUTHORITY: Secs. 8, 18, Occupational Safe-
ing. ty and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 657, 667).
PROCEDURE FOR PROPOSED OR POSSIBLE SOURCE: 36 FR 20751, Oct. 29, 1971, unless
REJECTION OF PLAN otherwise noted.
1902.17 The proceeding.

1902.18 Previous hearing or other oppor- Subpart AGeneral
tunity for comment on plan.
1902.19 Notice of hearing. 1902.1 Purpose and scope.
(a) This part applies the provisions of
DECISIONS
section 18 of the Williams-Steiger Oc-
1902.20 Decision following informal pro- cupational Safety and Health Act of
ceeding. 1970 (hereinafter referred to as the Act)
1902.21 Tentative decision following formal relating to State plans for the develop-
proceeding.
1902.22 Final decision following formal pro-
ment and enforcement of State occupa-
ceeding. tional safety and health standards. The
1902.23 Publication of decisions. provisions of the part set forth the pro-
cedures by which the Assistant Sec-
Subpart DProcedures for Determinations retary for Occupational Safety and
Under Section 18(e) of the Act Health (hereinafter referred to as the
Assistant Secretary) under a delega-
GENERAL
tion of authority from the Secretary of
1902.30 Purpose and scope. Labor (Secretarys Order No. 1271, 36
1902.31 Definitions. FR 8754, May 12, 1971) will approve or
1902.32 General policies.
reject State plans submitted to the
COMPLETION OF DEVELOPMENTAL STEPS Secretary. In the Act, Congress de-
CERTIFICATION clared it to be its purpose and policy
1902.33 Developmental period. * * * to assure so far as possible every
1902.34 Certification of completion of devel- working man and woman in the Nation
opmental steps. safe and healthful working conditions
1902.1 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7102 Edition)
and to preserve our human resources program on the basis of actual oper-
by, among other actions and programs, ations. After the determination that
* * * encouraging the State to assume the State is applying the criteria of
the fullest responsibility for the ad- section 18(c) of the Act, the Assistant
ministration and enforcement of their Secretarys enforcement authority
occupational safety and health laws. shall not apply with respect to any oc-
Section 18(a) of the Act is read as pre- cupational safety or health issue cov-
venting any State agency or court ered by the plan. Notwithstanding plan
from asserting jurisdiction under State approval and a determination under
law over any occupational safety or section 18(e) that the section 18(c) cri-
health issue with respect to which a teria are being followed, the Assistant
Federal standard has been issued under Secretary shall make a continuing
section 6 of the Act. However, section evaluation, as provided in section 18(f)
18(b) provides that any State that de- of the Act, of the manner in which the
sires to assume responsibility for the State is carrying out the plan.
development and enforcement therein (2) Federal enforcement authority
of occupational safety and health which must be retained by the Assist-
standards relating to issues covered by ant Secretary until actual operations
corresponding standards promulgated prove the State plan to be at least as
under section 6 of the Act shall submit effective as the Federal program, will
a plan for doing so to the Assistant be exercised to the degree necessary to
Secretary. assure occupational safety and health.
(b) Section 18(c) of the Act sets out Factors to be considered in deter-
certain criteria that a plan which is mining the level of Federal effort dur-
submitted under section 18(b) of the ing this period include:
Act must meet, either initially or upon (i) Whether the plan is developmental
modification, if it is to be approved. (i.e., approved under 1902.2(b)) or com-
Foremost among these criteria is the plete (i.e., approved under 1902.2 (a)).
requirement that the plan must pro- (ii) Results of evaluations conducted
vide for the development of State by the Assistant Secretary.
standards and the enforcement of such (3) Whenever the Assistant Secretary
standards which are or will be at least determines, after giving notice and af-
as effective in providing safe and fording the State an opportunity for a
healthful employment and places of hearing, that in the administration of
employment as the standards promul- the State plan there is a failure to
gated under section 6 of the Act which comply substantially with any provi-
relate to the same issues. sion of the plan or any assurance con-
(c)(1) If the Assistant Secretary ap- tained therein, he shall withdraw ap-
proves a State plan submitted under proval of such plan in whole or in part,
section 18(b), he may, but is not re- and upon notice the State shall cease
quired to, exercise his enforcement au- operations under any disapproved plan
thority with respect to Federal stand- or part thereof, except that it will be
ards corresponding to standards ap- permitted to retain jurisdiction as to
proved under the plan until he deter- any case commenced before withdrawal
mines, in accordance with section 18(e) of approval whenever the issues in-
of the Act, on the basis of actual oper- volved do not relate to the reasons for
ations under the plan, that the State is the withdrawal of the plan.
applying the criteria of section 18(c) of (4) A determination of approval of a
the Act. The Assistant Secretary shall State plan under section 18(e) does not
not make this determination (i) for at affect the authority and responsibility
least 3 years after initial approval of of the Assistant Secretary to enforce
the plan, and (ii) in the case of a devel- Federal standards covering issues not
opmental plan approved under included under the State plan.
1902.2(b), until the State has com- (d) The policy of the Act is to encour-
pleted all the steps specified in its plan age the assumption by the States of
which are designed to make it at least the fullest responsibility for the devel-
as effective as the Federal program and opment and enforcement of their own
the Assistant Secretary has had at occupational safety and health stand-
least 1 year in which to evaluate the ards. This assumption of responsibility
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor 1902.2
is considered to include State develop- schedule for their accomplishment not

ment and enforcement of standards on to exceed 3 years, at the end of which
as many occupational safety and the State plan will meet the criteria in
health issues as possible. To these 1902.3. A developmental plan shall in-
ends, the Assistant Secretary intends clude the date or dates within which
to cooperate with the States so that intermediate and final action will be
they can obtain approval of plans for accomplished. If necessary program
the development and enforcement of changes require legislative action by a
State standards which are or will be at State, a copy of a bill or a draft of leg-
least as effective as the Federal stand- islation that will be or has been pro-
ards and enforcement. posed for enactment shall be sub-
(e) After the Assistant Secretary has mitted, accompanied by (1) a state-
approved a plan, he may approve one or ment of the Governors support of the
more grants under section 23(g) of the legislation and (2) a statement of legal
Act to assist the State in admin-
opinion that the proposed legislation
istering and enforcing its program for
will meet the requirements of the Act
occupational safety and health in ac-
and this part in a manner consistent
cordance with appropriate instructions
or procedures to be promulgated by the with the States constitution and laws.
Assistant Secretary. On the basis of the States submission
the Assistant Secretary will approve
[36 FR 20751, Oct. 29, 1971, as amended at 61 the plan if he finds that there is a rea-
FR 9230, Mar. 7, 1996] sonable expectation that the State
1902.2 General policies. plan will meet the criteria in 1902.3
within the indicated 3-year period. In
(a) Policy. The Assistant Secretary such case, the Assistant Secretary
will approve a State plan which pro- shall not make a determination under
vides for an occupational safety and
section 18(e) of the Act that a State is
health program with respect to covered
fully applying the criteria in 1902.3
issues that in his judgment meets or
until the State has completed all the
will meet the criteria set forth in
developmental steps specified in its
1902.3. Included among these criteria
plan which are designed to make it at
is the requirement that the State plan
provide for the development and en- least as effective as the Federal pro-
forcement of standards relating to gram, and the Assistant Secretary has
issues covered by the plan which are or had at least 1 year to evaluate the plan
will be at least as effective in providing on the basis of actual operations. If at
safe and healthful employment and the end of 3 years from the date of
places of employment as standards pro- commencement of the plans develop-
mulgated and enforced under section 6 ment, the State is found by the Assist-
of the Act on the same issues. In deter- ant Secretary, after affording the State
mining whether a State plan satisfies notice and opportunity for a hearing,
the requirement of effectiveness, the not to have substantially completed
Assistant Secretary will measure the the developmental steps of the plan,
plan against the indices of effective- the Assistant Secretary shall withdraw
ness set forth in 1902.4. the approval of the plan.
(b) Developmental plan. A State plan (c) Scope of State plan. (1) A State
for an occupational safety and health plan may cover any occupational safe-
program may be approved although, ty and health issue with respect to
upon submission it does not fully meet which a Federal standard has been pro-
the criteria set forth in 1902.3, if it in- mulgated under section 6 of the Act.
cludes satisfactory assurances by the An issue is considered to be an in-
State that it will take the necessary dustrial, occupational or hazard group-
steps to bring the State program into ing which is at least as comprehensive
conformity with these criteria within as a corresponding grouping contained
the 3-year period immediately fol- in (i) one or more sections in subpart B
lowing the commencement of the or R of part 1910 of this chapter, or (ii)
plans operation. In such case, the one or more of the remaining subparts
State plan shall include the specific ac- of part 1910. However, for cause shown
tions it proposes to take and a time the Assistant Secretary may approve a
plan relating to other industrial, occu- to insure that the commitments of the
pational or hazard groupings if he de- State under the plan will be fulfilled.
termines that the plan is administra- (c) Standards. (1) The State plan shall
tively practicable and that such include or provide for the development
groupings would not conflict with the or adoption of, and contain assurances
purposes of the Act. that the State will continue to develop
(2) Each State plan shall describe the or adopt, standards which are or will be
occupational safety and health issue or at least as effective as those promul-
issues and the State standard or stand- gated under section 6 of the Act. Indi-
ards applicable to each such issue or ces of the effectiveness of standards
issues over which it desires to assume and procedures for the development or
enforcement responsibility in terms of adoption of standards against which
the corresponding Federal industrial, the Assistant Secretary will measure
occupational or hazard groupings and the State plan in determining whether
set forth the reasons, supported with it is approvable are set forth in
appropriate data, for any variations 1902.4(b).
the State proposes from the coverage (2) The State plan shall not include
of Federal standards. standards for products distributed or
(3) The State plan shall apply to all used in interstate commerce which are
employers and employees within the different from Federal standards for
affected industry, occupational or haz- such products unless such standards
ard grouping unless the Assistant Sec- are required by compelling local condi-
retary finds that the State has shown tions and do not unduly burden inter-
good cause why any group or groups of state commerce. This provision, re-
employers or employees should be ex- flecting section 18(c)(2) of the Act, is
cluded. Any employers or employees so interpreted as not being applicable to
excluded shall be covered by applicable customized products or parts not nor-
Federal standards and enforcement mally available on the open market, or
provisions in the Act. to the optional parts or additions to
products which are ordinarily available
Subpart BCriteria for State Plans with such optional parts or additions.
(d) Enforcement. (1) The State plan
1902.3 Specific criteria. shall provide a program for the en-
(a) General. A State plan must meet forcement of the State standards which
the specific criteria set forth in this is, or will be, at least as effective as
section. that provided in the Act, and provide
(b) Designation of State agency. (1) The assurances that the States enforce-
State plan shall designate a State ment program will continue to be at
agency or agencies as the agency or least as effective as the Federal pro-
agencies responsible for administering gram. Indices of the effectiveness of a
the plan throughout the State. States enforcement plan against which
(2) The plan shall also describe the the Assistant Secretary will measure
authority and responsibilities vested in the State plan in determining whether
such agency or agencies. The plan shall it is approvable are set forth in
contain assurances that any other re- 1902.4(c).
sponsibilities of the designated agency (2) The State plan shall require em-
shall not detract significantly from the ployers to comply with all applicable
resources and priorities assigned to ad- State occupational safety and health
ministration of the plan. standards covered by the plan and all
(3) A State agency or agencies must applicable rules issued thereunder, and
be designated with overall responsi- employees to comply with all stand-
bility for administering the plan ards, rules, and orders applicable to
throughout the State. However, polit- their conduct.
ical subdivisions of the State may have (e) Right of entry and inspection. The
the responsibility and authority for the State plan shall contain adequate as-
development and enforcement of stand- surance that inspectors will have a
ards, provided that the State agency or right to enter and inspect covered
agencies are given adequate authority workplaces which is, or will be, at least
by statute, regulation, or agreement, as effective as that provided in section
10
8 of the Act. Where such entry or in- fective and comprehensive occupa-
spection is refused, the State agency or tional safety and health program cov-
agencies shall have the authority, ering all employees of public agencies
through appropriate legal process, to of the State and its political subdivi-
compel such entry and inspection. sions. Such program shall be as effec-
(f) Prohibition against advance notice. tive as the programs contained in the
The State plan shall contain a prohibi- plan which are applicable to employees
tion against advance notice of inspec- covered by the plan.
tions. Any exceptions must be ex- (k) Employer records and reports. The
pressly authorized by the head of the State plan shall provide assurances
designated agency or agencies or his that employers covered by the plan
representative and such exceptions will maintain records and make reports
may be no broader than those author- to the Assistant Secretary in the same
ized under the Act and the rules pub- manner and to the same extent as if
lished in part 1903 of this chapter relat- the plan were not in effect.
ing to advance notice. (l) State agency reports to the Assistant
(g) Legal authority. The State plan Secretary. The State plan shall provide
shall contain satisfactory assurances assurances that the designated agency
that the designated agency or agencies or agencies shall make such reasonable
have, or will have, the legal authority reports to the Assistant Secretary in
necessary for the enforcement of its such form and containing such infor-
standards. mation as he may from time to time
(h) Personnel. The State plan shall require. The agency or agencies shall
provide assurance that the designated establish specific goals, consistent with
agency or agencies have, or will have, a the goals of the Act, including meas-
sufficient number of adequately ures of performance, output and results
trained and qualified personnel nec- which will determine the efficiency and
essary for the enforcement of the effectiveness of the State program, and
standards. For this purpose qualified shall make periodic reports to the As-
personnel means persons employed on a sistant Secretary on the extent to
merit basis, including all persons en- which the State, in implementation of
gaged in the development of standards its plan, has attained these goals. Re-
and the administration of the State ports will also include data and infor-
plan. Conformity with the Standards mation on the implementation of the
for a Merit System of Personnel Ad- specific inspection and voluntary com-
ministration, 45 CFR part 70, issued by pliance activities included within the
the Secretary of Labor, including any State plan. Further, these reports shall
amendments thereto, and any stand- contain such statistical information
pertaining to work-related deaths, in-
ards prescribed by the U.S. Civil Serv-
juries, and illnesses in employments
ice Commission pursuant to section 208
and places of employment covered by
of the Intergovernmental Personnel
the plan as the Assistant Secretary
Act of 1970 (Pub. L. 91648; 84 Stat. 1915)
may from time to time require.
modifying or superseding such stand-
ards, will be deemed to meet this re- (Approved by the Office of Management and
quirement. Budget under control number 12180004)
(i) Resources. The State plan shall [36 FR 20751, Oct. 29, 1971, as amended at 54
contain satisfactory assurances FR 24333, June 7, 1989]
through the use of budget, organiza-
tional description, and any other ap- 1902.4 Indices of effectiveness.
propriate means that the State will de- (a) General. In order to satisfy the re-
vote adequate funds to the administra- quirements of effectiveness under
tion and enforcement of the program. 1902.3 (c)(1) and (d)(1), the State plan
The Assistant Secretary will make shall:
periodic evaluations of the adequacy of (1) Establish the same standards, pro-
the State resources devoted to the cedures, criteria and rules as have been
plan. established by the Assistant Secretary
(j) State and local government employ- under the Act, or;
ees. The State plan shall include, to the (2) Establish alternative standards,
extent permitted by State law, an ef- procedures, criteria, and rules which
11
will be measured against each of the expert technical knowledge, and pro-
indices of effectiveness in paragraphs viding interested persons, including
(b) and (c) of this section to determine employers, employees, recognized
whether the alternatives are at least as standards-producing organizations, and
effective as the Federal program with the public an opportunity to submit in-
respect to the subject of each index. formation requesting the development
For each index the State must dem- or promulgation of new standards or
onstrate by the presentation of factual the modification or revocation of exist-
or other appropriate information that ing standards and to participate in any
its plan is or will be at least as effec- hearings. This index may also be satis-
tive as the Federal program. fied by such means as the adoption of
(b) Standards. (1) The indices for Federal standards, in which case the
measurement of a State plan with re- procedures at the Federal level before
gard to standards follow in paragraph adoption of a standard under section 6
(b)(2) of this section. The Assistant may be considered to meet the condi-
Secretary will determine whether the tions of this index.
State plan satisfies the requirements of (iv) Provides authority for the grant-
effectiveness with regard to each index ing of variances from State standards,
as provided in paragraph (a) of this sec- upon application of an employer or em-
tion. ployers which correspond to variances
(2) The Assistant Secretary will de- authorized under the Act, and for con-
termine whether the State plan: sideration of the views of interested
(i) Provides for State standards with parties, by such means as giving af-
respect to specific issues which are or fected employees notice of each appli-
will be at least as effective as the cation and an opportunity to request
standards promulgated under section 6 and participate in hearings or other ap-
of the Act relating to the same issues. propriate proceedings relating to appli-
In the case of any State standards deal- cations for variances.
ing with toxic materials or harmful
(v) Provides for prompt and effective
physical agents, they should ade-
standards setting actions for the pro-
quately assure, to the extent feasible,
tection of employees against new and
that no employee will suffer material
unforseen hazards, by such means as
impairment of health or functional ca-
pacity even if such employee has reg- the authority to promulgate emer-
ular exposure to the hazard dealt with gency temporary standards.
by such standard for the period of his (vi) Provides that State standards
working life, by such means as, in the contain appropriate provision for the
development and promulgation of furnishing to employees of information
standards, obtaining the best available regarding hazards in the workplace, in-
evidence through research, demonstra- cluding information about suitable pre-
tions, experiments, and experience cautions, relevant symptoms, and
under this and other safety and health emergency treatment in case of expo-
laws. sure, by such means as labeling, post-
(ii) Provides an adequate method to ing, and, where appropriate, medical
assure that its standards will continue examination at no cost to employees,
to be at least as effective as Federal with the results of such examinations
standards, including Federal standards being furnished only to appropriate
relating to issues covered by the plan, State officials and, if the employee so
which become effective subsequent to requests, to his physician.
any approval of the plan. (vii) Provides that State standards,
(iii) Provides a procedure for the de- where appropriate, contain specific
velopment and promulgation of stand- provision for the protection of employ-
ards which allows for the consideration ees from exposure to hazards, by such
of pertinent factual information and means as containing appropriate provi-
affords interested persons, including sion for use of suitable protective
employees, employers and the public, equipment and for control or techno-
an opportunity to participate in such logical procedures with respect to such
processes, by such means as estab- hazards, including monitoring or meas-
lishing procedures for consideration of uring such exposure.
12
(c) Enforcement. (1) The indices for against discharge or discrimination in

measurement of a State plan with re- terms and conditions of employment
gard to enforcement follow in para- because he has filed a complaint, testi-
graph (c)(2) of this section. The Assist- fied, or otherwise acted to exercise
ant Secretary will determine whether rights under the Act for himself or oth-
the State plan satisfies the require- ers, by such means as providing for ap-
ments of effectiveness with regard to propriate sanctions against the em-
each index as provided in paragraph (a) ployer for such actions and by pro-
of this section. viding for the withholding, upon re-
(2) The Assistant Secretary will de- quest, of the names of complainants
termine whether the State plan: from the employer.
(i) Provides for inspection of covered (vi) Provides that employees have ac-
workplaces in the State, including in- cess to information on their exposure
spections in response to complaints, to toxic materials or harmful physical
where there are reasonable grounds to agents and receive prompt information
believe a hazard exists, in order to as- when they have been or are being ex-
sure, so far as possible, safe and health- posed to such materials or agents in
ful working conditions for covered em- concentrations or at levels in excess of
ployees, by such means as providing for those prescribed by the applicable safe-
inspections under conditions such as ty and health standards, by such means
those provided in section 8 of the Act. as the observation by employees of the
(ii) Provides an opportunity for em- monitoring or measuring of such mate-
ployees and their representatives, be- rials or agents, employee access to the
fore, during, and after inspections, to records of such monitoring or meas-
bring possible violations to the atten- uring, prompt notification by an em-
tion of the State agency with enforce- ployer to any employee who has been
ment responsibility in order to aid in- or is being exposed to such agents or
spections, by such means as affording a materials in excess of the applicable
representative of the employer and a standards, and information to such em-
representative authorized by employ- ployee of corrective action being
ees an opportunity to accompany the taken.
State representative during the phys- (vii) Provides procedures for the
ical inspection of the workplace, or prompt restraint or elimination of any
where there is no authorized represent- conditions or practices in covered
ative, by providing for consultation by places of employment which could rea-
the State representative with a reason- sonably be expected to cause death or
able number of employees. serious physical harm immediately or
(iii) Provides for the notification of before the imminence of such danger
employees, or their representatives, can be eliminated through the enforce-
when the State decides not to take ment procedures otherwise provided for
compliance action as a result of viola- in the plan, by such means as imme-
tions alleged by such employees or diately informing employees and em-
their representatives and further pro- ployers of such hazards, taking steps to
vides for informal review of such deci- obtain immediate abatement of the
sions, by such means as written notifi- hazard by the employer, and where ap-
cation of decisions not to take compli- propriate, authority to initiate nec-
ance action and the reasons therefor, essary legal proceedings to require
and procedures for informal review of such abatement.
such decisions and written statements (viii) Provides adequate safeguards to
of the disposition of such review. protect trade secrets, by such means as
(iv) Provides that employees be in- limiting access to such trade secrets to
formed of their protections and obliga- authorized State officers or employees
tions under the Act, including the pro- concerned with carrying out the plan
visions of applicable standards, by such and by providing for the issuance of ap-
means as the posting of notices or propriate orders to protect the con-
other appropriate sources of informa- fidentiality of trade secrets.
tion. (ix) Provides that the State agency
(v) Provides necessary and appro- (or agencies) will have the necessary
priate protection to an employee legal authority for the enforcement of
13
standards, by such means as provisions 1902.6 Consultation with the Na-

for appropriate compulsory process to tional Institute for Occupational
obtain necessary evidence or testimony Safety and Health.
in connection with inspection and en- The Assistant Secretary will consult,
forcement proceedings. as appropriate, with the Director of the
(x) Provides for prompt notice to em- National Institute for Occupational
ployers and employees when an alleged Safety and Health with regard to plans
violation of standards has occurred, in- submitted by the States under this
cluding the proposed abatement re- part.
quirements, by such means as the
issuance of a written citation to the Subpart CProcedures for Sub-
employer and posting of the citation at mission, Approval and Rejec-
or near the site of the violation; fur- tion of State Plans
ther provides for advising the employer
of any proposed sanctions, by such 1902.10 Submission.
means as a notice to the employer by (a) An authorized representative of
certified mail within a reasonable time the State agency or agencies respon-
of any proposed sanctions. sible for administering the plan shall
(xi) Provides effective sanctions submit the plan with 10 copies to the
against employers who violate State appropriate Assistant Regional Direc-
standards and orders, such as those tor of the Occupational Safety and
prescribed in the Act. Health Administration, U.S. Depart-
(xii) Provides for an employer to ment of Labor. The State plan shall in-
clude (1) Supporting papers conforming
have the right of review of violations
to the requirements specified in sub-
alleged by the State, abatement peri-
part B of this part, and (2) the State
ods, and proposed penalties and for em- occupational safety and health stand-
ployees or their representatives to ards to be included in the plan, includ-
have an opportunity to participate in ing copies of any specific or enabling
review proceedings, by such means as State laws and regulations relating to
providing for administrative or judicial such standards. If any of the represen-
review, with an opportunity for a full tations concerning the requirements of
hearing on the issues. subpart B of this part are dependent
(xiii) Provides that the State will un- upon any judicial or administrative in-
dertake programs to encourage vol- terpretations of the State standards or
untary compliance by employers and enforcement provisions, the State shall
employees by such means as con- furnish citations to any pertinent judi-
ducting training and consultation with cial decisions and the text of any perti-
employers and employees. nent administrative decisions.
(d) Additional indices. Upon his own (b) Upon receipt of the State plan the
motion or after consideration of data, Assistant Regional Director shall make
views and arguments received in any a preliminary examination of the plan.
proceeding held under subpart C of this If his examination reveals any defect
part, the Assistant Secretary may pre- in the plan, the Assistant Regional Di-
rector shall offer assistance to the
scribe additional indices for any State
State agency and shall provide the
plan which shall be in furtherance of
agency an opportunity to cure such de-
the purpose of this part, as expressed in
fect. After his preliminary examina-
1902.1. tion, and after affording the State
agency such opportunity to cure de-
1902.5 Intergovernmental Coopera-
tion Act of 1968. fects, the Assistant Regional Director
shall submit the plan to the Assistant
This part shall be construed in a Secretary.
manner consistent with the Intergov- (c) Upon receipt of the plan from the
ernmental Cooperation Act of 1968 (42 Assistant Regional Director, the As-
U.S.C. 42014233), and any regulations sistant Secretary shall examine the
pursuant thereto. plan and supporting materials. If the
14
examination discloses no cause for re- and an office of the State which shall
jecting the plan, the Assistant Sec- be designated by the State for this pur-
retary shall follow the procedure pre- pose.
scribed in 1902.11. If the examination (e) Upon his own initiative, the As-
discloses cause for rejection of the sistant Secretary may give notice of an
plan, the Assistant Secretary shall fol- informal or formal hearing affording
low the procedure prescribed in an opportunity for oral comments con-
1902.17. cerning the plan.
PROCEDURE FOR PROPOSED OR POSSIBLE (f) In the event no notice of hearing
APPROVAL OF PLAN is provided under paragraph (e) of this
section it shall be provided that any in-
1902.11 General notice. terested person may request an infor-
(a) Upon receipt of a State plan sub- mal hearing concerning the proposed
mitted by an Assistant Regional Direc- plan, or any part thereof, whenever
tor under 1902.10 whenever the Assist- particularized written objections
ant Secretary proposes to approve the thereto are filed within 30 days fol-
plan, or to give notice that such ap- lowing publication of the notice in the
proval is an issue before him, he shall FEDERAL REGISTER. If the Assistant
publish in the FEDERAL REGISTER a no- Secretary finds that substantial objec-
tice meeting the requirements of the tions have been filed, he shall afford a
remaining paragraphs of this section. formal or informal hearing on the sub-
No later than 5 days following the pub- jects and issues involved under 1902.13
lication of the notice in the FEDERAL or 1902.14, or shall commence a pro-
REGISTER, the applying State agency ceeding under 1902.17.
shall publish, or cause to be published,
within the State reasonable notice con- 1902.12 Opportunity for modifica-
taining the same information. tions and clarifications.
(b) The notice shall indicate the sub- The Assistant Secretary may afford
mission of the plan and its contents, the State an opportunity to modify or
and any proposals, subjects, or issues
clarify its plan on the basis of any
involved.
comments received under 1902.11 or
(c) The notice shall provide that the
1902.13, before commencing a pro-
plan, or copies thereof, shall be avail-
able for inspection and copying at the ceeding to reject the plan. In this con-
office of the Director, Office of State nection, the State may informally dis-
Programs, Occupational Safety and cuss any issues raised by such com-
Health Administration, 1726 M Street ments with the staff of the Office of
NW., Washington, DC 20210, office of Federal and State Operations. The As-
the Assistant Regional Director in sistant Secretary may afford an addi-
whose region the State is located, and tional opportunity for public comment,
an office of the State which shall be particularly when such an opportunity
designated by the State for this pur- would not unduly delay final action on
pose. the plan and when the comments could
(d) The notice shall afford interested be expected to elicit new relevant mat-
persons an opportunity to submit in ter.
writing, data, views, and arguments on [38 FR 12605, May 14, 1973]
the proposal, subjects, or issues in-
volved within 30 days after publication 1902.13 Informal hearing.
of the notice in the FEDERAL REGISTER.
Thereafter the written comments re- Any informal hearing shall be legis-
ceived or copies thereof shall be avail- lative in type. The procedures for infor-
able for public inspection and copying mal hearings may take a variety of
at the office of the Director, Office of forms. The appropriateness of any par-
State Programs, Occupational Safety ticular form will turn largely upon the
and Health Administration, 1726 M proposals, subjects, or issues involved.
Street NW., Washington, DC 20210, of- The rules of procedure for each hearing
fice of the Assistant Regional Director shall be published with the notice
in whose region the State is located, thereof.
15
1902.14 Formal hearing. (3) For any other reason.

Any formal hearing provided for (b) Any written comments received
under 1902.11 (e) and (f) shall be com- in response to a notice issued under
menced upon the publication of reason- 1902.11 shall be a part of the record of
able notice in the FEDERAL REGISTER the proceeding.
and similar notice by the State. The (c) Whenever a formal hearing has
hearing shall conform with the require- been held under 1902.14 the Assistant
ments of 5 U.S.C. 556 and 557. The terms Secretary shall hold no additional
for filing proposed findings and conclu- hearing, and shall proceed to issue a
sions and exceptions to any tentative tentative decision under 1902.21.
decision, or objections to a tentative
1902.19 Notice of hearing.
decision, shall be set forth in the no-
tice. (a) Whenever the Assistant Secretary
has issued no previous notice con-
1902.15 Certification of the record of cerning the plan, or only informal rule
a hearing. making proceedings have been con-
Upon completion of any formal or in- ducted concerning the plan, the Assist-
formal hearing, the transcript thereof, ant Secretary shall publish in the FED-
together with written submissions, ex- ERAL REGISTER an appropriate notice
hibits filed during the hearing, and any concerning the plan and provide an op-
post-hearing presentations shall be cer- portunity for formal hearing and deci-
tified by the officer presiding at the sion on the possible rejection of the
hearing to the Assistant Secretary. plan and on any subsidiary issues. The
notice also shall set forth such rules as
PROCEDURE FOR PROPOSED OR POSSIBLE may be necessary so as to assure com-
REJECTION OF PLAN pliance with 5 U.S.C. 556 and 557 in the
conduct of the proceeding. The time for
1902.17 The proceeding. filing proposed findings and conclu-
Whenever as a result of (a) an initial sions and exceptions to any tentative
examination of a plan, or (b) written or decision shall be set forth in the no-
oral comments concerning a plan sub- tice.
mitted in an informal rulemaking pro- (b) Not later than 5 days following
ceeding concerning a proposed approval the publication of the notice in the
of a plan or any subject or issue con- FEDERAL REGISTER, required by para-
cerning the plan, the Assistant Sec- graph (a) of this section, the applying
retary proposes to reject a plan or re- State agency shall publish, or cause to
jection remains in issue for any reason, be published, within the State reason-
he shall follow the procedures pre- able notice containing the same infor-
scribed in the remaining sections of mation.
this subpart.
DECISIONS
1902.18 Previous hearing or other op-
portunity for comment on plan. 1902.20 Decision following informal
(a) Whenever an informal hearing has proceeding.
been held under 1902.11 and 1902.13, (a) This section deals with a situa-
any evidence submitted in such a hear- tion where the Assistant Secretary has
ing shall be considered and may be re- (1) Afforded interested persons an op-
lied upon whenever it is found that no portunity to submit written data,
party will be prejudiced thereby be- views, or arguments concerning a pro-
cause posal, subject, or issue concerning a
(1) Of a lack of an opportunity for plan; or
cross-examination afforded in the in- (2) Has in addition provided an infor-
formal hearing on the issues involved, mal hearing concerning a proposal,
or subject, or issue concerning a plan.
(2) The veracity and demeanor of wit- (b)(1)(i) After consideration of all rel-
nesses are not important with respect evant information which has been pre-
to the type of evidence involved (e.g., sented, if the Assistant Secretary ap-
extensive technical or statistical data), proves a plan he shall issue a decision
or to that effect.
16
(ii) In the event the plan is approved pating in the hearing shall have an op-
under 1902.2(b), the decision shall portunity to file exceptions to a ten-
state that the plan does not fully meet tative decision and objections to such
the criteria set forth in 1902.3, and exceptions within periods of time to be
shall summarize the schedule and any specified in the tentative decision. An
other measures for bringing the plan original and four copies of any excep-
up to the level of such criteria. tion or objections shall be filed.
(iii) The decision shall also reflect (b)(1) Thereafter the Assistant Sec-
the Assistant Secretarys intention as retary shall issue a final decision rul-
to continued Federal enforcement of ing upon each exception and objection
Federal standards in areas covered by filed. The final decision shall be pub-
the plan. Provisions for continued Fed- lished in the FEDERAL REGISTER.
eral enforcement shall take into con- (2) Any final decision approving a
sideration: plan shall contain the provisions pre-
(a) Whether the plan is approved scribed in 1902.20(b)(1)(iii) concerning
under 1902.2(a) or 1902.2(b); Federal enforcement in areas covered
(b) The schedule for coming up to by the plan.
Federal standards in any 1902.2(b)
1902.23 Publication of decisions.
plan; and
(c) Any other relevant matters. All decisions approving or dis-
(2) After consideration of all relevant approving a plan shall be published in
information contained in any written the FEDERAL REGISTER.
or oral comments received in any in-
formal proceeding, if the Assistant Subpart DProcedures for Deter-
Secretary proposes to disapprove a minations Under Section 18(e)
plan, or the disposition of a subject or of the Act
issue permits the possible disapproval
of a plan, he shall publish a notice to SOURCE: 40 FR 54782, Nov. 26, 1975, unless
that effect, and commence a pro- otherwise noted.
ceeding meeting the requirements of
1902.19. GENERAL
1902.21 Tentative decision following 1902.30 Purpose and scope.
formal proceeding.
This subpart contains procedures and
(a) On the basis of the whole record criteria under which the Assistant Sec-
of any hearing held under 1902.14 or retary of Labor for Occupational Safe-
1902.19, the Assistant Secretary shall ty and Health (hereinafter referred to
issue a tentative decision either ap- as the Assistant Secretary) under a
proving or disapproving the plan. The delegation of authority from the Sec-
tentative decision shall include a retary of Labor (Secretarys Order 12
statement of the findings and conclu- 71, 36 FR 8754) will make his determina-
sions and reasons or bases therefor on tion on whether to grant final approval
all material issues of fact, law, or dis- to State plans in accordance with the
cretion which have been presented. The provisions of section 18(e) of the Occu-
tentative decision shall be published in pational Safety and Health Act of 1970
the FEDERAL REGISTER. (29 U.S.C. 667) (hereinafter referred to
(b) The State agency and other inter- as the Act).
ested persons participating in the hear-
ing may waive the tentative decision. 1902.31 Definitions.
In such event the Assistant Secretary As used in this subpart, unless the
shall issue a final decision under context clearly indicates otherwise:
1902.22. Act means the Occupational Safety
and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 651 et
1902.22 Final decision following for- seq.)
mal proceeding. Affirmative 18(e) determination means
(a) Except when interested persons an affirmative determination under
participating in the hearing have section 18(e) of the Act that the State
waived the tentative decision under plan or any modification thereof, is in
1902.21(b) interested persons partici- actual operation meeting the criteria
17
and indices of section 18(c) of the Act Separable portion of a plan for pur-
and subpart B of this part so as to war- poses of an 18(e) determination gen-
rant the withdrawal of the application erally means more than one industrial,
of discretionary Federal enforcement occupational or hazard grouping as de-
and standards authority from issues fined in 1902.2(c)(1) which is adminis-
covered by the plan, or by any modi- tratively practicable and reasonably
fication thereof. separable from the remainder of the
Assistant Regional Director means the plan. (See 29 CFR 1952.6(a).)
Assistant Regional Director for Occu-
pational Safety and Health for the re- 1902.32 General policies.
gion in which a State is located. (a) Sections 18 (e) and (f) of the Act
Assistant Secretary means the Assist- provide for the continuing evaluation
ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- and monitoring of State plans approved
tional Safety and Health. under section 18(c) of the Act. The As-
Commencement of a case under section sistant Secretarys decision whether to
18(e) of the Act means, for the purpose grant an affirmative 18(e) determina-
of retaining Federal jurisdiction de- tion will be based, in part, on the re-
spite an affirmative 18(e) determina- sults of these evaluations. Section 18(e)
tion, the issuance of a citation, and in provides that a period of not less than
the case of an imminent danger, the 3 years shall have passed before the As-
initiation of enforcement proceedings sistant Secretary may make a deter-
under section 13 of the Act. mination that the State program in ac-
Commencement of plan operations tual operations is applying the criteria
means the beginning of operations of section 18(c) of the Act. In the case
under a plan following the approval of of a developmental plan, 1902.2(b) of
the plan by the Assistant Secretary this part requires that the Assistant
and in no case may be later than the Secretary must have at least one year
effective date of the initial funding in which to evaluate the plans actual
grant provided under section 23(g) of operations following the completion of
the Act. all developmental steps specified in the
Development step includes, but is not plan. Thus, to be considered for an 18(e)
limited to, those items listed in the determination, at least three years
published developmental schedule, or shall have passed following commence-
any revisions thereof, for each plan ment of operations after the initial ap-
contained in 29 CFR part 1952. A devel- proval of a States occupational safety
opmental step also includes those and health plan by the Assistant Sec-
items specified in the plan as approved retary. In the case of a developmental
under section 18(c) of the Act for com- plan, at least one year shall have
pletion by the State, as well as those passed following the completion of all
items which under the approval deci- developmental steps, but, in any event,
sion were subject to evaluations. (See at least three years must have passed
e.g., approval of Colorado and Michigan following initial approval of the plan
plans, 38 FR 25172, 38 FR 27388, respec- before discretionary Federal enforce-
tively), and changes deemed necessary ment authority and standards may be
as a result thereof to make the State withdrawn from issues covered by an
program at least as effective as the approved plan.
Federal program within the 3 years de- (b) In making an 18(e) determination,
velopmental period. (See 29 CFR the Assistant Secretary will determine
1953.10(a)). if actual operations under a States
Initial approval means approval of a plan, or under a separable portion of
State plan, or any modification there- the plan, indicate that the State is ap-
of, under section 18(c) of the Act and plying the criteria of section 18(c) of
subpart C of this part. the Act and the indices of effectiveness
Person means any individual, part- of subpart B of this part in a manner
nership, association, corporation, busi- which renders operations under the
ness trust, legal representative, orga- plan at least as effective as oper-
nized group of individuals, or any agen- ations under the Federal program in
cy, authority or instrumentality of the providing safe and healthful employ-
United States or of a State. ment and places of employment within
18
the State. In making this determina- Federal enforcement and standards au-
tion, the Assistant Secretary may con- thority and/or in the commencement of
sider such information which he deems proceedings for the withdrawal of ap-
appropriate for an informed decision. proval of the plan, or any portion
(c) If the Assistant Secretary makes thereof, pursuant to 29 CFR part 1955.
an affirmative 18(e) determination, the (f) The Assistant Secretary may re-
Federal enforcement provisions of sec- consider and, if necessary, rescind or
tions 5(a) (2), 8 (except for the purposes revoke all or a separable portion of an
of continuing evaluations under sec- affirmative 18(e) determination and re-
tion 18(f) of the Act), 9, 10, 13 and 17 and instate concurrent Federal enforce-
standards promulgated under section 6 ment authority if he finds that a State
of the Act shall not apply with respect
does not maintain its commitment to
to those occupational safety and health
provide a program for employee safety
issues covered under the plan which
have been given an affirmative 18(e) de- and health protection meeting the re-
termination. However, the Assistant quirements of section 18(c) of the Act.
Secretary may retain jurisdiction over This authority is designed to be used in
proceedings commenced under sections instances where operations under a
9, 10 and 13 of the Act before the date State program are found to be less ef-
of his determination. In addition, the fective than under the Federal program
Assistant Secretary shall retain his ju- because of unusual circumstances
risdiction under the anti-discrimina- which are temporary in nature. The
tion provisions of section 11(c) of the Assistant Secretary may also use this
Act. procedure to reinstate Federal enforce-
(d) If the Assistant Secretary deter- ment authority in conjunction with
mines that a State plan, or any portion plan withdrawal proceedings in order
thereof, has not met the criteria for an to ensure that there is no serious gap
18(e) determination, he shall retain his in his commitment to assure safe and
authority under the enforcement provi- healthful working conditions so far as
sions of sections 5(a) (2), 8, 9, 10, 13, and possible for every employee.
17 and his standards authority under
section 6 of the Act in the issues found COMPLETION OF DEVELOPMENTAL
ineligible for an 18(e) determination. In STEPSCERTIFICATION
addition, his decision may result in the
commencement of proceedings for 1902.33 Developmental period.
withdrawal of approval of the plan, or Upon the commencement of plan op-
any separable portion thereof, under 29 erations after the initial approval of a
CFR part 1955. States plan by the Assistant Sec-
(e) Once a States plan, or any modi- retary, a State has three years in
fication thereof, has been given an af- which to complete all of the develop-
firmative 18(e) determination, the
mental steps specified in the plan as
State is required to maintain a pro-
approved. Section 1953.11 of this chap-
gram which will meet the requirements
ter sets forth the procedures for the
of section 18 (c) and will continue to be
at least as effective as the Federal submission and consideration of devel-
program operations in the issues cov- opmental changes by the Assistant
ered by the determination. As the Fed- Secretary. Generally, whenever a State
eral program changes and thereby be- completes a developmental step, it
comes more effective, the State is cor- must submit the resulting change as a
respondingly required to adjust its pro- supplement to its plan together with
gram at a level which would provide a relevant documentation to the Assist-
program for workplace safety and ant Secretary for his approval. The As-
health which would be at least as ef- sistant Secretarys approval of such
fective as the improvements in the changes is then published in the FED-
Federal program. A failure to comply ERAL REGISTER and the pertinent sub-
with this requirement may result in parts of part 1952 of this chapter are
the revocation of the affirmative 18(e) amended to reflect the completion of a
determination and the resumption of developmental step.
19
1902.34 Certification of completion of completed all the developmental steps

developmental steps. specified in the plan, he shall publish
(a) Upon the completion of all of the the certification in the FEDERAL REG-
developmental steps in a States plan, ISTER and amend the appropriate sub-
which is to be accomplished not later part of part 1952 of this chapter to re-
than three years following commence- flect this finding.
ment of plan operations after approval
1902.35 Effect of certification.
of the plan by the Assistant Secretary
under section 18(c), the Assistant Re- Publication of the certification ac-
gional Director shall certify, as pro- knowledging the completion of all of
vided in paragraph (b) of this section, the developmental steps in a States
that all developmental steps in the plan will automatically initiate the
plan have been met and that the evaluation of a States plan for the
States program is to be evaluated on purposes of an 18(e) determination.
the basis of its eligibility for an 18(e) Evaluation for the purposes of an 18(e)
determination after at least one year determination will continue for at
of evaluations of the plan. least one year after the publication of
(b) Upon determining that a State the certification in the FEDERAL REG-
has completed all of its developmental ISTER. Federal enforcement authority
steps, the Assistant Regional Director under sections 5(a)(2), 8, 9, 10, 11(c), 13,
shall prepare a certification which he and 17 of the Act and Federal standards
shall promptly forward to the Assist- authority under section 6 of the Act
ant Secretary. The certification shall will not be relinquished during the
include, but shall not be limited to, the evaluation period. Evaluation con-
following; ducted for 18(e) determination purposes
(1) A list of all developmental steps will be based on the criteria set forth
or revisions thereof, plan amendments in 1902.37 and 1902.38.
or changes which result in the comple-
tion of the steps or revisions thereof, BASIS FOR 18(E) DETERMINATIONS
and the dates the Assistant Secretarys
or the Assistant Regional Directors 1902.36 General provisions.
approval of each change was published (a) In making his evaluation of the
in the FEDERAL REGISTER; actual operations of a States plan for
(2) Substantive changes, if any, in the purposes of an 18(e) determination,
the State program which were ap- the Assistant Secretary shall consider
proved by the Assistant Secretary and all relevant data which will aid him in
their dates of publication in the FED- making an effective determination. In
ERAL REGISTER; his evaluation he shall consider wheth-
(3) Documentation that the legal er the requirements of section 18(c) of
basis for the applicable State merit the Act and the criteria for State plans
system has been approved by the U.S. outlined in subpart B of this part as
Civil Service Commission and that the well as those in 1902.37 are being ap-
actual operations of the State merit plied in actual operations for a reason-
system has been found acceptable by able period of time in a manner which
the Occupational Safety and Health warrants the termination of concur-
Administration with the advice of the rent Federal enforcement authority
U.S. Civil Service Commission; and and standards in issues covered under
(4) A description of the issues which the plan.
are covered by the State plan. Where (b) The Assistant Secretarys evalua-
applicable, the certification shall in- tion for an 18(e) determination will be
clude a description of those separable addressed to consideration of whether
portions of the plan which have been the criteria and indices in 1902.37(a)
certified for 18(e) evaluation purposes are being applied by the State in such
as well as those portions of the plan a manner as to render its program in
which were not certified by the Assist- operation at least as effective as oper-
ant Regional Director. ations under the Federal program. In
(c) After a review of the certification considering the question of such appli-
and the States plan, if the Assistant cation, the Assistant Secretary shall
Secretary finds that the State has also consider the factors provided
20
under 1902.37(b). The Assistant Sec- (5) If any State standard, whether it
retarys evaluation may include such is an adopted Federal standard or a
other information on the application of standard developed by a State, has
the criteria and indices in 1902.37 such been subject to administrative or judi-
as information developed from com- cial challenge, the State has taken the
ments received from the public and the necessary administrative, judicial or
results of any hearings which may have legislative action to correct any defi-
been held under 1902.40 concerning the ciencies in its program resulting from
proposed 18(e) determination. such challenge.
(6) In granting permanent variances
1902.37 Factors for determination. from a standard the State has assured
(a) The Assistant Secretary shall de- that the employer provides conditions
termine if the State has applied and of employment which are as safe and
implemented all the specific criteria healthful as those which would prevail
and indices of effectiveness of 1902.3 if he complied with the standard.
and 1902.4 of this part. (7) In granting temporary variances
(b) In determining whether a State from a standard, the State has ensured
has applied the criteria and indices of that the recipient of the variance has
effectiveness in paragraph (a) of this come into compliance with the stand-
section in actual operations, the As- ard as early as possible.
sistant Secretary will, among other (8) The State inspection program is
things related to the application of the being implemented in a manner which
criteria and indices, consider whether: allows a sufficient allocation of re-
(1) The State has a sufficient number sources to be directed toward target in-
of adequately trained and competent dustries and target health hazards as
personnel to discharge its responsibil- designated by the State while pro-
ities under the plan. viding adequate attention to all other
(2) The State has adhered to the pro- workplaces covered under the plan, or
cedures which it has adopted and which any modification thereof.
have been approved either under the
(9) The State exercises the authority
State plan or in State plan changes or
through appropriate means, to enforce
under any other procedures for ap-
its right of entry and inspection wher-
proval authorized by the Assistant Sec-
ever such right of entry or inspection
retary.
is refused.
(3) The State has timely adopted all
Federal standards, and amendments (10) Inspections of workplaces are
thereto, for issues covered under the conducted by State inspectors in a
plan or has timely developed and pro- competent manner, following approved
mulgated standards which are at least enforcement procedures. This includes
as effective as the comparable Federal a requirement that the inspectors ob-
standards and amendments thereto. tain adequate information to support
(4) If the State has adopted Federal any citations which may be issued.
standards, the States interpretation (11) The State issues citations, pro-
and application of such standards have posed penalties and notices for failure
been consistent with the applicable to abate in a timely manner.
Federal interpretation and application. (12) The State proposes penalties in a
Where the State has developed and pro- manner at least as effective as under
mulgated its own standards, such the Federal program, including the
standards have been interpreted and proposing of penalties for first instance
applied in a manner which is at least as violations and the consideration of fac-
effective as the interpretation and ap- tors comparable to those required to be
plication of comparable Federal stand- considered under the Federal program.
ards. This requirement acknowledges (13) The State ensures the abatement
that State standards may have been of hazards for which a citation has
approved by the Assistant Regional Di- been issued, including the issuance of
rector, but emphasizes the requirement notices of failure to abate and appro-
that the standards are to be at least as priate penalties.
effective as the comparable Federal (14) Wherever appropriate, the State
standards in actual operations. agency has sought administrative and
21
judicial review of adverse adjudica- 1902.39 Completion of evaluation.

tions. This factor also addresses wheth- (a) After evaluating the actual oper-
er the State has taken the appropriate ations of the State plan, or any portion
and necessary administrative, legisla- thereof, for at least 1 year following
tive or judicial action to correct any publication of the certification in the
deficiencies in its enforcement pro- FEDERAL REGISTER under 1902.34, the
gram resulting from an adverse admin- Assistant Secretary shall notify the
istrative or judicial determination. State whenever he determines that the
(15) Insofar as it is available, analysis State will be eligible for an 18(e) deter-
of the annual occupational safety and mination. In addition, a State may re-
health survey by the Bureau of Labor quest an 18(e) determination following
Statistics, as well as of other available the evaluation period noted above. In
Federal and State measurements of no case shall this determination of eli-
program impact on worker safety and gibility be later than 2 years following
health, which analysis also takes into the publication of the certification of
consideration various local factors, in- the completion of developmental steps
dicates that trends in worker safety in the FEDERAL REGISTER under
and health injury and illness rates 1902.34. In the case of a plan which was
under the State program compare fa- not developmental, the determination
vorably to those under the Federal proof eligibility shall not be sooner than 3
gram. years following the date of commence-
[40 FR 54782, Nov. 26, 1975; 40 FR 58143, Dec.
ment of operations under the plan.
15, 1975] (b) After it has been determined that
a State will be eligible for an 18(e) de-
PROCEDURES FOR 18(E) DETERMINATION termination, the Assistant Regional
Director shall prepare a final report of
1902.38 Evaluation of plan following his evaluation of the actual operations
certification. under a States plan or portion thereof
(a) Following the publication in the which may be subject to the 18(e) de-
FEDERAL REGISTER under 1902.34 of the termination. The Assistant Regional
certification acknowledging the com- Directors report shall be transmitted
pletion of all developmental steps spec- to the Assistant Secretary. The Assist-
ant Secretary shall transmit such re-
ified in the plan, or any portion there-
port to the State and the State shall
of, the Assistant Secretary will evalu-
have an opportunity to respond to the
ate and monitor the actual operations
report.
under the State plan for at least 1 year
(c) Whenever it has been determined
before determining whether the State
that a States plan, or separable por-
is eligible for an 18(e) determination.
tion thereof, is eligible for an 18(e) de-
The evaluation will assess the actual
termination, the Assistant Secretary
operation of the States fully imple-
shall publish a notice in the FEDERAL
mented program in accordance with
REGISTER. The notice shall meet the re-
the criteria in 1902.37 and take into
quirements of the remaining para-
account any information available to
graphs of this section. No later than 10
the Assistant Secretary affecting the
days following the publication of the
States program.
notice in the FEDERAL REGISTER, the
(b) The Assistant Regional Director affected State agency shall publish, or
shall prepare a semiannual report of cause to be published, within the State,
his evaluation of the actual operations reasonable notice containing the same
under the State plan or any portion information.
thereof in narrative form. The Assist- (d) The notice shall indicate that the
ant Regional Directors evaluation re- plan, or any separable portion thereof,
port will be transmitted to the Assist- is in issue before the Assistant Sec-
ant Secretary who will then transmit retary for a determination as to wheth-
the report to the State. The State shall er the criteria in section 18(c) of the
be afforded an opportunity to respond Act are being applied in actual oper-
to each evaluation report. ation, and indicate the particular sub-
[40 FR 54782, Nov. 26, 1975, as amended at 42 stantive issues, if any, for consider-
FR 58746, Nov. 11, 1977] ation in making such determination.
22
Where a portion of a plan is in issue for 1902.40 Informal hearing.

such a determination, the notice shall
(a) Any hearing conducted under this
specify such portions of the plan as
section shall be legislative in type.
well as those portions of the plan However, fairness may require an op-
which are not in issue for the deter- portunity for cross-examination on
mination. pertinent issues. The presiding officer
(e) The notice shall afford interested is empowered to permit cross-examina-
persons an opportunity to submit in tion under such circumstances. The es-
writing, data, views, and arguments on sential intent is to provide an oppor-
the proposed 18(e) determination, and tunity for participation and comment
the affected State an opportunity to by interested persons which can be car-
respond to such submissions. ried out expeditiously and without
(f) The notice shall also state that rigid procedures which might unduly
any interested person or the affected impede or protract the 18(e) determina-
State may request an informal hearing tion process.
concerning the proposed 18(e) deter- (b) Although the hearing shall be in-
mination whenever particularized writ- formal and legislative in type, this sec-
ten objections thereto are filed within tion is intended to provide more than
35 days following publication of the no- the bare essentials of informal pro-
tice in the FEDERAL REGISTER. ceedings under 5 U.S.C. 553. The addi-
(g) If the Assistant Secretary finds tional requirements are the following:
that substantial objections are filed (1) The presiding officer shall be a
which relate to the proposed 18(e) de- hearing examiner appointed under 5
termination, the Assistant Secretary U.S.C. 3105.
shall, and in any other case may, pub- (2) The presiding officer shall provide
lish a notice of informal hearing in the an opportunity for cross-examination
FEDERAL REGISTER not later than 30 on pertinent issues.
days after the last day for filing writ- (3) The hearing shall be reported ver-
ten views or comments. The notice batim, and a transcript shall be avail-
shall include: able to any interested person on such
(1) A statement of the time, place terms as the presiding officer may pro-
and nature of the proceeding; vide.
(2) A specification of the substantial (c) The officer presiding at a hearing
issues which have been raised and on shall have all the power necessary or
which an informal hearing has been re- appropriate to conduct a fair and full
quested; hearing, including the powers:
(3) The requirement for the filing of (1) To regulate the course of the pro-
an intention to appear at the hearing, ceedings;
together with a statement of the posi- (2) To dispose of procedural requests,
tion to be taken with regard to the objections, and comparable matters;
issues specified, and of the evidence to (3) To confine the presentation to the
be adduced in support of the position; issues specified in the notice of hear-
ing, or, where appropriate, to matters
(4) The designation of a presiding of-
pertinent to the issue before the As-
ficer to conduct the hearing; and
sistant Secretary;
(5) Any other appropriate provisions (4) To regulate the conduct of those
with regard to the proceeding. present at the hearing by appropriate
(h) Not later than 10 days following means;
the publication of the notice in the (5) To take official notice of material
FEDERAL REGISTER, required by para- facts not appearing in the evidence in
graph (g) of this section, the affected the record, as long as the parties are
agency shall publish, or cause to be afforded an opportunity to show evi-
published, within the State reasonable dence to the contrary;
notice containing the same informa- (6) In his discretion, to keep the
tion. record open for a reasonable and speci-
EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 43 FR 11196, Mar. fied time to receive additional written
17, 1978, 1902.39(a) was suspended indefi- recommendations with supporting rea-
nitely, effective January 20, 1978. sons and any additional data, views,
23
and arguments from any person who tion thereof, in accordance with the
has participated in the oral proceeding. criteria of section 18(c) of the Act and
(d) Upon the completion of the oral that the State has applied the provi-
presentations, the transcripts thereof, sions of this part in a manner which
together with written submissions on renders the actual operations of the
the proceedings, exhibits filed during State program at least as effective
the hearing, and all posthearing com- as operations under the Federal pro-
ments, recommendations, and sup- gram.
porting reasons shall be certified by (b) In the case of an affirmative 18(e)
the officer presiding at the hearing to determination of a separable portion(s)
the Assistant Secretary. of a plan, the Assistant Secretary de-
termines that the State has applied the
1902.41 Decision. separable portion(s) of the plan in ac-
(a) Within a reasonable time gen- cordance with the criteria of section
erally within 120 days after the expira- 18(c) of the Act in a manner com-
tion of the period provided for the sub- parable to Federal operations covering
mission of written data, views, and ar- such portions and that the criteria of
guments on the issues on which no this part are being applied in a manner
hearing is held, or within a reasonable which renders the actual operations of
time, generally not to exceed 120 days such separable portion(s) of the State
after the certification of the record of program at least as effective as oper-
a hearing, the Assistant Secretary ations of such portions under the Fed-
shall publish his decision in the FED- eral program.
ERAL REGISTER. His decision shall state (c) Upon making an affirmative 18(e)
whether or not an affirmative 18(e) de- determination, the standards promul-
termination has been made for the gated under section 6 of the Act and
State plan or any separable portion the enforcement provisions of section
thereof, or whether he intends to with- 5(a)(2), 8 (except for the purpose of con-
draw approval of the plan or any por- tinuing evaluations under section 18(f)
tion thereof pursuant to part 1955 of of the Act), 9, 10, 13 and 17 of the Act
this chapter. The action of the Assist- shall not apply with respect to those
ant Secretary shall be taken after con- occupational safety and health issues
sideration of all information, including covered under the plan for which an af-
his evaluations of the actual oper- firmative 18(e) determination has been
ations of the plan, and information pre- granted. The Assistant Secretary shall
sented in written submissions and in retain his authority under the above
any hearings held under this subpart. sections for those issues covered in the
(b) Any decision under this section plan which have not been granted an
shall incorporate a concise statement affirmative 18(e) determination.
of its grounds and purpose and shall re- (d) The Assistant Secretary will re-
spond to any substantial issues which tain jurisdiction under the citation and
may have been raised in written sub- contest provisions of sections 9 and 10
missions or at the hearing. of the Act and the imminent-danger
(c) All decisions resulting in an af- provisions of section 13 where such pro-
firmative 18(e) determination shall ceedings have been commenced prior to
contain provisions amending the appro- the date of his determination.
priate subparts of part 1952 of this
chapter. 1902.43 Affirmative 18(e) decision.
(d) All decisions concerning the As- (a) In publishing his affirmative 18(e)
sistant Secretarys determination decision in the FEDERAL REGISTER the
under section 18(e) of the Act shall be Assistant Secretarys notice shall in-
published in the FEDERAL REGISTER. clude, but shall not be limited to the
following:
1902.42 Effect of affirmative 18(e) de- (1) Those issues under the plan over
termination. which the Assistant Secretary is with-
(a) In making an affirmative 18(e) de- drawing his standards and enforcement
termination, the Assistant Secretary authority;
determines that a State has applied the (2) A statement that the Assistant
provisions of its plan, or any modifica- Secretary retains his authority under
24
section 11(c) of the Act with regard to of the plan or any portion thereof pur-
complaints alleging discrimination suant to part 1955 of this chapter.
against employees because of the exer-
cise of any right afforded to the em- 1902.45 [Reserved]
ployee by the Act;
(3) Amendments to the appropriate 1902.46 Negative 18(e) determination.
subpart of part 1952 of this chapter; (a) This section sets out the proce-
(4) A statement that the Assistant dures which shall be followed whenever
Secretary is not precluded from revok- the Assistant Secretary determines
ing his determination and reinstating that a States plan, or any separate
his standards and enforcement author- portion thereof, has not met the cri-
ity under 1902.47 et seq., if his con- teria for an affirmative 18(e) deter-
tinuing evaluations under section 18(f) mination.
of the Act show that the State has sub- (b) If the Assistant Secretary deter-
stantially failed to maintain a program mines that a State plan, or a separable
which is at least as effective as oper- portion thereof, has not met the cri-
ations under the Federal program, or if teria of section 18(c) of the Act and
the State does not submit program that actual operations under the plan,
change supplements to its plan to the or portion thereof, have not met the
Assistant Secretary as required by 29 criteria for an affirmative determina-
CFR part 1953. tion set forth in 1902.37, he shall re-
tain his standards authority under sec-
1902.44 Requirements applicable to tion 6 of the Act and his enforcement
State plans granted affirmative authority under sections 5(a)(2), 8, 9, 10,
18(e) determinations. 13, and 17 of the Act for those issues
(a) A State whose plan, or modifica- covered under the plan or such portions
tion thereof, has been granted an af- of the plan which were subject to his
firmative 18(e) determination will be negative determination.
required to maintain a program within (c) A decision under this section may
the scope of such determination which result in the commencement of pro-
will be at least as effective as oper- ceedings for withdrawal of approval of
ations under the Federal program in the plan or any separable portion
providing employee safety and health thereof pursuant to part 1955 of this
protection at covered workplaces with- chapter.
in the comparable scope of the Federal (d) Where the Assistant Secretary de-
program. This requirement includes termines that operations under a State
submitting all required reports to the plan or any separable portion thereof
Assistant Secretary, as well as submit- have not met the criteria for an affirm-
ting supplements to the Assistant Sec- ative 18(e) determination, but are not
retary for his approval whenever there of such a nature as to warrant the ini-
is a change in the States program, tiation of withdrawal proceedings, the
whenever the results of evaluations Assistant Secretary may, at his discre-
conducted under section 18(f) show that tion, afford the State a reasonable time
some portion of a State plan has an ad- to meet the criteria for an affirmative
verse impact on the operations of the 18(e) determination after which time
State plan or whenever the Assistant he may initiate proceedings for with-
Secretary determines that any alter- drawal of plan approval. This discre-
ation in the Federal program could tionary authority will be applied in the
have an adverse impact on the at following manner:
least as effective as status of the (1) Upon determining that a State
State program. See part 1953 of this shall be subject to a final 18(e) deter-
chapter. mination, the Assistant Secretary
(b) A substantial failure to comply shall notify the agency designated by
with the requirements of this section the State to administer its program,
may result in the revocation of the af- within the State of his decision that
firmative 18(e) determination and the the States program, or a separable
resumption of Federal enforcement au- portion thereof, shall be subject to a
thority, and may also result in pro- final 18(e) determination. The Assist-
ceedings for the withdrawal of approval ant Secretary shall give the State a
25
reasonable time, generally not less determination, he shall publish a no-

than 1 year, in which to meet the cri- tice in the FEDERAL REGISTER meeting
teria for an affirmative 18(e) deter- the requirements of the remaining
mination. paragraphs of this section. No later
(2) The Assistant Secretary shall also than 10 days following the publication
publish a notice in the FEDERAL REG- of the notice in the FEDERAL REGISTER,
ISTER outlining his reasons for not the affected State agency shall publish,
making an affirmative 18(e) determina- or cause to be published, reasonable no-
tion at the time. The notice will also tice within the State containing the
set forth the reasonable time the State same information.
was granted to meet the criteria for an (b) The notice shall indicate the rea-
affirmative 18(e) determination and set sons for the proposed action.
forth such conditions as the Assistant (c) The notice shall afford interested
Secretary deems proper for the con- persons including the affected State,
tinuation of the States plan or such an opportunity to submit in writing,
portions subject to this action. data, views, and arguments on the pro-
(3) The State shall be afforded an op- posal within 35 days after publication
portunity to agree to the conditions of of the notice in the FEDERAL REGISTER.
the Assistant Secretarys decision. The notice shall also provide that any
(4) Upon the expiration of the time interested person may request an infor-
granted to a State to meet the criteria mal hearing concerning the proposed
for an affirmative 18(e) determination revocation whenever particularized
under paragraph (d)(2) of this section, written objections thereto are filed
the Assistant Secretary may initiate within 35 days following publication of
proceedings to determine whether a the notice in the FEDERAL REGISTER. If
State shall be granted an affirmative the Assistant Secretary finds that sub-
18(e) determination. The procedures stantial objections have been filed, he
outlined in this subpart shall be appli- shall afford an informal hearing on the
cable to any proceedings initiated proposed revocation under 1902.50.
under this paragraph. (d) The Assistant Secretary may,
upon his own initiative, give notice of
PROCEDURE FOR RECONSIDERATION AND an informal hearing affording an oppor-
REVOCATION OF AN AFFIRMATIVE 18(E) tunity for oral comments concerning
DETERMINATION the proposed revocation.
1902.47 Reconsideration of an affirm- 1902.50 Informal hearing.
ative 18(e) determination.
Any informal hearing shall be legis-
(a) The Assistant Secretary may at lative in type. The rules of procedure
any time reconsider on his own initia- for each hearing shall be those con-
tive or on petition of an interested per- tained in 1902.40 and will be published
son his decision granting an affirma- with the notice thereof.
tive 18(e) determination.
(b) Such reconsideration shall be 1902.51 Certification of the records
based on results of his continuing eval- of a hearing.
uation of a State plan after it has been Upon completion of an informal hear-
granted an affirmative 18(e) determina- ing, the transcript thereof, together
tion. with written submissions, exhibits filed
during the hearing, and any post-hear-
1902.48 The proceeding. ing presentations shall be certified by
Whenever, as a result of his reconsid- the officer presiding at the hearing to
eration, the Assistant Secretary pro- the Assistant Secretary.
poses to revoke his affirmative 18(e) de-
termination, he shall follow the proce- 1902.52 Decision.
dures in the remaining sections of this (a) After consideration of all relevant
subpart. information which has been presented,
the Assistant Secretary shall issue a
1902.49 General notice. decision on the continuation or revoca-
(a) Whenever the Assistant Secretary tion of the affirmative 18(e) determina-
proposes to revoke an affirmative 18(e) tion.
26
(b) The decision revoking the deter- Section 1903.7 also issued under 5 U.S.C.
mination shall also reflect the Assist- 553.
ant Secretarys determination that SOURCE: 36 FR 17850, Sept. 4, 1971, unless
concurrent Federal enforcement and otherwise noted.
standards authority will be reinstated
within the State for a reasonable time 1903.1 Purpose and scope.
until he has withdrawn his approval of The Williams-Steiger Occupational
the plan, or any separable portion Safety and Health Act of 1970 (84 Stat.
thereof, pursuant to part 1955 of this 1590 et seq., 29 U.S.C. 651 et seq.) re-
chapter or he has determined that the quires, in part, that every employer
State has met the criteria for an 18(e) covered under the Act furnish to his
determination pursuant to the applica- employees employment and a place of
ble procedures of this subpart. employment which are free from recog-
nized hazards that are causing or are
1902.53 Publication of decisions. likely to cause death or serious phys-
All decisions on the reconsideration ical harm to his employees. The Act
of an affirmative 18(e) determination also requires that employers comply
shall be published in the FEDERAL REG- with occupational safety and health
ISTER. standards promulgated under the Act,
and that employees comply with stand-
PART 1903INSPECTIONS, CITA- ards, rules, regulations and orders
TIONS AND PROPOSED PEN- issued under the Act which are applica-
ble to their own actions and conduct.
ALTIES The Act authorizes the Department of
Labor to conduct inspections, and to
Sec.
1903.1 Purpose and scope. issue citations and proposed penalties
1903.2 Posting of notice; availability of the for alleged violations. The Act, under
Act, regulations and applicable stand- section 20(b), also authorizes the Sec-
ards. retary of Health, Education, and Wel-
1903.3 Authority for inspection. fare to conduct inspections and to
1903.4 Objection to inspection. question employers and employees in
1903.5 Entry not a waiver. connection with research and other re-
1903.6 Advance notice of inspections. lated activities. The Act contains pro-
1903.7 Conduct of inspections.
1903.8 Representatives of employers and em-
visions for adjudication of violations,
ployees. periods prescribed for the abatement of
1903.9 Trade secrets. violations, and proposed penalties by
1903.10 Consultation with employees. the Occupational Safety and Health
1903.11 Complaints by employees. Review Commission, if contested by an
1903.12 Inspection not warranted; informal employer or by an employee or author-
review. ized representative of employees, and
1903.13 Imminent danger. for judicial review. The purpose of this
1903.14 Citations; notices of de minimis vio-
part 1903 is to prescribe rules and to set
lations; policy regarding employee res-
cue activities. forth general policies for enforcement
1903.14a Petitions for modification of abate- of the inspection, citation, and pro-
ment date. posed penalty provisions of the Act. In
1903.15 Proposed penalties. situations where this part 1903 sets
1903.16 Posting of citations. forth general enforcement policies
1903.17 Employer and employee contests be- rather than substantive or procedural
fore the Review Commission. rules, such policies may be modified in
1903.18 Failure to correct a violation for
specific circumstances where the Sec-
which a citation has been issued.
1903.19 Abatement verification. retary or his designee determines that
1903.20 Informal conferences. an alternative course of action would
1903.21 State administration. better serve the objectives of the Act.
1903.22 Definitions.
1903.2 Posting of notice; availability
AUTHORITY: Sections 8 and 9 of the Occupa- of the Act, regulations and applica-
tional Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 ble standards.
U.S.C. 657, 658); 5 U.S.C. 553; Secretary of La-
bors Order No. 190 (55 FR 9033) or 696 (62 (a)(1) Each employer shall post and
FR 111), as applicable. keep posted a notice or notices, to be
27
furnished by the Occupational Safety tablishment, to the extent that such

and Health Administration, U.S. De- notices have been furnished by the Oc-
partment of Labor, informing employ- cupational Safety and Health Adminis-
ees of the protections and obligations tration, U.S. Department of Labor.
provided for in the Act, and that for as- Where employers are engaged in activi-
sistance and information, including ties which are physically dispersed,
copies of the Act and of specific safety such as agriculture, construction,
and health standards, employees transportation, communications, and
should contact the employer or the electric, gas and sanitary services, the
nearest office of the Department of notice or notices required by this sec-
Labor. Such notice or notices shall be tion shall be posted at the location to
posted by the employer in each estab- which employees report each day.
lishment in a conspicuous place or Where employees do not usually work
places where notices to employees are at, or report to, a single establishment,
customarily posted. Each employer such as longshoremen, traveling sales-
shall take steps to insure that such no- men, technicians, engineers, etc., such
tices are not altered, defaced, or cov- notice or notices shall be posted at the
ered by other material. location from which the employees op-
(2) Where a State has an approved erate to carry out their activities. In
poster informing employees of their all cases, such notice or notices shall
protections and obligations as defined be posted in accordance with the re-
in 1952.10 of this chapter, such poster, quirements of paragraph (a) of this sec-
when posted by employers covered by tion.
the State plan, shall constitute compli- (c) Copies of the Act, all regulations
ance with the posting requirements of published in this chapter and all appli-
section 8(c)(1) of the Act. Employers cable standards will be available at all
whose operations are not within the Area Offices of the Occupational Safety
issues covered by the State plan must and Health Administration, U.S. De-
comply with paragraph (a)(1) of this partment of Labor. If an employer has
section. obtained copies of these materials, he
(3) Reproductions or facsimiles of shall make them available upon re-
such Federal or State posters shall quest to any employee or his author-
constitute compliance with the posting ized representative for review in the es-
requirements of section 8(c)(1) of the tablishment where the employee is em-
Act where such reproductions or fac- ployed on the same day the request is
similes are at least 812 inches by 14 made or at the earliest time mutually
inches, and the printing size is at least convenient to the employee or his au-
10 pt. Whenever the size of the poster thorized representative and the em-
increases, the size of the print shall ployer.
also increase accordingly. The caption (d) Any employer failing to comply
or heading on the poster shall be in with the provisions of this section shall
large type, generally not less than 36 be subject to citation and penalty in
pt. accordance with the provisions of sec-
(b) Establishment means a single phys- tion 17 of the Act.
ical location where business is con- [36 FR 17850, Sept. 4, 1971, as amended at 39
ducted or where services or industrial FR 39036, Nov. 5, 1974]
operations are performed. (For exam-
ple: A factory, mill, store, hotel, res- 1903.3 Authority for inspection.
taurant, movie theatre, farm, ranch, (a) Compliance Safety and Health Of-
bank, sales office, warehouse, or cen- ficers of the Department of Labor are
tral administrative office.) Where dis- authorized to enter without delay and
tinctly separate activities are per- at reasonable times any factory, plant,
formed at a single physical location establishment, construction site, or
(such as contract construction activi- other area, workplace or environment
ties from the same physical location as where work is performed by an em-
a lumber yard), each activity shall be ployee of an employer; to inspect and
treated as a separate physical estab- investigate during regular working
lishment, and a separate notice or no- hours and at other reasonable times,
tices shall be posted in each such es- and within reasonable limits and in a
28
reasonable manner, any such place of mediately report the refusal and the
employment, and all pertinent condi- reason therefor to the Area Director.
tions, structures, machines, apparatus, The Area Director shall consult with
devices, equipment and materials the Regional Solicitor, who shall take
therein; to question privately any em- appropriate action, including compul-
ployer, owner, operator, agent or em- sory process, if necessary.
ployee; and to review records required (b) Compulsory process shall be
by the Act and regulations published in sought in advance of an attempted in-
this chapter, and other records which spection or investigation if, in the
are directly related to the purpose of
judgment of the Area Director and the
the inspection. Representatives of the
Regional Solicitor, circumstances exist
Secretary of Health, Education, and
Welfare are authorized to make inspec- which make such preinspection process
tions and to question employers and desirable or necessary. Some examples
employees in order to carry out the of circumstances in which it may be
functions of the Secretary of Health, desirable or necessary to seek compul-
Education, and Welfare under the Act. sory process in advance of an attempt
Inspections conducted by Department to inspect or investigate include (but
of Labor Compliance Safety and Health are not limited to):
Officers and representatives of the Sec- (1) When the employers past practice
retary of Health, Education, and Wel- either implicitly or explicitly puts the
fare under section 8 of the Act and pur- Secretary on notice that a warrantless
suant to this part 1903 shall not affect inspection will not be allowed;
the authority of any State to conduct (2) When an inspection is scheduled
inspections in accordance with agree- far from the local office and procuring
ments and plans under section 18 of the a warrant prior to leaving to conduct
Act. the inspection would avoid, in case of
(b) Prior to inspecting areas con- refusal of entry, the expenditure of sig-
taining information which is classified nificant time and resources to return
by an agency of the United States Gov-
to the office, obtain a warrant and re-
ernment in the interest of national se-
turn to the worksite;
curity, Compliance Safety and Health
Officers shall have obtained the appro- (3) When an inspection includes the
priate security clearance. use of special equipment or when the
presence of an expert or experts is
1903.4 Objection to inspection. needed in order to properly conduct the
(a) Upon a refusal to permit the Com- inspection, and procuring a warrant
pliance Safety and Health Officer, in prior to an attempt to inspect would
exercise of his official duties, to enter alleviate the difficulties or costs en-
without delay and at reasonable times countered in coordinating the avail-
any place of employment or any place ability of such equipment or expert.
therein, to inspect, to review records, (c) With the approval of the Regional
or to question any employer, owner, Administrator and the Regional Solic-
operator, agent, or employee, in ac- itor, compulsory process may also be
cordance with 1903.3 or to permit a obtained by the Area Director or his
representative of employees to accom- designee.
pany the Compliance Safety and (d) For purposes of this section, the
Health Officer during the physical in- term compulsory process shall mean
spection of any workplace in accord- the institution of any appropriate ac-
ance with 1903.8, the Safety and tion, including ex parte application for
Health Officer shall terminate the in- an inspection warrant or its equiva-
spection or confine the inspection to lent. Ex parte inspection warrants shall
other areas, conditions, structures, ma- be the preferred form of compulsory
chines, apparatus, devices, equipment, process in all circumstances where
materials, records, or interviews con- compulsory process is relied upon to
cerning which no objection is raised. seek entry to a workplace under this
The Compliance Safety and Health Of-
section.
ficer shall endeavor to ascertain the
reason for such refusal, and shall im- [45 FR 65923, Oct. 3, 1980]
29
1903.5 Entry not a waiver. tion. An employer who fails to comply

Any permission to enter, inspect, re- with his obligation under this para-
view records, or question any person, graph promptly to inform the author-
shal not imply or be conditioned upon ized representative of employees of the
a waiver of any cause of action, cita- inspection or to furnish such informa-
tion, or penalty under the Act. Compli- tion as is necessary to enable the Com-
ance Safety and Health Officers are not pliance Safety and Health Officer
authorized to grant any such waiver. promptly to inform such representative
of the inspection, may be subject to ci-
1903.6 Advance notice of inspections. tation and penalty under section 17(c)
of the Act. Advance notice in any of
(a) Advance notice of inspections
may not be given, except in the fol- the situations described in paragraph
lowing situations: (a) of this section shall not be given
(1) In cases of apparent imminent more than 24 hours before the inspec-
danger, to enable the employer to tion is scheduled to be conducted, ex-
abate the danger as quickly as possible; cept in apparent imminent danger situ-
(2) In circumstances where the in- ations and in other unusual cir-
spection can most effectively be con- cumstances.
ducted after regular business hours or (c) The Act provides in section 17(f)
where special preparations are nec- that any person who gives advance no-
essary for an inspection; tice of any inspection to be conducted
(3) Where necessary to assure the under the Act, without authority from
presence of representatives of the em- the Secretary or his designees, shall,
ployer and employees or the appro- upon conviction, be punished by fine of
priate personnel needed to aid in the not more than $1,000 or by imprison-
inspection; and ment for not more than 6 months, or by
(4) In other circumstances where the both.
Area Director determines that the giv-
1903.7 Conduct of inspections.
ing of advance notice would enhance
the probability of an effective and (a) Subject to the provisions of
thorough inspection. 1903.3, inspections shall take place at
(b) In the situations described in such times and in such places of em-
paragraph (a) of this section, advance ployment as the Area Director or the
notice of inspections may be given only Compliance Safety and Health Officer
if authorized by the Area Director, ex- may direct. At the beginning of an in-
cept that in cases of apparent immi- spection, Compliance Safety and
nent danger, advance notice may be Health Officers shall present their cre-
given by the Compliance Safety and dentials to the owner, operator, or
Health Officer without such authoriza- agent in charge at the establishment;
tion if the Area Director is not imme- explain the nature and purpose of the
diately available. When advance notice inspection; and indicate generally the
is given, it shall be the employers re- scope of the inspection and the records
sponsibility promptly to notify the au- specified in 1903.3 which they wish to
thorized representative of employees of review. However, such designation of
the inspection, if the identity of such records shall not preclude access to ad-
representative is known to the em- ditional records specified in 1903.3.
ployer. (See 1903.8(b) as to situations (b) Compliance Safety and Health Of-
where there is no authorized represent- ficers shall have authority to take en-
ative of employees.) Upon the request vironmental samples and to take or ob-
of the employer, the Compliance Safe- tain photographs related to the pur-
ty and Health Officer will inform the pose of the inspection, employ other
authorized representative of employees reasonable investigative techniques,
of the inspection, provided that the and question privately any employer,
employer furnishes the Compliance owner, operator, agent or employee of
Safety and Health Officer with the an establishment. (See 1903.9 on trade
identity of such representative and secrets.) As used herein, the term em-
with such other information as is nec- ploy other reasonable investigative tech-
essary to enable him promptly to in- niques includes, but is not limited to,
form such representative of the inspec- the use of devices to measure employee
30
exposures and the attachment of per- ployer and employee representative

sonal sampling equipment such as may accompany the Compliance Safety
dosimeters, pumps, badges and other and Health Officer during each dif-
similar devices to employees in order ferent phase of an inspection if this
to monitor their exposures. will not interfere with the conduct of
(c) In taking photographs and sam- the inspection.
ples, Compliance Safety and Health Of- (b) Compliance Safety and Health Of-
ficers shall take reasonable pre- ficers shall have authority to resolve
cautions to insure that such actions all disputes as to who is the represent-
with flash, spark-producing, or other ative authorized by the employer and
equipment would not be hazardous. employees for the purpose of this sec-
Compliance Safety and Health Officers tion. If there is no authorized rep-
shall comply with all employer safety resentative of employees, or if the
and health rules and practices at the Compliance Safety and Health Officer
establishment being inspected, and is unable to determine with reasonable
they shall wear and use appropriate certainty who is such representative,
protective clothing and equipment. he shall consult with a reasonable
(d) The conduct of inspections shall number of employees concerning mat-
be such as to preclude unreasonable ters of safety and health in the work-
disruption of the operations of the em- place.
ployers establishment. (c) The representative(s) authorized
(e) At the conclusion of an inspec- by employees shall be an employee(s)
tion, the Compliance Safety and Health of the employer. However, if in the
Officer shall confer with the employer judgment of the Compliance Safety and
or his representative and informally Health Officer, good cause has been
advise him of any apparent safety or shown why accompaniment by a third
health violations disclosed by the in- party who is not an employee of the
spection. During such conference, the employer (such as an industrial hygien-
employer shall be afforded an oppor- ist or a safety engineer) is reasonably
tunity to bring to the attention of the necessary to the conduct of an effective
Compliance Safety and Health Officer and thorough physical inspection of
any pertinent information regarding the workplace, such third party may
conditions in the workplace. accompany the Compliance Safety and
(f) Inspections shall be conducted in Health Officer during the inspection.
accordance with the requirements of (d) Compliance Safety and Health Of-
this part. ficers are authorized to deny the right
[36 FR 17850, Sept. 14, 1971, as amended at 47 of accompaniment under this section
FR 6533, Feb. 12, 1982; 47 FR 55481, Dec. 10, to any person whose conduct interferes
1982] with a fair and orderly inspection. The
right of accompaniment in areas con-
1903.8 Representatives of employers taining trade secrets shall be subject to
and employees. the provisions of 1903.9(d). With regard
(a) Compliance Safety and Health Of- to information classified by an agency
ficers shall be in charge of inspections of the U.S. Government in the interest
and questioning of persons. A rep- of national security, only persons au-
resentative of the employer and a rep- thorized to have access to such infor-
resentative authorized by his employ- mation may accompany a Compliance
ees shall be given an opportunity to ac- Safety and Health Officer in areas con-
company the Compliance Safety and taining such information.
Health Officer during the physical in-
spection of any workplace for the pur- 1903.9 Trade secrets.
pose of aiding such inspection. A Com- (a) Section 15 of the Act provides:
pliance Safety and Health Officer may All information reported to or other-
permit additional employer representa- wise obtained by the Secretary or his
tives and additional representatives representative in connection with any
authorized by employees to accompany inspection or proceeding under this Act
him where he determines that such ad- which contains or which might reveal a
ditional representatives will further trade secret referred to in section 1905
aid the inspection. A different em- of title 18 of the United States Code
31
shall be considered confidential for the cept in accordance with the provisions
purpose of that section, except that of section 15 of the Act.
such information may be disclosed to (d) Upon the request of an employer,
other officers or employees concerned any authorized representative of em-
with carrying out this Act or when rel- ployees under 1903.8 in an area con-
evant in any proceeding under this Act. taining trade secrets shall be an em-
In any such proceeding the Secretary, ployee in that area or an employee au-
the Commission, or the court shall thorized by the employer to enter that
issue such orders as may be appro- area. Where there is no such represent-
priate to protect the confidentiality of ative or employee, the Compliance
trade secrets. Section 15 of the Act is Safety and Health Officer shall consult
considered a statute within the mean- with a reasonable number of employees
ing of section 552(b)(3) of title 5 of the who work in that area concerning mat-
United States Code, which exempts ters of safety and health.
from the disclosure requirements mat- 1903.10 Consultation with employees.
ters that are specifically exempted
from disclosure by statute. Compliance Safety and Health Offi-
cers may consult with employees con-
(b) Section 1905 of title 18 of the
cerning matters of occupational safety
United States Code provides: Who-
and health to the extent they deem
ever, being an officer or employee of
necessary for the conduct of an effec-
the United States or of any department
tive and thorough inspection. During
or agency thereof, publishes, divulges, the course of an inspection, any em-
discloses, or makes known in any man- ployee shall be afforded an opportunity
ner or to any extent not authorized by to bring any violation of the Act which
law any information coming to him in he has reason to believe exists in the
the course of his employment or offi- workplace to the attention of the Com-
cial duties or by reason of any exam- pliance Safety and Health Officer.
ination or investigation made by, or re-
turn, report or record made to or filed 1903.11 Complaints by employees.
with, such department or agency or of- (a) Any employee or representative of
ficer or employee thereof, which infor- employees who believe that a violation
mation concerns or relates to the trade of the Act exists in any workplace
secrets, processes, operations, style of where such employee is employed may
work, or apparatus, or to the identity, request an inspection of such work-
confidential statistical data, amount place by giving notice of the alleged
or source of any income, profits, losses, violation to the Area Director or to a
or expenditures of any person, firm, Compliance Safety and Health Officer.
partnership, corporation, or associa- Any such notice shall be reduced to
tion; or permits any income return or writing, shall set forth with reasonable
copy thereof or any book containing particularity the grounds for the no-
any abstract or particulars thereof to tice, and shall be signed by the em-
be seen or examined by any person ex- ployee or representative of employees.
cept as provided by law; shall be fined A copy shall be provided the employer
not more than $1,000, or imprisoned not or his agent by the Area Director or
more than 1 year, or both; and shall be Compliance Safety and Health Officer
removed from office or employment. no later than at the time of inspection,
(c) At the commencement of an in- except that, upon the request of the
spection, the employer may identify person giving such notice, his name
areas in the establishment which con- and the names of individual employees
tain or which might reveal a trade se- referred to therein shall not appear in
cret. If the Compliance Safety and such copy or on any record published,
Health Officer has no clear reason to released, or made available by the De-
question such identification, informa- partment of Labor.
tion obtained in such areas, including (b) If upon receipt of such notifica-
all negatives and prints of photo- tion the Area Director determines that
graphs, and environmental samples, the complaint meets the requirements
shall be labeled confidentialtrade set forth in paragraph (a) of this sec-
secret and shall not be disclosed ex- tion, and that there are reasonable
32
grounds to believe that the alleged vio- ference in which the complaining party
lation exists, he shall cause an inspec- and the employer may orally present
tion to be made as soon as practicable, their views. After considering all writ-
to determine if such alleged violation ten and oral views presented, the As-
exists. Inspections under this section sistant Regional Director shall affirm,
shall not be limited to matters referred modify, or reverse the determination of
to in the complaint. the Area Director and furnish the com-
(c) Prior to or during any inspection plaining party and the employer and
of a workplace, any employee or rep- written notification of this decision
resentative of employees employed in and the reasons therefor. The decision
such workplace may notify the Compli- of the Assistant Regional Director
ance Safety and Health Officer, in writ- shall be final and not subject to further
ing, of any violation of the Act which review.
they have reason to believe exists in (b) If the Area Director determines
such workplace. Any such notice shall that an inspection is not warranted be-
comply with the requirements of para- cause the requirements of 1903.11(a)
graph (a) of this section. have not been met, he shall notify the
(d) Section 11(c)(1) of the Act pro- complaining party in writing of such
vides: No person shall discharge or in determination. Such determination
any manner discriminate against any shall be without prejudice to the filing
employee because such employee has of a new complaint meeting the re-
filed any complaint or instituted or quirements of 1903.11(a).
caused to be instituted any proceeding
under or related to this Act or has tes- 1903.13 Imminent danger.
tified or is about to testify in any such Whenever and as soon as a Compli-
proceeding or because of the exercise ance Safety and Health Officer con-
by such employee on behalf of himself cludes on the basis of an inspection
or others of any right afforded by this that conditions or practices exist in
Act. any place of employment which could
(Approved by the Office of Management and reasonably be expected to cause death
Budget under control number 12180064) or serious physical harm immediately
[36 FR 17850, Sept. 4, 1973, as amended at 54 or before the imminence of such danger
FR 24333, June 7, 1989] can be eliminated through the enforce-
ment procedures otherwise provided by
1903.12 Inspection not warranted; in- the Act, he shall inform the affected
formal review. employees and employers of the danger
(a) If the Area Director determines and that he is recommending a civil ac-
that an inspection is not warranted be- tion to restrain such conditions or
cause there are no reasonable grounds practices and for other appropriate re-
to believe that a violation or danger lief in accordance with the provisions
exists with respect to a complaint of section 13(a) of the Act. Appropriate
under 1903.11, he shall notify the com- citations and notices of proposed pen-
plaining party in writing of such deter- alties may be issued with respect to an
mination. The complaining party may imminent danger even though, after
obtain review of such determination by being informed of such danger by the
submitting a written statement of po- Compliance Safety and Health Officer,
sition with the Assistant Regional Di- the employer immediately eliminates
rector and, at the same time, providing the imminence of the danger and initi-
the employer with a copy of such state- ates steps to abate such danger.
ment by certified mail. The employer
may submit an opposing written state- 1903.14 Citations; notices of de mini-
ment of position with the Assistant Re- mis violations; policy regarding em-
gional Director and, at the same time, ployee rescue activities.
provide the complaining party with a (a) The Area Director shall review
copy of such statement by certified the inspection report of the Compli-
mail. Upon the request of the com- ance Safety and Health Officer. If, on
plaining party or the employer, the As- the basis of the report the Area Direc-
sistant Regional Director, at his distor believes that the employer has vio-
cretion, may hold an informal con- lated a requirement of section 5 of the
33
Act, of any standard, rule or order pro- reasons therefor. The determination of
mulgated pursuant to section 6 of the the Assistant Regional Director shall
Act, or of any substantive rule pub- be final and not subject to review.
lished in this chapter, he shall, if ap- (e) Every citation shall state that the
propriate, consult with the Regional issuance of a citation does not con-
Solicitor, and he shall issue to the em- stitute a finding that a violation of the
ployer either a citation or a notice of Act has occurred unless there is a fail-
de minimis violations which have no ure to contest as provided for in the
direct or immediate relationship to Act or, if contested, unless the citation
safety or health. An appropriate cita- is affirmed by the Review Commission.
tion or notice of de minimis violations (f) No citation may be issued to an
shall be issued even though after being employer because of a rescue activity
informed of an alleged violation by the undertaken by an employee of that em-
Compliance Safety and Health Officer, ployer with respect to an individual in
the employer immediately abates, or imminent danger unless:
initiates steps to abate, such alleged (1)(i) Such employee is designated or
violation. Any citation or notice of de assigned by the employer to have re-
minimis violations shall be issued with sponsibility to perform or assist in res-
reasonable promptness after termi- cue operations, and
nation of the inspection. No citation (ii) The employer fails to provide pro-
may be issued under this section after tection of the safety and health of such
the expiration of 6 months following employee, including failing to provide
the occurrence of any alleged viola- appropriate training and rescue equip-
tion. ment; or
(b) Any citation shall describe with (2)(i) Such employee is directed by
particularity the nature of the alleged the employer to perform rescue activi-
violation, including a reference to the ties in the course of carrying out the
provision(s) of the Act, standard, rule, employees job duties, and
regulation, or order alleged to have (ii) The employer fails to provide pro-
been violated. Any citation shall also tection of the safety and health of such
fix a reasonable time or times for the employee, including failing to provide
abatement of the alleged violation. appropriate training and rescue equip-
(c) If a citation or notice of de mini- ment; or
mis violations is issued for a violation (3)(i) Such employee is employed in a
alleged in a request for inspection workplace that requires the employee
under 1903.11(a) or a notification of to carry out duties that are directly re-
violation under 1903.11(c), a copy of lated to a workplace operation where
the citation or notice of de minimis the likelihood of life-threatening acci-
violations shall also be sent to the em- dents is foreseeable, such as a work-
ployee or representative of employees place operation where employees are
who made such request or notification. located in confined spaces or trenches,
(d) After an inspection, if the Area handle hazardous waste, respond to
Director determines that a citation is emergency situations, perform exca-
not warranted with respect to a danger vations, or perform construction over
or violation alleged to exist in a re- water; and
quest for inspection under 1903.11(a) or (ii) Such employee has not been des-
a notification of violation under ignated or assigned to perform or assist
1903.11(c), the informal review proce- in rescue operations and voluntarily
dures prescribed in 1903.12(a) shall be elects to rescue such an individual; and
applicable. After considering all views (iii) The employer has failed to in-
presented, the Assistant Regional Di- struct employees not designated or as-
rector shall affirm the determination signed to perform or assist in rescue
of the Area Director, order a reinspec- operations of the arrangements for res-
tion, or issue a citation if he believes cue, not to attempt rescue, and of the
that the inspection disclosed a viola- hazards of attempting rescue without
tion. The Assistant Regional Director adequate training or equipment.
shall furnish the complaining party (4) For purposes of this policy, the
and the employer with written notifi- term imminent danger means the ex-
cation of his determination and the istence of any condition or practice
34
that could reasonably be expected to (1) A copy of such petition shall be

cause death or serious physical harm posted in a conspicuous place where all
before such condition or practice can affected employees will have notice
be abated. thereof or near such location where the
violation occurred. The petition shall
[36 FR 17850, Sept. 4, 1971, as amended at 59
remain posted for a period of ten (10)
FR 66613, Dec. 27, 1994]
working days. Where affected employ-
1903.14a Petitions for modification of ees are represented by an authorized
abatement date. representative, said representative
shall be served with a copy of such pe-
(a) An employer may file a petition tition.
for modification of abatement date (2) Affected employees or their rep-
when he has made a good faith effort to resentatives may file an objection in
comply with the abatement require- writing to such petition with the afore-
ments of a citation, but such abate- said Area Director. Failure to file such
ment has not been completed because objection within ten (10) working days
of factors beyond his reasonable con- of the date of posting of such petition
trol. or of service upon an authorized rep-
(b) A petition for modification of resentative shall constitute a waiver of
abatement date shall be in writing and any further right to object to said peti-
shall include the following information.
tion: (3) The Secretary or his duly author-
(1) All steps taken by the employer, ized agent shall have the authority to
and the dates of such action, in an ef- approve any petition for modification
fort to achieve compliance during the of abatement date filed pursuant to
prescribed abatement period. paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section.
(2) The specific additional abatement Such uncontested petitions shall be-
time necessary in order to achieve come final orders pursuant to sections
compliance. 10 (a) and (c) of the Act.
(3) The reasons such additional time (4) The Secretary or his authorized
is necessary, including the unavail- representative shall not exercise his
ability of professional or technical per- approval power until the expiration of
sonnel or of materials and equipment, fifteen (15) working days from the date
or because necessary construction or the petition was posted or served pur-
alteration of facilities cannot be com- suant to paragraphs (c) (1) and (2) of
pleted by the original abatement date. this section by the employer.
(4) All available interim steps being (d) Where any petition is objected to
taken to safeguard the employees by the Secretary or affected employ-
against the cited hazard during the ees, the petition, citation, and any ob-
abatement period. jections shall be forwarded to the Com-
(5) A certification that a copy of the mission within three (3) working days
petition has been posted and, if appro- after the expiration of the fifteen (15)
priate, served on the authorized rep- day period set out in paragraph (c)(4) of
resentative of affected employees, in this section.
accordance with paragraph (c)(1) of this [40 FR 6334, Feb. 11, 1975; 40 FR 11351, Mar. 11,
section and a certification of the date 1975]
upon which such posting and service
was made. 1903.15 Proposed penalties.
(c) A petition for modification of (a) After, or concurrent with, the
abatement date shall be filed with the issuance of a citation, and within a
Area Director of the United States De- reasonable time after the termination
partment of Labor who issued the cita- of the inspection, the Area Director
tion no later than the close of the next shall notify the employer by certified
working day following the date on mail or by personal service by the
which abatement was originally re- Compliance Safety and Health Officer
quired. A later-filed petition shall be of the proposed penalty under section
accompanied by the employers state- 17 of the Act, or that no penalty is
ment of exceptional circumstances ex- being proposed. Any notice of proposed
plaining the delay. penalty shall state that the proposed
35
penalty shall be deemed to be the final material. Notices of de minimis viola-

order of the Review Commission and tions need not be posted.
not subject to review by any court or (b) Each citation, or a copy thereof,
agency unless, within 15 working days shall remain posted until the violation
from the date of receipt of such notice, has been abated, or for 3 working days,
the employer notifies the Area Direc- whichever is later. The filing by the
tor in writing that he intends to con- employer of a notice of intention to
test the citation or the notification of contest under 1903.17 shall not affect
proposed penalty before the Review his posting responsibility under this
Commission. section unless and until the Review
(b) The Area Director shall determine Commission issues a final order
the amount of any proposed penalty, vacating the citation.
giving due consideration to the appro- (c) An employer to whom a citation
priateness of the penalty with respect has been issued may post a notice in
to the size of the business of the em- the same location where such citation
ployer being charged, the gravity of is posted indicating that the citation is
the violation, the good faith of the em- being contested before the Review
ployer, and the history of previous vio- Commission, and such notice may ex-
lations, in accordance with the provi- plain the reasons for such contest. The
sions of section 17 of the Act. employer may also indicate that speci-
(c) Appropriate penalties may be pro- fied steps have been taken to abate the
posed with respect to an alleged viola- violation.
tion even though after being informed (d) Any employer failing to comply
of such alleged violation by the Com- with the provisions of paragraphs (a)
pliance Safety and Health Officer, the and (b) of this section shall be subject
employer immediately abates, or initi- to citation and penalty in accordance
ates steps to abate, such alleged viola- with the provisions of section 17 of the
tion. Penalties shall not be proposed Act.
for de minimis violations which have
no direct or immediate relationship to 1903.17 Employer and employee con-
safety or health. tests before the Review Commis-
sion.
1903.16 Posting of citations. (a) Any employer to whom a citation
(a) Upon receipt of any citation or notice of proposed penalty has been
under the Act, the employer shall im- issued may, under section 10(a) of the
mediately post such citation, or a copy Act, notify the Area Director in writ-
thereof, unedited, at or near each place ing that he intends to contest such ci-
an alleged violation referred to in the tation or proposed penalty before the
citation occurred, except as provided Review Commission. Such notice of in-
below. Where, because of the nature of tention to contest shall be postmarked
the employers operations, it is not within 15 working days of the receipt
practicable to post the citation at or by the employer of the notice of pro-
near each place of alleged violation, posed penalty. Every notice of inten-
such citation shall be posted, unedited, tion to contest shall specify whether it
in a prominent place where it will be is directed to the citation or to the
readily observable by all affected em- proposed penalty, or both. The Area Di-
ployees. For example, where employers rector shall immediately transmit such
are engaged in activities which are notice to the Review Commission in ac-
physically dispersed (see 1903.2(b)), the cordance with the rules of procedure
citation may be posted at the location prescribed by the Commission.
to which employees report each day. (b) Any employee or representative of
Where employees do not primarily employees of an employer to whom a
work at or report to a single location citation has been issued may, under
(see 1903.2(b)), the citation may be section 10(c) of the Act, file a written
posted at the location from which the notice with the Area Director alleging
employees operate to carry out their that the period of time fixed in the ci-
activities. The employer shall take tation for the abatement of the viola-
steps to ensure that the citation is not tion is unreasonable. Such notice shall
altered, defaced, or covered by other be postmarked within 15 working days
36
of the receipt by the employer of the the employer notifies the Area Direc-
notice of proposed penalty or notice tor in writing that he intends to con-
that no penalty is being proposed. The test the notification or the proposed
Area Director shall immediately trans- additional penalty before the Review
mit such notice to the Review Commis- Commission.
sion in accordance with the rules of
procedure prescribed by the Commis- 1903.19 Abatement verification.
sion. Purpose. OSHAs inspections are in-
tended to result in the abatement of
1903.18 Failure to correct a violation
for which a citation has been violations of the Occupational Safety
issued. and Health Act of 1970 (the OSH Act).
This section sets forth the procedures
(a) If an inspection discloses that an OSHA will use to ensure abatement.
employer has failed to correct an al- These procedures are tailored to the
leged violation for which a citation has
nature of the violation and the employ-
been issued within the period per-
ers abatement actions.
mitted for its correction, the Area Di-
(a) Scope and application. This section
rector shall, if appropriate, consult
with the Regional Solicitor, and he applies to employers who receive a ci-
shall notify the employer by certified tation for a violation of the Occupa-
mail or by personal service by the tional Safety and Health Act.
Compliance Safety and Health Officer (b) Definitions. (1) Abatement means
of such failure and of the additional action by an employer to comply with
penalty proposed under section 17(d) of a cited standard or regulation or to
the Act by reason of such failure. The eliminate a recognized hazard identi-
period for the correction of a violation fied by OSHA during an inspection.
for which a citation has been issued (2) Abatement date means:
shall not begin to run until the entry (i) For an uncontested citation item,
of a final order of the Review Commis- the later of:
sion in the case of any review pro- (A) The date in the citation for
ceedings initiated by the employer in abatement of the violation;
good faith and not solely for delay or (B) The date approved by OSHA or es-
avoidance of penalties. tablished in litigation as a result of a
(b) Any employer receiving a notifi- petition for modification of the abate-
cation of failure to correct a violation ment date (PMA); or
and of proposed additional penalty (C) The date established in a citation
may, under section 10(b) of the Act, no- by an informal settlement agreement.
tify the Area Director in writing that (ii) For a contested citation item for
he intends to contest such notification which the Occupational Safety and
or proposed additional penalty before Health Review Commission (OSHRC)
the Review Commission. Such notice of has issued a final order affirming the
intention to contest shall be post- violation, the later of:
marked within 15 working days of the (A) The date identified in the final
receipt by the employer of the notifica-
order for abatement; or
tion of failure to correct a violation
(B) The date computed by adding the
and of proposed additional penalty. The
period allowed in the citation for
Area Director shall immediately trans-
mit such notice to the Review Commis- abatement to the final order date;
sion in accordance with the rules of (C) The date established by a formal
procedure prescribed by the Commis- settlement agreement.
sion. (3) Affected employees means those
(c) Each notification of failure to employees who are exposed to the haz-
correct a violation and of proposed ad- ard(s) identified as violation(s) in a ci-
ditional penalty shall state that it tation.
shall be deemed to be the final order of (4) Final order date means:
the Review Commission and not sub- (i) For an uncontested citation item,
ject to review by any court or agency the fifteenth working day after the em-
unless, within 15 working days from ployers receipt of the citation;
the date of receipt of such notification, (ii) For a contested citation item:
37
(A) The thirtieth day after the date (2) Documents demonstrating that
on which a decision or order of a com- abatement is complete may include,
mission administrative law judge has but are not limited to, evidence of the
been docketed with the commission, purchase or repair of equipment, photo-
unless a member of the commission has graphic or video evidence of abate-
directed review; or ment, or other written records.
(B) Where review has been directed, (e) Abatement plans. (1) The Agency
the thirtieth day after the date on may require an employer to submit an
which the Commission issues its deci- abatement plan for each cited violation
sion or order disposing of all or perti- (except an other-than-serious viola-
nent part of a case; or tion) when the time permitted for
(C) The date on which a federal ap- abatement is more than 90 calendar
peals court issues a decision affirming days. If an abatement plan is required,
the violation in a case in which a final the citation must so indicate.
order of OSHRC has been stayed. (2) The employer must submit an
(5) Movable equipment means a hand- abatement plan for each cited violation
held or non-hand-held machine or de- within 25 calendar days from the final
vice, powered or unpowered, that is order date when the citation indicates
used to do work and is moved within or that such a plan is required. The abate-
between worksites. ment plan must identify the violation
(c) Abatement certification. (1) Within and the steps to be taken to achieve
10 calendar days after the abatement abatement, including a schedule for
date, the employer must certify to completing abatement and, where nec-
OSHA (the Agency) that each cited vio- essary, how employees will be pro-
lation has been abated, except as protected from exposure to the violative
vided in paragraph (c)(2) of this sec- condition in the interim until abate-
tion. ment is complete.
(2) The employer is not required to
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (E): Appendix B con-
certify abatement if the OSHA Compli- tains a Sample Abatement Plan form.
ance Officer, during the on-site portion
of the inspection: (f) Progress reports. (1) An employer
(i) Observes, within 24 hours after a who is required to submit an abate-
violation is identified, that abatement ment plan may also be required to sub-
has occurred; and mit periodic progress reports for each
(ii) Notes in the citation that abate- cited violation. The citation must indi-
ment has occurred. cate:
(3) The employers certification that (i) That periodic progress reports are
abatement is complete must include, required and the citation items for
for each cited violation, in addition to which they are required;
the information required by paragraph (ii) The date on which an initial
(h) of this section, the date and method progress report must be submitted,
of abatement and a statement that af- which may be no sooner than 30 cal-
fected employees and their representa- endar days after submission of an
tives have been informed of the abate- abatement plan;
ment. (iii) Whether additional progress re-
ports are required; and
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (C): Appendix A con-
tains a sample Abatement Certification Let-
(iv) The date(s) on which additional
ter. progress reports must be submitted.
(2) For each violation, the progress
(d) Abatement documentation. (1) The report must identify, in a single sen-
employer must submit to the Agency, tence if possible, the action taken to
along with the information on abate- achieve abatement and the date the ac-
ment certification required by para- tion was taken.
graph (c)(3) of this section, documents
demonstrating that abatement is com- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (F): Appendix B con-
tains a Sample Progress Report form.
plete for each willful or repeat viola-
tion and for any serious violation for (g) Employee notification. (1) The em-
which the Agency indicates in the cita- ployer must inform affected employees
tion that such abatement documenta- and their representative(s) about
tion is required. abatement activities covered by this
38
section by posting a copy of each docu- (2) The date of postmark is the date
ment submitted to the Agency or a of submission for mailed documents.
summary of the document near the For documents transmitted by other
place where the violation occurred. means, the date the Agency receives
(2) Where such posting does not effec- the document is the date of submis-
tively inform employees and their rep- sion.
resentatives about abatement activi- (i) Movable equipment. (1) For serious,
ties (for example, for employers who repeat, and willful violations involving
have mobile work operations), the em- movable equipment, the employer
ployer must: must attach a warning tag or a copy of
(i) Post each document or a summary the citation to the operating controls
of the document in a location where it or to the cited component of equipment
will be readily observable by affected that is moved within the worksite or
employees and their representatives; or between worksites.
(ii) Take other steps to communicate
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (I)(1): Attaching a
fully to affected employees and their copy of the citation to the equipment is
representatives about abatement ac- deemed by OSHA to meet the tagging re-
tivities. quirement of paragraph (i)(1) of this section
(3) The employer must inform em- as well as the posting requirement of 29 CFR
ployees and their representatives of 1903.16.
their right to examine and copy all (2) The employer must use a warning
abatement documents submitted to the tag that properly warns employees
Agency. about the nature of the violation in-
(i) An employee or an employee rep- volving the equipment and identifies
resentative must submit a request to the location of the citation issued.
examine and copy abatement docu-
ments within 3 working days of receiv- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (I)(2): Non-Mandatory
ing notice that the documents have Appendix C contains a sample tag that em-
ployers may use to meet this requirement.
been submitted.
(ii) The employer must comply with (3) If the violation has not already
an employees or employee representa- been abated, a warning tag or copy of
tives request to examine and copy the citation must be attached to the
abatement documents within 5 working equipment:
days of receiving the request. (i) For hand-held equipment, imme-
(4) The employer must ensure that diately after the employer receives the
notice to employees and employee rep- citation; or
resentatives is provided at the same (ii) For non-hand-held equipment,
time or before the information is pro- prior to moving the equipment within
vided to the Agency and that abate- or between worksites.
ment documents are: (4) For the construction industry, a
(i) Not altered, defaced, or covered by tag that is designed and used in accord-
other material; and ance with 29 CFR 1926.20(b)(3) and 29
(ii) Remain posted for three working CFR 1926.200(h) is deemed by OSHA to
days after submission to the Agency. meet the requirements of this section
(h) Transmitting abatement documents. when the information required by para-
(1) The employer must include, in each graph (i)(2) is included on the tag.
submission required by this section, (5) The employer must assure that
the following information: the tag or copy of the citation attached
(i) The employers name and address; to movable equipment is not altered,
(ii) The inspection number to which defaced, or covered by other material.
the submission relates; (6) The employer must assure that
(iii) The citation and item numbers the tag or copy of the citation attached
to which the submission relates; to movable equipment remains at-
(iv) A statement that the informa- tached until:
tion submitted is accurate; and (i) The violation has been abated and
(v) The signature of the employer or all abatement verification documents
the employers authorized representa- required by this regulation have been
tive. submitted to the Agency;
39
(ii) The cited equipment has been llllllllllllllllllllllll

permanently removed from service or Signature
is no longer within the employers con- llllllllllllllllllllllll
trol; or Typed or Printed Name
(iii) The Commission issues a final APPENDIX B TO SECTION 1903.19SAMPLE
order vacating the citation. ABATEMENT PLAN OR PROGRESS REPORT
(NONMANDATORY)
APPENDICES TO 1903.19ABATEMENT
VERIFICATION (Name), Area Director
U. S. Department of LaborOSHA
NOTE: Appendices A through C provide in- Address of Area Office (on the citation)
formation and nonmandatory guidelines to [Companys Name]
assist employers and employees in com- [Companys Address]
plying with the appropriate requirements of
this section. Check one:
Abatement Plan [ ]
APPENDIX A TO SECTION 1903.19SAMPLE Progress Report [ ]
ABATEMENTCERTIFICATION LETTER (NON- Inspection Number lllllllllllll
MANDATORY)
Page ll of llll
(Name), Area Director Citation Number(s)* llllllllllll
U. S. Department of LaborOSHA Item Number(s)* llllllllllllll
Address of the Area Office (on the citation)
[Companys Name] Proposed
Comple- Comple-
[Companys Address] tion Date tion Date
The hazard referenced in Inspection Num- (for (for
Action abate- progress
ber [insert 9-digit #] for violation identified ment reports
as: plans only)
only)
Citation [insert #] and item [insert #] was
corrected on [insert date] by: 1. ........................................... ............... ...............
llllllllllllllllllllllll ...............................................
llllllllll. ...............................................
2. ........................................... ............... ...............
...............................................
corrected on [insert date] by: ...............................................
llllllllllllllllllllllll 3. ........................................... ............... ...............
...............................................
llllllllll.
...............................................
Citation [insert #] and item [insert #] was 4. ........................................... ............... ...............
corrected on [insert date] by: ...............................................
llllllllllllllllllllllll ............................................... ............... ...............
5. ........................................... ............... ...............
llllllllll. ...............................................
Citation [insert #] and item [insert #] was ............................................... ............... ...............
corrected on [insert date] by: 6. ........................................... ............... ...............
...............................................
llllllllllllllllllllllll ............................................... ............... ...............
llllllllll. 7. ........................................... ............... ...............
Citation [insert #] and item [insert #] was ...............................................
corrected on [insert date] by:
Date required for final abatement: lllll
llllllllllllllllllllllll I attest that the information contained in
llllllllll. this document is accurate.
llllllllllllllllllllllll
corrected on [insert date] by:
Signature
llllllllll. llllllllllllllllllllllll
Typed or Printed Name
corrected on insert date by: Name of primary point of contact for ques-
llllllllllllllllllllllll tions: [optional]
llllllllll. Telephone number: lllllllllllll
*Abatement plans or progress reports for
Citation [insert #] and item [insert #] was more than one citation item may be com-
corrected on [insert date] by: bined in a single abatement plan or progress
llllllllllllllllllllllll report if the abatement actions, proposed
llllllllll. completion dates, and actual completion
I attest that the information contained in dates (for progress reports only) are the
this document is accurate. same for each of the citation items.
40
APPENDIX C TO SECTION 1903.19SAMPLE WARNING TAG (NONMANDATORY)
[62 FR 15337, Mar. 31, 1997] ference for the purpose of discussing
any issues raised by an inspection, ci-
1903.20 Informal conferences. tation, notice of proposed penalty, or
At the request of an affected em- notice of intention to contest. The set-
ployer, employee, or representative of tlement of any issue at such conference
employees, the Assistant Regional Di-
rector may hold an informal con-
41
EC27OC91.000</GPH>
shall be subject to the rules of proce- (e) Area Director means the employee
dure prescribed by the Review Commis- or officer regularly or temporarily in
sion. If the conference is requested by charge of an Area Office of the Occupa-
the employer, an affected employee or tional Safety and Health Administra-
his representative shall be afforded an tion, U.S. Department of Labor, or any
opportunity to participate, at the dis- other person or persons who are au-
cretion of the Assistant Regional Di- thorized to act for such employee or of-
rector. If the conference is requested ficer. The latter authorizations may in-
by an employee or representative of clude general delegations of the au-
employees, the employer shall be af- thority of an Area Director under this
forded an opportunity to participate, part to a Compliance Safety and
at the discretion of the Assistant Re- Health Officer or delegations to such
gional Director. Any party may be rep- an officer for more limited purposes,
resented by counsel at such conference. such as the exercise of the Area Direc-
No such conference or request for such tors duties under 1903.14(a). The term
conference shall operate as a stay of also includes any employee or officer
any 15-working-day period for filing a exercising supervisory responsibilities
notice of intention to contest as pre- over an Area Director. A supervisory
scribed in 1903.17. employee or officer is considered to ex-
ercise concurrent authority with the
[36 FR 17850, Sept. 4, 1971. Redesignated at 62
FR 15337, Mar. 31, 1997]
Area Director.
(f) Assistant Regional Director means
1903.21 State administration. the employee or officer regularly or
temporarily in charge of a Region of
Nothing in this part 1903 shall pre- the Occupational Safety and Health
empt the authority of any State to Administration, U.S. Department of
conduct inspections, to initiate en- Labor, or any other person or persons
forcement proceedings or otherwise to who are specifically designated to act
implement the applicable provisions of for such employee or officer in his ab-
State law with respect to State occupa- sence. The term also includes any em-
tional safety and health standards in ployee or officer in the Occupational
accordance with agreements and plans Safety and Health Administration ex-
under section 18 of the Act and parts ercising supervisory responsibilities
1901 and 1902 of this chapter. over the Assistant Regional Director.
[36 FR 17850, Sept. 4, 1971. Redesignated at 62 Such supervisory employee or officer is
FR 15337, Mar. 31, 1997] considered to exercise concurrent au-
thority with the Assistant Regional Di-
1903.22 Definitions. rector. No delegation of authority
(a) Act means the Williams-Steiger under this paragraph shall adversely
Occupational Safety and Health Act of affect the procedures for independent
1970. (84 Stat. 1590 et seq., 29 U.S.C. 651 informal review of investigative deter-
et seq.) minations prescribed under 1903.12 of
(b) The definitions and interpreta- this part.
tions contained in section 3 of the Act (g) Inspection means any inspection of
shall be applicable to such terms when an employers factory, plant, establish-
used in this part 1903. ment, construction site, or other area,
(c) Working days means Mondays workplace or environment where work
through Fridays but shall not include is performed by an employee of an em-
Saturdays, Sundays, or Federal holi- ployer, and includes any inspection
days. In computing 15 working days, conducted pursuant to a complaint
the day of receipt of any notice shall filed under 1903.11 (a) and (c), any re-
not be included, and the last day of the inspection, followup inspection, acci-
15 working days shall be included. dent investigation or other inspection
(d) Compliance Safety and Health Offi- conducted under section 8(a) of the
cer means a person authorized by the Act.
Occupational Safety and Health Ad- [36 FR 17850, Sept. 4, 1971, as amended at 38
ministration, U.S. Department of FR 22624, Aug. 23, 1973. Redesignated at 62 FR
Labor, to conduct inspections. 15337, Mar. 31, 1997]
42
Part 1904Recording and Report- 1904.42 Requests from the Bureau of Labor
Statistics for data.
ing Occupational Injuries and
Illnesses Subpart FTransition From the Former Rule
Sec. 1904.43 Summary and posting of year 2000

data.
Subpart APurpose 1904.44 Retention and updating of old forms.
1904.45 OMB control numbers under the Pa-
1904.0 Purpose. perwork Reduction Act.
Subpart BScope Subpart GDefinitions

1904.1 Partial exemption for employers with 1904.46 Definitions.
10 or fewer employees.
1904.2 Partial exemption for establishments AUTHORITY: 29 U.S.C. 657, 658, 660, 666, 669,
in certain industries. 673, Secretary of Labors Order No. 32000 (65
1904.3 Keeping records for more than one FR 50017), and 5 U.S.C. 533.
agency. SOURCE: 66 FR 6122, Jan. 19, 2001, unless
NON-MANDATORY APPENDIX A TO SUBPART B otherwise noted.
PARTIALLY EXEMPT INDUSTRIES.
Subpart CRecordkeeping Forms and Subpart APurpose

Recording Criteria
1904.0 Purpose.
1904.4 Recording criteria. The purpose of this rule (Part 1904) is
1904.5 Determination of work-relatedness.
to require employers to record and re-
1904.6 Determination of new cases.
1904.7 General recording criteria.
port work-related fatalities, injuries
1904.8 Recording criteria for needlestick and and illnesses.
sharps injuries. NOTE TO 1904.0: Recording or reporting a
1904.9 Recording criteria for cases involving work-related injury, illness, or fatality does
medical removal under OSHA standards. not mean that the employer or employee was
1904.10 Recording criteria for cases involv- at fault, that an OSHA rule has been vio-
ing occupational hearing loss. lated, or that the employee is eligible for
1904.11 Recording criteria for work-related workers compensation or other benefits.
tuberculosis cases.
1904.12 Recording criteria for cases involv- Subpart BScope
ing work-related musculoskeletal dis-
orders. NOTE TO SUBPART B: All employers covered
1904.131904.28 [Reserved] by the Occupational Safety and Health Act
1904.29 Forms. (OSH Act) are covered by these Part 1904 reg-
ulations. However, most employers do not
Subpart DOther OSHA Injury and Illness have to keep OSHA injury and illness records
Recordkeeping Requirements unless OSHA or the Bureau of Labor Statis-
tics (BLS) informs them in writing that they
1904.30 Multiple business establishments. must keep records. For example, employers
1904.31 Covered employees. with 10 or fewer employees and business es-
1904.32 Annual summary. tablishments in certain industry classifica-
1904.33 Retention and updating. tions are partially exempt from keeping
1904.34 Change in business ownership. OSHA injury and illness records.
1904.35 Employee involvement.
1904.36 Prohibition against discrimination. 1904.1 Partial exemption for employ-
1904.37 State recordkeeping regulations. ers with 10 or fewer employees.
1904.38 Variances from the recordkeeping
rule. (a) Basic requirement. (1) If your com-
pany had ten (10) or fewer employees at
Subpart EReporting Fatality, Injury and all times during the last calendar year,
Illness Information to the Government you do not need to keep OSHA injury
and illness records unless OSHA or the
1904.39 Reporting fatalities and multiple
hospitalization incidents to OSHA.
BLS informs you in writing that you
1904.40 Providing records to government must keep records under 1904.41 or
representatives. 1904.42. However, as required by
1904.41 Annual OSHA Injury and Illness Sur- 1904.39, all employers covered by the
vey of Ten or More Employers. OSH Act must report to OSHA any
43
workplace incident that results in a fa- tion, electric, gas and sanitary serv-
tality or the hospitalization of three or ices; or wholesale trade are not eligible
more employees. for the partial industry classification
(2) If your company had more than exemption.
ten (10) employees at any time during (2) Is the partial industry classification
the last calendar year, you must keep exemption based on the industry classi-
OSHA injury and illness records unless fication of my entire company or on the
your establishment is classified as a classification of individual business estab-
partially exempt industry under lishments operated by my company? The
1904.2. partial industry classification exemp-
(b) Implementation. (1) Is the partial ex- tion applies to individual business es-
emption for size based on the size of my tablishments. If a company has several
entire company or on the size of an indi- business establishments engaged in dif-
vidual business establishment? The par- ferent classes of business activities,
tial exemption for size is based on the some of the companys establishments
number of employees in the entire may be required to keep records, while
company. others may be exempt.
(2) How do I determine the size of my (3) How do I determine the Standard In-
company to find out if I qualify for the dustrial Classification code for my com-
partial exemption for size? To determine pany or for individual establishments?
if you are exempt because of size, you You determine your Standard Indus-
need to determine your companys trial Classification (SIC) code by using
peak employment during the last cal- the Standard Industrial Classification
endar year. If you had no more than 10 Manual, Executive Office of the Presi-
employees at any time in the last cal- dent, Office of Management and Budg-
endar year, your company qualifies for et. You may contact your nearest
the partial exemption for size. OSHA office or State agency for help in
determining your SIC.
1904.2 Partial exemption for estab-
lishments in certain industries. 1904.3 Keeping records for more than
one agency.
(a) Basic requirement. (1) If your busi-
ness establishment is classified in a If you create records to comply with
specific low hazard retail, service, fi- another government agencys injury
nance, insurance or real estate indus- and illness recordkeeping require-
try listed in Appendix A to this Sub- ments, OSHA will consider those
part B, you do not need to keep OSHA records as meeting OSHAs Part 1904
injury and illness records unless the recordkeeping requirements if OSHA
government asks you to keep the accepts the other agencys records
records under 1904.41 or 1904.42. How- under a memorandum of understanding
ever, all employers must report to with that agency, or if the other agen-
OSHA any workplace incident that re- cys records contain the same informa-
sults in a fatality or the hospitalization as this Part 1904 requires you to
tion of three or more employees (see record. You may contact your nearest
1904.39). OSHA office or State agency for help in
(2) If one or more of your companys determining whether your records
establishments are classified in a non- meet OSHAs requirements.
exempt industry, you must keep OSHA
NON-MANDATORY APPENDIX A TO SUB-
injury and illness records for all of
PART B OF PART 1904PARTIALLY
such establishments unless your com-
EXEMPT INDUSTRIES
pany is partially exempted because of
size under 1904.1. Employers are not required to keep OSHA
(b) Implementation. (1) Does the partial injury and illness records for any establish-
industry classification exemption apply ment classified in the following Standard In-
only to business establishments in the re- dustrial Classification (SIC) codes, unless
they are asked in writing to do so by OSHA,
tail, services, finance, insurance or real
the Bureau of Labor Statistics ( BLS), or a
estate industries (SICs 5289)? Yes, busi- state agency operating under the authority
ness establishments classified in agri- of OSHA or the BLS. All employers, includ-
culture; mining; construction; manu- ing those partially exempted by reason of
facturing; transportation; communica- company size or industry classification,
44
must report to OSHA any workplace incident tion of three or more employees (see
that results in a fatality or the hospitaliza- 1904.39).
SIC code Industry description SIC code Industry description
525 ............ Hardware Stores 725 ........... Shoe Repair and Shoeshine Parlors.
542 ............ Meat and Fish Markets 726 ........... Funeral Service and Crematories.
544 ............ Candy, Nut, and Confectionery Stores 729 ........... Miscellaneous Personal Services.
545 ............ Dairy Products Stores 731 ........... Advertising Services.
546 ............ Retail Bakeries 732 ........... Credit Reporting and Collection Services.
549 ............ Miscellaneous Food Stores 733 ........... Mailing, Reproduction, & Stenographic Services.
551 ............ New and Used Car Dealers 737 ........... Computer and Data Processing Services.
552 ............ Used Car Dealers 738 ........... Miscellaneous Business Services.
554 ............ Gasoline Service Stations 764 ........... Reupholstery and Furniture Repair.
557 ............ Motorcycle Dealers 78 ............. Motion Picture.
56 .............. Apparel and Accessory Stores 791 ........... Dance Studios, Schools, and Halls.
573 ............ Radio, Television, & Computer Stores 792 ........... Producers, Orchestras, Entertainers.
58 .............. Eating and Drinking Places 793 ........... Bowling Centers.
591 ............ Drug Stores and Proprietary Stores 801 ........... Offices & Clinics Of Medical Doctors.
592 ............ Liquor Stores 802 ........... Offices and Clinics Of Dentists.
594 ............ Miscellaneous Shopping Goods Stores 803 ........... Offices Of Osteopathic.
599 ............ Retail Stores, Not Elsewhere Classified 804 ........... Offices Of Other Health Practitioners.
60 .............. Depository Institutions (banks & savings institu- 807 ........... Medical and Dental Laboratories.
tions)
61 .............. Nondepository 809 ........... Health and Allied Services, Not Elsewhere Clas-
sified.
62 .............. Security and Commodity Brokers 81 ............. Legal Services.
63 .............. Insurance Carriers 82 ............. Educational Services (schools, colleges, univer-
sities and libraries).
64 .............. Insurance Agents, Brokers & Services 832 ........... Individual and Family Services.
653 ............ Real Estate Agents and Managers 835 ........... Child Day Care Services.
654 ............ Title Abstract Offices 839 ........... Social Services, Not Elsewhere Classified.
67 .............. Holding and Other Investment Offices 841 ........... Museums and Art Galleries.
722 ............ Photographic Studios, Portrait 86 ............. Membership Organizations.
723 ............ Beauty Shops 87 ............. Engineering, Accounting, Research, Manage-
ment, and Related Services.
724 ............ Barber Shops 899 ........... Services, not elsewhere classified.
Subpart CRecordkeeping Forms (b) Implementation. (1) What sections of

and Recording Criteria this rule describe recording criteria for re-
cording work-related injuries and ill-
NOTE TO SUBPART C: This Subpart describes nesses? The table below indicates which
the work-related injuries and illnesses that sections of the rule address each topic.
an employer must enter into the OSHA (i) Determination of work-related-
records and explains the OSHA forms that ness. See 1904.5.
employers must use to record work-related (ii) Determination of a new case. See
fatalities, injuries, and illnesses. 1904.6.
(iii) General recording criteria. See
1904.4 Recording criteria. 1904.7.
(a) Basic requirement. Each employer (iv) Additional criteria. (Needlestick
required by this Part to keep records of and sharps injury cases, tuberculosis
fatalities, injuries, and illnesses must cases, hearing loss cases, medical re-
record each fatality, injury and illness moval cases, and musculoskeletal dis-
that: order cases). See 1904.8 through
1904.12.
(1) Is work-related; and
(2) How do I decide whether a par-
(2) Is a new case; and ticular injury or illness is recordable? The
(3) Meets one or more of the general decision tree for recording work-re-
recording criteria of 1904.7 or the ap- lated injuries and illnesses below shows
plication to specific cases of 1904.8 the steps involved in making this de-
through 1904.12. termination.
45
1904.5 Determination of work-relat- the work environment as the estab-

edness. lishment and other locations where one
or more employees are working or are
(a) Basic requirement. You must con-
present as a condition of their employ-
sider an injury or illness to be work-re-
ment. The work environment includes
lated if an event or exposure in the not only physical locations, but also
work environment either caused or the equipment or materials used by the
contributed to the resulting condition employee during the course of his or
or significantly aggravated a pre-exist- her work.
ing injury or illness. Work-relatedness (2) Are there situations where an injury
is presumed for injuries and illnesses or illness occurs in the work environment
resulting from events or exposures oc- and is not considered work-related? Yes,
curring in the work environment, un- an injury or illness occurring in the
less an exception in 1904.5(b)(2) spe- work environment that falls under one
cifically applies. of the following exceptions is not work-
(b) Implementation. (1) What is the related, and therefore is not record-
work environment? OSHA defines able.
46
ER19JA01.098</GPH>
1904.5(b)(2) You are not required to record injuries and illnesses if . . .
(i) ................. At the time of the injury or illness, the employee was present in the work environment as a member of the gen-
eral public rather than as an employee.
(ii) ................ The injury or illness involves signs or symptoms that surface at work but result solely from a non-work-related
event or exposure that occurs outside the work environment.
(iii) ................ The injury or illness results solely from voluntary participation in a wellness program or in a medical, fitness, or
recreational activity such as blood donation, physical examination, flu shot, exercise class, racquetball, or
baseball.
(iv) ............... The injury or illness is solely the result of an employee eating, drinking, or preparing food or drink for personal
consumption (whether bought on the employers premises or brought in). For example, if the employee is in-
jured by choking on a sandwich while in the employers establishment, the case would not be considered
work-related.
Note: If the employee is made ill by ingesting food contaminated by workplace contaminants (such as lead), or
gets food poisoning from food supplied by the employer, the case would be considered work-related.
(v) ................ The injury or illness is solely the result of an employee doing personal tasks (unrelated to their employment) at
the establishment outside of the employees assigned working hours.
(vi) ............... The injury or illness is solely the result of personal grooming, self medication for a non-work-related condition, or
is intentionally self-inflicted.
(vii) ............... The injury or illness is caused by a motor vehicle accident and occurs on a company parking lot or company ac-
cess road while the employee is commuting to or from work.
(viii) .............. The illness is the common cold or flu (Note: contagious diseases such as tuberculosis, brucellosis, hepatitis A, or
plague are considered work-related if the employee is infected at work).
(ix) ............... The illness is a mental illness. Mental illness will not be considered work-related unless the employee voluntarily
provides the employer with an opinion from a physician or other licensed health care professional with appro-
priate training and experience (psychiatrist, psychologist, psychiatric nurse practitioner, etc.) stating that the
employee has a mental illness that is work-related.
(3) How do I handle a case if it is not (iv) Medical treatment in a case

obvious whether the precipitating event or where no medical treatment was need-
exposure occurred in the work environ- ed for the injury or illness before the
ment or occurred away from work? In workplace event or exposure, or a
these situations, you must evaluate change in medical treatment was ne-
the employees work duties and envi- cessitated by the workplace event or
ronment to decide whether or not one exposure.
or more events or exposures in the (5) Which injuries and illnesses are con-
work environment either caused or sidered pre-existing conditions? An injury
contributed to the resulting condition or illness is a preexisting condition if it
or significantly aggravated a pre-exist- resulted solely from a non-work-re-
ing condition. lated event or exposure that occured
(4) How do I know if an event or expo- outside the work environment.
sure in the work environment signifi-
(6) How do I decide whether an injury
cantly aggravated a preexisting injury or
or illness is work-related if the employee is
illness? A preexisting injury or illness
on travel status at the time the injury or
has been significantly aggravated, for
illness occurs? Injuries and illnesses
purposes of OSHA injury and illness
recordkeeping, when an event or expo- that occur while an employee is on
sure in the work environment results travel status are work-related if, at the
in any of the following: time of the injury or illness, the em-
(i) Death, provided that the pre- ployee was engaged in work activities
existing injury or illness would likely in the interest of the employer. Ex-
not have resulted in death but for the amples of such activities include travel
occupational event or exposure. to and from customer contacts, con-
(ii) Loss of consciousness, provided ducting job tasks, and entertaining or
that the preexisting injury or illness being entertained to transact, discuss,
would likely not have resulted in loss or promote business (work-related en-
of consciousness but for the occupa- tertainment includes only entertain-
tional event or exposure. ment activities being engaged in at the
(iii) One or more days away from direction of the employer).
work, or days of restricted work, or Injuries or illnesses that occur when
days of job transfer that otherwise the employee is on travel status do not
would not have occurred but for the oc- have to be recorded if they meet one of
cupational event or exposure. the exceptions listed below.
47
You may use the following to determine if an injury or illness is

1904.5 (b)(6) If the employee has . . . work-related
(i) .................. checked into a hotel or motel for one or When a traveling employee checks into a hotel, motel, or into a
more days. other temporary residence, he or she establishes a home
away from home. You must evaluate the employees activities
after he or she checks into the hotel, motel, or other temporary
residence for their work-relatedness in the same manner as
you evaluate the activities of a non-traveling employee. When
the employee checks into the temporary residence, he or she
is considered to have left the work environment. When the em-
ployee begins work each day, he or she re-enters the work en-
vironment. If the employee has established a home away
from home and is reporting to a fixed worksite each day, you
also do not consider injuries or illnesses work-related if they
occur while the employee is commuting between the temporary
residence and the job location.
(ii) ................. taken a detour for personal reasons ............. Injuries or illnesses are not considered work-related if they occur
while the employee is on a personal detour from a reasonably
direct route of travel (e.g., has taken a side trip for personal
reasons).
(7) How do I decide if a case is work-re- of the body but had recovered com-
lated when the employee is working at pletely (all signs and symptoms had
home? Injuries and illnesses that occur disappeared) from the previous injury
while an employee is working at home, or illness and an event or exposure in
including work in a home office, will be the work environment caused the signs
considered work-related if the injury or or symptoms to reappear.
illness occurs while the employee is (b) Implementation. (1) When an em-
performing work for pay or compensa- ployee experiences the signs or symptoms
tion in the home, and the injury or ill- of a chronic work-related illness, do I
ness is directly related to the perform- need to consider each recurrence of signs
ance of work rather than to the general or symptoms to be a new case? No, for oc-
home environment or setting. For ex- cupational illnesses where the signs or
ample, if an employee drops a box of symptoms may recur or continue in
work documents and injures his or her the absence of an exposure in the work-
foot, the case is considered work-replace, the case must only be recorded
lated. If an employees fingernail is once. Examples may include occupa-
punctured by a needle from a sewing tional cancer, asbestosis, byssinosis
machine used to perform garment work and silicosis.
at home, becomes infected and requires (2) When an employee experiences the
medical treatment, the injury is con- signs or symptoms of an injury or illness
sidered work-related. If an employee is as a result of an event or exposure in the
injured because he or she trips on the workplace, such as an episode of occupa-
family dog while rushing to answer a tional asthma, must I treat the episode as
work phone call, the case is not consid- a new case? Yes, because the episode or
ered work-related. If an employee recurrence was caused by an event or
working at home is electrocuted be- exposure in the workplace, the incident
cause of faulty home wiring, the injury must be treated as a new case.
is not considered work-related. (3) May I rely on a physician or other
licensed health care professional to deter-
1904.6 Determination of new cases. mine whether a case is a new case or a re-
(a) Basic requirement. You must con- currence of an old case? You are not re-
sider an injury or illness to be a new quired to seek the advice of a physician
case if: or other licensed health care profes-
(1) The employee has not previously sional. However, if you do seek such
experienced a recorded injury or illness advice, you must follow the physician
of the same type that affects the same or other licensed health care profes-
part of the body, or sionals recommendation about wheth-
(2) The employee previously experi- er the case is a new case or a recur-
enced a recorded injury or illness of the rence. If you receive recommendations
same type that affected the same part from two or more physicians or other
48
licensed health care professionals, you volving days away and an entry of the
must make a decision as to which rec- number of calendar days away from
ommendation is the most authoritative work in the number of days column. If
(best documented, best reasoned, or the employee is out for an extended pe-
most authoritative), and record the riod of time, you must enter an esti-
case based upon that recommendation. mate of the days that the employee
will be away, and update the day count
1904.7 General recording criteria. when the actual number of days is
(a) Basic requirement. You must con- known.
sider an injury or illness to meet the (i) Do I count the day on which the in-
general recording criteria, and there- jury occurred or the illness began? No,
fore to be recordable, if it results in you begin counting days away on the
any of the following: death, days away day after the injury occurred or the ill-
from work, restricted work or transfer ness began.
to another job, medical treatment be- (ii) How do I record an injury or illness
yond first aid, or loss of consciousness. when a physician or other licensed health
You must also consider a case to meet care professional recommends that the
the general recording criteria if it in- worker stay at home but the employee
volves a significant injury or illness di- comes to work anyway? You must record
agnosed by a physician or other li- these injuries and illnesses on the
censed health care professional, even if OSHA 300 Log using the check box for
it does not result in death, days away cases with days away from work and
from work, restricted work or job enter the number of calendar days
transfer, medical treatment beyond away recommended by the physician or
first aid, or loss of consciousness. other licensed health care professional.
(b) Implementation. (1) How do I decide If a physician or other licensed health
if a case meets one or more of the general care professional recommends days
recording criteria? A work-related injury away, you should encourage your em-
or illness must be recorded if it results ployee to follow that recommendation.
in one or more of the following: However, the days away must be re-
(i) Death. See 1904.7(b)(2). corded whether the injured or ill em-
(ii) Days away from work. See ployee follows the physician or li-
1904.7(b)(3). censed health care professionals rec-
(iii) Restricted work or transfer to ommendation or not. If you receive
another job. See 1904.7(b)(4). recommendations from two or more
(iv) Medical treatment beyond first physicians or other licensed health
aid. See 1904.7(b)(5). care professionals, you may make a de-
(v) Loss of consciousness. See cision as to which recommendation is
1904.7(b)(6). the most authoritative, and record the
(vi) A significant injury or illness di- case based upon that recommendation.
agnosed by a physician or other li- (iii) How do I handle a case when a
censed health care professional. See physician or other licensed health care
1904.7(b)(7). professional recommends that the worker
(2) How do I record a work-related in- return to work but the employee stays at
jury or illness that results in the employ- home anyway? In this situation, you
ees death? You must record an injury must end the count of days away from
or illness that results in death by en- work on the date the physician or
tering a check mark on the OSHA 300 other licensed health care professional
Log in the space for cases resulting in recommends that the employee return
death. You must also report any work- to work.
related fatality to OSHA within eight (iv) How do I count weekends, holidays,
(8) hours, as required by 1904.39. or other days the employee would not
(3) How do I record a work-related in- have worked anyway? You must count
jury or illness that results in days away the number of calendar days the em-
from work? When an injury or illness in- ployee was unable to work as a result
volves one or more days away from of the injury or illness, regardless of
work, you must record the injury or whether or not the employee was
illness on the OSHA 300 Log with a scheduled to work on those day(s).
check mark in the space for cases in- Weekend days, holidays, vacation days
49
or other days off are included in the jury or illness, you must estimate the
total number of days recorded if the total number of days away or days of
employee would not have been able to restriction/job transfer and enter the
work on those days because of a workday count on the 300 Log.
related injury or illness. (ix) If a case occurs in one year but re-
(v) How do I record a case in which a sults in days away during the next cal-
worker is injured or becomes ill on a Fri- endar year, do I record the case in both
day and reports to work on a Monday, years? No, you only record the injury or
and was not scheduled to work on the illness once. You must enter the num-
weekend? You need to record this case ber of calendar days away for the in-
only if you receive information from a jury or illness on the OSHA 300 Log for
physician or other licensed health care the year in which the injury or illness
professional indicating that the em- occurred. If the employee is still away
ployee should not have worked, or from work because of the injury or ill-
should have performed only restricted ness when you prepare the annual sum-
work, during the weekend. If so, you mary, estimate the total number of
must record the injury or illness as a calendar days you expect the employee
case with days away from work or re- to be away from work, use this number
stricted work, and enter the day to calculate the total for the annual
counts, as appropriate. summary, and then update the initial
(vi) How do I record a case in which a log entry later when the day count is
worker is injured or becomes ill on the day known or reaches the 180-day cap.
before scheduled time off such as a holi- (4) How do I record a work-related in-
day, a planned vacation, or a temporary jury or illness that results in restricted
plant closing? You need to record a case work or job transfer? When an injury or
of this type only if you receive infor- illness involves restricted work or job
mation from a physician or other li- transfer but does not involve death or
censed health care professional indi-
days away from work, you must record
cating that the employee should not
the injury or illness on the OSHA 300
have worked, or should have performed
Log by placing a check mark in the
only restricted work, during the sched-
space for job transfer or restriction and
uled time off. If so, you must record
an entry of the number of restricted or
the injury or illness as a case with days
transferred days in the restricted
away from work or restricted work,
workdays column.
and enter the day counts, as appro-
priate. (i) How do I decide if the injury or ill-
(vii) Is there a limit to the number of ness resulted in restricted work? Re-
days away from work I must count? Yes, stricted work occurs when, as the re-
you may cap the total days away at sult of a work-related injury or illness:
180 calendar days. You are not required (A) You keep the employee from per-
to keep track of the number of cal- forming one or more of the routine
endar days away from work if the in- functions of his or her job, or from
jury or illness resulted in more than working the full workday that he or
180 calendar days away from work and/ she would otherwise have been sched-
or days of job transfer or restriction. In uled to work; or
such a case, entering 180 in the total (B) A physician or other licensed
days away column will be considered health care professional recommends
adequate. that the employee not perform one or
(viii) May I stop counting days if an more of the routine functions of his or
employee who is away from work because her job, or not work the full workday
of an injury or illness retires or leaves my that he or she would otherwise have
company? Yes, if the employee leaves been scheduled to work.
your company for some reason unre- (ii) What is meant by routine func-
lated to the injury or illness, such as tions? For recordkeeping purposes, an
retirement, a plant closing, or to take employees routine functions are those
another job, you may stop counting work activities the employee regularly
days away from work or days of re- performs at least once per week.
striction/job transfer. If the employee (iii) Do I have to record restricted work
leaves your company because of the in- or job transfer if it applies only to the day
50
on which the injury occurred or the ill- work all of his or her normally as-
ness began? No, you do not have to signed work shift. If the answer to both
record restricted work or job transfers of these questions is Yes, then the
if you, or the physician or other li- case does not involve a work restric-
censed health care professional, impose tion and does not have to be recorded
the restriction or transfer only for the as such. If the answer to one or both of
day on which the injury occurred or these questions is No, the case in-
the illness began. volves restricted work and must be re-
(iv) If you or a physician or other li- corded as a restricted work case. If you
censed health care professional rec- are unable to obtain this additional in-
ommends a work restriction, is the injury formation from the physician or other
or illness automatically recordable as a licensed health care professional who
restricted work case? No, a rec- recommended the restriction, record
ommended work restriction is record- the injury or illness as a case involving
able only if it affects one or more of restricted work.
the employees routine job functions. (viii) What do I do if a physician or
To determine whether this is the case, other licensed health care professional
you must evaluate the restriction in recommends a job restriction meeting
light of the routine functions of the in- OSHAs definition, but the employee does
jured or ill employees job. If the re- all of his or her routine job functions any-
striction from you or the physician or way? You must record the injury or ill-
other licensed health care professional ness on the OSHA 300 Log as a re-
keeps the employee from performing stricted work case. If a physician or
one or more of his or her routine job other licensed health care professional
functions, or from working the full recommends a job restriction, you
workday the injured or ill employee should ensure that the employee com-
would otherwise have worked, the em- plies with that restriction. If you re-
ployees work has been restricted and ceive recommendations from two or
you must record the case. more physicians or other licensed
(v) How do I record a case where the health care professionals, you may
worker works only for a partial work shift make a decision as to which rec-
because of a work-related injury or ill- ommendation is the most authori-
ness? A partial day of work is recorded tative, and record the case based upon
as a day of job transfer or restriction that recommendation.
for recordkeeping purposes, except for (ix) How do I decide if an injury or ill-
the day on which the injury occurred ness involved a transfer to another job? If
or the illness began. you assign an injured or ill employee
(vi) If the injured or ill worker produces to a job other than his or her regular
fewer goods or services than he or she job for part of the day, the case in-
would have produced prior to the injury volves transfer to another job. Note:
or illness but otherwise performs all of the This does not include the day on which
routine functions of his or her work, is the injury or illness occurred.
the case considered a restricted work case? (x) Are transfers to another job recorded
No, the case is considered restricted in the same way as restricted work cases?
work only if the worker does not per- Yes, both job transfer and restricted
form all of the routine functions of his work cases are recorded in the same
or her job or does not work the full box on the OSHA 300 Log. For example,
shift that he or she would otherwise if you assign, or a physician or other li-
have worked. censed health care professional rec-
(vii) How do I handle vague restrictions ommends that you assign, an injured
from a physician or other licensed health or ill worker to his or her routine job
care professional, such as that the em- duties for part of the day and to an-
ployee engage only in light duty or other job for the rest of the day, the in-
take it easy for a week? If you are not jury or illness involves a job transfer.
clear about the physician or other li- You must record an injury or illness
censed health care professionals rec- that involves a job transfer by placing
ommendation, you may ask that per- a check in the box for job transfer.
son whether the employee can do all of (xi) How do I count days of job transfer
his or her routine job functions and or restriction? You count days of job
51
transfer or restriction in the same way (B) Administering tetanus immuniza-

you count days away from work, using tions (other immunizations, such as
1904.7(b)(3)(i) to (viii), above. The only Hepatitis B vaccine or rabies vaccine,
difference is that, if you permanently are considered medical treatment);
assign the injured or ill employee to a (C) Cleaning, flushing or soaking
job that has been modified or perma- wounds on the surface of the skin;
nently changed in a manner that elimi- (D) Using wound coverings such as
nates the routine functions the em- bandages, Band-AidsTM, gauze pads,
ployee was restricted from performing, etc.; or using butterfly bandages or
you may stop the day count when the Steri-StripsTM (other wound closing de-
modification or change is made perma- vices such as sutures, staples, etc., are
nent. You must count at least one day considered medical treatment);
of restricted work or job transfer for (E) Using hot or cold therapy;
such cases. (F) Using any non-rigid means of sup-
(5) How do I record an injury or illness port, such as elastic bandages, wraps,
that involves medical treatment beyond non-rigid back belts, etc. (devices with
first aid? If a work-related injury or ill- rigid stays or other systems designed
ness results in medical treatment be- to immobilize parts of the body are
yond first aid, you must record it on considered medical treatment for rec-
the OSHA 300 Log. If the injury or ill- ordkeeping purposes);
ness did not involve death, one or more
(G) Using temporary immobilization
days away from work, one or more
devices while transporting an accident
days of restricted work, or one or more
victim (e.g., splints, slings, neck col-
days of job transfer, you enter a check
lars, back boards, etc.).
mark in the box for cases where the
employee received medical treatment (H) Drilling of a fingernail or toenail
but remained at work and was not to relieve pressure, or draining fluid
transferred or restricted. from a blister;
(i) What is the definition of medical (I) Using eye patches;
treatment? Medical treatment means (J) Removing foreign bodies from the
the management and care of a patient eye using only irrigation or a cotton
to combat disease or disorder. For the swab;
purposes of Part 1904, medical treat- (K) Removing splinters or foreign
ment does not include: material from areas other than the eye
(A) Visits to a physician or other li- by irrigation, tweezers, cotton swabs or
censed health care professional solely other simple means;
for observation or counseling; (L) Using finger guards;
(B) The conduct of diagnostic proce- (M) Using massages (physical therapy
dures, such as x-rays and blood tests, or chiropractic treatment are consid-
including the administration of pre- ered medical treatment for record-
scription medications used solely for keeping purposes); or
diagnostic purposes (e.g., eye drops to (N) Drinking fluids for relief of heat
dilate pupils); or stress.
(C) First aid as defined in para- (iii) Are any other procedures included
graph (b)(5)(ii) of this section. in first aid? No, this is a complete list of
(ii) What is first aid? For the pur- all treatments considered first aid for
poses of Part 1904, first aid means Part 1904 purposes.
the following: (iv) Does the professional status of the
(A) Using a non-prescription medica- person providing the treatment have any
tion at nonprescription strength (for effect on what is considered first aid or
medications available in both prescrip- medical treatment? No, OSHA considers
tion and non-prescription form, a rec- the treatments listed in 1904.7(b)(5)(ii)
ommendation by a physician or other of this Part to be first aid regardless of
licensed health care professional to use the professional status of the person
a non-prescription medication at pre- providing the treatment. Even when
scription strength is considered med- these treatments are provided by a
ical treatment for recordkeeping pur- physician or other licensed health care
poses); professional, they are considered first
52
aid for the purposes of Part 1904. Simi- restrictions are not recommended, or are
larly, OSHA considers treatment be- postponed, in a particular case.
yond first aid to be medical treatment
even when it is provided by someone 1904.8 Recording criteria for
other than a physician or other li- needlestick and sharps injuries.
censed health care professional. (a) Basic requirement. You must
(v) What if a physician or other li- record all work-related needlestick in-
censed health care professional rec- juries and cuts from sharp objects that
ommends medical treatment but the em- are contaminated with another per-
ployee does not follow the recommenda- sons blood or other potentially infec-
tion? If a physician or other licensed tious material (as defined by 29 CFR
health care professional recommends 1910.1030). You must enter the case on
medical treatment, you should encour- the OSHA 300 Log as an injury. To pro-
age the injured or ill employee to fol- tect the employees privacy, you may
low that recommendation. However, not enter the employees name on the
you must record the case even if the in- OSHA 300 Log (see the requirements for
jured or ill employee does not follow privacy cases in paragraphs 1904.29(b)(6)
the physician or other licensed health through 1904.29(b)(9)).
care professionals recommendation. (b) Implementation. (1) What does
(6) Is every work-related injury or ill- other potentially infectious material
ness case involving a loss of consciousness mean? The term other potentially in-
recordable? Yes, you must record a fectious materials is defined in the
work-related injury or illness if the
OSHA Bloodborne Pathogens standard
worker becomes unconscious, regard-
at 1910.1030(b). These materials in-
less of the length of time the employee
clude:
remains unconscious.
(i) Human bodily fluids, tissues and
(7) What is a significant diagnosed
injury or illness that is recordable under organs, and
the general criteria even if it does not re- (ii) Other materials infected with the
sult in death, days away from work, re- HIV or hepatitis B (HBV) virus such as
stricted work or job transfer, medical laboratory cultures or tissues from ex-
treatment beyond first aid, or loss of con- perimental animals.
sciousness? Work-related cases involv- (2) Does this mean that I must record all
ing cancer, chronic irreversible disease, cuts, lacerations, punctures, and scratch-
a fractured or cracked bone, or a punc- es? No, you need to record cuts, lacera-
tured eardrum must always be recorded tions, punctures, and scratches only if
under the general criteria at the time they are work-related and involve con-
of diagnosis by a physician or other li- tamination with another persons blood
censed health care professional. or other potentially infectious mate-
NOTE TO 1904.7: OSHA believes that most rial. If the cut, laceration, or scratch
significant injuries and illnesses will result involves a clean object, or a contami-
in one of the criteria listed in 1904.7(a): nant other than blood or other poten-
death, days away from work, restricted work
tially infectious material, you need to
or job transfer, medical treatment beyond
first aid, or loss of consciousness. However, record the case only if it meets one or
there are some significant injuries, such as a more of the recording criteria in
punctured eardrum or a fractured toe or rib, 1904.7.
for which neither medical treatment nor (3) If I record an injury and the em-
work restrictions may be recommended. In ployee is later diagnosed with an infec-
addition, there are some significant progres-
sive diseases, such as byssinosis, silicosis,
tious bloodborne disease, do I need to up-
and some types of cancer, for which medical date the OSHA 300 Log? Yes, you must
treatment or work restrictions may not be update the classification of the case on
recommended at the time of diagnosis but the OSHA 300 Log if the case results in
are likely to be recommended as the disease death, days away from work, restricted
progresses. OSHA believes that cancer, work, or job transfer. You must also
chronic irreversible diseases, fractured or
cracked bones, and punctured eardrums are
update the description to identify the
generally considered significant injuries and infectious disease and change the clas-
illnesses, and must be recorded at the initial sification of the case from an injury to
diagnosis even if medical treatment or work an illness.
53
(4) What if one of my employees is Standard Threshold Shift (STS) has oc-
splashed or exposed to blood or other po- curred, you must record the case on
tentially infectious material without being the OSHA 300 Log by checking the
cut or scratched? Do I need to record this hearing loss column.
incident? You need to record such an in- (b) Implementation. (1) What is a
cident on the OSHA 300 Log as an ill- Standard Threshold Shift? A Standard
ness if: Threshold Shift, or STS, is defined in
(i) It results in the diagnosis of a the occupational noise exposure stand-
bloodborne illness, such as HIV, hepa- ard at 29 CFR 1910.95(c)(10)(i) as a
titis B, or hepatitis C; or change in hearing threshold, relative
(ii) It meets one or more of the re- to the most recent audiogram for that
cording criteria in 1904.7. employee, of an average of 10 decibels
(dB) or more at 2000, 3000, and 4000
1904.9 Recording criteria for cases hertz in one or both ears.
involving medical removal under (2) How do I determine whether an STS
OSHA standards. has occurred? If the employee has never
(a) Basic requirement. If an employee previously experienced a recordable
is medically removed under the med- hearing loss, you must compare the
ical surveillance requirements of an employees current audiogram with
OSHA standard, you must record the that employees baseline audiogram. If
case on the OSHA 300 Log. the employee has previously experi-
(b) Implementation. (1) How do I clas- enced a recordable hearing loss, you
sify medical removal cases on the OSHA must compare the employees current
300 Log? You must enter each medical audiogram with the employees revised
removal case on the OSHA 300 Log as baseline audiogram (the audiogram re-
either a case involving days away from flecting the employees previous re-
work or a case involving restricted cordable hearing loss case).
work activity, depending on how you (3) May I adjust the audiogram results
decide to comply with the medical re- to reflect the effects of aging on hearing?
moval requirement. If the medical re- Yes, when comparing audiogram re-
moval is the result of a chemical expo- sults, you may adjust the results for
sure, you must enter the case on the the employees age when the audio-
OSHA 300 Log by checking the poi- gram was taken using Tables F1 or F
soning column. 2, as appropriate, in Appendix F of 29
(2) Do all of OSHAs standards have CFR 1910.95.
medical removal provisions? No, some (4) Do I have to record the hearing loss
OSHA standards, such as the standards if I am going to retest the employees
covering bloodborne pathogens and hearing? No, if you retest the employ-
noise, do not have medical removal ees hearing within 30 days of the first
provisions. Many OSHA standards that test, and the retest does not confirm
cover specific chemical substances the STS, you are not required to record
have medical removal provisions. the hearing loss case on the OSHA 300
These standards include, but are not Log. If the retest confirms the STS,
limited to, lead, cadmium, methylene you must record the hearing loss ill-
chloride, formaldehyde, and benzene. ness within seven (7) calendar days of
(3) Do I have to record a case where I the retest.
voluntarily removed the employee from ex- (5) Are there any special rules for deter-
posure before the medical removal criteria mining whether a hearing loss case is
in an OSHA standard are met? No, if the work-related? Yes, hearing loss is pre-
case involves voluntary medical resumed to be work-related if the em-
moval before the medical removal lev- ployee is exposed to noise in the work-
els required by an OSHA standard, you place at an 8-hour time-weighted aver-
do not need to record the case on the age of 85 dBA or greater, or to a total
OSHA 300 Log. noise dose of 50 percent, as defined in 29
CFR 1910.95. For hearing loss cases
1904.10 Recording criteria for cases where the employee is not exposed to
involving occupational hearing loss. this level of noise, you must use the
(a) Basic requirement. If an employees rules in 1904.5 to determine if the
hearing test (audiogram) reveals that a hearing loss is work-related.
54
(6) If a physician or other licensed of 10 decibels (dB) or more at 2000, 3000, and
health care professional determines the 4000 hertz (Hz) in one or both ears.
hearing loss is not work-related, do I still (2) How do I evaluate the current audiogram
to determine whether an employee has an STS
need to record the case? If a physician or and a 25dB hearing level?
other licensed health care professional (i) STS. If the employee has never pre-
determines that the hearing loss is not viously experienced a recordable hearing
work-related or has not been signifi- loss, you must compare the employees cur-
cantly aggravated by occupational rent audiogram with that employees base-
noise exposure, you are not required to line audiogram. If the employee has pre-
consider the case work-related or to viously experienced a recordable hearing
loss, you must compare the employees cur-
record the case on the OSHA 300 Log. rent audiogram with the employees revised
(c) Recording criteria for calendar year baseline audiogram (the audiogram reflect-
2002. From January 1, 2002 until Decem- ing the employees previous recordable hear-
ber 31, 2002, you are required to record ing loss case).
a work-related hearing loss averaging (ii) 25dB loss. Audiometric test results re-
25dB or more at 2000, 3000, and 4000 flect the employees overall hearing ability
in comparison to audiometric zero. There-
hertz in either ear on the OSHA 300
fore, using the employees current audio-
Log. You must use the employees gram, you must use the average hearing
original baseline audiogram for com- level at 2000, 3000, and 4000 Hz to determine
parison. You may make a correction whether or not the employees total hearing
for presbycusis (aging) by using the ta- level is 25 dB or more.
bles in Appendix F of 29 CFR 1910.95. (3) May I adjust the current audiogram to re-
The requirement of 1904.37(b)(1) that flect the effects of aging on hearing?
Yes. When you are determining whether an
States with OSHA-approved state plans
STS has occurred, you may age adjust the
must have the same requirements for employees current audiogram results by
determining which injuries and ill- using Tables F1 or F2, as appropriate, in
nesses are recordable and how they are Appendix F of 29 CFR 1910.95. You may not
recorded shall not preclude the states use an age adjustment when determining
from retaining their existing criteria whether the employees total hearing level is
with regard to this section during cal- 25 dB or more above audiometric zero.
endar year 2002. (4) Do I have to record the hearing loss if I am
going to retest the employees hearing?
NOTE TO 1904.10: Paragraphs (a) and (b) of No, if you retest the employees hearing
this section are effective on January 1, 2003. within 30 days of the first test, and the retest
Paragraph (c) of this section applies from does not confirm the recordable STS, you are
January 1, 2002 until December 31, 2002. not required to record the hearing loss case
[66 FR 6122, Jan. 19, 2001, as amended at 66 on the OSHA 300 Log. If the retest confirms
FR 52034, Oct. 12, 2001] the recordable STS, you must record the
hearing loss illness within seven (7) calendar
EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 67 FR 44047, July days of the retest. If subsequent audiometric
1, 2002, 1904.10 was revised, effective Jan. 1, testing performed under the testing require-
2003. For the convenience of the user, the re- ments of the 1910.95 noise standard indi-
vised text is set forth as follows: cates that an STS is not persistent, you may
erase or line-out the recorded entry.
1904.10 Recording criteria for cases in- (5) Are there any special rules for determining
volving occupational hearing loss.
whether a hearing loss case is work-related?
(a) Basic requirement. If an employees No. You must use the rules in 1904.5 to de-
hearing test (audiogram) reveals that the termine if the hearing loss is work-related. If
employee has experienced a work-related an event or exposure in the work environ-
Standard Threshold Shift (STS) in hearing in ment either caused or contributed to the
one or both ears, and the employees total hearing loss, or significantly aggravated a
hearing level is 25 decibels (dB) or more pre-existing hearing loss, you must consider
above audiometric zero (averaged at 2000, the case to be work related.
3000, and 4000 Hz) in the same ear(s) as the (6) If a physician or other licensed health care
STS, you must record the case on the OSHA professional determines the hearing loss is not
300 Log. work-related, do I still need to record the case?
(b) Implementation. If a physician or other licensed health care
(1) What is a Standard Threshold Shift? A professional determines that the hearing loss
Standard Threshold Shift, or STS, is defined is not work-related or has not been signifi-
in the occupational noise exposure standard cantly aggravated by occupational noise ex-
at 29 CFR 1910.95(g)(10)(i) as a change in posure, you are not required to consider the
hearing threshold, relative to the baseline case work-related or to record the case on
audiogram for that employee, of an average the OSHA 300 Log.
55
(7) How do I complete the 300 Log for a hear- orders of the muscles, nerves, tendons,
ing loss case? ligaments, joints, cartilage and spinal
When you enter a recordable hearing loss discs. MSDs do not include disorders
case on the OSHA 300 Log, you must check
caused by slips, trips, falls, motor vehi-
the 300 Log column for hearing loss.
NOTE TO 1904.10(b)(7): The applicability of cle accidents, or other similar acci-
paragraph (b)(7) is delayed until further no- dents. Examples of MSDs include: Car-
tice. pal tunnel syndrome, Rotator cuff syn-
drome, De Quervains disease, Trigger
1904.11 Recording criteria for work- finger, Tarsal tunnel syndrome, Sci-
related tuberculosis cases. atica, Epicondylitis, Tendinitis,
(a) Basic requirement. If any of your Raynauds phenomenon, Carpet layers
employees has been occupationally ex- knee, Herniated spinal disc, and Low
posed to anyone with a known case of back pain.
active tuberculosis (TB), and that em- (2) How do I decide which musculo-
ployee subsequently develops a tuber- skeletal disorders to record? There are no
culosis infection, as evidenced by a special criteria for determining which
positive skin test or diagnosis by a musculoskeletal disorders to record.
physician or other licensed health care An MSD case is recorded using the
professional, you must record the case same process you would use for any
on the OSHA 300 Log by checking the other injury or illness. If a musculo-
respiratory condition column. skeletal disorder is work-related, and
(b) Implementation. (1) Do I have to is a new case, and meets one or more of
record, on the Log, a positive TB skin test the general recording criteria, you
result obtained at a pre-employment phys- must record the musculoskeletal dis-
ical? No, you do not have to record it order. The following table will guide
because the employee was not occupa- you to the appropriate section of the
tionally exposed to a known case of ac- rule for guidance on recording MSD
tive tuberculosis in your workplace. cases.
(2) May I line-out or erase a recorded (i) Determining if the MSD is work-
related. See 1904.5.
TB case if I obtain evidence that the case
(ii) Determining if the MSD is a new
was not caused by occupational exposure?
case. See 1904.6.
Yes, you may line-out or erase the case
(iii) Determining if the MSD meets
from the Log under the following cir-
one or more of the general recording
cumstances:
criteria:
(i) The worker is living in a house-
(A) Days away from work, see
hold with a person who has been diag- 1904.7(b)(3).
nosed with active TB; (B) Restricted work or transfer to an-
(ii) The Public Health Department other job, or see 1904.7(b)(4).
has identified the worker as a contact (C) Medical treatment beyond first
of an individual with a case of active aid. See 1904.7(b)(5).
TB unrelated to the workplace; or (3) If a work-related MSD case involves
(iii) A medical investigation shows only subjective symptoms like pain or tin-
that the employees infection was gling, do I have to record it as a musculo-
caused by exposure to TB away from skeletal disorder? The symptoms of an
work, or proves that the case was not MSD are treated the same as symp-
related to the workplace TB exposure. toms for any other injury or illness. If
1904.12 Recording criteria for cases an employee has pain, tingling, burn-
involving work-related musculo- ing, numbness or any other subjective
skeletal disorders. symptom of an MSD, and the symp-
toms are work-related, and the case is
(a) Basic requirement. If any of your
a new case that meets the recording
employees experiences a recordable
criteria, you must record the case on
work-related musculoskeletal disorder
the OSHA 300 Log as a musculoskeletal
(MSD), you must record it on the
disorder.
OSHA 300 Log by checking the mus- NOTE TO 1904.12: This section is effective
culoskeletal disorder column. January 1, 2003. From January 1, 2002 until
(b) Implementation. (1) What is a December 31, 2002, you are required to record
musculoskeletal disorder or MSD? Mus- work-related injuries and illnesses involving
culoskeletal disorders (MSDs) are dis- muscles, nerves, tendons, ligaments, joints,
56
cartilage and spinal discs in accordance with (6) Are there situations where I do not
the requirements applicable to any injury or put the employees name on the forms for
illness under 1904.5, 1904.6, 1904.7, and privacy reasons? Yes, if you have a
1904.29. For entry (M) on the OSHA 300 Log,
privacy concern case, you may not
you must check either the entry for injury
or all other illneses. enter the employees name on the
OSHA 300 Log. Instead, enter privacy
[66 FR 6122, Jan. 19, 2001, as amended at 66 case in the space normally used for
FR 52034, Oct. 12, 2001] the employees name. This will protect
the privacy of the injured or ill em-
1904.131904.28 [Reserved]
ployee when another employee, a
1904.29 Forms former employee, or an authorized em-
ployee representative is provided ac-
(a) Basic requirement. You must use cess to the OSHA 300 Log under
OSHA 300, 300A, and 301 forms, or 1904.35(b)(2). You must keep a sepa-
equivalent forms, for recordable inju- rate, confidential list of the case num-
ries and illnesses. The OSHA 300 form bers and employee names for your pri-
is called the Log of Work-Related Inju- vacy concern cases so you can update
ries and Illnesses, the 300A is the the cases and provide the information
Summary of Work-Related Injuries and to the government if asked to do so.
Illnesses, and the OSHA 301 form is (7) How do I determine if an injury or
called the Injury and Illness Incident illness is a privacy concern case? You
Report. must consider the following injuries or
(b) Implementation. (1) What do I need illnesses to be privacy concern cases:
to do to complete the OSHA 300 Log? You (i) An injury or illness to an intimate
must enter information about your body part or the reproductive system;
business at the top of the OSHA 300 (ii) An injury or illness resulting
Log, enter a one or two line description from a sexual assault;
for each recordable injury or illness, (iii) Mental illnesses;
and summarize this information on the (iv) HIV infection, hepatitis, or tu-
OSHA 300A at the end of the year. berculosis;
(2) What do I need to do to complete the (v) Needlestick injuries and cuts
OSHA 301 Incident Report? You must from sharp objects that are contami-
complete an OSHA 301 Incident Report nated with another persons blood or
form, or an equivalent form, for each other potentially infectious material
recordable injury or illness entered on (see 1904.8 for definitions); and
the OSHA 300 Log. (vi) Other illnesses, if the employee
(3) How quickly must each injury or ill- independently and voluntarily requests
ness be recorded? You must enter each that his or her name not be entered on
recordable injury or illness on the the log. Musculoskeletal disorders
OSHA 300 Log and 301 Incident Report (MSDs) are not considered privacy con-
within seven (7) calendar days of re- cern cases. (NOTE: The first sentence of
ceiving information that a recordable this 1904.29(b)(7)(vi) is effective on
injury or illness has occurred. January 1, 2002. The second sentence is
(4) What is an equivalent form? An effective beginning on January 1, 2003.)
equivalent form is one that has the (8) May I classify any other types of in-
same information, is as readable and juries and illnesses as privacy concern
understandable, and is completed using cases? No, this is a complete list of all
the same instructions as the OSHA injuries and illnesses considered pri-
form it replaces. Many employers use vacy concern cases for Part 1904 pur-
an insurance form instead of the OSHA poses.
301 Incident Report, or supplement an (9) If I have removed the employees
insurance form by adding any addi- name, but still believe that the employee
tional information required by OSHA. may be identified from the information on
(5) May I keep my records on a com- the forms, is there anything else that I
puter? Yes, if the computer can produce can do to further protect the employees
equivalent forms when they are needed, privacy? Yes, if you have a reasonable
as described under 1904.35 and 1904.40, basis to believe that information de-
you may keep your records using the scribing the privacy concern case may
computer system. be personally identifiable even though
57
the employees name has been omitted, (b) Implementation. (1) Do I need to
you may use discretion in describing keep OSHA injury and illness records for
the injury or illness on both the OSHA short-term establishments (i.e., establish-
300 and 301 forms. You must enter ments that will exist for less than a year)?
enough information to identify the Yes, however, you do not have to keep
cause of the incident and the general a separate OSHA 300 Log for each such
severity of the injury or illness, but establishment. You may keep one
you do not need to include details of an OSHA 300 Log that covers all of your
intimate or private nature. For exam- short-term establishments. You may
ple, a sexual assault case could be de- also include the short-term establish-
scribed as injury from assault, or an ments recordable injuries and illnesses
injury to a reproductive organ could be on an OSHA 300 Log that covers short-
described as lower abdominal injury. term establishments for individual
(10) What must I do to protect employee company divisions or geographic re-
privacy if I wish to provide access to the gions.
OSHA Forms 300 and 301 to persons other (2) May I keep the records for all of my
than government representatives, employ- establishments at my headquarters loca-
ees, former employees or authorized rep- tion or at some other central location?
resentatives? If you decide to volun- Yes, you may keep the records for an
tarily disclose the Forms to persons establishment at your headquarters or
other than government representa- other central location if you can:
tives, employees, former employees or (i) Transmit information about the
authorized representatives (as required injuries and illnesses from the estab-
by 1904.35 and 1904.40), you must re- lishment to the central location within
move or hide the employees names and seven (7) calendar days of receiving in-
other personally identifying informa- formation that a recordable injury or
tion, except for the following cases. illness has occurred; and
You may disclose the Forms with per- (ii) Produce and send the records
sonally identifying information only: from the central location to the estab-
lishment within the time frames re-
(i) to an auditor or consultant hired
quired by 1904.35 and 1904.40 when
by the employer to evaluate the safety
you are required to provide records to
and health program;
a government representative, employ-
(ii) to the extent necessary for proc- ees, former employees or employee rep-
essing a claim for workers compensa- resentatives.
tion or other insurance benefits; or (3) Some of my employees work at sev-
(iii) to a public health authority or eral different locations or do not work at
law enforcement agency for uses and any of my establishments at all. How do I
disclosures for which consent, an au- record cases for these employees? You
thorization, or opportunity to agree or must link each of your employees with
object is not required under Depart- one of your establishments, for record-
ment of Health and Human Services keeping purposes. You must record the
Standards for Privacy of Individually injury and illness on the OSHA 300 Log
Identifiable Health Information, 45 of the injured or ill employees estab-
CFR 164.512. lishment, or on an OSHA 300 Log that
[66 FR 6122, Jan. 19, 2001, as amended at 66 covers that employees short-term es-
FR 52034, Oct. 12, 2001] tablishment.
(4) How do I record an injury or illness
when an employee of one of my establish-
Subpart DOther OSHA Injury and ments is injured or becomes ill while vis-
Illness Recordkeeping Re- iting or working at another of my estab-
quirements lishments, or while working away from
any of my establishments? If the injury
1904.30 Multiple business establish- or illness occurs at one of your estab-
ments.
lishments, you must record the injury
(a) Basic requirement. You must keep or illness on the OSHA 300 Log of the
a separate OSHA 300 Log for each es- establishment at which the injury or
tablishment that is expected to be in illness occurred. If the employee is in-
operation for one year or longer. jured or becomes ill and is not at one of
58
your establishments, you must record that company provides day-to-day su-
the case on the OSHA 300 Log at the es- pervision).
tablishment at which the employee
normally works. 1904.32 Annual summary.
(a) Basic requirement. At the end of
1904.31 Covered employees. each calendar year, you must:
(a) Basic requirement. You must (1) Review the OSHA 300 Log to
record on the OSHA 300 Log the record- verify that the entries are complete
able injuries and illnesses of all em- and accurate, and correct any defi-
ployees on your payroll, whether they ciencies identified;
are labor, executive, hourly, salary, (2) Create an annual summary of in-
part-time, seasonal, or migrant work- juries and illnesses recorded on the
ers. You also must record the record- OSHA 300 Log;
able injuries and illnesses that occur to (3) Certify the summary; and
employees who are not on your payroll (4) Post the annual summary.
if you supervise these employees on a (b) Implementation. (1) How extensively
day-to-day basis. If your business is or- do I have to review the OSHA 300 Log en-
ganized as a sole proprietorship or tries at the end of the year? You must re-
partnership, the owner or partners are view the entries as extensively as nec-
not considered employees for record- essary to make sure that they are com-
keeping purposes. plete and correct.
(b) Implementation. (1) If a self-em- (2) How do I complete the annual sum-
ployed person is injured or becomes ill mary? You must:
while doing work at my business, do I (i) Total the columns on the OSHA
need to record the injury or illness? No, 300 Log (if you had no recordable cases,
self-employed individuals are not cov- enter zeros for each column total); and
ered by the OSH Act or this regulation. (ii) Enter the calendar year covered,
(2) If I obtain employees from a tem- the companys name, establishment
porary help service, employee leasing serv- name, establishment address, annual
ice, or personnel supply service, do I have average number of employees covered
to record an injury or illness occurring to by the OSHA 300 Log, and the total
one of those employees? You must record hours worked by all employees covered
these injuries and illnesses if you su- by the OSHA 300 Log.
pervise these employees on a day-to- (iii) If you are using an equivalent
day basis. form other than the OSHA 300-A sum-
(3) If an employee in my establishment mary form, as permitted under
is a contractors employee, must I record 1904.6(b)(4), the summary you use
an injury or illness occurring to that em- must also include the employee access
ployee? If the contractors employee is and employer penalty statements
under the day-to-day supervision of the found on the OSHA 300-A Summary
contractor, the contractor is respon- form.
sible for recording the injury or illness. (3) How do I certify the annual sum-
If you supervise the contractor employ- mary? A company executive must cer-
ees work on a day-to-day basis, you tify that he or she has examined the
must record the injury or illness. OSHA 300 Log and that he or she rea-
(4) Must the personnel supply service, sonably believes, based on his or her
temporary help service, employee leasing knowledge of the process by which the
service, or contractor also record the inju- information was recorded, that the an-
ries or illnesses occurring to temporary, nual summary is correct and complete.
leased or contract employees that I super- (4) Who is considered a company execu-
vise on a day-to-day basis? No, you and tive? The company executive who cer-
the temporary help service, employee tifies the log must be one of the fol-
leasing service, personnel supply serv- lowing persons:
ice, or contractor should coordinate (i) An owner of the company (only if
your efforts to make sure that each in- the company is a sole proprietorship or
jury and illness is recorded only once: partnership);
either on your OSHA 300 Log (if you (ii) An officer of the corporation;
provide day-to-day supervision) or on (iii) The highest ranking company of-
the other employers OSHA 300 Log (if ficial working at the establishment; or
59
(iv) The immediate supervisor of the as required by 1904.33 of this Part, but
highest ranking company official need not update or correct the records
working at the establishment. of the prior owner.
(5) How do I post the annual summary?
You must post a copy of the annual 1904.35 Employee involvement.
summary in each establishment in a (a) Basic requirement. Your employees
conspicuous place or places where no- and their representatives must be in-
tices to employees are customarily volved in the recordkeeping system in
posted. You must ensure that the post- several ways.
ed annual summary is not altered, de- (1) You must inform each employee
faced or covered by other material. of how he or she is to report an injury
(6) When do I have to post the annual or illness to you.
summary? You must post the summary (2) You must provide limited access
no later than February 1 of the year to your injury and illness records for
following the year covered by the your employees and their representa-
records and keep the posting in place tives.
until April 30. (b) Implementation. (1) What must I do
to make sure that employees report work-
1904.33 Retention and updating. related injuries and illnesses to me?
(a) Basic requirement. You must save (i) You must set up a way for employ-
the OSHA 300 Log, the privacy case list ees to report work-related injuries and
(if one exists), the annual summary, illnesses promptly; and
and the OSHA 301 Incident Report (ii) You must tell each employee how
forms for five (5) years following the to report work-related injuries and ill-
end of the calendar year that these nesses to you.
records cover. (2) Do I have to give my employees and
(b) Implementation. (1) Do I have to up- their representatives access to the OSHA
date the OSHA 300 Log during the five- injury and illness records? Yes, your em-
year storage period? Yes, during the ployees, former employees, their per-
storage period, you must update your sonal representatives, and their au-
stored OSHA 300 Logs to include newly thorized employee representatives have
discovered recordable injuries or ill- the right to access the OSHA injury
nesses and to show any changes that and illness records, with some limita-
have occurred in the classification of tions, as discussed below.
previously recorded injuries and ill- (i) Who is an authorized employee rep-
nesses. If the description or outcome of resentative? An authorized employee
a case changes, you must remove or representative is an authorized collec-
line out the original entry and enter tive bargaining agent of employees.
the new information. (ii) Who is a personal representative
(2) Do I have to update the annual sum- of an employee or former employee? A
mary? No, you are not required to up- personal representative is:
date the annual summary, but you may (A) Any person that the employee or
do so if you wish. former employee designates as such, in
(3) Do I have to update the OSHA 301 writing; or
Incident Reports? No, you are not re- (B) The legal representative of a de-
quired to update the OSHA 301 Incident ceased or legally incapacitated em-
Reports, but you may do so if you wish. ployee or former employee.
(iii) If an employee or representative
1904.34 Change in business owner- asks for access to the OSHA 300 Log,
ship. when do I have to provide it? When an
If your business changes ownership, employee, former employee, personal
you are responsible for recording and representative, or authorized employee
reporting work-related injuries and ill- representative asks for copies of your
nesses only for that period of the year current or stored OSHA 300 Log(s) for
during which you owned the establish- an establishment the employee or
ment. You must transfer the Part 1904 former employee has worked in, you
records to the new owner. The new must give the requester a copy of the
owner must save all records of the es- relevant OSHA 300 Log(s) by the end of
tablishment kept by the prior owner, the next business day.
60
(iv) May I remove the names of the em- records, or otherwise exercises any
ployees or any other information from the rights afforded by the OSH Act.
OSHA 300 Log before I give copies to an
employee, former employee, or employee 1904.37 State recordkeeping regula-
representative? No, you must leave the tions.
names on the 300 Log. However, to pro- (a) Basic requirement. Some States op-
tect the privacy of injured and ill em- erate their own OSHA programs, under
ployees, you may not record the em- the authority of a State Plan approved
ployees name on the OSHA 300 Log for by OSHA. States operating OSHA-ap-
certain privacy concern cases, as proved State Plans must have occupa-
specified in paragraphs 1904.29(b)(6) tional injury and illness recording and
through 1904.29(b)(9). reporting requirements that are sub-
(v) If an employee or representative stantially identical to the require-
asks for access to the OSHA 301 Incident ments in this Part (see 29 CFR
Report, when do I have to provide it? 1902.3(k), 29 CFR 1952.4 and 29 CFR
(A) When an employee, former em- 1956.10(i)).
ployee, or personal representative asks (b) Implementation. (1) State-Plan
for a copy of the OSHA 301 Incident Re- States must have the same require-
port describing an injury or illness to ments as Federal OSHA for deter-
that employee or former employee, you mining which injuries and illnesses are
must give the requester a copy of the recordable and how they are recorded.
OSHA 301 Incident Report containing (2) For other Part 1904 provisions (for
that information by the end of the next example, industry exemptions, report-
business day. ing of fatalities and hospitalizations,
(B) When an authorized employee record retention, or employee involve-
representative asks for a copies of the ment), State-Plan State requirements
OSHA 301 Incident Reports for an es- may be more stringent than or supple-
tablishment where the agent rep- mental to the Federal requirements,
resents employees under a collective but because of the unique nature of the
bargaining agreement, you must give national recordkeeping program,
copies of those forms to the authorized States must consult with and obtain
employee representative within 7 cal- approval of any such requirements.
endar days. You are only required to (3) Although State and local govern-
give the authorized employee rep- ment employees are not covered Feder-
resentative information from the ally, all State-Plan States must pro-
OSHA 301 Incident Report section ti- vide coverage, and must develop injury
tled Tell us about the case. You and illness statistics, for these work-
must remove all other information ers. State Plan recording and reporting
from the copy of the OSHA 301 Incident requirements for State and local gov-
Report or the equivalent substitute ernment entities may differ from those
form that you give to the authorized for the private sector but must meet
employee representative. the requirements of paragraphs
(vi) May I charge for the copies? No, 1904.37(b)(1) and (b)(2).
you may not charge for these copies (4) A State-Plan State may not issue
the first time they are provided. How- a variance to a private sector employer
ever, if one of the designated persons and must recognize all variances issued
asks for additional copies, you may as- by Federal OSHA.
sess a reasonable charge for retrieving (5) A State Plan State may only
and copying the records. grant an injury and illness recording
and reporting variance to a State or
1904.36 Prohibition against discrimi- local government employer within the
nation. State after obtaining approval to grant
Section 11(c) of the Act prohibits you the variance from Federal OSHA.
from discriminating against an em-
ployee for reporting a work-related fa- 1904.38 Variances from the record-
tality, injury or illness. That provision keeping rule.
of the Act also protects the employee (a) Basic requirement. If you wish to
who files a safety and health com- keep records in a different manner
plaint, asks for access to the Part 1904 from the manner prescribed by the
61
Part 1904 regulations, you may submit ant Secretary will decide whether or
a variance petition to the Assistant not your proposed recordkeeping proce-
Secretary of Labor for Occupational dures will meet the purposes of the
Safety and Health, U.S. Department of Act, will not otherwise interfere with
Labor, Washington, DC 20210. You can the Act, and will provide the same in-
obtain a variance only if you can show formation as the Part 1904 regulations
that your alternative recordkeeping provide. If your procedures meet these
system: criteria, the Assistant Secretary may
(1) Collects the same information as grant the variance subject to such con-
this Part requires; ditions as he or she finds appropriate.
(2) Meets the purposes of the Act; and (iv) If the Assistant Secretary grants
(3) Does not interfere with the ad- your variance petition, OSHA will pub-
ministration of the Act. lish a notice in the FEDERAL REGISTER
(b) Implementation. (1) What do I need to announce the variance. The notice
to include in my variance petition? You will include the practices the variance
must include the following items in allows you to use, any conditions that
your petition: apply, and the reasons for allowing the
(i) Your name and address; variance.
(ii) A list of the State(s) where the (3) If I apply for a variance, may I use
variance would be used; my proposed recordkeeping procedures
(iii) The address(es) of the business while the Assistant Secretary is processing
establishment(s) involved; the variance petition? No, alternative
(iv) A description of why you are recordkeeping practices are only al-
seeking a variance; lowed after the variance is approved.
(v) A description of the different rec- You must comply with the Part 1904
ordkeeping procedures you propose to regulations while the Assistant Sec-
use; retary is reviewing your variance peti-
(vi) A description of how your pro-
tion.
posed procedures will collect the same
(4) If I have already been cited by
information as would be collected by
OSHA for not following the Part 1904 reg-
this Part and achieve the purpose of
the Act; and ulations, will my variance petition have
(vii) A statement that you have in- any effect on the citation and penalty?
formed your employees of the petition No, in addition, the Assistant Sec-
by giving them or their authorized rep- retary may elect not to review your
resentative a copy of the petition and variance petition if it includes an ele-
by posting a statement summarizing ment for which you have been cited
the petition in the same way as notices and the citation is still under review
are posted under 1903.2(a). by a court, an Administrative Law
(2) How will the Assistant Secretary Judge (ALJ), or the OSH Review Com-
handle my variance petition? The Assist- mission.
ant Secretary will take the following (5) If I receive a variance, may the As-
steps to process your variance petition. sistant Secretary revoke the variance at a
(i) The Assistant Secretary will offer later date? Yes, the Assistant Secretary
your employees and their authorized may revoke your variance if he or she
representatives an opportunity to sub- has good cause. The procedures revok-
mit written data, views, and arguments ing a variance will follow the same
about your variance petition. process as OSHA uses for reviewing
(ii) The Assistant Secretary may variance petitions, as outlined in para-
allow the public to comment on your graph 1904.38(b)(2). Except in cases of
variance petition by publishing the pe- willfulness or where necessary for pub-
tition in the FEDERAL REGISTER. If the lic safety, the Assistant Secretary will:
petition is published, the notice will es- (i) Notify you in writing of the facts
tablish a public comment period and or conduct that may warrant revoca-
may include a schedule for a public tion of your variance; and
meeting on the petition. (ii) Provide you, your employees, and
(iii) After reviewing your variance authorized employee representatives
petition and any comments from your with an opportunity to participate in
employees and the public, the Assist- the revocation procedures.
62
Subpart EReporting Fatality, In- (4) Do I have to report a fatality or mul-

jury and Illness Information to tiple hospitalization incident that occurs
the Government on a commercial or public transportation
system? No, you do not have to call
1904.39 Reporting fatalities and mul- OSHA to report a fatality or multiple
tiple hospitalization incidents to hospitalization incident if it involves a
OSHA. commercial airplane, train, subway or
(a) Basic requirement. Within eight (8) bus accident. However, these injuries
hours after the death of any employee must be recorded on your OSHA injury
from a work-related incident or the in- and illness records, if you are required
patient hospitalization of three or to keep such records.
more employees as a result of a work- (5) Do I have to report a fatality caused
related incident, you must orally re- by a heart attack at work? Yes, your
port the fatality/multiple hospitaliza- local OSHA Area Office director will
tion by telephone or in person to the decide whether to investigate the inci-
Area Office of the Occupational Safety dent, depending on the circumstances
and Health Administration (OSHA), of the heart attack.
U.S. Department of Labor, that is near- (6) Do I have to report a fatality or hos-
est to the site of the incident. You may pitalization that occurs long after the in-
also use the OSHA toll-free central cident? No, you must only report each
telephone number, 1800321OSHA (1 fatality or multiple hospitalization in-
8003216742). cident that occurs within thirty (30)
(b) Implementation. (1) If the Area Of- days of an incident.
fice is closed, may I report the incident by (7) What if I dont learn about an inci-
leaving a message on OSHAs answering dent right away? If you do not learn of
machine, faxing the area office, or send- a reportable incident at the time it oc-
ing an e-mail? No, if you cant talk to a curs and the incident would otherwise
person at the Area Office, you must re- be reportable under paragraphs (a) and
port the fatality or multiple hos- (b) of this section, you must make the
pitalization incident using the 800 report within eight (8) hours of the
number. time the incident is reported to you or
(2) What information do I need to give to any of your agent(s) or employee(s).
to OSHA about the incident? You must
give OSHA the following information 1904.40 Providing records to govern-
ment representatives.
for each fatality or multiple hos-
pitalization incident: (a) Basic requirement. When an au-
(i) The establishment name; thorized government representative
(ii) The location of the incident; asks for the records you keep under
(iii) The time of the incident; Part 1904, you must provide copies of
(iv) The number of fatalities or hos- the records within four (4) business
pitalized employees; hours.
(v) The names of any injured employ- (b) Implementation. (1) What govern-
ees; ment representatives have the right to get
(vi) Your contact person and his or copies of my Part 1904 records? The gov-
her phone number; and ernment representatives authorized to
(vii) A brief description of the inci- receive the records are:
dent. (i) A representative of the Secretary
(3) Do I have to report every fatality or of Labor conducting an inspection or
multiple hospitalization incident resulting investigation under the Act;
from a motor vehicle accident? No, you do (ii) A representative of the Secretary
not have to report all of these inci- of Health and Human Services (includ-
dents. If the motor vehicle accident oc- ing the National Institute for Occupa-
curs on a public street or highway, and tional Safety and HealthNIOSH) con-
does not occur in a construction work ducting an investigation under section
zone, you do not have to report the in- 20(b) of the Act, or
cident to OSHA. However, these inju- (iii) A representative of a State agen-
ries must be recorded on your OSHA cy responsible for administering a
injury and illness records, if you are re- State plan approved under section 18 of
quired to keep such records. the Act.
63
(2) Do I have to produce the records report for the year covered by the sur-
within four (4) hours if my records are vey.
kept at a location in a different time zone? (4) Do I have to answer the OSHA sur-
OSHA will consider your response to be vey form if I am located in a State-Plan
timely if you give the records to the State? Yes, all employers who receive
government representative within four survey forms must respond to the sur-
(4) business hours of the request. If you vey, even those in State-Plan States.
maintain the records at a location in a (5) Does this section affect OSHAs au-
different time zone, you may use the thority to inspect my workplace? No,
business hours of the establishment at nothing in this section affects OSHAs
which the records are located when cal- statutory authority to investigate con-
culating the deadline. ditions related to occupational safety
and health.
1904.41 Annual OSHA injury and ill-
ness survey of ten or more employ-
ers. 1904.42 Requests from the Bureau of
Labor Statistics for data.
(a) Basic requirement. If you receive
(a) Basic requirement. If you receive a
OSHAs annual survey form, you must
Survey of Occupational Injuries and
fill it out and send it to OSHA or
OSHAs designee, as stated on the sur- Illnesses Form from the Bureau of
vey form. You must report the fol- Labor Statistics (BLS), or a BLS des-
lowing information for the year de- ignee, you must promptly complete the
scribed on the form: form and return it following the in-
(1) the number of workers you em- structions contained on the survey
ployed; form.
(2) the number of hours worked by (b) Implementation. (1) Does every em-
your employees; and ployer have to send data to the BLS? No,
(3) the requested information from each year, the BLS sends injury and
the records that you keep under Part illness survey forms to randomly se-
1904. lected employers and uses the informa-
(b) Implementation. (1) Does every em- tion to create the Nations occupa-
ployer have to send data to OSHA? No, tional injury and illness statistics. In
each year, OSHA sends injury and ill- any year, some employers will receive
ness survey forms to employers in cer- a BLS survey form and others will not.
tain industries. In any year, some em- You do not have to send injury and ill-
ployers will receive an OSHA survey ness data to the BLS unless you re-
form and others will not. You do not ceive a survey form.
have to send injury and illness data to (2) If I get a survey form from the BLS,
OSHA unless you receive a survey what do I have to do? If you receive a
form. Survey of Occupational Injuries and
(2) How quickly do I need to respond to Illnesses Form from the Bureau of
an OSHA survey form? You must send Labor Statistics (BLS), or a BLS des-
the survey reports to OSHA, or OSHAs ignee, you must promptly complete the
designee, by mail or other means de- form and return it, following the in-
scribed in the survey form, within 30 structions contained on the survey
calendar days, or by the date stated in form.
the survey form, whichever is later. (3) Do I have to respond to a BLS sur-
(3) Do I have to respond to an OSHA vey form if I am normally exempt from
survey form if I am normally exempt from keeping OSHA injury and illness records?
keeping OSHA injury and illness records? Yes, even if you are exempt from keep-
Yes, even if you are exempt from keeping injury and illness records under
ing injury and illness records under 1904.1 to 1904.3, the BLS may inform
1904.1 to 1904.3, OSHA may inform you in writing that it will be collecting
you in writing that it will be collecting injury and illness information from
injury and illness information from you in the coming year. If you receive
you in the following year. If you re- such a letter, you must keep the injury
ceive such a letter, you must keep the and illness records required by 1904.5
injury and illness records required by to 1904.15 and make a survey report
1904.5 to 1904.15 and make a survey for the year covered by the survey.
64
(4) Do I have to answer the BLS survey 1904.45 OMB control numbers under
form if I am located in a State-Plan State? the Paperwork Reduction Act
Yes, all employers who receive a sur- The following sections each contain a
vey form must respond to the survey, collection of information requirement
even those in State-Plan States. which has been approved by the Office
of Management and Budget under the
Subpart FTransition From the control number listed
Former Rule OMB Con-
29 CFR citation trol No.
1904.43 Summary and posting of the
2001 data. 1904.435 ............................................................ 12180176
1904.3941 .......................................................... 12180176
(a) Basic requirement. If you were re- 1904.42 ................................................................ 12200045
1904.4344 .......................................................... 12180176
quired to keep OSHA 200 Logs in 2001,
you must post a 2000 annual summary
from the OSHA 200 Log of occupational Subpart GDefinitions
injuries and illnesses for each estab-
lishment. 1904.46 Definitions.
(b) Implementation. (1) What do I have The Act. The Act means the Occupa-
to include in the summary? tional Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
(i) You must include a copy of the to- U.S.C. 651 et seq.). The definitions con-
tals from the 2001 OSHA 200 Log and tained in section 3 of the Act (29 U.S.C.
the following information from that 652) and related interpretations apply
form: to such terms when used in this Part
(A) The calendar year covered; 1904.
(B) Your company name; Establishment. An establishment is a
(C) The name and address of the es- single physical location where business
tablishment; and is conducted or where services or in-
(D) The certification signature, title dustrial operations are performed. For
and date. activities where employees do not work
(ii) If no injuries or illnesses occurred at a single physical location, such as
at your establishment in 2001, you construction; transportation; commu-
must enter zeros on the totals line and nications, electric, gas and sanitary
post the 2001 summary. services; and similar operations, the es-
tablishment is represented by main or
(2) When am I required to summarize
branch offices, terminals, stations, etc.
and post the 2001 information?
that either supervise such activities or
(i) You must complete the summary are the base from which personnel
by February 1, 2002; and carry out these activities.
(ii) You must post a copy of the sum- (1) Can one business location include
mary in each establishment in a con- two or more establishments? Normally,
spicuous place or places where notices one business location has only one es-
to employees are customarily posted. tablishment. Under limited conditions,
You must ensure that the summary is the employer may consider two or
not altered, defaced or covered by more separate businesses that share a
other material. single location to be separate estab-
(3) You must post the 2001 summary lishments. An employer may divide one
from February 1, 2002 to March 1, 2002. location into two or more establish-
ments only when:
1904.44 Retention and updating of (i) Each of the establishments rep-
old forms. resents a distinctly separate business;
You must save your copies of the (ii) Each business is engaged in a dif-
OSHA 200 and 101 forms for five years ferent economic activity;
following the year to which they relate (iii) No one industry description in
and continue to provide access to the the Standard Industrial Classification
data as though these forms were the Manual (1987) applies to the joint ac-
OSHA 300 and 301 forms. You are not tivities of the establishments; and
required to update your old 200 and 101 (iv) Separate reports are routinely
forms. prepared for each establishment on the
65
Pt. 1905 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7102 Edition)
number of employees, their wages and You. You means an employer as

salaries, sales or receipts, and other defined in Section 3 of the Occupa-
business information. For example, if tional Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
an employer operates a construction U.S.C. 652).
company at the same location as a
lumber yard, the employer may con- PART 1905RULES OF PRACTICE
sider each business to be a separate es- FOR VARIANCES, LIMITATIONS,
tablishment.
(2) Can an establishment include more
VARIATIONS, TOLERANCES, AND
than one physical location? Yes, but only EXEMPTIONS UNDER THE WIL-
under certain conditions. An employer LIAMS-STEIGER OCCUPATIONAL
may combine two or more physical lo- SAFETY AND HEALTH ACT OF
cations into a single establishment 1970
only when:
(i) The employer operates the loca- Subpart AGeneral
tions as a single business operation
Sec.
under common management; 1905.1 Purpose and scope.
(ii) The locations are all located in 1905.2 Definitions.
close proximity to each other; and 1905.3 Petitions for amendments to this
(iii) The employer keeps one set of part.
business records for the locations, such 1905.4 Amendments to this part.
as records on the number of employees, 1905.5 Effect of variances.
their wages and salaries, sales or re- 1905.6 Public notice of a granted variance,
ceipts, and other kinds of business in- limitation, variation, tolerance, or ex-
emption.
formation. For example, one manufac- 1905.7 Form of documents; subscription;
turing establishment might include the copies.
main plant, a warehouse a few blocks
away, and an administrative services Subpart BApplications for Variances,
building across the street. Limitations, Variations, Tolerances, Ex-
(3) If an employee telecommutes from emptions and Other Relief
home, is his or her home considered a sep-
arate establishment? No, for employees 1905.10 Variances and other relief under sec-
tion 6(b)(6)(A).
who telecommute from home, the em-
1905.11 Variances and other relief under sec-
ployees home is not a business estab- tion 6(d).
lishment and a separate 300 Log is not 1905.12 Limitations, variations, tolerances,
required. Employees who telecommute or exemptions under section 16.
must be linked to one of your estab- 1905.13 Modification, revocation, and re-
lishments under 1904.30(b)(3). newal of rules or orders.
Injury or illness. An injury or illness 1905.14 Action on applications.
is an abnormal condition or disorder. 1905.15 Requests for hearings on applica-
Injuries include cases such as, but not tions.
1905.16 Consolidation of proceedings.
limited to, a cut, fracture, sprain, or
amputation. Illnesses include both Subpart CHearings
acute and chronic illnesses, such as,
but not limited to, a skin disease, res- 1905.20 Notice of hearing.
piratory disorder, or poisoning. (Note: 1905.21 Manner of service.
Injuries and illnesses are recordable 1905.22 Hearing examiners; powers and du-
ties.
only if they are new, work-related
1905.23 Prehearing conferences.
cases that meet one or more of the 1905.24 Consent findings and rules or orders.
Part 1904 recording criteria.) 1905.25 Discovery.
Physician or Other Licensed Health 1905.26 Hearings.
Care Professional. A physician or other 1905.27 Decisions of hearing examiners.
licensed health care professional is an 1905.28 Exceptions.
individual whose legally permitted 1905.29 Transmission of record.
scope of practice (i.e., license, registra- 1905.30 Decision of the Assistant Secretary.
tion, or certification) allows him or her
Subpart DSummary Decisions
to independently perform, or be dele-
gated the responsibility to perform, the 1905.40 Motion for summary decision.
activities described by this regulation. 1905.41 Summary decision.
66
Subpart EEffect of Initial Decisions shall be deemed to be a party without

the necessity of being named.
1905.50 Effect of appeal of a hearing exam-
iners decision. (f) Affected employee means an em-
1905.51 Finality for purposes of judicial re- ployee who would be affected by the
view. grant or denial of a variance, limita-
AUTHORITY: Secs. 6, 8, 16, Occupational tion, variation, tolerance, or exemp-
Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 655, tion, or any one of his authorized rep-
657, 665), Secretary of Labors Order No. 1271 resentatives, such as his collective bar-
(36 FR 8754), 876 (41 FR 25059), or 983 (48 FR gaining agent.
35736) as applicable.
SOURCE: 36 FR 12290, June 30, 1971, unless 1905.3 Petitions for amendments to
otherwise noted. this part.
Any person may at any time petition
Subpart AGeneral the Assistant Secretary in writing to
revise, amend, or revoke any provisions
1905.1 Purpose and scope. of this part. The petition should set
(a) This part contains rules of prac- forth either the terms or the substance
tice for administrative proceedings of the rule desired, with a concise
(1) To grant variances and other re- statement of the reasons therefor and
lief under sections 6(b)(6)(A) and 6(d) of the effects thereof.
the Williams-Steiger Occupational
Safety and Health Act of 1970, and 1905.4 Amendments to this part.
(2) To provide limitations, variations,
The Assistant Secretary may at any
tolerances, and exemptions under sec-
tion 16 of the Act. time revise, amend, or revoke any pro-
(b) These rules shall be construed to visions of this part, on his own motion
secure a prompt and just conclusion of or upon the written petition of any per-
proceedings subject thereto. son.
(c) The rules of practice in this part
do not apply to the granting of 1905.5 Effect of variances.
variances under section 6(b)(6)(C). All variances granted pursuant to
Whenever appropriate, the procedure this part shall have only future effect.
for granting such a variance shall be In his discretion, the Assistant Sec-
published in the FEDERAL REGISTER. retary may decline to entertain an ap-
plication for a variance on a subject or
1905.2 Definitions. issue concerning which a citation has
As used in this part, unless the con- been issued to the employer involved
text clearly requires otherwise and a proceeding on the citation or a
(a) Act means the Williams-Steiger related issue concerning a proposed
Occupational Safety and Health Act of penalty or period of abatement is pend-
1970. ing before the Occupational Safety and
(b) Secretary means the Secretary of Health Review Commission or appro-
Labor. priate State review authority until the
(c) Assistant Secretary means the As- completion of such proceeding.
sistant Secretary of Labor for Occupa-
tional Safety and Health. [36 FR 12290, June 30, 1971, as amended at 40
(d) Person means an individual, part- FR 25449, June 16, 1975]
nership, association, corporation, busi-
ness trust, legal representative, and or- 1905.6 Public notice of a granted
variance, limitation, variation, tol-
ganized group of individuals, or an erance, or exemption.
agency, authority, or instrumentality
of the United States or of a State. Every final action granting a vari-
(e) Party means a person admitted to ance, limitation, variation, tolerance,
participate in a hearing conducted in or exemption under this part shall be
accordance with subpart C of this part. published in the FEDERAL REGISTER.
An applicant for relief and any affected Every such final action shall specify
employee shall be entitled to be named the alternative to the standard in-
parties. The Department of Labor, rep- volved which the particular variance
resented by the Office of the Solicitor, permits.
67
1905.7 Form of documents; subscrip- protect employees against the hazard

tion; copies. covered by the standard;
(a) No particular form is prescribed (6) A statement of when the applicant
for applications and other papers which expects to be able to comply with the
may be filed in proceedings under this standard and of what steps he has
part. However, any applications and taken and will take, with specific dates
other papers shall be clearly legible. where appropriate, to come into com-
An original and six copies of any appli- pliance with the standard;
cation or other papers shall be filed. (7) A statement of the facts the appli-
The original shall be typewritten. cant would show to establish that
Clear carbon copies, or printed or proc- (i) The applicant is unable to comply
essed copies are acceptable copies. with a standard by its effective date
(b) Each application or other paper because of unavailability of profes-
which is filed in proceedings under this sional or technical personnel or of ma-
part shall be subscribed by the person terials and equipment needed to come
filing the same or by his attorney or into compliance with the standard or
other authorized representative. because necessary construction or al-
teration of facilities cannot be com-
pleted by the effective date;
Subpart BApplications for (ii) He is taking all available steps to
Variances, Limitations, Vari- safeguard his employees against the
ations, Tolerances, Exemp- hazards covered by the standard; and
tions and Other Relief (iii) He has an effective program for
coming into compliance with the
1905.10 Variances and other relief standard as quickly as practicable;
under section 6(b)(6)(A).
(8) Any request for a hearing, as pro-
(a) Application for variance. Any em- vided in this part;
ployer, or class of employers, desiring a (9) A statement that the applicant
variance from a standard, or portion has informed his affected employees of
thereof, authorized by section 6(b)(6)(A) the application by giving a copy there-
of the Act may file a written applica- of to their authorized representative,
tion containing the information speci- posting a statement, giving a summary
fied in paragraph (b) of this section of the application and specifying where
with the Assistant Secretary for Occu- a copy may be examined, at the place
pational Safety and Health, U.S. De- or places where notices to employees
partment of Labor, Washington, DC are normally posted, and by other ap-
20210. propriate means; and
(b) Contents. An application filed pur- (10) A description of how affected em-
suant to paragraph (a) of this section ployees have been informed of the ap-
shall include: plication and of their right to petition
(1) The name and address of the ap- the Assistant Secretary for a hearing.
plicant; (11) Where the requested variance
(2) The address of the place or places would be applicable to employment or
of employment involved; places of employment in more than one
(3) A specification of the standard or State, including at least one State
portion thereof from which the appli- with a State plan approved under sec-
cant seeks a variance; tion 18 of the Act, and involves a stand-
(4) A representation by the applicant, ard, or portion thereof, identical to a
supported by representations from State standard effective under such
qualified persons having first-hand plan:
knowledge of the facts represented, (i) A side-by-side comparison of the
that he is unable to comply with the Federal standard, or portion thereof,
standard or portion thereof by its effec- involved with the State standard, or
tive date and a detailed statement of portion thereof, identical in substance
the reasons therefor; and requirements;
(5) A statement of the steps the ap- (ii) A certification that the employer
plicant has taken and will take, with or employers have not filed for such
specific dates where appropriate, to variance on the same material facts for
68
the same employment or place of em- (b) Contents. An application filed pur-
ployment with any State authority suant to paragraph (a) of this section
having jurisdiction under an approval shall include:
plan over any employment or place of (1) The name and address of the ap-
employment covered in the applica- plicant;
tion; and (2) The address of the place or places
(iii) A statement as to whether, with of employment involved;
an identification of, any citations for (3) A description of the conditions,
violations of the State standard, or practices, means, methods, operations,
portion thereof, involved have been or processes used or proposed to be
issued to the employer or employers by used by the applicant:
any of the State authorities enforcing (4) A statement showing how the con-
the standard under a plan, and are ditions, practices, means, methods, op-
pending. erations, or processes used or proposed
to be used would provide employment
(c) Interim order(1) Application. An
and places of employment to employ-
application may also be made for an in-
ees which are as safe and healthful as
terim order to be effective until a deci-
those required by the standard from
sion is rendered on the application for
which a variance is sought:
the variance filed previously or concur-
(5) A certification that the applicant
rently. An application for an interim has informed his employees of the ap-
order may include statements of fact plication by
and arguments as to why the order (i) Giving a copy thereof to their au-
should be granted. The Assistant Sec- thorized representative;
retary may rule ex parte upon the ap- (ii) Posting a statement giving a
plication. summary of the application and speci-
(2) Notice of denial of application. If an fying where a copy may be examined,
application filed pursuant to paragraph at the place or places where notices to
(c)(1) of this section is denied, the ap- employees are normally posted (or in
plicant shall be given prompt notice of lieu of such summary, the posting of
the denial, which shall include, or be the application itself); and
accompanied by, a brief statement of (iii) By other appropriate means;
the grounds therefor. (6) Any request for a hearing, as pro-
(3) Notice of the grant of an interim vided in this part; and
order. If an interim order is granted, a (7) A description of how employees
copy of the order shall be served upon have been informed of the application
the applicant for the order and other and of their right to petition the As-
parties and the terms of the order shall sistant Secretary for a hearing.
be published in the FEDERAL REGISTER. (8) Where the requested variance
It shall be a condition of the order that would be applicable to employment or
the affected employer shall give notice places of employment in more than one
thereof to affected employees by the State, including at least one State
same means to be used to inform them with a State plan approved under sec-
of an application for a variance. tion 18 of the Act, and involves a stand-
ard, or portion thereof, identical to a
[36 FR 12290, June 30, 1971, as amended at 40 State standard effective under such
FR 25449, June 16, 1975] plan:
(i) A side-by-side comparison of the
1905.11 Variances and other relief
under section 6(d). Federal standard, or portion thereof,
involved with the State standard, or
(a) Application for variance. Any em- portion thereof, identical in substance
ployer, or class of employers, desiring a and requirements;
variance authorized by section 6(d) of (ii) A certification that the employer
the Act may file a written application or employers have not filed for such
containing the information specified in variance on the same material facts for
paragraph (b) of this section, with the the same employment or place of em-
Assistant Secretary for Occupational ployment with any State authority
Safety and Health, U.S. Department of having jurisdiction under an approved
Labor, Washington, DC 20210. plan over any employment or place of
69
employment covered in the applica- (1) The name and address of the ap-
tion; and plicant;
(iii) A statement as to whether, with (2) The address of the place or places
an identification of, any citations for of employment involved;
violations of the State standard, or (3) A specification of the provision of
portion thereof, involved have been the Act to or from which the applicant
issued to the employer or employers by seeks a limitation, variation, toler-
any of the State authorities enforcing ance, or exemption;
the standard under a plan, and are (4) A representation showing that the
pending. limitation, variation, tolerance, or ex-
(c) Interim order(1) Application. An emption sought is necessary and proper
application may also be made for an in- to avoid serious impairment of the na-
terim order to be effective until a deci- tional defense;
sion is rendered on the application for (5) Any request for a hearing, as pro-
the variance filed previously or concur- vided in this part; and
rently. An application for an interim (6) A description of how employees
order may include statements of fact have been informed of the application
and arguments as to why the order and of their right to petition the As-
should be granted. The Assistant Sec- sistant Secretary for a hearing.
retary may rule ex parte upon the ap- (c) Interim order(1) Application. An
plication. application may also be made for an in-
(2) Notice of denial of application. If an terim order to be effective until a deci-
application filed pursuant to paragraph sion is rendered on the application for
(c)(1) of this section is denied, the ap- the limitation, variation, tolerance, or
plicant shall be given prompt notice of exemption filed previously or concur-
the denial, which shall include, or be rently. An application for an interim
accompanied by; a brief statement of order may include statements of fact
the grounds therefor. and arguments as to why the order
(3) Notice of the grant of an interim should be granted. The Assistant Sec-
order. If an interim order is granted, a retary may rule ex parte upon the ap-
copy of the order shall be served upon plication.
the applicant for the order and other (2) Notice of denial of application. If an
parties, and the terms of the order application filed pursuant to paragraph
shall be published in the FEDERAL REG- (c)(1) of this section is denied, the ap-
ISTER. It shall be a condition of the plicant shall be given prompt notice of
order that the affected employer shall the denial, which shall include, or be
give notice thereof to affected employ- accompanied, by a brief statement of
ees by the same means to be used to in- the grounds therefor.
form them of an application for a vari- (3) Notice of the grant of an interim
ance. order. If an interim order is granted, a
[36 FR 12290, June 30, 1971, as amended at 40 copy of the order shall be served upon
FR 25449, June 16, 1975] the applicant for the order and other
parties, and the terms of the order
1905.12 Limitations, variations, toler- shall be published in the FEDERAL REG-
ances, or exemptions under section ISTER. It shall be a condition of the
16. order that the affected employer shall
(a) Application. Any person, or class give notice thereof to affected employ-
of persons, desiring a limitation, vari- ees by the same means to be used to in-
ation, tolerance, or exemption author- form them of an application for a vari-
ized by section 16 of the Act may file ance.
an application containing the informa-
tion specified in paragraph (b) of this 1905.13 Modification, revocation, and
section, with the Assistant Secretary renewal of rules or orders.
for Occupational Safety and Health, (a) Modification or revocation. (1) An
U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, affected employer or an affected em-
DC 20210. ployee may apply in writing to the As-
(b) Contents. An application filed pur- sistant Secretary of Labor for Occupa-
suant to paragraph (a) of this section tional Safety and Health for a modi-
shall include: fication or revocation of a rule or order
70
issued under section 6(b) (6) (A), 6(d), or (c) Multi-state variances. Where a Fed-
16 of the Act. The application shall eral variance has been granted with
contain: multi-state applicability, including ap-
(i) The name and address of the appli- plicability in a State operating under a
cant; State plan approved under section 18 of
(ii) A description of the relief which the Act, from a standard, or portion
is sought; thereof, identical to a State standard,
(iii) A statement setting forth with or portion thereof, without filing the
particularity the grounds for relief; information required in 1905.10(b)(11)
(iv) If the applicant is an employer, a or 1905.11(b)(8) of this chapter, such
certification that the applicant has in- variance shall likewise be deemed an
formed his affected employees of the authoritative interpretation of the em-
application by: ployer(s) compliance obligations with
(a) Giving a copy thereof to their au- regard to the State standard, or por-
thorized representative; tion thereof, upon filing the informa-
(b) Posting at the place or places tion required under 1905.10(b)(11) or
where notices to employees are nor- 1905.11(b)(8) of this chapter, provided
mally posted, a statement giving a no objections of substance are found to
summary of the application and speci- be interposed by the State authority
fying where a copy of the full applica- under 1905.14 of this chapter.
tion may be examined (or, in lieu of the [36 FR 12290, June 30, 1971, as amended at 40
summary, posting the application FR 25449, June 16, 1975]
itself); and
(c) Other appropriate means. 1905.14 Action on applications.
(v) If the applicant is an affected em- (a) Defective applications. (1) If an ap-
ployee, a certification that a copy of plication filed pursuant to 1905.10(a),
the application has been furnished to 1905.11(a), 1905.12(a), or 1905.13 does
the employer; and not conform to the applicable section,
(vi) Any request for a hearing, as pro- the Assistant Secretary may deny the
vided in this part. application.
(2) The Assistant Secretary may on (2) Prompt notice of the denial of an
his own motion proceed to modify or application shall be given to the appli-
revoke a rule or order issued under sec- cant.
tion 6(b) (6) (A), 6(d), or 16 of the Act. (3) A notice of denial shall include, or
In such event, the Assistant Secretary be accompanied by, a brief statement
shall cause to be published in the FED- of the grounds for the denial.
ERAL REGISTER a notice of his inten- (4) A denial of an application pursu-
tion, affording interested persons an ant to this paragraph shall be without
opportunity to submit written data, prejudice to the filing of another appli-
views, or arguments regarding the pro- cation.
posal and informing the affected em- (b) Adequate applications. (1) If an ap-
ployer and employees of their right to plication has not been denied pursuant
request a hearing, and shall take such to paragraph (a) of this section, the As-
other action as may be appropriate to sistant Secretary shall cause to be pub-
give actual notice to affected employ- lished in the FEDERAL REGISTER a no-
ees. Any request for a hearing shall in- tice of the filing of the application.
clude a short and plain statement of: (2) A notice of the filing of an appli-
(i) How the proposed modification or cation shall include:
revocation would affect the requesting (i) The terms, or an accurate sum-
party; and mary, of the application;
(ii) What the requesting party would (ii) A reference to the section of the
seek to show on the subjects or issues Act under which the application has
involved. been filed;
(b) Renewal. Any final rule or order (iii) An invitation to interested per-
issued under section 6(b) (6) (A) or 16 of sons to submit within a stated period
the Act may be renewed or extended as of time written data, views, or argu-
permitted by the applicable section ments regarding the application; and
and in the manner prescribed for its (iv) Information to affected employ-
issuance. ers, employees, and appropriate State
71
authority having jurisdiction over em- 1905.16 Consolidation of proceedings.

ployment or places of employment cov-
The Assistant Secretary on his own
ered in the application of any right to
motion or that of any party may con-
request a hearing on the application.
solidate or contemporaneously con-
(3) Where the requested variance, or
sider two or more proceedings which
any proposed modification or extension
involve the same or closely related
thereof, involves a Federal standard, or
issues.
any portion thereof, identical to a
State standard, or any portion thereof,
as provided in 1905.10(b)(11) and Subpart CHearings
1905.11(b)(8) of this chapter, the Assist-
ant Secretary will promptly furnish a 1905.20 Notice of hearing.
copy of the application to the appro- (a) Service. Upon request for a hearing
priate State authority and provide an as provided in this part, or upon his
opportunity for comment, including own initiative, the Assistant Secretary
the opportunity to participate as a shall serve, or cause to be served, a rea-
party, on the application by such au- sonable notice of hearing.
thority, which shall be taken into con- (b) Contents. A notice of hearing
sideration in determining the merits of served under paragraph (a) of this sec-
the proposed action. tion shall include:
(4) A copy of each final decision of (1) The time, place, and nature of the
the Assistant Secretary with respect to hearing;
an application filed under 1905.10, (2) The legal authority under which
1905.11, or 1905.13 shall be furnished, the hearing is to be held;
within 10 days of issuance, the State (3) A specification of issues of fact
authorities having jurisdiction over and law; and
the employment or place of employ- (4) A designation of a hearing exam-
ment covered in the application. iner appointed under 5 U.S.C. 3105 to
[36 FR 12290, June 30, 1971, as amended at 40 preside over the hearing.
FR 25449, June 16, 1975] (c) Referral to hearing examiner. A
copy of a notice of hearing served pur-
1905.15 Requests for hearings on ap- suant to paragraph (a) of this section
plications. shall be referred to the hearing exam-
(a) Request for hearing. Within the iner designated therein, together with
time allowed by a notice of the filing of the original application and any writ-
an application, any affected employer, ten request for a hearing thereon filed
employee, or appropriate State agency pursuant to this part.
having jurisdiction over employment
or places of employment covered in an 1905.21 Manner of service.
application may file with the Assistant Service of any document upon any
Secretary, in quadruplicate, a request party may be made by personal deliv-
for a hearing on the application. ery of, or by mailing, a copy of the doc-
(b) Contents of a request for a hearing. ument to the last known address of the
A request for a hearing filed pursuant party. The person serving the docu-
to paragraph (a) of this section shall ment shall certify to the manner and
include: the date of the service.
(1) A concise statement of facts show-
ing how the employer or employee 1905.22 Hearing examiners; powers
would be affected by the relief applied and duties.
for; (a) Powers. A hearing examiner des-
(2) A specification of any statement ignated to preside over a hearing shall
or representation in the application have all powers necessary or appro-
which is denied, and a concise sum- priate to conduct a fair, full, and im-
mary of the evidence that would be ad- partial hearing, including the fol-
duced in support of each denial; and lowing:
(3) Any views or arguments on any (1) To administer oaths and affirma-
issue of fact or law presented. tions;
[36 FR 12290, June 30, 1971, as amended at 40 (2) To rule upon offers of proof and
FR 25450, June 16, 1975] receive relevant evidence;
72
(3) To provide for discovery and to or regulating the contents of the

determine its scope; record of the hearing.
(4) To regulate the course of the (e) Referral to Federal Rules of Civil
hearing and the conduct of the parties Procedure. On any procedural question
and their counsel therein; not regulated by this part, the Act, or
(5) To consider and rule upon proce- the Administrative Procedure Act, a
dural requests; hearing examiner shall be guided to the
(6) To hold conferences for the settle- extent practicable by any pertinent
ment or simplification of the issues by provisions of the Federal Rules of Civil
consent of the parties; Procedure.
(7) To make, or to cause to be made,
an inspection of the employment or 1905.23 Prehearing conferences.
place of employment involved. (a) Convening a conference. Upon his
(8) To make decisions in accordance own motion or the motion of a party,
with the Act, this part, and the Admin- the hearing examiner may direct the
istrative Procedure Act (5 U.S.C. Ch. 5); parties or their counsel to meet with
and him for a conference to consider:
(9) To take any other appropriate ac-
(1) Simplification of the issues;
tion authorized by the Act, this part,
(2) Necessity or desirability of
or the Administrative Procedure Act.
amendments to documents for purposes
(b) Private consultation. Except to the
of clarification, simplification, or limi-
extent required for the disposition of
tation;
ex parte matters, a hearing examiner
may not consult a person or a party on (3) Stipulations, admissions of fact,
any fact at issue, unless upon notice and of contents and authenticity of
and opportunity for all parties to par- documents;
ticipate. (4) Limitation of the number of par-
(c) Disqualification. (1) When a hear- ties and of expert witnesses; and
ing examiner deems himself disquali- (5) Such other matters as may tend
fied to preside over a particular hear- to expedite the disposition of the pro-
ing, he shall withdraw therefrom by ceeding, and to assure a just conclusion
notice on the record directed to the thereof.
Chief Hearing Examiner. (b) Record of conference. The hearing
(2) Any party who deems a hearing examiner shall make an order which
examiner for any reason to be disquali- recites the action taken at the con-
fied to preside, or to continue to preference, the amendments allowed to
side, over a particular hearing, may any documents which have been filed,
file with the Chief Hearing Examiner of and the agreements made between the
the Department of Labor a motion to parties as to any of the matters consid-
disqualify and remove the hearing ex- ered, and which limits the issues for
aminer, such motion to be supported hearing to those not disposed of by ad-
by affidavits setting forth the alleged missions or agreements; and such order
grounds for disqualification. The Chief when entered controls the subsequent
Hearing Examiner shall rule upon the course of the hearing, unless modified
motion. at the hearing, to prevent manifest in-
(d) Contumacious conduct; failure or re- justice.
fusal to appear or obey the rulings of a
presiding hearing examiner. (1) Contuma- 1905.24 Consent findings and rules or
cious conduct at any hearing before the orders.
hearing examiner shall be grounds for (a) General. At any time before the
exclusion from the hearing. reception of evidence in any hearing, or
(2) If a witness or a party refuses to during any hearing a reasonable oppor-
answer a question after being directed tunity may be afforded to permit nego-
to do so, or refuses to obey an order to tiation by the parties of an agreement
provide or permit discovery, the hear- containing consent findings and a rule
ing examiner may make such orders or order disposing of the whole or any
with regard to the refusal as are just part of the proceeding. The allowance
and appropriate, including an order de- of such opportunity and the duration
nying the application of an applicant thereof shall be in the discretion of the
73
presiding hearing examiner, after con- (ii) The time when, the place where,
sideration of the nature of the pro- and the name and post office address of
ceeding, the requirements of the public the person before whom the deposition
interest, the representations of the is to be taken;
parties, and the probability of an (iii) The name and address of each
agreement which will result in a just witness; and
disposition of the issues involved. (iv) The subject matter concerning
(b) Contents. Any agreement con- which each witness is expected to tes-
taining consent findings and rule or tify.
order disposing of a proceeding shall (3) Notice. Such notice as the pre-
also provide: siding hearings examiner may order
(1) That the rule or order shall have shall be given by the party taking the
the same force and effect as if made deposition to every other party.
after a full hearing; (4) Taking and receiving in evidence.
(2) That the entire record on which Each witness testifying upon deposi-
any rule or order may be based shall tion shall be sworn, and the parties not
consist solely of the application and calling him shall have the right to
the agreement; cross-examine him. The questions pro-
(3) A waiver of any further proce- pounded and the answers thereto, to-
dural steps before the hearing exam- gether with all objections made, shall
iner and the Assistant Secretary; and be reduced to writing, read to the wit-
(4) A waiver of any right to challenge ness, subscribed by him, and certified
or contest the validity of the findings by the officer before whom the deposi-
and of the rule or order made in action is taken. Thereafter, the officer
cordance with the agreement. shall seal the deposition, with two cop-
ies thereof, in an envelope and mail the
(c) Submission. On or before the expi-
same by registered mail to the pre-
ration of the time granted for negotia-
siding hearing examiner. Subject to
tions, the parties or their counsel may:
such objections to the questions and
(1) Submit the proposed agreement to answers as were noted at the time of
the presiding hearing examiner for his taking the deposition and would be
consideration; or valid were the witness personally
(2) Inform the presiding hearing ex- present and testifying, such deposition
aminer that agreement cannot be may be read and offered in evidence by
reached. the party taking it as against any
(d) Disposition. In the event an agree- party who was present, represented at
ment containing consent findings and the taking of the deposition, or who
rule or order is submitted within the had due notice thereof. No part of a
time allowed therefor, the presiding deposition shall be admitted in evi-
hearing examiner may accept such dence unless there is a showing that
agreement by issuing his decision the reasons for the taking of the depo-
based upon the agreed findings. sition in the first instance exist at the
time of hearing.
1905.25 Discovery. (b) Other discovery. Whenever appro-
(a) Depositions. (1) For reasons of un- priate to a just disposition of any issue
availability or for other good cause in a hearing, the presiding hearing ex-
shown, the testimony of any witness aminer may allow discovery by any
may be taken by deposition. Deposi- other appropriate procedure, such as by
tions may be taken orally or upon written interrogatories upon a party,
written interrogatories before any per- production of documents by a party, or
son designated by the presiding hearing by entry for inspection of the employ-
examiner and having power to admin- ment or place of employment involved.
ister oaths.
(2) Application. Any party desiring to 1905.26 Hearings.
take the deposition of a witness may (a) Order of proceeding. Except as may
make application in writing to the pre- be ordered otherwise by the presiding
siding hearing examiner, setting forth: hearing examiner, the party applicant
(i) The reasons why such deposition for relief shall proceed first at a hear-
should be taken; ing.
74
(b) Burden of proof. The party appli- siding hearing examiner may allow,
cant shall have the burden of proof. each party may file with the hearing
(c) Evidence(1) Admissibility. A party examiner proposed findings of fact,
shall be entitled to present his case or conclusions of law, and rule or order,
defense by oral or documentary evi- together with a supporting brief ex-
dence, to submit rebuttal evidence, and pressing the reasons for such proposals.
to conduct such cross-examination as Such proposals and brief shall be
may be required for a full and true dis- served on all other parties, and shall
closure of the facts. Any oral or docu- refer to all portions of the record and
mentary evidence may be received, but to all authorities relied upon in sup-
a presiding hearing examiner shall export of each proposal.
clude evidence which is irrelevant, im- (b) Decision of the hearing examiner.
material, or unduly repetitious.
Within a reasonable time after the
(2) Testimony of witnesses. The testi-
time allowed for the filing of proposed
mony of a witness shall be upon oath
findings of fact, conclusions of law, and
or affirmation administered by the pre-
rule or order, the presiding hearing ex-
siding hearing examiner.
(3) Objections. If a party objects to aminer shall make and serve upon each
the admission or rejection of any evi- party his decision, which shall become
dence, or to the limitation of the scope final upon the 20th day after service
of any examination or cross-examina- thereof, unless exceptions are filed
tion, or to the failure to limit such thereto, as provided in 1905.28. The de-
scope, he shall state briefly the cision of the hearing examiner shall in-
grounds for such objection. Rulings on clude (1) a statement of findings and
all objections shall appear in the conclusions, with reasons and bases
record. Only objections made before therefor, upon each material issue of
the presiding hearing examiner may be fact, law, or discretion presented on
relied upon subsequently in a pro- the record, and (2) the appropriate rule,
ceeding. order, relief, or denial thereof. The de-
(4) Exceptions. Formal exception to an cision of the hearing examiner shall be
adverse ruling is not required. based upon a consideration of the
(d) Official notice. Official notice may whole record and shall state all facts
be taken of any material fact not ap- officially noticed and relied upon. It
pearing in evidence in the record, shall be made on the basis of a prepon-
which is among the traditional matters derance of reliable and probative evi-
of judicial notice or concerning which dence.
the Department of Labor by reason of
its functions is presumed to be expert: 1905.28 Exceptions.
Provided, That the parties shall be Within 20 days after service of a deci-
given adequate notice, at the hearing sion of a presiding hearing examiner,
or by reference in the presiding hearing any party may file with the hearing ex-
examiners decision, of the matters so aminer written exceptions thereto with
noticed, and shall be given adequate supporting reasons. Such exceptions
opportunity to show the contrary.
shall refer to the specific findings of
(e) Transcript. Hearings shall be
fact, conclusions of law, or terms of the
stenographically reported. Copies of
rule or order excepted to, the specific
the transcript may be obtained by the
pages of transcript relevant to the sug-
parties upon written application filed
gestions, and shall suggest corrected
with the reporter, and upon the pay-
ment of fees at the rate provided in the findings of fact, conclusions of law, or
agreement with the reporter. terms of the rule or order. Upon receipt
of any exceptions, the hearing exam-
1905.27 Decisions of hearing examiner shall fix a time for filing any ob-
iners. jections to the exceptions and any sup-
(a) Proposed findings of fact, conclu- porting reasons.
sions, and rules or orders. Within 10 days
1905.29 Transmission of record.
after receipt of notice that the tran-
script of the testimony has been filed If exceptions are filed, the hearing
or such additional time as the pre- examiner shall transmit the record of
75
the proceeding to the Assistant Sec- (c) The hearing examiner may grant
retary for review. The record shall in- such motion if the pleadings, affida-
clude: The application, any request for vits, material obtained by discovery or
hearing thereon, motions and requests otherwise obtained, or matters offi-
filed in written form, rulings thereon, cially noticed show that there is no
the transcript of the testimony taken genuine issue as to any material fact
at the hearing, together with the ex- and that a party is entitled to sum-
hibits admitted in evidence, any docu- mary decision. The hearing examiner
ments or papers filed in connection may deny such motion whenever the
with prehearing conferences, such pro- moving party denies access to informa-
posed findings of fact, conclusions of tion by means of discovery to a party
law, rules or orders, and supporting opposing the motion.
reasons, as may have been filed, the (d) Affidavits shall set forth such
hearing examiners decision, and such facts as would be admissible in evi-
exceptions, statements of objections, dence in a proceeding subject to 5
and briefs in support thereof, as may U.S.C. 556 and 557 and shall show af-
have been filed in the proceeding. firmatively that the affiant is com-
petent to testify to the matters stated
1905.30 Decision of the Assistant Sec- therein. When a motion for summary
retary. decision is made and supported as pro-
If exceptions to a decision of a hear- vided in this section, a party opposing
ing examiner are taken pursuant to the motion may not rest upon the mere
1905.28, the Assistant Secretary shall allegations or denials of his pleading;
upon consideration thereof, together his response must set forth specific
with the record references and authori- facts showing that there is a genuine
ties cited in support thereof, and any issue of fact for the hearing.
objections to exceptions and sup- (e) Should it appear from the affida-
porting reasons, make his decision. The vits of a party opposing the motion
decision may affirm, modify, or set that he cannot for reasons stated
aside, in whole or part, the findings, present by affidavit facts essential to
conclusions, and the rule or order con- justify his opposition, the hearing ex-
tained in the decision of the presiding aminer may deny the motion for sum-
hearing examiner, and shall include a mary decision or may order a continu-
statement of reasons or bases for the ance to permit affidavits to be ob-
actions taken on each exception pre- tained or discovery to be had or may
sented. make such other order as is just.
(f) The denial of all or any part of a
Subpart DSummary Decisions motion for summary decision by the
hearing examiner shall not be subject
1905.40 Motion for summary deci- to interlocutory appeal to the Assist-
sion. ant Secretary unless the hearing exam-
(a) Any party may, at least 20 days iner certifies in writing (1) that the
before the date fixed for any hearing ruling involves an important question
under subpart C of this part, move with of law or policy as to which there is
or without supporting affidavits for a substantial ground for difference of
summary decision in his favor on all or opinion, and (2) that an immediate ap-
any part of the proceeding. Any other peal from the ruling may materially
party may, within 10 days after service advance the ultimate termination of
of the motion, serve opposing affidavits the proceeding. The allowance of such
or countermove for summary decision. an interlocutory appeal shall not stay
The presiding hearing examiner may, the proceeding before the hearing ex-
in his discretion, set the matter for ar- aminer unless the Assistant Secretary
gument and call for the submission of shall so order.
briefs.
(b) The filing of any documents under 1905.41 Summary decision.
paragraph (a) of this section shall be (a) No genuine issue of material fact. (1)
with the hearing examiner, and copies Where no genuine issue of a material
of any such documents shall be served fact is found to have been raised, the
in accordance with 1905.21. hearing examiner may issue an initial
76
decision to become final 20 days after PART 1906ADMINISTRATION WIT-

service thereof, unless, within such pe- NESSES AND DOCUMENTS IN PRI-
riod of time any party has filed written VATE LITIGATION [RESERVED]
exceptions to the decision. If any time-
ly exception is filed, the hearing exam-
iner shall fix a time for filing any ob-
PART 1908CONSULTATION
jections to the exception and any sup-
AGREEMENTS
porting reasons. Thereafter, the Assist-
Sec.
ant Secretary, after consideration of 1908.1 Purpose and scope.
the exceptions and any supporting 1908.2 Definitions.
briefs filed therewith and of any objec- 1908.3 Eligibility and funding.
tions to the exceptions and any sup- 1908.4 Offsite consultation.
porting reasons, may issue a final deci- 1908.5 Requests and scheduling for onsite
sion. consultation.
1908.6 Conduct of a visit.
(2) An initial decision and a final de- 1908.7 Relationship to enforcement.
cision made under this paragraph shall 1908.8 Consultant specifications.
include a statement of: 1908.9 Monitoring and evaluation.
(i) Findings and conclusions, and the 1908.10 Cooperative Agreements.
reasons or bases therefor, on all issues 1908.11 Exclusions.
presented; and AUTHORITY: Secs. 7(c), 8, 21(d), Occupa-
(ii) The terms and conditions of the tional Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
U.S.C. 656, 657, 670) and Secretary of Labors
rule or order made.
Order No. 696 (62 FR 111, January 2, 1997).
(3) A copy of an initial decision and a
final decision under this paragraph SOURCE: 49 FR 25094, June 19, 1984, unless
otherwise noted.
shall be served on each party.
(b) Hearings on issues of fact. Where a 1908.1 Purpose and scope.
genuine material question of fact is
(a) This part contains requirements
raised, the hearing examiner shall, and for Cooperative Agreements between
in any other case he may, set the case states and the Federal Occupational
for an evidentiary hearing in accord- Safety and Health Administration
ance with subpart C of this part. (OSHA) under sections 21(c) of the Oc-
cupational Safety and Health Act of
Subpart EEffect of Initial 1970 (29 U.S.C. 651 et seq.) and section
Decisions 21(d), the Occupational Safety and
Health Administration Compliance As-
1905.50 Effect of appeal of a hearing sistance Authorization Act of 1998
examiners decision. (which amends the Occupational Safe-
A hearing examiners decision under ty and Health Act,) under which OSHA
this part shall not be operative pending will utilize state personnel to provide
consultative services to employers.
a decision on appeal by the Assistant
Priority in scheduling such consulta-
Secretary.
tion visits must be assigned to requests
1905.51 Finality for purposes of judi- received from small businesses which
cial review. are in higher hazard industries or have
the most hazardous conditions at issue
Only a decision by the Assistant Sec- in the request. Consultation programs
retary shall be deemed final agency ac- operated under the authority of a state
tion for purposes of judicial review. A plan approved under Section 18 of the
decision by a hearing examiner which Act (and funded under Section 23(g),
becomes final for lack of appeal is not rather than under a Cooperative Agree-
deemed final agency action for pur- ment) which provide consultative serv-
poses of 5 U.S.C. 704. ices to private sector employers, must
77
be at least as effective as the section questing the service, subject to sched-

21(d) Cooperative Agreement programs uling priorities, available resources,
established by this part. The service and any other limitations established
will be made available at no cost to by the Assistant Secretary as part of
employers to assist them in estab- the Cooperative Agreement.
lishing effective occupational safety (c) States operating approved Plans
and health programs for providing em- under section 18 of the Act shall, in ac-
ployment and places of employment cord with section 18(b), establish en-
which are safe and healthful. The over- forcement policies applicable to the
all goal is to prevent the occurrence of safety and health issues covered by the
injuries and illnesses which may result State Plan which are at least as effec-
from exposure to hazardous workplace tive as the enforcement policies estab-
conditions and from hazardous work lished by this part, including a recogni-
practices. The principal assistance will tion and exemption program.
be provided at the employers worksite,
[49 FR 25094, June 19, 1984, as amended at 65
but off-site assistance may also be pro- FR 64290, Oct. 26, 2000]
vided by telephone and correspondence
and at locations other than the em- 1908.2 Definitions.
ployers worksite, such as the consulta-
tion project offices. At the worksite, As used in this part:
the consultant will, within the scope of Act means the Federal Occupational
the employers request, evaluate the Safety and Health Act of 1970.
employers program for providing em- Assistant Secretary means the Assist-
ployment and a place of employment ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa-
which is safe and healthful, as well as tional Safety and Health.
identify specific hazards in the work- Compliance Officer means a Federal
place, and will provide appropriate ad- compliance safety and health officer.
vice and assistance in establishing or Consultant means an employee under
improving the employers safety and a Cooperative Agreement pursuant to
health program and in correcting any this part who provides consultation.
hazardous conditions identified. Consultation means all activities re-
(b) Assistance may include education lated to the provision of consultative
and training of the employer, the em- assistance under this part, including
ployers supervisors, and the employ- offsite consultation and onsite con-
ers other employees as needed to make sultation.
the employer self-sufficient in ensuring Cooperative Agreement means the
safe and healthful work and working legal instrument which enables the
conditions. Although onsite consulta- States to collaborate with OSHA to
tion will be conducted independent of provide consultation in accord with
any OSHA enforcement activity, and this part.
the discovery of hazards will not man- Designee means the State official des-
date citation or penalties, the em- ignated by the Governor to be respon-
ployer remains under a statutory obli- sible for entering into a Cooperative
gation to protect employees, and in Agreement in accord with this part.
certain instances will be required to Education means planned and orga-
take necessary protective action. Em- nized activity by a consultant to im-
ployer correction of hazards identified part information to employers and em-
by the consultant during a comprehen- ployees to enable them to establish and
sive workplace survey, and implemen- maintain employment and a place of
tation of certain core elements of an employment which is safe and health-
effective safety and health program ful.
and commitment to the completion of Employee means an employee of an
others may serve as the basis for em- employer who is employed in the busi-
ployer exemption from certain OSHA ness of that employer which affects
enforcement activities. States entering interstate commerce.
into Agreements under this part will Employee representative, as used in the
receive ninety percent Federal reim- OSHA consultation program under this
bursement for allowable costs, and will part, means the authorized representa-
provide consultation to employers re- tive of employees at a site where there
78
is a recognized labor organization rep- under a Plan approved under section 18

resenting employees. of the Act for the enforcement of occu-
Employer means a person engaged in a pational safety and health standards in
business who has employees, but does that State.
not include the United States (not in- Other-than-serious hazard means any
cluding the United States Postal Serv- condition or practice which would be
ice,) or any state or political subdivi- classified as an other-than-serious vio-
sion of a state. lation of applicable federal or state
Hazard correction means the elimi- statutes, regulations or standards,
nation or control of a workplace hazard based on criteria contained in the cur-
in accord with the requirements of ap-
rent OSHA field instructions or ap-
plicable Federal or State statutes, reg-
proved State Plan counterpart.
ulations or standards.
Imminent danger means any condi- Programmed inspection means OSHA
tions or practices in a place of employ- worksite inspections which are sched-
ment which are such that a danger ex- uled based upon objective or neutral
ists which could reasonably be ex- criteria. These inspections do not in-
pected to cause death or serious phys- clude imminent danger, fatality/catas-
ical harm immediately or before the trophe, and formal complaints.
imminence of such danger can be elimi- Programmed inspection schedule means
nated through the procedures set forth OSHA inspections scheduled in accord-
in 1908.6(e)(4), (f) (2) and (3), and (g). ance with criteria contained in the cur-
List of Hazards means a list of all se- rent OSHA field instructions or ap-
rious hazards that are identified by the proved State Plan counterpart.
consultant and the correction due RA means the Regional Adminis-
dates agreed upon by the employer and trator for Occupational Safety and
the consultant. Serious hazards include Health of the Region in which the
hazards addressed under section 5(a)(1) State concerned is located.
of the OSH Act and recordkeeping re- Recognition and exemption program
quirements classified as serious. The
means an achievement recognition pro-
List of Hazards will accompany the
gram of the OSHA consultation serv-
consultants written report but is sepa-
rate from the written report to the em- ices which recognizes small employers
ployer. who operate, at a particular worksite,
Offsite consultation means the provi- an exemplary program that results in
sion of consultative assistance on occu- the immediate and long term preven-
pational safety and health issues away tion of job related injuries and ill-
from an employers worksite by such nesses.
means as telephone and correspond- Serious hazard means any condition
ence, and at locations other than the or practice which would be classified as
employers worksite, such as the con- a serious violation of applicable federal
sultation project offices. It may, under or state statutes, regulations or stand-
limited conditions specified by the As- ards, based on criteria contained in the
sistant Secretary, include training and current OSHA field instructions or ap-
education. proved State Plan counterpart, except
Onsite consultation means the provi- that the element of employer knowl-
sion of consultative assistance on an edge shall not be considered.
employers occupational safety and State includes a State of the United
health program and on specific work- States, the District of Columbia, Puer-
place hazards through a visit to an em- to Rico, the Virgin Islands, American
ployers worksite. It includes a written Samoa, Guam, and the Trust Territory
report to the employer on the findings
of the Pacific Islands.
and recommendations resulting from
the visit. It may include training and Training means the planned and orga-
education needed to address hazards, or nized activity of a consultant to im-
potential hazards, at the worksite. part skills, techniques and methodolo-
OSHA means the Federal Occupa- gies to employers and their employees
tional Safety and Health Administra- to assist them in establishing and
tion or the State agency responsible maintaining employment and a place
79
of employment which is safe and fices. It may, under limited conditions

healthful. specified by the Assistant Secretary,
include training and education.
FR 64290, Oct. 26, 2000]
1908.5 Requests and scheduling for
1908.3 Eligibility and funding. onsite consultation.
(a) State eligibility. Any state may (a) Encouraging requests(1) State re-
enter into an agreement with the As- sponsibility. The State shall be respon-
sistant Secretary to perform consulta- sible for encouraging employers to re-
tion for private sector employers; ex- quest consultative assistance and shall
cept that a state having a plan ap- publicize the availability of its con-
proved under section 18 of the Act is el- sultative service and the scope of the
igible to participate in the program service which will be provided. The As-
only if that Plan does not include pro- sistant Secretary will also engage in
visions for federally funded consulta- activities to publicize and promote the
tion to private sector employers as a program.
part of its plan. (2) Promotional methods. To inform
(b) Reimbursement. (1) The Assistant employers of the availability of its
Secretary will reimburse 90 percent of consultative service and to encourage
the costs incurred under a Cooperative requests, the State may use methods
Agreement entered into pursuant to such as the following:
this part. Approved training of State (i) Paid newspaper advertisements;
staff operating under a Cooperative (ii) Newspaper, magazine, and trade
Agreement and specified out-of-State publication articles;
travel by such staff will be fully reim- (iii) Special direct mailings or tele-
bursed. phone solicitations to establishments
(2) Reimbursement to States under based on workers compensation data
this part is limited to costs incurred in or other appropriate listings;
providing consultation to private sec- (iv) In-person visits to workplaces to
tor employers only. explain the availability of the service,
(i) In all States with Plans approved and participation at employer con-
under section 18 of the Act, consulta- ferences and seminars;
tion provided to State and local gov- (v) Solicitation of support from State
ernments, as well as the remaining business and labor organizations and
range of voluntary compliance activi- leaders, and public officials;
ties referred to in 29 CFR (vi) Solicitation of publicizing by em-
1902.4(c)(2)(xiii), will not be affected by ployers and employees who have re-
the provisions of this part. Federal received consultative services;
imbursement for these activities will (vii) Preparation and dissemination
be made in accordance with the provi- of publications, descriptive materials,
sions of section 23(g) of the Act. and other appropriate items on con-
(ii) In States without Plans approved sultative services;
under section 18, no Federal reimburse- (viii) Free public service announce-
ment for consultation provided to ments on radio and television.
State and local governments will be al-
(3) Scope of service. In its publicity for
lowed, although this activity may be
the program, in response to any in-
conducted independently by a State
quiry, and before an employers request
with 100 percent State funding.
for a consultative visit may be accept-
[49 FR 25094, June 19, 1984, as amended at 65 ed, the state shall clearly explain that
FR 64291, Oct. 26, 2000] the service is provided at no cost to an
employer with federal and state funds
1908.4 Offsite consultation. for the purpose of assisting the em-
The State may provide consultative ployer in establishing and maintaining
services to employers on occupational effective programs for providing safe
safety and health issues by telephone and healthful places of employment for
and correspondence, and at locations employees, in accord with the require-
other than the employers worksite, ments of the applicable state or federal
such as the consultation project of- laws and regulations. The state shall
80
explain that while utilizing this serv- (3) Employers may request onsite
ice, an employer remains under a stat- consultation to assist in the abatement
utory obligation to provide safe and of hazards cited during an OSHA en-
healthful work and working conditions forcement inspection. However, an on-
for employees. In addition, while the site consultative visit may not take
identification of hazards by a consult- place after an inspection until the con-
ant will not mandate the issuance of ditions set forth in 1908.7(b)(3) have
citations or penalties, the employer is been met.
required to take necessary action to (c) Scheduling priority. Priority shall
eliminate employee exposure to a haz- be assigned to requests from businesses
ard which in the judgment of the con- with the most hazardous operations,
sultant represents an imminent danger with primary attention to smaller
to employees, and to take action to businesses. Preference shall be given to
correct within a reasonable time any the smaller businesses which are in
serious hazards that are identified. The higher hazard industries or which have
state shall emphasize, however, that the most hazardous conditions at issue
the discovery of such a hazard will not in the request.
initiate any enforcement activity, and
that referral will not take place, unless [49 FR 25094, June 19, 1984, as amended at 65
the employer fails to eliminate the FR 64291, Oct. 26, 2000]
identified hazard within the estab-
lished time frame. The state shall also 1908.6 Conduct of a visit.
explain the requirements for participa- (a) Preparation. (1) An onsite consult-
tion in the recognition and exemption ative visit shall be made only after ap-
program as set forth in 1908.7(b)(4), propriate preparation by the consult-
and shall ensure that the employer un- ant. Prior to the visit, the consultant
derstands his or her obligation to post shall become familiar with as many
the List of Hazards accompanying the factors concerning the establishments
consultants written report. operation as possible. The consultant
(b) Employer requests. (1) An onsite shall review all applicable codes and
consultative visit will be provided only standards. In addition, the consultant
at the request of the employer, and shall assure that all necessary tech-
shall not result from the enforcement nical and personal protective equip-
of any right of entry under state law. ment is available and functioning prop-
(2) When making a request, an em- erly.
ployer in a small, high hazard estab-
(2) At the time of any promotional
lishment shall generally be encouraged
visit conducted by a consultant to en-
to include within the scope of such re-
courage the use of the onsite consult-
quest all working conditions at the
worksite and the employers entire ative services, a consultation may be
safety and health program. However, a performed without delay if the em-
more limited scope may be encouraged ployer so requests and the consultant
in larger and less hazardous establish- is otherwise prepared to conduct such
ments. Moreover, any employer may consultation.
specify a more limited scope for the (b) Structured format. An initial onsite
visit by indicating working conditions, consultative visit will consist of an
hazards, or situations on which onsite opening conference, an examination of
consultation will be focused. When those aspects of the employers safety
such limited requests are at issue, the and health program which relate to the
consultant will limit review and pro- scope of the visit, a walkthrough of the
vide assistance only with respect to workplace, and a closing conference.
those working conditions, hazards, or An initial visit may include training
situations specified; except that if the and education for employers and em-
consultant observes, in the course of ployees, if the need for such training
the onsite visit, hazards which are out- and education is revealed by the
side the scope of the request, the con- walkthrough of the workplace and the
sultant must treat such hazards as examination of the employers safety
though they were within the scope of and health program, and if the em-
the request. ployer so requests. The visit shall be
81
followed by a written report to the em- objection to a joint conference, the

ployer. Additional visits may be con- consultant will conduct separate con-
ducted at the employers request to ferences with employer and employee
provide needed education and training, representatives. The consultant must
assistance with the employers safety inform affected employees, with whom
and health program, technical assist- he confers, of the purpose of the con-
ance in the correction of hazards, or as sultation visit.
necessary to verify the correction of (2) In addition to the requirements of
serious hazards identified during pre- paragraph (c) of this section, the con-
vious visits. A compliance inspection sultant will, in the opening conference,
may in some cases be the basis for a explain to the employer the relation-
visit limited to education and training, ship between onsite consultation and
assistance with the employers safety OSHA enforcement activity, explain
and health program, or technical as- the obligation to protect employees in
sistance in the correction of hazards. the event that certain hazardous condi-
(c) Employee participation. (1) The con- tions are identified, and emphasize the
sultant shall retain the right to confer employers obligation to post the List
with individual employees during the of Hazards accompanying the consult-
course of the visit in order to identify ants written report as described in
and judge the nature and extent of par- paragraph (e)(8) of this section.
ticular hazards within the scope of the (3) At the conclusion of the consulta-
employers request, and to evaluate the tion visit, the consultant will conduct
employers safety and health program. a closing conference with employer and
The consultant shall explain the neces- employee representatives, jointly or
sity for this contact to the employer separately. The consultant will de-
during the opening conference, and an scribe hazards identified during the
employer must agree to permit such visit and other pertinent issues related
contact before a visit can proceed. to employee safety and health.
(2)(i) In addition, an employee rep- (e) Onsite activity. (1) Activity during
resentative of affected employees must the onsite consultative visit will focus
be afforded an opportunity to accom- primarily on those areas, conditions, or
pany the consultant and the employ- hazards regarding which the employer
ers representative during the physical has requested assistance. An employer
inspection of the workplace. The con- may expand or reduce the scope of the
sultant may permit additional employ- request at any time during the onsite
ees (such as representatives of a joint visit. The consultant shall, if prepared
safety and health committee, if one ex- and if scheduling priorities permit, ex-
ists at the worksite) to participate in pand the scope of the visit at the time
the walkaround, where the consultant of the request. If the employers re-
determines that such additional rep- quest for expansion necessitates fur-
resentatives will further aid the visit. ther preparation by the consultant or
(ii) If there is no employee represent- the expertise of another consultant, or
ative, or if the consultant is unable if other employer requests may merit
with reasonable certainty to determine higher priority, the consultant shall
who is such a representative, or if the refer the request to the consultation
employee representative declines the manager for scheduling. In all cases in
offer to participate, the consultant which the scope of the visit is reduced,
must confer with a reasonable number the consultant remains obligated to
of employees concerning matters of oc- work with the employer to ensure cor-
cupational safety and health. rection of those serious hazards which
(iii) The consultant is authorized to are identified during the visit.
deny the right to accompany under (2) The consultant shall advise the
this section to any person whose con- employer as to the employers obliga-
duct interferes with the orderly con- tions and responsibilities under appli-
duct of the visit. cable Federal or State law and imple-
(d) Opening and closing conferences. (1) menting regulations.
The consultant will encourage a joint (3) Within the scope of the employers
opening conference with employer and request, consultants shall review the
employee representatives. If there is an employers safety and health program
82
and provide advice on modifications or fected employees for 3 working days, or

additions to make such programs more until the hazards are corrected, which-
effective. ever is later. A copy of the List of Haz-
(4) Consultants shall identify and ards must be made available to the em-
provide advice on correction of those ployee representative who participates
hazards included in the employers rein the visit. In addition, the employer
quest and any other safety or health must agree to make information on the
hazards observed in the workplace dur- corrective actions proposed by the con-
ing the course of the onsite consult- sultant, as well as other-than-serious
ative visit. This advice shall include hazards identified, available at the
basic information indicating the possi- worksite for review by affected em-
bility of a solution and describing the ployees or the employee representa-
general form of the solution. The con- tive. OSHA will not schedule a compli-
sultant shall conduct sampling and ance inspection in response to a com-
testing, with subsequent analyses. as plaint based upon a posted List of Haz-
may be necessary to confirm the exist- ards unless the employer fails to meet
ence of safety and health hazards. his obligations under paragraph (f) of
(5) Advice and technical assistance this section, or fails to provide interim
on the correction of identified safety protection for exposed employees.
and health hazards may be provided to (f) Employer obligations. (1) An em-
employers during and after the onsite ployer must take immediate action to
consultative visit. Descriptive mate- eliminate employee exposure to a haz-
rials may be provided on approaches,
ard which, in the judgment of the con-
means, techniques, and other appro-
sultant, presents an imminent danger
priate items commonly utilized for the
to employees. If the employer fails to
elimination or control of such hazards.
take the necessary action, the consult-
The consultants shall also advise the
ant must immediately notify the af-
employers of additional sources of as-
fected employees and the appropriate
sistance, if known.
OSHA enforcement authority and pro-
(6) When a hazard is identified in the
vide the relevant information.
workplace, the consultant shall indi-
cate to the employer the consultants (2) An employer must also take the
best judgment as to whether the situa- necessary action in accordance with
tion would be classified as a serious the plan developed under paragraph
or other-than-serious hazard. (e)(7) of this section to eliminate or
(7) At the time the consultant deter- control employee exposure to any iden-
mines that a serious hazard exists, the tified serious hazard, and meet the
consultant will assist the employer to posting requirements of paragraph
develop a specific plan to correct the (e)(8) of this section. In order to dem-
hazard, affording the employer a rea- onstrate that the necessary action is
sonable period of time to complete the being taken, an employer may be re-
necessary action. The state must pro- quired to submit periodic reports, per-
vide, upon request from the employer mit a follow-up visit, or take similar
within 15 working days of receipt of the action that achieves the same end.
consultants report, a prompt oppor- (3) An employer may request, and the
tunity for an informal discussion with consultation manager may grant, an
the consultation manager regarding extension of the time frame established
the period of time established for the for correction of a serious hazard when
correction of a hazard or any other the employer demonstrates having
substantive finding of the consultant. made a good faith effort to correct the
(8) As a condition for receiving the hazard within the established time
consultation service, the employer frame; shows evidence that correction
must agree to post the List of Hazards has not been completed because of fac-
accompanying the consultants written tors beyond the employers reasonable
report, and to notify affected employ- control; and shows evidence that the
ees when hazards are corrected. When employer is taking all available in-
received, the List of Hazards must be terim steps to safeguard the employees
posted, unedited, in a prominent place against the hazard during the correc-
where it is readily observable by all af- tion period.
83
(4) If the employer fails to take the close information contained in the con-
action necessary to correct a serious sultants written report to the extent
hazard within the established time required by 29 CFR 1910.1020 or other
frame or any extensions thereof, the applicable OSHA standards or regula-
consultation manager shall imme- tions.
diately notify the appropriate OSHA (h) Confidentiality. (1) The consultant
enforcement authority and provide the shall preserve the confidentiality of in-
relevant information. The OSHA en- formation obtained as the result of a
forcement authority will make a deter- consultative visit which contains or
mination, based on a review of the might reveal a trade secret of the em-
facts, whether enforcement activity is ployer.
warranted. (2) Disclosure of consultation pro-
(5) After correction of all serious haz- gram information which identifies em-
ards, the employer shall notify the con- ployers who have requested the serv-
sultation manager by written con- ices of a consultant would adversely af-
firmation of the correction of the haz- fect the operation of the OSHA con-
ards, unless correction of the serious sultation program as well as breach the
hazards is verified by direct observa- confidentiality of commercial informa-
tion by the consultant. tion not customarily disclosed by the
(g) Written report. (1) A written report employer. Accordingly, the state shall
shall be prepared for each visit which keep such information confidential.
results in substantive findings or rec- The state shall provide consultation
ommendations, and shall be sent to the program information requested by
employer. The timing and format of OSHA, including information which
the report shall be approved by the As- identifies employers who have re-
sistant Secretary. The report shall requested consultation services. OSHA
state the employers request and de- may use such information to admin-
scribe the working conditions exam- ister the consultation program and to
ined by the consultant; shall, within evaluate state and federal performance
the scope of the request, evaluate the under that program, but shall, to the
employers program for ensuring safe maximum extent permitted by law,
and healthful employment and provide treat information which identifies spe-
recommendations for making such pro- cific employers as exempt from public
grams effective; shall identify specific disclosure.
hazards and describe their nature, in-
(Approved by the Office of Management and
cluding reference to applicable stand-
Budget under control number 12180110)
ards or codes; shall identify the seri-
ousness of the hazards; and, to the ex- [49 FR 25094, June 19, 1984, as amended at 54
tent possible, shall include suggested FR 24333, June 7, 1989; 65 FR 64291, Oct. 26,
means or approaches to their correc- 2000]
tion. Additional sources of assistance
1908.7 Relationship to enforcement.
shall also be indicated, if known, in-
cluding the possible need to procure (a) Independence. (1) Consultative ac-
specific engineering consultation, med- tivity by a State shall be conducted
ical advice and assistance, and other independently of any OSHA enforce-
appropriate items. The report shall ment activity.
also include reference to the comple- (2) The consultative activity shall
tion dates for the situations described have its own identifiable managerial
in 1908.6(f) (1) and (2). staff. In States with Plans approved
(2) Because the consultants written under section 18 of the Act, this staff
report contains information considered will be separate from the managing of
confidential, and because disclosure of compliance inspections and scheduling.
such reports would adversely affect the (3) The identity of employers request-
operation of the OSHA consultation ing onsite consultation, as well as the
program, the state shall not disclose file of the consultants visit, shall not
the consultants written report except be provided to OSHA for use in any
to the employer for whom it was pre- compliance activity, except as provided
pared and as provided for in for in 1908.6(f)(1) (failure to eliminate
1908.7(a)(3). The state may also dis- imminent danger,) 1908.6(f)(4) (failure
84
to eliminate serious hazards,) para- is issued, onsite consultation shall only

graph (b)(1) of this section (inspection take place with regard to those cita-
deferral) and paragraph (b)(4) of this tion items which have become final or-
section (recognition and exemption ders.
program). (4) The recognition and exemption
(b) Effect upon scheduling. (1) An on- program operated by the OSHA con-
site consultative visit already in sultation projects provide incentives
progress will have priority over OSHA and support to smaller, high-hazard
compliance inspections except as pro- employers to work with their employ-
vided in paragraph (b)(2) of this sec- ees to develop, implement, and con-
tion. The consultant and the employer tinuously improve the effectiveness of
shall notify the compliance officer of their workplace safety and health man-
the visit in progress and request delay agement system.
of the inspection until after the visit is (i) Programmed Inspection Schedule.
completed. An onsite consultative visit (A) When an employer requests partici-
shall be considered in progress in re- pation in a recognition and exemption
lation to the working conditions, haz- program, and undergoes a consultative
ards, or situations covered by the visit visit covering all conditions and oper-
from the beginning of the opening con- ations in the place of employment re-
ference through the end of the correc- lated to occupational safety and
tion due dates and any extensions health; corrects all hazards that were
thereof. OSHA may, in exercising its identified during the course of the con-
authority to schedule compliance in- sultative visit within established time
spections, assign a lower priority to frames; has began to implement all the
worksites where consultation visits are elements of an effective safety and
scheduled. health program; and agrees to request
(2) The consultant shall terminate an a consultative visit if major changes in
onsite consultative visit already in working conditions or work processes
progress where one of the following occur which may introduce new haz-
kinds of OSHA compliance inspections ards, OSHAs Programmed Inspections
is about to take place: at that particular site may be deferred
(i) Imminent danger investigations; while the employer is working to
(ii) Fatality/catastrophe investiga- achieve recognition and exemption sta-
tions; tus.
(iii) Complaint investigations; (B) Employers who meet all the re-
(iv) Other critical inspections as de- quirements for recognition and exemp-
termined by the Assistant Secretary. tion will have the names of their estab-
(3) An onsite consultation visit may lishments removed from OSHAs Pro-
not take place while an OSHA enforce- grammed Inspection Schedule for a pe-
ment inspection is in progress at the riod of not less than one year. The ex-
establishment. An enforcement inspec- emption period will extend from the
tion shall be deemed in progress date of issuance by the Regional Office
from the time a compliance officer ini- of the certificate of recognition.
tially seeks entry to the workplace to (ii) Inspections. OSHA will continue
the end of the closing conference. An to make inspections in the following
enforcement inspection will also be categories at sites that achieved rec-
considered in progress in cases where ognition status and have been granted
entry is refused, until such times as: exemption from OSHAs Programmed
the inspection is conducted; the RA de- Inspection Schedule; and at sites
termines that a warrant to require granted inspection deferrals as pro-
entry to the workplace will not be vided for under paragraph (b)(4)(i)(A) of
sought; or the RA determines that al- this section:
lowing a consultative visit to proceed (A) Imminent danger.
is in the best interest of employee safe- (B) Fatality/Catastrophe.
ty and health. An onsite consultative (C) Formal Complaints.
visit shall not take place subsequent to (5) When an employer requests con-
an OSHA enforcement inspection until sideration for participation in the rec-
a determination has been made that no ognition and exemption program under
citation will be issued, or if a citation paragraph (b)(4) of this section, the
85
provisions of 1908.6(e)(7), (e)(8), (f)(3), identified as a result of a consultative

and (f)(5) shall apply to other-than-se- visit, the Area Director shall have au-
rious hazards as well as serious haz- thority to assess minimum penalties if
ards. the employer is in good faith com-
(c) Effect upon enforcement. (1) The ad- plying with the recommendations of a
vice of the consultant and the consult- consultant after such consultative
ants written report will not be binding visit.
on a compliance officer in a subsequent (Approved by the Office of Management and
enforcement inspection. In a subse- Budget under control number 12180110)
quent inspection, a compliance officer
is not precluded from finding hazardous FR 24333, June 7, 1989; 65 FR 64292, Oct. 26,
conditions, or violations of standards, 2000]
rules or regulations, for which cita-
tions would be issued and penalties 1908.8 Consultant specifications.
proposed. (a) Number. (1) The number of con-
(2) The hazard identification and cor- sultant positions which will be funded
rection assistance given by a State under a Cooperative Agreement pursu-
consultant, or the failure of a consultant to this part for the purpose of pro-
ant to point out a specific hazard, or viding consultation to private sector
other possible errors or omissions by employers will be determined by the
the consultant, shall not be binding Assistant Secretary on the basis of pro-
upon a compliance officer and need not gram performance, demand for serv-
affect the regular conduct of a compli- ices, industrial mix, resources avail-
ance inspection or preclude the finding able, and the recommendation of the
of alleged violations and the issuance RA, and may be adjusted periodically.
of citations, or constitute a defense to (2) States shall make efforts to uti-
any enforcement action. lize consultants with the safety and
(3) In the event of a subsequent in- health expertise necessary to properly
spection, the employer is not required meet the demand for consultation by
to inform the compliance officer of the the various industries within a State.
prior visit. The employer is not re- The RA will determine and negotiate a
quired to provide a copy of the state reasonable balance with the State on
consultants written report to the com- an annual basis.
pliance officer, except to the extent (b) Qualifications. (1) All consultants
that disclosure of information con- utilized under Cooperative Agreements
tained in the report is required by 29 pursuant to this part shall be employ-
CFR 1910.1020 or other applicable OSHA ees of the State, qualified under State
standard or regulation. If, during a requirements for employment in occu-
subsequent enforcement investigation, pational safety and health. They must
OSHA independently determines there demonstrate adequate education and
is reason to believe that the employer: experience to satisfy the RA before as-
failed to correct serious hazards identi- signment to work under an Agreement,
fied during the course of a consultation and annually thereafter, that they
visit; created the same hazard again; or meet the requirements set out in
made false statements to the state or 1908.8(b)(2), and that they have the
OSHA in connection with participation ability to perform satisfactorily pursu-
in the consultation program, OSHA ant to the Cooperative Agreement. Per-
may exercise its authority to obtain sons who have the potential but do not
the consultation report. yet demonstrate adequate education
(4) If, however, the employer chooses and experience to satisfy the RA that
to provide a copy of the consultants they have the ability to perform con-
report to a compliance officer, it may sultant duties independently may, with
be used as a factor in determining the RA approval, be trained under a Coop-
extent to which an inspection is re- erative Agreement to perform consult-
quired and as a factor in determining ant duties. Such persons may not, how-
proposed penalties. When, during the ever, perform consultant duties inde-
course of a compliance inspection, an pendently until it has been determined
OSHA compliance officer identifies the by the RA that they meet the require-
existence of serious hazards previously ments and have the ability indicated.
86
All consultants shall be selected in ac- (ii) A performance evaluation of each

cordance with the provisions of Execu- State consultant performing consulta-
tive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, tion services for employers shall be
as amended, entitled Equal Employ- prepared annually. All aspects of a con-
ment Opportunity. sultants performance shall be reviewed
(2) Minimum requirements of con- at that time. Recommendation for re-
sultants shall include the following: medial action shall be made and acted
(i) The ability to identify hazards; upon. The annual evaluation report
the ability to assess employee exposure shall be a confidential State personnel
and risk; knowledge of OSHA stand- record and may be timed to coincide
ards; knowledge of hazard correction with regular personnel evaluations.
techniques and practices; knowledge of (iii) Performance of individual con-
workplace safety and health program sultants shall be measured in terms of
requirements; and the ability to effec- their ability to identify hazards in the
tively communicate, both orally and in workplaces which they have visited;
writing. their ability to determine employee ex-
(ii) Consultants shall meet any addi- posure and risk, and in particular their
tional degree and/or experience re- performance under 1908.6 (e) and (f);
quirements as may be established by their knowledge and application of ap-
the Assistant Secretary. plicable Federal or State statutes, reg-
(c) Training. As necessary, the Assist- ulations or standards; their knowledge
ant Secretary will specify immediate and application of appropriate hazard
and continuing training requirements correction techniques and approaches;
for consultants. Expenses for training their knowledge and application of the
which is required by the Assistant Sec- requirements of an effective workplace
retary or approved by the RA will be safety and health program; and their
reimbursed in full. ability to communicate effectively
their findings and recommendations
1908.9 Monitoring and evaluation. and the reasons for them to employers,
(a) Assistant Secretary responsibility. A and relevant information, skills and
States performance under a Coopera- techniques to employers and employ-
tive Agreement will be regularly mon- ees.
itored and evaluated by the Assistant (iv) Accompanied visits to observe
Secretary as part of a systematic Fed- consultants during onsite consultative
eral plan for this activity. The Assist- visits shall be conducted periodically
ant Secretary may require changes as a in accord with a plan established in
result of these evaluations to foster each annual Cooperative Agreement.
conformance with consultation policy. The State may also conduct unaccom-
If the State policies or practices which panied visits to workplaces which re-
require change are such that the ceived onsite consultation, for the pur-
States assurance of correction of seri- pose of evaluating consultants. A writ-
ous hazards and of the effectiveness of ten report of each visit shall be pro-
employers safety and health programs vided to the consultant. These visits
is in doubt, the Assistant Secretary shall be conducted only with the ex-
may, pending the completion of the pressed permission of the employer
changes, suspend recognition of a who requests the onsite consultative
States consultative visits as a basis visit.
for exemption from compliance inspec- (v) The State will report quarterly to
tion as permitted under 1908.7(b)(4). the RA on system operations, including
(b) Consultant performance(1) State copies of accompanied visit reports
activity. The State shall establish and completed that quarter.
maintain an organized consultant per- (2) Federal activity. State consultant
formance monitoring system under the performance monitoring as set out in
Cooperative Agreement: 1908.9(b)(1) shall not preclude Federal
(i) Operation of the system shall con- monitoring activity by methods deter-
form to all requirements established by mined to be appropriate by the Assist-
the Assistant Secretary. The system ant Secretary.
shall be approved by the Assistant Sec- (c) State reporting. For Federal moni-
retary before it is placed in operation. toring and evaluation purposes, the
87
State shall compile and submit such (d) Location of sample Cooperative
factual and statistical data in the for- Agreement. A sample Agreement is
mat and at the frequency required by available for inspection at all Regional
the Assistant Secretary. The State Offices of the Occupational Safety and
shall prepare and submit to the RA any Health Administration of the U.S. De-
narrative reports, including copies of partment of Labor.
written reports to employers as may be (e) Action upon requests. The State
required by the Assistant Secretary. will be notified within a reasonable pe-
riod of time of any decision concerning
(Approved by the Office of Management and
its request for a Cooperative Agree-
Budget under control number 12180110)
ment. If a request is denied, the State
[49 FR 25094, June 19, 1984, as amended at 54 will be informed in writing of the rea-
FR 24333, June 7, 1989] sons supporting the decision. If a Coop-
erative Agreement is negotiated, the
1908.10 Cooperative Agreements. initial finding will specify the period
(a) Who may make Agreements. The As- for the Agreement. Additional funds
sistant Secretary may make a Coopera- may be added at a later time provided
tive Agreement under this part with the activity is satisfactorily carried
the Governor of a State or with any out and appropriations are available.
State agency designated for that pur- The State may also be required to
pose by the Governor. amend the Agreement for continued
(b) Negotiations. (1) Procedures for ne- support.
gotiations may be obtained through (f) Termination. Either party may ter-
the RA who will negotiate for the As- minate a Cooperative Agreement under
sistant Secretary and make final rec- this part upon 30 days written notice
ommendations on each Agreement to to the other party.
the Assistant Secretary. (Approved by the Office of Management and
(2) States with Plans approved under Budget under control number 12180110)
section 18 of the Act may initiate nego-
tiations in anticipation of the with- FR 24333, June 7, 1989]
drawal from the Plan of Federally
funded onsite consultation services to 1908.11 Exclusions.
private sector employers. A Cooperative Agreement under this
(3) Renegotiation of existing Agree- part will not restrict in any manner
ments funded under this part shall be the authority and responsibility of the
initiated within 30 days of the effective Assistant Secretary under sections 8, 9,
date of these revisions. 10, 13, and 17 of the Act, or any cor-
(c) Contents of Cooperative Agreement. responding State authority.
(1) Any Agreement and subsequent
modifications shall be in writing and
signed by both parties. PART 1910OCCUPATIONAL
(2) Each Agreement shall provide SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS
that the State will conform its oper-
ations under the Agreement to: Subpart AGeneral
(i) The requirements contained in Sec.
this part 1908; 1910.1 Purpose and scope.
(ii) All related formal directives sub- 1910.2 Definitions.
sequently issued by the Assistant Sec- 1910.3 Petitions for the issuance, amend-
retary implementing this regulation. ment, or repeal of a standard.
1910.4 Amendments to this part.
(3) Each Agreement shall contain 1910.5 Applicability of standards.
such other explicit written commit- 1910.6 Incorporation by reference.
ments in conformance with the provi- 1910.7 Definition and requirements for a na-
sions of this part as may be required by tionally recognized testing laboratory.
the Assistant Secretary. Each Agree- 1910.8 OMB control numbers under the Pa-
ment shall also include a budget of the perwork Reduction Act.
States anticipated expenditures under
Subpart BAdoption and Extension of
the Agreement, in the detail and for-
Established Federal Standards
mat required by the Assistant Sec-
retary. 1910.11 Scope and purpose.
88
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1910
1910.12 Construction work. 1910.110 Storage and handling of liquified
1910.15 Shipyard employment. petroleum gases.
1910.16 Longshoring and marine terminals. 1910.111 Storage and handling of anhydrous
1910.17 Effective dates. ammonia.
1910.18 Changes in established Federal 1910.1121910.113 [Reserved]
standards. 1910.119 Process safety management of high-
1910.19 Special provisions for air contami- ly hazardous chemicals.
nants. 1910.120 Hazardous waste operations and
emergency response.
Subpart C [Reserved] 1910.121 [Reserved]
Subpart DWalking-Working Surfaces DIPPING AND COATING OPERATIONS
1910.21 Definitions. 1910.122 Table of contents.

1910.22 General requirements. 1910.123 Dipping and coating operations:
1910.23 Guarding floor and wall openings Coverage and definitions.
and holes. 1910.124 General requirements for dipping
1910.24 Fixed industrial stairs. and coating operations.
1910.25 Portable wood ladders. 1910.125 Additional requirements for dipping
1910.26 Portable metal ladders. and coating operations that use flam-
1910.27 Fixed ladders. mable or combustible liquids.
1910.28 Safety requirements for scaffolding. 1910.126 Additional requirements for special
1910.29 Manually propelled mobile ladder dipping and coating operations.
stands and scaffolds (towers).
1910.30 Other working surfaces. Subpart IPersonal Protective Equipment
1910.132 General requirements.
Subpart EMeans of Egress 1910.133 Eye and face protection.
1910.35 Definitions. 1910.134 Respiratory protection.
1910.36 General requirements. 1910.135 Head protection.
1910.37 Means of egress, general. 1910.136 Foot protection.
1910.38 Employee emergency plans and fire 1910.137 Electrical protective equipment.
prevention plans. 1910.138 Hand protection.
APPENDIX TO SUBPART E TO PART 1910 1910.139 Respiratory protection for M. tu-
MEANS OF EGRESS berculosis.
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART I TO PART 1910REF-
Subpart FPowered Platforms, Manlifts, ERENCES FOR FURTHER INFORMATION (NON-
and Vehicle-Mounted Work Platforms MANDATORY)
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART I TO PART 1910NON-
1910.66 Powered platforms for building MANDATORY COMPLIANCE GUIDELINES FOR
maintenance. HAZARD ASSESSMENT AND PERSONAL PRO-
1910.67 Vehicle-mounted elevating and ro- TECTIVE EQUIPMENT SELECTION
tating work platforms.
1910.68 Manlifts. Subpart JGeneral Environmental Controls
Subpart GOccupational Health and 1910.141 Sanitation.
Environmental Control 1910.142 Temporary labor camps.
1910.143 Nonwater carriage disposal sys-
1910.94 Ventilation. tems. [Reserved]
1910.95 Occupational noise exposure. 1910.144 Safety color code for marking phys-
1910.97 Nonionizing radiation. ical hazards.
1910.98 Effective dates. 1910.145 Specifications for accident preven-
tion signs and tags.
Subpart HHazardous Materials 1910.146 Permit-required confined spaces.
1910.147 The control of hazardous energy
1910.101 Compressed gases (general require- (lockout/tagout).
ments).
1910.102 Acetylene. Subpart KMedical and First Aid
1910.103 Hydrogen.
1910.104 Oxygen. 1910.151 Medical services and first aid.
1910.105 Nitrous oxide. 1910.152 [Reserved]
1910.106 Flammable and combustible liq-
uids. Subpart LFire Protection
1910.107 Spray finishing using flammable
and combustible materials. 1910.155 Scope, application and definitions
1910.108 [Reserved] applicable to this subpart.
1910.109 Explosives and blasting agents. 1910.156 Fire brigades.
89
Pt. 1910 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7102 Edition)
PORTABLE FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT 1910.219 Mechanical power-transmission ap-
paratus.
1910.157 Portable fire extinguishers.
1910.158 Standpipe and hose systems.
Subpart PHand and Portable Powered
FIXED FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT Tools and Other Hand-Held Equipment
1910.159 Automatic sprinkler systems. 1910.241 Definitions.
1910.160 Fixed extinguishing systems, gen- 1910.242 Hand and portable powered tools
eral. and equipment, general.
1910.161 Fixed extinguishing systems, dry 1910.243 Guarding of portable powered tools.
chemical. 1910.244 Other portable tools and equip-
1910.162 Fixed extinguishing systems, gas- ment.
eous agent.
1910.163 Fixed extinguishing systems, water Subpart QWelding, Cutting and Brazing
spray and foam.
OTHER FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
1910.252 General requirements.
1910.164 Fire detection systems. 1910.253 Oxygen-fuel gas welding and cut-
1910.165 Employee alarm systems. ting.
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART L TO PART 1910 1910.254 Arc welding and cutting.
FIRE PROTECTION 1910.255 Resistance welding.
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART L TO PART 1910NA-
TIONAL CONSENSUS STANDARDS Subpart RSpecial Industries
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART L TO PART 1910
FIRE PROTECTION REFERENCES FOR FUR- 1910.261 Pulp, paper, and paperboard mills.
THER INFORMATION 1910.262 Textiles.
APPENDIX D TO SUBPART L TO PART 1910 1910.263 Bakery equipment.
AVAILABILITY OF PUBLICATIONS INCOR- 1910.264 Laundry machinery and operations.
PORATED BY REFERENCE IN SECTION 1910.265 Sawmills.
1910.156 FIRE BRIGADES 1910.266 Logging operations.
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART L TO PART 1910 1910.268 Telecommunications.
TEST METHODS FOR PROTECTIVE CLOTHING 1910.269 Electric power generation, trans-
mission, and distribution.
Subpart MCompressed Gas and 1910.272 Grain handling facilities.
Compressed Air Equipment
Subpart SElectrical
1910.1661910.168 [Reserved]
1910.169 Air receivers. GENERAL
1910.301 Introduction.
Subpart NMaterials Handling and
Storage DESIGN SAFETY STANDARDS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
1910.176 Handling materialsgeneral.
1910.177 Servicing multipiece and single 1910.302 Electric utilization systems.
piece rim wheels. 1910.303 General requirements.
1910.178 Powered industrial trucks. 1910.304 Wiring design and protection.
1910.179 Overhead and gantry cranes. 1910.305 Wiring methods, components, and
1910.180 Crawler locomotive and truck equipment for general use.
cranes. 1910.306 Specific purpose equipment and in-
1910.181 Derricks. stallations.
1910.183 Helicopters. 1910.307 Hazardous (classified) locations.
1910.184 Slings. 1910.308 Special systems.
1910.3091910.330 [Reserved]
Subpart OMachinery and Machine
Guarding SAFETY-RELATED WORK PRACTICES
1910.331 Scope.
1910.212 General requirements for all ma- 1910.332 Training.
chines. 1910.333 Selection and use of work practices.
1910.213 Woodworking machinery require- 1910.334 Use of equipment.
ments. 1910.335 Safeguards for personnel protec-
1910.214 Cooperage machinery. [Reserved] tion.
1910.215 Abrasive wheel machinery. 1910.3361910.360 [Reserved]
1910.216 Mills and calenders in the rubber
SAFETY-RELATED MAINTENANCE
and plastics industries.
REQUIREMENTS
1910.217 Mechanical power presses.
1910.218 Forging machines. 1910.3611910.380 [Reserved]
90
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIAL Sections 1910.7 and 1910.8 also issued under
EQUIPMENT 29 CFR Part 1911. Section 1910.7(f) also issued
under 31 U.S.C. 9701, 29 U.S.C. 9a, 5 U.S.C. 553;
1910.3811910.398 [Reserved]
Pub. L. 106113 (113 Stat. 1501A222); and OMB
DEFINITIONS Circular A25 (dated July 8, 1993) (58 FR
38142, July 15, 1993).
1910.399 Definitions applicable to this sub-
part. 1910.1 Purpose and scope.
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART S TO PART 1910 (a) Section 6(a) of the Williams-
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
Steiger Occupational Safety and
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART S TO PART 1910EX-
PLANATORY DATA [RESERVED]
Health Act of 1970 (84 Stat. 1593) pro-
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART S TO PART 1910TA- vides that without regard to chapter 5
BLES, NOTES, AND CHARTS [RESERVED] of title 5, United States Code, or to the
other subsections of this section, the
Subpart TCommercial Diving Operations Secretary shall, as soon as practicable
during the period beginning with the
GENERAL effective date of this Act and ending 2
1910.401 Scope and application. years after such date, by rule promul-
1910.402 Definitions. gate as an occupational safety or
health standard any national con-
PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS
sensus standard, and any established
1910.410 Qualifications of dive team. Federal standard, unless he determines
GENERAL OPERATIONS PROCEDURES
that the promulgation of such a stand-
ard would not result in improved safety
1910.420 Safe practices manual. or health for specifically designated
1910.421 Pre-dive procedures. employees. The legislative purpose of
1910.422 Procedures during dive.
this provision is to establish, as rapidly
1910.423 Post-dive procedures.
as possible and without regard to the
SPECIFIC OPERATIONS PROCEDURES rule-making provisions of the Adminis-
1910.424 SCUBA diving.
trative Procedure Act, standards with
1910.425 Surface-supplied air diving. which industries are generally famil-
1910.426 Mixed-gas diving. iar, and on whose adoption interested
1910.427 Liveboating. and affected persons have already had
an opportunity to express their views.
EQUIPMENT PROCEDURES AND REQUIREMENTS Such standards are either (1) national
1910.430 Equipment. concensus standards on whose adoption
affected persons have reached substan-
RECORDKEEPING tial agreement, or (2) Federal stand-
1910.440 Recordkeeping requirements. ards already established by Federal
1910.441 Effective date. statutes or regulations.
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART T TO PART 1910EX- (b) This part carries out the directive
AMPLES OF CONDITIONS WHICH MAY RE- to the Secretary of Labor under section
STRICT OR LIMIT EXPOSURE TO 6(a) of the Act. It contains occupa-
HYPERBARIC CONDITIONS tional safety and health standards
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART T TO PART 1910 which have been found to be national
GUIDELINES FOR SCIENTIFIC DIVING
consensus standards or established
Subparts UY [Reserved] Federal standards.
1910.9011910.999 [Reserved] 1910.2 Definitions.

SOURCE: 39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, unless As used in this part, unless the con-
otherwise noted. text clearly requires otherwise:
(a) Act means the Williams-Steiger
Subpart AGeneral Occupational Safety and Health Act of
1970 (84 Stat. 1590).
(b) Assistant Secretary of Labor means
AUTHORITY: Secs. 4, 6, 8, Occupational Safe-
ty and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655,
the Assistant Secretary of Labor for
657); Secretary of Labors Order Numbers 12 Occupational Safety and Health;
71 (36 FR 8754), 876 (41 FR 25059), 983 (48 FR (c) Employer means a person engaged
35736), 190 (55 FR 9033), or 696 (62 FR 111), as in a business affecting commerce who
applicable. has employees, but does not include
91
the United States or any State or po- the rule desired, the effects thereof if
litical subdivision of a State; promulgated, and the reasons therefor.
(d) Employee means an employee of an (b)(1) The relevant legislative history
employer who is employed in a busi- of the Act indicates congressional rec-
ness of his employer which affects com- ognition of the American National
merce; Standards Institute and the National
(e) Commerce means trade, traffic, Fire Protection Association as the
commerce, transportation, or commu- major sources of national consensus
nication among the several States, or standards. National consensus stand-
between a State and any place outside ards adopted on May 29, 1971, pursuant
thereof, or within the District of Co- to section 6(a) of the Act are from
lumbia, or a possession of the United those two sources. However, any orga-
States (other than the Trust Territory nization which deems itself a producer
of the Pacific Islands), or between of national consensus standards, within
points in the same State but through a the meaning of section 3(9) of the Act,
point outside thereof; is invited to submit in writing to the
(f) Standard means a standard which Assistant Secretary of Labor at any
requires conditions, or the adoption or time prior to February 1, 1973, all rel-
evant information which may enable
use of one or more practices, means,
the Assistant Secretary to determine
methods, operations, or processes, rea-
whether any of its standards satisfy
sonably necessary or appropriate to
the requirements of the definition of
provide safe or healthful employment
national consensus standard in sec-
and places of employment;
tion 3(9) of the Act.
(g) National consensus standard means (2) Within a reasonable time after the
any standard or modification thereof receipt of a submission pursuant to
which (1) has been adopted and promul- paragraph (b)(1) of this section, the As-
gated by a nationally recognized stand- sistant Secretary of Labor shall pub-
ards-producing organization under pro- lish or cause to be published in the
cedures whereby it can be determined FEDERAL REGISTER a notice of such
by the Secretary of Labor or by the As- submission, and shall afford interested
sistant Secretary of Labor that persons persons a reasonable opportunity to
interested and affected by the scope or present written data, views, or argu-
provisions of the standard have reached ments with regard to the question
substantial agreement on its adoption, whether any standards of the organiza-
(2) was formulated in a manner which tion making the submission are na-
afforded an opportunity for diverse tional consensus standards.
views to be considered, and (3) has been
designated as such a standard by the 1910.4 Amendments to this part.
Secretary or the Assistant Secretary, (a) The Assistant Secretary of Labor
after consultation with other appro- shall have all of the authority of the
priate Federal agencies; and Secretary of Labor under sections 3(9)
(h) Established Federal standard means and 6(a) of the Act.
any operative standard established by (b) The Assistant Secretary of Labor
any agency of the United States and in may at any time before April 28, 1973,
effect on April 28, 1971, or contained in on his own motion or upon the written
any Act of Congress in force on the petition of any person, by rule promul-
date of enactment of the Williams- gate as a standard any national con-
Steiger Occupational Safety and sensus standard and any established
Health Act. Federal standard, pursuant to and in
accordance with section 6(a) of the Act,
1910.3 Petitions for the issuance, and, in addition, may modify or revoke
amendment, or repeal of a stand- any standard in this part 1910. In the
ard. event of conflict among any such
(a) Any interested person may peti- standards, the Assistant Secretary of
tion in writing the Assistant Secretary Labor shall take the action necessary
of Labor to promulgate, modify, or re- to eliminate the conflict, including the
voke a standard. The petition should revocation or modification of a stand-
set forth the terms or the substance of ard in this part, so as to assure the
92
greatest protection of the safety or (d) In the event a standard protects

health of the affected employees. on its face a class of persons larger
than employees, the standard shall be
1910.5 Applicability of standards. applicable under this part only to em-
(a) Except as provided in paragraph ployees and their employment and
(b) of this section, the standards con- places of employment.
tained in this part shall apply with re- (e) [Reserved]
spect to employments performed in a (f) An employer who is in compliance
with any standard in this part shall be
workplace in a State, the District of
deemed to be in compliance with the
Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puer-
requirement of section 5(a)(1) of the
to Rico, the Virgin Islands, American
Act, but only to the extent of the con-
Samoa, Guam, Trust Territory of the
dition, practice, means, method, oper-
Pacific Islands, Wake Island, Outer
ation, or process covered by the stand-
Continental Shelf lands defined in the ard.
Outer Continental Shelf Lands Act,
Johnston Island, and the Canal Zone. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 58
(b) None of the standards in this part FR 35308, June 30, 1993]
shall apply to working conditions of 1910.6 Incorporation by reference.
employees with respect to which Fed-
eral agencies other than the Depart- (a)(1) The standards of agencies of
ment of Labor, or State agencies act- the U.S. Government, and organiza-
ing under section 274 of the Atomic En- tions which are not agencies of the
ergy Act of 1954, as amended (42 U.S.C. U.S. Government which are incor-
porated by reference in this part, have
2021), exercise statutory authority to
the same force and effect as other
prescribe or enforce standards or regu-
standards in this part. Only the manda-
lations affecting occupational safety or
tory provisions (i.e., provisions con-
health.
taining the word shall or other man-
(c)(1) If a particular standard is spe- datory language) of standards incor-
cifically applicable to a condition, porated by reference are adopted as
practice, means, method, operation, or standards under the Occupational Safe-
process, it shall prevail over any dif- ty and Health Act.
ferent general standard which might (2) Any changes in the standards in-
otherwise be applicable to the same corporated by reference in this part
condition, practice, means, method, op- and an official historic file of such
eration, or process. For example, changes are available for inspection at
1915.23(c)(3) of this title prescribes the national office of the Occupational
personal protective equipment for cer- Safety and Health Administration,
tain ship repairmen working in speci- U.S. Department of Labor, Washington,
fied areas. Such a standard shall apply, DC 20210.
and shall not be deemed modified nor (3) The materials listed in paragraphs
superseded by any different general (b) through (w) of this section are in-
standard whose provisions might other- corporated by reference in the cor-
wise be applicable, to the ship repair- responding sections noted as they exist
men working in the areas specified in on the date of the approval, and a no-
1915.23(c)(3). tice of any change in these materials
(2) On the other hand, any standard will be published in the FEDERAL REG-
shall apply according to its terms to ISTER. These incorporations by ref-
any employment and place of employ- erence were approved by the Director
ment in any industry, even though par- of the Federal Register in accordance
ticular standards are also prescribed with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51.
for the industry, as in subpart B or sub- (4) Copies of the following standards
part R of this part, to the extent that that are issued by the respective pri-
none of such particular standards ap- vate standards organizations may be
plies. To illustrate, the general stand- obtained from the issuing organiza-
ard regarding noise exposure in 1910.95 tions. The materials are available for
applies to employments and places of purchase at the corresponding address-
employment in pulp, paper, and paper- es of the private standards organiza-
board mills covered by 1910.261. tions noted below. In addition, all are
93
available for inspection at the Office of proved for 1910.66 appendix D, (c)(4);
the Federal Register, 800 North Capitol 1910.68 (b)(4) and (b)(8)(ii); 1910.261
Street, NW., suite 700, Washington DC, (a)(3)(ii), (b)(3), (c)(3)(i), (c)(15)(ii),
and through the OSHA Docket Office, (e)(4), (g)(13), (h)(1), (h)(3)(vi), (j)(4) (ii)
room N2625, U.S. Department of Labor, and (iv), (j)(5)(i), (k)(6), (k)(13)(i), and
200 Constitution Ave., Washington, DC (k)(15).
20210, or any of its regional offices. (6) ANSI A13.156 Scheme for the
(b) The following material is avail- Identification of Piping Systems, IBR
able for purchase from the American approved for 1910.253(d)(4)(ii);
Conference of Governmental Industrial 1910.261(a)(3)(iii); 1910.262(c)(7).
Hygienists (ACGIH), 1014 Broadway, (7) ANSI A14.168 Safety Code for
Cincinnati OH 45202: Portable Wood Ladders, Supplemented
(1) Industrial Ventilation: A Manual by ANSI A14.1a77, IBR approved for
of Recommended Practice (22nd ed., 1910.261 (a)(3)(iv) and (c)(3)(i).
1995), incorporation by reference (IBR) (8) ANSI A14.256 Safety Code for
approved for 1910.124(b)(4)(iii). Portable Metal Ladders, Supplemented
(2) Threshold Limit Values and Bio- by ANSI A14.2a77, IBR approved for
logical Exposure Indices for 198687 1910.261 (a)(3)(v) and (c)(3)(i).
(1986), IBR approved for 1910.120, PEL (9) ANSI A14.356 Safety Code for
definition. Fixed Ladders, IBR approved for
(c) The following material is avail- 1910.68(b) (4) and (12); 1910.179(c)(2);
able for purchase from the American and 1910.261 (a)(3)(vi) and (c)(3)(i).
Society of Agricultural Engineers (10) ANSI A17.165 Safety Code for
(ASAE), 2950 Niles Road, Post Office Elevators, Dumbwaiters and Moving
Box 229, St. Joseph, MI 49085: Walks, Including Supplements, A17.1a
(1) ASAE Emblem for Identifying (1967); A17.1b (1968); A17.1c (1969); A17.1d
Slow Moving Vehicles, ASAE S276.2 (1970), IBR approved for 1910.261
(1968), IBR approved for 1910.145(d)(10). (a)(3)(vii), (g)(11)(i), and (l)(4).
(2) [Reserved] (11) ANSI A17.260 Practice for the
(d) The following material is avail- Inspection of Elevators, Including Sup-
able for purchase from the Agriculture plements, A17.2a (1965), A17.2b (1967),
Ammonia Institute-Rubber Manufac- IBR approved for 1910.261(a)(3)(viii).
turers (AAIRMA) Association, 1400 K (12) ANSI A90.169 Safety Standard
St. NW, Washington DC 20005: for Manlifts, IBR approved for
(1) AAI-RMA Specifications for An- 1910.68(b)(3).
hydrous Ammonia Hose, IBR approved (13) ANSI A92.269 Standard for Vehi-
for 1910.111(b)(8)(i). cle Mounted Elevating and Rotating
(2) [Reserved] Work Platforms, IBR approved for
(e) The following material is avail- 1910.67 (b)(1), (2), (c)(3), and (4) and
able for purchase from the American 1910.268(s)(1)(v).
National Standards Institute (ANSI), (14) ANSI A120.170 Safety Code for
11 West 42nd St., New York, NY 10036: Powered Platforms for Exterior Build-
(1) ANSI A10.244 Safety Code for ing Maintenance, IBR approved for
Building Construction, IBR approved 1910.66 app. D (b) through (d).
for 1910.144(a)(1)(ii). (15) ANSI B7.170 Safety Code for the
(2) ANSI A10.370 Safety Require- Use, Care and Protection of Abrasive
ments for Explosive-Actuated Fas- Wheels, IBR approved for
tening Tools, IBR approved for 1910.94(b)(5)(i)(a); 1910.215(b)(12); and
1910.243(d)(1)(i). 1910.218(j)(5).
(3) ANSI A11.165 (R 70) Practice for (16) ANSI B15.153 (R 58) Safety Code
Industrial Lighting, IBR approved for for Mechanical Power Transmission
1910.219(c)(5)(iii); 1910.261 (a)(3)(i), Apparatus, IBR approved for
(c)(10), and (k)(21); and 1910.265(c)(2). 1910.68(b)(4) and 1910.261 (a)(3)(ix),
(4) ANSI A11.165 Practice for Indus- (b)(1), (e)(3), (e)(9), (f)(4), (j)(5)(iv),
trial Lighting, IBR approved for (k)(12), and (l)(3).
1910.262(c)(6) and 1910.265(d)(2)(i)(a). (17) ANSI B20.157 Safety Code for
(5) ANSI A12.167 Safety Require- Conveyors, Cableways, and Related
ments for Floor and Wall Openings, Equipment, IBR approved for
Railings, and Toe Boards, IBR ap- 1910.218(j)(3); 1910.261 (a)(3)(x), (b)(1),
94
(c)(15)(iv), (f)(4), and (j)(2); (33) ANSI C171 National Electrical

1910.265(c)(18)(i). Code, IBR approved for 1910.66 appen-
(18) ANSI B30.243 (R 52) Safety Code dix D (c)(22) (i) and (vii).
for Cranes, Derricks, and Hoists, IBR (34) ANSI C33.256 Safety Standard
approved for 1910.261 (a)(3)(xi), for Transformer-Type Arc Welding Ma-
(c)(2)(vi), and (c)(8) (i) and (iv). chines, IBR approved for 1910.254(b)(1).
(19) ANSI B30.2.067 Safety Code for (35) ANSI D8.167 Practices for Rail-
Overhead and Gantry Cranes, IBR ap- road Highway Grade Crossing Protec-
proved for 1910.179(b)(2); 1910.261 tion, IBR approved for
(a)(3)(xii), (c)(2)(v), and (c)(8) (i) and 1910.265(c)(31)(i).
(iv). (36) ANSI H23.170 Seamless Copper
(20) ANSI B30.568 Safety Code for Water Tube Specification, IBR ap-
Crawler, Locomotive, and Truck proved for 1910.110(b) (8)(ii) and
Cranes, IBR approved for (13)(ii)(b)(1).
1910.180(b)(2) and 1910.261(a)(3)(xiii). (37) ANSI H38.769 Specification for
(21) ANSI B30.669 Safety Code for Aluminum Alloy Seamless Pipe and
Derricks, IBR approved for Seamless Extruded Tube, IBR approved
1910.181(b)(2) and 1910.268(j)(4)(iv) (E) for 1910.110(b)(8)(i).
and (H). (38) ANSI J6.471 Standard Specifica-
(22) ANSI B31.155 Code for Pressure tion for Rubber Insulating Blankets,
Piping, IBR approved for IBR approved for 1910.268 (f)(1) and
(n)(11)(v).
1910.261(g)(18)(iii).
(39) ANSI J6.671 Standard Specifica-
(23) ANSI B31.167, IBR approved for
tion for Rubber Insulating Gloves, IBR
1910.253(d)(1)(i)(A)
approved for 1910.268 (f)(1) and
(24) ANSI B31.1a63 Addenda to ANSI (n)(11)(iv).
B31.1 (1955), IBR approved for
(40) ANSI K13.167 Identification of
1910.261(g)(18)(iii). Gas Mask Canisters, IBR approved for
(25) ANSI B31.167 and Addenda B31.1 1910.261 (a)(3)(xvi) and (h)(2)(iii).
(1969) Code for Pressure Piping, IBR ap- (41) ANSI K61.160 Safety Require-
proved for 1910.103(b)(1)(iii)(b); ments for the Storage and Handling of
1910.104(b)(5)(ii); 1910.218 (d)(4) and Anhydrous Ammonia, IBR approved for
(e)(1)(iv); and 1910.261 (a)(3)(xiv) and 1910.111(b)(11)(i).
(g)(18)(iii). (42) ANSI K61.166 Safety Require-
(26) ANSI B31.268 Fuel Gas Piping, ments for the Storage and Handling of
IBR approved for 1910.261(g)(18)(iii). Anhydrous Ammonia, IBR approved for
(27) ANSI B31.366 Petroleum Refin- 1910.111(b)(11)(i).
ery Piping, IBR approved for (43) ANSI O1.154 (R 61) Safety Code
1910.103(b)(3)(v)(b). for Woodworking Machinery, IBR ap-
(28) ANSI B31.566 Addenda B31.5a proved for 1910.261 (a)(3)(xvii), (e)(7),
(1968) Refrigeration Piping, IB ap- and (i)(2).
proved for 1910.103(b)(3)(v)(b) and (44) ANSI S1.471 (R 76) Specification
1910.111(b)(7)(iii). for Sound Level Meters, IBR approved
(29) ANSI B56.169 Safety Standard for 1910.95 appendixes D and I.
for Powered Industrial Trucks, IBR ap- (45) ANSI S1.1171 (R 76) Specification
proved for 1910.178(a) (2) and (3) and for Octave, Half-Octave and Third-Oc-
1910.261 (a)(3)(xv), (b)(6), (m)(2), and tave Band Filter Sets, IBR approved
(m)(5)(iii). for 1910.95 appendix D.
(30) ANSI B57.165 Compressed Gas (46) ANSI S3.669 Specifications for
Cylinder Valve Outlet and Inlet Con- Audiometers, IBR approved for
nections, IBR approved for 1910.95(h)(2) and (5)(ii) and appendix D.
1910.253(b)(1)(iii). (47) ANSI Z4.168 Requirements for
(31) ANSI B71.168 Safety Specifica- Sanitation in Places of Employment,
tions for Power Lawn Mowers, IBR ap- IBR approved for 1910.261 (a)(3)(xviii)
proved for 1910.243(e)(1)(i). and (g)(15)(vi).
(32) ANSI B175.11991, Safety Require- (48) ANSI Z4.242 Standard Specifica-
ments for Gasoline-Powered Chain tions for Drinking Fountains, IBR ap-
Saws 1910.266(e)(2)(i). proved for 1910.142(c)(4).
95
(49) ANSI Z9.151 Safety Code for (61) ANSI Z4191, Personal Protec-
Ventilation and Operation of Open Sur- tion-Protective Footwear, IBR ap-
face Tanks, IBR approved for proved for 1910.136(b)(1).
1910.94(c)(5)(iii)(e) and 1910.261 (62) ANSI Z48.154 Method for Mark-
(a)(3)(xix), (g)(18)(v), and (h)(2)(i). ing Portable Compressed Gas Con-
(50) ANSI Z9.171 Practices for Ven- tainers to Identify the Material Con-
tilation and Operation of Open-Surface tained, IBR approved for
Tanks, IBR approved for 1910.103(b)(1)(i)(c); 1910.110(b)(5)(iii);
1910.124(b)(4)(iv). and 1910.253(b)(1)(ii).
(51) ANSI Z9.260 Fundamentals Gov- (63) ANSI Z48.154 (R 70) Method for
erning the Design and Operation of Marking Portable Compressed Gas Con-
Local Exhaust Systems, IBR approved tainers To Identify the Material Con-
for 1910.94(a)(4)(i) introductory text, tained, IBR approved for 1910.111(e)(1)
(a)(6) introductory text, (b)(3)(ix), and 1910.134(d)(4).
(b)(4)(i) and (ii), (c)(3)(i) introductory (64) ANSI Z49.167 Safety in Welding
text, (c)(5)(iii)(b), and (c)(7)(iv)(a); and Cutting, IBR approved for
1910.261(a)(3)(xx), (g)(1)(i) and (iii), and 1910.252(c)(1)(iv) (A) and (B).
(h)(2)(ii). (65) ANSI Z53.167 Safety Color Code
(52) ANSI Z9.279 Fundamentals Gov- for Marking Physical Hazards and the
erning the Design and Operation of Identification of Certain Equipment,
Local Exhaust Systems, IBR approved IBR approved for 1910.97(a)(3)(ii);
for 1910.124(b)(4)(i). 1910.145(d) (2), (4), and (6).
(53) ANSI Z12.1268 Standard for the (66) ANSI Z54.163 Safety Standard
Prevention of Sulfur Fires and Explo- for Non-Medical X-Ray and Sealed
sions, IBR approved for 1910.261 Gamma Ray Sources, IBR approved for
(a)(3)(xxi), (d)(1)(i), (f)(2)(iv), and 1910.252(d) (1)(vii) and (2)(ii).
(g)(1)(i).
(67) ANSI Z87.168 Practice of Occu-
(54) ANSI Z12.2062 (R 69) Code for the
pational and Educational Eye and Face
Prevention of Dust Explosions in
Protection, IBR approved for
Woodworking and Wood Flour Manu-
1910.133(b)(2); 1910.252(b)(2)(ii)(I); and
facturing Plants, IBR approved for
1910.261 (a)(3)(xxv), (d)(1)(ii), (f)(5),
1910.265(c)(20)(i).
(g)(10), (g)(15)(v), (g)(18)(ii), and (i)(4).
(55) ANSI Z21.3064 Requirements for
Gas Appliances and Gas Piping Instal- (68) ANSI Z87.189, Practice for Occu-
lations, IBR approved for pational and Educational Eye and Face
1910.265(c)(15). Protection, IBR approved for
(56) ANSI Z24.2257 Method of Meas- 1910.133(b)(1).
urement of Real-Ear Attenuation of (69) ANSI Z88.269 Practices for Res-
Ear Protectors at Threshold, IBR ap- piratory Protection, IBR approved for
proved for 1910.261(a)(3)(xxii). 1910.94(c)(6)(iii)(a); 1910.134(c); and
(57) ANSI Z33.161 Installation of 1910.261 (a)(3)(xxvi), (b)(2), (f)(5),
Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, (g)(15)(v), (h)(2) (iii) and (iv), and (i)(4).
Stock, and Vapor Removal or Con- (70) ANSI Z89.169 Safety Require-
veying, IBR approved for ments for Industrial Head Protection,
1910.94(a)(4)(i); 1910.261 (a)(3)(xxiii) IBR approved for 1910.135(b)(2); and
and (f)(5); and 1910.265(c)(20)(i). 1910.261 (a)(3)(xxvii), (b)(2), (g)(15)(v),
(58) ANSI Z33.166 Installation of and (i)(4).
Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, (71) ANSI Z89.186, Protective
Stock, and Vapor Removal or Con- Headwear for Industrial Workers Re-
veying, IBR approved for quirements, IBR approved for
1910.94(a)(2)(ii). 1910.135(b)(1).
(59) ANSI Z35.168 Specifications for (72) ANSI Z89.271 Safety Require-
Accident Prevention Signs, IBR ap- ments for Industrial Protective Hel-
proved for 1910.261 (a)(3)(xxiv) and mets for Electrical Workers, Class B,
(c)(16). IBR approved for 1910.268(i)(1).
(60) ANSI Z41.167 Mens Safety Toe (f) The following material is avail-
Footwear, IBR approved for able for purchase from the American
1910.94(a)(5)(v); 1910.136(b)(2) and Petroleum Institute (API), 1220 L
1910.261(i)(4). Street NW, Washington DC 20005:
96
(1) API 12A (Sept. 1951) Specification 1910.111(b)(2) (i), (ii), and (iv); and
for Oil Storage Tanks With Riveted 1910.169(a)(2) (i) and (ii);
Shells, 7th Ed., IBR approved for (4) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
1910.106(b)(1)(i)(a)(2). Code, Sec. VIII, Paragraph UG84, 1968,
(2) API 12B (May 1958) Specification IBR approved for 1910.104 (b)(4)(ii) and
for Bolted Production Tanks, 11th Ed., (b)(5)(iii);
With Supplement No. 1, Mar. 1962, IBR (5) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
approved for 1910.106(b)(1)(i)(a)(3). Code, Sec. VIII, Unfired Pressure Ves-
(3) API 12D (Aug. 1957) Specification sels, Including Addenda (1969), IBR ap-
for Large Welded Production Tanks, proved for 1910.261; 1910.262;
7th Ed., IBR approved for 1910.263(i)(24)(ii);
1910.106(b)(1)(i)(a)(3). (6) Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels
(4) API 12F (Mar. 1961) Specification
for Petroleum Liquids and Gases of the
for Small Welded Production Tanks,
API and the ASME, 1951 Ed., IBR ap-
5th Ed., IBR approved for
proved for 1910.110(b)(3)(iii); and
1910.106(b)(1)(i)(a)(3).
(5) API 620, Fourth Ed. (1970) Includ- (7) ASME B56.61992 (with addenda),
ing appendix R, Recommended Rules Safety Standard for Rough Terrain
for Design and Construction of Large Forklift Trucks, IBR approved for
Welded Low Pressure Storage Tanks, 1910.266(f)(4).
IBR approved for 1910.103(c)(1)(i)(a); (h) The following material is avail-
1910.106(b)(1)(iv)(b)(1); and 1910.111(d)(1) able for purchase from the American
(ii) and (iii). Society for Testing and Materials
(6) API 650 (1966) Welded Steel Tanks (ASTM), 1916 Race Street, Philadel-
for Oil Storage, 3rd Ed., IBR approved phia, PA 19103:
for 1910.106(b)(1)(iii)(a)(2). (1) ASTM A 4768 Malleable Iron
(7) API 1104 (1968) Standard for Weld- Castings, IBR approved for
ing Pipelines and Related Facilities, 1910.111(b)(7)(vi).
IBR approved for 1910.252(d)(1)(v). (2) ASTM A 5369 Welded and Seam-
(8) API 2000 (1968) Venting Atmos- less Steel Pipe, IBR approved for
pheric and Low Pressure Storage 1910.110(b)(8)(i) (a) and (b) and
Tanks, IBR approved for 1910.111(b)(7)(iv).
1910.106(b)(2)(iv)(b)(1). (3) ASTM A 12666 Gray Iron Casting
(9) API 2201 (1963) Welding or Hot for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fitting,
Tapping on Equipment Containing IBR approved for 1910.111(b)(7)(vi).
Flammables, IBR approved for (4) ASTM A 39165 (ANSI G61.11968)
1910.252(d)(1)(vi). Alloy Steel Chain, IBR approved for
(g) The following material is avail- 1910.184(e)(4).
able for purchase from the American (5) ASTM A 39568 Ductile Iron for
Society of Mechanical Engineers Use at Elevated Temperatures, IBR ap-
(ASME), United Engineering Center, proved for 1910.111(b)(7)(vi).
345 East 47th Street, New York, NY (6) ASTM B 8869 Seamless Copper
10017:
Water Tube, IBR approved for
(1) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
1910.110(b) (8)(i)(a) and (13)(ii)(b)(1).
Code, Sec. VIII, 1949, 1950, 1952, 1956,
(7) ASTM B 8866A Seamless Copper
1959, and 1962 Ed., IBR approved for
1910.110 (b)(10)(iii) (Table H26), (d)(2) Water Tube, IBR approved for
(Table H31); (e)(3)(i) (Table H32), 1910.252(d)(1)(i)(A)(2).
(h)(2) (Table H34); and (8) ASTM B 11764 Salt Spray (Fog)
1910.111(b)(2)(vi); Test, IBR approved for
(2) ASME Code for Pressure Vessels, 1910.268(g)(2)(i)(A).
1968 Ed., IBR approved for (9) ASTM B 21068 Aluminum-Alloy
1910.106(i)(3)(i); 1910.110(g)(2)(iii)(b)(2); Drawn Seamless Tubes, IBR approved
and 1910.217(b)(12); for 1910.110(b)(8)(ii).
(3) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel (10) ASTM B 24169, IBR approved for
Code, Sec. VIII, 1968, IBR approved for 1910.110(b)(8)(i) introductory text.
1910.103; 1910.104(b)(4)(ii); 1910.106 (11) ASTM D 565 Test for Penetra-
(b)(1)(iv)(b)(2) and (i)(3)(ii); 1910.107; tion by Bituminous Materials, IBR ap-
1910.110(b)(11) (i)(b) and (iii)(a)(1); proved for 1910.106(a)(17).
97
(12) ASTM D 5670 Test for Flash (2) Publication Model Performance
Point by Tag Closed Tester, IBR ap- Criteria for Structural Fire Fighters
proved for 1910.106(a)(14)(i). Helmets, IBR approved for
(13) ASTM D 8662 Test for Distilla- 1910.156(e)(5)(i).
tion of Petroleum Products, IBR ap- (k) The following material is avail-
proved for 1910.106(a)(5) and able for purchase from the Compressed
1910.119(b) Boiling point. Gas Association (CGA), 1235 Jefferson
(14) ASTM D 8856 Test for Saybolt Davis Highway, Arlington, VA 22202:
Viscosity, IBR approved for (1) CGA C6 (1968) Standards for Vis-
1910.106(a)(37). ual Inspection of Compressed Gas Cyl-
(15) ASTM D 9371 Test for Flash inders, IBR approved for 1910.101(a).
Point by Pensky Martens, IBR ap- (2) CGA C8 (1962) Standard for Re-
proved for 1910.106(a)(14)(ii). qualification of ICC3HT Cylinders,
(16) ASTM D 32368, IBR approved for IBR approved for 1910.101(a).
1910.106(a)(30) (3) CGA G1 (1966) Acetylene, IBR ap-
(17) ASTM D 44565 Test for Viscosity proved for 1910.102(a).
of Transparent and Opaque Liquids, (4) CGA G1.3 (1959) Acetylene Trans-
IBR approved for 1910.106(a)(37). mission for Chemical Synthesis, IBR
(18) ASTM D 169268 Test for Flam- approved for 1910.102(b).
mability of Plastic Sheeting and Cel- (5) CGA G1.4 (1966) Standard for
lular Plastics, IBR approved for Acetylene Cylinder Charging Plants,
1910.103(c)(1)(v)(d). IBR approved for 1910.102(b).
(19) ASTM D 216166 Conversion Ta-
(6) CGA G7.1 (1966) Commodity Spec-
bles For SUS, IBR approved for
ification, IBR approved for
1910.106(a)(37).
1910.134(d)(1).
(i) The following material is avail-
(7) CGA G8.1 (1964) Standard for the
able for purchase from the American
Installation of Nitrous Oxide Systems
Welding Society (AWS), 550 NW,
at Consumer Sites, IBR approved for
LeJeune Road, P.O. Box 351040, Miami
1910.105.
FL 33135:
(1) AWS A3.0 (1969) Terms and Defini- (8) CGA P1 (1965) Safe Handling of
tions, IBR approved for 1910.251(c). Compressed Gases, IBR approved for
(2) AWS A6.1 (1966) Recommended 1910.101(b).
Safe Practices for Gas Shielded Arc (9) CGA P3 (1963) Specifications,
Welding, IBR approved for Properties, and Recommendations for
1910.254(d)(1). Packaging, Transportation, Storage
(3) AWS B3.041 Standard Qualifica- and Use of Ammonium Nitrate, IBR ap-
tion Procedure, IBR approved for proved for 1910.109(i)(1)(ii)(b).
1910.67(c)(5)(i). (10) CGA S1.1 (1963) and 1965 Ad-
(4) AWS D1.01966 Code for Welding in denda. Safety Release Device Stand-
Building Construction, IBR approved ardsCylinders for Compressed Gases,
for 1910.27(b)(6). IBR approved for 1910.101(c);
(5) AWS D2.069 Specifications for 1910.103(c)(1)(iv)(a)(2).
Welding Highway and Railway Bridges, (11) CGA S1.2 (1963) Safety Release
IBR approved for 1910.67(c)(5)(iv). Device Standards, Cargo and Portable
(6) AWS D8.461 Recommended Prac- Tanks for Compressed Gases, IBR ap-
tices for Automotive Welding Design, proved for 1910.101(c);
IBR approved for 1910.67(c)(5)(ii). 1910.103(c)(1)(iv)(a)(2).
(7) AWS D10.969 Standard Qualifica- (12) CGA S1.3 (1959) Safety Release
tion of Welding Procedures and Weld- Device Standards-Compressed Gas
ers for Piping and Tubing, IBR ap- Storage Containers, IBR approved for
proved for 1910.67(c)(5)(iii). 1910.103(c)(1)(iv)(a)(2);
(j) The following material is avail- 1910.104(b)(6)(iii); and
able for purchase from the Department 1910.111(d)(4)(ii)(b).
of Commerce: (13) CGA 1957 Standard Hose Connec-
(1) Commercial Standard, CS 20256 tion Standard, IBR approved for
(1961) Industrial Lifts and Hinged 1910.253(e) (4)(v) and (5)(iii).
Loading Ramps, IBR approved for (14) CGA and RMA (Rubber Manufac-
1910.30(a)(3). turers Association) Specification for
98
Rubber Welding Hose (1958), IBR ap- (3) NFPA 331969 Standard for Spray
proved for 1910.253(e)(5)(i). Finishing Using Flammable and Com-
(15) CGA 1958 Regulator Connection bustible Material, IBR approved for
Standard, IBR approved for 1910.253(e) 1910.94(c) (1)(ii), (2), (3) (i) and (iii),
(4)(iv) and (6). and (5).
(l) The following material is avail- (4) NFPA 341966 Standard for Dip
able for purchase from the Crane Man- Tanks Containing Flammable or Com-
ufacturers Association of America, bustible Liquids, IBR approved for
Inc. (CMAA), 1 Thomas Circle NW, 1910.124(b)(4)(iv).
Washington DC 20005: (5) NFPA 341995 Standard for Dip
(1) CMAA Specification 1B61, Speci- Tanks Containing Flammable or Com-
fications for Electric Overhead Trav- bustible Liquids, IBR approved for
eling Cranes, IBR approved for 1910.124(b)(4)(ii).
1910.179(b)(6)(i). (6) NFPA 351970 Standard for the
(2) [Reserved] Manufacture of Organic Coatings, IBR
(m) The following material is avail- approved for 1910.106(j)(6)(ii).
able for purchase from the General (7) NFPA 361967 Standard for Sol-
Services Administration: vent Extraction Plants, IBR approved
(1) GSA Pub. GG-B0067b, Air Com- for 1910.106(j)(6)(iii).
pressed for Breathing Purposes, or In- (8) NFPA 371970 Standard for the In-
terim Federal Specifications, Apr. 1965, stallation and Use of Stationary Com-
IBR approved for 1910.134(d)(4). bustion Engines and Gas Turbines, IBR
(2) [Reserved] approved for 1910.106(j)(6)(iv) and
(n) The following material is avail- 1910.110 (b)(20)(iv)(c) and (e)(11).
able for purchase from the Department (9) NFPA 51B1962 Standard for Fire
of Health and Human Services: Protection in Use of Cutting and Weld-
(1) Publication No. 76120 (1975), List ing Processes, IBR approved for
of Personal Hearing Protectors and At- 1910.252(a)(1) introductory text.
tenuation Data, IBR approved for (10) NFPA 541969 Standard for the
1910.95 App. B. Installation of Gas Appliances and Gas
(2) [Reserved] Piping, IBR approved for
(o) The following material is avail- 1910.110(b)(20)(iv)(a).
able for purchase from the Institute of (11) NFPA 54A1969 Standard for the
Makers of Explosives (IME), 420 Lex- Installation of Gas Piping and Gas
ington Avenue, New York, NY 10017: Equipment on Industrial Premises and
(1) IME Pamphlet No. 17, 1960, Safety Certain Other Premises, IBR approved
in the Handling and Use of Explosives, for 1910.110(b)(20)(iv)(b).
IBR approved for 1910.261 (a)(4)(iii) (12) NFPA 581969 Standard for the
and (c)(14)(ii). Storage and Handling of Liquefied Pe-
(2) [Reserved] troleum Gases (ANSI Z106.11970), IBR
(p) The following material is avail- approved for 1910.110 (b)(3)(iv) and
able for purchase from the National (i)(3) (i) and (ii); and 1910.178(f)(2).
Electrical Manufacturers Association (13) NFPA 591968 Standard for the
(NEMA): Storage and Handling of Liquefied Pe-
(1) NEMA EW1 (1962) Requirements troleum Gases at Utility Gas Plants,
for Electric Arc Welding Apparatus, IBR approved for 1910.110 (b)(3)(iv)
IBR approved for 1910.254(b)(1). and (i)(2)(iv).
(2) [Reserved] (14) NFPA 621967 Standard for the
(q) The following material is avail- Prevention of Dust Explosions in the
able for purchase from the National Production, Packaging, and Handling
Fire Protection Association (NFPA), 11 of Pulverized Sugar and Cocoa, IBR ap-
Tracy Drive, Avon, MA 02322: proved for 1910.263(k)(2)(i).
(1) NFPA 30 (1969) Flammable and (15) NFPA 681954 Guide for Explosion
Combustible Liquids Code, IBR ap- Venting, IBR approved for
proved for 1910.178(f)(1). 1910.94(a)(2)(iii).
(2) NFPA 321970 Standard for Dry (16) NFPA 701971 National Electrical
Cleaning Plants, IBR approved for Code, IBR approved for 1910.66 App.
1910.106(j)(6)(i). D(c)(2).
99
(17) NFPA 781968 Lightning Protec- ered Industrial Trucks, IBR approved
tion Code, IBR approved for for 1910.110(e)(2)(iv).
1910.109(i)(6)(ii). (31) NFPA 5661965 Standard for the
(18) NFPA 801968 Standard for Fire Installation of Bulk Oxygen Systems
Doors and Windows, IBR approved for at Consumer Sites, IBR approved for
1910.106(d)(4)(i). 1910.253 (b)(4)(iv) and (c)(2)(v).
(19) NFPA 801970 Standard for the (32) NFPA 6561959 Code for the Pre-
Installation of Fire Doors and Win- vention of Dust Ignition in Spice
dows, IBR approved for Grinding Plants, IBR approved for
1910.253(f)(6)(i)(I). 1910.263(k)(2)(i).
(20) NFPA 86A1969 Standard for Oven (33) NFPA 19711975 Protective Cloth-
and Furnaces Design, Location and ing for Structural Fire Fighting, IBR
Equipment, IBR approved for 1910.107 approved for 1910.156(e)(3)(ii) introduc-
(j)(1) and (l)(3) and 1910.108 (b)(2) and
tory text.
(d)(2).
(r) The following material is avail-
(21) NFPA 911961 Standard for the
able for purchase from the National
Installation of Blower and Exhaust
Systems for Dust, Stock, and Vapor Food Plant Institute, 1700 K St. NW.,
Removal or Conveying (ANSI Z33.161), Washington, DC 20006:
IBR approved for 1910.107(d)(1). (1) Definition and Test Procedures for
(22) NFPA 911969 Standards for Ammonium Nitrate Fertilizer (Nov.
Blower and Exhaust Systems, IBR ap- 1964), IBR approved for 1910.109 Table
proved for 1910.108(b)(1). H22, ftn. 3.
(23) NFPA 961970 Standard for the (2) [Reserved]
Installation of Equipment for the Re- (s) The following material is avail-
moval of Smoke and Grease Laden Va- able for purchase from the National In-
pors from Commercial Cooking Equip- stitute for Occupational Safety and
ment, IBR approved for Health (NIOSH):
1910.110(b)(20)(iv)(d). (1) Registry of Toxic Effects of Chem-
(24) NFPA 1011970 Code for Life Safe- ical Substances, 1978, IBR approved for
ty From Fire in Buildings and Struc- 1910.20(c)(13)(i) and appendix B.
tures, IBR approved for (2) Development of Criteria for Fire
1910.261(a)(4)(ii). Fighters Gloves; Vol. II, Part II; Test
(25) NFPA 203M1970 Manual on Roof Methods, 1976, IBR approved for
Coverings, IBR approved for 1910.156(e)(4)(i) introductory text.
1910.109(i)(1)(iii)(c). (3) NIOSH Recommendations for Oc-
(26) NFPA 2511969 Standard Methods cupational Safety and Health Stand-
of Fire Tests of Building Construction ards (Sept. 1987), IBR approved for
and Materials, IBR approved for 1910.120 PEL definition.
1910.106 (d)(3)(ii) introductory text
(t) The following material is avail-
and (d)(4)(i).
able for purchase from the Public
(27) NFPA 3021968 Fire Protection
Health Service:
Standard for Motor-Craft (Pleasure and
Commercial), IBR approved for (1) U.S. Pharmacopeia, IBR approved
1910.265(d)(2)(iv) introductory text. for 1910.134(d)(1).
(28) NFPA 3851966 Recommended (2) Publication No. 934 (1962), Food
Regulatory Standard for Tank Vehicles Service Sanitation Ordinance and
for Flammable and Combustible Liq- Code, Part V of the Food Service Sani-
uids, IBR approved for tation Manual, IBR approved for
1910.106(g)(1)(i)(e)(1). 1910.142(i)(1).
(29) NFPA 4961967 Standard for (u) The following material is avail-
Purged Enclosures for Electrical able for purchase from the Society of
Equipment in Hazardous Locations, Automotive Engineers (SAE), 485 Lex-
IBR approved for ington Avenue, New York, NY 10017:
1910.103(c)(1)(ix)(e)(1). (1) SAE J185, June 1988, Rec-
(30) NFPA 5051969 Standard for Type ommended Practice for Access Systems
Designations, Areas of Use, for Off-Road Machines, IBR approved
Maintenence, and Operation of Pow- for 1910.266(f)(5)(i).
100
(2) SAE J231, January 1981, Minimum (NRTL) means an organization which
Performance Criteria for Falling Ob- is recognized by OSHA in accordance
ject Protective Structure (FOPS), IBR with appendix A of this section and
approved for 1910.266(f)(3)(ii). which tests for safety, and lists or la-
(3) SAE J386, June 1985, Operator Re- bels or accepts, equipment or materials
straint Systems for Off-Road Work Ma- and which meets all of the following
chines, IBR approved for criteria:
1910.266(d)(3)(iv). (1) For each specified item of equip-
(4) SAE J397, April 1988, Deflection ment or material to be listed, labeled
Limiting Volume-ROPS/FOPS Labora- or accepted, the NRTL has the capa-
tory Evaluation, IBR approved for bility (including proper testing equip-
1910.266(f)(3)(iv). ment and facilities, trained staff, writ-
(5) SAE 765 (1961) SAE Recommended ten testing procedures, and calibration
Practice: Crane Loading Stability Test and quality control programs) to per-
Code, IBR approved for 1910.180 form:
(c)(1)(iii) and (e)(2)(iii)(a). (i) Testing and examining of equip-
(6) SAE J1040, April 1988, Perform- ment and materials for workplace safe-
ance Criteria for Rollover Protective ty purposes to determine conformance
Structures (ROPS) for Construction, with appropriate test standards; or
Earthmoving, Forestry and Mining Ma- (ii) Experimental testing and exam-
chines, IBR approved for ining of equipment and materials for
1910.266(f)(3)(ii). workplace safety purposes to deter-
(v) The following material is avail- mine conformance with appropriate
able for purchase from the Fertilizer test standards or performance in a
Institute, 1015 18th Street NW, Wash- specified manner.
ington, DC 20036: (2) The NRTL shall provide, to the
(1) Standard M1 (1953, 1955, 1957, 1960, extent needed for the particular equip-
1961, 1963, 1965, 1966, 1967, 1968), Super- ment or materials listed, labeled, or
seded by ANSI K61.11972, IBR approved accepted, the following controls or
for 1910.111(b)(1) (i) and (iii). services:
(2) [Reserved] (i) Implements control procedures for
(w) The following material is avail- identifying the listed and labeled
able for purchase from Underwriters equipment or materials;
Laboratories (UL), 207 East Ohio (ii) Inspects the run of production of
Street, Chicago, IL 60611: such items at factories for product
(1) UL 5861 Steel Underground Tanks evaluation purposes to assure conform-
for Flammable and Combustible Liq- ance with the test standards; and
uids, 5th Ed., IBR approved for (iii) Conducts field inspections to
1910.106(b)(1)(iii)(a)(1). monitor and to assure the proper use of
(2) UL 8063 Steel Inside Tanks for its identifying mark or labels on prod-
Oil-Burner Fuel, IBR approved for ucts;
1910.106(b)(1)(iii)(a)(1). (3) The NRTL is completely inde-
(3) UL 14268 Steel Above Ground pendent of employers subject to the
Tanks for Flammable and Combustible tested equipment requirements, and of
Liquids, IBR approved for any manufacturers or vendors of equip-
1910.106(b)(1)(iii)(a)(1). ment or materials being tested for
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49 these purposes; and,
FR 5321, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9231, Mar. 7, 1996; (4) The NRTL maintains effective
64 FR 13908, Mar. 23, 1999] procedures for:
(i) Producing creditable findings or
1910.7 Definition and requirements reports that are objective and without
for a nationally recognized testing bias; and
laboratory. (ii) Handling complaints and disputes
(a) Application. This section shall under a fair and reasonable system.
apply only when the term nationally (c) Test standards. An appropriate test
recognized testing laboratory is used in standard referred to in 1910.7(b)(1) (i)
other sections of this part. and (ii) is a document which specifies
(b) Laboratory requirements. The term the safety requirements for specific
nationally recognized testing laboratory equipment or class of equipment and is:
101
(1) Recognized in the United States tion of reports, evaluations and FED-
as a safety standard providing an ade- ERAL REGISTER notices; and
quate level of safety, and (ii) Audits of sites.
(2) Compatible with and maintained (2) The fee schedule established by
current with periodic revisions of ap- OSHA reflects the cost of performing
plicable national codes and installation the activities for each service listed in
standards, and paragraph (f)(1) of this section. OSHA
(3) Developed by a standards devel- calculates the fees based on either the
oping organization under a method pro- average or actual time required to per-
viding for input and consideration of form the work necessary; the staff
views of industry groups, experts, costs per hour (which include wages,
users, consumers, governmental au- fringe benefits, and expenses other
thorities, and others having broad ex- than travel for personnel that perform
perience in the safety field involved, or
or administer the activities covered by
(4) In lieu of paragraphs (c) (1), (2),
the fees); and the average or actual
and (3), the standard is currently des-
costs for travel when on-site reviews
ignated as an American National
are involved. The formula for the fee
Standards Institute (ANSI) safety-des-
ignated product standard or an Amer- calculation is as follows:
ican Society for Testing and Materials Activity Fee = [Average (or Actual)
(ASTM) test standard used for evalua- Hours to Complete the Activity Staff
tion of products or materials. Costs per Hour] + Average (or Actual)
(d) Alternative test standard. If a test- Travel Costs
ing laboratory desires to use a test
(3) (i) OSHA will review costs annu-
standard other than one allowed under
ally and will propose a revised fee
paragraph (c) of this section, then the
Assistant Secretary of Labor shall schedule, if warranted. In its review,
evaluate the proposed standard to de- OSHA will apply the formula estab-
termine that it provides an adequate lished in paragraph (f)(2) of this section
level of safety before it is used. to the current estimated costs for the
(e) Implementation. A testing organi- NRTL Program. If a change is war-
zation desiring recognition by OSHA as ranted, OSHA will follow the imple-
an NRTL shall request that OSHA mentation table in paragraph (f)(4) of
evaluate its testing and control pro- this section.
grams against the requirements in this (ii) OSHA will publish all fee sched-
section for any equipment or material ules in the FEDERAL REGISTER. Once
it may specify. The recognition proce- published, a fee schedule remains in ef-
dure shall be conducted in accordance fect until it is superseded by a new fee
with appendix A to this section. schedule. Any member of the public
(f) Fees. (1) Each applicant for NRTL may request a change to the fees in-
recognition and each NRTL must pay cluded in the current fee schedule.
fees for services provided by OSHA. Such a request must include appro-
OSHA will assess fees for the following priate documentation in support of the
services: suggested change. OSHA will consider
(i) Processing of applications for ini- such requests during its annual review
tial recognition, expansion of recogni- of the fee schedule.
tion, or renewal of recognition, includ- (4) OSHA will implement fee assess-
ing on-site reviews; review and evalua- ment, collection, and payment as fol-
tion of the applications; and prepara- lows:
Approximate dates Action required
I. Annual Review of Fee Schedule
November 1 .............................. OSHA will publish any proposed new Fee Schedule in the Federal Register, if OSHA deter-
mines changes in the schedule are warranted.
November 16 ............................ Comments due on the proposed new Fee Schedule.
December 15 ............................ OSHA will publish the final Fee Schedule in the Federal Register, making it effective.
102
Approximate dates Action required
II. Application Processing Fees
Time of application ................... Applicant must pay the applicable fees shown in the Fee Schedule when submitting the appli-
cation; OSHA will not begin processing until fees are received.
Publication of preliminary notice Applicant must pay remainder of fees; OSHA cancels application if fees are not paid when
due.
III. Audit Fees

After audit performed ................ OSHA will bill each existing NRTL for the audit fees in effect at the time of audit, but will re-
flect actual travel costs and staff time in the bill.
30 days after bill date ............... NRTLs must pay audit fees; OSHA will assess late fee if audit fees are not paid.
45 days after bill date ............... OSHA will send a letter to the NRTL requesting immediate payment of the audit fees and late
fee
60 days after bill date ............... OSHA will publish a notice in the Federal Register announcing its intent to revoke recognition
for NRTLs that have not paid these audit fees.
(5) OSHA will provide details about b. However, in determining eligibility for a
how to pay the fees through appro- foreign-based testing agency or organization,
priate OSHA Program Directives, OSHA shall take into consideration the pol-
icy of the foreign government regarding both
which will be available on the OSHA the acceptance in that country of testing
web site. data, equipment acceptances, and listings,
and labeling, which are provided through na-
APPENDIX A TO 1910.7OSHA RECOGNITION tionally recognized testing laboratories rec-
PROCESS FOR NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED ognized by the Assistant Secretary, and the
TESTING LABORATORIES accessibility to government recognition or a
similar system in that country by U.S.-based
INTRODUCTION safety-related testing agencies, whether rec-
ognized by the Assistant Secretary or not, if
This appendix provides requirements and such recognition or a similar system is re-
criteria which OSHA will use to evaluate and quired by that country.
recognize a Nationally Recognized Testing 2. Content of application. a. The applicant
Laboratory (NRTL). This process will in- shall provide sufficient information and de-
clude the the evaluation of the product eval- tail demonstrating that it meets the require-
uation and control programs being operated ments set forth in 1910.7, in order for an in-
by the NRTL, as well as the NRTLs testing formed decision concerning recognition to be
facilities being used in its program. In the made by the Assistant Secretary.
evaluation of the NRTLs, OSHA will use ei- b. The applicant also shall identify the
ther consensus-based standards currently in scope of the NRTL-related activity for which
use nationally, or other standards or criteria the applicant wishes to be recognized. This
which may be considered appropriate. This will include identifying the testing methods
appendix implements the definition of NRTL it will use to test or judge the specific equip-
in 29 CFR 1910.7 which sets out the criteria ment and materials for which recognition is
that a laboratory must meet to be recog- being requested, unless such test methods
nized by OSHA (initially and on a continuing are already specified in the test standard. If
basis). The appendix is broader in scope, pro- requested to do so by OSHA, the applicant
viding procedures for renewal, expansion and shall provide documentation of the efficacy
revocation of OSHA recognition. Except as of these testing methods.
otherwise provided, the burden is on the ap- c. The applicant may include whatever en-
plicant to establish by a preponderance of closures, attachments, or exhibits the appli-
the evidence that it is entitled to recogni- cant deems appropriate. The application
tion as an NRTL. If further detailing of these need not be submitted on a Federal form.
requirements and criteria will assist the 3. Filing office location. The application
NRTLs or OSHA in this activity, this detail- shall be filed with: NRTL Recognition Pro-
ing will be done through appropriate OSHA gram, Occupational Safety and Health Ad-
Program Directives. ministration, U.S. Department of Labor, 200
Constitution Avenue, NW., Washington, DC
I. Procedures for Initial OSHA Recognition
20210.
A. Applications. 4. Amendments and withdrawals. a. An appli-
cation may be revised by an applicant at any
1. Eligibility. a. Any testing agency or orga- time prior to the completion of activity
nization considering itself to meet the defi- under paragraph I.B.4. of this appendix.
nition of nationally recognized testing lab- b. An application may be withdrawn by an
oratory as specified in 1910.7 may apply for applicant, without prejudice, at any time
OSHA recognition as an NRTL. prior to the final decision by the Assistant
103
Secretary in paragraph I.B.7.c. of this appen- 4. Preliminary finding by Assistant Secretary.
dix. a. The Assistant Secretary, or a special des-
ignee for this purpose, will make a prelimi-
B. Review and Decision Process; Issuance or nary finding as to whether the applicant has
Renewal. or has not met the requirements for recogni-
1. Acceptance and on-site review. a. Applica- tion, based on the completed application file,
tions submitted by eligible testing agencies the written staff recommendation, and the
will be accepted by OSHA, and their receipt statement of reasons supplied by the appli-
acknowledged in writing. After receipt of an cant if there remains a staff recommenda-
application, OSHA may request additional tion of disapproval.
information if it believes information rel- b. Notification of this preliminary finding
evant to the requirements for recognition will be sent to the applicant and subse-
has been omitted. quently published in the FEDERAL REGISTER.
b. OSHA shall, as necessary, conduct an c. This preliminary finding shall not be
on-site review of the testing facilities of the considered an official decision by the Assist-
applicant, as well as the applicants adminis- ant Secretary or OSHA, and does not confer
trative and technical practices, and, if nec- any change in status or any interim or tem-
essary, review any additional documentation porary recognition for the applicant.
underlying the application. 5. Public review and comment perioda. The
c. These on-site reviews will be conducted FEDERAL REGISTER notice of preliminary
by qualified individuals technically expert in finding will provide a period of not less than
these matters, including, as appropriate, 30 calendar days for written comments on
non-Federal consultants/contractors accept- the applicants fulfillment of the require-
able to OSHA. The protocol for each review ments for recognition. The application, sup-
will be based on appropriate national con- porting documents, staff recommendation,
sensus standards or international guides, statement of applicants reasons, and any
with such additions, changes, or deletions as comments received, will be available for pub-
may be considered necessary and appropriate lic inspection in the OSHA Docket Office.
in each case by OSHA. A written report shall b. Any member of the public, including the
be made of each on-site review and a copy applicant, may supply detailed reasons and
shall be provided to the applicant. evidence supporting or challenging the suffi-
2. Positive finding by staff. If, after review of ciency of the applicants having met the re-
the application, and additional information, quirements of the definition in 29 CFR
and the on-site review report, the applicant 1910.7 and this appendix. Submission of per-
appears to have met the requirements for tinent documents and exhibits shall be made
recognition, a written recommendation shall in writing by the close of the comment pe-
be submitted by the responsible OSHA per- riod.
sonnel to the Assistant Secretary that the 6. Action after public comment. a. Final de-
application be approved, accompanied by a cision by Assistant Secretary. Where the public
supporting explanation. review and comment record supports the As-
3. Negative finding by staff.a. Notification sistant Secretarys preliminary finding con-
to applicant. If, after review of the applica- cerning the application, i.e., absent any seri-
tion, any additional information and the on- ous objections or substantive claims con-
site review report, the applicant does not ap- trary to the preliminary finding having been
pear to have met the requirements for rec- received in writing from the public during
ognition, the responsible OSHA personnel the comment period, the Assistant Secretary
shall notify the applicant in writing, listing will proceed to final written decision on the
the specific requirements of 1910.7 and this application. The reasons supporting this de-
appendix which the applicant has not met, cision shall be derived from the evidence
and allow a reasonable period for response. available as a result of the full application,
b. Revision of application. (i) After receipt of the supporting documentation, the staff find-
a notification of negative finding (i.e., for ining, and the written comments and evidence
tended disapproval of the application), and presented during the public review and com-
within the response period provided, the ap- ment period.
plicant may: b. Public announcement. A copy of the As-
(a) Submit a revised application for further sistant Secretarys final decision will be pro-
review, which could result in a positive find- vided to the applicant. Subsequently, a noti-
ing by the responsible OSHA personnel pur- fication of the final decision shall be pub-
suant to subsection I.B.2. of this appendix; or lished in the FEDERAL REGISTER. The publi-
(b) Request that the original application be cation date will be the effective date of the
submitted to the Assistant Secretary with recognition.
an attached statement of reasons, supplied c. Review of final decision. There will be no
by the applicant of why the application further review activity available within the
should be approved. Department of Labor from the final decision
(ii) This procedure for applicant notifica- of the Assistant Secretary.
tion and potential revision shall be used only 7. Action after public objection. a. Review of
once during each recognition process. negative information. At the discretion of the
104
Assistant Secretary or his designee, OSHA and provisions of 1910.7 and this appendix,
may authorize Federal or contract personnel the following two organizations are recog-
to initiate a special review of any informa- nized temporarily as nationally recognized
tion provided in the public comment record testing laboratories by the Assistant Sec-
which appears to require resolution, before a retary for a period of five years beginning
final decision can be made. June 13, 1988 and ending on July 13, 1993:
b. Supplementation of record. The contents
(i) Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 333
and results of special reviews will be made
Pfingsten Road, Northbrook, Illinois 60062.
part of this record by the Assistant Sec-
retary by either: (ii) Factory Mutual Research Corporation,
(i) Reopening the written comment period 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike, Norwood,
for public comments on these reviews; or Massachusetts 02062.
(ii) Convening an informal hearing to ac- b. At the end of the five-year period, the
cept public comments on these reviews, con- two temporarily recognized laboratories
ducted under applicable OSHA procedures for shall apply for renewal of OSHA recognition
similar hearings. utilizing the following procedures estab-
c. Final decision by the Assistant Secretary. lished for renewal of OSHA recognition.
The Assistant Secretary shall issue a deci-
sion as to whether it has been demonstrated, II. Supplementary Procedures.
based on a preponderance of the evidence,
that the applicant meets the requirements A. Test standard changes.
for recognition. The reasons supporting this
A recognized NRTL may change a testing
decision shall be derived from the evidence
available as a result of the full application, standard or elements incorporated in the
the supporting documentation, the staff find- standard such as testing methods or pass-fail
ing, the comments and evidence presented criteria by notifying the Assistant Secretary
during the public review and comment pe- of the change, certifying that the revised
riod, and written to transcribed evidence re- standard will be at least as effective as the
ceived during any subsequent reopening of prior standard, and providing the supporting
the written comment period or informal pub- data upon which its conclusions are based.
lic hearing held. The NRTL need not inform the Assistant
d. Public announcement. A copy of the As- Secretary of minor deviations from a test
sistant Secretarys final decision will be pro- standard such as the use of new instrumenta-
vided to the applicant, and a notification tion that is more accurate or sensitive than
will be published in the FEDERAL REGISTER originally called for in the standard. The
subsequently announcing the decision. NRTL also need not inform the Assistant
e. Review of final decision. There will be no Secretary of its adoption of revisions to
further review activity available within the third-party testing standards meeting the re-
Department of Labor from the final decision
quirements of 1910.7(c)(4), if such revisions
of the Assistant Secretary.
have been developed by the standards devel-
c. Terms and conditions of recognition. The
following terms and conditions shall be part oping organization, or of its adoption of revi-
of every recognition: sions to other third-party test standards
1. Letter of recognition. The recognition by which the developing organization has sub-
OSHA of any NRTL will be evidenced by a mitted to OSHA. If, upon review, the Assist-
letter of recognition from OSHA. The letter ant Secretary or his designee determines
will provide the specific details of the scope that the proposed revised standard is not
of the OSHA recognition, including the spe- substantially equivalent to the previous
cific equipment or materials for which OSHA version with regard to the level of safety ob-
recognition has been granted, as well as any tained, OSHA will not accept the proposed
specific conditions imposed by OSHA. testing standard by the recognized NRTL,
2. Period of recognition. The recognition by and will initiate discontinuance of that as-
OSHA of each NRTL will be valid for five pect of OSHA-recognized activity by the
years, unless terminated before the expira- NRTL by modification of the official letter
tion of the period. The dates of the period of of recognition. OSHA will publicly announce
recognition will be stated in the recognition this action and the NRTL will be required to
letter. communicate this OSHA decision directly to
3. Constancy in operations. The recognized
affected manufacturers.
NRTL shall continue to satisfy all the re-
quirements or limitations in the letter of B. Expansion of current recognition
recognition during the period of recognition.
4. Accurate publicity. The OSHA-recognized 1. Eligibility. A recognized NRTL may apply
NRTL shall not engage in or permit others to OSHA for an expansion of its current rec-
to engage in misrepresentation of the scope ognition to cover other categories of NRTL
or conditions of its recognition. testing in addition to those included in the
5. Temporary Recognition of Certain NRTLs. current recognition.
a. Notwithstanding all other requirements
105
2. Procedure. a. OSHA will act upon and form the public of any voluntary termi-
process the application for expansion in ac- nation by FEDERAL REGISTER notice.
cordance with subsection I.B. of this appen-
dix, except that the period for written com- E. Revocation of recognition by OSHA.
ments, specified in paragraph 5.a of sub-
1. Potential causes. If an NRTL either has
section I.B. of this appendix, will be not less
failed to continue to substantially satisfy
than 15 calendar days.
the requirements of 1910.7 or this appendix,
b. In that process, OSHA may decide not to
or has not been reasonably performing the
conduct an on-site review, where the sub-
NRTL testing requirements encompassed
stantive scope of the request to expand rec-
within its letter of recognition, or has mate-
ognition is closely related to the current
rially misrepresented itself in its applica-
area of recognition.
c. The expiration date for each expansion tions or misrepresented the scope or condi-
of recognition shall coincide with the expira- tions of its recognition, the Assistant Sec-
tion date of the current basic recognition pe- retary may revoke the recognition of a rec-
riod. ognized NRTL, in whole or in part. OSHA
may initiate revocation procedures on the
C. Renewal of OSHA recognition basis of information provided by any inter-
ested person.
1. Eligibility. A recognized NRTL may
2. Procedure. a. Before proposing to revoke
renew its recognition by filing a renewal re-
recognition, the Agency will notify the rec-
quest at the address in paragraph I.A.3. of
ognized NRTL in writing, giving it the op-
this appendix not less than nine months, nor
portunity to rebut or correct the alleged de-
more than one year, before the expiration
ficiencies which would form the basis of the
date of its current recognition.
proposed revocation, within a reasonable pe-
2. Procedure. a. OSHA will process the re-
riod.
newal request in accordance with subsection
I.B. of this appendix, except that the period b. If the alleged deficiencies are not cor-
for written comments, specified in paragraph rected or reconciled within a reasonable pe-
5.a of subsection I.B. of this appendix, will be riod, OSHA will propose, in writing to the
not less than 15 calendar days. recognized NRTL, to revoke recognition. If
b. In that process, OSHA may determine deemed appropriate, no other announcement
not to conduct the on-site reviews in I.B.1.a. need be made by OSHA.
where appropriate. c. The revocation shall be effective in 60
c. When a recognized NRTL has filed a days unless within that period the recog-
timely and sufficient renewal request, its nized NRTL corrects the deficiencies or re-
current recognition will not expire until a quests a hearing in writing.
final decision has been made by OSHA on the d. If a hearing is requested, it shall be held
request. before an administrative law judge of the De-
d. After the first renewal has been granted partment of Labor pursuant to the rules
to the NRTL, the NRTL shall apply for a specified in 29 CFR part 1905, subpart C.
continuation of its recognition status every e. The parties shall be OSHA and the rec-
five years by submitting a renewal request. ognized NRTL. The Assistant Secretary may
In lieu of submitting a renewal request after allow other interested persons to participate
the initial renewal, the NRTL may certify in these hearings if such participation would
its continuing compliance with the terms of contribute to the resolution of issues ger-
its letter of recognition and 29 CFR 1910.7. mane to the proceeding and not cause undue
3. Alternative procedure. After the initial delay.
recognition and before the expiration there- f. The burden of proof shall be on OSHA to
of, OSHA may (for good cause) determine demonstrate by a preponderance of the evi-
that there is a sufficient basis to dispense dence that the recognition should be revoked
with the renewal requirement for a given because the NRTL is not meeting the re-
laboratory and will so notify the laboratory quirements for recognition, has not been rea-
of such a determination in writing. In lieu of sonably performing the product testing func-
submitting a renewal request, any labora- tions as required by 1910.7, this appendix A,
tory so notified shall certify its continuing or the letter of recognition, or has materi-
compliance with the terms of its letter of ally misrepresented itself in its applications
recognition and 29 CFR 1910.7. or publicity.
3. Final decision. a. After the hearing, the
D. Voluntary termination of recognition. Administrative Law Judge shall issue a deci-
At any time, a recognized NRTL may vol- sion stating the reasons based on the record
untarily terminate its recognition, either in as to whether it has been demonstrated,
its entirety or with respect to any area cov- based on a preponderance of evidence, that
ered in its recognition, by giving written no- the applicant does not continue to meet the
tice to OSHA. The written notice shall state requirements for its current recognition.
the date as of which the termination is to b. Upon issuance of the decision, any party
take effect. The Assistant Secretary shall in- to the hearing may file exceptions within 20
106
days pursuant to 29 CFR 1905.28. If no excep- OMB con-
29 CFR citation
tions are filed, this decision is the final deci- trol No.
sion of the Assistant Secretary. If objections
1910.179(j)(2)(iii) and (iv) .................................... 12180224
are filed, the Administrative Law Judge 1910.179(m)(1) and (m)(2) .................................. 12180224
shall forward the decision, exceptions and 1910.180(d)(6) ..................................................... 12180221
record to the Assistant Secretary for the 1910.180(g)(1) and (g)(2)(ii) ................................ 12180221
final decision on the proposed revocation. 1910.181(g)(1) and (g)(3) .................................... 12180222
c. The Assistant Secretary will review the 1910.184(e)(4), (f)(4) and (i)(8)(ii) ....................... 12180223
record, the decision by the Administrative 1910.217(e)(1)(i) and (ii) ..................................... 12180229
1910.217(g) ......................................................... 12180070
Law Judge, and the exceptions filed. Based
1910.217(h) ......................................................... 12180143
on this, the Assistant Secretary shall issue 1910.218(a)(2)(i) and (ii) ..................................... 12180228
the final decision as to whether it has been 1910.252(a)(2)(xiii)(c) .......................................... 12180207
demonstrated, by a preponderance of evi- 1910.255(e) ......................................................... 12180207
dence, that the recognized NRTL has not 1910.266 .............................................................. 12180198
continued to meet the requirements for 1910.268 .............................................................. 12180225
OSHA recognition. If the Assistant Sec- 1910.269 .............................................................. 12180190
1910.272 .............................................................. 12180206
retary finds that the NRTL does not meet 1910.420 .............................................................. 12180069
the NRTL recognition requirements, the rec- 1910.421 .............................................................. 12180069
ognition will be revoked. 1910.423 .............................................................. 12180069
4. Public announcement. A copy of the As- 1910.430 .............................................................. 12180069
sistant Secretarys final decision will be pro- 1910.440 .............................................................. 12180069
vided to the applicant, and a notification 1910.1001 ............................................................ 12180133
1910.1003 ............................................................ 12180085
will be published in the FEDERAL REGISTER 1910.1004 ............................................................ 12180084
announcing the decision, and the availability 1910.1006 ............................................................ 12180086
of the complete record of this proceeding at 1910.1007 ............................................................ 12180083
OSHA. The effective date of any revocation 1910.1008 ............................................................ 12180087
will be the date the final decision copy is 1910.1009 ............................................................ 12180089
sent to the NRTL. 1910.1010 ............................................................ 12180082
1910.1011 ............................................................ 12180090
5. Review of final decision. There will be no
1910.1012 ............................................................ 12180080
further review activity available within the 1910.1013 ............................................................ 12180079
Department of Labor from the final decision 1910.1014 ............................................................ 12180088
of the Assistant Secretary. 1910.1015 ............................................................ 12180044
1910.1016 ............................................................ 12180081
[53 FR 12120, Apr. 12, 1988; 53 FR 16838, May 1910.1017 ............................................................ 12180010
11, 1988, as amended at 54 FR 24333, June 7, 1910.1018 ............................................................ 12180104
1989; 65 FR 46818, 46819, July 31, 2000] 1910.1020 ............................................................ 12180065
1910.1025 ............................................................ 12180092
1910.8 OMB control numbers under 1910.1027 ............................................................ 12180185
1910.1028 ............................................................ 12180129
the Paperwork Reduction Act. 1910.1029 ............................................................ 12180128
The following sections or paragraphs 1910.1030 ............................................................ 12180180
1910.1043 ............................................................ 12180061
each contain a collection of informa- 1910.1044 ............................................................ 12180101
tion requirement which has been ap- 1910.1045 ............................................................ 12180126
proved by the Office of Management 1910.1047 ............................................................ 12180108
and Budget under the control number 1910.1048 ............................................................ 12180145
1910.1050 ............................................................ 12180184
listed. 1910.1051 ............................................................ 12180170
1910.1052 ............................................................ 12180179
OMB con- 1910.1096 ............................................................ 12180103
29 CFR citation trol No.
1910.1200 ............................................................ 12180072
1910.1450 ............................................................ 12180131
1910.7 .................................................................. 12180147
1910.23 ................................................................ 12180199
1910.66 ................................................................ 12180121
[61 FR 5508, Feb. 13, 1996, as amended at 62
1910.67(b) ........................................................... 12180230
1910.68 ................................................................ 12180226 FR 29668, June 2, 1997; 62 FR 42666, Aug. 8,
1910.95 ................................................................ 12180048 1997; 62 FR 43581, Aug. 14, 1997; 62 FR 65203,
1910.111 .............................................................. 12180208 Dec. 11, 1997; 63 FR 13340, Mar. 19, 1998; 63 FR
1910.119 .............................................................. 12180200 17093, Apr. 8, 1998]
1910.120 .............................................................. 12180202
1910.132 .............................................................. 12180205
1910.134 .............................................................. 12180099 Subpart BAdoption and Exten-
1910.137 ..............................................................
1910.142 ..............................................................
12180190
12180096
sion of Established Federal
1910.145 .............................................................. 12180132 Standards
1910.146 .............................................................. 12180203
1910.147 .............................................................. 12180150
1910.156 .............................................................. 12180075 AUTHORITY: Secs. 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupa-
1910.157(e)(3) ..................................................... 12180210 tional Safety and Health Act, 29 U.S.C. 653,
1910.157(f)(16) .................................................... 12180218 655, 657; Walsh-Healey Act, 41 U.S.C. 35 et
1910.177(d)(3)(iv) ................................................ 12180219 seq.; Service Contract Act of 1965, 41 U.S.C.
107
351 et seq.; Sec.107, Contract Work Hours and pair, including painting and deco-
Safety Standards Act (Construction Safety rating. See discussion of these terms in
Act), 40 U.S.C. 333; Sec. 41, Longshore and 1926.13 of this title.
Harbor Workers Compensation Act, 33
(c) Construction Safety Act distin-
U.S.C. 941; National Foundation of Arts and
Humanities Act, 20 U.S.C. 951 et seq.; Sec- guished. This section adopts as occupa-
retary of Labors Order No. 1271 (36 FR 8754), tional safety and health standards
876 (41 FR 1911), 983 (48 FR 35736), 190 (55 under section 6 of the Act the stand-
FR 9033), or 6-96 (62 FR 111), as applicable. ards which are prescribed in part 1926
of this chapter. Thus, the standards
1910.11 Scope and purpose. (substantive rules) published in subpart
(a) The provisions of this subpart B C and the following subparts of part
adopt and extend the applicability of, 1926 of this chapter are applied. This
established Federal standards in effect section does not incorporate subparts
on April 28, 1971, with respect to every A and B of part 1926 of this chapter.
employer, employee, and employment Subparts A and B have pertinence only
covered by the Act. to the application of section 107 of the
(b) It bears emphasis that only stand- Contract Work Hours and Safety
ards (i.e., substantive rules) relating to Standards Act (the Construction Safe-
safety or health are adopted by any ty Act). For example, the interpreta-
incorporations by reference of stand- tion of the term subcontractor in
ards prescribed elsewhere in this chap- paragraph (c) of 1926.13 of this chapter
ter or this title. Other materials con- is significant in discerning the cov-
tained in the referenced parties are not erage of the Construction Safety Act
adopted. Illustrations of the types of and duties thereunder. However, the
materials which are not adopted are term subcontractor has no signifi-
these. The incorporations by reference cance in the application of the Act,
of parts 1915, 1916, 1917, 1918 in 1910.13, which was enacted under the Com-
1910.14, 1910.15, and 1910.16 are not in- merce Clause and which establishes du-
tended to include the discussion in ties for employers which are not de-
those parts of the coverage of the pendent for their application upon any
Longshoremens and Harbor Workers contractual relationship with the Fed-
Compensation Act or the penalty pro- eral Government or upon any form of
visions of the Act. Similarly, the incor- Federal financial assistance.
poration by reference of part 1926 in (d) For the purposes of this part, to
1910.12 is not intended to include ref- the extent that it may not already be
erences to interpretative rules having included in paragraph (b) of this sec-
relevance to the application of the tion, construction work includes the
Construction Safety Act, but having no erection of new electric transmission
relevance to the application to the Oc- and distribution lines and equipment,
cupational Safety and Health Act. and the alteration, conversion, and im-
provement of the existing transmission
1910.12 Construction work. and distribution lines and equipment.
(a) Standards. The standards pre-
scribed in part 1926 of this chapter are 1910.15 Shipyard employment.
adopted as occupational safety and (a) Adoption and extension of estab-
health standards under section 6 of the lished safety and health standards for
Act and shall apply, according to the shipyard employment. The standards
provisions thereof, to every employ- prescribed by part 1915 (formerly parts
ment and place of employment of every 15011503) of this title and in effect on
employee engaged in construction April 28, 1971 (as revised), are adopted
work. Each employer shall protect the as occupational safety or health stand-
employment and places of employment ards under section 6(a) of the Act and
of each of his employees engaged in shall apply, according to the provisions
construction work by complying with thereof, to every employment and
the appropriate standards prescribed in place of employment of every employee
this paragraph. engaged in ship repair, shipbreaking,
(b) Definition. For purposes of this and shipbuilding, or a related employ-
section, Construction work means work ment. Each employer shall protect the
for construction, alteration, and/or re- employment and places of employment
108
of each of his employees engaged in (iii) Electrical. Subpart S when shore-

ship repair, shipbreaking, and ship- based electrical installations provide
building, or a related employment, by power for use aboard vessels;
complying with the appropriate stand- (iv) Hazard communication. Subpart Z,
ards prescribed by this paragraph. 1910.1200;
(b) Definitions. For purposes of this (v) Ionizing radiation. Subpart Z,
section: 1910.1096;
(1) Ship repair means any repair of a (vi) Noise. Subpart G, 1910.95;
vessel, including, but not restricted to, (vii) Nonionizing radiation. Subpart G,
alterations, conversions, installations, 1910.97;
cleaning, painting, and maintenance NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a)(2)(vii): Exposures
work; to nonionizing radiation emissions from
commercial vessel transmitters are consid-
(2) Shipbreaking means any breaking ered hazardous under the following condi-
down of a vessels structure for the tions: (1) where the radar is transmitting,
purpose of scrapping the vessel, includ- the scanner is stationary, and the exposure
ing the removal of gear, equipment, or distance is 18.7 feet (6 m.) or less; or (2)
any component of a vessel; where the radar is transmitting, the scanner
(3) Shipbuilding means the construc- is rotating, and the exposure distance is 5.2
feet (1.8 m.) or less.
tion of a vessel, including the installa-
tion of machinery and equipment; (viii) Respiratory protection. Subpart
I, 1910.134;
(4) Related employment means any em-
(ix) Toxic and hazardous substances.
ployment performed as an incident to,
Subpart Z applies to marine cargo han-
or in conjunction with, ship repair,
dling activities except for the fol-
shipbreaking, and shipbuilding work,
lowing:
including, but not restricted to, inspec-
(A) When a substance or cargo is con-
tion, testing, and employment as a
tained within a sealed, intact means of
watchman; and packaging or containment complying
(5) Vessel includes every description with Department of Transportation or
of watercraft or other artificial con- International Maritime Organization
trivance used, or capable of being used, requirements;1
as a means of transportation on water, (B) Bloodborne pathogens, 1910.1030;
including special purpose floating (C) Carbon monoxide, 1910.1000 (See
structures not primarily designed for, 1918.94 (a)); and
or used as a means of, transportation (D) Hydrogen sulfide, 1910.1000 (See
on water. 1918.94 (f)).
[58 FR 35308, June 30, 1993] (x) Powered industrial truck operator
training, Subpart N, 1910.178(l).
1910.16 Longshoring and marine ter- (b) Safety and health standards for ma-
minals. rine terminals. Part 1917 of this chapter
(a) Safety and health standards for shall apply exclusively, according to
longshoring. (1) Part 1918 of this chapter the provisions thereof, to employment
shall apply exclusively, according to within a marine terminal, except as
the provisions thereof, to all employ- follows:
ment of every employee engaged in (1) The provisions of part 1917 of this
longshoring operations or related em- chapter do not apply to the following:
ployment aboard any vessel. All cargo (i) Facilities used solely for the bulk
storage, handling, and transfer of flam-
transfer accomplished with the use of
mable and combustible liquids and
shore-based material handling devices
gases.
shall be governed by part 1917 of this
(ii) Facilities subject to the regula-
chapter.
tions of the Office of Pipeline Safety of
(2) Part 1910 does not apply to
longshoring operations except for the
1 The International Maritime Organization
following provisions:
publishes the International Maritime Dan-
(i) Access to employee exposure and gerous Goods Code to aid compliance with
medical records. Subpart Z, 1910.1020; the international legal requirements of the
(ii) Commercial diving operations. Sub- International Convention for the Safety of
part T; Life at Sea, 1960.
109
the Research and Special Programs Ad- dling of, cargo, ships stores, gear, etc.,
ministration, Department of Transpor- into, in, on, or out of any vessel;
tation (49 CFR chapter I, subchapter (2) Related employment means any em-
D), to the extent such regulations ployment performed as an incident to
apply to specific working conditions. or in conjunction with, longshoring op-
(iii) Fully automated bulk coal han- erations including, but not restricted
dling facilities contiguous to electrical to, securing cargo, rigging, and em-
power generating plants. ployment as a porter, checker, or
(2) Part 1910 does not apply to marine
watchman; and
terminals except for the following:
(i) Abrasive blasting. Subpart G, (3) Vessel includes every description
1910.94(a); of watercraft or other artificial con-
(ii) Access to employee exposure and trivance used, or capable of being used,
medical records. Subpart Z, 1910.1020; as a means of transportation on water,
(iii) Commercial diving operations. Sub- including special purpose floating
part T; structures not primarily designed for,
(iv) Electrical. Subpart S; or used as a means of, transportation
(v) Grain handling facilities. Subpart on water.
R, 1910.272; (4) Marine terminal means wharves,
(vi) Hazard communication. Subpart Z, bulkheads, quays, piers, docks and
1910.1200; other berthing locations and adjacent
(vii) Ionizing radiation. Subpart Z, storage or adjacent areas and struc-
1910.1096; tures associated with the primary
(viii) Noise. Subpart G, 1910.95;
movement of cargo or materials from
(ix) Nonionizing radiation. Subpart G,
vessel to shore or shore to vessel in-
1910.97.
(x) Respiratory protection. Subpart I, cluding structures which are devoted
1910.134. to receiving, handling, holding, con-
(xi) Safety requirements for scaffolding. solidation and loading or delivery of
Subpart D, 1910.28; waterborne shipments or passengers,
(xii) Servicing multi-piece and single including areas devoted to the mainte-
piece rim wheels. Subpart N, 1910.177; nance of the terminal or equipment.
(xiii) Toxic and hazardous substances. The term does not include production
Subpart Z applies to marine cargo han- or manufacturing areas having their
dling activities except for the fol- own docking facilities and located at a
lowing: marine terminal nor does the term in-
(A) When a substance or cargo is con- clude storage facilities directly associ-
tained within a sealed, intact means of ated with those production or manufac-
packaging or containment complying turing areas.
with Department of Transportation or
International Maritime Organization [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 48
requirements; 2 FR 30908, July 5, 1983; 52 FR 36026, Sept. 25,
(B) Bloodborne pathogens, 1910.1030; 1987; 62 FR 40195, July 25, 1997; 63 FR 66270,
Dec. 1, 1998]
(C) Carbon monoxide, 1910.1000 (See
1917.24(a)); and
1910.17 Effective dates.
(D) Hydrogen sulfide, 1910.1000 (See
1917.73(a)(2)); and (a)(b) [Reserved]
(xiv) Powered industrial truck oper- (c) Except whenever any employment
ator training, Subpart N, 1910.178(l). or place of employment is, or becomes,
(c) Definitions. For purposes of this subject to any safety and health stand-
section: ard prescribed in part 1915, 1916, 1917,
(1) Longshoring operation means the 1918, or 1926 of this title on a date be-
loading, unloading, moving, or han- fore August 27, 1971, by virtue of the
Construction Safety Act or the Long-
2 The International Maritime Organization
shoremens and Harbor Workers Com-
publishes the International Maritime Dan- pensation Act, that occupational safe-
gerous Goods Code to aid compliance with
the international legal requirements of the ty and health standard as incorporated
International Convention for the Safety of by reference in this subpart shall also
Life at Sea, 1960. become effective under the Williams-
110
Steiger Occupational Safety and (e) Inorganic arsenic. Section 1910.1018

Health Act of 1970 on that date. shall apply to the exposure of every
employee to inorganic arsenic in every
FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996]
employment covered by 1910.12,
1910.13, 1910.14, 1910.15, or 1910.16, in
1910.18 Changes in established Fed- lieu of any different standard on expo-
eral standards. sure to inorganic arsenic which would
otherwise be applicable by virtue of
Whenever an occupational safety and any of those sections.
health standard adopted and incor- (f) [Reserved]
porated by reference in this subpart B (g) Lead. Section 1910.1025 shall apply
is changed pursuant to section 6(b) of to the exposure of every employee to
the Act and the statute under which lead in every employment and place of
the standard was originally promul- employment covered by 1910.13,
gated, and in accordance with part 1911 1910.14, 1910.15, and 1910.16, in lieu of
of this chapter, the standard shall be any different standard on exposure to
deemed changed for purposes of that lead which would otherwise be applica-
statute and this subpart B, and shall ble by virtue of those sections.
apply under this subpart B. For the (h) Ethylene oxide. Section 1910.1047
purposes of this section, a change in a shall apply to the exposure of every
standard includes any amendment, ad- employee to ethylene oxide in every
dition, or repeal, in whole or in part, of employment and place of employment
any standard. covered by 1910.12, 1910.13, 1910.14,
1910.15, or 1910.16, in lieu of any dif-
1910.19 Special provisions for air
contaminants. ferent standard on exposure to ethyl-
ene oxide which would otherwise be ap-
(a) Asbestos, tremolite, anthophyllite, plicable by virtue of those sections.
and actinolite dust. Section 1910.1001 (i) 4,4-Methylenedianiline (MDA). Sec-
shall apply to the exposure of every tion 1910.1050 shall apply to the expo-
employee to asbestos, tremolite, sure of every employee to MDA in
anthophyllite, and actinolite dust in every employment and place of em-
every employment and place of employment covered by 1910.13, 1910.14,
ployment covered by 1910.16, in lieu of 1910.15, or 1910.16, in lieu of any dif-
any different standard on exposure to ferent standard on exposure to MDA
asbestos, tremolite, anthophyllite, and which would otherwise be applicable by
actinolite dust which would otherwise virtue of those sections.
be applicable by virtue of any of those (j) Formaldehyde. Section 1910.1048
sections. shall apply to the exposure of every
(b) Vinyl chloride. Section 1910.1017 employee to formaldehyde in every em-
shall apply to the exposure of every ployment and place of employment
employee to vinyl chloride in every covered by 1910.12, 1910.13, 1910.14,
employment and place of employment 1910.15 or 1910.16 in lieu of any different
covered by 1910.12, 1910.13, 1910.14, standard on exposure to formaldehyde
1910.15, or 1910.16, in lieu of any dif- which would otherwise be applicable by
ferent standard on exposure to vinyl virtue of those sections.
chloride which would otherwise be ap- (k) Cadmium. Section 1910.1027 shall
plicable by virtue of any of those sec- apply to the exposure of every em-
tions. ployee to cadmium in every employ-
(c) Acrylonitrile. Section 1910.1045 ment and place of employment covered
shall apply to the exposure of every by 1910.16 in lieu of any different stand-
employee to acrylonitrile in every em- ard on exposures to cadmium that
ployment and place of employment would otherwise be applicable by virtue
covered by 1910.12, 1910.13, 1910.14, of those sections.
1910.15, or 1910.16, in lieu of any dif- (l) 1,3-Butadiene (BD). Section
ferent standard on exposure to acrylo- 1910.1051 shall apply to the exposure of
nitrile which would otherwise be appli- every employee to BD in every employ-
cable by virtue of any of those sec- ment and place of employment covered
tions. by 1910.12, 1910.13, 1910.14, 1910.15, or
(d) [Reserved] 1910.16, in lieu of any different standard
111
on exposure to BD which would other- nish persons with a handhold in case of

wise be applicable by virtue of those tripping.
sections. (4) Platform. A working space for per-
(m) Methylene chloride (MC). Section sons, elevated above the surrounding
1910.1052 shall apply to the exposure of floor or ground; such as a balcony or
every employee to MC in every employ- platform for the operation of machin-
ment and place of employment covered ery and equipment.
by 1910.16 in lieu of any different (5) Runway. A passageway for per-
standard on exposure to MC which sons, elevated above the surrounding
would otherwise be applicable by virtue floor or ground level, such as a
of that section when it is not present footwalk along shafting or a walkway
in sealed, intact containers. between buildings.
[43 FR 28473, June 30, 1978, as amended at 43 (6) Standard railing. A vertical barrier
FR 45809, Oct. 3, 1978; 43 FR 53007, Nov. 14, erected along exposed edges of a floor
1978; 44 FR 5447, Jan. 26, 1979; 46 FR 32022, opening, wall opening, ramp, platform,
June 19, 1981; 49 FR 25796, June 22, 1984; 50 FR or runway to prevent falls of persons.
51173, Dec. 13, 1985; 52 FR 46291, Dec. 4, 1987; (7) Standard strength and construction.
57 FR 35666, Aug. 10, 1992; 57 FR 42388, Sept.
Any construction of railings, covers, or
14, 1992; 59 FR 41057, Aug. 10, 1994; 61 FR 56831,
Nov. 4, 1996; 62 FR 1600, Jan. 10, 1997] other guards that meets the require-
ments of 1910.23.
(8) Stair railing. A vertical barrier
Subpart C [Reserved] erected along exposed sides of a stair-
way to prevent falls of persons.
Subpart DWalking-Working (9) Toeboard. A vertical barrier at
Surfaces floor level erected along exposed edges
of a floor opening, wall opening, plat-
AUTHORITY: Secs. 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupa- form, runway, or ramp to prevent falls
tional Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 of materials.
U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657); Secretary of Labors (10) Wall hole. An opening less than 30
Order No. 1271 (36 FR 8754), 876 (41 FR
inches but more than 1 inch high, of
25059), 983 (48 FR 35736), or 190 (55 FR 9033),
as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. unrestricted width, in any wall or par-
tition; such as a ventilation hole or
1910.21 Definitions. drainage scupper.
(a) As used in 1910.23, unless the con- (11) Wall opening. An opening at least
text requires otherwise, floor and wall 30 inches high and 18 inches wide, in
opening, railing and toe board terms any wall or partition, through which
shall have the meanings ascribed in persons may fall; such as a yard-arm
this paragraph. doorway or chute opening.
(1) Floor hole. An opening measuring (b) As used in 1910.24, unless the con-
less than 12 inches but more than 1 text requires otherwise, fixed indus-
inch in its least dimension, in any trial stair terms shall have the mean-
floor, platform, pavement, or yard, ing ascribed in this paragraph.
through which materials but not per- (1) Handrail. A single bar or pipe sup-
sons may fall; such as a belt hole, pipe ported on brackets from a wall or par-
opening, or slot opening. tition to provide a continuous hand-
(2) Floor opening. An opening meas- hold for persons using a stair.
uring 12 inches or more in its least di- (2) Nose, nosing. That portion of a
mension, in any floor, platform, pave- tread projecting beyond the face of the
ment, or yard through which persons riser immediately below.
may fall; such as a hatchway, stair or (3) Open riser. The air space between
ladder opening, pit, or large manhole. the treads of stairways without upright
Floor openings occupied by elevators, members (risers).
dumb waiters, conveyors, machinery, (4) Platform. An extended step or
or containers are excluded from this landing breaking a continuous run of
subpart. stairs.
(3) Handrail. A single bar or pipe sup- (5) Railing. A vertical barrier erected
ported on brackets from a wall or par- along exposed sides of stairways and
tition, as on a stairway or ramp, to fur- platforms to prevent falls of persons.
112
The top member of railing usually the sections measured along the side
serves as a handrail. rails.
(6) Rise. The vertical distance from (5) Sectional ladder. A sectional ladder
the top of a tread to the top of the next is a non-self-supporting portable lad-
higher tread. der, nonadjustable in length, consisting
(7) Riser. The upright member of a of two or more sections of ladder so
step situated at the back of a lower constructed that the sections may be
tread and near the leading edge of the combined to function as a single lad-
next higher tread. der. Its size is designated by the overall
(8) Stairs, stairway. A series of steps length of the assembled sections.
leading from one level or floor to an- (6) Trestle ladder. A trestle ladder is a
other, or leading to platforms, pits, self-supporting portable ladder, non-
boiler rooms, crossovers, or around ma- adjustable in length, consisting of two
chinery, tanks, and other equipment sections hinged at the top to form
that are used more or less continuously equal angles with the base. The size is
or routinely by employees, or only oc- designated by the length of the side
casionally by specific individuals. A se- rails measured along the front edge.
ries of steps and landings having three (7) Extension trestle ladder. An exten-
or more risers constitutes stairs or sion trestle ladder is a self-supporting
stairway. portable ladder, adjustable in length,
(9) Tread. The horizontal member of a consisting of a trestle ladder base and
step. a vertically adjustable single ladder,
(10) Tread run. The horizontal dis- with suitable means for locking the
tance from the leading edge of a tread ladders together. The size is designated
to the leading edge of an adjacent by the length of the trestle ladder base.
tread. (8) Special-purpose ladder. A special-
(11) Tread width. The horizontal dis- purpose ladder is a portable ladder
tance from front to back of tread in- which represents either a modification
cluding nosing when used. or a combination of design or construc-
(c) As used in 1910.25, unless the con- tion features in one of the general-pur-
text requires otherwise, portable wood pose types of ladders previously de-
ladders terms shall have the meanings fined, in order to adapt the ladder to
ascribed in this paragraph. special or specific uses.
(1) Ladders. A ladder is an appliance (9) Trolley ladder. A trolley ladder is a
usually consisting of two side rails semifixed ladder, nonadjustable in
joined at regular intervals by cross- length, supported by attachments to an
pieces called steps, rungs, or cleats, on overhead track, the plane of the ladder
which a person may step in ascending being at right angles to the plane of
or descending. motion.
(2) Stepladder. A stepladder is a (10) Side-rolling ladder. A side-rolling
selfsupporting portable ladder, non- ladder is a semifixed ladder, nonadjust-
adjustable in length, having flat steps able in length, supported by attach-
and a hinged back. Its size is des- ments to a guide rail, which is gen-
ignated by the overall length of the erally fastened to shelving, the plane of
ladder measured along the front edge of the ladder being also its plane of mo-
the side rails. tion.
(3) Single ladder. A single ladder is a (11) Wood characteristics. Wood char-
non-self-supporting portable ladder, acteristics are distinguishing features
nonadjustable in length, consisting of which by their extent and number de-
but one section. Its size is designated termine the quality of a piece of wood.
by the overall length of the side rail. (12) Wood irregularities. Wood irreg-
(4) Extension ladder. An extension lad- ularities are natural characteristics in
der is a non-self-supporting portable or on wood that may lower its dura-
ladder adjustable in length. It consists bility, strength, or utility.
of two or more sections traveling in (13) Cross grain. Cross grain (slope of
guides or brackets so arranged as to grain) is a deviation of the fiber direc-
permit length adjustment. Its size is tion from a line parallel to the sides of
designated by the sum of the lengths of the piece.
113
(14) Knot. A knot is a branch or limb, the overall length of the ladder meas-
imbedded in the tree and cut through ured along the front edge of the side
in the process of lumber manufacture, rails.
classified according to size, quality, (3) Single ladder. A single ladder is a
and occurrence. The size of the knot is non-self-supporting portable ladder,
determined as the average diameter on nonadjustable in length, consisting of
the surface of the piece. but one section. Its size is designated
(15) Pitch and bark pockets. A pitch by the overall length of the side rail.
pocket is an opening extending parallel (4) Extension ladder. An extension lad-
to the annual growth rings containing, der is a non-self-supporting portable
or that has contained, pitch, either ladder adjustable in length. It consists
solid or liquid. A bark pocket is an of two or more sections traveling in
opening between annual growth rings guides or brackets so arranged as to
that contains bark. permit length adjustment. Its size is
(16) Shake. A shake is a separation designated by the sum of the lengths of
along the grain, most of which occurs the sections measured along the side
between the rings of annual growth. rails.
(17) Check. A check is a lengthwise (5) Platform ladder. A self-supporting
separation of the wood, most of which ladder of fixed size with a platform pro-
occurs across the rings of annual vided at the working level. The size is
growth.
determined by the distance along the
(18) Wane. Wane is bark, or the lack
front rail from the platform to the base
of wood from any cause, on the corner
of the ladder.
of a piece.
(19) Decay. Decay is disintegration of (6) Sectional ladder. A sectional ladder
wood substance due to action of wood- is a non-self-supporting portable lad-
destroying fungi. It is also known as der, non-adjustable in length, con-
dote and rot. sisting of two or more sections so con-
(20) Compression failure. A compres- structed that the sections may be com-
sion failure is a deformation (buckling) bined to function as a single ladder. Its
of the fibers due to excessive compres- size is designated by the overall length
sion along the grain. of the assembled sections.
(21) Compression wood. Compression (7) Trestle ladder. A trestle ladder is a
wood is an aberrant (abnormal) and self-supporting portable ladder, non-ad-
highly variable type of wood structure justable in length, consisting of two
occurring in softwood species. The sections, hinged at the top to form
wood commonly has density somewhat equal angles with the base. The size is
higher than does normal wood, but designated by the length of the side
somewhat lower stiffness and tensile rails measured along the front edge.
strength for its weight in addition to (8) Extension trestle ladder. An exten-
high longitudinal shrinkage. sion trestle ladder is a self-supporting
(22) Low density. Low-density wood is portable ladder, adjustable in length,
that which is exceptionally light in consisting of a trestle ladder base and
weight and usually deficient in a vertically adjustable single ladder,
strength properties for the species. with suitable means for locking the
(d) As used in 1910.26, unless the con- ladders together. The size is designated
text requires otherwise, portable metal by the length of the trestle ladder base.
ladder terms shall have the meanings (9) Special-purpose ladder. A special-
ascribed in this paragraph. purpose ladder is a portable ladder
(1) Ladder. A ladder is an appliance which represents either a modification
usually consisting of two side rails or a combination of design or construc-
joined at regular intervals by cross- tion features in one of the general-pur-
pieces called steps, rungs, or cleats, on pose types of ladders previously de-
which a person may step in ascending fined, in order to adapt the ladder to
or descending. special or specific uses.
(2) Step ladder. A step ladder is a self- (e) As used in 1910.27, unless the con-
supporting portable ladder, nonadjust- text requires otherwise, fixed ladder
able in length, having flat steps and a terms shall have the meanings ascribed
hinged back. Its size is designated by in this paragraph.
114
(1) Ladder. A ladder is an appliance (13) Ladder safety device. A ladder

usually consisting of two side rails safety device is any device, other than
joined at regular intervals by cross- a cage or well, designed to eliminate or
pieces called steps, rungs, or cleats, on reduce the possibility of accidental
which a person may step in ascending falls and which may incorporate such
or descending. features as life belts, friction brakes,
(2) Fixed ladder. A fixed ladder is a and sliding attachments.
ladder permanently attached to a (14) Grab bars. Grab bars are indi-
structure, building, or equipment. vidual handholds placed adjacent to or
(3) Individual-rung ladder. An indi- as an extension above ladders for the
vidual-rung ladder is a fixed ladder purpose of providing access beyond the
each rung of which is individually at- limits of the ladder.
tached to a structure, building, or (15) Through ladder. A through ladder
equipment. is one from which a man getting off at
(4) Rail ladder. A rail ladder is a fixed the top must step through the ladder in
ladder consisting of side rails joined at order to reach the landing.
regular intervals by rungs or cleats and (16) Side-step ladder. A side-step lad-
fastened in full length or in sections to der is one from which a man getting off
a building, structure, or equipment. at the top must step sideways from the
(5) Railings. A railing is any one or a ladder in order to reach the landing.
combination of those railings con- (f) As used in 1910.28, unless the con-
structed in accordance with 1910.23. A text requires otherwise, scaffolding
standard railing is a vertical barrier terms shall have the meaning ascribed
erected along exposed edges of floor in this paragraph.
openings, wall openings, ramps, plat- (1) Bearer. A horizontal member of a
forms, and runways to prevent falls of scaffold upon which the platform rests
persons. and which may be supported by ledg-
ers.
(6) Pitch. Pitch is the included angle
(2) Boatswains chair. A seat sup-
between the horizontal and the ladder,
ported by slings attached to a sus-
measured on the opposite side of the
pended rope, designed to accommodate
ladder from the climbing side.
one workman in a sitting position.
(7) Fastenings. A fastening is a device
(3) Brace. A tie that holds one scaf-
to attach a ladder to a structure, build-
fold member in a fixed position with
ing, or equipment.
respect to another member.
(8) Rungs. Rungs are ladder cross- (4) Bricklayers square scaffold. A scaf-
pieces of circular or oval cross-section fold composed of framed wood squares
on which a person may step in ascend- which support a platform limited to
ing or descending. light and medium duty.
(9) Cleats. Cleats are ladder cross- (5) Carpenters bracket scaffold. A scaf-
pieces of rectangular cross-section fold consisting of wood or metal brack-
placed on edge on which a person may ets supporting a platform.
step in ascending or descending. (6) Coupler. A device for locking to-
(10) Steps. Steps are the flat cross- gether the component parts of a tubu-
pieces of a ladder on which a person lar metal scaffold. The material used
may step in ascending or descending. for the couplers shall be of a structural
(11) Cage. A cage is a guard that may type, such as a drop-forged steel, mal-
be referred to as a cage or basket guard leable iron, or structural grade alu-
which is an enclosure that is fastened minum. The use of gray cast iron is
to the side rails of the fixed ladder or prohibited.
to the structure to encircle the climb- (7) Crawling board or chicken ladder. A
ing space of the ladder for the safety of plank with cleats spaced and secured at
the person who must climb the ladder. equal intervals, for use by a worker on
(12) Well. A well is a permanent com- roofs, not designed to carry any mate-
plete enclosure around a fixed ladder, rial.
which is attached to the walls of the (8) Double pole or independent pole
well. Proper clearances for a well will scaffold. A scaffold supported from the
give the person who must climb the base by a double row of uprights, inde-
ladder the same protection as a cage. pendent of support from the walls and
115
constructed of uprights, ledgers, hori- cured to the uprights erected along the
zontal platform bearers, and diagonal exposed sides and ends of platforms.
bracing. (22) Needle beam scaffold. A light duty
(9) Float or ship scaffold. A scaffold scaffold consisting of needle beams
hung from overhead supports by means supporting a platform.
of ropes and consisting of a substantial (23) Outrigger scaffold. A scaffold sup-
platform having diagonal bracing un- ported by outriggers or thrustouts pro-
derneath, resting upon and securely jecting beyond the wall or face of the
fastened to two parallel plank bearers building or structure, the inboard ends
at right angles to the span. of which are secured inside of such a
(10) Guardrail. A rail secured to building or structure.
uprights and erected along the exposed (24) Putlog. A scaffold member upon
sides and ends of platforms. which the platform rests.
(11) Heavy duty scaffold. A scaffold de- (25) Roofing bracket. A bracket used in
signed and constructed to carry a sloped roof construction, having provi-
working load not to exceed 75 pounds sions for fastening to the roof or sup-
per square foot. ported by ropes fastened over the ridge
(12) Horse scaffold. A scaffold for light and secured to some suitable object.
or medium duty, composed of horses (26) Runner. The lengthwise hori-
supporting a work platform.
zontal bracing or bearing members or
(13) Interior hung scaffold. A scaffold both.
suspended from the ceiling or roof
(27) Scaffold. Any temporary elevated
structure.
platform and its supporting structure
(14) Ladder jack scaffold. A light duty
used for supporting workmen or mate-
scaffold supported by brackets at-
rials or both.
tached to ladders.
(28) Single-point adjustable suspension
(15) Ledger (stringer). A horizontal
scaffold. A manually or power-operated
scaffold member which extends from
unit designed for light duty use, sup-
post to post and which supports the
putlogs or bearer forming a tie between ported by a single wire rope from an
the posts. overhead support so arranged and oper-
ated as to permit the raising or low-
(16) Light duty scaffold. A scaffold de-
ering of the platform to desired work-
signed and constructed to carry a
working load not to exceed 25 pounds ing positions.
per square foot. (29) Single pole scaffold. Platforms
(17) Manually propelled mobile scaffold. resting on putlogs or crossbeams, the
A portable rolling scaffold supported outside ends of which are supported on
by casters. ledgers secured to a single row of posts
(18) Masons adjustable multiple-point or uprights and the inner ends of which
suspension scaffold. A scaffold having a are supported on or in a wall.
continuous platform supported by bear- (30) Stone setters adjustable multiple-
ers suspended by wire rope from over- point suspension scaffold. A swinging-
head supports, so arranged and oper- type scaffold having a platform sup-
ated as to permit the raising or low- ported by hangers suspended at four
ering of the platform to desired work- points so as to permit the raising or
ing positions. lowering of the platform to the desired
(19) Maximum intended load. The total working position by the use of hoisting
of all loads including the working load, machines.
the weight of the scaffold, and such (31) Toeboard. A barrier secured along
other loads as may be reasonably an- the sides and ends of a platform, to
ticipated. guard against the falling of material.
(20) Medium duty scaffold. A scaffold (32) Tube and coupler scaffold. An as-
designed and constructed to carry a sembly consisting of tubing which
working load not to exceed 50 pounds serves as posts, bearers, braces, ties,
per square foot. and runners, a base supporting the
(21) Mid-rail. A rail approximately posts, and special couplers which serve
midway between the guardrail and to connect the uprights and to join the
platform, used when required, and se- various members.
116
(33) Tubular welded frame scaffold. A (9) Ladder stand. A mobile fixed size
sectional, panel, or frame metal scaf- self-supporting ladder consisting of a
fold substantially built up of prefab- wide flat tread ladder in the form of
ricated welded sections which consist stairs. The assembly may include hand-
of posts and horizontal bearer with in- rails.
termediate members. Panels or frames (10) Ledger (stringer). A horizontal
shall be braced with diagonal or cross scaffold member which extends from
braces. post to post and which supports the
(34) Two-point suspension scaffold bearer forming a tie between the posts.
(swinging scaffold). A scaffold, the plat- (11) Mobile scaffold (tower). A light,
form of which is supported by hangers medium, or heavy duty scaffold mount-
(stirrups) at two points, suspended ed on casters or wheels.
from overhead supports so as to permit (12) Mobile. Manually propelled.
the raising or lowering of the platform (13) Mobile work platform. Generally a
to the desired working position by fixed work level one frame high on
tackle or hoisting machines. casters or wheels, with bracing diago-
(35) Window jack scaffold. A scaffold, nally from platform to vertical frame.
the platform of which is supported by a (14) Runner. The lengthwise hori-
bracket or jack which projects through zontal bracing and/or bearing members.
a window opening. (15) Scaffold. Any temporary elevated
(36) Working load. Load imposed by platform and its necessary vertical, di-
men, materials, and equipment. agonal, and horizontal members used
(g) As used in 1910.29, unless the con- for supporting workmen and materials.
text requires otherwise, manually pro- (Also known as a scaffold tower.)
pelled mobile ladder stand and scaffold (16) Toeboard. A barrier at platform
(tower) terms shall have the meaning level erected along the exposed sides
ascribed in this paragraph. and ends of a scaffold platform to pre-
vent falls of materials.
(1) Bearer. A horizontal member of a
(17) Tube and coupler scaffold. An as-
scaffold upon which the platform rests
sembly consisting of tubing which
and which may be supported by ledg-
serves as posts, bearers, braces, ties,
ers.
and runners, a base supporting the
(2) Brace. A tie that holds one scaf-
posts, and uprights, and serves to join
fold member in a fixed position with
the various members, usually used in
respect to another member.
fixed locations.
(3) Climbing ladder. A separate ladder (18) Tubular welded frame scaffold. A
with equally spaced rungs usually at- sectional, panel, or frame metal scaf-
tached to the scaffold structure for fold substantially built up of prefab-
climbing and descending. ricated welded sections, which consist
(4) Coupler. A device for locking to- of posts and bearers with intermediate
gether the components of a tubular connecting members and braced with
metal scaffold which shall be designed diagonal or cross braces.
and used to safely support the max- (19) Tubular welded sectional folding
imum intended loads. scaffold. A sectional, folding metal
(5) Design working load. The max- scaffold either of ladder frame or inside
imum intended load, being the total of stairway design, substantially built of
all loads including the weight of the prefabricated welded sections, which
men, materials, equipment, and plat- consist of end frames, platform frame,
form. inside inclined stairway frame and
(6) Equivalent. Alternative design or braces, or hinged connected diagonal
features, which will provide an equal and horizontal braces, capable of being
degree or factor of safety. folded into a flat package when the
(7) Guardrail. A barrier secured to scaffold is not in use.
uprights and erected along the exposed (20) Work level. The elevated plat-
sides and ends of platforms to prevent form, used for supporting workmen and
falls of persons. their materials, comprising the nec-
(8) Handrail. A rail connected to a essary vertical, horizontal, and diago-
ladder stand running parallel to the nal braces, guardrails, and ladder for
slope and/or top step. access to the work platform.
117
1910.22 General requirements. which such floor or roof is approved by

the building official.
This section applies to all permanent
places of employment, except where 1910.23 Guarding floor and wall
domestic, mining, or agricultural work openings and holes.
only is performed. Measures for the
control of toxic materials are consid- (a) Protection for floor openings. (1)
ered to be outside the scope of this sec- Every stairway floor opening shall be
tion. guarded by a standard railing con-
(a) Housekeeping. (1) All places of em- structed in accordance with paragraph
ployment, passageways, storerooms, (e) of this section. The railing shall be
and service rooms shall be kept clean provided on all exposed sides (except at
and orderly and in a sanitary condi- entrance to stairway). For infrequently
tion. used stairways where traffic across the
(2) The floor of every workroom shall opening prevents the use of fixed stand-
be maintained in a clean and, so far as ard railing (as when located in aisle
possible, a dry condition. Where wet spaces, etc.), the guard shall consist of
processes are used, drainage shall be a hinged floor opening cover of stand-
maintained, and false floors, platforms, ard strength and construction and re-
mats, or other dry standing places movable standard railings on all ex-
should be provided where practicable. posed sides (except at entrance to
stairway).
(3) To facilitate cleaning, every floor,
working place, and passageway shall be (2) Every ladderway floor opening or
kept free from protruding nails, splin- platform shall be guarded by a stand-
ters, holes, or loose boards. ard railing with standard toeboard on
all exposed sides (except at entrance to
(b) Aisles and passageways. (1) Where
opening), with the passage through the
mechanical handling equipment is
railing either provided with a swinging
used, sufficient safe clearances shall be
gate or so offset that a person cannot
allowed for aisles, at loading docks,
walk directly into the opening.
through doorways and wherever turns
or passage must be made. Aisles and (3) Every hatchway and chute floor
passageways shall be kept clear and in opening shall be guarded by one of the
good repairs, with no obstruction following:
across or in aisles that could create a (i) Hinged floor opening cover of
hazard. standard strength and construction
(2) Permanent aisles and passageways equipped with standard railings or per-
shall be appropriately marked. manently attached thereto so as to
(c) Covers and guardrails. Covers and/ leave only one exposed side. When the
or guardrails shall be provided to pro- opening is not in use, the cover shall be
tect personnel from the hazards of open closed or the exposed side shall be
pits, tanks, vats, ditches, etc. guarded at both top and intermediate
(d) Floor loading protection. (1) In positions by removable standard rail-
every building or other structure, or ings.
part thereof, used for mercantile, busi- (ii) A removable railing with
ness, industrial, or storage purposes, toeboard on not more than two sides of
the loads approved by the building offi- the opening and fixed standard railings
cial shall be marked on plates of ap- with toeboards on all other exposed
proved design which shall be supplied sides. The removable railings shall be
and securely affixed by the owner of kept in place when the opening is not
the building, or his duly authorized in use.
agent, in a conspicuous place in each Where operating conditions necessitate
space to which they relate. Such plates the feeding of material into any hatch-
shall not be removed or defaced but, if way or chute opening, protection shall
lost, removed, or defaced, shall be re- be provided to prevent a person from
placed by the owner or his agent. falling through the opening.
(2) It shall be unlawful to place, or (4) Every skylight floor opening and
cause, or permit to be placed, on any hole shall be guarded by a standard
floor or roof of a building or other skylight screen or a fixed standard
structure a load greater than that for railing on all exposed sides.
118
(5) Every pit and trapdoor floor open- opening with its center approximately
ing, infrequently used, shall be guarded 4 feet above floor level and of standard
by a floor opening cover of standard strength and mounting.
strength and construction. While the (ii) Extension platform onto which
cover is not in place, the pit or trap materials can be hoisted for handling,
opening shall be constantly attended and which shall have side rails or
by someone or shall be protected on all equivalent guards of standard speci-
exposed sides by removable standard fications.
railings. (2) Every chute wall opening from
(6) Every manhole floor opening shall which there is a drop of more than 4
be guarded by a standard manhole feet shall be guarded by one or more of
cover which need not be hinged in the barriers specified in paragraph
place. While the cover is not in place, (b)(1) of this section or as required by
the manhole opening shall be con- the conditions.
stantly attended by someone or shall (3) Every window wall opening at a
be protected by removable standard stairway landing, floor, platform, or
railings. balcony, from which there is a drop of
(7) Every temporary floor opening more than 4 feet, and where the bottom
shall have standard railings, or shall be of the opening is less than 3 feet above
constantly attended by someone. the platform or landing, shall be guard-
(8) Every floor hole into which pered by standard slats, standard grill
sons can accidentally walk shall be work (as specified in paragraph (e)(11)
guarded by either: of this section), or standard railing.
(i) A standard railing with standard Where the window opening is below the
toeboard on all exposed sides, or landing, or platform, a standard toe
(ii) A floor hole cover of standard board shall be provided.
strength and construction. While the (4) Every temporary wall opening
cover is not in place, the floor hole shall have adequate guards but these
shall be constantly attended by some- need not be of standard construction.
one or shall be protected by a remov- (5) Where there is a hazard of mate-
able standard railing. rials falling through a wall hole, and
(9) Every floor hole into which per- the lower edge of the near side of the
sons cannot accidentally walk (on ac- hole is less than 4 inches above the
count of fixed machinery, equipment, floor, and the far side of the hole more
or walls) shall be protected by a cover than 5 feet above the next lower level,
that leaves no openings more than 1 the hole shall be protected by a stand-
inch wide. The cover shall be securely ard toeboard, or an enclosing screen ei-
held in place to prevent tools or mate- ther of solid construction, or as speci-
rials from falling through. fied in paragraph (e)(11) of this section.
(10) Where doors or gates open di- (c) Protection of open-sided floors, plat-
rectly on a stairway, a platform shall forms, and runways. (1) Every open-
be provided, and the swing of the door sided floor or platform 4 feet or more
shall not reduce the effective width to above adjacent floor or ground level
less than 20 inches. shall be guarded by a standard railing
(b) Protection for wall openings and (or the equivalent as specified in para-
holes. (1) Every wall opening from graph (e)(3) of this section) on all open
which there is a drop of more than 4 sides except where there is entrance to
feet shall be guarded by one of the fol- a ramp, stairway, or fixed ladder. The
lowing: railing shall be provided with a
(i) Rail, roller, picket fence, half toeboard wherever, beneath the open
door, or equivalent barrier. Where sides,
there is exposure below to falling ma- (i) Persons can pass,
terials, a removable toe board or the (ii) There is moving machinery, or
equivalent shall also be provided. When (iii) There is equipment with which
the opening is not in use for handling falling materials could create a hazard.
materials, the guard shall be kept in (2) Every runway shall be guarded by
position regardless of a door on the a standard railing (or the equivalent as
opening. In addition, a grab handle specified in paragraph (e)(3) of this sec-
shall be provided on each side of the tion) on all open sides 4 feet or more
119
above floor or ground level. Wherever (e) Railing, toe boards, and cover speci-
tools, machine parts, or materials are fications. (1) A standard railing shall
likely to be used on the runway, a consist of top rail, intermediate rail,
toeboard shall also be provided on each and posts, and shall have a vertical
exposed side. height of 42 inches nominal from upper
Runways used exclusively for special surface of top rail to floor, platform,
purposes (such as oiling, shafting, or runway, or ramp level. The top rail
filling tank cars) may have the railing shall be smooth-surfaced throughout
on one side omitted where operating the length of the railing. The inter-
conditions necessitate such omission, mediate rail shall be approximately
providing the falling hazard is mini- halfway between the top rail and the
mized by using a runway of not less floor, platform, runway, or ramp. The
than 18 inches wide. Where persons en- ends of the rails shall not overhang the
tering upon runways become thereby terminal posts except where such over-
exposed to machinery, electrical equip- hang does not constitute a projection
ment, or other danger not a falling haz- hazard.
ard, additional guarding than is here (2) A stair railing shall be of con-
specified may be essential for protec- struction similar to a standard railing
tion. but the vertical height shall be not
(3) Regardless of height, open-sided more than 34 inches nor less than 30
floors, walkways, platforms, or run- inches from upper surface of top rail to
ways above or adjacent to dangerous surface of tread in line with face of
equipment, pickling or galvanizing riser at forward edge of tread.
tanks, degreasing units, and similar (3) [Reserved]
hazards shall be guarded with a stand- (i) For wood railings, the posts shall
ard railing and toe board. be of at least 2-inch by 4-inch stock
(d) Stairway railings and guards. (1) spaced not to exceed 6 feet; the top and
Every flight of stairs having four or intermediate rails shall be of at least 2-
more risers shall be equipped with inch by 4-inch stock. If top rail is made
standard stair railings or standard of two right-angle pieces of 1-inch by 4-
handrails as specified in paragraphs inch stock, posts may be spaced on 8-
(d)(1) (i) through (v) of this section, the foot centers, with 2-inch by 4-inch in-
width of the stair to be measured clear termediate rail.
of all obstructions except handrails: (ii) For pipe railings, posts and top
(i) On stairways less than 44 inches and intermediate railings shall be at
wide having both sides enclosed, at least 112 inches nominal diameter with
least one handrail, preferably on the posts spaced not more than 8 feet on
right side descending. centers.
(ii) On stairways less than 44 inches (iii) For structural steel railings,
wide having one side open, at least one posts and top and intermediate rails
stair railing on open side. shall be of 2-inch by 2-inch by 38-inch
(iii) On stairways less than 44 inches angles or other metal shapes of equiva-
wide having both sides open, one stair lent bending strength with posts
railing on each side. spaced not more than 8 feet on centers.
(iv) On stairways more than 44 inches (iv) The anchoring of posts and fram-
wide but less than 88 inches wide, one ing of members for railings of all types
handrail on each enclosed side and one shall be of such construction that the
stair railing on each open side. completed structure shall be capable of
(v) On stairways 88 or more inches withstanding a load of at least 200
wide, one handrail on each enclosed pounds applied in any direction at any
side, one stair railing on each open point on the top rail.
side, and one intermediate stair railing (v) Other types, sizes, and arrange-
located approximately midway of the ments of railing construction are ac-
width. ceptable provided they meet the fol-
(2) Winding stairs shall be equipped lowing conditions:
with a handrail offset to prevent walk- (a) A smooth-surfaced top rail at a
ing on all portions of the treads having height above floor, platform, runway,
width less than 6 inches. or ramp level of 42 inches nominal;
120
(b) A strength to withstand at least (7) Floor opening covers may be of

the minimum requirement of 200 any material that meets the following
pounds top rail pressure; strength requirements:
(c) Protection between top rail and (i) Trench or conduit covers and their
floor, platform, runway, ramp, or stair supports, when located in plant road-
treads, equivalent at least to that af- ways, shall be designed to carry a
forded by a standard intermediate rail; truck rear-axle load of at least 20,000
(4) A standard toeboard shall be 4 pounds.
inches nominal in vertical height from (ii) Manhole covers and their sup-
its top edge to the level of the floor, ports, when located in plant roadways,
platform, runway, or ramp. It shall be shall comply with local standard high-
securely fastened in place and with not way requirements if any; otherwise,
more than 14-inch clearance above they shall be designed to carry a truck
floor level. It may be made of any sub- rear-axle load of at least 20,000 pounds.
stantial material either solid or with (iii) The construction of floor open-
openings not over 1 inch in greatest di- ing covers may be of any material that
mension. meets the strength requirements. Cov-
Where material is piled to such height ers projecting not more than 1 inch
that a standard toeboard does not pro- above the floor level may be used pro-
vide protection, paneling from floor to viding all edges are chamfered to an
intermediate rail, or to top rail shall angle with the horizontal of not over 30
be provided. degrees. All hinges, handles, bolts, or
(5)(i) A handrail shall consist of a other parts shall set flush with the
lengthwise member mounted directly floor or cover surface.
on a wall or partition by means of (8) Skylight screens shall be of such
brackets attached to the lower side of construction and mounting that they
the handrail so as to offer no obstruc- are capable of withstanding a load of at
tion to a smooth surface along the top least 200 pounds applied perpendicu-
and both sides of the handrail. The larly at any one area on the screen.
handrail shall be of rounded or other They shall also be of such construction
section that will furnish an adequate and mounting that under ordinary
handhold for anyone grasping it to loads or impacts, they will not deflect
avoid falling. The ends of the handrail downward sufficiently to break the
should be turned in to the supporting glass below them. The construction
wall or otherwise arranged so as not to shall be of grillwork with openings not
constitute a projection hazard. more than 4 inches long or of slatwork
(ii) The height of handrails shall be with openings not more than 2 inches
not more than 34 inches nor less than wide with length unrestricted.
30 inches from upper surface of hand- (9) Wall opening barriers (rails, roll-
rail to surface of tread in line with face ers, picket fences, and half doors) shall
of riser or to surface of ramp. be of such construction and mounting
(iii) The size of handrails shall be: that, when in place at the opening, the
When of hardwood, at least 2 inches in barrier is capable of withstanding a
diameter; when of metal pipe, at least load of at least 200 pounds applied in
112 inches in diameter. The length of any direction (except upward) at any
brackets shall be such as will give a point on the top rail or corresponding
clearance between handrail and wall or member.
any projection thereon of at least 3 (10) Wall opening grab handles shall
inches. The spacing of brackets shall be not less than 12 inches in length and
not exceed 8 feet. shall be so mounted as to give 3 inches
(iv) The mounting of handrails shall clearance from the side framing of the
be such that the completed structure is wall opening. The size, material, and
capable of withstanding a load of at anchoring of the grab handle shall be
least 200 pounds applied in any direc- such that the completed structure is
tion at any point on the rail. capable of withstanding a load of at
(6) All handrails and railings shall be least 200 pounds applied in any direc-
provided with a clearance of not less tion at any point of the handle.
than 3 inches between the handrail or (11) Wall opening screens shall be of
railing and any other object. such construction and mounting that
121
they are capable of withstanding a load where the diameter of the structure is
of at least 200 pounds applied hori- not less than five (5) feet.
zontally at any point on the near side (c) Stair strength. Fixed stairways
of the screen. They may be of solid con- shall be designed and constructed to
struction, of grillwork with openings carry a load of five times the normal
not more than 8 inches long, or of live load anticipated but never of less
slatwork with openings not more than strength than to carry safely a moving
4 inches wide with length unrestricted. concentrated load of 1,000 pounds.
(d) Stair width. Fixed stairways shall
have a minimum width of 22 inches.
FR 49744, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5321, Feb. 10,
1984] (e) Angle of stairway rise. Fixed stairs
shall be installed at angles to the hori-
1910.24 Fixed industrial stairs. zontal of between 30 and 50. Any uni-
form combination of rise/tread dimen-
(a) Application of requirements. This sions may be used that will result in a
section contains specifications for the stairway at an angle to the horizontal
safe design and construction of fixed within the permissible range. Table D
general industrial stairs. This classi- 1 gives rise/tread dimensions which will
fication includes interior and exterior produce a stairway within the permis-
stairs around machinery, tanks, and sible range, stating the angle to the
other equipment, and stairs leading to horizontal produced by each combina-
or from floors, platforms, or pits. This tion. However, the rise/tread combina-
section does not apply to stairs used tions are not limited to those given in
for fire exit purposes, to construction Table D1.
operations to private residences, or to
articulated stairs, such as may be in- TABLE D1
stalled on floating roof tanks or on
dock facilities, the angle of which Tread
Rise (in
Angle to horizontal run (in
inches)
changes with the rise and fall of the inches)
base support.
3035 .................................................... 612 11
(b) Where fixed stairs are required. 3208 .................................................... 634 1034
Fixed stairs shall be provided for ac- 3341 .................................................... 7 1012
cess from one structure level to an- 3516 .................................................... 714 1014
3652 .................................................... 7 2
1 10
other where operations necessitate reg- 3829 .................................................... 734 934
ular travel between levels, and for ac- 4008 .................................................... 8 912
cess to operating platforms at any 4144 .................................................... 814 914
equipment which requires attention 4322 .................................................... 812 9
4500 .................................................... 834 834
routinely during operations. Fixed 4638 .................................................... 9 8 2
1
stairs shall also be provided where ac- 4816 .................................................... 914 814
cess to elevations is daily or at each 4954 .................................................... 912 8
shift for such purposes as gauging, in-
spection, regular maintenance, etc., (f) Stair treads. All treads shall be rea-
where such work may expose employ- sonably slip-resistant and the nosings
ees to acids, caustics, gases, or other shall be of nonslip finish. Welded bar
harmful substances, or for which pur- grating treads without nosings are ac-
poses the carrying of tools or equip- ceptable providing the leading edge can
ment by hand is normally required. (It be readily identified by personnel de-
is not the intent of this section to pre- scending the stairway and provided the
clude the use of fixed ladders for access tread is serrated or is of definite non-
to elevated tanks, towers, and similar slip design. Rise height and tread width
structures, overhead traveling cranes, shall be uniform throughout any flight
etc., where the use of fixed ladders is of stairs including any foundation
common practice.) Spiral stairways structure used as one or more treads of
shall not be permitted except for spe- the stairs.
cial limited usage and secondary access (g) Stairway platforms. Stairway plat-
situations where it is not practical to forms shall be no less than the width of
provide a conventional stairway. Wind- a stairway and a minimum of 30 inches
ing stairways may be installed on in length measured in the direction of
tanks and similar round structures travel.
122
(h) Railings and handrails. Standard (b) A uniform step spacing shall be
railings shall be provided on the open employed which shall be not more than
sides of all exposed stairways and stair 12 inches. Steps shall be parallel and
platforms. Handrails shall be provided level when the ladder is in position for
on at least one side of closed stairways use.
preferably on the right side descending. (c) The minimum width between side
Stair railings and handrails shall be in- rails at the top, inside to inside, shall
stalled in accordance with the provi- be not less than 1112 inches. From top
sions of 1910.23. to bottom, the side rails shall spread at
(i) Vertical clearance. Vertical clear- least 1 inch for each foot of length of
ance above any stair tread to an over- stepladder.
head obstruction shall be at least 7 feet (d)(e) [Reserved]
measured from the leading edge of the (f) A metal spreader or locking device
tread. of sufficient size and strength to se-
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 curely hold the front and back sections
FR 49744, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5321, Feb. 10, in open positions shall be a component
1984] of each stepladder. The spreader shall
have all sharp points covered or re-
1910.25 Portable wood ladders. moved to protect the user. For Type III
(a) Application of requirements. This ladder, the pail shelf and spreader may
section is intended to prescribe rules be combined in one unit (the so-called
and establish minimum requirements shelf-lock ladder).
for the construction, care, and use of (3) Portable rung ladders.
the common types of portable wood (i) [Reserved]
ladders, in order to insure safety under (ii) Single ladder. (a) Single ladders
normal conditions of usage. Other longer than 30 feet shall not be sup-
types of special ladders, fruitpickers plied.
ladders, combination step and exten- (b) [Reserved]
sion ladders, stockroom step ladders, (iii) Two-section ladder. (a) Two-sec-
aisle-way step ladders, shelf ladders, tion extension ladders longer than 60
and library ladders are not specifically feet shall not be supplied. All ladders of
covered by this section. this type shall consist of two sections,
(b) Materials(1) Requirements appli- one to fit within the side rails of the
cable to all wood parts. (i) All wood other, and arranged in such a manner
parts shall be free from sharp edges and that the upper section can be raised
splinters; sound and free from accepted and lowered.
visual inspection from shake, wane, (b) [Reserved]
compression failures, decay, or other (iv) Sectional ladder. (a) Assembled
irregularities. Low density wood shall combinations of sectional ladders
not be used. longer than lengths specified in this
(ii) [Reserved] subdivision shall not be used.
(2) [Reserved] (b) [Reserved]
(c) Construction requirements. (v) Trestle and extension trestle ladder.
(1) [Reserved] (a) Trestle ladders, or extension sec-
(2) Portable stepladders. Stepladders tions or base sections of extension tres-
longer than 20 feet shall not be sup- tle ladders longer than 20 feet shall not
plied. Stepladders as hereinafter speci- be supplied.
fied shall be of three types: (b) [Reserved]
Type IIndustrial stepladder, 3 to 20 feet
(4) Special-purpose ladders.
for heavy duty, such as utilities, contrac- (i) [Reserved]
tors, and industrial use. (ii) Painters stepladder. (a) Painters
Type IICommercial stepladder, 3 to 12 stepladders longer than 12 feet shall
feet for medium duty, such as painters, of- not be supplied.
fices, and light industrial use. (b) [Reserved]
Type IIIHousehold stepladder, 3 to 6 feet
(iii) Masons ladder. A masons ladder
for light duty, such as light household use.
is a special type of single ladder in-
(i) General requirements. tended for use in heavy construction
(a) [Reserved] work.
123
(a) Masons ladders longer than 40 with larger dimensions of the parts
feet shall not be supplied. should be procured;
(b) [Reserved] (iii) Portable ladders shall be so
(5) Trolley and side-rolling ladders(i) placed that the side rails have a secure
Length. Trolley ladders and side-rolling footing. The top rest for portable rung
ladders longer than 20 feet should not and cleat ladders shall be reasonably
be supplied. rigid and shall have ample strength to
(ii) [Reserved] support the applied load;
(d) Care and use of ladders(1) Care. (iv) Ladders shall not be placed in
To insure safety and serviceability the front of doors opening toward the lad-
following precautions on the care of der unless the door is blocked upon,
ladders shall be observed: locked, or guarded;
(i) Ladders shall be maintained in (v) Ladders shall not be placed on
good condition at all times, the joint boxes, barrels, or other unstable bases
between the steps and side rails shall to obtain additional height;
be tight, all hardware and fittings se- (vi)(vii) [Reserved]
curely attached, and the movable parts (viii) Ladders with broken or missing
shall operate freely without binding or steps, rungs, or cleats, broken side
undue play. rails, or other faulty equipment shall
(ii) Metal bearings of locks, wheels, not be used; improvised repairs shall
pulleys, etc., shall be frequently lubri- not be made;
cated. (ix) Short ladders shall not be spliced
(iii) Frayed or badly worn rope shall together to provide long sections;
be replaced. (x) Ladders made by fastening cleats
(iv) Safety feet and other auxiliary across a single rail shall not be used;
equipment shall be kept in good condi- (xi) Ladders shall not be used as
tion to insure proper performance. guys, braces, or skids, or for other than
(v)(ix) [Reserved] their intended purposes;
(x) Ladders shall be inspected fre- (xii) Tops of the ordinary types of
quently and those which have devel- stepladders shall not be used as steps;
oped defects shall be withdrawn from (xiii) On two-section extension lad-
service for repair or destruction and ders the minimum overlap for the two
tagged or marked as Dangerous, Do sections in use shall be as follows:
Not Use. Overlap
Size of ladder (feet)
(xi) Rungs should be kept free of (feet)
grease and oil. Up to and including 36 ........................................ 3
(2) Use. The following safety pre- Over 36 up to and including 48 ........................... 4
cautions shall be observed in connec- Over 48 up to and including 60 ........................... 5
tion with the use of ladders:
(i) Portable rung and cleat ladders (xiv) Portable rung ladders with rein-
shall, where possible, be used at such a forced rails (see paragraphs (c)(3) (ii)(c)
pitch that the horizontal distance from and (iii)(d) this section) shall be used
the top support to the foot of the lad- only with the metal reinforcement on
der is one-quarter of the working the under side;
length of the ladder (the length along (xv) No ladder should be used to gain
the ladder between the foot and the top access to a roof unless the top of the
support). The ladder shall be so placed ladder shall extend at least 3 feet above
as to prevent slipping, or it shall be the point of support, at eave, gutter, or
lashed, or held in position. Ladders roofline;
shall not be used in a horizontal posi- (xvi) [Reserved]
tion as platforms, runways, or scaf- (xvii) Middle and top sections of sec-
folds; tional or window cleaners ladders
(ii) Ladders for which dimensions are should not be used for bottom section
specified should not be used by more unless the user equips them with safety
than one man at a time nor with ladder shoes;
jacks and scaffold planks where use by (xviii) [Reserved]
more than one man is anticipated. In (xix) The user should equip all port-
such cases, specially designed ladders able rung ladders with nonslip bases
124
when there is a hazard of slipping. Non- (iv) Extension ladders shall be

slip bases are not intended as a sub- equipped with positive stops which will
stitute for care in safely placing, lash- insure the overlap specified in the
ing, or holding a ladder that is being table above.
used upon oily, metal, concrete, or slip- (3) General specificationsstep ladders.
pery surfaces; (i)(ii) [Reserved]
(xx) The bracing on the back legs of (iii) The length of a stepladder is
step ladders is designed solely for in- measured by the length of the front
creasing stability and not for climbing. rail. To be classified as a standard
length ladder, the measured length
FR 49744, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5321, Feb. 10, shall be within plus or minus one-half
1984] inch of the specified length. Step-
ladders shall not exceed 20 feet in
1910.26 Portable metal ladders. length.
(a) Requirements(1) General. Specific (iv)(vi) [Reserved]
design and construction requirements (vii) The bottoms of the four rails are
are not part of this section because of to be supplied with insulating nonslip
the wide variety of metals and design material for the safety of the user.
possibilities. However, the design shall (viii) A metal spreader or locking de-
be such as to produce a ladder without vice of sufficient size and strength to
structural defects or accident hazards securely hold the front and back sec-
such as sharp edges, burrs, etc. The tions in the open position shall be a
metal selected shall be of sufficient component of each stepladder. The
strength to meet the test require- spreader shall have all sharp points or
ments, and shall be protected against edges covered or removed to protect
corrosion unless inherently corrosion- the user.
resistant. (4) General specificationstrestles and
(i)(ii) [Reserved] extension trestle ladders. (i) Trestle lad-
(iii) The spacing of rungs or steps ders or extension sections or base sec-
shall be on 12-inch centers. tions of extension trestle ladders shall
(iv) [Reserved] be not more than 20 feet in length.
(v) Rungs and steps shall be cor- (ii) [Reserved]
rugated, knurled, dimpled, coated with (5) General specificationsplatform lad-
skid-resistant material, or otherwise ders. (i) The length of a platform ladder
treated to minimize the possibility of shall not exceed 20 feet. The length of
slipping. a platform ladder shall be measured
(2) General specificationsstraight and along the front rail from the floor to
extension ladders. (i) The minimum the platform.
width between side rails of a straight (ii) [Reserved]
ladder or any section of an extension (b) [Reserved]
ladder shall be 12 inches. (c) Care and maintenance of ladders
(ii) The length of single ladders or in- (1) General. To get maximum service-
dividual sections of ladders shall not ability, safety, and to eliminate unnec-
exceed 30 feet. Two-section ladders essary damage of equipment, good safe
shall not exceed 48 feet in length and practices in the use and care of ladder
over two-section ladders shall not ex- equipment must be employed by the
ceed 60 feet in length. users.
(iii) Based on the nominal length of The following rules and regulations
the ladder, each section of a multisec- are essential to the life of the equip-
tion ladder shall overlap the adjacent ment and the safety of the user.
section by at least the number of feet (2) Care of ladders.
stated in the following: (i)(iii) [Reserved]
(iv) Ladders must be maintained in
Overlap good usable condition at all times.
Normal length of ladder (feet) (feet)
(v) [Reserved]
Up to and including 36 ........................................ 3 (vi) If a ladder is involved in any of
Over 36, up to and including 48 .......................... 4
the following, immediate inspection is
Over 48, up to 60 ................................................ 5
necessary:
125
(a) If ladders tip over, inspect ladder signed to meet the following load re-
for side rails dents or bends, or exces- quirements:
sively dented rungs; check all rung-to- (i) The minimum design live load
side-rail connections; check hardware shall be a single concentrated load of
connections; check rivets for shear. 200 pounds.
(b)(c) [Reserved] (ii) The number and position of addi-
(d) If ladders are exposed to oil and tional concentrated live-load units of
grease, equipment should be cleaned of 200 pounds each as determined from an-
oil, grease, or slippery materials. This ticipated usage of the ladder shall be
can easily be done with a solvent or considered in the design.
steam cleaning.
(iii) The live loads imposed by per-
(vii) Ladders having defects are to be
sons occupying the ladder shall be con-
marked and taken out of service until
sidered to be concentrated at such
repaired by either maintenance depart-
points as will cause the maximum
ment or the manufacturer.
(3) Use of ladders. (i). A simple rule stress in the structural member being
for setting up a ladder at the proper considered.
angle is to place the base a distance (iv) The weight of the ladder and at-
from the vertical wall equal to one- tached appurtenances together with
fourth the working length of the lad- the live load shall be considered in the
der. design of rails and fastenings.
(ii) Portable ladders are designed as a (2) Design stresses. Design stresses for
one-man working ladder based on a 200- wood components of ladders shall not
pound load. exceed those specified in 1910.25. All
(iii) The ladder base section must be wood parts of fixed ladders shall meet
placed with a secure footing. the requirements of 1910.25(b).
(iv) The top of the ladder must be For fixed ladders consisting of wood
placed with the two rails supported, side rails and wood rungs or cleats,
unless equipped with a single support used at a pitch in the range 75 degrees
attachment. to 90 degrees, and intended for use by
(v) When ascending or descending, no more than one person per section,
the climber must face the ladder. single ladders as described in
(vi) Ladders must not be tied or fas-
1910.25(c)(3)(ii) are acceptable.
tened together to provide longer sec-
(b) Specific features(1) Rungs and
tions. They must be equipped with the
hardware fittings necessary if the man- cleats. (i) All rungs shall have a min-
ufacturer endorses extended uses. imum diameter of three-fourths inch
(vii) Ladders should not be used as a for metal ladders, except as covered in
brace, skid, guy or gin pole, gangway, paragraph (b)(7)(i) of this section and a
or for other uses than that for which minimum diameter of 118 inches for
they were intended, unless specifically wood ladders.
recommended for use by the manufac- (ii) The distance between rungs,
turer. cleats, and steps shall not exceed 12
(viii) See 1910.333(c) for work prac- inches and shall be uniform throughout
tices to be used when work is per- the length of the ladder.
formed on or near electric circuits. (iii) The minimum clear length of
rungs or cleats shall be 16 inches.
FR 49745, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5321, Feb. 10, (iv) Rungs, cleats, and steps shall be
1984; 55 FR 32014, Aug. 6, 1990] free of splinters, sharp edges, burrs, or
projections which may be a hazard.
1910.27 Fixed ladders. (v) The rungs of an individual-rung
(a) Design requirements(1) Design ladder shall be so designed that the
considerations. All ladders, appur- foot cannot slide off the end. A sug-
tenances, and fastenings shall be de- gested design is shown in figure D1.
126
shall be treated with a nonirritating

preservative, and the details shall be
such as to prevent or minimize the ac-
cumulation of water on wood parts.
(iii) When different types of mate-
rials are used in the construction of a
ladder, the materials used shall be so
treated as to have no deleterious effect
one upon the other.
FIGURE D1.SUGGESTED DESIGN FOR RUNGS

ON INDIVIDUAL-RUNG LADDERS.
(2) Side rails. Side rails which might
be used as a climbing aid shall be of
such cross sections as to afford ade-
quate gripping surface without sharp
edges, splinters, or burrs.
(3) Fastenings. Fastenings shall be an
integral part of fixed ladder design.
(4) Splices. All splices made by what-
ever means shall meet design require-
ments as noted in paragraph (a) of this
section. All splices and connections
shall have smooth transition with
original members and with no sharp or
extensive projections.
(5) Electrolytic action. Adequate means
shall be employed to protect dissimilar FIGURE D2.RAIL LADDER WITH BAR STEEL
metals from electrolytic action when RAILS AND ROUND STEEL RUNGS
such metals are joined. (c) Clearance(1) Climbing side. On
(6) Welding. All welding shall be in fixed ladders, the perpendicular dis-
accordance with the Code for Welding tance from the centerline of the rungs
in Building Construction (AWSD1.0 to the nearest permanent object on the
1966). climbing side of the ladder shall be 36
(7) Protection from deterioration. (i) inches for a pitch of 76 degrees, and 30
Metal ladders and appurtenances shall inches for a pitch of 90 degrees (fig. D
be painted or otherwise treated to re- 2 of this section), with minimum clear-
sist corrosion and rusting when loca-
ances for intermediate pitches varying
tion demands. Ladders formed by indi-
between these two limits in proportion
vidual metal rungs imbedded in con-
to the slope, except as provided in sub-
crete, which serve as access to pits and
to other areas under floors, are fre- paragraphs (3) and (5) of this para-
quently located in an atmosphere that graph.
causes corrosion and rusting. To in- (2) Ladders without cages or wells. A
crease rung life in such atmosphere, in- clear width of at least 15 inches shall
dividual metal rungs shall have a min- be provided each way from the center-
imum diameter of 1 inch or shall be line of the ladder in the climbing
painted or otherwise treated to resist space, except when cages or wells are
corrosion and rusting. necessary.
(ii) Wood ladders, when used under (3) Ladders with cages or baskets. Lad-
conditions where decay may occur, ders equipped with cage or basket are
EC27OC91.002
127
EC27OC91.001
excepted from the provisions of sub-

paragraphs (1) and (2) of this para-
graph, but shall conform to the provi-
sions of paragraph (d)(1)(v) of this sec-
tion. Fixed ladders in smooth-walled
wells are excepted from the provisions
of subparagraph (1) of this paragraph,
but shall conform to the provisions of
paragraph (d)(1)(vi) of this section.
(4) Clearance in back of ladder. The
distance from the centerline of rungs,
cleats, or steps to the nearest perma-
nent object in back of the ladder shall
be not less than 7 inches, except that
when unavoidable obstructions are en-
countered, minimum clearances as
shown in figure D3 shall be provided.
MINIMUM LADDER CLEARANCES
FIGURE D4.LADDER FAR FROM WALL

(7) Hatch cover. Counterweighted
hatch covers shall open a minimum of
60 degrees from the horizontal. The dis-
tance from the centerline of rungs or
cleats to the edge of the hatch opening
on the climbing side shall be not less
than 24 inches for offset wells or 30
inches for straight wells. There shall be
not protruding potential hazards with-
in 24 inches of the centerline of rungs
or cleats; any such hazards within 30
inches of the centerline of the rungs or
cleats shall be fitted with deflector
plates placed at an angle of 60 degrees
FIGURE D3.CLEARANCE FOR UNAVOIDABLE from the horizontal as indicated in fig-
OBSTRUCTION AT REAR OF FIXED LADDER ure D5. The relationship of a fixed lad-
(5) Clearance in back of grab bar. The der to an acceptable counterweighted
distance from the centerline of the hatch cover is illustrated in figure D6.
grab bar to the nearest permanent ob- (d) Special requirements(1) Cages or
ject in back of the grab bars shall be wells. (i) Cages or wells (except on
not less than 4 inches. Grab bars shall chimney ladders) shall be built, as
not protrude on the climbing side be- shown on the applicable drawings, cov-
yond the rungs of the ladder which ered in detail in figures D7, D8, and
they serve. D9, or of equivalent construction.
(6) Step-across distance. The step- (ii) Cages or wells (except as provided
across distance from the nearest edge in subparagraph (5) of this paragraph)
of ladder to the nearest edge of equip- conforming to the dimensions shown in
ment or structure shall be not more figures D7, D8, and D9 shall be pro-
than 12 inches, or less than 212 inches vided on ladders of more than 20 feet to
(fig. D4). a maximum unbroken length of 30 feet.
EC27OC91.004
128
EC27OC91.003
than 4 inches, or portion of cage oppo-

site ladder shall be carried to the base.
(v) Cages shall not extend less than
27 nor more than 28 inches from the
centerline of the rungs of the ladder.
Cage shall not be less than 27 inches in
width. The inside shall be clear of pro-
jections. Vertical bars shall be located
at a maximum spacing of 40 degrees
around the circumference of the cage;
this will give a maximum spacing of
approximately 912 inches, center to
center.
(vi) Ladder wells shall have a clear
width of at least 15 inches measured
FIGURE D5.DEFLECTOR PLATES FOR HEAD each way from the centerline of the
HAZARDS ladder. Smooth-walled wells shall be a
minimum of 27 inches from the center-
line of rungs to the well wall on the
climbing side of the ladder. Where
other obstructions on the climbing side
of the ladder exist, there shall be a
minimum of 30 inches from the center-
line of the rungs.
FIGURE D6.RELATIONSHIP OF FIXED LADDER

TO A SAFE ACCESS HATCH
(iii) Cages shall extend a minimum of
42 inches above the top of landing, un-
less other acceptable protection is pro-
vided.
(iv) Cages shall extend down the lad-
der to a point not less than 7 feet nor
more than 8 feet above the base of the FIGURE D7.CAGES FOR LADDERS MORE
ladder, with bottom flared not less THAN 20 FEET HIGH
EC27OC91.007
EC27OC91.006
129
EC27OC91.005
FIGURE D8.CLEARANCE DIAGRAM FOR FIXED LADDER IN WELL
130
EC27OC91.008
(3) Ladder extensions. The side rails of

through or side-step ladder extensions
shall extend 312 feet above parapets and
landings. For through ladder exten-
sions, the rungs shall be omitted from
the extension and shall have not less
than 18 nor more than 24 inches clear-
ance between rails. For side-step or off-
set fixed ladder sections, at landings,
the side rails and rungs shall be carried
to the next regular rung beyond or
above the 312 feet minimum (fig. D10).
FIGURE D9.CAGESSPECIAL APPLICATIONS.

(2) Landing platforms. When ladders
are used to ascend to heights exceeding
20 feet (except on chimneys), landing
platforms shall be provided for each 30
feet of height or fraction thereof, ex-
cept that, where no cage, well, or lad-
der safety device is provided, landing
platforms shall be provided for each 20
feet of height or fraction thereof. Each
ladder section shall be offset from adja-
cent sections. Where installation con-
ditions (even for a short, unbroken
length) require that adjacent sections
be offset, landing platforms shall be
provided at each offset.
(i) Where a man has to step a dis-
tance greater than 12 inches from the
centerline of the rung of a ladder to the
nearest edge of structure or equipment,
a landing platform shall be provided. FIGURE D10.OFFSET FIXED LADDER
The minimum step-across distance SECTIONS
shall be 212 inches. (4) Grab bars. Grab bars shall be
(ii) All landing platforms shall be spaced by a continuation of the rung
equipped with standard railings and spacing when they are located in the
toeboards, so arranged as to give safe horizontal position. Vertical grab bars
access to the ladder. Platforms shall be shall have the same spacing as the lad-
not less than 24 inches in width and 30 der side rails. Grab-bar diameters shall
inches in length. be the equivalent of the round-rung di-
(iii) One rung of any section of ladder ameters.
shall be located at the level of the (5) Ladder safety devices. Ladder safe-
landing laterally served by the ladder. ty devices may be used on tower, water
Where access to the landing is through tank, and chimney ladders over 20 feet
the ladder, the same rung spacing as in unbroken length in lieu of cage pro-
used on the ladder shall be used from tection. No landing platform is re-
the landing platform to the first rung quired in these cases. All ladder safety
below the landing. devices such as those that incorporate
EC27OC91.010
131
EC27OC91.009
lifebelts, friction brakes, and sliding 1910.28 Safety requirements for scaf-
attachments shall meet the design re- folding.
quirements of the ladders which they (a) General requirements for all scaf-
serve. folds. (1) Scaffolds shall be furnished
(e) Pitch(1) Preferred pitch. The pre- and erected in accordance with this
ferred pitch of fixed ladders shall be standard for persons engaged in work
considered to come in the range of 75 that cannot be done safely from the
degrees and 90 degrees with the hori- ground or from solid construction, ex-
zontal (fig. D11). cept that ladders used for such work
shall conform to 1910.25 and 1910.26.
(2) The footing or anchorage for scaf-
folds shall be sound, rigid, and capable
of carrying the maximum intended
load without settling or displacement.
Unstable objects such as barrels, boxes,
loose brick, or concrete blocks shall
not be used to support scaffolds or
planks.
(3) [Reserved]
(4) Scaffolds and their components
shall be capable of supporting without
failure at least four times the max-
imum intended load.
(5) Scaffolds and other devices men-
tioned or described in this section shall
be maintained in safe condition. Scaf-
folds shall not be altered or moved
horizontally while they are in use or
occupied.
(6) Any scaffold damaged or weak-
ened from any cause shall be imme-
diately repaired and shall not be used
FIGURE D11.PITCH OF FIXED LADDERS until repairs have been completed.
(2) Substandard pitch. Fixed ladders (7) Scaffolds shall not be loaded in
shall be considered as substandard if excess of the working load for which
they are installed within the sub- they are intended.
standard pitch range of 60 and 75 de- (8) All load-carrying timber members
grees with the horizontal. Substandard of scaffold framing shall be a minimum
fixed ladders are permitted only where of 1,500 f. (Stress Grade) construction
it is found necessary to meet condi- grade lumber. All dimensions are nomi-
tions of installation. This substandard nal sizes as provided in the American
pitch range shall be considered as a Lumber Standards, except that where
critical range to be avoided, if possible. rough sizes are noted, only rough or
(3) Scope of coverage in this section. undressed lumber of the size specified
will satisfy minimum requirements.
This section covers only fixed ladders
(NOTE: Where nominal sizes of lumber
within the pitch range of 60 degrees
are used in place of rough sizes, the
and 90 degrees with the horizontal.
nominal size lumber shall be such as to
(4) Pitch greater than 90 degrees. Lad- provide equivalent strength to that
ders having a pitch in excess of 90 de- specified in tables D7 through D12
grees with the horizontal are prohib- and D16.)
ited. (9) All planking shall be Scaffold
(f) Maintenance. All ladders shall be Grade as recognized by grading rules
maintained in a safe condition. All lad- for the species of wood used. The max-
ders shall be inspected regularly, with imum permissible spans for 2- 9-inch
the intervals between inspections being or wider planks are shown in the fol-
determined by use and exposure. lowing table:
132
EC27OC91.011
Material involving the use of corrosive sub-

Nominal
stances or chemicals.
Full thickness un- (22) Wire or fiber rope used for scaf-
thickness
dressed lumber lumber fold suspension shall be capable of sup-
porting at least six times the intended
load.
Working load
(p.s.f.) ............... 25 50 75 25 50
(23) When acid solutions are used for
Permissible span cleaning buildings over 50 feet in
(ft.) ................... 10 8 6 8 9 height, wire rope supported scaffolds
shall be used.
The maximum permissible span for 114 (24) The use of shore scaffolds or
x 9-inch or wider plank of full thick- lean-to scaffolds is prohibited.
ness is 4 feet with medium loading of 50 (25) Lumber sizes, when used in this
p.s.f. section, refer to nominal sizes except
(10) Nails or bolts used in the con- where otherwise stated.
struction of scaffolds shall be of ade- (26) Scaffolds shall be secured to per-
quate size and in sufficient numbers at manent structures, through use of an-
each connection to develop the de- chor bolts, reveal bolts, or other equiv-
signed strength of the scaffold. Nails alent means. Window cleaners anchor
shall not be subjected to a straight pull bolts shall not be used.
and shall be driven full length. (27) Special precautions shall be
(11) All planking or platforms shall taken to protect scaffold members, in-
be overlapped (minimum 12 inches) or cluding any wire or fiber ropes, when
secured from movement. using a heat-producing process.
(12) An access ladder or equivalent (b) General requirements for wood pole
safe access shall be provided. scaffolds. (1) Scaffold poles shall bear
(13) Scaffold planks shall extend over on a foundation of sufficient size and
their end supports not less than 6 strength to spread the load from the
inches nor more than 18 inches. poles over a sufficient area to prevent
settlement. All poles shall be set
(14) The poles, legs, or uprights of
plumb.
scaffolds shall be plumb, and securely
(2) Where wood poles are spliced, the
and rigidly braced to prevent swaying
ends shall be squared and the upper
and displacement.
section shall rest squarely on the lower
(15) Materials being hoisted onto a section. Wood splice plates shall be
scaffold shall have a tag line. provided on at least two adjacent sides
(16) Overhead protection shall be pro- and shall not be less than 4 feet 0
vided for men on a scaffold exposed to inches in length, overlapping the abut-
overhead hazards. ted ends equally, and have the same
(17) Scaffolds shall be provided with a width and not less than the cross-sec-
screen between the toeboard and the tional area of the pole. Splice plates of
guardrail, extending along the entire other materials of equivalent strength
opening, consisting of No. 18 gauge U.S. may be used.
Standard Wire one-half-inch mesh or (3) Independent pole scaffolds shall be
the equivalent, where persons are reset as near to the wall of the building
quired to work or pass under the scaf- as practicable.
folds. (4) All pole scaffolds shall be securely
(18) Employees shall not work on guyed or tied to the building or struc-
scaffolds during storms or high winds. ture. Where the height or length ex-
(19) Employees shall not work on ceeds 25 feet, the scaffold shall be se-
scaffolds which are covered with ice or cured at intervals not greater than 25
snow, unless all ice or snow is removed feet vertically and horizontally.
and planking sanded to prevent slip- (5) Putlogs or bearers shall be set
ping. with their greater dimensions vertical,
(20) Tools, materials, and debris shall long enough to project over the ledgers
not be allowed to accumulate in quan- of the inner and outer rows of poles at
tities to cause a hazard. least 3 inches for proper support.
(21) Only treated or protected fiber (6) Every wooden putlog on single
rope shall be used for or near any work pole scaffolds shall be reinforced with a
133
316 x 2-inch steel strip or equivalent se- prevent tipping. The planks that meet
cured to its lower edge throughout its the corner putlog at an angle shall be
entire length. laid first, extending over the diago-
(7) Ledgers shall be long enough to nally placed putlog far enough to have
extend over two pole spaces. Ledgers a good safe bearing, but not far enough
shall not be spliced between the poles. to involve any danger from tipping.
Ledgers shall be reinforced by bearing The planking running in the opposite
blocks securely nailed to the side of direction at right angles shall be laid
the pole to form a support for the ledg- so as to extend over and rest on the
er. first layer of planking.
(8) Diagonal bracing shall be provided (14) When moving platforms to the
to prevent the poles from moving in a next level, the old platform shall be
direction parallel with the wall of the left undisturbed until the new putlogs
building, or from buckling. or bearers have been set in place, ready
(9) Cross bracing shall be provided be- to receive the platform planks.
tween the inner and outer sets of poles
(15) Guardrails not less than 2 4
in independent pole scaffolds. The free
inches or the equivalent and not less
ends of pole scaffolds shall be cross
than 36 inches or more than 42 inches
braced.
(10) Full diagonal face bracing shall high, with a mid-rail, when required, of
be erected across the entire face of pole 1 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and
scaffolds in both directions. The braces toeboards, shall be installed at all open
shall be spliced at the poles. sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet
(11) Platform planks shall be laid above the ground or floor. Toeboards
with their edges close together so the shall be a minimum of 4 inches in
platform will be tight with no spaces height. Wire mesh shall be installed in
through which tools or fragments of accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of
material can fall. this section.
(12) Where planking is lapped, each (16) All wood pole scaffolds 60 feet or
plank shall lap its end supports at least less in height shall be constructed and
12 inches. Where the ends of planks erected in accordance with tables D7
abut each other to form a flush floor, through D12 of this section. If they are
the butt joint shall be at the centerline over 60 feet in height they shall be de-
of a pole. The abutted ends shall rest signed by a registered professional en-
on separate bearers. Intermediate gineer and constructed and erected in
beams shall be provided where nec- accordance with such design. A copy of
essary to prevent dislodgment of the typical drawings and specifications
planks due to deflection, and the ends shall be made available to the em-
shall be nailed or cleated to prevent ployer and for inspection purposes.
their dislodgment. (17) Wood-pole scaffolds shall not be
(13) When a scaffold turns a corner, erected beyond the reach of effective
the platform planks shall be laid to firefighting apparatus.
TABLE D7MINIMUM NOMINAL SIZE AND MAXIMUM SPACING OF MEMBERS OF SINGLE POLE
SCAFFOLDSLIGHT DUTY
Maximum height of scaffold
20 feet 60 feet
Uniformly distributed load ................................................ Not to exceed 25 pounds per

square foot..
Poles or uprights .............................................................. 2 by 4 in ....................................... 4 by 4 in.
Pole spacing (longitudinal) ............................................... 6 ft. 0 in ........................................ 10 ft. 0 in.
Maximum width of scaffold .............................................. 5 ft. 0 in ........................................ 5 ft. 0 in.
Bearers or putlogs to 3 ft. 0 in. width .............................. 2 by 4 in ....................................... 2 by 4 in.
Bearers or putlogs to 5 ft. 0 in. width .............................. 2 by 6 in. or 3 by 4 in .................. 2 by 6 in. or 3 by 4 in.(rough).
Ledgers ............................................................................ 1 by 4 in ....................................... 114 by 9 in.
Planking ........................................................................... 114 by 9 in. (rough) ...................... 2 by 9 in.
Vertical spacing of horizontal members .......................... 7 ft. 0 in ........................................ 7 ft. 0 in.
Bracing, horizontal and diagonal ..................................... 1 by 4 in ....................................... 1 by 4 in.
Tie-ins .............................................................................. 1 by 4 in ....................................... 1 by 4 in.
Toeboards ........................................................................ 4 in. high (minimum) .................... 4 in. high (minimum).
134
TABLE D7MINIMUM NOMINAL SIZE AND MAXIMUM SPACING OF MEMBERS OF SINGLE POLE
SCAFFOLDSLIGHT DUTYContinued
20 feet 60 feet
Guardrail .......................................................................... 2 by 4 in ....................................... 2 by 4 in.

All members except planking are used on edge.
TABLE D8MINIMUM NOMINAL SIZE AND MAX- TABLE D9MINIMUM NOMINAL SIZE AND MAX-
IMUM SPACING OF MEMBERS OF SINGLE POLE IMUM SPACING OF MEMBERS OF SINGLE POLE
SCAFFOLDSMEDIUM DUTY SCAFFOLDSHEAVY DUTY
Uniformly distributed load ............. Not to exceed 50 pounds Uniformly distributed load ............. Not to exceed 75 pounds
per square foot. per square foot.
Maximum height of scaffold ......... 60 ft. Maximum height of scaffold ......... 60 ft.
Poles or uprights .......................... 4 by 4 in. Poles or uprights .......................... 4 by 4 in.
Pole spacing (longitudinal) ........... 8 ft. 0 in. Pole spacing (longitudinal) ........... 6 ft. 0 in.
Maximum width of scaffold ........... 5 ft. 0 in. Maximum width of scaffold ........... 5 ft. 0 in.
Bearers or putlogs ........................ 2 by 9 in. or 3 by 4 in. Bearers or putlogs ........................ 2 by 9 in. or 3 by 5 in.
Spacing of bearers or putlogs ...... 8 ft. 0 in. (rough).
Ledgers ......................................... 2 by 9 in. Spacing of bearers or putlogs ...... 6 ft. 0 in.
Vertical spacing of horizontal 9 ft. 0 in. Ledgers ......................................... 2 by 9 in.
members. Vertical spacing of horizontal 6 ft. 6 in.
Bracing, horizontal ........................ 1 by 6 in. or 114 by 4 in. members.
Bracing, diagonal .......................... 1 by 4 in. Bracing, horizontal and diagonal .. 2 by 4 in.
Tie-ins ........................................... 1 by 4 in. Tie-ins ........................................... 1 by 4 in.
Planking ........................................ 2 by 9 in. Planking ........................................ 2 by 9 in.
Toeboards ..................................... 4 in. high (minimum). Toeboards ..................................... 4 in. high (minimum).
Guardrail ....................................... 2 by 4 in. Guardrail ....................................... 2 by 4 in.
All members except planking are used on edge. All members except planking are used on edge.
TABLE D10MINIMUM NOMINAL SIZE AND MAXIMUM SPACING OF MEMBERS OF INDEPENDENT POLE
SCAFFOLDSLIGHT DUTY
20 feet 60 feet
Uniformly distributed load ................................................ Not to exceed 25 pounds per

square foot..
Poles or uprights .............................................................. 2 by 4 in ....................................... 4 by 4 in.
Pole spacing (longitudinal) ............................................... 6 ft. 0 in ........................................ 10 ft. 0 in.
Pole spacing (transverse) ................................................ 6 ft. 0 in ........................................ 10 ft. 0 in.
Ledgers ............................................................................ 114 by 4 in ................................... 114 by 9 in.
Bearers to 3 ft. 0 in. span ................................................ 2 by 4 in ....................................... 2 by 4 in.
Bearers to 10 ft. 0 in. span .............................................. 2 by 6 in. or 3 by 4 in .................. 2 by 9 (rough) or 3 by 8 in.
Planking ........................................................................... 114 by 9 in ................................... 2 by 9 in.
Vertical spacing of horizontal members .......................... 7 ft. 0 in ........................................ 7 ft. 0 in.
Bracing, horizontal and diagonal ..................................... 1 by 4 in ....................................... 1 by 4 in.
Tie-ins .............................................................................. 1 by 4 in ....................................... 1 by 4 in.
Toeboards ........................................................................ 4 in. high ...................................... 4 in. high (minimum).
Guardrail .......................................................................... 2 by 4 in ....................................... 2 by 4 in.
All members except planking are used on edge.
TABLE D11MINIMUM NOMINAL SIZE AND TABLE D11MINIMUM NOMINAL SIZE AND
MAXIMUM SPACING OF MEMBERS OF INDE- MAXIMUM SPACING OF MEMBERS OF INDE-
PENDENT POLE SCAFFOLDSMEDIUM DUTY PENDENT POLE SCAFFOLDSMEDIUM DUTY
Uniformly distributed load ............. Not to exceed 50 pounds
Continued
per square foot. Bracing, diagonal .......................... 1 by 4 in.
Maximum height of scaffold ......... 60 ft. Tie-ins ........................................... 1 by 4 in.
Poles or uprights .......................... 4 by 4 in.
Planking ........................................ 2 by 9 in.
Pole spacing (longitudinal) ........... 8 ft. 0 in.
Pole spacing (transverse) ............. 8 ft. 0 in. Toeboards ..................................... 4 in. high (minimum).
Ledgers ......................................... 2 by 9 in. Guardrail ....................................... 2 by 4 in.
Vertical spacing of horizontal 6 ft. 0 in. All members except planking are used on edge.
members.
Spacing of bearers ....................... 8 ft. 0 in.
Bearers ......................................... 2 by 9 in. (rough) or 2 by
10 in.
Bracing, horizontal ........................ 1 by 6 in. or 114 by 4 in.
135
TABLE D12MINIMUM NOMINAL SIZE AND (2) A medium-duty tube and coupler
MAXIMUM SPACING OF MEMBERS OF INDE- scaffold shall have all posts, runners,
PENDENT POLE SCAFFOLDSHEAVY DUTY and bracing of nominal 2-inch O.D.
Uniformly distributed load ............. Not to exceed 75 pounds steel tubing. Posts spaced not more
per square foot. than 6 feet apart by 8 feet along the
Maximum height of scaffold ......... 60 ft. length of the scaffold shall have bear-
Poles or uprights .......................... 4 by 4 in.
Pole spacing (longitudinal) ........... 6 ft. 0 in. ers of nominal 212-inch O.D. steel tub-
Pole spacing (transverse) ............. 8 ft. 0 in. ing. Posts spaced not more than 5 feet
Ledgers ......................................... 2 by 9 in. apart by 8 feet along the length of the
Vertical spacing of horizontal 4 ft. 6 in.
members. scaffold shall have bearers of nominal
Bearers ......................................... 2 by 9 in. (rough). 2-inch O.D. steel tubing. Other struc-
Bracing, horizontal and diagonal .. 2 by 4 in.
Tie-ins ........................................... 1 by 4 in.
tural metals when used must be de-
Planking ........................................ 2 by 9 in. signed to carry an equivalent load.
Toeboards ..................................... 4 in. high (minimum). (3) A heavy-duty tube and coupler
Guardrail ....................................... 2 by 4 in.
scaffold shall have all posts, runners,
All members except planking are used on edge. and bracing of nominal 2-inch O.D.
TABLE D13TUBE AND COUPLER steel tubing, with the posts spaced not
SCAFFOLDSLIGHT DUTY more than 6 feet apart by 6 feet 6
inches along the length of the scaffold.
Uniformly distributed load ............. Not to exceed 25 p.s.f. Other structural metals when used
post spacing (longitudinal) ............ 10 ft. 0 in.
Post spacing (transverse) ............. 6 ft. 0 in. must be designed to carry an equiva-
lent load.
Working levels Additional planked Maximum height
(4) Tube and coupler scaffolds shall
levels be limited in heights and working lev-
1 8 125 ft. els to those permitted in tables D13,
2 4 125 ft. 14, and 15, of this section. Drawings and
3 0 91 ft. 0 in.
specifications of all tube and coupler
scaffolds above the limitations in ta-
TABLE D14TUBE AND COUPLER bles D13, 14, and 15 of this section
SCAFFOLDSMEDIUM DUTY shall be designed by a registered pro-
Uniformly distributed load ............. Not to exceed 50 p.s.f. fessional engineer and copies made
Post spacing (longitudinal) ........... 8 ft. 0 in. available to the employer and for in-
Post spacing (transverse) ............. 6 ft. 0 in.
spection purposes.
Additional planked
(5) All tube and coupler scaffolds
Working levels Maximum height shall be constructed and erected to
levels
support four times the maximum in-
1 6 125 ft.
2 0 78 ft. 0 in. tended loads as set forth in tables D13,
14, and 15 of this section, or as set forth
TABLE D15TUBE AND COUPLER in the specifications by a registered
SCAFFOLDSHEAVY DUTY professional engineer, copies which
shall be made available to the em-
Uniformly distributed load ............. Not to exceed 75 p.s.f. ployer and for inspection purposes.
Post spacing (longitudinal) ........... 6 ft. 6 in.
Post spacing (transverse) ............. 6 ft. 0 in. (6) All tube and coupler scaffolds
shall be erected by competent and ex-
Additional planked perienced personnel.
Working levels Maximum height
levels (7) Posts shall be accurately spaced,
1 6 125 ft. erected on suitable bases, and main-
tained plumb.
(c) Tube and coupler scaffolds. (1) A (8) Runners shall be erected along the
light-duty tube and coupler scaffold length of the scaffold located on both
shall have all posts, bearers, runners, the inside and the outside posts at even
and bracing of nominal 2-inch O.D. height. Runners shall be interlocked to
steel tubing. The posts shall be spaced form continuous lengths and coupled to
no more than 6 feet apart by 10 feet each post. The bottom runners shall be
along the length of the scaffold. Other located as close to the base as possible.
structural metals when used must be Runners shall be placed not more than
designed to carry an equivalent load. 6 feet 6 inches on centers.
136
(9) Bearers shall be installed trans- (2) Spacing of panels or frames shall
versely between posts and shall be se- be consistent with the loads imposed.
curely coupled to the posts bearing on (3) Scaffolds shall be properly braced
the runner coupler. When coupled di- by cross bracing or diagonal braces, or
rectly to the runners, the coupler must both, for securing vertical members to-
be kept as close to the posts as pos- gether laterally, and the cross braces
sible. shall be of such length as will auto-
(10) Bearers shall be at least 4 inches matically square and aline vertical
but not more than 12 inches longer members so that the erected scaffold is
than the post spacing or runner spac- always plumb, square, and rigid. All
ing. Bearers may be cantilevered for brace connections shall be made se-
use as brackets to carry not more than cure.
two planks. (4) Scaffold legs shall be set on ad-
(11) Cross bracing shall be installed justable bases or plain bases placed on
across the width of the scaffold at least mud sills or other foundations ade-
every third set of posts horizontally quate to support the maximum in-
and every fourth runner vertically. tended load.
Such bracing shall extend diagonally (5) The frames shall be placed one on
from the inner and outer runners up- top of the other with coupling or stack-
ward to the next outer and inner run- ing pins to provide proper vertical
ners. alinement of the legs.
(12) Longitudinal diagonal bracing
(6) Where uplift may occur, panels
shall be installed at approximately a
shall be locked together vertically by
45-degree angle from near the base of
pins or other equivalent suitable
the first outer post upward to the ex-
means.
treme top of the scaffold. Where the
(7) Guardrails not less than 2 4
longitudinal length of the scaffold per-
mits, such bracing shall be duplicated
beginning at every fifth post. In a simi-
high, with a mid-rail, when required, of
lar manner, longitudinal diagonal brac-
1- 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and
ing shall also be installed from the last
toeboards, shall be installed at all open
post extending back and upward to-
sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet
ward the first post. Where conditions
above the ground or floor. Toeboards
preclude the attachment of this brac-
shall be a minimum of 4 inches in
ing to the posts, it may be attached to
height. Wire mesh shall be installed in
the runners.
accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of
(13) The entire scaffold shall be tied
this section.
to and securely braced against the
building at intervals not to exceed 30 (8) All tubular metal scaffolds shall
feet horizontally and 26 feet vertically. be constructed and erected to support
(14) Guardrails not less than 24 four times the maximum intended
inches or the equivalent and not less loads.
than 36 inches or more than 42 inches (9) To prevent movement, the scaf-
high, with a mid-rail, when required, of fold shall be secured to the building or
14-inch lumber or equivalent, and structure at intervals not to exceed 30
toeboards, shall be installed at all open feet horizontally and 26 feet vertically.
sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet (10) Maximum permissible spans of
above the ground or floor. Toeboards planking shall be in conformity with
shall be a minimum of 4 inches in paragraph (a)(9) of this section.
height. Wire mesh shall be installed in (11) Drawings and specifications for
accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of all frame scaffolds over 125 feet in
this section. height above the base plates shall be
(d) Tubular welded frame scaffolds. (1) designed by a registered professional
Metal tubular frame scaffolds, includ- engineer and copies made available to
ing accessories such as braces, brack- the employer and for inspection pur-
ets, trusses, screw legs, ladders, etc., poses.
shall be designed and proved to safely (12) All tubular welded frame scaf-
support four times the maximum in- folds shall be erected by competent and
tended load. experienced personnel.
137
(13) Frames and accessories for scaf- building wall. Planking shall be nailed
folds shall be maintained in good re- or bolted to outriggers.
pair and every defect, unsafe condition, (5) Where there is danger of material
or noncompliance with this section falling from the scaffold, a wire mesh
shall be immediately corrected before or other enclosure shall be provided be-
further use of the scaffold. Any broken, tween the guardrail and the toeboard.
bent, excessively rusted, altered, or (6) Where additional working levels
otherwise structurally damaged frames are required to be supported by the
or accessories shall not be used. outrigger method, the plans and speci-
(14) Periodic inspections shall be fications of the outrigger and scaf-
made of all welded frames and acces- folding structure shall be designed by a
sories, and any maintenance, including registered professional engineer.
painting, or minor corrections author- (f) Masons adjustable multiple-point
ized by the manufacturer, shall be suspension scaffolds. (1) The scaffold
made before further use. shall be capable of sustaining a work-
(e) Outrigger scaffolds. (1) Outrigger ing load of 50 pounds per square foot
beams shall extend not more than 6 and shall not be loaded in excess of
feet beyond the face of the building. that figure.
The inboard end of outrigger beams, (2) The scaffold shall be provided
measured from the fulcrum point to with hoisting machines that meet the
the extreme point of support, shall be requirements of a nationally recog-
not less than one and one-half times nized testing laboratory. Refer to
the outboard end in length. The beams 1910.7 for definition of nationally rec-
shall rest on edge, the sides shall be ognized testing laboratory.
plumb, and the edges shall be hori-
zontal. The fulcrum point of the beam TABLE D16MINIMUM NOMINAL SIZE AND
shall rest on a secure bearing at least MAXIMUM SPACING OF MEMBERS OF OUT-
RIGGER SCAFFOLDS
6 inches in each horizontal dimension.
The beam shall be secured in place Medium
Light duty
against movement and shall be se- duty
curely braced at the fulcrum point Maximum scaffold load ............... 25 p.s.f. ..... 50 p.s.f.
against tipping. Outrigger size ............................. 2 x 10 in .... 3 x 10 in.
(2) The inboard ends of outrigger Maximum outrigger spacing ....... 10 ft 0 in .... 6 ft 0 in.
beams shall be securely supported ei- Planking ...................................... 2 x 9 in ...... 2 x 9 in.
Guardrail ..................................... 2 x 4 in ...... 2 x 4 in.
ther by means of struts bearing against Guardrail uprights ....................... 2 x 4 in ...... 2 x 4 in.
sills in contact with the overhead Toeboards (minimum) ................ 4 in ............ 4 in.
beams or ceiling, or by means of ten-
sion members secured to the floor (3) The platform shall be supported
joists underfoot, or by both if nec- by wire ropes in conformity with para-
essary. The inboard ends of outrigger graph (a)(22) of this section, suspended
beams shall be secured against tipping from overhead outrigger beams.
and the entire supporting structure (4) The scaffold outrigger beams shall
shall be securely braced in both direc- consist of structural metal securely
tions to prevent any horizontal move- fastened or anchored to the frame or
ment. floor system of the building or struc-
(3) Unless outrigger scaffolds are de- ture.
signed by a licensed professional engi- (5) Each outrigger beam shall be
neer, they shall be constructed and equivalent in strength to at least a
erected in accordance with table D16. standard 7-inch, 15.3-pound steel I-
Outrigger scaffolds designed by a reg- beam, be at least 15 feet long, and shall
istered professional engineer shall be not project more than 6 feet 6 inches
constructed and erected in accordance beyond the bearing point.
with such design. A copy of the de- (6) Where the overhang exceeds 6 feet
tailed drawings and specifications 6 inches, outrigger beams shall be com-
showing the sizes and spacing of mem- posed of stronger beams or multiple
bers shall be kept on the job. beams and be installed in accordance
(4) Planking shall be laid tight and with approved designs and instruc-
shall extend to within 3 inches of the tions.
138
(7) If channel iron outrigger beams sional engineer, and supervised by a

are used in place of I-beams, they shall competent, designated person.
be securely fastened together with the (g) Two-point suspension scaffolds
flanges turned out. (swinging scaffolds). (1) Two-point sus-
(8) All outrigger beams shall be set pension scaffold platforms shall be not
and maintained with their webs into less than 20 inches no more than 36
vertical position. inches wide overall. The platform shall
(9) A stop bolt shall be placed at each be securely fastened to the hangers by
end of every outrigger beam. U-bolts or by other equivalent means.
(10) The outrigger beam shall rest on (2) The hangers of two-point suspen-
suitable wood-bearing blocks. sion scaffolds shall be made of wrought
(11) All parts of the scaffold such as iron, mild steel, or other equivalent
bolts, nuts, fittings, clamps, wire rope, material having a cross-sectional area
and outrigger beams and their fas- capable of sustaining four times the
tenings, shall be maintained in sound maximum intended load, and shall be
and good working condition and shall designed with a support for guardrail,
be inspected before each installation intermediate rail, and toeboard.
and periodically thereafter. (3) When hoisting machines are used
(12) The free end of the suspension on two-point suspension scaffolds, such
wire ropes shall be equipped with prop- machines shall be of a design tested
er size thimbles and be secured by and approved by a nationally recog-
splicing or other equivalent means. nized testing laboratory. Refer to
The running ends shall be securely at- 1910.7 for definition of nationally rec-
tached to the hoisting drum and at ognized testing laboratory.
least four turns of rope shall at all
(4) The roof irons or hooks shall be of
times remain on the drum.
wrought iron, mild steel, or other
(13) Where a single outrigger beam is
equivalent material of proper size and
used, the steel shackles or clevises
design, securely installed and an-
with which the wire ropes are attached
chored. Tie-backs of three-fourth inch
to the outrigger beams shall be placed
manila rope or the equivalent shall
directly over the hoisting drums.
serve as a secondary means of anchor-
(14) The scaffold platform shall be
age, installed at right angles to the
equivalent in strength to at least 2-
face of the building whenever possible
inch planking. (For maximum planking
spans see paragraph (a)(9) of this sec- and secured to a structurally sound
tion.) portion of the building.
(15) Guardrails not less than 2 4 (5) Guardrails not less than 2 4
inches or the equivalent and not less inches or the equivalent and not less
than 36 inches or more than 42 inches than 36 inches or more than 42 inches
high, with a mid-rail, when required, of high, with a mid-rail, when required, of
1 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and 1- 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and
toeboards, shall be installed at all open toeboards, shall be installed at all open
sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet
above the ground or floor. Toeboards above the ground or floor. Toeboards
shall be a minimum of 4 inches in shall be a minimum of 4 inches in
height. Wire mesh shall be installed in height. Wire mesh shall be installed in
accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of
this section. this section.
(16) Overhead protection shall be pro- (6) Two-point suspension scaffolds
vided on the scaffold, not more than 9 shall be suspended by wire or fiber
feet above the platform, consisting of ropes. Wire and fiber ropes shall con-
2-inch planking or material of equiva- form to paragraph (a)(22) of this sec-
lent strength laid tight, when men are tion.
at work on the scaffold and an over- (7) The blocks for fiber ropes shall be
head hazard exists. of standard 6-inch size, consisting of at
(17) Each scaffold shall be installed least one double and one single block.
or relocated in accordance with designs The sheaves of all blocks shall fit the
and instructions, of a registered profes- size of rope used.
139
(8) All wire ropes, fiber ropes, slings, eighth inch. The stringers shall be tied
hangers, platforms, and other sup- together with the tie rods not less than
porting parts shall be inspected before one-quarter inch in diameter, passing
every installation. Periodic inspections through the stringers and riveted up
shall be made while the scaffold is in tight against washers on both ends.
use. The flooring strips shall be spaced not
(9) On suspension scaffolds designed more than five-eighth inch apart ex-
for a working load of 500 pounds no cept at the side rails where the space
more than two men shall be permitted may be 1 inch. Ladder-type platforms
to work at one time. On suspension shall be constructed in accordance with
scaffolds with a working load of 750 table D17.
pounds, no more than three men shall (ii) Plank-type platforms shall be
be permitted to work at one time. Each composed of not less than nominal 2- x
workman shall be protected by a safety 8-inch unspliced planks, properly
lifebelt attached to a lifeline. The life- cleated together on the underside
line shall be securely attached to sub-
starting 6 inches from each end; inter-
stantial members of the structure (not
vals in between shall not exceed 4 feet.
scaffold), or to securely rigged lines,
The plank-type platform shall not ex-
which will safely suspend the workman
tend beyond the hangers more than 18
in case of a fall.
(10) Where acid solutions are used, inches. A bar or other effective means
fiber ropes are not permitted unless shall be securely fastened to the plat-
acid-proof. form at each end to prevent its slipping
(11) Two-point suspension scaffolds off the hanger. The span between hang-
shall be securely lashed to the building ers for plank-type platforms shall not
or structure to prevent them from exceed 10 feet.
swaying. Window cleaners anchors (iii) Beam platforms shall have side
shall not be used for this purpose. stringers of lumber not less than 2 x 6
(12) The platform of every two-point inches set on edge. The span between
suspension scaffold shall be one of the hangers shall not exceed 12 feet when
following types: beam platforms are used. The flooring
(i) The side stringer of ladder-type shall be supported on 2- and 6-inch
platforms shall be clear straight- crossbeams, laid flat and set into the
grained spruce or materials of equiva- upper edge of the stringers with a snug
lent strength and durability. The rungs fit, at intervals of not more than 4 feet,
shall be of straight-grained oak, ash, or securely nailed in place. The flooring
hickory, at least 118 inch in diameter, shall be of 1- x 6-inch material properly
with seven-eighth inch tenons mortised nailed. Floorboards shall not be spaced
into the side stringers at least seven- more than one-half inch apart.
TABLE D17SCHEDULE FOR LADDER-TYPE PLATFORMS
Length of platform (feet)
12 14 & 16 18 & 20 22 & 24 28 & 30
Side stringers, minimum cross section (finished sizes):

At ends (in.) ...................................................................... 134 x 234 134 x 234 134 x 3 134 x 3 134 x 312
At middle (in.) ................................................................... 134 x 334 134 x 334 134 x 4 134 x 414 134 x 5
Reinforcing strip (minimum) 1 ................................................... .................. .................. .................. .................. ..................
Rungs 2 ..................................................................................... .................. .................. .................. .................. ..................
Tie rods:
Number (minimum) ........................................................... 3 4 4 5 6
Diameter (minimum) ......................................................... 14 in 14 in 14 in 14 in 14 in.
Flooring, minimum finished size (in.) ....................................... x 234

12 x 234
12 x 234
12 x 34
12 x 234
12
1 A 18x78-in. steel reinforcing strip or its equivalent shall be attached to the side or underside full length.
2 Rungs shall be 118-in. minimum, diameter with at least 78-in. diameter tenons, and the maximum spacing shall be 12 in. cen-
ter to center.
(h) Stone setters adjustable multiple- working load of 25 pounds per square
point suspension scaffolds. (1) The scaf-
fold shall be capable of sustaining a
140
foot and shall not be overloaded. Scaf- power units or manually operated
folds shall not be used for storage of winches, shall be a type tested and list-
stone or other heavy materials. ed by a nationally recognized testing
(2) The hoisting machine and its sup- laboratory. Refer to 1910.399(a)(77) for
ports shall be of a type tested and list- definition of listed, and 1910.7 for na-
ed by a nationally recognized testing tionally recognized testing laboratory.
laboratory. Refer to 1910.399(a)(77) for (2) [Reserved]
definition of listed, and 1910.7 for na- (3) All power-operated gears and
tionally recognized testing laboratory. brakes shall be enclosed.
(3) The platform shall be securely fas-
(4) In addition to the normal oper-
tened to the hangers by U-bolts or
other equivalent means. ating brake, all-power driven units
(4) The scaffold unit shall be sus- must have an emergency brake which
pended from metal outriggers, iron engages automatically when the nor-
brackets, wire rope slings, or iron mal speed of descent is exceeded.
hooks which will safely support the (5) Guards, mid-rails, and toeboards
maximum intended load. shall completely enclose the cage or
(5) Outriggers when used shall be set basket. Guardrails shall be no less than
with their webs in a vertical position, 2 by 4 inches or the equivalent in-
securely anchored to the building or stalled no less than 36 inches nor more
structure and provided with stop bolts than 42 inches above the platform. Mid-
at each end. rails shall be 1 by 6 inches or the equiv-
(6) The scaffold shall be supported by alent, installed equidistant between
wire rope conforming with paragraph the guardrail and the platform.
(a)(22) of this section, suspended from Toeboards shall be a minimum of 4
overhead supports. inches in height.
(7) The free ends of the suspension (6) The hoisting machines, cables,
wire ropes shall be equipped with prop- and equipment shall be regularly serv-
er size thimbles, secured by splicing or iced and inspected after each installa-
other equivalent means. The running
tion and every 30 days thereafter.
ends shall be securely attached to the
hoisting drum and at least four turns (7) The units may be combined to
of rope shall remain on the drum at all form a two-point suspension scaffold.
times. Such scaffold shall comply with para-
(8) Guardrails not less than 2 by 4 graph (g) of this section.
inches or the equivalent and not less (8) The supporting cable shall be
than 36 inches or more than 42 inches straight for its entire length, and the
high, with a mid-rail, when required, of operator shall not sway the basket and
1- by 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and fix the cable to any intermediate
toeboards, shall be installed at all open points to change his original path of
sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet travel.
above the ground or floor. Toeboards (9) Equipment shall be maintained
shall be a minimum of 4 inches in and used in accordance with the manu-
height. Wire mesh shall be installed in facturers instructions.
accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of (10) Suspension methods shall con-
this section. form to applicable provisions of para-
(9) When two or more scaffolds are graphs (f) and (g) of this section.
used on a building or structure they (j) Boatswains chairs. (1) The chair
shall not be bridged one to the other
seat shall be not less than 12 by 24
but shall be maintained at even height
inches, and of 1-inch thickness. The
with platforms butting closely.
(10) Each scaffold shall be installed seat shall be reinforced on the under-
or relocated in accordance with designs side to prevent the board from split-
and instructions of a registered profes- ting.
sional engineer, and such installation (2) The two fiber rope seat slings
or relocation shall be supervised by a shall be of 58-inch diameter, reeved
competent designated person. through the four seat holes so as to
(i) Single-point adjustable suspension cross each other on the underside of
scaffolds. (1) The scaffolding, including the seat.
141
(3) Seat slings shall be of at least 38- height. Wire mesh shall be installed in
inch wire rope when a workman is con- accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of
ducting a heat producing process such this section.
as gas or arc welding. (l) Bricklayers square scaffolds. (1) The
(4) The workman shall be protected squares shall not exceed 5 feet in width
by a safety life belt attached to a life- and 5 feet in height.
line. The lifeline shall be securely at- (2) Members shall be not less than
tached to substantial members of the those specified in Table D18.
structure (not scaffold), or to securely (3) The squares shall be reinforced on
rigged lines, which will safely suspend both sides of each corner with 1- by 6-
the worker in case of a fall. inch gusset pieces. They shall also have
(5) The tackle shall consist of correct braces 1 by 8 inches on both sides run-
size ball bearing or bushed blocks and ning from center to center of each
properly spliced 58-inch diameter first- member, or other means to secure
grade manila rope. equivalent strength and rigidity.
(6) The roof irons, hooks, or the ob- (4) The squares shall be set not more
ject to which the tackle is anchored than 5 feet apart for medium duty scaf-
shall be securely installed. Tiebacks folds, and not more than 8 feet apart
when used shall be installed at right for light duty scaffolds. Bracing 1 x 8
angles to the face of the building and inches, extending from the bottom of
securely fastened to a chimney. each square to the top of the next
(k) Carpenters bracket scaffolds. (1) square, shall be provided on both front
The brackets shall consist of a tri- and rear sides of the scaffold.
angular wood frame not less than 2 by
TABLE D18MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR
3 inches in cross section, or of metal of
BRICKLAYERS SQUARE SCAFFOLD MEMBERS
equivalent strength. Each member
shall be properly fitted and securely Members Dimensions
joined. (inches)
(2) Each bracket shall be attached to Bearers or horizontal members ....................... 2 by 6.
the structure by means of one of the Legs ................................................................. 2 by 6.
following: Braces at corners ............................................. 1 by 6.
Braces diagonally from center frame ............... 1 by 8.
(i) A bolt no less than five-eighths
inch in diameter which shall extend (5) Platform planks shall be at least
through the inside of the building wall. 2- by 9-inch nominal size. The ends of
(ii) A metal stud attachment device. the planks shall overlap the bearers of
(iii) Welding to steel tanks. the squares and each plank shall be
(iv) Hooking over a well-secured and supported by not less than three
adequately strong supporting member. squares.
The brackets shall be spaced no more (6) Bricklayers square scaffolds shall
than 10 feet apart. not exceed three tiers in height and
(3) No more than two persons shall shall be so constructed and arranged
occupy any given 10 feet of a bracket that one square shall rest directly
scaffold at any one time. Tools and ma- above the other. The upper tiers shall
terials shall not exceed 75 pounds in ad- stand on a continuous row of planks
dition to the occupancy. laid across the next lower tier and be
(4) The platform shall consist of not nailed down or otherwise secured to
less than two 2- by 9-inch nominal size prevent displacement.
planks extending not more than 18 (7) Scaffolds shall be level and set
inches or less than 6 inches beyond upon a firm foundation.
each end support. (m) Horse scaffolds. (1) Horse scaffolds
(5) Guardrails not less than 2 by 4 shall not be constructed or arranged
inches or the equivalent and not less more than two tiers or 10 feet in
than 36 inches or more than 42 inches height.
high, with a mid-rail, when required, of (2) The members of the horses shall
1- by 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and be not less than those specified in
toeboards, shall be installed at all open Table D19.
sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet (3) Horses shall be spaced not more
above the ground or floor. Toeboards than 5 feet for medium duty and not
shall be a minimum of 4 inches in more than 8 feet for light duty.
142
(4) When arranged in tiers, each horse shall be designed based on design re-
shall be placed directly over the horse quirements for the special span. The
in the tier below. overhang of each end of the platform
(5) On all scaffolds arranged in tiers, planks shall be not less than 1 foot and
the legs shall be nailed down to the not more than 18 inches.
planks to prevent displacement or (5) When one needle beam is higher
thrust and each tier shall be substan- than the other or when the platform is
tially cross braced. not level the platform shall be secured
against slipping.
TABLE D19MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR
(6) All unattached tools, bolts, and
HORSE SCAFFOLD MEMBERS
nuts used on needle beam scaffolds
Members Dimensions shall be kept in suitable containers.
(inches)
(7) One end of a needle beam scaffold
Horizontal members or bearers ....................... 3 by 4. may be supported by a permanent
Legs ................................................................. 114 by 412. structural member conforming to para-
Longitudinal brace between legs ..................... 1 by 6.
Gusset brace at top of legs ............................. 1 by 8. graphs (a) (4) and (8) of this section.
Half diagonal braces ........................................ 114 by 412. (8) Each man working on a needle
beam scaffold 20 feet or more above the
(6) Horses or parts which have be- ground or floor and working with both
come weak or defective shall not be hands, shall be protected by a safety
used. life belt attached to a lifeline. The life-
(7) Guardrails not less than 2 by 4 line shall be securely attached to sub-
inches or the equivalent and not less stantial members of the structure (not
than 36 inches or more than 42 inches scaffold), or to securely rigged lines,
high with a mid-rail, when required, of which will safely suspend the workman
1- by 4-inch lumber or equivalent and in case of a fall.
toeboards, shall be installed at all open (o) Plasterers, decorators, and large
sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet area scaffolds. (1) Plasterers, decora-
above the ground or floor. Toeboards tors, lathers, and ceiling workers in-
shall be a minimum of 4 inches in side scaffolds shall be constructed in
height. Wire mesh shall be installed in accordance with the general require-
accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of ments set forth for independent wood
this section. pole scaffolds.
(n) Needle beam scaffold. (1) Wood nee-
(2) Guardrails not less than 2 by 4
dle beams shall be in accordance with
paragraph (a) (5) and (9) of this section,
and shall be not less than 4 by 6 inches
high, with a mid-rail, when required, of
in size, with the greater dimension
1- by 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and
placed in a vertical direction. Metal
toeboards, shall be installed at all open
beams or the equivalent conforming to
sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet
paragraph (a) (4) and (8) of this section
above the ground or floor. Toeboards
may be used.
shall be a minimum of 4 inches in
(2) Ropes or hangers shall be provided
height. Wire mesh shall be installed in
for supports. The span between sup-
accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of
ports on the needle beam shall not ex-
this section.
ceed 10 feet for 4- by 6-inch timbers.
Rope supports shall be equivalent in (3) All platform planks shall be laid
strength to 1-inch diameter first-grade with the edges close together.
manila rope. (4) When independent pole scaffold
(3) The ropes shall be attached to the platforms are erected in sections, such
needle beams by a scaffold hitch or a sections shall be provided with con-
properly made eye splice. The loose end necting runways equipped with sub-
of the rope shall be tied by a bowline stantial guardrails.
knot or by a round turn and one-half (p) Interior hung scaffolds.
hitch. (1) [Reserved]
(4) The platform span between the (2) The suspended steel wire rope
needle beams shall not exceed 8 feet shall conform to paragraph (a)(22) of
when using 2-inch scaffold plank. For this section. Wire may be used pro-
spans greater than 8 feet, platforms viding the strength requirements of
143
paragraph (a)(22) of this section are tened, held, or equipped with devices so
met. as to prevent slipping.
(3) For hanging wood scaffolds, the (5) The wood platform planks shall be
following minimum nominal size mate- not less than 2 inches nominal in
rial is recommended: thickness. Both metal and wood plat-
(i) Supporting bearers 2 by 9 inches form planks shall overlap the bearing
on edge. surface not less than 12 inches. The
(ii) Planking 2 by 9 inches or 2 by 10 span between supports for wood shall
inches, with maximum span 7 feet for not exceed 8 feet. Platform width shall
heavy duty and 10 feet for light duty or be not less than 18 inches.
medium duty. (6) Not more than two persons shall
(4) Steel tube and coupler members occupy any given 8 feet of any ladder-
may be used for hanging scaffolds with jack scaffold at any one time.
both types of scaffold designed to sus- (r) Window-jack scaffolds. (1) Window-
tain a uniform distributed working jack scaffolds shall be used only for the
load up to heavy duty scaffold loads purpose of working at the window
with a safety factor of four. opening through which the jack is
placed.
(5) When a hanging scaffold is sup-
(2) Window jacks shall not be used to
ported by means of wire rope, such wire
support planks placed between one win-
rope shall be wrapped at least twice
dow jack and another or for other ele-
around the supporting members and
ments of scaffolding.
twice around the bearers of the scaf-
(3) Window-jack scaffolds shall be
fold, with each end of the wire rope se-
provided with suitable guardrails un-
cured by at least three standard wire-
less safety belts with lifelines are at-
rope clips.
tached and provided for the workman.
(6) All overhead supporting members Window-jack scaffolds shall be used by
shall be inspected and checked for one man only.
strength before the scaffold is erected. (s) Roofing brackets. (1) Roofing
(7) Guardrails not less than 2 by 4 brackets shall be constructed to fit the
inches or the equivalent and not less pitch of the roof.
than 36 inches or more than 42 inches (2) Brackets shall be secured in place
high, with a mid-rail, when required, of by nailing in addition to the pointed
1- by 4-inch lumber or equivalent, and metal projections. The nails shall be
toeboards, shall be installed at all open driven full length into the roof. When
sides on all scaffolds more than 10 feet rope supports are used, they shall con-
above the ground or floor. Toeboards sist of first-grade manila of at least
shall be a minimum of 4 inches in three-quarter-inch diameter, or equiva-
height. Wire mesh shall be installed in lent.
accordance with paragraph (a)(17) of (3) A substantial catch platform shall
this section. be installed below the working area of
(q) Ladder-jack scaffolds. (1) All lad- roofs more than 20 feet from the
der-jack scaffolds shall be limited to ground to eaves with a slope greater
light duty and shall not exceed a than 3 inches in 12 inches without a
height of 20 feet above the floor or parapet. In width the platform shall ex-
ground. tend 2 feet beyond the projection of the
(2) All ladders used in connection eaves and shall be provided with a safe-
with ladder-jack scaffolds shall be ty rail, mid-rail, and toeboard. This
heavy-duty ladders and shall be de- provision shall not apply where em-
signed and constructed in accordance ployees engaged in work upon such
with 1910.25 and 1910.26. roofs are protected by a safety belt at-
(3) The ladder jack shall be so detached to a lifeline.
signed and constructed that it will bear (t) Crawling boards or chicken ladders.
on the side rails in addition to the lad- (1) Crawling boards shall be not less
der rungs, or if bearing on rungs only, than 10 inches wide and 1 inch thick,
the bearing area shall be at least 10 having cleats 1 x 112 inches. The cleats
inches on each rung. shall be equal in length to the width of
(4) Ladders used in conjunction with the board and spaced at equal intervals
ladder jacks shall be so placed, fas- not to exceed 24 inches. Nails shall be
144
driven through and clinched on the un- rigged lines, which will safely suspend
derside. The crawling board shall ex- the workman in case of a fall.
tend from the ridge pole to the eaves (v) Scope. This section establishes
when used in connection with roof con- safety requirements for the construc-
struction, repair, or maintenance. tion, operation, maintenance, and use
(2) A firmly fastened lifeline of at of scaffolds used in the maintenance of
least three-quarter-inch rope shall be buildings and structures.
strung beside each crawling board for a [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43
handhold. FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5321, Feb. 10,
(3) Crawling boards shall be secured 1984; 53 FR 12121, Apr. 12, 1988]
to the roof by means of adequate ridge
hooks or equivalent effective means. 1910.29 Manually propelled mobile
(u) Float or ship scaffolds. (1) Float or ladder stands and scaffolds (tow-
ship scaffolds shall support not more ers).
than three men and a few light tools, (a) General requirements(1) Applica-
such as those needed for riveting, bolt- tion. This section is intended to pre-
ing, and welding. They shall be con- scribe rules and requirements for the
structed in accordance with paragraphs design, construction, and use of mobile
(u) (2) through (6) of this section, un- work platforms (including ladder
less substitute designs and materials stands but not including aerial ladders)
provide equivalent strength, stability, and rolling (mobile) scaffolds (towers).
and safety. This standard is promulgated to aid in
(2) The platform shall be not less providing for the safety of life, limb,
than 3 feet wide and 6 feet long, made and property, by establishing minimum
of three-quarter-inch plywood, equiva- standards for structural design require-
lent to American Plywood Association ments and for the use of mobile work
Grade BB, Group I, Exterior. platforms and towers.
(3) Under the platform, there shall be (2) Working loads. (i) Work platforms
two supporting bearers made from 2- x and scaffolds shall be capable of car-
4-inch, or 1- x 10-inch rough, selected rying the design load under varying
lumber, or better. They shall be free of circumstances depending upon the con-
knots or other flaws and project 6 ditions of use. Therefore, all parts and
inches beyond the platform on both appurtenances necessary for their safe
sides. The ends of the platform shall and efficient utilization must be inte-
extend about 6 inches beyond the outer gral parts of the design.
edges of the bearers. Each bearer shall (ii) Specific design and construction
be securely fastened to the platform. requirements are not a part of this sec-
(4) An edging of wood not less than 34 tion because of the wide variety of ma-
x 112 inches, or equivalent, shall be terials and design possibilities. How-
placed around all sides of the platform ever, the design shall be such as to
to prevent tools from rolling off. produce a mobile ladder stand or scaf-
(5) Supporting ropes shall be 1-inch fold that will safely sustain the speci-
diameter manila rope or equivalent, fied loads. The material selected shall
free from deterioration, chemical dam- be of sufficient strength to meet the
age, flaws, or other imperfections. test requirements and shall be pro-
Rope connections shall be such that tected against corrosion or deteriora-
the platform cannot shift or slip. If two tion.
ropes are used with each float, each of (a) The design working load of ladder
the two supporting ropes shall be stands shall be calculated on the basis
hitched around one end of a bearer and of one or more 200-pound persons to-
pass under the platforms to the other gether with 50 pounds of equipment
end of the bearer where it is hitched each.
again, leaving sufficient rope at each (b) The design load of all scaffolds
end for the supporting ties. shall be calculated on the basis of:
(6) Each workman shall be protected
Light Designed and constructed to carry
by a safety lifebelt attached to a life- a working load of 25 pounds per square foot.
line. The lifeline shall be securely at- Medium Designed and constructed to
tached to substantial members of the carry a working load of 50 pounds per square
structure (not scaffold), or to securely foot.
145
Heavy Designed and constructed to carry have a standard (4-inch nominal)
a working load of 75 pounds per square foot. toeboard.
All ladder stands and scaffolds shall be (vii) All work levels 10 feet or higher
capable of supporting at least four above the ground or floor shall have a
times the design working load. guardrail of 2- by 4-inch nominal or the
(iii) The materials used in mobile equivalent installed no less than 36
ladder stands and scaffolds shall be of inches or more than 42 inches high,
standard manufacture and conform to with a mid-rail, when required, of 1- by
standard specifications of strength, di- 4-inch nominal lumber or equivalent.
mensions, and weights, and shall be se- (viii) A climbing ladder or stairway
lected to safely support the design shall be provided for proper access and
working load. egress, and shall be affixed or built into
(iv) Nails, bolts, or other fasteners the scaffold and so located that its use
used in the construction of ladders, will not have a tendency to tip the
scaffolds, and towers shall be of ade- scaffold. A landing platform shall be
quate size and in sufficient numbers at provided at intervals not to exceed 30
each connection to develop the de- feet.
signed strength of the unit. Nails shall (4) Wheels or casters. (i) Wheels or
be driven full length. (All nails should casters shall be properly designed for
be immediately withdrawn from dis- strength and dimensions to support
mantled lumber.) four (4) times the design working load.
(v) All exposed surfaces shall be free
(ii) All scaffold casters shall be pro-
from sharp edges, burrs or other safety
vided with a positive wheel and/or
hazards.
swivel lock to prevent movement. Lad-
(3) Work levels. (i) The maximum
der stands shall have at least two (2) of
work level height shall not exceed four
(4) times the minimum or least base di- the four (4) casters and shall be of the
mensions of any mobile ladder stand or swivel type.
scaffold. Where the basic mobile unit (iii) Where leveling of the elevated
does not meet this requirement, suit- work platform is required, screw jacks
able outrigger frames shall be em- or other suitable means for adjusting
ployed to achieve this least base di- the height shall be provided in the base
mension, or provisions shall be made to section of each mobile unit.
guy or brace the unit against tipping. (b) Mobile tubular welded frame scaf-
(ii) The minimum platform width for folds(1) General. Units shall be de-
any work level shall not be less than 20 signed to comply with the require-
inches for mobile scaffolds (towers). ments of paragraph (a) of this section.
Ladder stands shall have a minimum (2) Bracing. Scaffolds shall be prop-
step width of 16 inches. erly braced by cross braces and/or di-
(iii) The supporting structure for the agonal braces for securing vertical
work level shall be rigidly braced, members together laterally. The cross
using adequate cross bracing or diago- braces shall be of a length that will
nal bracing with rigid platforms at automatically square and align
each work level. vertical members so the erected scaf-
(iv) The steps of ladder stands shall fold is always plumb, square, and rigid.
be fabricated from slip resistant treads. (3) Spacing. Spacing of panels or
(v) The work level platform of scaf- frames shall be consistent with the
folds (towers) shall be of wood, alu-
loads imposed. The frames shall be
minum, or plywood planking, steel or
placed one on top of the other with
expanded metal, for the full width of
coupling or stacking pins to provide
the scaffold, except for necessary open-
ings. Work platforms shall be secured proper vertical alignment of the legs.
in place. All planking shall be 2-inch (4) Locking. Where uplift may occur,
(nominal) scaffold grade minimum 1,500 panels shall be locked together
f. (stress grade) construction grade vertically by pins or other equivalent
lumber or equivalent. means.
(vi) All scaffold work levels 10 feet or (5) Erection. Only the manufacturer of
higher above the ground or floor shall a scaffold or his qualified designated
146
agent shall be permitted to erect or su- shall be designed so that the horizontal
pervise the erection of scaffolds exceed- bearers provide supports for multiple
ing 50 feet in height above the base, un- planking levels.
less such structure is approved in writ- (7) Erection. Only the manufacturer of
ing by a registered professional engi- the scaffold or his qualified designated
neer, or erected in accordance with in- agent shall be permitted to erect or su-
structions furnished by the manufac- pervise the erection of scaffolds exceed-
turer. ing 50 feet in height above the base, un-
(c) Mobile tubular welded sectional less such structure is approved in writ-
folding scaffolds(1) General. Units ining by a licensed professional engineer,
cluding sectional stairway and sec- or erected in accordance with instruc-
tional ladder scaffolds shall be de- tions furnished by the manufacturer.
signed to comply with the require- (d) Mobile tube and coupler scaffolds
ments of paragraph (a) of this section. (1) Design. Units shall be designed to
(2) Stairway. An integral stairway comply with the applicable require-
and work platform shall be incor- ments of paragraph (a) of this section.
porated into the structure of each sec- (2) Material. The material used for
tional folding stairway scaffold. the couplers shall be of a structural
(3) Bracing. An integral set of piv- type, such as a drop-forged steel, mal-
oting and hinged folding diagonal and leable iron or structural grade alu-
horizontal braces and a detachable minum. The use of gray cast iron is
work platform shall be incorporated prohibited.
into the structure of each sectional (3) Erection. Only the manufacturer of
folding ladder scaffold. the scaffold or his qualified designated
(4) Sectional folding stairway scaffolds. agent shall be permitted to erect or su-
Sectional folding stairway scaffolds pervise the erection of scaffolds exceed-
shall be designed as medium duty scaf- ing 50 feet in height above the base, un-
folds except for high clearance. These less such structure is approved in writ-
special base sections shall be designed ing by a licensed professional engineer,
as light duty scaffolds. When upper sec- or erected in accordance with instruc-
tional folding stairway scaffolds are tions furnished by the manufacturer.
used with a special high clearance base, (e) Mobile work platforms(1) Design.
the load capacity of the entire scaffold Units shall be designed for the use in-
shall be reduced accordingly. The tended and shall comply with the re-
width of a sectional folding stairway quirements of paragraph (a) of this sec-
scaffold shall not exceed 412 feet. The tion.
maximum length of a sectional folding (2) Base width. The minimum width of
stairway scaffold shall not exceed 6 the base of mobile work platforms shall
feet. not be less than 20 inches.
(5) Sectional folding ladder scaffolds. (3) Bracing. Adequate rigid diagonal
Sectional folding ladder scaffolds shall bracing to vertical members shall be
be designed as light duty scaffolds in- provided.
cluding special base (open end) sections (f) Mobile ladder stands(1) Design.
which are designed for high clearance. Units shall comply with applicable re-
For certain special applications the quirements of paragraph (a) of this sec-
six-foot (6) folding ladder scaffolds, ex- tion.
cept for special high clearance base (2) Base width. The minimum base
sections, shall be designed for use as width shall conform to paragraph
medium duty scaffolds. The width of a (a)(3)(i) of this section. The maximum
sectional folding ladder scaffold shall length of the base section shall be the
not exceed 412 feet. The maximum total length of combined steps and top
length of a sectional folding ladder assembly, measured horizontally, plus
scaffold shall not exceed 6 feet 6 inches five-eighths inch per step of rise.
for a six-foot (6) long unit, 8 feet 6 (3) Steps. Steps shall be uniformly
inches for an eight-foot (8) unit or 10 spaced, and sloped, with a rise of not
feet 6 inches for a ten-foot (10) long less than nine (9) inches, nor more than
unit. ten (10) inches, and a depth of not less
(6) End frames. The end frames of sec- seven (7) inches. The slope of the steps
tional ladder and stairway scaffolds section shall be a minimum of fifty-
147
five (55) degrees and a maximum of (3) Wood platforms used on the floor
sixty (60) degrees measured from the in front of machines shall be substan-
horizontal. tially constructed.
(4) Handrails. (i) Units having more (c) Veneer machinery. (1) Sides of
than five (5) steps or 60 inches vertical steam vats shall extend to a height of
height to the top step shall be equipped not less than 36 inches above the floor,
with handrails. working platform, or ground.
(ii) Handrails shall be a minimum of (2) Large steam vats divided into sec-
29 inches high. Measurements shall be tions shall be provided with substantial
taken vertically from the center of the walkways between sections. Each
step. walkway shall be provided with a
(5) Loading. The load (see paragraph standard handrail on each exposed side.
(a)(2)(ii)(a) of this section) shall be ap- These handrails may be removable, if
plied uniformly to a 312 inches wide necessary.
area front to back at the center of the (3) Covers shall be removed only from
width span with a safety factor of four that portion of steaming vats on which
(4). men are working and a portable railing
shall be placed at this point to protect
1910.30 Other working surfaces. the operators.
(4) Workmen shall not ride or step on
(a) Dockboards (bridge plates). (1) Port- logs in steam vats.
able and powered dockboards shall be
strong enough to carry the load im- [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 49
posed on them. FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996]
(2) Portable dockboards shall be se-
cured in position, either by being an- Subpart EMeans of Egress
chored or equipped with devices which
will prevent their slipping. AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-
(3) Powered dockboards shall be de- pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
signed and constructed in accordance U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labors
Order No. 1271 (36 FR 8754), 876 (41 FR
with Commercial Standard CS20256 25059), 983 (48 FR 35736), or 190 (55 FR 9033),
(1961) Industrial Lifts and Hinged as applicable.
Loading Ramps published by the U.S.
Department of Commerce, which is in- 1910.35 Definitions.
corporated by reference as specified in As used in this subpart.
1910.6. (a) Means of egress. A means of egress
(4) Handholds, or other effective is a continuous and unobstructed way
means, shall be provided on portable of exit travel from any point in a build-
dockboards to permit safe handling. ing or structure to a public way and
(5) Positive protection shall be pro- consists of three separate and distinct
vided to prevent railroad cars from parts: the way of exit access, the exit,
being moved while dockboards or and the way of exit discharge. A means
bridge plates are in position. of egress comprises the vertical and
(b) Forging machine area. (1) Machines horizontal ways of travel and shall in-
shall be so located as to give (i) enough clude intervening room spaces, door-
clearance between machines so that ways, hallways, corridors, passage-
the movement of one operator will not ways, balconies, ramps, stairs, enclo-
interfere with the work of another, (ii) sures, lobbies, escalators, horizontal
ample room for cleaning machines and exits, courts, and yards.
handling the work, including material (b) Exit access. Exit access is that por-
and scrap. The arrangement of mation of a means of egress which leads to
chines shall be such that operators will an entrance to an exit.
not stand in aisles. (c) Exit. Exit is that portion of a
(2) Aisles shall be provided of suffi- means of egress which is separated
cient width to permit the free move- from all other spaces of the building or
ment of employees bringing and remov- structure by construction or equip-
ing material. This aisle space is to be ment as required in this subpart to pro-
independent of working and storage vide a protected way of travel to the
space. exit discharge.
148
(d) Exit discharge. Exit discharge is sels, or other mobile structures are not
that portion of a means of egress be- covered by this subpart.
tween the termination of an exit and a (b) Fundamental requirements. (1)
public way. Every building or structure, new or
(e) Low hazard contents. Low hazard old, designed for human occupancy
contents shall be classified as those of shall be provided with exits sufficient
such low combustibility that no self- to permit the prompt escape of occu-
propagating fire therein can occur and pants in case of fire or other emer-
that consequently the only probable gency. The design of exits and other
danger requiring the use of emergency safeguards shall be such that reliance
exits will be from panic, fumes, or for safety to life in case of fire or other
smoke, or fire from some external emergency will not depend solely on
source. any single safeguard; additional safe-
(f) High-hazard contents. High-hazard guards shall be provided for life safety
contents shall be classified as those in case any single safeguard is ineffec-
which are liable to burn with extreme tive due to some human or mechanical
rapidity or from which poisonous failure.
fumes or explosions are to be feared in (2) Every building or structure shall
the event of fire. be so constructed, arranged, equipped,
(g) Ordinary hazard contents. Ordinary maintained, and operated as to avoid
hazard contents shall be classified as undue danger to the lives and safety of
those which are liable to burn with its occupants from fire, smoke, fumes,
moderate rapidity and to give off a or resulting panic during the period of
considerable volume of smoke but from time reasonably necessary for escape
which neither poisonous fumes nor ex- from the building or structure in case
plosions are to be feared in case of fire. of fire or other emergency.
(h) Approved. For the purpose of this (3) Every building or structure shall
subpart approved shall mean listed or be provided with exits of kinds, num-
approved equipment by a nationally bers, location, and capacity appro-
recognized testing laboratory. Refer to priate to the individual building or
1910.155(c)(3)(iv)(A) for definition of structure, with due regard to the char-
listed, and 1910.7 for nationally recog- acter of the occupancy, the number of
nized testing laboratory. persons exposed, the fire protection
(i) Emergency action plan means a available, and the height and type of
plan for a workplace, or parts thereof, construction of the building or struc-
describing what procedures the em- ture, to afford all occupants convenient
ployer and employees must take to en- facilities for escape.
sure employee safety from fire or other (4) In every building or structure
emergencies. exits shall be so arranged and main-
(j) Emergency escape route means the tained as to provide free and unob-
route that employees are directed to structed egress from all parts of the
follow in the event they are required to building or structure at all times when
evacuate the workplace or seek a des- it is occupied. No lock or fastening to
ignated refuge area. prevent free escape from the inside of
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 45 any building shall be installed except
FR 60703, Sept. 12, 1980; 53 FR 12121, Apr. 12, in mental, penal, or corrective institu-
1988] tions where supervisory personnel is
continually on duty and effective pro-
1910.36 General requirements. visions are made to remove occupants
(a) Application. This subpart contains in case of fire or other emergency.
general fundamental requirements es- (5) Every exit shall be clearly visible
sential to providing a safe means of or the route to reach it shall be con-
egress from fire and like emergencies. spicuously indicated in such a manner
Nothing in this subpart shall be con- that every occupant of every building
strued to prohibit a better type of or structure who is physically and
building construction, more exits, or mentally capable will readily know the
otherwise safer conditions than the direction of escape from any point, and
minimum requirements specified in each path of escape, in its entirety,
this subpart. Exits from vehicles, ves- shall be so arranged or marked that
149
the way to a place of safety outside is tained, or in lieu thereof other meas-
unmistakable. Any doorway or pas- ures are taken which provide equiva-
sageway not constituting an exit or lent safety.
way to reach an exit, but of such a (3) No flammable or explosive sub-
character as to be subject to being mis- stances or equipment for repairs or al-
taken for an exit, shall be so arranged terations shall be introduced in a
or marked as to minimize its possible building of normally low or ordinary
confusion with an exit and the result- hazard classification while the building
ant danger of persons endeavoring to is occupied, unless the condition of use
escape from fire finding themselves and safeguards provided are such as not
trapped in a dead-end space, such as a to create any additional danger or
cellar or storeroom, from which there handicap to egress beyond the nor-
is no other way out. mally permissible conditions in the
(6) In every building or structure building.
equipped for artificial illumination,
(d) Maintenance. (1) Every required
adequate and reliable illumination
exit, way of approach thereto, and way
shall be provided for all exit facilities.
of travel from the exit into the street
(7) In every building or structure of
such size, arrangement, or occupancy or open space, shall be continuously
that a fire may not itself provide ade- maintained free of all obstructions or
quate warning to occupants, fire alarm impediments to full instant use in the
facilities shall be provided where nec- case of fire or other emergency.
essary to warn occupants of the exist- (2) Every automatic sprinkler sys-
ence of fire so that they may escape, or tem, fire detection and alarm system,
to facilitate the orderly conduct of fire exit lighting, fire door, and other item
exit drills. of equipment, where provided, shall be
(8) Every building or structure, sec- continuously in proper operating con-
tion, or area thereof of such size, occu- dition.
pancy, and arrangement that the rea-
sonable safety of numbers of occupants 1910.37 Means of egress, general.
may be endangered by the blocking of (a) Permissible exit components. An exit
any single means of egress due to fire shall consist only of the approved com-
or smoke, shall have at least two ponents. Exit components shall be con-
means of egress remote from each structed as an integral part of the
other, so arranged as to minimize any building or shall be permanently af-
possibility that both may be blocked fixed thereto.
by any one fire or other emergency (b) Protective enclosure of exits. When
conditions. an exit is protected by separation from
(9) Compliance with this subpart other parts of the building the sepa-
shall not be construed as eliminating rating construction shall meet the fol-
or reducing the necessity for other pro- lowing requirements.
visions for safety of persons using a
(1) The separation shall have at least
structure under normal occupancy con-
a 1-hour fire resistance rating when the
ditions, nor shall any provision of the
exit connects three stories or less. This
subpart be construed as requiring or
permitting any condition that may be applies whether the stories connected
hazardous under normal occupancy are above or below the story at which
conditions. exit discharge begins.
(c) Protection of employees exposed by (2) The separation shall have at least
construction and repair operations. (1) No a 2-hour fire resistance rating when the
building or structure under construc- exit connects four or more stories,
tion shall be occupied in whole or in whether above or below the floor of dis-
part until all exit facilities required for charge. It shall be constructed of non-
the part occupied are completed and combustible materials, and shall be
ready for use. supported by construction having at
(2) No existing building shall be occu- least a 2-hour fire resistance rating.
pied during repairs or alterations un- (3) Any opening therein shall be pro-
less all existing exits and any existing tected by an approved self-closing fire
fire protection are continuously main- door.
150
(4) Openings in exit enclosures shall capacity shall not be decreased in the
be confined to those necessary for ac- direction of exit travel.
cess to the enclosure from normally oc- (e) Arrangement of exits. When more
cupied spaces and for egress from the than one exit is required from a story,
enclosure. at least two of the exits shall be re-
(c) Width and capacity of means of mote from each other and so arranged
egress. (1) The capacity in number of as to minimize any possibility that
persons per unit of exit width for ap- both may be blocked by any one fire or
proved components of means of egress other emergency condition.
shall be as follows: (f) Access to exits. (1) Exits shall be so
(i) Level Egress Components (includ- located and exit access shall be so ar-
ing Class A Ramps) 100 persons. ranged that exits are readily accessible
(ii) Inclined Egress Components (in- at all times. Where exits are not imme-
cluding Class B Ramps) 60 persons. diately accessible from an open floor
(iii) A ramp shall be designated as area, safe and continuous passageways,
Class A or Class B in accordance with aisles, or corridors leading directly to
the following Table E1: every exit and so arranged as to pro-
vide convenient access for each occu-
TABLE E1
pant to at least two exits by separate
Class A Class B ways of travel, except as a single exit
or limited dead ends are permitted by
Width .............................. 44 inches and 30 to 44 inches.
greater. other provisions of this subpart, shall
Slope .............................. 1 to 1316 1316 to 2 be maintained.
inches in 12 inches in 12 (2) A door from a room to an exit or
inches. inches.
Maximum height be- No limit ............ 12 feet.
to a way of exit access shall be of the
tween landings. side-hinged, swinging type. It shall
swing with exit travel when the room
(2) Means of egress shall be measured is occupied by more than 50 persons or
in units of exit width of 22 inches. used for a high hazard occupancy.
Fractions of a unit shall not be count- (3) In no case shall access to an exit
ed, except that 12 inches added to one be through a bathroom, or other room
or more full units shall be counted as subject to locking, except where the
one-half a unit of exit width. exit is required to serve only the room
(3) Units of exit width shall be meas- subject to locking.
ured in the clear at the narrowest (4) Ways of exit access and the doors
point of the means of egress except to exits to which they lead shall be so
that a handrail may project inside the designed and arranged as to be clearly
measured width on each side not more recognizable as such. Hangings or drap-
than 5 inches and a stringer may eries shall not be placed over exit doors
project inside the measured width not or otherwise so located as to conceal or
more than 112 inches. An exit or exit obscure any exit. Mirrors shall not be
access door swinging into an aisle or placed on exit doors. Mirrors shall not
passageway shall not restrict the effec- be placed in or adjacent to any exit in
tive width thereof at any point during such a manner as to confuse the direc-
its swing to less than the minimum tion of exit.
widths hereafter specified. (5) Exit access shall be so arranged
(d) Egress capacity and occupant load. that it will not be necessary to travel
(1) The capacity of means of egress for toward any area of high hazard occu-
any floor, balcony, tier, or other occupancy in order to reach the nearest
pied space shall be sufficient for the oc- exit, unless the path of travel is effec-
cupant load thereof. The occupant load tively shielded from the high hazard lo-
shall be the maximum number of per- cation by suitable partitions or other
sons that may be in the space at any physical barriers.
time. (6) The minimum width of any way of
(2) Where exits serve more than one exit access shall in no case be less than
floor, only the occupant load of each 28 inches. Where a single way of exit
floor considered individually need be access leads to an exit, its capacity in
used in computing the capacity of the terms of width shall be at least equal
exits at that floor, provided that exit to the required capacity of the exit to
151
which it leads. Where more than one that gives safe access to a public way.
way of exit access leads to an exit, The streets to which the exits dis-
each shall have a width adequate for charge shall be of width adequate to
the number of persons it must accom- accommodate all persons leaving the
modate. building. Yards, courts, or other open
(g) Exterior ways of exit access. (1) Ac- spaces to which exits discharge shall
cess to an exit may be by means of any also be of adequate width and size to
exterior balcony, porch, gallery, or roof provide all persons leaving the building
that conforms to the requirements of with ready access to the street.
this section. (2) Stairs and other exits shall be so
(2) Exterior ways of exit access shall arranged as to make clear the direction
have smooth, solid floors, substantially of egress to the street. Exit stairs that
level, and shall have guards on the continue beyond the floor of discharge
unenclosed sides. shall be interrupted at the floor of dis-
(3) Where accumulation of snow or charge by partitions, doors, or other ef-
ice is likely because of the climate, the fective means.
exterior way of exit access shall be pro- (i) Headroom. Means of egress shall be
tected by a roof, unless it serves as the so designed and maintained as to pro-
sole normal means of access to the vide adequate headroom, but in no case
rooms or spaces served, in which case shall the ceiling height be less than 7
it may be assumed that snow and ice feet 6 inches nor any projection from
will be regularly removed in the course the ceiling be less than 6 feet 8 inches
of normal occupancy. from the floor.
(4) A permanent, reasonably straight (j) Changes in elevation. Where a
path of travel shall be maintained over means of egress is not substantially
the required exterior way of exit ac- level, such differences in elevation
cess. There shall be no obstruction by shall be negotiated by stairs or ramps.
railings, barriers, or gates that divide (k) Maintenance and workmanship. (1)
the open space into sections appur- Doors, stairs, ramps, passages, signs,
tenant to individual rooms, apart- and all other components of means of
ments, or other uses. Where the Assist- egress shall be of substantial, reliable
ant Secretary of Labor or his duly au- construction and shall be built or in-
thorized representative finds the re- stalled in a workmanlike manner.
quired path of travel to be obstructed (2) Means of egress shall be continu-
by furniture or other movable objects, ously maintained free of all obstruc-
he may require that they be fastened tions or impediments to full instant
out of the way or he may require that use in the case of fire or other emer-
railings or other permanent barriers be gency.
installed to protect the path of travel (3) Any device or alarm installed to
against encroachment. restrict the improper use of an exit
(5) An exterior way of exit access shall be so designed and installed that
shall be so arranged that there are no it cannot, even in cases of failure, im-
dead ends in excess of 20 feet. Any pede or prevent emergency use of such
unenclosed exit served by an exterior exit.
way of exit access shall be so located (l) Furnishings and decorations. (1) No
that no part of the exit extends past a furnishings, decorations, or other ob-
vertical plane 20 feet and one-half the jects shall be so placed as to obstruct
required width of the exit from the end exits, access thereto, egress therefrom,
of and at right angles to the way of or visibility thereof.
exit access. (2) No furnishings or decorations of
(6) Any gallery, balcony, bridge, an explosive or highly flammable char-
porch, or other exterior exit access acter shall be used in any occupancy.
that projects beyond the outside wall (m) Automatic sprinkler systems. All
of the building shall comply with the automatic sprinkler systems shall be
requirements of this section as to continuously maintained in reliable
width and arrangement. operating condition at all times, and
(h) Discharge from exits. (1) All exits such periodic inspections and tests
shall discharge directly to the street, shall be made as are necessary to as-
or to a yard, court, or other open space sure proper maintenance.
152
(n) Fire alarm signaling systems. The material to show red or other specified
employer shall assure that fire alarm designating color on the side of the ap-
signaling systems are maintained and proach.
tested in accordance with the require- (7) Each internally illuminated exit
ments of 1910.165(d). sign shall be provided in all occupan-
(o) Fire retardant paints. Fire retard- cies where reduction of normal illu-
ant paints or solutions shall be re- mination is permitted.
newed at such intervals as necessary to (8) Every exit sign shall have the
maintain the necessary flame retard- word Exit in plainly legible letters
ant properties. not less than 6 inches high, with the
(p) [Reserved] principal strokes of letters not less
(q) Exit marking. (1) Exits shall be than three-fourths-inch wide.
marked by a readily visible sign. Ac- [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 45
cess to exits shall be marked by readily FR 60703, Sept. 12, 1980]
visible signs in all cases where the exit
or way to reach it is not immediately 1910.38 Employee emergency plans
visible to the occupants. and fire prevention plans.
(2) Any door, passage, or stairway (a) Emergency action plan(1) Scope
which is neither an exit nor a way of and application. This paragraph (a) ap-
exit access, and which is so located or plies to all emergency action plans re-
arranged as to be likely to be mistaken quired by a particular OSHA standard.
for an exit, shall be identified by a sign The emergency action plan shall be in
reading Not an Exit or similar des- writing (except as provided in the last
ignation, or shall be identified by a sentence of paragraph (a)(5)(iii) of this
sign indicating its actual character, section) and shall cover those des-
such as To Basement, Storeroom, ignated actions employers and employ-
Linen Closet, or the like. ees must take to ensure employee safe-
(3) Every required sign designating ty from fire and other emergencies.
an exit or way of exit access shall be so (2) Elements. The following elements,
located and of such size, color, and de- at a minimum, shall be included in the
sign as to be readily visible. No decora- plan:
tions, furnishings, or equipment which (i) Emergency escape procedures and
impair visibility of an exit sign shall emergency escape route assignments;
be permitted, nor shall there be any (ii) Procedures to be followed by em-
brightly illuminated sign (for other ployees who remain to operate critical
than exit purposes), display, or object plant operations before they evacuate;
in or near the line of vision to the re- (iii) Procedures to account for all
quired exit sign of such a character as employees after emergency evacuation
to so detract attention from the exit has been completed;
sign that it may not be noticed. (iv) Rescue and medical duties for
(4) Every exit sign shall be distinc- those employees who are to perform
tive in color and shall provide contrast them;
with decorations, interior finish, or (v) The preferred means of reporting
other signs. fires and other emergencies; and
(5) A sign reading Exit, or similar (vi) Names or regular job titles of
designation, with an arrow indicating persons or departments who can be
the directions, shall be placed in every contacted for further information or
location where the direction of travel explanation of duties under the plan.
to reach the nearest exit is not imme- (3) Alarm system. (i) The employer
diately apparent. shall establish an employee alarm sys-
(6) Every exit sign shall be suitably tem which complies with 1910.165.
illuminated by a reliable light source (ii) If the employee alarm system is
giving a value of not less than 5 foot- used for alerting fire brigade members,
candles on the illuminated surface. Ar- or for other purposes, a distinctive sig-
tificial lights giving illumination to nal for each purpose shall be used.
exit signs other than the internally il- (4) Evacuation. The employer shall es-
luminated types shall have screens, tablish in the emergency action plan
discs, or lenses of not less than 25 the types of evacuation to be used in
square inches area made of translucent emergency circumstances.
153
Pt. 1910, Subpt. E, App. 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7102 Edition)
(5) Training. (i) Before implementing procedures shall be included in the

the emergency action plan, the em- written fire prevention plan.
ployer shall designate and train a suffi- (4) Training. (i) The employer shall
cient number of persons to assist in the apprise employees of the fire hazards of
safe and orderly emergency evacuation the materials and processes to which
of employees. they are exposed.
(ii) The employer shall review the (ii) The employer shall review with
plan with each employee covered by each employee upon initial assignment
the plan at the following times: those parts of the fire prevention plan
(A) Initially when the plan is devel- which the employee must know to pro-
oped, tect the employee in the event of an
(B) Whenever the employees respon- emergency. The written plan shall be
kept in the workplace and made avail-
sibilities or designated actions under
able for employee review. For those
the plan change, and
employers with 10 or fewer employees,
(C) Whenever the plan is changed. the plan may be communicated orally
(iii) The employer shall review with to employees and the employer need
each employee upon initial assignment not maintain a written plan.
those parts of the plan which the em- (5) Maintenance. The employer shall
ployee must know to protect the em- regularly and properly maintain, ac-
ployee in the event of an emergency. cording to established procedures,
The written plan shall be kept at the equipment and systems installed on
workplace and made available for em- heat producing equipment to prevent
ployee review. For those employers accidental ignition of combustible ma-
with 10 or fewer employees the plan terials. The maintenance procedures
may be communicated orally to em- shall be included in the written fire
ployees and the employer need not prevention plan.
maintain a written plan.
[45 FR 60703, Sept. 12, 1980]
(b) Fire prevention plan(1) Scope and
application. This paragraph (b) applies APPENDIX TO SUBPART E OF PART 1910
to all fire prevention plans required by MEANS OF EGRESS
a particular OSHA standard. The fire
prevention plan shall be in writing, ex- This appendix serves as a nonmandatory
cept as provided in the last sentence of guideline to assist employers in complying
with the appropriate requirements of subpart
paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section.
E.
(2) Elements. The following elements,
at a minimum, shall be included in the 1910.38 Employee emergency plans.
fire prevention plan: 1. Emergency action plan elements. The
(i) A list of the major workplace fire emergency action plan should address emer-
hazards and their proper handling and gencies that the employer may reasonably
storage procedures, potential ignition expect in the workplace. Examples are: fire;
sources (such as welding, smoking and toxic chemical releases; hurricanes; torna-
does; blizzards; floods; and others. The ele-
others) and their control procedures, ments of the emergency action plan pre-
and the type of fire protection equip- sented in paragraph 1910.38(a)(2) can be sup-
ment or systems which can control a plemented by the following to more effec-
fire involving them; tively achieve employee safety and health in
(ii) Names or regular job titles of an emergency. The employer should list in
those personnel responsible for mainte- detail the procedures to be taken by those
employees who have been selected to remain
nance of equipment and systems in-
behind to care for essential plant operations
stalled to prevent or control ignitions until their evacuation becomes absolutely
or fires; and necessary. Essential plant operations may
(iii) Names or regular job titles of include the monitoring of plant power sup-
those personnel responsible for control plies, water supplies, and other essential
of fuel source hazards. services which cannot be shut down for every
emergency alarm. Essential plant operations
(3) Housekeeping. The employer shall
may also include chemical or manufacturing
control accumulations of flammable processes which must be shut down in stages
and combustible waste materials and or steps where certain employees must be
residues so that they do not contribute present to assure that safe shut down proce-
to a fire emergency. The housekeeping dures are completed.
154
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1910, Subpt. E, App.
The use of floor plans or workplace maps should check rooms and other enclosed
which clearly show the emergency escape spaces in the workplace for employees who
routes should be included in the emergency may be trapped or otherwise unable to evac-
action plan. Color coding will aid employees uate the area.
in determining their route assignments. After the desired degree of evacuation is
The employer should also develop and ex- completed, the wardens should be able to ac-
plain in detail what rescue and medical first count for or otherwise verify that all em-
aid duties are to be performed and by whom. ployees are in the safe areas.
All employees are to be told what actions In buildings with several places of employ-
they are to take in these emergency situa- ment, employers are encouraged to coordi-
tions that the employer anticipates may nate their plans with the other employers in
occur in the workplace. the building. A building-wide or standardized
2. Emergency evacuation. At the time of an plan for the whole building is acceptable pro-
emergency, employees should know what vided that the employers inform their re-
type of evacuation is necessary and what spective employees of their duties and re-
their role is in carrying out the plan. In sponsibilities under the plan. The standard-
some cases where the emergency is very ized plan need not be kept by each employer
grave, total and immediate evacuation of all in the multi-employer building, provided
employees is necessary. In other emer- there is an accessible location within the
gencies, a partial evacuation of nonessential building where the plan can be reviewed by
employees with a delayed evacuation of oth- affected employees. When multi-employer
ers may be necessary for continued plant op- building-wide plans are not feasible, employ-
eration. In some cases, only those employees ers should coordinate their plans with the
in the immediate area of the fire may be ex- other employers within the building to as-
pected to evacuate or move to a safe area sure that conflicts and confusion are avoided
such as when a local application fire suppres- during times of emergencies. In multi-story
sion system discharge employee alarm is buildings where more than one employer is
sounded. Employees must be sure that they on a single floor, it is essential that these
know what is expected of them in all such employers coordinate their plans with each
emergency possibilities which have been other to avoid conflicts and confusion.
planned in order to provide assurance of 4. Fire prevention housekeeping. The stand-
their safety from fire or other emergency. ard calls for the control of accumulations of
The designation of refuge or safe areas for flammable and combustible waste materials.
evacuation should be determined and identi- It is the intent of this standard to assure
fied in the plan. In a building divided into that hazardous accumulations of combus-
fire zones by fire walls, the refuge area may tible waste materials are controlled so that
still be within the same building but in a dif- a fast developing fire, rapid spread of toxic
ferent zone from where the emergency oc- smoke, or an explosion will not occur. This
curs. does not necessarily mean that each room
Exterior refuge or safe areas may include has to be swept each day. Employers and em-
parking lots, open fields or streets which are ployees should be aware of the hazardous
located away from the site of the emergency properties of materials in their workplaces,
and which provide sufficient space to accom- and the degree of hazard each poses. Cer-
modate the employees. Employees should be tainly oil soaked rags have to be treated dif-
instructed to move away from the exit dis- ferently than general paper trash in office
charge doors of the building, and to avoid areas. However, large accumulations of
congregating close to the building where waste paper or corrugated boxes, etc., can
they may hamper emergency operations. pose a significant fire hazard. Accumulations
3. Emergency action plan training. The em- of materials which can cause large fires or
ployer should assure that an adequate num- generate dense smoke that are easily ignited
ber of employees are available at all times or may start from spontaneous combustion,
during working hours to act as evacuation are the types of materials with which this
wardens so that employees can be swiftly standard is concerned. Such combustible ma-
moved from the danger location to the safe terials may be easily ignited by matches,
areas. Generally, one warden for each twenty welders sparks, cigarettes and similar low
employees in the workplace should be able to level energy ignition sources.
provide adequate guidance and instruction at 5. Maintenance of equipment under the fire
the time of a fire emergency. The employees prevention plan. Certain equipment is often
selected or who volunteer to serve as war- installed in workplaces to control heat
dens should be trained in the complete work- sources or to detect fuel leaks. An example is
place layout and the various alternative es- a temperature limit switch often found on
cape routes from the workplace. All wardens deep-fat food fryers found in restaurants.
and fellow employees should be made aware There may be similar switches for high tem-
of handicapped employees who may need perature dip tanks, or flame failure and
extra assistance, such as using the buddy flashback arrester devices on furnaces and
system, and of hazardous areas to be avoided similar heat producing equipment. If these
during emergencies. Before leaving, wardens devices are not properly maintained or if
155
they become inoperative, a definite fire haz- ployer before each use in writing that
ard exists. Again employees and supervisors the installation meets the require-
should be aware of the specific type of con- ments of paragraphs (e)(1) and (f)(1) of
trol devices on equipment involved with
combustible materials in the workplace and this section and the additional design
should make sure, through periodic inspec- criteria contained in other provisions
tion or testing, that these controls are oper- of paragraphs (e) and (f) of this section
able. Manufacturers recommendations relating to: required load sustaining
should be followed to assure proper mainte- capabilities of platforms, building com-
nance procedures. ponents, hoisting and supporting equip-
[45 FR 60714, Sept. 12, 1980] ment; stability factors for carriages,
platforms and supporting equipment;
Subpart FPowered Platforms, maximum horizontal force for move-
Manlifts, and Vehicle-Mount- ment of carriages and davits; design of
ed Work Platforms carriages, hoisting machines, wire rope
and stabilization systems; and design
criteria for electrical wiring and equip-
AUTHORITY: Secs. 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupa-
tional Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
ment.
U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657); Secretary of Labors (2) Building owners shall base the in-
Order No. 1271 (36 FR 8754), 876 (41 FR formation required in paragraph (c)(1)
25059), 983 (48 FR 35736), or 190 (55 FR 9033), of this section on the results of a field
as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. test of the installation before being
placed into service and following any
1910.66 Powered platforms for build- major alteration to an existing instal-
ing maintenance.
lation, as required in paragraph (g)(1)
(a) Scope. This section covers powered of this section. The assurance shall
platform installations permanently also be based on all other relevant
dedicated to interior or exterior build- available information, including, but
ing maintenance of a specific structure not limited to, test data, equipment
or group of structures. This section specifications and verification by a
does not apply to suspended scaffolds registered professional engineer.
(swinging scaffolds) used to service (3) Building owners of all installa-
buildings on a temporary basis and tions, new and existing, shall inform
covered under subpart D of this part, the employer in writing that the in-
nor to suspended scaffolds used for con- stallation has been inspected, tested
struction work and covered under sub- and maintained in compliance with the
part L of 29 CFR part 1926. Building
requirements of paragraphs (g) and (h)
maintenance includes, but is not lim-
of this section and that all protection
ited to, such tasks as window cleaning,
anchorages meet the requirements of
caulking, metal polishing and re-
paragraph (I)(c)(10) of appendix C.
glazing.
(b) Application(1) New installations. (4) The employer shall not permit
This section applies to all permanent employees to use the installation prior
installations completed after July 23, to receiving assurance from the build-
1990. Major modifications to existing ing owner that the installation meets
installations completed after that date the requirements contained in para-
are also considered new installations graphs (c)(1) and (c)(3) of this section.
under this section. (d) Definitions.
(2) Existing installations. (i) Perma- Anemometer means an instrument for
nent installations in existence and/or measuring wind velocity.
completed before July 23, 1990 shall Angulated roping means a suspension
comply with paragraphs (g), (h), (i), (j) method where the upper point of sus-
and appendix C of this section. pension is inboard from the attach-
(ii) In addition, permanent installa- ments on the suspended unit, thus
tions completed after August 27, 1971, causing the suspended unit to bear
and in existence and/or completed be- against the face of the building.
fore July 23, 1990, shall comply with ap- Building face roller means a rotating
pendix D of this section. cylindrical member designed to ride on
(c) Assurance. (1) Building owners of the face of the building wall to prevent
new installations shall inform the em- the platform from abrading the face of
156
the building and to assist in stabilizing pended working platform above the
the platform. building face being serviced.
Building maintenance means oper- Guide button means a building face
ations such as window cleaning, caulk- anchor designed to engage a guide
ing, metal polishing, reglazing, and track mounted on a platform.
general maintenance on building sur- Guide roller means a rotating cylin-
faces. drical member, operating separately or
Cable means a conductor, or group of as part of a guide assembly, designed to
conductors, enclosed in a weatherproof provide continuous engagement be-
sheath, that may be used to supply tween the platform and the building
electrical power and/or control current guides or guideways.
for equipment or to provide voice com- Guide shoe means a device attached
munication circuits. to the platform designed to provide a
Carriage means a wheeled vehicle sliding contact between the platform
used for the horizontal movement and and the building guides.
support of other equipment. Hoisting machine means a device in-
Certification means a written, signed tended to raise and lower a suspended
and dated statement confirming the or supported unit.
performance of a requirement of this Hoist rated load means the hoist man-
section. ufacturers maximum allowable oper-
ating load.
Combination cable means a cable hav-
Installation means all the equipment
ing both steel structural members ca-
and all affected parts of a building
pable of supporting the platform, and
which are associated with the perform-
copper or other electrical conductors
ance of building maintenance using
insulated from each other and the
powered platforms.
structural members by nonconductive
Interlock means a device designed to
barriers.
ensure that operations or motions
Competent person means a person who,
occur in proper sequence.
because of training and experience, is
Intermittent stabilization means a
capable of identifying hazardous or
method of platform stabilization in
dangerous conditions in powered plat-
which the angulated suspension wire
form installations and of training em-
rope(s) are secured to regularly spaced
ployees to identify such conditions.
building anchors.
Continuous pressure means the need Lanyard means a flexible line of rope,
for constant manual actuation for a wire rope or strap which is used to se-
control to function. cure the body belt or body harness to a
Control means a mechanism used to deceleration device, lifeline or anchor-
regulate or guide the operation of the age.
equipment. Lifeline means a component con-
Davit means a device, used singly or sisting of a flexible line for connection
in pairs, for suspending a powered plat- to an anchorage at one end to hang
form from work, storage and rigging vertically (vertical lifeline), or for con-
locations on the building being serv- nection to anchorages at both ends to
iced. Unlike outriggers, a davit reacts stretch horizontally (horizontal life-
its operating load into a single roof line), and which serves as a means for
socket or carriage attachment. connecting other components of a per-
Equivalent means alternative designs, sonal fall arrest system to the anchor-
materials or methods which the em- age.
ployer can demonstrate will provide an Live load means the total static
equal or greater degree of safety for weight of workers, tools, parts, and
employees than the methods, materials supplies that the equipment is designed
or designs specified in the standard. to support.
Ground rigging means a method of Obstruction detector means a control
suspending a working platform start- that will stop the suspended or sup-
ing from a safe surface to a point of ported unit in the direction of travel if
suspension above the safe surface. an obstruction is encountered, and will
Ground rigged davit means a davit allow the unit to move only in a direc-
which cannot be used to raise a sus- tion away from the obstruction.
157
Operating control means a mechanism Rope means the equipment used to

regulating or guiding the operation of suspend a component of an equipment
equipment that ensures a specific oper- installation, i.e., wire rope.
ating mode. Safe surface means a horizontal sur-
Operating device means a device actu- face intended to be occupied by per-
ated manually to activate a control. sonnel, which is so protected by a fall
Outrigger means a device, used singly protection system that it can be rea-
or in pairs, for suspending a working sonably assured that said occupants
platform from work, storage, and rig- will be protected against falls.
ging locations on the building being Secondary brake means a brake de-
serviced. Unlike davits, an outrigger signed to arrest the descent of the sus-
reacts its operating moment load as at pended or supported equipment in the
least two opposing vertical components event of an overspeed condition.
acting into two or more distinct roof Self powered platform means a work-
points and/or attachments. ing platform where the hoist(s) used to
Platform rated load means the com- raise or lower the platform is mounted
bined weight of workers, tools, equip- on the platform.
ment and other material which is per- Speed reducer means a positive type
mitted to be carried by the working speed reducing machine.
platform at the installation, as stated Stability factor means the ratio of the
on the load rating plate. stabilizing moment to the overturning
Poured socket means the method of moment.
providing wire rope terminations in Stabilizer tie means a flexible line
which the ends of the rope are held in connecting the building anchor and the
a tapered socket by means of poured suspension wire rope supporting the
spelter or resins. platform.
Supported equipment means building
Primary brake means a brake designed
maintenance equipment that is held or
to be applied automatically whenever
moved to its working position by
power to the prime mover is inter-
means of attachment directly to the
rupted or discontinued.
building or extensions of the building
Prime mover means the source of me-
being maintained.
chanical power for a machine.
Suspended equipment means building
Rated load means the manufacturers maintenance equipment that is sus-
recommended maximum load. pended and raised or lowered to its
Rated strength means the strength of working position by means of ropes or
wire rope, as designated by its manu- combination cables attached to some
facturer or vendor, based on standard anchorage above the equipment.
testing procedures or acceptable engi- Suspended scaffold (swinging scaffold)
neering design practices. means a scaffold supported on wire or
Rated working load means the com- other ropes, used for work on, or for
bined static weight of men, materials, providing access to, vertical sides of
and suspended or supported equipment. structures on a temporary basis. Such
Registered professional engineer means scaffold is not designed for use on a
a person who has been duly and cur- specific structure or group of struc-
rently registered and licensed by an au- tures.
thority within the United States or its Tail line means the nonsupporting
territories to practice the profession of end of the wire rope used to suspend
engineering. the platform.
Roof powered platform means a work- Tie-in guides means the portion of a
ing platform where the hoist(s) used to building that provides continuous posi-
raise or lower the platform is located tive engagement between the building
on the roof. and a suspended or supported unit dur-
Roof rigged davit means a davit used ing its vertical travel on the face of the
to raise the suspended working plat- building.
form above the building face being Traction hoist means a type of hoist-
serviced. This type of davit can also be ing machine that does not accumulate
used to raise a suspended working plat- the suspension wire rope on the hoist-
form which has been ground-rigged. ing drum or sheave, and is designed to
158
raise and lower a suspended load by the (2) Tie-in guides. (i) The exterior of
application of friction forces between each building shall be provided with
the suspension wire rope and the drum tie-in guides unless the conditions in
or sheave. paragraph (e)(2)(ii) or (e)(2)(iii) of this
Transportable outriggers means out- section are met.
riggers designed to be moved from one NOTE: See Figure 1 in appendix B of this
work location to another. section for a description of a typical contin-
Trolley carriage means a carriage sus- uous stabilization system utilizing tie-in
pended from an overhead track struc- guides.
ture. (ii) If angulated roping is employed,
Verified means accepted by design, tie-in guides required in paragraph
evaluation, or inspection by a reg- (e)(2)(i) of this section may be elimi-
istered professional engineer. nated for not more than 75 feet (22.9 m)
Weatherproof means so constructed of the uppermost elevation of the
that exposure to adverse weather con- building, if infeasible due to exterior
ditions will not affect or interfere with building design, provided an angulation
the proper use or functions of the force of at least 10 pounds (44.4 n) is
equipment or component. maintained under all conditions of
Winding drum hoist means a type of loading.
hoisting machine that accumulates the (iii) Tie-in guides required in para-
suspension wire rope on the hoisting graph (e)(2)(i) of this section may be
drum. eliminated if one of the guide systems
Working platform means suspended or in paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(A), (e)(2)(iii)(B)
supported equipment intended to pro- or (e)(2)(iii)(C) of this section is pro-
vide access to the face of a building and vided, or an equivalent.
manned by persons engaged in building (A) Intermittent stabilization sys-
maintenance. tem. The system shall keep the equip-
Wrap means one complete turn of the ment in continuous contact with the
suspension wire rope around the sur- building facade, and shall prevent sud-
face of a hoist drum. den horizontal movement of the plat-
(e) Powered platform installationsAf- form. The system may be used together
fected parts of buildings(1) General re- with continuous positive building guide
quirements. The following requirements systems using tie-in guides on the
apply to affected parts of buildings same building, provided the require-
which utilize working platforms for ments for each system are met.
building maintenance. (1) The maximum vertical interval
(i) Structural supports, tie-downs, between building anchors shall be three
tie-in guides, anchoring devices and floors or 50 feet (15.3 m), whichever is
any affected parts of the building in- less.
cluded in the installation shall be de- (2) Building anchors shall be located
signed by or under the direction of a vertically so that attachment of the
registered professional engineer experi- stabilizer ties will not cause the plat-
enced in such design; form suspension ropes to angulate the
(ii) Exterior installations shall be ca- platform horizontally across the face of
pable of withstanding prevailing cli- the building. The anchors shall be posi-
matic conditions; tioned horizontally on the building
(iii) The building installation shall face so as to be symmetrical about the
provide safe access to, and egress from, platform suspension ropes.
the equipment and sufficient space to (3) Building anchors shall be easily
conduct necessary maintenance of the visible to employees and shall allow a
equipment; stabilizer tie attachment for each of
(iv) The affected parts of the building the platform suspension ropes at each
shall have the capability of sustaining vertical interval. If more than two sus-
all the loads imposed by the equip- pension ropes are used on a platform,
ment; and, only the two building-side suspension
(v) The affected parts of the building ropes at the platform ends shall require
shall be designed so as to allow the a stabilizer attachment.
equipment to be used without exposing (4) Building anchors which extend be-
employees to a hazardous condition. yond the face of the building shall be
159
free of sharp edges or points. Where ca- the platform, or provision shall be
bles, suspension wire ropes and lifelines made in the guide tracks or guide
may be in contact with the building track connectors to prevent the plat-
face, external building anchors shall form and its attachments from trans-
not interfere with their handling or op- mitting the weight of the platform to
eration. the guide buttons, connections and
(5) The intermittent stabilization seals. In either case, the minimum de-
system building anchors and compo- sign load shall be 300 pounds (1334 n)
nents shall be capable of sustaining per building anchor.
without failure at least four times the
maximum anticipated load applied or NOTE: See paragraph (f)(5)(vi) of this sec-
tion for relevant equipment provisions.
transmitted to the components and an-
NOTE: See Figure 3 in appendix B of this
chors. The minimum design wind load section for a a description of a typical but-
for each anchor shall be 300 (1334 n) ton guide stabilization system.
pounds, if two anchors share the wind
load. (C) System utilizing angulated roping
(6) The building anchors and sta- and building face rollers. The system
bilizer ties shall be capable of sus- shall keep the equipment in continuous
taining anticipated horizontal and contact with the building facade, and
vertical loads from winds specified for shall prevent sudden horizontal move-
roof storage design which may act on ment of the platform. This system is
the platform and wire ropes if the plat- acceptable only where the suspended
form is stranded on a building face. If portion of the equipment in use does
the building anchors have different not exceed 130 feet (39.6 m) above a safe
spacing than the suspension wire rope surface or ground level, and where the
or if the building requires different sus- platform maintains no less than 10
pension spacings on one platform, one pounds (44.4 n) angulation force on the
building anchor and stabilizer tie shall building facade.
be capable of sustaining the wind loads. (iv) Tie-in guides for building inte-
NOTE: See Figure 2 in appendix B of this riors (atriums) may be eliminated
section for a description of a typical inter- when a registered professional engineer
mittent stabilization system. determines that an alternative sta-
bilization system, including systems in
(B) Button guide stabilization sys-
paragraphs (e)(2)(iii) (A), (B) and (C), or
tem.
a platform tie-off at each work station
(1) Guide buttons shall be coordi-
will provide equivalent safety.
nated with platform mounted equip-
ment of paragraph (f)(5)(vi) of this sec- (3) Roof guarding. (i) Employees
tion. working on roofs while performing
(2) Guide buttons shall be located building maintenance shall be pro-
horizontally on the building face so as tected by a perimeter guarding system
to allow engagement of each of the which meets the requirements of para-
guide tracks mounted on the platform. graph (c)(1) of 1910.23 of this part.
(3) Guide buttons shall be located in (ii) The perimeter guard shall not be
vertical rows on the building face for more than six inches (152 mm) inboard
proper engagement of the guide tracks of the inside face of a barrier, i.e. the
mounted on the platform. parapet wall, or roof edge curb of the
(4) Two guide buttons shall engage building being serviced; however, the
each guide track at all times except for perimeter guard location shall not ex-
the initial engagement. ceed an 18 inch (457 mm) setback from
(5) Guide buttons which extend be- the exterior building face.
yond the face of the building shall be (4) Equipment stops. Operational areas
free of sharp edges or points. Where ca- for trackless type equipment shall be
bles, ropes and lifelines may be in con- provided with structural stops, such as
tact with the building face, guide but- curbs, to prevent equipment from trav-
tons shall not interfere with their han- eling outside its intended travel areas
dling or operation. and to prevent a crushing or shearing
(6) Guide buttons, connections and hazard.
seals shall be capable of sustaining (5) Maintenance access. Means shall be
without damage at least the weight of provided to traverse all carriages and
160
their suspended equipment to a safe buildings which utilize working plat-

area for maintenance and storage. forms for building maintenance.
(6) Elevated track. (i) An elevated (i) General building electrical instal-
track system which is located four feet lations shall comply with 1910.302
(1.2 m) or more above a safe surface, through 1910.308 of this part, unless
and traversed by carriage supported otherwise specified in this section;
equipment, shall be provided with a (ii) Building electrical wiring shall be
walkway and guardrail system; or of such capacity that when full load is
(ii) The working platform shall be ca- applied to the equipment power circuit
pable of being lowered, as part of its not more than a five percent drop from
normal operation, to the lower safe building service-vault voltage shall
surface for access and egress of the per- occur at any power circuit outlet used
sonnel and shall be provided with a safe by equipment regulated by this sec-
means of access and egress to the lower tion;
safe surface. (iii) The equipment power circuit
(7) Tie-down anchors. Imbedded tie- shall be an independent electrical cir-
down anchors, fasteners, and affected cuit that shall remain separate from
structures shall be resistant to corro- all other equipment within or on the
sion. building, other than power circuits
(8) Cable stabilization. (i) Hanging life- used for hand tools that will be used in
lines and all cables not in tension shall conjunction with the equipment. If the
be stabilized at each 200 foot (61 m) in- building is provided with an emergency
terval of vertical travel of the working power system, the equipment power
platform beyond an initial 200 foot (61 circuit may also be connected to this
m) distance. system;
(ii) Hanging cables, other than sus- (iv) The power circuit shall be pro-
pended wire ropes, which are in con- vided with a disconnect switch that
stant tension shall be stabilized when can be locked in the OFF and ON
the vertical travel exceeds an initial positions. The switch shall be conven-
600 foot (183 m) distance, and at further iently located with respect to the pri-
intervals of 600 feet (183 m) or less. mary operating area of the equipment
(9) Emergency planning. A written to allow the operators of the equip-
emergency action plan shall be devel- ment access to the switch;
oped and implemented for each kind of (v) The disconnect switch for the
working platform operation. This plan power circuit shall be locked in the
shall explain the emergency procedures ON position when the equipment is
which are to be followed in the event of in use; and
a power failure, equipment failure or (vi) An effective two-way voice com-
other emergencies which may be en- munication system shall be provided
countered. The plan shall also explain between the equipment operators and
that employees inform themselves persons stationed within the building
about the building emergency escape being serviced. The communications
routes, procedures and alarm systems facility shall be operable and shall be
before operating a platform. Upon ini- manned at all times by persons sta-
tial assignment and whenever the plan tioned within the building whenever
is changed the employer shall review the platform is being used.
with each employee those parts of the (f) Powered platform installations
plan which the employee must know to Equipment(1) General requirements.
protect himself or herself in the event The following requirements apply to
of an emergency. equipment which are part of a powered
(10) Building maintenance. Repairs or platform installation, such as plat-
major maintenance of those building forms, stabilizing components, car-
portions that provide primary support riages, outriggers, davits, hoisting ma-
for the suspended equipment shall not chines, wire ropes and electrical com-
affect the capability of the building to ponents.
meet the requirements of this stand- (i) Equipment installations shall be
ard. designed by or under the direction of a
(11) Electrical requirements. The fol- registered professional engineer experi-
lowing electrical requirements apply to enced in such design;
161
(ii) The design shall provide for a pended portion of the equipment is lo-
minimum live load of 250 pounds (113.6 cated at its uppermost designed posi-
kg) for each occupant of a suspended or tion for traversing; and is free of con-
supported platform; tact with the face of the building or
(iii) Equipment that is exposed to building guides. In addition, all protec-
wind when not in service shall be de- tive devices and interlocks are to be in
signed to withstand forces generated the proper position to allow traversing
by winds of at least 100 miles per hour of the carriage;
(44.7 m/s) at 30 feet (9.2 m) above grade; (G) Stability for underfoot supported
and carriages shall be obtained by gravity,
(iv) Equipment that is exposed to by an attachment to a structural sup-
wind when in service shall be designed port, or by a combination of gravity
to withstand forces generated by winds and a structural support. The use of
of at least 50 miles per hour (22.4 m/s) flowing counterweights to achieve sta-
for all elevations. bility is prohibited.
(2) Construction requirements. Bolted (1) The stability factor against over-
connections shall be self-locking or turning shall not be less than two for
shall otherwise be secured to prevent horizontal traversing of the carriage,
loss of the connections by vibration. including the effects of impact and
(3) Suspension methods. Elevated wind.
building maintenance equipment shall (2) The carriages and their anchor-
be suspended by a carriage, outriggers, ages shall be capable of resisting acci-
davits or an equivalent method. dental over-tensioning of the wire
(i) Carriages. Carriages used for sus- ropes suspending the working platform,
pension of elevated building mainte- and this calculated value shall include
nance equipment shall comply with the the effect of one and one-half times the
following: stall capacity of the hoist motor. All
(A) The horizontal movement of a parts of the installation shall be capa-
carriage shall be controlled so as to en- ble of withstanding without damage to
sure its safe movement and allow accu- any part of the installation the forces
rate positioning of the platform for resulting from the stall load of the
vertical travel or storage; hoist and one half the wind load.
(B) Powered carriages shall not ex- (3) Roof carriages which rely on hav-
ceed a traversing speed of 50 feet per ing tie-down devices secured to the
minute (0.3 m/s); building to develop the required sta-
(C) The initiation of a traversing bility against overturning shall be pro-
movement for a manually propelled vided with an interlock which will pre-
carriage on a smooth level surface vent vertical platform movement un-
shall not require a person to exert a less the tie-down is engaged;
horizontal force greater than 40 pounds (H) An automatically applied braking
(444.8 n); or locking system, or equivalent, shall
(D) Structural stops and curbs shall be provided that will prevent uninten-
be provided to prevent the traversing tional traversing of power traversed or
of the carriage beyond its designed lim- power assisted carriages;
its of travel; (I) A manual or automatic braking or
(E) Traversing controls for a powered locking system or equivalent, shall be
carriage shall be of a continuous pres- provided that will prevent uninten-
sure weatherproof type. Multiple con- tional traversing of manually propelled
trols when provided shall be arranged carriages;
to permit operation from only one con- (J) A means to lock out the power
trol station at a time. An emergency supply for the carriage shall be pro-
stop device shall be provided on each vided;
end of a powered carriage for inter- (K) Safe access to and egress from
rupting power to the carriage drive mo- the carriage shall be provided from a
tors; safe surface. If the carriage traverses
(F) The operating controls(s) shall be an elevated area, any operating area on
so connected that in the case of sus- the carriage shall be protected by a
pended equipment, traversing of a car- guardrail system in compliance with
riage is not possible until the sus- the provisions of paragraph (f)(5)(i)(F)
162
of this section. Any access gate shall (iii) Davits. (A) Every davit installa-
be self-closing and self-latching, or pro- tion, fixed or transportable, rotatable
vided with an interlock; or non-rotatable shall be designed and
(L) Each carriage work station posi- installed to insure that it has a sta-
tion shall be identified by location bility factor against overturning of not
markings and/or position indicators; less than four.
and (B) The following requirements apply
(M) The motors shall stall if the load to roof rigged davit systems:
on the hoist motors is at any time in (1) Access to and egress from the
excess of three times that necessary for working platform shall be from a safe
lifting the working platform with its surface. Access or egress shall not re-
rated load. quire persons to climb over a buildings
(ii) Transportable outriggers. (A) parapet or guard railing; and
Transportable outriggers may be used
(2) The working platform shall be
as a method of suspension for ground
provided with wheels, casters or a car-
rigged working platforms where the
riage for traversing horizontally.
point of suspension does not exceed 300
feet (91.5 m) above a safe surface. Tie- (C) The following requirements apply
in guide system(s) shall be provided to ground rigged davit systems:
which meet the requirements of para- (1) The point of suspension shall not
graph (e)(2) of this section. exceed 300 feet (91.5 m) above a safe
(B) Transportable outriggers shall be surface. Guide system(s) shall be pro-
used only with self-powered, ground vided which meet the requirements of
rigged working platforms. paragraph (e)(2) of this section;
(C) Each transportable outrigger (2) Access and egress to and from the
shall be secured with a tie-down to a working platform shall only be from a
verified anchorage on the building dur- safe surface below the point of suspen-
ing the entire period of its use. The an- sion.
chorage shall be designed to have a sta- (D) A rotating davit shall not require
bility factor of not less than four a horizontal force in excess of 40
against overturning or upsetting of the pounds (177.9 n) per person to initiate a
outrigger. rotating movement.
(D) Access to and egress from the (E) The following requirements shall
working platform shall be from and to apply to transportable davits:
a safe surface below the point of sus- (1) A davit or part of a davit weighing
pension. more than 80 pounds (36 kg) shall be
(E) Each transportable outrigger provided with a means for its trans-
shall be designed for lateral stability port, which shall keep the center of
to prevent roll-over in the event an ac- gravity of the davit at or below 36
cidental lateral load is applied to the inches (914 mm) above the safe surface
outrigger. The accidental lateral load
during transport;
to be considered in this design shall be
(2) A davit shall be provided with a
not less than 70 percent of the rated
load of the hoist. pivoting socket or with a base that will
(F) Each transportable outrigger allow the insertion or removal of a
shall be designed to support an ulti- davit at a position of not more than 35
mate load of not less than four times degrees above the horizontal, with the
the rated load of the hoist. complete davit inboard of the building
(G) Each transportable outrigger face being serviced; and
shall be so located that the suspension (3) Means shall be provided to lock
wire ropes for two point suspended the davit to its socket or base before it
working platforms are hung parallel. is used to suspend the platform.
(H) A transportable outrigger shall (4) Hoisting machines. (i) Raising and
be tied-back to a verified anchorage on lowering of suspended or supported
the building with a rope equivalent in equipment shall be performed only by a
strength to the suspension rope. hoisting machine.
(I) The tie-back rope shall be in- (ii) Each hoisting machine shall be
stalled parallel to the centerline of the capable of arresting any overspeed de-
outrigger. scent of the load.
163
(iii) Each hoisting machine shall be (B) Each suspended unit component
powered only by air, electric or hy- shall be constructed of materials that
draulic sources. will withstand anticipated weather
(iv) Flammable liquids shall not be conditions.
carried on the working platform. (C) Each suspended unit shall be pro-
(v) Each hoisting machine shall be vided with a load rating plate, con-
capable of raising or lowering 125 per- spicuously located, stating the unit
cent of the rated load of the hoist. weight and rated load of the suspended
(vi) Moving parts of a hoisting ma- unit.
chine shall be enclosed or guarded in (D) When the suspension points on a
compliance with paragraphs (a)(1) and suspended unit are not at the unit
(2) of 1910.212 of this part. ends, the unit shall be capable of re-
(vii) Winding drums, traction drums maining continuously stable under all
and sheaves and directional sheaves conditions of use and position of the
used in conjunction with hoisting ma- live load, and shall maintain at least a
chines shall be compatible with, and 1.5 to 1 stability factor against unit
sized for, the wire rope used. upset.
(viii) Each winding drum shall be (E) Guide rollers, guide shoes or
provided with a positive means of at- building face rollers shall be provided,
taching the wire rope to the drum. The and shall compensate for variations in
attachment shall be capable of devel- building dimensions and for minor hor-
oping at least four times the rated load izontal out-of-level variations of each
of the hoist. suspended unit.
(ix) Each hoisting machine shall be (F) Each working platform of a sus-
provided with a primary brake and at pended unit shall be secured to the
least one independent secondary brake, building facade by one or more of the
each capable of stopping and holding following methods, or by an equivalent
not less than 125 percent of the lifting method:
capacity of the hoist. (1) Continuous engagement to build-
(A) The primary brake shall be di- ing anchors as provided in paragraph
rectly connected to the drive train of (e)(2)(i) of this section;
the hoisting machine, and shall not be (2) Intermittent engagement to build-
connected through belts, chains, ing anchors as provided in paragraph
clutches, or set screw type devices. The (e)(2)(iii)(A) of this section;
brake shall automatically set when (3) Button guide engagement as pro-
power to the prime mover is inter- vided in paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(B) of this
rupted. section; or
(B)(1) The secondary brake shall be (4) Angulated roping and building
an automatic emergency type of brake face rollers as provided in paragraph
that, if actuated during each stopping (e)(2)(iii)(C) of this section.
cycle, shall not engage before the hoist (G) Each working platform of a sus-
is stopped by the primary brake. pended unit shall be provided with a
(2) When a secondary brake is actu- guardrail system on all sides which
ated, it shall stop and hold the plat- shall meet the following requirements:
form within a vertical distance of 24 (1) The system shall consist of a top
inches (609.6 mm). guardrail, midrail, and a toeboard;
(x) Any component of a hoisting ma- (2) The top guardrail shall not be less
chine which requires lubrication for its than 36 inches (914 mm) high and shall
protection and proper functioning shall be able to withstand at least a 100-
be provided with a means for that lu- pound (444 n) force in any downward or
brication to be applied. outward direction;
(5) Suspended equipment(i) General (3) The midrail shall be able to with-
requirements. (A) Each suspended unit stand at least a 75-pound (333 n) force
component, except suspension ropes in any downward or outward direction;
and guardrail systems, shall be capable and
of supporting, without failure, at least (4) The areas between the guardrail
four times the maximum intended live and toeboard on the ends and outboard
load applied or transmitted to that side, and the area between the midrail
component. and toeboard on the inboard side, shall
164
be closed with a material that is capa- (F) Each operating station of every
ble of withstanding a load of 100 pounds working platform shall be provided
(45.4 KG.) applied horizontally over any with a means of interrupting the power
area of one square foot (.09 m2). The supply to all hoist motors to stop any
material shall have all openings small further powered ascent or descent of
enough to reject passage of life lines the platform.
and potential falling objects which (G) The maximum rated speed of the
may be hazardous to persons below. platform shall not exceed 50 feet per
(5) Toeboards shall be capable of minute (0.3 ms) with single speed
withstanding, without failure, a force hoists, nor 75 feet per minute (0.4 ms)
of at least 50 pounds (222 n) applied in with multi-speed hoists.
any downward or horizontal direction (H) Provisions shall be made for se-
at any point along the toeboard. curing all tools, water tanks, and other
(6) Toeboards shall be three and one- accessories to prevent their movement
half inches (9 cm) minimum in length or accumulation on the floor of the
from their top edge to the level of the platform.
platform floor. (I) Portable fire extinguishers con-
(7) Toeboards shall be securely fas- forming to the provisions of 1910.155
tened in place at the outermost edge of and 1910.157 of this part shall be pro-
the platform and have no more than vided and securely attached on all
working platforms.
one-half inch (1.3 cm) clearance above
(J) Access to and egress from a work-
the platform floor.
ing platfrom, except for those that land
(8) Toeboards shall be solid or with
directly on a safe surface, shall be pro-
an opening not over one inch (2.5 cm)
vided by stairs, ladders, platforms and
in the greatest dimension.
runways conforming to the provisions
(ii) Two and four-point suspended of subpart D of this part. Access gates
working platforms. (A) The working shall be self-closing and self-latching.
platform shall be not less than 24 (K) Means of access to or egress from
inches (610 mm) wide and shall be pro- a working platform which is 48 inches
vided with a minimum of a 12 inch (305 (1.2 m) or more above a safe surface
mm) wide passage at or past any ob- shall be provided with a guardrail sys-
struction on the platform. tem or ladder handrails that conform
(B) The flooring shall be of a slip-re- to the provisions of subpart D of this
sistant type and shall contain no open- part.
ing that would allow the passage of life (L) The platform shall be provided
lines, cables and other potential falling with a secondary wire rope suspension
objects. If a larger opening is provided, system if the platform contains over-
it shall be protected by placing a mate- head structures which restrict the
rial under the opening which shall pre- emergency egress of employees. A hori-
vent the passage of life lines, cables zontal lifeline or a direct connection
and potential falling objects. anchorage shall be provided, as part of
(C) The working platfrom shall be a fall arrest system which meets the
provided with a means of suspension requirements of appendix C, for each
that will restrict the platforms in- employee on such a platform.
board to outboard roll about its longi- (M) A vertical lifeline shall be pro-
tudinal axis to a maximum of 15 de- vided as part of a fall arrest system
grees from a horizontal plane when which meets the requirements of ap-
moving the live load from the inboard pendix C, for each employee on a work-
to the outboard side of the platform. ing platform suspended by two or more
(D) Any cable suspended from above wire ropes, if the failure of one wire
the platform shall be provided with a rope or suspension attachment will
means for storage to prevent accumu- cause the platform to upset. If a sec-
lation of the cable on the floor of the ondary wire rope suspension is used,
platform. vertical lifelines are not required for
(E) All operating controls for the the fall arrest system, provided that
vertical travel of the platform shall be each employee is attached to a hori-
of the continuous-pressure type, and zontal lifeline anchored to the plat-
shall be located on the platform. form.
165
(N) An emergency electric operating (C) The platform shall be provided

device shall be provided on roof pow- with a stopping device that will inter-
ered platforms near the hoisting ma- rupt the hoist power supply in the
chine for use in the event of failure of event the platform contacts a sta-
the normal operating device located on bilizer tie during its ascent.
the working platform, or failure of the (D) Building face rollers shall not be
cable connected to the platform. The placed at the anchor setting if exterior
emergency electric operating device anchors are used on the building face.
shall be mounted in a secured compart- (E) Stabilizer ties used on intermit-
ment, and the compartment shall be la- tently stabilized platforms shall allow
beled with instructions for use. A for the specific attachment length
means for opening the compartment needed to effect the predetermined an-
shall be mounted in a break-glass gulation of the suspended wire rope.
receptable located near the emergency The specific attachment length shall
electric operating device or in an be maintained at all building anchor
equivalent secure and accessible loca- locations.
tion. (F) The platform shall be in contin-
uous contact with the face of the build-
(iii) Single point suspended working
ing during ascent and descent.
platforms. (A) The requirements of
(G) The attachment and removal of
paragraphs (f)(5)(ii) (A) through (K) of
stabilizer ties shall not require the hor-
this section shall also apply to a single izontal movement of the platform.
point working platform. (H) The platform-mounted equipment
(B) Each single point suspended and its suspension wire ropes shall not
working platform shall be provided be physically damaged by the loads
with a secondary wire rope suspension from the stabilizer tie or its building
system, which will prevent the working anchor. The platform, platform mount-
platform from falling should there be a ed equipment and wire ropes shall be
failure of the primary means of sup- able to withstand a load that is at least
port, or if the platform contains over- twice the ultimate strength of the sta-
head structures which restrict the bilizer tie.
egress of the employees. A horizontal
NOTE: See Figure II in appendix B of this
life line or a direct connection anchor- section for a description of a typical inter-
age shall be provided, as part of a fall mittent stabilization system.
arrest system which meets the require-
ments of appendix C, for each employee (vi) Button-guide stabilized platforms.
on the platform. (A) The platform shall comply with
paragraphs (f)(5)(ii) (A) through (M) of
(iv) Ground-rigged working platforms.
this section.
(A) Groundrigged working platforms
(B) Each guide track on the platform
shall comply with all the requirements
shall engage a minimum of two guide
of paragraphs (f)(5)(ii) (A) through (M)
buttons during any vertical travel of
of this section. the platform following the initial but-
(B) After each days use, the power ton engagement.
supply within the building shall be dis- (C) Each guide track on a platform
connected from a ground-rigged work- that is part of a roof rigged system
ing platform, and the platform shall be shall be provided with a storage posi-
either disengaged from its suspension tion on the platform.
points or secured and stored at grade. (D) Each guide track on the platform
(v) Intermittently stabilized platforms. shall be sufficiently maneuverable by
(A) The platform shall comply with platform occupants to permit easy en-
paragraphs (F)(5)(ii) (A) through (M) of gagement of the guide buttons, and
this section. easy movement into and out of its stor-
(B) Each stabilizer tie shall be age position on the platform.
equipped with a quick connect-quick (E) Two guide tracks shall be mount-
disconnect device which cannot be ed on the platform and shall provide
accidently disengaged, for attachment continuous contact with the building
to the building anchor, and shall be re- face.
sistant to adverse environmental con- (F) The load carrying components of
ditions. the button guide stabilization system
166
which transmit the load into the plat- F = Design factor

form shall be capable of supporting the S = Manufacturers rated strength of one
weight of the platform, or provision suspension rope
N = Number of suspension ropes under load
shall be made in the guide track con- W = Rated working load on all ropes at any
nectors or platform attachments to point of travel
prevent the weight of the platform
(iii) Suspension wire rope grade shall
from being transmitted to the platform
be at least improved plow steel or
attachments.
equivalent.
NOTE: See Figure III in appendix B of this (iv) Suspension wire ropes shall be
section for a description of a typical button sized to conform with the required de-
guide stabilization system. sign factor, but shall not be less than 5/
(6) Supported equipment. (i) Supported 16 inch (7.94 mm) in diameter.
equipment shall maintain a vertical (v) No more than one reverse bend in
position in respect to the face of the six wire rope lays shall be permitted.
building by means other than friction. (vi) A corrosion-resistant tag shall be
(ii) Cog wheels or equivalent means securely attached to one of the wire
shall be incorporated to provide climb- rope fastenings when a suspension wire
ing traction between the supported rope is to be used at a specific location
equipment and the building guides. Ad- and will remain in that location. This
ditional guide wheels or shoes shall be tag shall bear the following wire rope
incorporated as may be necessary to data:
ensure that the drive wheels are con- (A) The diameter (inches and/or mm);
tinuously held in positive engagement (B) Construction classification;
with the building guides. (C) Whether non-preformed or
(iii) Launch guide mullions indexed preformed;
to the building guides and retained in (D) The grade of material;
alignment with the building guides (E) The manufacturers rated
shall be used to align drive wheels en- strength;
tering the building guides. (F) The manufacturers name;
(iv) Manned platforms used on sup- (G) The month and year the ropes
ported equipment shall comply with were installed; and
the requirements of paragraphs (H) The name of the person or com-
(f)(5)(ii)(A), (f)(5)(ii)(B), and (f)(5)(ii) (D) pany which installed the ropes.
through (K) of this section covering (vii) A new tag shall be installed at
suspended equipment. each rope renewal.
(7) Suspension wire ropes and rope con- (viii) The original tag shall be
nections. (i) Each specific installation stamped with the date of the
shall use suspension wire ropes or com- resocketing, or the original tag shall
bination cable and connections meet- be retained and a supplemental tag
ing the specification recommended by shall be provided when ropes are
the manufacturer of the hoisting ma- resocketed. The supplemental tag shall
chine used. Connections shall be capa- show the date of resocketing and the
ble of developing at least 80 percent of name of the person or company that
the rated breaking strength of the wire resocketed the rope.
rope. (ix) Winding drum type hoists shall
(ii) Each suspension rope shall have a contain at least three wraps of the sus-
Design Factor of at least 10. The pension wire rope on the drum when
Design Factor is the ratio of the the suspended unit has reached the
rated strength of the suspension wire lowest possible point of its vertical
rope to the rated working load, and travel.
shall be calculated using the following (x) Traction drum and sheave type
formula: hoists shall be provided with a wire
rope of sufficient length to reach the
lowest possible point of vertical travel
S(N) of the suspended unit, and an addi-
F = tional length of the wire rope of at
W least four feet (1.2 m).
(xi) The lengthening or repairing of
Where: suspension wire ropes is prohibited.
167
(xii) Babbitted fastenings for suspen- (vii) Upper and lower directional
sion wire rope are prohibited. switches designed to prevent the travel
(8) Control circuits, power circuits and of suspended units beyond safe upward
their components. (i) Electrical wiring and downward levels shall be provided.
and equipment shall comply with sub- (viii) Emergency stop switches shall
part S of this part, except as otherwise be provided on remote controlled, roof-
required by this section. powered manned platforms adjacent to
(ii) Electrical runway conductor sys- each control station on the platform.
tems shall be of a type designed for use (ix) Cables which are in constant ten-
in exterior locations, and shall be lo- sion shall have overload devices which
cated so that they do not come into will prevent the tension in the cable
contact with accumulated snow or from interfering with the load limiting
water. device required in paragraph
(iii) Cables shall be protected against (f)(8)(vi)(B) of this section, or with the
damage resulting from overtensioning platform roll limiting device required
or from other causes. in paragraph (f)(5)(ii)(C) of this section.
(iv) Devices shall be included in the The setting of these devices shall be co-
control system for the equipment ordinated with other overload settings
which will provide protection against at the time of design of the system,
electrical overloads, three phase rever- and shall be clearly indicated on or
sal and phase failure. The control sys- near the device. The device shall inter-
tem shall have a separate method, rupt the equipment travel in the
independent of the direction control down direction.
circuit, for breaking the power circuit (g) Inspection and tests(1) Installa-
in case of an emergency or malfunctions and alterations. All completed
tion. building maintenance equipment in-
(v) Suspended or supported equip- stallations shall be inspected and test-
ment shall have a control system ed in the field before being placed in
which will require the operator of the initial service to determine that all
equipment to follow predetermined parts of the installation conform to ap-
procedures. plicable requirements of this standard,
(vi) The following requirements shall and that all safety and operating
apply to electrical protection devices: equipment is functioning as required. A
(A) On installations where the car- similar inspection and test shall be
riage does not have a stability factor of made following any major alteration to
at least four against overturning, elec- an existing installation. No hoist in an
trical contact(s) shall be provided and installation shall be subjected to a load
so connected that the operating devices in excess of 125 percent of its rated
for the suspended or supported equip- load.
ment shall be operative only when the (2) Periodic inspections and tests. (i)
carriage is located and mechanically Related building supporting structures
retained at an established operating shall undergo periodic inspection by a
point. competent person at intervals not ex-
(B) Overload protection shall be proceeding 12 months.
vided in the hoisting or suspension sys- (ii) All parts of the equipment includ-
tem to protect against the equipment ing control systems shall be inspected,
operating in the up direction with a and, where necessary, tested by a com-
load in excess of 125 percent of the petent person at intervals specified by
rated load of the platform; and the manufacturer/supplier, but not to
(C) An automatic detector shall be exceed 12 months, to determine that
provided for each suspension point that they are in safe operating condition.
will interrupt power to all hoisting mo- Parts subject to wear, such as wire
tors for travel in the down direction, ropes, bearings, gears, and governors
and apply the primary brakes if any shall be inspected and/or tested to de-
suspension wire rope becomes slack. A termine that they have not worn to
continuous-pressure rigging-bypass such an extent as to affect the safe op-
switch designed for use during rigging eration of the installation.
is permitted. This switch shall only be (iii) The building owner shall keep a
used during rigging. certification record of each inspection
168
and test required under paragraphs system is removed from the equipment
(g)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section. The cer- for testing, all reinstalled and directly
tification record shall include the date related components shall be rein-
of the inspection, the signature of the spected prior to returning the equip-
person who performed the inspection, ment installation to service.
and the number, or other identifier, of (v) Inspection of governors and sec-
the building support structure and ondary brakes shall be performed by a
equipment which was inspected. This competent person.
certification record shall be kept read- (vi) The secondary brake governor
ily available for review by the Assist- and actuation device shall be tested be-
ant Secretary of Labor or the Assistant fore each days use. Where testing is
Secretarys representative and by the not feasible, a visual inspection of the
employer. brake shall be made instead to ensure
(iv) Working platforms and their that it is free to operate.
components shall be inspected by the (5) Suspension wire rope maintenance,
employer for visible defects before inspection and replacement. (i) Suspen-
every use and after each occurrence sion wire rope shall be maintained and
which could affect the platforms struc- used in accordance with procedures
tural integrity. recommended by the wire rope manu-
(3) Maintenance inspections and tests. facturer.
(i) A maintenance inspection and, (ii) Suspension wire rope shall be in-
where necessary, a test shall be made spected by a competent person for visi-
of each platform installation every 30 ble defects and gross damage to the
days, or where the work cycle is less rope before every use and after each oc-
than 30 days such inspection and/or currence which might affect the wire
test shall be made prior to each work ropes integrity.
cycle. This inspection and test shall (iii) A thorough inspection of suspen-
follow procedures recommended by the sion wire ropes in service shall be made
manufacturer, and shall be made by a once a month. Suspension wire ropes
competent person. that have been inactive for 30 days or
(ii) The building owner shall keep a longer shall have a thorough inspection
certification record of each inspection before they are placed into service.
and test performed under paragraph These thorough inspections of suspen-
(g)(3)(i) of this section. The certifi- sion wire ropes shall be performed by a
cation record shall include the date of competent person.
the inspection and test, the signature
(iv) The need for replacement of a
of the person who performed the in-
suspension wire rope shall be deter-
spection and/or test, and an identifier
mined by inspection and shall be based
for the platform installation which was
on the condition of the wire rope. Any
inspected. The certification record
of the following conditions or combina-
shall be kept readily available for re-
tion of conditions will be cause for re-
view by the Assistant Secretary of
moval of the wire rope:
Labor or the Assistant Secretarys rep-
(A) Broken wires exceeding three
resentative and by the employer.
wires in one strand or six wires in one
(4) Special inspection of governors and
rope lay;
secondary brakes. (i) Governors and sec-
ondary brakes shall be inspected and (B) Distortion of rope structure such
tested at intervals specified by the as would result from crushing or
manufacturer/supplier but not to ex- kinking;
ceed every 12 months. (C) Evidence of heat damage;
(ii) The results of the inspection and (D) Evidence of rope deterioration
test shall confirm that the initiating from corrosion;
device for the secondary braking sys- (E) A broken wire within 18 inches
tem operates at the proper overspeed. (460.8 mm) of the end attachments;
(iii) The results of the inspection and (F) Noticeable rusting and pitting;
test shall confirm that the secondary (G) Evidence of core failure (a length-
brake is functioning properly. ening of rope lay, protrusion of the
(iv) If any hoisting machine or initi- rope core and a reduction in rope di-
ating device for the secondary brake ameter suggests core failure); or
169
(H) More than one valley break (bro- (4) Periodic reshackling of suspension
ken wire). wire ropes. The hoisting ropes shall be
(I) Outer wire wear exceeds one-third reshackled at the nondrum ends at in-
of the original outer wire diameter. tervals not exceeding 24 months. When
(J) Any other condition which the reshackling the ropes, a sufficient
competent person determines has sig- length shall be cut from the end of the
nificantly affected the integrity of the rope to remove damaged or fatigued
rope. portions.
(v) The building owner shall keep a (5) Roof systems. Roof track systems,
certification record of each monthly tie-downs, or similar equipment shall
inspection of a suspension wire rope as be maintained in proper working order
required in paragraph (g)(5)(iii) of this so that they perform the function for
section. The record shall include the which they were intended.
date of the inspection, the signature of
(6) Building face guiding members. T-
the person who performed the inspec-
rails, indented mullions, or equivalent
tion, and a number, or other identifier,
guides located in the face of a building
of the wire rope which was inspected.
This record of inspection shall be made shall be maintained in proper working
available for review by the Assistant order so that they perform the func-
Secretary of Labor or the Assistant tions for which they were intended.
Secretarys representative and by the Brackets for cable stabilizers shall
employer. similarly be maintained in proper
(6) Hoist inspection. Before lowering working order.
personnel below the top elevation of (7) Inoperative safety devices. No per-
the building, the hoist shall be tested son shall render a required safety de-
each day in the lifting direction with vice or electrical protective device in-
the intended load to make certain it operative, except as necessary for
has sufficient capacity to raise the per- tests, inspections, and maintenance.
sonnel back to the boarding level. Immediately upon completion of such
(h) Maintenance(1) General mainte- tests, inspections and maintenance, the
nance. All parts of the equipment af- device shall be restored to its normal
fecting safe operation shall be main- operating condition.
tained in proper working order so that (i) Operations(1) Training. (i) Work-
they may perform the functions for ing platforms shall be operated only by
which they were intended. The equip- persons who are proficient in the oper-
ment shall be taken out of service ation, safe use and inspection of the
when it is not in proper working order. particular working platform to be oper-
(2) Cleaning. (i) Control or power ated.
contactors and relays shall be kept (ii) All employees who operate work-
clean. ing platforms shall be trained in the
(ii) All other parts shall be kept following:
clean if their proper functioning would (A) Recognition of, and preventive
be affected by the presence of dirt or measures for, the safety hazards associ-
other contaminants. ated with their individual work tasks.
(3) Periodic resocketing of wire rope fas-
(B) General recognition and preven-
tenings. (i) Hoisting ropes utilizing
tion of safety hazards associated with
poured socket fastenings shall be
the use of working platforms, including
resocketed at the non-drum ends at in-
tervals not exceeding 24 months. In the provisions in the section relating
resocketing the ropes, a sufficient to the particular working platform to
length shall be cut from the end of the be operated.
rope to remove damaged or fatigued (C) Emergency action plan proce-
portions. dures required in paragraph (e)(9) of
(ii) Resocketed ropes shall conform this section.
to the requirements of paragraph (f)(7) (D) Work procedures required in
of this section. paragraph (i)(1)(iv) of this section.
(iii) Limit switches affected by the (E) Personal fall arrest system in-
resocketed ropes shall be reset, if nec- spection, care, use and system perform-
essary. ance.
170
(iii) Training of employees in the op- ropes and life lines which have been
eration and inspection of working plat- contacted by the heat producing proc-
forms shall be done by a competent ess shall be considered to be perma-
person. nently damaged and shall not be used.
(iv) Written work procedures for the (v) The platform shall not be oper-
operation, safe use and inspection of ated in winds in excess of 25 miles per
working platforms shall be provided for hour (40.2 km/hr) except to move it
employee training. Pictorial methods from an operating to a storage posi-
of instruction, may be used, in lieu of tion. Wind speed shall be determined
written work procedures, if employee based on the best available informa-
communication is improved using this tion, which includes on-site anemom-
method. The operating manuals sup- eter readings and local weather fore-
plied by manufacturers for platform casts which predict wind velocities for
system components can serve as the the area.
basis for these procedures. (vi) On exterior installations, an ane-
(v) The employer shall certify that mometer shall be mounted on the plat-
employees have been trained in oper- form to provide information of on-site
ating and inspecting a working plat- wind velocities prior to and during the
form by preparing a certification use of the platform. The anemometer
record which includes the identity of may be a portable (hand held) unit
the person trained, the signature of the which is temporarily mounted during
employer or the person who conducted platform use.
the training and the date that training (vii) Tools, materials and debris not
was completed. The certification related to the work in progress shall
record shall be prepared at the comple- not be allowed to accumulate on plat-
tion of the training required in para- forms. Stabilizer ties shall be located
graph (i)(1)(ii) of this section, and shall so as to allow unencumbered passage
be maintained in a file for the duration along the full length of the platform
of the employees employment. The and shall be of such length so as not to
certification record shall be kept read- become entangled in rollers, hoists or
ily available for review by the Assist- other machinery.
ant Secretary of Labor or the Assistant (j) Personal fall protection. Employees
Secretarys representative. on working platforms shall be pro-
(2) Use. (i) Working platforms shall tected by a personal fall arrest system
not be loaded in excess of the rated meeting the requirements of appendix
load, as stated on the platform load C, section I, of this standard, and as
rating plate. otherwise provided by this standard.
(ii) Employees shall be prohibited
from working on snow, ice, or other APPENDIX A TO 1910.66, GUIDELINES
slippery material covering platforms, (ADVISORY)
except for the removal of such mate- 1. Use of the Appendix. Appendix A provides
rials. examples of equipment and methods to assist
(iii) Adequate precautions shall be the employer in meeting the requirements of
taken to protect the platform, wire the indicated provision of the standard. Em-
ropes and life lines from damage due to ployers may use other equipment or proce-
acids or other corrosive substances, in dures which conform to the requirements of
the standard. This appendix neither adds to
accordance with the recommendations
nor detracts from the mandatory require-
of the corrosive substance producer, ments set forth in 1910.66.
supplier, platform manufacturer or 2. Assurance. Paragraph (c) of the standard
other equivalent information sources. requires the building owner to inform the
Platform members which have been ex- employer in writing that the powered plat-
posed to acids or other corrosive sub- form installation complies with certain re-
stances shall be washed down with a quirements of the standard, since the em-
neutralizing solution, at a frequency ployer may not have the necessary informa-
tion to make these determinations. The em-
recommended by the corrosive sub-
ployer, however, remains responsible for
stance producer or supplier. meeting these requirements which have not
(iv) Platform members, wire ropes been set off in paragraph (c)(1).
and life lines shall be protected when 3. Design Requirements. The design require-
using a heat producing process. Wire ments for each installation should be based
171
on the limitations (stresses, deflections, factors include building height and architec-
etc.), established by nationally recognized tural design, platform length and weight,
standards as promulgated by the following wire rope angulation, and the wind velocities
organizations, or to equivalent standards: in the building area. Another factor to con-
AAThe Aluminum Association, 818 Con- sider is the material of the building face,
necticut Avenue, NW., Washington, DC, since this material may be adversely af-
20006 fected by the building rollers.
Aluminum Construction Manual External or indented type building anchors
Specifications For Aluminum Structures are acceptable. Receptacles in the building
Aluminum Standards and Data facade used for the indented type should be
AGMAAmerican Gear Manufacturers Asso- kept clear of extraneous materials which
ciation, 101 North Fort Meyer Dr., Suite will hinder their use. During the inspection
1000, Arlington, VA 22209 of the platform installation, evidence of a
AISCAmerican Institute of Steel Construc- failure or abuse of the anchors should be
tion, 400 North Michigan Avenue, Chi- brought to the attention of the employer.
cago, IL 60611 6. Stabilizer tie length. A stabilizer tie
ANSIAmerican National Standards Insti- should be long enough to provide for the
tute, Inc., 1430 Broadway, New York, NY planned angulation of the suspension cables.
10018 However, the length of the tie should not be
ASCEAmerican Society of Civil Engineers, excessive and become a problem by possibly
345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017 becoming entangled in the building face roll-
ASMEAmerican Society of Mechanical En-
ers or parts of the platform machinery.
gineers, 345 East 47th Street, New York,
NY 10017 The attachment length may vary due to
ASTMAmerican Society for Testing and material elongation and this should be con-
Materials, 1916 Race Street, Philadel- sidered when selecting the material to be
phia, PA 19103 used. Consideration should also be given to
AWSAmerican Welding Society, Inc., Box the use of ties which are easily installed by
351040, 550 NW. LeJeunne Road, Miami, employees, since this will encourage their
FL 33126 use.
JICJoint Industrial Council, 2139 Wisconsin 7. Intermittent stabilization system. Intermit-
Avenue NW., Washington, DC 20007 tent stabilization systems may use different
NEMANational Electric Manufacturers As- equipment, tie-in devices and methods to re-
sociation, 2101 L Street, NW., Wash- strict the horizontal movement of a powered
ington, DC 20037 platform with respect to the face of the
building. One acceptable method employs
4. Tie-in-guides. Indented mullions, T-rails corrosion-resistant building anchors secured
or other equivalent guides are acceptable as
in the face of the building in vertical rows
tie-in guides in a building face for a contin-
every third floor or 50 feet (15.3 m), which-
uous stabilization system. Internal guides
ever is less. The anchors are spaced hori-
are embedded in other building members
zontally to allow a stabilization attachment
with only the opening exposed (see Figure 1
(stabilizer tie) for each of the two platform
of appendix B). External guides, however, are
suspension wire ropes. The stabilizer tie con-
installed external to the other building
sists of two parts. One part is a quick con-
members and so are fully exposed. The min-
nect-quick disconnect device which utilizes a
imum opening for tie-in guides is three-quar-
corrosion-resistant yoke and retainer spring
ters of an inch (19 mm), and the minimum in-
that is designed to fit over the building an-
side dimensions are one-inch (25 mm) deep
and two inches (50 mm) wide. chors. The second part of the stabilizer tie is
Employers should be aware of the hazards a lanyard which is used to maintain a fixed
associated with tie-in guides in a continuous distance between the suspension wire rope
stabilization system which was not designed and the face of the building.
properly. For example, joints in these track In this method, as the suspended powered
systems may become extended or discontin- platform descends past the elevation of each
uous due to installation or building settle- anchor, the descent is halted and each of the
ment. If this alignment problem is not cor- platform occupants secures a stabilizer tie
rected, the system could jam when a guide between a suspension wire rope and a build-
roller or guide shoe strikes a joint and this ing anchor. The procedure is repeated as
would cause a hazardous situation for em- each elevation of a building anchor is
ployees. In another instance, faulty design reached during the descent of the powered
will result in guide rollers being mounted in platform.
a line so they will jam in the track at the As the platform ascends, the procedure is
slightest misalignment. reversed; that is, the stabilizer ties are re-
5. Building anchors (intermittent stabilization moved as each elevation of a building anchor
system). In the selection of the vertical dis- is reached. The removal of each stabilizer tie
tance between building anchors, certain fac- is assured since the platform is provided
tors should be given consideration. These with stopping devices which will interrupt
172
power to its hoist(s) in the event either stop- tems should receive instruction in the spe-
ping device contacts a stabilizer during the cific ascent and descent procedures involving
ascent of the platform. the assembly and disassembly of the sta-
Figure 2 of appendix B illustrates another bilizer ties.
type of acceptable intermittent stabilization An acceptable training program should
system which utilizes retaining pins as the also include employee instruction in basic
quick connect-quick disconnect device in the inspection procedures for the purpose of de-
stabilizer tie. termining the need for repair and replace-
8. Wire Rope Inspection. The inspection of ment of platform equipment. In addition, the
the suspension wire rope is important since program should cover the inspection, care
the rope gradually loses strength during its and use of the personal fall protection equip-
useful life. The purpose of the inspection is ment required in paragraph (j)(1) of the
to determine whether the wire rope has suffi- standard.
cient integrity to support a platform with In addition, the training program should
the required design factor. also include emergency action plan ele-
If there is any doubt concerning the condi- ments. OSHA brochure #1B3088 (Rev.) 1985,
tion of a wire rope or its ability to perform How to Prepare for Workplace Emer-
the required work, the rope should be re- gencies, details the basic steps needed to
placed. The cost of wire rope replacement is prepare to handle emergencies in the work-
quite small if compared to the cost in terms place.
of human injuries, equipment down time and Following the completion of a training
replacement. program, the employee should be required to
No listing of critical inspection factors,
demonstrate competency in operating the
which serve as a basis for wire rope replace-
equipment safely. Supplemental training of
ment in the standard, can be a substitute for
the employee should be provided by the em-
an experienced inspector of wire rope. The
ployer, as necessary, if the equipment used
listing serves as a users guide to the accept-
or other working conditions should change.
ed standards by which ropes must be judged.
An employee who is required to work with
Rope life can be prolonged if preventive
chemical products on a platform should re-
maintenance is performed regularly. Cutting
ceive training in proper cleaning procedures,
off an appropriate length of rope at the end
and in the hazards, care and handling of
termination before the core degrades and
these products. In addition, the employee
valley breaks appear minimizes degradation
should be supplied with the appropriate per-
at these sections.
sonal protective equipment, such as gloves
9. General Maintenance. In meeting the gen-
and eye and face protection.
eral maintenance requirement in paragraph
(h)(1) of the standard, the employer should 11. Suspension and Securing of Powered Plat-
undertake the prompt replacement of bro- forms (Equivalency). One acceptable method
ken, worn and damaged parts, switch con- of demonstrating the equivalency of a meth-
tacts, brushes, and short flexible conductors od of suspending or securing a powered plat-
of electrical devices. The components of the form, as required in paragraphs (e)(2)(iii),
electrical service system and traveling ca- (f)(3) and (f)(5)(i)(F), is to provide an engi-
bles should be replaced when damaged or sig- neering analysis by a registered professional
nificantly abraded. In addition, gears, shafts, engineer. The analysis should demonstrate
bearings, brakes and hoisting drums should that the proposed method will provide an
be kept in proper alignment. equal or greater degree of safety for employ-
10. Training. In meeting the training re- ees than any one of the methods specified in
quirement of paragraph (i)(1) of the standard, the standard.
employers should use both on the job train- APPENDIX B TO 1910.66EXHIBITS (ADVISORY)
ing and formal classroom training. The writ-
ten work procedures used for this training The three drawings in appendix B illus-
should be obtained from the manufacturer, if trate typical platform stabilization systems
possible, or prepared as necessary for the em- which are addressed in the standard. The
ployees information and use. drawings are to be used for reference pur-
Employees who will operate powered plat- poses only, and do not illustrate all the man-
forms with intermittent stabilization sys- datory requirements for each system.
173
174
EC27OC91.012</GPH>
175
EC27OC91.013</GPH>
176
EC27OC91.014</GPH>
APPENDIX C TO 1910.66PERSONAL FALL AR- ate. It is measured as the distance between
REST SYSTEM (SECTION IMANDATORY; SEC- the location of an employees body belt or
TIONS II AND IIINON-MANDATORY) body harness attachment point at the mo-
ment of activation (at the onset of fall arrest
Use of the Appendix forces) of the deceleration device during a
Section I of appendix C sets out the man- fall, and the location of that attachment
datory criteria for personal fall arrest sys- point after the employee comes to a full
tems used by all employees using powered stop.
platforms, as required by paragraph (j)(1) of Equivalent means alternative designs, ma-
this standard. Section II sets out nonmanda- terials or methods which the employer can
tory test procedures which may be used to demonstrate will provide an equal or greater
determine compliance with applicable re- degree of safety for employees than the
quirements contained in section I of this ap- methods, materials or designs specified in
pendix. Section III provides nonmandatory the standard.
guidelines which are intended to assist em- Free fall means the act of falling before the
ployers in complying with these provisions. personal fall arrest system begins to apply
I. Personal fall arrest systems(a) Scope and force to arrest the fall.
application. This section establishes the ap- Free fall distance means the vertical dis-
plication of and performance criteria for per- placement of the fall arrest attachment
sonal fall arrest systems which are required point on the employees body belt or body
for use by all employees using powered plat- harness between onset of the fall and just be-
forms under paragraph 1910.66(j). fore the system begins to apply force to ar-
(b) Definitions. Anchorage means a secure rest the fall. This distance excludes decelera-
point of attachment for lifelines, lanyards or tion distance, lifeline and lanyard elongation
deceleration devices, and which is inde- but includes any deceleration device slide
pendent of the means of supporting or sus- distance or self-retracting lifeline/lanyard
pending the employee. extension before they operate and fall arrest
Body belt means a strap with means both forces occur.
for securing it about the waist and for at- Lanyard means a flexible line of rope, wire
taching it to a lanyard, lifeline, or decelera- rope, or strap which is used to secure the
tion device. body belt or body harness to a deceleration
Body harness means a design of straps device, lifeline, or anchorage.
which may be secured about the employee in
Lifeline means a component consisting of a
a manner to distribute the fall arrest forces
flexible line for connection to an anchorage
over at least the thighs, pelvis, waist, chest
at one end to hang vertically (vertical life-
and shoulders with means for attaching it to
line), or for connection to anchorages at
other components of a personal fall arrest
both ends to stretch horizontally (horizontal
system.
lifeline), and which serves as a means for
Buckle means any device for holding the
connecting other components of a personal
body belt or body harness closed around the
fall arrest system to the anchorage.
employees body.
Competent person means a person who is ca- Personal fall arrest system means a system
pable of identifying hazardous or dangerous used to arrest an employee in a fall from a
conditions in the personal fall arrest system working level. It consists of an anchorage,
or any component thereof, as well as in their connectors, a body belt or body harness and
application and use with related equipment. may include a lanyard, deceleration device,
Connector means a device which is used to lifeline, or suitable combinations of these.
couple (connect) parts of the system to- Qualified person means one with a recog-
gether. It may be an independent component nized degree or professional certificate and
of the system (such as a carabiner), or an in- extensive knowledge and experience in the
tegral component of part of the system (such subject field who is capable of design, anal-
as a buckle or dee-ring sewn into a body belt ysis, evaluation and specifications in the
or body harness, or a snap-hook spliced or subject work, project, or product.
sewn to a lanyard or self-retracting lanyard). Rope grab means a deceleration device
Deceleration device means any mechanism, which travels on a lifeline and automatically
such as a rope grab, ripstitch lanyard, spe- frictionally engages the lifeline and locks so
cially woven lanyard, tearing or deforming as to arrest the fall of an employee. A rope
lanyard, or automatic self retracting-life- grab usually employs the principle of iner-
line/lanyard, which serves to dissipate a sub- tial locking, cam/lever locking, or both.
stantial amount of energy during a fall ar- Self-retracting lifeline/lanyard means a de-
rest, or otherwise limits the energy imposed celeration device which contains a drum-
on an employee during fall arrest. wound line which may be slowly extracted
Deceleration distance means the additional from, or retracted onto, the drum under
vertical distance a falling employee travels, slight tension during normal employee
excluding lifeline elongation and free fall movement, and which, after onset of a fall,
distance, before stopping, from the point at automatically locks the drum and arrests
which the deceleration device begins to oper- the fall.
177
Snap-hook means a connector comprised of (10) Anchorages to which personal fall ar-
a hookshaped member with a normally rest equipment is attached shall be capable
closed keeper, or similar arrangement, which of supporting at least 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN)
may be opened to permit the hook to receive per employee attached, or shall be designed,
an object and, when released, automatically installed, and used as part of a complete per-
closes to retain the object. Snap-hooks are sonal fall arrest system which maintains a
generally one of two types: safety factor of at least two, under the su-
1. The locking type with a self-closing, pervision of a qualified person.
self-locking keeper which remains closed and (11) Ropes and straps (webbing) used in lan-
locked until unlocked and pressed open for yards, lifelines, and strength components of
connection or disconnection, or body belts and body harnesses, shall be made
2. The non-locking type with a self-closing from synthetic fibers or wire rope.
keeper which remains closed until pressed (d) System performance criteria. (1) Personal
open for connection or disconnection. fall arrest systems shall, when stopping a
Tie-off means the act of an employee, wear- fall:
ing personal fall protection equipment, con- (i) Limit maximum arresting force on an
necting directly or indirectly to an anchor- employee to 900 pounds (4 kN) when used
age. It also means the condition of an em- with a body belt;
ployee being connected to an anchorage. (ii) Limit maximum arresting force on an
(c) Design for system components. (1) Connec- employee to 1,800 pounds (8 kN) when used
tors shall be drop forged, pressed or formed with a body harness;
steel, or made of equivalent materials. (iii) Bring an employee to a complete stop
(2) Connectors shall have a corrosion-re- and limit maximum deceleration distance an
sistant finish, and all surfaces and edges employee travels to 3.5 feet (1.07 m); and
shall be smooth to prevent damage to inter- (iv) Shall have sufficient strength to with-
facing parts of the system. stand twice the potential impact energy of
(3) Lanyards and vertical lifelines which an employee free falling a distance of six feet
tie-off one employee shall have a minimum (1.8 m), or the free fall distance permitted by
breaking strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). the system, whichever is less.
(4) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards (2)(i) When used by employees having a
which automatically limit free fall distance combined person and tool weight of less than
to two feet (0.61 m) or less shall have compo- 310 pounds (140 kg), personal fall arrest sys-
nents capable of sustaining a minimum stat- tems which meet the criteria and protocols
ic tensile load of 3,000 pounds (13.3 kN) ap- contained in paragraphs (b), (c) and (d) in
plied to the device with the lifeline or lan- section II of this appendix shall be consid-
yard in the fully extended position. ered as complying with the provisions of
(5) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards paragraphs (d)(1)(i) through (d)(1)(iv) above.
which do not limit free fall distance to two (ii) When used by employees having a com-
feet (0.61 m) or less, ripstitch lanyards, and bined tool and body weight of 310 pounds (140
tearing and deforming lanyards shall be ca- kg) or more, personal fall arrest systems
pable of sustaining a minimum tensile load which meet the criteria and protocols con-
of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) applied to the device tained in paragraphs (b), (c) and (d) in sec-
with the lifeline or lanyard in the fully ex- tion II may be considered as complying with
tended position. the provisions of paragraphs (d)(1)(i) through
(6) Dee-rings and snap-hooks shall be capa- (d)(1)(iv) provided that the criteria and pro-
ble of sustaining a minimum tensile load of tocols are modified appropriately to provide
5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). proper protection for such heavier weights.
(7) Dee-rings and snap-hooks shall be 100 (e) Care and use. (1) Snap-hooks, unless of
percent proof-tested to a minimum tensile a locking type designed and used to prevent
load of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without crack- disengagement from the following connec-
ing, breaking, or taking permanent deformations, shall not be engaged:
tion. (i) Directly to webbing, rope or wire rope;
(8) Snap-hooks shall be sized to be compat- (ii) To each other;
ible with the member to which they are con- (iii) To a dee-ring to which another snap-
nected so as to prevent unintentional dis- hook or other connector is attached;
engagement of the snap-hook by depression (iv) To a horizontal lifeline; or
of the snap-hook keeper by the connected (v) To any object which is incompatibly
member, or shall be a locking type snap- shaped or dimensioned in relation to the
hook designed and used to prevent dis- snap-hook such that the connected object
engagement of the snap-hook by the contact could depress the snap-hook keeper a suffi-
of the snaphook keeper by the connected cient amount to release itself.
member. (2) Devices used to connect to a horizontal
(9) Horizontal lifelines, where used, shall lifeline which may become a vertical lifeline
be designed, and installed as part of a com- shall be capable of locking in either direc-
plete personal fall arrest system, which tion on the lifeline.
maintains a safety factor of at least two, (3) Personal fall arrest systems shall be
under the supervision of a qualified person. rigged such that an employee can neither
178
free fall more than six feet (1.8 m), nor con- quickly released without having any appre-
tact any lower level. ciable motion imparted to it.
(4) The attachment point of the body belt (7) The systems performance should be
shall be located in the center of the wearers evaluated taking into account the range of
back. The attachment point of the body har- environmental conditions for which it is de-
ness shall be located in the center of the signed to be used.
wearers back near shoulder level, or above (8) Following the test, the system need not
the wearers head. be capable of further operation.
(5) When vertical lifelines are used, each (c) Strength test. (1) During the testing of
employee shall be provided with a separate all systems, a test weight of 300 pounds plus
lifeline. or minus five pounds (135 kg plus or minus
(6) Personal fall arrest systems or compo- 2.5 kg) should be used. (See paragraph (b)(4),
nents shall be used only for employee fall above.)
protection. (2) The test consists of dropping the test
(7) Personal fall arrest systems or compo- weight once. A new unused system should be
nents subjected to impact loading shall be used for each test.
immediately removed from service and shall (3) For lanyard systems, the lanyard
not be used again for employee protection length should be six feet plus or minus two
unless inspected and determined by a com- inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) as meas-
petent person to be undamaged and suitable ured from the fixed anchorage to the attach-
for reuse. ment on the body belt or body harness.
(8) The employer shall provide for prompt (4) For rope-grab-type deceleration sys-
rescue of employees in the event of a fall or tems, the length of the lifeline above the
shall assure the self-rescue capability of em- centerline of the grabbing mechanism to the
ployees. lifelines anchorage point should not exceed
(9) Before using a personal fall arrest sys- two feet (0.61 m).
tem, and after any component or system is (5) For lanyard systems, for systems with
changed, employees shall be trained in ac- deceleration devices which do not automati-
cordance with the requirements of paragraph cally limit free fall distance to two feet (0.61
1910.66(i)(1), in the safe use of the system. m) or less, and for systems with deceleration
(f) Inspections. Personal fall arrest systems devices which have a connection distance in
shall be inspected prior to each use for mil- excess of one foot (0.3 m) (measured between
dew, wear, damage and other deterioration, the centerline of the lifeline and the attach-
and defective components shall be removed ment point to the body belt or harness), the
from service if their strength or function test weight should be rigged to free fall a dis-
may be adversely affected. tance of 7.5 feet (2.3 m) from a point that is
II. Test methods for personal fall arrest sys- 1.5 feet (46 cm) above the anchorage point, to
tems (non-mandatory)(a) General. Para- its hanging location (six feet below the an-
graphs (b), (c), (d) and (e), of this section II chorage). The test weight should fall without
set forth test procedures which may be used interference, obstruction, or hitting the floor
to determine compliance with the require- or ground during the test. In some cases a
ments in paragraph (d)(1)(i) through (d)(1)(iv) non-elastic wire lanyard of sufficient length
of section I of this appendix. may need to be added to the system (for test
(b) General conditions for all tests in section purposes) to create the necessary free fall
II. (1) Lifelines, lanyards and deceleration distance.
devices should be attached to an anchorage (6) For deceleration device systems with
and connected to the body-belt or body har- integral lifelines or lanyards which auto-
ness in the same manner as they would be matically limit free fall distance to two feet
when used to protect employees. (0.61 m) or less, the test weight should be
(2) The anchorage should be rigid, and rigged to free fall a distance of four feet (1.22
should not have a deflection greater than .04 m).
inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 pounds (7) Any weight which detaches from the
(10 kN) is applied. belt or harness should constitute failure for
(3) The frequency response of the load the strength test.
measuring instrumentation should be 120 Hz. (d) Force test(1) General. The test consists
(4) The test weight used in the strength of dropping the respective test weight speci-
and force tests should be a rigid, metal, cy- fied in (d)(2)(i) or (d)(3)(i) once. A new, un-
lindrical or torso-shaped object with a girth used system should be used for each test.
of 38 inches plus or minus four inches (96 cm (2) For lanyard systems. (i) A test weight of
plus or minus 10 cm). 220 pounds plus or minus three pounds (100
(5) The lanyard or lifeline used to create kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See
the free fall distance should be supplied with paragraph (b)(4), above.)
the system, or in its absence, the least elas- (ii) Lanyard length should be six feet plus
tic lanyard or lifeline available to be used or minus two inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5
with the system. cm) as measured from the fixed anchorage to
(6) The test weight for each test should be the attachment on the body belt or body har-
hoisted to the required level and should be ness.
179
(iii) The test weight should fall free from for use in complying with requirements for a
the anchorage level to its hanging location personal fall arrest system.
(a total of six feet (1.83 m) free fall distance) (a) Selection and use considerations. The
without interference, obstruction, or hitting kind of personal fall arrest system selected
the floor or ground during the test. should match the particular work situation,
(3) For all other systems. (i) A test weight of and any possible free fall distance should be
220 pounds plus or minus three pounds (100 kept to a minimum. Consideration should be
kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See given to the particular work environment.
paragraph (b)(4), above.) For example, the presence of acids, dirt,
(ii) The free fall distance to be used in the moisture, oil, grease, etc., and their effect on
test should be the maximum fall distance the system, should be evaluated. Hot or cold
physically permitted by the system during environments may also have an adverse af-
normal use conditions, up to a maximum fect on the system. Wire rope should not be
free fall distance for the test weight of six used where an electrical hazard is antici-
feet (1.83 m), except as follows: pated. As required by the standard, the em-
(A) For deceleration systems which have a ployer must plan to have means available to
connection link or lanyard, the test weight promptly rescue an employee should a fall
should free fall a distance equal to the con- occur, since the suspended employee may not
nection distance (measured between the cen- be able to reach a work level independently.
terline of the lifeline and the attachment Where lanyards, connectors, and lifelines
point to the body belt or harness). are subject to damage by work operations
(B) For deceleration device systems with such as welding, chemical cleaning, and
sandblasting, the component should be pro-
integral lifelines or lanyards which auto-
tected, or other securing systems should be
matically limit free fall distance to two feet
used. The employer should fully evaluate the
(0.61 m) or less, the test weight should free
work conditions and environment (including
fall a distance equal to that permitted by the
seasonal weather changes) before selecting
system in normal use. (For example, to test
the appropriate personal fall protection sys-
a system with a self-retracting lifeline or
tem. Once in use, the systems effectiveness
lanyard, the test weight should be supported
should be monitored. In some cases, a pro-
and the system allowed to retract the life-
gram for cleaning and maintenance of the
line or lanyard as it would in normal use.
system may be necessary.
The test weight would then be released and (b) Testing considerations. Before pur-
the force and deceleration distance meas- chasing or putting into use a personal fall
ured). arrest system, an employer should obtain
(4) A system fails the force test if the re- from the supplier information about the sys-
corded maximum arresting force exceeds tem based on its performance during testing
1,260 pounds (15.6 kN) when using a body belt, so that the employer can know if the system
and/or exceeds 2,520 pounds (11.2 kN) when meets this standard. Testing should be done
using a body harness. using recognized test methods. Section II of
(5) The maximum elongation and decelera- this appendix C contains test methods recog-
tion distance should be recorded during the nized for evaluating the performance of fall
force test. arrest systems. Not all systems may need to
(e) Deceleration device tests(1) General. The be individually tested; the performance of
device should be evaluated or tested under some systems may be based on data and cal-
the environmental conditions, (such as rain, culations derived from testing of similar sys-
ice, grease, dirt, type of lifeline, etc.), for tems, provided that enough information is
which the device is designed. available to demonstrate similarity of func-
(2) Rope-grab-type deceleration devices. (i) tion and design.
Devices should be moved on a lifeline 1,000 (c) Component compatibility considerations.
times over the same length of line a distance Ideally, a personal fall arrest system is de-
of not less than one foot (30.5 cm), and the signed, tested, and supplied as a complete
mechanism should lock each time. system. However, it is common practice for
(ii) Unless the device is permanently lanyards, connectors, lifelines, deceleration
marked to indicate the type(s) of lifeline devices, body belts and body harnesses to be
which must be used, several types (different interchanged since some components wear
diameters and different materials), of life- out before others. The employer and em-
lines should be used to test the device. ployee should realize that not all compo-
(3) Other self-activatinq-type deceleration de- nents are interchangeable. For instance, a
vices. The locking mechanisms of other self- lanyard should not be connected between a
activating-type deceleration devices de- body belt (or harness) and a deceleration de-
signed for more than one arrest should lock vice of the self-retracting type since this can
each of 1,000 times as they would in normal result in additional free fall for which the
service. system was not designed. Any substitution
III. Additional non-mandatory guidelines for or change to a personal fall arrest system
personal fall arrest systems. The following in- should be fully evaluated or tested by a com-
formation constitutes additional guidelines petent person to determine that it meets the
180
standard, before the modified system is put ropes must be withdrawn from service imme-
in use. diately, and should be tagged or marked as
(d) Employee training considerations. Thor- unusable, or destroyed.
ough employee training in the selection and (g) Rescue considerations. As required by the
use of personal fall arrest systems is impera- standard (section I, Paragraph (e)(8)), when
tive. As stated in the standard, before the personal fall arrest systems are used, the
equipment is used, employees must be employer must assure that employees can be
trained in the safe use of the system. This promptly rescued or can rescue themselves
should include the following: Application should a fall occur. The availability of res-
limits; proper anchoring and tie-off tech- cue personnel, ladders or other rescue equip-
niques; estimation of free fall distance, in- ment should be evaluated. In some situa-
cluding determination of deceleration dis- tions, equipment which allows employees to
tance, and total fall distance to prevent rescue themselves after the fall has been ar-
striking a lower level; methods of use; and rested may be desirable, such as devices
inspection and storage of the system. Care- which have descent capability.
less or improper use of the equipment can re- (h) Tie-off considerations. (1) One of the
sult in serious injury or death. Employers most important aspects of personal fall pro-
and employees should become familiar with tection systems is fully planning the system
the material in this appendix, as well as before it is put into use. Probably the most
manufacturers recommendations, before a overlooked component is planning for suit-
system is used. Of uppermost importance is able anchorage points. Such planning should
the reduction in strength caused by certain ideally be done before the structure or build-
tie-offs (such as using knots, tying around ing is constructed so that anchorage points
sharp edges, etc.) and maximum permitted can be incorporated during construction for
free fall distance. Also, to be stressed are the use later for window cleaning or other build-
importance of inspections prior to use, the ing maintenance. If properly planned, these
limitations of the equipment, and unique anchorage points may be used during con-
conditions at the worksite which may be im- struction, as well as afterwards.
portant in determining the type of system to (2) Employers and employees should at all
use. times be aware that the strength of a per-
(e) Instruction considerations. Employers sonal fall arrest system is based on its being
should obtain comprehensive instructions attached to an anchoring system which does
from the supplier as to the systems proper not significantly reduce the strength of the
use and application, including, where appli- system (such as a properly dimensioned eye-
cable: bolt/snap-hook anchorage). Therefore, if a
(1) The force measured during the sample means of attachment is used that will reduce
force test; the strength of the system, that component
(2) The maximum elongation measured for should be replaced by a stronger one, but one
lanyards during the force test; that will also maintain the appropriate max-
(3) The deceleration distance measured for imum arrest force characteristics.
deceleration devices during the force test; (3) Tie-off using a knot in a rope lanyard or
(4) Caution statements on critical use limi- lifeline (at any location) can reduce the life-
tations; line or lanyard strength by 50 percent or
(5) Application limits; more. Therefore, a stronger lanyard or life-
(6) Proper hook-up, anchoring and tie-off line should be used to compensate for the
techniques, including the proper dee-ring or weakening effect of the knot, or the lanyard
other attachment point to use on the body length should be reduced (or the tie-off loca-
belt and harness for fall arrest; tion raised) to minimize free fall distance, or
(7) Proper climbing techniques; the lanyard or lifeline should be replaced by
(8) Methods of inspection, use, cleaning, one which has an appropriately incorporated
and storage; and connector to eliminate the need for a knot.
(9) Specific lifelines which may be used. (4) Tie-off of a rope lanyard or lifeline
This information should be provided to em- around an H or I beam or similar sup-
ployees during training. port can reduce its strength as much as 70
(f) Inspection considerations. As stated in percent due to the cutting action of the
the standard (section I, Paragraph (f)), per- beam edges. Therefore, use should be made of
sonal fall arrest systems must be regularly a webbing lanyard or wire core lifeline
inspected. Any component with any signifi- around the beam; or the lanyard or lifeline
cant defect, such as cuts, tears, abrasions, should be protected from the edge; or free
mold, or undue stretching; alterations or ad- fall distance should be greatly minimized.
ditions which might affect its efficiency; (5) Tie-off where the line passes over or
damage due to deterioration; contact with around rough or sharp surfaces reduces
fire, acids, or other corrosives; distorted strength drastically. Such a tie-off should be
hooks or faulty hook springs; tongues avoided or an alternative tie-off rigging
unfitted to the shoulder of buckles; loose or should be used. Such alternatives may in-
damaged mountings; non-functioning parts; clude use of a snap-hook/dee ring connection,
or wearing or internal deterioration in the wire rope tie-off, an effective padding of the
181
surfaces, or an abrasion-resistance strap locking type. Locking snap-hooks incor-
around or over the problem surface. porate a positive locking mechanism in addi-
(6) Horizontal lifelines may, depending on tion to the spring loaded keeper, which will
their geometry and angle of sag, be subjected not allow the keeper to open under moderate
to greater loads than the impact load im- pressure without someone first releasing the
posed by an attached component. When the mechanism. Such a feature, properly de-
angle of horizontal lifeline sag is less than 30 signed, effectively prevents roll-out from oc-
degrees, the impact force imparted to the curring.
lifeline by an attached lanyard is greatly As required by the standard (section I,
amplified. For example, with a sag angle of paragraph (e)(1)) the following connections
15 degrees, the force amplification is about must be avoided (unless properly designed
2:1 and at 5 degrees sag, it is about 6:1. De- locking snap-hooks are used) because they
pending on the angle of sag, and the lines are conditions which can result in roll-out
elasticity, the strength of the horizontal life- when a nonlocking snap-hook is used:
line and the anchorages to which it is at- Direct connection of a snap-hook to a
tached should be increased a number of horizontal lifeline.
times over that of the lanyard. Extreme care Two (or more) snap-hooks connected to
should be taken in considering a horizontal one dee-ring.
lifeline for multiple tie-offs. The reason for Two snap-hooks connected to each other.
this is that in multiple tie-offs to a hori- A snap-hook connected back on its inte-
zontal lifeline, if one employee falls, the gral lanyard.
movement of the falling employee and the A snap-hook connected to a webbing loop
horizontal lifeline during arrest of the fall or webbing lanyard.
may cause other employees to also fall. Hori- Improper dimensions of the dee-ring,
zontal lifeline and anchorage strength should rebar, or other connection point in relation
be increased for each additional employee to to the snap-hook dimensions which would
be tied-off. For these and other reasons, the allow the snap-hook keeper to be depressed
design of systems using horizontal lifelines by a turning motion of the snap-hook.
must only be done by qualified persons. Test- (k) Free fall considerations. The employer
ing of installed lifelines and anchors prior to and employee should at all times be aware
use is recommended. that a systems maximum arresting force is
(7) The strength of an eye-bolt is rated evaluated under normal use conditions es-
along the axis of the bolt and its strength is tablished by the manufacturer, and in no
greatly reduced if the force is applied at an case using a free fall distance in excess of six
angle to this axis (in the direction of shear). feet (1.8 m). A few extra feet of free fall can
Also, care should be exercised in selecting significantly increase the arresting force on
the proper diameter of the eye to avoid acci- the employee, possibly to the point of caus-
dental disengagement of snap-hooks not de- ing injury. Because of this, the free fall dis-
signed to be compatible for the connection. tance should be kept at a minimum, and, as
(8) Due to the significant reduction in the required by the standard, in no case greater
strength of the lifeline/lanyard (in some than six feet (1.8 m). To help assure this, the
cases, as much as a 70 percent reduction), the tie-off attachment point to the lifeline or an-
sliding hitch knot should not be used for life- chor should be located at or above the con-
line/lanyard connections except in emer- nection point of the fall arrest equipment to
gency situations where no other available belt or harness. (Since otherwise additional
system is practical. The one-and-one slid- free fall distance is added to the length of
ing hitch knot should never be used because the connecting means (i.e. lanyard)). Attach-
it is unreliable in stopping a fall. The two- ing to the working surface will often result
and-two, or three-and-three knot (pref- in a free fall greater than six feet (1.8 m). For
erable), may be used in emergency situa- instance, if a six foot (1.8 m) lanyard is used,
tions; however, care should be taken to limit the total free fall distance will be the dis-
free fall distance to a minimum because of tance from the working level to the body
reduced lifeline/lanyard strength. belt (or harness) attachment point plus the
(i) Vertical lifeline considerations. As re- six feet (1.8 m) of lanyard length. Another
quired by the standard, each employee must important consideration is that the arrest-
have a separate lifeline when the lifeline is ing force which the fall system must with-
vertical. The reason for this is that in mul- stand also goes up with greater distances of
tiple tie-offs to a single lifeline, if one em- free fall, possibly exceeding the strength of
ployee falls, the movement of the lifeline the system.
during the arrest of the fall may pull other (l) Elongation and deceleration distance con-
employees lanyards, causing them to fall as siderations. Other factors involved in a proper
well. tie-off are elongation and deceleration dis-
(j) Snap-hook considerations. Although not tance. During the arresting of a fall, a lan-
required by this standard for all connections, yard will experience a length of stretching or
locking snap-hooks designed for connection elongation, whereas activation of a decelera-
to suitable objects (of sufficient strength) tion device will result in a certain stopping
are highly recommended in lieu of the non- distance. These distances should be available
182
with the lanyard or devices instructions and (b), (c) and (d) and which were effective on
must be added to the free fall distance to ar- August 27, 1971.
rive at the total fall distance before an em-
ployee is fully stopped. The additional stop- NOTE: All existing installations subject to
ping distance may be very significant if the this appendix shall also comply with para-
lanyard or deceleration device is attached graphs (g), (h), (i), (j) and appendix C of the
near or at the end of a long lifeline, which standard 29 CFR 1910.66.
may itself add considerable distance due to (a) Definitions applicable to this appendix
its own elongation. As required by the stand- (1) Angulated roping. A system of platform
ard, sufficient distance to allow for all of suspension in which the upper wire rope
these factors must also be maintained be- sheaves or suspension points are closer to
tween the employee and obstructions below, the plane of the building face than the cor-
to prevent an injury due to impact before the
responding attachment points on the plat-
system fully arrests the fall. In addition, a
form, thus causing the platform to press
minimum of 12 feet (3.7 m) of lifeline should
against the face of the building during its
be allowed below the securing point of a rope
vertical travel.
grab type deceleration device, and the end
terminated to prevent the device from slid- (2) ANSI. American National Standards In-
ing off the lifeline. Alternatively, the lifeline stitute.
should extend to the ground or the next (3) Babbitted fastenings. The method of pro-
working level below. These measures are viding wire rope attachments in which the
suggested to prevent the worker from inad- ends of the wire strands are bent back and
vertently moving past the end of the lifeline are held in a tapered socket by means of
and having the rope grab become disengaged poured molten babbitt metal.
from the lifeline. (4) Brakedisc type. A brake in which the
(m) Obstruction considerations. The location holding effect is obtained by frictional re-
of the tie-off should also consider the hazard sistance between one or more faces of discs
of obstructions in the potential fall path of keyed to the rotating member to be held and
the employee. Tie-offs which minimize the fixed discs keyed to the stationary or hous-
possibilities of exaggerated swinging should ing member (pressure between the discs
be considered. In addition, when a body belt being applied axially).
is used, the employees body will go through (5) Brakeself-energizing band type. An es-
a horizontal position to a jack-knifed posi- sentially undirectional brake in which the
tion during the arrest of all falls. Thus, ob- holding effect is obtained by the snubbing
structions which might interfere with this action of a flexible band wrapped about a cy-
motion should be avoided or a severe injury lindrical wheel or drum affixed to the rotat-
could occur. ing member to be held, the connections and
(n) Other considerations. Because of the de- linkages being so arranged that the motion
sign of some personal fall arrest systems, ad- of the brake wheel or drum will act to in-
ditional considerations may be required for crease the tension or holding force of the
proper tie-off. For example, heavy decelera- band.
tion devices of the self-retracting type
(6) Brakeshoe type. A brake in which the
should be secured overhead in order to avoid
holding effect is obtained by applying the di-
the weight of the device having to be sup-
rect pressure of two or more segmental fric-
ported by the employee. Also, if
tion elements held to a stationary member
selfretracting equipment is connected to a
against a cylindrical wheel or drum affixed
horizontal lifeline, the sag in the lifeline
to the rotating member to be held.
should be minimized to prevent the device
from sliding down the lifeline to a position (7) Building face rollers. A specialized form
which creates a swing hazard during fall ar- of guide roller designed to contact a portion
rest. In all cases, manufacturers instruc- of the outer face or wall structure of the
tions should be followed. building, and to assist in stabilizing the op-
erators platform during vertical travel.
APPENDIX D TO 1910.66EXISTING (8) Continuous pressure. Operation by means
INSTALLATIONS (MANDATORY) of buttons or switches, any one of which may
be used to control the movement of the
Use of the Appendix working platform or roof car, only as long as
Appendix D sets out the mandatory build- the button or switch is manually maintained
ing and equipment requirements for applica- in the actuating position.
ble permanent installations completed after (9) Control. A system governing starting,
August 27, 1971, and no later than July 23, stopping, direction, acceleration, speed, and
1990 which are exempt from the paragraphs retardation of moving members.
(a), (b)(1), (b)(2), (c), (d), (e), and (f) of this (10) Controller. A device or group of devices,
standard. The requirements in appendix D usually contained in a single enclosure,
are essentially the same as unrevised build- which serves to control in some predeter-
ing and equipment provisions which pre- mined manner the apparatus to which it is
viously were designated as 29 CFR 1910.66 (a), connected.
183
(11) Electrical ground. A conducting connec- vides access to the exterior of the building or
tion between an electrical circuit or equip- structure.
ment and the earth, or some conducting (26) Yield point. The stress at which the ma-
body which serves in place of the earth. terial exhibits a permanent set of 0.2 per-
(12) Guide roller. A rotating, bearing- cent.
mounted, generally cylindrical member, op- (27) Zinced fastenings. The method of pro-
erating separately or as part of a guide shoe viding wire rope attachments in which the
assembly, attached to the platform, and pro- splayed or fanned wire ends are held in a ta-
viding rolling contact with building guide- pered socket by means of poured molten
ways, or other building contact members. zinc.
(13) Guide shoe. An assembly of rollers, (b) General requirements. (1) Design require-
slide members, or the equivalent, attached ments. All powered platform installations
as a unit to the operators platform, and de- for exterior building maintenance completed
signed to engage with the building members as of August 27, 1971, but no later than [in-
provided for the vertical guidance of the op- sert date, 180 days after the effective date],
erators platform. shall meet all of the design, construction and
(14) Interlock. A device actuated by the op- installation requirements of Part II and III
eration of some other device with which it is of the American National Standard Safety
directly associated, to govern succeeding op- Requirements for Powered Platforms for Ex-
erations of the same or allied devices. terior Building Maintenance ANSI A120.1
(15) Operating device. A pushbutton, lever, 1970 and of this appendix. References shall
or other manual device used to actuate a be made to appropriate parts of ANSI A120.1
control. 1970 for detail specifications for equipment
(16) Powered platform. Equipment to provide and special installations.
access to the exterior of a building for main- (2) Limitation. The requirements of this ap-
tenance, consisting of a suspended power-op- pendix apply only to electric powered plat-
erated working platform, a roof car, or other forms. It is not the intent of this appendix to
suspension means, and the requisite oper- prohibit the use of other types of power. In-
ating and control devices. stallation of powered platforms using other
(17) Rated load. The combined weight of types of power is permitted, provided such
employees, tools, equipment, and other ma- platforms have adequate protective devices
terial which the working platform is de- for the type of power used, and otherwise
signed and installed to lift. provide for reasonable safety of life and limb
(18) Relay, direction. An electrically ener- to users of equipment and to others who may
gized contactor responsive to an initiating be exposed.
control circuit, which in turn causes a mov- (3) Types of powered platforms. (i) For the
ing member to travel in a particular direc- purpose of applying this appendix, powered
tion. platforms are divided into two basic types,
(19) Relay, potential for vertical travel. An Type F and Type T.
electrically energized contactor responsive (ii) Powered platforms designated as Type
to initiating control circuit, which in turn F shall meet all the requirements in Part II
controls the operation of a moving member of ANSI A 120.11970, American National
in both directions. This relay usually oper- Standard Safety Requirements for Powered
ates in conjunction with direction relays, as Platforms for Exterior Building Mainte-
covered under the definition, relay, direc- nance. A basic requirement of Type F equip-
tion. ment is that the work platform is suspended
(20) Roof car. A structure for the suspen- by at least four wire ropes and designed so
sion of a working platform, providing for its that failure of any one wire rope will not
horizontal movement to working positions. substantially alter the normal position of
(21) Roof-powered platform. A powered plat- the working platform. Another basic require-
form having the raising and lowering mecha- ment of Type F equipment is that only one
nism located on a roof car. layer of hoisting rope is permitted on wind-
(22) Self-powered platform. A powered plating drums. Type F powered platforms may be
form having the raising and lowering mecha- either roof-powered or self-powered.
nism located on the working platform. (iii) Powered platforms designated as Type
(23) Traveling cable. A cable made up of T shall meet all the requirements in Part III
electrical or communication conductors or of ANSI A120.11970 American National
both, and providing electrical connection be- Standard Safety Requirements for Powered
tween the working platform and the roof car Platforms for Exterior Building Mainte-
or other fixed point. nance, except for section 28, Safety Belts and
(24) Weatherproof. Equipment so con- Life Lines. A basic requirement of Type T
structed or protected that exposure to the equipment is that the working platform is
weather will not interfere with its proper op- suspended by at least two wire ropes. Failure
eration. of one wire rope would not permit the work-
(25) Working platform. The suspended struc- ing platform to fall to the ground, but would
ture arranged for vertical travel which pro- upset its normal position. Type T powered
184
platforms may be either roof-powered or self- (c)(3) (i) or (ii) of this appendix, whichever is
powered. greater.
(iv) The requirements of this section apply (i) The roof car shall be continuously sta-
to powered platforms with winding drum ble, considering overturning moment as de-
type hoisting machines. It is not the intent termined by 125 percent rated load, plus
of this section to prohibit powered platforms maximum dead load and the prescribed wind
using other types of hoisting machines such loading.
as, but not limited to, traction drum hoist- (ii) The roof car and its anchorages shall be
ing machines, air powered machines, hydrau- capable of resisting accidental over-ten-
lic powered machines, and internal combus- sioning of the wire ropes suspending the
tion machines. Installation of powered plat- working platform and this calculated value
forms with other types of hoisting machines shall include the effect of one and one-half
is permitted, provided adequate protective times the value. For this calculation, the si-
devices are used, and provided reasonable multaneous effect of one-half wind load shall
safety of life and limb to users of the equip- be included, and the design stresses shall not
ment and to others who may be exposed is exceed those referred to in paragraph (b)(1)
assured. of this appendix.
(v) Both Type F and Type T powered plat- (iii) If the load on the motors is at any
forms shall comply with the requirements of time in excess of three times that required
appendix C of this standard. for lifting the working platform with its
(c) Type F powered platforms(1) Roof car, rated load the motor shall stall.
general. (i) A roof car shall be provided when- (4) Access to the roof car. Safe access to the
ever it is necessary to move the working roof car and from the roof car to the working
platform horizontally to working or storage platform shall be provided. If the access to
positions. the roof car at any point of its travel is not
(ii) The maximum rated speed at which a over the roof area or where otherwise nec-
power traversed roof car may be moved in a essary for safety, self-closing, self-locking
horizontal direction shall be 50 feet per gates shall be provided. Applicable provi-
minute. sions of the American National Standard
(2) Movement and positioning of roof car. (i) Safety Requirements for Floor and Wall
Provision shall be made to protect against Openings, Railings and Toeboard, A12.11967,
having the roof car leave the roof or enter shall apply.
roof areas not designed for travel. (5) Means for maintenance, repair, and stor-
(ii) The horizontal motion of the roof cars age. Means shall be provided to run the roof
shall be positively controlled so as to insure car away from the roof perimeter, where nec-
proper movement and positioning of the roof essary, and to provide a safe area for mainte-
car. nance, repairs, and storage. Provisions shall
(iii) Roof car positioning devices shall be be made to secure the machine in the stored
provided to insure that the working platform position. For stored machines subject to
is placed and retained in proper position for wind forces, see special design and anchorage
vertical travel and during storage. requirements for wind forces in Part II,
(iv) Mechanical stops shall be provided to section 10.5.1.1 of ANSI A120.11970 American
prevent the traversing of the roof car beyond National Standard Safety Requirements for
its normal limits of travel. Such stops shall Powered Platforms for Exterior Building
be capable of withstanding a force equal to Maintenance.
100 percent of the inertial effect of the roof (6) General requirements for working plat-
car in motion with traversing power applied. forms. The working platform shall be of gird-
(v)(a) The operating device of a power-oper or truss construction and shall be ade-
erated roof car for traversing shall be lo- quate to support its rated load under any po-
cated on the roof car, the working platform, sition of loading, and comply with the provi-
or both, and shall be of the continuous pres- sions set forth in section 10 of ANSI A120.1
sure weather-proof electric type. If more 1970, American National Standard Safety Re-
than one operating device is provided, they quirements for Powered Platforms for Exte-
shall be so arranged that traversing is pos- rior Building Maintenance.
sible only from one operating device at a (7) Load rating plate. Each working plat-
time. form shall bear a manufacturers load rating
(b) The operating device shall be so con- plate, conspicuously posted; stating the max-
nected that it is not operable until: imum permissible rated load. Load rating
(1) The working platform is located at its plates shall be made of noncorrosive mate-
uppermost position of travel and is not in rial and shall have letters and figures
contact with the building face or fixed stamped, etched, or cast on the surface. The
vertical guides in the face of the building; minimum height of the letters and figures
and shall be one-fourth inch.
(2) All protective devices and interlocks (8) Minimum size. The working platform
are in a position for traversing. shall have a minimum net width of 24 inches.
(3) Roof car stability. Roof car stability (9) Guardrails. Working platforms shall be
shall be determined by either paragraph furnished with permanent guard rails not
185
less than 36 inches high, and not more than manual cranking. This provision for manual
42 inches high at the front (building side). At operation shall be designed so that not more
the rear, and on the sides, the rail shall not than two persons will be required to perform
be less than 42 inches high. An intermediate this operation. The access to this provision
guardrail shall be provided around the entire shall include a means to automatically make
platform between the top guardrail and the the machine inoperative electrically while
toeboard. under the emergency manual operation. The
(10) Toeboards. A four-inch toeboard shall design shall be such that the emergency
be provided along all sides of the working brake is operative at or below governor trip-
platform. ping speed during manual operation.
(11) Open spaces between guardrails and (17) Arrangement and guarding of hoisting
toeboards. The spaces between the inter- equipment.
mediate guardrail and platform toeboard on (i) Hoisting equipment shall consist of a
the building side of the working platform, power-driven drum or drum contained in the
and between the top guardrail and the roof car (roof-powered platforms) or con-
toeboard on other sides of the platform, shall tained on the working platform (self-powered
be filled with metalic mesh or similar mate- platform).
rial that will reject a ball one inch in diame- (ii) The hoisting equipment shall be power-
ter. The installed mesh shall be capable of operated in both up and down directions.
withstanding a load of 100 pounds applied (iii) Guard or other protective devices shall
horizontally over any area of 144 square be installed wherever rotating shafts or
inches. If the space between the platform and other mechanisms or gears may expose per-
the building face does not exceed eight sonnel to a hazard.
inches, and the platform is restrained by (iv) Friction devices or clutches shall not
guides, the mesh may be omitted on the be used for connecting the main driving
front side. mechanism to the drum or drums. Belt or
(12) Flooring. The platform flooring shall be chain-driven machines are prohibited.
of the nonskid type, and if of open construc- (18) Hoisting motors. (i) Hoisting motors
tion, shall reject a 916-inch diameter ball, or shall be electric and of weather-proof con-
be provided with a screen below the floor to struction.
reject a 916-inch diameter ball. (ii) Hoisting motors shall be in conform-
(13) Access gates. Where access gates are ance with applicable provisions of paragraph
provided, they shall be self-closing and self- (c)(22) of this appendix, Electric Wiring and
locking. Equipment.
(14) Operating device for vertical movement of (iii) Hoisting motors shall be directly con-
the working platform. (i) The normal oper- nected to the hoisting machinery. Motor
ating device for the working platform shall couplings, if used, shall be of steel construc-
be located on the working platform and shall tion.
be of the continuous pressure weatherproof (19) Brakes. The hoisting machine(s) shall
electric type. have two independent braking means, each
(ii) The operating device shall be operable designed to stop and hold the working plat-
only when all electrical protective devices form with 125 percent of rated load.
and interlocks on the working platform are (20) Hoisting ropes and rope connections. (i)
in position for normal service and, the roof Working platforms shall be suspended by
car, if provided, is at an established oper- wire ropes of either 619 or 637 classifica-
ating point. tion, preformed or nonpreformed.
(15) Emergency electric operative device. (i) In (ii) [Reserved]
addition, on roof-powered platforms, an (iii) The minimum factor of safety shall be
emergency electric operating device shall be 10, and shall be calculated by the following
provided near the hoisting machine for use formula:
in the event of failure of the normal oper-
F = SN/W
ating device for the working platform, or
failure of the traveling cable system. The Where
emergency operating device shall be mount- S = Manufacturers rated breaking strength
ed in a locked compartment and shall have a of one rope.
legend mounted thereon reading: For Emer- N = Number of ropes under load.
gency Operation Only. Establish Commu- W = Maximum static load on all ropes with
nication With Personnel on Working Plat- the platform and its rated load at any
form Before Use. point of its travel.
(ii) A key for unlocking the compartment (iv) Hoisting ropes shall be sized to con-
housing the emergency operating device form with the required factor of safety, but
shall be mounted in a break-glass receptacle in no case shall the size be less than 516 inch
located near the emergency operating de- diameter.
vice. (v) Winding drums shall have at least three
(16) Manual cranking for emergency oper- turns of rope remaining when the platform
ation. Emergency operation of the main has landed at the lowest possible point of its
drive machine may be provided to allow travel.
186
(vi) The lengthening or repairing of wire accumulated snow. The receptacles shall be
rope by the joining of two or more lengths is grounded and the electric cable shall include
prohibited. a grounding conductor. The receptacle and
(vii) The nondrum ends of the hoisting plug shall be a type designed to avoid hazard
ropes shall be provided with individual to persons inserting or withdrawing the plug.
shackle rods which will permit individual ad- Provision shall be made to prevent applica-
justment of rope lengths, if required. tion of cable strain directly to the plug and
(viii) More than two reverse bends in each receptacle.
rope is prohibited. (vii) Electric runway conductor systems
(21) Rope tag data. (i) A metal data tag shall be of the type designed for use in exte-
shall be securely attached to one of the wire rior locations and shall be located so as not
rope fastenings. This data tag shall bear the to be subject to contact with water or accu-
following wire rope data: mulated snow. The conductors, collectors,
(a) The diameter in inches. and disconnecting means shall conform to
(b) Construction classification. the same requirements as those for cranes
(c) Whether nonpreformed or preformed. and hoists in Article 610 of the National
(d) The grade of material used. Electrical Code, NFPA 701971; ANSI C11971
(e) The manufacturers rated breaking (Rev. of C11968). A grounded conductor shall
strength. parallel the power conductors and be so con-
(f) Name of the manufacturer of the rope. nected that it cannot be opened by the dis-
(g) The month and year the ropes were in- connecting means. The system shall be de-
stalled. signed to avoid hazard to persons in the area.
(22) Electrical wiring and equipment. (i) All (viii) Electrical protective devices and
electrical equipment and wiring shall con- interlocks of the weatherproof type shall be
form to the requirements of the National provided.
Electrical Code, NFPA 701971; ANSI C11971 (ix) Where the installation includes a roof
(Rev. of C11968), except as modified by ANSI car, electric contact(s) shall be provided and
A120.11970 American National Standard so connected that the operating devices for
Safety Requirements for Powered Platforms the working platform shall be operative only
for Exterior Building Maintenance. For de- when the roof car is located and mechani-
tail design specifications for electrical equip- cally retained at an established operating
ment, see Part 2, ANSI A120.11970. point.
(ii) All motors and operation and control (x) Where the powered platform includes a
equipment shall be supplied from a single powered-operated roof car, the operating de-
power source. vice for the roof car shall be inoperative
(iii) The power supply for the powered plat- when the roof car is mechanically retained
form shall be an independent circuit supplied at an established operating point.
through a fused disconnect switch. (xi) An electric contact shall be provided
(iv) Electrical conductor parts of the power and so connected that it will cause the down
supply system shall be protected against ac- direction relay for vertical travel to open if
cidental contact. the tension in the traveling cable exceeds
(v) Electrical grounding shall be provided. safe limits.
(a) Provisions for electrical grounding (xii) An automatic overload device shall be
shall be included with the power-supply sys- provided to cut off the electrical power to
tem. the circuit in all hoisting motors for travel
(b) Controller cabinets, motor frames, in the up direction, should the load applied
hoisting machines, the working platform, to the hoisting ropes at either end of the
roof car and roof car track system, and non- working platform exceed 125 percent of its
current carrying parts of electrical equip- normal tension with rated load, as shown on
ment, where provided, shall be grounded. the manufacturers data plate on the work-
(c) The controller, where used, shall be so ing platform.
designed and installed that a single ground (xiii) An automatic device shall be pro-
or short circuit will not prevent both the vided for each hoisting rope which will cut
normal and final stopping device from stop- off the electrical power to the hoisting
ping the working platform. motor or motors in the down direction and
(d) Means shall be provided on the roof car apply the brakes if any hoisting rope be-
and working platform for grounding portable comes slack.
electric tools. (xiv) Upper and lower directional limit de-
(e) The working platform shall be grounded vices shall be provided to prevent the travel
through a grounding connection in a trav- of the working platform beyond the normal
eling cable. Electrically powered tools uti- upper and lower limits of travel.
lized on the working platform shall be (xv) Operation of a directional limit device
grounded. shall prevent further motion in the appro-
(vi) Electrical receptacles located on the priate direction, if the normal limit of travel
roof or other exterior location shall be of a has been reached.
weatherproof type and shall be located so as (xvi) Directional limit devices, if driven
not to be subject to contact with water or from the hoisting machine by chains, tapes,
187
or cables, shall incorporate a device to dis- (a) Designated personnel continuously
connect the electric power from the hoisting available while the powered platform is in
machine and apply both the primary and sec- use; and
ondary brakes in the event of failure of the (b) Designated personnel on roof-powered
driving means. platforms, undertaking emergency operation
(xvii) Final terminal stopping devices of of the working platform by means of the
the working platform: emergency operating device located near the
(a) Final terminal stopping devices for the hoisting machine.
working platform shall be provided as a sec- (iv) The emergency communication equip-
ondary means of preventing the working ment shall be one of the following types:
platform from over-traveling at the termi- (a) Telephone connected to the central
nals. telephone exchange system; or
(b) The device shall be set to function as (b) Telephones on a limited system or an
close to each terminal landing as practical, approved two-way radio system, provided
but in such a way that under normal oper- designated personnel are available to receive
ating conditions it will not function when a message during the time the powered plat-
the working platform is stopped by the nor- form is in use.
mal terminal stopping device. (d) Type T powered platforms(1) Roof car.
(c) Operation of the final terminal stopping The requirements of paragraphs (c)(1)
device shall open the potential relay for through (c)(5) of this appendix shall apply to
vertical travel, thereby disconnecting the Type T powered platforms.
electric power from the hoisting machine, (2) Working platform. The requirements of
and applying both the primary and sec- paragraphs (c)(6) through (c)(16) of this ap-
ondary brakes. pendix apply to Type T powered platforms.
(d) The final terminal stopping device for (i) The working platform shall be sus-
the upper limit of travel shall be mounted so pended by at least two wire ropes.
that it is operated directly by the motion of (ii) The maximum rated speed at which the
the working platform itself. working platform of self-powered platforms
(xviii) Emergency stop switches shall be may be moved in a vertical direction shall
provided in or adjacent to each operating de- not exceed 35 feet per minute.
vice. (3) Hoisting equipment. The requirements of
(xix) Emergency stop switches shall: paragraphs (c) (17) and (18) of this appendix
(a) Have red operating buttons or handles. shall apply to Type T powered platforms.
(b) Be conspicuously and permanently (4) Brakes. Brakes requirements of para-
marked Stop. graph (c)(19) of this appendix shall apply.
(c) Be the manually opened and manually (5) Hoisting ropes and rope connections. (i)
closed type. Paragraphs (c)(20) (i) through (vi) and (viii)
(d) Be positively opened with the opening of this appendix shall apply to Type T pow-
not solely dependent on springs. ered platforms.
(xx) The manual operation of an emer- (ii) Adjustable shackle rods in subpara-
gency stop switch associated with an oper- graph (c)(20)(vii) of this appendix shall apply
ating device for the working platform shall to Type T powered platforms, if the working
open the potential relay for vertical travel, platform is suspended by more than two wire
thereby disconnecting the electric power ropes.
from the hoisting machine and applying both (6) Electrical wiring and equipment. (i) The
the primary and secondary brakes. requirements of paragraphs (c)(22) (i)
(xxi) The manual operation of the emer- through (vi) of this appendix shall apply to
gency stop switch associated with the oper- Type T powered platforms. Circuit protec-
ating device for a power-driven roof car shall tion limitation, powered platform elec-
cause the electrical power to the traverse trical service system, all operating services
machine to be interrupted, and the traverse and control equipment shall comply with the
machine brake to apply. specifications contained in Part 2, section 26,
ANSI A120.11970.
(23) Requirements for emergency communica-
(ii) For electrical protective devices the re-
tions. (i) Communication equipment shall be
quirements of paragraphs (c)(22) (i) through
provided for each powered platform for use in
(viii) of this appendix shall apply to Type T
an emergency.
powered platforms. Requirements for the
(ii) Two-way communication shall be es-
circuit potential limitation shall be in ac-
tablished between personnel on the roof and
cordance with specifications contained in
personnel on the stalled working platform
Part 2, section 26, of ANSI A120.11970.
before any emergency operation of the work-
(7) Emergency communications. All the re-
ing platform is undertaken by personnel on
quirements of paragraph (c)(23) of this appen-
the roof.
dix shall apply to Type T powered platforms.
(iii) The equipment shall permit two-way
voice communication between the working [54 FR 31456, July 28, 1989, as amended at 61
platform and FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996]
188
1910.67 Vehicle-mounted elevating above. Aerial equipment may be made

and rotating work platforms. of metal, wood, fiberglass reinforced
(a) Definitions applicable to this sec- plastic (FRP), or other material; may
tion(1) Aerial device. Any vehicle be powered or manually operated; and
mounted device, telescoping or articu- are deemed to be aerial lifts whether or
lating, or both, which is used to posi- not they are capable of rotating about
tion personnel. a substantially vertical axis.
(2) Aerial ladder. An aerial device con- (2) Aerial lifts may be field modi-
sisting of a single- or multiple-section fied for uses other than those in-
extensible ladder. tended by the manufacturer, provided
(3) Articulating boom platform. An aer- the modification has been certified in
ial device with two or more hinged writing by the manufacturer or by any
boom sections. other equivalent entity, such as a na-
(4) Extensible boom platform. An aerial tionally recognized testing laboratory,
device (except ladders) with a tele- to be in conformity with all applicable
scopic or extensible boom. Telescopic provisions of ANSI A92.21969 and this
derricks with personnel platform at- section, and to be at least as safe as
tachments shall be considered to be ex- the equipment was before modification.
tensible boom platforms when used (3) The requirements of this section
with a personnel platform. do not apply to firefighting equipment
(5) Insulated aerial device. An aerial or to the vehicles upon which aerial de-
device designed for work on energized vices are mounted, except with respect
lines and apparatus. to the requirement that a vehicle be a
(6) Mobile unit. A combination of an stable support for the aerial device.
aerial device, its vehicle, and related (4) For operations near overhead elec-
equipment. tric lines, see 1910.333(c)(3).
(7) Platform. Any personnel-carrying (c) Specific requirements(1) Ladder
device (basket or bucket) which is a trucks and tower trucks. Before the
component of an aerial device. truck is moved for highway travel, aer-
(8) Vehicle. Any carrier that is not ial ladders shall be secured in the lower
manually propelled. traveling position by the locking de-
(9) Vertical tower. An aerial device device above the truck cab, and the
signed to elevate a platform in a sub- manually operated device at the base
stantially vertical axis. of the ladder, or by other equally effec-
(b) General requirements. (1) Unless tive means (e.g., cradles which prevent
otherwise provided in this section, aer- rotation of the ladder in combination
ial devices (aerial lifts) acquired on or with positive acting linear actuators).
after July 1, 1975, shall be designed and (2) Extensible and articulating boom
constructed in conformance with the platforms. (i) Lift controls shall be test-
applicable requirements of the Amer- ed each day prior to use to determine
ican National Standard for Vehicle that such controls are in safe working
Mounted Elevating and Rotating Work condition.
Platforms, ANSI A92.21969, includ- (ii) Only trained persons shall oper-
ing appendix, which is incorporated by ate an aerial lift.
reference as specified in 1910.6. Aerial (iii) Belting off to an adjacent pole,
lifts acquired for use before July 1, 1975 structure, or equipment while working
which do not meet the requirements of from an aerial lift shall not be per-
ANSI A92.21969, may not be used after mitted.
July 1, 1976, unless they shall have been (iv) Employees shall always stand
modified so as to conform with the ap- firmly on the floor of the basket, and
plicable design and construction re- shall not sit or climb on the edge of the
quirements of ANSI A92.21969. Aerial basket or use planks, ladders, or other
devices include the following types of devices for a work position.
vehicle-mounted aerial devices used to (v) A body belt shall be worn and a
elevate personnel to jobsites above lanyard attached to the boom or bas-
ground: (i) Extensible boom platforms, ket when working from an aerial lift.
(ii) aerial ladders, (iii) articulating (vi) Boom and basket load limits
boom platforms, (iv) vertical towers, specified by the manufacturer shall not
and (v) a combination of any of the be exceeded.
189
(vii) The brakes shall be set and out- (5) Welding standards. All welding
riggers, when used, shall be positioned shall conform to the following Auto-
on pads or a solid surface. Wheel motive Welding Society (AWS) Stand-
chocks shall be installed before using ards, which are incorporated by ref-
an aerial lift on an incline. erence as specified in 1910.6, as appli-
(viii) An aerial lift truck may not be cable:
moved when the boom is elevated in a (i) Standard Qualification Procedure,
working position with men in the bas- AWS B3.041.
ket, except for equipment which is spe- (ii) Recommended Practices for
cifically designed for this type of oper- Automotive Welding Design, AWS
ation in accordance with the provisions D8.461.
of paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2) of this (iii) Standard Qualification of Weld-
section. ing Procedures and Welders for Piping
(ix) Articulating boom and extensible and Tubing, AWS D10.969.
boom platforms, primarily designed as (iv) Specifications for Welding High-
personnel carriers, shall have both way and Railway Bridges, AWS D2.069.
platform (upper) and lower controls.
Upper controls shall be in or beside the [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40
platform within easy reach of the oper- FR 13439, Mar. 26, 1975; 55 FR 32014, Aug. 6,
1990; 61 FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996]
ator. Lower controls shall provide for
overriding the upper controls. Controls 1910.68 Manlifts.
shall be plainly marked as to their
function. Lower level controls shall not (a) Definitions applicable to this sec-
be operated unless permission has been tion(1) Handhold (Handgrip). A hand-
obtained from the employee in the lift, hold is a device attached to the belt
except in case of emergency. which can be grasped by the passenger
(x) Climbers shall not be worn while to provide a means of maintaining bal-
performing work from an aerial lift. ance.
(xi) The insulated portion of an aerial (2) Open type. One which has a hand-
lift shall not be altered in any manner grip surface fully exposed and capable
that might reduce its insulating value. of being encircled by the passengers
(xii) Before moving an aerial lift for fingers.
travel, the boom(s) shall be inspected (3) Closed type. A cup-shaped device,
to see that it is properly cradled and open at the top in the direction of trav-
outriggers are in stowed position, ex- el of the step for which it is to be used,
cept as provided in paragraph and closed at the bottom, into which
(c)(2)(viii) of this section. the passenger may place his fingers.
(3) Electrical tests. Electrical tests (4) Limit switch. A device, the purpose
shall be made in conformance with the of which is to cut off the power to the
requirements of ANSI A92.21969, Sec- motor and apply the brake to stop the
tion 5. However, equivalent DC voltage carrier in the event that a loaded step
tests may be used in lieu of the AC passes the terminal landing.
voltage test specified in A92.21969. DC (5) Manlift. A device consisting of a
voltage tests which are approved by power-driven endless belt moving in
the equipment manufacturer or equiva- one direction only, and provided with
lent entity shall be considered an steps or platforms and handholds at-
equivalent test for the purpose of this tached to it for the transportation of
paragraph (c)(3). personnel from floor to floor.
(4) Bursting safety factor. All critical (6) Rated speed. Rated speed is the
hydraulic and pneumatic components speed for which the device is designed
shall comply with the provisions of the and installed.
American National Standards Institute (7) Split-rail switch. An electric limit
standard, ANSI A92.21969, Section 4.9 switch operated mechanically by the
Bursting Safety Factor. Critical com- rollers on the manlift steps. It consists
ponents are those in which a failure of an additional hinged or split rail,
would result in a free fall or free rota- mounted on the regular guide rail, over
tion of the boom. All noncritical com- which the step rollers pass. It is
ponents shall have a bursting safety springloaded in the split position. If
factor of at least two to one. the step supports no load, the rollers
190
will bump over the switch; if a load- down runs shall be not less than 28
ed step should pass over the section, inches nor more than 36 inches in
the split rail will be forced straight, width for a 12-inch belt; not less than
tripping the switch and opening the 34 inches nor more than 38 inches for a
electrical circuit. 14-inch belt; and not less than 36 inches
(8) Step (platform). A step is a pas- nor more than 40 inches for a 16-inch
senger carrying unit. belt and shall extend not less than 24
(9) Travel. The travel is the distance inches, nor more than 28 inches from
between the centers of the top and bot- the face of the belt.
tom pulleys. (ii) Uniformity. All floor openings for
(b) General requirements(1) Applica- a given manlift shall be uniform in size
tion. This section applies to the con- and shall be approximately circular,
struction, maintenance, inspection,
and each shall be located vertically
and operation of manlifts in relation to
above the opening below it.
accident hazards. Manlifts covered by
this section consist of platforms or (6) Landing(i) Vertical clearance. The
brackets and accompanying handholds clearanace between the floor or mount-
mounted on, or attached to an endless ing platform and the lower edge for the
belt, operating vertically in one direc- conical guard above it required by sub-
tion only and being supported by, and paragraph (7) of this paragraph shall
driven through pulleys, at the top and not be less than 7 feet 6 inches. Where
bottom. These manlifts are intended this clearance cannot be obtained no
for conveyance of persons only. It is access to the manlift shall be provided
not intended that this section cover and the manlift runway shall be en-
moving stairways, elevators with enclosed where it passes through such
closed platforms (Paternoster ele- floor.
vators), gravity lifts, nor conveyors (ii) Clear landing space. The landing
used only for conveying material. This space adjacent to the floor openings
section applies to manlifts used to shall be free from obstruction and kept
carry only personnel trained and au- clear at all times. This landing space
thorized by the employer in their use. shall be at least 2 feet in width from
(2) Purpose. The purpose of this sec- the edge of the floor opening used for
tion is to provide reasonable safety for mounting and dismounting.
life and limb. (iii) Lighting and landing. Adequate
(3) Design requirements. All new lighting, not less than 5-foot candles,
manlift installations and equipment shall be provided at each floor landing
installed after the effective date of at all times when the lift is in oper-
these regulations shall meet the design ation.
requirements of the American Na- (iv) Landing surface. The landing sur-
tional Safety Standard for Manlifts faces at the entrances and exits to the
ANSI A90.11969, which is incor- manlift shall be constructed and main-
porated by reference as specified in tained as to provide safe footing at all
1910.6, and the requirements of this
times.
section.
(v) Emergency landings. Where there is
(4) Reference to other codes and sub-
parts. The following codes, and sub- a travel of 50 feet or more between
parts of this part, are applicable to this floor landings, one or more emergency
section: Safety Code for Mechanical landings shall be provided so that there
Power Transmission Apparatus, ANSI will be a landing (either floor or emer-
B15.11953 (R 1958), and subpart O; sub- gency) for every 25 feet or less of
part S; Safety Code for Fixed Ladders, manlift travel.
ANSI A14.31956, and Safety Require- (a) Emergency landings shall be ac-
ments for Floor and Wall Openings, cessible from both the up and
Railings and Toeboards, ANSI A12.1 down rungs of the manlift and shall
1967, and subpart D. The preceding give access to the ladder required in
ANSI standards are incorporated by subparagraph (12) of this paragraph.
reference as specified in 1910.6. (b) Emergency landings shall be com-
(5) Floor openings(i) Allowable size. pletely enclosed with a standard rail-
Floor openings for both the up and ing and toeboard.
191
(c) Platforms constructed to give ac- (iv) Maze. Maze or staggered openings
cess to bucket elevators or other equip- shall offer no direct passage between
ment for the purpose of inspection, lu- enclosure and outer floor space.
brication, and repair may also serve as (v) Except where building layout pre-
emergency landings under this rule. All vents, entrances at all landings shall
such platforms will then be considered be in the same relative position.
part of the emergency landing and (9) Guards for openings(i) Construc-
shall be provided with standard rail- tion. The floor opening at each landing
ings and toeboards. shall be guarded on sides not used for
(7) Guards on underside of floor open- entrance or exit by a wall, a railing
ings(i) Fixed type. On the ascending and toeboard or by panels of wire mesh
side of the manlift floor openings shall of suitable strength.
be provided with a bevel guard or cone (ii) Height and location. Such rails or
meeting the following requirements: guards shall be at least 42 inches in
(a) The cone shall make an angle of height on the up-running side and 66
not less than 45 with the horizontal. inches on the down-running side.
An angle of 60 or greater shall be used (10) Bottom arrangement(i) Bottom
where ceiling heights permit. landing. At the bottom landing the
(b) The lower edge of this guard shall clear area shall be not smaller than the
extend at least 42 inches outward from area enclosed by the guardrails on the
any handhold on the belt. It shall not floors above, and any wall in front of
extend beyond the upper surface of the the down-running side of the belt shall
floor above. be not less than 48 inches from the face
(c) The cone shall be made of not less of the belt. This space shall not be en-
than No. 18 U.S. gauge sheet steel or croached upon by stairs or ladders.
material of equivalent strength or (ii) Location of lower pulley. The lower
stiffness. The lower edge shall be rolled (boot) pulley shall be installed so that
to a minimum diameter of one-half it is supported by the lowest landing
inch and the interior shall be smooth served. The sides of the pulley support
with no rivets, bolts or screws pro- shall be guarded to prevent contact
truding. with the pulley or the steps.
(ii) Floating type. In lieu of the fixed (iii) Mounting platform. A mounting
guards specified in subdivision (i) of platform shall be provided in front or
this subparagraph a floating type safe- to one side of the uprun at the lowest
ty cone may be used, such floating landing, unless the floor level is such
cones to be mounted on hinges at least that the following requirement can be
6 inches below the underside of the met: The floor or platform shall be at
floor and so constructed as to actuate or above the point at which the upper
a limit switch should a force of 2 surface of the ascending step completes
pounds be applied on the edge of the its turn and assumes a horizontal posi-
cone closest to the hinge. The depth of tion.
this floating cone need not exceed 12 (iv) Guardrails. To guard against per-
inches. sons walking under a descending step,
(8) Protection of entrances and exits the area on the downside of the manlift
(i) Guard rail requirement. The en- shall be guarded in accordance with
trances and exits at all floor landings subparagraph (8) of this paragraph. To
affording access to the manlift shall be guard against a person getting between
guarded by a maze (staggered railing) the mounting platform and an ascend-
or a handrail equipped with self-closing ing step, the area between the belt and
gates. the platform shall be protected by a
(ii) Construction. The rails shall be guardrail.
standard guardrails with toeboards (11) Top arrangements(i) Clearance
meeting the provisions of the Safety from floor. A top clearance shall be pro-
Requirements for Floor and Wall Open- vided of at least 11 feet above the top
ings, Railings and Toeboards, ANSI terminal landing. This clearance shall
A12.11967 and 1910.23. be maintained from a plane through
(iii) Gates. Gates, if used, shall open each face of the belt to a vertical cylin-
outward and shall be self-closing. Cor- drical plane having a diameter 2 feet
ners of gates shall be rounded. greater than the diameter of the floor
192
opening, extending upward from the ing, by requiring power or force from
top floor to the ceiling on the up-run- an external source to cause disengage-
ning side of the belt. No encroachment ment. The brake shall be electrically
of structural or machine supporting released, and shall be applied to the
members within this space will be per- motor shaft for direct-connected units
mitted. or to the input shaft for belt-driven
(ii) Pulley clearance. (a) There shall be units. The brake shall be capable of
a clearance of at least 5 feet between stopping and holding the manlift when
the center of the head pulley shaft and the descending side is loaded with 250
any ceiling obstruction. lb on each step.
(b) The center of the head pulley (ii) Belt. (a) The belts shall be of
shaft shall be not less than 6 feet above hard-woven canvas, rubber-coated can-
the top terminal landing. vas, leather, or other material meeting
(iii) Emergency grab rail. An emer- the strength requirements of paragraph
gency grab bar or rail and platform (b)(3) of this section and having a coef-
shall be provided at the head pulley ficient of friction such that when used
when the distance to the head pulley is in conjunction with an adequate ten-
over 6 feet above the top landing, oth- sion device it will meet the brake test
erwise only a grab bar or rail is to be specified in subdivision (i) of this sub-
provided to permit the rider to swing paragraph.
free should the emergency stops be- (b) The width of the belt shall be not
come inoperative. less than 12 inches for a travel not ex-
(12) Emergency exit ladder. A fixed ceeding 100 feet, not less than 14 inches
metal ladder accessible from both the for a travel greater than 100 feet but
up and down run of the manlift not exceeding 150 feet and 16 inches for
shall be provided for the entire travel a travel exceeding 150 feet.
of the manlift. Such ladder shall be in (c) A belt that has become torn while
accordance with the existing ANSI in use on a manlift shall not be spliced
A14.31956 Safety Code for Fixed Lad- and put back in service.
ders and 1910.27. (2) Speed(i) Maximum speed. No
(13) Superstructure bracing. Manlift manlift designed for a speed in excess
rails shall be secured in such a manner of 80 feet per minute shall be installed.
as to avoid spreading, vibration, and (ii) [Reserved]
misalinement. (3) Platforms or steps(i) Minimum
(14) Illumination(i) General. Both depth. Steps or platforms shall be not
runs of the manlift shall be illumi- less than 12 inches nor more than 14
nated at all times when the lift is in inches deep, measured from the belt to
operation. An intensity of not less than the edge of the step or platform.
1-foot candle shall be maintained at all (ii) Width. The width of the step or
points. (However, see subparagraph platform shall be not less than the
(6)(iii) of this paragraph for illumina- width of the belt to which it is at-
tion requirements at landings.) tached.
(ii) Control of illumination. Lighting of (iii) Distance between steps. The dis-
manlift runways shall be by means of tance between steps shall be equally
circuits permanently tied in to the spaced and not less than 16 feet meas-
building circuits (no switches), or shall ured from the upper surface of one step
be controlled by switches at each land- to the upper surface of the next step
ing. Where separate switches are pro- above it.
vided at each landing, any switch shall (iv) Angle of step. The surface of the
turn on all lights necessary to illu- step shall make approximately a right
minate the entire runway. angle with the up and down run of
(15) Weather protection. The entire the belt, and shall travel in the approx-
manlift and its driving mechanism imate horizontal position with the
shall be protected from the weather at up and down run of the belt.
all times. (v) Surfaces. The upper or working
(c) Mechanical requirements(1) Ma- surfaces of the step shall be of a mate-
chines, general(i) Brakes. Brakes pro- rial having inherent nonslip character-
vided for stopping and holding a istics (coefficient of friction not less
manlift shall be inherently self-engag- than 0.5) or shall be covered completely
193
by a nonslip tread securely fastened to step roller and located not more than 6
it. inches above the top terminal landing.
(vi) Strength of step supports. When The second automatic stop device may
subjected to a load of 400 pounds ap- consist of any of the following:
plied at the approximate center of the (a) Any split-rail switch placed 6
step, step frames, or supports and their inches above and on the side opposite
guides shall be of adequate strength to: the first limit switch.
(a) Prevent the disengagement of any (b) An electronic device.
step roller. (c) A switch actuated by a lever, rod,
(b) Prevent any appreciable or plate, the latter to be placed on the
misalinement. up side of the head pulley so as to
(c) Prevent any visible deformation just clear a passing step.
of the steps or its support.
(ii) Manual reset location. After the
(vii) Prohibition of steps without
manlift has been stopped by a stop de-
handholds. No steps shall be provided
unless there is a corresponding hand- vice it shall be necessary to reset the
hold above or below it meeting the re- automatic stop manually. The device
quirements of paragraph (c)(4) of this shall be so located that a person reset-
section. If a step is removed for repairs ting it shall have a clear view of both
or permanently, the handholds imme- the up and down runs of the
diately above and below it shall be re- manlift. It shall not be possible to
moved before the lift is again placed in reset the device from any step or plat-
service. form.
(4) Handholds(i) Location. (iii) Cut-off point. The initial limit
Handholds attached to the belt shall be stop device shall function so that the
provided and installed so that they are manlift will be stopped before the load-
not less than 4 feet nor more than 4 ed step has reached a point 24 inches
feet 8 inches above the step tread. above the top terminal landing.
These shall be so located as to be avail- (iv) Electrical requirements. (a) Where
able on the both up and down run such switches open the main motor cir-
of the belt. cuit directly they shall be of the
(ii) Size. The grab surface of the multipole type.
handhold shall be not less than 412 (b) Where electronic devices are used
inches in width, not less than 3 inches they shall be so designed and installed
in depth, and shall provide 2 inches of that failure will result in shutting off
clearance from the belt. Fastenings for the power to the driving motor.
handholds shall be located not less (c) Where flammable vapors or com-
than 1 inch from the edge of the belt. bustible dusts may be present, elec-
(iii) Strength. The handhold shall be trical installations shall be in accord-
capable of withstanding, without dam- ance with the requirements of subpart
age, a load of 300 pounds applied par- S of this part for such locations.
allel to the run of the belt.
(d) Unless of the oil-immersed type
(iv) Prohibition of handhold without
controller contacts carrying the main
steps. No handhold shall be provided
motor current shall be copper to car-
without a corresponding step. If a
bon or equal, except where the circuit
handhold is removed permanently or
temporarily, the corresponding step is broken at two or more points simul-
and handhold for the opposite direction taneously.
of travel shall also be removed before (6) Emergency stop(i) General. An
the lift is again placed in service. emergency stop means shall be pro-
(v) Type. All handholds shall be of the vided.
closed type. (ii) Location. This stop means shall be
(5) Up limit stops(i) Requirements. within easy reach of the ascending and
Two separate automatic stop devices descending runs of the belt.
shall be provided to cut off the power (iii) Operation. This stop means shall
and apply the brake when a loaded step be so connected with the control lever
passes the upper terminal landing. One or operating mechanism that it will
of these shall consist of a split-rail cut off the power and apply the brake
switch mechanically operated by the when pulled in the direction of travel.
194
(iv) Rope. If rope is used, it shall be Rollers and Slides.

not less than three-eights inch in di- Belt and Belt Tension.
ameter. Wire rope, unless marlin-cov- Handholds and Fastenings.
Floor Landings.
ered, shall not be used. Guardrails.
(7) Instruction and warning signs(i) Lubrication.
Instruction signs at landings or belts. Limit Switches.
Signs of conspicuous and easily read Warning Signs and Lights.
style giving instructions for the use of Illumination.
the manlift shall be posted at each Drive Pulley.
Bottom (boot) Pulley and Clearance.
landing or stenciled on the belt. Pulley Supports.
(a) [Reserved] Motor.
(b) The instructions shall read ap- Driving Mechanism.
proximately as follows: Brake.
Electrical Switches.
Face the Belt. Vibration and Misalignment.
Use the Handholds. Skip on up or down run when mounting
To StopPull Rope. step (indicating worn gears).
(ii) Top floor warning sign and light. (3) Inspection record. A certification
(a) At the top floor an illuminated sign record shall be kept of each inspection
shall be displayed bearing the fol- which includes the date of the inspec-
lowing wording: tion, the signature of the person who
TOP FLOORGET OFF performed the inspection and the serial
number, or other identifier, of the
Signs shall be in block letters not less manlift which was inspected. This
than 2 inches in height. This sign shall record of inspection shall be made
be located within easy view of an as- available to the Assistant Secretary of
cending passenger and not more than 2 Labor or a duly authorized representa-
feet above the top terminal landing. tive.
(b) In addition to the sign required by
paragraph (c)(7)(ii)(a) of this section, a FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 51 FR 34560, Sept. 29,
red warning light of not less than 40- 1986; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 55 FR 32014,
watt rating shall be provided imme- Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9235, Mar. 7, 1996]
diately below the upper landing ter-
minal and so located as to shine in the Subpart GOccupational Health
passengers face. and Environmental Control
(iii) Visitor warning. A conspicuous
sign having the following legendAU-
THORIZED PERSONNEL ONLYshall AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
be displayed at each landing. U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labors Or-
(d) Operating rules(1) Proper use of ders Nos. 1271 (36 FR 8754), 876 (41 FR 25059),
manlifts. No freight, packaged goods, 983 (48 FR 35736), 190 (55 FR 9033), or 696 (62
pipe, lumber, or construction materials FR 111), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
of any kind shall be handled on any
manlift. 1910.94 Ventilation.
(2) [Reserved] (a) Abrasive blasting(1) Definitions
(e) Periodic inspection(1) Frequency. applicable to this paragraph(i) Abra-
All manlifts shall be inspected by a sive. A solid substance used in an abra-
competent designated person at inter- sive blasting operation.
vals of not more than 30 days. Limit (ii) Abrasive-blasting respirator. A res-
switches shall be checked weekly. pirator constructed so that it covers
Manlifts found to be unsafe shall not be the wearers head, neck, and shoulders
operated until properly repaired. to protect the wearer from rebounding
(2) Items covered. This periodic inspec- abrasive.
tion shall cover but is not limited to (iii) Blast cleaning barrel. A complete
the following items: enclosure which rotates on an axis, or
Steps. which has an internal moving tread to
Step Fastenings. tumble the parts, in order to expose
Rails. various surfaces of the parts to the ac-
Rail Supports and Fastenings. tion of an automatic blast spray.
195
(iv) Blast cleaning room. A complete (iii) Organic abrasives which are
enclosure in which blasting operations combustible shall be used only in auto-
are performed and where the operator matic systems. Where flammable or ex-
works inside of the room to operate the plosive dust mixtures may be present,
blasting nozzle and direct the flow of the construction of the equipment, in-
the abrasive material. cluding the exhaust system and all
(v) Blasting cabinet. An enclosure electric wiring, shall conform to the
where the operator stands outside and requirements of American National
operates the blasting nozzle through an Standard Installation of Blower and
opening or openings in the enclosure. Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and
(vi) Clean air. Air of such purity that Vapor Removal or Conveying, Z33.1
it will not cause harm or discomfort to 1961 (NFPA 911961), which is incor-
an individual if it is inhaled for ex- porated by reference as specified in
tended periods of time. 1910.6, and subpart S of this part. The
(vii) Dust collector. A device or com- blast nozzle shall be bonded and
bination of devices for separating dust grounded to prevent the build up of
from the air handled by an exhaust static charges. Where flammable or ex-
ventilation system. plosive dust mixtures may be present,
(viii) Exhaust ventilation system. A the abrasive blasting enclosure, the
system for removing contaminated air ducts, and the dust collector shall be
from a space, comprising two or more constructed with loose panels or explo-
of the following elements (a) enclosure sion venting areas, located on sides
or hood, (b) duct work, (c) dust col- away from any occupied area, to pro-
lecting equipment, (d) exhauster, and vide for pressure relief in case of explo-
(e) discharge stack. sion, following the principles set forth
(ix) Particulate-filter respirator. An air in the National Fire Protection Asso-
purifying respirator, commonly re- ciation Explosion Venting Guide,
ferred to as a dust or a fume respirator, NFPA 681954, which is incorporated by
which removes most of the dust or reference as specified in 1910.6.
fume from the air passing through the (3) Blast-cleaning enclosures. (i) Blast-
device. cleaning enclosures shall be exhaust
(x) Respirable dust. Airborne dust in ventilated in such a way that a contin-
sizes capable of passing through the uous inward flow of air will be main-
upper respiratory system to reach the tained at all openings in the enclosure
lower lung passages.
during the blasting operation.
(xi) Rotary blast cleaning table. An en-
(a) All air inlets and access openings
closure where the pieces to be cleaned
shall be baffled or so arranged that by
are positioned on a rotating table and
are passed automatically through a se- the combination of inward air flow and
ries of blast sprays. baffling the escape of abrasive or dust
(xii) Abrasive blasting. The forcible particules into an adjacent work area
application of an abrasive to a surface will be minimized and visible spurts of
by pneumatic pressure, hydraulic pres- dust will not be observed.
sure, or centrifugal force. (b) The rate of exhaust shall be suffi-
(2) Dust hazards from abrasive blasting. cient to provide prompt clearance of
(i) Abrasives and the surface coatings the dust-laden air within the enclosure
on the materials blasted are shattered after the cessation of blasting.
and pulverized during blasting oper- (c) Before the enclosure is opened,
ations and the dust formed will contain the blast shall be turned off and the ex-
particles of respirable size. The com- haust system shall be run for a suffi-
position and toxicity of the dust from cient period of time to remove the
these sources shall be considered in dusty air within the enclosure.
making an evaluation of the potential (d) Safety glass protected by screen-
health hazards. ing shall be used in observation win-
(ii) The concentration of respirable dows, where hard deep-cutting abra-
dust or fume in the breathing zone of sives are used.
the abrasive-blasting operator or any (e) Slit abrasive-resistant baffles
other worker shall be kept below the shall be installed in multiple sets at all
levels specified in 1910.1000. small access openings where dust
196
might escape, and shall be inspected (a) When working inside of blast-
regularly and replaced when needed. cleaning rooms, or
(1) Doors shall be flanged and tight (b) When using silica sand in manual
when closed. blasting operations where the nozzle
(2) Doors on blast-cleaning rooms and blast are not physically separated
shall be operable from both inside and from the operator in an exhaust venti-
outside, except that where there is a lated enclosure, or
small operator access door, the large (c) Where concentrations of toxic
work access door may be closed or dust dispersed by the abrasive blasting
opened from the outside only. may exceed the limits set in 1910.1000
(ii) [Reserved] and the nozzle and blast are not phys-
(4) Exhaust ventilation systems. (i) The ically separated from the operator in
construction, installation, inspection, an exhaust-ventilated enclosure.
and maintenance of exhaust systems (iii) Properly fitted particulate-filter
shall conform to the principles and re- respirators, commonly referred to as
quirements set forth in American Na- dust-filter respirators, may be used for
tional Standard Fundamentals Gov- short, intermittent, or occasional dust
erning the Design and Operation of exposures such as cleanup, dumping of
Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.21960, and dust collectors, or unloading shipments
ANSI Z33.11961, which is incorporated of sand at a receiving point when it is
by reference as specified in 1910.6. not feasible to control the dust by en-
(a) When dust leaks are noted, re- closure, exhaust ventilation, or other
pairs shall be made as soon as possible. means. The respirators used must be
(b) The static pressure drop at the ex- approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part
haust ducts leading from the equip- 84 for protection against the specific
ment shall be checked when the instal- type of dust encountered.
lation is completed and periodically (a) Dust-filter respirators may be
thereafter to assure continued satisfac- used to protect the operator of outside
tory operation. Whenever an appre- abrasive-blasting operations where
ciable change in the pressure drop indi- nonsilica abrasives are used on mate-
cates a partial blockage, the system rials having low toxicities.
shall be cleaned and returned to nor- (b) Dust-filter respirators shall not be
mal operating condition. used for continuous protection where
(ii) In installations where the abra- silica sand is used as the blasting abra-
sive is recirculated, the exhaust ven- sive, or toxic materials are blasted.
tilation system for the blasting enclo- (iv) For employees who use res-
sure shall not be relied upon for the re- pirators required by this section, the
moval of fines from the spent abrasive employer must implement a res-
instead of an abrasive separator. An piratory protection program in accord-
abrasive separator shall be provided for ance with 29 CFR 1910.134.
the purpose. (v) Operators shall be equipped with
(iii) The air exhausted from blast- heavy canvas or leather gloves and
cleaning equipment shall be discharged aprons or equivalent protection to pro-
through dust collecting equipment. tect them from the impact of abra-
Dust collectors shall be set up so that sives. Safety shoes shall be worn to
the accumulated dust can be emptied protect against foot injury where
and removed without contaminating heavy pieces of work are handled.
other working areas. (a) Safety shoes shall conform to the
(5) Personal protective equipment. (i) requirements of American National
Employers must use only respirators Standard for Mens Safety-Toe Foot-
approved by the National Institute for wear, Z41.11967, which is incorporated
Occupational Safety and Health by reference as specified in 1910.6.
(NIOSH) under 42 CFR part 84 to pro- (b) Equipment for protection of the
tect employees from dusts produced eyes and face shall be supplied to the
during abrasive-blasting operations. operator when the respirator design
(ii) Abrasive-blasting respirators does not provide such protection and to
shall be worn by all abrasive-blasting any other personnel working in the vi-
operators: cinity of abrasive blasting operations.
197
This equipment shall conform to the (v) Disc wheels. All power-driven ro-
requirements of 1910.133. tatable discs faced with abrasive mate-
(6) Air supply and air compressors. Air rials, artificial or natural, and used for
for abrasive-blasting respirators must grinding or polishing on the side of the
be free of harmful quantities of dusts, assembled disc.
mists, or noxious gases, and must meet (vi) Entry loss. The loss in static pres-
the requirements for supplied-air qual- sure caused by air flowing into a duct
ity and use specified in 29 CFR or hood. It is usually expressed in
1910.134(i). inches of water gauge.
(7) Operational procedures and general (vii) Exhaust system. A system con-
safety. Dust shall not be permitted to sisting of branch pipes connected to
accumulate on the floor or on ledges hoods or enclosures, one or more head-
outside of an abrasive-blasting enclo- er pipes, an exhaust fan, means for sep-
sure, and dust spills shall be cleaned up arating solid contaminants from the
promptly. Aisles and walkways shall be air flowing in the system, and a dis-
kept clear of steel shot or similar abra- charge stack to outside.
sive which may create a slipping haz- (viii) Grinding wheels. All power-driv-
ard. en rotatable grinding or abrasive
(8) Scope. This paragraph (a) applies wheels, except disc wheels as defined in
to all operations where an abrasive is this standard, consisting of abrasive
forcibly applied to a surface by pneu- particles held together by artificial or
matic or hydraulic pressure, or by cen- natural bonds and used for peripheral
trifugal force. It does not apply to grinding.
steam blasting, or steam cleaning, or (ix) Header pipe (main pipe). A pipe
hydraulic cleaning methods where into which one or more branch pipes
work is done without the aid of abra- enter and which connects such branch
sives. pipes to the remainder of the exhaust
(b) Grinding, polishing, and buffing op- system.
erations(1) Definitions applicable to this (x) Hoods and enclosures. The partial
paragraph(i) Abrasive cutting-off or complete enclosure around the
wheels. Organic-bonded wheels, the wheel or disc through which air enters
thickness of which is not more than an exhaust system during operation.
one forty-eighth of their diameter for (xi) Horizontal double-spindle disc
those up to, and including, 20 inches in grinder. A grinding machine carrying
diameter, and not more than one-six- two power-driven, rotatable, coaxial,
tieth of their diameter for those larger horizontal spindles upon the inside
than 20 inches in diameter, used for a ends of which are mounted abrasive
multitude of operations variously disc wheels used for grinding two sur-
known as cutting, cutting off, faces simultaneously.
grooving, slotting, coping, and joint- (xii) Horizontal single-spindle disc
ing, and the like. The wheels may be grinder. A grinding machine carrying
solid consisting of organic-bonded an abrasive disc wheel upon one or
abrasive material throughout, steel both ends of a power-driven, rotatable
centered consisting of a steel disc single horizontal spindle.
with a rim of organic-bonded material (xiii) Polishing and buffing wheels. All
moulded around the periphery, or of power-driven rotatable wheels com-
the inserted tooth type consisting of posed all or in part of textile fabrics,
a steel disc with organic-bonded abra- wood, felt, leather, paper, and may be
sive teeth or inserts mechanically se- coated with abrasives on the periphery
cured around the periphery. of the wheel for purposes of polishing,
(ii) Belts. All power-driven, flexible, buffing, and light grinding.
coated bands used for grinding, (xiv) Portable grinder. Any power-driv-
polishing, or buffing purposes. en rotatable grinding, polishing, or
(iii) Branch pipe. The part of an ex- buffing wheel mounted in such manner
haust system piping that is connected that it may be manually manipulated.
directly to the hood or enclosure. (xv) Scratch brush wheels. All power-
(iv) Cradle. A movable fixture, upon driven rotatable wheels made from
which the part to be ground or polished wire or bristles, and used for scratch
is placed. cleaning and brushing purposes.
198
(xvi) Swing-frame grinder. Any power- TABLE G4GRINDING AND ABRASIVE CUTTING-
driven rotatable grinding, polishing, or OFF WHEELS
buffing wheel mounted in such a man-
Minimum
ner that the wheel with its supporting Wheel exhaust
Wheel diameter (inches) width
framework can be manipulated over volume
(inches) (feet3/min.)
stationary objects.
(xvii) Velocity pressure (vp). The ki- To 9 ............................................... 112 220
Over 9 to 16 .................................. 2 390
netic pressure in the direction of flow
Over 16 to 19 ................................ 3 500
necessary to cause a fluid at rest to Over 19 to 24 ................................ 4 610
flow at a given velocity. It is usually Over 24 to 30 ................................ 5 880
expressed in inches of water gauge. Over 30 to 36 ................................ 6 1,200
(xviii) Vertical spindle disc grinder. A
grinding machine having a vertical, ro- For any wheel wider than wheel diame-
tatable power-driven spindle carrying a ters shown in Table G4, increase the
horizontal abrasive disc wheel. exhaust volume by the ratio of the new
(2) Application. Wherever dry grind- width to the width shown.
ing, dry polishing or buffing is per- Example: If wheel width=412 inches, then
formed, and employee exposure, with-
4.54610 = 686 (rounded to 690).
out regard to the use of respirators, ex-
ceeds the permissible exposure limits (iii) Scratch-brush wheels and all
prescribed in 1910.1000 or other sec- buffing and polishing wheels mounted
tions of this part, a local exhaust ven- on floor stands, pedestals, benches, or
tilation system shall be provided and special-purpose machines shall have
used to maintain employee exposures not less than the minimum exhaust
within the prescribed limits. volume shown in Table G5.
(3) Hood and branch pipe requirements.
TABLE G5BUFFING AND POLISHING WHEELS
(i) Hoods connected to exhaust systems
shall be used, and such hoods shall be Wheel Minimum
exhaust
designed, located, and placed so that Wheel diameter (inches) width volume
(inches)
the dust or dirt particles shall fall or (feet3/min.)
be projected into the hoods in the di- To 9 ............................................... 2 300
rection of the air flow. No wheels, Over 9 to 16 .................................. 3 500
discs, straps, or belts shall be operated Over 16 to 19 ................................ 4 610
in such manner and in such direction Over 19 to 24 ................................ 5 740
Over 24 to 30 ................................ 6 1,040
as to cause the dust and dirt particles
Over 30 to 36 ................................ 6 1,200
to be thrown into the operators
breathing zone. (iv) Grinding wheels or discs for hori-
(ii) Grinding wheels on floor stands, zontal single-spindle disc grinders shall
pedestals, benches, and special-purpose be hooded to collect the dust or dirt
grinding machines and abrasive cut- generated by the grinding operation
ting-off wheels shall have not less than and the hoods shall be connected to
the minimum exhaust volumes shown branch pipes having exhaust volumes
in Table G4 with a recommended min- as shown in Table G6.
imum duct velocity of 4,500 feet per
minute in the branch and 3,500 feet per TABLE G6HORIZONTAL SINGLE-SPINDLE DISC
minute in the main. The entry losses GRINDER
from all hoods except the vertical-spin- Exhaust
dle disc grinder hood, shall equal 0.65 Disc diameter (inches) volume
(ft.3/min.)
velocity pressure for a straight takeoff
and 0.45 velocity pressure for a tapered Up to 12 ............................................................... 220
takeoff. The entry loss for the vertical- Over 12 to 19 ...................................................... 390
Over 19 to 30 ...................................................... 610
spindle disc grinder hood is shown in
Over 30 to 36 ...................................................... 880
figure G1 (following 1910.94(b)).
199
(v) Grinding wheels or discs for hori- sures to house the complete operation,
zontal double-spindle disc grinders a minimum average air velocity of 150
shall have a hood enclosing the grind- feet per minute shall be maintained
ing chamber and the hood shall be con- over the entire opening of the enclo-
nected to one or more branch pipes sure. Swing-frame grinders shall also
having exhaust volumes as shown in be exhausted in the same manner as
Table G7. provided for cradles. (See fig. G3)
(ix) Where the work is outside the
TABLE G7HORIZONTAL DOUBLE-SPINDLE
hood, air volumes must be increased as
DISC GRINDER
shown in American Standard Fun-
Exhaust damentals Governing the Design and
Disc diameter (inches) volume Operation of Local Exhaust Systems,
(ft.3/min.)
Z9.21960 (section 4, exhaust hoods).
Up to 19 ............................................................... 610 (4) Exhaust systems. (i) Exhaust sys-
Over 19 to 25 ...................................................... 880
Over 25 to 30 ...................................................... 1,200 tems for grinding, polishing, and buff-
Over 30 to 53 ...................................................... 1,770 ing operations should be designed in
Over 53 to 72 ...................................................... 6,280 accordance with American Standard
Fundamentals Governing the Design
(vi) Grinding wheels or discs for and Operation of Local Exhaust Sys-
vertical single-spindle disc grinders tems, Z9.21960.
shall be encircled with hoods to remove
(ii) Exhaust systems for grinding,
the dust generated in the operation.
The hoods shall be connected to one or polishing, and buffing operations shall
more branch pipes having exhaust vol- be tested in the manner described in
umes as shown in Table G8. American Standard Fundamentals
Governing the Design and Operation of
TABLE G8VERTICAL SPINDLE DISC GRINDER Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.21960.
(iii) All exhaust systems shall be pro-
One-half or more Disc not cov-
of disc covered ered vided with suitable dust collectors.
(5) Hood and enclosure design. (i)(a) It
Disc diameter (inches) Ex- Ex-
Num- haust Num- haust is the dual function of grinding and ab-
ber 1 foot3/ ber 1 foot3/ rasive cutting-off wheel hoods to pro-
min.) min.
tect the operator from the hazards of
Up to 20 ..................... 1 500 2 780 bursting wheels as well as to provide a
Over 20 to 30 ............ 2 780 2 1,480
Over 30 to 53 ............ 2 1,770 4 3,530
means for the removal of dust and dirt
Over 53 to 72 ............ 2 3,140 5 6,010 generated. All hoods shall be not less
1 Number of exhaust outlets around periphery of hood, or in structural strength than specified in
equal distribution provided by other means. the American National Standard Safe-
ty Code for the Use, Care, and Protec-
(vii) Grinding and polishing belts
tion of Abrasive Wheels, B7.11970,
shall be provided with hoods to remove
dust and dirt generated in the oper- which is incorporated by reference as
ations and the hoods shall be connected specified in 1910.6.
to branch pipes having exhaust vol- (b) Due to the variety of work and
umes as shown in Table G9. types of grinding machines employed,
it is necessary to develop hoods adapt-
TABLE G9GRINDING AND POLISHING BELTS able to the particular machine in ques-
tion, and such hoods shall be located as
Exhaust
Belts width (inches) volume close as possible to the operation.
(ft.3/min.) (ii) Exhaust hoods for floor stands,
Up to 3 ................................................................. 220 pedestals, and bench grinders shall be
Over 3 to 5 .......................................................... 300 designed in accordance with figure G2.
Over 5 to 7 .......................................................... 390 The adjustable tongue shown in the fig-
Over 7 to 9 .......................................................... 500
Over 9 to 11 ........................................................ 610
ure shall be kept in working order and
Over 11 to 13 ...................................................... 740 shall be adjusted within one-fourth
inch of the wheel periphery at all
(viii) Cradles and swing-frame grind- times.
ers. Where cradles are used for han- (iii) Swing-frame grinders shall be
dling the parts to be ground, polished, provided with exhaust booths as indi-
or buffed, requiring large partial enclo- cated in figure G3.
200
(iv) Portable grinding operations, space around the periphery of the

whenever the nature of the work per- wheel of at least 1 inch in order to per-
mits, shall be conducted within a par- mit the suction to act around the
tial enclosure. The opening in the en- wheel periphery. The opening on the
closure shall be no larger than is actu- side of the disc shall be no larger than
ally required in the operation and an is required for the grinding operation,
average face air velocity of not less but must never be less than twice the
than 200 feet per minute shall be main- area of the branch outlet.
tained. (viii) Horizontal double-spindle disc
(v) Hoods for polishing and buffing grinders shall have a hood encircling
and scratch-brush wheels shall be con- the wheels and grinding chamber simi-
structed to conform as closely to figure lar to that illustrated in figure G7.
G4 as the nature of the work will per-
The openings for passing the work into
mit.
the grinding chamber should be kept as
(vi) Cradle grinding and polishing op-
erations shall be performed within a small as possible, but must never be
partial enclosure similar to figure G5. less than twice the area of the branch
The operator shall be positioned out- outlets.
side the working face of the opening of (ix) Vertical-spindle disc grinders
the enclosure. The face opening of the shall be encircled with a hood so con-
enclosure should not be any greater in structed that the heavy dust is drawn
area than that actually required for off a surface of the disc and the lighter
the performance of the operation and dust exhausted through a continuous
the average air velocity into the work- slot at the top of the hood as shown in
ing face of the enclosure shall not be figure G1.
less than 150 feet per minute. (x) Grinding and polishing belt hoods
(vii) Hoods for horizontal single-spin- shall be constructed as close to the op-
dle disc grinders shall be constructed eration as possible. The hood should
to conform as closely as possible to the extend almost to the belt, and 1-inch
hood shown in figure G6. It is essen- wide openings should be provided on ei-
tial that there be a space between the ther side. Figure G8 shows a typical
back of the wheel and the hood, and a hood for a belt operation.
201
Dia D. inches Exhaust E Volume

Exhausted Note
No at 4,500 ft/
Min. Max. Dia.
Pipes min ft3/min
........................................................ 20 1 414 500 When one-half or more of the disc can be hood-
ed, use exhaust ducts as shown at the left.
Over 20 ......................................... 30 2 4 780
Over 30 ......................................... 72 2 6 1,770
Over 53 ......................................... 72 2 8 3,140
........................................................ 20 2 4 780 When no hood can be used over disc, use ex-
haust ducts as shown at left.
Over 20 ......................................... 20 2 4 780
Over 30 ......................................... 30 2 512 1,480
Over 53 ......................................... 53 4 6 3,530
72 5 7 6,010
Entry loss=1.0 slot velocity pressure + 0.5 branch velocity pressure.
Minimum slot velocity=2,000 ft/min12-inch slot width.
202
EC27OC91.015</GPH>
Wheel dimension, inches Volume of

Exhaust air at
Diameter outlet, 4,500 ft/
Width, Max inches E min
Min=d Max=D
9 112 3 220
Over 9 ........................................................................................................... 16 2 4 390
Over 16 ......................................................................................................... 19 3 412 500
Over 19 ......................................................................................................... 24 4 5 610
Over 24 ......................................................................................................... 30 5 6 880
Over 30 ......................................................................................................... 36 6 7 1,200
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff.
203
EC27OC91.016</GPH>
204
EC27OC91.017</GPH>
Standard Buffing and Polishing Hood
Wheel dimension, inches Volume of

Exhaust air at
Diameter outlet, 4,500 ft/
Width, Max inches E min
Min=d Max=D
9 2 312 300
Over 9 ........................................................................................................... 16 3 4 500
Over 16 ......................................................................................................... 19 4 5 610
Over 19 ......................................................................................................... 24 5 5 2
1 740
Over 24 ......................................................................................................... 30 6 6 2
1 1.040
Over 30 ......................................................................................................... 36 6 7 1.200
Entry loss = 0.15 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff.
205
EC27OC91.018</GPH>
206
EC27OC91.019</GPH>
Dia D, inches Volume ex-

Exhaust E, hausted at
dia. inches 4,500 ft/min
Min. Max. ft3/min
12 3 220
Over 12 .............................................................................................................................. 19 4 390
Over 19 .............................................................................................................................. 30 5 610
Over 30 .............................................................................................................................. 36 6 880
NOTE: If grinding wheels are used for disc grinding purposes, hoods must conform to structural strength and materials as de-
scribed in 9.1.
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff.
207
EC27OC91.020</GPH>
Disc dia. inches Exhaust E Volume

exhaust at
4,500 ft/ Note
Min. Max. No Pipes Dia. min. ft3/
min
19 1 5 610
Over 19 .................................. 25 1 6 880 When width W permits, exhaust ducts
should be as near heaviest grinding as
possible.
Over 25 .................................. 30 1 7 1,200
Over 30 .................................. 53 2 6 1,770
Over 53 .................................. 72 4 8 6,280
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff.
208
EC27OC91.021</GPH>
Exhaust (iii) Spray room. A spray room is a

Belt width W. Inches volume. room in which spray-finishing oper-
ft.1/min
ations not conducted in a spray booth
Up to 3 ................................................................. 220 are performed separately from other
3 to 5 ................................................................... 300
5 to 7 ................................................................... 390 areas.
7 to 9 ................................................................... 500 (iv) Minimum maintained velocity. Min-
9 to 11 ................................................................. 610 imum maintained velocity is the veloc-
11 to 13 ............................................................... 740
ity of air movement which must be
Minimum duct velocity = 4,500 ft/min branch, 3,500 ft/min maintained in order to meet minimum
main.
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65 specified requirements for health and
velocity pressure for straight takeoff. safety.
(6) Scope. This paragraph (b), pre- (2) Location and application. Spray
scribes the use of exhaust hood enclo- booths or spray rooms are to be used to
sures and systems in removing dust, enclose or confine all operations.
dirt, fumes, and gases generated Spray-finishing operations shall be lo-
through the grinding, polishing, or cated as provided in sections 201
buffing of ferrous and nonferrous met- through 206 of the Standard for Spray
als. Finishing Using Flammable and Com-
(c) Spray finishing operations(1) Defi- bustible Materials, NFPA No. 331969.
nitions applicable to this paragraph(i) (3) Design and construction of spray
Spray-finishing operations. Spray-fin- booths. (i) Spray booths shall be de-
ishing operations are employment of signed and constructed in accordance
methods wherein organic or inorganic with 1910.107(b) (1) through (4) and (6)
materials are utilized in dispersed form through (10) (see sections 301304 and
for deposit on surfaces to be coated, 306310 of the Standard for Spray Fin-
treated, or cleaned. Such methods of ishing Using Flammable and Combus-
deposit may involve either automatic, tible Materials, NFPA No. 331969), for
manual, or electrostatic deposition but general construction specifications.
do not include metal spraying or met- For a more detailed discussion of fun-
allizing, dipping, flow coating, roller damentals relating to this subject, see
coating, tumbling, centrifuging, or ANSI Z9.21960
spray washing and degreasing as con- (a) Lights, motors, electrical equip-
ducted in self-contained washing and ment, and other sources of ignition
degreasing machines or systems. shall conform to the requirements of
(ii) Spray booth. Spray booths are de- 1910.107 (b)(10) and (c). (See section 310
fined and described in 1910.107(a). (See and chapter 4 of the Standard for Spray
sections 103, 104, and 105 of the Stand- Finishing Using Flammable and Com-
ard for Spray Finishing Using Flam- bustible Materials NFPA No. 331969.)
mable and Combustible Materials, (b) In no case shall combustible ma-
NFPA No. 331969, which is incor- terial be used in the construction of a
porated by reference as specified in spray booth and supply or exhaust duct
1910.6). connected to it.
209
EC27OC91.022</GPH>
(ii) Unobstructed walkways shall not (a) Tanks shall be provided with
be less than 612 feet high and shall be weirs, skimmer plates, or screens to
maintained clear of obstruction from prevent sludge and floating paint from
any work location in the booth to a entering the pump suction box. Means
booth exit or open booth front. In for automatically maintaining the
booths where the open front is the only proper water level shall also be pro-
exit, such exits shall be not less than 3 vided. Fresh water inlets shall not be
feet wide. In booths having multiple submerged. They shall terminate at
exits, such exits shall not be less than least one pipe diameter above the safe-
2 feet wide, provided that the max- ty overflow level of the tank.
imum distance from the work location (b) Tanks shall be so constructed as
to the exit is 25 feet or less. Where to discourage accumulation of haz-
booth exits are provided with doors, ardous deposits.
such doors shall open outward from the (vi) Pump manifolds, risers, and
booth. headers shall be adequately sized to in-
(iii) Baffles, distribution plates, and sure sufficient water flow to provide ef-
dry-type overspray collectors shall ficient operation of the water chamber.
conform to the requirements of (4) Design and construction of spray
1910.107(b) (4) and (5). (See sections 304 rooms. (i) Spray rooms, including
and 305 of the Standard for Spray Fin- floors, shall be constructed of masonry,
ishing Using Flammable and Combus- concrete, or other noncombustible ma-
tible Materials, NFPA No. 331969.) terial.
(a) Overspray filters shall be in- (ii) Spray rooms shall have non-
stalled and maintained in accordance combustible fire doors and shutters.
with the requirements of 1910.107 (iii) Spray rooms shall be adequately
(b)(5), (see section 305 of the Standard ventilated so that the atmosphere in
for Spray Finishing Using Flammable the breathing zone of the operator
shall be maintained in accordance with
and Combustible Materials, NFPA No.
the requirements of paragraph (c)(6)(ii)
331969), and shall only be in a location
of this section.
easily accessible for inspection, clean-
(iv) Spray rooms used for production
ing, or replacement.
spray-finishing operations shall con-
(b) Where effective means, inde- form to the requirements for spray
pendent of the overspray filters, are in- booths.
stalled which will result in design air (5) Ventilation. (i) Ventilation shall be
distribution across the booth cross sec- provided in accordance with provisions
tion, it is permissible to operate the of 1910.107(d) (see chapter 5 of the
booth without the filters in place. Standard for Spray Finishing Using
(iv) (a) For wet or water-wash spray Flammable or Combustible Materials,
booths, the water-chamber enclosure, NFPA No. 331969), and in accordance
within which intimate contact of con- with the following:
taminated air and cleaning water or (a) Where a fan plenum is used to
other cleaning medium is maintained, equalize or control the distribution of
if made of steel, shall be 18 gage or exhaust air movement through the
heavier and adequately protected booth, it shall be of sufficient strength
against corrosion. or rigidity to withstand the differential
(b) Chambers may include scrubber air pressure or other superficially im-
spray nozzles, headers, troughs, or posed loads for which the equipment is
other devices. Chambers shall be pro- designed and also to facilitate clean-
vided with adequate means for creating ing. Construction specifications shall
and maintaining scrubbing action for be at least equivalent to those of para-
removal of particulate matter from the graph (c)(5)(iii) of this section.
exhaust air stream. (b) [Reserved]
(v) Collecting tanks shall be of weld- (ii) Inlet or supply ductwork used to
ed steel construction or other suitable transport makeup air to spray booths
non-combustible material. If pits are or surrounding areas shall be con-
used as collecting tanks, they shall be structed of noncombustible materials.
concrete, masonry, or other material (a) If negative pressure exists within
having similar properties. inlet ductwork, all seams and joints
210
shall be sealed if there is a possibility ning length for ducts up to 12 inches in

of infiltration of harmful quantities of diameter, but the distance between
noxious gases, fumes, or mists from cleanout doors may be greater for larg-
areas through which ductwork passes. er pipes. (See 8.3.21 of American Na-
(b) Inlet ductwork shall be sized in tional Standard Z9.11951, which is in-
accordance with volume flow require- corporated by reference as specified in
ments and provide design air require- 1910.6.) A clean-out door or doors shall
ments at the spray booth. be provided for servicing the fan, and
(c) Inlet ductwork shall be ade- where necessary, a drain shall be pro-
quately supported throughout its vided.
length to sustain at least its own (f) Where ductwork passes through a
weight plus any negative pressure combustible roof or wall, the roof or
which is exerted upon it under normal wall shall be protected at the point of
operating conditions. penetration by open space or fire-resis-
(iii)(a) Exhaust ductwork shall be tive material between the duct and the
adequately supported throughout its roof or wall. When ducts pass through
length to sustain its weight plus any
firewalls, they shall be provided with
normal accumulation in interior dur-
automatic fire dampers on both sides of
ing normal operating conditions and
the wall, except that three-eighth-inch
any negative pressure exerted upon it.
steel plates may be used in lieu of
(b) Exhaust ductwork shall be sized
in accordance with good design prac- automatic fire dampers for ducts not
tice which shall include consideration exceeding 18 inches in diameter.
of fan capacity, length of duct, number (g) Ductwork used for ventilating any
of turns and elbows, variation in size, process covered in this standard shall
volume, and character of materials not be connected to ducts ventilating
being exhausted. See American Na- any other process or any chimney or
tional Standard Z9.21960 for further flue used for conveying any products of
details and explanation concerning ele- combustion.
ments of design. (6) Velocity and air flow requirements.
(c) Longitudinal joints in sheet steel (i) Except where a spray booth has an
ductwork shall be either lock-seamed, adequate air replacement system, the
riveted, or welded. For other than steel velocity of air into all openings of a
construction, equivalent securing of spray booth shall be not less than that
joints shall be provided. specified in Table G10 for the oper-
(d) Circumferential joints in duct- ating conditions specified. An adequate
work shall be substantially fastened air replacement system is one which
together and lapped in the direction of introduces replacement air upstream
airflow. At least every fourth joint or above the object being sprayed and
shall be provided with connecting is so designed that the velocity of air
flanges, bolted together, or of equiva- in the booth cross section is not less
lent fastening security. than that specified in Table G10 when
(e) Inspection or clean-out doors shall measured upstream or above the object
be provided for every 9 to 12 feet of run- being sprayed.
TABLE G10MINIMUM MAINTAINED VELOCITIES INTO SPRAY BOOTHS
Airflow velocities, f.p.m.
Crossdraft,
Operating conditions for objects completely inside booth f.p.m. Design Range
Electrostatic and automatic airless operation contained in booth Negligible .... 50 large booth ...................... 5075
without operator.
100 small booth .................... 75125
Air-operated guns, manual or automatic ............................................ Up to 50 ...... 100 large booth .................... 75125
150 small booth .................... 125175

Air-operated guns, manual or automatic ............................................ Up to 100 .... 150 large booth .................... 125175
200 small booth .................... 150250

NOTES:
(1) Attention is invited to the fact that the effectiveness of the spray booth is dependent upon the relationship of the depth of
the booth to its height and width.
211
(2) Crossdrafts can be eliminated through proper design and such design should be sought. Crossdrafts in excess of
100fpm (feet per minute) should not be permitted.
(3) Excessive air pressures result in loss of both efficiency and material waste in addition to creating a backlash that may
carry overspray and fumes into adjacent work areas.
(4) Booths should be designed with velocities shown in the column headed Design. However, booths operating with veloci-
ties shown in the column headed Range are in compliance with this standard.
(ii) In addition to the requirements TABLE G11LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT OF

in paragraph (c)(6)(i) of this section the SOME COMMONLY USED SOLVENTSContinued
total air volume exhausted through a
Lower ex-
spray booth shall be such as to dilute Cubic feet plosive
per gallon
solvent vapor to at least 25 percent of Solvent of vapor of limit in per-
cent by
the lower explosive limit of the solvent liquid at 70 volume of
F.
being sprayed. An example of the meth- air at 70 F
od of calculating this volume is given Butyl Cellosolve ............................. 24.8 1.1
below. Cellosolve ...................................... 33.6 1.8
Cellosolve Acetate ......................... 23.2 1.7
Example: To determine the lower explosive 1 1.1
Cyclohexanone .............................. 31.2
limits of the most common solvents used in 1,1 Dichloroethylene ...................... 42.4 5.9
spray finishing, see Table G11. Column 1 1,2 Dichloroethylene ...................... 42.4 9.7
gives the number of cubic feet of vapor per Ethyl Acetate ................................. 32.8 2.5
gallon of solvent and column 2 gives the Ethyl Alcohol .................................. 55.2 4.3
lower explosive limit (LEL) in percentage by Ethyl Lactate .................................. 28.0 1 1.5
volume of air. Note that the quantity of sol- Methyl Acetate ............................... 40.0 3.1
vent will be diminished by the quantity of Methyl Alcohol ............................... 80.8 7.3
solids and nonflammables contained in the Methyl Cellosolve .......................... 40.8 2.5
finish. Methyl Ethyl Ketone ...................... 36.0 1.8
To determine the volume of air in cubic Methyl n-Propyl Ketone ................. 30.4 1.5
Naphtha (VM&P) (76 Naphtha) ... 22.4 0.9
feet necessary to dilute the vapor from 1 gal-
Naphtha (100 Flash) Safety Sol-
lon of solvent to 25 percent of the lower ex- ventStoddard Solvent ............. 23.2 1.0
plosive limit, apply the following formula: Propyl Acetate (n) ......................... 27.2 2.8
Dilution volume required per gallon of sol- Propyl Acetate (iso) ....................... 28.0 1.1
vent = 4 (100LEL) (cubic feet of vapor per Propyl Alcohol (n) .......................... 44.8 2.1
Propyl Alcohol (iso) ....................... 44.0 2.0
gallon) LEL
Toluene .......................................... 30.4 1.4
Using toluene as the solvent. Turpentine ..................................... 20.8 0.8
Xylene (o) ...................................... 26.4 1.0
(1) LEL of toluene from Table G11, column
2, is 1.4 percent. 1 At 212 F.
(2) Cubic feet of vapor per gallon from
Table G11, column 1, is 30.4 cubic feet per (iii)(a) When an operator is in a booth
gallon. downstream from the object being
(3) Dilution volume required= sprayed, an air-supplied respirator or
4 (1001.4) 30.4 1.4 = 8,564 cubic feet.
other type of respirator must be used
by employees that has been approved
(4) To convert to cubic feet per minute of by NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84 for the
required ventilation, multiply the dilution material being sprayed.
volume required per gallon of solvent by the
number of gallons of solvent evaporated per (b) Where downdraft booths are pro-
minute. vided with doors, such doors shall be
closed when spray painting.
TABLE G11LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT OF (7) Make-up air. (i) Clean fresh air,
SOME COMMONLY USED SOLVENTS free of contamination from adjacent
industrial exhaust systems, chimneys,
Lower ex-
Cubic feet plosive stacks, or vents, shall be supplied to a
per gallon
Solvent of vapor of limit in per- spray booth or room in quantities
cent by
liquid at 70 volume of equal to the volume of air exhausted
F. air at 70 F through the spray booth.
Column 1 Column 2 (ii) Where a spray booth or room re-
Acetone ......................................... 44.0 2.6 ceives make-up air through self-closing
Amyl Acetate (iso) ......................... 21.6 1 1.0 doors, dampers, or louvers, they shall
Amyl Alcohol (n) ............................ 29.6 1.2 be fully open at all times when the
Amyl Alcohol (iso) ......................... 29.6 1.2
Benzene ........................................ 36.8 1 1.4
booth or room is in use for spraying.
Butyl Acetate (n) ............................ 24.8 1.7 The velocity of air through such doors,
Butyl Alcohol (n) ............................ 35.2 1.4 dampers, or louvers shall not exceed
212
200 feet per minute. If the fan charac- (d) Where make-up air is heated by
teristics are such that the required air coal or oil, the products of combustion
flow through the booth will be pro- shall not be allowed to mix with the
vided, higher velocities through the make-up air, and the products of com-
doors, dampers, or louvers may be bustion shall be conducted outside the
used. building through a flue terminating at
(iii)(a) Where the air supply to a a point remote from all points where
spray booth or room is filtered, the fan make-up air enters the building.
static pressure shall be calculated on (e) Where make-up air is heated by
the assumption that the filters are gas, and the products of combustion
dirty to the extent that they require are not mixed with the make-up air but
cleaning or replacement. are conducted through an independent
(b) The rating of filters shall be gov- flue to a point outside the building re-
erned by test data supplied by the man- mote from all points where make-up
ufacturer of the filter. A pressure gage air enters the building, it is not nec-
shall be installed to show the pressure essary to comply with paragraph
drop across the filters. This gage shall (c)(7)(iv)(f) of this section.
be marked to show the pressure drop at (f) Where make-up air to any manu-
which the filters require cleaning or re- ally operated spray booth or room is
placement. Filters shall be replaced or heated by gas and the products of com-
cleaned whenever the pressure drop bustion are allowed to mix with the
across them becomes excessive or supply air, the following precautions
whenever the air flow through the face must be taken:
of the booth falls below that specified
(1) The gas must have a distinctive
in Table G10.
and strong enough odor to warn work-
(iv)(a) Means for heating make-up air
men in a spray booth or room of its
to any spray booth or room, before or
at the time spraying is normally per- presence if in an unburned state in the
formed, shall be provided in all places make-up air.
where the outdoor temperature may be (2) The maximum rate of gas supply
expected to remain below 55 F. for ap- to the make-up air heater burners
preciable periods of time during the op- must not exceed that which would
eration of the booth except where ade- yield in excess of 200 p.p.m. (parts per
quate and safe means of radiant heat- million) of carbon monoxide or 2,000
ing for all operating personnel affected p.p.m. of total combustible gases in the
is provided. The replacement air during mixture if the unburned gas upon the
the heating seasons shall be main- occurrence of flame failure were mixed
tained at not less than 65 F. at the with all of the make-up air supplied.
point of entry into the spray booth or (3) A fan must be provided to deliver
spray room. When otherwise unheated the mixture of heated air and products
make-up air would be at a temperature of combustion from the plenum cham-
of more than 10 F. below room tember housing the gas burners to the
perature, its temperature shall be regu- spray booth or room.
lated as provided in section 3.6.3 of (8) Scope. Spray booths or spray
ANSI Z9.21960. rooms are to be used to enclose or con-
(b) As an alternative to an air re- fine all spray finishing operations cov-
placement system complying with the ered by this paragraph (c). This para-
preceding section, general heating of graph does not apply to the spraying of
the building in which the spray room the exteriors of buildings, fixed tanks,
or booth is located may be employed or similar structures, nor to small
provided that all occupied parts of the portable spraying apparatus not used
building are maintained at not less repeatedly in the same location.
than 65 F. when the exhaust system is
in operation or the general heating sys-
FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 40 FR 24522, June 9,
tem supplemented by other sources of 1975; 43 FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322,
heat may be employed to meet this re- Feb. 10, 1984; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 58 FR
quirement. 35308, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9236, Mar. 7, 1996;
(c) No means of heating make-up air 63 FR 1269, Jan. 8, 1998; 64 FR 13909, Mar. 23,
shall be located in a spray booth. 1999]
213
1910.95 Occupational noise exposure. TABLE G16PERMISSIBLE NOISE EXPOSURES 1

(a) Protection against the effects of Sound
noise exposure shall be provided when level dBA
Duration per day, hours slow re-
the sound levels exceed those shown in sponse
Table G16 when measured on the A
8 ........................................................................... 90
scale of a standard sound level meter 6 ........................................................................... 92
at slow response. When noise levels are 4 ........................................................................... 95
determined by octave band analysis, 3 ........................................................................... 97
the equivalent A-weighted sound level 2 ........................................................................... 100
112 ....................................................................... 102
may be determined as follows: 1 ........................................................................... 105
12 ......................................................................... 110
14 or less ............................................................. 115
1 When the daily noise exposure is composed of two or
more periods of noise exposure of different levels, their com-
bined effect should be considered, rather than the individual
effect of each. If the sum of the following fractions: C1/T1+C2/
T2Cn/Tn exceeds unity, then, the mixed exposure should be
considered to exceed the limit value. Cn indicates the total
time of exposure at a specified noise level, and Tn indicates
the total time of exposure permitted at that level.
Exposure to impulsive or impact noise should not exceed
140 dB peak sound pressure level.
(c) Hearing conservation program. (1)

The employer shall administer a con-
tinuing, effective hearing conservation
program, as described in paragraphs (c)
through (o) of this section, whenever
employee noise exposures equal or ex-
ceed an 8-hour time-weighted average
sound level (TWA) of 85 decibels meas-
ured on the A scale (slow response) or,
equivalently, a dose of fifty percent.
FIGURE G9 For purposes of the hearing conserva-
Equivalent sound level contours. Octave tion program, employee noise expo-
band sound pressure levels may be converted sures shall be computed in accordance
to the equivalent A-weighted sound level by with appendix A and Table G16a, and
plotting them on this graph and noting the without regard to any attenuation pro-
A-weighted sound level corresponding to the
vided by the use of personal protective
point of highest penetration into the sound
equipment.
level contours. This equivalent A-weighted
sound level, which may differ from the ac- (2) For purposes of paragraphs (c)
tual A-weighted sound level of the noise, is through (n) of this section, an 8-hour
used to determine exposure limits from time-weighted average of 85 decibels or
Table 1.G16. a dose of fifty percent shall also be re-
ferred to as the action level.
(b)(1) When employees are subjected (d) Monitoring. (1) When information
to sound exceeding those listed in indicates that any employees exposure
Table G16, feasible administrative or may equal or exceed an 8-hour time-
engineering controls shall be utilized. weighted average of 85 decibels, the
If such controls fail to reduce sound employer shall develop and implement
levels within the levels of Table G16, a monitoring program.
personal protective equipment shall be (i) The sampling strategy shall be de-
provided and used to reduce sound lev- signed to identify employees for inclu-
els within the levels of the table. sion in the hearing conservation pro-
(2) If the variations in noise level in- gram and to enable the proper selec-
volve maxima at intervals of 1 second tion of hearing protectors.
or less, it is to be considered contin- (ii) Where circumstances such as high
uous. worker mobility, significant variations
214
EC27OC91.023
in sound level, or a significant compo- maintaining and checking calibration

nent of impulse noise make area moni- and proper functioning of the audiom-
toring generally inappropriate, the em- eters being used. A technician who op-
ployer shall use representative per- erates microprocessor audiometers
sonal sampling to comply with the does not need to be certified. A techni-
monitoring requirements of this para- cian who performs audiometric tests
graph unless the employer can show must be responsible to an audiologist,
that area sampling produces equivalent otolaryngologist or physician.
results. (4) All audiograms obtained pursuant
(2)(i) All continuous, intermittent to this section shall meet the require-
and impulsive sound levels from 80 ments of appendix C: Audiometric Meas-
decibels to 130 decibels shall be inte- uring Instruments.
grated into the noise measurements. (5) Baseline audiogram. (i) Within 6
(ii) Instruments used to measure em- months of an employees first exposure
ployee noise exposure shall be cali- at or above the action level, the em-
brated to ensure measurement accu- ployer shall establish a valid baseline
racy. audiogram against which subsequent
(3) Monitoring shall be repeated audiograms can be compared.
whenever a change in production, proc- (ii) Mobile test van exception. Where
ess, equipment or controls increases mobile test vans are used to meet the
noise exposures to the extent that:
audiometric testing obligation, the em-
(i) Additional employees may be ex-
ployer shall obtain a valid baseline
posed at or above the action level; or
audiogram within 1 year of an employ-
(ii) The attenuation provided by
ees first exposure at or above the ac-
hearing protectors being used by em-
tion level. Where baseline audiograms
ployees may be rendered inadequate to
are obtained more than 6 months after
meet the requirements of paragraph (j)
the employees first exposure at or
of this section.
above the action level, employees shall
(e) Employee notification. The em-
wearing hearing protectors for any pe-
ployer shall notify each employee ex-
riod exceeding six months after first
posed at or above an 8-hour time-
weighted average of 85 decibels of the exposure until the baseline audiogram
results of the monitoring. is obtained.
(f) Observation of monitoring. The em- (iii) Testing to establish a baseline
ployer shall provide affected employees audiogram shall be preceded by at least
or their representatives with an oppor- 14 hours without exposure to workplace
tunity to observe any noise measure- noise. Hearing protectors may be used
ments conducted pursuant to this sec- as a substitute for the requirement
tion. that baseline audiograms be preceded
(g) Audiometric testing program. (1) by 14 hours without exposure to work-
The employer shall establish and main- place noise.
tain an audiometric testing program as (iv) The employer shall notify em-
provided in this paragraph by making ployees of the need to avoid high levels
audiometric testing available to all of non-occupational noise exposure
employees whose exposures equal or ex- during the 14-hour period immediately
ceed an 8-hour time-weighted average preceding the audiometric examina-
of 85 decibels. tion.
(2) The program shall be provided at (6) Annual audiogram. At least annu-
no cost to employees. ally after obtaining the baseline audio-
(3) Audiometric tests shall be per- gram, the employer shall obtain a new
formed by a licensed or certified audi- audiogram for each employee exposed
ologist, otolaryngologist, or other phy- at or above an 8-hour time-weighted
sician, or by a technician who is cer- average of 85 decibels.
tified by the Council of Accreditation (7) Evaluation of audiogram. (i) Each
in Occupational Hearing Conservation, employees annual audiogram shall be
or who has satisfactorily demonstrated compared to that employees baseline
competence in administering audiogram to determine if the audio-
audiometric examinations, obtaining gram is valid and if a standard thresh-
valid audiograms, and properly using, old shift as defined in paragraph (g)(10)
215
of this section has occurred. This com- pathology of the ear is caused or aggra-
parison may be done by a technician. vated by the wearing of hearing protec-
(ii) If the annual audiogram shows tors.
that an employee has suffered a stand- (D) The employee is informed of the
ard threshold shift, the employer may need for an otological examination if a
obtain a retest within 30 days and con- medical pathology of the ear that is
sider the results of the retest as the an- unrelated to the use of hearing protec-
nual audiogram. tors is suspected.
(iii) The audiologist, (iii) If subsequent audiometric test-
otolaryngologist, or physician shall re- ing of an employee whose exposure to
view problem audiograms and shall de- noise is less than an 8-hour TWA of 90
termine whether there is a need for fur- decibels indicates that a standard
ther evaluation. The employer shall threshold shift is not persistent, the
provide to the person performing this employer:
evaluation the following information: (A) Shall inform the employee of the
(A) A copy of the requirements for new audiometric interpretation; and
hearing conservation as set forth in (B) May discontinue the required use
paragraphs (c) through (n) of this sec- of hearing protectors for that em-
tion; ployee.
(B) The baseline audiogram and most
(9) Revised baseline. An annual audio-
recent audiogram of the employee to
gram may be substituted for the base-
be evaluated;
line audiogram when, in the judgment
(C) Measurements of background
of the audiologist, otolaryngologist or
sound pressure levels in the
physician who is evaluating the audio-
audiometric test room as required in
gram:
appendix D: Audiometric Test Rooms.
(i) The standard threshold shift re-
(D) Records of audiometer calibra-
vealed by the audiogram is persistent;
tions required by paragraph (h)(5) of
or
this section.
(8) Follow-up procedures. (i) If a com- (ii) The hearing threshold shown in
parison of the annual audiogram to the the annual audiogram indicates signifi-
baseline audiogram indicates a stand- cant improvement over the baseline
ard threshold shift as defined in para- audiogram.
graph (g)(10) of this section has oc- (10) Standard threshold shift. (i) As
curred, the employee shall be informed used in this section, a standard thresh-
of this fact in writing, within 21 days of old shift is a change in hearing thresh-
the determination. old relative to the baseline audiogram
(ii) Unless a physician determines of an average of 10 dB or more at 2000,
that the standard threshold shift is not 3000, and 4000 Hz in either ear.
work related or aggravated by occupa- (ii) In determining whether a stand-
tional noise exposure, the employer ard threshold shift has occurred, allow-
shall ensure that the following steps ance may be made for the contribution
are taken when a standard threshold of aging (presbycusis) to the change in
shift occurs: hearing level by correcting the annual
(A) Employees not using hearing pro- audiogram according to the procedure
tectors shall be fitted with hearing pro- described in appendix F: Calculation
tectors, trained in their use and care, and Application of Age Correction to
and required to use them. Audiograms.
(B) Employees already using hearing (h) Audiometric test requirements. (1)
protectors shall be refitted and re- Audiometric tests shall be pure tone,
trained in the use of hearing protectors air conduction, hearing threshold ex-
and provided with hearing protectors aminations, with test frequencies in-
offering greater attenuation if nec- cluding as a minimum 500, 1000, 2000,
essary. 3000, 4000, and 6000 Hz. Tests at each
(C) The employee shall be referred for frequency shall be taken separately for
a clinical audiological evaluation or an each ear.
otological examination, as appropriate, (2) Audiometric tests shall be con-
if additional testing is necessary or if ducted with audiometers (including
the employer suspects that a medical microprocessor audiometers) that meet
216
the specifications of, and are main- (B) Has experienced a standard
tained and used in accordance with, threshold shift.
American National Standard Specifica- (3) Employees shall be given the op-
tion for Audiometers, S3.61969, which portunity to select their hearing pro-
is incorporated by reference as speci- tectors from a variety of suitable hear-
fied in 1910.6. ing protectors provided by the em-
(3) Pulsed-tone and self-recording ployer.
audiometers, if used, shall meet the re- (4) The employer shall provide train-
quirements specified in appendix C: ing in the use and care of all hearing
Audiometric Measuring Instruments. protectors provided to employees.
(4) Audiometric examinations shall (5) The employer shall ensure proper
be administered in a room meeting the initial fitting and supervise the correct
requirements listed in appendix D: use of all hearing protectors.
Audiometric Test Rooms. (j) Hearing protector attenuation. (1)
(5) Audiometer calibration. (i) The The employer shall evaluate hearing
functional operation of the audiometer protector attenuation for the specific
shall be checked before each days use noise environments in which the pro-
by testing a person with known, stable tector will be used. The employer shall
hearing thresholds, and by listening to use one of the evaluation methods de-
the audiometers output to make sure scribed in appendix B: Methods for Esti-
that the output is free from distorted mating the Adequacy of Hearing Protec-
or unwanted sounds. Deviations of 10 tion Attenuation.
decibels or greater require an acoustic (2) Hearing protectors must attenu-
calibration. ate employee exposure at least to an 8-
(ii) Audiometer calibration shall be hour time-weighted average of 90 deci-
checked acoustically at least annually bels as required by paragraph (b) of
in accordance with appendix E: Acoustic this section.
Calibration of Audiometers. Test fre- (3) For employees who have experi-
quencies below 500 Hz and above 6000 Hz enced a standard threshold shift, hear-
may be omitted from this check. Devi- ing protectors must attenuate em-
ations of 15 decibels or greater require ployee exposure to an 8-hour time-
an exhaustive calibration. weighted average of 85 decibels or
(iii) An exhaustive calibration shall below.
be performed at least every two years (4) The adequacy of hearing protector
in accordance with sections 4.1.2; 4.1.3.; attenuation shall be re-evaluated
4.1.4.3; 4.2; 4.4.1; 4.4.2; 4.4.3; and 4.5 of whenever employee noise exposures in-
the American National Standard Speci- crease to the extent that the hearing
fication for Audiometers, S3.61969. protectors provided may no longer pro-
Test frequencies below 500 Hz and vide adequate attenuation. The em-
above 6000 Hz may be omitted from this ployer shall provide more effective
calibration. hearing protectors where necessary.
(i) Hearing protectors. (1) Employers (k) Training program. (1) The em-
shall make hearing protectors avail- ployer shall institute a training pro-
able to all employees exposed to an 8- gram for all employees who are ex-
hour time-weighted average of 85 deci- posed to noise at or above an 8-hour
bels or greater at no cost to the em- time-weighted average of 85 decibels,
ployees. Hearing protectors shall be re- and shall ensure employee participa-
placed as necessary. tion in such program.
(2) Employers shall ensure that hear- (2) The training program shall be re-
ing protectors are worn: peated annually for each employee in-
(i) By an employee who is required by cluded in the hearing conservation pro-
paragraph (b)(1) of this section to wear gram. Information provided in the
personal protective equipment; and training program shall be updated to
(ii) By any employee who is exposed be consistent with changes in protec-
to an 8-hour time-weighted average of tive equipment and work processes.
85 decibels or greater, and who: (3) The employer shall ensure that
(A) Has not yet had a baseline audio- each employee is informed of the fol-
gram established pursuant to para- lowing:
graph (g)(5)(ii); or (i) The effects of noise on hearing;
217
(ii) The purpose of hearing protec- ployees, representatives designated by

tors, the advantages, disadvantages, the individual employee, and the As-
and attenuation of various types, and sistant Secretary. The provisions of 29
instructions on selection, fitting, use, CFR 1910.20 (a)(e) and (g)(i) apply to
and care; and access to records under this section.
(iii) The purpose of audiometric test- (5) Transfer of records. If the employer
ing, and an explanation of the test pro- ceases to do business, the employer
cedures. shall transfer to the successor em-
(l) Access to information and training ployer all records required to be main-
materials. (1) The employer shall make tained by this section, and the suc-
available to affected employees or cessor employer shall retain them for
their representatives copies of this the remainder of the period prescribed
standard and shall also post a copy in in paragraph (m)(3) of this section.
the workplace. (n) Appendices. (1) Appendices A, B, C,
(2) The employer shall provide to af- D, and E to this section are incor-
fected employees any informational porated as part of this section and the
materials pertaining to the standard contents of these appendices are man-
that are supplied to the employer by datory.
the Assistant Secretary. (2) Appendices F and G to this sec-
(3) The employer shall provide, upon tion are informational and are not in-
request, all materials related to the tended to create any additional obliga-
employers training and education pro- tions not otherwise imposed or to de-
gram pertaining to this standard to the tract from any existing obligations.
Assistant Secretary and the Director. (o) Exemptions. Paragraphs (c)
(m) Recordkeeping(1) Exposure meas- through (n) of this section shall not
urements. The employer shall maintain apply to employers engaged in oil and
an accurate record of all employee ex- gas well drilling and servicing oper-
posure measurements required by para- ations.
graph (d) of this section. (p) Startup date. Baseline audiograms
(2) Audiometric tests. (i) The employer required by paragraph (g) of this sec-
shall retain all employee audiometric tion shall be completed by March 1,
test records obtained pursuant to para- 1984.
graph (g) of this section:
(ii) This record shall include: APPENDIX A TO 1910.95NOISE EXPOSURE
COMPUTATION
(A) Name and job classification of
the employee; This Appendix is Mandatory
(B) Date of the audiogram; I. Computation of Employee Noise Expo-
(C) The examiners name; sure
(D) Date of the last acoustic or ex- (1) Noise dose is computed using Table G
haustive calibration of the audiometer; 16a as follows:
and (i) When the sound level, L, is constant
(E) Employees most recent noise ex- over the entire work shift, the noise dose, D,
posure assessment. in percent, is given by: D=100 C/T where C is
the total length of the work day, in hours,
(F) The employer shall maintain ac- and T is the reference duration cor-
curate records of the measurements of responding to the measured sound level, L,
the background sound pressure levels as given in Table G16a or by the formula
in audiometric test rooms. shown as a footnote to that table.
(3) Record retention. The employer (ii) When the workshift noise exposure is
shall retain records required in this composed of two or more periods of noise at
paragraph (m) for at least the following different levels, the total noise dose over the
periods. work day is given by:
(i) Noise exposure measurement D = 100 (C1/T1+C2/T2+ . . . + Cn/Tn),
records shall be retained for two years. where Cn indicates the total time of exposure
(ii) Audiometric test records shall be at a specific noise level, and Tn indicates the
reference duration for that level as given by
retained for the duration of the af-
Table G16a.
fected employees employment. (2) The eight-hour time-weighted average
(4) Access to records. All records re- sound level (TWA), in decibels, may be com-
quired by this section shall be provided puted from the dose, in percent, by means of
upon request to employees, former em- the formula: TWA=16.61 log10 (D/100)+90. For
218
an eight-hour workshift with the noise level II. Conversion Between Dose and 8-Hour
constant over the entire shift, the TWA is Time-Weighted Average Sound Level
equal to the measured sound level.
Compliance with paragraphs (c)(r) of this
(3) A table relating dose and TWA is given
regulation is determined by the amount of
in Section II.
exposure to noise in the workplace. The
amount of such exposure is usually measured
TABLE G16A
with an audiodosimeter which gives a read-
Ref- out in terms of dose. In order to better un-
A-weighted sound level, L (decibel) erence derstand the requirements of the amend-
duration, ment, dosimeter readings can be converted
T (hour)
to an 8-hour time-weighted average sound
80 ........................................................................... 32 level. (TWA).
81 ........................................................................... 27.9 In order to convert the reading of a dosim-
82 ........................................................................... 24.3 eter into TWA, see Table A1, below. This
83 ........................................................................... 21.1 table applies to dosimeters that are set by
84 ........................................................................... 18.4
the manufacturer to calculate dose or per-
85 ........................................................................... 16
86 ........................................................................... 13.9 cent exposure according to the relationships
87 ........................................................................... 12.1 in Table G16a. So, for example, a dose of 91
88 ........................................................................... 10.6 percent over an eight hour day results in a
89 ........................................................................... 9.2 TWA of 89.3 dB, and, a dose of 50 percent cor-
90 ........................................................................... 8 responds to a TWA of 85 dB.
91 ........................................................................... 7.0 If the dose as read on the dosimeter is less
92 ........................................................................... 6.1
93 ........................................................................... 5.3
than or greater than the values found in
94 ........................................................................... 4.6 Table A1, the TWA may be calculated by
95 ........................................................................... 4 using the formula: TWA=16.61 log10 (D/100)+90
96 ........................................................................... 3.5 where TWA=8-hour time-weighted average
97 ........................................................................... 3.0 sound level and D=accumulated dose in per-
98 ........................................................................... 2.6 cent exposure.
99 ........................................................................... 2.3
100 ......................................................................... 2
101 ......................................................................... 1.7 TABLE A1CONVERSION FROM PERCENT
102 ......................................................................... 1.5 NOISE EXPOSURE OR DOSE TO 8-HOUR
103 ......................................................................... 1.3 TIME-WEIGHTED AVERAGE SOUND LEVEL
104 ......................................................................... 1.1
105 ......................................................................... 1
(TWA)
106 ......................................................................... 0.87
Dose or percent noise exposure TWA
107 ......................................................................... 0.76
108 ......................................................................... 0.66 10 ........................................................................... 73.4
109 ......................................................................... 0.57 15 ........................................................................... 76.3
110 ......................................................................... 0.5 20 ........................................................................... 78.4
111 ......................................................................... 0.44 25 ........................................................................... 80.0
112 ......................................................................... 0.38 30 ........................................................................... 81.3
113 ......................................................................... 0.33 35 ........................................................................... 82.4
114 ......................................................................... 0.29 40 ........................................................................... 83.4
115 ......................................................................... 0.25 45 ........................................................................... 84.2
116 ......................................................................... 0.22 50 ........................................................................... 85.0
117 ......................................................................... 0.19 55 ........................................................................... 85.7
118 ......................................................................... 0.16 60 ........................................................................... 86.3
119 ......................................................................... 0.14 65 ........................................................................... 86.9
120 ......................................................................... 0.125 70 ........................................................................... 87.4
121 ......................................................................... 0.11 75 ........................................................................... 87.9
122 ......................................................................... 0.095 80 ........................................................................... 88.4
123 ......................................................................... 0.082 81 ........................................................................... 88.5
124 ......................................................................... 0.072 82 ........................................................................... 88.6
125 ......................................................................... 0.063 83 ........................................................................... 88.7
126 ......................................................................... 0.054 84 ........................................................................... 88.7
127 ......................................................................... 0.047 85 ........................................................................... 88.8
128 ......................................................................... 0.041 86 ........................................................................... 88.9
129 ......................................................................... 0.036 87 ........................................................................... 89.0
130 ......................................................................... 0.031 88 ........................................................................... 89.1
89 ........................................................................... 89.2
In the above table the reference duration, 90 ........................................................................... 89.2
91 ........................................................................... 89.3
T, is computed by 92 ........................................................................... 89.4
93 ........................................................................... 89.5
8 94 ........................................................................... 89.6
95 ........................................................................... 89.6
T = 2(L90)/5 96 ........................................................................... 89.7
97 ........................................................................... 89.8
98 ........................................................................... 89.9
where L is the measured A-weighted sound 99 ........................................................................... 89.9
level. 100 ......................................................................... 90.0
219
TABLE A1CONVERSION FROM PERCENT TABLE A1CONVERSION FROM PERCENT

NOISE EXPOSURE OR DOSE TO 8-HOUR NOISE EXPOSURE OR DOSE TO 8-HOUR
TIME-WEIGHTED AVERAGE SOUND LEVEL TIME-WEIGHTED AVERAGE SOUND LEVEL
(TWA)Continued (TWA)Continued
Dose or percent noise exposure TWA Dose or percent noise exposure TWA
101 ......................................................................... 90.1 530 ......................................................................... 102.0

102 ......................................................................... 90.1 540 ......................................................................... 102.2
103 ......................................................................... 90.2 550 ......................................................................... 102.3
104 ......................................................................... 90.3 560 ......................................................................... 102.4
105 ......................................................................... 90.4 570 ......................................................................... 102.6
106 ......................................................................... 90.4 580 ......................................................................... 102.7
107 ......................................................................... 90.5 590 ......................................................................... 102.8
108 ......................................................................... 90.6 600 ......................................................................... 102.9
109 ......................................................................... 90.6 610 ......................................................................... 103.0
110 ......................................................................... 90.7 620 ......................................................................... 103.2
111 ......................................................................... 90.8 630 ......................................................................... 103.3
112 ......................................................................... 90.8 640 ......................................................................... 103.4
113 ......................................................................... 90.9 650 ......................................................................... 103.5
114 ......................................................................... 90.9 660 ......................................................................... 103.6
115 ......................................................................... 91.1 670 ......................................................................... 103.7
116 ......................................................................... 91.1 680 ......................................................................... 103.8
117 ......................................................................... 91.1 690 ......................................................................... 103.9
118 ......................................................................... 91.2 700 ......................................................................... 104.0
119 ......................................................................... 91.3 710 ......................................................................... 104.1
120 ......................................................................... 91.3 720 ......................................................................... 104.2
125 ......................................................................... 91.6 730 ......................................................................... 104.3
130 ......................................................................... 91.9 740 ......................................................................... 104.4
135 ......................................................................... 92.2 750 ......................................................................... 104.5
140 ......................................................................... 92.4 760 ......................................................................... 104.6
145 ......................................................................... 92.7 770 ......................................................................... 104.7
150 ......................................................................... 92.9 780 ......................................................................... 104.8
155 ......................................................................... 93.2 790 ......................................................................... 104.9
160 ......................................................................... 93.4 800 ......................................................................... 105.0
165 ......................................................................... 93.6 810 ......................................................................... 105.1
170 ......................................................................... 93.8 820 ......................................................................... 105.2
175 ......................................................................... 94.0 830 ......................................................................... 105.3
180 ......................................................................... 94.2 840 ......................................................................... 105.4
185 ......................................................................... 94.4 850 ......................................................................... 105.4
190 ......................................................................... 94.6 860 ......................................................................... 105.5
195 ......................................................................... 94.8 870 ......................................................................... 105.6
200 ......................................................................... 95.0 880 ......................................................................... 105.7
210 ......................................................................... 95.4 890 ......................................................................... 105.8
220 ......................................................................... 95.7 900 ......................................................................... 105.8
230 ......................................................................... 96.0 910 ......................................................................... 105.9
240 ......................................................................... 96.3 920 ......................................................................... 106.0
250 ......................................................................... 96.6 930 ......................................................................... 106.1
260 ......................................................................... 96.9 940 ......................................................................... 106.2
270 ......................................................................... 97.2 950 ......................................................................... 106.2
280 ......................................................................... 97.4 960 ......................................................................... 106.3
290 ......................................................................... 97.7 970 ......................................................................... 106.4
300 ......................................................................... 97.9 980 ......................................................................... 106.5
310 ......................................................................... 98.2 990 ......................................................................... 106.5
320 ......................................................................... 98.4 999 ......................................................................... 106.6
330 ......................................................................... 98.6
340 ......................................................................... 98.8
350 ......................................................................... 99.0
APPENDIX B TO 1910.95METHODS FOR ESTI-
360 ......................................................................... 99.2 MATING THE ADEQUACY OF HEARING PRO-
370 ......................................................................... 99.4 TECTOR ATTENUATION
380 ......................................................................... 99.6
390 ......................................................................... 99.8 This Appendix is Mandatory
400 ......................................................................... 100.0
410 ......................................................................... 100.2
For employees who have experienced a sig-
420 ......................................................................... 100.4 nificant threshold shift, hearing protector
430 ......................................................................... 100.5 attenuation must be sufficient to reduce em-
440 ......................................................................... 100.7 ployee exposure to a TWA of 85 dB. Employ-
450 ......................................................................... 100.8 ers must select one of the following methods
460 ......................................................................... 101.0 by which to estimate the adequacy of hear-
470 ......................................................................... 101.2 ing protector attenuation.
480 ......................................................................... 101.3
490 ......................................................................... 101.5
The most convenient method is the Noise
500 ......................................................................... 101.6 Reduction Rating (NRR) developed by the
510 ......................................................................... 101.8 Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).
520 ......................................................................... 101.9 According to EPA regulation, the NRR must
220
be shown on the hearing protector package. (iv) When using a sound level meter set on
The NRR is then related to an individual the C-weighting network:
workers noise environment in order to as- (A) Obtain a representative sample of the
sess the adequacy of the attenuation of a C-weighted sound levels in the employees
given hearing protector. This appendix de- environment.
scribes four methods of using the NRR to de- (B) Subtract the NRR from the C-weighted
termine whether a particular hearing pro- average sound level to obtain the estimated
tector provides adequate protection within a A-weighted TWA under the ear protector.
given exposure environment. Selection (v) When using area monitoring procedures
among the four procedures is dependent upon and a sound level meter set to the A-weigh-
the employers noise measuring instruments. ing network.
Instead of using the NRR, employers may (A) Obtain a representative sound level for
evaluate the adequacy of hearing protector the area in question.
attenuation by using one of the three meth- (B) Subtract 7 dB from the NRR and sub-
ods developed by the National Institute for tract the remainder from the A-weighted
Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), sound level for that area.
which are described in the List of Personal (vi) When using area monitoring proce-
Hearing Protectors and Attenuation Data, dures and a sound level meter set to the C-
HEW Publication No. 76120, 1975, pages 2137. weighting network:
These methods are known as NIOSH methods (A) Obtain a representative sound level for
#1B1, #1B2 and #1B3. The NRR described the area in question.
below is a simplification of NIOSH method (B) Subtract the NRR from the C-weighted
#1B2. The most complex method is NIOSH sound level for that area.
method #1B1, which is probably the most ac-
curate method since it uses the largest APPENDIX C TO 1910.95AUDIOMETRIC
amount of spectral information from the in- MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
dividual employees noise environment. As This Appendix is Mandatory
in the case of the NRR method described
below, if one of the NIOSH methods is used, 1. In the event that pulsed-tone audiom-
the selected method must be applied to an eters are used, they shall have a tone on-
individuals noise environment to assess the time of at least 200 milliseconds.
adequacy of the attenuation. Employers 2. Self-recording audiometers shall comply
should be careful to take a sufficient number with the following requirements:
of measurements in order to achieve a rep- (A) The chart upon which the audiogram is
resentative sample for each time segment. traced shall have lines at positions cor-
NOTE: The employer must remember that responding to all multiples of 10 dB hearing
calculated attenuation values reflect real- level within the intensity range spanned by
istic values only to the extent that the pro- the audiometer. The lines shall be equally
tectors are properly fitted and worn. spaced and shall be separated by at least 14
When using the NRR to assess hearing pro- inch. Additional increments are optional.
tector adequacy, one of the following meth- The audiogram pen tracings shall not exceed
ods must be used: 2 dB in width.
(i) When using a dosimeter that is capable (B) It shall be possible to set the stylus
of C-weighted measurements: manually at the 10-dB increment lines for
(A) Obtain the employees C-weighted dose calibration purposes.
for the entire workshift, and convert to TWA (C) The slewing rate for the audiometer at-
(see appendix A, II). tenuator shall not be more than 6 dB/sec ex-
(B) Subtract the NRR from the C-weighted cept that an initial slewing rate greater than
TWA to obtain the estimated A-weighted 6 dB/sec is permitted at the beginning of
TWA under the ear protector. each new test frequency, but only until the
(ii) When using a dosimeter that is not ca- second subject response.
pable of C-weighted measurements, the fol- (D) The audiometer shall remain at each
lowing method may be used: required test frequency for 30 seconds ( 3
(A) Convert the A-weighted dose to TWA seconds). The audiogram shall be clearly
(see appendix A). marked at each change of frequency and the
(B) Subtract 7 dB from the NRR. actual frequency change of the audiometer
(C) Subtract the remainder from the A- shall not deviate from the frequency bound-
weighted TWA to obtain the estimated A- aries marked on the audiogram by more than
weighted TWA under the ear protector. 3 seconds.
(iii) When using a sound level meter set to (E) It must be possible at each test fre-
the A-weighting network: quency to place a horizontal line segment
(A) Obtain the employees A-weighted parallel to the time axis on the audiogram,
TWA. such that the audiometric tracing crosses
(B) Subtract 7 dB from the NRR, and sub- the line segment at least six times at that
tract the remainder from the A-weighted test frequency. At each test frequency the
TWA to obtain the estimated A-weighted threshold shall be the average of the
TWA under the ear protector. midpoints of the tracing excursions.
221
APPENDIX D TO 1910.95AUDIOMETRIC TEST C. For each 10-dB decrement on the audi-
ROOMS ometer the sound level meter should indicate
a corresponding 10 dB decrease.
This Appendix is Mandatory D. This measurement may be made elec-
Rooms used for audiometric testing shall trically with a voltmeter connected to the
not have background sound pressure levels earphone terminals.
exceeding those in Table D1 when measured
(3) Tolerances
by equipment conforming at least to the
Type 2 requirements of American National When any of the measured sound levels de-
Standard Specification for Sound Level Me- viate from the levels in Table E1 or Table
ters, S1.41971 (R1976), and to the Class II re- E2 by 3 dB at any test frequency between
quirements of American National Standard 500 and 3000 Hz, 4 dB at 4000 Hz, or 5 dB at
Specification for Octave, Half-Octave, and 6000 Hz, an exhaustive calibration is advised.
Third-Octave Band Filter Sets, S1.111971 An exhaustive calibration is required if the
(R1976). deviations are greater than 15 dB or greater
at any test frequency.
TABLE D1MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE OCTAVE-
BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVELS FOR TABLE E1REFERENCE THRESHOLD LEVELS
AUDIOMETRIC TEST ROOMS FOR TELEPHONICSTDH39 EARPHONES
Octave-band center fre- Reference

quency (Hz) ................ 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 threshold Sound
Sound pressure level level for level meter
Frequency, Hz
(dB) ............................. 40 40 47 57 62 TDH39 reading,
earphones, dB
dB
APPENDIX E TO 1910.95ACOUSTIC
CALIBRATION OF AUDIOMETERS 500 ................................................. 11.5 81.5
1000 ............................................... 7 77
This Appendix is Mandatory 2000 ............................................... 9 79
3000 ............................................... 10 80
Audiometer calibration shall be checked 4000 ............................................... 9.5 79.5
acoustically, at least annually, according to 6000 ............................................... 15.5 85.5
the procedures described in this appendix.
The equipment necessary to perform these
measurements is a sound level meter, oc-
TABLE E2REFERENCE THRESHOLD LEVELS
tave-band filter set, and a National Bureau FOR TELEPHONICSTDH49 EARPHONES
of Standards 9A coupler. In making these
Ref-
measurements, the accuracy of the cali- erence Sound
brating equipment shall be sufficient to de- threshold level
termine that the audiometer is within the level for
Frequency, Hz meter
TDH49
tolerances permitted by American Standard reading,
ear- dB
Specification for Audiometers, S3.61969. phones,
dB
(1) Sound Pressure Output Check
500 ..................................................... 13.5 83.5
A. Place the earphone coupler over the 1000 ................................................... 7.5 77.5
microphone of the sound level meter and 2000 ................................................... 11 81.0
place the earphone on the coupler. 3000 ................................................... 9.5 79.5
B. Set the audiometers hearing threshold 4000 ................................................... 10.5 80.5
level (HTL) dial to 70 dB. 6000 ................................................... 13.5 83.5
C. Measure the sound pressure level of the
tones at each test frequency from 500 Hz APPENDIX F TO 1910.95CALCULATIONS AND
through 6000 Hz for each earphone. APPLICATION OF AGE CORRECTIONS TO
D. At each frequency the readout on the AUDIOGRAMS
sound level meter should correspond to the
levels in Table E1 or Table E2, as appro- This Appendix Is Non-Mandatory
priate, for the type of earphone, in the col- In determining whether a standard thresh-
umn entitled sound level meter reading. old shift has occurred, allowance may be
made for the contribution of aging to the
(2) Linearity Check
change in hearing level by adjusting the
A. With the earphone in place, set the fre- most recent audiogram. If the employer
quency to 1000 Hz and the HTL dial on the chooses to adjust the audiogram, the em-
audiometer to 70 dB. ployer shall follow the procedure described
B. Measure the sound levels in the coupler below. This procedure and the age correction
at each 10-dB decrement from 70 dB to 10 dB, tables were developed by the National Insti-
noting the sound level meter reading at each tute for Occupational Safety and Health in
setting. the criteria document entitled Criteria for
222
a Recommended Standard . . . Occupational tracted from the adjusted annual audiogram
Exposure to Noise, ((HSM)11001). hearing threshold at 4000 Hz (22). Thus the
For each audiometric test frequency; age-corrected threshold shift would be 17 dB
(i) Determine from Tables F1 or F2 the (as opposed to a threshold shift of 20 dB
age correction values for the employee by: without age correction).
(A) Finding the age at which the most re-
cent audiogram was taken and recording the TABLE F1AGE CORRECTION VALUES IN
corresponding values of age corrections at DECIBELS FOR MALES
1000 Hz through 6000 Hz;
(B) Finding the age at which the baseline Audiometric Test Frequencies (Hz)
audiogram was taken and recording the cor- Years
1000 2000 3000 4000 6000
responding values of age corrections at 1000
Hz through 6000 Hz. 20 or younger ....... 5 3 4 5 8
(ii) Subtract the values found in step (i)(B) 21 ......................... 5 3 4 5 8
from the value found in step (i)(A). 22 ......................... 5 3 4 5 8
(iii) The differences calculated in step (ii) 23 ......................... 5 3 4 6 9
24 ......................... 5 3 5 6 9
represented that portion of the change in 25 ......................... 5 3 5 7 10
hearing that may be due to aging. 26 ......................... 5 4 5 7 10
EXAMPLE: Employee is a 32-year-old male. 27 ......................... 5 4 6 7 11
The audiometric history for his right ear is 28 ......................... 6 4 6 8 11
shown in decibels below. 29 ......................... 6 4 6 8 12
30 ......................... 6 4 6 9 12
Audiometric test frequency (Hz) 31 ......................... 6 4 7 9 13
Employees age 32 ......................... 6 5 7 10 14
1000 2000 3000 4000 6000 33 ......................... 6 5 7 10 14
34 ......................... 6 5 8 11 15
26 ......................... 10 5 5 10 5 35 ......................... 7 5 8 11 15
*27 ........................ 0 0 0 5 5 36 ......................... 7 5 9 12 16
28 ......................... 0 0 0 10 5 37 ......................... 7 6 9 12 17
29 ......................... 5 0 5 15 5 38 ......................... 7 6 9 13 17
30 ......................... 0 5 10 20 10 39 ......................... 7 6 10 14 18
31 ......................... 5 10 20 15 15 40 ......................... 7 6 10 14 19
*32 ........................ 5 10 10 25 20 41 ......................... 7 6 10 14 20
42 ......................... 8 7 11 16 20
The audiogram at age 27 is considered the 43 ......................... 8 7 12 16 21
baseline since it shows the best hearing 44 ......................... 8 7 12 17 22
45 ......................... 8 7 13 18 23
threshold levels. Asterisks have been used to
46 ......................... 8 8 13 19 24
identify the baseline and most recent audio- 47 ......................... 8 8 14 19 24
gram. A threshold shift of 20 dB exists at 4000 48 ......................... 9 8 14 20 25
Hz between the audiograms taken at ages 27 49 ......................... 9 9 15 21 26
and 32. 50 ......................... 9 9 16 22 27
(The threshold shift is computed by sub- 51 ......................... 9 9 16 23 28
tracting the hearing threshold at age 27, 52 ......................... 9 10 17 24 29
53 ......................... 9 10 18 25 30
which was 5, from the hearing threshold at 54 ......................... 10 10 18 26 31
age 32, which is 25). A retest audiogram has 55 ......................... 10 11 19 27 32
confirmed this shift. The contribution of 56 ......................... 10 11 20 28 34
aging to this change in hearing may be esti- 57 ......................... 10 11 21 29 35
mated in the following manner: 58 ......................... 10 12 22 31 36
Go to Table F1 and find the age correction 59 ......................... 11 12 22 32 37
60 or older ............ 11 13 23 33 38
values (in dB) for 4000 Hz at age 27 and age 32.
Frequency (Hz) TABLE F2AGE CORRECTION VALUES IN
1000 2000 3000 4000 6000 DECIBELS FOR FEMALES
Age 32 .................. 6 5 7 10 14 Audiometric Test Frequencies (Hz)
Age 27 .................. 5 4 6 7 11 Years
1000 2000 3000 4000 6000
Difference ...... 1 1 1 3 3
20 or younger ....... 7 4 3 3 6
21 ......................... 7 4 4 3 6
The difference represents the amount of 22 ......................... 7 4 4 4 6
hearing loss that may be attributed to aging 23 ......................... 7 5 4 4 7
in the time period between the baseline 24 ......................... 7 5 4 4 7
audiogram and the most recent audiogram. 25 ......................... 8 5 4 4 7
In this example, the difference at 4000 Hz is 26 ......................... 8 5 5 4 8
3 dB. This value is subtracted from the hear- 27 ......................... 8 5 5 5 8
28 ......................... 8 5 5 5 8
ing level at 4000 Hz, which in the most recent 29 ......................... 8 5 5 5 9
audiogram is 25, yielding 22 after adjust- 30 ......................... 8 6 5 5 9
ment. Then the hearing threshold in the 31 ......................... 8 6 6 5 9
baseline audiogram at 4000 Hz (5) is sub- 32 ......................... 9 6 6 6 10
223
TABLE F2AGE CORRECTION VALUES IN not a monitoring program should be initi-

DECIBELS FOR FEMALESContinued ated.
HOW IS NOISE MEASURED?
Audiometric Test Frequencies (Hz) Basically, there are two different instru-
Years ments to measure noise exposures: the sound
1000 2000 3000 4000 6000
level meter and the dosimeter. A sound level
33 ......................... 9 6 6 6 10 meter is a device that measures the inten-
34 ......................... 9 6 6 6 10 sity of sound at a given moment. Since
35 ......................... 9 6 7 7 11 sound level meters provide a measure of
36 ......................... 9 7 7 7 11 sound intensity at only one point in time, it
37 ......................... 9 7 7 7 12 is generally necessary to take a number of
38 ......................... 10 7 7 7 12 measurements at different times during the
39 ......................... 10 7 8 8 12
40 ......................... 10 7 8 8 13 day to estimate noise exposure over a work-
41 ......................... 10 8 8 8 13 day. If noise levels fluctuate, the amount of
42 ......................... 10 8 9 9 13 time noise remains at each of the various
43 ......................... 11 8 9 9 14 measured levels must be determined.
44 ......................... 11 8 9 9 14 To estimate employee noise exposures with
45 ......................... 11 8 10 10 15 a sound level meter it is also generally nec-
46 ......................... 11 9 10 10 15 essary to take several measurements at dif-
47 ......................... 11 9 10 11 16
48 ......................... 12 9 11 11 16 ferent locations within the workplace. After
49 ......................... 12 9 11 11 16 appropriate sound level meter readings are
50 ......................... 12 10 11 12 17 obtained, people sometimes draw maps of
51 ......................... 12 10 12 12 17 the sound levels within different areas of the
52 ......................... 12 10 12 13 18 workplace. By using a sound level map
53 ......................... 13 10 13 13 18 and information on employee locations
54 ......................... 13 11 13 14 19 throughout the day, estimates of individual
55 ......................... 13 11 14 14 19
56 ......................... 13 11 14 15 20
exposure levels can be developed. This meas-
57 ......................... 13 11 15 15 20 urement method is generally referred to as
58 ......................... 14 12 15 16 21 area noise monitoring.
59 ......................... 14 12 16 16 21 A dosimeter is like a sound level meter ex-
60 or older ............ 14 12 16 17 22 cept that it stores sound level measurements
and integrates these measurements over
APPENDIX G TO 1910.95MONITORING NOISE time, providing an average noise exposure
LEVELS NON-MANDATORY INFORMATIONAL reading for a given period of time, such as an
APPENDIX 8-hour workday. With a dosimeter, a micro-
phone is attached to the employees clothing
This appendix provides information to help and the exposure measurement is simply
employers comply with the noise monitoring read at the end of the desired time period. A
obligations that are part of the hearing con- reader may be used to read-out the
servation amendment. dosimeters measurements. Since the dosim-
WHAT IS THE PURPOSE OF NOISE MONITORING? eter is worn by the employee, it measures
This revised amendment requires that em- noise levels in those locations in which the
ployees be placed in a hearing conservation employee travels. A sound level meter can
program if they are exposed to average noise also be positioned within the immediate vi-
levels of 85 dB or greater during an 8 hour cinity of the exposed worker to obtain an in-
workday. In order to determine if exposures dividual exposure estimate. Such procedures
are at or above this level, it may be nec- are generally referred to as personal noise
essary to measure or monitor the actual monitoring.
noise levels in the workplace and to estimate Area monitoring can be used to estimate
the noise exposure or dose received by em- noise exposure when the noise levels are rel-
ployees during the workday. atively constant and employees are not mo-
WHEN IS IT NECESSARY TO IMPLEMENT A bile. In workplaces where employees move
NOISE MONITORING PROGRAM? about in different areas or where the noise
It is not necessary for every employer to intensity tends to fluctuate over time, noise
measure workplace noise. Noise monitoring exposure is generally more accurately esti-
or measuring must be conducted only when mated by the personal monitoring approach.
exposures are at or above 85 dB. Factors In situations where personal monitoring is
which suggest that noise exposures in the appropriate, proper positioning of the micro-
workplace may be at this level include em- phone is necessary to obtain accurate meas-
ployee complaints about the loudness of urements. With a dosimeter, the microphone
noise, indications that employees are losing is generally located on the shoulder and re-
their hearing, or noisy conditions which mains in that position for the entire work-
make normal conversation difficult. The em- day. With a sound level meter, the micro-
ployer should also consider any information phone is stationed near the employees head,
available regarding noise emitted from spe- and the instrument is usually held by an in-
cific machines. In addition, actual workplace dividual who follows the employee as he or
noise measurements can suggest whether or she moves about.
224
Manufacturers instructions, contained in toring program. Some audiological testing
dosimeter and sound level meter operating firms and industrial hygiene firms also pro-
manuals, should be followed for calibration vide noise monitoring services. Universities
and maintenance. To ensure accurate re- with audiology, industrial hygiene, or acous-
sults, it is considered good professional practical engineering departments may also pro-
tice to calibrate instruments before and vide information or may be able to help em-
after each use. ployers meet their obligations under this
HOW OFTEN IS IT NECESSARY TO MONITOR amendment.
NOISE LEVELS? Free, on-site assistance may be obtained
The amendment requires that when there from OSHA-supported state and private con-
are significant changes in machinery or pro- sultation organizations. These safety and
duction processes that may result in in- health consultative entities generally give
creased noise levels, remonitoring must be priority to the needs of small businesses.
conducted to determine whether additional
employees need to be included in the hearing APPENDIX H TO 1910.95AVAILABILITY OF
conservation program. Many companies REFERENCED DOCUMENTS
choose to remonitor periodically (once every
year or two) to ensure that all exposed em- Paragraphs (c) through (o) of 29 CFR 1910.95
ployees are included in their hearing con- and the accompanying appendices contain
servation programs. provisions which incorporate publications by
WHERE CAN EQUIPMENT AND TECHNICAL AD- reference. Generally, the publications pro-
VICE BE OBTAINED? vide criteria for instruments to be used in
Noise monitoring equipment may be either monitoring and audiometric testing. These
purchased or rented. Sound level meters cost criteria are intended to be mandatory when
about $500 to $1,000, while dosimeters range so indicated in the applicable paragraphs of
in price from about $750 to $1,500. Smaller 1910.95 and appendices.
companies may find it more economical to It should be noted that OSHA does not re-
rent equipment rather than to purchase it. quire that employers purchase a copy of the
Names of equipment suppliers may be found referenced publications. Employers, how-
in the telephone book (Yellow Pages) under ever, may desire to obtain a copy of the ref-
headings such as: Safety Equipment, In- erenced publications for their own informa-
dustrial Hygiene, or Engineers-Acous- tion.
tical. In addition to providing information The designation of the paragraph of the
on obtaining noise monitoring equipment, standard in which the referenced publica-
many companies and individuals included tions appear, the titles of the publications,
under such listings can provide professional and the availability of the publications are
advice on how to conduct a valid noise moni- as follows:
Paragraph designation Referenced publication Available from
Appendix B ......................... List of Personal Hearing Protectors and National Technical Information Service, Port Royal
Attenuation Data, HEW Pub. No. 76 Road, Springfield, VA 22161.
120, 1975. NTISPB267461.
Appendix D ......................... Specification for Sound Level Meters, American National Standards Institute, Inc., 1430
S1.41971 (R1976). Broadway, New York, NY 10018.
1910.95(k)(2), appendix E Specifications for Audiometers, S3.6 American National Standards Institute, Inc., 1430
1969. Broadway, New York, NY 10018.
Appendix D ......................... Specification for Octave, Half-Octave Back Numbers Department, Dept. STD, American In-
and Third-Octave Band Filter Sets, stitute of Physics, 333 E. 45th St., New York, NY
S1.111971 (R1976). 10017; American National Standards Institute, Inc.,
1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018.
The referenced publications (or a micro- APPENDIX I TO 1910.95DEFINITIONS

fiche of the publications) are available for
These definitions apply to the following
review at many universities and public li-
terms as used in paragraphs (c) through (n)
braries throughout the country. These publi-
of 29 CFR 1910.95.
cations may also be examined at the OSHA
Action levelAn 8-hour time-weighted aver-
Technical Data Center, Room N2439, United
age of 85 decibels measured on the A-scale,
States Department of Labor, 200 Constitu- slow response, or equivalently, a dose of
tion Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20210, fifty percent.
(202) 2197500 or at any OSHA Regional Office AudiogramA chart, graph, or table result-
(see telephone directories under United ing from an audiometric test showing an
States GovernmentLabor Department). individuals hearing threshold levels as a
function of frequency.
AudiologistA professional, specializing in
the study and rehabilitation of hearing,
225
who is certified by the American Speech- of this specification shall include the
Language-Hearing Association or licensed microwave frequency region.
by a state board of examiners. (ii) Partial body irradiation. Pertains
Baseline audiogramThe audiogram against
to the case in which part of the body is
which future audiograms are compared.
Criterion sound levelA sound level of 90 exposed to the incident electro-
decibels. magnetic energy.
Decibel (dB)Unit of measurement of sound (iii) Radiation protection guide. Radi-
level. ation level which should not be exceed-
Hertz (Hz)Unit of measurement of freed without careful consideration of the
quency, numerically equal to cycles per reasons for doing so.
second. (iv) The word symbol as used in
Medical pathologyA disorder or disease.
this specification refers to the overall
For purposes of this regulation, a condi-
tion or disease affecting the ear, which
design, shape, and coloring of the rf ra-
should be treated by a physician specialist. diation sign shown in figure G11.
Noise doseThe ratio, expressed as a per- (v) Whole body irradiation. Pertains to
centage, of (1) the time integral, over a the case in which the entire body is ex-
stated time or event, of the 0.6 power of the posed to the incident electromagnetic
measured SLOW exponential time-aver- energy or in which the cross section of
aged, squared A-weighted sound pressure the body is smaller than the cross sec-
and (2) the product of the criterion duration of the incident radiation beam.
tion (8 hours) and the 0.6 power of the
(2) Radiation protection guide. (i) For
squared sound pressure corresponding to
the criterion sound level (90 dB).
normal environmental conditions and
Noise dosimeterAn instrument that inte- for incident electromagnetic energy of
grates a function of sound pressure over a frequencies from 10 MHz to 100 GHz,
period of time in such a manner that it di- the radiation protection guide is 10
rectly indicates a noise dose. mW/cm.2 (milliwatt per square centi-
OtolaryngologistA physician specializing meter) as averaged over any possible
in diagnosis and treatment of disorders of 0.1-hour period. This means the fol-
the ear, nose and throat. lowing:
Representative exposureMeasurements of
an employees noise dose or 8-hour time- Power density: 10 mW./cm.2 for periods of 0.1-
weighted average sound level that the em- hour or more.
ployers deem to be representative of the Energy density: 1 mW.-hr./cm.2 (milliwatt
exposures of other employees in the work- hour per square centimeter) during any 0.1-
place. hour period.
Sound levelTen times the common loga-
rithm of the ratio of the square of the This guide applies whether the radi-
measured A-weighted sound pressure to the ation is continuous or intermittent.
square of the standard reference pressure (ii) These formulated recommenda-
of 20 micropascals. Unit: decibels (dB). For tions pertain to both whole body irra-
use with this regulation, SLOW time re- diation and partial body irradiation.
sponse, in accordance with ANSI S1.41971 Partial body irradiation must be in-
(R1976), is required.
cluded since it has been shown that
Sound level meterAn instrument for the
measurement of sound level. some parts of the human body (e.g.,
Time-weighted average sound levelThat eyes, testicles) may be harmed if ex-
sound level, which if constant over an 8- posed to incident radiation levels sig-
hour exposure, would result in the same nificantly in excess of the rec-
noise dose as is measured. ommended levels.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 46 (3) Warning symbol. (i) The warning
FR 4161, Jan. 16, 1981; 46 FR 62845, Dec. 29, symbol for radio frequency radiation
1981; 48 FR 9776, Mar. 8, 1983; 48 FR 29687, hazards shall consist of a red isosceles
June 28, 1983; 54 FR 24333, June 7, 1989; 61 FR triangle above an inverted black isos-
9236, Mar. 7, 1996] celes triangle, separated and outlined
by an aluminum color border. The
1910.97 Nonionizing radiation. words WarningRadio-Frequency Ra-
(a) Electromagnetic radiation(1) Defi- diation Hazard shall appear in the
nitions applicable to this paragraph. (i) upper triangle. See figure G11.
The term electromagnetic radiation is re- (ii) American National Standard
stricted to that portion of the spec- Safety Color Code for Marking Phys-
trum commonly defined as the radio ical Hazards and the Identification of
frequency region, which for the purpose Certain Equipment, Z53.11953, which is
226
incorporated by reference as specified instructions is at the discretion of the

in 1910.6, shall be used for color speci- user. If such information is included it
fication. All lettering and the border shall appear in the lower triangle of
shall be of aluminum color. the warning symbol.
(iii) The inclusion and choice of
warning information or precautionary
FIGURE G11 RADIO-FREQUENCY RADIATION HAZARD WARNING SYMBOL
227
EC27OC91.024
(4) Scope. This section applies to all 983 (48 FR 35736), 190 (55 FR 9033), or 696 (62
radiations originating from radio sta- FR 111), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 11.
tions, radar equipment, and other pos- Sections 1910.103, 1910.106 through 1910.111,
sible sources of electromagnetic radi- and 1910.119, 1910.120, and 1910.122 through
ation such as used for communication, 1910.126 also issued under 29 CFR part 1911.
radio navigation, and industrial and Section 1910.119 also issued under Section
304, Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990
scientific purposes. This section does
(Pub.L. 101549), reprinted at 29 U.S.C. 655
not apply to the deliberate exposure of
Note.
patients by, or under the direction of, Section 1910.120 also issued under Section
practitioners of the healing arts. 126, Superfund Amendments and Reauthor-
(b) [Reserved] ization Act of 1986 as amended (29 U.S.C. 655
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 61 Note), and 5 U.S.C. 553.
FR 9236, Mar. 7, 1996]
1910.101 Compressed gases (general
1910.98 Effective dates. requirements).
(a) The provisions of this Subpart G (a) Inspection of compressed gas cyl-
shall become effective on August 27, inders. Each employer shall determine
1971, except as provided in the remain- that compressed gas cylinders under
ing paragraphs of this section. his control are in a safe condition to
(b) The following provisions shall be- the extent that this can be determined
come effective on February 15, 1972: by visual inspection. Visual and other
1910.94 (a)(2)(iii), (a)(3), (a)(4), (b), (c)(2), inspections shall be conducted as pre-
(c)(3), (c)(4), (c)(5), (c)(6)(i), (c)(6)(ii), scribed in the Hazardous Materials
(d)(1)(ii), (d)(3), (d)(4), (d)(5), and (d)(7). Regulations of the Department of
(c) Notwithstanding anything in Transportation (49 CFR parts 171179
paragraph (a), (b), or (d) of this section, and 14 CFR part 103). Where those regu-
any provision in any other section of lations are not applicable, visual and
this subpart which contains in itself a other inspections shall be conducted in
specific effective date or time limita- accordance with Compressed Gas Asso-
tion shall become effective on such ciation Pamphlets C61968 and C8
date or shall apply in accordance with 1962, which is incorporated by reference
such limitation. as specified in 1910.6.
(d) Notwithstanding anything in (b) Compressed gases. The in-plant
paragraph (a) of this section, if any handling, storage, and utilization of all
standard in 41 CFR part 50204, other compressed gases in cylinders, portable
than a national consensus standard in- tanks, rail tankcars, or motor vehicle
corporated by reference in 50 cargo tanks shall be in accordance with
204.2(a)(1), is or becomes applicable at Compressed Gas Association Pamphlet
any time to any employment and place P11965, which is incorporated by ref-
of employment, by virtue of the Walsh- erence as specified in 1910.6.
Healey Public Contracts Act, or the (c) Safety relief devices for compressed
Service Contract Act of 1965, or the Na- gas containers. Compressed gas cyl-
tional Foundation on Arts and Human-
inders, portable tanks, and cargo tanks
ities Act of 1965, any corresponding es-
shall have pressure relief devices in-
tablished Federal standard in this Sub-
part G which is derived from 41 CFR stalled and maintained in accordance
part 50204 shall also become effective, with Compressed Gas Association Pam-
and shall be applicable to such employ- phlets S1.11963 and 1965 addenda and
ment and place of employment, on the S1.21963, which is incorporated by ref-
same date. erence as specified in 1910.6.
Subpart HHazardous Materials FR 9236, Mar. 7, 1996]
AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-

1910.102 Acetylene.
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 (a) Cylinders. The in-plant transfer,
U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labors Or- handling, storage, and utilization of
ders Nos. 1271 (36 FR 8754), 876 (41 FR 25059),
228
acetylene in cylinders shall be in ac- the consumer premises and is delivered

cordance with Compressed Gas Associa- by mobile equipment.
tion Pamphlet G11966, which is incor- (b) Paragraph (b) of this section does
porated by reference as specified in not apply to gaseous hydrogen systems
1910.6. having a total hydrogen content of less
(b) Piped systems. The piped systems than 400 cubic feet, nor to hydrogen
for the inplant transfer and distribu- manufacturing plants or other estab-
tion of acetylene shall be designed, in- lishments operated by the hydrogen
stalled, maintained, and operated in supplier or his agent for the purpose of
accordance with Compressed Gas Asso-
storing hydrogen and refilling portable
ciation Pamphlet G1.31959, which is
containers, trailers, mobile supply
incorporated by reference as specified
in 1910.6. trucks, or tank cars.
(c) Generators and filling cylinders. (ii) Liquefied hydrogen systems. (a)
Plants for the generation of acetylene Paragraph (c) of this section applies to
and the charging (filling) of acetylene the installation of liquefied hydrogen
cylinders shall be designed, con- systems on consumer premises.
structed, and tested in accordance with (b) Paragraph (c) of this section does
the standards prescribed in Compressed not apply to liquefied hydrogen port-
Gas Association Pamphlet G1.41966, able containers of less than 150 liters
which is incorporated by reference as (39.63 gallons) capacity; nor to liquefied
specified in 1910.6. hydrogen manufacturing plants or
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 61 other establishments operated by the
FR 9236, Mar. 7, 1996] hydrogen supplier or his agent for the
sole purpose of storing liquefied hydro-
1910.103 Hydrogen. gen and refilling portable containers,
(a) General(1) Definitions. As used in trailers, mobile supply trucks, or tank
this section (i) Gaseous hydrogen sys- cars.
tem is one in which the hydrogen is de- (b) Gaseous hydrogen systems(1) De-
livered, stored and discharged in the sign(i) Containers. (a) Hydrogen con-
gaseous form to consumers piping. The tainers shall comply with one of the
system includes stationary or movable following:
containers, pressure regulators, safety (1) Designed, constructed, and tested
relief devices, manifolds, inter- in accordance with appropriate require-
connecting piping and controls. The ments of ASME Boiler and Pressure
system terminates at the point where Vessel Code, Section VIIIUnfired
hydrogen at service pressure first en- Pressure Vessels1968, which is incor-
ters the consumers distribution pip- porated by reference as specified in
ing. 1910.6.
(ii) ApprovedMeans, unless other- (2) Designed, constructed, tested and
wise indicated, listed or approved by a maintained in accordance with U.S.
nationally recognized testing labora- Department of Transportation Speci-
tory. Refer to 1910.7 for definition of fications and Regulations.
nationally recognized testing labora-
(b) Permanently installed containers
tory.
(iii) ListedSee approved. shall be provided with substantial non-
(iv) ASMEAmerican Society of Me- combustible supports on firm non-
chanical Engineers. combustible foundations.
(v) DOT SpecificationsRegulations (c) Each portable container shall be
of the Department of Transportation legibly marked with the name Hydro-
published in 49 CFR Chapter I. gen in accordance with Marking
(vi) DOT regulationsSee 1910.103 Portable Compressed Gas Containers to
(a)(1)(v). Identify the Material Contained ANSI
(2) Scope(i) Gaseous hydrogen sys- Z48.11954, which is incorporated by
tems. (a) Paragraph (b) of this section reference as specified in 1910.6. Each
applies to the installation of gaseous manifolded hydrogen supply unit shall
hydrogen systems on consumer prem- be legibly marked with the name Hy-
ises where the hydrogen supply to the drogen or a legend such as This unit
consumer premises originates outside contains hydrogen.
229
(ii) Safety relief devices. (a) Hydrogen be adequately secured to prevent move-
containers shall be equipped with safe- ment.
ty relief devices as required by the (f) Mobile hydrogen supply units
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, shall be electrically bonded to the sys-
Section VIII Unfired Pressure Vessels, tem before discharging hydrogen.
1968 or the DOT Specifications and (v) Marking. The hydrogen storage lo-
Regulations under which the container cation shall be permanently placarded
is fabricated. as follows: HYDROGENFLAM-
(b) Safety relief devices shall be ar- MABLE GASNO SMOKINGNO
ranged to discharge upward and unob- OPEN FLAMES, or equivalent.
structed to the open air in such a man- (vi) Testing. After installations, all
ner as to prevent any impingement of piping, tubing, and fittings shall be
escaping gas upon the container, adja- tested and proved hydrogen gas tight
cent structure or personnel. This re- at maximum operating pressure.
quirement does not apply to DOT Spec- (2) Location(i) General. (a) The sys-
ification containers having an internal tem shall be located so that it is read-
volume of 2 cubic feet or less. ily accessible to delivery equipment
(c) Safety relief devices or vent pip- and to authorized personnel.
ing shall be designed or located so that (b) Systems shall be located above
moisture cannot collect and freeze in a ground.
manner which would interfere with (c) Systems shall not be located be-
proper operation of the device. neath electric power lines.
(iii) Piping, tubing, and fittings. (a) (d) Systems shall not be located close
Piping, tubing, and fittings shall be to flammable liquid piping or piping of
suitable for hydrogen service and for other flammable gases.
the pressures and temperatures in- (e) Systems near aboveground flam-
volved. Cast iron pipe and fittings shall mable liquid storage shall be located
not be used. on ground higher than the flammable
(b) Piping and tubing shall conform liquid storage except when dikes, di-
to Section 2Industrial Gas and Air version curbs, grading, or separating
PipingCode for Pressure Piping, solid walls are used to prevent accumu-
ANSI B31.11967 with addenda B31.1 lation of flammable liquids under the
1969, which is incorporated by reference system.
as specified in 1910.6. (ii) Specific requirements. (a) The loca-
tion of a system, as determined by the
(c) Joints in piping and tubing may
maximum total contained volume of
be made by welding or brazing or by
hydrogen, shall be in the order of pref-
use of flanged, threaded, socket, or
erence as indicated by Roman numer-
compression fittings. Gaskets and
als in Table H1.
thread sealants shall be suitable for
hydrogen service. TABLE H1
(iv) Equipment assembly. (a) Valves,
gauges, regulators, and other acces- Size of hydrogen system
sories shall be suitable for hydrogen Nature of location 3,000 CF In excess
Less than
service. to 15,000 of 15,000
3,000 CF CF CF
(b) Installation of hydrogen systems
shall be supervised by personnel famil- Outdoors .................... I ............... IDI..
In a separate building II .............. II .............. II.
iar with proper practices with ref- In a special room ...... III ............. III ............. Not per-
erence to their construction and use. mitted.
(c) Storage containers, piping, valves, Inside buildings not in IV ............. Not per- Not per-
regulating equipment, and other acces- a special room and mitted. mitted.
exposed to other
sories shall be readily accessible, and occupancies.
shall be protected against physical
damage and against tampering. (b) The minimum distance in feet
(d) Cabinets or housings containing from a hydrogen system of indicated
hydrogen control or operating equip- capacity located outdoors, in separate
ment shall be adequately ventilated. buildings or in special rooms to any
(e) Each mobile hydrogen supply unit specified outdoor exposure shall be in
used as part of a hydrogen system shall accordance with Table H2.
230
(c) The distances in Table H2 Items adequate fire walls are located between
1, 14, and 3 to 10 inclusive do not apply the system and the exposure.
where protective structures such as
TABLE H2
Type of outdoor exposure Size of hydrogen system
3,000 CF In excess
Less than to 15,000 of 15,000
3,000 CF CF CF
1. Building or structure ............................... Wood frame construction 1 ........................ 10 25 50

Heavy timber, noncombustible or ordinary 0 10 2 25
construction 1.
Fire-resistive construction 1 ........................ 0 0 0
2. Wall openings ......................................... Not above any part of a system ................ 10 10 10
Above any part of a system ...................... 25 25 25
3. Flammable liquids above ground. .......... 0 to 1,000 gallons ...................................... 10 25 25
In excess of 1,000 gallons ......................... 25 50 50
4. Flammable liquids below ground0 to Tank ........................................................... 10 10 10
1,000 gallons. Vent or fill opening of tank ........................ 25 25 25
5. Flammable liquids below groundin ex- Tank ........................................................... 20 20 20
cess of 1,000 gallons.. Vent or fill opening of tank ........................ 25 25 25
6. Flammable gas storage, either high 0 to 15,000 CF capacity ............................ 10 25 25
pressure or low pressure.. In excess of 15,000 CF capacity ............... 25 50 50
7. Oxygen storage ...................................... 12,000 CF or less 4 .................................... .................. .................. ..................
More than 12,000 CF 5 .............................. .................. .................. ..................
8. Fast burning solids such as ordinary lumber, excelsior or paper .................................. 50 50 50
9. Slow burning solids such as heavy timber or coal ......................................................... 25 25 25
10. Open flames and other sources of ignition ................................................................... 25 25 25
11. Air compressor intakes or inlets to ventilating or air-conditioning equipment .............. 50 50 50
12. Concentration of people 3 .............................................................................................. 25 50 50
1 Refer to NFPA No. 220 Standard Types of Building Construction for definitions of various types of construction. (1969 Ed.)
2 But not less than one-half the height of adjacent side wall of the structure.
3 Incongested areas such as offices, lunchrooms, locker rooms, time-clock areas.
4 Refer to NFPA No. 51, gas systems for welding and cutting (1969).
5 Refer to NFPA No. 566, bulk oxygen systems at consumer sites (1969).
(d) Hydrogen systems of less than tem shall meet all of the requirements
3,000 CF when located inside buildings of this paragraph.
and exposed to other occupancies shall (3) Design consideration at specific loca-
be situated in the building so that the tions(i) Outdoor locations. (a) Where
system will be as follows: protective walls or roofs are provided,
(1) In an adequately ventilated area they shall be constructed of non-
as in paragraph (b)(3)(ii)(b) of this sec- combustible materials.
tion. (b) Where the enclosing sides adjoin
(2) Twenty feet from stored flam- each other, the area shall be properly
mable materials or oxidizing gases. ventilated.
(3) Twenty-five feet from open (c) Electrical equipment within 15
flames, ordinary electrical equipment feet shall be in accordance with sub-
or other sources of ignition. part S of this part.
(4) Twenty-five feet from concentra- (ii) Separate buildings. (a) Separate
tions of people. buildings shall be built of at least non-
(5) Fifty feet from intakes of ventila- combustible construction. Windows
tion or air-conditioning equipment and and doors shall be located so as to be
air compressors. readily accessible in case of emer-
(6) Fifty feet from other flammable gency. Windows shall be of glass or
gas storage. plastic in metal frames.
(7) Protected against damage or in- (b) Adequate ventilation to the out-
jury due to falling objects or working doors shall be provided. Inlet openings
activity in the area. shall be located near the floor in exte-
(8) More than one system of 3,000 CF rior walls only. Outlet openings shall
or less may be installed in the same be located at the high point of the
room, provided the systems are sepa- room in exterior walls or roof. Inlet
rated by at least 50 feet. Each such sys- and outlet openings shall each have
231
minimum total area of one (1) square (4) Operating instructions. For instal-
foot per 1,000 cubic feet of room vol- lations which require any operation of
ume. Discharge from outlet openings equipment by the user, legible instruc-
shall be directed or conducted to a safe tions shall be maintained at operating
location. locations.
(c) Explosion venting shall be pro- (5) Maintenance. The equipment and
vided in exterior walls or roof only. functioning of each charged gaseous
The venting area shall be equal to not hydrogen system shall be maintained
less than 1 square foot per 30 cubic feet in a safe operating condition in accord-
of room volume and may consist of any ance with the requirements of this sec-
one or any combination of the fol- tion. The area within 15 feet of any hy-
lowing: Walls of light, noncombustible drogen container shall be kept free of
material, preferably single thickness, dry vegetation and combustible mate-
single strength glass; lightly fastened rial.
hatch covers; lightly fastened swinging (c) Liquefied hydrogen systems(1) De-
doors in exterior walls opening out- sign(i) Containers. (a) Hydrogen con-
ward; lightly fastened walls or roof de- tainers shall comply with the fol-
signed to relieve at a maximum pres- lowing: Storage containers shall be de-
sure of 25 pounds per square foot. signed, constructed, and tested in ac-
(d) There shall be no sources of igni- cordance with appropriate require-
tion from open flames, electrical equipments of the ASME Boiler and Pres-
ment, or heating equipment. sure Vessel Code, Section VIIIUnfired
(e) Electrical equipment shall be in Pressure Vessels (1968) or applicable
accordance with subpart S of this part provisions of API Standard 620, Rec-
for Class I, Division 2 locations. ommended Rules for Design and Con-
(f) Heating, if provided, shall be by struction of Large, Welded, Low-Pres-
steam, hot water, or other indirect sure Storage Tanks, Second Edition
means. (June 1963) and appendix R (April 1965),
(iii) Special rooms. (a) Floor, walls, which is incorporated by reference as
and ceiling shall have a fire-resistance specified in 1910.6.
rating of at least 2 hours. Walls or par- (b) Portable containers shall be de-
titions shall be continuous from floor signed, constructed and tested in ac-
to ceiling and shall be securely an- cordance with DOT Specifications and
chored. At least one wall shall be an Regulations.
exterior wall. Openings to other parts (ii) Supports. Permanently installed
of the building shall not be permitted. containers shall be provided with sub-
Windows and doors shall be in exterior stantial noncombustible supports se-
walls and shall be located so as to be curely anchored on firm noncombus-
readily accessible in case of emer- tible foundations. Steel supports in ex-
gency. Windows shall be of glass or cess of 18 inches in height shall be pro-
plastic in metal frames. tected with a protective coating having
(b) Ventilation shall be as provided in a 2-hour fire-resistance rating.
paragraph (b)(3)(ii)(b) of this section. (iii) Marking. Each container shall be
(c) Explosion venting shall be as pro- legibly marked to indicate LIQUE-
vided in paragraph (b)(3)(ii)(c) of this FIED HYDROGENFLAMMABLE
section. GAS.
(d) There shall be no sources of igni- (iv) Safety relief devices. (a)(1) Sta-
tion from open flames, electrical equip- tionary liquefied hydrogen containers
ment, or heating equipment. shall be equipped with safety relief de-
(e) Electric equipment shall be in ac- vices sized in accordance with CGA
cordance with the requirements of sub- Pamphlet S1, Part 3, Safety Relief De-
part S of this part for Class I, Division vice Standards for Compressed Gas
2 locations. Storage Containers, which is incor-
(f) Heating, if provided, shall be by porated by reference as specified in
steam, hot water, or indirect means. 1910.6.
232
(2) Portable liquefied hydrogen con- operating at low temperatures and to

tainers complying with the U.S. De- prevent air condensate from contacting
partment of Transportation Regula- piping, structural members, and sur-
tions shall be equipped with safety re- faces not suitable for cryogenic tem-
lief devices as required in the U.S. De- peratures. Only those insulating mate-
partment of Transportation Specifica- rials which are rated nonburning in ac-
tions and Regulations. Safety relief de- cordance with ASTM Procedures D1692
vices shall be sized in accordance with 68, which is incorporated by reference
the requirements of CGA Pamphlet S as specified in 1910.6, may be used.
1, Safety Relief Device Standards, Part Other protective means may be used to
1, Compressed Gas Cylinders and Part protect personnel. The insulation shall
2, Cargo and Portable Tank Containers. be designed to have a vapor-tight seal
(b) Safety relief devices shall be ar- in the outer covering to prevent the
ranged to discharge unobstructed to condensation of air and subsequent ox-
the outdoors and in such a manner as ygen enrichment within the insulation.
to prevent impingement of escaping The insulation material and outside
liquid or gas upon the container, adja- shield shall also be of adequate design
cent structures or personnel. See para- to prevent attrition of the insulation
graph (c)(2)(i)(f) of this section for due to normal operating conditions.
venting of safety relief devices in spe- (e) Uninsulated piping and equipment
cial locations. which operate at liquefied-hydrogen
(c) Safety relief devices or vent pip- temperature shall not be installed
ing shall be designed or located so that above asphalt surfaces or other com-
moisture cannot collect and freeze in a bustible materials in order to prevent
manner which would interfere with contact of liquid air with such mate-
proper operation of the device. rials. Drip pans may be installed under
(d) Safety relief devices shall be pro- uninsulated piping and equipment to
vided in piping wherever liquefied hy- retain and vaporize condensed liquid
drogen could be trapped between clo- air.
sures. (vi) Equipment assembly. (a) Valves,
(v) Piping, tubing, and fittings. (a) Pip- gauges, regulators, and other acces-
ing, tubing, and fittings and gasket and sories shall be suitable for liquefied hy-
thread sealants shall be suitable for drogen service and for the pressures
hydrogen service at the pressures and and temperatures involved.
temperatures involved. Consideration (b) Installation of liquefied hydrogen
shall be given to the thermal expansion systems shall be supervised by per-
and contraction of piping systems sonnel familiar with proper practices
when exposed to temperature fluctua- and with reference to their construc-
tions of ambient to liquefied hydrogen tion and use.
temperatures. (c) Storage containers, piping, valves,
(b) Gaseous hydrogen piping and tub- regulating equipment, and other acces-
ing (above 20 F.) shall conform to sories shall be readily accessible and
the applicable sections of Pressure Pip- shall be protected against physical
ing Section 2Industrial Gas and Air damage and against tampering. A shut-
Piping, ANSI B31.11967 with addenda off valve shall be located in liquid
B31.11969. Design of liquefied hydrogen product withdrawal lines as close to
or cold (20 F. or below) gas piping the container as practical. On con-
shall use Petroleum Refinery Piping tainers of over 2,000 gallons capacity,
ANSI B31.31966 or Refrigeration Pip- this shutoff valve shall be of the re-
ing ANSI B31.51966 with addenda mote control type with no connections,
B31.5a1968 as a guide, which are incor- flanges, or other appurtenances (other
porated by reference as specified in than a welded manual shutoff valve) al-
1910.6. lowed in the piping between the shutoff
(c) Joints in piping and tubing shall valve and its connection to the inner
preferably be made by welding or braz- container.
ing; flanged, threaded, socket, or suit- (d) Cabinets or housings containing
able compression fittings may be used. hydrogen control equipment shall be
(d) Means shall be provided to mini- ventilated to prevent any accumula-
mize exposure of personnel to piping tion of hydrogen gas.
233
(vii) Testing. (a) After installation, (x) Bonding and grounding. The lique-
all field-erected piping shall be tested fied hydrogen container and associated
and proved hydrogen gas-tight at oper- piping shall be electrically bonded and
ating pressure and temperature. grounded.
(b) Containers if out of service in ex- (2) Location of liquefied hydrogen stor-
cess of 1 year shall be inspected and age(i) General requirements. (a) The
tested as outlined in (a) of this subdivi- storage containers shall be located so
sion. The safety relief devices shall be that they are readily accessible to mo-
checked to determine if they are oper- bile supply equipment at ground level
able and properly set. and to authorized personnel.
(viii) Liquefied hydrogen vaporizers. (a)
(b) The containers shall not be ex-
The vaporizer shall be anchored and its
posed by electric power lines, flam-
connecting piping shall be sufficiently
flexible to provide for the effect of ex- mable liquid lines, flammable gas lines,
pansion and contraction due to tem- or lines carrying oxidizing materials.
perature changes. (c) When locating liquified hydrogen
(b) The vaporizer and its piping shall storage containers near above-ground
be adequately protected on the hydro- flammable liquid storage or liquid oxy-
gen and heating media sections with gen storage, it is advisable to locate
safety relief devices. the liquefied hydrogen container on
(c) Heat used in a liquefied hydrogen ground higher than flammable liquid
vaporizer shall be indirectly supplied storage or liquid oxygen storage.
utilizing media such as air, steam, (d) Where it is necessary to locate
water, or water solutions. the liquefied hydrogen container on
(d) A low temperature shutoff switch ground that is level with or lower than
shall be provided in the vaporizer dis- adjacent flammable liquid storage or
charge piping to prevent flow of lique- liquid oxygen storage, suitable protec-
fied hydrogen in the event of the loss of tive means shall be taken (such as by
the heat source. diking, diversion curbs, grading), with
(ix) Electrical systems. (a) Electrical respect to the adjacent flammable liq-
wiring and equipment located within 3 uid storage or liquid oxygen storage, to
feet of a point where connections are prevent accumulation of liquids within
regularly made and disconnected, shall 50 feet of the liquefied hydrogen con-
be in accordance with subpart S of this tainer.
part, for Class I, Group B, Division 1 lo- (e) Storage sites shall be fenced and
cations. posted to prevent entrance by unau-
(b) Except as provided in (a) of this thorized personnel. Sites shall also be
subdivision, electrical wiring, and placarded as follows: Liquefied Hydro-
equipment located within 25 feet of a
genFlammable GasNo Smoking
point where connections are regularly
No Open Flames.
made and disconnected or within 25
feet of a liquid hydrogen storage con- (f) If liquified hydrogen is located in
tainer, shall be in accordance with sub- (as specified in Table H3) a separate
part S of this part, for Class I, Group B, building, in a special room, or inside
Division 2 locations. When equipment buildings when not in a special room
approved for class I, group B and exposed to other occupancies, con-
atmospheres is not commercially avail- tainers shall have the safety relief de-
able, the equipment may be vices vented unobstructed to the out-
(1) Purged or ventilated in accord- doors at a minimum elevation of 25 feet
ance with NFPA No. 4961967, Standard above grade to a safe location as re-
for Purged Enclosures for Electrical quired in paragraph (c)(1)(iv)(b) of this
Equipment in Hazardous Locations, section.
(2) Intrinsically safe, or (ii) Specific requirements. (a) The loca-
(3) Approved for Class I, Group C tion of liquefied hydrogen storage, as
atmospheres. This requirement does determined by the maximum total
not apply to electrical equipment quantity of liquified hydrogen, shall be
which is installed on mobile supply in the order of preference as indicated
trucks or tank cars from which the by Roman numerals in the following
storage container is filled. Table H3.
234
TABLE H3MAXIMUM TOTAL QUANTITY OF LIQUEFIED HYDROGEN STORAGE PERMITTED

Size of hydrogen storage (capacity in gallons)
Nature of location 39.63 (150 liters) 51 to 300 301 to 600 In excess of 600
to 50
Outdoors ................................................................. I ......................... I ......................... I ......................... I.

In a separate building ............................................. II ........................ II ........................ II ........................ Not permitted.
In a special room .................................................... III ....................... III ....................... Not permitted .... Do.
Inside buildings not in a special room and ex- IV ....................... Not permitted .... ......do ................ Do.
posed to other occupancies.
NOTE: This table does not apply to the storage in dewars of the type generally used in laboratories for experimental purposes.
(b) The minimum distance in feet fied hydrogen containers of 50 gallons

from liquefied hydrogen systems of in- or less capacity as permitted in Table
dicated storage capacity located out- H3 and in compliance with subdivision
doors, in a separate building, or in a (i)(f) of this subparagraph when housed
special room to any specified exposure inside buildings not located in a special
shall be in accordance with Table H4. room and exposed to other occupancies
shall comply with the following min-
TABLE H4MINIMUM DISTANCE (FEET) FROM imum requirements:
LIQUEFIED HYDROGEN SYSTEMS TO EXPO- (a) Be located 20 feet from flammable
SURE 1 2 liquids and readily combustible mate-
rials such as excelsior or paper.
Liquefied hydrogen storage
(capacity in gallons) (b) Be located 25 feet from ordinary
electrical equipment and other sources
Type of exposure 39.63 15,001 of ignition including process or analyt-
(150 li- 3,501 to to
ters) to 15,000 ical equipment.
30,000
3,500
(c) Be located 25 feet from concentra-
1. Fire-resistive building and tions of people.
fire walls 3 ......................... 5 5 5 (d) Be located 50 feet from intakes of
2. Noncombustible building 3 25 50 75
3. Other buildings 3 .............. 50 75 100
ventilation and air-conditioning equip-
4. Wall openings, air-comment or intakes of compressors.
pressor intakes, inlets for (e) Be located 50 feet from storage of
air-conditioning or ven- other flammable-gases or storage of
tilating equipment ............. 75 75 75
5. Flammable liquids (above oxidizing gases.
ground and vent or fill (f) Containers shall be protected
openings if below ground) against damage or injury due to falling
(see 513 and 514) ........... 50 75 100
6. Between stationary lique-
objects or work activity in the area.
fied hydrogen containers 5 5 5 (g) Containers shall be firmly secured
7. Flammable gas storage .. 50 75 100 and stored in an upright position.
8. Liquid oxygen storage (h) Welding or cutting operations,
and other oxidizers (see
513 and 514) ................... 100 100 100
and smoking shall be prohibited while
9. Combustible solids .......... 50 75 100 hydrogen is in the room.
10. Open flames, smoking (i) The area shall be adequately ven-
and welding ...................... 50 50 50 tilated. Safety relief devices on the
11. Concentrations of peo-
ple .................................... 75 75 75 containers shall be vented directly out-
1 The
doors or to a suitable hood. See para-
distance in Nos. 2, 3, 5, 7, 9, and 12 in Table H4
may be reduced where protective structures, such as firewalls graphs (c)(1)(iv)(b) and (c)(2)(i)(f) of
equal to height of top of the container, to safeguard the lique- this section.
fied hydrogen storage system, are located between the lique-
fied hydrogen storage installation and the exposure. (3) Design considerations at specific lo-
2 Where protective structures are provided, ventilation and
cations(i) Outdoor locations. (a) Out-
confinement of product should be considered. The 5-foot dis-
tance in Nos. 1 and 6 facilitates maintenance and enhances door location shall mean outside of any
ventilation.
3 Refer to Standard Types of Building Construction, NFPA
building or structure, and includes lo-
No. 2201969 for definitions of various types of construction. cations under a weather shelter or can-
In congested areas such as offices, lunchrooms, locker opy provided such locations are not en-
rooms, time-clock areas.
closed by more than two walls set at
(iii) Handling of liquefied hydrogen in- right angles and are provided with
side buildings other than separate build- vent-space between the walls and vent-
ings and special rooms. Portable lique- ed roof or canopy.
235
(b) Roadways and yard surfaces lo- Windows and doors shall be in exterior
cated below liquefied hydrogen piping, walls and doors shall be located in such
from which liquid air may drip, shall a manner that they will be accessible
be constructed of noncombustible main an emergency. Windows shall be of
terials. shatterproof glass or plastic in metal
(c) If protective walls are provided, frames.
they shall be constructed of non- (b) Ventilation shall be as provided in
combustible materials and in accord- paragraph (c)(3)(ii)(b) of this section.
ance with the provisions of paragraph
(c) Explosion venting shall be pro-
(c)(3)(i)(a) of this section.
(d) Electrical wiring and equipment vided in exterior walls or roof only.
shall comply with paragraph (c)(1)(ix) The venting area shall be equal to not
(a) and (b) of this section. less than 1 square foot per 30 cubic feet
(e) Adequate lighting shall be proof room volume and may consist of any
vided for nighttime transfer operation. one or any combination of the fol-
(ii) Separate buildings. (a) Separate lowing: Walls of light noncombustible
buildings shall be of light noncombus- material; lightly fastened hatch covers;
tible construction on a substantial lightly fastened swinging doors open-
frame. Walls and roofs shall be lightly ing outward in exterior walls; lightly
fastened and designed to relieve at a fastened walls or roofs designed to re-
maximum internal pressure of 25 lieve at a maximum pressure of 25
pounds per square foot. Windows shall pounds per square foot.
be of shatterproof glass or plastic in (d) There shall be no sources of igni-
metal frames. Doors shall be located in tion.
such a manner that they will be readily
(e) Electrical wiring and equipment
accessible to personnel in an emer-
gency. shall comply with paragraph (c)(1)(ix)
(b) Adequate ventilation to the out- (a) and (b) of this section except that
doors shall be provided. Inlet openings the provision of paragraph (c)(1)(ix)(b)
shall be located near the floor level in of this section shall apply to all elec-
exterior walls only. Outlet openings trical wiring and equipment in the spe-
shall be located at the high point of the cial room.
room in exterior walls or roof. Both the (f) Heating, if provided, shall be
inlet and outlet vent openings shall steam, hot water, or by other indirect
have a minimum total area of 1 square means.
foot per 1,000 cubic feet of room vol- (4) Operating instructions(i) Written
ume. Discharge from outlet openings instructions. For installation which re-
shall be directed or conducted to a safe quire any operation of equipment by
location. the user, legible instructions shall be
(c) There shall be no sources of igni- maintained at operating locations.
tion.
(ii) Attendant. A qualified person
(d) Electrical wiring and equipment
shall comply with paragraphs (c)(1)(ix) shall be in attendance at all times
(a) and (b) of this section except that while the mobile hydrogen supply unit
the provisions of paragraph (c)(1)(ix)(b) is being unloaded.
of this section shall apply to all elec- (iii) Security. Each mobile liquefied
trical wiring and equipment in the sep- hydrogen supply unit used as part of a
arate building. hydrogen system shall be adequately
(e) Heating, if provided, shall be by secured to prevent movement.
steam, hot water, or other indirect (iv) Grounding. The mobile liquefied
means. hydrogen supply unit shall be grounded
(iii) Special rooms. (a) Floors, walls, for static electricity.
and ceilings shall have a fire resistance (5) Maintenance. The equipment and
rating of at least 2 hours. Walls or par- functioning of each charged liquefied
titions shall be continuous from floor hydrogen system shall be maintained
to ceiling and shall be securely an- in a safe operating condition in accord-
chored. At least one wall shall be an ance with the requirements of this sec-
exterior wall. Openings to other parts tion. Weeds or similar combustibles
of the building shall not be permitted.
236
shall not be permitted within 25 feet of any leakage of liquid oxygen might fall
any liquefied hydrogen equipment. during operation of the system and fill-
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 ing of a storage container. For pur-
FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 53 FR 12121, Apr. 12, poses of this paragraph, asphaltic or bi-
1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 58 FR 35309, tuminous paving is considered to be
June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9236, 9237, Mar. 7, 1996] combustible.
(iv) Elevation. When locating bulk ox-
1910.104 Oxygen.
ygen systems near above-ground flam-
(a) Scope. This section applies to the mable or combustible liquid storage
installation of bulk oxygen systems on which may be either indoors or out-
industrial and institutional consumer doors, it is advisable to locate the sys-
premises. This section does not apply
tem on ground higher than the flam-
to oxygen manufacturing plants or
mable or combustible liquid storage.
other establishments operated by the
oxygen supplier or his agent for the (v) Dikes. Where it is necessary to lo-
purpose of storing oxygen and refilling cate a bulk oxygen system on ground
portable containers, trailers, mobile lower than adjacent flammable or com-
supply trucks, or tank cars, nor to sys- bustible liquid storage suitable means
tems having capacities less than those shall be taken (such as by diking, di-
stated in paragraph (b)(1) of this sec- version curbs, or grading) with respect
tion. to the adjacent flammable or combus-
(b) Bulk oxygen systems(1) Definition. tible liquid storage to prevent accumu-
As used in this section: A bulk oxygen lation of liquids under the bulk oxygen
system is an assembly of equipment, system.
such as oxygen storage containers, (3) Distance between systems and expo-
pressure regulators, safety devices, va- sures(i) General. The minimum dis-
porizers, manifolds, and inter- tance from any bulk oxygen storage
connecting piping, which has storage container to exposures, measured in
capacity of more than 13,000 cubic feet
the most direct line except as indicated
of oxygen, Normal Temperature and
in paragraphs (b)(3) (vi) and (viii) of
Pressure (NTP), connected in service or
ready for service, or more than 25,000 this section, shall be as indicated in
cubic feet of oxygen (NTP) including paragraphs (b)(3) (ii) to (xviii) of this
unconnected reserves on hand at the section inclusive.
site. The bulk oxygen system termi- (ii) Combustible structures. Fifty feet
nates at the point where oxygen at from any combustible structures.
service pressure first enters the supply (iii) Fire resistive structures. Twenty-
line. The oxygen containers may be five feet from any structures with fire-
stationary or movable, and the oxygen resistive exterior walls or sprinklered
may be stored as gas or liquid. buildings of other construction, but
(2) Location(i) General. Bulk oxygen not less than one-half the height of ad-
storage systems shall be located above jacent side wall of the structure.
ground out of doors, or shall be in- (iv) Openings. At least 10 feet from
stalled in a building of noncombustible any opening in adjacent walls of fire
construction, adequately vented, and resistive structures. Spacing from such
used for that purpose exclusively. The structures shall be adequate to permit
location selected shall be such that maintenance, but shall not be less than
containers and associated equipment
1 foot.
shall not be exposed by electric power
(v) Flammable liquid storage above-
lines, flammable or combustible liquid
lines, or flammable gas lines. ground.
(ii) Accessibility. The system shall be Distance (feet) Capacity (gallons)
located so that it is readily accessible
to mobile supply equipment at ground 50 .................................................. 0 to 1000.
level and to authorized personnel. 90 .................................................. 1001 or more.
(iii) Leakage. Where oxygen is stored
as a liquid, noncombustible surfacing (vi) Flammable liquid storage below-
shall be provided in an area in which ground.
237
Distance measured Distance from oxygen age installation and the exposure. In
storage container to
horizontally from oxy- filling and vent con- Capacity gal- such cases, the bulk oxygen storage in-
gen storage container
to flammable liquid nections or openings lons stallation may be a minimum distance
to flammable liquid
tank (feet) tank (feet) of 1 foot from the firewall.
(4) Storage containers(i) Foundations
15 .............................. 50 .............................. 0 to 1000.
30 .............................. 50 .............................. 1001 or
and supports. Permanently installed
more. containers shall be provided with sub-
stantial noncombustible supports on
(vii) Combustible liquid storage above- firm noncombustible foundations.
ground. (ii) Constructionliquid. Liquid oxy-
gen storage containers shall be fab-
Distance (feet) Capacity (gallons)
ricated from materials meeting the im-
25 .................................................. 0 to 1000. pact test requirements of paragraph
50 .................................................. 1001 or more. UG84 of ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code, Section VIIIUnfired
(viii) Combustible liquid storage below-
Pressure Vessels1968, which is incor-
ground.
porated by reference as specified in
Distance measured hori- Distance from oxygen stor- 1910.6. Containers operating at pres-
age container to filling and sures above 15 pounds per square inch
zontally from oxygen storage vent connections or openings
container to combustible liq- gage (p.s.i.g.) shall be designed, con-
to combustible liquid tank
uid tank (feet) (feet) structed, and tested in accordance with
15 ........................................... 40. appropriate requirements of ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sec-
(ix) Flammable gas storage. (Such as tion VIIUnfired Pressure Vessels
compressed flammable gases, liquefied 1968. Insulation surrounding the liquid
flammable gases and flammable gases oxygen container shall be noncombus-
in low pressure gas holders): tible.
Distance (feet) Capacity (cu. ft. NTP)
(iii) Constructiongaseous. High- pres-
sure gaseous oxygen containers shall
50 .................................................. Less than 5000. comply with one of the following:
90 .................................................. 5000 or more.
(a) Designed, constructed, and tested
(x) Highly combustible materials. Fifty in accordance with appropriate require-
feet from solid materials which burn ments of ASME Boiler and Pressure
rapidly, such as excelsior or paper. Vessel Code, Section VIIIUnfired
(xi) Slow-burning materials. Twenty- Pressure Vessels1968.
five feet from solid materials which (b) Designed, constructed, tested, and
burn slowly, such as coal and heavy maintained in accordance with DOT
timber. Specifications and Regulations.
(xii) Ventilation. Seventy-five feet in (5) Piping, tubing, and fittings(i) Se-
one direction and 35 feet in approxi- lection. Piping, tubing, and fittings
mately 90 direction from confining shall be suitable for oxygen service and
walls (not including firewalls less than for the pressures and temperatures in-
20 feet high) to provide adequate ven- volved.
tilation in courtyards and similar con- (ii) Specification. Piping and tubing
fining areas. shall conform to Section 2Gas and
(xiii) Congested areas. Twenty-five Air Piping Systems of Code for Pres-
feet from congested areas such as of- sure Piping, ANSI, B31.11967 with ad-
fices, lunchrooms, locker rooms, time denda B31.10a1969, which is incor-
clock areas, and similar locations porated by reference as specified in
where people may congregate. 1910.6.
(xiv)(xvii) [Reserved] (iii) Fabrication. Piping or tubing for
(xviii) Exceptions. The distances in operating temperatures below 20 F.
paragraphs (b)(3) (ii), (iii), (v) to (xi) in- shall be fabricated from materials
clusive, of this section do not apply meeting the impact test requirements
where protective structures such as of paragraph UG84 of ASME Boiler
firewalls of adequate height to safe- and Pressure Vessel Code, Section
guard the oxygen storage systems are VIIIUnfired Pressure Vessels1968,
located between the bulk oxygen stor- when tested at the minimum operating
238
temperature to which the piping may or other readily oxidizable materials

be subjected in service. before placing the system in service.
(6) Safety relief devices(i) General. (ii) Joints. Joints in piping and tubing
Bulk oxygen storage containers, re- may be made by welding or by use of
gardless of design pressure shall be flanged, threaded, slip, or compression
equipped with safety relief devices as fittings. Gaskets or thread sealants
required by the ASME code or the DOT shall be suitable for oxygen service.
specifications and regulations. (iii) Accessories. Valves, gages, regu-
(ii) DOT containers. Bulk oxygen stor- lators, and other accessories shall be
age containers designed and con- suitable for oxygen service.
structed in accordance with DOT speci- (iv) Installation. Installation of bulk
fication shall be equipped with safety oxygen systems shall be supervised by
relief devices as required thereby. personnel familiar with proper prac-
(iii) ASME containers. Bulk oxygen tices with reference to their construc-
storage containers designed and con- tion and use.
structed in accordance with the ASME
(v) Testing. After installation all field
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Sec-
erected piping shall be tested and
tion VIIIUnfired Pressure Vessel
1968 shall be equipped with safety relief proved gas tight at maximum oper-
devices meeting the provisions of the ating pressure. Any medium used for
Compressed Gas Association Pamphlet testing shall be oil free and nonflam-
Safety Relief Device Standards for mable.
Compressed Gas Storage Containers, (vi) Security. Storage containers, pip-
S1, Part 3, which is incorporated by ing, valves, regulating equipment, and
reference as specified in 1910.6. other accessories shall be protected
(iv) Insulation. Insulation casings on against physical damage and against
liquid oxygen containers shall be tampering.
equipped with suitable safety relief de- (vii) Venting. Any enclosure con-
vices. taining oxygen control or operating
(v) Reliability. All safety relief de- equipment shall be adequately vented.
vices shall be so designed or located (viii) Placarding. The bulk oxygen
that moisture cannot collect and freeze storage location shall be permanently
in a manner which would interfere with placarded to indicate: OXYGENNO
proper operation of the device. SMOKINGNO OPEN FLAMES, or an
(7) Liquid oxygen vaporizers(i) equivalent warning.
Mounts and couplings. The vaporizer (ix) Electrical wiring. Bulk oxygen in-
shall be anchored and its connecting stallations are not hazardous locations
piping be sufficiently flexible to pro- as defined and covered in subpart S of
vide for the effect of expansion and this part. Therefore, general purpose or
contraction due to temperature weatherproof types of electrical wiring
changes. and equipment are acceptable depend-
(ii) Relief devices. The vaporizer and ing upon whether the installation is in-
its piping shall be adequately protected doors or outdoors. Such equipment
on the oxygen and heating medium sec-
shall be installed in accordance with
tions with safety relief devices.
the applicable provisions of subpart S
(iii) Heating. Heat used in an oxygen
of this part.
vaporizer shall be indirectly supplied
only through media such as steam, air, (9) Operating instructions. For instal-
water, or water solutions which do not lations which require any operation of
react with oxygen. equipment by the user, legible instruc-
(iv) Grounding. If electric heaters are tions shall be maintained at operating
used to provide the primary source of locations.
heat, the vaporizing system shall be (10) Maintenance. The equipment and
electrically grounded. functioning of each charged bulk oxy-
(8) Equipment assembly and installa- gen system shall be maintained in a
tion(i) Cleaning. Equipment making safe operating condition in accordance
up a bulk oxygen system shall be with the requirements of this section.
cleaned in order to remove oil, grease Wood and long dry grass shall be cut
239
back within 15 feet of any bulk oxygen which is incorporated by reference as

storage container. specified in 1910.6, may be used as the
boiling point of the liquid.
FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 61 FR 9237, Mar. 7, (6) Boilover shall mean the expulsion
1996] of crude oil (or certain other liquids)
from a burning tank. The light frac-
1910.105 Nitrous oxide. tions of the crude oil burnoff producing
The piped systems for the in-plant a heat wave in the residue, which on
transfer and distribution of nitrous reaching a water strata may result in
oxide shall be designed, installed, the expulsion of a portion of the con-
maintained, and operated in accord- tents of the tank in the form of froth.
ance with Compressed Gas Association (7) Bulk plant shall mean that por-
Pamphlet G8.11964, which is incor- tion of a property where flammable or
porated by reference as specified in combustible liquids are received by
1910.6. tank vessel, pipelines, tank car, or
tank vehicle, and are stored or blended
in bulk for the purpose of distributing
FR 9237, Mar. 7, 1996]
such liquids by tank vessel, pipeline,
1910.106 Flammable and combustible tank car, tank vehicle, or container.
liquids. (8) Chemical plant shall mean a large
(a) Definitions. As used in this sec- integrated plant or that portion of
tion: such a plant other than a refinery or
(1) Aerosol shall mean a material distillery where flammable or combus-
which is dispensed from its container tible liquids are produced by chemical
as a mist, spray, or foam by a propel- reactions or used in chemical reac-
lant under pressure. tions.
(2) Atmospheric tank shall mean a (9) Closed container shall mean a
storage tank which has been designed container as herein defined, so sealed
to operate at pressures from atmos- by means of a lid or other device that
pheric through 0.5 p.s.i.g. neither liquid nor vapor will escape
(3) Automotive service station shall from it at ordinary temperatures.
mean that portion of property where (10) Crude petroleum shall mean hy-
flammable or combustible liquids used drocarbon mixtures that have a flash
as motor fuels are stored and dispensed point below 150 F. and which have not
from fixed equipment into the fuel been processed in a refinery.
tanks of motor vehicles and shall in- (11) Distillery shall mean a plant or
clude any facilities available for the that portion of a plant where flam-
sale and service of tires, batteries, and mable or combustible liquids produced
accessories, and for minor automotive by fermentation are concentrated, and
maintenance work. Major automotive where the concentrated products may
repairs, painting, body and fender work also be mixed, stored, or packaged.
are excluded. (12) Fire area shall mean an area of a
(4) Basement shall mean a story of a building separated from the remainder
building or structure having one-half of the building by construction having
or more of its height below ground a fire resistance of at least 1 hour and
level and to which access for fire fight- having all communicating openings
ing purposes is unduly restricted. properly protected by an assembly hav-
(5) Boiling point shall mean the boiling a fire resistance rating of at least 1
ing point of a liquid at a pressure of hour.
14.7 pounds per square inch absolute (13) Flammable aerosol shall mean an
(p.s.i.a.) (760 mm.). Where an accurate aerosol which is required to be labeled
boiling point is unavailable for the ma- Flammable under the Federal Haz-
terial in question, or for mixtures ardous Substances Labeling Act (15
which do not have a constant boiling U.S.C. 1261). For the purposes of para-
point, for purposes of this section the graph (d) of this section, such aerosols
10 percent point of a distillation per- are considered Class IA liquids.
formed in accordance with the Stand- (14) Flashpoint means the minimum
ard Method of Test for Distillation of temperature at which a liquid gives off
Petroleum Products, ASTM D8662, vapor within a test vessel in sufficient
240
concentration to form an ignitable by persons harbored or detained to re-

mixture with air near the surface of ceive medical, charitable or other care
the liquid, and shall be determined as or treatment, or by persons involun-
follows: tarily detained.
(i) For a liquid which has a viscosity (17) Liquid shall mean, for the pur-
of less than 45 SUS at 100 F. (37.8 C.), pose of this section, any material
does not contain suspended solids, and which has a fluidity greater than that
does not have a tendency to form a sur- of 300 penetration asphalt when tested
face film while under test, the proce- in accordance with ASTM Test for Pen-
dure specified in the Standard Method etration for Bituminous Materials, D
of Test for Flashpoint by Tag Closed 565, which is incorporated by reference
Tester (ASTM D5670), which is incor- as specified in 1910.6. When not other-
porated by reference as specified in wise identified, the term liquid shall
1910.6, shall be used. include both flammable and combus-
(ii) For a liquid which has a viscosity tible liquids.
of 45 SUS or more at 100 F. (37.8 C.), (18) Combustible liquid means any liq-
or contains suspended solids, or has a uid having a flashpoint at or above 100
tendency to form a surface film while F. (37.8 C.) Combustible liquids shall
under test, the Standard Method of be divided into two classes as follows:
Test for Flashpoint by Pensky-Martens (i) Class II liquids shall include those
Closed Tester (ASTM D9371) shall be with flashpoints at or above 100 F.
used, except that the methods specified (37.8 C.) and below 140 F. (60 C.), ex-
in Note 1 to section 1.1 of ASTM D93 cept any mixture having components
71 may be used for the respective mate- with flashpoints of 200 F. (93.3 C.) or
rials specified in the Note. The pre- higher, the volume of which make up 99
ceding ASTM standards are incor- percent or more of the total volume of
porated by reference as specified in the mixture.
1910.6. (ii) Class III liquids shall include
(iii) For a liquid that is a mixture of those with flashpoints at or above 140
compounds that have different F. (60 C.) Class III liquids are sub-
volatilities and flashpoints, its divided into two subclasses:
flashpoint shall be determined by using (a) Class IIIA liquids shall include
the procedure specified in paragraph those with flashpoints at or above 140
(a)(14) (i) or (ii) of this section on the F. (60 C.) and below 200 F. (93.3 C.),
liquid in the form it is shipped. If the except any mixture having components
flashpoint, as determined by this test, with flashpoints of 200 F. (93.3 C.), or
is 100 F. (37.8 C.) or higher, an addi- higher, the total volume of which make
tional flashpoint determination shall up 99 percent or more of the total vol-
be run on a sample of the liquid evapo- ume of the mixture.
rated to 90 percent of its original vol- (b) Class IIIB liquids shall include
ume, and the lower value of the two those with flashpoints at or above 200
tests shall be considered the flashpoint F. (93.3 C.). This section does not
of the material. cover Class IIIB liquids. Where the
(iv) Organic peroxides, which undergo term Class III liquids is used in this
autoaccelerating thermal decomposi- section, it shall mean only Class IIIA
tion, are excluded from any of the liquids.
flashpoint determination methods (iii) When a combustible liquid is
specified in this subparagraph. heated for use to within 30 F. (16.7 C.)
(15) Hotel shall mean buildings or of its flashpoint, it shall be handled in
groups of buildings under the same accordance with the requirements for
management in which there are sleep- the next lower class of liquids.
ing accommodations for hire, primarily (19) Flammable liquid means any liq-
used by transients who are lodged with uid having a flashpoint below 100 F.
or without meals including but not (37.8 C.), except any mixture having
limited to inns, clubs, motels, and components with flashpoints of 100 F.
apartment hotels. (37.8 C.) or higher, the total of which
(16) Institutional occupancy shall make up 99 percent or more of the total
mean the occupancy or use of a build- volume of the mixture. Flammable liq-
ing or structure or any portion thereof uids shall be known as Class I liquids.
241
Class I liquids are divided into three uids are produced on a commercial
classes as follows: scale from crude petroleum, natural
(i) Class IA shall include liquids hav- gasoline, or other hydrocarbon sources.
ing flashpoints below 73 F. (22.8 C.) (29) Safety can shall mean an ap-
and having a boiling point below 100 F. proved container, of not more than 5
(37.8 C.). gallons capacity, having a spring-clos-
(ii) Class IB shall include liquids having lid and spout cover and so designed
ing flashpoints below 73 F. (22.8 C.) that it will safely relieve internal pres-
and having a boiling point at or above sure when subjected to fire exposure.
100 F. (37.8 C.). (30) Vapor pressure shall mean the
(iii) Class IC shall include liquids pressure, measured in pounds per
having flashpoints at or above 73 F. square inch (absolute) exerted by a
(22.8 C.) and below 100 F. (37.8 C.). volatile liquid as determined by the
(20) Unstable (reactive) liquid shall Standard Method of Test for Vapor
mean a liquid which in the pure state Pressure of Petroleum Products (Reid
or as commercially produced or trans- Method), American Society for Test-
ported will vigorously polymerize, de- ing and Materials ASTM D32368, which
compose, condense, or will become self- is incorporated by reference as speci-
reactive under conditions of shocks, fied in 1910.6.
pressure, or temperature. (31) Ventilation as specified in this
(21) Low-pressure tank shall mean a section is for the prevention of fire and
storage tank which has been designed explosion. It is considered adequate if
to operate at pressures above 0.5 p.s.i.g. it is sufficient to prevent accumulation
but not more than 15 p.s.i.g. of significant quantities of vapor-air
(22) Marine service station shall mixtures in concentration over one-
mean that portion of a property where fourth of the lower flammable limit.
flammable or combustible liquids used (32) Storage: Flammable or combus-
as fuels are stored and dispensed from tible liquids shall be stored in a tank
fixed equipment on shore, piers, or in a container that complies with
wharves, or floating docks into the fuel paragraph (d)(2) of this section.
tanks of self-propelled craft, and shall (33) Barrel shall mean a volume of 42
include all facilities used in connection U.S. gallons.
therewith. (34) Container shall mean any can,
(23) Mercantile occupancy shall mean barrel, or drum.
the occupancy or use of a building or (35) Approved unless otherwise indi-
structure or any portion thereof for the cated, approved, or listed by a nation-
displaying, selling, or buying of goods, ally recognized testing laboratory.
wares, or merchandise. Refer to 1910.7 for definition of nation-
(24) Office occupancy shall mean the ally recognized testing laboratory.
occupancy or use of a building or struc- (36) Listed see approved in
ture or any portion thereof for the 1910.106(a)(35).
transaction of business, or the ren- (37) SUS means Saybolt Universal
dering or receiving of professional serv- Seconds as determined by the Standard
ices. Method of Test for Saybolt Viscosity
(25) Portable tank shall mean a (ASTM D8856), and may be deter-
closed container having a liquid capac- mined by use of the SUS conversion ta-
ity over 60 U.S. gallons and not in- bles specified in ASTM Method D2161
tended for fixed installation. 66 following determination of viscosity
(26) Pressure vessel shall mean a in accordance with the procedures
storage tank or vessel which has been specified in the Standard Method of
designed to operate at pressures above Test for Viscosity of Transparent and
15 p.s.i.g. Opaque Liquids (ASTM D44565).
(27) Protection for exposure shall (38) Viscous means a viscosity of 45
mean adequate fire protection for SUS or more.
structures on property adjacent to (b) Tank storage(1) Design and con-
tanks, where there are employees of struction of tanks(i) Materials. (a)
the establishment. Tanks shall be built of steel except as
(28) Refinery shall mean a plant in provided in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) (b)
which flammable or combustible liq- through (e) of this section.
242
(b) Tanks may be built of materials Edition, May 1958, and Supplement 1,
other than steel for installation under- March 1962; No. 12D, Specification for
ground or if required by the properties Large Welded Production Tanks, Sev-
of the liquid stored. Tanks located enth Edition, August 1957; or No. 12F,
above ground or inside buildings shall Specification for Small Welded Produc-
be of noncombustible construction. tion Tanks, Fifth Edition, March 1961.
(c) Tanks built of materials other Tanks built in accordance with these
than steel shall be designed to speci- standards shall be used only as produc-
fications embodying principles recog- tion tanks for storage of crude petro-
nized as good engineering design for leum in oil-producing areas.
the material used. (b) Tanks designed for underground
(d) Unlined concrete tanks may be service not exceeding 2,500 gallons ca-
used for storing flammable or combus- pacity may be used aboveground.
tible liquids having a gravity of 40 API (c) Low-pressure tanks and pressure
or heavier. Concrete tanks with special vessels may be used as atmospheric
lining may be used for other services tanks.
provided the design is in accordance (d) Atmospheric tanks shall not be
with sound engineering practice. used for the storage of a flammable or
(e) [Reserved] combustible liquid at a temperature at
(f) Special engineering consideration or above its boiling point.
shall be required if the specific gravity (iv) Low pressure tanks. (a) The nor-
of the liquid to be stored exceeds that mal operating pressure of the tank
of water or if the tanks are designed to shall not exceed the design pressure of
contain flammable or combustible liq- the tank.
uids at a liquid temperature below 0 F. (b) Low-pressure tanks shall be built
(ii) Fabrication. (a) [Reserved] in accordance with acceptable stand-
(b) Metal tanks shall be welded, riv- ards of design. Low-pressure tanks may
eted, and caulked, brazed, or bolted, or be built in accordance with the fol-
constructed by use of a combination of lowing consensus standards that are in-
these methods. Filler metal used in corporated by reference as specified in
brazing shall be nonferrous metal or an 1910.6:
alloy having a melting point above 1000 (1) American Petroleum Institute
F. and below that of the metal joined. Standard No. 620. Recommended Rules
(iii) Atmospheric tanks. (a) Atmos- for the Design and Construction of
pheric tanks shall be built in accord- Large, Welded, Low-Pressure Storage
ance with acceptable good standards of Tanks, Third Edition, 1966.
design. Atmospheric tanks may be
(2) The principles of the Code for
built in accordance with the following
Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section VIII
consensus standards that are incor-
of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Ves-
porated by reference as specified in
sels Code, 1968.
1910.6:
(c) Atmospheric tanks built accord-
(1) Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,
ing to Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,
Subjects No. 142, Standard for Steel
requirements in subdivision (iii)(a) of
Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and
and shall be limited to 2.5 p.s.i.g. under
Combustible Liquids, 1968; No. 58,
emergency venting conditions.
Standard for Steel Underground Tanks
for Flammable and Combustible Liq- This paragraph may be used for oper-
uids, Fifth Edition, December 1961; or ating pressures not exceeding 1 p.s.i.g.
No. 80, Standard for Steel Inside Tanks (d) Pressure vessels may be used as
for Oil-Burner Fuel, September 1963. low-pressure tanks.
(2) American Petroleum Institute (v) Pressure vessels. (a) The normal op-
Standards No. 12A, Specification for erating pressure of the vessel shall not
Oil Storage Tanks with Riveted Shells, exceed the design pressure of the ves-
Seventh Edition, September 1951, or sel.
No. 650, Welded Steel Tanks for Oil (b) Pressure vessels shall be built in
Storage, Third Edition, 1966. accordance with the Code for Unfired
(3) American Petroleum Institute Pressure Vessels, Section VIII of the
Standards No. 12B, Specification for ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
Bolted Production Tanks, Eleventh 1968.
243
(vi) Provisions for internal corrosion. Suitable means shall be taken to pre-
When tanks are not designed in accord- vent the accumulation of flammable or
ance with the American Petroleum In- combustible liquids under adjacent liq-
stitute, American Society of Mechan- uefied petroleum gas containers such
ical Engineers, or the Underwriters as by diversion curbs or grading. When
Laboratories, Inc.s, standards, or if flammable or combustible liquid stor-
corrosion is anticipated beyond that age tanks are within a diked area, the
provided for in the design formulas liquefied petroleum gas containers
used, additional metal thickness or shall be outside the diked area and at
suitable protective coatings or linings least 10 feet away from the centerline
shall be provided to compensate for the of the wall of the diked area. The fore-
corrosion loss expected during the de- going provisions shall not apply when
sign life of the tank. liquefied petroleum gas containers of
(2) Installation of outside aboveground 125 gallons or less capacity are in-
tanks. stalled adjacent to fuel oil supply
(i) [Reserved] tanks of 550 gallons or less capacity.
(ii) Spacing (shell-to-shell) between (iii) [Reserved]
aboveground tanks. (a) The distance be- (iv) Normal venting for aboveground
tween any two flammable or combus- tanks. (a) Atmospheric storage tanks
tible liquid storage tanks shall not be shall be adequately vented to prevent
less than 3 feet. the development of vacuum or pressure
(b) Except as provided in paragraph sufficient to distort the roof of a cone
(b)(2)(ii)(c) of this section, the distance roof tank or exceeding the design pres-
between any two adjacent tanks shall sure in the case of other atmospheric
not be less than one-sixth the sum of tanks, as a result of filling or
their diameters. When the diameter of emptying, and atmospheric tempera-
one tank is less than one-half the di- ture changes.
ameter of the adjacent tank, the dis- (b) Normal vents shall be sized either
tance between the two tanks shall not in accordance with: (1) The American
be less than one-half the diameter of Petroleum Institute Standard 2000
the smaller tank. (1968), Venting Atmospheric and Low-
(c) Where crude petroleum in con- Pressure Storage Tanks, which is in-
junction with production facilities are corporated by reference as specified in
located in noncongested areas and have 1910.6; or (2) other accepted standard;
capacities not exceeding 126,000 gallons or (3) shall be at least as large as the
(3,000 barrels), the distance between filling or withdrawal connection,
such tanks shall not be less than 3 feet. whichever is larger but in no case less
(d) Where unstable flammable or than 114 inch nominal inside diameter.
combustible liquids are stored, the dis- (c) Low-pressure tanks and pressure
tance between such tanks shall not be vessels shall be adequately vented to
less than one-half the sum of their di- prevent development of pressure or
ameters. vacuum, as a result of filling or
(e) When tanks are compacted in emptying and atmospheric tempera-
three or more rows or in an irregular ture changes, from exceeding the de-
pattern, greater spacing or other sign pressure of the tank or vessel.
means shall be provided so that inside Protection shall also be provided to
tanks are accessible for firefighting prevent overpressure from any pump
purposes. discharging into the tank or vessel
(f) The minimum separation between when the pump discharge pressure can
a liquefied petroleum gas container exceed the design pressure of the tank
and a flammable or combustible liquid or vessel.
storage tank shall be 20 feet, except in (d) If any tank or pressure vessel has
the case of flammable or combustible more than one fill or withdrawal con-
liquid tanks operating at pressures ex- nection and simultaneous filling or
ceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. or equipped with withdrawal can be made, the vent size
emergency venting which will permit shall be based on the maximum antici-
pressures to exceed 2.5 p.s.i.g. in which pated simultaneous flow.
case the provisions of subdivisions (a) (e) Unless the vent is designed to
and (b) of this subdivision shall apply. limit the internal pressure 2.5 p.s.i. or
244
less, the outlet of vents and vent drains (b) In a vertical tank the construc-
shall be arranged to discharge in such tion referred to in subdivision (a) of
a manner as to prevent localized over- this subdivision may take the form of a
heating of any part of the tank in the floating roof, lifter roof, a weak roof-
event vapors from such vents are ig- to-shell seam, or other approved pres-
nited. sure relieving construction. The weak
(f) Tanks and pressure vessels storing roof-to-shell seam shall be constructed
Class IA liquids shall be equipped with to fail preferential to any other seam.
venting devices which shall be nor- (c) Where entire dependence for emer-
mally closed except when venting to gency relief is placed upon pressure re-
pressure or vacuum conditions. Tanks lieving devices, the total venting ca-
and pressure vessels storing Class IB
pacity of both normal and emergency
and IC liquids shall be equipped with
vents shall be enough to prevent rup-
venting devices which shall be nor-
ture of the shell or bottom of the tank
mally closed except when venting
under pressure or vacuum conditions, if vertical, or of the shell or heads if
or with approved flame arresters. horizontal. If unstable liquids are
stored, the effects of heat or gas result-
Exemption: Tanks of 3,000 bbls. capac- ing from polymerization, decomposi-
ity or less containing crude petroleum
tion, condensation, or self-reactivity
in crude-producing areas; and, outside
shall be taken into account. The total
aboveground atmospheric tanks under
capacity of both normal and emergency
1,000 gallons capacity containing other
than Class IA flammable liquids may venting devices shall be not less than
have open vents. (See subdivision that derived from Table H10 except as
(vi)(b) of this subparagraph.) provided in subdivision (e) or (f) of this
(g) Flame arresters or venting de- subdivision. Such device may be a self-
vices required in subdivision (f) of this closing manhole cover, or one using
subdivision may be omitted for Class long bolts that permit the cover to lift
IB and IC liquids where conditions are under internal pressure, or an addi-
such that their use may, in case of ob- tional or larger relief valve or valves.
struction, result in tank damage. The wetted area of the tank shall be
(v) Emergency relief venting for fire ex- calculated on the basis of 55 percent of
posure for aboveground tanks. (a) Every the total exposed area of a sphere or
aboveground storage tank shall have spheroid, 75 percent of the total ex-
some form of construction or device posed area of a horizontal tank and the
that will relieve excessive internal first 30 feet above grade of the exposed
pressure caused by exposure fires. shell area of a vertical tank.
TABLE H10WETTED AREA VERSUS CUBIC FEET FREE AIR PER HOUR
[14.7 psia and 60 F.]
Square feet CFH Square feet CFH Square feet CFH
20 21,100 200 211,000 1,000 524,000

30 31,600 250 239,000 1,200 557,000
40 42,100 300 265,000 1,400 587,000
50 52,700 350 288,000 1,600 614,000
60 63,200 400 312,000 1,800 639,000
70 73,700 500 354,000 2,000 662,000
80 84,200 600 392,000 2,400 704,000
90 94,800 700 428,000 2,800 742,000
100 105,000 800 462,000 and
120 126,000 900 493,000 over
140 147,000 1,000 524,000
160 168,000
180 190,000
200 211,000
(d) For tanks and storage vessels de- except that when the exposed wetted
signed for pressure over 1 p.s.i.g., the area of the surface is greater than 2,800
total rate of venting shall be deter- square feet, the total rate of venting
mined in accordance with Table H10,
245
shall be calculated by the following larger than 12 inches nominal pipe size,
formula: including manhole covers with long
CFH = 1,107A 0.82 bolts or equivalent, may be calculated
provided that the opening pressure is
Where; actually measured, the rating pressure
CFH = Venting requirement, in cubic feet of and corresponding free orifice area are
free air per hour. stated, the word calculated appears
A = Exposed wetted surface, in square feet. on the nameplate, and the computation
NOTE: The foregoing formula is based on
Q=21,000A0.82.
is based on a flow coefficient of 0.5 ap-
(e) The total emergency relief vent- plied to the rated orifice area.
ing capacity for any specific stable liq- (vi) Vent piping for aboveground tanks.
uid may be determined by the fol- (a) Vent piping shall be constructed in
lowing formula: accordance with paragraph (c) of this
section.
V = 1337 LM (b) Where vent pipe outlets for tanks
V = Cubic feet of free air per hour from Table storing Class I liquids are adjacent to
H10. buildings or public ways, they shall be
L = Latent heat of vaporization of specific located so that the vapors are released
liquid in B.t.u. per pound. at a safe point outside of buildings and
M = Molecular weight of specific liquids. not less than 12 feet above the adjacent
(f) The required airflow rate of sub- ground level. In order to aid their dis-
division (c) or (e) of this subdivision persion, vapors shall be discharged up-
may be multiplied by the appropriate ward or horizontally away from closely
factor listed in the following schedule adjacent walls. Vent outlets shall be
when protection is provided as indi- located so that flammable vapors will
cated. Only one factor may be used for not be trapped by eaves or other ob-
any one tank. structions and shall be at least five
feet from building openings.
0.5 for drainage in accordance with subdivi-
sion (vii)(b) of this subparagraph for tanks (c) When tank vent piping is
over 200 square feet of wetted area. manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as
0.3 for approved water spray. to discharge, within the pressure limi-
0.3 for approved insulation. tations of the system, the vapors they
0.15 for approved water spray with ap- may be required to handle when
proved insulation. manifolded tanks are subject to the
(g) The outlet of all vents and vent same fire exposure.
drains on tanks equipped with emer- (vii) Drainage, dikes, and walls for
gency venting to permit pressures ex- aboveground tanks(a) Drainage and
ceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. shall be arranged to diked areas. The area surrounding a
discharge in such a way as to prevent tank or a group of tanks shall be pro-
localized overheating of any part of the vided with drainage as in subdivision
tank, in the event vapors from such (b) of this subdivision, or shall be diked
vents are ignited. as provided in subdivision (c) of this
(h) Each commercial tank venting subdivision, to prevent accidental dis-
device shall have stamped on it the charge of liquid from endangering ad-
opening pressure, the pressure at which joining property or reaching water-
the valve reaches the full open posi- ways.
tion, and the flow capacity at the lat- (b) Drainage. Where protection of ad-
ter pressure, expressed in cubic feet per joining property or waterways is by
hour of air at 60 F. and at a pressure means of a natural or manmade drain-
of 14.7 p.s.i.a. age system, such systems shall comply
(i) The flow capacity of tank venting with the following:
devices 12 inches and smaller in nomi- (1) [Reserved]
nal pipe size shall be determined by ac- (2) The drainage system shall termi-
tual test of each type and size of vent. nate in vacant land or other area or in
These flow tests may be conducted by an impounding basin having a capacity
the manufacturer if certified by a not smaller than that of the largest
qualified impartial observer, or may be tank served. This termination area and
conducted by an outside agency. The the route of the drainage system shall
flow capacity of tank venting devices be so located that, if the flammable or
246
combustible liquids in the drainage signed and installed as to minimize the

system are ignited, the fire will not se- possibility of generating static elec-
riously expose tanks or adjoining prop- tricity. A fill pipe entering the top of a
erty. tank shall terminate within 6 inches of
(c) Diked areas. Where protection of the bottom of the tank and shall be in-
adjoining property or waterways is ac- stalled to avoid excessive vibration.
complished by retaining the liquid (f) Filling and emptying connections
around the tank by means of a dike, which are made and broken shall be lo-
the volume of the diked area shall cated outside of buildings at a location
comply with the following require- free from any source of ignition and
ments:
not less than 5 feet away from any
(1) Except as provided in subdivision
building opening. Such connection
(2) of this subdivision, the volumetric
capacity of the diked area shall not be shall be closed and liquidtight when
less than the greatest amount of liquid not in use. The connection shall be
that can be released from the largest properly identified.
tank within the diked area, assuming a (3) Installation of underground tanks
full tank. The capacity of the diked (i) Location. Excavation for under-
area enclosing more than one tank ground storage tanks shall be made
shall be calculated by deducting the with due care to avoid undermining of
volume of the tanks other than the foundations of existing structures. Un-
largest tank below the height of the derground tanks or tanks under build-
dike. ings shall be so located with respect to
(2) For a tank or group of tanks with existing building foundations and sup-
fixed roofs containing crude petroleum ports that the loads carried by the lat-
with boilover characteristics, the volu- ter cannot be transmitted to the tank.
metric capacity of the diked area shall The distance from any part of a tank
be not less than the capacity of the storing Class I liquids to the nearest
largest tank served by the enclosure, wall of any basement or pit shall be
assuming a full tank. The capacity of not less than 1 foot, and to any prop-
the diked enclosure shall be calculated erty line that may be built upon, not
by deducting the volume below the less than 3 feet. The distance from any
height of the dike of all tanks within
part of a tank storing Class II or Class
the enclosure.
III liquids to the nearest wall of any
(3) Walls of the diked area shall be of
basement, pit or property line shall be
earth, steel, concrete or solid masonry
designed to be liquidtight and to with- not less than 1 foot.
stand a full hydrostatic head. Earthen (ii) Depth and cover. Underground
walls 3 feet or more in height shall tanks shall be set on firm foundations
have a flat section at the top not less and surrounded with at least 6 inches
than 2 feet wide. The slope of an earth- of noncorrosive, inert materials such
en wall shall be consistent with the as clean sand, earth, or gravel well
angle of repose of the material of which tamped in place. The tank shall be
the wall is constructed. placed in the hole with care since drop-
(4) The walls of the diked area shall ping or rolling the tank into the hole
be restricted to an average height of 6 can break a weld, puncture or damage
feet above interior grade. the tank, or scrape off the protective
(5) [Reserved] coating of coated tanks. Tanks shall be
(6) No loose combustible material, covered with a minimum of 2 feet of
empty or full drum or barrel, shall be earth, or shall be covered with not less
permitted within the diked area. than 1 foot of earth, on top of which
(viii) Tank openings other than vents shall be placed a slab of reinforced con-
for aboveground tanks. crete not less than 4 inches thick.
(a)(c) [Reserved] When underground tanks are, or are
(d) Openings for gaging shall be pro- likely to be, subject to traffic, they
vided with a vaportight cap or cover.
shall be protected against damage from
(e) For Class IB and Class IC liquids
vehicles passing over them by at least
other than crude oils, gasolines, and
asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so de- 3 feet of earth cover, or 18 inches of
247
well-tamped earth, plus 6 inches of re- TABLE H11VENT LINE DIAMETERS

inforced concrete or 8 inches of asphal- Continued
tic concrete. When asphaltic or rein-
Pipe length 1
forced concrete paving is used as part Maximum flow GPM
of the protection, it shall extend at 50 feet 100 feet 200 feet
least 1 foot horizontally beyond the 1,000 .................................... 2 2 3
outline of the tank in all directions. 1 Vent lines of 50 ft., 100 ft., and 200 ft. of pipe plus 7 ells.
(iii) Corrosion protection. Corrosion
protection for the tank and its piping (c) Location and arrangement of
shall be provided by one or more of the vents for Class II or Class III liquids.
following methods: Vent pipes from tanks storing Class II
(a) Use of protective coatings or or Class III flammable liquids shall ter-
wrappings; minate outside of the building and
(b) Cathodic protection; or, higher than the fill pipe opening. Vent
(c) Corrosion resistant materials of outlets shall be above normal snow
construction. level. They may be fitted with return
(iv) Vents. (a) Location and arrange- bends, coarse screens or other devices
ment of vents for Class I liquids. Vent to minimize ingress of foreign mate-
pipes from tanks storing Class I liquids rial.
shall be so located that the discharge (d) Vent piping shall be constructed
point is outside of buildings, higher in accordance with paragraph (c) of
than the fill pipe opening, and not less this section. Vent pipes shall be so laid
than 12 feet above the adjacent ground as to drain toward the tank without
level. Vent pipes shall discharge only sags or traps in which liquid can col-
upward in order to disperse vapors. lect. They shall be located so that they
Vent pipes 2 inches or less in nominal will not be subjected to physical dam-
inside diameter shall not be obstructed age. The tank end of the vent pipe shall
by devices that will cause excessive enter the tank through the top.
back pressure. Vent pipe outlets shall (e) When tank vent piping is
be so located that flammable vapors manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as
will not enter building openings, or be to discharge, within the pressure limi-
trapped under eaves or other obstruc- tations of the system, the vapors they
tions. If the vent pipe is less than 10 may be required to handle when
feet in length, or greater than 2 inches manifolded tanks are filled simulta-
in nominal inside diameter, the outlet neously.
shall be provided with a vacuum and (v) Tank openings other than vents. (a)
pressure relief device or there shall be Connections for all tank openings shall
an approved flame arrester located in be vapor or liquid tight.
the vent line at the outlet or within (b) Openings for manual gaging, if
the approved distance from the outlet. independent of the fill pipe, shall be
(b) Size of vents. Each tank shall be provided with a liquid-tight cap or
vented through piping adequate in size cover. If inside a building, each such
to prevent blow-back of vapor or liquid opening shall be protected against liq-
at the fill opening while the tank is uid overflow and possible vapor release
being filled. Vent pipes shall be not less by means of a spring loaded check
than 114 inch nominal inside diameter. valve or other approved device.
(c) Fill and discharge lines shall
TABLE H11VENT LINE DIAMETERS enter tanks only through the top. Fill
Pipe length 1 lines shall be sloped toward the tank.
Maximum flow GPM (d) For Class IB and Class IC liquids
50 feet 100 feet 200 feet
other than crude oils, gasolines, and
Inches Inches Inches asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so de-
100 ....................................... 114 114 114 signed and installed as to minimize the
200 ....................................... 114 114 114 possibility of generating static elec-
300 ....................................... 114 114 112
400 ....................................... 114 112 2 tricity by terminating within 6 inches
500 ....................................... 112 112 2 of the bottom of the tank.
600 ....................................... 112 2 2 (e) Filling and emptying connections
700 ....................................... 2 2 2
800 ....................................... 2 2 3 which are made and broken shall be lo-
900 ....................................... 2 2 3 cated outside of buildings at a location
248
free from any source of ignition and this subdivision), shall be provided
not less than 5 feet away from any with a vaportight cap or cover. Each
building opening. Such connection such opening shall be protected against
shall be closed and liquidtight when liquid overflow and possible vapor re-
not in use. The connection shall be lease by means of a spring loaded check
properly identified. valve or other approved device.
(4) Installation of tanks inside of build- (e) For Class IB and Class IC liquids
ings(i) Location. Tanks shall not be other than crude oils, gasolines, and
permitted inside of buildings except as asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so de-
provided in paragraphs (e), (g), (h), or signed and installed as to minimize the
(i) of this section. possibility of generating static elec-
(ii) Vents. Vents for tanks inside of tricity by terminating within 6 inches
buildings shall be as provided in sub- of the bottom of the tank.
paragraphs (2) (iv), (v), (vi)(b), and (f) The fill pipe inside of the tank
(3)(iv) of this paragraph, except that shall be installed to avoid excessive vi-
emergency venting by the use of weak bration of the pipe.
roof seams on tanks shall not be per- (g) The inlet of the fill pipe shall be
mitted. Vents shall discharge vapors located outside of buildings at a loca-
outside the buildings. tion free from any source of ignition
(iii) Vent piping. Vent piping shall be and not less than 5 feet away from any
constructed in accordance with para- building opening. The inlet of the fill
graph (c) of this section. pipe shall be closed and liquidtight
(iv) Tank openings other than vents. (a) when not in use. The fill connection
Connections for all tank openings shall shall be properly identified.
be vapor or liquidtight. Vents are cov- (h) Tanks inside buildings shall be
ered in subdivision (ii) of this subpara- equipped with a device, or other means
graph. shall be provided, to prevent overflow
(b) Each connection to a tank inside into the building.
of buildings through which liquid can (5) Supports, foundations, and anchor-
normally flow shall be provided with age for all tank locations(i) General.
an internal or an external valve lo- Tank supports shall be installed on
cated as close as practical to the shell firm foundations. Tank supports shall
of the tank. Such valves, when exter- be of concrete, masonry, or protected
nal, and their connections to the tank steel. Single wood timber supports (not
shall be of steel except when the chem- cribbing) laid horizontally may be used
ical characteristics of the liquid stored for outside aboveground tanks if not
are incompatible with steel. When ma- more than 12 inches high at their low-
terials other than steel are necessary, est point.
they shall be suitable for the pressures, (ii) Fire resistance. Steel supports or
structural stresses, and temperatures exposed piling shall be protected by
involved, including fire exposures. materials having a fire resistance rat-
(c) Flammable or combustible liquid ing of not less than 2 hours, except that
tanks located inside of buildings, ex- steel saddles need not be protected if
cept in one-story buildings designed less than 12 inches high at their lowest
and protected for flammable or com- point. Water spray protection or its
bustible liquid storage, shall be pro- equivalent may be used in lieu of fire-
vided with an automatic-closing heat- resistive materials to protect supports.
actuated valve on each withdrawal con- (iii) Spheres. The design of the sup-
nection below the liquid level, except porting structure for tanks such as
for connections used for emergency dis- spheres shall receive special engineer-
posal, to prevent continued flow in the ing consideration.
event of fire in the vicinity of the tank. (iv) Load distribution. Every tank
This function may be incorporated in shall be so supported as to prevent the
the valve required in (b) of this subdivi- excessive concentration of loads on the
sion, and if a separate valve, shall be supporting portion of the shell.
located adjacent to the valve required (v) Foundations. Tanks shall rest on
in (b) of this subdivision. the ground or on foundations made of
(d) Openings for manual gaging, if concrete, masonry, piling, or steel.
independent of the fill pipe (see (f) of Tank foundations shall be designed to
249
minimize the possibility of uneven set- with liquids is impracticable because of

tling of the tank and to minimize cor- the character of their contents, their
rosion in any part of the tank resting use, or for other reasons, each tank
on the foundation. shall be safeguarded against movement
(vi) Flood areas. Where a tank is lo- when empty and submerged by high
cated in an area that may be subjected ground water or flood waters by an-
to flooding, the applicable precautions choring, weighting with concrete or
outlined in this subdivision shall be ob- other approved solid loading material,
served. or securing by other means. Each such
(a) No aboveground vertical storage tank shall be so constructed and in-
tank containing a flammable or com- stalled that it will safely resist exter-
bustible liquid shall be located so that nal pressures due to high ground water
the allowable liquid level within the or flood waters.
tank is below the established max- (g) At locations where there is an
imum flood stage, unless the tank is ample and dependable water supply
provided with a guiding structure such available, underground tanks con-
as described in (m), (n), and (o) of this taining flammable or combustible liq-
subdivision. uids, so installed that more than 70
(b) Independent water supply facili- percent of their storage capacity will
ties shall be provided at locations be submerged at the maximum flood
where there is no ample and dependable stage, shall be so anchored, weighted,
public water supply available for load- or secured by other means, as to pre-
ing partially empty tanks with water. vent movement of such tanks when
(c) In addition to the preceding refilled with flammable or combustible
quirements, each tank so located that liquids, and submerged by flood waters
more than 70 percent, but less than 100 to the established flood stage.
percent, of its allowable liquid storage (h) Pipe connections below the allow-
capacity will be submerged at the es-
able liquid level in a tank shall be pro-
tablished maximum flood stage, shall
vided with valves or cocks located as
be safeguarded by one of the following
closely as practicable to the tank shell.
methods: Tank shall be raised, or its
Such valves and their connections to
height shall be increased, until its top
tanks shall be of steel or other mate-
extends above the maximum flood
rial suitable for use with the liquid
stage a distance equivalent to 30 per-
being stored. Cast iron shall not be per-
cent or more of its allowable liquid
mitted.
storage capacity: Provided, however,
That the submerged part of the tank (i) At locations where an independent
shall not exceed two and one-half times water supply is required, it shall be en-
the diameter. Or, as an alternative to tirely independent of public power and
the foregoing, adequate noncombus- water supply. Independent source of
tible structural guides, designed to per- water shall be available when flood wa-
mit the tank to float vertically with- ters reach a level not less than 10 feet
out loss of product, shall be provided. below the bottom of the lowest tank on
(d) Each horizontal tank so located a property.
that more than 70 percent of its stor- (j) The self-contained power and
age capacity will be submerged at the pumping unit shall be so located or so
established flood stage, shall be an- designed that pumping into tanks may
chored, attached to a foundation of be carried on continuously throughout
concrete or of steel and concrete, of the rise in flood waters from a level 10
sufficient weight to provide adequate feet below the lowest tank to the level
load for the tank when filled with flam- of the potential flood stage.
mable or combustible liquid and sub- (k) Capacity of the pumping unit
merged by flood waters to the estab- shall be such that the rate of rise of
lished flood stage, or adequately se- water in all tanks shall be equivalent
cured by other means. to the established potential average
(e) [Reserved] rate of rise of flood waters at any
(f) At locations where there is no stage.
ample and dependable water supply, or (l) Each independent pumping unit
where filling of underground tanks shall be tested periodically to insure
250
that it is in satisfactory operating con- quirements, in order to assure the fol-

dition. lowing:
(m) Structural guides for holding (1) That all flammable or combus-
floating tanks above their foundations tible liquid storage tanks are in com-
shall be so designed that there will be pliance with these requirements and so
no resistance to the free rise of a tank, maintained.
and shall be constructed of noncombus- (2) That detailed printed instructions
tible material. of what to do in flood emergencies are
(n) The strength of the structure properly posted.
shall be adequate to resist lateral (3) That station operators and other
movement of a tank subject to a hori- employees depended upon to carry out
zontal force in any direction equivalent such instructions are thoroughly in-
to not less than 25 pounds per square formed as to the location and operation
foot acting on the projected vertical of such valves and other equipment
cross-sectional area of the tank. necessary to effect these requirements.
(o) Where tanks are situated on ex-
(vii) Earthquake areas. In areas sub-
posed points or bends in a shoreline
ject to earthquakes, the tank supports
where swift currents in flood waters
and connections shall be designed to
will be present, the structures shall be
resist damage as a result of such
designed to withstand a unit force of
shocks.
not less than 50 pounds per square foot.
(p) The filling of a tank to be pro- (6) Sources of ignition. In locations
tected by water loading shall be start- where flammable vapors may be
ed as soon as flood waters reach a dan- present, precautions shall be taken to
gerous flood stage. The rate of filling prevent ignition by eliminating or con-
shall be at least equal to the rate of trolling sources of ignition. Sources of
rise of the floodwaters (or the estab- ignition may include open flames,
lished average potential rate of rise). lightning, smoking, cutting and weld-
(q) Sufficient fuel to operate the ing, hot surfaces, frictional heat,
water pumps shall be available at all sparks (static, electrical, and mechan-
times to insure adequate power to fill ical), spontaneous ignition, chemical
all tankage with water. and physical-chemical reactions, and
(r) All valves on connecting pipelines radiant heat.
shall be closed and locked in closed po- (7) Testing(i) General. All tanks,
sition when water loading has been whether shop built or field erected,
completed. shall be strength tested before they are
(s) Where structural guides are pro- placed in service in accordance with
vided for the protection of floating the applicable paragraphs of the code
tanks, all rigid connections between under which they were built. The
tanks and pipelines shall be discon- American Society of Mechanical Engi-
nected and blanked off or blinded be- neers (ASME) code stamp, American
fore the floodwaters reach the bottom Petroleum Institute (API) monogram,
of the tank, unless control valves and or the label of the Underwriters Lab-
their connections to the tank are of a oratories, Inc., on a tank shall be evi-
type designed to prevent breakage be- dence of compliance with this strength
tween the valve and the tank shell. test. Tanks not marked in accordance
(t) All valves attached to tanks other with the above codes shall be strength
than those used in connection with tested before they are placed in service
water loading operations shall be in accordance with good engineering
closed and locked. principles and reference shall be made
(u) If a tank is equipped with a swing to the sections on testing in the codes
line, the swing pipe shall be raised to listed in subparagraphs (1) (iii)(a),
and secured at its highest position. (iv)(b), or (v)(b) of this paragraph.
(v) Inspections. The Assistant Sec- (ii) Strength. When the vertical
retary or his designated representative length of the fill and vent pipes is such
shall make periodic inspections of all that when filled with liquid the static
plants where the storage of flammable head imposed upon the bottom of the
or combustible liquids is such as to re- tank exceeds 10 pounds per square inch,
quire compliance with the foregoing re- the tank and related piping shall be
251
tested hydrostatically to a pressure tubing, flanges, bolting, gaskets,

equal to the static head thus imposed. valves, fittings, the pressure con-
(iii) Tightness. In addition to the taining parts of other components such
strength test called for in subdivisions as expansion joints and strainers, and
(i) and (ii) of this subparagraph, all devices which serve such purposes as
tanks and connections shall be tested mixing, separating, snubbing, distrib-
for tightness. Except for underground uting, metering, or controlling flow.
tanks, this tightness test shall be made (2) Materials for piping, valves, and fit-
at operating pressure with air, inert tings(i) Required materials. Materials
gas, or water prior to placing the tank for piping, valves, or fittings shall be
in service. In the case of field-erected steel, nodular iron, or malleable iron,
tanks the strength test may be consid- except as provided in paragraph (c)(2)
ered to be the test for tank tightness. (ii), (iii) and (iv) of this section.
Underground tanks and piping, before (ii) Exceptions. Materials other than
being covered, enclosed, or placed in steel, nodular iron, or malleable iron
use, shall be tested for tightness may be used underground, or if re-
hydrostatically, or with air pressure at quired by the properties of the flam-
not less than 3 pounds per square inch mable or combustible liquid handled.
and not more than 5 pounds per square Material other than steel, nodular iron,
inch. or malleable iron shall be designed to
(iv) Repairs. All leaks or deforma- specifications embodying principles
tions shall be corrected in an accept- recognized as good engineering prac-
able manner before the tank is placed tices for the material used.
in service. Mechanical caulking is not (iii) Linings. Piping, valves, and fit-
permitted for correcting leaks in weld- tings may have combustible or non-
ed tanks except pinhole leaks in the combustible linings.
roof. (iv) Low-melting materials. When low-
(v) Derated operations. Tanks to be op- melting point materials such as alu-
erated at pressures below their design minum and brass or materials that
pressure may be tested by the applica- soften on fire exposure such as plastics,
ble provisions of subdivision (i) or (ii) or non-ductile materials such as cast
of this subparagraph, based upon the iron, are necessary, special consider-
pressure developed under full emer- ation shall be given to their behavior
gency venting of the tank. on fire exposure. If such materials are
(c) Piping, valves, and fittings(1) Gen- used in above ground piping systems or
eral(i) Design. The design (including inside buildings, they shall be suitably
selection of materials) fabrication, as- protected against fire exposure or so
sembly, test, and inspection of piping located that any spill resulting from
systems containing flammable or com- the failure of these materials could not
bustible liquids shall be suitable for unduly expose persons, important
the expected working pressures and buildings or structures or can be read-
structural stresses. Conformity with ily controlled by remote valves.
the applicable provisions of Pressure (3) Pipe joints. Joints shall be made
Piping, ANSI B31 series and the provi- liquid tight. Welded or screwed joints
sions of this paragraph, shall be consid- or approved connectors shall be used.
ered prima facie evidence of compli- Threaded joints and connections shall
ance with the foregoing provisions. be made up tight with a suitable lubri-
(ii) Exceptions. This paragraph does cant or piping compound. Pipe joints
not apply to any of the following: dependent upon the friction character-
(a) Tubing or casing on any oil or gas istics of combustible materials for me-
wells and any piping connected directly chanical continuity of piping shall not
thereto. be used inside buildings. They may be
(b) Motor vehicle, aircraft, boat, or used outside of buildings above or
portable or stationary engines. below ground. If used above ground, the
(c) Piping within the scope of any ap- piping shall either be secured to pre-
plicable boiler and pressures vessel vent disengagement at the fitting or
code. the piping system shall be so designed
(iii) Definitions. As used in this para- that any spill resulting from such dis-
graph, piping systems consist of pipe, engagement could not unduly expose
252
persons, important buildings or struc- (b) Class I or Class II liquids in the

tures, and could be readily controlled fuel tanks of a motor vehicle, aircraft,
by remote valves. boat, or portable or stationary engine;
(4) Supports. Piping systems shall be (c) Flammable or combustible paints,
substantially supported and protected oils, varnishes, and similar mixtures
against physical damage and excessive used for painting or maintenance when
stresses arising from settlement, vibra- not kept for a period in excess of 30
tion, expansion, or contraction. days;
(5) Protection against corrosion. All (d) Beverages when packaged in indi-
piping for flammable or combustible vidual containers not exceeding 1 gal-
lon in size.
liquids, both aboveground and under-
(2) Design, construction, and capacity
ground, where subject to external cor-
of containers(i) General. Only ap-
rosion, shall be painted or otherwise
proved containers and portable tanks
protected.
shall be used. Metal containers and
(6) Valves. Piping systems shall con- portable tanks meeting the require-
tain a sufficient number of valves to ments of and containing products au-
operate the system properly and to thorized by chapter I, title 49 of the
protect the plant. Piping systems in Code of Federal Regulations (regula-
connection with pumps shall contain a tions issued by the Hazardous Mate-
sufficient number of valves to control rials Regulations Board, Department of
properly the flow of liquid in normal Transportation), shall be deemed to be
operation and in the event of physical acceptable.
damage. Each connection to pipelines, (ii) Emergency venting. Each portable
by which equipments such as tankcars tank shall be provided with one or
or tank vehicles discharge liquids by more devices installed in the top with
means of pumps into storage tanks, sufficient emergency venting capacity
shall be provided with a check valve for to limit internal pressure under fire ex-
automatic protection against backflow posure conditions to 10 p.s.i.g., or 30
if the piping arrangement is such that percent of the bursting pressure of the
backflow from the system is possible. tank, whichever is greater. The total
(7) Testing. All piping before being venting capacity shall be not less than
covered, enclosed, or placed in use that specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(v) (c)
shall be hydrostatically tested to 150 or (e) of this section. At least one pres-
percent of the maximum anticipated sure-activated vent having a minimum
pressure of the system, or pneumati- capacity of 6,000 cubic feet of free air
cally tested to 110 percent of the max- (14.7 p.s.i.a. and 60 F.) shall be used. It
imum anticipated pressure of the sys- shall be set to open at not less than 5
tem, but not less than 5 pounds per p.s.i.g. If fusible vents are used, they
square inch gage at the highest point shall be actuated by elements that op-
of the system. This test shall be main- erate at a temperature not exceeding
300 F.
tained for a sufficient time to complete
(iii) Size. Flammable and combustible
visual inspection of all joints and con-
liquid containers shall be in accord-
nections, but for at least 10 minutes.
ance with Table H12, except that glass
(d) Container and portable tank stor- or plastic containers of no more than 1-
age(1) Scope(i) General. This para- gallon capacity may be used for a Class
graph shall apply only to the storage of IA or IB flammable liquid if:
flammable or combustible liquids in (a)(1) Such liquid either would be
drums or other containers (including rendered unfit for its intended use by
flammable aerosols) not exceeding 60 contact with metal or would exces-
gallons individual capacity and those sively corrode a metal container so as
portable tanks not exceeding 660 gal- to create a leakage hazard; and
lons individual capacity. (2) The users process either would re-
(ii) Exceptions. This paragraph shall quire more than 1 pint of a Class IA liq-
not apply to the following: uid or more than 1 quart of a Class IB
(a) Storage of containers in bulk liquid of a single assay lot to be used at
plants, service stations, refineries, one time, or would require the mainte-
chemical plants, and distilleries; nance of an analytical standard liquid
253
of a quality which is not met by the allowed under Table H12 for the class
specified standards of liquids available, of liquid; or
and the quantity of the analytical (b) The containers are intended for
standard liquid required to be used in direct export outside the United
any one control process exceeds one- States.
sixteenth the capacity of the container
TABLE H12MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SIZE OF CONTAINERS AND PORTABLE TANKS
Flammable liquids Combustible liquids
Container type
Class IA Class IB Class IC Class II Class III
Glass or approved plastic ....................................................... 1 pt 1 qt 1 gal 1 gal 1 gal.

Metal (other than DOT drums) ................................................ 1 gal 5 gal 5 gal 5 gal 5 gal.
Safety cans ............................................................................. 2 gal 5 gal 5 gal 5 gal 5 gal.
Metal drums (DOT specifications) .......................................... 60 gal 60 gal 60 gal 60 gal 60 gal.
Approved portable tanks ......................................................... 660 gal 660 gal 660 gal 660 gal 660 gal.
NOTE: Container exemptions: (a) Medicines, beverages, foodstuffs, cosmetics, and other common consumer items, when pack-
aged according to commonly accepted practices, shall be exempt from the requirements of 1910.106(d)(2) (i) and (ii).
(3) Design, construction, and capacity All joints shall be rabbetted and shall
of storage cabinets(i) Maximum capac- be fastened in two directions with flat-
ity. Not more than 60 gallons of Class I head woodscrews. When more than one
or Class II liquids, nor more than 120 door is used, there shall be a rabbetted
gallons of Class III liquids may be overlap of not less than 1 inch. Hinges
stored in a storage cabinet. shall be mounted in such a manner as
(ii) Fire resistance. Storage cabinets not to lose their holding capacity due
shall be designed and constructed to to loosening or burning out of the
limit the internal temperature to not screws when subjected to the fire test.
more than 325 F. when subjected to a (4) Design and construction of inside
10-minute fire test using the standard storage rooms(i) Construction. Inside
time-temperature curve as set forth in storage rooms shall be constructed to
Standard Methods of Fire Tests of meet the required fire-resistive rating
Building Construction and Materials, for their use. Such construction shall
NFPA 2511969, which is incorporated comply with the test specifications set
by reference as specified in 1910.6. All forth in Standard Methods of Fire
joints and seams shall remain tight Tests of Building Construction and Ma-
and the door shall remain securely terials, NFPA 2511969. Where an auto-
closed during the fire test. Cabinets matic sprinkler system is provided, the
shall be labeled in conspicuous let- system shall be designed and installed
tering, FlammableKeep Fire Away. in an acceptable manner. Openings to
(a) Metal cabinets constructed in the other rooms or buildings shall be pro-
following manner shall be deemed to be vided with noncombustible liquid-tight
in compliance. The bottom, top, door, raised sills or ramps at least 4 inches in
and sides of cabinet shall be at least height, or the floor in the storage area
No. 18 gage sheet iron and double shall be at least 4 inches below the sur-
walled with 112-inch air space. Joints rounding floor. Openings shall be pro-
shall be riveted, welded or made tight vided with approved self-closing fire
by some equally effective means. The doors. The room shall be liquid-tight
door shall be provided with a three- where the walls join the floor. A per-
point lock, and the door sill shall be missible alternate to the sill or ramp is
raised at least 2 inches above the bot- an open-grated trench inside of the
tom of the cabinet. room which drains to a safe location.
(b) Wooden cabinets constructed in Where other portions of the building or
the following manner shall be deemed other properties are exposed, windows
in compliance. The bottom, sides, and shall be protected as set forth in the
top shall be constructed of an approved Standard for Fire Doors and Windows,
grade of plywood at least 1 inch in NFPA No. 801968, which is incor-
thickness, which shall not break down porated by reference as specified in
or delaminate under fire conditions. 1910.6, for Class E or F openings. Wood
254
at least 1 inch nominal thickness may rior of the building in which the room
be used for shelving, racks, dunnage, is located.
scuffboards, floor overlay, and similar (v) Storage in inside storage rooms. In
installations. every inside storage room there shall
(ii) Rating and capacity. Storage in in- be maintained one clear aisle at least 3
side storage rooms shall comply with feet wide. Containers over 30 gallons
Table H13. capacity shall not be stacked one upon
the other. Dispensing shall be by ap-
TABLE H13STORAGE IN INSIDE ROOMS proved pump or self-closing faucet
only.
Total al-
lowable (5) Storage inside building(i) Egress.
Fire protec- quan- Flammable or combustible liquids, in-
Fire resist- tities
tion 1 pro- ance Maximum size (gals./ cluding stock for sale, shall not be
vided sq. ft./ stored so as to limit use of exits, stair-
floor
area) ways, or areas normally used for the
safe egress of people.
Yes ........... 2 hours .... 500 sq. ft ...................... 10 (ii) Containers. The storage of flam-
No ............ 2 hours .... 500 sq. ft ...................... 5 mable or combustible liquids in con-
Yes ........... 1 hour ...... 150 sq. ft ...................... 4
No ............ 1 hour ...... 150 sq. ft ...................... 2
tainers or portable tanks shall comply
with subdivisions (iii) through (v) of
1 Fire protection system shall be sprinkler, water spray, car-
bon dioxide, or other system.
this subparagraph.
(iii) Office occupancies. Storage shall
(iii) Wiring. Electrical wiring and be prohibited except that which is re-
equipment located in inside storage quired for maintenance and operation
rooms used for Class I liquids shall be of building and operation of equipment.
approved under Subpart S of this part Such storage shall be kept in closed
for Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Loca- metal containers stored in a storage
tions; for Class II and Class III liquids, cabinet or in safety cans or in an inside
shall be approved for general use. storage room not having a door that
(iv) Ventilation. Every inside storage opens into that portion of the building
room shall be provided with either a used by the public.
gravity or a mechanical exhaust ven- (iv) Mercantile occupancies and other
tilation system. Such system shall be retail stores.
designed to provide for a complete (a)(d) [Reserved]
change of air within the room at least (e) Leaking containers shall be re-
six times per hour. If a mechanical ex- moved to a storage room or taken to a
haust system is used, it shall be con- safe location outside the building and
trolled by a switch located outside of the contents transferred to an
the door. The ventilating equipment undamaged container.
and any lighting fixtures shall be oper- (v) General purpose public warehouses.
ated by the same switch. A pilot light Storage shall be in accordance with
shall be installed adjacent to the Table H14 or H15 and in buildings or
switch if Class I flammable liquids are in portions of such buildings cut off by
dispensed within the room. Where grav- standard firewalls. Material creating
ity ventilation is provided, the fresh no fire exposure hazard to the flam-
air intake, as well as the exhaust out- mable or combustible liquids may be
let from the room, shall be on the exte- stored in the same area.
TABLE H14INDOOR CONTAINER STORAGE
Gallons
Class liquid Storage level Protected Unprotected

storage max- storage max-
imum per pile imum per pile
A ................................................... Ground and upper floors ........................................................ 2,750 660
Basement ................................................................................ Not permitted Not permitted

B ................................................... Ground and upper floors ........................................................ 5,500 1,375

C ................................................... Ground and upper floors ........................................................ 16,500 4,125
255
TABLE H14INDOOR CONTAINER STORAGEContinued

Gallons


II ................................................... Ground and upper floors ........................................................ 16,500 4,125
Basement ................................................................................ 5,500 Not permitted
III .................................................. Ground and upper floors ........................................................ 55,000 13,750
NOTE 1: When 2 or more classes of materials are stored in a single pile, the maximum gallonage permitted in that pile shall be
the smallest of the 2 or more separate maximum gallonages.
NOTE 2: Aisles shall be provided so that no container is more than 12 ft. from an aisle. Main aisles shall be at least 3 ft. wide
and side aisles at least 4 ft. wide.
NOTE 3: Each pile shall be separated from each other by at least 4 ft.
(Numbers in parentheses indicate corresponding number of 55-gal. drums.)
TABLE H15INDOOR PORTABLE TANK STORAGE

Gallons

IA .................................................. Ground and upper floors ........................................................ Not permitted Not permitted
IB .................................................. Ground and upper floors ........................................................ 20,000 2,000
IC .................................................. Ground and upper floors ........................................................ 40,000 5,500
II ................................................... Ground and upper floors ........................................................ 40,000 5,500
III .................................................. Ground and upper floors ........................................................ 60,000 22,000
NOTE 1: When 1 or more classes of materials are stored in a single pile, the maximum gallonage permitted in that pile shall be
the smallest of the 2 or more separate maximum gallonages.
NOTE 2: Aisles shall be provided so that no portable tank is more than 12 ft. from an aisle. Main aisles shall be at least 8 ft.
wide and side aisles at least 4 ft. wide.
NOTE 3: Each pile shall be separated from each other by at least 4 ft.
(vi) Flammable and combustible liquid curely, without dunnage, and adequate
warehouses or storage buildings. (a) If materials handing equipment shall be
the storage building is located 50 feet available to handle tanks safely at the
or less from a building or line of ad- upper tier level.
joining property that may be built (e) No pile shall be closer than 3 feet
upon, the exposing wall shall be a to the nearest beam, chord, girder, or
blank wall having a fire-resistance rat- other obstruction, and shall be 3 feet
ing of at least 2 hours. below sprinkler deflectors or discharge
(b) The total quantity of liquids with- orifices of water spray, or other over-
in a building shall not be restricted, head fire protection systems.
but the arrangement of storage shall (f) Aisles of at least 3 feet wide shall
comply with Table H14 or H15. be provided where necessary for rea-
(c) Containers in piles shall be sepa- sons of access to doors, windows or
rated by pallets or dunnage where nec- standpipe connections.
essary to provide stability and to pre- (6) Storage outside buildings(i) Gen-
vent excessive stress on container eral. Storage outside buildings shall be
walls. in accordance with Table H16 or H17,
(d) Portable tanks stored over one and subdivisions (ii) and (iv) of this
tier high shall be designed to nest se- subparagraph.
256
TABLE H16OUTDOOR CONTAINER STORAGE

4Distance 5Distance
2Max- 3Distance to property to street,
1Class imum per between line that can alley, public
pile piles be built way
upon
gallons feet feet feet
IA ........................................................................................................... 1,100 5 20 10
IB ........................................................................................................... 2,200 5 20 10
IC ........................................................................................................... 4,400 5 20 10
II ............................................................................................................ 8,800 5 10 5
III ........................................................................................................... 22,000 5 10 5
NOTE 1: When 2 or more classes of materials are stored in a single pile, the maximum gallonage in that pile shall be the
smallest of the 2 or more separate gallonages.
NOTE 2: Within 200 ft. of each container, there shall be a 12-ft. wide access way to permit approach of fire control apparatus.
NOTE 3: The distances listed apply to properties that have protection for exposures as defined. If there are exposures, and
such protection for exposures does not exist, the distances in column 4 shall be doubled.
NOTE 4: When total quantity stored does not exceed 50 percent of maximum per pile, the distances in columns 4 and 5 may
be reduced 50 percent, but not less than 3 ft.
(ii) Maximum storage. A maximum of rounded by a curb at least 6 inches

1,100 gallons of flammable or combus- high. When curbs are used, provisions
tible liquids may be located adjacent shall be made for draining of accumu-
to buildings located on the same prem- lations of ground or rain water or spills
ises and under the same management of flammable or combustible liquids.
provided the provisions of subdivisions Drains shall terminate at a safe loca-
(a) and (b) of this subdivision are com- tion and shall be accessible to oper-
plied with. ation under fire conditions.
(a) [Reserved] (iv) Security. The storage area shall
(b) Where quantity stored exceeds be protected against tampering or tres-
1,100 gallons, or provisions of subdivi- passers where necessary and shall be
sion (a) of this subdivision cannot be kept free of weeds, debris and other
met, a minimum distance of 10 feet be- combustible material not necessary to
tween buildings and nearest container the storage.
of flammable or combustible liquid (7) Fire control(i) Extinguishers.
shall be maintained. Suitable fire control devices, such as
(iii) Spill containment. The storage small hose or portable fire extin-
area shall be graded in a manner to di- guishers, shall be available at locations
vert possible spills away from buildings where flammable or combustible liq-
or other exposures or shall be sur- uids are stored.
TABLE H17OUTDOOR PORTABLE TANK STORAGE
4Distance 5Distance
2Max- 3Distance to property to street,
1Class imum per between line that can alley, public
pile piles be built way
upon
gallon feet feet feet
IA ........................................................................................................... 2,200 5 20 10
IB ........................................................................................................... 4,400 5 20 10
IC ........................................................................................................... 8,800 5 20 10
II ............................................................................................................ 17,600 5 10 5
III ........................................................................................................... 44,000 5 10 5
NOTE 1: When 2 or more classes of materials are stored in a single pile, the maximum gallonage in that pile shall be the the
smallest of the 2 or more separate gallonages.
NOTE 2: Within 200 ft. of each portable tank, there shall be a 12-ft. wide access way to permit approach of fire control appa-
ratus.
NOTE 3: The distances listed apply to properties that have protection for exposures as defined. If there are exposures, and
such protection for exposures does not exist, the distances in column 4 shall be doubled.
NOTE 4: When total quantity stored does not exceed 50 percent of maximum per pile, the distances in columns 4 and 5 may
be reduced 50 percent, but not less than 3 ft.
257
(a) At least one portable fire extin- (ii) Containers. Flammable or com-
guisher having a rating of not less than bustible liquids shall be stored in tanks
12B units shall be located outside of, or closed containers.
but not more than 10 feet from, the (a) Except as provided in subdivisions
door opening into any room used for (b) and (c) of this subdivision, all stor-
storage. age shall comply with paragraph (d) (3)
(b) At least one portable fire extin- or (4) of this section.
guisher having a rating of not less than (b) The quantity of liquid that may
12B units must be located not less be located outside of an inside storage
than 10 feet, nor more than 25 feet, room or storage cabinet in a building
from any Class I or Class II liquid stor- or in any one fire area of a building
age area located outside of a storage shall not exceed:
(1) 25 gallons of Class IA liquids in
room but inside a building.
containers
(ii) Sprinklers. When sprinklers are
(2) 120 gallons of Class IB, IC, II, or
provided, they shall be installed in ac- III liquids in containers
cordance with 1910.159. (3) 660 gallons of Class IB, IC, II, or
(iii) Open flames and smoking. Open III liquids in a single portable tank.
flames and smoking shall not be per- (c) Where large quantities of flam-
mitted in flammable or combustible mable or combustible liquids are nec-
liquid storage areas. essary, storage may be in tanks which
(iv) Water reactive materials. Materials shall comply with the applicable re-
which will react with water shall not quirements of paragraph (b) of this sec-
be stored in the same room with flam- tion.
mable or combustible liquids. (iii) Separation and protection. Areas
(e) Industrial plants(1) Scope(i) Ap- in which flammable or combustible liq-
plication. This paragraph shall apply to uids are transferred from one tank or
those industrial plants where: container to another container shall be
(a) The use of flammable or combus- separated from other operations in the
tible liquids is incidental to the prin- building by adequate distance or by
cipal business, or construction having adequate fire re-
(b) Where flammable or combustible sistance. Drainage or other means shall
liquids are handled or used only in unit be provided to control spills. Adequate
physical operations such as mixing, natural or mechanical ventilation shall
drying, evaporating, filtering, distilla- be provided.
tion, and similar operations which do (iv) Handling liquids at point of final
not involve chemical reaction. This use. (a) Flammable liquids shall be
paragraph shall not apply to chemical kept in covered containers when not
actually in use.
plants, refineries or distilleries.
(b) Where flammable or combustible
(ii) Exceptions. Where portions of such
liquids are used or handled, except in
plants involve chemical reactions such closed containers, means shall be pro-
as oxidation, reduction, halogenation, vided to dispose promptly and safely of
hydrogenation, alkylation, polymeriza- leakage or spills.
tion, and other chemical processes, (c) Class I liquids may be used only
those portions of the plant shall be in where there are no open flames or
accordance with paragraph (h) of this other sources of ignition within the
section. possible path of vapor travel.
(2) Incidental storage or use of flam- (d) Flammable or combustible liquids
mable and combustible liquids(i) Appli- shall be drawn from or transferred into
cation. This subparagraph shall be ap- vessels, containers, or portable tanks
plicable to those portions of an indus- within a building only through a closed
trial plant where the use and handling piping system, from safety cans, by
of flammable or combustible liquids is means of a device drawing through the
only incidental to the principal busi- top, or from a container or portable
ness, such as automobile assembly, tanks by gravity through an approved
construction of electronic equipment, self-closing valve. Transferring by
furniture manufacturing, or other means of air pressure on the container
similar activities. or portable tanks shall be prohibited.
258
(3) Unit physical operations(i) Appli- (b) Equipment used in a building and
cation. This subparagraph shall be ap- the ventilation of the building shall be
plicable in those portions of industrial designed so as to limit flammable
plants where flammable or combustible vapor-air mixtures under normal oper-
liquids are handled or used in unit ating conditions to the interior of
physical operations such as mixing, equipment, and to not more than 5 feet
drying, evaporating, filtering, distilla- from equipment which exposes Class I
tion, and similar operations which do liquids to the air. Examples of such
not involve chemical change. Examples equipment are dispensing stations,
are plants compounding cosmetics, open centrifuges, plate and frame fil-
pharmaceuticals, solvents, cleaning ters, open vacuum filters, and surfaces
fluids, insecticides, and similar types of open equipment.
of activities. (vi) Storage and handling. The stor-
(ii) Location. Industrial plants shall age, transfer, and handling of liquid
be located so that each building or unit shall comply with paragraph (h)(4) of
of equipment is accessible from at least this section.
one side for firefighting and fire con- (4) Tank vehicle and tank car loading
trol purposes. Buildings shall be lo- and unloading. (i) Tank vehicle and
cated with respect to lines of adjoining tank car loading or unloading facilities
property which may be built upon as shall be separated from aboveground
set forth in paragraph (h)(2) (i) and (ii) tanks, warehouses, other plant build-
of this section except that the blank ings or nearest line of adjoining prop-
wall referred to in paragraph (h)(2)(ii) erty which may be built upon by a dis-
of this section shall have a fire resist- tance of 25 feet for Class I liquids and
ance rating of at least 2 hours. 15 feet for Class II and Class III liquids
(iii) Chemical processes. Areas where measured from the nearest position of
unstable liquids are handled or small any fill stem. Buildings for pumps or
shelters for personnel may be a part of
scale unit chemical processes are car-
the facility. Operations of the facility
ried on shall be separated from the re-
shall comply with the appropriate por-
mainder of the plant by a fire wall of 2-
tions of paragraph (f)(3) of this section.
hour minimum fire resistance rating.
(ii) [Reserved]
(iv) Drainage. (a) Emergency drainage (5) Fire control(i) Portable and special
systems shall be provided to direct equipment. Portable fire extinguish-
flammable or combustible liquid leak- ment and control equipment shall be
age and fire protection water to a safe provided in such quantities and types
location. This may require curbs, scup- as are needed for the special hazards of
pers, or special drainage systems to operation and storage.
control the spread of fire; see para- (ii) Water supply. Water shall be
graph (b)(2)(vii)(b) of this section. available in volume and at adequate
(b) Emergency drainage systems, if pressure to supply water hose streams,
connected to public sewers or dis- foam-producing equipment, automatic
charged into public waterways, shall be sprinklers, or water spray systems as
equipped with traps or separator. the need is indicated by the special
(v) Ventilation. (a) Areas as defined in hazards of operation, dispensing and
subdivision (i) of this subparagraph storage.
using Class I liquids shall be ventilated (iii) Special extinguishers. Special ex-
at a rate of not less than 1 cubic foot tinguishing equipment such as that
per minute per square foot of solid utilizing foam, inert gas, or dry chem-
floor area. This shall be accomplished ical shall be provided as the need is in-
by natural or mechanical ventilation dicated by the special hazards of oper-
with discharge or exhaust to a safe lo- ation dispensing and storage.
cation outside of the building. Provi- (iv) Special hazards. Where the need is
sion shall be made for introduction of indicated by special hazards of oper-
makeup air in such a manner as not to ation, flammable or combustible liquid
short circuit the ventilation. Ventila- processing equipment, major piping,
tion shall be arranged to include all and supporting steel shall be protected
floor areas or pits where flammable va- by approved water spray systems, del-
pors may collect. uge systems, approved fire-resistant
259
coatings, insulation, or any combina- Division 1 area, and up to 3 feet above

tion of these. floor or grade level within 25 feet, if in-
(v) Maintenance. All plant fire protec- doors, or 10 feet if outdoors, from any
tion facilities shall be adequately pump, bleeder, withdrawal fitting,
maintained and periodically inspected meter, or similar device handling Class
and tested to make sure they are al- I liquids. Pits provided with adequate
ways in satisfactory operating condi- mechanical ventilation within a Divi-
tion, and they will serve their purpose sion 1 or 2 area shall be classified Divi-
in time of emergency. sion 2. If Class II or Class III liquids
(6) Sources of ignition(i) General. only are handled, then ordinary elec-
Adequate precautions shall be taken to trical equipment is satisfactory though
prevent the ignition of flammable va- care shall be used in locating electrical
pors. Sources of ignition include but apparatus to prevent hot metal from
are not limited to open flames; light- falling into open equipment.
ning; smoking; cutting and welding; (d) Where the provisions of subdivi-
hot surfaces; frictional heat; static, sions (a), (b), and (c), of this subdivision
electrical, and mechanical sparks; require the installation of electrical
spontaneous ignition, including heat- equipment suitable for Class I, Division
producing chemical reactions; and ra- 1 or Division 2 locations, ordinary elec-
diant heat. trical equipment including switchgear
(ii) Grounding. Class I liquids shall may be used if installed in a room or
not be dispensed into containers unless enclosure which is maintained under
the nozzle and container are elec- positive pressure with respect to the
trically interconnected. Where the me- hazardous area. Ventilation makeup
tallic floorplate on which the container air shall be uncontaminated by flam-
stands while filling is electrically con- mable vapors.
nected to the fill stem or where the fill (8) Repairs to equipment. Hot work,
stem is bonded to the container during such as welding or cutting operations,
filling operations by means of a bond use of spark-producing power tools, and
wire, the provisions of this section chipping operations shall be permitted
shall be deemed to have been complied only under supervision of an individual
with. in responsible charge. The individual in
(7) Electrical(i) Equipment. (a) All responsible charge shall make an in-
electrical wiring and equipment shall spection of the area to be sure that it
be installed according to the require- is safe for the work to be done and that
ments of Subpart S of this part. safe procedures will be followed for the
(b) Locations where flammable work specified.
vapor-air mixtures may exist under (9) Housekeeping(i) General. Mainte-
normal operations shall be classified nance and operating practices shall be
Class I, Division 1 according to the rein accordance with established proce-
quirements of Subpart S of this part. dures which will tend to control leak-
For those pieces of equipment installed age and prevent the accidental escape
in accordance with subparagraph of flammable or combustible liquids.
(3)(v)(b) of this paragraph, the Division Spills shall be cleaned up promptly.
1 area shall extend 5 feet in all direc- (ii) Access. Adequate aisles shall be
tions from all points of vapor libera- maintained for unobstructed move-
tion. All areas within pits shall be clas- ment of personnel and so that fire pro-
sified Division 1 if any part of the pit is tection equipment can be brought to
within a Division 1 or 2 classified area, bear on any part of flammable or com-
unless the pit is provided with mechan- bustible liquid storage, use, or any unit
ical ventilation. physical operation.
(c) Locations where flammable vapor- (iii) Waste and residue. Combustible
air mixtures may exist under abnormal waste material and residues in a build-
conditions and for a distance beyond ing or unit operating area shall be kept
Division 1 locations shall be classified to a minimum, stored in covered metal
Division 2 according to the require- receptacles and disposed of daily.
ments of Subpart S of this part. These (iv) Clear zone. Ground area around
locations include an area within 20 feet buildings and unit operating areas
horizontally, 3 feet vertically beyond a shall be kept free of weeds, trash, or
260
other unnecessary combustible mate- vapors in hazardous concentrations.

rials. Where mechanical ventilation is re-
(f) Bulk plants(1) Storage(i) Class I quired, it shall be kept in operation
liquids. Class I liquids shall be stored in while flammable liquids are being han-
closed containers, or in storage tanks dled.
above ground outside of buildings, or (3) Loading and unloading facilities(i)
underground in accordance with para- Separation. Tank vehicle and tank car
graph (b) of this section. loading or unloading facilities shall be
(ii) Class II and III liquids. Class II separated from aboveground tanks,
and Class III liquids shall be stored in warehouses, other plant buildings or
containers, or in tanks within build- nearest line of adjoining property that
ings or above ground outside of build- may be built upon by a distance of 25
ings, or underground in accordance feet for Class I liquids and 15 feet for
with paragraph (b) of this section. Class II and Class III liquids measured
(iii) Piling containers. Containers of from the nearest position of any fill
flammable or combustible liquids when spout. Buildings for pumps or shelters
piled one upon the other shall be sepa- for personnel may be a part of the fa-
rated by dunnage sufficient to provide cility.
stability and to prevent excessive (ii) Class restriction. Equipment such
stress on container walls. The height of as piping, pumps, and meters used for
the pile shall be consistent with the the transfer of Class I liquids between
stability and strength of containers. storage tanks and the fill stem of the
(2) Buildings(i) Exits. Rooms in loading rack shall not be used for the
which flammable or combustible liq- transfer of Class II or Class III liquids.
uids are stored or handled by pumps (iii) Valves. Valves used for the final
shall have exit facilities arranged to control for filling tank vehicles shall
prevent occupants from being trapped be of the self-closing type and manu-
in the event of fire. ally held open except where automatic
(ii) Heating. Rooms in which Class I means are provided for shutting off the
liquids are stored or handled shall be flow when the vehicle is full or after
heated only by means not constituting filling of a preset amount.
a source of ignition, such as steam or (iv) Static protection. (a) Bonding fa-
hot water. Rooms containing heating cilities for protection against static
appliances involving sources of igni- sparks during the loading of tank vehi-
tion shall be located and arranged to cles through open domes shall be pro-
prevent entry of flammable vapors. vided:
(iii) Ventilation. (a) Ventilation shall (1) Where Class I liquids are loaded,
be provided for all rooms, buildings, or or
enclosures in which Class I liquids are (2) Where Class II or Class III liquids
pumped or dispensed. Design of ventila- are loaded into vehicles which may
tion systems shall take into account contain vapors from previous cargoes
the relatively high specific gravity of of Class I liquids.
the vapors. Ventilation may be pro- (b) Protection as required in (a) of
vided by adequate openings in outside this subdivision (iv) shall consist of a
walls at floor level unobstructed except metallic bond wire permanently elec-
by louvers or coarse screens. Where trically connected to the fill stem or to
natural ventilation is inadequate, me- some part of the rack structure in elec-
chanical ventilation shall be provided. trical contact with the fill stem. The
(b) Class I liquids shall not be stored free end of such wire shall be provided
or handled within a building having a with a clamp or equivalent device for
basement or pit into which flammable convenient attachment to some metal-
vapors may travel, unless such area is lic part in electrical contact with the
provided with ventilation designed to cargo tank of the tank vehicle.
prevent the accumulation of flammable (c) Such bonding connection shall be
vapors therein. made fast to the vehicle or tank before
(c) Containers of Class I liquids shall dome covers are raised and shall re-
not be drawn from or filled within main in place until filling is completed
buildings unless provision is made to and all dome covers have been closed
prevent the accumulation of flammable and secured.
261
(d) Bonding as specified in (a), (b), in conjunction with a bulk plant, the
and (c) of this subdivision is not re- primary function of which is the trans-
quired: fer of flammable or combustible liquid
(1) Where vehicles are loaded exclu- cargo in bulk between the bulk plant
sively with products not having a stat- and any tank vessel, ship, barge, light-
ic accumulating tendency, such as as- er boat, or other mobile floating craft;
phalt, most crude oils, residual oils, and this subparagraph shall apply to
and water soluble liquids; all such installations except Marine
(2) Where no Class I liquids are han- Service Stations as covered in para-
dled at the loading facility and the graph (g) of this section.
tank vehicles loaded are used exclu- (ii)(iii) [Reserved]
sively for Class II and Class III liquids; (iv) Design and construction. Sub-
and structure and deck shall be substan-
(3) Where vehicles are loaded or un- tially designed for the use intended.
loaded through closed bottom or top Deck may employ any material which
connections. will afford the desired combination of
(e) Filling through open domes into flexibility, resistance to shock, dura-
the tanks of tank vehicles or tank cars, bility, strength, and fire resistance.
that contain vapor-air mixtures within Heavy timber construction is accept-
the flammable range or where the liq- able.
uid being filled can form such a mix- (v) [Reserved]
ture, shall be by means of a downspout (vi) Pumps. Loading pumps capable of
which extends near the bottom of the building up pressures in excess of the
tank. This precaution is not required safe working pressure of cargo hose or
when loading liquids which are non- loading arms shall be provided with by-
accumulators of static charges. passes, relief valves, or other arrange-
(v) Stray currents. Tank car loading ment to protect the loading facilities
facilities where Class I liquids are load- against excessive pressure. Relief de-
ed through open domes shall be pro- vices shall be tested at not more than
tected against stray currents by bond- yearly intervals to determine that they
ing the pipe to at least one rail and to function satisfactorily at the pressure
the rack structure if of metal. Multiple at which they are set.
lines entering the rack area shall be (vii) Hoses and couplings. All pressure
electrically bonded together. In addi- hoses and couplings shall be inspected
tion, in areas where excessive stray at intervals appropriate to the service.
currents are known to exist, all pipe The hose and couplings shall be tested
entering the rack area shall be pro- with the hose extended and using the
vided with insulating sections to elec- inservice maximum operating pres-
trically isolate the rack piping from sures. Any hose showing material de-
the pipelines. No bonding between the teriorations, signs of leakage, or weak-
tank car and the rack or piping is re- ness in its carcass or at the couplings
quired during either loading or unload- shall be withdrawn from service and re-
ing of Class II or III liquids. paired or discarded.
(vi) Container filling facilities. Class I (viii) Piping and fittings. Piping,
liquids shall not be dispensed into con- valves, and fittings shall be in accord-
tainers unless the nozzle and container ance with paragraph (c) of this section,
are electrically interconnected. Where with the following exceptions and addi-
the metallic floorplate on which the tions:
container stands while filling is elec- (a) Flexibility of piping shall be as-
trically connected to the fill stem or sured by appropriate layout and ar-
where the fill stem is bonded to the rangement of piping supports so that
container during filling operations by motion of the wharf structure resulting
means of a bond wire, the provisions of from wave action, currents, tides, or
this section shall be deemed to have the mooring of vessels will not subject
been complied with. the pipe to repeated strain beyond the
(4) Wharves(i) Definition, application. elastic limit.
The term wharf shall mean any wharf, (b) Pipe joints depending upon the
pier, bulkhead, or other structure over friction characteristics of combustible
or contiguous to navigable water used materials or grooving of pipe ends for
262
mechanical continuity of piping shall nections are made and broken can be
not be used. reached by at least one hose stream.
(c) Swivel joints may be used in pip- (b) Material shall not be placed on
ing to which hoses are connected, and wharves in such a manner as to ob-
for articulated swivel-joint transfer struct access to firefighting equipment,
systems, provided that the design is or important pipeline control valves.
such that the mechanical strength of (c) Where the wharf is accessible to
the joint will not be impaired if the vehicle traffic, an unobstructed road-
packing material should fail, as by ex- way to the shore end of the wharf shall
posure to fire. be maintained for access of firefighting
(d) Piping systems shall contain a apparatus.
sufficient number of valves to operate (x) Operations control. Loading or dis-
the system properly and to control the charging shall not commence until the
flow of liquid in normal operation and wharf superintendent and officer in
in the event of physical damage. charge of the tank vessel agree that
(e) In addition to the requirements of the tank vessel is properly moored and
subdivision (d) of this subdivision, each all connections are properly made. Me-
line conveying flammable liquids lead- chanical work shall not be performed
ing to a wharf shall be provided with a on the wharf during cargo transfer, ex-
readily accessible block valve located cept under special authorization based
on shore near the approach to the
on a review of the area involved, meth-
wharf and outside of any diked area.
ods to be employed, and precautions
Where more than one line is involved,
necessary.
the valves shall be grouped in one loca-
tion. (5) Electrical equipment(i) Applica-
(f) Means of easy access shall be pro- tion. This subparagraph shall apply to
vided for cargo line valves located areas where Class I liquids are stored
below the wharf deck. or handled. For areas where Class II or
(g) Pipelines on flammable or com- Class III liquids only are stored or han-
bustible liquids wharves shall be ade- dled, the electrical equipment may be
quately bonded and grounded. If exces- installed in accordance with the provi-
sive stray currents are encountered, in- sions of Subpart S of this part, for ordi-
sulating joints shall be installed. Bond- nary locations.
ing and grounding connections on all (ii) Conformance. All electrical equip-
pipelines shall be located on wharfside ment and wiring shall be of a type
of hose-riser insulating flanges, if used, specified by and shall be installed in
and shall be accessible for inspection. accordance with Subpart S of this part.
(h) Hose or articulated swivel-joint (iii) Classification. So far as it applies
pipe connections used for cargo trans- Table H18 shall be used to delineate
fer shall be capable of accommodating and classify hazardous areas for the
the combined effects of change in draft purpose of installation of electrical
and maximum tidal range, and mooring equipment under normal cir-
lines shall be kept adjusted to prevent cumstances. In Table H18 a classified
the surge of the vessel from placing area shall not extend beyond an
stress on the cargo transfer system. unpierced wall, roof, or other solid par-
(i) Hose shall be supported so as to tition. The area classifications listed
avoid kinking and damage from chaf- shall be based on the premise that the
ing. installation meets the applicable re-
(ix) Fire protection. Suitable portable quirements of this section in all re-
fire extinguishers with a rating of not spects.
less than 12BC shall be located within (6) Sources of ignition. Class I liquids
75 feet of those portions of the facility shall not be handled, drawn, or dis-
where fires are likely to occur, such as pensed where flammable vapors may
hose connections, pumps, and separator reach a source of ignition. Smoking
tanks. shall be prohibited except in des-
(a) Where piped water is available, ignated localities. No Smoking signs
ready-connected fire hose in size appro- shall be conspicuously posted where
priate for the water supply shall be hazard from flammable liquid vapors is
provided so that manifolds where con- normally present.
263
(7) Drainage and waste disposal. Provi- (b) Aboveground tanks, located in an
sion shall be made to prevent flam- adjoining bulk plant, may be connected
mable or combustible liquids which by piping to service station under-
may be spilled at loading or unloading ground tanks if, in addition to valves
points from entering public sewers and at aboveground tanks, a valve is also
drainage systems, or natural water- installed within control of service sta-
ways. Connection to such sewers, tion personnel.
drains, or waterways by which flam- (c) Apparatus dispensing Class I liq-
mable or combustible liquids might uids into the fuel tanks of motor vehi-
enter shall be provided with separator cles of the public shall not be located
boxes or other approved means where- at a bulk plant unless separated by a
by such entry is precluded. Crankcase fence or similar barrier from the area
drainings and flammable or combus- in which bulk operations are con-
tible liquids shall not be dumped into ducted.
sewers, but shall be stored in tanks or (d) [Reserved]
tight drums outside of any building (e) The provisions of paragraph
until removed from the premises. (g)(1)(i)(a) of this section shall not pro-
(8) Fire control. Suitable fire-control hibit the dispensing of flammable liq-
devices, such as small hose or portable uids in the open from a tank vehicle to
fire extinguishers, shall be available to a motor vehicle. Such dispensing shall
locations where fires are likely to be permitted provided:
occur. Additional fire-control equip-
(1) The tank vehicle complies with
ment may be required where a tank of
the requirements covered in the Stand-
more than 50,000 gallons individual ca-
ard on Tank Vehicles for Flammable
pacity contains Class I liquids and
Liquids, NFPA 3851966.
where an unusual exposure hazard ex-
ists from surrounding property. Such (2) The dispensing is done on prem-
additional fire-control equipment shall ises not open to the public.
be sufficient to extinguish a fire in the (3) [Reserved]
largest tank. The design and amount of (4) The dispensing hose does not ex-
such equipment shall be in accordance ceed 50 feet in length.
with approved engineering standards. (5) The dispensing nozzle is a listed
(g) Service stations(1) Storage and automatic-closing type without a
handling(i) General provisions. (a) Liq- latchopen device.
uids shall be stored in approved closed (f) Class I liquids shall not be stored
containers not exceeding 60 gallons ca- or handled within a building having a
pacity, in tanks located underground, basement or pit into which flammable
in tanks in special enclosures as de- vapors may travel, unless such area is
scribed in paragraph (g)(i) of this sec- provided with ventilation designed to
tion, or in aboveground tanks as pro- prevent the accumulation of flammable
vided for in paragraphs (g)(4)(ii), (b), (c) vapors therein.
and (d) of this section. (g) [Reserved]
TABLE H18ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT HAZARDOUS AREASBULK PLANTS
Class I
Location Group D Extent of classified area
division
Tank vehicle and tank car: 1

Loading through open dome ........................... 1 Within 3 feet of edge of dome, extending in all directions.
2 Area between 3 feet and 5 feet from edge of dome, extending
in all directions.
Loading through bottom connections with at- 1 Within 3 feet of point of venting to atmosphere extending in all
mospheric venting. directions.
2 Area between 3 feet and 5 feet from point of venting to at-
mosphere, extending in all directions. Also up to 18 inches
above grade within a horizontal radius of 10 feet from point
of loading connection.
Loading through closed dome with atmos- 1 Within 3 feet of open end of vent, extending in all directions.
pheric venting. 2 Area between 3 feet and 5 feet from open end of vent, ex-
tending in all directions. Also within 3 feet of edge of dome,
extending in all directions.
264
TABLE H18ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT HAZARDOUS AREASBULK PLANTSContinued

Class I
division
Loading through closed dome with vapor re- 2 Within 3 feet of point of connection of both fill and vapor lines,
covery. extending in all directions.
Bottom loading with vapor recovery or any 2 Within 3 feet of point of connections extending in all direc-
bottom unloading. tions. Also up to 18 inches above grade with in a horizontal
radius of 10 feet from point of connection.
Drum and container filling:
Outdoors, or indoors with adequate ventilation 1 Within 3 feet of vent and fill opening, extending in all direc-
tions.
2 Area between 3 feet and 5 feet from vent or fill opening, ex-
tending in all directions. Also up to 18 inches above floor or
grade level within a horizontal radius of 10 feet from vent or
fill opening.
Outdoors, or indoors with adequate ventilation 1 Within 3 feet of vent and fill opening, extending in all direc-
tions.
2 Area between 3 feet and 5 feet from vent or fill opening, ex-
tending in all directions. Also up to 18 inches above floor or
grade level within a horizontal radius of 10 feet from vent or
fill opening.
TankAboveground:
Shell, ends, or roof and dike area .................. 2 Within 10 feet from shell, ends, or roof of tank, Area inside
dikes to level of top of dike.
Vent ................................................................. 1 Within 5 feet of open end of vent, extending in all directions.
2 Area between 5 feet and 10 feet from open end of vent, ex-
tending in all directions.
Floating roof .................................................... 1 Area above the roof and within the shell.
Pits:
Without mechanical ventilation ........................ 1 Entire area within pit if any part is within a Division 1 or 2
classified area.
With mechanical ventilation ............................. 2 Entire area within pit if any part is within a Division 1 or 2
classified area.
Containing valves, fittings or piping, and not 2 Entire pit.
within a Division 1 or 2 classified area.
Pumps, bleeders, withdrawal fittings, meters and
similar devices:
Indoors ............................................................. 2 Within 5 feet of any edge of such devices, extending in all di-
rections. Also up to 3 feet above floor or grade level within
25 feet horizontally from any edge of such devices.
Outdoors .......................................................... 2 Within 3 feet of any edge of such devices, extending in all di-
rections. Also up to 18 inches above grade level within 10
feet horizontally from any edge of such devices.
Storage and repair garage for tank vehicles .. 1 All pits or spaces below floor level.
2 Area up to 18 inches above floor or grade level for entire stor-
age or repair garage.
Drainage ditches, separators, impounding ba- 2 Area up to 18 inches above ditch, separator or basin. Also up
sins. to 18 inches above grade within 15 feet horizontally from
any edge.
Garages for other than tank vehicles .............. (2 ) If there is any opening to these rooms within the extent of an
outdoor classified area, the entire room shall be classified
the same as the area classification at the point of the open-
ing.
Outdoor drum storage ..................................... (2 )
Indoor warehousing where there is no flam- (2 ) If there is any opening to these rooms within the extent of an
mable liquid transfer. indoor classified are, the room shall be classified the same
as if the wall, curb or partition did not exist.
Office and rest rooms ...................................... (2 )
1 When classifying the extent of the area, consideration shall be given to the fact that tank cars or tank vehicles may be spot-
ted at varying points. Therefore, the extremities of the loading or unloading positions shall be used.
2 Ordinary.
(ii) Special enclosures. (a) When instal- (b) The enclosure shall be substan-
lation of tanks in accordance with tially liquid and vaportight without
paragraph (b)(3) of this section is im- backfill. Sides, top, and bottom of the
practical because of property or build- enclosure shall be of reinforced con-
ing limitations, tanks for flammable or crete at least 6 inches thick, with open-
combustible liquids may be installed in ings for inspection through the top
buildings if properly enclosed. only. Tank connections shall be so
265
piped or closed that neither vapors nor below grade, only approved mechanical
liquid can escape into the enclosed ventilation shall be used and the entire
space. Means shall be provided whereby dispensing area shall be protected by
portable equipment may be employed an approved automatic sprinkler sys-
to discharge to the outside any liquid tem. Ventilating systems shall be elec-
or vapors which might accumulate trically interlocked with gasoline dis-
should leakage occur. pensing units so that the dispensing
(iii) Inside buildings. (a) Except where units cannot be operated unless the
stored in tanks as provided in subdivi- ventilating fan motors are energized.
sion (ii) of this subparagraph, no Class (iii) Emergency power cutoff. A clearly
I liquids shall be stored within any identified and easily accessible
service station building except in switch(es) or a circuit breaker(s) shall
closed containers of aggregate capacity be provided at a location remote from
not exceeding 60 gallons. One container dispensing devices, including remote
not exceeding 60 gallons capacity pumping systems, to shut off the power
equipped with an approved pump is per- to all dispensing devices in the event of
mitted. an emergency.
(b) Class I liquids may be transferred (iv) Dispensing units. (a) Class I liq-
from one container to another in lubri- uids shall be transferred from tanks by
cation or service rooms of a service means of fixed pumps so designed and
station building provided the electrical equipped as to allow control of the flow
installation complies with Table H19 and to prevent leakage or accidental
and provided that any heating equip- discharge.
ment complies with subparagraph (6) of (b)(1) Only listed devices may be used
this paragraph. for dispensing Class I liquids. No such
(c) Class II and Class III liquids may device may be used if it shows evidence
be stored and dispensed inside service of having been dismantled.
station buildings from tanks of not (2) Every dispensing device for Class I
more than 120 gallons capacity each. liquids installed after December 31,
(iv) [Reserved] 1978, shall contain evidence of listing
(v) Dispensing into portable containers. so placed that any attempt to dis-
No delivery of any Class I liquids shall mantle the device will result in dam-
be made into portable containers un- age to such evidence, visible without
less the container is constructed of disassembly or dismounting of the noz-
metal, has a tight closure with screwed zle.
or spring cover, and is fitted with a (c) Class I liquids shall not be dis-
spout or so designed that the contents pensed by pressure from drums, bar-
can be poured without spilling. rels, and similar containers. Approved
(2) [Reserved] pumps taking suction through the top
(3) Dispensing systems(i) Location. of the container or approved self-clos-
Dispensing devices at automotive serving faucets shall be used.
ice stations shall be so located that all (d) The dispensing units, except those
parts of the vehicle being served will be attached to containers, shall be mount-
on the premises of the service station. ed either on a concrete island or pro-
(ii) Inside location. Approved dis- tected against collision damage by
pensing units may be located inside of suitable means.
buildings. The dispensing area shall be (v) Remote pumping systems.
separated from other areas in an ap- (a) This subdivision shall apply to
proved manner. The dispensing unit systems for dispensing Class I liquids
and its piping shall be mounted either where such liquids are transferred from
on a concrete island or protected storage to individual or multiple dis-
against collision damage by suitable pensing units by pumps located else-
means and shall be located in a posi- where than at the dispensing units.
tion where it cannot be struck by a ve- (b) Pumps shall be designed or
hicle descending a ramp or other slope equipped so that no part of the system
out of control. The dispensing area will be subjected to pressures above its
shall be provided with an approved me- allowable working pressure. Pumps in-
chanical or gravity ventilation system. stalled above grade, outside of build-
When dispensing units are located ings, shall be located not less than 10
266
feet from lines of adjoining property (4) Marine service stations(i) Dis-
which may be built upon, and not less pensing. (a) The dispensing area shall
than 5 feet from any building opening. be located away from other structures
When an outside pump location is im- so as to provide room for safe ingress
practical, pumps may be installed in- and egress of craft to be fueled. Dis-
side of buildings, as provided for dispensing units shall in all cases be at
pensers in subdivision (ii) of this sub- least 20 feet from any activity involv-
paragraph, or in pits as provided in ing fixed sources of ignition.
subdivision (c) of this subdivision. (b) Dispensing shall be by approved
Pumps shall be substantially anchored dispensing units with or without inte-
and protected against physical damage gral pumps and may be located on open
by vehicles. piers, wharves, or floating docks or on
(c) Pits for subsurface pumps or pip- shore or on piers of the solid fill type.
ing manifolds of submersible pumps (c) Dispensing nozzles shall be auto-
shall withstand the external forces to matic-closing without a hold-open
which they may be subjected without latch.
damage to the pump, tank, or piping. (ii) Tanks and pumps. (a) Tanks, and
The pit shall be no larger than nec- pumps not integral with the dispensing
essary for inspection and maintenance unit, shall be on shore or on a pier of
and shall be provided with a fitted the solid fill type, except as provided in
cover. paragraphs (g)(4)(ii) (b) and (c) of this
(d) A control shall be provided that section.
will permit the pump to operate only (b) Where shore location would re-
when a dispensing nozzle is removed quire excessively long supply lines to
from its bracket on the dispensing unit dispensers, tanks may be installed on a
and the switch on this dispensing unit pier provided that applicable portions
is manually actuated. This control of paragraph (b) of this section relative
shall also stop the pump when all noz- to spacing, diking, and piping are com-
zles have been returned to their brack- plied with and the quantity so stored
ets. does not exceed 1,100 gallons aggregate
(e) An approved impact valve, incor- capacity.
porating a fusible link, designed to (c) Shore tanks supplying marine
close automatically in the event of se- service stations may be located above
vere impact or fire exposure shall be ground, where rock ledges or high
properly installed in the dispensing water table make underground tanks
supply line at the base of each indi- impractical.
vidual dispensing device. (d) Where tanks are at an elevation
(f) Testing. After the completion of which would produce gravity head on
the installation, including any paving, the dispensing unit, the tank outlet
that section of the pressure piping sys- shall be equipped with a pressure con-
tem between the pump discharge and trol valve positioned adjacent to and
the connection for the dispensing facil- outside the tank block valve specified
ity shall be tested for at least 30 min- in paragraph (b)(2)(ix)(b) of this sec-
utes at the maximum operating pres- tion, so adjusted that liquid cannot
sure of the system. Such tests shall be flow by gravity from the tank in case
repeated at 5-year intervals thereafter. of piping or hose failure.
(vi) Delivery nozzles. (a) A listed man- (iii) Piping. (a) Piping between shore
ual or automatic-closing type hose noz- tanks and dispensing units shall be as
zle valve shall be provided on dis- described in paragraph (c) of this sec-
pensers used for the dispensing of Class tion, except that, where dispensing is
I liquids. from a floating structure, suitable
(b) Manual-closing type valves shall lengths of oil-resistant flexible hose
be held open manually during dis- may be employed between the shore
pensing. Automatic-closing type valves piping and the piping on the floating
may be used in conjunction with an ap- structure as made necessary by change
proved latch-open device. in water level or shoreline.
267
TABLE H19ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT HAZARDOUS AREASSERVICE STATIONS

Class I
division
Underground tank:
Fill opening ...................................................... 1 Any pit, box or space below grade level, any part of which is
within the Division 1 or 2 classified area.
2 Up to 18 inches above grade level within a horizontal radius
of 10 feet from a loose fill connection and within a hori-
zontal radius of 5 feet from a tight fill connection.
VentDischarging upward .............................. 1 Within 3 feet of open end of vent, extending in all directions.
2 Area between 3 feet and 5 feet of open end of vent, extending
in all directions.
Dispenser:
Pits ................................................................... 1 Any pit, box or space below grade level, any part of which is
within the Division 1 or 2 classified area.
Dispenser enclosure ........................................ 1 The area 4 feet vertically above base within the enclosure and
18 inches horizontally in all directions.
Outdoor ............................................................ 2 Up to 18 inches above grade level within 20 feet horizontally
of any edge of enclosure.
Indoor:
With mechanical ventilation ............................. 2 Up to 18 inches above grade or floor level within 20 feet hori-
zontally of any edge of enclosure.
With gravity ventilation .................................... 2 Up to 18 inches above grade or floor level within 25 feet hori-
zontally of any edge of enclosure.
Remote pumpOutdoor ................................. 1 Any pit, box or space below grade level if any part is within a
horizontal distance of 10 feet from any edge of pump.
2 Within 3 feet of any edge of pump, extending in all directions.
Also up to 18 inches above grade level within 10 feet hori-
zontally from any edge of pump.
Remote pumpIndoor .................................... 1 Entire area within any pit.
2 Within 5 feet of any edge of pump, extending in all directions.
Also up to 3 feet above floor or grade level within 25 feet
horizontally from any edge of pump.
Lubrication or service room ............................. 1 Entire area within any pit.
2 Area up to 18 inches above floor or grade level within entire
lubrication room.
Dispenser for Class I liquids ........................... 2 Within 3 feet of any fill or dispensing point, extending in all di-
rections.
Special enclosure inside building per 1910. 1 Entire enclosure.
106(f)(1)(ii).
Sales, storage and rest rooms ........................ (1 ) If there is any opening to these rooms within the extent of a
Division 1 area, the entire room shall be classified as Divi-
sion 1.
1 Ordinary.
(b) A readily accessible valve to shut (ii) All electrical equipment and wir-
off the supply from shore shall be pro- ing shall be of a type specified by and
vided in each pipeline at or near the shall be installed in accordance with
approach to the pier and at the shore subpart S of this part.
end of each pipeline adjacent to the (iii) So far as it applies. Table H19
point where flexible hose is attached. shall be used to delineate and classify
(c) Piping shall be located so as to be hazardous areas for the purpose of in-
protected from physical damage. stallation of electrical equipment
(d) Piping handling Class I liquids under normal circumstances. A classi-
shall be grounded to control stray cur- fied area shall not extend beyond an
rents. unpierced wall, roof, or other solid par-
(5) Electrical equipment(i) Applica- tition.
tion. This subparagraph shall apply to
(iv) The area classifications listed
areas where Class I liquids are stored
shall be based on the assumption that
or handled. For areas where Class II or
Class III liquids are stored or handled the installation meets the applicable
the electrical equipment may be in- requirements of this section in all re-
stalled in accordance with the provi- spects.
sions of subpart S of this part, for ordi-
nary locations.
268
(6) Heating equipment(i) Conform- spicuous and legible signs prohibiting

ance. Heating equipment shall be in- smoking shall be posted within sight of
stalled as provided in paragraphs (g)(6) the customer being served. The motors
(ii) through (v) of this section. of all equipment being fueled shall be
(ii) Application. Heating equipment shut off during the fueling operation.
may be installed in the conventional (9) Fire control. Each service station
manner in an area except as provided shall be provided with at least one fire
in paragraph (g)(6) (iii), (iv), or (v) of extinguisher having a minimum ap-
this section. proved classification of 6 B, C, located
(iii) Special room. Heating equipment so that an extinguisher, will be within
may be installed in a special room sep-
75 feet of each pump, dispenser, under-
arated from an area classified by Table
ground fill pipe opening, and lubrica-
H19 by walls having a fire resistance
rating of at least 1 hour and without tion or service room.
any openings in the walls within 8 feet (h) Processing plants(1) Scope. This
of the floor into an area classified in paragraph shall apply to those plants
Table H19. This room shall not be used or buildings which contain chemical
for combustible storage and all air for operations such as oxidation, reduc-
combustion purposes shall come from tion, halogenation, hydrogenation,
outside the building. alkylation, polymerization, and other
(iv) Work areas. Heating equipment chemical processes but shall not apply
using gas or oil fuel may be installed in to chemical plants, refineries or distill-
the lubrication, sales, or service room eries.
where there is no dispensing or trans- (2) Location(i) Classification. The lo-
ferring of Class I liquids provided the cation of each processing vessel shall
bottom of the combustion chamber is be based upon its flammable or com-
at least 18 inches above the floor and bustible liquid capacity.
the heating equipment is protected (ii) [Reserved]
from physical damage by vehicles. (3) Processing building(i) Construc-
Heating equipment using gas or oil fuel
tion. (a) Processing buildings shall be of
listed for use in garages may be in-
fire-resistance or noncombustible con-
stalled in the lubrication or service
room where Class I liquids are dis- struction, except heavy timber con-
pensed provided the equipment is instruction with load-bearing walls may
stalled at least 8 feet above the floor. be permitted for plants utilizing only
(v) Electric heat. Electrical heating stable Class II or Class III liquids. Ex-
equipment shall conform to paragraph cept as provided in paragraph (h)(2)(ii)
(g)(5) of this section. of this section or in the case of explo-
(7) Drainage and waste disposal. Provi- sion resistant walls used in conjunc-
sion shall be made in the area where tion with explosion relieving facilities,
Class I liquids are dispensed to prevent see paragraph (h)(3)(iv) of this section,
spilled liquids from flowing into the in- load-bearing walls are prohibited.
terior of service station buildings. Buildings shall be without basements
Such provision may be by grading or covered pits.
driveways, raising door sills, or other (b) Areas shall have adequate exit fa-
equally effective means. Crankcase cilities arranged to prevent occupants
drainings and flammable or combus- from being trapped in the event of fire.
tible liquids shall not be dumped into Exits shall not be exposed by the drain-
sewers but shall be stored in tanks or age facilities described in paragraph
drums outside of any building until re- (h)(ii) of this section.
moved from the premises. (ii) Drainage. (a) Emergency drainage
(8) Sources of ignition. In addition to
systems shall be provided to direct
the previous restrictions of this para-
flammable or combustible liquid leak-
graph, the following shall apply: There
shall be no smoking or open flames in age and fire protection water to a safe
the areas used for fueling, servicing location. This may require curbs, scup-
fuel systems for internal combustion pers, or special drainage systems to
engines, receiving or dispensing of control the spread of fire, see para-
flammable or combustible liquids. Con- graph (b)(2)(vii)(b) of this section.
269
(b) Emergency drainage systems, if a fire resistance rating of at least 2

connected to public sewers or dis- hours.
charged into public waterways, shall be (d) The storage of flammable or com-
equipped with traps or separators. bustible liquids in containers shall be
(iii) Ventilation. (a) Enclosed proc- in accordance with the applicable pro-
essing buildings shall be ventilated at a visions of paragraph (d) of this section.
rate of not less than 1 cubic foot per (ii) Piping, valves, and fittings. (a) Pip-
minute per square foot of solid floor ing, valves, and fittings shall be in ac-
area. This shall be accomplished by cordance with paragraph (c) of this sec-
natural or mechanical ventilation with tion.
discharge or exhaust to a safe location (b) Approved flexible connectors may
outside of the building. Provisions be used where vibration exists or where
shall be made for introduction of frequent movement is necessary. Ap-
makeup air in such a manner as not to proved hose may be used at transfer
short circuit the ventilation. Ventila- stations.
tion shall be arranged to include all (c) Piping containing flammable or
floor areas or pits where flammable va- combustible liquids shall be identified.
pors may collect. (iii) Transfer. (a) The transfer of large
(b) Equipment used in a building and quantities of flammable or combustible
the ventilation of the building shall be liquids shall be through piping by
designed so as to limit flammable means of pumps or water displacement.
vapor-air mixtures under normal oper- Except as required in process equip-
ating conditions to the interior of ment, gravity flow shall not be used.
equipment, and to not more than 5 feet The use of compressed air as a transfer-
from equipment which exposes Class I ring medium is prohibited.
liquids to the air. Examples of such (b) Positive displacement pumps
equipment are dispensing stations, shall be provided with pressure relief
open centrifuges, plate and frame fil- discharging back to the tank or to
ters, open vacuum filters, and surfaces pump suction.
of open equipment. (iv) Equipment. (a) Equipment shall
(iv) Explosion relief. Areas where Class be designed and arranged to prevent
IA or unstable liquids are processed the unintentional escape of liquids and
shall have explosion venting through vapors and to minimize the quantity
one or more of the following methods: escaping in the event of accidental re-
(a) Open air construction. lease.
(b) Lightweight walls and roof. (b) Where the vapor space of equip-
(c) Lightweight wall panels and roof ment is usually within the flammable
hatches. range, the probability of explosion
(d) Windows of explosion venting damage to the equipment can be lim-
type. ited by inerting, by providing an explo-
(4) Liquid handling(i) Storage. (a) sion suppression system, or by design-
The storage of flammable or combus- ing the equipment to contain the peak
tible liquids in tanks shall be in ac- explosion pressure which may be modi-
cordance with the applicable provisions fied by explosion relief. Where the spe-
of paragraph (b) of this section. cial hazards of operation, sources of ig-
(b) If the storage of flammable or nition, or exposures indicate a need,
combustible liquids in outside above- consideration shall be given to pro-
ground or underground tanks is not viding protection by one or more of the
practical because of temperature or above means.
production considerations, tanks may (5) Tank vehicle and tank car loading
be permitted inside of buildings or and unloading. Tank vehicle and tank
structures in accordance with the ap- car loading or unloading facilities shall
plicable provisions of paragraph (b) of be separated from aboveground tanks,
this section. warehouses, other plant buildings, or
(c) Storage tanks inside of buildings nearest line of adjoining property
shall be permitted only in areas at or which may be built upon by a distance
above grade which have adequate of 25 feet for Class I liquids and 15 feet
drainage and are separated from the for Class II and Class III liquids meas-
processing area by construction having ured from the nearest position of any
270
fill stem. Buildings for pumps or shel- and mechanical sparks; spontaneous ig-
ters for personnel may be a part of the nition, including heat-producing chem-
facility. Operations of the facility shall ical reactions; and radiant heat.
comply with the appropriate portions (b) Class I liquids shall not be dis-
of paragraph (f)(3) of this section. pensed into containers unless the noz-
(6) Fire control(i) Portable extin- zle and container are electrically inter-
guishers. Approved portable fire extin- connected. Where the metallic
guishers of appropriate size, type, and floorplate on which the container
number shall be provided. stands while filling is electrically con-
(ii) Other controls. Where the special nected to the fill stem or where the fill
hazards of operation or exposure indi- stem is bonded to the container during
cate a need, the following fire control filling operations by means of a bond
provision shall be provided. wire, the provisions of this section
(a) A reliable water supply shall be shall be deemed to have been complied
available in pressure and quantity ade- with.
quate to meet the probable fire de- (ii) Maintenance and repair. (a) When
mands. necessary to do maintenance work in a
(b) Hydrants shall be provided in ac- flammable or combustible liquid proc-
cordance with accepted good practice. essing area, the work shall be author-
(c) Hose connected to a source of ized by a responsible representative of
water shall be installed so that all ves- the employer.
sels, pumps, and other equipment con-
(b) Hot work, such as welding or cut-
taining flammable or combustible liq-
ting operations, use of spark-producing
uids can be reached with at least one
power tools, and chipping operations
hose stream. Nozzles that are capable
shall be permitted only under super-
of discharging a water spray shall be
vision of an individual in responsible
provided.
charge who shall make an inspection of
(d) Processing plants shall be pro-
the area to be sure that it is safe for
tected by an approved automatic sprin-
the work to be done and that safe pro-
kler system or equivalent extin-
cedures will be followed for the work
guishing system. If special extin-
guishing systems including but not specified.
limited to those employing foam, car- (iii) Electrical. (a) All electric wiring
bon dioxide, or dry chemical are pro- and equipment shall be installed in ac-
vided, approved equipment shall be cordance with subpart S of this part.
used and installed in an approved man- (b) Locations where flammable
ner. vapor-air mixtures may exist under
(iii) Alarm systems. An approved normal operations shall be classified
means for prompt notification of fire Class I, Division 1 according to the re-
to those within the plant and any pub- quirements of subpart S of this part.
lic fire department available shall be For those pieces of equipment installed
provided. It may be advisable to con- in accordance with paragraph
nect the plant system with the public (h)(3)(iii)(b) of this section, the Divi-
system where public fire alarm system sion 1 area shall extend 5 feet in all di-
is available. rections from all points of vapor libera-
(iv) Maintenance. All plant fire pro- tion. All areas within pits shall be clas-
tection facilities shall be adequately sified Division 1 if any part of the pit is
maintained and periodically inspected within a Division 1 or 2 classified area,
and tested to make sure they are al- unless the pit is provided with mechan-
ways in satisfactory operating condi- ical ventilation.
tion and that they will serve their pur- (c) Locations where flammable vapor-
pose in time of emergency. air mixtures may exist under abnormal
(7) Sources of ignition(i) General. (a) conditions and for a distance beyond
Precautions shall be taken to prevent Division 1 locations shall be classified
the ignition of flammable vapors. Division 2 according to the require-
Sources of ignition include but are not ments of subpart S of this part. These
limited to open flames; lightning; locations include an area within 20 feet
smoking; cutting and welding; hot sur- horizontally, 3 feet vertically beyond a
faces; frictional heat; static, electrical, Division 1 area, and up to 3 feet above
271
floor or grade level within 25 feet, if in- (2) Wharves. Wharves handling flam-
doors, or 10 feet if outdoors, from any mable or combustible liquids shall be
pump, bleeder, withdrawal fitting, in accordance with paragraph (f)(4) of
meter, or similar device handling Class this section.
I liquids. Pits provided with adequate (3) Fired and unfired pressure vessels
mechanical ventilation within a Divi- (i) Fired vessels. Fired pressure vessels
sion 1 or 2 area shall be classified Divi- shall be constructed in accordance with
sion 2. If Class II or Class III liquids the Code for Fired Pressure Vessels,
only are handled, then ordinary elec- Section I of the ASME Boiler and Pres-
trical equipment is satisfactory though sure Vessel Code1968.
care shall be used in locating electrical (ii) Unfired vessels shall be con-
apparatus to prevent hot metal from structed in accordance with the Code
falling into open equipment. for Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section
(d) Where the provisions of para- VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure
graphs (h)(7)(iii) (a), (b), and (c) of this Vessel Code1968.
section require the installation of ex- (4) Location of process units. Process
plosion-proof equipment, ordinary elec- units shall be located so that they are
trical equipment including switchgear accessible from at least one side for the
may be used if installed in a room or purpose of fire control.
enclosure which is maintained under (5) Fire control(i) Portable equipment.
positive pressure with respect to the Portable fire extinguishment and con-
hazardous area. Ventilation makeup trol equipment shall be provided in
air shall be uncontaminated by flam- such quantities and types as are needed
mable vapors. for the special hazards of operation and
(8) Housekeeping(i) General. Mainte- storage.
nance and operating practices shall be (ii) Water supply. Water shall be
in accordance with established proce- available in volume and at adequate
dures which will tend to control leak- pressure to supply water hose streams,
age and prevent the accidental escape foam producing equipment, automatic
of flammable or combustible liquids. sprinklers, or water spray systems as
Spills shall be cleaned up promptly. the need is indicated by the special
(ii) Access. Adequate aisles shall be hazards of operation and storage.
maintained for unobstructed move- (iii) Special equipment. Special extin-
ment of personnel and so that fire pro- guishing equipment such as that uti-
tection equipment can be brought to lizing foam, inert gas, or dry chemical
bear on any part of the processing shall be provided as the need is indi-
equipment. cated by the special hazards of oper-
(iii) Waste and residues. Combustible ation and storage.
waste material and residues in a build- (j) Scope. This section applies to the
ing or operating area shall be kept to a handling, storage, and use of flam-
minimum, stored in closed metal waste mable and combustible liquids with a
cans, and disposed of daily. flashpoint below 200 F. This section
(iv) Clear zone. Ground area around does not apply to:
buildings and operating areas shall be (1) Bulk transportation of flammable
kept free of tall grass, weeds, trash, or and combustible liquids;
other combustible materials. (2) Storage, handling, and use of fuel
(i) Refineries, chemical plants, and dis- oil tanks and containers connected
tilleries(1) Storage tanks. Flammable with oil burning equipment;
or combustible liquids shall be stored (3) Storage of flammable and combus-
in tanks, in containers, or in portable tible liquids on farms;
tanks. Tanks shall be installed in ac- (4) Liquids without flashpoints that
cordance with paragraph (b) of this sec- may be flammable under some condi-
tion. Tanks for the storage of flam- tions, such as certain halogenated hy-
mable or combustible liquids in tank drocarbons and mixtures containing
farms and in locations other than proc- halogenated hydrocarbons;
ess areas shall be located in accordance (5) Mists, sprays, or foams, except
with paragraph (b)(2) (i) and (ii) of this flammable aerosols covered in para-
section. graph (d) of this section; or
272
(6) Installations made in accordance as described in subparagraph (4) of this

with requirements of the following paragraph. A dry spray booth may be
standards that are incorporated by ref- equipped with (i) distribution or baffle
erence as specified in 1910.6: plates to promote an even flow of air
(i) National Fire Protection Associa- through the booth or cause the deposit
tion Standard for Drycleaning Plants, of overspray before it enters the ex-
NFPA No. 321970; haust duct; or (ii) overspray dry filters
(ii) National Fire Protection Associa- to minimize dusts; or (iii) overspray
tion Standard for the Manufacture of dry filters to minimize dusts or resi-
Organic Coatings, NFPA No. 351970; dues entering exhaust ducts; or (iv)
(iii) National Fire Protection Asso- overspray dry filter rolls designed to
ciation Standard for Solvent Extrac- minimize dusts or residues entering ex-
tion Plants, NFPA No. 361967; or haust ducts; or (v) where dry powders
(iv) National Fire Protection Asso- are being sprayed, with powder collec-
ciation Standard for the Installation tion systems so arranged in the ex-
and Use of Stationary Combustion En- haust to capture oversprayed material.
gines and Gas Turbines, NFPA No. 37 (6) Fluidized bed. A container holding
1970. powder coating material which is aer-
ated from below so as to form an air-
supported expanded cloud of such ma-
FR 3982, Jan. 27, 1975; 40 FR 23743, June 2,
1975; 43 FR 49746, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51759, terial through which the preheated ob-
Nov. 7, 1978; 47 FR 39164, Sept. 7, 1982; 51 FR ject to be coated is immersed and
34560, Sept. 29, 1986; 53 FR 12121, Apr. 12, 1988; transported.
55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9237, Mar. 7, (7) Electrostatic fluidized bed. A con-
1996] tainer holding powder coating material
which is aerated from below so as to
1910.107 Spray finishing using flam- form an air-supported expanded cloud
mable and combustible materials. of such material which is electrically
(a) Definitions applicable to this sec- charged with a charge opposite to the
tion(1) Aerated solid powders. Aerated charge of the object to be coated; such
powders shall mean any powdered ma- object is transported, through the con-
terial used as a coating material which tainer immediately above the charged
shall be fluidized within a container by and aerated materials in order to be
passing air uniformly from below. It is coated.
common practice to fluidize such mate- (8) Approved. Shall mean approved
rials to form a fluidized powder bed and and listed by a nationally recognized
then dip the part to be coated into the testing laboratory. Refer to 1910.7 for
bed in a manner similar to that used in definition of nationally recognized
liquid dipping. Such beds are also used testing laboratory.
as sources for powder spray operations. (9) Listed. See approved in
(2) Spraying area. Any area in which 1910.107(a)(8).
dangerous quantities of flammable va- (b) Spray booths(1) Construction.
pors or mists, or combustible residues, Spray booths shall be substantially
dusts, or deposits are present due to constructed of steel, securely and rig-
the operation of spraying processes. idly supported, or of concrete or ma-
(3) Spray booth. A power-ventilated sonry except that aluminum or other
structure provided to enclose or accom- substantial noncombustible material
modate a spraying operation to confine may be used for intermittent or low
and limit the escape of spray, vapor, volume spraying. Spray booths shall be
and residue, and to safely conduct or designed to sweep air currents toward
direct them to an exhaust system. the exhaust outlet.
(4) Waterwash spray booth. A spray (2) Interiors. The interior surfaces of
booth equipped with a water washing spray booths shall be smooth and con-
system designed to minimize dusts or tinuous without edges and otherwise
residues entering exhaust ducts and to designed to prevent pocketing of resi-
permit the recovery of overspray fin- dues and facilitate cleaning and wash-
ishing material. ing without injury.
(5) Dry spray booth. A spray booth not (3) Floors. The floor surface of a spray
equipped with a water washing system booth and operators working area, if
273
combustible, shall be covered with non- (vi) Clean filters or filter rolls shall
combustible material of such character be noncombustible or of a type having
as to facilitate the safe cleaning and a combustibility not in excess of class
removal of residues. 2 filters as listed by Underwriters Lab-
(4) Distribution or baffle plates. Dis- oratories, Inc. Filters and filter rolls
tribution or baffle plates, if installed shall not be alternately used for dif-
to promote an even flow of air through ferent types of coating materials,
the booth or cause the deposit of where the combination of materials
overspray before it enters the exhaust may be conducive to spontaneous igni-
duct, shall be of noncombustible mate- tion. See also paragraph (g)(6) of this
rial and readily removable or acces- section.
sible on both sides for cleaning. Such (6) Frontal area. Each spray booth
plates shall not be located in exhaust
having a frontal area larger than 9
ducts.
square feet shall have a metal deflector
(5) Dry type overspray collectors(ex-
or curtain not less than 212 inches deep
haust air filters). In conventional dry
installed at the upper outer edge of the
type spray booths, overspray dry filters
or filter rolls, if installed, shall con- booth over the opening.
form to the following: (7) Conveyors. Where conveyors are
(i) The spraying operations except arranged to carry work into or out of
electrostatic spraying operations shall spray booths, the openings therefor
be so designed, installed and main- shall be as small as practical.
tained that the average air velocity (8) Separation of operations. Each
over the open face of the booth (or spray booth shall be separated from
booth cross section during spraying op- other operations by not less than 3
erations) shall be not less than 100 lin- feet, or by a greater distance, or by
ear feet per minute. Electrostatic such partition or wall as to reduce the
spraying operations may be conducted danger from juxtaposition of hazardous
with an air velocity over the open face operations. See also paragraph (c)(1) of
of the booth of not less than 60 linear this section.
feet per minute, or more, depending on (9) Cleaning. Spray booths shall be so
the volume of the finishing material installed that all portions are readily
being applied and its flammability and accessible for cleaning. A clear space of
explosion characteristics. Visible not less than 3 feet on all sides shall be
gauges or audible alarm or pressure ac- kept free from storage or combustible
tivated devices shall be installed to in- construction.
dicate or insure that the required air (10) Illumination. When spraying areas
velocity is maintained. Filter rolls
are illuminated through glass panels or
shall be inspected to insure proper re-
other transparent materials, only fixed
placement of filter media.
lighting units shall be used as a source
(ii) All discarded filter pads and filter
of illumination. Panels shall effec-
rolls shall be immediately removed to
a safe, well-detached location or placed tively isolate the spraying area from
in a water-filled metal container and the area in which the lighting unit is
disposed of at the close of the days op- located, and shall be of a noncombus-
eration unless maintained completely tible material of such a nature or so
in water. protected that breakage will be un-
(iii) The location of filters in a spray likely. Panels shall be so arranged that
booth shall be so as to not reduce the normal accumulations of residue on
effective booth enclosure of the arti- the exposed surface of the panel will
cles being sprayed. not be raised to a dangerous tempera-
(iv) Space within the spray booth on ture by radiation or conduction from
the downstream and upstream sides of the source of illumination.
filters shall be protected with approved (c) Electrical and other sources of igni-
automatic sprinklers. tion(1) Conformance. All electrical
(v) Filters or filter rolls shall not be equipment, open flames and other
used when applying a spray material sources of ignition shall conform to the
known to be highly susceptible to spon- requirements of this paragraph, except
taneous heating and ignition. as follows:
274
(i) Electrostatic apparatus shall con- from by a partition, shall be totally en-
form to the requirements of paragraphs closed to prevent the falling of hot par-
(h) and (i) of this section; ticles and shall be protected from me-
(ii) Drying, curing, and fusion appa- chanical injury by suitable guards or
ratus shall conform to the require- by location.
ments of paragraph (j) of this section; (8) Portable lamps. Portable electric
(iii) Automobile undercoating spray lamps shall not be used in any spraying
operations in garages shall conform to area during spraying operations. Port-
the requirements of paragraph (k) of able electric lamps, if used during
this section; cleaning or repairing operations, shall
(iv) Powder coating equipment shall be of the type approved for hazardous
conform to the requirements of para- Class I locations.
graph (c)(1) of this section. (9) Grounding. (i) All metal parts of
(2) Minimum separation. There shall be spray booths, exhaust ducts, and piping
no open flame or spark producing systems conveying flammable or com-
equipment in any spraying area nor bustible liquids or aerated solids shall
within 20 feet thereof, unless separated be properly electrically grounded in an
by a partition. effective and permanent manner.
(3) Hot surfaces. Space-heating appli- (ii) [Reserved]
ances, steampipes, or hot surfaces shall
(d) Ventilation(1) Conformance. Ven-
not be located in a spraying area where
tilating and exhaust systems shall be
deposits of combustible residues may
in accordance with the Standard for
readily accumulate.
Blower and Exhaust Systems for Vapor
(4) Wiring conformance. Electrical wir-
ing and equipment shall conform to the Removal, NFPA No. 911961, which is
provisions of this paragraph and shall incorporated by reference as specified
otherwise be in accordance with sub- in 1910.6, where applicable and shall
part S of this part. also conform to the provisions of this
(5) Combustible residues, areas. Unless section.
specifically approved for locations con- (2) General. All spraying areas shall
taining both deposits of readily ignit- be provided with mechanical ventila-
able residue and explosive vapors, there tion adequate to remove flammable va-
shall be no electrical equipment in any pors, mists, or powders to a safe loca-
spraying area, whereon deposits of tion and to confine and control com-
combustible residues may readily accu- bustible residues so that life is not en-
mulate, except wiring in rigid conduit dangered. Mechanical ventilation shall
or in boxes or fittings containing no be kept in operation at all times while
taps, splices, or terminal connections. spraying operations are being con-
(6) Wiring type approved. Electrical ducted and for a sufficient time there-
wiring and equipment not subject to after to allow vapors from drying coat-
deposits of combustible residues but lo- ed articles and drying finishing mate-
cated in a spraying area as herein de- rial residue to be exhausted.
fined shall be of explosion-proof type (3) Independent exhaust. Each spray
approved for Class I, group D locations booth shall have an independent ex-
and shall otherwise conform to the pro- haust duct system discharging to the
visions of subpart S of this part, for exterior of the building, except that
Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Loca- multiple cabinet spray booths in which
tions. Electrical wiring, motors, and identical spray finishing material is
other equipment outside of but within used with a combined frontal area of
twenty (20) feet of any spraying area, not more than 18 square feet may have
and not separated therefrom by parti- a common exhaust. If more than one
tions, shall not produce sparks under fan serves one booth, all fans shall be
normal operating conditions and shall so interconnected that one fan cannot
otherwise conform to the provisions of operate without all fans being oper-
subpart S of this part for Class I, Divi- ated.
sion 2 Hazardous Locations. (4) Fan-rotating element. The fan-ro-
(7) Lamps. Electric lamps outside of, tating element shall be nonferrous or
but within twenty (20) feet of any nonsparking or the casing shall consist
spraying area, and not separated thereof or be lined with such material.
275
There shall be ample clearance be- struction or unprotected opening in

tween the fan-rotating element and the any noncombustible exterior wall with-
fan casing to avoid a fire by friction, in 25 feet.
necessary allowance being made for or- (9) Air exhaust. Air exhaust from
dinary expansion and loading to pre- spray operations shall not be directed
vent contact between moving parts and so that it will contaminate makeup air
the duct or fan housing. Fan blades being introduced into the spraying area
shall be mounted on a shaft suffi- or other ventilating intakes, nor di-
ciently heavy to maintain perfect rected so as to create a nuisance. Air
alignment even when the blades of the exhausted from spray operations shall
fan are heavily loaded, the shaft pref- not be recirculated.
erably to have bearings outside the (10) Access doors. When necessary to
duct and booth. All bearings shall be of facilitate cleaning, exhaust ducts shall
the self-lubricating type, or lubricated be provided with an ample number of
from the outside duct. access doors.
(5) Electric motors. Electric motors (11) Room intakes. Air intake openings
driving exhaust fans shall not be placed to rooms containing spray finishing op-
inside booths or ducts. See also para- erations shall be adequate for the effi-
graph (c) of this section. cient operation of exhaust fans and
(6) Belts. Belts shall not enter the shall be so located as to minimize the
duct or booth unless the belt and pul- creation of dead air pockets.
ley within the duct or booth are thor- (12) Drying spaces. Freshly sprayed
oughly enclosed. articles shall be dried only in spaces
(7) Exhaust ducts. Exhaust ducts shall provided with adequate ventilation to
be constructed of steel and shall be prevent the formation of explosive va-
substantially supported. Exhaust ducts pors. In the event adequate and reliable
without dampers are preferred; how- ventilation is not provided such drying
ever, if dampers are installed, they spaces shall be considered a spraying
shall be maintained so that they will area. See also paragraph (j) of this sec-
be in a full open position at all times tion.
the ventilating system is in operation. (e) Flammable and combustible liquids
(i) Exhaust ducts shall be protected storage and handling(1) Conformance.
against mechanical damage and have a The storage of flammable or combus-
clearance from unprotected combustible liquids in connection with spray-
tible construction or other combustible ing operations shall conform to the re-
material of not less than 18 inches. quirements of 1910.106, where applica-
(ii) If combustible construction is ble.
provided with the following protection (2) Quantity. The quantity of flam-
applied to all surfaces within 18 inches, mable or combustible liquids kept in
clearances may be reduced to the dis- the vicinity of spraying operations
tances indicated: shall be the minimum required for op-
(a) 28-gage sheet metal on 14-inch asbestos 12 inches. erations and should ordinarily not ex-
mill board. ceed a supply for 1 day or one shift.
(b) 28-gage sheet metal on 18-inch asbestos 9 inches. Bulk storage of portable containers of
mill board spaced out 1 inch on non-
combustible spacers. flammable or combustible liquids shall
(c) 22-gage sheet metal on 1-inch rockwool 3 inches. be in a separate, constructed building
batts reinforced with wire mesh or the detached from other important build-
equivalent.
(d) Where ducts are protected with an ap-
ings or cut off in a standard manner.
proved automatic sprinkler system, properly (3) Containers. Original closed con-
maintained, the clearance required in sub- tainers, approved portable tanks, ap-
division (i) of this subparagraph may be re- proved safety cans or a properly ar-
duced to 6 inches.
ranged system of piping shall be used
(8) Discharge clearance. Unless the for bringing flammable or combustible
spray booth exhaust duct terminal is liquids into spray finishing room. Open
from a water-wash spray booth, the or glass containers shall not be used.
terminal discharge point shall be not (4) Transferring liquids. Except as pro-
less than 6 feet from any combustible vided in paragraph (e)(5) of this section
exterior wall or roof nor discharge in the withdrawal of flammable and com-
the direction of any combustible con- bustible liquids from containers having
276
a capacity of greater than 60 gallons maximum operating pressures. Any

shall be by approved pumps. The with- hose showing material deteriorations,
drawal of flammable or combustible signs of leakage, or weakness in its
liquids from containers and the filling carcass or at the couplings, shall be
of containers, including portable mix- withdrawn from service and repaired or
ing tanks, shall be done only in a suit- discarded.
able mixing room or in a spraying area (iv) Piping systems conveying flam-
when the ventilating system is in oper- mable or combustible liquids shall be
ation. Adequate precautions shall be of steel or other material having com-
taken to protect against liquid spillage parable properties of resistance to heat
and sources of ignition. and physical damage. Piping systems
(5) Spraying containers. Containers shall be properly bonded and grounded.
supplying spray nozzles shall be of (7) Spray liquid heaters. Electrically
closed type or provided with metal cov- powered spray liquid heaters shall be
ers kept closed. Containers not resting approved and listed for the specific lo-
on floors shall be on metal supports or cation in which used (see paragraph (c)
suspended by wire cables. Containers of this section). Heaters shall not be lo-
supplying spray nozzles by gravity flow cated in spray booths nor other loca-
shall not exceed 10 gallons capacity. tions subject to the accumulation of
Original shipping containers shall not deposits or combustible residue. If an
be subject to air pressure for supplying electric motor is used, see paragraph
spray nozzles. Containers under air (c) of this section.
pressure supplying spray nozzles shall (8) Pump relief. If flammable or com-
be of limited capacity, not exceeding bustible liquids are supplied to spray
that necessary for 1 days operation; nozzles by positive displacement
shall be designed and approved for such pumps, the pump discharge line shall
use; shall be provided with a visible be provided with an approved relief
pressure gage; and shall be provided valve discharging to a pump suction or
with a relief valve set to operate in a safe detached location, or a device
conformance with the requirements of provided to stop the prime mover if the
the Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels, discharge pressure exceeds the safe op-
Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and erating pressure of the system.
Pressure Vessel Code1968, which is in- (9) Grounding. Whenever flammable
corporated by reference as specified in or combustible liquids are transferred
1910.6. Containers under air pressure from one container to another, both
supplying spray nozzles, air-storage containers shall be effectively bonded
tanks and coolers shall conform to the and grounded to prevent discharge
standards of the Code for Unfired Pres- sparks of static electricity.
sure Vessels, Section VIII of the ASME (f) Protection(1) Conformance. In
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code1968 sprinklered buildings, the automatic
for construction, tests, and mainte- sprinkler system in rooms containing
nance. spray finishing operations shall con-
(6) Pipes and hoses. (i) All containers form to the requirements of 1910.159.
or piping to which is attached a hose or In unsprinklered buildings where sprin-
flexible connection shall be provided klers are installed only to protect
with a shutoff valve at the connection. spraying areas, the installation shall
Such valves shall be kept shut when conform to such standards insofar as
spraying operations are not being con- they are applicable. Sprinkler heads
ducted. shall be located so as to provide water
(ii) When a pump is used to deliver distribution throughout the entire
products, automatic means shall be booth.
provided to prevent pressure in excess (2) Valve access. Automatic sprinklers
of the design working pressure of ac- protecting each spray booth (together
cessories, piping, and hose. with its connecting exhaust) shall be
(iii) All pressure hose and couplings under an accessibly located separate
shall be inspected at regular intervals outside stem and yoke (OS&Y) subcon-
appropriate to this service. The hose trol valve.
and couplings shall be tested with the (3) Cleaning of heads. Sprinklers pro-
hose extended, and using the inservice tecting spraying areas shall be kept as
277
free from deposits as practical by ously posted at all spraying areas and
cleaning daily if necessary. (See also paint storage rooms.
paragraph (g) of this section.) (h) Fixed electrostatic apparatus(1)
(4) Portable extinguishers. An adequate Conformance. Where installation and
supply of suitable portable fire extin- use of electrostatic spraying equip-
guishers shall be installed near all ment is used, such installation and use
spraying areas. shall conform to all other paragraphs
(g) Operations and maintenance(1) of this section, and shall also conform
Spraying. Spraying shall not be con- to the requirements of this paragraph.
ducted outside of predetermined spray- (2) Type approval. Electrostatic appa-
ing areas. ratus and devices used in connection
(2) Cleaning. All spraying areas shall with coating operations shall be of ap-
be kept as free from the accumulation proved types.
of deposits of combustible residues as (3) Location. Transformers, power
practical, with cleaning conducted packs, control apparatus, and all other
daily if necessary. Scrapers, spuds, or electrical portions of the equipment,
other such tools used for cleaning pur- with the exception of high-voltage
poses shall be of nonsparking material. grids, electrodes, and electrostatic
atomizing heads and their connections,
(3) Residue disposal. Residue scrapings
shall be located outside of the spraying
and debris contaminated with residue
area, or shall otherwise conform to the
shall be immediately removed from the
requirements of paragraph (c) of this
premises and properly disposed of. Ap-
section.
proved metal waste cans shall be pro-
(4) Support. Electrodes and electro-
vided wherever rags or waste are im- static atomizing heads shall be ade-
pregnated with finishing material and quately supported in permanent loca-
all such rags or waste deposited therein tions and shall be effectively insulated
immediately after use. The contents of from the ground. Electrodes and elec-
waste cans shall be properly disposed of trostatic atomizing heads which are
at least once daily or at the end of each permanently attached to their bases,
shift. supports, or reciprocators, shall be
(4) Clothing storage. Spray finishing deemed to comply with this section.
employees clothing shall not be left on Insulators shall be nonporous and non-
the premises overnight unless kept in combustible.
metal lockers. (5) Insulators, grounding. High-voltage
(5) Cleaning solvents. The use of sol- leads to electrodes shall be properly in-
vents for cleaning operations shall be sulated and protected from mechanical
restricted to those having flashpoints injury or exposure to destructive
not less than 100 F.; however, for chemicals. Electrostatic atomizing
cleaning spray nozzles and auxiliary heads shall be effectively and perma-
equipment, solvents having flashpoints nently supported on suitable insulators
not less than those normally used in and shall be effectively guarded
spray operations may be used. Such against accidental contact or ground-
cleaning shall be conducted inside ing. An automatic means shall be pro-
spray booths and ventilating equip- vided for grounding the electrode sys-
ment operated during cleaning. tem when it is electrically deenergized
(6) Hazardous materials combinations. for any reason. All insulators shall be
Spray booths shall not be alternately kept clean and dry.
used for different types of coating ma- (6) Safe distance. A safe distance shall
terials, where the combination of the be maintained between goods being
materials may be conducive to sponta- painted and electrodes or electrostatic
neous ignition, unless all deposits of atomizing heads or conductors of at
the first used material are removed least twice the sparking distance. A
from the booth and exhaust ducts prior suitable sign indicating this safe dis-
to spraying with the second used mate- tance shall be conspicuously posted
rial. near the assembly.
(7) No Smoking signs. No smoking (7) Conveyors required. Goods being
signs in large letters on contrasting painted using this process are to be
color background shall be conspicu- supported on conveyors. The conveyors
278
shall be so arranged as to maintain (i) Electrostatic hand spraying equip-

safe distances between the goods and ment(1) Application. This paragraph
the electrodes or electrostatic atom- shall apply to any equipment using
izing heads at all times. Any irregu- electrostatically charged elements for
larly shaped or other goods subject to the atomization and/or, precipitation
possible swinging or movement shall be of materials for coatings on articles, or
rigidly supported to prevent such for other similar purposes in which the
swinging or movement which would re- atomizing device is hand held and ma-
duce the clearance to less than that nipulated during the spraying oper-
specified in paragraph (h)(6) of this sec- ation.
tion. (2) Conformance. Electrostatic hand
(8) Prohibition. This process is not ac- spraying equipment shall conform with
ceptable where goods being coated are the other provisions of this section.
manipulated by hand. When finishing (3) Equipment approval and specifica-
materials are applied by electrostatic tions. Electrostatic hand spray appa-
equipment which is manipulated by ratus and devices used in connection
hand, see paragraph (i) of this section with coating operations shall be of ap-
for applicable requirements. proved types. The high voltage circuits
(9) Fail-safe controls. Electrostatic ap- shall be designed so as to not produce
paratus shall be equipped with auto- a spark of sufficient intensity to ignite
matic controls which will operate with- any vapor-air mixtures nor result in
out time delay to disconnect the power appreciable shock hazard upon coming
supply to the high voltage transformer in contact with a grounded object
and to signal the operator under any of under all normal operating conditions.
the following conditions: The electrostatically charged exposed
(i) Stoppage of ventilating fans or elements of the handgun shall be capa-
failure of ventilating equipment from ble of being energized only by a switch
any cause. which also controls the coating mate-
(ii) Stoppage of the conveyor car- rial supply.
rying goods through the high voltage (4) Electrical support equipment. Trans-
field. formers, powerpacks, control appa-
(iii) Occurrence of a ground or of an ratus, and all other electrical portions
imminent ground at any point on the of the equipment, with the exception of
high voltage system. the handgun itself and its connections
(iv) Reduction of clearance below to the power supply shall be located
that specified in paragraph (h)(6) of outside of the spraying area or shall
this section. otherwise conform to the requirements
(10) Guarding. Adequate booths, fenc- of paragraph (c) of this section.
ing, railings, or guards shall be so (5) Spray gun ground. The handle of
placed about the equipment that they, the spraying gun shall be electrically
either by their location or character or connected to ground by a metallic con-
both, assure that a safe isolation of the nection and to be so constructed that
process is maintained from plant stor- the operator in normal operating posi-
age or personnel. Such railings, fenc- tion is in intimate electrical contact
ing, and guards shall be of conducting with the grounded handle.
material, adequately grounded. (6) Groundinggeneral. All elec-
(11) Ventilation. Where electrostatic trically conductive objects in the
atomization is used the spraying area spraying area shall be adequately
shall be so ventilated as to insure safe grounded. This requirement shall apply
conditions from a fire and health to paint containers, wash cans, and any
standpoint. other objects or devices in the area.
(12) Fire protection. All areas used for The equipment shall carry a prominent
spraying, including the interior of the permanently installed warning regard-
booth, shall be protected by automatic ing the necessity for this grounding
sprinklers where this protection is feature.
available. Where this protection is not (7) Maintenance of grounds. Objects
available, other approved automatic being painted or coated shall be main-
extinguishing equipment shall be pro- tained in metallic contact with the
vided. conveyor or other grounded support.
279
Hooks shall be regularly cleaned to in- (4) Alternate use permitted. Auto-
sure this contact and areas of contact mobile refinishing spray booths or en-
shall be sharp points or knife edges closures, otherwise installed and main-
where possible. Points of support of the tained in full conformity with this sec-
object shall be concealed from random tion, may alternately be used for dry-
spray where feasible and where the ob- ing with portable electrical infrared
jects being sprayed are supported from drying apparatus when conforming
a conveyor, the point of attachment to with the following:
the conveyor shall be so located as to (i) Interior (especially floors) of
not collect spray material during nor- spray enclosures shall be kept free of
mal operation. overspray deposits.
(8) Interlocks. The electrical equip-
(ii) During spray operations, the dry-
ment shall be so interlocked with the
ing apparatus and electrical connec-
ventilation of the spraying area that
tions and wiring thereto shall not be
the equipment cannot be operated un-
less the ventilation fans are in oper- located within spray enclosure nor in
ation. any other location where spray resi-
(9) Ventilation. The spraying oper- dues may be deposited thereon.
ation shall take place within a spray (iii) The spraying apparatus, the dry-
area which is adequately ventilated to ing apparatus, and the ventilating sys-
remove solvent vapors released from tem of the spray enclosure shall be
the operation. equipped with suitable interlocks so ar-
(j) Drying, curing, or fusion appa- ranged that:
ratus(1) Conformance. Drying, curing, (a) The spraying apparatus cannot be
or fusion apparatus in connection with operated while the drying apparatus is
spray application of flammable and inside the spray enclosure.
combustible finishes shall conform to (b) The spray enclosure will be
the Standard for Ovens and Furnaces, purged of spray vapors for a period of
NFPA 86A1969, which is incorporated not less than 3 minutes before the dry-
by reference as specified in 1910.6, ing apparatus can be energized.
where applicable and shall also con- (c) The ventilating system will main-
form with the following requirements tain a safe atmosphere within the en-
of this paragraph. closure during the drying process and
(2) Alternate use prohibited. Spray the drying apparatus will automati-
booths, rooms, or other enclosures used cally shut off in the event of failure of
for spraying operations shall not alter- the ventilating system.
nately be used for the purpose of dry- (iv) All electrical wiring and equip-
ing by any arrangement which will ment of the drying apparatus shall con-
cause a material increase in the sur- form with the applicable sections of
face temperature of the spray booth,
subpart S of this part. Only equipment
room, or enclosure.
of a type approved for Class I, Division
(3) Adjacent system interlocked. Except
2 hazardous locations shall be located
as specifically provided in paragraph
within 18 inches of floor level. All me-
(j)(4) of this section, drying, curing, or
tallic parts of the drying apparatus
fusion units utilizing a heating system
having open flames or which may shall be properly electrically bonded
produce sparks shall not be installed in and grounded.
a spraying area, but may be installed (v) The drying apparatus shall con-
adjacent thereto when equipped with tain a prominently located, perma-
an interlocked ventilating system ar- nently attached warning sign indi-
ranged to: cating that ventilation should be main-
(i) Thoroughly ventilate the drying tained during the drying period and
space before the heating system can be that spraying should not be conducted
started; in the vicinity that spray will deposit
(ii) Maintain a safe atmosphere at on apparatus.
any source of ignition; (k) Automobile undercoating in garages.
(iii) Automatically shut down the Automobile undercoating spray oper-
heating system in the event of failure ations in garages, conducted in areas
of the ventilating system. having adequate natural or mechanical
280
ventilation, are exempt from the rein shall conform to paragraph (l)(1) of
quirements pertaining to spray fin- this section.
ishing operations, when using under- (6) Electrostatic hand spraying equip-
coating materials not more hazardous ment. The provisions of paragraph (i) of
than kerosene (as listed by Under- this section and other subparagraphs of
writers Laboratories in respect to fire this paragraph, shall apply to electro-
hazard rating 3040) or undercoating static handguns when used in powder
materials using only solvents listed as coating, except that electrical equip-
having a flash point in excess of 100 F. ment not covered therein shall conform
Undercoating spray operations not con- to paragraph (l)(1) of this section.
forming to these provisions are subject (7) Electrostatic fluidized beds. (i) Elec-
to all requirements of this section per- trostatic fluidized beds and associated
taining to spray finishing operations. equipment shall be of approved types.
(l) Powder coating(1) Electrical and The maximum surface temperature of
other sources of ignition. Electrical this equipment in the coating area
equipment and other sources of igni- shall not exceed 150 F. The high volt-
tion shall conform to the requirements age circuits shall be so designed as to
of paragraphs (c)(1) (i)(iv), (8) and (9)(i) not produce a spark of sufficient inten-
of this section and subpart S of this sity to ignite any powder-air mixtures
part. nor result in appreciable shock hazard
(2) Ventilation. (i) In addition to the upon coming in contact with a ground-
provisions of paragraph (d) of this sec- ed object under normal operating con-
tion, where applicable, exhaust ventila- ditions.
tion shall be sufficient to maintain the (ii) Transformers, powerpacks, con-
atmosphere below the lowest explosive trol apparatus, and all other electrical
limits for the materials being applied. portions of the equipment, with the ex-
All nondeposited air-suspended powders ception of the charging electrodes and
shall be safely removed via exhaust their connections to the power supply
ducts to the powder recovery cyclone shall be located outside of the powder
or receptacle. Each installation shall coating area or shall otherwise con-
be designed and operated to meet the form to the requirements of paragraph
foregoing performance specification. (l)(1) of this section.
(ii) Powders shall not be released to (iii) All electrically conductive ob-
the outside atmosphere. jects within the charging influence of
(3) Drying, curing, or fusion equipment. the electrodes shall be adequately
The provisions of the Standard for grounded. The powder coating equip-
ovens and furnaces, NFPA No. 86A1969 ment shall carry a prominent, perma-
shall apply where applicable. nently installed warning regarding the
(4) Operation and maintenance. (i) All necessity for grounding these objects.
areas shall be kept free of the accumu- (iv) Objects being coated shall be
lation of powder coating dusts, particu- maintained in contact with the con-
larly such horizontal surfaces as veyor or other support in order to in-
ledges, beams, pipes, hoods, booths, and sure proper grounding. Hangers shall
floors. be regularly cleaned to insure effective
(ii) Surfaces shall be cleaned in such contact and areas of contact shall be
manner as to avoid scattering dust to sharp points or knife edges where pos-
other places or creating dust clouds. sible.
(iii) No Smoking signs in large let- (v) The electrical equipment shall be
ters on contrasting color background so interlocked with the ventilation sys-
shall be conspicuously posted at all tem that the equipment cannot be op-
powder coating areas and powder stor- erated unless the ventilation fans are
age rooms. in operation.
(5) Fixed electrostatic spraying equip- (m) Organic peroxides and dual compo-
ment. The provisions of paragraph (h) of nent coatings(1) Conformance. All
this section and other subparagraphs of spraying operations involving the use
this paragraph shall apply to fixed of organic peroxides and other dual
electrostatic equipment, except that component coatings shall be conducted
electrical equipment not covered therein approved sprinklered spray booths
281
meeting the requirements of this sec- and heat, unless such compound, mix-
tion. ture, or device is otherwise specifically
(2) Smoking. Smoking shall be prohib- classified by the U.S. Department of
ited and No Smoking signs shall be Transportation; see 49 CFR chapter I.
prominently displayed and only non- The term explosives shall include all
sparking tools shall be used in any area material which is classified as Class A,
where organic peroxides are stored, Class B, and Class C explosives by the
mixed or applied. U.S. Department of Transportation,
(n) Scope. This section applies to and includes, but is not limited to dy-
flammable and combustible finishing namite, black powder, pellet powders,
materials when applied as a spray by initiating explosives, blasting caps,
compressed air, airless or hydraulic electric blasting caps, safety fuse, fuse
atomization, steam, electrostatic lighters, fuse igniters, squibs, cordeau
methods, or by any other means in con- detonant fuse, instantaneous fuse, ig-
tinuous or intermittent processes. The niter cord, igniters, small arms ammu-
section also covers the application of nition, small arms ammunition prim-
combustible powders by powder spray ers, smokeless propellant, cartridges
guns, electrostatic powder spray guns, for propellant-actuated power devices,
fluidized beds, or electrostatic fluidized and cartridges for industrial guns.
beds. The section does not apply to Commercial explosives are those explo-
outdoor spray application of buildings, sives which are intended to be used in
tanks, or other similar structures, nor commercial or industrial operations.
to small portable spraying apparatus NOTE 1: Classification of explosives is de-
not used repeatedly in the same loca- scribed by the U.S. Department of Transpor-
tion. tation as follows (see 49 CFR chapter I):
(i) Class A explosives. Possessing, det-
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 45 onating, or otherwise maximum haz-
FR 60704, Sept. 12, 1980; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10,
1984; 53 FR 12121, Apr. 12, 1988; 61 FR 9237,
ard; such as dynamite, nitroglycerin,
Mar. 7, 1996] picric acid, lead azide, fulminate of
mercury, black powder, blasting caps,
1910.108 [Reserved] and detonating primers.
(ii) Class B explosives. Possessing
1910.109 Explosives and blasting flammable hazard, such as propellant
agents. explosives (including some smokeless
(a) Definitions applicable to this sec- propellants), photographic flash pow-
tion(1) Blasting agent. Blasting ders, and some special fireworks.
agentany material or mixture, con- (iii) Class C explosives. Includes cer-
sisting of a fuel and oxidizer, intended tain types of manufactured articles
for blasting, not otherwise classified as which contain Class A or Class B explo-
an explosive and in which none of the sives, or both, as components but in re-
ingredients are classified as an explo- stricted quantities.
sive, provided that the finished prod- (iv) Forbidden or not acceptable explo-
uct, as mixed and packaged for use or sives. Explosives which are forbidden or
shipment, cannot be detonated by not acceptable for transportation by
means of a No. 8 test blasting cap when common carriers by rail freight, rail
unconfined. express, highway, or water in accord-
(2) Explosive-actuated power devices. ance with the regulations of the U.S.
Explosive-actuated power deviceany Department of Transportation, 49 CFR
tool or special mechanized device chapter I.
which is actuated by explosives, but (4) Highway. Highwayany public
not including propellant-actuated street, public alley, or public road.
power devices. Examples of explosive- (5) [Reserved]
actuated power devices are jet tappers (6) Magazine. Magazineany building
and jet perforators. or structure, other than an explosives
(3) Explosive. Explosiveany chem- manufacturing building, used for the
ical compound, mixture, or device, the storage of explosives.
primary or common purpose of which is (7) Motor vehicle. Motor vehicleany
to function by explosion, i.e., with sub- self-propelled vehicle, truck, tractor,
stantially instantaneous release of gas semitrailer, or truck-full trailers used
282
for the transportation of freight over tetranitrate (PETN), hexahydro-1,3,5-

public highways. trinitro-s-triazine (RDX), and other
(8) Propellant-actuated power devices. similar compounds used for high-en-
Propellant-actuated power devices ergy-rate forming, expanding, and
any tool or special mechanized device shaping in metal fabrication, and for
or gas generator system which is actu- dismemberment and quick reduction of
ated by a smokeless propellant or scrap metal.
which releases and directs work (18) Water gels or slurry explosives.
through a smokeless propellant charge. These comprise a wide variety of mate-
(9) [Reserved] rials used for blasting. They all contain
(10) Pyrotechnics. Pyrotechnicsany substantial proportions of water and
combustible or explosive compositions high proportions of ammonium nitrate,
or manufactured articles designed and some of which is in solution in the
prepared for the purpose of producing water. Two broad classes of water gels
audible or visible effects which are are (i) those which are sensitized by a
commonly referred to as fireworks. material classed as an explosive, such
(11) [Reserved] as TNT or smokeless powder, (ii) those
(12) Semiconductive hose. which contain no ingredient classified
Semiconductive hosea hose with an as an explosive; these are sensitized
electrical resistance high enough to with metals such as aluminum or with
limit flow of stray electric currents to other fuels. Water gels may be
safe levels, yet not so high as to pre- premixed at an explosives plant or
vent drainage of static electric charges mixed at the site immediately before
to ground; hose of not more than 2 delivery into the borehole.
megohms resistance over its entire (19) DOT specifications. Regulations of
length and of not less than 5,000 ohms the Department of Transportation pub-
per foot meets the requirement. lished in 49 CFR chapter I.
(13) Small arms ammunition. Small (b) Miscellaneous provisions(1) Gen-
arms ammunitionany shotgun, rifle, eral hazard. No person shall store, han-
pistol, or revolver cartridge, and car- dle, or transport explosives or blasting
tridges for propellant-actuated power agents when such storage, handling,
devices and industrial guns. Military- and transportation of explosives or
type ammunition containing explosive- blasting agents constitutes an undue
bursting charges, incendiary, tracer, hazard to life.
spotting, or pyrotechnic projectiles is (2) [Reserved]
excluded from this definition. (c) Storage of explosives(1) General
(14) Small arms ammunition primers. provisions. (i) All Class A, Class B, Class
Small arms ammunition primers C explosives, and special industrial ex-
small percussion-sensitive explosive plosives, and any newly developed and
charges, encased in a cup, used to ig- unclassified explosives, shall be kept in
nite propellant powder. magazines which meet the require-
(15) Smokeless propellants. Smokeless ments of this paragraph.
propellantssolid propellants, com- (ii) Blasting caps, electric blasting
monly called smokeless powders in the caps, detonating primers, and primed
trade, used in small arms ammunition, cartridges shall not be stored in the
cannon, rockets, propellant-actuated same magazine with other explosives.
power devices, etc. (iii) Ground around magazines shall
(16) Special industrial explosives de- slope away for drainage. The land sur-
vices. Special industrial explosives de- rounding magazines shall be kept clear
vicesexplosive-actuated power de- of brush, dried grass, leaves, and other
vices and propellant-actuated power materials for a distance of at least 25
devices. feet.
(17) Special industrial explosives mate- (iv) Magazines as required by this
rials. Special industrial explosives ma- paragraph shall be of two classes;
terialsshaped materials and sheet namely, Class I magazines, and Class II
forms and various other extrusions, magazines.
pellets, and packages of high explo- (v) Class I magazines shall be re-
sives, which include dynamite, tri- quired where the quantity of explosives
nitrotoluene (TNT), pentaerythritol stored is more than 50 pounds. Class II
283
magazines may be used where the TABLE H21AMERICAN TABLE OF DISTANCES

quantity of explosives stored is 50 FOR STORAGE OF EXPLOSIVES 1 NDASH;5
pounds or less. Continued
(vi) Class I magazines shall be lo- [As revised and approved by the Institute of Makers of
cated away from other magazines in Explosives, June 5, 1964]
conformity with Table H21. Explosives Distances in feet
when storage is
TABLE H21AMERICAN TABLE OF DISTANCES barricaded: Sepa-
Pounds over Pounds not over ration of maga-
FOR STORAGE OF EXPLOSIVES 1 NDASH;5 zines
[As revised and approved by the Institute of Makers of
Explosives, June 5, 1964] 120,000 130,000 215
130,000 140,000 225
Explosives Distances in feet 140,000 150,000 235
when storage is
barricaded: Sepa- 150,000 160,000 245
Pounds over Pounds not over ration of maga- 160,000 170,000 255
zines 170,000 180,000 265
180,000 190,000 275
2 5 6 190,000 200,000 285
5 10 8
200,000 210,000 295
10 20 10
20 30 11 210,000 230,000 315
30 40 12 230,000 250,000 335
40 50 14 250,000 275,000 360
50 75 15 275,000 300,000 385
75 100 16 1 Natural barricade means natural features of the ground,
100 125 18
such as hills, or timber of sufficient density that the sur-
125 150 19 rounding exposures which require protection cannot be seen
150 200 21 from the magazine when the trees are bare of leaves.
200 250 23 2 Artificial barricade means an artificial mound or revetted
250 300 24 wall of earth of a minimum thickness of three feet.
300 400 27 3 Barricaded means that a building containing explosives
400 500 29 is effectually screened from a magazine, building, railway, or

500 600 31 highway, either by a natural barricade, or by an artificial barri-
600 700 32 cade of such height that a straight line from the top of any
sidewall of the building containing explosives to the eave line
700 800 33 of any magazine, or building, or to a point 12 feet above the
800 900 35 center of a railway or highway, will pass through such inter-
900 1,000 36 vening natural or artificial barricade.
1,000 1,200 39 4 When two or more storage magazines are located on the
1,200 1,400 41 same property, each magazine must comply with the min-
1,400 1,600 43 imum distances specified from inhabited buildings, railways,
1,600 1,800 44 and highways, and in addition, they should be separated from
each other by not less than the distances shown for Separa-
1,800 2,000 45 tion of Magazines, except that the quantity of explosives con-
2,000 2,500 49 tained in cap magazines shall govern in regard to the spacing
2,500 3,000 52 of said cap magazines from magazines containing other ex-
3,000 4,000 58 plosives. If any two or more magazines are separated from
4,000 5,000 61 each other by less than the specified Separation of Maga-
5,000 6,000 65 zines distances, then such two or more magazines, as a
6,000 7,000 68 group, must be considered as one magazine, and the total
quantity of explosives stored in such group must be treated as
7,000 8,000 72 if stored in a single magazine located on the site of any mag-
8,000 9,000 75 azine of the group, and must comply with the minimum of dis-
9,000 10,000 78 tances specified from other magazines, inhabited buildings,
10,000 12,000 82 railways, and highways.
5 This table applies only to the permanent storage of com-
12,000 14,000 87
14,000 16,000 90 mercial explosives. It is not applicable to transportation of ex-
16,000 18,000 94 plosives, or any handling or temporary storage necessary or
incident thereto. It is not intended to apply to bombs, projec-
18,000 20,000 98 tiles, or other heavily encased explosives.
20,000 25,000 105
25,000 30,000 112 (vii) Except as provided in subdivi-
30,000 35,000 119
35,000 40,000 124 sion (viii) of this subparagraph, class II
40,000 45,000 129 magazines shall be located in con-
45,000 50,000 135 formity with Table H21, but may be
50,000 55,000 140
55,000 60,000 145 permitted in warehouses and in whole-
60,000 65,000 150 sale and retail establishments when lo-
65,000 70,000 155 cated on a floor which has an entrance
70,000 75,000 160
75,000 80,000 165
at outside grade level and the magazine
80,000 85,000 170 is located not more than 10 feet from
85,000 90,000 175 such an entrance. Two class II maga-
90,000 95,000 180 zines may be located in the same build-
95,000 100,000 185
100,000 110,000 195 ing when one is used only for blasting
110,000 120,000 205 caps in quantities not in excess of 5,000
284
caps and a distance of 10 feet is main- (v) The magazine heating systems
tained between magazines. shall meet the following requirements:
(viii) When used for temporary stor- (a) The radiant heating coils within
age at a site for blasting operations, the building shall be installed in such a
class II magazines shall be located manner that the explosives or explo-
away from other magazines. A distance sives containers cannot contact the
of at least one hundred and fifty (150) coils and air is free to circulate be-
feet shall be maintained between class tween the coils and the explosives or
II magazines and the work in progress explosives containers.
when the quantity of explosives kept (b) The heating ducts shall be in-
therein is in excess of 25 pounds, and at stalled in such a manner that the hot-
least 50 feet when the quantity of ex- air discharge from the duct is not di-
plosives is 25 pounds, or less. rected against the explosives or explo-
(ix) This paragraph (c) does not apply sives containers.
to: (c) The heating device used in con-
(a) Stocks of small arms ammuni- nection with a magazine shall have
tion, propellant-actuated power car- controls which prevent the ambient
tridges, small arms ammunition prim- building temperature from exceeding
ers in quantities of less than 750,000, or 130 F.
of smokeless propellants in quantities (d) The electric fan or pump used in
less than 750 pounds; the heating system for a magazine
shall be mounted outside and separate
(b) Explosive-actuated power devices
from the wall of the magazine and shall
when in quantities less than 50 pounds
be grounded.
net weight of explosives;
(e) The electric fan motor and the
(c) Fuse lighters and fuse igniters; controls for electrical heating devices
(d) Safety fuses other than cordeau used in heating water or steam shall
detonant fuses. have overloads and disconnects, which
(2) Construction of magazinesgeneral. comply with subpart S of this part. All
(i) Magazines shall be constructed in electrical switch gear shall be located
conformity with the provisions of this a minimum distance of 25 feet from the
paragraph. magazine.
(ii) Magazines for the storage of ex- (f) The heating source for water or
plosives, other than black powder, steam shall be separated from the mag-
Class B and Class C explosives shall be azine by a distance of not less than 25
bullet resistant, weather resistant, fire feet when electrical and 50 feet when
resistant, and ventilated sufficiently to fuel fired. The area between the heat-
protect the explosive in the specific lo- ing unit and the magazine shall be
cality. Magazines used only for storage cleared of all combustible materials.
of black powder, Class B and Class C (g) The storage of explosives and ex-
explosives shall be weather resistant, plosives containers in the magazine
fire-resistant, and have ventilation. shall allow uniform air circulation so
Magazines for storage of blasting and product temperature uniformity can be
electric blasting caps shall be weather maintained.
resistant, fire-resistant, and venti- (vi) When lights are necessary inside
lated. the magazine, electric safety flash-
(iii) Property upon which Class I light, or electric safety lanterns shall
magazines are located and property be used.
where Class II magazines are located (3) Construction of Class I magazines.
outside of buildings shall be posted (i) Class I magazines shall be of ma-
with signs reading ExplosivesKeep sonry construction or of wood or of
Off. metal construction, or a combination
(iv) Magazines requiring heat shall be of these types. Thickness of masonry
heated by either hot-water radiant units shall not be less than 8 inches.
heating with the magazine building; or Hollow masonry units used in con-
air directed into the magazine building struction required to be bullet resist-
over either hot water or low pressure ant shall have all hollow spaces filled
steam (15 p.s.i.g.) coils located outside with weak cement or well-tamped sand.
the magazine building. Wood constructed walls, required to be
285
bullet resistant, shall have at least a 6- or metal construction, or a combina-

inch space between interior and exte- tion thereof.
rior sheathing and the space between (ii) Wood magazines of this class
sheathing shall be filled with well- shall have sides, bottom, and cover
tamped sand. Metal wall construction, constructed of 2-inch hardwood boards
when required to be bullet resistant, well braced at corners and protected by
shall be lined with brick at least 4 being entirely covered with sheet
inches in thickness or shall have at metal of not less than No. 20 gage. All
least a 6-inch sandfill between interior nails exposed to the interior of the
and exterior walls. magazine shall be well countersunk.
(ii) Floors and roofs of masonry mag- All metal magazines of this class shall
azines may be of wood construction. have sides, bottom, and cover con-
Wood floors shall be tongue and structed of sheet metal, and shall be
grooved lumber having a nominal lined with three-eighths-inch plywood
thickness of 1 inch. or equivalent. Edges of metal covers
(iii) Roofs required to be bullet re- shall overlap sides at least 1 inch.
sistant shall be protected by a sand (iii) Covers for both wood- and metal-
tray located at the line of eaves and constructed magazines of this class
covering the entire area except that shall be provided with substantial
necessary for ventilation. Sand in the strap hinges and shall be provided with
sand tray shall be maintained at a substantial means for locking.
depth of not less than 4 inches. (iv) Magazines of this class shall be
painted red and shall bear lettering in
(iv) All wood at the exterior of maga-
white, on all sides and top, at least 3
zines, including eaves, shall be pro-
inches high, ExplosivesKeep Fire
tected by being covered with black or
Away. Class II magazines when lo-
galvanized steel or aluminum metal of
cated in warehouses, and in wholesale
thickness of not less than No. 26 gage.
and retail establishments shall be pro-
All nails exposed to the interior of
vided with substantial wheels or cast-
magazines shall be well countersunk.
ers to facilitate easy removal in the
(v) Foundations for magazines shall
case of fire. Where necessary due to cli-
be of substantial construction and ar-
matic conditions, Class II magazines
ranged to provide good cross ventila-
shall be ventilated.
tion.
(5) Storage within magazines. (i) Pack-
(vi) Magazines shall be ventilated ages of explosives shall be laid flat
sufficiently to prevent dampness and with top side up. Black powder when
heating of stored explosives. Ven- stored in magazines with other explo-
tilating openings shall be screened to sives shall be stored separately. Black
prevent the entrance of sparks. powder stored in kegs shall be stored
(vii) Openings to magazines shall be on ends, bungs down, or on side, seams
restricted to that necessary for the down. Corresponding grades and brands
placement and removal of stocks of ex- shall be stored together in such a man-
plosives. Doors for openings in maga- ner that brands and grade marks show.
zines for Class A explosives shall be All stocks shall be stored so as to be
bullet resistant. Doors for magazines easily counted and checked. Packages
not required to be bullet resistant shall of explosives shall be piled in a stable
be designed to prevent unauthorized manner. When any kind of explosive is
entrance to the magazine. removed from a magazine for use, the
(viii) [Reserved] oldest explosive of that particular kind
(ix) Provisions shall be made to pre- shall always be taken first.
vent the piling of stocks of explosives (ii) Packages of explosives shall not
directly against masonry walls, brick- be unpacked or repacked in a magazine
lined or sand-filled metal walls and sin- nor within 50 feet of a magazine or in
gle-thickness metal walls; such protec- close proximity to other explosives.
tion, however, shall not interfere with Tools used for opening packages of ex-
proper ventilation at the interior of plosives shall be constructed of non-
side and end walls. sparking materials, except that metal
(4) Construction of Class II magazines. slitters may be used for opening fiber-
(i) Class II magazines shall be of wood board boxes. A wood wedge and a fiber,
286
rubber, or wood mallet shall be used for times and who shall be held responsible
opening or closing wood packages of for the enforcement of all safety pre-
explosives. Opened packages of explo- cautions.
sives shall be securely closed before (ix) Explosives recovered from blast-
being returned to a magazine. ing misfires shall be placed in a sepa-
(iii) Magazines shall not be used for rate magazine until competent per-
the storage of any metal tools nor any sonnel has determined from the manu-
commodity except explosives, but this facturer the method of disposal. Caps
restriction shall not apply to the stor- recovered from blasting misfires shall
age of blasting agents and blasting sup- not be reused. Such explosives and caps
plies. shall then be disposed of in the manner
(iv) Magazine floors shall be regu- recommended by the manufacturer.
larly swept, kept clean, dry, free of (d) Transportation of explosives(1)
grit, paper, empty used packages, and General provisions. (i) No employee
rubbish. Brooms and other cleaning shall be allowed to smoke, carry
utensils shall not have any spark-pro- matches or any other flame-producing
ducing metal parts. Sweepings from device, or carry any firearms or loaded
floors of magazines shall be properly cartridges while in or near a motor ve-
disposed of. Magazine floors stained hicle transporting explosives; or drive,
with nitroglycerin shall be cleaned ac- load, or unload such vehicle in a care-
cording to instructions by the manu- less or reckless manner.
facturer. (ii) [Reserved]
(v) When any explosive has deterio- (iii) Explosives shall not be trans-
rated to an extent that it is in an un- ferred from one vehicle to another
stable or dangerous condition, or if ni- within the confines of any jurisdiction
troglycerin leaks from any explosives, (city, county, State, or other area)
then the person in possession of such without informing the fire and police
explosive shall immediately proceed to departments thereof. In the event of
destroy such explosive in accordance breakdown or collision the local fire
with the instructions of the manufac- and police departments shall be
turer. Only experienced persons shall promptly notified to help safeguard
be allowed to do the work of destroying such emergencies. Explosives shall be
explosives. transferred from the disabled vehicle
(vi) When magazines need inside re- to another only, when proper and
pairs, all explosives shall be removed qualified supervision is provided.
therefrom and the floors cleaned. In (iv) Blasting caps or electric blasting
making outside repairs, if there is a caps shall not be transported over the
possibility of causing sparks or fire the highways on the same vehicles with
explosives shall be removed from the other explosives, unless packaged, seg-
magazine. Explosives removed from a regated, and transported in accordance
magazine under repair shall either be with the Department of Transpor-
placed in another magazine or placed a tations Hazardous Materials Regula-
safe distance from the magazine where tions (49 CFR parts 177180).
they shall be properly guarded and pro- (2) Transportation vehicles. (i) Vehicles
tected until repairs have been com- used for transporting explosives shall
pleted, when they shall be returned to be strong enough to carry the load
the magazine. without difficulty and be in good me-
(vii) Smoking, matches, open flames, chanical condition. If vehicles do not
spark-producing devices, and firearms have a closed body, the body shall be
(except firearms carried by guards) covered with a flameproof and mois-
shall not be permitted inside of or tureproof tarpaulin or other effective
within 50 feet of magazines. The land protection against moisture and
surrounding a magazine shall be kept sparks. All vehicles used for the trans-
clear of all combustible materials for a portation of explosives shall have tight
distance of at least 25 feet. Combus- floors and any exposed spark-producing
tible materials shall not be stored metal on the inside of the body shall be
within 50 feet of magazines. covered with wood or other non-
(viii) Magazines shall be in the sparking materials to prevent contact
charge of a competent person at all with packages of explosives. Packages
287
of explosives shall not be loaded above guishers, each having a rating of at

the sides of an open-body vehicle. least 10BC.
(ii) Every vehicle used for trans- (a) Only extinguishers listed or ap-
porting explosives and oxidizing mate- proved by a nationally recognized test-
rials listed in paragraph (d)(2)(ii)(a) of ing laboratory shall be deemed suitable
this section shall be marked as follows: for use on explosives-carrying vehicles.
(a) Exterior markings or placards re- Refer to 1910.155(c)(3)(iv)(A) for defini-
quired on applicable vehicles shall be tion of listed, and 1910.7 for nationally
as follows for the various classes of recognized testing laboratory.
commodities: (b) Extinguishers shall be filled and
ready for immediate use and located
Commodity Type of marking or near the drivers seat. Extinguishers
placard
shall be examined periodically by a
Explosives, Class A, any quantity Explosives A (Red letters competent person.
or a combination of Class A on white background). (iv) A motor vehicle used for trans-
and Class B explosives. porting explosives shall be given the
Explosives, Class B, and quantity Explosives B (Red letters
on white background).
following inspection to determine that
Oxidizing material (blasting Oxidizers (Yellow letters it is in proper condition for safe trans-
agents, ammonium nitrate, on black background). portation of explosives:
etc.), 1,000 pounds or more (a) Fire extinguishers shall be filled
gross weight.
and in working order.
(b) All electrical wiring shall be com-
(b) [Reserved] pletely protected and securely fastened
(c) Such markings or placards shall to prevent short-circuiting.
be displayed at the front, rear, and on (c) Chassis, motor, pan, and underside
each side of the motor vehicle or trail- of body shall be reasonably clean and
er, or other cargo carrying body while free of excess oil and grease.
it contains explosives or other dan- (d) Fuel tank and feedline shall be se-
gerous articles of such type and in such cure and have no leaks.
quantity as specified in paragraph (e) Brakes, lights, horn, windshield
(d)(1)(ii)(a) of this subdivision. The wipers, and steering apparatus shall
front marking or placard may be dis- function properly.
played on the front of either the truck, (f) Tires shall be checked for proper
truck body, truck tractor or the trail- inflation and defects.
er. (g) The vehicle shall be in proper con-
(d) Any motor vehicle, trailer, or dition in every other respect and ac-
other cargo-carrying body containing ceptable for handling explosives.
more than one kind of explosive as well (3) Operation of transportation vehicles.
as an oxidizing material requiring a (i) Vehicles transporting explosives
placard under the provisions of para- shall only be driven by and be in the
graph (d)(2)(ii)(a), the aggregate gross charge of a driver who is familiar with
weight of which totals 1,000 pounds or the traffic regulations, State laws, and
more, shall be marked or placarded the provisions of this section.
Dangerous as well as Explosive A (ii) Except under emergency condi-
or Explosive B as appropriate. If ex- tions, no vehicle transporting explo-
plosives Class A and explosives Class B sives shall be parked before reaching
are loaded on the same vehicle, the its destination, even though attended,
Explosives B marking need not be on any public street adjacent to or in
displayed. proximity to any place where people
(e) In any combination of two or work.
more vehicles containing explosives or (iii) Every motor vehicle trans-
other dangerous articles each vehicle porting any quantity of Class A or
shall be marked or placarded as to its Class B explosives shall, at all times,
contents and in accordance with para- be attended by a driver or other at-
graphs (d)(2)(ii) (a) and (c) of this sub- tendant of the motor carrier. This at-
division. tendant shall have been made aware of
(iii) Each motor vehicle used for the class of the explosive material in
transporting explosives shall be the vehicle and of its inherent dangers,
equipped with a minimum of two extin- and shall have been instructed in the
288
measures and procedures to be followed flame. No person shall be allowed to

in order to protect the public from handle explosives while under the in-
those dangers. He shall have been made fluence of intoxicating liquors, nar-
familiar with the vehicle he is as- cotics, or other dangerous drugs.
signed, and shall be trained, supplied (ii) Original containers or Class II
with the necessary means, and author- magazines shall be used for taking det-
ized to move the vehicle when required. onators and other explosives from stor-
(a) For the purpose of this subdivi- age magazines to the blasting area.
sion, a motor vehicle shall be deemed (iii) When blasting is done in con-
attended only when the driver or gested areas or in close proximity to a
other attendant is physically on or in structure, or any other installation
the vehicle, or has the vehicle within that may be damaged, the blast shall
his field of vision and can reach it be covered before firing with a mat
quickly and without any kind of inter- constructed so that it is capable of pre-
ference attended also means that the venting fragments from being thrown.
driver or attendant is awake, alert, and (iv) Persons authorized to prepare ex-
not engaged in other duties or activi- plosive charges or conduct blasting op-
ties which may divert his attention erations shall use every reasonable pre-
from the vehicle, except for necessary caution, including but not limited to
communication with public officers, or warning signals, flags, barricades, or
representatives of the carrier shipper, woven wire mats to insure the safety of
or consignee, or except for necessary the general public and workmen.
absence from the vehicle to obtain food (v) Blasting operations shall be con-
or to provide for his physical comfort. ducted during daylight hours.
(b) However, an explosive-laden vehi- (vi) Whenever blasting is being con-
cle may be left unattended if parked ducted in the vicinity of gas, electric,
within a securely fenced or walled area water, fire alarm, telephone, telegraph,
with all gates or entrances locked and steam utilities, the blaster shall
where parking of such vehicle is other- notify the appropriate representatives
wise permissible, or at a magazine site of such utilities at least 24 hours in ad-
established solely for the purpose of vance of blasting, specifying the loca-
storing explosives. tion and intended time of such blast-
(iv) No spark-producing metal, sparking. Verbal notice shall be confirmed
producing metal tools, oils, matches, with written notice.
firearms, electric storage batteries, (vii) Due precautions shall be taken
flammable substances, acids, oxidizing to prevent accidental discharge of elec-
materials, or corrosive compounds tric blasting caps from current induced
shall be carried in the body of any by radar, radio transmitters, lightning,
motor truck and/or vehicle trans- adjacent powerlines, dust storms, or
porting explosives, unless the loading other sources of extraneous electricity.
of such dangerous articles and the ex- These precautions shall include:
plosives comply with U.S. Department (a) The suspension of all blasting op-
of Transportation regulations. erations and removal of persons from
(v) Vehicles transporting explosives the blasting area during the approach
shall avoid congested areas and heavy and progress of an electric storm.
traffic. Where routes through con- (b) The posting of signs warning
gested areas have been designated by against the use of mobile radio trans-
local authorities such routes shall be mitters on all roads within 350 feet of
followed. the blasting operations.
(vi) Delivery shall only be made to (2) Storage at use sites. (i) Empty con-
authorized persons and into authorized tainers and paper and fiber packing
magazines or authorized temporary materials which have previously con-
storage or handling areas. tained explosive materials shall be dis-
(e) Use of explosives and blasting posed of in a safe manner, or reused in
agents(1) General provisions. (i) While accordance with the Department of
explosives are being handled or used, Transportations Hazardous Materials
smoking shall not be permitted and no Regulations (49 CFR parts 177180).
one near the explosives shall possess (ii) Containers of explosives shall not
matches, open light or other fire or be opened in any magazine or within 50
289
feet of any magazine. In opening kegs a wooden punch of proper size or stand-
or wooden cases, no sparking metal ard cap crimper.
tools shall be used; wooden wedges and (v) Explosives shall not be extracted
either wood, fiber or rubber mallets from a hole that has once been charged
shall be used. Nonsparking metallic or has misfired unless it is impossible
slitters may be used for opening fiber- to detonate the unexploded charge by
board cases. insertion of a fresh additional primer.
(iii) Explosives or blasting equipment (vi) If there are any misfires while
that are obviously deteriorated or dam- using cap and fuse, all persons shall be
aged shall not be used. required to remain away from the
(iv) No explosives shall be abandoned. charge for at least 1 hour. If electric
(3) Loading of explosives in blast holes. blasting caps are used and a misfire oc-
(i) All drill holes shall be sufficiently curs, this waiting period may be re-
large to admit freely the insertion of duced to 30 minutes. Misfires shall be
the cartridges of explosives. handled under the direction of the per-
(ii) Tamping shall be done only with son in charge of the blasting and all
wood rods without exposed metal parts, wires shall be carefully traced and
but nonsparking metal connectors may search made for unexploded charges.
be used for jointed poles. Violent tamp- (vii) Blasters, when testing circuits
ing shall be avoided. Primed cartridges to charged holes, shall use only blast-
shall not be tamped. ing galvanometers designed for this
(iii) When loading blasting agents purpose.
pneumatically over electric blasting (viii) Only the employee making
caps, semiconductive delivery hose leading wire connections in electrical
shall be used and the equipment shall firing shall be allowed to fire the shot.
be bonded and grounded. Leading wires shall remain shorted and
not be connected to the blasting ma-
(iv) No holes shall be loaded except
chine or other source of current until
those to be fired in the next round of
the charge is to be fired.
blasting. After loading, all remaining
(5) Warning required. Before a blast is
explosives shall be immediately re-
fired, the employer shall require that a
turned to an authorized magazine.
loud warning signal be given by the
(v) Drilling shall not be started until
person in charge, who has made certain
all remaining butts of old holes are ex-
that all surplus explosives are in a safe
amined with a wooden stick for
place, all persons and vehicles are at a
unexploded charges, and if any are
safe distance or under sufficient cover,
found, they shall be refired before work
and that an adequate warning has been
proceeds.
given.
(vi) No person shall be allowed to (f) Explosives at piers, railway stations,
deepen drill holes which have con- and cars or vessels not otherwise specified
tained explosives. in this standard(1) Railway cars. Ex-
(vii) After loading for a blast is com- cept in an emergency and with permis-
pleted, all excess blasting caps or elec- sion of the local authority, no person
tric blasting caps and other explosives shall have or keep explosives in a rail-
shall immediately be returned to their way car unless said car and contents
separate storage magazines. and methods of loading are in accord-
(4) Initiation of explosive charges. ance with the U.S. Department of
(i) [Reserved] Transportation Regulations for the
(ii) When fuse is used, the blasting Transportation of Explosives, 49 CFR
cap shall be securely attached to the chapter I.
safety fuse with a standard-ring type (2) Packing and marking. No person
cap crimper. All primers shall be as- shall deliver any explosive to any car-
sembled at least 50 feet from any maga- rier unless such explosive conforms in
zine. all respects, including marking and
(iii) Primers shall be made up only as packing, to the U.S. Department of
required for each round of blasting. Transportation Regulations for the
(iv) No blasting cap shall be inserted Transportation of Explosives.
in the explosives without first making (3) Marking cars. Every railway car
a hole in the cartridge for the cap with containing explosives which has
290
reached its designation, or is stopped lated and isolated by a firewall. The ex-
in transit so as no longer to be in inter- haust systems on all such engines shall
state commerce, shall have attached to be located so any spark emission can-
both sides and ends of the car, cards not be a hazard to any materials in or
with the words ExplosivesHandle adjacent to the plant.
CarefullyKeep Fire Away in red let- (iii) Equipment used for mixing
ters at least 112 inches high on a white blasting agents shall conform to the re-
background. quirements of this subdivision.
(4) Storage. Any explosives at a rail- (a) The design of the mixer shall min-
way facility, truck terminal, pier, imize the possibility of frictional heat-
wharf harbor facility, or airport tering, compaction, and especially con-
minal whether for delivery to a confinement. All bearings and drive as-
signee, or forwarded to some other des- semblies shall be mounted outside the
tination shall be kept in a safe place, mixer and protected against the accu-
isolated as far as practicable and in mulation of dust. All surfaces shall be
such manner that they can be easily accessible for cleaning.
and quickly removed. (b) Mixing and packaging equipment
(5) Hours of transfer. Explosives shall shall be constructed of materials com-
not be delivered to or received from patible with the fuel-ammonium ni-
any railway station, truck terminal, trate composition.
pier, wharf, harbor facility, or airport (c) Suitable means shall be provided
terminal between the hours of sunset to prevent the flow of fuel oil to the
and sunrise. mixer in case of fire. In gravity flow
(g) Blasting agents(1) General. Unless systems an automatic spring-loaded
otherwise set forth in this paragraph, shutoff valve with fusible link shall be
blasting agents, excluding water gels, installed.
shall be transported, stored, and used (iv) The provisions of this subdivision
in the same manner as explosives. shall be considered when determining
Water gels are covered in paragraph (h) blasting agent compositions.
of this section.
(a) The sensitivity of the blasting
(2) Fixed location mixing. (i) [Re-
agent shall be determined by means of
served]
a No. 8 test blasting cap at regular in-
(ii) Buildings used for the mixing of
tervals and after every change in for-
blasting agents shall conform to the re-
mulation.
quirements of this section.
(a) Buildings shall be of noncombus- (b) Oxidizers of small particle size,
tible construction or sheet metal on such as crushed ammonium nitrate
wood studs. prills or fines, may be more sensitive
(b) Floors in a mixing plant shall be than coarser products and shall, there-
of concrete or of other nonabsorbent fore, be handled with greater care.
materials. (c) No hydrocarbon liquid fuel with
(c) All fuel oil storage facilities shall flashpoint lower than that of No. 2 die-
be separated from the mixing plant and sel fuel oil 125 F. minimum shall be
located in such a manner that in case used.
of tank rupture, the oil will drain away (d) Crude oil and crankcase oil shall
from the mixing plant building. not be used.
(d) The building shall be well venti- (e) Metal powders such as aluminum
lated. shall be kept dry and shall be stored in
(e) Heating units which do not depend containers or bins which are moisture-
on combustion processes, when prop- resistant or weathertight. Solid fuels
erly designed and located, may be used shall be used in such manner as to min-
in the building. All direct sources of imize dust explosion hazards.
heat shall be provided exclusively from (f) Peroxides and chlorates shall not
units located outside the mixing build- be used.
ing. (v) All electrical switches, controls,
(f) All internal-combustion engines motors, and lights located in the mix-
used for electric power generation shall ing room shall conform to the require-
be located outside the mixing plant ments in subpart S of this part for
building, or shall be properly venti- Class II, Division 2 locations; otherwise
291
they shall be located outside the mix- form with the requirements of this
ing room. The frame of the mixer and paragraph (ii).
all other equipment that may be used (a) The body shall be constructed of
shall be electrically bonded and be pro- noncombustible materials.
vided with a continuous path to the (b) Vehicles used to transport bulk
ground. premixed blasting agents on public
(vi) Safety precautions at mixing highways shall have closed bodies.
plants shall include the requirements (c) All moving parts of the mixing
of this subdivision. system shall be designed as to prevent
(a) Floors shall be constructed so as a heat buildup. Shafts or axles which
to eliminate floor drains and piping contact the product shall have out-
into which molten materials could flow board bearings with 1-inch minimum
and be confined in case of fire. clearance between the bearings and the
(b) The floors and equipment of the outside of the product container. Par-
mixing and packaging room shall be ticular attention shall be given to the
cleaned regularly and thoroughly to clearances on all moving parts.
prevent accumulation of oxidizers or
(d) A bulk delivery vehicle shall be
fuels and other sensitizers.
strong enough to carry the load with-
(c) The entire mixing and packaging
out difficulty and be in good mechan-
plant shall be cleaned regularly and
ical condition.
thoroughly to prevent excessive accu-
mulation of dust. (iii) Operation of bulk delivery vehi-
(d) Smoking, matches, open flames, cles shall conform to the requirements
spark-producing devices, and firearms of this subdivision. These include the
(except firearms carried by guards) placarding requirements as specified by
shall not be permitted inside of or Department of Transportation.
within 50 feet of any building or facil- (a) The operator shall be trained in
ity used for the mixing of blasting the safe operation of the vehicle to-
agents. gether with its mixing, conveying, and
(e) The land surrounding the mixing related equipment. The employer shall
plant shall be kept clear of brush, dried assure that the operator is familiar
grass, leaves, and other materials for a with the commodities being delivered
distance of at least 25 feet. and the general procedure for handling
(f) Empty ammonium nitrate bags emergency situations.
shall be disposed of daily in a safe man- (b) The hauling of either blasting
ner. caps or other explosives but not both,
(g) No welding shall be permitted or shall be permitted on bulk trucks pro-
open flames used in or around the mix- vided that a special wood or non-
ing or storage area of the plant unless ferrous-lined container is installed for
the equipment or area has been com- the explosives. Such blasting caps or
pletely washed down and all oxidizer other explosives shall be in DOT-speci-
material removed. fied shipping containers: see 49 CFR
(h) Before welding or repairs to hol- chapter I.
low shafts, all oxidizer material shall (c) No person shall smoke, carry
be removed from the outside and inside matches or any flame-producing de-
of the shaft and the shaft vented with vice, or carry any firearms while in or
a minimum one-half inch diameter about bulk vehicles effecting the mix-
opening. ing transfer or down-the-hole loading
(i) Explosives shall not be permitted of blasting agents at or near the blast-
inside of or within 50 feet of any building site.
ing or facility used for the mixing of (d) Caution shall be exercised in the
blasting agents. movement of the vehicle in the blast-
(3) Bulk delivery and mixing vehicles. ing area to avoid driving the vehicle
(i) The provisions of this paragraph over or dragging hoses over firing lines,
shall apply to off-highway private oper- cap wires, or explosive materials. The
ations as well as to all public highway employer shall assure that the driver,
movements. in moving the vehicle, has assistance of
(ii) A bulk vehicle body for delivering a second person to guide his move-
and mixing blasting agents shall con- ments.
292
(e) No intransit mixing of materials public highways, in accordance with

shall be performed. Table-21 and separation from other
(iv) Pneumatic loading from bulk de- blasting agent storage and explosives
livery vehicles into blastholes primed storage shall be in conformity with
with electric blasting caps or other Table H22.
static-sensitive systems shall conform (vi) Bins containing ammonium ni-
to the requirements of this subdivision. trate shall be separated from blasting
(a) A positive grounding device shall agent storage and explosives storage in
be used to prevent the accumulation of conformity with Table H22.
static electricity.
(b) A discharge hose shall be used TABLE H22TABLE OF RECOMMENDED SEPA-
that has a resistance range that will RATION DISTANCES OF AMMONIUM NITRATE
prevent conducting stray currents, but AND BLASTING AGENTS FROM EXPLOSIVES OR
that is conductive enough to bleed off BLASTING AGENTS 1 NDASH;6
static buildup.
Donor weight Minimum separation
(c) A qualified person shall evaluate Minimum
distance of receptor thickness
all systems to determine if they will when barricaded 2 (ft.) of artificial
adequately dissipate static under po- Pounds Pounds barri-
Ammo-
over not over Blasting cades 5
tential field conditions. nium ni- agent 4 (in.)
trate 3
(v) Repairs to bulk delivery vehicles
shall conform to the requirements of 100 3 11 12
this section. 100 300 4 14 12
300 600 5 18 12
(a) No welding or open flames shall
600 1,000 6 22 12
be used on or around any part of the 1,000 1,600 7 25 12
delivery equipment unless it has been 1,600 2,000 8 29 12
completely washed down and all oxi- 2,000 3,000 9 32 15
dizer material removed. 3,000 4,000 10 36 15
4,000 6,000 11 40 15
(b) Before welding or making repairs 6,000 8,000 12 43 20
to hollow shafts, the shaft shall be 8,000 10,000 13 47 20
thoroughly cleaned inside and out and 10,000 12,000 14 50 20
vented with a minimum one-half-inch 12,000 16,000 15 54 25
diameter opening. 16,000 20,000 16 58 25
20,000 25,000 18 65 25
(4) Bulk storage bins. (i) The bin, in- 25,000 30,000 19 68 30
cluding supports, shall be constructed 30,000 35,000 20 72 30
of compatible materials, waterproof, 35,000 40,000 21 76 30
and adequately supported and braced 40,000 45,000 22 79 35
45,000 50,000 23 83 35
to withstand the combination of all
50,000 55,000 24 86 35
loads including impact forces arising 55,000 60,000 25 90 35
from product movement within the bin 60,000 70,000 26 94 40
and accidental vehicle contact with the 70,000 80,000 28 101 40
support legs. 80,000 90,000 30 108 40
90,000 100,000 32 115 40
(ii) The bin discharge gate shall be 100,000 120,000 34 122 50
designed to provide a closure tight 120,000 140,000 37 133 50
enough to prevent leakage of the 140,000 160,000 40 144 50
stored product. Provision shall also be 160,000 180,000 44 158 50
made so that the gate can be locked. 180,000 200,000 48 173 50
200,000 220,000 52 187 60
(iii) Bin loading manways or access 220,000 250,000 56 202 60
hatches shall be hinged or otherwise 250,000 275,000 60 216 60
attached to the bin and be designed to 275,000 300,000 64 230 60
permit locking. 1 These distances apply to the separation of stores only.
(iv) Any electrically driven con- Table H21 shall be used in determining separation distances
from inhabited buildings, passenger railways, and public high-
veyors for loading or unloading bins ways.
shall conform to the requirements of 2 When the ammonium nitrate and/or blasting agent is not
barricaded, the distances shown in the table shall be multi-
subpart S of this part. They shall be plied by six. These distances allow for the possibility of high
designed to minimize damage from cor- velocity metal fragments from mixers, hoppers, truck bodies,
sheet metal structures, metal container, and the like which
rosion. may enclose the donor. Where storage is in bullet-resistant
(v) Bins containing blasting agent magazines recommended for explosives or where the storage
is protected by a bullet-resistant wall, distances, and barricade
shall be located, with respect to inhab- thicknesses in excess of those prescribed in Table H21 are
ited buildings, passenger railroads, and not required.
293
3 The distances in the table apply to ammonium nitrate that
be stored in the manner set forth in
passes the insensitivity test prescribed in the definition of am-
monium nitrate fertilizer promulgated by the National Plant this subdivision.
Food Institute*; and ammonium nitrate failing to pass said test (a) Blasting agents or ammonium ni-
shall be stored at separation distances determined by com-
petent persons. (*Definition and Test Procedures for Ammo- trate, when stored in conjunction with
nium Nitrate Fertilizer, National Plant Food Institute, Novem- explosives, shall be stored in the man-
ber 1964.)
4 These distances apply to nitro-carbo-nitrates and blasting ner set forth in paragraph (c) of this
agents which pass the insensitivity test prescribed in the U.S. section for explosives. The mass of
Department of Transportation (DOT) regulations.
5 Earth, or sand dikes, or enclosures filled with the pre- blasting agents and one-half the mass
scribed minimum thickness of earth or sand are acceptable of ammonium nitrate shall be included
artificial barricades. Natural barricades, such as hills or timber
of sufficient density that the surrounding exposures which re- when computing the total quantity of
quire protection cannot be seen from the donor when the explosives for determining distance re-
trees are bare of leaves, are also acceptable.
6 When the ammonium nitrate must be counted in deter- quirements.
mining the distances to be maintained from inhabited build- (b) Blasting agents, when stored en-
ings, passenger railways and public highways, it may be tirely separate from explosives, may be
counted at one-half its actual weight because its blast effect is
lower. stored in the manner set forth in para-
NOTE 7: Guide to use of table of recommended separation graph (c) of this section or in one-story
distances of ammonium nitrate and blasting agents from ex-
plosives or blasting agents. warehouses (without basements) which
(a) Sketch location of all potential donor and acceptor mate- shall be:
rials together with the maximum mass of material to be al-
lowed in that vicinity. (Potential donors are high explosives, (1) Noncombustible or fire resistive;
blasting agents, and combination of masses of detonating ma- (2) Constructed so as to eliminate
terials. Potential acceptors are high explosives, blasting
agents, and ammonium nitrate.) open floor drains and piping into which
(b) Consider separately each donor mass in combination molten materials could flow and be
with each acceptor mass. If the masses are closer than table
allowance (distances measured between nearest edges), the confined in case of fire;
combination of masses becomes a new potential donor of (3) Weather resistant;
weight equal to the total mass. When individual masses are
considered as donors, distances to potential acceptors shall (4) Well ventilated; and
be measured between edges. When combined masses within (5) Equipped with a strong door kept
propagating distance of each other are considered as a
donor, the appropriate distance to the edge of potential ac- securely locked except when open for
ceptors shall be computed as a weighted distance from the business.
combined masses.
Calculation of weighted distance from combined masses: (c) Semitrailer or full-trailer vans
Let M2, M3 . . . Mn be donor masses to be combined. used for highway or onsite transpor-
M1 is a potential acceptor mass. tation of the blasting agents are satis-
D12 is distance from M1 to M2 (edge to edge).
D13 is distance from M1 to M3 (edge to edge), etc. factory for temporarily storing these
To find weighted distance [D1(2,3 . . . n)] from combined materials, provided they are located in
masses to M1, add the products of the individual masses and accordance with Table H22 with re-
distances and divide the total by the sum of the masses thus:
spect to one another. Trailers shall be
D1(2, 3 . . . n)=M2D12+M3D12 . . . +MnD12M2+M3 . . .
+Mn provided with substantial means for
Propagation is possible if either an individual donor mass is locking, and the trailer doors shall be
less than the tabulated distance from an acceptor or a com- kept locked, except during the time of
bined mass is less than the weighted distance from an accep-
tor. placement and removal of stocks of
(c) In determining the distances separating highways, rail- blasting agents.
roads, and inhabited buildings from potential explosions (as
prescribed in Table H21), the sum of all masses which may (ii) Warehouses used for the storage
propagate (i.e., lie at distances less than prescribed in the of blasting agents separate from explo-
Table) from either individual or combined donor masses are
included. However, when the ammonium nitrate must be in- sives shall be located as set forth in
cluded, only 50 percent of its weight shall be used because of this subdivision.
its reduced blast effects. In applying Table H21 to distances
from highways, railroads, and inhabited buildings, distances (a) Warehouses used for the storage
are measured from the nearest edge of potentially explodable of blasting agents shall be located in
material as prescribed in Table H21, Note 5.
(d) When all or part of a potential acceptor comprises Ex-
Table H22 with respect to one another.
plosives Class A as defined in DOT regulations, storage in (b) If both blasting agents and ammo-
bullet-resistant magazines is required. Safe distances to nium nitrate are handled or stored
stores in bullet-resistant magazines may be obtained from the
intermagazine distances prescribed in Table H21. within the distance limitations pre-
(e) Barricades must not have line-of-sight openings be- scribed through paragraph (g)(2) of this
tween potential donors and acceptors which permit blast or
missiles to move directly between masses. section, one-half the mass of the am-
(f) Good housekeeping practices shall be maintained monium nitrate shall be added to the
around any bin containing ammonium nitrate or blasting
agent. This includes keeping weeds and other combustible mass of the blasting agent when com-
materials cleared within 25 feet of such bin. Accumulation of puting the total quantity of explosives
spilled product on the ground shall be prevented.
for determining the proper distance for
(5) Storage of blasting agents and sup- compliance with Table H21.
plies. (i) Blasting agents and oxidizers (iii) Smoking, matches, open flames,
used for mixing of blasting agents shall spark producing devices, and firearms
294
are prohibited inside of or within 50 (7) Use of blasting agents. Persons

feet of any warehouse used for the stor- using blasting agents shall comply
age of blasting agents. Combustible with all of the applicable provisions of
materials shall not be stored within 50 paragraph (e) of this section.
feet of warehouses used for the storage (h) Water gel (Slurry) explosives and
of blasting agents. blasting agents(1) General provisions.
(iv) The interior of warehouses used Unless otherwise set forth in this para-
for the storage of blasting agents shall graph, water gels shall be transported,
be kept clean and free from debris and stored and used in the same manner as
empty containers. Spilled materials explosives or blasting agents in accord-
shall be cleaned up promptly and safely ance with the classification of the
removed. Combustible materials, flam- product.
mable liquids, corrosive acids, chlor- (2) Types and classifications. (i) Water
ates, or nitrates shall not be stored in gels containing a substance in itself
any warehouse used for blasting agents
classified as an explosive shall be clas-
unless separated therefrom by a fire re-
sified as an explosive and manufac-
sistive separation of not less than 1
tured, transported, stored, and used as
hour resistance. The provisions of this
specified for explosives in this sec-
subdivision shall not prohibit the stor-
tion, except as noted in subdivision (iv)
age of blasting agents together with
nonexplosive blasting supplies. of this subparagraph.
(v) Piles of ammonium nitrate and (ii) Water gels containing no sub-
warehouses containing ammonium ni- stance in itself classified as an explo-
trate shall be adequately separated sive and which are cap-sensitive as de-
from readily combustible fuels. fined in paragraph (a) of this section
(vi) Caked oxidizers, either in bags or under Blasting Agent shall be classified
in bulk, shall not be loosened by blast- as an explosive and manufactured,
ing. transported, stored and used as speci-
(vii) Every warehouse used for the fied for explosives in this section.
storage of blasting agents shall be (iii) Water gels containing no sub-
under the supervision of a competent stance in itself classified as an explo-
person. sive and which are not cap-sensitive as
(6) Transportation of packaged blasting defined in paragraph (a) of this section
agents. (i) When blasting agents are under Blasting Agent shall be classified
transported in the same vehicle with as blasting agents and manufactured,
explosives, all of the requirements of transported, stored, and used as speci-
paragraph (d) of this section shall be fied for blasting agents in this sec-
complied with. tion.
(ii) Vehicles transporting blasting (iv) When tests on specific formula-
agents shall only be driven by and be in tions of water gels result in Depart-
charge of a driver in possession of a ment of Transportation classification
valid motor vehicle operators license. as a Class B explosive, bullet-resistant
Such a person shall also be familiar magazines are not required, see para-
with the States vehicle and traffic graph (c)(2)(ii) of this section.
laws. (3) Fixed location mixing.
(iii) No matches, firearms, acids, or
(i) [Reserved]
other corrosive liquids shall be carried
(ii) Buildings used for the mixing of
in the bed or body of any vehicle con-
taining blasting agents. water gels shall conform to the re-
(iv) No person shall be permitted to quirements of this subdivision.
ride upon, drive, load, or unload a vehi- (a) Buildings shall be of noncombus-
cle containing blasting agents while tible construction or sheet metal on
smoking or under the influence of in- wood studs.
toxicants, narcotics, or other dan- (b) Floors in a mixing plant shall be
gerous drugs. of concrete or of other nonabsorbent
(v) [Reserved] materials.
(vi) Vehicles transporting blasting (c) Where fuel oil is used all fuel oil
agents shall be in safe operating condi- storage facilities shall be separated
tion at all times. from the mixing plant and located in
295
such a manner that in case of tank rup- (c) Mixers, pumps, valves, and related
ture, the oil will drain away from the equipment shall be designed to permit
mixing plant building. regular and periodic flushing, cleaning,
(d) The building shall be well venti- dismantling, and inspection.
lated. (d) All electrical equipment including
(e) Heating units that do not depend wiring, switches, controls, motors, and
on combustion processes, when prop- lights, shall conform to the require-
erly designed and located, may be used ments of subpart S of this part.
in the building. All direct sources of (e) All electric motors and generators
heat shall be provided exclusively from shall be provided with suitable over-
units located outside of the mixing load protection devices. Electrical gen-
building. erators, motors, proportioning devices,
(f) All internal-combustion engines and all other electrical enclosures shall
used for electric power generation shall be electrically bonded. The grounding
be located outside the mixing plant conductor to all such electrical equip-
building, or shall be properly venti- ment shall be effectively bonded to the
lated and isolated by a firewall. The ex- service-entrance ground connection
haust systems on all such engines shall and to all equipment ground connec-
be located so any spark emission can- tions in a manner so as to provide a
not be a hazard to any materials in or continuous path to ground.
adjacent to the plant. (v) Mixing facilities shall comply
(iii) Ingredients of water gels shall with the fire prevention requirements
conform to the requirements of this of this subdivision.
subdivision. (a) The mixing, loading, and ingre-
(a) Ingredients in themselves classi- dient transfer areas where residues or
fied as Class A or Class B explosives spilled materials may accumulate shall
shall be stored in conformity with be cleaned periodically. A cleaning and
paragraph (c) of this section. collection system for dangerous resi-
(b) Nitrate-water solutions may be dues shall be provided. ,
stored in tank cars, tank trucks, or (b) A daily visual inspection shall be
fixed tanks without quantity or dis- made of mixing, conveying, and elec-
tance limitations. Spills or leaks which trical equipment to establish that such
may contaminate combustible mate- equipment is in good operating condi-
rials shall be cleaned up immediately. tion. A program of systematic mainte-
(c) Metal powders such as aluminum nance shall be conducted on regular
shall be kept dry and shall be stored in schedule.
containers or bins which are moisture- (c) Heaters which are not dependent
resistant or weathertight. Solid fuels on the combustion process within the
shall be used in such manner as to min- heating unit may be used within the
imize dust explosion hazards. confines of processing buildings, or
(d) Ingredients shall not be stored compartments, if provided with tem-
with incompatible materials. perature and safety controls and lo-
(e) Peroxides and chlorates shall not cated away from combustible materials
be used. and the finished product.
(iv) Mixing equipment shall comply (4) Bulk delivery and mixing vehicles.
with the requirements of this subdivi- (i) The design of vehicles shall comply
sion. with the requirements of this subdivi-
(a) The design of the processing sion.
equipment, including mixing and con- (a) Vehicles used over public high-
veying equipment, shall be compatible ways for the bulk transportation of
with the relative sensitivity of the ma- water gels or of ingredients classified
terials being handled. Equipment shall as dangerous commodities, shall meet
be designed to minimize the possibility the requirements of the Department of
of frictional heating, compaction, over- Transportation and shall meet the re-
loading, and confinement. quirements of paragraphs (d) and (g)(6)
(b) Both equipment and handling proof this section.
cedures shall be designed to prevent (b) When electric power is supplied by
the introduction of foreign objects or a self-contained motor generator lo-
materials. cated on the vehicle the generator
296
shall be at a point separate from where site when the boreholes are loaded or
the water gel is discharged. in the process of being loaded.
(c) The design of processing equip- (i) Storage of ammonium nitrate(1)
ment and general requirements shall Scope and definitions. (i)(a) Except as
conform to subparagraphs (3) (iii) and provided in paragraph (i)(1)(i)(d) of this
(iv) of this paragraph. paragraph applies to the storage of am-
(d) A positive action parking brake, monium nitrate in the form of crystals,
which will set the wheel brakes on at flakes, grains, or prills including fer-
least one axle shall be provided on ve- tilizer grade, dynamite grade, nitrous
hicles when equipped with air brakes oxide grade, technical grade, and other
and shall be used during bulk delivery mixtures containing 60 percent or more
operations. Wheel chocks shall supple- ammonium nitrate by weight but does
ment parking brakes whenever condi- not apply to blasting agents.
tions may require. (b) This paragraph does not apply to
(ii) Operation of bulk delivery and the transportation of ammonium ni-
mixing vehicles shall comply with the trate.
requirements of this subdivision. (c) This paragraph does not apply to
storage under the jurisdiction of and in
(a) The placarding requirements con-
compliance with the regulations of the
tained in DOT regulations apply to ve-
U.S. Coast Guard (see 46 CFR parts 146
hicles carrying water gel explosives or
149).
blasting agents.
(d) The storage of ammonium nitrate
(b) The operator shall be trained in and ammonium nitrate mixtures that
the safe operation of the vehicle to- are more sensitive than allowed by the
gether with its mixing, conveying, and Definition of Test Procedures for Am-
related equipment. He shall be familiar monium Nitrate Fertilizer is prohib-
with the commodities being delivered ited.
and the general procedure for handling (ii)(a) [Reserved]
emergency situations. (b) The standards for ammonium ni-
(c) The hauling of either blasting trate (nitrous oxide grade) are those
caps or other explosives, but not both, found in the Specifications, Prop-
shall be permitted on bulk trucks pro- erties, and Recommendations for Pack-
vided that a special wood or non- aging, Transportation, Storage, and
ferrous-lined container is installed for Use of Ammonium Nitrate, available
the explosives. Such blasting caps or from the Compressed Gas Association,
other explosives shall be in DOT-speci- Inc., which is incorporated by reference
fied shipping containers; see 49 CFR as specified in 1910.6.
chapter I. (2) General provisions. (i) This para-
(d) No person shall be allowed to graph applies to all persons storing,
smoke, carry matches or any flame- having, or keeping ammonium nitrate,
producing device, or carry any firearms and to the owner or lessee of any build-
while in or about bulk vehicles effecting, premises, or structure in which
ing the mixing, transfer, or down-the- ammonium nitrate is stored in quan-
hole loading of water gels at or near tities of 1,000 pounds or more.
the blasting site. (ii) Approval of large quantity stor-
(e) Caution shall be exercised in the age shall be subject to due consider-
movement of the vehicle in the blast- ation of the fire and explosion hazards,
ing area to avoid driving the vehicle including exposure to toxic vapors
over or dragging hoses over firing lines, from burning or decomposing ammo-
cap wires, or explosive materials. The nium nitrate.
employer shall furnish the driver the (iii)(a) Storage buildings shall not
assistance of a second person to guide have basements unless the basements
the drivers movements. are open on at least one side. Storage
(f) No intransit mixing of materials buildings shall not be over one story in
shall be performed. height.
(g) The location chosen for water gel (b) Storage buildings shall have ade-
or ingredient transfer from a support quate ventilation or be of a construc-
vehicle into the borehole loading vehi- tion that will be self-ventilating in the
cle shall be away from the blasthole event of fire.
297
(c) The wall on the exposed side of a roof or supporting and spreader beams
storage building within 50 feet of a overhead.
combustible building, forest, piles of (d) Aisles shall be provided to sepa-
combustible materials and similar ex- rate piles by a clear space of not less
posure hazards shall be of fire-resistive than 3 feet in width. At least one serv-
construction. In lieu of the fire-resis- ice or main aisle in the storage area
tive wall, other suitable means of expo- shall be not less than 4 feet in width.
sure protection such as a free standing (4) Storage of bulk ammonium nitrate.
wall may be used. The roof coverings (i)(a) Warehouses shall have adequate
shall be Class C or better, as defined in ventilation or be capable of adequate
the Manual on Roof Coverings, NFPA ventilation in case of fire.
203M1970, which is incorporated by ref- (b) Unless constructed of noncombus-
erence as specified in 1910.6. tible material or unless adequate fa-
(d) All flooring in storage and han- cilities for fighting a roof fire are
dling areas, shall be of noncombustible available, bulk storage structures shall
material or protected against impreg- not exceed a height of 40 feet.
nation by ammonium nitrate and shall (ii)(a) Bins shall be clean and free of
be without open drains, traps, tunnels, materials which may contaminate am-
pits, or pockets into which any molten monium nitrate.
ammonium nitrate could flow and be (b) Due to the corrosive and reactive
confined in the event of fire. properties of ammonium nitrate, and
(e) The continued use of an existing to avoid contamination, galvanized
storage building or structure not in iron, copper, lead, and zinc shall not be
strict conformity with this paragraph used in a bin construction unless suit-
may be approved in cases where such ably protected. Aluminum bins and
continued use will not constitute a wooden bins protected against impreg-
hazard to life. nation by ammonium nitrate are per-
(f) Buildings and structures shall be missible. The partitions dividing the
dry and free from water seepage ammonium nitrate storage from other
through the roof, walls, and floors. products which would contaminate the
(3) Storage of ammonium nitrate in ammonium nitrate shall be of tight
bags, drums, or other containers. (i)(a) construction.
Bags and containers used for ammo- (c) The ammonium nitrate storage
nium nitrate must comply with speci- bins or piles shall be clearly identified
fications and standards required for use by signs reading Ammonium Nitrate
in interstate commerce (see 49 CFR with letters at least 2 inches high.
chapter I). (iii)(a) Piles or bins shall be so sized
(b) Containers used on the premises and arranged that all material in the
in the actual manufacturing or proc- pile is moved out periodically in order
essing need not comply with provisions to minimize possible caking of the
of paragraph (i)(3)(i)(a) of this para- stored ammonium nitrate.
graph. (b) Height or depth of piles shall be
(ii)(a) Containers of ammonium ni- limited by the pressure-setting tend-
trate shall not be accepted for storage ency of the product. However, in no
when the temperature of the ammo- case shall the ammonium nitrate be
nium nitrate exceeds 130 F. piled higher at any point than 36 inches
(b) Bags of ammonium nitrate shall below the roof or supporting and
not be stored within 30 inches of the spreader beams overhead.
storage building walls and partitions. (c) Ammonium nitrate shall not be
(c) The height of piles shall not ex- accepted for storage when the tempera-
ceed 20 feet. The width of piles shall ture of the product exceeds 130 F.
not exceed 20 feet and the length 50 feet (d) Dynamite, other explosives, and
except that where the building is of blasting agents shall not be used to
noncombustible construction or is pro- break up or loosen caked ammonium
tected by automatic sprinklers the nitrate.
length of piles shall not be limited. In (5) Contaminants. (i)(a) Ammonium
no case shall the ammonium nitrate be nitrate shall be in a separate building
stacked closer than 36 inches below the or shall be separated by approved type
298
firewalls of not less than 1 hour fire-re- (d) Storage and/or operations on the
sistance rating from storage of organic premises of makers, distributors, and
chemicals, acids, or other corrosive user-compounders of explosives or
materials, materials that may require blasting agents shall be in conformity
blasting during processing or handling, with paragraphs (a) through (h) of this
compressed flammable gases, flam- section.
mable and combustible materials or (6) General precautions. (i) Electrical
other contaminating substances, in- installations shall conform to the re-
cluding but not limited to animal fats, quirements of subpart S of this part,
baled cotton, baled rags, baled scrap for ordinary locations. They shall be
paper, bleaching powder, burlap or cot- designed to minimize damage from cor-
ton bags, caustic soda, coal, coke, char- rosion.
coal, cork, camphor, excelsior, fibers of
(ii) In areas where lightning storms
any kind, fish oils, fish meal, foam rub-
are prevalent, lightning protection
ber, hay, lubricating oil, linseed oil, or
other oxidizable or drying oils, naph- shall be provided. (See the Lightning
thalene, oakum, oiled clothing, oiled Protection Code, NFPA 781968, which
paper, oiled textiles, paint, straw, saw- is incorporated by reference as speci-
dust, wood shavings, or vegetable oils. fied in 1910.6.)
Walls referred to in this subdivision (iii) Provisions shall be made to pre-
need extend only to the underside of vent unauthorized personnel from en-
the roof. tering the ammonium nitrate storage
(b) In lieu of separation walls, ammo- area.
nium nitrate may be separated from (7) Fire protection. (i) Not more than
the materials referred to in paragraph 2,500 tons (2270 tonnes) of bagged am-
(a) of this section by a space of at least monium nitrate shall be stored in a
30 feet. building or structure not equipped with
(c) Flammable liquids such as gaso- an automatic sprinkler system. Sprin-
line, kerosene, solvents, and light fuel kler systems shall be of the approved
oils shall not be stored on the premises type and installed in accordance with
except when such storage conforms to 1910.159.
1910.106, and when walls and sills or (ii)(a) Suitable fire control devices
curbs are provided in accordance with such as small hose or portable fire ex-
paragraphs (i)(5)(i) (a) or (b) of this sec- tinguishers shall be provided through-
tion. out the warehouse and in the loading
(d) LP-Gas shall not be stored on the and unloading areas. Suitable fire con-
premises except when such storage control devices shall comply with the re-
forms to 1910.110. quirements of 1910.157 and 1910.158.
(ii)(a) Sulfur and finely divided met- (b) Water supplies and fire hydrants
als shall not be stored in the same shall be available in accordance with
building with ammonium nitrate ex- recognized good practices.
cept when such storage conforms to
(j) Small arms ammunition, small arms
paragraphs (a) through (h) of this sec-
primers, and small arms propellants(1)
tion.
Scope. This paragraph does not apply to
(b) Explosives and blasting agents
shall not be stored in the same building in-process storage and intraplant
with ammonium nitrate except on the transportation during manufacture of
premises of makers, distributors, and small arms ammunition, small arms
user-compounders of explosives or primers, and smokeless propellants.
blasting agents. (2) Small arms ammunition. (i) No
(c) Where explosives or blasting quantity limitations are imposed on
agents are stored in separate buildings, the storage of small arms ammunition
other than on the premises of makers, in warehouses, retail stores, and other
distributors, and user-compounders of general occupancy facilities, except
explosives or blasting agents, they those imposed by limitations of storage
shall be separated from the ammonium facilities.
nitrate by the distances and/or barri- (ii) Small arms ammunition shall be
cades specified in Table H22 of this separated from flammable liquids,
subpart, but by not less than 50 feet. flammable solids as classified in 49
299
CFR part 172, and from oxidizing mate- form prescribed by the official U.S.
rials, by a fire-resistive wall of 1-hour Pharmacopeia.
rating or by a distance of 25 feet. (2) The manufacture of explosives as
(iii) Small arms ammunition shall defined in paragraph (a)(3) of this sec-
not be stored together with Class A or tion shall also meet the requirements
Class B explosives unless the storage contained in 1910.119.
facility is adequate for this latter stor- (3) The manufacture of pyrotechnics
age. as defined in paragraph (a)(10) of this
(3) Smokeless propellants. (i) All section shall also meet the require-
smokeless propellants shall be stored ments contained in 1910.119.
in shipping containers specified in 49 [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43
CFR 173.93 for smokeless propellants. FR 49747, Oct. 24, 1978; 45 FR 60704, Sept. 12,
(ii) [Reserved] 1980; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 57 FR 6403,
(iii) Commercial stocks of smokeless Feb. 24, 1992; 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993; 61 FR
propellants over 20 pounds and not 9237, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33466, June 18, 1998]
more than 100 pounds shall be stored in
portable wooden boxes having walls of 1910.110 Storage and handling of liq-
at least 1 inch nominal thickness. uefied petroleum gases.
(iv) Commercial stocks in quantities (a) Definitions applicable to this sec-
not to exceed 750 pounds shall be stored tion. As used in this section:
in nonportable storage cabinets having (1) APIASME containerA con-
wooden walls of at least 1 inch nominal tainer constructed in accordance with
thickness. Not more than 400 pounds the requirements of paragraph
shall be permitted in any one cabinet. (b)(3)(iii) of this section.
(v) Quantities in excess of 750 pounds (2) ASME containerA container
shall be stored in magazines in accord- constructed in accordance with the re-
ance with paragraph (c) of this section. quirements of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this
(4) Small arms ammunition primers. (i) section.
Small arms ammunition primers shall (3) Container assemblyAn assembly
not be stored except in the original consisting essentially of the container
shipping container in accordance with and fittings for all container openings,
the requirements of 49 CFR 173.107 for including shutoff valves, excess flow
small arms ammunition primers. valves, liquid-level gaging devices,
(ii) [Reserved] safety relief devices, and protective
(iii) Small arms ammunition primers housing.
shall be separated from flammable liq- (4) ContainersAll vessels, such as
uids, flammable solids as classified in tanks, cylinders, or drums, used for
49 CFR part 172, and oxidizing mate- transportation or storing liquefied pe-
rials by a fire-resistive wall of 1-hour troleum gases.
rating or by a distance of 25 feet. (5) DOTDepartment of Transpor-
(iv) Not more than 750,000 small arms tation.
ammunition primers shall be stored in (6) DOT containerA container con-
any one building, except as provided in structed in accordance with the appli-
paragraph (j)(4)(v) of this paragraph. cable requirements of 49 CFR chapter 1.
Not more than 100,000 shall be stored in (7) Liquified petroleum gases
any one pile. Piles shall be at least 15 LPG and LP-GasAny material
feet apart. which is composed predominantly of
(v) Quantities of small arms ammuni- any of the following hydrocarbons, or
tion primers in excess of 750,000 shall mixtures of them; propane, propylene,
be stored in magazines in accordance butanes (normal butane or iso-butane),
with paragraph (c) of this section. and butylenes.
(k) Scope. (1) This section applies to (8) Movable fuel storage tenders or
the manufacture, keeping, having, farm cartsContainers not in excess of
storage, sale, transportation, and use 1,200 gallons water capacity, equipped
of explosives, blasting agents, and py- with wheels to be towed from one loca-
rotechnics. The section does not apply tion of usage to another. They are basi-
to the sale and use (public display) of cally nonhighway vehicles, but may oc-
pyrotechnics, commonly known as fire- casionally be moved over public roads
works, nor the use of explosives in the or highways. They are used as a fuel
300
supply for farm tractors, construction clude the use of other odorants that
machinery and similar equipment. meet the odorization requirements of
(9) P.S.I.G.pounds per square inch paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section.
gauge. (2) Approval of equipment and systems.
(10) P.S.I.A.pounds per square inch (i) Each system utilizing DOT con-
absolute. tainers in accordance with 49 CFR part
(11) Systemsan assembly of equip- 178 shall have its container valves, con-
ment consisting essentially of the connectors, manifold valve assemblies, and
tainer or containers, major devices regulators approved.
such as vaporizers, safety relief valves, (ii) Each system for domestic or com-
excess flow valves, regulators, and pip- mercial use utilizing containers of 2,000
ing connecting such parts.
gallons or less water capacity, other
(12) Vaporizer-burneran integral va-
than those constructed in accordance
porizer-burner unit, dependent upon
with 49 CFR part 178, shall consist of a
the heat generated by the burner as the
source of heat to vaporize the liquid container assembly and one or more
used for dehydrators or dryers. regulators, and may include other
(13) Ventilation, adequatewhen parts. The system as a unit or the con-
specified for the prevention of fire dur- tainer assembly as a unit, and the reg-
ing normal operation, ventilation shall ulator or regulators, shall be individ-
be considered adequate when the con- ually listed.
centration of the gas in a gas-air mix- (iii) In systems utilizing containers
ture does not exceed 25 percent of the of over 2,000 gallons water capacity,
lower flammable limit. each regulator, container valve, excess
(14) Approvedunless otherwise indi- flow valve, gaging device, and relief
cated, listing or approval by a nation- valve installed on or at the container,
ally recognized testing laboratory. shall have its correctness as to design,
Refer to 1910.7 for definition of nation- construction, and performance deter-
ally recognized testing laboratory. mined by listing by a nationally recog-
(15) Listedsee approved in nized testing laboratory. Refer to
1910.110(14). 1910.7 for definition of nationally rec-
(16) DOT Specificationsregulations ognized testing laboratory.
of the Department of Transportation (3) Requirements for construction and
published in 49 CFR chapter I. original test of containers. (i) Containers
(17)(18) [Reserved] used with systems embodied in para-
(19) DOT cylinderscylinders meet- graphs (d), (e), (g), and (h) of this sec-
ing the requirements of 49 CFR chapter tion, except as provided in paragraphs
I. (e)(3)(iii) and (g)(2)(i) of this section,
(b) Basic rules(1) Odorizing gases. (i)
shall be designed, constructed, and
All liquefied petroleum gases shall be
tested in accordance with the Rules for
effectively odorized by an approved
Construction of Unfired Pressure Ves-
agent of such character as to indicate
sels, section VIII, Division 1, American
positively, by distinct odor, the pres-
Society of Mechanical Engineers
ence of gas down to concentration in
air of not over one-fifth the lower limit (ASME) Boiler and Pressure Vessel
of flammability. Odorization, however, Code, 1968 edition, which is incor-
is not required if harmful in the use of porated by reference as specified in
further processing of the liquefied pe- 1910.6.
troleum gas, or if odorization will serve (ii) Containers constructed according
no useful purpose as a warning agent in to the 1949 and earlier editions of the
such use or further processing. ASME Code do not have to comply
(ii) The odorization requirement of with paragraphs U2 through U10 and
paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section shall U19 thereof. Containers constructed
be considered to be met by the use of according to paragraph U70 in the 1949
1.0 pounds of ethyl mercaptan, 1.0 and earlier editions are not authorized.
pounds of thiophane or 1.4 pounds of (iii) Containers designed, con-
amyl mercaptan per 10,000 gallons of structed, and tested prior to July 1,
LP-Gas. However, this listing of 1961, according to the Code for Unfired
odorants and quantities shall not ex- Pressure Vessels for Petroleum Liquids
301
and Gases, 1951 edition with 1954 Ad- intended for both and different style
denda, of the American Petroleum In- hoods are provided, the marking shall
stitute and the American Society of indicate the proper hood for each type
Mechanical Engineers, which is incor- of installation.
porated by reference as specified in (c) With the name and address of the
1910.6, shall be considered in conform- supplier of the container, or with the
ance. Containers constructed according trade name of the container.
to APIASME Code do not have to (d) With the water capacity of the
comply with section I or with appendix container in pounds or gallons, U.S.
to section I. Paragraphs W601 to W606 Standard.
inclusive in the 1943 and earlier edi- (e) With the pressure in p.s.i.g., for
tions do not apply. which the container is designed.
(iv) The provisions of paragraph (f) With the wording This container
(b)(3)(i) of this section shall not be con- shall not contain a product having a
strued as prohibiting the continued use vapor pressure in excess of p.s.i.g. at
or reinstallation of containers con- 100 F., see subparagraph (14)(viii) of
structed and maintained in accordance this paragraph.
with the standard for the Storage and (g) With the tare weight in pounds or
Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases other identified unit of weight for con-
NFPA No. 58 in effect at the time of tainers with a water capacity of 300
fabrication. pounds or less.
(v) Containers used with systems em- (h) With marking indicating the
bodied in paragraph (b), (d)(3)(iii), and maximum level to which the container
(f) of this section, shall be constructed, may be filled with liquid at tempera-
tested, and stamped in accordance with tures between 20 F. and 130 F., except
DOT specifications effective at the on containers provided with fixed max-
date of their manufacture. imum level indicators or which are
(4) Welding of containers. (i) Welding filled by weighing. Markings shall be
to the shell, head, or any other part of increments of not more than 20 F.
the container subject to internal pres- This marking may be located on the
sure, shall be done in compliance with liquid level gaging device.
the code under which the tank was fab- (i) With the outside surface area in
ricated. Other welding is permitted square feet.
only on saddle plates, lugs, or brackets (ii) Markings specified shall be on a
attached to the container by the tank metal nameplate attached to the con-
manufacturer. tainer and located in such a manner as
(ii) Where repair or modification in- to remain visible after the container is
volving welding of DOT containers is installed.
required, the container shall be re- (iii) When LP-Gas and one or more
turned to a qualified manufacturer other gases are stored or used in the
making containers of the same type, same area, the containers shall be
and the repair or modification made in marked to identify their content.
compliance with DOT regulations. Marking shall be in compliance with
(5) Markings on containers. (i) Each American National Standard Z48.1
container covered in paragraph (b)(3)(i) 1954, Method of Marking Portable
of this section, except as provided in Compressed Gas Containers To Identify
paragraph (b)(3)(iv) of this section shall the Material Contained, which is in-
be marked as specified in the following: corporated by reference as specified in
(a) With a marking identifying com- 1910.6.
pliance with, and other markings re- (6) Location of containers and regu-
quired by, the rules of the reference lating equipment. (i) Containers, and
under which the container is con- first stage regulating equipment if
structed; or with the stamp and other used, shall be located outside of build-
markings required by the National ings, except under one or more of the
Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel In- following:
spectors. (a) In buildings used exclusively for
(b) With notation as to whether the container charging, vaporization pres-
container is designed for underground sure reduction, gas mixing, gas manu-
or aboveground installation or both. If facturing, or distribution.
302
(b) When portable use is necessary (vii) The minimum separation be-
and in accordance with paragraph (c)(5) tween liquefied petroleum gas con-
of this section. tainers and flammable liquid tanks
(c) LP-Gas fueled stationary or port- shall be 20 feet, and the minimum sepa-
able engines in accordance with para- ration between a container and the
graph (e) (11) or (12) of this section. centerline of the dike shall be 10 feet.
(d) LP-Gas fueled industrial trucks The foregoing provision shall not apply
used in accordance with paragraph when LP-Gas containers of 125 gallons
(e)(13) of this section. or less capacity are installed adjacent
(e) LP-Gas fueled vehicles garaged in to Class III flammable liquid tanks of
accordance with paragraph (e)(14) of 275 gallons or less capacity.
this section. (viii) Suitable means shall be taken
(f) Containers awaiting use or resale to prevent the accumulation of flam-
when stored in accordance with para- mable liquids under adjacent liquified
graph (f) of this section. petroleum gas containers, such as by
(ii) Each individual container shall diking, diversion curbs, or grading.
be located with respect to the nearest (ix) When dikes are used with flam-
important building or group of build- mable liquid tanks, no liquefied petro-
ings in accordance with Table H23. leum gas containers shall be located
within the diked area.
TABLE H23 (7) Container valves and container ac-
cessories. (i) Valves, fittings, and acces-
Minimum distances sories connected directly to the con-
Water capacity per Containers Between tainer including primary shutoff
container above- valves, shall have a rated working pres-
Under- Above- ground
ground ground containers sure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. and shall be
of material and design suitable for LP-
Less than 125 gals.1 ... 10 feet .... None ....... None.
125 to 250 gals ........... 10 feet .... 10 feet .... None.
Gas service. Cast iron shall not be used
251 to 500 gals ........... 10 feet .... 10 feet .... 3 feet. for container valves, fittings, and ac-
501 to 2,000 gals ........ 25 feet 2 .. 25 feet 2 .. 3 feet. cessories. This does not prohibit the
2,001 to 30,000 gals ... 50 feet .... 50 feet .... 5 feet. use of container valves made of malle-
30,001 to 70,000 gals 50 feet .... 75 feet.3. able or nodular iron.
70,001 to 90,000 gals 50 feet .... 100 feet.3.
(ii) Connections to containers, except
1 If the aggregate water capacity of a multi-container instal-
safety relief connections, liquid level
lation at a consumer site is 501 gallons or greater, the min-
imum distance shall comply with the appropriate portion of gaging devices, and plugged openings,
this table, applying the aggregate capacity rather than the ca- shall have shutoff valves located as
pacity per container. If more than one installation is made,
each installation shall be separated from another installation close to the container as practicable.
by at least 25 feet. Do not apply the MINIMUM DISTANCES (iii) Excess flow valves, where re-
BETWEEN ABOVE-GROUND CONTAINERS to such installa-
tions. quired shall close automatically at the
2 The above distance requirements may be reduced to not
rated flows of vapor or liquid as speci-
less than 10 feet for a single container of 1,200 gallons water
capacity or less, providing such a container is at least 25 feet fied by the manufacturer. The connec-
from any other LP-Gas container of more than 125 gallons tions or line including valves, fittings,
water capacity.
3 14 of sum of diameters of adjacent containers. etc., being protected by an excess flow
valve shall have a greater capacity
(iii) Containers installed for use shall than the rated flow of the excess flow
not be stacked one above the other. valve.
(iv) [Reserved] (iv) Liquid level gaging devices which
(v) In the case of buildings devoted are so constructed that outward flow of
exclusively to gas manufacturing and container contents shall not exceed
distributing operations, the distances that passed by a No. 54 drill size open-
required by Table H23 may be reduced ing, need not be equipped with excess
provided that in no case shall con- flow valves.
tainers of water capacity exceeding 500 (v) Openings from container or
gallons be located closer than 10 feet to through fittings attached directly on
such gas manufacturing and distrib- container to which pressure gage con-
uting buildings. nection is made, need not be equipped
(vi) Readily ignitible material such with shutoff or excess flow valves if
as weeds and long dry grass shall be re- such openings are restricted to not
moved within 10 feet of any container. larger than No. 54 drill size opening.
303
(vi) Except as provided in paragraph (a) Vapor piping with operating pres-
(c)(5)(i)(b) of this section, excess flow sures not exceeding 125 p.s.i.g. shall be
and back pressure check valves where suitable for a working pressure of at
required by this section shall be lo- least 125 p.s.i.g. Pipe shall be at least
cated inside of the container or at a Schedule 40 (ASTM A5369, Grade B
point outside where the line enters the Electric Resistance Welded and Elec-
container; in the latter case, installa- tric Flash Welded Pipe, which is incor-
tion shall be made in such manner that porated by reference as specified in
any undue strain beyond the excess 1910.6, or equal).
flow or back pressure check valve will (b) Vapor piping with operating pres-
not cause breakage between the con- sures over 125 p.s.i.g. and all liquid pip-
tainer and such valve. ing shall be suitable for a working
(vii) Excess flow valves shall be de- pressure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. Pipe
signed with a bypass, not to exceed a shall be at least Schedule 80 if joints
No. 60 drill size opening to allow are threaded or threaded and back
equalization of pressures. welded. At least Schedule 40 (ASTM A
(viii) Containers of more than 30 gal- 5369 Grade B Electric Resistance Weld-
lons water capacity and less than 2,000 ed and Electric Flash Welded Pipe or
gallons water capacity, filled on a vol- equal) shall be used if joints are weld-
umetric basis, and manufactured after ed, or welded and flanged.
December 1, 1963, shall be equipped for (ii) Tubing shall be seamless and of
filling into the vapor space. copper, brass, steel, or aluminum alloy.
(8) Pipingincluding pipe, tubing, and Copper tubing shall be of type K or L
fittings. (i) Pipe, except as provided in or equivalent as covered in the Speci-
paragraphs (e)(6)(i) and (g)(10)(iii), of fication for Seamless Copper Water
this section shall be wrought iron or Tube, ANSI H23.11970 (ASTM B8869),
steel (black or galvanized), brass, cop- which is incorporated by reference as
per, or aluminum alloy. Aluminum specified in 1910.6. Aluminum alloy
alloy pipe shall be at least Schedule 40 tubing shall be of Type A or B or equiv-
in accordance with the specifications alent as covered in Specification ASTM
for Aluminum Alloy Pipe, American B21068 (which is incorporated by ref-
National Standards Institute (ANSI)
erence as specified in 1910.6) and shall
H38.71969 (ASTM, B24169), which is in-
be suitably marked every 18 inches in-
corporated by reference as specified in
dicating compliance with ASTM Speci-
1910.6, except that the use of alloy 5456
fications. The minimum nominal wall
is prohibited and shall be suitably
thickness of copper tubing and alu-
marked at each end of each length in-
minum alloy tubing shall be as speci-
dicating compliance with American
fied in Table H24 and Table H25.
National Standard Institute Specifica-
tions. Aluminum Alloy pipe shall be Aluminum alloy tubing shall be pro-
protected against external corrosion tected against external corrosion when
when it is in contact with dissimilar it is in contact with dissimilar metals
metals other than galvanized steel, or other than galvanized steel, or its loca-
its location is subject to repeated wet- tion is subject to repeated wetting by
ting by such liquids as water (except liquids such as water (except rain-
rain water), detergents, sewage, or water), detergents, sewage, or leakage
leaking from other piping, or it passes from other piping, or it passes through
through flooring, plaster, masonry, or flooring, plaster, masonry, or insula-
insulation. Galvanized sheet steel or tion. Galvanized sheet steel or pipe,
pipe, galvanized inside and out, may be galvanized inside and out, may be con-
considered suitable protection. The sidered suitable protection. The max-
maximum nominal pipe size for alu- imum outside diameter for aluminum
minum pipe shall be three-fourths inch alloy tubing shall be three-fourths inch
and shall not be used for pressures ex- and shall not be used for pressures ex-
ceeding 20 p.s.i.g. Aluminum alloy pipe ceeding 20 p.s.i.g. Aluminum alloy tub-
shall not be installed within 6 inches of ing shall not be installed within 6
the ground. inches of the ground.
304
TABLE H24WALL THICKNESS OF COPPER signed for a pressure of at least 125

TUBING 1 p.s.i.g. For operating pressures above
125 p.s.i.g., fittings shall be designed
Nominal wall thickness
Standard size Nominal out- (inches) for a minimum of 250 p.s.i.g.
side diameter
(inches) (vi) The use of threaded cast iron
(inches) Type K Type L
pipe fittings such as ells, tees, crosses,

14
38
0.375 0.035 0.030 couplings, and unions is prohibited.
0.500 0.049 0.035
12 0.625 0.049 0.040
Aluminum alloy fittings shall be used
58 0.750 0.049 0.042 with aluminum alloy pipe and tubing.
34 0.875 0.065 0.045 Insulated fittings shall be used where
1 1.125 0.065 0.050
114 1.375 0.065 0.055
aluminum alloy pipe or tubing con-
112 1.625 0.072 0.060 nects with a dissimilar metal.
2 2.125 0.083 0.070 (vii) Strainers, regulators, meters,
1 Based on data in Specification for Seamless Copper compressors, pumps, etc., are not to be
Water Tube, ANSI H23.11970 (ASTM B8869). considered as pipe fittings. This does
NOTE: The standard size by which tube is designated is 18
inch smaller than its nominal outside diameter. not prohibit the use of malleable, nod-
ular, or higher strength gray iron for
TABLE H25WALL THICKNESS OF ALUMINUM such equipment.
ALLOY TUBING 1 (viii) All materials such as valve
Nominal wall thickness (inches)
seats, packing, gaskets, diaphragms,
Outside diameter etc., shall be of such quality as to be
(inches) Type A Type B resistant to the action of liquefied pe-

38 0.035 0.049 troleum gas under the service condi-

12 0.035 0.049 tions to which they are subjected.

58 0.042 0.049
34 0.049 0.058
(ix) All piping, tubing, or hose shall
1 Based on data in Standard Specification for Aluminum-
be tested after assembly and proved
Alloy Drawn Seamless Coiled Tubes for Special Purpose Ap- free from leaks at not less than normal
plications, ASTM B21068. operating pressures. After installation,
(iii) In systems where the gas in liq- piping and tubing of all domestic and
uid form without pressure reduction commercial systems shall be tested
enters the building, only heavy walled and proved free of leaks using a ma-
seamless brass or copper tubing with nometer or equivalent device that will
an internal diameter not greater than indicate a drop in pressure. Test shall
three thirty-seconds inch, and a wall not be made with a flame.
thickness of not less than three sixty- (x) Provision shall be made to com-
fourths inch shall be used. This re- pensate for expansion, contraction, jar-
quirement shall not apply to research ring, and vibration, and for settling.
and experimental laboratories, build- This may be accomplished by flexible
ings, or separate fire divisions of build- connections.
ings used exclusively for housing inter- (xi) Piping outside buildings may be
nal combustion engines, and to com- buried, above ground, or both, but shall
mercial gas plants or bulk stations be well supported and protected
where containers are charged, nor to against physical damage. Where soil
industrial vaporizer buildings, nor to conditions warrant, all piping shall be
buildings, structures, or equipment protected against corrosion. Where
under construction or undergoing condensation may occur, the piping
major renovation. shall be pitched back to the container,
(iv) Pipe joints may be screwed, or suitable means shall be provided for
flanged, welded, soldered, or brazed revaporization of the condensate.
with a material having a melting point (9) Hose specifications. (i) Hose shall
exceeding 1,000 F. Joints on seamless be fabricated of materials that are re-
copper, brass, steel, or aluminum alloy sistant to the action of LP-Gas in the
gas tubing shall be made by means of liquid and vapor phases. If wire braid is
approved gas tubing fittings, or sol- used for reinforcing the hose, it shall
dered or brazed with a material having be of corrosion-resistant material such
a melting point exceeding 1,000 F. as stainless steel.
(v) For operating pressures of 125 (ii) Hose subject to container pres-
p.s.i.g. or less, fittings shall be de- sure shall be marked LP-Gas or
305
LPG at not greater than 10-foot in- with DOT specifications and every va-
tervals. porizer (except motor fuel vaporizers
(iii) Hose subject to container pres- and except vaporizers described in
sure shall be designed for a bursting paragraph (b)(11)(ii)(c) of this section
pressure of not less than 1,250 p.s.i.g. and paragraph (d)(4)(v)(a) of this sec-
(iv) Hose subject to container pres- tion) whether heated by artificial
sure shall have its correctness as to de- means or not, shall be provided with
sign construction and performance de- one or more safety relief valves of
termined by being listed (see spring-loaded or equivalent type. These
1910.110(a)(15)). valves shall be arranged to afford free
(v) Hose connections subject to con- vent to the outer air with discharge
tainer pressure shall be capable of not less than 5 feet horizontally away
withstanding, without leakage, a test from any opening into the building
pressure of not less than 500 p.s.i.g. which is below such discharge. The rate
(vi) Hose and hose connections on the of discharge shall be in accordance
low-pressure side of the regulator or re- with the requirements of paragraph
ducing valve shall be designed for a (b)(10)(ii) or (b)(10)(iii) of this section in
bursting pressure of not less than 125 the case of vaporizers.
p.s.i.g. or five times the set pressure of (ii) Minimum required rate of dis-
the relief devices protecting that por- charge in cubic feet per minute of air
tion of the system, whichever is higher. at 120 percent of the maximum per-
(vii) Hose may be used on the low- mitted start to discharge pressure for
pressure side of regulators to connect safety relief valves to be used on con-
to other than domestic and commercial tainers other than those constructed in
gas appliances under the following con- accordance with DOT specification
ditions: shall be as follows:
(a) The appliances connected with
Flow rate
hose shall be portable and need a flexi- Surface area (sq. ft.) CFM air
ble connection.
(b) For use inside buildings the hose 20 or less ............................................................. 626
25 ......................................................................... 751
shall be of minimum practical length, 30 ......................................................................... 872
but shall not exceed 6 feet except as 35 ......................................................................... 990
provided in paragraph (c)(5)(i)(g) of this 40 ......................................................................... 1,100
45 ......................................................................... 1,220
section and shall not extend from one 50 ......................................................................... 1,330
room to another, nor pass through any 55 ......................................................................... 1,430
walls, partitions, ceilings, or floors. 60 ......................................................................... 1,540
65 ......................................................................... 1,640
Such hose shall not be concealed from 70 ......................................................................... 1,750
view or used in a concealed location. 75 ......................................................................... 1,850
For use outside of buildings, the hose 80 ......................................................................... 1,950
85 ......................................................................... 2,050
may exceed this length but shall be 90 ......................................................................... 2,150
kept as short as practical. 95 ......................................................................... 2,240
(c) The hose shall be approved and 100 ....................................................................... 2,340
shall not be used where it is likely to 105 ....................................................................... 2,440
110 ....................................................................... 2,530
be subjected to temperatures above 125 115 ....................................................................... 2,630
F. The hose shall be securely con- 120 ....................................................................... 2,720
nected to the appliance and the use of 125 ....................................................................... 2,810
130 ....................................................................... 2,900
rubber slip ends shall not be permitted. 135 ....................................................................... 2,990
(d) The shutoff valve for an appliance 140 ....................................................................... 3,080
connected by hose shall be in the metal 145 ....................................................................... 3,170
150 ....................................................................... 3,260
pipe or tubing and not at the appliance 155 ....................................................................... 3,350
end of the hose. When shutoff valves 160 ....................................................................... 3,440
are installed close to each other, pre- 165 ....................................................................... 3,530
cautions shall be taken to prevent op- 170 ....................................................................... 3,620
175 ....................................................................... 3,700
eration of the wrong valve. 180 ....................................................................... 3,790
(e) Hose used for connecting to wall 185 ....................................................................... 3,880
outlets shall be protected from phys- 190 ....................................................................... 3,960
195 ....................................................................... 4,050
ical damage. 200 ....................................................................... 4,130
(10) Safety devices. (i) Every container 210 ....................................................................... 4,300
except those constructed in accordance 220 ....................................................................... 4,470
306
Flow rate (3) Spherical container:

Surface area (sq. ft.) CFM air
Area=Outside diameter squared3.1416.
230 ....................................................................... 4,630 Flow Rate-CFM Air=Required flow capacity
240 ....................................................................... 4,800 in cubic feet per minute of air at standard
250 ....................................................................... 4,960 conditions, 60 F. and atmospheric pressure
260 ....................................................................... 5,130 (14.7 p.s.i.a.).
270 ....................................................................... 5,290
280 ....................................................................... 5,450 The rate of discharge may be interpolated
290 ....................................................................... 5,610 for intermediate values of surface area. For
300 ....................................................................... 5,760 containers with total outside surface area
310 ....................................................................... 5,920 greater than 2,000 square feet, the required
320 ....................................................................... 6,080 flow rate can be calculated using the for-
330 ....................................................................... 6,230
mula, Flow Rate-CFM Air=53.632 A0.82.
340 ....................................................................... 6,390
350 ....................................................................... 6,540 A=total outside surface area of the con-
360 ....................................................................... 6,690 tainer in square feet.
370 ....................................................................... 6,840 Valves not marked Air have flow rate
380 ....................................................................... 7,000 marking in cubic feet per minute of liquefied
390 ....................................................................... 7,150 petroleum gas. These can be converted to
400 ....................................................................... 7,300
ratings in cubic feet per minute of air by
450 ....................................................................... 8,040
500 ....................................................................... 8,760 multiplying the liquefied petroleum gas rat-
550 ....................................................................... 9,470 ings by factors listed below. Air flow ratings
600 ....................................................................... 10,170 can be converted to ratings in cubic feet per
650 ....................................................................... 10,860 minute of liquefied petroleum gas by divid-
700 ....................................................................... 11,550 ing the air ratings by the factors listed
750 ....................................................................... 12,220
below.
800 ....................................................................... 12,880
850 ....................................................................... 13,540
900 ....................................................................... 14,190 AIR CONVERSION FACTORS
950 ....................................................................... 14,830 Container type ...... 100 125 150 175 200
1,000 .................................................................... 15,470 Air conversion fac-
1,050 .................................................................... 16,100 tor ...................... 1.162 1.142 1.113 1.078 1.010
1,100 .................................................................... 16,720
1,150 .................................................................... 17,350 (iii) Minimum Required Rate of Dis-
1,200 .................................................................... 17,960 charge for Safety Relief Valves for Liq-
1,250 .................................................................... 18,570
1,300 .................................................................... 19,180 uefied Petroleum Gas Vaporizers
1,350 .................................................................... 19,780 (Steam Heated, Water Heated, and Di-
1,400 .................................................................... 20,380 rect Fired).
1,450 .................................................................... 20,980
1,500 .................................................................... 21,570 The minimum required rate of dis-
1,550 .................................................................... 22,160 charge for safety relief valves shall be
1,600 .................................................................... 22,740
1,650 .................................................................... 23,320
determined as follows:
1,700 .................................................................... 23,900 (a) Obtain the total surface area by
1,750 .................................................................... 24,470 adding the surface area of vaporizer
1,800 .................................................................... 25,050 shell in square feet directly in contact
1,850 .................................................................... 25,620
1,900 .................................................................... 26,180 with LP-Gas and the heat exchanged
1,950 .................................................................... 26,750 surface area in square feet directly in
2,000 .................................................................... 27,310 contact with LP-Gas.
(b) Obtain the minimum required
Surface area=total outside surface area of rate of discharge in cubic feet of air per
container in square feet. minute, at 60 F. and 14.7 p.s.i.a. from
When the surface area is not stamped on paragraph (b)(10)(ii) of this section, for
the nameplate or when the marking is not this total surface area.
legible, the area can be calculated by using (iv) Container and vaporizer safety
one of the following formulas: relief valves shall be set to start-to-dis-
(1) Cylindrical container with hemi-
spherical heads:
charge, with relation to the design
pressure of the container, in accord-
Area=Overall lengthoutside diameter
3.1416.
ance with Table H26.
(v) Safety relief devices used with
(2) Cylindrical container with other than
hemispherical heads:
systems employing containers other
than those constructed according to
Area=(Overall length+0.3 outside diameter)
outside diameter3.1416.
DOT specifications shall be so con-
NOTE: This formula is not exact, but will structed as to discharge at not less
give results within the limits of practical ac- than the rates shown in paragraph
curacy for the sole purpose of sizing relief (b)(10)(ii) of this section, before the
valves. pressure is in excess of 120 percent of
307
the maximum (not including the 10 per- the valve in cubic feet per minute of
cent referred to in paragraph (b)(10)(iv) air at 60 F. and 14.7 p.s.i.a.; and the
of this section) permitted start to dis- manufacturers name and catalog num-
charge pressure setting of the device. ber, for example: T2002504050 AIRin-
dicating that the valve is suitable for
TABLE H26 use on a Type 200 container, that it is
Minimum Maximum set to start to discharge at 250 p.s.i.g.;
Containers (percent) (percent) and that its rate of discharge is 4,050
ASME Code; Par. U68, U69
cubic feet per minute of air as deter-
1949 and earlier editions ........... 110 1 25 mined in subdivision (ii) of this sub-
ASME Code; Par. U200, U paragraph.
2011949 edition ...................... 88 1 100
(xi) Safety relief valve assemblies, in-
ASME Code1950, 1952, 1956,
1959, 1962, 1965 and 1968 (Di- cluding their connections, shall be of
vision I) editions ......................... 88 1 100 sufficient size so as to provide the rate
APIASME Codeall editions .... 88 1 100
of flow required for the container on
DOTAs prescribed in 49 CFR
Chapter I. which they are installed.
1 Manufacturers of safety relief valves are allowed a plus
(xii) A hydrostatic relief valve shall
tolerance not exceeding 10 percent of the set pressure be installed between each pair of shut-
marked on the valve. off valves on liquefied petroleum gas
(vi) In certain locations sufficiently liquid piping so as to relieve into a safe
sustained high temperatures prevail atmosphere. The start-to-discharge
which require the use of a lower vapor pressure setting of such relief valves
pressure product to be stored or the use shall not be in excess of 500 p.s.i.g. The
of a higher designed pressure vessel in minimum setting on relief valves in-
order to prevent the safety valves stalled in piping connected to other
opening as the result of these tempera- than DOT containers shall not be lower
tures. As an alternative the tanks may than 140 percent of the container relief
be protected by cooling devices such as valve setting and in piping connected
by spraying, by shading, or other effec- to DOT containers not lower than 400
tive means. p.s.i.g. The start-to-discharge pressure
(vii) Safety relief valves shall be ar- setting of such a relief valve, if in-
ranged so that the possibility of tam- stalled on the discharge side of a pump,
pering will be minimized. If pressure shall be greater than the maximum
setting or adjustment is external, the pressure permitted by the recirculation
relief valves shall be provided with ap- device in the system.
proved means for sealing adjustment. (xiii) The discharge from any safety
(viii) Shutoff valves shall not be in- relief device shall not terminate in or
stalled between the safety relief de- beneath any building, except relief de-
vices and the container, or the equip- vices covered by paragraphs (b)(6)(i) (a)
ment or piping to which the safety re- through (e) of this section, or para-
lief device is connected except that a graphs (c) (4)(i) or (5) of this section.
shutoff valve may be used where the (xiv) Container safety relief devices
arrangement of this valve is such that and regulator relief vents shall be lo-
full required capacity flow through the cated not less than five (5) feet in any
safety relief device is always afforded. direction from air openings into sealed
(ix) Safety relief valves shall have di- combustion system appliances or me-
rect communication with the vapor chanical ventilation air intakes.
space of the container at all times. (11) Vaporizer and housing. (i) Indirect
(x) Each container safety relief valve fired vaporizers utilizing steam, water,
used with systems covered by para- or other heating medium shall be con-
graphs (d), (e), (g), and (h) of this sec- structed and installed as follows:
tion, except as provided in paragraph (a) Vaporizers shall be constructed in
(e)(3)(iii) of this section shall be plainly accordance with the requirements of
and permanently marked with the fol- paragraph (b)(3) (i)(iii) of this section
lowing: Container Type of the pres- and shall be permanently marked as
sure vessel on which the valve is de- follows:
signed to be installed; the pressure in (1) With the code marking signifying
p.s.i.g. at which the valve is set to dis- the specifications to which the vapor-
charge; the actual rate of discharge of izer is constructed.
308
(2) With the allowable working pres- be installed in a building, compart-

sure and temperature for which the va- ment, room, or lean-to which shall be
porizer is designed. ventilated near the floorline and roof
(3) With the sum of the outside sur- to the outside. The device location
face area and the inside heat exchange shall be separated from all compart-
surface area expressed in square feet. ments or rooms containing liquefied
(4) With the name or symbol of the petroleum gas vaporizers, pumps, and
manufacturer. central gas mixing devices by a wall
(b) Vaporizers having an inside di- designed to withstand a static pressure
ameter of 6 inches or less exempted by of at least 100 pounds per square foot.
the ASME Unfired Pressure Vessel This wall shall have no openings or
Code, Section VIII of the ASME Boiler pipes or conduit passing through it.
and Pressure Vessel Code1968 shall This requirement does not apply to the
have a design pressure not less than 250 domestic water heaters which may sup-
p.s.i.g. and need not be permanently ply heat for a vaporizer in a domestic
marked. system.
(c) Heating or cooling coils shall not (h) Gas-fired heating systems sup-
be installed inside a storage container. plying heat exclusively for vaporiza-
(d) Vaporizers may be installed in tion purposes shall be equipped with
buildings, rooms, sheds, or lean-tos automatic safety devices to shut off
used exclusively for gas manufacturing the flow of gas to main burners, if the
or distribution, or in other structures pilot light should fail.
of light, noncombustible construction (i) Vaporizers may be an integral part
or equivalent, well ventilated near the of a fuel storage container directly
floor line and roof. connected to the liquid section or gas
When vaporizing and/or mixing equip- section or both.
ment is located in a structure or build- (j) Vaporizers shall not be equipped
ing not used exclusively for gas manu- with fusible plugs.
facturing or distribution, either at- (k) Vaporizer houses shall not have
tached to or within such a building, unprotected drains to sewers or sump
such structure or room shall be sepa- pits.
rated from the remainder of the build- (ii) Atmospheric vaporizers employ-
ing by a wall designed to withstand a ing heat from the ground or sur-
static pressure of at least 100 pounds rounding air shall be installed as fol-
per square foot. This wall shall have no lows:
openings or pipe or conduit passing (a) Buried underground, or
through it. Such structure or room (b) Located inside the building close
shall be provided with adequate ven- to a point at which pipe enters the
tilation and shall have a roof or at building provided the capacity of the
least one exterior wall of lightweight unit does not exceed 1 quart.
construction. (c) Vaporizers of less than 1 quart ca-
(e) Vaporizers shall have, at or near pacity heated by the ground or sur-
the discharge, a safety relief valve pro- rounding air, need not be equipped with
viding an effective rate of discharge in safety relief valves provided that ade-
accordance with paragraph (b)(10)(iii) quate tests demonstrate that the as-
of this section, except as provided in sembly is safe without safety relief
paragraph (d)(4)(v)(a), of this section. valves.
(f) The heating medium lines into (iii) Direct gas-fired vaporizers shall
and leaving the vaporizer shall be probe constructed, marked, and installed
vided with suitable means for pre- as follows:
venting the flow of gas into the heat (a)(1) In accordance with the require-
systems in the event of tube rupture in ments of the American Society of Me-
the vaporizer. Vaporizers shall be pro- chanical Engineers Boiler and Pressure
vided with suitable automatic means Vessel Code1968 that are applicable to
to prevent liquid passing through the the maximum working conditions for
vaporizers to the gas discharge piping. which the vaporizer is designed.
(g) The device that supplies the nec- (2) With the name of the manufac-
essary heat for producing steam, hot turer; rated BTU input to the burner;
water, or other heating medium may the area of the heat exchange surface
309
in square feet; the outside surface of (g) Vaporizers shall be equipped with
the vaporizer in square feet; and the automatic safety devices to shut off
maximum vaporizing capacity in gal- the flow of gas to main burners if the
lons per hour. pilot light should fail. When the flow
(b)(1) Vaporizers may be connected to through the pilot exceeds 2,000 B.t.u.
the liquid section or the gas section of per hour, the pilot also shall be
the storage container, or both; but in equipped with an automatic safety de-
any case there shall be at the container vice to shut off the flow of gas to the
a manually operated valve in each con- pilot should the pilot flame be extin-
nection to permit completely shutting guished.
off when desired, of all flow of gas or (h) Pressure regulating and pressure
liquid from container to vaporizer. reducing equipment if located within 10
(2) Vaporizers with capacity not ex- feet of a direct fire vaporizer shall be
ceeding 35 gallons per hour shall be lo- separated from the open flame by a
cated at least 5 feet from container substantially airtight noncombustible
shutoff valves. Vaporizers having ca- partition or partitions.
pacity of more than 35 gallons but not (i) Except as provided in (c) of this
exceeding 100 gallons per hour shall be subdivision, the following minimum
located at least 10 feet from the con- distances shall be maintained between
tainer shutoff valves. Vaporizers hav- direct fired vaporizers and the nearest
ing a capacity greater than 100 gallons important building or group of build-
per hour shall be located at least 15 ings:
feet from container shutoff valves. Ten feet for vaporizers having a capacity of
(c) Vaporizers may be installed in 15 gallons per hour or less vaporizing capac-
buildings, rooms, housings, sheds, or ity.
Twenty-five feet for vaporizers having a
lean-tos used exclusively for vaporizing
vaporizing capacity of 16 to 100 gallons per
or mixing of liquefied petroleum gas. hour.
Vaporizing housing structures shall be Fifty feet for vaporizers having a vapor-
of noncombustible construction, well izing capacity exceeding 100 gallons per hour.
ventilated near the floorline and the
(j) Direct fired vaporizers shall not
highest point of the roof. When vapor-
raise the product pressure above the
izer and/or mixing equipment is located
design pressure of the vaporizer equip-
in a structure or room attached to or
ment nor shall they raise the product
within a building, such structure or pressure within the storage container
room shall be separated from the re- above the pressure shown in the second
mainder of the building by a wall de- column of Table H31.
signed to withstand a static pressure of (k) Vaporizers shall not be provided
at least 100 pounds per square foot. with fusible plugs.
This wall shall have no openings or (l) Vaporizers shall not have unpro-
pipes or conduit passing through it. tected drains to sewers or sump pits.
Such structure or room shall be pro- (iv) Direct gas-fired tank heaters
vided with adequate ventilation, and shall be constructed and installed as
shall have a roof or at least one exte- follows:
rior wall of lightweight construction. (a) Direct gas-fired tank heaters, and
(d) Vaporizers shall have at or near tanks to which they are applied, shall
the discharge, a safety relief valve pro- only be installed above ground.
viding an effective rate of discharge in (b) Tank heaters shall be perma-
accordance with paragraph (b)(10)(iii) nently marked with the name of the
of this section. The relief valve shall be manufacturer, the rated B.t.u. input to
so located as not to be subjected to the burner, and the maximum vapor-
temperatures in excess of 140 F. izing capacity in gallons per hour.
(e) Vaporizers shall be provided with (c) Tank heaters may be an integral
suitable automatic means to prevent part of a fuel storage container di-
liquid passing from the vaporizer to the rectly connected to the container liq-
gas discharge piping of the vaporizer. uid section, or vapor section, or both.
(f) Vaporizers shall be provided with (d) Tank heaters shall be provided
means for manually turning off the gas with a means for manually turning off
to the main burner and pilot. the gas to the main burner and pilot.
310
(e) Tank heaters shall be equipped F. The start-to-discharge pressure set-

with an automatic safety device to ting shall be such as to protect the
shut off the flow of gas to main burn- components involved, but not less than
ers, if the pilot light should fail. When 250 p.s.i.g. The discharge shall be di-
flow through pilot exceeds 2,000 B.t.u. rected upward and away from compo-
per hour, the pilot also shall be nent parts of the equipment and away
equipped with an automatic safety de- from operating personnel.
vice to shut off the flow of gas to the (e) Vaporizer-burners shall be pro-
pilot should the pilot flame be extin- vided with means for manually turning
guished. off the gas to the main burner and
(f) Pressure regulating and pressure pilot.
reducing equipment if located within 10 (f) Vaporizer-burners shall be
feet of a direct fired tank heater shall equipped with automatic safety devices
be separated from the open flame by a to shut off the flow of gas to the main
substantially airtight noncombustible burner and pilot in the event the pilot
partition. is extinguished.
(g) The following minimum distances (g) Pressure regulating and control
shall be maintained between a storage equipment shall be located or pro-
tank heated by a direct fired tank tected so that the temperatures sur-
heater and the nearest important rounding this equipment shall not ex-
building or group of buildings: ceed 140 F. except that equipment
components may be used at higher
Ten feet for storage containers of less than temperatures if designed to withstand
500 gallons water capacity.
Twenty-five feet for storage containers of
such temperatures.
500 to 1,200 gallons water capacity. (h) Pressure regulating and control
Fifty feet for storage containers of over equipment when located downstream of
1,200 gallons water capacity. the vaporizer shall be designed to with-
stand the maximum discharge tem-
(h) No direct fired tank heater shall perature of the vapor.
raise the product pressure within the (i) The vaporizer section of vaporizer-
storage container over 75 percent of the burners shall not be provided with fusi-
pressure set out in the second column ble plugs.
of Table H31. (j) Vaporizer coils or jackets shall be
(v) The vaporizer section of vapor- made of ferrous metal or high tempera-
izer-burners used for dehydrators or ture alloys.
dryers shall be located outside of build- (k) Equipment utilizing vaporizer-
ings; they shall be constructed and in- burners shall be equipped with auto-
stalled as follows: matic shutoff devices upstream and
(a) Vaporizer-burners shall have a downstream of the vaporizer section
minimum design pressure of 250 p.s.i.g. connected so as to operate in the event
with a factor of safety of five. of excessive temperature, flame failure,
(b) Manually operated positive shut- and, if applicable, insufficient airflow.
off valves shall be located at the con- (12) Filling densities. (i) The filling
tainers to shut off all flow to the va- density is defined as the percent ratio
porizer-burners. of the weight of the gas in a container
(c) Minimum distances between stor- to the weight of water the container
age containers and vaporizer-burners will hold at 60 F. All containers shall
shall be as follows: be filled according to the filling den-
Minimum sities shown in Table H27.
Water capacity per container (gallons) distances
(feet) TABLE H27MAXIMUM PERMITTED FILLING
Less than 501 ...................................................... 10 DENSITY
501 to 2,000 ........................................................ 25
Over 2,000 ........................................................... 50 Above ground containers
0 to 1,200 Over 1,200 Under

Specific gravity
(d) The vaporizer section of vapor- at 60 F. (15.6 U.S. gals. U.S. gals. ground con-
(1,000 imp. (1,000 imp. tainers, all
izer-burners shall be protected by a hy- C.) gal., 4,550 gal., 4,550 capacities
drostatic relief valve. The relief valve liters) total liters) total
water cap. water cap.
shall be located so as not to be sub-
jected to temperatures in excess of 140 Percent Percent Percent
311
TABLE H27MAXIMUM PERMITTED FILLING reduction, gas mixing, gas manufac-

DENSITYContinued turing, or distribution, or to house in-
ternal combustion engines, industrial
Above ground containers
processes, research and experimental
Specific gravity 0 to 1,200 Over 1,200 Under laboratories, or equipment and proc-
U.S. gals. U.S. gals. ground con-
at 60 F. (15.6 esses using such gas and having similar
(1,000 imp. (1,000 imp. tainers, all
C.) gal., 4,550 gal., 4,550 capacities hazard; and when such buildings, or
liters) total liters) total
water cap. water cap. separate areas thereof are constructed
in accordance with this section.
0 .4960 .503 41 44 45 (b) Buildings, structures, or equip-
.504 .510 42 45 46
.511 .519 43 46 47 ment under construction or undergoing
.520 .527 44 47 48 major renovation provided the tem-
.528 .536 45 48 49 porary piping meets the following con-
.537 .544 46 49 50
.545 .552 47 50 51
ditions:
.553 .560 48 51 52 (1) Liquid piping inside the building
.561 .568 49 52 53 shall conform to the requirements of
.569 .576 50 53 54 paragraph (b)(8) of this section, and
.577 .584 51 54 55
.585 .592 52 55 56 shall not exceed three-fourths iron pipe
.593 .600 53 56 57 size. Copper tubing with an outside di-
ameter of three-fourths inch or less
(ii) Except as provided in paragraph may be used provided it conforms to
(b)(12)(iii) of this section, any con- Type K of Specifications for Seamless
tainer including mobile cargo tanks Water Tube, ANSI H23.11970 (ASTM
and portable tank containers regard- B8869) (see Table H24). All such pip-
less of size or construction, shipped ing shall be protected against construc-
under DOT jurisdiction or constructed tion hazards. Liquid piping inside
in accordance with 49 CFR chapter I buildings shall be kept to a minimum.
Specifications shall be charged accord- Such piping shall be securely fastened
ing to 49 CFR chapter I requirements. to walls or other surfaces so as to pro-
(iii) Portable containers not subject vide adequate protection from break-
to DOT jurisdiction (such as, but not age and so located as to subject the liq-
limited to, motor fuel containers on in- uid line to lowest ambient tempera-
dustrial and lift trucks, and farm trac- tures.
tors covered in paragraph (e) of this (2) A shutoff valve shall be installed
section, or containers recharged at the in each intermediate branch line where
installation) may be filled either by it takes off the main line and shall be
weight, or by volume using a fixed readily accessible. A shutoff valve shall
length dip tube gaging device. also be placed at the appliance end of
(13) LP-Gas in buildings. (i) Vapor the intermediate branch line. Such
shall be piped into buildings at pres- shutoff valve shall be upstream of any
sures in excess of 20 p.s.i.g. only if the flexible connector used with the appli-
buildings or separate areas thereof, (a) ance.
are constructed in accordance with this (3) Suitable excess flow valves shall
section; (b) are used excusively to be installed in the container outlet line
house equipment for vaporization, pres- supplying liquid LP-Gas to the build-
sure reduction, gas mixing, gas manu- ing. A suitable excess flow valve shall
facturing, or distribution, or to house be installed immediately downstream
internal combustion engines, industrial of each shutoff valve. Suitable excess
processes, research and experimental flow valves shall be installed where
laboratories, or equipment and proc- piping size is reduced and shall be sized
esses using such gas and having similar for the reduced size piping.
hazard; (c) buildings, structures, or (4) Hydrostatic relief valves shall be
equipment under construction or un- installed in accordance with paragraph
dergoing major renovation. (b)(10)(xii) of this section.
(ii) Liquid may be permitted in build- (5) The use of hose to carry liquid be-
ings as follows: tween the container and the building
(a) Buildings, or separate areas of or at any point in the liquid line, ex-
buildings, used exclusively to house cept at the appliance connector, shall
equipment for vaporization, pressure be prohibited.
312
(6) Where flexible connectors are nec- (vi) Filling of portable containers,
essary for appliance installation, such containers mounted on skids, fuel con-
connectors shall be as short as prac- tainers on farm tractors, or similar ap-
ticable and shall comply with para- plications, from storage containers
graph (b)(8)(ii) or (9) of this section. used in domestic or commercial serv-
(7) Release of fuel when any section ice, shall be performed not less than 50
of piping or appliances is disconnected feet from the nearest important build-
shall be minimized by either of the fol- ing.
lowing methods: (vii) The filling connection and the
(i) Using an approved automatic vent from the liquid level gages in con-
quick-closing coupling (a type closing tainers, filled at point of installation,
in both directions when coupled in the shall not be less than 10 feet in any di-
fuel line), or rection from air openings into sealed
(ii) Closing the valve nearest to the combustion system appliances or me-
appliance and allowing the appliance chanical ventilation air intakes.
to operate until the fuel in the line is (viii) Fuel supply containers shall be
consumed. gaged and charged only in the open air
(iii) Portable containers shall not be or in buildings especially provided for
taken into buildings except as provided that purpose.
in paragraph (b)(6)(i) of this section. (ix) The maximum vapor pressure of
(14) Transfer of liquids. The employer
the product at 100 F. which may be
shall assure that (i) at least one at-
transferred into a container shall be in
tendant shall remain close to the
accordance with paragraphs (d)(2) and
transfer connection from the time the
(e)(3) of this section. (For DOT con-
connections are first made until they
tainers use DOT requirements.)
are finally disconnected, during the
transfer of the product. (x) Marketers and users shall exercise
(ii) Containers shall be filled or used precaution to assure that only those
only upon authorization of the owner. gases for which the system is designed,
(iii) Containers manufactured in ac- examined, and listed, are employed in
cordance with specifications of 49 CFR its operation, particularly with regard
part 178 and authorized by 49 CFR to pressures.
chapter 1 as a single trip or non- (xi) Pumps or compressors shall be
refillable container shall not be re- designed for use with LP-Gas. When
filled or reused in LP-Gas service. compressors are used they shall nor-
(iv) Gas or liquid shall not be vented mally take suction from the vapor
to the atmosphere to assist in transfer- space of the container being filled and
ring contents of one container to an- discharge to the vapor space of the con-
other, except as provided in paragraph tainer being emptied.
(e)(5)(iv) of this section and except that (xii) Pumping systems, when
this shall not preclude the use of listed equipped with a positive displacement
pump utilizing LP-Gas in the vapor pump, shall include a recirculating de-
phase as a source of energy and venting vice which shall limit the differential
such gas to the atmosphere at a rate pressure on the pump under normal op-
not to exceed that from a No. 31 drill erating conditions to the maximum
size opening and provided that such differential pressure rating of the
venting and liquid transfer shall be lo- pump. The discharge of the pumping
cated not less than 50 feet from the system shall be protected so that pres-
nearest important building. sure does not exceed 350 p.s.i.g. If a re-
(v) Filling of fuel containers for in- circulation system discharges into the
dustrial trucks or motor vehicles from supply tank and contains a manual
industrial bulk storage containers shutoff valve, an adequate secondary
shall be performed not less than 10 feet safety recirculation system shall be in-
from the nearest important masonry- corporated which shall have no means
walled building or not less than 25 feet of rendering it inoperative. Manual
from the nearest important building or shutoff valves in recirculation systems
other construction and, in any event, shall be kept open except during an
not less than 25 feet from any building emergency or when repairs are being
opening. made to the system.
313
(xiii) When necessary, unloading pip- conform to the distances in subpara-

ing or hoses shall be provided with graph (6)(ii) of this paragraph.
suitable bleeder valves for relieving (16) Instructions. Personnel per-
pressure before disconnection. forming installation, removal, oper-
(xiv) Agricultural air moving equip- ation, and maintenance work shall be
ment, including crop dryers, shall be properly trained in such function.
shut down when supply containers are (17) Electrical equipment and other
being filled unless the air intakes and sources of ignition. (i) Electrical equip-
sources of ignition on the equipment ment and wiring shall be of a type
are located 50 feet or more from the specified by and shall be installed in
container. accordance with subpart S of this part,
(xv) Agricultural equipment employ- for ordinary locations except that fixed
ing open flames or equipment with in- electrical equipment in classified areas
tegral containers, such as flame cul- shall comply with subparagraph (18) of
tivators, weed burners, and, in addi- this paragraph.
tion, tractors, shall be shut down dur- (ii) Open flames or other sources of
ing refueling. ignition shall not be permitted in va-
(15) Tank car or transport truck loading porizer rooms (except those housing di-
or unloading points and operations. (i) rect-fired vaporizers), pumphouses,
The track of tank car siding shall be container charging rooms or other
relatively level. similar locations. Direct-fired vapor-
(ii) A Tank Car Connected sign, as izers shall not be permitted in pump-
covered by DOT rules, shall be in- houses or container charging rooms.
stalled at the active end or ends of the (iii) Liquefied petroleum gas storage
siding while the tank car is connected. containers do not require lightning
(iii) While cars are on sidetrack for protection.
loading or unloading, the wheels at (iv) Since liquefied petroleum gas is
both ends shall be blocked on the rails. contained in a closed system of piping
(iv) The employer shall insure that and equipment, the system need not be
an employee is in attendance at all electrically conductive or electrically
times while the tank car, cars, or bonded for protection against static
trucks are being loaded or unloaded. electricity.
(v) A backflow check valve, excess- (v) Open flames (except as provided
flow valve, or a shutoff valve with for in paragraph (b)(11) of this section),
means of remote closing, to protect cutting or welding, portable electric
against uncontrolled discharge of LP- tools, and extension lights capable of
Gas from storage tank piping shall be igniting LP-Gas, shall not be permitted
installed close to the point where the within classified areas specified in
liquid piping and hose or swing joint Table H28 unless the LP-Gas facilities
pipe is connected. have been freed of all liquid and vapor,
(vi) Where practical, the distance of or special precautions observed under
the unloading or loading point shall carefully controlled conditions.
TABLE H28
Equipment shall be
Part Location Extent of classified area 1 suitable for Class 1,
Group D 2
A ..... Storage containers other than Within 15 feet in all directions from connections, except con- Division 2.
DOT cylinders. nections otherwise covered in Table H28.
B ..... Tank vehicle and tank car Within 5 feet in all directions from connections regularly made Division 1.
loading and unloading 3. or disconnected for product transfer.
Beyond 5 feet but within 15 feet in all directions from a point Division 2.
where connections are regularly made or disconnected and
within the cylindrical volume between the horizontal equator
of the sphere and grade. (See Figure H1).
C ..... Gage vent openings other than Within 5 feet in all directions from point of discharge ............... Division 1.
those on DOT cylinders. Beyond 5 feet but within 15 feet in all directions from point of
discharge.
Division 2.
D ..... Relief valve discharge other Within direct path of discharge .................................................. Division 1.
than those on DOT cylinders.
Within 5 feet in all directions from point of discharge ............... Division 1.
314
TABLE H28Continued
Equipment shall be
Part Location Extent of classified area 1 suitable for Class 1,
Group D 2
Beyond 5 feet but within 15 feet in all directions from point of Division 2.
discharge except within the direct path of discharge.
E ..... Pumps, compressors, gas-air .
mixers and vaporizers other
than direct fired.
Indoors without ventilation ....... Entire room and any adjacent room not separated by a gas- Division 1.
tight partition.
Within 15 feet of the exterior side of any exterior wall or roof Division 2.
that is not vaportight or within 15 feet of any exterior open-
ing.
Indoors with adequate ventila- Entire room and any adjacent room not separated by a gas- Division 2.
tion 4. tight partition.
Outdoors in open air at or Within 15 feet in all directions from this equipment and within Division 2.
abovegrade. the cylindrical volume between the horizontal equator of the
sphere and grade. See Figure H1.
F ..... Service Station Dispensing Entire space within dispenser enclosure, and 18 inches hori- Division 1.
Units. zontally from enclosure exterior up to an elevation 4 ft.
above dispenser base. Entire pit or open space beneath
dispenser.
Up to 18 inches abovegrade within 20 ft. horizontally from any Division 2.
edge of enclosure.
NOTE: For pits within this area, see Part F of this table..
G ..... Pits or trenches containing or .
located beneath LP-Gas
valves, pumps, compressors,
regulators, and similar equip-
ment.
Without mechanical ventilation Entire pit or trench ..................................................................... Division 1.
Entire room and any adjacent room not separated by a gas- Division 1.
tight partition.
Within 15 feet in all directions from pit or trench when located Division 2.
outdoors.
With adequate mechanical Entire pit or trench ..................................................................... Division 2.
ventilation.
Entire room and any adjacent room not separated by a gas- Division 2.
tight partition.
Within 15 feet in all directions from pit or trench when located Division 2.
outdoors.
H ..... Special buildings or rooms for Entire room ................................................................................. Division 2.
storage of portable con-
tainers.
Pipelines and connections con- Within 5 ft. in all directions from point of discharge .................. Division 1.
taining operational bleeds, Beyond 5 ft. from point of discharge, same as Part E of this
drips, vents or drains. table.
J ...... Container filling:.
Indoors without ventilation ....... Entire room ................................................................................. Division 1.
Indoors with adequate ventila- Within 5 feet in all directions from connections regularly made Division 1.
tion 4. or disconnected for product transfer.
Beyond 5 feet and entire room .................................................. Division 2.
Outdoors in open air ................ Within 5 feet in all directions from connections regularly made Division 1.
or disconnected for product transfer.
Beyond 5 feet but within 15 feet in all directions from a point Division 2.
where connections are regularly made or disconnected and
within the cylindrical volume between the horizontal equator
of the sphere and grade. (See Figure H1).
1 The classified area shall not extend beyond an unpierced wall, roof, or solid vaportight partition.
2 See subpart S of this part.
3 When classifying extent of hazardous area, consideration shall be given to possible variations in the spotting of tank cars and
tank vehicles at the unloading points and the effect these variations of actual spotting point may have on the point of connection.
4 Ventilation, either natural or mechanical, is considered adequate when the concentration of the gas in a gas-air mixture does
not exceed 25 percent of the lower flammable limit under normal operating conditions.
315
aboveground or underground service.

The dials of gages intended for use only
on aboveground containers of over 1,200
gallons water capacity shall be so
marked.
(iii) Gaging devices that require
bleeding of the product to the atmos-
phere, such as the rotary tube, fixed
tube, and slip tube, shall be designed so
that the bleed valve maximum opening
is not larger than a No. 54 drill size, un-
less provided with excess flow valve.
(iv) Gaging devices shall have a de-
sign working pressure of at least 250
FIGURE H1 p.s.i.g.
(18) Fixed electrical equipment in classi- (v) Length of tube or position of fixed
fied areas. Fixed electrical equipment liquid-level gage shall be designed to
and wiring installed within classified indicate the maximum level to which
areas specified in Table H28 shall com- the container may be filled for the
ply with Table H28 and shall be in- product contained. This level shall be
stalled in accordance with Subpart S of based on the volume of the product at
this part. This provision does not apply 40 F. at its maximum permitted filling
to fixed electrical equipment at resi- density for aboveground containers and
dential or commercial installations of at 50 F. for underground containers.
LP-Gas systems or to systems covered The employer shall calculate the fill-
by paragraph (e) or (g) of this section. ing point for which the fixed liquid
(19) Liquid-level gaging device. (i) Each level gage shall be designed according
container manufactured after Decem- to the method in this subdivision.
ber 31, 1965, and filled on a volumetric (a) It is impossible to set out in a
basis shall be equipped with a fixed liq- table the length of a fixed dip tube for
uid-level gage to indicate the max- various capacity tanks because of the
imum permitted filling level as pro- varying tank diameters and lengths
vided in paragraph (b)(19)(v) of this sec- and because the tank may be installed
tion. Each container manufactured either in a vertical or horizontal posi-
after December 31, 1969, shall have per- tion. Knowing the maximum permitted
manently attached to the container ad- filling volume in gallons, however, the
jacent to the fixed level gage a mark- length of the fixed tube can be deter-
ing showing the percentage full that mined by the use of a strapping table
will be shown by that gage. When a obtained from the container manufac-
variable liquid-level gage is also pro- turer. The length of the fixed tube
vided, the fixed liquid-level gage will should be such that when its lower end
also serve as a means for checking the touches the surface of the liquid in the
variable gage. These gages shall be container, the contents of the con-
used in charging containers as required tainer will be the maximum permitted
in paragraph (b)(12) of this section. volume as determined by the following
(ii) All variable gaging devices shall formula:
be arranged so that the maximum liq-
uid level for butane, for a 5050 mixture [(Water capacity (gals.) of container*filling
density**)(Specific gravity of LP-
of butane and propane, and for propane,
Gas*volume correction factor
to which the container may be charged 100)]=Maximum volume of LP-Gas
is readily determinable. The markings
indicating the various liquid levels *Measured at 60 F.
from empty to full shall be on the sys- **From subparagraph (12) of this paragraph
tem nameplate or gaging device or part Filling Densities.
For aboveground containers the liquid
may be on the system nameplate and
temperature is assumed to be 40 F. and for
part on the gaging device. Dials of underground containers the liquid tempera-
magnetic or rotary gages shall show ture is assumed to be 50 F. To correct the
whether they are for cylindrical or liquid volumes at these temperatures to 60
spherical containers and whether for F. the following factors shall be used.
316
EC27OC91.025
(b) Formula for determining max- shall be stamped on the exterior of the
imum volume of liquefied petroleum gage with the letters DT followed by
gas for which a fixed length of dip tube the vertical distance (expressed in
shall be set: inches and carried out to one decimal
place) from the top of container to the
TABLE H29VOLUME CORRECTION FACTORS end of the dip tube or to the centerline
Specific gravity Aboveground Underground of the gage when it is located at the
maximum permitted filling level. For
0.500 1.033 1.017 portable containers that may be filled
.510 1.031 1.016
.520 1.029 1.015 in the horizontal and/or vertical posi-
.530 1.028 1.014 tion the letters DT shall be followed
.540 1.026 1.013 by V with the vertical distance from
.550 1.025 1.013
.560 1.024 1.012 the top of the container to the end of
.570 1.023 1.011 the dip tube for vertical filling and
.580 1.021 1.011 with H followed by the proper dis-
.590 1.020 1.010
tance for horizontal filling. For DOT
(c) The maximum volume of LP-Gas containers the stamping shall be placed
which can be placed in a container both on the exterior of the gage and on
when determining the length of the dip the container. On above-ground or
tube expressed as a percentage of total cargo containers where the gages are
water content of the container is cal- positioned at specific levels, the mark-
culated by the following formula. ing may be specified in percent of total
(d) The maximum weight of LP-Gas tank contents and the marking shall be
which may be placed in a container for stamped on the container.
determining the length of a fixed dip tube (vii) Gage glasses of the columnar
is determined by multiplying the max- type shall be restricted to charging
imum volume of liquefied petroleum plants where the fuel is withdrawn in
gas obtained by the formula in para- the liquid phase only. They shall be
graph (b)(19)(b) of this section by the equipped with valves having metallic
pounds of liquefied petroleum gas in a handwheels, with excess flow valves,
gallon at 40 F. for abovegound and at and with extra-heavy glass adequately
50 F. for underground containers. For protected with a metal housing applied
example, typical pounds per gallon are by the gage manufacturer. They shall
specified below: be shielded against the direct rays of
the sun. Gage glasses of the columnar
Example: Assume a 100-gallon total water type are prohibited on tank trucks, and
capacity tank for aboveground storage of
on motor fuel tanks, and on containers
propane having a specific gravity of 0.510 of
60 F. used in domestic, commercial, and in-
[(100 (gals.)42 (filling density from subpara- dustrial installations.
graph (12) of this paragraph))(0.5101.031 (viii) Gaging devices of the float, or
(correction factor from Table H equivalent type which do not require
29)100)]=(420052.6) flow for their operation and having
(420052.6)=79.8 gallons propane, the max- connections extending to a point out-
imum amount permitted to be placed in a side the container do not have to be
100-gallon total water capacity above- equipped with excess flow valves pro-
ground container equipped with a fixed dip vided the piping and fittings are ade-
tube.
quately designed to withstand the con-
[(Maximum volume of LP-Gas (from formula tainer pressure and are properly pro-
in subdivision (b) of this subdivi-
sion)100)Total water content of container
tected against physical damage and
in gallons]=Maximum percent of LP-Gas breakage.
(20) Requirements for appliances. (i)
Above- Under- Except as provided in paragraph
ground, ground,
pounds per pounds per (b)(20)(ii) of this section, new commer-
gallon gallon cial and industrial gas consuming ap-
Propane ......................................... 4.37 4.31 pliances shall be approved.
N Butane ....................................... 4.97 4.92 (ii) Any appliance that was originally
manufactured for operation with a gas-
(vi) Fixed liquid-level gages used on eous fuel other than LP-Gas and is in
containers other than DOT containers good condition may be used with LP-
317
Gas only after it is properly converted, shall not prohibit the installation in a
adapted, and tested for performance compartment or recess below grade
with LP-Gas before the appliance is level such as a niche in a slope or ter-
placed in use. race wall which is used for no other
(iii) Unattended heaters used inside purpose, providing that the container
buildings for the purpose of animal or and regulating equipment are not in
poultry production or care shall be contact with the ground and the com-
equipped with an approved automatic partment or recess is drained and ven-
device designed to shut off the flow of tilated horizontally to the outside air
gas to the main burners, and pilot if from its lowest level, with the outlet at
used, in the event of flame extinguish- least 3 feet away from any building
ment. opening which is below the level of
(iv) All commercial, industrial, and such outlet.
agricultural appliances or equipment Except as provided in paragraph
shall be installed in accordance with (b)(10)(xiii) of this section, the dis-
the requirements of this section and in charge from safety relief devices shall
accordance with the following NFPA be located not less than 3 feet hori-
consensus standards, which are incor- zontally away from any building open-
porated by reference as specified in ing which is below the level of such dis-
1910.6: charge and shall not terminate beneath
(a) Domestic and commercial appli- any building unless such space is well
ancesNFPA 541969, Standard for the ventilated to the outside and is not en-
Installation of Gas Appliances and Gas closed on more than two sides.
Piping. (ii) Containers shall be set upon firm
(b) Industrial appliancesNFPA 54A foundation or otherwise firmly secured;
1969, Standard for the Installation of the possible effect on the outlet piping
Gas Piping and Gas Equipment on In- of settling shall be guarded against by
dustrial Premises and Certain Other a flexible connection or special fitting.
Premises. (5) Containers and equipment used in-
(c) Standard for the Installation and side of buildings or structures. (i) When
Use of Stationary Combustion Engines operational requirements make port-
and Gas TurbinesNFPA 371970. able use of containers necessary and
(d) Standard for the Installation of their location outside of buildings or
Equipment for the Removal of Smoke structure is impracticable, containers
and Grease-Laden Vapors from Com- and equipment are permitted to be
mercial Cooking Equipment, NFPA 96 used inside of buildings or structures in
1970. accordance with (a) through (l) of this
(c) Cylinder systems(1) Application. subdivision, and, in addition, such
This paragraph applies specifically to other provisions of this subparagraph
systems utilizing containers con- as are applicable to the particular use
structed in accordance with DOT Spec- or occupancy.
ifications. All requirements of para- (a) Containers in use shall mean con-
graph (b) of this section apply to this nected for use.
paragraph unless otherwise noted in (b) Systems utilizing containers hav-
paragraph (b) of this section. ing a water capacity greater than 212
(2) Marking of containers. Containers pounds (nominal 1 pound LP-Gas ca-
shall be marked in accordance with pacity) shall be equipped with excess
DOT regulations. Additional markings flow valves. Such excess flow valves
not in conflict with DOT regulations shall be either integral with the con-
may be used. tainer valves or in the connections to
(3) Description of a system. A system the container valve outlets. In either
shall include the container base or case, an excess flow valve shall be in-
bracket, containers, container valves, stalled in such a manner that any
connectors, manifold valve assembly, undue strain beyond the excess flow
regulators, and relief valves. valve will not cause breakage between
(4) Containers and regulating equip- the container and the excess flow
ment installed outside of buildings or valve. The installation of excess flow
structures. (i) Containers shall not be valves shall take into account the type
buried below ground. However, this of valve protection provided.
318
(c) Regulators, if used, shall be either ing a maximum water capacity of 212
directly connected to the container pounds. Container valves, connectors,
valves or to manifolds connected to the regulators, manifolds, piping, and tub-
container values. The regulator shall ing shall not be used as structural sup-
be suitable for use with LP-Gas. Mani- ports for heaters.
folds and fittings connecting con- (i) Containers, regulating equipment,
tainers to pressure regulator inlets manifolds, pipe, tubing, and hose shall
shall be designed for at least 250 p.s.i.g. be located so as to minimize exposure
service pressure. to abnormally high temperatures (such
(d) Valves on containers having a as may result from exposure to convec-
water capacity greater than 50 pounds tion or radiation from heating equip-
(nominal 20 pounds LP-Gas capacity) ment or installation in confined
shall be protected while in use. spaces), physical damage, or tampering
(e) Containers shall be marked in ac- by unauthorized persons.
cordance with paragraph (b)(5)(iii) of (j) Heat producing equipment shall be
this section and paragraph (c)(2) of this located and used so as to minimize the
section. possibility of ignition of combustibles.
(f) Pipe or tubing shall conform to
(k) Containers having a water capac-
paragraph (b)(8) of this section except
ity greater than 212 pounds (nominal 1
that aluminum pipe or tubing shall not
pound LP-Gas capacity) connected for
be used.
use, shall stand on a firm and substan-
(g)(1) Hose shall be designed for a
tially level surface and, when nec-
working pressure of at least 250 p.s.i.g.
essary, shall be secured in an upright
Hose and hose connections shall have
position.
their correctness as to design, con-
struction and performance determined (l) Containers, including the valve
by listing by a nationally recognized protective devices, shall be installed so
testing laboratory. The hose length as to minimize the probability of im-
may exceed the length specified in pingement of discharge of safety relief
paragraph (b)(9)(vii)(b) of this section, devices upon containers.
but shall be as short as practicable. (ii) Containers having a maximum
Refer to 1910.7 for definition of nation- water capacity of 212 pounds (nominal 1
ally recognized testing laboratory. pound LP-Gas capacity) are permitted
(2) Hose shall be long enough to per- to be used inside of buildings as part of
mit compliance with spacing provi- approved self-contained hand torch as-
sions of this subparagraph without semblies or similar appliances.
kinking or straining or causing hose to (iii) Containers having a maximum
be so close to a burner as to be dam- water capacity of 12 pounds (nominal 5
aged by heat. pounds LP-Gas capacity) are permitted
(h) Portable heaters, including sala- to be used temporarily inside of build-
manders, shall be equipped with an ap- ings for public exhibition or dem-
proved automatic device to shut off the onstration purposes, including use for
flow of gas to the main burner, and classroom demonstrations.
pilot if used, in the event of flame ex- (iv) [Reserved]
tinguishment. Such heaters having in- (v) Containers are permitted to be
puts above 50,000 B.t.u. manufactured used in buildings or structures under
on or after May 17, 1967, and such heat- construction or undergoing major ren-
ers having inputs above 100,000 B.t.u. ovation when such buildings or struc-
manufactured before May 17, 1967, shall tures are not occupied by the public, as
be equipped with either. follows:
(1) A pilot which must be lighted and (a) The maximum water capacity of
proved before the main burner can be individual containers shall be 245
turned on; or pounds (nominal 100 pounds LP-Gas ca-
(2) An electric ignition system. pacity).
The provisions of this paragraph (h) do (b) For temporary heating such as
not apply to tar kettle burners, torch- curing concrete, drying plaster and
es, melting pots, nor do they apply to similar applications, heaters (other
portable heaters under 7,500 B.t.u.h. than integral heater-container units)
input when used with containers hav- shall be located at least 6 feet from any
319
LP-Gas container. This shall not pro- rated at least 20 feet from a similar
hibit the use of heaters specifically de- unit.
signed for attachment to the container (c) The amount of LP-Gas in con-
or to a supporting standard, provided tainers for research and experimental
they are designed and installed so as to use shall be limited to the smallest
prevent direct or radiant heat applica- practical quantity.
tion from the heater onto the con- (vii)(a) Containers are permitted to
tainer. Blower and radiant type heaters be used in industrial occupancies with
shall not be directed toward any LP- essentially noncombustible contents
Gas container within 20 feet. where portable equipment for space
(c) If two or more heater-container heating is essential and where a perma-
units, of either the integral or non- nent heating installation is not prac-
integral type, are located in an tical, as follows:
unpartitioned area on the same floor, (b) Containers and heaters shall com-
the container or containers of each ply with and be used in accordance
unit shall be separated from the con- with paragraph (c)(5)(v) of this section.
tainer or containers of any other unit (viii) Containers are permitted to be
by at least 20 feet. used in buildings for temporary emer-
(d) When heaters are connected to gency heating purposes, if necessary to
containers for use in an unpartitioned prevent damage to the buildings or
area on the same floor, the total water contents, when the permanent heating
capacity of containers manifolded to- system is temporarily out of service, as
gether for connection to a heater or follows:
heaters shall not be greater than 735 (a) Containers and heaters shall com-
pounds (nominal 300 pounds LP-Gas ca- ply with and be used in accordance
pacity). Such manifolds shall be sepa- with paragraph (c)(5)(v) of this section.
rated by at least 20 feet. (b) The temporary heating equipment
(e) On floors on which heaters are not shall not be left unattended.
connected for use, containers are per- (ix) Containers are permitted to be
mitted to be manifolded together for used temporarily in buildings for train-
connection to a heater or heaters on ing purposes related in installation and
another floor, Provided: use of LP-Gas systems, as follows:
(1) The total water capacity of con- (a) The maximum water capacity of
tainers connected to any one manifold individual containers shall be 245
is not greater than 2,450 pounds (nomi- pounds (nominal 100 pounds LP-Gas ca-
nal 1,000 pounds LP-Gas capacity) and; pacity), but the maximum quantity of
(2) Where more than one manifold LP-Gas that may be placed in each
having a total water capacity greater container shall be 20 pounds.
than 735 pounds (nominal 300 pounds (b) If more than one such container is
LP-Gas capacity) are located in the located in the same room, the con-
same unpartitioned area, they shall be tainers shall be separated by at least 20
separated by at least 50 feet. feet.
(f) Storage of containers awaiting use (6) Container valves and accessories.
shall be in accordance with paragraph (i) Valves in the assembly of multiple
(f) of this section. container systems shall be arranged so
(vi) Containers are permitted to be that replacement of containers can be
used in industrial occupancies for proc- made without shutting off the flow of
essing, research, or experimental pur- gas in the system.
poses as follows: NOTE: This provision is not to be construed
(a) The maximum water capacity of as requiring an automatic changeover de-
vice.
individual containers shall be 245
pounds (nominal 100 pounds LP-Gas ca- (ii) Regulators and low-pressure re-
pacity). lief devices shall be rigidly attached to
(b) Containers connected to a mani- the cylinder valves, cylinders, sup-
fold shall have a total water capacity porting standards, the building walls or
not greater than 735 pounds (nominal otherwise rigidly secured and shall be
300 pounds LP-Gas capacity) and not so installed or protected that the ele-
more than one such manifold may be ments (sleet, snow, or ice) will not af-
located in the same room unless sepa- fect their operation.
320
(iii) Valves and connections to the discharge. These provisions do not

containers shall be protected while in apply to individual appliance regu-
transit, in storage, and while being lators when protection is otherwise
moved into final utilization, as follows: provided nor to paragraph (c)(5) of this
(a) By setting into the recess of the section and paragraph (b)(10)(xiii) of
container to prevent the possibility of this section. In buildings devoted ex-
their being struck if the container is clusively to gas distribution purposes,
dropped upon a flat surface, or the space above the diaphragm need
(b) By ventilated cap or collar, fas- not be vented to the outside.
tened to the container capable of with- (8) Reinstallation of containers. Con-
standing a blow from any direction tainers shall not be reinstalled unless
equivalent to that of a 30-pound weight they are requalified in accordance with
dropped 4 feet. Construction must be DOT regulations.
such that a blow will not be trans- (9) Permissible product. A product
mitted to the valve or other connec- shall not be placed in a container
tion. marked with a service pressure less
(iv) When containers are not con- than four-fifths of the maximum vapor
nected to the system, the outlet valves pressure of product at 130 F.
shall be kept tightly closed or plugged, (d) Systems utilizing containers other
even though containers are considered than DOT containers(1) Application.
empty. This paragraph applies specifically to
(v) Containers having a water capac- systems utilizing storage containers
ity in excess of 50 pounds (approxi- other than those constructed in accord-
mately 21 pounds LP-Gas capacity), re- ance with DOT specifications. Para-
charged at the installation, shall be graph (b) of this section applies to this
provided with excess flow or backflow paragraph unless otherwise noted in
check valves to prevent the discharge paragraph (b) of this section.
of container contents in case of failure (2) Design pressure and classification of
of the filling or equalizing connection. storage containers. Storage containers
(7) Safety devices. (i) Containers shall shall be designed and classified in ac-
be provided with safety devices as re- cordance with Table H31.
quired by DOT regulations.
(ii) A final stage regulator of an LP- TABLE H31
Gas system (excluding any appliance
Minimum design pressure of con-
regulator) shall be equipped on the low- tainer, lb. per sq. in. gage
pressure side with a relief valve which For gases
with vapor 1949 edition of ASME
is set to start to discharge within the press. Not 1949 and Code (Par. U200,
Con- to exceed earlier edi- U201); 1950, 1952,
limits specified in Table H30. tainer lb. per sq. tions of 1956, 1959, 1962,
type in. gage at ASME 1965, and 1968 (Divi-
TABLE H30 100 F. Code (Par. sion 1) editions of
(37.8 C.) U68, U ASME Code; All edi-
Relief valve start-to-dis- 69) tions of APIASME
charge pressure setting Code 3
(percent of regulator
Regulator delivery pressure 1 80 1 80 1 80 1 100
delivery pressure)
100 100 100 125
Minimum Maximum 125 125 125 156
150 150 150 187
1 p.s.i.g. or less ............................. 200 300 175 175 175 219
Above 1 p.s.i.g. but not over 3 2 200 215 200 250
p.s.i.g ......................................... 140 200
1 New storage containers of the 80 type have not been au-
Above 3 p.s.i.g .............................. 125 200
thorized since Dec. 31, 1947.
2 Container type may be increased by increments of 25.
(iii) When a regulator or pressure re- The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 100% of
the container type designation when constructed under 1949
lief valve is used inside a building for or earlier editions of the ASME Code (Par. U68 and U69).
other than purposes specified in para- The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 125% of
the container type designation when constructed under: (1)
graphs (b)(6)(i) (a)(g) of this section, the 1949 ASME Code (Par. U200 and U201), (2) 1950,
the relief valve and the space above the 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions
of the ASME Code, and (3) all editions of the APIASME
regulator and relief valve diaphragms Code.
shall be vented to the outside air with 3 Construction of containers under the APIASME Code is
not authorized after July 1, 1961.
the discharge outlet located not less
than 3 feet horizontally away from any (3) Container valves and accessories,
building opening which is below such filler pipes, and discharge pipes. (i) The
321
filling pipe inlet terminal shall not be for vapor withdrawal systems and one-
located inside a building. For con- eighth inch in diameter for liquid with-
tainers with a water capacity of 125 drawal systems.
gallons or more, such terminals shall (e) An approved pressure-reducing
be located not less than 10 feet from regulator is directly attached to the
any building (see paragraph (b)(6)(ii) of outlet of the shutoff valve and is rig-
this section), and preferably not less idly supported, or that an approved
than 5 feet from any driveway, and pressure-reducing regulator is attached
shall be located in a protective housing to the outlet of the shutoff valve by
built for the purpose. means of a suitable flexible connection,
(ii) The filling connection shall be provided the regulator is adequately
fitted with one of the following: supported and properly protected on or
(a) Combination back-pressure check at the tank.
valve and excess flow valve. (v) All inlet and outlet connections
(b) One double or two single back- except safety relief valves, liquid level
pressure check valves. gaging devices and pressure gages on
(c) A positive shutoff valve, in con- containers of 2,000 gallons water capac-
junction with either: ity, or more, and on any container used
(1) An internal back-pressure valve, to supply fuel directly to an internal
or combustion engine, shall be labeled to
(2) An internal excess flow valve. designate whether they communicate
(iii) All openings in a container shall with vapor or liquid space. Labels may
be equipped with approved automatic be on valves.
excess flow valves except in the fol-
(vi) In lieu of an excess flow valve
lowing: Filling connections as provided
openings may be fitted with a quick-
in paragraph (d)(3)(ii) of this section;
closing internal valve which, except
safety relief connections, liquid-level
during operating periods shall remain
gaging devices as provided in para-
closed. The internal mechanism for
graphs (b)(7)(iv), (19)(iii), and (19)(viii)
such valves may be provided with a
of this section; pressure gage connec-
secondary control which shall be
tions as provided in paragraph (b)(7)(v)
equipped with a fusible plug (not over
of this section, as provided in para-
220 F. melting point) which will cause
graphs (d) (iv), (vi), and (vii) of this
the internal valve to close automati-
section.
cally in case of fire.
(iv) An excess flow valve is not re-
quired in the withdrawal service line (vii) Not more than two plugged
providing the following are complied openings shall be permitted on a con-
with: tainer of 2,000 gallons or less water ca-
(a) Such systems total water capac- pacity.
ity does not exceed 2,000 U.S. gallons. (viii) Containers of 125 gallons water
(b) The discharge from the service capacity or more manufactured after
outlet is controlled by a suitable July 1, 1961, shall be provided with an
manually operated shutoff valve which approved device for liquid evacuation,
is: the size of which shall be three-fourths
(1) Threaded directly into the service inch National Pipe Thread minimum. A
outlet of the container; or plugged opening will not satisfy this
(2) Is an integral part of a substantial requirement.
fitting threaded into or on the service (4) Safety devices. (i) All safety de-
outlet of the container; or vices shall comply with the following:
(3) Threaded directly into a substan- (a) All container safety relief devices
tial fitting threaded into or on the shall be located on the containers and
service outlet of the container. shall have direct communication with
(c) The shutoff valve is equipped with the vapor of space of the container.
an attached handwheel or the equiva- (b) In industrial and gas manufac-
lent. turing plants, discharge pipe from safe-
(d) The controlling orifice between ty relief valves on pipe lines within a
the contents of the container and the building shall discharge vertically up-
outlet of the shutoff valve does not ex- ward and shall be piped to a point out-
ceed five-sixteenths inch in diameter side a building.
322
(c) Safety relief device discharge ter- lief valves and fuse plugs shall have di-
minals shall be so located as to provide rect communication with the vapor
protection against physical damage space of the container.
and such discharge pipes shall be fitted (c) On a container having a water ca-
with loose raincaps. Return bends and pacity greater than 125 gallons, but not
restrictive pipefittings shall not be over 2,000 gallons, the discharge from
permitted. the safety relief valves shall be vented
(d) If desired, discharge lines from away from the container vertically up-
two or more safety relief devices lo- wards and unobstructed to the open air
cated on the same unit, or similar lines in such a manner as to prevent any im-
from two or more different units, may pingement of escaping gas upon the
be run into a common discharge head- container; loose-fitting rain caps shall
er, provided that the cross-sectional be used. Suitable provision shall be
area of such header be at least equal to made for draining condensate which
the sum of the cross-sectional area of may accumulate in the relief valve or
the individual discharge lines, and that its discharge pipe.
the setting of safety relief valves are (d) On containers of 125 gallons water
the same. capacity or less, the discharge from
(e) Each storage container of over safety relief devices shall be located
2,000 gallons water capacity shall be not less than 5 feet horizontally away
provided with a suitable pressure gage. from any opening into the building
(f) A final stage regulator of an LP- below the level of such discharge.
Gas system (excluding any appliance (e) On a container having a water ca-
regulator) shall be equipped on the low- pacity greater than 2,000 gallons, the
pressure side with a relief valve which discharge from the safety relief valves
is set to start to discharge within the shall be vented away from the con-
limits specified in Table H30. tainer vertically upwards to a point at
(g) When a regulator or pressure re- least 7 feet above the container, and
lief valve is installed inside a building, unobstructed to the open air in such a
the relief valve and the space above the manner as to prevent any impingement
regulator and relief valve diaphragms of escaping gas upon the container;
shall be vented to the outside air with loose-fitting rain caps shall be used.
the discharge outlet located not less Suitable provision shall be made so
than 3 feet horizontally away from any that any liquid or condensate that may
opening into the building which is accumulate inside of the safety relief
below such discharge. (These provisions valve or its discharge pipe will not
do not apply to individual appliance render the valve inoperative. If a drain
regulators when protection is other- is used, a means shall be provided to
wise provided. In buildings devoted ex- protect the container, adjacent con-
clusively to gas distribution purposes, tainers, piping, or equipment against
the space above the diaphragm need impingement of flame resulting from
not be vented to the outside.) ignition of product escaping from the
(ii) Safety devices for aboveground drain.
containers shall be provided as follows: (iii) On all containers which are in-
(a) Containers of 1,200 gallons water stalled underground and which contain
capacity or less which may contain liq- no liquid fuel until buried and covered,
uid fuel when installed above ground the rate of discharge of the spring-load-
shall have the rate of discharge re- ed relief valve installed thereon may be
quired by paragraph (b)(10)(ii) of this reduced to a minimum of 30 percent of
section provided by a spring-loaded re- the rate of discharge specified in para-
lief valve or valves. In addition to the graph (b)(10)(ii) of this section. Con-
required spring-loaded relief valve(s), tainers so protected shall not be uncov-
suitable fuse plug(s) may be used pro- ered after installation until the liquid
vided the total discharge area of the fuel has been removed therefrom. Con-
fuse plug(s) for each container does not tainers which may contain liquid fuel
exceed 0.25 square inch. before being installed under ground and
(b) The fusible metal of the fuse plugs before being completely covered with
shall have a yield temperature of 208 earth are to be considered aboveground
F. minimum and 220 F. maximum. Re- containers when determining the rate
323
of discharge requirement of the relief substantial masonry or noncombus-

valves. tible structural supports on firm ma-
(iv) On underground containers of sonry foundation.
more than 2,000 gallons water capacity, (ii) Aboveground containers shall be
the discharge from safety relief devices supported as follows:
shall be piped vertically and directly (a) Horizontal containers shall be
upward to a point at least 7 feet above mounted on saddles in such a manner
the ground. as to permit expansion and contrac-
Where there is a probability of the tion. Structural metal supports may be
manhole or housing becoming flooded, employed when they are protected
the discharge from regulator vent lines against fire in an approved manner.
shall be above the highest probable Suitable means of preventing corrosion
water level. All manholes or housings shall be provided on that portion of the
shall be provided with ventilated container in contact with the founda-
louvers or their equivalent, the area of tions or saddles.
such openings equaling or exceeding (b) Containers of 2,000 gallons water
the combined discharge areas of the capacity or less may be installed with
safety relief valves and other vent lines nonfireproofed ferrous metal supports
which discharge their content into the
if mounted on concrete pads or foot-
manhole housing.
ings, and if the distance from the out-
(v) Safety devices for vaporizers shall
side bottom of the container shell to
be provided as follows:
(a) Vaporizers of less than 1 quart the concrete pad, footing, or the
total capacity, heated by the ground or ground does not exceed 24 inches.
the surrounding air, need not be (iii) Any container may be installed
equipped with safety relief valves pro- with nonfireproofed ferrous metal sup-
vided that adequate tests certified by ports if mounted on concrete pads or
any of the authorities referred to in footings, and if the distance from the
paragraph (b)(2) of this section, dem- outside bottom of the container to the
onstrate that the assembly is safe ground does not exceed 5 feet, provided
without safety relief valves. the container is in an isolated location.
(b) No vaporizer shall be equipped (iv) Containers may be partially bur-
with fusible plugs. ied providing the following require-
(c) In industrial and gas manufac- ments are met:
turing plants, safety relief valves on (a) The portion of the container
vaporizers within a building shall be below the surface and for a vertical dis-
piped to a point outside the building tance not less than 3 inches above the
and be discharged upward. surface of the ground is protected to
(5) Reinstallation of containers. Con- resist corrosion, and the container is
tainers may be reinstalled if they do protected against settling and corro-
not show any evidence of harmful ex- sion as required for fully buried con-
ternal corrosion or other damage. tainers.
Where containers are reinstalled un- (b) Spacing requirements shall be as
derground, the corrosion resistant specified for underground tanks in
coating shall be put in good condition paragraph (b)(6)(ii) of this section.
(see paragraph (c)(7)(vi) of this sec-
(c) Relief valve capacity shall be as
tion). Where containers are reinstalled
required for aboveground containers.
above ground, the safety devices and
gaging devices shall comply with para- (d) Container is located so as not to
graph (c)(4) of this section and para- be subject to vehicular damage, or is
graph (b)(19) of this section respec- adequately protected against such
tively for aboveground containers. damage.
(6) Capacity of containers. A storage (e) Filling densities shall be as re-
container shall not exceed 90,000 gal- quired for above-ground containers.
lons water capacity. (v) Containers buried underground
(7) Installation of storage containers. (i) shall be placed so that the top of the
Containers installed above ground, ex- container is not less than 6 inches
cept as provided in paragraph (c)(7)(vii) below grade. Where an underground
of this section, shall be provided with container might be subject to abrasive
324
action or physical damage due to ve- to minimize the possibility of breakage

hicular traffic or other causes, then it or leakage of connections if the con-
shall be: tainer settles, moves, or is otherwise
(a) Placed not less than 2 feet below displaced.
grade, or (f) Skids, or lugs for attachment of
(b) Otherwise protected against such skids, shall be secured to the container
physical damage. in accordance with the code or rules
It will not be necessary to cover the under which the container is designed
portion of the container to which man- and built (with a minimum factor of
hole and other connections are affixed; safety of four) to withstand loading in
however, where necessary, protection any direction equal to four times the
shall be provided against vehicular weight of the container and attach-
damage. When necessary to prevent ments when filled to the maximum per-
floating, containers shall be securely missible loaded weight.
anchored or weighted. (viii) Field welding where necessary
(vi)(a) Containers shall be given a shall be made only on saddle plates or
protective coating before being placed brackets which were applied by the
under ground. This coating shall be manufacturer of the tank.
equivalent to hot-dip galvanizing or to (ix) For aboveground containers, se-
two coatings of red lead followed by a cure anchorage or adequate pier height
heavy coating of coal tar or asphalt. In shall be provided against possible con-
lowering the container into place, care tainer flotation wherever sufficiently
shall be exercised to prevent damage to high floodwater might occur.
the coating. Any damage to the coat- (x) When permanently installed con-
ing shall be repaired before backfilling. tainers are interconnected, provision
(b) Containers shall be set on a firm
shall be made to compensate for expan-
foundation (firm earth may be used)
sion, contraction, vibration, and set-
and surrounded with earth or sand
tling of containers, and inter-
firmly tamped in place.
connecting piping. Where flexible con-
(vii) Containers with foundations at-
nections are used, they shall be of an
tached (portable or semiportable con-
approved type and shall be designed for
tainers with suitable steel runners
or skids and popularly known in the a bursting pressure of not less than five
industry as skid tanks) shall be de- times the vapor pressure of the product
signed, installed, and used in accord- at 100 F. The use of nonmetallic hose
ance with these rules subject to the fol- is prohibited for permanently inter-
lowing provisions: connecting such containers.
(a) If they are to be used at a given (xi) Container assemblies listed for
general location for a temporary period interchangeable installation above
not to exceed 6 months they need not ground or under ground shall conform
have fire-resisting foundations or sad- to the requirements for aboveground
dles but shall have adequate ferrous installations with respect to safety re-
metal supports. lief capacity and filling density. For
(b) They shall not be located with the installation above ground all other re-
outside bottom of the container shell quirements for aboveground installa-
more than 5 feet above the surface of tions shall apply. For installation
the ground unless fire-resisting sup- under ground all other requirements
ports are provided. for underground installations shall
(c) The bottom of the skids shall not apply.
be less than 2 inches or more than 12 (8) Protection of container accessories.
inches below the outside bottom of the (i) Valves, regulating, gaging, and
container shell. other container accessory equipment
(d) Flanges, nozzles, valves, fittings, shall be protected against tampering
and the like, having communication and physical damage. Such accessories
with the interior of the container, shall shall also be so protected during the
be protected against physical damage. transit of containers intended for in-
(e) When not permanently located on stallation underground.
fire-resisting foundations, piping con- (ii) On underground or combination
nections shall be sufficiently flexible aboveground-underground containers,
325
the service valve handwheel, the ter- (13) Container-charging plants. (i) The
minal for connecting the hose, and the container-charging room shall be lo-
opening through which there can be a cated not less than:
flow from safety relief valves shall be (a) Ten feet from bulk storage con-
at least 4 inches above the container tainers.
and this opening shall be located in the (b) [Reserved]
dome or housing. Underground systems (ii) Tank truck filling station outlets
shall be so installed that all the above shall be located not less than:
openings, including the regulator vent, (a) [Reserved]
are located above the normal max- (b) Ten feet from pumps and compres-
imum water table. sors if housed in one or more separate
(iii) All connections to underground buildings.
(iii) The pumps or compressors may
containers shall be located within a
be located in the container-charging
substantial dome, housing, or manhole
room or building, in a separate build-
and with access thereto protected by a
ing, or outside of buildings. When
substantial cover. housed in a separate building, such
(9) Drips for condensed gas. Where va- building (a small noncombustible
porized gas on the low-pressure side of weather cover is not to be construed as
the system may condense to a liquid at a building) shall be located not less
normal operating temperatures and than:
pressures, suitable means shall be pro- (a) Ten feet from bulk storage tanks.
vided for revaporization of the conden- (b) [Reserved]
sate. (c) Twenty-five feet from sources of
(10) Damage from vehicles. When dam- ignition.
age to LP-Gas systems from vehicular (iv) When a part of the container-
traffic is a possibility, precautions charging building is to be used for a
against such damage shall be taken. boiler room or where open flames or
(11) Drains. No drains or blowoff lines similar sources of ignition exist or are
shall be directed into or in proximity employed, the space to be so occupied
to sewer systems used for other pur- shall be separated from container
poses. charging room by a partition wall or
(12) General provisions applicable to walls of fire-resistant construction
systems in industrial plants (of 2,000 gal- continuous from floor to roof or ceil-
lons water capacity and more) and to bulk ing. Such separation walls shall be
filling plants. (i) When standard watch without openings and shall be joined to
service is provided, it shall be extended the floor, other walls, and ceiling or
to the LP-Gas installation and per- roof in a manner to effect a permanent
sonnel properly trained. gas-tight joint.
(v) Electrical equipment and installa-
(ii) If loading and unloading are nor-
tions shall conform with paragraphs (b)
mally done during other than daylight
(17) and (18) of this section.
hours, adequate lights shall be pro-
(14) Fire protection. (i) Each bulk
vided to illuminate storage containers,
plant shall be provided with at least
control valves, and other equipment. one approved portable fire extinguisher
(iii) Suitable roadways or means of having a minimum rating of 12B, C.
access for extinguishing equipment (ii) In industrial installations involv-
such as wheeled extinguishers or fire ing containers of 150,000 gallons aggre-
department apparatus shall be pro- gate water capacity or more, provision
vided. shall be made for an adequate supply of
(iv) To minimize trespassing or tam- water at the container site for fire pro-
pering, the area which includes con- tection in the container area, unless
tainer appurtenances, pumping equip- other adequate means for fire control
ment, loading and unloading facilities, are provided. Water hydrants shall be
and cylinder-filling facilities shall be readily accessible and so spaced as to
enclosed with at least a 6-foot-high in- provide water protection for all con-
dustrial type fence unless otherwise tainers. Sufficient lengths of firehose
adequately protected. There shall be at shall be provided at each hydrant loca-
least two means of emergency access. tion on a hose cart, or other means
326
provided to facilitate easy movement dustrial Trucks, NFPA 5051969, which

of the hose in the container area. It is is incorporated by reference as speci-
desirable to equip the outlet of each fied in 1910.6.
hose line with a combination fog noz- (v) Engines on vehicles shall be shut
zle. A shelter shall be provided to pro- down while fueling if the fueling oper-
tect the hose and its conveyor from the ation involves venting to the atmos-
weather. phere.
(15) [Reserved] (3) Design pressure and classification of
(16) Lighting. Electrical equipment fuel containers. (i) Except as covered in
and installations shall conform to paragraphs (e)(3) (ii) and (iii) of this
paragraphs (b) (17) and (18) of this sec- section, containers shall be in accord-
tion. ance with Table H32.
(17) Vaporizers for internal combustion (ii) Fuel containers for use in indus-
engines. The provisions of paragraph trial trucks (including lift trucks)
(e)(8) of this section shall apply. shall be either DOT containers author-
(18) Gas regulating and mixing equip- ized for LP-Gas service having a min-
ment for internal combustion engines. The imum service pressure of 240 p.s.i.g. or
provisions of paragraph (e)(9) of this minimum Container Type 250. Under
section shall apply. 1950 and later ASME codes, this means
(e) Liquefied petroleum gas as a motor a 312.5p.s.i.g. design pressure con-
fuel(1) Application. (i) This paragraph tainer.
applies to internal combustion engines,
fuel containers, and pertinent equip- TABLE H32
ment for the use of liquefied petroleum Minimum design pressure of con-
gases as a motor fuel on easily mov- tainer, lb. per sq. in. gage
For gases
able, readily portable units including with vapor 1949 edition of ASME
self-propelled vehicles. Con- press. Not 1949 and Code (Par. U200,
to exceed earlier edi- U201); 1950, 1952,
(ii) Fuel containers and pertinent tainer lb. per sq. tions of 1956, 1959, 1962,
type
equipment for internal combustion en- in. gage at ASME 1965, and 1968 (Divi-
100 F. Code (Par. sion 1) editions of
gines using liquefied petroleum gas (37.8 C.) U68, U ASME Code; All edi-
where installation is of the stationary 69) tions of APIASME
Code 2
type are covered by paragraph (d) of
this section. This paragraph does not 1 200 215Z 200 250
apply to containers for transportation 1 Container type may be increased by increments of 25.
of liquefied petroleum gases nor to ma- The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 100% of
the container type designation when constructed under 1949
rine fuel use. All requirements of para- or earlier editions of the ASME Code (Par. U68 and U69).
graph (b) of this section apply to this The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 125% of
the container type designation when constructed under: (1)
paragraph, unless otherwise noted in the 1949 ASME Code (Par. U200 and U201), (2) 1950,
paragraph (b) of this section. 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions
of the ASME Code, and (3) all editions of the APIASME
(2) General. (i) Fuel may be used from Code.
the cargo tank of a truck while in tran- 2 Construction of containers under the APIASME Code is
sit, but not from cargo tanks on trail-
ers or semitrailers. The use of fuel (iii) Containers manufactured and
from the cargo tanks to operate sta- maintained under DOT specifications
tionary engines is permitted providing and regulations may be used as fuel
wheels are securely blocked. containers. When so used they shall
(ii) Passenger-carrying vehicles shall conform to all requirements of this
not be fueled while passengers are on paragraph.
board. (iv) All container inlets and outlets
(iii) Industrial trucks (including lift except safety relief valves and gaging
trucks) equipped with permanently devices shall be labeled to designate
mounted fuel containers shall be whether they communicate with vapor
charged outdoors. Charging equipment or liquid space. Labels may be on
shall comply with the provisions of valves.
paragraph (h) of this section. (4) Installation of fuel containers. (i)
(iv) LP-Gas fueled industrial trucks Containers shall be located in a place
shall comply with the Standard for and in a manner to minimize the possi-
Type Designations, Areas of Use, Main- bility of damage to the container. Con-
tenance and Operation of Powered In- tainers located in the rear of trucks
327
and buses, when protected by substan- valves on the container on liquid and
tial bumpers, will be considered in con- vapor lines must be readily accessible.
formance with this requirement. Fuel (iii) With the exceptions of paragraph
containers on passenger-carrying vehi- (e)(5)(iv)(c) of this section, filling con-
cles shall be installed as far from the nections equipped with approved auto-
engine as is practicable, and the pas- matic back-pressure check valves, and
senger space and any space containing safety relief valves, all connections to
radio equipment shall be sealed from containers having openings for the flow
the container space to prevent direct of gas in excess of a No. 54 drill size
seepage of gas to these spaces. The con- shall be equipped with approved auto-
tainer compartment shall be vented to matic excess flow valves to prevent dis-
the outside. In case the fuel container charge of content in case connections
is mounted near the engine or the ex- are broken.
haust system, the container shall be (iv) Liquid-level gaging devices:
shielded against direct heat radiation. (a) Variable liquid-level gages which
(ii) Containers shall be installed with require the venting of fuel to the at-
as much clearance as practicable but mosphere shall not be used on fuel con-
never less than the minimum road tainers of industrial trucks (including
clearance of the vehicle under max- lift trucks).
imum spring deflection. This minimum (b) On portable containers that may
clearance shall be to the bottom of the be filled in the vertical and/or hori-
container or to the lowest fitting on zontal position, the fixed liquid-level
the container or housing, whichever is gage must indicate maximum per-
lower. mitted filling level for both vertical
(iii) Permanent and removable fuel and horizontal filling with the con-
containers shall be securely mounted tainer oriented to place the safety re-
to prevent jarring loose, slipping, or ro- lief valve in communication with the
tating, and the fastenings shall be de- vapor space.
signed and constructed to withstand (c) In the case of containers used
static loading in any direction equal to solely in farm tractor service, and
twice the weight of the tank and at- charged at a point at least 50 feet from
tachments when filled with fuel using a any important building, the fixed liq-
safety factor of not less than four uid-level gaging device may be so con-
based on the ultimate strength of the structed that the outward flow of con-
material to be used. Field welding, tainer content exceeds that passed by a
when necessary, shall be made only on No. 54 drill size opening, but in no case
saddle plates, lugs or brackets, origi- shall the flow exceed that passed by a
nally attached to the container by the No. 31 drill-size opening. An excess flow
tank manufacturer. valve is not required. Fittings equipped
(iv) Fuel containers on buses shall be with such restricted drill size opening
permanently installed. and container on which they are used
(v) Containers from which vapor only shall be marked to indicate the size of
is to be withdrawn shall be installed the opening.
and equipped with suitable connections (d) All valves and connections on
to minimize the accidental withdrawal containers shall be adequately pro-
of liquid. tected to prevent damage due to acci-
(5) Valves and accessories. (i) Con- dental contact with stationary objects
tainer valves and accessories shall have or from loose objects thrown up from
a rated working pressure of at least 250 the road, and all valves shall be safe-
p.s.i.g., and shall be of a type suitable guarded against damage due to colli-
for liquefied petroleum gas service. sion, overturning or other accident.
(ii) The filling connection shall be For farm tractors where parts of the
fitted with an approved double back- vehicle provide such protection to
pressure check valve, or a positive valves and fittings, the foregoing re-
shutoff in conjunction with an internal quirements shall be considered ful-
back-pressure check valve. On a remov- filled. However, on removable type con-
able container the filler valve may be a tainers the protection for the fittings
hand operated shutoff valve with an in- shall be permanently attached to the
ternal excess flow valve. Main shutoff container.
328
(e) When removable fuel containers the required flow of gas from the safety
are used, means shall be provided in relief valve. Such discharge line shall
the fuel system to minimize the escape be able to withstand the pressure re-
of fuel when the containers are ex- sulting from the discharge of vapor
changed. This may be accomplished by when the safety relief valve is in the
either of the following methods: full open position. When flexibility is
(1) Using an approved automatic necessary, flexible metal hose or tub-
quick-closing coupling (a type closing ing shall be used.
in both directions when uncoupled) in (iv) Portable containers equipped for
the fuel line, or volumetric filling may be filled in ei-
(2) Closing the valve at the fuel con- ther the vertical or horizontal position
tainer and allowing the engine to run only when oriented to place the safety
until the fuel in the line is consumed. relief valve in communication with the
(6) Pipingincluding pipe, tubing, and vapor space.
fittings. (i) Pipe from fuel container to (v) Paragraph (b)(10)(xii) of this sec-
first-stage regulator shall be not less tion for hydrostatic relief valves shall
than schedule 80 wrought iron or steel apply.
(black or galvanized), brass or copper; (8) Vaporizers. (i) Vaporizers and any
or seamless copper, brass, or steel tub- part thereof and other devices that
ing. Steel tubing shall have a min- may be subjected to container pressure
imum wall thickness of 0.049 inch. shall have a design pressure of at least
Steel pipe or tubing shall be ade- 250 p.s.i.g.
quately protected against exterior cor- (ii) Each vaporizer shall have a valve
rosion. Copper tubing shall be types K or suitable plug which will permit sub-
or L or equivalent having a minimum stantially complete draining of the va-
wall thickness of 0.032 inch. Approved porizer. It shall be located at or near
flexible connections may be used be- the lowest portion of the section occu-
tween container and regulator or be- pied by the water or other heating me-
tween regulator and gas-air mixer dium.
within the limits of approval. The use (iii) Vaporizers shall be securely fas-
of aluminum pipe or tubing is prohib- tened so as to minimize the possibility
ited. In the case of removable con- of becoming loosened.
tainers an approved flexible connection (iv) Each vaporizer shall be perma-
shall be used between the container nently marked at a visible point as fol-
and the fuel line. lows:
(ii) All piping shall be installed, (a) With the design pressure of the
braced, and supported so as to reduce fuel-containing portion in p.s.i.g.
to a minimum the possibility of vibra- (b) With the water capacity of the
tion strains or wear. fuel-containing portion of the vapor-
(7) Safety devices. (i) Spring-loaded in- izer in pounds.
ternal type safety relief valves shall be (v) Devices to supply heat directly to
used on all motor fuel containers. a fuel container shall be equipped with
(ii) The discharge outlet from safety an automatic device to cut off the sup-
relief valves shall be located on the ply of heat before the pressure inside
outside of enclosed spaces and as far as the fuel container reaches 80 percent of
practicable from possible sources of ig- the start to discharge pressure setting
nition, and vented upward within 45 de- of the safety relief device on the fuel
grees of the vertical in such a manner container.
as to prevent impingement of escaping (vi) Engine exhaust gases may be
gas upon containers, or parts of vehi- used as a direct source of heat supply
cles, or on vehicles in adjacent lines of for the vaporization of fuel if the mate-
traffic. A rain cap or other protector rials of construction of those parts of
shall be used to keep water and dirt the vaporizer in contact with exhaust
from collecting in the valve. gases are resistant to the corrosive ac-
(iii) When a discharge line from the tion of exhaust gases and the vaporizer
container safety relief valve is used, system is designed to prevent excessive
the line shall be metallic, other than pressures.
aluminum, and shall be sized, located, (vii) Vaporizers shall not be equipped
and maintained so as not to restrict with fusible plugs.
329
(9) Gas regulating and mixing equip- the ignition is off or if the engine
ment. (i) Approved automatic pressure should stop.
reducing equipment shall be installed (v) The capacity of LP-Gas con-
in a secure manner between the fuel tainers used with such engines shall
supply container and gas-air mixer for comply with the applicable occupancy
the purpose of reducing the pressure of provision of paragraph (c)(5) of this sec-
the fuel delivered to the gas-air mixer. tion.
(ii) An approved automatic shutoff (13) Industrial trucks inside buildings.
valve shall be provided in the fuel sys- (i) LP-Gas-fueled industrial trucks are
tem at some point ahead of the inlet of permitted to be used in buildings and
the gas-air mixer, designed to prevent structures.
flow of fuel to the mixer when the igni- (ii) No more than two LP-Gas con-
tion is off and the engine is not run- tainers shall be used on an industrial
ning. In the case of industrial trucks truck for motor fuel purposes.
and engines operating in buildings (iii)(iv) [Reserved]
other than those used exclusively to (v) Industrial trucks shall not be
house engines, the automatic shutoff parked and left unattended in areas of
valve shall be designed to operate if the possible excessive heat or sources of ig-
engine should stop. Atmospheric type nition.
regulators (zero governors) shall be (14) Garaging LP-Gas-fueled vehicles.
considered adequate as an automatic (i) LP-Gas-fueled vehicles may be
shutoff valve only in cases of outdoor stored or serviced inside garages pro-
operation such as farm tractors, con- vided there are no leaks in the fuel sys-
struction equipment, irrigation pump tem and the fuel tanks are not filled
engines, and other outdoor stationary beyond the maximum filling capacity
engine installations. specified in paragraph (b)(12)(i) of this
(iii) The source of the air for combus- section.
tion shall be completely isolated from (ii) LP-Gas-fueled vehicles being re-
the passenger compartment, ven- paired in garages shall have the con-
tilating system, or air-conditioning tainer shutoff valve closed except when
system. fuel is required for engine operation.
(10) [Reserved] (iii) Such vehicles shall not be
(11) Stationary engines in buildings. parked near sources of heat, open
Stationary engines and gas turbines in- flames, or similar sources of ignition
stalled in buildings, including portable or near open pits unless such pits are
engines used instead of or to supple- adequately ventilated.
ment stationary engines, shall comply (f) Storage of containers awaiting use or
with the Standard for the Institution resale(1) Application. This paragraph
and Use of Stationary Combustion En- shall apply to the storage of portable
gines and Gas Turbines, NFPA 371970, containers not in excess of 1,000 pounds
and the appropriate provisions of para- water capacity, filled or partially
graphs (b), (c), and (d) of this section. filled, at user location but not con-
(12) Portable engines in buildings. (i) nected for use, or in storage for resale
Portable engines may be used in build- by dealers or resellers. This paragraph
ings only for emergency use, except as shall not apply to containers stored at
provided by subparagraph (11) of this charging plants or at plants devoted
paragraph. primarily to the storage and distribu-
(ii) Exhaust gases shall be discharged tion of LP-Gas or other petroleum
to outside the building or to an area products.
where they will not constitute a haz- (2) General. (i) Containers in storage
ard. shall be located so as to minimize ex-
(iii) Provision shall be made to sup- posure to excessive temperature rise,
ply sufficient air for combustion and physical damage, or tampering by un-
cooling. authorized persons.
(iv) An approved automatic shutoff (ii) Containers when stored inside
valve shall be provided in the fuel sys- shall not be located near exits, stair-
tem ahead of the engine, designed to ways, or in areas normally used or in-
prevent flow of fuel to the engine when tended for the safe exit of people.
330
(iii) Container valves shall be pro- definition of nationally recognized

tected while in storage as follows: testing laboratory.
(a) By setting into recess of con- (v) Such rooms shall have no open
tainer to prevent the possibility of flames for heating or lighting.
their being struck if the container is (vi) Such rooms shall be adequately
dropped upon a flat surface, or ventilated both top and bottom to the
(b) By ventilated cap or collar, fas- outside only. The openings from such
tened to container capable of with- vents shall be at least 5 feet away from
standing blow from any direction any other opening into any building.
equivalent to that of a 30-pound weight (vii) The floors of such rooms shall
dropped 4 feet. Construction must be not be below ground level. Any space
such that a blow will not be trans- below the floor shall be of solid fill or
mitted to a valve or other connection. properly ventilated to the open air.
(iv) The outlet valves of containers in (viii) Such storage rooms shall not be
storage shall be closed. located adjoining the line of property
(v) Empty containers which have occupied by schools, churches, hos-
been in LP-Gas service when stored in- pitals, athletic fields or other points of
side, shall be considered as full con- public gathering.
tainers for the purpose of determining (ix) Fixed electrical equipment shall
the maximum quantity of LP-Gas per- be installed in accordance with para-
mitted by this paragraph. graph (b)(18) of this section.
(3) [Reserved] (6) Storage outside of buildings. (i)
(4) Storage within buildings not fre- Storage outside of buildings, for con-
quented by the public (such as industrial tainers awaiting use or resale, shall be
buildings). (i) The quantity of LP-Gas located in accordance with Table H33
stored shall not exceed 300 pounds (ap- with respect to:
proximately 2,550 cubic feet in vapor (a) The nearest important building or
form) except as provided in subpara- group of buildings;
graph (5) of this paragraph. (b) [Reserved]
(ii) Containers carried as a part of (c) Busy thoroughfares;
service equipment on highway mobile TABLE H33
vehicles are not to be considered in the
total storage capacity in subdivision (i) Quantity of LP-Gas Stored Distance
of this subparagraph provided such ve- 500 pounds or less .............................................. 0
hicles are stored in private garages, 501 to 2,500 pounds ........................................... 10
and are limited to one container per 2,501 to 6,000 pounds ........................................ 10 feet
6,001 to 10,000 pounds ...................................... 20 feet
vehicle with an LP-Gas capacity of not Over 10,000 pounds ............................................ 25 feet
more than 100 pounds. All container 1 Container or containers shall be at least 10 feet from any
valves shall be closed. building on adjoining property, any sidewalk, or any of the ex-
(5) Storage within special buildings or posures described in 1910.110(f)(6)(i) (c) or (d) of this
paragraph.
rooms. (i) The quantity of LP-Gas
stored in special buildings or rooms (ii) Containers shall be in a suitable
shall not exceed 10,000 pounds. enclosure or otherwise protected
(ii) The walls, floors, and ceilings of against tampering.
container storage rooms that are with- (7) Fire protection. Storage locations
in or adjacent to other parts of the other than supply depots separated and
building shall be constructed of mate- located apart from dealer, reseller, or
rial having at least a 2-hour fire resist- user establishments shall be provided
ance rating. with at least one approved portable fire
(iii) A portion of the exterior walls or extinguisher having a minimum rating
roof having an area not less than 10 of 8B, C.
percent of that of the combined area of (g) [Reserved]
the enclosing walls and roof shall be of (h) Liquefied petroleum gas service sta-
explosion relieving construction. tions(1) Application. This paragraph
(iv) Each opening from such storage applies to storage containers, and dis-
rooms to other parts of the building pensing devices, and pertinent equip-
shall be protected by a 112 hour (B) fire ment in service stations where LP-Gas
door listed by a nationally recognized is stored and is dispensed into fuel
testing laboratory. Refer to 1910.7 for tanks of motor vehicles. See paragraph
331
(e) of this section for requirements cov- (iii) All openings in the container ex-
ering use of LP-Gas as a motor fuel. All cept those listed below shall be
requirements of paragraph (b) of this equipped with approved excess flow
section apply to this paragraph unless check valves:
otherwise noted. (a) Filling connections as provided in
(2) Design pressure and classification of subdivision (i) of this subparagraph.
storage containers. Storage containers (b) Safety relief connections as pro-
shall be designed and classified in ac- vided in paragraph (b)(7)(ii) of this sec-
cordance with Table H34. tion.
(c) Liquid-level gaging devices as pro-
TABLE H34 vided in paragraphs (b)(7)(iv) and
Minimum design pressure of con- (19)(iv) of this section.
tainer, lb. per sq. in. gage (d) Pressure gage connections as pro-
For gases
with vapor 1949 edition of ASME vided in paragraph (b)(7)(v) of this sec-
Con- press. Not 1949 and Code (Par. U200, tion.
to exceed earlier edi- U201); 1950, 1952,
tainer lb. per sq. tions of 1956, 1959, 1962, (iv) All container inlets and outlets
type in. gage at ASME 1965, and 1968 (Divi- except those listed below shall be la-
100 F. Code (Par. sion 1) editions of
(37.8 C.) U68, U ASME Code; All edi- beled to designate whether they con-
69) tions of APIASME nect with vapor or liquid (labels may
Code 2
be on valves):
1 200 215 200 250 (a) Safety relief valves.
1 Container type may be increased by increments of 25. (b) Liquid-level gaging devices.
The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 100 per- (c) Pressure gages.
cent of the container type designation when constructed
under 1949 or earlier editions of the ASME Code (Par. U68 (v) Each storage container shall be
and U69). The minimum design pressure of containers shall provided with a suitable pressure gage.
be 125 percent of the container type designation when con-
structed under: (1) The 1949 ASME Code (Paragraphs U200 (4) Safety-relief valves. (i) All safety-
and U201), (2) 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and relief devices shall be installed as fol-
1968 (Division 1) editions of the ASME Code, and (3) all edi-
tions of the API-ASME Code. lows:
2 Construction of containers under the API-ASME Code is
(a) On the container and directly con-
nected with the vapor space.
(3) Container valves and accessories. (i) (b) Safety-relief valves and discharge
A filling connection on the container piping shall be protected against phys-
shall be fitted with one of the fol- ical damage. The outlet shall be pro-
lowing: vided with loose-fitting rain caps.
(a) A combination back-pressure There shall be no return bends or re-
check and excess flow valve. strictions in the discharge piping.
(b) One double or two single back- (c) The discharge from two or more
pressure valves. safety relief valves having the same
(c) A positive shutoff valve, in con- pressure settings may be run into a
junction with either, common discharge header. The cross-
(1) An internal back-pressure valve, sectional area of such header shall be
or at least equal to the sum of the cross-
(2) On internal excess flow valve. sectional areas of the individual dis-
In lieu of an excess flow valve, filling charges.
connections may be fitted with a (d) Discharge from any safety relief
quick-closing internal valve, which device shall not terminate in any
shall remain closed except during oper- building nor beneath any building.
ating periods. The mechanism for such (ii) Aboveground containers shall be
valves may be provided with a sec- provided with safety relief valves as
ondary control which will cause it to follows:
close automatically in case of fire. (a) The rate of discharge, which may
When a fusible plug is used its melting be provided by one or more valves,
point shall not exceed 220 F. shall be not less than that specified in
(ii) A filling pipe inlet terminal not paragraph (b)(10)(ii) of this section.
on the container shall be fitted with a (b) The discharge from safety relief
positive shutoff valve in conjunction valves shall be vented to the open air
with either; unobstructed and vertically upwards in
(a) A black pressure check valve, or such a manner as to prevent any im-
(b) An excess flow check valve. pingement of escaping gas upon the
332
container; loose-fitting rain caps shall (b) Readily ignitible material includ-
be used. On a container having a water ing weeds and long dry grass, shall be
capacity greater than 2,000 gallons, the removed within 10 feet of containers.
discharge from the safety relief valves (c) The minimum separation between
shall be vented away from the con- LP-Gas containers and flammable liq-
tainer vertically upwards to a point at uid tanks shall be 20 feet and the min-
least 7 feet above the container. Suit- imum separation between a container
able provisions shall be made so that and the centerline of the dike shall be
any liquid or condensate that may ac- 10 feet.
cumulate inside of the relief valve or (d) LP-Gas containers located near
its discharge pipe will not render the flammable liquid containers shall be
valve inoperative. If a drain is used, a protected against the flow or accumu-
means shall be provided to protect the lation of flammable liquids by diking,
container, adjacent containers, piping, diversion curbs, or grading.
or equipment against impingement of (e) LP-Gas containers shall not be lo-
flame resulting from ignition of the cated within diked areas for flammable
product escaping from the drain. liquid containers.
(iii) Underground containers shall be (f) Field welding is permitted only on
provided with safety relief valves as saddle plates or brackets which were
follows: applied by the container manufacturer.
(a) The discharge from safety-relief (g) When permanently installed con-
valves shall be piped vertically upward tainers are interconnected, provision
to a point at least 10 feet above the shall be made to compensate for expan-
ground. The discharge lines or pipes sion, contraction, vibration, and set-
shall be adequately supported and pro- tling of containers and interconnecting
tected against physical damage. piping. Where flexible connections are
(b) [Reserved] used, they shall be of an approved type
(c) If no liquid is put into a container and shall be designed for a bursting
until after it is buried and covered, the pressure of not less than five times the
rate of discharge of the relief valves vapor pressure of the product at 100 F.
may be reduced to not less than 30 per- The use of nonmetallic hose is prohib-
cent of the rate shown in paragraph ited for interconnecting such con-
(b)(10)(ii) of this section. If liquid fuel tainers.
is present during installation of con- (h) Where high water table or flood
tainers, the rate of discharge shall be conditions may be encountered protec-
the same as for aboveground con- tion against container flotation shall
tainers. Such containers shall not be be provided.
uncovered until emptied of liquid fuel.
(ii) Aboveground containers shall be
(5) Capacity of liquid containers. Indi- installed in accordance with this sub-
vidual liquid storage containers shall division.
not exceed 30,000 gallons water capac-
(a) Containers may be installed hori-
ity.
zontally or vertically.
(6) Installation of storage containers.
(b) Containers shall be protected by
(i)(a) Each storage container used ex-
crash rails or guards to prevent phys-
clusively in service station operation
ical damage unless they are so pro-
shall comply with the following table
tected by virtue of their location. Vehi-
which specifies minimum distances to
cles shall not be serviced within 10 feet
a building and groups of buildings.
of containers.
Minimum distances (c) Container foundations shall be of
Above- Between substantial masonry or other non-
Water capacity per container (gal-
lons) ground above- combustible material. Containers shall
and underground
ground containers be mounted on saddles which shall per-
(feet) (feet) mit expansion and contraction, and
shall provide against the excessive con-
Up to 2,000 .................................... 25 3
Over 2,000 ..................................... 50 5
centration of stresses. Corrosion pro-
tection shall be provided for tank-
NOTE: The above distances may be reduced to not less
than 10 feet for service station buildings of other than wood mounting areas. Structural metal con-
frame construction. tainer supports shall be protected
333
against fire. This protection is not re- (ii) The filling pipe inlet terminal
quired on prefabricated storage and shall not be located within a building
pump assemblies, mounted on a com- nor within 10 feet of any building or
mon base, with container bottom not driveway. It shall be protected against
more than 24 inches above ground and physical damage.
whose water capacity is 2,000 gallons or (9) Piping, valves, and fittings. (i) Pip-
less if the piping connected to the storing may be underground, above ground,
age and pump assembly is sufficiently or a combination of both. It shall be
flexible to minimize the possibility of well supported and protected against
breakage or leakage in the event of physical damage and corrosion.
failure of the container supports. (ii) Piping laid beneath driveways
(iii) Underground containers shall be shall be installed to prevent physical
installed in accordance with this sub- damage by vehicles.
division. (iii) Piping shall be wrought iron or
(a) Containers shall be given a pro- steel (black or galvanized), brass or
tective coating before being placed copper pipe; or seamless copper, brass,
under ground. This coating shall be or steel tubing and shall be suitable for
equivalent to hot-dip galvanizing or to a minimum pressure of 250 p.s.i.g. Pipe
two coatings of red lead followed by a joints may be screwed, flanged, brazed,
heavy coating of coal tar or asphalt. In or welded. The use of aluminum alloy
lowering the container into place, care piping or tubing is prohibited.
shall be exercised to minimize abrasion (iv) All shutoff valves (liquid or gas)
or other damage to the coating. Dam- shall be suitable for liquefied petro-
age to the coating shall be repaired be- leum gas service and designed for not
fore back-filling. less than the maximum pressure to
(b) Containers shall be set on a firm which they may be subjected. Valves
foundation (firm earth may be used) which may be subjected to container
and surrounded with earth or sand pressure shall have a rated working
firmly tamped in place. Backfill should pressure of at least 250 p.s.i.g.
be free of rocks or other abrasive mate- (v) All materials used for valve seats,
rials. packing, gaskets, diaphragms, etc.,
(c) A minimum of 2 feet of earth shall be resistant to the action of LP-
cover shall be provided. Where ground Gas.
conditions make compliance with this (vi) Fittings shall be steel, malleable
requirement impractical, equivalent iron, or brass having a minimum work-
protection against physical damage ing pressure of 250 p.s.i.g. Cast iron
shall be provided. The portion of the pipe fittings, such as ells, tees, and
container to which manhole and other unions shall not be used.
connections are attached need not be (vii) All piping shall be tested after
covered. If the location is subjected to assembly and proved free from leaks at
vehicular traffic, containers shall be not less than normal operating pres-
protected by a concrete slab or other sures.
cover adequate to prevent the weight (viii) Provision shall be made for ex-
of a loaded vehicle imposing con- pansion, contraction, jarring, and vi-
centrated direct loads on the container bration, and for settling. This may be
shell. accomplished by flexible connections.
(7) Protection of container fittings. (10) Pumps and accessories. All pumps
Valves, regulators, gages, and other and accessory equipment shall be suit-
container fittings shall be protected able for LP-Gas service, and designed
against tampering and physical dam- for not less than the maximum pres-
age. sure to which they may be subjected.
(8) Transport truck unloading point. (i) Accessories shall have a minimum
During unloading, the transport truck rated working pressure of 250 p.s.i.g.
shall not be parked on public thorough- Positive displacement pumps shall be
fares and shall be at least 5 feet from equipped with suitable pressure actu-
storage containers, and shall be posi- ated bypass valves permitting flow
tioned so that shutoff valves are read- from pump discharge to storage con-
ily accessible. tainer or pump suction.
334
(11) Dispensing devices. (i) Meters, performed by a competent attendant

vapor separators, valves, and fittings who shall remain at the LP-Gas dis-
in the dispenser shall be suitable for penser during the entire transfer oper-
LP-Gas service and shall be designed ation.
for a minimum working pressure of 250 (12) Additional rules. There shall be no
p.s.i.g. smoking on the driveway of service
(ii) Provisions shall be made for vent- stations in the dispensing areas or
ing LP-Gas contained in a dispensing transport truck unloading areas. Con-
device to a safe location. spicuous signs prohibiting smoking
(iii) Pumps used to transfer LP-Gas shall be posted within sight of the cus-
shall be equipped to allow control of tomer being served. Letters on such
the flow and to prevent leakage or ac- signs shall be not less than 4 inches
cidental discharge. Means shall be pro- high. The motors of all vehicles being
vided outside the dispensing device to fueled shall be shut off during the fuel-
readily shut off the power in the event ing operations.
of fire or accident. (13) Electrical. Electrical equipment
(iv) A manual shutoff valve and an and installations shall conform to
excess flow check valve shall be in- paragraphs (b) (17) and (18) of this sec-
stalled downstream of the pump and tion.
ahead of the dispenser inlet. (14) Fire protection. Each service sta-
(v)(a) Dispensing hose shall be resist- tion shall be provided with at least one
ant to the action of LP-Gas in the liq- approved portable fire extinguisher
uid phase and designed for a minimum having at least an 8B, C, rating.
bursting pressure of 1,250 p.s.i.g. (i) Scope(1) Application. (i) Para-
(b) An excess flow check valve or graph (b) of this section applies to in-
automatic shutoff valve shall be installations made in accordance with
stalled at the terminus of the liquid the requirements of paragraphs (c), (d),
line at the point of attachment of the (e), (g), and (h) of this section, except
dispensing hose. as noted in each of those paragraphs.
(vi)(a) LP-Gas dispensing devices
(ii) Paragraphs (c) through (h) of this
shall be located not less than 10 feet
section apply as provided in each of
from aboveground storage containers
those paragraphs.
greater than 2,000 gallons water capac-
ity. The dispensing devices shall not be (2) Inapplicability. This section does
less than 20 feet from any building (not not apply to:
including canopies), basement, cellar, (i) Marine and pipeline terminals,
pit, or line of adjoining property which natural gas processing plants, refin-
may be built upon and not less than 10 eries, or tank farms other than those
feet from sidewalks, streets, or thor- at industrial sites.
oughfares. No drains or blowoff lines (ii) LP-Gas refrigerated storage sys-
shall be directed into or in proximity tems;
to the sewer systems used for other (iii) LP-Gas when used with oxygen.
purposes. The requirements of 1910.253 shall
(b) LP-Gas dispensing devices shall apply to such use;
be installed on a concrete foundation (iv) LP-Gas when used in utility gas
or as part of a complete storage and plants. The National Fire Protection
dispensing assembly mounted on a Association Standard for the Storage
common base, and shall be adequately and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum
protected from physical damage. Gases at Utility Gas Plants, NFPA No.
(c) LP-Gas dispensing devices shall 591968, shall apply to such use;
not be installed within a building ex- (v) Low-pressure (not in excess of
cept that they may be located under a one-half pound per square inch or 14
weather shelter or canopy provided inches water column) LP-Gas piping
this area is not enclosed on more than systems, and the installation and oper-
two sides. If the enclosing sides are ad- ation of residential and commercial ap-
jacent to each other, the area shall be pliances including their inlet connec-
properly ventilated. tions, supplied through such systems.
(vii) The dispensing of LP-Gas into For such systems, the National Fire
the fuel container of a vehicle shall be Protection Association Standard for
335
the Installation of Gas Appliances and (ii) Cylinder. A container of 1,000

Gas Piping, NFPA 541969 shall apply. pounds of water capacity or less con-
(3) Retroactivity. Unless otherwise structed in accordance with Depart-
stated, it is not intended that the pro- ment of Transportation specifications.
visions of this section be retroactive. (iii) Code. The Boiler and Pressure
(i) Existing plants, appliances, equip- Vessel Code, Section VIII, Unfired
ment, buildings, structures, and instal- Pressure Vessels of the American Soci-
lations for the storage, handling or use ety of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
of LP-Gas, which were in compliance 1968.
with the current provisions of the Na- (iv) Container. Includes all vessels,
tional Fire Protection Association tanks, cylinders, or spheres used for
Standard for the Storage and Handling transportation, storage, or application
of Liquefied Petroleum Gases NFPA of anhydrous ammonia.
No. 58, at the time of manufacture or (v) DOT. U.S. Department of Trans-
installation may be continued in use, if portation.
such continued use does not constitute (vi) Design pressure is identical to the
a recognized hazard that is causing or term Maximum Allowable Working Pres-
is likely to cause death or serious sure used in the Code.
physical harm to employees. (vii) Farm vehicle (implement of hus-
(ii) Stocks of equipment and appli- bandry). A vehicle for use on a farm on
ances on hand in such locations as which is mounted a container of not
manufacturers storage, distribution over 1,200 gallons water capacity.
warehouses, and dealers storage and (viii) Filling density. the percent ratio
showrooms, which were in compliance of the weight of the gas in a container
with the current provisions of the Na- to the weight of water at 60 F. that
tional Fire Protection Association the container will hold.
Standard for the Storage and Handling (ix) Gas. Anhydrous ammonia in ei-
of Liquefied Petroleum Gases, NFPA ther the gaseous or liquefied state.
No. 58, at the time of manufacture, (x) Gas masks. Gas masks must be ap-
may be placed in service, if such use proved by the National Institute for
does not constitute a recognized hazard Occupational Safety and Health
that is causing or is likely to cause (NIOSH) under 42 CFR part 84 for use
death or serious physical harm to em- with anhydrous ammonia.
ployees. (xi) Capacity. Total volume of the
container in standard U.S. gallons.
FR 49747, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, (xii) DOT specificationsRegulations
1984; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 25094, of the Department of Transportation
June 20, 1990; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 58 FR published in 49 CFR Chapter I.
35309, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9237, 9238, Mar. 7, (b) Basic rules. This paragraph applies
1996; 63 FR 33466, June 18, 1998] to all paragraphs of this section unless
otherwise noted.
1910.111 Storage and handling of an- (1) Approval of equipment and systems.
hydrous ammonia. Each appurtenance shall be approved in
(a) General(1) Scope. (i) This stand- accordance with paragraph (b)(1) (i),
ard is intended to apply to the design, (ii), (iii), or (iv) of this section.
construction, location, installation, (i) It was installed before February 8,
and operation of anhydrous ammonia 1973, and was approved, tested, and in-
systems including refrigerated ammo- stalled in accordance with either the
nia storage systems. provisions of the American National
(ii) This standard does not apply to: Standard for the Storage and Handling
(a) Ammonia manufacturing plants. of Anhydrous Ammonia, K61.1, or the
(b) Refrigeration plants where ammo- Fertilizer Institute Standards for the
nia is used solely as a refrigerant. Storage and Handling of Agricultural
(2) Definitions. As used in this sec- Anhydrous Ammonia, M1, (both of
tion. which are incorporated by reference as
(i) Appurtenances. All devices such as specified in 1910.6) in effect at the
pumps, compressors, safety relief de- time of installation; or
vices, liquid-level gaging devices, (ii) It is accepted, or certified, or list-
valves and pressure gages. ed, or labeled, or otherwise determined
336
to be safe by a nationally recognized spections of the production of such

testing laboratory; or equipment, and whose labeling indi-
(iii) It is a type which no nationally cates compliance with nationally rec-
recognized testing laboratory does, or ognized standards or tests to determine
will undertake to, accept, certify, list, safe use in a specified manner. Certified
label, or determine to be safe; and such means it has been tested and found by
equipment is inspected or tested by a nationally recognized testing labora-
any Federal, State, municipal, or other tory to meet nationally recognized
local authority responsible for enforc- standards or to be safe for use in a
ing occupational safety provisions of a specified manner, or is of a kind whose
Federal, State, municipal or other production is periodically inspected by
local law, code, or regulation per- a nationally recognized testing labora-
taining to the storage, handling, trans- tory, and it bears a label, tag, or other
port, and use of anhydrous ammonia, record of certification.
and found to be in compliance with ei- (vi) For the purposes of this para-
ther the provisions of the American graph (b)(1), refer to 1910.7 for defini-
National Standard for the Storage and tion of nationally recognized testing
Handling of Anhydrous Ammonia, laboratory.
K61.1, or the Fertilizer Institute Stand- (2) Requirements for construction, origi-
ards for the Storage and Handling of nal test and requalification of nonrefrig-
Agricultural Anhydrous Ammonia, M erated containers. (i) Containers used
1, in effect at the time of installation; with systems covered in paragraphs (c),
or (f), (g), and (h) of this section shall be
(iv) It is a custom-designed and cus- constructed and tested in accordance
tom-built unit, which no nationally with the Code except that construction
recognized testing laboratory, or Fed- under Table UW12 at a basic joint effi-
eral, State, municipal or local author- ciency of under 80 percent is not au-
ity responsible for the enforcement of a thorized.
Federal, State, municipal, or local law, (ii) Containers built according to the
code or regulation pertaining to the Code do not have to comply with Para-
storage, transportation and use of an- graphs UG125 to UG128 inclusive, and
hydrous ammonia is willing to under- Paragraphs UG132 and UG133 of the
take to accept, certify, list, label or de- Code.
termine to be safe, and the employer (iii) Containers exceeding 36 inches in
has on file a document attesting to its diameter or 250 gallons water capacity
safe condition following the conduct of shall be constructed to comply with
appropriate tests. The document shall one or more of the following:
be signed by a registered professional (a) Containers shall be stress relieved
engineer or other person having special after fabrication in accordance with
training or experience sufficient to per- the Code, or
mit him to form an opinion as to safety (b) Cold-form heads when used, shall
of the unit involved. The document be stress relieved, or
shall set forth the test bases, test data (c) Hot-formed heads shall be used.
and results, and also the qualifications (iv) Welding to the shell, head, or any
of the certifying person. other part of the container subject to
(v) For the purposes of this para- internal pressure shall be done in com-
graph (b)(1), the word listed means that pliance with the Code. Other welding is
equipment is of a kind mentioned in a permitted only on saddle plates, lugs,
list which is published by a nationally or brackets attached to the container
recognized laboratory which makes by the container manufacturer.
periodic inspection of the production of (v) Containers used with systems cov-
such equipment, and states such equip- ered in paragraph (e) of this section
ment meets nationally recognized shall be constructed and tested in ac-
standards or has been tested and found cordance with the DOT specifications.
safe for use in a specified manner. La- (vi) The provisions of subdivision (i)
beled means there is attached to it a of this subparagraph shall not be con-
label, symbol, or other identifying strued as prohibiting the continued use
mark of a nationally recognized testing or reinstallation of containers con-
laboratory which, makes periodic instructed and maintained in accordance
337
with the 1949, 1950, 1952, 1956, 1959, and tainers that are filled with weight.
1962 editions of the Code or any revi- Markings shall be in increments of not
sions thereof in effect at the time of more than 20 F.
fabrication.
Above ground and under ground: System
(3) Marking nonrefrigerated containers. nameplate or on liquid-level gaging device.
(i) System nameplates, when required,
shall be permanently attached to the (i) With the total outside surface area
system so as to be readily accessible of the container in square feet.
for inspection and shall include mark- Under ground: System nameplate.
ings as prescribed in subdivision (ii) of Above ground: No requirement.
this subparagraph.
(ii) Each container or system covered (j) Marking specified on the con-
in paragraphs (c), (f), (g), and (h) of this tainer shall be on the container itself
section shall be marked as specified in or on a nameplate permanently at-
the following: tached to it.
(a) With a notation Anhydrous Am- (4) Marking refrigerated containers.
monia. Each refrigerated container shall be
(b) With a marking identifying com- marked with nameplate on the outer
pliance with the rules of the Code covering in an accessible place as spec-
under which the container is con- ified in the following:
structed. (i) With the notation, Anhydrous
Ammonia.
Under ground: Container and system name-
(ii) With the name and address of the
plate.
Above ground: Container. builder and the date of fabrication.
(iii) With the water capacity of the
(c) With a notation whether the sys- container in gallons, U.S. Standard.
tem is designed for underground or (iv) With the design pressure.
aboveground installation or both. (v) With the minimum temperature
(d) With the name and address of the in degrees Fahrenheit for which the
supplier of the system or the trade container was designed.
name of the system and with the date (vi) The maximum allowable water
of fabrication. level to which the container may be
Under ground and above ground: System filled for test purposes.
nameplate. (vii) With the density of the product
(e) With the water capacity of the in pounds per cubic foot for which the
container in pounds at 60 F. or gal- container was designed.
lons, U.S. Standard. (viii) With the maximum level to
which the container may be filled with
Under ground: Container and system name- liquid anhydrous ammonia.
plate.
(5) Location of containers. (i) Consider-
Above ground: Container.
ation shall be given to the physio-
(f) With the design pressure in pounds logical effects of ammonia as well as to
per square inch. adjacent fire hazards in selecting the
Under ground: Container and system name- location for a storage container. Con-
plate. tainers shall be located outside of
Above ground: Container. buildings or in buildings or sections
thereof especially provided for this
(g) With the wall thickness of the
purpose.
shell and heads.
(ii) Permanent storage containers
Under ground: Container and system name- shall be located at least 50 feet from a
plate. dug well or other sources of potable
Above ground: Container. water supply, unless the container is a
(h) With marking indicating the part of a water-treatment installation.
maximum level to which the container (iii)(iv) [Reserved]
may be filled with liquid anhydrous (v) Storage areas shall be kept free of
ammonia at temperatures between 20 readily ignitible materials such as
F. and 130 F. except on containers waste, weeds, and long dry grass.
provided with fixed level indicators, (6) Container appurtenances. (i) All ap-
such as fixed length dip tubes, or con- purtenances shall be designed for not
338
less than the maximum working pres- (7) Piping, tubing, and fittings. (i) All
sure of that portion of the system on piping, tubing, and fittings shall be
which they are installed. All appur- made of material suitable for anhy-
tenances shall be fabricated from ma- drous ammonia service.
terials proved suitable for anhydrous (ii) All piping, tubing, and fittings
ammonia service. shall be designed for a pressure not less
(ii) All connections to containers ex- than the maximum pressure to which
cept safety relief devices, gaging de- they may be subjected in service.
vices, or those fitted with No. 54 drill- (iii) All refrigerated piping shall con-
size orifice shall have shutoff valves lo- form to the Refrigeration Piping Code,
cated as close to the container as prac- American National Standards Insti-
ticable. tute, B31.51966 with addenda B31.1a
(iii) Excess flow valves where re- 1968, which is incorporated by reference
quired by these standards shall close as specified in 1910.6, as it applies to
automatically at the rated flows of ammonia.
vapor or liquid as specified by the man- (iv) Piping used on non-refrigerated
ufacturer. The connections and line in- systems shall be at least American So-
cluding valves and fittings being pro- ciety for Testing and Materials
tected by an excess flow valve shall (ASTM) A5369 Grade B Electric Re-
have a greater capacity than the rated sistance Welded and Electric Flash
flow of the excess flow valve so that Welded Pipe, which is incorporated by
the valve will close in case of failure of reference as specified in 1910.6, or
the line or fittings. equal. Such pipe shall be at least
schedule 40 when joints are welded, or
(iv) Liquid-level gaging devices that
welded and flanged. Such pipe shall be
require bleeding of the product to the
at least schedule 80 when joints are
atmosphere and which are so con-
threaded. Threaded connections shall
structed that outward flow will not ex-
not be back-welded. Brass, copper, or
ceed that passed by a No. 54 drill-size
galvanized steel pipe shall not be used.
opening need not be equipped with ex-
(v) Tubing made of brass, copper, or
cess flow valves.
other material subject to attack by
(v) Openings from the container or ammonia shall not be used.
through fittings attached directly on (vi) Cast iron fittings shall not be
the container to which pressure gage used but this shall not prohibit the use
connections are made need not be of fittings made specifically for ammo-
equipped with excess flow valves if nia service of malleable, nodular, or
such openings are not larger than No. high strength gray iron meeting Amer-
54 drill size. ican Society for Testing and Materials
(vi) Excess flow and back pressure (ASTM) A4768, ASTM 39568, or ASTM
check valves where required by the A12666 Class B or C all of which are in-
standards in this section shall be lo- corporated by reference as specified in
cated inside of the container or at a 1910.6.
point outside as close as practicable to (vii) Joint compounds shall be resist-
where the line enters the container. In ant to ammonia.
the latter case installation shall be (8) Hose specifications. (i) Hose used in
made in such manner that any undue ammonia service shall conform to the
strain beyond the excess flow or back joint Agricultural Ammonia Insti-
pressure check valve will not cause tuteRubber Manufacturers Associa-
breakage between the container and tion Specifications for Anhydrous Am-
the valve. monia Hose.
(vii) Excess flow valves shall be de- (ii) Hose subject to container pres-
signed with a bypass, not to exceed a sure shall be designed for a minimum
No. 60 drill-size opening to allow working pressure of 350 p.s.i.g. and a
equalization of pressures. minimum burst pressure of 1,750 p.s.i.g.
(viii) All excess flow valves shall be Hose assemblies, when made up, shall
plainly and permanently marked with be capable of withstanding a test pres-
the name or trademark of the manufac- sure of 500 p.s.i.g.
turer, the catalog number, and the (iii) Hose and hose connections lo-
rated capacity. cated on the low-pressure side of flow
339
control of pressure-reducing valves TABLE H36Continued

shall be designed for a bursting pres- [Minimum required rate of discharge in cubic feet per minute
of air at 120 percent of the maximum permitted start to dis-
sure of not less than 5 times the pres- charge pressure of safety relief valves]
sure setting of the safety relief devices
protecting that portion of the system Surface area (sq. ft.) Flow rate
CFM air
but not less than 125 p.s.i.g. All connec-
tions shall be so designed and con- 160 ....................................................................... 1,420
structed that there will be no leakage 165 ....................................................................... 1,460
170 ....................................................................... 1,500
when connected. 175 ....................................................................... 1,530
(iv) Where hose is to be used for 180 ....................................................................... 1,570
transferring liquid from one container 185 ....................................................................... 1,600
190 ....................................................................... 1,640
to another, wet hose is rec- 195 ....................................................................... 1,670
ommended. Such hose shall be 200 ....................................................................... 1,710
equipped with approved shutoff valves 210 ....................................................................... 1,780
at the discharge end. Provision shall be 220 ....................................................................... 1,850
230 ....................................................................... 1,920
made to prevent excessive pressure in 240 ....................................................................... 1,980
the hose. 250 ....................................................................... 2,050
(v) On all hose one-half inch outside 260 ....................................................................... 2,120
270 ....................................................................... 2,180
diameter and larger, used for the trans- 280 ....................................................................... 2,250
fer of anhydrous ammonia liquid or 290 ....................................................................... 2,320
vapor, there shall be etched, cast, or 300 ....................................................................... 2,380
impressed at 5-foot intervals the fol- 310 ....................................................................... 2,450
320 ....................................................................... 2,510
lowing information. 330 ....................................................................... 2,570
340 ....................................................................... 2,640
Anhydrous Ammonia xxx p.s.i.g. (max- 350 ....................................................................... 2,700
imum working pressure), manufacturers 360 ....................................................................... 2,760
name or trademark, year of manufacture. 370 ....................................................................... 2,830
380 ....................................................................... 2,890
In lieu of this requirement the same in- 390 ....................................................................... 2,950
formation may be contained on a 400 ....................................................................... 3,010
450 ....................................................................... 3,320
nameplate permanently attached to 500 ....................................................................... 3,620
the hose. 550 ....................................................................... 3,910
600 ....................................................................... 4,200
TABLE H36 650 ....................................................................... 4,480
[Minimum required rate of discharge in cubic feet per minute 700 ....................................................................... 4,760
of air at 120 percent of the maximum permitted start to dis- 750 ....................................................................... 5,040
charge pressure of safety relief valves] 800 ....................................................................... 5,300
850 ....................................................................... 5,590
Flow rate 900 ....................................................................... 5,850
Surface area (sq. ft.) CFM air 950 ....................................................................... 6,120
1,000 .................................................................... 6,380
20 ......................................................................... 258 1,050 .................................................................... 6,640
25 ......................................................................... 310 1,100 .................................................................... 6,900
30 ......................................................................... 360 1,150 .................................................................... 7,160
35 ......................................................................... 408 1,200 .................................................................... 7,410
40 ......................................................................... 455 1,250 .................................................................... 7,660
45 ......................................................................... 501 1,300 .................................................................... 7,910
50 ......................................................................... 547 1,350 .................................................................... 8,160
55 ......................................................................... 591
1,400 .................................................................... 8,410
60 ......................................................................... 635
1,450 .................................................................... 8,650
65 ......................................................................... 678
1,500 .................................................................... 8,900
70 ......................................................................... 720
1,550 .................................................................... 9,140
75 ......................................................................... 762
80 ......................................................................... 804 1,600 .................................................................... 9,380
85 ......................................................................... 845 1,650 .................................................................... 9,620
90 ......................................................................... 885 1,700 .................................................................... 9,860
95 ......................................................................... 925 1,750 .................................................................... 10,090
100 ....................................................................... 965 1,800 .................................................................... 10,330
105 ....................................................................... 1,010 1,850 .................................................................... 10,560
110 ....................................................................... 1,050 1,900 .................................................................... 10,800
115 ....................................................................... 1,090 1,950 .................................................................... 11,030
120 ....................................................................... 1,120 2,000 .................................................................... 11,260
125 ....................................................................... 1,160 2,050 .................................................................... 11,490
130 ....................................................................... 1,200 2,100 .................................................................... 11,720
135 ....................................................................... 1,240 2,150 .................................................................... 11,950
140 ....................................................................... 1,280 2,200 .................................................................... 12,180
145 ....................................................................... 1,310 2,250 .................................................................... 12,400
150 ....................................................................... 1,350 2,300 .................................................................... 12,630
155 ....................................................................... 1,390 2,350 .................................................................... 12,850
340
TABLE H36Continued Containers Minimum Maximum

[Minimum required rate of discharge in cubic feet per minute (percent) (percent)
of air at 120 percent of the maximum permitted start to dis-
charge pressure of safety relief valves] ASMEU68, U69 ....................... 110 125
ASMEU200, U201 ................... 95 100
Flow rate ASME 1959, 1956, 1952, or 1962 95 100
Surface area (sq. ft.) CFM air APIASME ..................................... 95 100
U.S. Coast Guard .......................... 95 100
2,400 .................................................................... 13,080
2,450 .................................................................... 13,300
2,500 .................................................................... 13,520 As required by DOT Regulations.
(iii) Safety relief devices used in sys-
Surface Area=total outside surface area of tems covered by paragraphs (c), (f), (g),
container in square feet. When the surface and (h) of this section shall be con-
area is not stamped on the nameplate or structed to discharge at not less than
when the marking is not legible the area can the rates required in paragraph (b)(9)(i)
be calculated by using one of the following of this section before the pressure is in
formulas: excess of 120 percent (not including the
(1) Cylindrical container with hemi- 10 percent tolerance referred to in
spherical heads:
paragraph (b)(9)(ii) of this section) of
Area=overall length in feet times outside di- the maximum permitted start-to-dis-
ameter in feet times 3.1416.
charge pressure setting of the device.
(2) Cylindrical container with other than (iv) Safety-relief valves shall be so
hemispherical heads:
arranged that the possibility of tam-
Area=(overall length in feet plus 0.3 outside pering will be minimized. If the pres-
diameter in feet) times outside diameter in
sure setting adjustment is external,
feet times 3.1416.
the relief valves shall be provided with
(3) Spherical container:
means for sealing the adjustment.
Area=outside diameter in feet squared times (v) Shutoff valves shall not be in-
3.1416.
stalled between the safety-relief valves
Flow RateCFM Air=cubic feet per minute and the container; except, that a shut-
of air required at standard conditions, 60 F. off valve may be used where the ar-
and atmospheric pressure (14.7 p.s.i.a.).
The rate of discharge may be interpolated
rangement of this valve is such as al-
for intermediate values of surface area. For ways to afford full required capacity
containers with total outside surface area flow through the relief valves.
greater than 2,500 square feet, the required (vi) Safety-relief valves shall have di-
flow rate can be calculated using the for- rect communication with the vapor
mula: Flow Rate CFM Air=22.11 A 0 82, space of the container.
where A=outside surface area of the con- (vii) Each container safety-relief
tainer in square feet.
valve used with systems covered by
(9) Safety relief devices. (i) Every con- paragraphs (c), (f), (g), and (h) of this
tainer used in systems covered by para- section shall be plainly and perma-
graphs (c), (f), (g), and (h) of this sec- nently marked with the symbol NH3
tion shall be provided with one or more or AA; with the pressure in pounds-
safety relief valves of the spring-loaded per-square-inch gage at which the
or equivalent type. The discharge from valve is set to start-to-discharge; with
safety-relief valves shall be vented the actual rate of discharge of the
away from the container upward and valve at its full open position in cubic
unobstructed to the atmosphere. All feet per minute of air at 60 F. and at-
relief-valve discharge openings shall mospheric pressure; and with the man-
have suitable rain caps that will allow ufacturers name and catalog number.
free discharge of the vapor and prevent Example: NH3 2504050 Air indicates
entrance of water. Provision shall be that the valve is suitable for use on an
made for draining condensate which anhydrous ammonia container, is set
may accumulate. The rate of the dis- to start-to-discharge at a pressure of
charge shall be in accordance with the 250 p.s.i.g., and that its rate of dis-
provisions of Table H36. charge at full open position (subdivi-
(ii) Container safety-relief valves sions (ii) and (iii) of this subparagraph)
shall be set to start-to-discharge as fol- is 4,050 cubic feet per minute of air.
lows, with relation to the design pres- (viii) The flow capacity of the relief
sure of the container: valve shall not be restricted by any
341
connection to it on either the upstream (ii) The employer shall require the
or downstream side. continuous presence of an attendant in
(ix) A hydrostatic relief valve shall the vicinity of the operation during
be installed between each pair of valves such time as ammonia is being trans-
in the liquid ammonia piping or hose ferred.
where liquid may be trapped so as to (iii) Containers shall be charged or
relieve into the atmosphere at a safe used only upon authorization of the
location. owner.
(10) General. (iv) Containers shall be gaged and
(i) [Reserved] charged only in the open atmosphere or
(ii) Stationary storage installations in buildings or areas thereof provided
must have at least two suitable gas for that purpose.
masks in readily-accessible locations. (v) Pumps used for transferring am-
Full-face masks with ammonia can- monia shall be those manufactured for
isters that have been approved by that purpose.
NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84 are suit- (a) Pumps shall be designed for at
able for emergency action involving least 250 p.s.i.g. working pressure.
most anhydrous ammonia leaks, par- (b) Positive displacement pumps
ticularly leaks that occur outdoors. shall have, installed off the discharged
For respiratory protection in con- port, a constant differential relief
centrated ammonia atmospheres, a valve discharging into the suction port
self-contained breathing apparatus is of the pump through a line of sufficient
required. size to carry the full capacity of the
(iii) Stationary storage installations pump at relief valve setting, which set-
shall have an easily accessible shower ting and installation shall be according
or a 50-gallon drum of water. to the pump manufacturers rec-
(iv) Each vehicle transporting ammo- ommendations.
nia in bulk except farm applicator ve- (c) On the discharge side of the pump,
hicles shall carry a container of at before the relief valve line, there shall
least 5 gallons of water and shall be be installed a pressure gage graduated
equipped with a full face mask. from 0 to 400 p.s.i.
(11) Charging of containers. (i) The fill- (d) Plant piping shall contain shutoff
ing densities for containers that are valves located as close as practical to
not refrigerated shall not exceed the pump connections.
following: (vi) Compressors used for transfer-
ring or refrigerating ammonia shall be
Percent by Percent by recommended for ammonia service by
Type of container weight volume
the manufacturer.
AbovegroundUninsulated ............ 56 82 (a) Compressors shall be designed for
AbovegroundUninsulated ............ .................. 87.5 at least 250 p.s.i.g. working pressure.
AbovegroundInsulated ................. 57 83.5
UndergroundUninsulated ............. 58 85
(b) Plant piping shall contain shutoff
DOTIn accord with DOT regula- valves located as close as practical to
tions.. compressor connections.
(c) A relief valve large enough to dis-
(ii) Aboveground uninsulated con- charge the full capacity of the com-
tainers may be charged 87.5 percent by pressor shall be connected to the dis-
volume provided the temperature of charge before any shutoff valve.
the anhydrous ammonia being charged (d) Compressors shall have pressure
is determined to be not lower than 30 gages at suction and discharge grad-
F. or provided the charging of the con- uated to at least one and one-half
tainer is stopped at the first indication times the maximum pressure that can
of frost or ice formation on its outside be developed.
surface and is not resumed until such (e) Adequate means, such as drain-
frost or ice has disappeared. able liquid trap, shall be provided on
(12) Transfer of liquids. (i) Anhydrous the compressor suction to minimize
ammonia shall always be at a tempera- the entry of liquid into the compressor.
ture suitable for the material of con- (vii) Loading and unloading systems
struction and the design of the receiv- shall be protected by suitable devices
ing container. to prevent emptying of the storage
342
container or the container being loaded (iv) Gaging devices shall have a de-
or unloaded in the event of severance sign pressure equal to or greater than
of the hose. Backflow check valves or the design pressure of the container on
properly sized excess flow valves shall which they are installed.
be installed where necessary to provide (v) Fixed tube liquid-level gages shall
such protection. In the event that such be designed and installed to indicate
valves are not practical, remotely op- that level at which the container is
erated shutoff valves may be installed. filled to 85 percent of its water capac-
(13) Tank car unloading points and op- ity in gallons.
erations. (i) Provisions for unloading (vi) Gage glasses of the columnar
tank cars shall conform to the applica- type shall be restricted to stationary
ble recommendations contained in the storage installations. They shall be
DOT regulations. equipped with shutoff valves having
(ii) The employer shall insure that metallic handwheels, with excess-flow
unloading operations are performed by valves, and with extra heavy glass ade-
reliable persons properly instructed quately protected with a metal housing
and given the authority to monitor applied by the gage manufacturer.
careful compliance with all applicable They shall be shielded against the di-
procedures. rect rays of the sun.
(iii) Caution signs shall be so placed (15) [Reserved]
on the track or car as to give necessary (16) Electrical equipment and wiring. (i)
warning to persons approaching the car Electrical equipment and wiring for
from open end or ends of siding and use in ammonia installations shall be
shall be left up until after the car is general purpose or weather resistant as
unloaded and disconnected from dis- appropriate.
charge connections. Signs shall be of (ii) Electrical systems shall be in-
metal or other suitable material, at stalled and maintained in accordance
least 12 by 15 inches in size and bear with subpart S of this part.
the words STOPTank Car Con- (c) Systems utilizing stationary, non-
nected or STOPMen at Work the refrigerated storage containers. This
word, STOP, being in letters at least paragraph applies to stationary, non-
4 inches high and the other words in refrigerated storage installations uti-
letters at least 2 inches high. lizing containers other than those cov-
(iv) The track of a tank car siding ered in paragraph (e) of this section.
shall be substantially level. Paragraph (b) of this section applies to
(v) Brakes shall be set and wheels this paragraph unless otherwise noted.
blocked on all cars being unloaded. (1) Design pressure and construction of
(14) Liquid-level gaging device. (i) Each containers. The minimum design pres-
container except those filled by weight sure for nonrefrigerated containers
shall be equipped with an approved liq- shall be 250 p.s.i.g.
uid-level gaging device. A thermometer (2) Container valves and accessories,
well shall be provided in all containers filling and discharge connections. (i)
not utilizing a fixed liquid-level gaging Each filling connection shall be pro-
device. vided with combination back-pressure
(ii) All gaging devices shall be ar- check valve and excess-flow valve; one
ranged so that the maximum liquid double or two single back-pressure
level to which the container is filled is check valves; or a positive shutoff
readily determined. valve in conjunction with either an in-
(iii) Gaging devices that require ternal back-pressure check valve or an
bleeding of the product to the atmos- internal excess flow valve.
phere such as the rotary tube, fixed (ii) All liquid and vapor connections
tube, and slip tube devices shall be de- to containers except filling pipes, safe-
signed so that the maximum opening of ty relief connections, and liquid-level
the bleed valve is not larger than No. gaging and pressure gage connections
54 drill size unless provided with an ex- provided with orifices not larger than
cess flow valve. (This requirement does No. 54 drill size as required in para-
not apply to farm vehicles used for the graphs (b)(6) (iv) and (v) of this section
application of ammonia as covered in shall be equipped with excess-flow
paragraph (h) of this section.) valves.
343
(iii) Each storage container shall be structed and show no evidence of seri-
provided with a pressure gage grad- ous corrosion.
uated from 0 to 400 p.s.i. Gages shall be (ii) Where containers are reinstalled
designated for use in ammonia service. above ground, safety devices or gaging
(iv) All containers shall be equipped devices shall comply with paragraph
with vapor return valves. (b)(9) of this section and this paragraph
(3) Safety-relief devices. (i) Every con- respectively for aboveground con-
tainer shall be provided with one or tainers.
more safety-relief valves of the spring- (5) Installation of storage containers. (i)
loaded or equivalent type in accord- Containers installed above ground, ex-
ance with paragraph (b)(9) of this sec- cept as provided in paragraph (c)(5)(v)
tion. of this section shall be provided with
(ii) The rate of discharge of spring- substantial concrete or masonry sup-
loaded safety relief valves installed on ports, or structural steel supports on
underground containers may be re- firm concrete or masonry foundations.
duced to a minimum of 30 percent of All foundations shall extend below the
the rate of discharge specified in Table frost line.
H36. Containers so protected shall not (ii) Horizontal aboveground con-
be uncovered after installation until tainers shall be so mounted on founda-
the liquid ammonia has been removed. tions as to permit expansion and con-
traction. Every container shall be sup-
Containers which may contain liquid
ported to prevent the concentration of
ammonia before being installed under-
excessive loads on the supporting por-
ground and before being completely
tion of the shell. That portion of the
covered with earth are to be considered
container in contact with foundations
aboveground containers when deter-
or saddles shall be protected against
mining the rate of discharge require-
corrosion.
ments of the safety-relief valves.
(iii) Containers installed under
(iii) On underground installations ground shall be so placed that the top
where there is a probability of the of the container is below the frost line
manhole or housing becoming flooded, and in no case less than 2 feet below
the discharge from vent lines shall be the surface of the ground. Should
located above the high water level. All ground conditions make compliance
manholes or housings shall be provided with these requirements impracticable,
with ventilated louvers or their equiva- installation shall be made otherwise to
lent, the area of such openings equal- prevent physical damage. It will not be
ling or exceeding combined discharge necessary to cover the portion of the
areas of safety-relief valves and vent container to which manhole and other
lines which discharge their content connections are affixed. When nec-
into the manhole housing. essary to prevent floating, containers
(iv) Vent pipes, when used, shall not shall be securely anchored or weighted.
be restricted or of smaller diameter (iv) Underground containers shall be
than the relief-valve outlet connection. set on a firm foundation (firm earth
(v) If desired, vent pipes from two or may be used) and surrounded with
more safety-relief devices located on earth or sand well tamped in place. The
the same unit, or similar lines from container, prior to being placed under
two or more different units may be run ground, shall be given a corrosion re-
into a common discharge header, pro- sisting protective coating. The con-
vided the capacity of such header is at tainer thus coated shall be so lowered
least equal to the sum of the capacities into place as to prevent abrasion or
of the individual discharge lines. other damage to the coating.
(4) Reinstallation of containers. (i) Con- (v) Containers with foundations at-
tainers once installed under ground tached (portable or semiportable tank
shall not later be reinstalled above containers with suitable steel run-
ground or under ground, unless they ners or skids and commonly known
successfully withstand hydrostatic in the industry as skid tanks) shall
pressure retests at the pressure speci- be designed and constructed in accord-
fied for the original hydrostatic test as ance with paragraph (c)(1) of this sec-
required by the code under which con- tion.
344
(vi) Secure anchorage or adequate start-to-discharge pressure setting of

pier height shall be provided against the safety-relief valve.
container flotation wherever suffi- (2) Installation of refrigerated storage
ciently high flood water might occur. containers. (i) Containers shall be sup-
(vii) The distance between under- ported on suitable noncombustible
ground containers of over 2,000 gallons foundations designed to accommodate
capacity shall be at least 5 feet. the type of container being used.
(6) Protection of appurtenances. (i) (ii) Adequate protection against flo-
Valves, regulating, gaging, and other tation or other water damage shall be
appurtenances shall be protected provided wherever high flood water
against tampering and physical dam- might occur.
age. Such appurtenances shall also be (iii) Containers for product storage at
protected during transit of containers. less than 32 F. shall be supported in
(ii) All connections to underground such a way, or heat shall be supplied,
containers shall be located within a to prevent the effects of freezing and
dome, housing, or manhole and with consequent frost heaving.
access thereto by means of a substan- (3) Shutoff valves. When operating
tial cover. conditions make it advisable, a check
(7) Damage from vehicles. Precaution valve shall be installed on the fill con-
shall be taken against damage to am- nection and a remotely operated shut-
monia systems from vehicles. off valve on other connections located
(d) Refrigerated storage systems. This below the maximum liquid level.
paragraph applies to systems utilizing (4) Safety relief devices. (i) Safety re-
containers with the storage of anhy- lief valves shall be set to start-to-dis-
drous ammonia under refrigerated con- charge at a pressure not in excess of
ditions. All applicable rules of para- the design pressure of the container
graph (b) of this section apply to this and shall have a total relieving capac-
paragraph unless otherwise noted. ity sufficient to prevent a maximum
(1) Design of containers. (i) The design pressure in the container of more than
temperature shall be the minimum 120 percent of the design pressure. Re-
temperature to which the container lief valves for refrigerated storage con-
will be refrigerated. tainers shall be self-contained spring-
(ii) Containers with a design pressure loaded, weight-loaded, or self-con-
exceeding 15 p.s.i.g. shall be contained pilot-operated type.
structed in accordance with paragraph (ii) The total relieving capacity shall
(b)(2) of this section, and the materials be the larger of:
shall be selected from those listed in (a) Possible refrigeration system
API Standard 620, Recommended Rules upset such as (1) cooling water failure,
for Design and Construction of Large, (2) power failure, (3) instrument air or
Welded, Low-Pressure Storage Tanks, instrument failure, (4) mechanical fail-
Fourth Edition, 1970, Tables 2.02, R2.2, ure of any equipment, (5) excessive
R2.2(A), R2.2.1, or R2.3 which are incor- pumping rates.
porated by reference as specified in (b) Fire exposure determined in ac-
1910.6. cordance with Compressed Gas Associa-
(iii) Containers with a design pres- tion (CGA) S1, Part 3, Safety Relief
sure of 15 p.s.i.g. and less shall be con- Device Standards for Compressed Gas
structed in accordance with the appli- Storage Containers, 1959, which is in-
cable requirements of API Standard 620 corporated by reference as specified in
including its appendix R. 1910.6, except that A shall be the
(iv) When austenitic steels or non- total exposed surface area in square
ferrous materials are used, the Code feet up to 25 foot above grade or to the
shall be used as a guide in the selection equator of the storage container if it is
of materials for use at the design tem- a sphere, whichever is greater. If the
perature. relieving capacity required for fire ex-
(v) The filling density for refrig- posure is greater than that required by
erated storage containers shall be such (a) of this subdivision, the additional
that the container will not be liquid capacity may be provided by weak roof
full at a liquid temperature cor- to shell seams in containers operating
responding to the vapor pressure at the at essentially atmospheric pressure
345
and having an inherently weak roof-to- dle the loads listed in paragraphs
shell seam. The weak roof-to-shell (d)(8)(i) (a) and (b) of this section.
seam is not to be considered as pro- Where more than two compressors are
viding any of the capacity required in provided minimum standby equipment
(a) of this subdivision. equal to the largest normally operating
(iii) If vent lines are installed to con- equipment shall be installed. Filling
duct the vapors from the relief valve, compressors may be used as standby
the back pressure under full relieving equipment for holding compressors.
conditions shall not exceed 50 percent (ii) Compressors shall be sized to op-
of the start-to-discharge pressure for erate with a suction pressure at least
pressure balanced valves or 10 percent 10 percent below the minimum setting
of the start-to-discharge pressure for of the safety valve(s) on the storage
conventional valves. The vent lines container and shall withstand a suc-
shall be installed to prevent accumulation pressure at least equal to 120 per-
tion of liquid in the lines. cent of the design pressure of the con-
(iv) The valve or valve installation tainer.
shall provide weather protection. (10) Compressor drives. (i) Each com-
(v) Atmospheric storage shall be pro- pressor shall have its individual driv-
vided with vacuum breakers. Ammonia ing unit.
gas, nitrogen, methane, or other inert (ii) An emergency source of power of
gases can be used to provide a pad. sufficient capacity to handle the loads
(5) Protection of container appur- listed in paragraphs (d)(8)(i) (a) and (b)
tenances. Appurtenances shall be proof this section shall be provided unless
tected against tampering and physical facilities are available to safely dispose
damage. of vented vapors while the refrigera-
(6) Reinstallation of refrigerated storage tion system is not operating.
containers. Containers of such size as to (11) Automatic control equipment. (i)
require field fabrication shall, when The refrigeration system shall be ar-
moved and reinstalled, be recon- ranged with suitable controls to govern
structed and reinspected in complete the compressor operation in accord-
accordance with the requirements ance with the load as evidenced by the
under which they were constructed. pressure in the container(s).
The containers shall be subjected to a (ii) An emergency alarm system shall
pressure retest and if rerating is nec- be installed to function in the event
essary, rerating shall be in accordance the pressure in the container(s) rises to
with applicable requirements. the maximum allowable operating
(7) Damage from vehicles. Precaution pressure.
shall be taken against damage from ve- (iii) An emergency alarm and shut-
hicles. off shall be located in the condenser
(8) Refrigeration load and equipment. system to respond to excess discharge
(i) The total refrigeration load shall be pressure caused by failure of the cool-
computed as the sum of the following: ing medium.
(a) Load imposed by heat flow into (iv) All automatic controls shall be
the container caused by the tempera- installed in a manner to preclude oper-
ture differential between design ambi- ation of alternate compressors unless
ent temperature and storage tempera- the controls will function with the al-
ture. ternate compressors.
(b) Load imposed by heat flow into (12) Separators for compressors. (i) An
the container caused by maximum sun entrainment separator of suitable size
radiation. and design pressure shall be installed
(c) Maximum load imposed by filling in the compressor suction line of lubri-
the container with ammonia warmer cated compression. The separator shall
than the design storage temperature. be equipped with a drain and gaging de-
(ii) More than one storage container vice.
may be handled by the same refrigera- (ii) [Reserved]
tion system. (13) Condensers. The condenser sys-
(9) Compressors. (i) A minimum of two tem may be cooled by air or water or
compressors shall be provided either of both. The condenser shall be designed
which shall be of sufficient size to han- for at least 250 p.s.i.g. Provision shall
346
be made for purging noncondensibles Paragraph (b) of this section applies to

either manually or automatically. this paragraph unless otherwise noted.
(14) Receiver and liquid drain. A re- Containers and pertinent equipment
ceiver shall be provided with a liquid- for tank motor vehicles for the trans-
level control to discharge the liquid portation of anhydrous ammonia, in
ammonia to storage. The receiver shall addition to complying with the re-
be designed for at least 250 p.s.i.g. and quirements of this section, shall also
be equipped with the necessary connec- comply with the requirements of DOT.
tions, safety valves, and gaging device. (2) Design pressure and construction of
(15) Insulation. Refrigerated con- containers. (i) The minimum design
tainers and pipelines which are insu- pressure for containers shall be that
lated shall be covered with a material specified in the regulations of the DOT.
of suitable quality and thickness for (ii) The shell or head thickness of
the temperatures encountered. Insula- any container shall not be less than
tion shall be suitably supported and three-sixteenth inch.
protected against the weather. Weath- (iii) All container openings, except
erproofing shall be of a type which will safety relief valves, liquid-level gaging
not support flame propagation. devices, and pressure gages, shall be la-
(e) Systems utilizing portable DOT con- beled to designate whether they com-
tainers(1) Conformance. Cylinders municate with liquid or vapor space.
shall comply with DOT specifications
(3) Container appurtenances. (i) All ap-
and shall be maintained, filled, pack-
purtenances shall be protected against
aged, marked, labeled, and shipped to
physical damage.
comply with 49 CFR chapter I and
Marking Portable Compressed Gas Con- (ii) All connections to containers, ex-
tainers to Identify the Material Con- cept filling connections, safety relief
tained, ANSI Z48.11954 (R1970), which devices, and liquid-level and pressure
is incorporated by reference as speci- gage connections, shall be provided
fied in 1910.6. with suitable automatic excess flow
(2) Storage. Cylinders shall be stored valves, or in lieu thereof, may be fitted
in an area free from ignitable debris with quick-closing internal valves,
and in such manner as to prevent ex- which shall remain closed except dur-
ternal corrosion. Storage may be ining delivery operations. The control
doors or outdoors. mechanism for such valves may be pro-
(3) Heat protection. Cylinders filled in vided with a secondary control remote
accordance with DOT regulations will from the delivery connections and such
become liquid full at 145 F. Cylinders control mechanism shall be provided
shall be protected from heat sources with a fusible section (melting point
such as radiant flame and steampipes. 208 F. to 220 F.) which will permit the
Heat shall not be applied directly to internal valve to close automatically
cylinders to raise the pressure. in case of fire.
(4) Protection. Cylinders shall be (iii) Filling connections shall be pro-
stored in such manner as to protect vided with automatic back-pressure
them from moving vehicles or external check valves, excess-flow valves, or
damage. quick-closing internal valves, to pre-
(5) Valve cap. Any cylinder which is vent back-flow in case the filling con-
designed to have a valve protection cap nection is broken. Where the filling
shall have the cap securely in place and discharge connect to a common
when the cylinder is not in service. opening in the container shell and that
(f) Tank motor vehicles for the transpor- opening is fitted with a quick-closing
tation of ammonia. (1) This paragraph internal valve as specified in paragraph
applies to containers and pertinent (f)(3)(ii) of this section, the automatic
equipment mounted on tank motor ve- valve shall not be required.
hicles including semitrailers and full (iv) All containers shall be equipped
trailers used for the transportation of for spray loading (filling in the vapor
ammonia. This paragraph does not space) or with an approved vapor re-
apply to farm vehicles. For require- turn valve of adequate capacity.
ments covering farm vehicles, refer to (4) Piping and fittings. (i) All piping,
paragraphs (g) and (h) of this section. tubing, and fittings shall be securely
347
mounted and protected against dam- ble of discharging to atmosphere the

age. Means shall be provided to protect full flow of gas from the compressor at
hoses while the vehicle is in motion. a pressure not exceeding 300 p.s.i.g.
(ii) Fittings shall comply with para- shall be connected between the com-
graph (b)(6) of this section. Pipe shall pressor discharge and the discharge
be Schedule 80. shutoff valve.
(5) Safety relief devices. (i) The dis- (iv) Valve functions shall be clearly
charge from safety relief valves shall and legibly identified by metal tags or
be vented away from the container up- nameplates permanently affixed to
ward and unobstructed to the open air each valve.
in such a manner as to prevent any im- (7)(8) [Reserved]
pingement of escaping gas upon the (9) Chock blocks. At least two chock
container; loose-fitting rain caps shall blocks shall be provided. These blocks
be used. Size of discharge lines from shall be placed to prevent rolling of the
safety valves shall not be smaller than vehicle whenever it is parked during
the nominal size of the safety-relief loading and unloading operations.
valve outlet connection. Suitable pro- (10) Portable tank containers (skid
vision shall be made for draining con- tanks). Where portable tank containers
densate which may accumulate in the are used for farm storage they shall
discharge pipe. comply with paragraph (c)(1) of this
(ii) Any portion of liquid ammonia section. When portable tank containers
piping which at any time may be closed are used in lieu of cargo tanks and are
at both ends shall be provided with a permanently mounted on tank motor
hydrostatic relief valve. vehicles for the transportation of am-
(6) Transfer of liquids. (i) The content monia, they shall comply with the re-
of tank motor vehicle containers shall quirements of this paragraph.
be determined by weight, by a suitable (g) Systems mounted on farm vehicles
liquid-level gaging device, or other ap- other than for the application of ammo-
proved methods. If the content of a nia(1) Application. This paragraph ap-
container is to be determined by liq- plies to containers of 1,200 gallons ca-
uid-level measurement, the container pacity or less and pertinent equipment
shall have a thermometer well so that mounted on farm vehicles (implements
the internal liquid temperature can be of husbandry) and used other than for
easily determined. This volume when the application of ammonia to the soil.
converted to weight shall not exceed Paragraph (b) of this section applies to
the filling density specified by the this paragraph unless otherwise noted.
DOT. (2) Design pressure and classification of
(ii) Any pump, except a constant containers. (i) The minimum design
speed centrifugal pump, shall be pressure for containers shall be 250
equipped with a suitable pressure actu- p.s.i.g.
ated bypass valve permitting flow from (ii) The shell or head thickness of
discharge to suction when the dis- any container shall be not less than
charge pressure rises above a predeter- three-sixteenths of an inch.
mined point. Pump discharge shall also (3) Mounting containers. (i) A suitable
be equipped with a spring-loaded safety stop or stops shall be mounted on
relief valve set at a pressure not more the vehicle or on the container in such
than 135 percent of the setting of the a way that the container shall not be
bypass valve or more than 400 p.s.i.g., dislodged from its mounting due to the
whichever is larger. vehicle coming to a sudden stop. Back
(iii) Compressors shall be equipped slippage shall also be prevented by
with manually operated shutoff valves proper methods.
on both suction and discharge connec- (ii) A suitable hold down device
tions. Pressure gages of bourdon-tube shall be provided which will anchor the
type shall be installed on the suction container to the vehicle at one or more
and discharge of the compressor before places on each side of the container.
the shutoff valves. The compressor (iii) When containers are mounted on
shall not be operated if either pressure four-wheel trailers, care shall be taken
gage is removed or is inoperative. A to insure that the weight is distributed
spring-loaded, safety-relief valve capa- evenly over both axles.
348
(iv) When the cradle and the tank are (ii) All trailers shall be securely at-
not welded together suitable material tached to the vehicle drawing them by
shall be used between them to elimi- means of drawbars supplemented by
nate metal-to-metal friction. suitable safety chains.
(4) Container appurtenances. (i) All (iii) A trailer shall be constructed so
containers shall be equipped with a that it will follow substantially in the
fixed liquid-level gage. path of the towing vehicle and will not
(ii) All containers with a capacity ex- whip or swerve dangerously from side
ceeding 250 gallons shall be equipped to side.
with a pressure gage having a dial (iv) All vehicles shall carry a can
graduated from 0400 p.s.i. containing 5 gallons or more of water.
(iii) The filling connection shall be (h) Systems mounted on farm vehicles
fitted with combination back-pressure for the application of ammonia. (1) This
check valve and excess-flow valve; one paragraph applies to systems utilizing
double or two single back-pressure containers of 250 gallons capacity or
check valves; or a positive shutoff less which are mounted on farm vehi-
valve in conjunction with either an in- cles (implement of husbandry) and used
ternal back-pressure check valve or an for the application of ammonia to the
internal excess flow valve. soil. Paragraph (b) of this section ap-
plies to this paragraph unless other-
(iv) All containers with a capacity
wise noted. Where larger containers are
exceeding 250 gallons shall be equipped
used, they shall comply with paragraph
for spray loading or with an approved
(g) of this section.
vapor return valve.
(2) Design pressure and classification of
(v) All vapor and liquid connections containers. (i) The minimum design
except safety-relief valves and those pressure for containers shall be 250
specifically exempted by paragraph p.s.i.g.
(b)(6)(v) of this section shall be (ii) The shell or head thickness of
equipped with approved excess-flow any container shall not be less than
valves or may be fitted with quick- three-sixteenths inch.
closing internal valves which, except (3) Mounting of containers. All con-
during operating periods, shall remain tainers and flow-control devices shall
closed. be securely mounted.
(vi) Fittings shall be adequately pro- (4) Container valves and accessories. (i)
tected from damage by a metal box or Each container shall have a fixed liq-
cylinder with open top securely fas- uid-level gage.
tened to the container or by rigid (ii) The filling connection shall be
guards, well braced, welded to the con- fitted with a combination back-pres-
tainer on both sides of the fittings or sure check valve and an excess-flow
by a metal dome. If a metal dome is valve; one double or two single back-
used, the relief valve shall be properly pressure check valves: or a positive
vented through the dome. shutoff valve in conjunction with an
(vii) If a liquid withdrawal line is in- internal back-pressure check valve or
stalled in the bottom of a container, an internal excess-flow valve.
the connections thereto, including (iii) The applicator tank may be
hose, shall not be lower than the low- filled by venting to open air provided
est horizontal edge of the vehicle axle. the bleeder valve orifice does not ex-
(viii) Provision shall be made to se- ceed seven-sixteenths inch in diameter.
cure both ends of the hose while in (iv) Regulation equipment may be
transit. connected directly to the tank cou-
(5) Marking the container. There shall pling or flange, in which case a flexible
appear on each side and on the rear end connection shall be used between such
of the container in letters at least 4 regulating equipment and the remain-
inches high, the words, CautionAm- der of the liquid withdrawal sys-
monia or the container shall be tem.Regulating equipment not so in-
marked in accordance with DOT regu- stalled shall be flexibly connected to
lations. the container shutoff valve.
(6) Farm vehicles. (i) Farm vehicles (v) No excess flow valve is required in
shall conform with State regulations. the liquid withdrawal line provided the
349
1910.1121910.113 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7102 Edition)
controlling orifice between the con- available for the material in question,
tents of the container and the outlet of or for mixtures which do not have a
the shutoff valve does not exceed constant boiling point, the 10 percent
seven-sixteenths inch in diameter. point of a distillation performed in ac-
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 cordance with the Standard Method of
FR 49748, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, Test for Distillation of Petroleum
1984; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 61 FR 9238, Products, ASTM D8662, which is in-
Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 1269, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR corporated by reference as specified in
33466, June 18, 1998] 1910.6, may be used as the boiling
point of the liquid.
1910.1121910.113 [Reserved]
Catastrophic release means a major
1910.119 Process safety management uncontrolled emission, fire, or explo-
of highly hazardous chemicals. sion, involving one or more highly haz-
Purpose. This section contains re- ardous chemicals, that presents serious
quirements for preventing or mini- danger to employees in the workplace.
mizing the consequences of cata- Facility means the buildings, con-
strophic releases of toxic, reactive, tainers or equipment which contain a
flammable, or explosive chemicals. process.
These releases may result in toxic, fire Highly hazardous chemical means a
or explosion hazards. substance possessing toxic, reactive,
(a) Application. (1) This section ap- flammable, or explosive properties and
plies to the following: specified by paragraph (a)(1) of this
(i) A process which involves a chem- section.
ical at or above the specified threshold Hot work means work involving elec-
quantities listed in appendix A to this tric or gas welding, cutting, brazing, or
section; similar flame or spark-producing oper-
(ii) A process which involves a flam- ations.
mable liquid or gas (as defined in Normally unoccupied remote facility
1910.1200(c) of this part) on site in one means a facility which is operated,
location, in a quantity of 10,000 pounds maintained or serviced by employees
(4535.9 kg) or more except for: who visit the facility only periodically
(A) Hydrocarbon fuels used solely for to check its operation and to perform
workplace consumption as a fuel (e.g., necessary operating or maintenance
propane used for comfort heating, gaso- tasks. No employees are permanently
line for vehicle refueling), if such fuels stationed at the facility.
are not a part of a process containing Facilities meeting this definition are
another highly hazardous chemical not contiguous with, and must be geo-
covered by this standard; graphically remote from all other
(B) Flammable liquids stored in at-
buildings, processes or persons.
mospheric tanks or transferred which
are kept below their normal boiling Process means any activity involving
point without benefit of chilling or re- a highly hazardous chemical including
frigeration. any use, storage, manufacturing, han-
(2) This section does not apply to: dling, or the on-site movement of such
(i) Retail facilities; chemicals, or combination of these ac-
(ii) Oil or gas well drilling or serv- tivities. For purposes of this definition,
icing operations; or, any group of vessels which are inter-
(iii) Normally unoccupied remote fa- connected and separate vessels which
cilities. are located such that a highly haz-
(b) Definitions. Atmospheric tank ardous chemical could be involved in a
means a storage tank which has been potential release shall be considered a
designed to operate at pressures from single process.
atmospheric through 0.5 p.s.i.g. (pounds Replacement in kind means a replace-
per square inch gauge, 3.45 Kpa). ment which satisfies the design speci-
Boiling point means the boiling point fication.
of a liquid at a pressure of 14.7 pounds Trade secret means any confidential
per square inch absolute (p.s.i.a.) (760 formula, pattern, process, device, infor-
mm.). For the purposes of this section, mation or compilation of information
where an accurate boiling point is un- that is used in an employers business,
350
and that gives the employer an oppor- NOTE: Material Safety Data Sheets meet-
tunity to obtain an advantage over ing the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1200(g)
competitors who do not know or use it. may be used to comply with this require-
ment to the extent they contain the infor-
Appendix D contained in 1910.1200 sets mation required by this subparagraph.
out the criteria to be used in evalu- (2) Information pertaining to the tech-
ating trade secrets. nology of the process. (i) Information
(c) Employee participation. (1) Employ- concerning the technology of the proc-
ers shall develop a written plan of ac- ess shall include at least the following:
tion regarding the implementation of (A) A block flow diagram or sim-
the employee participation required by plified process flow diagram (see appen-
this paragraph. dix B to this section);
(2) Employers shall consult with em- (B) Process chemistry;
ployees and their representatives on (C) Maximum intended inventory;
the conduct and development of proc- (D) Safe upper and lower limits for
ess hazards analyses and on the devel- such items as temperatures, pressures,
opment of the other elements of proc- flows or compositions; and,
ess safety management in this stand- (E) An evaluation of the con-
ard. sequences of deviations, including
(3) Employers shall provide to em- those affecting the safety and health of
ployees and their representatives ac- employees.
cess to process hazard analyses and to (ii) Where the original technical in-
all other information required to be deformation no longer exists, such infor-
veloped under this standard. mation may be developed in conjunc-
(d) Process safety information. In action with the process hazard analysis
cordance with the schedule set forth in in sufficient detail to support the anal-
paragraph (e)(1) of this section, the em- ysis.
ployer shall complete a compilation of (3) Information pertaining to the equip-
written process safety information be- ment in the process. (i) Information per-
fore conducting any process hazard taining to the equipment in the process
analysis required by the standard. The shall include:
compilation of written process safety (A) Materials of construction;
information is to enable the employer (B) Piping and instrument diagrams
and the employees involved in oper- (P&IDs);
ating the process to identify and under- (C) Electrical classification;
stand the hazards posed by those proc- (D) Relief system design and design
esses involving highly hazardous basis;
chemicals. This process safety informa- (E) Ventilation system design;
tion shall include information per- (F) Design codes and standards em-
taining to the hazards of the highly ployed;
hazardous chemicals used or produced (G) Material and energy balances for
by the process, information pertaining processes built after May 26, 1992; and,
to the technology of the process, and (H) Safety systems (e.g. interlocks,
information pertaining to the equip- detection or suppression systems).
ment in the process. (ii) The employer shall document
(1) Information pertaining to the haz- that equipment complies with recog-
ards of the highly hazardous chemicals in nized and generally accepted good engi-
the process. This information shall con- neering practices.
sist of at least the following: (iii) For existing equipment designed
and constructed in accordance with
(i) Toxicity information;
codes, standards, or practices that are
(ii) Permissible exposure limits; no longer in general use, the employer
(iii) Physical data; shall determine and document that the
(iv) Reactivity data: equipment is designed, maintained, in-
(v) Corrosivity data; spected, tested, and operating in a safe
(vi) Thermal and chemical stability manner.
data; and (e) Process hazard analysis. (1) The
(vii) Hazardous effects of inadvertent employer shall perform an initial proc-
mixing of different materials that ess hazard analysis (hazard evaluation)
could foreseeably occur. on processes covered by this standard.
351
The process hazard analysis shall be their interrelationships such as appro-

appropriate to the complexity of the priate application of detection meth-
process and shall identify, evaluate, odologies to provide early warning of
and control the hazards involved in the releases. (Acceptable detection meth-
process. Employers shall determine and ods might include process monitoring
document the priority order for con- and control instrumentation with
ducting process hazard analyses based alarms, and detection hardware such as
on a rationale which includes such con- hydrocarbon sensors.);
siderations as extent of the process (iv) Consequences of failure of engi-
hazards, number of potentially affected neering and administrative controls;
employees, age of the process, and op- (v) Facility siting;
erating history of the process. The (vi) Human factors; and
process hazard analysis shall be con- (vii) A qualitative evaluation of a
ducted as soon as possible, but not range of the possible safety and health
later than the following schedule: effects of failure of controls on employ-
(i) No less than 25 percent of the ini- ees in the workplace.
tial process hazards analyses shall be (4) The process hazard analysis shall
completed by May 26, 1994; be performed by a team with expertise
(ii) No less than 50 percent of the ini- in engineering and process operations,
tial process hazards analyses shall be and the team shall include at least one
completed by May 26, 1995; employee who has experience and
(iii) No less than 75 percent of the knowledge specific to the process being
initial process hazards analyses shall evaluated. Also, one member of the
be completed by May 26, 1996; team must be knowledgeable in the
(iv) All initial process hazards anal- specific process hazard analysis meth-
yses shall be completed by May 26, 1997. odology being used.
(v) Process hazards analyses com- (5) The employer shall establish a
pleted after May 26, 1987 which meet system to promptly address the teams
the requirements of this paragraph are findings and recommendations; assure
acceptable as initial process hazards that the recommendations are resolved
analyses. These process hazard anal- in a timely manner and that the reso-
yses shall be updated and revalidated, lution is documented; document what
based on their completion date, in ac- actions are to be taken; complete ac-
cordance with paragraph (e)(6) of this tions as soon as possible; develop a
section. written schedule of when these actions
(2) The employer shall use one or are to be completed; communicate the
more of the following methodologies actions to operating, maintenance and
that are appropriate to determine and other employees whose work assign-
evaluate the hazards of the process ments are in the process and who may
being analyzed. be affected by the recommendations or
(i) What-If; actions.
(ii) Checklist; (6) At least every five (5) years after
(iii) What-If/Checklist; the completion of the initial process
(iv) Hazard and Operability Study hazard analysis, the process hazard
(HAZOP): analysis shall be updated and revali-
(v) Failure Mode and Effects Analysis dated by a team meeting the require-
(FMEA); ments in paragraph (e)(4) of this sec-
(vi) Fault Tree Analysis; or tion, to assure that the process hazard
(vii) An appropriate equivalent meth- analysis is consistent with the current
odology. process.
(3) The process hazard analysis shall (7) Employers shall retain process
address: hazards analyses and updates or re-
(i) The hazards of the process; validations for each process covered by
(ii) The identification of any previous this section, as well as the documented
incident which had a likely potential resolution of recommendations de-
for catastrophic consequences in the scribed in paragraph (e)(5) of this sec-
workplace; tion for the life of the process.
(iii) Engineering and administrative (f) Operating procedures (1) The em-
controls applicable to the hazards and ployer shall develop and implement
352
written operating procedures that pro- equipment or piping; and control over
vide clear instructions for safely con- entrance into a facility by mainte-
ducting activities involved in each cov- nance, contractor, laboratory, or other
ered process consistent with the proc- support personnel. These safe work
ess safety information and shall ad- practices shall apply to employees and
dress at least the following elements. contractor employees.
(i) Steps for each operating phase: (g) Training(1) Initial training. (i)
(A) Initial startup; Each employee presently involved in
(B) Normal operations; operating a process, and each employee
(C) Temporary operations; before being involved in operating a
(D) Emergency shutdown including newly assigned process, shall be
the conditions under which emergency trained in an overview of the process
shutdown is required, and the assign- and in the operating procedures as
ment of shutdown responsibility to specified in paragraph (f) of this sec-
qualified operators to ensure that tion. The training shall include empha-
emergency shutdown is executed in a sis on the specific safety and health
safe and timely manner. hazards, emergency operations includ-
(E) Emergency Operations; ing shutdown, and safe work practices
(F) Normal shutdown; and, applicable to the employees job tasks.
(G) Startup following a turnaround, (ii) In lieu of initial training for
or after an emergency shutdown. those employees already involved in
(ii) Operating limits: operating a process on May 26, 1992, an
(A) Consequences of deviation; and employer may certify in writing that
(B) Steps required to correct or avoid the employee has the required knowl-
deviation. edge, skills, and abilities to safely
(iii) Safety and health considerations: carry out the duties and responsibil-
(A) Properties of, and hazards pre- ities as specified in the operating pro-
sented by, the chemicals used in the
cedures.
process;
(2) Refresher training. Refresher train-
(B) Precautions necessary to prevent
ing shall be provided at least every
exposure, including engineering con-
trols, administrative controls, and per- three years, and more often if nec-
sonal protective equipment; essary, to each employee involved in
(C) Control measures to be taken if operating a process to assure that the
physical contact or airborne exposure employee understands and adheres to
occurs; the current operating procedures of the
(D) Quality control for raw materials process. The employer, in consultation
and control of hazardous chemical in- with the employees involved in oper-
ventory levels; and, ating the process, shall determine the
(E) Any special or unique hazards. appropriate frequency of refresher
(iv) Safety systems and their functions. training.
(2) Operating procedures shall be (3) Training documentation. The em-
readily accessible to employees who ployer shall ascertain that each em-
work in or maintain a process. ployee involved in operating a process
(3) The operating procedures shall be has received and understood the train-
reviewed as often as necessary to as- ing required by this paragraph. The
sure that they reflect current oper- employer shall prepare a record which
ating practice, including changes that contains the identity of the employee,
result from changes in process chemi- the date of training, and the means
cals, technology, and equipment, and used to verify that the employee under-
changes to facilities. The employer stood the training.
shall certify annually that these oper- (h) Contractors(1) Application. This
ating procedures are current and accu- paragraph applies to contractors per-
rate. forming maintenance or repair, turn-
(4) The employer shall develop and around, major renovation, or specialty
implement safe work practices to pro- work on or adjacent to a covered proc-
vide for the control of hazards during ess. It does not apply to contractors
operations such as lockout/tagout; con- providing incidental services which do
fined space entry; opening process not influence process safety, such as
353
janitorial work, food and drink serv- cluding the safe work practices re-
ices, laundry, delivery or other supply quired by paragraph (f)(4) of this sec-
services. tion.
(2) Employer responsibilities. (i) The (v) The contract employer shall ad-
employer, when selecting a contractor, vise the employer of any unique haz-
shall obtain and evaluate information ards presented by the contract employ-
regarding the contract employers safe- ers work, or of any hazards found by
ty performance and programs. the contract employers work.
(ii) The employer shall inform con- (i) Pre-startup safety review. (1) The
tract employers of the known potential employer shall perform a pre-startup
fire, explosion, or toxic release hazards safety review for new facilities and for
related to the contractors work and modified facilities when the modifica-
the process. tion is significant enough to require a
(iii) The employer shall explain to change in the process safety informa-
contract employers the applicable pro- tion.
visions of the emergency action plan (2) The pre-startup safety review
required by paragraph (n) of this sec- shall confirm that prior to the intro-
tion. duction of highly hazardous chemicals
(iv) The employer shall develop and to a process:
implement safe work practices con- (i) Construction and equipment is in
sistent with paragraph (f)(4) of this sec- accordance with design specifications;
tion, to control the entrance, presence (ii) Safety, operating, maintenance,
and exit of contract employers and and emergency procedures are in place
contract employees in covered process and are adequate;
areas. (iii) For new facilities, a process haz-
(v) The employer shall periodically ard analysis has been performed and
evaluate the performance of contract recommendations have been resolved
employers in fulfilling their obliga- or implemented before startup; and
tions as specified in paragraph (h)(3) of modified facilities meet the require-
this section. ments contained in management of
(vi) The employer shall maintain a change, paragraph (l).
contract employee injury and illness (iv) Training of each employee in-
log related to the contractors work in volved in operating a process has been
process areas. completed.
(3) Contract employer responsibilities. (j) Mechanical integrity(1) Applica-
(i) The contract employer shall assure tion. Paragraphs (j)(2) through (j)(6) of
that each contract employee is trained this section apply to the following
in the work practices necessary to safe- process equipment:
ly perform his/her job. (i) Pressure vessels and storage
(ii) The contract employer shall as- tanks;
sure that each contract employee is in- (ii) Piping systems (including piping
structed in the known potential fire, components such as valves);
explosion, or toxic release hazards re- (iii) Relief and vent systems and de-
lated to his/her job and the process, vices;
and the applicable provisions of the (iv) Emergency shutdown systems;
emergency action plan. (v) Controls (including monitoring
(iii) The contract employer shall doc- devices and sensors, alarms, and inter-
ument that each contract employee locks) and,
has received and understood the train- (vi) Pumps.
ing required by this paragraph. The (2) Written procedures. The employer
contract employer shall prepare a shall establish and implement written
record which contains the identity of procedures to maintain the on-going
the contract employee, the date of integrity of process equipment.
training, and the means used to verify (3) Training for process maintenance
that the employee understood the activities. The employer shall train each
training. employee involved in maintaining the
(iv) The contract employer shall as- on-going integrity of process equip-
sure that each contract employee fol- ment in an overview of that process
lows the safety rules of the facility in- and its hazards and in the procedures
354
applicable to the employees job tasks the hot work operations; it shall indi-
to assure that the employee can per- cate the date(s) authorized for hot
form the job tasks in a safe manner. work; and identify the object on which
(4) Inspection and testing. (i) Inspec- hot work is to be performed. The per-
tions and tests shall be performed on mit shall be kept on file until comple-
process equipment. tion of the hot work operations.
(ii) Inspection and testing procedures (l) Management of change. (1) The em-
shall follow recognized and generally ployer shall establish and implement
accepted good engineering practices. written procedures to manage changes
(iii) The frequency of inspections and (except for replacements in kind) to
tests of process equipment shall be con- process chemicals, technology, equip-
sistent with applicable manufacturers ment, and procedures; and, changes to
recommendations and good engineering facilities that affect a covered process.
practices, and more frequently if deter- (2) The procedures shall assure that
mined to be necessary by prior oper- the following considerations are ad-
ating experience. dressed prior to any change:
(iv) The employer shall document (i) The technical basis for the pro-
each inspection and test that has been posed change;
performed on process equipment. The (ii) Impact of change on safety and
documentation shall identify the date health;
of the inspection or test, the name of (iii) Modifications to operating pro-
the person who performed the inspec- cedures;
tion or test, the serial number or other (iv) Necessary time period for the
identifier of the equipment on which change; and,
the inspection or test was performed, a (v) Authorization requirements for
description of the inspection or test the proposed change.
performed, and the results of the in- (3) Employees involved in operating a
spection or test. process and maintenance and contract
(5) Equipment deficiencies. The em- employees whose job tasks will be af-
ployer shall correct deficiencies in fected by a change in the process shall
equipment that are outside acceptable be informed of, and trained in, the
limits (defined by the process safety in- change prior to start-up of the process
formation in paragraph (d) of this sec- or affected part of the process.
tion) before further use or in a safe and (4) If a change covered by this para-
timely manner when necessary means graph results in a change in the process
are taken to assure safe operation. safety information required by para-
(6) Quality assurance. (i) In the con- graph (d) of this section, such informa-
struction of new plants and equipment, tion shall be updated accordingly.
the employer shall assure that equip- (5) If a change covered by this para-
ment as it is fabricated is suitable for graph results in a change in the oper-
the process application for which they ating procedures or practices required
will be used. by paragraph (f) of this section, such
(ii) Appropriate checks and inspec- procedures or practices shall be up-
tions shall be performed to assure that dated accordingly.
equipment is installed properly and (m) Incident investigation. (1) The em-
consistent with design specifications ployer shall investigate each incident
and the manufacturers instructions. which resulted in, or could reasonably
(iii) The employer shall assure that have resulted in a catastrophic release
maintenance materials, spare parts and of highly hazardous chemical in the
equipment are suitable for the process workplace.
application for which they will be used. (2) An incident investigation shall be
(k) Hot work permit. (1) The employer initiated as promptly as possible, but
shall issue a hot work permit for hot not later than 48 hours following the
work operations conducted on or near a incident.
covered process. (3) An incident investigation team
(2) The permit shall document that shall be established and consist of at
the fire prevention and protection re- least one person knowledgeable in the
quirements in 29 CFR 1910.252(a) have process involved, including a contract
been implemented prior to beginning employee if the incident involved work
355
of the contractor, and other persons comply with the section available to
with appropriate knowledge and experi- those persons responsible for compiling
ence to thoroughly investigate and the process safety information (re-
analyze the incident. quired by paragraph (d) of this section),
(4) A report shall be prepared at the those assisting in the development of
conclusion of the investigation which the process hazard analysis (required
includes at a minimum: by paragraph (e) of this section), those
(i) Date of incident; responsible for developing the oper-
(ii) Date investigation began; ating procedures (required by para-
(iii) A description of the incident; graph (f) of this section), and those in-
(iv) The factors that contributed to volved in incident investigations (re-
the incident; and, quired by paragraph (m) of this sec-
(v) Any recommendations resulting tion), emergency planning and response
from the investigation.I11(5) The em- (paragraph (n) of this section) and com-
ployer shall establish a system to pliance audits (paragraph (o) of this
promptly address and resolve the inci- section) without regard to possible
dent report findings and recommenda- trade secret status of such informa-
tions. Resolutions and corrective action.
tions shall be documented. (2) Nothing in this paragraph shall
(6) The report shall be reviewed with preclude the employer from requiring
all affected personnel whose job tasks the persons to whom the information is
are relevant to the incident findings in- made available under paragraph (p)(1)
cluding contract employees where ap- of this section to enter into confiden-
plicable. tiality agreements not to disclose the
(7) Incident investigation reports information as set forth in 29 CFR
shall be retained for five years. 1910.1200.
(n) Emergency planning and response. (3) Subject to the rules and proce-
The employer shall establish and im- dures set forth in 29 CFR 1910.1200(i)(1)
plement an emergency action plan for through 1910.1200(i)(12), employees and
the entire plant in accordance with the their designated representatives shall
provisions of 29 CFR 1910.38(a). In addi- have access to trade secret information
tion, the emergency action plan shall contained within the process hazard
include procedures for handling small analysis and other documents required
releases. Employers covered under this to be developed by this standard.
standard may also be subject to the
hazardous waste and emergency re- APPENDIX A TO 1910.119LIST OF HIGHLY
sponse provisions contained in 29 CFR HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS, TOXICS AND
1910.120 (a), (p) and (q). REACTIVES (MANDATORY)
(o) Compliance Audits. (1) Employers This appendix contains a listing of toxic
shall certify that they have evaluated and reactive highly hazardous chemicals
compliance with the provisions of this which present a potential for a catastrophic
section at least every three years to event at or above the threshold quantity.
verify that the procedures and prac- CHEMICAL name CAS* TQ**
tices developed under the standard are
adequate and are being followed. Acetaldehyde ....................................... 75070 2500
(2) The compliance audit shall be Acrolein (2-Propenal) .......................... 107028 150
Acrylyl Chloride ................................... 814686 250
conducted by at least one person Allyl Chloride ....................................... 107051 1000
knowledgeable in the process. Allylamine ............................................ 107119 1000
(3) A report of the findings of the Alkylaluminums .................................... Varies 5000
Ammonia, Anhydrous .......................... 7664417 10000
audit shall be developed. Ammonia solutions (>44% ammonia
(4) The employer shall promptly de- by weight) ........................................ 7664417 15000
termine and document an appropriate Ammonium Perchlorate ....................... 7790989 7500
response to each of the findings of the Ammonium Permanganate .................. 7787362 7500
Arsine (also called Arsenic Hydride) ... 7784421 100
compliance audit, and document that Bis(Chloromethyl) Ether ...................... 542881 100
deficiencies have been corrected. Boron Trichloride ................................. 10294345 2500
(5) Employers shall retain the two (2) Boron Trifluoride .................................. 7637072 250
Bromine ............................................... 7726956 1500
most recent compliance audit reports. Bromine Chloride ................................. 13863417 1500
(p) Trade secrets. (1) Employers shall Bromine Pentafluoride ......................... 7789302 2500
make all information necessary to Bromine Trifluoride .............................. 7787715 15000
356
CHEMICAL name CAS* TQ** CHEMICAL name CAS* TQ**
3Bromopropyne (also called Pro- Methyl Ethyl Ketone Peroxide (con-

pargyl Bromide) ............................... 106967 100 centration >60%) .............................. 1338234 5000
Butyl Hydroperoxide (Tertiary) ............ 75912 5000 Methyl Fluoroacetate ........................... 453189 100
Butyl Perbenzoate (Tertiary) ............... 614459 7500 Methyl Fluorosulfate ............................ 421205 100
Carbonyl Chloride (see Phosgene) ..... 75445 100 Methyl Hydrazine ................................. 60344 100
Carbonyl Fluoride ................................ 353504 2500 Methyl Iodide ....................................... 74884 7500
Cellulose Nitrate (concentration Methyl Isocyanate ............................... 624839 250
>12.6% nitrogen ............................... 9004700 2500 Methyl Mercaptan ................................ 74931 5000
Chlorine ............................................... 7782505 1500 Methyl Vinyl Ketone ............................ 79844 100
Chlorine Dioxide .................................. 10049044 1000 Methyltrichlorosilane ............................ 75796 500
Chlorine Pentrafluoride ........................ 13637633 1000 Nickel Carbonly (Nickel Tetracarbonyl) 13463393 150
Chlorine Trifluoride .............................. 7790912 1000 Nitric Acid (94.5% by weight or great-
Chlorodiethylaluminum (also called er) ..................................................... 7697372 500
Diethylaluminum Chloride) ............... 96106 5000 Nitric Oxide .......................................... 10102439 250
1-Chloro-2,4-Dinitrobenzene ............... 97007 5000 Nitroaniline (para Nitroaniline .............. 100016 5000
Chloromethyl Methyl Ether .................. 107302 500 Nitromethane ....................................... 75525 2500
Chloropicrin ......................................... 76062 500 Nitrogen Dioxide .................................. 10102440 250
Chloropicrin and Methyl Bromide mix-
Nitrogen Oxides (NO; NO2; N204;
ture ................................................... None 1500
N203) ............................................... 10102440 250
Chloropicrin and Methyl Chloride mix-
Nitrogen Tetroxide (also called Nitro-
ture ................................................... None 1500
gen Peroxide) .................................. 10544726 250
Cumene Hydroperoxide ...................... 80159 5000
Nitrogen Trifluoride .............................. 7783542 5000
Cyanogen ............................................ 460195 2500
Nitrogen Trioxide ................................. 10544737 250
Cyanogen Chloride .............................. 506774 500
Oleum (65% to 80% by weight; also
Cyanuric Fluoride ................................ 675149 100
Diacetyl Peroxide (Concentration called Fuming Sulfuric Acid) ............ 8014947 1000
>70%) ............................................... 110225 5000 Osmium Tetroxide ............................... 20816120 100
Diazomethane ..................................... 334883 500 Oxygen Difluoride (Fluorine Monoxide) 7783417 100
Dibenzoyl Peroxide ............................. 94360 7500 Ozone .................................................. 10028156 100
Diborane .............................................. 19287457 100 Pentaborane ........................................ 19624227 100
Dibutyl Peroxide (Tertiary) .................. 110054 5000 Peracetic Acid (concentration >60%
Dichloro Acetylene .............................. 7572294 250 Acetic Acid; also called Peroxy-
Dichlorosilane ...................................... 4109960 2500 acetic Acid) ...................................... 79210 1000
Diethylzinc ........................................... 557200 10000 Perchloric Acid (concentration >60%
Diisopropyl Peroxydicarbonate ............ 105646 7500 by weight) ........................................ 7601903 5000
Dilaluroyl Peroxide .............................. 105748 7500 Perchloromethyl Mercaptan ................ 594423 150
Dimethyldichlorosilane ......................... 75785 1000 Perchloryl Fluoride .............................. 7616946 5000
Dimethylhydrazine, 1,1- ....................... 57147 1000 Peroxyacetic Acid (concentration
Dimethylamine, Anhydrous ................. 124403 2500 >60% Acetic Acid; also called Per-
2,4-Dinitroaniline .................................. 97029 5000 acetic Acid) ...................................... 79210 1000
Ethyl Methyl Ketone Peroxide (also Phosgene (also called Carbonyl Chlo-
Methyl Ethyl Ketone Peroxide; con- ride) .................................................. 75445 100
centration >60%) .............................. 1338234 5000 Phosphine (Hydrogen Phosphide) ...... 7803512 100
Ethyl Nitrite .......................................... 109955 5000 Phosphorus Oxychloride (also called
Ethylamine ........................................... 75047 7500 Phosphoryl Chloride) ....................... 10025873 1000
Ethylene Fluorohydrin ......................... 371620 100 Phosphorus Trichloride ....................... 7719122 1000
Ethylene Oxide .................................... 75218 5000 Phosphoryl Chloride (also called
Ethyleneimine ...................................... 151564 1000 Phosphorus Oxychloride) ................ 10025873 1000
Fluorine ................................................ 7782414 1000 Propargyl Bromide ............................... 106967 100
Formaldehyde (Formalin) .................... 50000 1000 Propyl Nitrate ....................................... 62734 2500
Furan ................................................... 110009 500 Sarin .................................................... 107448 100
Hexafluoroacetone .............................. 684162 5000 Selenium Hexafluoride ........................ 7783791 1000
Hydrochloric Acid, Anhydrous ............. 7647010 5000 Stibine (Antimony Hydride) ................. 7803523 500
Hydrofluoric Acid, Anhydrous .............. 7664393 1000 Sulfur Dioxide (liquid) .......................... 7446095 1000
Hydrogen Bromide .............................. 10035106 5000 Sulfur Pentafluoride ............................. 5714227 250
Hydrogen Chloride .............................. 7647010 5000 Sulfur Tetrafluoride .............................. 7783600 250
Hydrogen Cyanide, Anhydrous ........... 74908 1000 Sulfur Trioxide (also called Sulfuric
Hydrogen Fluoride ............................... 7664393 1000 Anhydride) ........................................ 7446119 1000
Hydrogen Peroxide (52% by weight or Sulfuric Anhydride (also called Sulfur
greater) ............................................ 7722841 7500 Trioxide) ........................................... 7446119 1000
Hydrogen Selenide .............................. 7783075 150 Tellurium Hexafluoride ........................ 7783804 250
Hydrogen Sulfide ................................. 7783064 1500 Tetrafluoroethylene .............................. 116143 5000
Hydroxylamine ..................................... 7803498 2500
Tetrafluorohydrazine ............................ 10036472 5000
Iron, Pentacarbonyl ............................. 13463406 250
Tetramethyl Lead ................................ 75741 1000
Isopropylamine .................................... 75310 5000
Thionyl Chloride .................................. 7719097 250
Ketene ................................................. 463514 100
Trichloro (chloromethyl) Silane ........... 1558254 100
Methacrylaldehyde .............................. 78853 1000
Trichloro (dichlorophenyl) Silane ......... 27137855 2500
Methacryloyl Chloride .......................... 920467 150
Methacryloyloxyethyl Isocyanate ......... 30674807 100 Trichlorosilane ..................................... 10025782 5000
Methyl Acrylonitrile .............................. 126987 250 Trifluorochloroethylene ........................ 79389 10000
Methylamine, Anhydrous ..................... 74895 1000 Trimethyoxysilane ................................ 2487903 1500
Methyl Bromide ................................... 74839 2500 *Chemical Abstract Service Number.
Methyl Chloride ................................... 74873 15000 **Threshold Quantity in Pounds (Amount necessary to be
Methyl Chloroformate .......................... 79221 500 covered by this standard).
357
APPENDIX B TO 1910.119BLOCK FLOW DIAGRAM AND SIMPLIFIED PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM
(NONMANDATORY)
358
EC27OC91.026</GPH>
APPENDIX C TO 1910.119COMPLIANCE GUIDE- ment program requires a systematic ap-

LINES AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR PROCESS proach to evaluating the whole process.
SAFETY MANAGEMENT (NONMANDATORY) Using this approach the process design, proc-
ess technology, operational and maintenance
This appendix serves as a nonmandatory activities and procedures, nonroutine activi-
guideline to assist employers and employees ties and procedures, emergency preparedness
in complying with the requirements of this plans and procedures, training programs, and
section, as well as provides other helpful rec- other elements which impact the process are
ommendations and information. Examples all considered in the evaluation. The various
presented in this appendix are not the only lines of defense that have been incorporated
means of achieving the performance goals in into the design and operation of the process
the standard. This appendix neither adds nor to prevent or mitigate the release of haz-
detracts from the requirements of the stand- ardous chemicals need to be evaluated and
ard. strengthened to assure their effectiveness at
1. Introduction to Process Safety Manage- each level. Process safety management is the
ment. The major objective of process safety proactive identification, evaluation and
management of highly hazardous chemicals mitigation or prevention of chemical re-
is to prevent unwanted releases of hazardous leases that could occur as a result of failures
chemicals especially into locations which in process, procedures or equipment.
could expose employees and others to serious The process safety management standard
hazards. An effective process safety manage- targets highly hazardous chemicals that
359
EC27OC91.027</GPH>
have the potential to cause a catastrophic formed about relevant safety and health
incident. This standard as a whole is to aid issues and employers may be able to adapt
employers in their efforts to prevent or miti- these practices and procedures to meet their
gate episodic chemical releases that could obligations under this standard. Employers
lead to a catastrophe in the workplace and who have not implemented an occupational
possibly to the surrounding community. To safety and health program may wish to form
control these types of hazards, employers a safety and health committee of employees
need to develop the necessary expertise, ex- and management representatives to help the
periences, judgement and proactive initia- employer meet the obligations specified by
tive within their workforce to properly im- this standard. These committees can become
plement and maintain an effective process a significant ally in helping the employer to
safety management program as envisioned in implement and maintain an effective process
the OSHA standard. This OSHA standard is safety managment program for all employ-
required by the Clean Air Act Amendments ees.
as is the Environmental Protection Agencys 3. Process Safety Information. Complete and
Risk Management Plan. Employers, who accurate written information concerning
merge the two sets of requirements into process chemicals, process technology, and
their process safety management program, process equipment is essential to an effective
will better assure full compliance with each process safety management program and to a
as well as enhancing their relationship with process hazards analysis. The compiled infor-
the local community. mation will be a necessary resource to a va-
While OSHA believes process safety man- riety of users including the team that will
agement will have a positive effect on the perform the process hazards analysis as re-
safety of employees in workplaces and also quired under paragraph (e); those developing
offers other potential benefits to employers the training programs and the operating pro-
(increased productivity), smaller businesses cedures; contractors whose employees will be
which may have limited resources available working with the process; those conducting
to them at this time, might consider alter- the pre-startup reviews; local emergency
native avenues of decreasing the risks asso- preparedness planners; and insurance and en-
ciated with highly hazardous chemicals at forcement officials.
their workplaces. One method which might The information to be compiled about the
be considered is the reduction in the inven- chemicals, including process intermediates,
tory of the highly hazardous chemical. This needs to be comprehensive enough for an ac-
reduction in inventory will result in a reduc- curate assessment of the fire and explosion
tion of the risk or potential for a cata- characteristics, reactivity hazards, the safe-
strophic incident. Also, employers including ty and health hazards to workers, and the
small employers may be able to establish corrosion and erosion effects on the process
more efficient inventory control by reducing equipment and monitoring tools. Current
the quantities of highly hazardous chemicals material safety data sheet (MSDS) informa-
on site below the established threshold quan- tion can be used to help meet this require-
tities. This reduction can be accomplished ment which must be supplemented with
by ordering smaller shipments and maintain- process chemistry information including
ing the minimum inventory necessary for ef- runaway reaction and over pressure hazards
ficient and safe operation. When reduced in- if applicable.
ventory is not feasible, then the employer Process technology information will be a
might consider dispersing inventory to sev- part of the process safety information pack-
eral locations on site. Dispersing storage age and it is expected that it will include
into locations where a release in one loca- diagrams of the type shown in appendix B of
tion will not cause a release in another loca- this section as well as employer established
tion is a practical method to also reduce the criteria for maximum inventory levels for
risk or portential for catastrophic incidents. process chemicals; limits beyond which
2. Employee Involvement in Process Safety would be considered upset conditions; and a
Management. Section 304 of the Clean Air Act qualitative estimate of the consequences or
Amendments states that employers are to results of deviation that could occur if oper-
consult with their employees and their rep- ating beyond the established process limits.
resentatives regarding the employers efforts Employers are encouraged to use diagrams
in the development and implementation of which will help users understand the process.
the process safety management program ele- A block flow diagram is used to show the
ments and hazard assessments. Section 304 major process equipment and inter-
also requires employers to train and educate connecting process flow lines and show flow
their employees and to inform affected em- rates, stream composition, temperatures,
ployees of the findings from incident inves- and pressures when necessary for clarity.
tigations required by the process safety man- The block flow diagram is a simplified dia-
agement program. Many employers, under gram.
their safety and health programs, have al- Process flow diagrams are more complex
ready established means and methods to and will show all main flow streams includ-
keep employees and their representatives ining valves to enhance the understanding of
360
the process, as well as pressures and tem- significance of potential hazards associated
peratures on all feed and product lines with- with the processing or handling of highly
in all major vessels, in and out of headers hazardous chemicals. A PHA provides infor-
and heat exchangers, and points of pressure mation which will assist employers and em-
and temperature control. Also, materials of ployees in making decisions for improving
construction information, pump capacities safety and reducing the consequences of un-
and pressure heads, compressor horsepower wanted or unplanned releases of hazardous
and vessel design pressures and temperatures chemicals. A PHA is directed toward ana-
are shown when necessary for clarity. In ad- lyzing potential causes and consequences of
dition, major components of control loops fires, explosions, releases of toxic or flam-
are usually shown along with key utilities mable chemicals and major spills of haz-
on process flow diagrams. ardous chemicals. The PHA focuses on equip-
Piping and instrument diagrams (P&IDs) ment, instrumentation, utilities, human ac-
may be the more appropriate type of dia- tions (routine and nonroutine), and external
grams to show some of the above details and factors that might impact the process. These
to display the information for the piping de- considerations assist in determining the haz-
signer and engineering staff. The P&IDs are ards and potential failure points or failure
to be used to describe the relationships be- modes in a process.
tween equipment and instrumentation as
The selection of a PHA methodology or
well as other relevant information that will
technique will be influenced by many factors
enhance clarity. Computer software pro-
including the amount of existing knowledge
grams which do P&IDs or other diagrams
useful to the information package, may be about the process. Is it a process that has
used to help meet this requirement. been operated for a long period of time with
The information pertaining to process little or no innovation and extensive experi-
equipment design must be documented. In ence has been generated with its use? Or, is
other words, what were the codes and stand- it a new process or one which has been
ards relied on to establish good engineering changed frequently by the inclusion of inno-
practice. These codes and standards are pub- vative features? Also, the size and com-
lished by such organizations as the American plexity of the process will influence the deci-
Society of Mechanical Engineers, American sion as to the appropriate PHA methodology
Petroleum Institute, American National to use. All PHA methodologies are subject to
Standards Institute, National Fire Protec- certain limitations. For example, the check-
tion Association, American Society for Test- list methodology works well when the proc-
ing and Materials, National Board of Boiler ess is very stable and no changes are made,
and Pressure Vessel Inspectors, National As- but it is not as effective when the process
sociation of Corrosion Engineers, American has undergone extensive change. The check-
Society of Exchange Manufacturers Associa- list may miss the most recent changes and
tion, and model building code groups. consequently the changes would not be eval-
In addition, various engineering societies uated. Another limitation to be considered
issue technical reports which impact process concerns the assumptions made by the team
design. For example, the American Institute or analyst. The PHA is dependent on good
of Chemical Engineers has published tech- judgement and the assumptions made during
nical reports on topics such as two phase the study need to be documented and under-
flow for venting devices. This type of tech- stood by the team and reviewer and kept for
nically recognized report would constitute a future PHA.
good engineering practice. The team conducting the PHA need to un-
For existing equipment designed and con- derstand the methodology that is going to be
structed many years ago in accordance with used. A PHA team can vary in size from two
the codes and standards available at that people to a number of people with varied
time and no longer in general use today, the operational and technical backgrounds.
employer must document which codes and Some team members may only be a part of
standards were used and that the design and the team for a limited time. The team leader
construction along with the testing, inspec- needs to be fully knowledgeable in the proper
tion and operation are still suitable for the implementation of the PHA methodology
intended use. Where the process technology that is to be used and should be impartial in
requires a design which departs from the ap- the evaluation. The other full or part time
plicable codes and standards, the employer team members need to provide the team with
must document that the design and con- expertise in areas such as process tech-
struction is suitable for the intended pur- nology, process design, operating procedures
pose. and practices, including how the work is ac-
4. Process Hazard Analysis. A process hazard tually performed, alarms, emergency proce-
analysis (PHA), sometimes called a process dures, instrumentation, maintenance proce-
hazard evaluation, is one of the most impor- dures, both routine and nonroutine tasks, in-
tant elements of the process safety manage- cluding how the tasks are authorized, pro-
ment program. A PHA is an organized and curement of parts and supplies, safety and
systematic effort to identify and analyze the health, and any other relevant subject as the
361
need dictates. At least one team member evolved from a checklist or what-if ques-
must be familiar with the process. tions, could be developed and used by each
The ideal team will have an intimate employer effectively to reflect his/her par-
knowledge of the standards, codes, specifica- ticular process; this would simplify compli-
tions and regulations applicable to the proc- ance for them.
ess being studied. The selected team mem- When the employer has a number of proc-
bers need to be compatible and the team esses which require a PHA, the employer
leader needs to be able to manage the team, must set up a priority system of which PHAs
and the PHA study. The team needs to be to conduct first. A preliminary or gross haz-
able to work together while benefiting from ard analysis may be useful in prioritizing the
the expertise of others on the team or out- processes that the employer has determined
side the team, to resolve issues, and to forge are subject to coverage by the process safety
a consensus on the findings of the study and management standard. Consideration should
recommendations. first be given to those processes with the po-
The application of a PHA to a process may tential of adversely affecting the largest
involve the use of different methodologies number of employees. This prioritizing
for various parts of the process. For example, should consider the potential severity of a
a process involving a series of unit operation chemical release, the number of potentially
of varying sizes, complexities, and ages may affected employees, the operating history of
use different methodologies and team mem- the process such as the frequency of chem-
bers for each operation. Then the conclu- ical releases, the age of the process and any
sions can be integrated into one final study other relevant factors. These factors would
and evaluation. A more specific example is suggest a ranking order and would suggest
the use of a checklist PHA for a standard either using a weighing factor system or a
boiler or heat exchanger and the use of a systematic ranking method. The use of a
Hazard and Operability PHA for the overall preliminary hazard analysis would assist an
process. Also, for batch type processes like employer in determining which process
custom batch operations, a generic PHA of a should be of the highest priority and thereby
representative batch may be used where the employer would obtain the greatest im-
there are only small changes of monomer or provement in safety at the facility.
other ingredient ratios and the chemistry is Detailed guidance on the content and ap-
documented for the full range and ratio of plication of process hazard analysis meth-
batch ingredients. Another process that odologies is available from the American In-
might consider using a generic type of PHA stitute of Chemical Engineers Center for
is a gas plant. Often these plants are simply Chemical Process Safety (see appendix D).
moved from site to site and therefore, a ge- 5. Operating Procedures and Practices. Oper-
neric PHA may be used for these movable ating procedures describe tasks to be per-
plants. Also, when an employer has several formed, data to be recorded, operating condi-
similar size gas plants and no sour gas is tions to be maintained, samples to be col-
being processed at the site, then a generic lected, and safety and health precautions to
PHA is feasible as long as the variations of be taken. The procedures need to be tech-
the individual sites are accounted for in the nically accurate, understandable to employ-
PHA. Finally, when an employer has a large ees, and revised periodically to ensure that
continuous process which has several control they reflect current operations. The process
rooms for different portions of the process safety information package is to be used as
such as for a distillation tower and a blend- a resource to better assure that the oper-
ing operation, the employer may wish to do ating procedures and practices are consistent
each segment separately and then integrate with the known hazards of the chemicals in
the final results. the process and that the operating param-
Additionally, small businesses which are eters are accurate. Operating procedures
covered by this rule, will often have proc- should be reviewed by engineering staff and
esses that have less storage volume, less ca- operating personnel to ensure that they are
pacity, and less complicated than processes accurate and provide practical instructions
at a large facility. Therefore, OSHA would on how to actually carry out job duties safe-
anticipate that the less complex methodolo- ly.
gies would be used to meet the process haz- Operating procedures will include specific
ard analysis criteria in the standard. These instructions or details on what steps are to
process hazard analyses can be done in less be taken or followed in carrying out the
time and with a few people being involved. A stated procedures. These operating instruc-
less complex process generally means that tions for each procedure should include the
less data, P&IDs, and process information is applicable safety precautions and should
needed to perform a process hazard analysis. contain appropriate information on safety
Many small businesses have processes that implications. For example, the operating
are not unique, such as cold storage lockers procedures addressing operating parameters
or water treatment facilities. Where em- will contain operating instructions about
ployer associations have a number of mem- pressure limits, temperature ranges, flow
bers with such facilities, a generic PHA, rates, what to do when an upset condition
362
occurs, what alarms and instruments are erating personnel should be informed to pro-
pertinent if an upset condition occurs, and vide closure on the job.
other subjects. Another example of using op- 6. Employee Training. All employees, includ-
erating instructions to properly implement ing maintenance and contractor employees,
operating procedures is in starting up or involved with highly hazardous chemicals
shutting down the process. In these cases, need to fully understand the safety and
different parameters will be required from health hazards of the chemicals and proc-
those of normal operation. These operating esses they work with for the protection of
instructions need to clearly indicate the dis- themselves, their fellow employees and the
tinctions between startup and normal oper- citizens of nearby communities. Training
ations such as the appropriate allowances for conducted in compliance with 1910.1200, the
heating up a unit to reach the normal oper- Hazard Communication standard, will help
ating parameters. Also the operating in- employees to be more knowledgeable about
structions need to describe the proper meth- the chemicals they work with as well as fa-
od for increasing the temperature of the unit miliarize them with reading and under-
until the normal operating temperature pa- standing MSDS. However, additional train-
rameters are achieved. ing in subjects such as operating procedures
Computerized process control systems add and safety work practices, emergency evacu-
complexity to operating instructions. These ation and response, safety procedures, rou-
operating instructions need to describe the tine and nonroutine work authorization ac-
logic of the software as well as the relation- tivities, and other areas pertinent to process
safety and health will need to be covered by
ship between the equipment and the control
an employers training program.
system; otherwise, it may not be apparent to
In establishing their training programs,
the operator.
employers must clearly define the employees
Operating procedures and instructions are to be trained and what subjects are to be
important for training operating personnel. covered in their training. Employers in set-
The operating procedures are often viewed as ting up their training program will need to
the standard operating practices (SOPs) for clearly establish the goals and objectives
operations. Control room personnel and oper- they wish to achieve with the training that
ating staff, in general, need to have a full un- they provide to their employees. The learn-
derstanding of operating procedures. If working goals or objectives should be written in
ers are not fluent in English then procedures clear measurable terms before the training
and instructions need to be prepared in a sec- begins. These goals and objectives need to be
ond language understood by the workers. In tailored to each of the specific training mod-
addition, operating procedures need to be ules or segments. Employers should describe
changed when there is a change in the proc- the important actions and conditions under
ess as a result of the management of change which the employee will demonstrate com-
procedures. The consequences of operating petence or knowledge as well as what is ac-
procedure changes need to be fully evaluated ceptable performance.
and the information conveyed to the per- Hands-on-training where employees are
sonnel. For example, mechanical changes to able to use their senses beyond listening,
the process made by the maintenance depart- will enhance learning. For example, oper-
ment (like changing a valve from steel to ating personnel, who will work in a control
brass or other subtle changes) need to be room or at control panels, would benefit by
evaluated to determine if operating proce- being trained at a simulated control panel or
dures and practices also need to be changed. panels. Upset conditions of various types
All management of change actions must be could be displayed on the simulator, and
coordinated and integrated with current op- then the employee could go through the
erating procedures and operating personnel proper operating procedures to bring the
must be oriented to the changes in proce- simulator panel back to the normal oper-
dures before the change is made. When the ating parameters. A training environment
process is shut down in order to make a could be created to help the trainee feel the
change, then the operating procedures must full reality of the situation but, of course,
be updated before startup of the process. under controlled conditions. This realistic
Training in how to handle upset conditions type of training can be very effective in
must be accomplished as well as what oper- teaching employees correct procedures while
ating personnel are to do in emergencies allowing them to also see the consequences
such as when a pump seal fails or a pipeline of what might happen if they do not follow
ruptures. Communication between operating established operating procedures. Other
personnel and workers performing work training techniques using videos or on-the-
within the process area, such as nonroutine job training can also be very effective for
tasks, also must be maintained. The hazards teaching other job tasks, duties, or other im-
of the tasks are to be conveyed to operating portant information. An effective training
personnel in accordance with established program will allow the employee to fully
procedures and to those performing the ac- participate in the training process and to
tual tasks. When the work is completed, op- practice their skill or knowledge.
363
Employers need to periodically evaluate rience. This log will also contain informa-
their training programs to see if the nection which will be of use to those auditing
essary skills, knowledge, and routines are process safety management compliance and
being properly understood and implemented those involved in incident investigations.
by their trained employees. The means or Contract employees must perform their
methods for evaluating the training should work safely. Considering that contractors
be developed along with the training pro- often perform very specialized and poten-
gram goals and objectives. Training program tially hazardous tasks such as confined space
evaluation will help employers to determine entry activities and nonroutine repair activi-
the amount of training their employees un- ties it is quite important that their activi-
derstood, and whether the desired results ties be controlled while they are working on
were obtained. If, after the evaluation, it ap- or near a covered process. A permit system
pears that the trained employees are not at or work authorization system for these ac-
the level of knowledge and skill that was ex- tivities would also be helpful to all affected
pected, the employer will need to revise the employers. The use of a work authorization
training program, provide retraining, or pro- system keeps an employer informed of con-
vide more frequent refresher training ses- tract employee activities, and as a benefit
sions until the deficiency is resolved. Those the employer will have better coordination
who conducted the training and those who and more management control over the work
received the training should also be con- being performed in the process area. A well
sulted as to how best to improve the training run and well maintained process where em-
process. If there is a language barrier, the ployee safety is fully recognized will benefit
language known to the trainees should be all of those who work in the facility whether
used to reinforce the training messages and they be contract employees or employees of
information. the owner.
Careful consideration must be given to as- 8. Pre-Startup Safety. For new processes,
sure that employees including maintenance the employer will find a PHA helpful in im-
and contract employees receive current and proving the design and construction of the
updated training . For example, if changes process from a reliability and quality point
are made to a process, impacted employees of view. The safe operation of the new proc-
must be trained in the changes and under- ess will be enhanced by making use of the
stand the effects of the changes on their job PHA recommendations before final installa-
tasks (e.g., any new operating procedures tions are completed. P&IDs are to be com-
pertinent to their tasks). Additionally, as al- pleted along with having the operating pro-
ready discussed the evaluation of the em- cedures in place and the operating staff
ployees absorption of training will certainly trained to run the process before startup.
influence the need for training. The initial startup procedures and normal
7. Contractors. Employers who use contrac- operating procedures need to be fully evalu-
tors to perform work in and around processes ated as part of the pre-startup review to as-
that involve highly hazardous chemicals, sure a safe transfer into the normal oper-
will need to establish a screening process so ating mode for meeting the process param-
that they hire and use contractors who ac- eters.
complish the desired job tasks without com- For existing processes that have been shut-
promising the safety and health of employ- down for turnaround, or modification, etc.,
ees at a facility. For contractors, whose safe- the employer must assure that any changes
ty performance on the job is not known to other than replacement in kind made to
the hiring employer, the employer will need the process during shutdown go through the
to obtain information on injury and illness management of change procedures. P&IDs
rates and experience and should obtain con- will need to be updated as necessary, as well
tractor references. Additionally, the em- as operating procedures and instructions. If
ployer must assure that the contractor has the changes made to the process during shut-
the appropriate job skills, knowledge and down are significant and impact the training
certifications (such as for pressure vessel program, then operating personnel as well as
welders). Contractor work methods and expe- employees engaged in routine and nonrou-
riences should be evaluated. For example, tine work in the process area may need some
does the contractor conducting demolition refresher or additional training in light of
work swing loads over operating processes or the changes. Any incident investigation rec-
does the contractor avoid such hazards? ommendations, compliance audits or PHA
Maintaining a site injury and illness log recommendations need to be reviewed as
for contractors is another method employers well to see what impacts they may have on
must use to track and maintain current the process before beginning the startup.
knowledge of work activities involving con- 9. Mechanical Integrity. Employers will need
tract employees working on or adjacent to to review their maintenance programs and
covered processes. Injury and illness logs of schedules to see if there are areas where
both the employers employees and contract breakdown maintenance is used rather
employees allow an employer to have full than an on-going mechanical integrity pro-
knowledge of process injury and illness expe- gram. Equipment used to process, store, or
364
handle highly hazardous chemicals needs to and inspection frequency, as well as appro-
be designed, constructed, installed and main- priate methodologies.
tained to minimize the risk of releases of The applicable codes and standards provide
such chemicals. This requires that a mechan- criteria for external inspections for such
ical integrity program be in place to assure items as foundation and supports, anchor
the continued integrity of process equip- bolts, concrete or steel supports, guy wires,
ment. Elements of a mechanical integrity nozzles and sprinklers, pipe hangers, ground-
program include the identification and cating connections, protective coatings and in-
egorization of equipment and instrumenta- sulation, and external metal surfaces of pip-
tion, inspections and tests, testing and ining and vessels, etc. These codes and stand-
spection frequencies, development of mainte- ards also provide information on methodolo-
nance procedures, training of maintenance gies for internal inspection, and a frequency
personnel, the establishment of criteria for formula based on the corrosion rate of the
acceptable test results, documentation of materials of construction. Also, erosion both
test and inspection results, and documenta- internal and external needs to be considered
tion of manufacturer recommendations as to along with corrosion effects for piping and
meantime to failure for equipment and in- valves. Where the corrosion rate is not
strumentation. known, a maximum inspection frequency is
The first line of defense an employer has recommended, and methods of developing
available is to operate and maintain the the corrosion rate are available in the codes.
process as designed, and to keep the chemi- Internal inspections need to cover items
cals contained. This line of defense is backed such as vessel shell, bottom and head; metal-
up by the next line of defense which is the lic linings; nonmetallic linings; thickness
controlled release of chemicals through measurements for vessels and piping; inspec-
venting to scrubbers or flares, or to surge or tion for erosion, corrosion, cracking and
overflow tanks which are designed to receive bulges; internal equipment like trays, baf-
such chemicals, etc. These lines of defense fles, sensors and screens for erosion, corro-
are the primary lines of defense or means to sion or cracking and other deficiencies.
prevent unwanted releases. The secondary Some of these inspections may be performed
lines of defense would include fixed fire pro- by state of local government inspectors
tection systems like sprinklers, water spray, under state and local statutes. However,
or deluge systems, monitor guns, etc., dikes, each employer needs to develop procedures
designed drainage systems, and other sys- to ensure that tests and inspections are con-
tems which would control or mitigate haz- ducted properly and that consistency is
ardous chemicals once an unwanted release maintained even where different employees
occurs. These primary and secondary lines of may be involved. Appropriate training is to
defense are what the mechanical integrity be provided to maintenance personnel to en-
program needs to protect and strengthen sure that they understand the preventive
these primary and secondary lines of de- maintenance program procedures, safe prac-
fenses where appropriate. tices, and the proper use amd application of
The first step of an effective mechanical special equipment or unique tools that may
integrity program is to compile and cat- be required. This training is part of the over-
egorize a list of process equipment and in- all training program called for in the stand-
strumentation for inclusion in the program. ard.
This list would include pressure vessels, stor- A quality assurance system is needed to
age tanks, process piping, relief and vent help ensure that the proper materials of con-
systems, fire protection system components, struction are used, that fabrication and in-
emergency shutdown systems and alarms spection procedures are proper, and that in-
and interlocks and pumps. For the cat- stallation procedures recognize field instal-
egorization of instrumentation and the listed lation concerns. The quality assurance pro-
equipment the employer would prioritize gram is an essential part of the mechanical
which pieces of equipment require closer integrity program and will help to maintain
scrutiny than others. Meantime to failure of the primary and secondary lines of defense
various instrumentation and equipment that have been designed into the process to
parts would be known from the manufactur- prevent unwanted chemical releases or those
ers data or the employers experience with which control or mitigate a release. As
the parts, which would then influence the in- built drawings, together with certifications
spection and testing frequency and associ- of coded vessels and other equipment, and
ated procedures. Also, applicable codes and materials of construction need to be verified
standards such as the National Board Inspec- and retained in the quality assurance docu-
tion Code, or those from the American Soci- mentation. Equipment installation jobs need
ety for Testing and Material, American Pe- to be properly inspected in the field for use
troleum Institute, National Fire Protection of proper materials and procedures and to as-
Association, American National Standards sure that qualified craftsmen are used to do
Institute, American Society of Mechanical the job. The use of appropriate gaskets,
Engineers, and other groups, provide infor- packing, bolts, valves, lubricants and weld-
mation to help establish an effective testing ing rods need to be verified in the field. Also
365
procedures for installation of safety devices change in materials of construction, equip-
need to be verified, such as the torque on the ment specifications, piping pre-arrange-
bolts on ruptured disc installations, uniform ments, experimental equipment, computer
torque on flange bolts, proper installation of program revisions and changes in alarms and
pump seals, etc. If the quality of parts is a interlocks. Employers need to establish
problem, it may be appropriate to conduct means and methods to detect both technical
audits of the equipment suppliers facilities changes and mechanical changes.
to better assure proper purchases of required Temporary changes have caused a number
equipment which is suitable for its intended of catastrophes over the years, and employ-
service. Any changes in equipment that may ers need to establish ways to detect tem-
become necessary will need to go through porary changes as well as those that are per-
the management of change procedures. manent. It is important that a time limit for
10. Nonroutine Work Authorizations. Nonrou- temporary changes be established and mon-
tine work which is conducted in process itored since, without control, these changes
areas needs to be controlled by the employer may tend to become permanent. Temporary
in a consistent manner. The hazards identi- changes are subject to the management of
fied involving the work that is to be accom- change provisions. In addition, the manage-
plished must be communicated to those ment of change procedures are used to insure
doing the work, but also to those operating that the equipment and procedures are re-
personnel whose work could affect the safety turned to their original or designed condi-
of the process. A work authorization notice
tions at the end of the temporary change.
or permit must have a procedure that de-
Proper documentation and review of these
scribes the steps the maintenance super-
changes is invaluable in assuring that the
visor, contractor representative or other per-
safety and health considerations are being
son needs to follow to obtain the necessary
incorporated into the operating procedures
clearance to get the job started. The work
and the process.
authorization procedures need to reference
and coordinate, as applicable, lockout/tagout Employers may wish to develop a form or
procedures, line breaking procedures, con- clearance sheet to facilitate the processing
fined space entry procedures and hot work of changes through the management of
authorizations. This procedure also needs to change procedures. A typical change form
provide clear steps to follow once the job is may include a description and the purpose of
completed in order to provide closure for the change, the technical basis for the
those that need to know the job is now com- change, safety and health considerations,
pleted and equipment can be returned to nor- documentation of changes for the operating
mal. procedures, maintenance procedures, inspec-
11. Managing Change. To properly manage tion and testing, P&IDs, electrical classifica-
changes to process chemicals, technology, tion, training and communications, pre-
equipment and facilities, one must define startup inspection, duration if a temporary
what is meant by change. In this process change, approvals and authorization. Where
safety management standard, change in- the impact of the change is minor and well
cludes all modifications to equipment, proce- understood, a check list reviewed by an au-
dures, raw materials and processing condi- thorized person with proper communication
tions other than replacement in kind. to others who are affected may be sufficient.
These changes need to be properly managed However, for a more complex or significant
by identifying and reviewing them prior to design change, a hazard evaluation procedure
implementation of the change. For example, with approvals by operations, maintenance,
the operating procedures contain the oper- and safety departments may be appropriate.
ating parameters (pressure limits, tempera- Changes in documents such as P&IDs, raw
ture ranges, flow rates, etc.) and the impor- materials, operating procedures, mechanical
tance of operating within these limits. While integrity programs, electrical classifica-
the operator must have the flexibility to tions, etc., need to be noted so that these re-
maintain safe operation within the estab- visions can be made permanent when the
lished parameters, any operation outside of drawings and procedure manuals are up-
these parameters requires review and ap- dated. Copies of process changes need to be
proval by a written management of change kept in an accessible location to ensure that
procedure. design changes are available to operating
Management of change covers such as personnel as well as to PHA team members
changes in process technology and changes when a PHA is being done or one is being up-
to equipment and instrumentation. Changes dated.
in process technology can result from 12. Investigation of Incidents. Incident inves-
changes in production rates, raw materials, tigation is the process of identifying the un-
experimentation, equipment unavailability, derlying causes of incidents and imple-
new equipment, new product development, menting steps to prevent similar events from
change in catalyst and changes in operating occurring. The intent of an incident inves-
conditions to improve yield or quality. tigation is for employers to learn from past
Equipment changes include among others experiences and thus avoid repeating past
366
mistakes. The incidents for whicn OSHA ex- Employers at a minimum must have an
pects employers to become aware and to in- emergency action plan which will facilitate
vestigate are the types of events which re- the prompt evacuation of employees due to
sult in or could reasonably have resulted in an unwanted release of a highly hazardous
a catastrophic release. Some of the events chemical. This means that the employer will
are sometimes referred to as near misses, have a plan that will be activated by an
meaning that a serious consequence did not alarm system to alert employees when to
occur, but could have. evacuate and, that employees who are phys-
Employers need to develop in-house capa- ically impaired, will have the necessary sup-
bility to investigate incidents that occur in port and assistance to get them to the safe
their facilities. A team needs to be assem- zone as well. The intent of these require-
bled by the employer and trained in the tech- ments is to alert and move employees to a
niques of investigation including how to con- safe zone quickly. Delaying alarms or con-
duct interviews of witnesses, needed docu- fusing alarms are to be avoided. The use of
mentation and report writing. A multi-dis- process control centers or similar process
ciplinary team is better able to gather the buildings in the process area as safe areas is
facts of the event and to analyze them and discouraged. Recent catastrophes have
develop plausible scenarios as to what hap- shown that a large life loss has occurred in
pened, and why. Team members should be se- these structures because of where they have
lected on the basis of their training, knowl- been sited and because they are not nec-
edge and ability to contribute to a team ef- essarily designed to withstand over-pressures
fort to fully investigate the incident. Em- from shockwaves resulting from explosions
ployees in the process area where the inci- in the process area.
dent occurred should be consulted, inter- Unwanted incidental releases of highly
viewed or made a member of the team. Their hazardous chemicals in the process area
knowledge of the events form a significant must be addressed by the employer as to
set of facts about the incident which oc- what actions employees are to take. If the
curred. The report, its findings and rec- employer wants employees to evacuate the
ommendations are to be shared with those area, then the emergency action plan will be
who can benefit from the information. The activated. For outdoor processes where wind
cooperation of employees is essential to an direction is important for selecting the safe
effective incident investigation. The focus of route to a refuge area, the employer should
the investigation should be to obtain facts, place a wind direction indicator such as a
and not to place blame. The team and the in- wind sock or pennant at the highest point
vestigation process should clearly deal with that can be seen throughout the process
all involved individuals in a fair, open and area. Employees can move in the direction of
consistent manner. cross wind to upwind to gain safe access to
13. Emergency Preparedness. Each employer the refuge area by knowing the wind direc-
must address what actions employees are to tion.
take when there is an unwanted release of If the employer wants specific employees
highly hazardous chemicals. Emergency pre- in the release area to control or stop the
paredness or the employers tertiary (third) minor emergency or incidental release, these
lines of defense are those that will be relied actions must be planned for in advance and
on along with the secondary lines of defense procedures developed and implemented.
when the primary lines of defense which are Preplanning for handling incidental releases
used to prevent an unwanted release fail to for minor emergencies in the process area
stop the release. Employers will need to de- needs to be done, appropriate equipment for
cide if they want employees to handle and the hazards must be provided, and training
stop small or minor incidental releases. conducted for those employees who will per-
Whether they wish to mobilize the available form the emergency work before they re-
resources at the plant and have them spond to handle an actual release. The em-
brought to bear on a more significant re- ployers training program, including the
lease. Or whether employers want their em- Hazard Communication standard training is
ployees to evacuate the danger area and to address the training needs for employees
promptly escape to a preplanned safe zone who are expected to handle incidental or
area, and allow the local community emer- minor releases.
gency response organizations to handle the Preplanning for releases that are more se-
release. Or whether the employer wants to rious than incidental releases is another im-
use some combination of these actions. Em- portant line of defense to be used by the em-
ployers will need to select how many dif- ployer. When a serious release of a highly
ferent emergency preparedness or tertiary hazardous chemical occurs, the employer
lines of defense they plan to have and then through preplanning will have determined in
develop the necessary plans and procedures, advance what actions employees are to take.
and appropriately train employees in their The evacuation of the immediate release
emergency duties and responsibilities and area and other areas as necessary would be
then implement these lines of defense. accomplished under the emergency action
367
plan. If the employer wishes to use plant per- 14. Compliance Audits. Employers need to
sonnel such as a fire brigade, spill control select a trained individual or assemble a
team, a hazardous materials team, or use trained team of people to audit the process
employees to render aid to those in the im- safety management system and program. A
mediate release area and control or mitigate small process or plant may need only one
the incident, these actions are covered by knowledgeable person to conduct an audit.
1910.120, the Hazardous Waste Operations The audit is to include an evaluation of the
and Emergency Response (HAZWOPER) design and effectiveness of the process safety
standard. If outside assistance is necessary, management system and a field inspection of
such as through mutual aid agreements be- the safety and health conditions and prac-
tween employers or local government emer- tices to verify that the employers systems
gency response organizations, these emer- are effectively implemented. The audit
gency responders are also covered by should be conducted or lead by a person
HAZWOPER. The safety and health protec- knowledgeable in audit techniques and who
tions required for emergency responders are is impartial towards the facility or area
the responsibility of their employers and of being audited. The essential elements of an
the on-scene incident commander. audit program include planning, staffing,
conduting the audit, evaluation and correc-
Responders may be working under very
tive action, follow-up and documentation.
hazardous conditions and therefore the ob-
Planning in advance is essential to the suc-
jective is to have them competently led by
cess of the auditing process. Each employer
an on-scene incident commander and the
needs to establish the format, staffing,
commanders staff, properly equipped to do
scheduling and verification methods prior to
their assigned work safely, and fully trained conducting the audit. The format should be
to carry out their duties safely before they designed to provide the lead auditor with a
respond to an emergency. Drills, training ex- procedure or checklist which details the re-
ercises, or simulations with the local com- quirements of each section of the standard.
munity emergency response planners and re- The names of the audit team members
sponder organizations is one means to obtain should be listed as part of the format as well.
better preparedness. This close cooperation The checklist, if properly designed, could
and coordination between plant and local serve as the verification sheet which pro-
community emergency preparedness man- vides the auditor with the necessary infor-
agers will also aid the employer in com- mation to expedite the review and assure
plying with the Environmental Protection that no requirements of the standard are
Agencys Risk Management Plan criteria. omitted. This verification sheet format
One effective way for medium to large fa- could also identify those elements that will
cilities to enhance coordination and commu- require evaluation or a response to correct
nication during emergencies for on plant op- deficiencies. This sheet could also be used for
erations and with local community organiza- developing the follow-up and documentation
tions is for employers to establish and equip requirements.
an emergency control center. The emergency The selection of effective audit team mem-
control center would be sited in a safe zone bers is critical to the success of the program.
area so that it could be occupied throughout Team members should be chosen for their ex-
the duration of an emergency. The center perience, knowledge, and training and should
would serve as the major ccommunication be familiar with the processes and with au-
link between the on-scene incident com- diting techniques, practices and procedures.
mander and plant or corporate management The size of the team will vary depending on
as well as with the local community offi- the size and complexity of the process under
cials. The communication equipment in the consideration. For a large, complex, highly
emergency control center should include a instrumented plant, it may be desirable to
network to receive and transmit information have team members with expertise in proc-
by telephone, radio or other means. It is im- ess engineering and design, process chem-
portant to have a backup communication istry, instrumentation and computer con-
network in case of power failure or one com- trols, electrical hazards and classifications,
munication means fails. The center should safety and health disciplines, maintenance,
also be equipped with the plant layout and emergency preparedness, warehousing or
community maps, utility drawings including shipping, and process safety auditing. The
fire water, emergency lighting, appropriate team may use part-time members to provide
reference materials such as a government for the depth of expertise required as well as
agency notification list, company personnel for what is actually done or followed, com-
phone list, SARA Title III reports and mate- pared to what is written.
rial safety data sheets, emergency plans and An effective audit includes a review of the
procedures manual, a listing with the loca- relevant documentation and process safety
tion of emergency response equipment, mu- information, inspection of the physical fa-
tual aid information, and access to meteoro- cilities, and interviews with all levels of
logical or weather condition data and any plant personnel. Utilizing the audit proce-
dispersion modeling data. dure and checklist developed in the
368
preplanning stage, the audit team can sys- It is important to assure that each defi-
tematically analyze compliance with the ciency identified is addressed, the corrective
provisions of the standard and any other cor- action to be taken noted, and the audit per-
porate policies that are relevant. For exam- son or team responsible be properly docu-
ple, the audit team will review all aspects of mented by the employer. To control the cor-
the training program as part of the overall rective action process, the employer should
audit. The team will review the written consider the use of a tracking system. This
training program for adequacy of content, tracking system might include periodic sta-
frequency of training, effectiveness of train- tus reports shared with affected levels of
ing in terms of its goals and objectives as management, specific reports such as com-
well as to how it fits into meeting the stand- pletion of an engineering study, and a final
ards requirements, documentation, etc. implementation report to provide closure for
Through interviews, the team can determine audit findings that have been through man-
the employees knowledge and awareness of agement of change, if appropriate, and then
the safety procedures, duties, rules, emer- shared with affected employees and manage-
gency response assignments, etc. During the ment. This type of tracking system provides
inspection, the team can observe actual the employer with the status of the correc-
practices such as safety and health policies, tive action. It also provides the documenta-
procedures, and work authorization prac- tion required to verify that appropriate cor-
tices. This approach enables the team to rective actions were taken on deficiencies
identify deficiencies and determine where identified in the audit.
corrective actions or improvements are nec- APPENDIX D TO 1910.119SOURCES OF
essary. FURTHER INFORMATION (NONMANDATORY)
An audit is a technique used to gather suf-
ficient facts and information, including sta- 1. Center for Chemical Process Safety,
tistical information, to verify compliance American Institute of Chemical Engineers,
with standards. Auditors should select as 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017,
part of their preplanning a sample size suffi- (212) 7057319.
cient to give a degree of confidence that the 2. Guidelines for Hazard Evaluation Pro-
audit reflects the level of compliance with cedures, American Institute of Chemical
the standard. The audit team, through this Engineers; 345 East 47th Street, New York,
NY 10017.
systematic analysis, should document areas
3. Guidelines for Technical Management
which require corrective action as well as
of Chemical Process Safety, Center for
those areas where the process safety man-
Chemical Process Safety of the American In-
agement system is effective and working in
stitute of Chemical Engineers; 345 East 47th
an effective manner. This provides a record
Street, New York, NY 10017.
of the audit procedures and findings, and
4. Evaluating Process Safety in the Chem-
serves as a baseline of operation data for fu-
ical Industry, Chemical Manufacturers As-
ture audits. It will assist future auditors in sociation; 2501 M Street NW, Washington, DC
determining changes or trends from previous 20037.
audits. 5. Safe Warehousing of Chemicals,
Corrective action is one of the most impor- Chemical Manufacturers Association; 2501 M
tant parts of the audit. It includes not only Street NW, Washington, DC 20037.
addressing the identified deficiencies, but 6. Management of Process Hazards,
also planning, followup, and documentation. American Petroleum Institute (API Rec-
The corrective action process normally be- ommended Practice 750); 1220 L Street, N.W.,
gins with a management review of the audit Washington, D.C. 20005.
findings. The purpose of this review is to de- 7. Improving Owner and Contractor Safe-
termine what actions are appropriate, and to ty Performance, American Petroleum Insti-
establish priorities, timetables, resource al- tute (API Recommended Practice 2220); API,
locations and requirements and responsibil- 1220 L Street N.W., Washington, D.C. 20005.
ities. In some cases, corrective action may 8. Chemical Manufacturers Association
involve a simple change in procedure or (CMAs Manager Guide), First Edition, Sep-
minor maintenance effort to remedy the con- tember 1991; CMA, 2501 M Street, N.W.,
cern. Management of change procedures need Washington, D.C. 20037.
to be used, as appropriate, even for what 9. Improving Construction Safety Per-
may seem to be a minor change. Many of the formance, Report A3, The Business Round-
deficiencies can be acted on promptly, while table; The Business Roundtable, 200 Park Av-
some may require engineering studies or in- enue, New York, NY 10166. (Report includes
depth review of actual procedures and prac- criteria to evaluate contractor safety per-
tices. There may be instances where no ac- formance and criteria to enhance contractor
tion is necessary and this is a valid response safety performance).
to an audit finding. All actions taken, in- 10. Recommended Guidelines for Con-
cluding an explanation where no action is tractor Safety and Health, Texas Chemical
taken on a finding, needs to be documented Council; Texas Chemical Council, 1402
as to what was done and why. Nueces Street, Austin, TX 787011534.
369
11. Loss Prevention in the Process Indus- ery Act of 1976 (RCRA) as amended (42
tries, Volumes I and II; Frank P. Lees, U.S.C. 6901 et seq.);
Butterworth; London 1983.
(iii) Voluntary clean-up operations at
12. Safety and Health Program Manage-
ment Guidelines, 1989; U.S. Department of sites recognized by Federal, state, local
Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Ad- or other governmental bodies as uncon-
ministration. trolled hazardous waste sites;
13. Safety and Health Guide for the Chem- (iv) Operations involving hazardous
ical Industry, 1986, (OSHA 3091); U.S. De- wastes that are conducted at treat-
partment of Labor, Occupational Safety and ment, storage, and disposal (TSD) fa-
Health Administration; 200 Constitution Av- cilities regulated by 40 CFR parts 264
enue, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20210.
14. Review of Emergency Systems, June
and 265 pursuant to RCRA; or by agen-
1988; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency cies under agreement with U.S.E.P.A.
(EPA), Office of Solid Waste and Emergency to implement RCRA regulations; and
Response, Washington, DC 20460. (v) Emergency response operations
15. Technical Guidance for Hazards Anal- for releases of, or substantial threats of
ysis, Emergency Planning for Extremely releases of, hazardous substances with-
Hazardous Substances, December 1987; U.S. out regard to the location of the haz-
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA),
Federal Emergency Management Adminis-
ard.
tration (FEMA) and U.S. Department of (2) Application. (i) All requirements of
Transportation (DOT), Washington, DC 20460. part 1910 and part 1926 of title 29 of the
16. Accident Investigation * * * A New Code of Federal Regulations apply pur-
Approach, 1983, National Safety Council; 444 suant to their terms to hazardous
North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, IL 60611 waste and emergency response oper-
3991. ations whether covered by this section
17. Fire & Explosion Index Hazard Classi-
or not. If there is a conflict or overlap,
fication Guide, 6th Edition, May 1987, Dow
Chemical Company; Midland, Michigan 48674. the provision more protective of em-
18. Chemical Exposure Index, May 1988, ployee safety and health shall apply
Dow Chemical Company; Midland, Michigan without regard to 29 CFR 1910.5(c)(1).
48674. (ii) Hazardous substance clean-up op-
[57 FR 6403, Feb. 24, 1992; 57 FR 7847, Mar. 4, erations within the scope of paragraphs
1992, as amended at 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996] (a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(iii) of this sec-
tion must comply with all paragraphs
1910.120 Hazardous waste operations of this section except paragraphs (p)
and emergency response. and (q).
(a) Scope, application, and definitions (iii) Operations within the scope of
(1) Scope. This section covers the fol- paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section
lowing operations, unless the employer must comply only with the require-
can demonstrate that the operation ments of paragraph (p) of this section.
does not involve employee exposure or Notes and Exceptions: (A) All provisions of
the reasonable possibility for employee paragraph (p) of this section cover any treat-
exposure to safety or health hazards: ment, storage or disposal (TSD) operation
(i) Clean-up operations required by a regulated by 40 CFR parts 264 and 265 or by
governmental body, whether Federal, state law authorized under RCRA, and re-
state, local or other involving haz- quired to have a permit or interim status
ardous substances that are conducted from EPA pursuant to 40 CFR 270.1 or from
a state agency pursuant to RCRA.
at uncontrolled hazardous waste sites
(B) Employers who are not required to
(including, but not limited to, the have a permit or interim status because they
EPAs National Priority Site List are conditionally exempt small quantity
(NPL), state priority site lists, sites generators under 40 CFR 261.5 or are genera-
recommended for the EPA NPL, and tors who qualify under 40 CFR 262.34 for ex-
initial investigations of government emptions from regulation under 40 CFR parts
identified sites which are conducted be- 264, 265 and 270 (excepted employers) are
fore the presence or absence of haz- not covered by paragraphs (p)(1) through
(p)(7) of this section. Excepted employers
ardous substances has been
who are required by the EPA or state agency
ascertained); to have their employees engage in emer-
(ii) Corrective actions involving gency response or who direct their employ-
clean-up operations at sites covered by ees to engage in emergency response are cov-
the Resource Conservation and Recov- ered by paragraph (p)(8) of this section, and
370
cannot be exempted by (p)(8)(i) of this sec- time of release by employees in the im-
tion. Excepted employers who are not re- mediate release area, or by mainte-
quired to have employees engage in emer- nance personnel are not considered to
gency response, who direct their employees
to evacuate in the case of such emergencies
be emergency responses within the
and who meet the requirements of paragraph scope of this standard. Responses to re-
(p)(8)(i) of this section are exempt from the leases of hazardous substances where
balance of paragraph (p)(8) of this section. there is no potential safety or health
(C) If an area is used primarily for treat- hazard (i.e., fire, explosion, or chemical
ment, storage or disposal, any emergency re- exposure) are not considered to be
sponse operations in that area shall comply emergency responses.
with paragraph (p)(8) of this section. In other
Facility means (A) any building,
areas not used primarily for treatment, stor-
age, or disposal, any emergency response op- structure, installation, equipment, pipe
erations shall comply with paragraph (q) of or pipeline (including any pipe into a
this section. Compliance with the require- sewer or publicly owned treatment
ments of paragraph (q) of this section shall works), well, pit, pond, lagoon, im-
be deemed to be in compliance with the re- poundment, ditch, storage container,
quirements of paragraph (p)(8) of this sec- motor vehicle, rolling stock, or air-
tion. craft, or (B) any site or area where a
(iv) Emergency response operations hazardous substance has been depos-
for releases of, or substantial threats of ited, stored, disposed of, or placed, or
releases of, hazardous substances which otherwise come to be located; but does
are not covered by paragraphs (a)(1)(i) not include any consumer product in
through (a)(1)(iv) of this section must consumer use or any water-borne ves-
only comply with the requirements of sel.
paragraph (q) of this section. Hazardous materials response
(3) DefinitionsBuddy system means a (HAZMAT) team means an organized
system of organizing employees into group of employees, designated by the
work groups in such a manner that employer, who are expected to perform
each employee of the work group is work to handle and control actual or
designated to be observed by at least potential leaks or spills of hazardous
one other employee in the work group. substances requiring possible close ap-
The purpose of the buddy system is to proach to the substance. The team
provide rapid assistance to employees members perform responses to releases
in the event of an emergency. or potential releases of hazardous sub-
Clean-up operation means an oper- stances for the purpose of control or
ation where hazardous substances are stabilization of the incident. A
removed, contained, incinerated, neu- HAZMAT team is not a fire brigade nor
tralized, stabilized, cleared-up, or in is a typical fire brigade a HAZMAT
any other manner processed or handled team. A HAZMAT team, however, may
with the ultimate goal of making the be a separate component of a fire bri-
site safer for people or the environ- gade or fire department.
ment. Hazardous substance means any sub-
Decontamination means the removal stance designated or listed under para-
of hazardous substances from employ- graphs (A) through (D) of this defini-
ees and their equipment to the extent tion, exposure to which results or may
necessary to preclude the occurrence of result in adverse affects on the health
foreseeable adverse health affects. or safety of employees:
Emergency response orresponding to (A) Any substance defined under sec-
emergencies means a response effort by tion 101(14) of CERCLA;
employees from outside the immediate (B) Any biological agent and other
release area or by other designated re- disease-causing agent which after re-
sponders (i.e., mutual-aid groups, local lease into the environment and upon
fire departments, etc.) to an occurrence exposure, ingestion, inhalation, or as-
which results, or is likely to result, in similation into any person, either di-
an uncontrolled release of a hazardous rectly from the environment or indi-
substance. Responses to incidental re- rectly by ingestion through food
leases of hazardous substances where chains, will or may reasonably be an-
the substance can be absorbed, neutral- ticipated to cause death, disease, be-
ized, or otherwise controlled at the havioral abnormalities, cancer, genetic
371
mutation, physiological malfunctions Permissible exposure limit means the

(including malfunctions in reproduc- exposure, inhalation or dermal permis-
tion) or physical deformations in such sible exposure limit specified in 29 CFR
persons or their offspring; part 1910, subparts G and Z.
(C) Any substance listed by the U.S. Published exposure level means the ex-
Department of Transportation as haz- posure limits published in NIOSH
ardous materials under 49 CFR 172.101 Recommendations for Occupational
and appendices; and Health Standards dated 1986, which is
(D) Hazardous waste as herein de- incorporated by reference as specified
fined. in 1910.6 or if none is specified, the ex-
Hazardous waste means posure limits published in the stand-
(A) A waste or combination of wastes ards specified by the American Con-
ference of Governmental Industrial Hy-
as defined in 40 CFR 261.3, or
gienists in their publication Thresh-
(B) Those substances defined as haz-
old Limit Values and Biological Expo-
ardous wastes in 49 CFR 171.8.
sure Indices for 198788 dated 1987,
Hazardous waste operation means any which is incorporated by reference as
operation conducted within the scope specified in 1910.6.
of this standard. Post emergency response means that
Hazardous waste site or Site means portion of an emergency response per-
any facility or location within the formed after the immediate threat of a
scope of this standard at which haz- release has been stabilized or elimi-
ardous waste operations take place. nated and clean-up of the site has
Health hazard means a chemical, mix- begun. If post emergency response is
ture of chemicals or a pathogen for performed by an employers own em-
which there is statistically significant ployees who were part of the initial
evidence based on at least one study emergency response, it is considered to
conducted in accordance with estab- be part of the initial response and not
lished scientific principles that acute post emergency response. However, if a
or chronic health effects may occur in group of an employers own employees,
exposed employees. The term health separate from the group providing ini-
hazard includes chemicals which are tial response, performs the clean-up op-
carcinogens, toxic or highly toxic eration, then the separate group of em-
agents, reproductive toxins, irritants, ployees would be considered to be per-
corrosives, sensitizers, heptaotoxins, forming post-emergency response and
nephrotoxins, neurotoxins, agents subject to paragraph (q)(11) of this sec-
which act on the hematopoietic sys- tion.
tem, and agents which damage the Qualified person means a person with
lungs, skin, eyes, or mucous mem- specific training, knowledge and expe-
branes. It also includes stress due to rience in the area for which the person
temperature extremes. Further defini- has the responsibility and the author-
tion of the terms used above can be ity to control.
found in appendix A to 29 CFR 1910.1200. Site safety and health supervisor (or of-
IDLH orImmediately dangerous to life ficial) means the individual located on
or health means an atmospheric con- a hazardous waste site who is respon-
centration of any toxic, corrosive or sible to the employer and has the au-
asphyxiant substance that poses an im- thority and knowledge necessary to
mediate threat to life or would cause implement the site safety and health
irreversible or delayed adverse health plan and verify compliance with appli-
effects or would interfere with an indi- cable safety and health requirements.
viduals ability to escape from a dan- Small quantity qenerator means a gen-
gerous atmosphere. erator of hazardous wastes who in any
Oxygen deficiency means that con- calendar month generates no more
centration of oxygen by volume below than 1,000 kilograms (2,205 pounds) of
which atmosphere supplying res- hazardous waste in that month.
piratory protection must be provided. Uncontrolled hazardous waste site,
It exists in atmospheres where the per- means an area identified as an uncon-
centage of oxygen by volume is less trolled hazardous waste site by a gov-
than 19.5 percent oxygen. ernmental body, whether Federal,
372
state, local or other where an accumu- cordance with subpart P of 29 CFR part
lation of hazardous substances creates 1926.
a threat to the health and safety of in- (iv) Contractors and sub-contractors.
dividuals or the environment or both. An employer who retains contractor or
Some sites are found on public lands sub-contractor services for work in
such as those created by former munic- hazardous waste operations shall in-
ipal, county or state landfills where il- form those contractors, sub-contrac-
legal or poorly managed waste disposal tors, or their representatives of the
has taken place. Other sites are found site emergency response procedures
on private property, often belonging to and any potential fire, explosion,
generators or former generators of haz- health, safety or other hazards of the
ardous substance wastes. Examples of hazardous waste operation that have
such sites include, but are not limited been identified by the employer, in-
to, surface impoundments, landfills, cluding those identified in the employ-
dumps, and tank or drum farms. Nor- ers information program.
mal operations at TSD sites are not (v) Program availability. The written
covered by this definition. safety and health program shall be
(b) Safety and health program. made available to any contractor or
NOTE TO (b): Safety and health programs subcontractor or their representative
developed and implemented to meet other who will be involved with the haz-
Federal, state, or local regulations are con- ardous waste operation; to employees;
sidered acceptable in meeting this require- to employee designated representa-
ment if they cover or are modified to cover tives; to OSHA personnel, and to per-
the topics required in this paragraph. An ad- sonnel of other Federal, state, or local
ditional or separate safety and health pro-
gram is not required by this paragraph. agencies with regulatory authority
(1) General. (i) Employers shall de- over the site.
velop and implement a written safety (2) Organizational structure part of the
and health program for their employ- site program(i) The organizationa1
ees involved in hazardous waste oper- structure part of the program shall es-
ations. The program shall be designed tablish the specific chain of command
to identify, evaluate, and control safe- and specify the overall responsibilities
ty and health hazards, and provide for of supervisors and employees. It shall
emergency response for hazardous include, at a minimum, the following
waste operations. elements:
(ii) The written safety and health (A) A general supervisor who has the
program shall incorporate the fol- responsibility and authority to direct
lowing: all hazardous waste operations.
(A) An organizational structure; (B) A site safety and health super-
(B) A comprehensive workplan; visor who has the responsibility and
(C) A site-specific safety and health authority to develop and implement
plan which need not repeat the employ- the site safety and health plan and
ers standard operating procedures re- verify compliance.
quired in paragraph (b)(1)(ii)(F) of this (C) All other personnel needed for
section; hazardous waste site operations and
(D) The safety and health training emergency response and their general
program; functions and responsibilities.
(E) The medical surveillance pro- (D) The lines of authority, responsi-
gram; bility, and communication.
(F) The employers standard oper- (ii) The organizational structure
ating procedures for safety and health; shall be reviewed and updated as nec-
and essary to reflect the current status of
(G) Any necessary interface between waste site operations.
general program and site specific ac- (3) Comprehensive workplan part of the
tivities. site program. The comprehensive
(iii) Site excavation. Site excavations workplan part of the program shall ad-
created during initial site preparation dress the tasks and objectives of the
or during hazardous waste operations site operations and the logistics and re-
shall be shored or sloped as appropriate sources required to reach those tasks
to prevent accidental collapse in ac- and objectives.
373
(i) The comprehensive workplan shall (F) Site control measures in accord-
address anticipated clean-up activities ance with the site control program re-
as well as normal operating procedures quired in paragraph (d) of this section.
which need not repeat the employers (G) Decontamination procedures in
procedures available elsewhere. accordance with paragraph (k) of this
(ii) The comprehensive workplan section.
shall define work tasks and objectives (H) An emergency response plan
and identify the methods for accom- meeting the requirements of paragraph
plishing those tasks and objectives. (l) of this section for safe and effective
(iii) The comprehensive workplan responses to emergencies, including
shall establish personnel requirements the necessary PPE and other equip-
for implementing the plan. ment.
(iv) The comprehensive workplan (I) Confined space entry procedures.
shall provide for the implementation of (J) A spill containment program
the training required in paragraph (e) meeting the requirements of paragraph
of this section. (j) of this section.
(v) The comprehensive workplan (iii) Pre-entry briefing. The site spe-
shall provide for the implementation of cific safety and health plan shall pro-
the required informational programs vide for pre-entry briefings to be held
required in paragraph (i) of this sec- prior to initiating any site activity,
tion. and at such other times as necessary to
ensure that employees are apprised of
(vi) The comprehensive workplan
the site safety and health plan and
shall provide for the implementation of
that this plan is being followed. The in-
the medical surveillance program de-
formation and data obtained from site
scribed in paragraph (f) of this section.
characterization and analysis work re-
(4) Site-specific safety and health plan
quired in paragraph (c) of this section
part of the program(i) General. The site
shall be used to prepare and update the
safety and health plan, which must be
site safety and health plan.
kept on site, shall address the safety
(iv) Effectiveness of site safety and
and health hazards of each phase of site
health plan. Inspections shall be con-
operation and include the requirements
ducted by the site safety and health su-
and procedures for employee protec-
pervisor or, in the absence of that indi-
tion.
vidual, another individual who is
(ii) Elements. The site safety and knowledgeable in occupational safety
health plan, as a minimum, shall ad- and health, acting on behalf of the em-
dress the following: ployer as necessary to determine the
(A) A safety and health risk or haz- effectiveness of the site safety and
ard analysis for each site task and op- health plan. Any deficiencies in the ef-
eration found in the workplan. fectiveness of the site safety and
(B) Employee training assignments health plan shall be corrected by the
to assure compliance with paragraph employer.
(e) of this section. (c) Site characterization and analysis
(C) Personal protective equipment to (1) General. Hazardous waste sites shall
be used by employees for each of the be evaluated in accordance with this
site tasks and operations being con- paragraph to identify specific site haz-
ducted as required by the personal pro- ards and to determine the appropriate
tective equipment program in para- safety and health control procedures
graph (g)(5) of this section. needed to protect employees from the
(D) Medical surveillance require- identified hazards.
ments in accordance with the program (2) Preliminary evaluation. A prelimi-
in paragraph (f) of this section. nary evaluation of a sites characteris-
(E) Frequency and types of air moni- tics shall be performed prior to site
toring, personnel monitoring, and envi- entry by a qualified person in order to
ronmental sampling techniques and in- aid in the selection of appropriate em-
strumentation to be used, including ployee protection methods prior to site
methods of maintenance and calibra- entry. Immediately after initial site
tion of monitoring and sampling equip- entry, a more detailed evaluation of
ment to be used. the sites specific characteristics shall
374
be performed by a qualified person in pected hazardous substances and

order to further identify existing site health hazards, and which will provide
hazards and to further aid in the selec- protection against other known and
tion of the appropriate engineering suspected hazards identified during the
controls and personal protective equip- preliminary site evaluation. If there is
ment for the tasks to be performed. no permissible exposure limit or pub-
(3) Hazard identification. All suspected lished exposure level, the employer
conditions that may pose inhalation or may use other published studies and in-
skin absorption hazards that are imme- formation as a guide to appropriate
diately dangerous to life or health personal protective equipment.
(IDLH), or other conditions that may (ii) If positive-pressure self-contained
cause death or serious harm, shall be breathing apparatus is not used as part
identified during the preliminary sur- of the entry ensemble, and if res-
vey and evaluated during the detailed piratory protection is warranted by the
survey. Examples of such hazards in- potential hazards identified during the
clude, but are not limited to, confined preliminary site evaluation, an escape
space entry, potentially explosive or self-contained breathing apparatus of
flammable situations, visible vapor at least five minutes duration shall be
clouds, or areas where biological indi- carried by employees during initial site
cators such as dead animals or vegeta- entry.
tion are located. (iii) If the preliminary site evalua-
(4) Required information. The fol- tion does not produce sufficient infor-
lowing information to the extent avail- mation to identify the hazards or sus-
able shall be obtained by the employer pected hazards of the site, an ensemble
prior to allowing employees to enter a providing protection equivalent to
site: Level B PPE shall be provided as min-
(i) Location and approximate size of imum protection, and direct reading
the site.
instruments shall be used as appro-
(ii) Description of the response activ-
priate for identifying IDLH conditions.
ity and/or the job task to be performed.
(See appendix B for a description of
(iii) Duration of the planned em-
Level B hazards and the recommenda-
ployee activity.
tions for Level B protective equip-
(iv) Site topography and accessibility
ment.)
by air and roads.
(v) Safety and health hazards ex- (iv) Once the hazards of the site have
pected at the site. been identified, the appropriate PPE
(vi) Pathways for hazardous sub- shall be selected and used in accord-
stance dispersion. ance with paragraph (g) of this section.
(vii) Present status and capabilities (6) Monitoring. The following moni-
of emergency response teams that toring shall be conducted during initial
would provide assistance to hazardous site entry when the site evaluation
waste clean-up site employees at the produces information that shows the
time of an emergency. potential for ionizing radiation or
(viii) Hazardous substances and IDLH conditions, or when the site in-
health hazards involved or expected at formation is not sufficient reasonably
the site, and their chemical and phys- to eliminate these possible conditions:
ical properties. (i) Monitoring with direct reading in-
(5) Personal protective equipment. Per- struments for hazardous levels of ion-
sonal protective equipment (PPE) shall izing radiation.
be provided and used during initial site (ii) Monitoring the air with appro-
entry in accordance with the following priate direct reading test equipment
requirements: (i.e., combustible gas meters, detector
(i) Based upon the results of the pre- tubes) for IDLH and other conditions
liminary site evaluation, an ensemble that may cause death or serious harm
of PPE shall be selected and used dur- (combustible or explosive atmospheres,
ing initial site entry which will provide oxygen deficiency, toxic substances).
protection to a level of exposure below (iii) Visually observing for signs of
permissible exposure limits and pub- actual or potential IDLH or other dan-
lished exposure levels for known or sus- gerous conditions.
375
(iv) An ongoing air monitoring pro- tem; site communications including

gram in accordance with paragraph (h) alerting means for emergencies; the
of this section shall be implemented standard operating procedures or safe
after site characterization has deter- work practices; and, identification of
mined the site is safe for the start-up the nearest medical assistance. Where
of operations. these requirements are covered else-
(7) Risk identification. Once the pres- where they need not be repeated.
ence and concentrations of specific (e) Training(1) General. (i) All em-
hazardous substances and health haz- ployees working on site (such as but
ards have been established, the risks not limited to equipment operators,
associated with these substances shall general laborers and others) exposed to
be identified. Employees who will be hazardous substances, health hazards,
working on the site shall be informed or safety hazards and their supervisors
of any risks that have been identified. and management responsible for the
In situations covered by the Hazard site shall receive training meeting the
Communication Standard, 29 CFR requirements of this paragraph before
1910.1200, training required by that they are permitted to engage in haz-
standard need not be duplicated. ardous waste operations that could ex-
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(7).Risks to con- pose them to hazardous substances,
sider include, but are not limited to: safety, or health hazards, and they
(a) Exposures exceeding the permissible ex- shall receive review training as speci-
posure limits and published exposure levels.
fied in this paragraph.
(b) IDLH concentrations.
(c) Potential skin absorption and irritation (ii) Employees shall not be permitted
sources. to participate in or supervise field ac-
(d) Potential eye irritation sources. tivities until they have been trained to
(e) Explosion sensitivity and flammability a level required by their job function
ranges. and responsibility.
(f) Oxygen deficiency. (2) Elements to be covered. The train-
(8) Employee notification. Any infor- ing shall thoroughly cover the fol-
mation concerning the chemical, phys- lowing:
ical, and toxicologic properties of each (i) Names of personnel and alternates
substance known or expected to be responsible for site safety and health;
present on site that is available to the
(ii) Safety, health and other hazards
employer and relevant to the duties an
present on the site;
employee is expected to perform shall
be made available to the affected em- (iii) Use of personal protective equip-
ployees prior to the commencement of ment;
their work activities. The employer (iv) Work practices by which the em-
may utilize information developed for ployee can minimize risks from haz-
the hazard communication standard for ards;
this purpose. (v) Safe use of engineering controls
(d) Site control(1) General. Appro- and equipment on the site;
priate site control procedures shall be (vi) Medical surveillance require-
implemented to control employee expo- ments, including recognition of symp-
sure to hazardous substances before toms and signs which might indicate
clean-up work begins. overexposure to hazards; and
(2) Site control program. A site control (vii) The contents of paragraphs (G)
program for protecting employees through (J) of the site safety and
which is part of the employers site health plan set forth in paragraph
safety and health program required in (b)(4)(ii) of this section.
paragraph (b) of this section shall be (3) Initial training. (i) General site
developed during the planning stages of workers (such as equipment operators,
a hazardous waste clean-up operation general laborers and supervisory per-
and modified as necessary as new infor- sonnel) engaged in hazardous substance
mation becomes available. removal or other activities which ex-
(3) Elements of the site control program. pose or potentially expose workers to
The site control program shall, as a hazardous substances and health haz-
minimum, include: A site map; site ards shall receive a minimum of 40
work zones; the use of a buddy sys- hours of instruction off the site, and a
376
minimum of three days actual field ex- about the subject matter that is being
perience under the direct supervision of presented in training. Such trainers
a trained, experienced supervisor. shall have satisfactorily completed a
(ii) Workers on site only occasionally training program for teaching the sub-
for a specific limited task (such as, but jects they are expected to teach, or
not limited to, ground water moni- they shall have the academic creden-
toring, land surveying, or geo-physical tials and instructional experience nec-
surveying) and who are unlikely to be essary for teaching the subjects. In-
exposed over permissible exposure lim- structors shall demonstrate competent
its and published exposure limits shall instructional skills and knowledge of
receive a minimum of 24 hours of in- the applicable subject matter.
struction off the site, and the min- (6) Training certification. Employees
imum of one day actual field experi- and supervisors that have received and
ence under the direct supervision of a successfully completed the training
trained, experienced supervisor. and field experience specified in para-
(iii) Workers regularly on site who graphs (e)(1) through (e)(4) of this sec-
work in areas which have been mon- tion shall be certified by their instruc-
itored and fully characterized indi- tor or the head instructor and trained
cating that exposures are under per- supervisor as having successfully com-
missible exposure limits and published pleted the necessary training. A writ-
exposure limits where respirators are ten certificate shall be given to each
not necessary, and the characterization person so certified. Any person who has
indicates that there are no health haz- not been so certified or who does not
ards or the possibility of an emergency meet the requirements of paragraph
developing, shall receive a minimum of (e)(9) of this section shall be prohibited
24 hours of instruction off the site and from engaging in hazardous waste oper-
the minimum of one day actual field ations.
experience under the direct supervision (7) Emergency response. Employees
of a trained, experienced supervisor. who are engaged in responding to haz-
(iv) Workers with 24 hours of training ardous emergency situations at haz-
who are covered by paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) ardous waste clean-up sites that may
and (e)(3)(iii) of this section, and who expose them to hazardous substances
become general site workers or who are shall be trained in how to respond to
required to wear respirators, shall have such expected emergencies.
the additional 16 hours and two days of (8) Refresher training. Employees spec-
training necessary to total the training ified in paragraph (e)(1) of this section,
specified in paragraph (e)(3)(i). and managers and supervisors specified
(4) Management and supervisor train- in paragraph (e)(4) of this section, shall
ing. On-site management and super- receive eight hours of refresher train-
visors directly responsible for, or who ing annually on the items specified in
supervise employees engaged in, haz- paragraph (e)(2) and/or (e)(4) of this
ardous waste operations shall receive section, any critique of incidents that
40 hours initial training, and three have occurred in the past year that can
days of supervised field experience (the serve as training examples of related
training may be reduced to 24 hours work, and other relevant topics.
and one day if the only area of their re- (9) Equivalent training. Employers
sponsibility is employees covered by who can show by documentation or cer-
paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) and (e)(3)(iii)) and tification that an employees work ex-
at least eight additional hours of spe- perience and/or training has resulted in
cialized training at the time of job as- training equivalent to that training re-
signment on such topics as, but not quired in paragraphs (e)(1) through
limited to, the employers safety and (e)(4) of this section shall not be re-
health program and the associated em- quired to provide the initial training
ployee training program, personal pro- requirements of those paragraphs to
tective equipment program, spill con- such employees and shall provide a
tainment program, and health hazard copy of the certification or documenta-
monitoring procedure and techniques. tion to the employee upon request.
(5) Qualifications for trainers. Trainers However, certified employees or em-
shall be qualified to instruct employees ployees with equivalent training new
377
to a site shall receive appropriate, site ployee has not had an examination
specific training before site entry and within the last six months;
have appropriate supervised field expe- (D) As soon as possible upon notifica-
rience at the new site. Equivalent tion by an employee that the employee
training includes any academic train- has developed signs or symptoms indi-
ing or the training that existing em- cating possible overexposure to haz-
ployees might have already received ardous substances or health hazards, or
from actual hazardous waste site work that the employee has been injured or
experience. exposed above the permissible exposure
(f) Medical surveillance(1) General. limits or published exposure levels in
Employers engaged in operations speci- an emergency situation;
fied in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (E) At more frequent times, if the ex-
(a)(1)(iv) of this section and not cov- amining physician determines that an
ered by (a)(2)(iii) exceptions and em- increased frequency of examination is
ployers of employees specified in para- medically necessary.
graph (q)(9) shall institute a medical (ii) For employees covered under
surveillance program in accordance paragraph (f)(2)(iii) and for all employ-
with this paragraph. ees including those of employers cov-
(2) Employees covered. The medical ered by paragraph (a)(1)(v) who may
surveillance program shall be insti- have been injured, received a health
tuted by the employer for the following impairment, developed signs or symp-
employees: toms which may have resulted from ex-
(i) All employees who are or may be posure to hazardous substances result-
exposed to hazardous substances or ing from an emergency incident, or ex-
health hazards at or above the permis- posed during an emergency incident to
sible exposure limits or, if there is no hazardous substances at concentra-
permissible exposure limit, above the tions above the permissible exposure
published exposure levels for these sub- limits or the published exposure levels
stances, without regard to the use of without the necessary personal protec-
respirators, for 30 days or more a year; tive equipment being used:
(ii) All employees who wear a res- (A) As soon as possible following the
pirator for 30 days or more a year or as emergency incident or development of
required by 1910.134; signs or symptoms;
(B) At additional times, if the exam-
(iii) All employees who are injured,
ining physician determines that follow-
become ill or develop signs or symp-
up examinations or consultations are
toms due to possible overexposure in-
medically necessary.
volving hazardous substances or health
(4) Content of medical examinations and
hazards from an emergency response or
consultations. (i) Medical examinations
hazardous waste operation; and
required by paragraph (f)(3) of this sec-
(iv) Members of HAZMAT teams.
tion shall include a medical and work
(3) Frequency of medical examinations history (or updated history if one is in
and consultations. Medical examina- the employees file) with special em-
tions and consultations shall be made phasis on symptoms related to the han-
available by the employer to each em- dling of hazardous substances and
ployee covered under paragraph (f)(2) of health hazards, and to fitness for duty
this section on the following schedules: including the ability to wear any re-
(i) For employees covered under quired PPE under conditions (i.e., tem-
paragraphs (f)(2)(i), (f)(2)(ii), and perature extremes) that may be ex-
(f)(2)(iv): pected at the work site.
(A) Prior to assignment; (ii) The content of medical examina-
(B) At least once every twelve tions or consultations made available
months for each employee covered un- to employees pursuant to paragraph (f)
less the attending physician believes a shall be determined by the attending
longer interval (not greater than bien- physician. The guidelines in the Occu-
nially) is appropriate; pational Safety and Health Guidance
(C) At termination of employment or Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activi-
reassignment to an area where the em- ties (See appendix D, Reference #10)
ployee would not be covered if the em- should be consulted.
378
(5) Examination by a physician and quired by paragraph (f) of this section

costs. All medical examinations and shall be retained. This record shall be
procedures shall be performed by or retained for the period specified and
under the supervision of a licensed phy- meet the criteria of 29 CFR 1910.20.
sician, preferably one knowledgeable in (ii) The record required in paragraph
occupational medicine, and shall be (f)(8)(i) of this section shall include at
provided without cost to the employee, least the following information:
without loss of pay, and at a reason- (A) The name and social security
able time and place. number of the employee;
(6) Information provided to the physi- (B) Physicians written opinions, rec-
cian. The employer shall provide one ommended limitations, and results of
copy of this standard and its appen- examinations and tests;
dices to the attending physician, and in (C) Any employee medical com-
addition the following for each em- plaints related to exposure to haz-
ployee: ardous substances;
(i) A description of the employees (D) A copy of the information pro-
duties as they relate to the employees vided to the examining physician by
exposures. the employer, with the exception of the
(ii) The employees exposure levels or standard and its appendices.
anticipated exposure levels. (g) Engineering controls, work prac-
(iii) A description of any personal tices, and personal protective equipment
protective equipment used or to be for employee protection. Engineering
used. controls, work practices, personal pro-
(iv) Information from previous med- tective equipment, or a combination of
ical examinations of the employee these shall be implemented in accord-
which is not readily available to the ance with this paragraph to protect
examining physician. employees from exposure to hazardous
(v) Information required by 1910.134. substances and safety and health haz-
(7) Physicians written opinion. (i) The ards.
employer shall obtain and furnish the (1) Engineering controls, work practices
employee with a copy of a written and PPE for substances regulated in sub-
opinion from the attending physician parts G and Z. (i) Engineering controls
containing the following: and work practices shall be instituted
(A) The physicians opinion as to to reduce and maintain employee expo-
whether the employee has any detected sure to or below the permissible expo-
medical conditions which would place sure limits for substances regulated by
the employee at increased risk of ma- 29 CFR part 1910, to the extent required
terial impairment of the employees by subpart Z, except to the extent that
health from work in hazardous waste such controls and practices are not fea-
operations or emergency response, or sible.
from respirator use. NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (g)(1)(i): Engineering
(B) The physicians recommended controls which may be feasible include the
limitations upon the employees as- use of pressurized cabs or control booths on
signed work. equipment, and/or the use of remotely oper-
ated material handling equipment. Work
(C) The results of the medical exam-
practices which may be feasible are remov-
ination and tests if requested by the ing all non-essential employees from poten-
employee. tial exposure during opening of drums, wet-
(D) A statement that the employee ting down dusty operations and locating em-
has been informed by the physician of ployees upwind of possible hazards.
the results of the medical examination (ii) Whenever engineering controls
and any medical conditions which re- and work practices are not feasible or
quire further examination or treat- not required, any reasonable combina-
ment. tion of engineering controls, work
(ii) The written opinion obtained by practices and PPE shall be used to re-
the employer shall not reveal specific duce and maintain employee exposures
findings or diagnoses unrelated to oc- to or below the permissible exposure
cupational exposures. limits or dose limits for substances
(8) Recordkeeping. (i) An accurate regulated by 29 CFR part 1910, subpart
record of the medical surveillance re- Z.
379
(iii) The employer shall not imple- stantial possibility of immediate

ment a schedule of employee rotation death, immediate serious illness or in-
as a means of compliance with permis- jury, or impair the ability to escape.
sible exposure limits or dose limits ex- (v) The level of protection provided
cept when there is no other feasible by PPE selection shall be increased
way of complying with the airborne or when additional information on site
dermal dose limits for ionizing radi- conditions indicates that increased
ation. protection is necessary to reduce em-
(iv) The provisions of 29 CFR, subpart ployee exposures below permissible ex-
G, shall be followed. posure limits and published exposure
(2) Engineering controls, work practices, levels for hazardous substances and
and PPE for substances not regulated in health hazards. (See appendix B for
subparts G and Z. An appropriate com- guidance on selecting PPE ensembles.)
bination of engineering controls, work NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (g)(3): The level of em-
practices and personal protective ployee protection provided may be decreased
equipment shall be used to reduce and when additional information or site condi-
maintain employee exposure to or tions show that decreased protection will not
below published exposure levels for result in hazardous exposures to employees.
hazardous substances and health haz- (vi) Personal protective equipment
ards not regulated by 29 CFR part 1910, shall be selected and used to meet the
subparts G and Z. The employer may requirements of 29 CFR part 1910, sub-
use the published literature and MSDS part I, and additional requirements
as a guide in making the employers specified in this section.
determination as to what level of pro- (4) Totally-encapsulating chemical pro-
tection the employer believes is appro- tective suits. (i) Totally-encapsulating
priate for hazardous substances and suits shall protect employees from the
health hazards for which there is no particular hazards which are identified
permissible exposure limit or published during site characterization and anal-
exposure limit. ysis.
(3) Personal protective equipment selec- (ii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall
tion. (i) Personal protective equipment be capable of maintaining positive air
(PPE) shall be selected and used which pressure. (See appendix A for a test
will protect employees from the haz- method which may be used to evaluate
ards and potential hazards they are this requirement.)
likely to encounter as identified during (iii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall
the site characterization and analysis. be capable of preventing inward test
(ii) Personal protective equipment gas leakage of more than 0.5 percent.
selection shall be based on an evalua- (See appendix A for a test method
tion of the performance characteristics which may be used to evaluate this re-
of the PPE relative to the require- quirement.)
ments and limitations of the site, the (5) Personal protective equipment (PPE)
task-specific conditions and duration, program. A written personal protective
and the hazards and potential hazards equipment program, which is part of
identified at the site. the employers safety and health pro-
(iii) Positive pressure self-contained gram required in paragraph (b) of this
breathing apparatus, or positive pres- section or required in paragraph (p)(1)
sure air-line respirators equipped with of this section and which is also a part
an escape air supply, shall be used of the site-specific safety and health
when chemical exposure levels present plan shall be established. The PPE pro-
will create a substantial possibility of gram shall address the elements listed
immediate death, immediate serious below. When elements, such as donning
illness or injury, or impair the ability and doffing procedures, are provided by
to escape. the manufacturer of a piece of equip-
(iv) Totally-encapsulating chemical ment and are attached to the plan,
protective suits (protection equivalent they need not be rewritten into the
to Level A protection as recommended plan as long as they adequately address
in appendix B) shall be used in condi- the procedure or element.
tions where skin absorption of a haz- (i) PPE selection based upon site haz-
ardous substance may result in a sub- ards,
380
(ii) PPE use and limitations of the (ii) When contaminants other than
equipment, those previously identified are being
(iii) Work mission duration, handled.
(iv) PPE maintenance and storage, (iii) When a different type of oper-
(v) PPE decontamination and dis- ation is initiated (e.g., drum opening as
posal, opposed to exploratory well drilling).
(vi) PPE training and proper fitting, (iv) When employees are handling
(vii) PPE donning and doffing proce- leaking drums or containers or work-
dures, ing in areas with obvious liquid con-
(viii) PPE inspection procedures tamination (e.g., a spill or lagoon).
prior to, during, and after use, (4) Monitoring of high-risk employees.
(ix) Evaluation of the effectiveness of After the actual clean-up phase of any
the PPE program, and hazardous waste operation commences;
(x) Limitations during temperature for example, when soil, surface water
extremes, heat stress, and other appro- or containers are moved or disturbed;
priate medical considerations. the employer shall monitor those em-
(h) Monitoring(1) General. (i) Moni- ployees likely to have the highest ex-
toring shall be performed in accord- posures to hazardous substances and
ance with this paragraph where there health hazards likely to be present
may be a question of employee expo- above permissible exposure limits or
sure to hazardous concentrations of published exposure levels by using per-
hazardous substances in order to assure sonal sampling frequently enough to
proper selection of engineering con- characterize employee exposures. If the
trols, work practices and personal pro- employees likely to have the highest
tective equipment so that employees exposure are over permissible exposure
are not exposed to levels which exceed limits or published exposure limits,
permissible exposure limits, or pub- then monitoring shall continue to de-
lished exposure levels if there are no termine all employees likely to be
permissible exposure limits, for haz- above those limits. The employer may
ardous substances. utilize a representative sampling ap-
(ii) Air monitoring shall be used to proach by documenting that the em-
identify and quantify airborne levels of ployees and chemicals chosen for moni-
hazardous substances and safety and toring are based on the criteria stated
health hazards in order to determine above.
the appropriate level of employee pro- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (h): It is not required
tection needed on site. to monitor employees engaged in site char-
(2) Initial entry. Upon initial entry, acterization operations covered by paragraph
representative air monitoring shall be (c) of this section.
conducted to identify any IDLH condi- (i) Informational programs. Employers
tion, exposure over permissible expo- shall develop and implement a pro-
sure limits or published exposure lev- gram, which is part of the employers
els, exposure over a radioactive mate- safety and health program required in
rials dose limits or other dangerous paragraph (b) of this section, to inform
condition such as the presence of flam- employees, contractors, and sub-
mable atmospheres or oxygen-deficient contractors (or their representative)
environments. actually engaged in hazardous waste
(3) Periodic monitoring. Periodic moni- operations of the nature, level and de-
toring shall be conducted when the pos- gree of exposure likely as a result of
sibility of an IDLH condition or flam- participation in such hazardous waste
mable atmosphere has developed or operations. Employees, contractors and
when there is indication that exposures subcontractors working outside of the
may have risen over permissible expo- operations part of a site are not cov-
sure limits or published exposure levels ered by this standard.
since prior monitoring. Situations (j) Handling drums and containers(1)
where it shall be considered whether General. (i) Hazardous substances and
the possibility that exposures have contaminated soils, liquids, and other
risen are as follows: residues shall be handled, transported,
(i) When work begins on a different labeled, and disposed of in accordance
portion of the site. with this paragraph.
381
(ii) Drums and containers used dur- and ready for use to control incipient
ing the clean-up shall meet the appro- fires.
priate DOT, OSHA, and EPA regula- (2) Openinq drums and containers. The
tions for the wastes that they contain. following procedures shall be followed
(iii) When practical, drums and con- in areas where drums or containers are
tainers shall be inspected and their in- being opened:
tegrity shall be assured prior to being (i) Where an airline respirator system
moved. Drums or containers that can- is used, connections to the source of air
not be inspected before being moved supply shall be protected from con-
because of storage conditions (i.e., bur- tamination and the entire system shall
ied beneath the earth, stacked behind be protected from physical damage.
other drums, stacked several tiers high (ii) Employees not actually involved
in a pile, etc.) shall be moved to an ac- in opening drums or containers shall be
cessible location and inspected prior to kept a safe distance from the drums or
further handling. containers being opened.
(iv) Unlabelled drums and containers (iii) If employees must work near or
shall be considered to contain haz- adjacent to drums or containers being
ardous substances and handled accord- opened, a suitable shield that does not
ingly until the contents are positively interfere with the work operation shall
identified and labeled. be placed between the employee and
(v) Site operations shall be organized the drums or containers being opened
to minimize the amount of drum or to protect the employee in case of acci-
container movement. dental explosion.
(vi) Prior to movement of drums or (iv) Controls for drum or container
containers, all employees exposed to opening equipment, monitoring equip-
the transfer operation shall be warned ment, and fire suppression equipment
of the potential hazards associated shall be located behind the explosion-
with the contents of the drums or con- resistant barrier.
tainers. (v) When there is a reasonable possi-
(vii) U.S. Department of Transpor- bility of flammable atmospheres being
tation specified salvage drums or con- present, material handling equipment
tainers and suitable quantities of prop- and hand tools shall be of the type to
er absorbent shall be kept available prevent sources of ignition.
and used in areas where spills, leaks, or (vi) Drums and containers shall be
ruptures may occur. opened in such a manner that excess
(viii) Where major spills may occur, a interior pressure will be safely re-
spill containment program, which is lieved. If pressure can not be relieved
part of the employers safety and from a remote location, appropriate
health program required in paragraph shielding shall be placed between the
(b) of this section, shall be imple- employee and the drums or containers
mented to contain and isolate the en- to reduce the risk of employee injury.
tire volume of the hazardous substance (vii) Employees shall not stand upon
being transferred. or work from drums or containers.
(ix) Drums and containers that can- (3) Material handling equipment. Mate-
not be moved without rupture, leakage, rial handiing equipment used to trans-
or spillage shall be emptied into a fer drums and containers shall be se-
sound container using a device classi- lected, positioned and operated to min-
fied for the material being transferred. imize sources of ignition related to the
(x) A ground-penetrating system or equipment from igniting vapors re-
other type of detection system or de- leased from ruptured drums or con-
vice shall be used to estimate the loca- tainers.
tion and depth of buried drums or con- (4) Radioactive wastes. Drums and con-
tainers. tainers containing radioactive wastes
(xi) Soil or covering material shall be shall not be handled until such time as
removed with caution to prevent drum their hazard to employees is properly
or container rupture. assessed.
(xii) Fire extinguishing equipment (5) Shock sensitive wastes. As a min-
meeting the requirements of 29 CFR imum, the following special pre-
part 1910, subpart L, shall be on hand cautions shall be taken when drums
382
and containers containing or suspected (ii) If crystalline material is noted on

of containing shock-sensitive wastes any container, the contents shall be
are handled: handled as a shock-sensitive waste
(i) All non-essential employees shall until the contents are identified.
be evacuated from the area of transfer. (7) Sampling of drum and container
(ii) Material handling equipment contents. Sampling of containers and
shall be provided with explosive con- drums shall be done in accordance with
tainment devices or protective shields
a sampling procedure which is part of
to protect equipment operators from
the site safety and health plan devel-
exploding containers.
(iii) An employee alarm system capa- oped for and available to employees
ble of being perceived above sur- and others at the specific worksite.
rounding light and noise conditions (8) Shipping and transport. (i) Drums
shall be used to signal the commence- and containers shall be identified and
ment and completion of explosive classified prior to packaging for ship-
waste handling activities. ment.
(iv) Continuous communications (i.e., (ii) Drum or container staging areas
portable radios, hand signals, tele- shall be kept to the minimum number
phones, as appropriate) shall be main- necessary to identify and classify ma-
tained between the employee-in-charge terials safely and prepare them for
of the immediate handling area and transport.
both the site safety and health super- (iii) Staging areas shall be provided
visor and the command post until such with adequate access and egress routes.
time as the handling operation is com-
(iv) Bulking of hazardous wastes
pleted. Communication equipment or
methods that could cause shock sen- shall be permitted only after a thor-
sitive materials to explode shall not be ough characterization of the materials
used. has been completed.
(v) Drums and containers under pres- (9) Tank and vault procedures. (i)
sure, as evidenced by bulging or swell- Tanks and vaults containing hazardous
ing, shall not be moved until such time substances shall be handled in a man-
as the cause for excess pressure is de- ner similar to that for drums and con-
termined and appropriate containment tainers, taking into consideration the
procedures have been implemented to size of the tank or vault.
protect employees from explosive relief (ii) Appropriate tank or vault entry
of the drum. procedures as described in the employ-
(vi) Drums and containers containing ers safety and health plan shall be fol-
packaged laboratory wastes shall be lowed whenever employees must enter
considered to contain shock-sensitive a tank or vault.
or explosive materials until they have
(k) Decontamination(1) General. Pro-
been characterized.
cedures for all phases of decontamina-
CAUTION: Shipping of shock sensitive tion shall be developed and imple-
wastes may be prohibited under U.S. Depart- mented in accordance with this para-
ment of Transportation regulations. Employ-
ers and their shippers should refer to 49 CFR
graph.
173.21 and 173.50. (2) Decontamination procedures. (i) A
decontamination procedure shall be de-
(6) Laboratory waste packs. In addition veloped, communicated to employees
to the requirements of paragraph (j)(5)
and implemented before any employees
of this section, the following pre-
or equipment may enter areas on site
cautions shall be taken, as a minimum,
in handling laboratory waste packs where potential for exposure to haz-
(lab packs): ardous substances exists.
(i) Lab packs shall be opened only (ii) Standard operating procedures
when necessary and then only by an in- shall be developed to minimize em-
dividual knowledgeable in the inspec- ployee contact with hazardous sub-
tion, classification, and segregation of stances or with equipment that has
the containers within the pack accord- contacted hazardous substances.
ing to the hazards of the wastes.
383
(iii) All employees leaving a contami- Emergency response plan. (i) An emer-
nated area shall be appropriately de- gency response plan shall be developed
contaminated; all contaminated cloth- and implemented by all employers
ing and equipment leaving a contami- within the scope of paragraphs (a)(1)
nated area shall be appropriately dis- (i)(ii) of this section to handle antici-
posed of or decontaminated. pated emergencies prior to the com-
(iv) Decontamination procedures mencement of hazardous waste oper-
shall be monitored by the site safety ations. The plan shall be in writing and
and health supervisor to determine available for inspection and copying by
their effectiveness. When such proce- employees, their representatives,
dures are found to be ineffective, ap- OSHA personnel and other govern-
propriate steps shall be taken to cor- mental agencies with relevant respon-
rect any deficiencies. sibilities.
(3) Location. Decontamination shall (ii) Employers who will evacuate
be performed in geographical areas their employees from the danger area
that will minimize the exposure of when an emergency occurs, and who do
uncontaminated employees or equip- not permit any of their employees to
ment to contaminated employees or assist in handling the emergency, are
equipment. exempt from the requirements of this
(4) Equipment and solvents. All equip- paragraph if they provide an emer-
ment and solvents used for decon- gency action plan complying with
tamination shall be decontaminated or 1910.38(a) of this part.
disposed of properly. (2) Elements of an emergency response
(5) Personal protective clothing and plan. The employer shall develop an
equipment. (i) Protective clothing and emergency response plan for emer-
equipment shall be decontaminated, gencies which shall address, as a min-
cleaned, laundered, maintained or re- imum, the following:
placed as needed to maintain their ef- (i) Pre-emergency planning.
fectiveness. (ii) Personnel roles, lines of author-
(ii) Employees whose non-imper- ity, and communication.
meable clothing becomes wetted with (iii) Emergency recognition and pre-
hazardous substances shall imme- vention.
diately remove that clothing and pro- (iv) Safe distances and places of ref-
ceed to shower. The clothing shall be uge.
disposed of or decontaminated before it
(v) Site security and control.
is removed from the work zone.
(vi) Evacuation routes and proce-
(6) Unauthorized employees. Unauthor-
dures.
ized employees shall not remove pro-
tective clothing or equipment from (vii) Decontamination procedures
change rooms. which are not covered by the site safe-
(7) Commercial laundries or cleaning es- ty and health plan.
tablishments. Commercial laundries or (viii) Emergency medical treatment
cleaning establishments that decon- and first aid.
taminate protective clothing or equip- (ix) Emergency alerting and response
ment shall be informed of the poten- procedures.
tially harmful effects of exposures to (x) Critique of response and follow-
hazardous substances. up.
(8) Showers and change rooms. Where (xi) PPE and emergency equipment.
the decontamination procedure indi- (3) Procedures for handling emergency
cates a need for regular showers and incidents. (i) In addition to the ele-
change rooms outside of a contami- ments for the emergency response plan
nated area, they shall be provided and required in paragraph (l)(2) of this sec-
meet the requirements of 29 CFR tion, the following elements shall be
1910.141. If temperature conditions pre- included for emergency response plans:
vent the effective use of water, then (A) Site topography, layout, and pre-
other effective means for cleansing vailing weather conditions.
shall be provided and used. (B) Procedures for reporting inci-
(l) Emergency response by employees at dents to local, state, and federal gov-
uncontrolled hazardous waste sites(1) ernmental agencies.
384
(ii) The emergency response plan quate supply of potable water shall be
shall be a separate section of the Site provided on the site.
Safety and Health Plan. (ii) Portable containers used to dis-
(iii) The emergency response plan pense drinking water shall be capable
shall be compatible and integrated of being tightly closed, and equipped
with the disaster, fire and/or emer- with a tap. Water shall not be dipped
gency response plans of local, state, from containers.
and federal agencies. (iii) Any container used to distribute
(iv) The emergency response plan drinking water shall be clearly marked
shall be rehearsed regularly as part of as to the nature of its contents and not
the overall training program for site used for any other purpose.
operations. (iv) Where single service cups (to be
(v) The site emergency response plan used but once) are supplied, both a san-
shall be reviewed periodically and, as itary container for the unused cups and
necessary, be amended to keep it cur- a receptacle for disposing of the used
rent with new or changing site condi- cups shall be provided.
tions or information. (2) Nonpotable water. (i) Outlets for
(vi) An employee alarm system shall nonpotable water, such as water for
be installed in accordance with 29 CFR firefighting purposes, shall be identi-
1910.165 to notify employees of an emer- fied to indicate clearly that the water
gency situation; to stop work activities is unsafe and is not to be used for
if necessary; to lower background noise drinking, washing, or cooking pur-
in order to speed communication; and poses.
to begin emergency procedures. (ii) There shall be no cross-connec-
(vii) Based upon the information tion, open or potential, between a sys-
available at time of the emergency, the tem furnishing potable water and a
employer shall evaluate the incident system furnishing nonpotable water.
and the site response capabilities and (3) Toilet facilities. (i) Toilets shall be
proceed with the appropriate steps to provided for employees according to
implement the site emergency response the following Table H120.2.
plan.
(m) Illumination. Areas accessible to TABLE H120.2TOILET FACILITIES
employees shall be lighted to not less Number of employees Minimum number of facilities
than the minimum illumination inten-
sities listed in the following Table H 20 or fewer ............................. One.
More than 20, fewer than 200 One toilet seat and one uri-
120.1 while any work is in progress: nal per 40 employees.
More than 200 ........................ One toilet seat and one uri-
TABLE H120.1MINIMUM ILLUMINATION nal per 50 employees.
INTENSITIES IN FOOT-CANDLES
(ii) Under temporary field conditions,
Foot-
can- Area or operations provisions shall be made to assure that
dles at least one toilet facility is available.
(iii) Hazardous waste sites not pro-
5 ........ General site areas.
3 ........ Excavation and waste areas, accessways, active vided with a sanitary sewer shall be
storage areas, loading platforms, refueling, and provided with the following toilet fa-
field maintenance areas. cilities unless prohibited by local
5 ........ Indoors: Warehouses, corridors, hallways, and
exitways.
codes:
5 ........ Tunnels, shafts, and general underground work (A) Chemical toilets;
areas. (Exception: Minimum of 10 foot-candles is (B) Recirculating toilets;
required at tunnel and shaft heading during drilling (C) Combustion toilets; or
mucking, and scaling. Mine Safety and Health Ad-
ministration approved cap lights shall be accept-
(D) Flush toilets.
able for use in the tunnel heading.) (iv) The requirements of this para-
10 ...... General shops (e.g., mechanical and electrical graph for sanitation facilities shall not
equipment rooms, active storerooms, barracks or apply to mobile crews having transpor-
living quarters, locker or dressing rooms, dining
areas, and indoor toilets and workrooms.) tation readily available to nearby toi-
30 ...... First aid stations, infirmaries, and offices. let facilities.
(v) Doors entering toilet facilities
(n) Sanitation at temporary work- shall be provided with entrance locks
places(1) Potable water. (i) An ade- controlled from inside the facility.
385
(4) Food handling. All food service fa- (iv) Employers shall assure that em-
cilities and operations for employees ployees shower at the end of their work
shall meet the applicable laws, ordi- shift and when leaving the hazardous
nances, and regulations of the jurisdic- waste site.
tions in which they are located. (o) New technology programs. (1) The
(5) Temporary sleeping quarters. When employer shall develop and implement
temporary sleeping quarters are pro- procedures for the introduction of ef-
vided, they shall be heated, ventilated, fective new technologies and equip-
and lighted. ment developed for the improved pro-
(6) Washing facilities. The employer tection of employees working with haz-
shall provide adequate washing facili- ardous waste clean-up operations, and
ties for employees engaged in oper- the same shall be implemented as part
ations where hazardous substances of the site safety and health program
may be harmful to employees. Such fa- to assure that employee protection is
cilities shall be in near proximity to being maintained.
the worksite; in areas where exposures (2) New technologies, equipment or
are below permissible exposure limits control measures available to the in-
and published exposure levels and dustry, such as the use of foams,
which are under the controls of the em- absorbents, adsorbents, neutralizers, or
ployer; and shall be so equipped as to other means to suppress the level of air
enable employees to remove hazardous contaminates while excavating the site
substances from themselves. or for spill control, shall be evaluated
(7) Showers and change rooms. When by employers or their representatives.
hazardous waste clean-up or removal Such an evaluation shall be done to de-
operations commence on a site and the termine the effectiveness of the new
duration of the work will require six methods, materials, or equipment be-
months or greater time to complete, fore implementing their use on a large
the employer shall provide showers and scale for enhancing employee protec-
change rooms for all employees ex- tion. Information and data from manu-
posed to hazardous substances and facturers or suppliers may be used as
health hazards involved in hazardous part of the employers evaluation ef-
waste clean-up or removal operations. fort. Such evaluations shall be made
(i) Showers shall be provided and available to OSHA upon request.
shall meet the requirements of 29 CFR (p) Certain Operations Conducted
1910.141(d)(3). Under the Resource Conservation and Re-
(ii) Change rooms shall be provided covery Act of 1976 (RCRA). Employers
and shall meet the requirements of 29 conducting operations at treatment,
CFR 1910.141(e). Change rooms shall storage and disposal (TSD) facilities
consist of two separate change areas specified in paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this
separated by the shower area required section shall provide and implement
in paragraph (n)(7)(i) of this section. the programs specified in this para-
One change area, with an exit leading graph. See the Notes and Exceptions
off the worksite, shall provide employ- to paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section
ees with a clean area where they can for employers not covered.).
remove, store, and put on street cloth- (1) Safety and health program. The em-
ing. The second area, with an exit to ployer shall develop and implement a
the worksite, shall provide employees written safety and health program for
with an area where they can put on, re- employees involved in hazardous waste
move and store work clothing and per- operations that shall be available for
sonal protective equipment. inspection by employees, their rep-
(iii) Showers and change rooms shall resentatives and OSHA personnel. The
be located in areas where exposures are program shall be designed to identify,
below the permissible exposure limits evaluate and control safety and health
and published exposure levels. If this hazards in their facilities for the pur-
cannot be accomplished, then a ven- pose of employee protection, to provide
tilation system shall be provided that for emergency response meeting the re-
will supply air that is below the per- quirements of paragraph (p)(8) of this
missible exposure limits and published section and to address as appropriate
exposure levels. site analysis, engineering controls,
386
maximum exposure limits, hazardous lent to the initial training required by

waste handling procedures and uses of this paragraph, shall be considered as
new technologies. meeting the initial training require-
(2) Hazard communication program. ments of this paragraph as to that em-
The employer shall implement a haz- ployee. Equivalent training includes
ard communication program meeting the training that existing employees
the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1200 as might have already received from ac-
part of the employers safety and pro- tual site work experience. Current em-
gram. ployees shall receive eight hours of re-
NOTE TO 1910.120: The exemption for haz- fresher training annually.
ardous waste provided in 1910.1200 is appli- (iii) Trainers. Trainers who teach ini-
cable to this section. tial training shall have satisfactorily
(3) Medical surveillance program. The completed a training course for teach-
employer shall develop and implement ing the subjects they are expected to
a medical surveillance program meet- teach or they shall have the academic
ing the requirements of paragraph (f) of credentials and instruction experience
this section. necessary to demonstrate a good com-
(4) Decontamination program. The em- mand of the subject matter of the
ployer shall develop and implement a courses and competent instructional
decontamination procedure meeting skills.
the requirements of paragraph (k) of
(8) Emergency response program(i)
this section.
Emergency response plan. An emergency
(5) New technology program. The em-
response plan shall be developed and
ployer shall develop and implement
implemented by all employers. Such
procedures meeting the requirements
plans need not duplicate any of the
of paragraph (o) of this section for in-
subjects fully addressed in the employ-
troducing new and innovative equip-
ers contingency planning required by
ment into the workplace.
permits, such as those issued by the
(6) Material handling program. Where
U.S. Environmental Protection Agen-
employees will be handling drums or
cy, provided that the contingency plan
containers, the employer shall develop
is made part of the emergency response
and implement procedures meeting the
plan. The emergency response plan
requirements of paragraphs (j)(1) (ii)
shall be a written portion of the em-
through (viii) and (xi) of this section,
as well as (j)(3) and (j)(8) of this section ployers safety and health program re-
prior to starting such work. quired in paragraph (p)(1) of this sec-
(7) Training program(i) New employ- tion. Employers who will evacuate
ees. The employer shall develop and im- their employees from the worksite lo-
plement a training program, which is cation when an emergency occurs and
part of the employers safety and who do not permit any of their employ-
health program, for employees exposed ees to assist in handling the emergency
to health hazards or hazardous sub- are exempt from the requirements of
stances at TSD operations to enable paragraph (p)(8) if they provide an
the employees to perform their as- emergency action plan complying with
signed duties and functions in a safe 1910.38(a) of this part.
and healthful manner so as not endan- (ii) Elements of an emergency response
ger themselves or other employees. The plan. The employer shall develop an
initial training shall be for 24 hours emergency response plan for emer-
and refresher training shall be for eight gencies which shall address, as a min-
hours annually. Employees who have imum, the following areas to the ex-
received the initial training required tent that they are not addressed in any
by this paragraph shall be given a writ- specific program required in this para-
ten certificate attesting that they have graph:
successfully completed the necessary (A) Pre-emergency planning and co-
training. ordination with outside parties.
(ii) Current employees. Employers who (B) Personnel roles, lines of author-
can show by an employees previous ity, and communication.
work experience and/or training that (C) Emergency recognition and pre-
the employee has had training equiva- vention.
387
(D) Safe distances and places of ref- dures to be used at the incident scene;
uge. in the techniques of coordination with
(E) Site security and control. other employees to minimize risks; in
(F) Evacuation routes and proce- the appropriate response to over expo-
dures. sure from health hazards or injury to
(G) Decontamination procedures. themselves and other employees; and
(H) Emergency medical treatment in the recognition of subsequent symp-
and first aid. toms which may result from over expo-
(I) Emergency alerting and response sures.
procedures.
(C) The employer shall certify that
(J) Critique of response and follow-
each covered employee has attended
up.
(K) PPE and emergency equipment. and successfully completed the train-
(iii) Training. (A) Training for emer- ing required in paragraph (p)(8)(iii) of
gency response employees shall be this section, or shall certify the em-
completed before they are called upon ployees competency at least yearly.
to perform in real emergencies. Such The method used to demonstrate com-
training shall include the elements of petency for certification of training
the emergency response plan, standard shall be recorded and maintained by
operating procedures the employer has the employer.
established for the job, the personal (iv) Procedures for handling emergency
protective equipment to be worn and incidents. (A) In addition to the ele-
procedures for handling emergency in- ments for the emergency response plan
cidents. required in paragraph (p)(8)(ii) of this
Exception #1: An employer need not train
section, the following elements shall be
all employees to the degree specified if the included for emergency response plans
employer divides the work force in a manner to the extent that they do not repeat
such that a sufficient number of employees any information already contained in
who have responsibility to control emer- the emergency response plan:
gencies have the training specified, and all (1) Site topography, layout, and pre-
other employees, who may first respond to
vailing weather conditions.
an emergency incident, have sufficient
awareness training to recognize that an (2) Procedures for reporting incidents
emergency response situation exists and that to local, state, and federal govern-
they are instructed in that case to summon mental agencies.
the fully trained employees and not attempt (B) The emergency response plan
control activities for which they are not shall be compatible and integrated
trained.
Exception #2: An employer need not train
with the disaster, fire and/or emer-
all employees to the degree specified if ar- gency response plans of local, state,
rangements have been made in advance for and federal agencies.
an outside fully-trained emergency response (C) The emergency response plan
team to respond in a reasonable period and shall be rehearsed regularly as part of
all employees, who may come to the incident the overall training program for site
first, have sufficient awareness training to
recognize that an emergency response situa-
operations.
tion exists and they have been instructed to (D) The site emergency response plan
call the designated outside fully-trained shall be reviewed periodically and, as
emergency response team for assistance. necessary, be amended to keep it cur-
(B) Employee members of TSD facil- rent with new or changing site condi-
ity emergency response organizations tions or information.
shall be trained to a level of com- (E) An employee alarm system shall
petence in the recognition of health be installed in accordance with 29 CFR
and safety hazards to protect them- 1910.165 to notify employees of an emer-
selves and other employees. This would gency situation; to stop work activities
include training in the methods used to if necessary; to lower background noise
minimize the risk from safety and in order to speed communication; and
health hazards; in the safe use of con- to begin emergency procedures.
trol equipment; in the selection and (F) Based upon the information avail-
use of appropriate personal protective able at time of the emergency, the em-
equipment; in the safe operating proce- ployer shall evaluate the incident and
388
the site response capabilities and pro- (viii) Emergency medical treatment
ceed with the appropriate steps to im- and first aid.
plement the site emergency response (ix) Emergency alerting and response
plan. procedures.
(q) Emerqency response to hazardous (x) Critique of response and follow-
substance releases. This paragraph cov- up.
ers employers whose employees are en- (xi) PPE and emergency equipment.
gaged in emergency response no matter (xii) Emergency response organiza-
where it occurs except that it does not tions may use the local emergency re-
cover employees engaged in operations sponse plan or the state emergency re-
specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through sponse plan or both, as part of their
(a)(1)(iv) of this section. Those emer- emergency response plan to avoid du-
gency response organizations who have plication. Those items of the emer-
developed and implemented programs gency response plan that are being
equivalent to this paragraph for han- properly addressed by the SARA Title
dling releases of hazardous substances III plans may be substituted into their
pursuant to section 303 of the Super- emergency plan or otherwise kept to-
fund Amendments and Reauthorization gether for the employer and employees
Act of 1986 (Emergency Planning and use.
Community Right-to-Know Act of 1986, (3) Procedures for handlinq emergency
42 U.S.C. 11003) shall be deemed to have response. (i) The senior emergency re-
met the requirements of this para- sponse official responding to an emer-
graph. gency shall become the individual in
(1) Emergency response plan. An emer- charge of a site-specific Incident Com-
gency response plan shall be developed mand System (ICS). All emergency re-
and implemented to handle anticipated sponders and their communications
emergencies prior to the commence- shall be coordinated and controlled
ment of emergency response oper- through the individual in charge of the
ations. The plan shall be in writing and ICS assisted by the senior official
available for inspection and copying by present for each employer.
employees, their representatives and NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (q)(3)(i).The senior
OSHA personnel. Employers who will official at an emergency response is the
evacuate their employees from the most senior official on the site who has the
responsibility for controlling the operations
danger area when an emergency occurs,
at the site. Initially it is the senior officer
and who do not permit any of their em- on the first-due piece of responding emer-
ployees to assist in handling the emergency apparatus to arrive on the incident
gency, are exempt from the require- scene. As more senior officers arrive (i.e.,
ments of this paragraph if they provide battalion chief, fire chief, state law enforce-
an emergency action plan in accord- ment official, site coordinator, etc.) the posi-
ance with 1910.38(a) of this part. tion is passed up the line of authority which
has been previously established.
(2) Elements of an emergency response
plan. The employer shall develop an (ii) The individual in charge of the
emergency response plan for emer- ICS shall identify, to the extent pos-
gencies which shall address, as a min- sible, all hazardous substances or con-
imum, the following to the extent that ditions present and shall address as ap-
they are not addressed elsewhere: propriate site analysis, use of engineer-
ing controls, maximum exposure lim-
(i) Pre-emergency planning and co-
its, hazardous substance handling pro-
ordination with outside parties.
cedures, and use of any new tech-
(ii) Personnel roles, lines of author- nologies.
ity, training, and communication. (iii) Based on the hazardous sub-
(iii) Emergency recognition and pre- stances and/or conditions present, the
vention. individual in charge of the ICS shall
(iv) Safe distances and places of ref- implement appropriate emergency op-
uge. erations, and assure that the personal
(v) Site security and control. protective equipment worn is appro-
(vi) Evacuation routes and proce- priate for the hazards to be encoun-
dures. tered. However, personal protective
(vii) Decontamination. equipment shall meet, at a minimum,
389
the criteria contained in 29 CFR paratus may be used with approved cyl-
1910.156(e) when worn while performing inders from other approved self-con-
fire fighting operations beyond the in- tained compressed air breathing appa-
cipient stage for any incident. ratus provided that such cylinders are
(iv) Employees engaged in emergency of the same capacity and pressure rat-
response and exposed to hazardous sub- ing. All compressed air cylinders used
stances presenting an inhalation haz- with self-contained breathing appa-
ard or potential inhalation hazard shall ratus shall meet U.S. Department of
wear positive pressure self-contained Transportation and National Institute
breathing apparatus while engaged in for Occupational Safety and Health cri-
emergency response, until such time teria.
that the individual in charge of the ICS (4) Skilled support personnel. Per-
determines through the use of air mon- sonnel, not necessarily an employers
itoring that a decreased level of res- own employees, who are skilled in the
piratory protection will not result in operation of certain equipment, such as
hazardous exposures to employees. mechanized earth moving or digging
(v) The individual in charge of the equipment or crane and hoisting equip-
ICS shall limit the number of emer- ment, and who are needed temporarily
gency response personnel at the emer- to perform immediate emergency sup-
gency site, in those areas of potential port work that cannot reasonably be
or actual exposure to incident or site performed in a timely fashion by an
hazards, to those who are actively per- employers own employees, and who
forming emergency operations. How-
will be or may be exposed to the haz-
ever, operations in hazardous areas
ards at an emergency response scene,
shall be performed using the buddy sys-
are not required to meet the training
tem in groups of two or more.
required in this paragraph for the em-
(vi) Back-up personnel shall stand by
ployers regular employees. However,
with equipment ready to provide as-
these personnel shall be given an ini-
sistance or rescue. Advance first aid
tial briefing at the site prior to their
support personnel, as a minimum, shall
participation in any emergency re-
also stand by with medical equipment
sponse. The initial briefing shall in-
and transportation capability.
clude instruction in the wearing of ap-
(vii) The individual in charge of the
ICS shall designate a safety official, propriate personal protective equip-
who is knowledgable in the operations ment, what chemical hazards are in-
being implemented at the emergency volved, and what duties are to be per-
response site, with specific responsi- formed. All other appropriate safety
bility to identify and evaluate hazards and health precautions provided to the
and to provide direction with respect employers own employees shall be
to the safety of operations for the used to assure the safety and health of
emergency at hand. these personnel.
(viii) When activities are judged by (5) Specialist employees. Employees
the safety official to be an IDLH condi- who, in the course of their regular job
tion and/or to involve an imminent duties, work with and are trained in
danger condition, the safety official the hazards of specific hazardous sub-
shall have the authority to alter, sus- stances, and who will be called upon to
pend, or terminate those activities. provide technical advice or assistance
The safety official shall immediately at a hazardous substance release inci-
inform the individual in charge of the dent to the individual in charge, shall
ICS of any actions needed to be taken receive training or demonstrate com-
to correct these hazards at the emer- petency in the area of their specializa-
gency scene. tion annually.
(ix) After emergency operations have (6) Training. Training shall be based
terminated, the individual in charge of on the duties and function to be per-
the ICS shall implement appropriate formed by each responder of an emer-
decontamination procedures. gency response organization. The skill
(x) When deemed necessary for meet- and knowledge levels required for all
ing the tasks at hand, approved self- new responders, those hired after the
contained compressed air breathing ap- effective date of this standard, shall be
390
conveyed to them through training be- prevent exposures. First responders at

fore they are permitted to take part in the operational level shall have re-
actual emergency operations on an in- ceived at least eight hours of training
cident. Employees who participate, or or have had sufficient experience to ob-
are expected to participate, in emer- jectively demonstrate competency in
gency response, shall be given training the following areas in addition to those
in accordance with the following para- listed for the awareness level and the
graphs: employer shall so certify:
(i) First responder awareness level. (A) Knowledge of the basic hazard
First responders at the awareness level and risk assessment techniques.
are individuals who are likely to wit- (B) Know how to select and use prop-
ness or discover a hazardous substance er personal protective equipment pro-
release and who have been trained to vided to the first responder operational
initiate an emergency response se- level.
quence by notifying the proper authori- (C) An understanding of basic haz-
ties of the release. They would take no ardous materials terms.
further action beyond notifying the au- (D) Know how to perform basic con-
thorities of the release. First respond- trol, containment and/or confinement
ers at the awareness level shall have operations within the capabilities of
sufficient training or have had suffi- the resources and personal protective
cient experience to objectively dem- equipment available with their unit.
onstrate competency in the following (E) Know how to implement basic de-
areas: contamination procedures.
(A) An understanding of what haz- (F) An understanding of the relevant
ardous substances are, and the risks as- standard operating procedures and ter-
sociated with them in an incident. mination procedures.
(B) An understanding of the potential (iii) Hazardous materials technician.
outcomes associated with an emer- Hazardous materials technicians are
gency created when hazardous sub- individuals who respond to releases or
stances are present. potential releases for the purpose of
(C) The ability to recognize the pres- stopping the release. They assume a
ence of hazardous substances in an more aggressive role than a first re-
emergency. sponder at the operations level in that
(D) The ability to identify the haz- they will approach the point of release
ardous substances, if possible. in order to plug, patch or otherwise
(E) An understanding of the role of stop the release of a hazardous sub-
the first responder awareness indi- stance. Hazardous materials techni-
vidual in the employers emergency re- cians shall have received at least 24
sponse plan including site security and hours of training equal to the first re-
control and the U.S. Department of sponder operations level and in addi-
Transportations Emergency Response tion have competency in the following
Guidebook. areas and the employer shall so certify:
(F) The ability to realize the need for (A) Know how to implement the em-
additional resources, and to make ap- ployers emergency response plan.
propriate notifications to the commu- (B) Know the classification, identi-
nication center. fication and verification of known and
(ii) First responder operations level. unknown materials by using field sur-
First responders at the operations level vey instruments and equipment.
are individuals who respond to releases (C) Be able to function within an as-
or potential releases of hazardous sub- signed role in the Incident Command
stances as part of the initial response System.
to the site for the purpose of protecting (D) Know how to select and use prop-
nearby persons, property, or the envi- er specialized chemical personal pro-
ronment from the effects of the re- tective equipment provided to the haz-
lease. They are trained to respond in a ardous materials technician.
defensive fashion without actually try- (E) Understand hazard and risk as-
ing to stop the release. Their function sessment techniques.
is to contain the release from a safe (F) Be able to perform advance con-
distance, keep it from spreading, and trol, containment, and/or confinement
391
operations within the capabilities of the first responder awareness level,

the resources and personal protective shall receive at least 24 hours of train-
equipment available with the unit. ing equal to the first responder oper-
(G) Understand and implement de- ations level and in addition have com-
contamination procedures. petency in the following areas and the
(H) Understand termination proce- employer shall so certify:
dures. (A) Know and be able to implement
(I) Understand basic chemical and the employers incident command sys-
toxicological terminology and behav- tem.
ior. (B) Know how to implement the em-
(iv) Hazardous materials specialist. ployers emergency response plan.
Hazardous materials specialists are in- (C) Know and understand the hazards
dividuals who respond with and provide and risks associated with employees
support to hazardous materials techni- working in chemical protective cloth-
cians. Their duties parallel those of the ing.
hazardous materials technician, how- (D) Know how to implement the local
ever, those duties require a more di- emergency response plan.
rected or specific knowledge of the var- (E) Know of the state emergency re-
ious substances they may be called sponse plan and of the Federal Re-
upon to contain. The hazardous mate- gional Response Team.
rials specialist would also act as the (F) Know and understand the impor-
site liaison with Federal, state, local tance of decontamination procedures.
and other government authorities in (7) Trainers. Trainers who teach any
regards to site activities. Hazardous of the above training subjects shall
materials specialists shall have re- have satisfactorily completed a train-
ceived at least 24 hours of training ing course for teaching the subjects
equal to the technician level and in ad- they are expected to teach, such as the
dition have competency in the fol- courses offered by the U.S. National
lowing areas and the employer shall so Fire Academy, or they shall have the
certify: training and/or academic credentials
(A) Know how to implement the local and instructional experience necessary
emergency response plan. to demonstrate competent instruc-
(B) Understand classification, identi- tional skills and a good command of
fication and verification of known and the subject matter of the courses they
unknown materials by using advanced are to teach.
survey instruments and equipment. (8) Refresher training. (i) Those em-
(C) Know of the state emergency re- ployees who are trained in accordance
sponse plan. with paragraph (q)(6) of this section
(D) Be able to select and use proper shall receive annual refresher training
specialized chemical personal protec- of sufficient content and duration to
tive equipment provided to the haz- maintain their competencies, or shall
ardous materials specialist. demonstrate competency in those areas
(E) Understand in-depth hazard and at least yearly.
risk techniques. (ii) A statement shall be made of the
(F) Be able to perform specialized training or competency, and if a state-
control, containment, and/or confinement of competency is made, the em-
ment operations within the capabili- ployer shall keep a record of the meth-
ties of the resources and personal pro- odology used to demonstrate com-
tective equipment available. petency.
(G) Be able to determine and imple- (9) Medical surveillance and consulta-
ment decontamination procedures. tion. (i) Members of an organized and
(H) Have the ability to develop a site designated HAZMAT team and haz-
safety and control plan. ardous materials specialists shall re-
(I) Understand chemical, radiological ceive a baseline physical examination
and toxicological terminology and be- and be provided with medical surveil-
havior. lance as required in paragraph (f) of
(v) On scene incident commander. Inci- this section.
dent commanders, who will assume (ii) Any emergency response employ-
control of the incident scene beyond ees who exhibits signs or symptoms
392
which may have resulted from exposure evaluate compliance with 1910.120 (g)(4) (ii)
to hazardous substances during the and (iii). Other tests and other challenge
course of an emergency incident, either agents may be used to evaluate compliance.
immediately or subsequently, shall be A. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective
provided with medical consultation as suit pressure test
required in paragraph (f)(3)(ii) of this 1.0Scope
section. 1.1 This practice measures the ability of a
(10) Chemical protective clothing. gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical
Chemical protective clothing and protective suit material, seams, and closures
equipment to be used by organized and to maintain a fixed positive pressure. The re-
designated HAZMAT team members, or sults of this practice allow the gas tight in-
to be used by hazardous materials spe- tegrity of a totally-encapsulating chemical
cialists, shall meet the requirements of protective suit to be evaluated.
1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to
paragraphs (g) (3) through (5) of this permeation, penetration, and degradation by
section. specific hazardous substances is not deter-
(11) Post-emergency response oper- mined by this test method.
ations. Upon completion of the emer- 2.0Definition of terms
gency response, if it is determined that 2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective
it is necessary to remove hazardous suit (TECP suit) means a full body garment
substances, health hazards, and mate- which is constructed of protective clothing
materials; covers the wearers torso, head,
rials contaminated with them (such as
arms, legs and respirator; may cover the
contaminated soil or other elements of wearers hands and feet with tightly at-
the natural environment) from the site tached gloves and boots; completely encloses
of the incident, the employer con- the wearer and respirator by itself or in com-
ducting the clean-up shall comply with bination with the wearers gloves and boots.
one of the following: 2.2 Protective clothing material means any
(i) Meet all of the requirements of material or combination of materials used in
an item of clothing for the purpose of iso-
paragraphs (b) through (o) of this sec-
lating parts of the body from direct contact
tion; or with a potentially hazardous liquid or gas-
(ii) Where the clean-up is done on eous chemicals.
plant property using plant or work- 2.3 Gas tight means, for the purpose of this
place employees, such employees shall test method, the limited flow of a gas under
have completed the training require- pressure from the inside of a TECP suit to
ments of the following: 29 CFR atmosphere at a prescribed pressure and
1910.38(a); 1910.134; 1910.1200, and other time interval.
3.0Summary of test method
appropriate safety and health training 3.1 The TECP suit is visually inspected and
made necessary by the tasks that they modified for the test. The test apparatus is
are expected to be performed such as attached to the suit to permit inflation to
personal protective equipment and de- the pre-test suit expansion pressure for re-
contamination procedures. All equip- moval of suit wrinkles and creases. The pres-
ment to be used in the performance of sure is lowered to the test pressure and mon-
the clean-up work shall be in service- itored for three minutes. If the pressure drop
is excessive, the TECP suit fails the test and
able condition and shall have been in-
is removed from service. The test is repeated
spected prior to use. after leak location and repair.
4.0Required Supplies
APPENDICES TO 1910.120HAZ- 4.1 Source of compressed air.
ARDOUS WASTE OPERATIONS 4.2 Test apparatus for suit testing, includ-
AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE ing a pressure measurement device with a
sensitivity of at least 14 inch water gauge.
NOTE: The following appendices serve as 4.3 Vent valve closure plugs or sealing
non-mandatory guidelines to assist employ- tape.
ees and employers in complying with the ap- 4.4 Soapy water solution and soft brush.
propriate requirements of this section. How- 4.5 Stop watch or appropriate timing de-
ever paragraph 1910.120(g) makes mandatory vice.
in certain circumstances the use of Level A 5.0Safety Precautions
and Level B PPE protection. 5.1 Care shall be taken to provide the cor-
rect pressure safety devices required for the
APPENDIX A TO 1910.120PERSONAL
source of compressed air used.
PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT TEST METHODS
6.0Test Procedure
This appendix sets forth the non-manda- 6.1 Prior to each test, the tester shall per-
tory examples of tests which may be used to form a visual inspection of the suit. Check
393
the suit for seam integrity by visually exam- 8.1 Each TECP suit tested by this practice
ining the seams and gently pulling on the shall have the following information re-
seams. Ensure that all air supply lines, fit- corded:
tings, visor, zippers, and valves are secure 8.1.1 Unique identification number, identi-
and show no signs of deterioration. fying brand name, date of purchase, material
6.1.1 Seal off the vent valves along with of construction, and unique fit features, e.g.,
any other normal inlet or exhaust points special breathing apparatus.
(such as umbilical air line fittings or face 8.1.2 The actual values for test pressures
piece opening) with tape or other appropriate (A), (B), and (C) shall be recorded along with
means (caps, plugs, fixture, etc.). Care should the specific observation times. If the ending
be exercised in the sealing process not to pressure (C) is less than 80 percent of the test
damage any of the suit components. pressure (B), the suit shall be identified as
6.1.2 Close all closure assemblies. failing the test. When possible, the specific
6.1.3 Prepare the suit for inflation by pro- leak location shall be identified in the test
viding an improvised connection point on the records. Retest pressure data shall be re-
suit for connecting an airline. Attach the corded as an additional test.
pressure test apparatus to the suit to permit 8.1.3 The source of the test apparatus used
suit inflation from a compressed air source shall be identified and the sensitivity of the
equipped with a pressure indicating regu- pressure gauge shall be recorded.
lator. The leak tightness of the pressure test 8.1.4 Records shall be kept for each pres-
apparatus should be tested before and after sure test even if repairs are being made at
each test by closing off the end of the tubing the test location.
attached to the suit and assuring a pressure
of three inches water gauge for three min- CAUTION
utes can be maintained. If a component is re- Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be
moved for the test, that component shall be sure they are positioned correctly and se-
replaced and a second test conducted with cured tightly before putting the suit back
another component removed to permit a into service. Special care should be taken to
complete test of the ensemble. examine each exhaust valve to make sure it
6.1.4 The pre-test expansion pressure (A) is not blocked.
and the suit test pressure (B) shall be sup- Care should also be exercised to assure
plied by the suit manufacturer, but in no that the inside and outside of the suit is
case shall they be less than: (A)=three inches completely dry before it is put into storage.
water gauge; and (B)=two inches water
gauge. The ending suit pressure (C) shall be B. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective
no less than 80 percent of the test pressure suit qualitative leak test
(B); i.e., the pressure drop shall not exceed 20 1.0Scope
percent of the test pressure (B). 1.1 This practice semi-qualitatively tests
6.1.5 Inflate the suit until the pressure in- gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical
side is equal to pressure (A), the pre-test ex- protective suit integrity by detecting inward
pansion suit pressure. Allow at least one leakage of ammonia vapor. Since no modi-
minute to fill out the wrinkles in the suit. fications are made to the suit to carry out
Release sufficient air to reduce the suit pres- this test, the results from this practice pro-
sure to pressure (B), the suit test pressure. vide a realistic test for the integrity of the
Begin timing. At the end of three minutes, entire suit.
record the suit pressure as pressure (C), the 1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to per-
ending suit pressure. The difference between meation, penetration, and degradation is not
the suit test pressure and the ending suit determined by this test method. ASTM test
test pressure (BC) shall be defined as the methods are available to test suit materials
suit pressure drop. for these characteristics and the tests are
6.1.6 If the suit pressure drop is more than usually conducted by the manufacturers of
20 percent of the suit test pressure (B) during the suits.
the three-minute test period, the suit fails 2.0Definition of terms
the test and shall be removed from service. 2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective
7.0Retest Procedure suit (TECP suit) means a full body garment
7.1 If the suit fails the test check for leaks which is constructed of protective clothing
by inflating the suit to pressure (A) and materials; covers the wearers torso, head,
brushing or wiping the entire suit (including arms, legs and respirator; may cover the
seams, closures, lens gaskets, glove-to-sleeve wearers hands and feet with tightly at-
joints, etc.) with a mild soap and water solu- tached gloves and boots; completely encloses
tion. Observe the suit for the formation of the wearer and respirator by itself or in com-
soap bubbles, which is an indication of a bination with the wearers gloves, and boots.
leak. Repair all identified leaks. 2.2 Protective clothing material means any
7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in material or combination of materials used in
Test procedure 6.0. an item of clothing for the purpose of iso-
8.0Report lating parts of the body from direct contact
394
with a potentially hazardous liquid or gas- ppm ammonia or greater over a two-minute
eous chemicals. period of exposure. [pH 3.0 (yellow) to pH 4.6
2.3 Gas tight means, for the purpose of this (blue)]
test method, the limited flow of a gas under 4.3 A supply of high range (0.510 volume
pressure from the inside of a TECP suit to percent) and low range (5700 ppm) detector
atmosphere at a prescribed pressure and tubes for ammonia and the corresponding
time interval. sampling pump. More sensitive ammonia de-
2.4 Intrusion Coefficient means a number ex- tectors can be substituted for the low range
pressing the level of protection provided by a detector tubes to improve the sensitivity of
gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical this practice.
protective suit. The intrusion coefficient is 4.4 A shallow plastic pan (PVC) at least
calculated by dividing the test room chal- 12:14:1 and a half pint plastic container
lenge agent concentration by the concentra- (PVC) with tightly closing lid.
tion of challenge agent found inside the suit. 4.5 A graduated cylinder or other volu-
The accuracy of the intrusion coefficient is metric measuring device of at least 50 milli-
dependent on the challenge agent monitoring liters in volume with an accuracy of at least
methods. The larger the intrusion coefficient 1 milliliters.
the greater the protection provided by the 5.0Safety precautions
TECP suit. 5.1 Concentrated aqueous ammonium hy-
3.0Summary of recommended practice
droxide, NH4 OH, is a corrosive volatile liq-
3.1 The volume of concentrated aqueous
uid requiring eye, skin, and respiratory pro-
ammonia solution (ammonia hydroxide NH4
tection. The person conducting the test shall
OH) required to generate the test atmos-
review the MSDS for aqueous ammonia.
phere is determined using the directions out-
5.2 Since the established permissible ex-
lined in 6.1. The suit is donned by a person
wearing the appropriate respiratory equip- posure limit for ammonia is 35 ppm as a 15
ment (either a positive pressure self-con- minute STEL, only persons wearing a posi-
tained breathing apparatus or a positive tive pressure self-contained breathing appa-
pressure supplied air respirator) and worn in- ratus or a positive pressure supplied air res-
side the enclosed test room. The con- pirator shall be in the chamber. Normally
centrated aqueous ammonia solution is only the person wearing the totally-encap-
taken by the suited individual into the test sulating suit will be inside the chamber. A
room and poured into an open plastic pan. A stand-by person shall have a positive pres-
two-minute evaporation period is observed sure self-contained breathing apparatus, or a
before the test room concentration is meas- positive pressure supplied air respirator
ured, using a high range ammonia length of available to enter the test area should the
stain detector tube. When the ammonia suited individual need assistance.
vapor reaches a concentration of between 5.3 A method to monitor the suited indi-
1000 and 1200 ppm, the suited individual vidual must be used during this test. Visual
starts a standardized exercise protocol to contact is the simplest but other methods
stress and flex the suit. After this protocol is using communication devices are acceptable.
completed, the test room concentration is 5.4 The test room shall be large enough to
measured again. The suited individual exits allow the exercise protocol to be carried out
the test room and his stand-by person meas- and then to be ventilated to allow for easy
ures the ammonia concentration inside the exhaust of the ammonia test atmosphere
suit using a low range ammonia length of after the test(s) are completed.
stain detector tube or other more sensitive 5.5 Individuals shall be medically
ammonia detector. A stand-by person is re- screened for the use of respiratory protection
quired to observe the test individual during and checked for allergies to ammonia before
the test procedure; aid the person in donning participating in this test procedure.
and doffing the TECP suit; and monitor the 6.0Test procedure
suit interior. The intrusion coefficient of the 6.1.1 Measure the test area to the nearest
suit can be calculated by dividing the aver- foot and calculate its volume in cubic feet.
age test area concentration by the interior Multiply the test area volume by 0.2 milli-
suit concentration. A colorimetric ammonia liters of concentrated aqueous ammonia so-
indicator strip of bromophenol blue or equiv- lution per cubic foot of test area volume to
alent is placed on the inside of the suit face determine the approximate volume of con-
piece lens so that the suited individual is centrated aqueous ammonia required to gen-
able to detect a color change and know if the erate 1000 ppm in the test area.
suit has a significant leak. If a color change 6.1.2 Measure this volume from the supply
is observed the individual shall leave the test of concentrated aqueous ammonia and place
room immediately. it into a closed plastic container.
4.0Required supplies 6.1.3 Place the container, several high
4.1 A supply of concentrated aqueous am- range ammonia detector tubes, and the pump
monium hydroxide (58% by weight). in the clean test pan and locate it near the
4.2 A supply of bromophenol/blue indi- test area entry door so that the suited indi-
cating paper or equivalent, sensitive to 510 vidual has easy access to these supplies.
395
6.2.1 In a non-contaminated atmosphere, ured again using the high range colorimetric
open a pre-sealed ammonia indicator strip detector tube.
and fasten one end of the strip to the inside 6.10 Exit the test area.
of the suit face shield lens where it can be 6.11 The opening created by the suit zip-
seen by the wearer. Moisten the indicator per or other appropriate suit penetration
strip with distilled water. Care shall be should be used to determine the ammonia
taken not to contaminate the detector part concentration in the suit with the low range
of the indicator paper by touching it. A length of stain detector tube or other ammo-
small piece of masking tape or equivalent nia monitor. The internal TECP suit air
should be used to attach the indicator strip should be sampled far enough from the en-
to the interior of the suit face shield. closed test area to prevent a false ammonia
6.2.2 If problems are encountered with reading.
this method of attachment, the indicator 6.12 After completion of the measurement
strip can be attached to the outside of the of the suit interior ammonia concentration
respirator face piece lens being used during the test is concluded and the suit is doffed
the test. and the respirator removed.
6.3 Don the respiratory protective device 6.13 The ventilating fan for the test room
normally used with the suit, and then don should be turned on and allowed to run for
the TECP suit to be tested. Check to be sure enough time to remove the ammonia gas.
all openings which are intended to be sealed The fan shall be vented to the outside of the
(zippers, gloves, etc.) are completely sealed. building.
DO NOT, however, plug off any venting 6.14 Any detectable ammonia in the suit
valves. interior (five ppm ammonia (NH3) or more
6.4 Step into the enclosed test room such for the length of stain detector tube) indi-
as a closet, bathroom, or test booth, cates that the suit has failed the test. When
equipped with an exhaust fan. No air should other ammonia detectors are used a lower
be exhausted from the chamber during the level of detection is possible, and it should be
test because this will dilute the ammonia specified as the pass/fail criteria.
challenge concentrations. 6.15 By following this test method, an in-
6.5 Open the container with the pre-meas- trusion coefficient of approximately 200 or
ured volume of concentrated aqueous ammo- more can be measured with the suit in a
nia within the enclosed test room, and pour completely operational condition. If the in-
the liquid into the empty plastic test pan. trusion coefficient is 200 or more, then the
Wait two minutes to allow for adequate vola- suit is suitable for emergency response and
tilization of the concentrated aqueous am- field use.
monia. A small mixing fan can be used near 7.0Retest procedures
the evaporation pan to increase the evapo- 7.1 If the suit fails this test, check for
ration rate of the ammonia solution. leaks by following the pressure test in test A
6.6 After two minutes a determination of above.
the ammonia concentration within the 7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in
chamber should be made using the high the test procedure 6.0.
range colorimetric detector tube. A con- 8.0Report
centration of 1000 ppm ammonia or greater 8.1 Each gas tight totally-encapsulating
shall be generated before the exercises are chemical protective suit tested by this prac-
started. tice shall have the following information re-
6.7 To test the integrity of the suit the corded.
following four minute exercise protocol 8.1.1 Unique identification number, iden-
should be followed: tifying brand name, date of purchase, mate-
6.7.1 Raising the arms above the head rial of construction, and unique suit fea-
with at least 15 raising motions completed in tures; e.g., special breathing apparatus.
one minute. 8.1.2 General description of test room
6.7.2 Walking in place for one minute with used for test.
at least 15 raising motions of each leg in a 8.1.3 Brand name and purchase date of
one-minute period. ammonia detector strips and color change
6.7.3 Touching the toes with a least 10 data.
complete motions of the arms from above 8.1.4 Brand name, sampling range, and ex-
the head to touching of the toes in a one- piration date of the length of stain ammonia
minute period. detector tubes. The brand name and model of
6.7.4 Knee bends with at least 10 complete the sampling pump should also be recorded.
standing and squatting motions in a one- If another type of ammonia detector is used,
minute period. it should be identified along with its min-
6.8 If at any time during the test the col- imum detection limit for ammonia.
orimetric indicating paper should change 8.1.5 Actual test results shall list the two
colors, the test should be stopped and section test area concentrations, their average, the
6.10 and 6.12 initiated (See 4.2). interior suit concentration, and the cal-
6.9 After completion of the test exercise, culated intrusion coefficient. Retest data
the test area concentration should be meas- shall be recorded as an additional test.
396
8.2 The evaluation of the data shall be pensive PPE inner garments, suits or equip-
specified as suit passed or suit failed, ment.
and the date of the test. Any detectable am- The more that is known about the hazards
monia (five ppm or greater for the length of at the site, the easier the job of PPE selec-
stain detector tube) in the suit interior indi- tion becomes. As more information about
cates the suit has failed this test. When the hazards and conditions at the site be-
other ammonia detectors are used, a lower comes available, the site supervisor can
level of detection is possible and it should be make decisions to up-grade or down-grade
specified as the pass fail criteria. the level of PPE protection to match the
tasks at hand.
CAUTION The following are guidelines which an em-
ployer can use to begin the selection of the
Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be appropriate PPE. As noted above, the site in-
sure they are positioned correctly and se- formation may suggest the use of combina-
cured tightly before putting the suit back tions of PPE selected from the different pro-
into service. Special care should be taken to tection levels (i.e., A, B, C, or D) as being
examine each exhaust valve to make sure it more suitable to the hazards of the work. It
is not blocked. should be cautioned that the listing below
Care should also be exercised to assure does not fully address the performance of the
that the inside and outside of the suit is specific PPE material in relation to the spe-
completely dry before it is put into storage. cific hazards at the job site, and that PPE
selection, evaluation and re-selection is an
APPENDIX B TO 1910.120GENERAL DESCRIP- ongoing process until sufficient information
TION AND DISCUSSION OF THE LEVELS OF about the hazards and PPE performance is
PROTECTION AND PROTECTIVE GEAR obtained.
This appendix sets forth information about Part A. Personal protective equipment is
personal protective equipment (PPE) protec- divided into four categories based on the de-
tion levels which may be used to assist em- gree of protection afforded. (See Part B of
ployers in complying with the PPE require- this appendix for further explanation of Lev-
ments of this section. els A, B, C, and D hazards.)
As required by the standard, PPE must be I. Level A To be selected when the great-
selected which will protect employees from est level of skin, respiratory, and eye protec-
the specific hazards which they are likely to tion is required.
The following constitute Level A equip-
encounter during their work on-site.
ment; it may be used as appropriate;
Selection of the appropriate PPE is a com- 1. Positive pressure, full face-piece self-
plex process which should take into consider- contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or
ation a variety of factors. Key factors in- positive pressure supplied air respirator with
volved in this process are identification of escape SCBA, approved by the National In-
the hazards, or suspected hazards; their stitute for Occupational Safety and Health
routes of potential hazard to employees (in- (NIOSH).
halation, skin absorption, ingestion, and eye 2. Totally-encapsulating chemical-protec-
or skin contact); and the performance of the tive suit.
PPE materials (and seams) in providing a bar- 3. Coveralls.1
rier to these hazards. The amount of protec- 4. Long underwear.1
tion provided by PPE is material-hazard spe- 5. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant.
cific. That is, protective equipment mate- 6. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant.
rials will protect well against some haz- 7. Boots, chemical-resistant, steel toe and
ardous substances and poorly, or not at all, shank.
against others. In many instances, protec- 8. Hard hat (under suit).1
tive equipment materials cannot be found 9. Disposable protective suit, gloves and
which will provide continuous protection boots (depending on suit construction, may
from the particular hazardous substance. In be worn over totally-encapsulating suit).
these cases the breakthrough time of the II. Level BThe highest level of res-
protective material should exceed the work piratory protection is necessary but a lesser
durations. level of skin protection is needed.
Other factors in this selection process to The following constitute Level B equip-
be considered are matching the PPE to the ment; it may be used as appropriate.
employees work requirements and task-spe- 1. Positive pressure, full-facepiece self-con-
cific conditions. The durability of PPE mate- tained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or posi-
rials, such as tear strength and seam tive pressure supplied air respirator with es-
strength, should be considered in relation to cape SCBA (NIOSH approved).
the employees tasks. The effects of PPE in 2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing
relation to heat stress and task duration are (overalls and long-sleeved jacket; coveralls;
a factor in selecting and using PPE. In some one or two-piece chemical-splash suit; dis-
cases layers of PPE may be necessary to pro- posable chemical-resistant overalls).
vide sufficient protection, or to protect ex- 3. Coveralls. 1
397
4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. 2. Substances with a high degree of hazard
5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. to the skin are known or suspected to be
6. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant steel present, and skin contact is possible; or
toe and shank. 3. Operations are being conducted in con-
7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant fined, poorly ventilated areas, and the ab-
(disposable).1 sence of conditions requiring Level A have
8. Hard hat. 1 not yet been determined.
9. [Reserved] II. Level BLevel B protection should be
10. Face shield. 1 used when:
III. Level CThe concentration(s) and 1. The type and atmospheric concentration
type(s) of airborne substance(s) is known and of substances have been identified and re-
the criteria for using air purifying res- quire a high level of respiratory protection,
pirators are met. but less skin protection;
The following constitute Level C equip- 2. The atmosphere contains less than 19.5
ment; it may be used as appropriate. percent oxygen; or
3. The presence of incompletely identified
1. Full-face or half-mask, air purifying res-
vapors or gases is indicated by a direct-read-
pirators (NIOSH approved).
ing organic vapor detection instrument, but
2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing
vapors and gases are not suspected of con-
(overalls; two-piece chemical-splash suit;
taining high levels of chemicals harmful to
disposable chemical-resistant overalls).
skin or capable of being absorbed through
3. Coveralls. 1 the skin.
4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. NOTE: This involves atmospheres with
5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. IDLH concentrations of specific substances
6. Boots (outer), chemical-resistant steel that present severe inhalation hazards and
toe and shank. 1 that do not represent a severe skin hazard;
7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant or that do not meet the criteria for use of
(disposable) 1. air-purifying respirators.
8. Hard hat. 1 III. Level CLevel C protection should be
9. Escape mask. 1 used when:
10. Face shield. 1 1. The atmospheric contaminants, liquid
IV. Level DA work uniform affording splashes, or other direct contact will not ad-
minimal protection, used for nuisance con- versely affect or be absorbed through any ex-
tamination only. posed skin;
The following constitute Level D equip- 2. The types of air contaminants have been
ment; it may be used as appropriate: identified, concentrations measured, and an
1. Coveralls. air-purifying respirator is available that can
2. Gloves. 1 remove the contaminants; and
3. Boots/shoes, chemical-resistant steel toe 3. All criteria for the use of air-purifying
and shank. respirators are met.
4. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant (dispos- IV. Level DLevel D protection should be
able). 1 used when:
5. Safety glasses or chemical splash 1. The atmosphere contains no known haz-
goggles*. ard; and
6. Hard hat. 1 2. Work functions preclude splashes, im-
7. Escape mask. 1 mersion, or the potential for unexpected in-
8. Face shield. 1 halation of or contact with hazardous levels
Part B. The types of hazards for which lev- of any chemicals.
els A, B, C, and D protection are appropriate NOTE: As stated before, combinations of
are described below: personal protective equipment other than
I. Level ALevel A protection should be those described for Levels A, B, C, and D pro-
used when: tection may be more appropriate and may be
1. The hazardous substance has been iden- used to provide the proper level of protec-
tified and requires the highest level of pro- tion.
tection for skin, eyes, and the respiratory As an aid in selecting suitable chemical
system based on either the measured (or po- protective clothing, it should be noted that
tential for) high concentration of atmos- the National Fire Protection Association
pheric vapors, gases, or particulates; or the (NFPA) has developed standards on chemical
site operations and work functions involve a protective clothing. The standards that have
high potential for splash, immersion, or ex- been adopted by include:
posure to unexpected vapors, gases, or par- NFPA 1991Standard on Vapor-Protective
ticulates of materials that are harmful to Suits for Hazardous Chemical Emergencies
skin or capable of being absorbed through (EPA Level A Protective Clothing).
the skin; NFPA 1992Standard on Liquid Splash-
Protective Suits for Hazardous Chemical
Emergencies (EPA Level B Protective Cloth-
1 Optional, as applicable. ing).
398
NFPA 1993Standard on Liquid Splash- visor or manager and staff; (2) means or
Protective Suits for Non-emergency, Non- methods for the development of procedures
flammable Hazardous Chemical Situations for identifying and controlling workplace
(EPA Level B Protective Clothing). hazards at the site; (3) means or methods for
These standards apply documentation and the development and communication to em-
performance requirements to the manufac- ployees of the various plans, work rules,
ture of chemical protective suits. Chemical standard operating procedures and practices
protective suits meeting these requirements that pertain to individual employees and su-
are labelled as compliant with the appro- pervisors; (4) means for the training of super-
priate standard. It is recommended that visors and employees to develop the needed
chemical protective suits that meet these skills and knowledge to perform their work
standards be used. in a safe and healthful manner; (5) means to
anticipate and prepare for emergency situa-
APPENDIX C TO 1910.120COMPLIANCE tions; and (6) means for obtaining informa-
GUIDELINES tion feedback to aid in evaluating the pro-
1. Occupational Safety and Health Program. gram and for improving the effectiveness of
Each hazardous waste site clean-up effort the program. The management and employ-
will require an occupational safety and ees should be trying continually to improve
health program headed by the site coordi- the effectiveness of the program thereby en-
nator or the employers representative. The hancing the protection being afforded those
purpose of the program will be the protec- working on the site.
tion of employees at the site and will be an Accidents on the site or workplace should
extension of the employers overall safety be investigated to provide information on
and health program. The program will need how such occurrences can be avoided in the
to be developed before work begins on the future. When injuries or illnesses occur on
site and implemented as work proceeds as the site or workplace, they will need to be
stated in paragraph (b). The program is to fa- investigated to determine what needs to be
cilitate coordination and communication of done to prevent this incident from occurring
safety and health issues among personnel re- again. Such information will need to be used
sponsible for the various activities which as feedback on the effectiveness of the pro-
will take place at the site. It will provide the gram and the information turned into posi-
overall means for planning and imple- tive steps to prevent any reoccurrence. Re-
menting the needed safety and health train- ceipt of employee suggestions or complaints
ing and job orientation of employees who relating to safety and health issues involved
will be working at the site. The program will with site or workplace activities is also a
provide the means for identifying and con- feedback mechanism that can be used effec-
trolling worksite hazards and the means for tively to improve the program and may serve
monitoring program effectiveness. The pro- in part as an evaluative tool(s).
gram will need to cover the responsibilities For the development and implementation
and authority of the site coordinator or the of the program to be the most effective, pro-
employers manager on the site for the safe- fessional safety and health personnel should
ty and health of employees at the site, and be used. Certified Safety Professionals,
the relationships with contractors or support Board Certified Industrial Hygienists or Reg-
services as to what each employers safety istered Professional Safety Engineers are
and health responsibilities are for their em- good examples of professional stature for
ployees on the site. Each contractor on the safety and health managers who will admin-
site needs to have its own safety and health ister the employers program.
program so structured that it will smoothly 2. Training. The training programs for em-
interface with the program of the site coor- ployees subject to the requirements of para-
dinator or principal contractor. graph (e) of this standard should address: the
Also those employers involved with treat- safety and health hazards employees should
ing, storing or disposal of hazardous waste as expect to find on hazardous waste clean-up
covered in paragraph (p) must have imple- sites; what control measures or techniques
mented a safety and health program for their are effective for those hazards; what moni-
employees. This program is to include the toring procedures are effective in character-
hazard communication program required in izing exposure levels; what makes an effec-
paragraph (p)(1) and the training required in tive employers safety and health program;
paragraphs (p)(7) and (p)(8) as parts of the what a site safety and health plan should in-
employers comprehensive overall safety and clude; hands on training with personal pro-
health program. This program is to be in tective equipment and clothing they may be
writing. expected to use; the contents of the OSHA
Each site or workplace safety and health standard relevant to the employees duties
program will need to include the following: and function; and, employees responsibil-
(1) Policy statements of the line of authority ities under OSHA and other regulations. Su-
and accountability for implementing the pervisors will need training in their respon-
program, the objectives of the program and sibilities under the safety and health pro-
the role of the site safety and health super- gram and its subject areas such as the spill
399
containment program, the personal protec- safety and health involving specific haz-
tive equipment program, the medical sur- ardous substances.
veillance program, the emergency response Those skilled support personnel, such as
plan and other areas. employees who work for public works depart-
The training programs for employees sub- ments or equipment operators who operate
ject to the requirements of paragraph (p) of bulldozers, sand trucks, backhoes, etc., who
this standard should address: the employers may be called to the incident scene to pro-
safety and health program elements impact- vide emergency support assistance, should
ing employees; the hazard communication have at least a safety and health briefing be-
program; the medical surveillance program; fore entering the area of potential or actual
the hazards and the controls for such hazards exposure. These skilled support personnel,
that employees need to know for their job who have not been a part of the emergency
duties and functions. All require annual re- response plan and do not meet the training
fresher training. requirements, should be made aware of the
The training programs for employees cov- hazards they face and should be provided all
ered by the requirements of paragraph (q) of necessary protective clothing and equipment
this standard should address those com- required for their tasks.
petencies required for the various levels of
There are two National Fire Protection As-
response such as: the hazards associated with
sociation standards, NFPA 472Standard
hazardous substances; hazard identification
for Professional Competence of Responders
and awareness; notification of appropriate
to Hazardous Material Incidents and NFPA
persons; the need for and use of personal pro-
471Recommended Practice for Responding
tective equipment including respirators; the
to Hazardous Material Incidents, which are
decontamination procedures to be used;
excellent resource documents to aid fire de-
preplanning activities for hazardous sub-
partments and other emergency response or-
stance incidents including the emergency
ganizations in developing their training pro-
reponse plan; company standard operating
procedures for hazardous substance emer- gram materials. NFPA 472 provides guidance
gency responses; the use of the incident com- on the skills and knowledge needed for first
mand system and other subjects. Hands-on responder awareness level, first responder
training should be stressed whenever pos- operations level, hazmat technicians, and
sible. Critiques done after an incident which hazmat specialist. It also offers guidance for
include an evaluation of what worked and the officer corp who will be in charge of haz-
what did not and how could the incident be ardous substance incidents.
better handled the next time may be counted 3. Decontamination. Decontamination pro-
as training time. cedures should be tailored to the specific
For hazardous materials specialists (usu- hazards of the site, and may vary in com-
ally members of hazardous materials teams), plexity and number of steps, depending on
the training should address the care, use and/ the level of hazard and the employees expo-
or testing of chemical protective clothing insure to the hazard. Decontamination proce-
cluding totally encapsulating suits, the med- dures and PPE decontamination methods
ical surveillance program, the standard oper- will vary depending upon the specific sub-
ating procedures for the hazardous materials stance, since one procedure or method may
team including the use of plugging and not work for all substances. Evaluation of
patching equipment and other subject areas. decontamination methods and procedures
Officers and leaders who may be expected should be performed, as necessary, to assure
to be in charge at an incident should be fully that employees are not exposed to hazards
knowledgeable of their companys incident by re-using PPE. References in appendix D
command system. They should know where may be used for guidance in establishing an
and how to obtain additional assistance and effective decontamination program. In addi-
be familiar with the local districts emer- tion, the U.S. Coast Guards Manual, Policy
gency response plan and the state emergency Guidance for Response to Hazardous Chem-
response plan. ical Releases, U.S. Department of Transpor-
Specialist employees such as technical ex- tation, Washington, DC (COMDTINST
perts, medical experts or environmental ex- M16465.30) is a good reference for establishing
perts that work with hazardous materials in an effective decontamination program.
their regular jobs, who may be sent to the 4. Emergency response plans. States, along
incident scene by the shipper, manufacturer with designated districts within the states,
or governmental agency to advise and assist will be developing or have developed local
the person in charge of the incident should emergency response plans. These state and
have training on an annual basis. Their district plans should be utilized in the emer-
training should include the care and use of gency response plans called for in the stand-
personal protective equipment including res- ard. Each employer should assure that its
pirators; knowledge of the incident com- emergency response plan is compatible with
mand system and how they are to relate to the local plan. The major reference being
it; and those areas needed to keep them cur- used to aid in developing the state and local
rent in their respective field as it relates to district plans is the Hazardous Materials
400
Emergency Planning Guide, NRT1. The cur- eral companies and many pieces of appa-
rent Emergency Response Guidebook from ratus, a command post would be established.
the U.S. Department of Transportation, This enabled one individual to be in charge of
CMAs CHEMTREC and the Fire Service managing the incident, rather than having
Emergency Management Handbook may also several officers from different companies
be used as resources. making separate, and sometimes conflicting,
Employers involved with treatment, stor- decisions. The individual in charge of the
age, and disposal facilities for hazardous command post would delegate responsibility
waste, which have the required contingency for performing various tasks to subordinate
plan called for by their permit, would not officers. Additionally, all communications
need to duplicate the same planning ele- were routed through the command post to
ments. Those items of the emergency re- reduce the number of radio transmissions
sponse plan that are properly addressed in and eliminate confusion. However, strategy,
the contingency plan may be substituted tactics, and all decisions were made by one
into the emergency response plan required in individual.
1910.120 or otherwise kept together for em- The ICS is a very similar system, except it
ployer and employee use. is implemented for emergency response to
5. Personal protective equipment programs. all incidents, both large and small, that in-
The purpose of personal protective clothing volve hazardous substances.
and equipment (PPE) is to shield or isolate For a small incident, the individual in
individuals from the chemical, physical, and charge of the ICS may perform many tasks
biologic hazards that may be encountered at of the ICS. There may not be any, or little,
a hazardous substance site. delegation of tasks to subordinates. For ex-
As discussed in appendix B, no single com-
ample, in response to a small incident, the
bination of protective equipment and cloth-
individual in charge of the ICS, in addition
ing is capable of protecting against all haz-
to normal command activities, may become
ards. Thus PPE should be used in conjunc-
the safety officer and may designate only
tion with other protective methods and its
one employee (with proper equipment) as a
effectiveness evaluated periodically.
back-up to provide assistance if needed.
The use of PPE can itself create significant
OSHA does recommend, however, that at
worker hazards, such as heat stress, physical
and psychological stress, and impaired vi- least two employees be designated as back-
sion, mobility, and communication. For any up personnel since the assistance needed
given situation, equipment and clothing may include rescue.
should be selected that provide an adequate To illustrate the operation of the ICS, the
level of protection. However, over-protec- following scenario might develop during a
tion, as well as under-protection, can be haz- small incident, such as an overturned tank
ardous and should be avoided where possible. truck with a small leak of flammable liquid.
Two basic objectives of any PPE program The first responding senior officer would
should be to protect the wearer from safety implement and take command of the ICS.
and health hazards, and to prevent injury to That person would size-up the incident and
the wearer from incorrect use and/or mal- determine if additional personnel and appa-
function of the PPE. To accomplish these ratus were necessary; would determine what
goals, a comprehensive PPE program should actions to take to control the leak; and, de-
include hazard identification, medical moni- termine the proper level of personal protec-
toring, environmental surveillance, selec- tive equipment. If additional assistance is
tion, use, maintenance, and decontamination not needed, the individual in charge of the
of PPE and its associated training. ICS would implement actions to stop and
The written PPE program should include control the leak using the fewest number of
policy statements, procedures, and guide- personnel that can effectively accomplish
lines. Copies should be made available to all the tasks. The individual in charge of the
employees, and a reference copy should be ICS then would designate himself as the safe-
made available at the worksite. Technical ty officer and two other employees as a
data on equipment, maintenance manuals, back-up in case rescue may become nec-
relevant regulations, and other essential in- essary. In this scenario, decontamination
formation should also be collected and main- procedures would not be necessary.
tained. A large complex incident may require
6. Incident command system (ICS). Paragraph many employees and difficult, time-con-
1910.120(q)(3)(ii) requires the implementation suming efforts to control. In these situa-
of an ICS. The ICS is an organized approach tions, the individual in charge of the ICS will
to effectively control and manage operations want to delegate different tasks to subordi-
at an emergency incident. The individual in nates in order to maintain a span of control
charge of the ICS is the senior official re- that will keep the number of subordinates,
sponding to the incident. The ICS is not that are reporting, to a manageable level.
much different than the command post ap- Delegation of task at large incidents may
proach used for many years by the fire serv- be by location, where the incident scene is
ice. During large complex fires involving sev- divided into sectors, and subordinate officers
401
coordinate activities within the sector that Agency (EPA); October 1985 provides an ex-
they have been assigned. cellent example of the types of medical test-
Delegation of tasks can also be by func- ing that should be done as part of a medical
tion. Some of the functions that the indi- surveillance program.
vidual in charge of the ICS may want to del- 9. New Technology and Spill Containment
egate at a large incident are: medical serv- Programs. Where hazardous substances may
ices; evacuation; water supply; resources be released by spilling from a container that
(equipment, apparatus); media relations; will expose employees to the hazards of the
safety; and, site control (integrate activities materials, the employer will need to imple-
with police for crowd and traffic control). ment a program to contain and control the
Also for a large incident, the individual in spilled material. Diking and ditching, as well
charge of the ICS will designate several em- as use of absorbents like diatomaceous
ployees as back-up personnel; and a number earth, are traditional techniques which have
of safety officers to monitor conditions and proven to be effective over the years. How-
recommend safety precautions. ever, in recent years new products have come
Therefore, no matter what size or com- into the marketplace, the use of which com-
plexity an incident may be, by implementing plement and increase the effectiveness of
an ICS there will be one individual in charge these traditional methods. These new prod-
who makes the decisions and gives direc- ucts also provide emergency responders and
tions; and, all actions, and communications others with additional tools or agents to use
are coordinated through one central point of to reduce the hazards of spilled materials.
command. Such a system should reduce con- These agents can be rapidly applied over a
fusion, improve safety, organize and coordi- large area and can be uniformly applied or
nate actions, and should facilitate effective otherwise can be used to build a small dam,
management of the incident. thus improving the workers ability to con-
7. Site Safety and Control Plans. The safety trol spilled material. These application tech-
and security of response personnel and oth- niques enhance the intimate contact be-
ers in the area of an emergeny response inci- tween the agent and the spilled material al-
dent site should be of primary concern to the lowing for the quickest effect by the agent or
incident commander. The use of a site safety quickest control of the spilled material.
and control plan could greatly assist those in Agents are available to solidify liquid spilled
charge of assuring the safety and health of materials, to suppress vapor generation from
employees on the site. spilled materials, and to do both. Some spe-
A comprehensive site safety and control cial agents, which when applied as rec-
plan should include the following: summary ommended by the manufacturer, will react
analysis of hazards on the site and a risk in a controlled manner with the spilled ma-
analysis of those hazards; site map or terial to neutralize acids or caustics, or
sketch; site work zones (clean zone, transi- greatly reduce the level of hazard of the
tion or decontamination zone, work or hot spilled material.
zone); use of the buddy system; site commu- There are several modern methods and de-
nications; command post or command cen- vices for use by emergency response per-
ter; standard operating procedures and safe sonnel or others involved with spill control
work practices; medical assistance and efforts to safely apply spill control agents to
triage area; hazard monitoring plan (air con- control spilled material hazards. These in-
taminate monitoring, etc.); decontamination clude portable pressurized applicators simi-
procedures and area; and other relevant lar to hand-held portable fire extinguishing
areas. This plan should be a part of the em- devices, and nozzle and hose systems similar
ployers emergency response plan or an ex- to portable fire fighting foam systems which
tension of it to the specific site. allow the operator to apply the agent with-
8. Medical surveillance programs. Workers out having to come into contact with the
handling hazardous substances may be ex- spilled material. The operator is able to
posed to toxic chemicals, safety hazards, bio- apply the agent to the spilled material from
logic hazards, and radiation. Therefore, a a remote position.
medical surveillance program is essential to The solidification of liquids provides for
assess and monitor workers health and fit- rapid containment and isolation of haz-
ness for employment in hazardous waste op- ardous substance spills. By directing the
erations and during the course of work; to agent at run-off points or at the edges of the
provide emergency and other treatment as spill, the reactant solid will automatically
needed; and to keep accurate records for fu- create a barrier to slow or stop the spread of
ture reference. the material. Clean-up of hazardous sub-
The Occupational Safety and Health Guid- stances is greatly improved when solidifying
ance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activi- agents, acid or caustic neutralizers, or acti-
ties developed by the National Institute for vated carbon adsorbents are used. Properly
Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), applied, these agents can totally solidify liq-
the Occupational Safety and Health Admin- uid hazardous substances or neutralize or ab-
istration (OSHA), the U.S. Coast Guard sorb them, which results in materials which
(USCG), and the Environmental Protection are less hazardous and easier to handle,
402
transport, and dispose of. The concept of 3. OSHA Instruction DTS CPL 2.74Janu-
spill treatment, to create less hazardous sub- ary 29, 1986, Hazardous Waste Activity Form,
stances, will improve the safety and level of OSHA 175.
protection of employees working at spill 4. Hazardous Waste Inspections Reference
clean-up operations or emergency response Manual, U.S. Department of Labor, Occupa-
operations to spills of hazardous substances. tional Safety and Health Administration,
The use of vapor suppression agents for 1986.
volatile hazardous substances, such as flam- 5. Memorandum of Understanding Among
mable liquids and those substances which the National Institute for Occupational Safe-
present an inhalation hazard, is important ty and Health, the Occupational Safety and
for protecting workers. The rapid and uni- Health Administration, the United States
form distribution of the agent over the sur- Coast Guard, and the United States Environ-
face of the spilled material can provide quick mental Protection Agency, Guidance for
vapor knockdown. There are temporary and Worker Protection During Hazardous Waste Site
long-term foam-type agents which are effec- Investigations and Clean-up and Hazardous
tive on vapors and dusts, and activated car- Substance Emergencies. December 18, 1980.
bon adsorption agents which are effective for 6. National Priorities List, 1st Edition, Octo-
vapor control and soaking-up of the liquid. ber 1984; U.S. Environmental Protection
The proper use of hose lines or hand-held Agency, Revised periodically.
portable pressurized applicators provides 7. The Decontamination of Response Per-
good mobility and permits the worker to de- sonnel, Field Standard Operating Procedures
liver the agent from a safe distance without (F.S.O.P.) 7; U.S. Environmental Protection
having to step into the untreated spilled ma-
Agency, Office of Emergency and Remedial
terial. Some of these systems can be re-
Response, Hazardous Response Support Divi-
charged in the field to provide coverage of
sion, December 1984.
larger spill areas than the design limits of a
8. Preparation of a Site Safety Plan, Field
single charged applicator unit. Some of the
Standard Operating Procedures (F.S.O.P.) 9;
more effective agents can solidify the liquid
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Of-
flammable hazardous substances and at the
same time elevate the flashpoint above 140 fice of Emergency and Remedial Response,
F so the resulting substance may be handled Hazardous Response Support Division, April
as a nonhazardous waste material if it meets 1985.
the U.S. Environmental Protection Agencys 9. Standard Operating Safety Guidelines; U.S.
40 CFR part 261 requirements (See particu- Environmental Protection Agency, Office of
larly 261.21). Emergency and Remedial Response, Haz-
All workers performing hazardous sub- ardous Response Support Division, Environ-
stance spill control work are expected to mental Response Team; November 1984.
wear the proper protective clothing and 10. Occupational Safety and Health Guidance
equipment for the materials present and to Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities,
follow the employers established standard National Institute for Occupational Safety
operating procedures for spill control. All in- and Health (NIOSH), Occupational Safety
volved workers need to be trained in the es- and Health Administration (OSHA), U.S.
tablished operating procedures; in the use Coast Guard (USCG), and Environmental
and care of spill control equipment; and in Protection Agency (EPA); October 1985.
the associated hazards and control of such 11. Protecting Health and Safety at Haz-
hazards of spill containment work. ardous Waste Sites: An Overview, U.S. Envi-
These new tools and agents are the things ronmental Protection Agency, EPA/625/985/
that employers will want to evaluate as part 006; September 1985.
of their new technology program. The treat- 12. Hazardous Waste Sites and Hazardous
ment of spills of hazardous substances or Substance Emergencies, NIOSH Worker Bul-
wastes at an emergency incident as part of letin, U.S. Department of Health and Human
the immediate spill containment and control Services, Public Health Service, Centers for
efforts is sometimes acceptable to EPA and a Disease Control, National Institute for Occu-
permit exception is described in 40 CFR pational Safety and Health; December 1982.
264.1(g)(8) and 265.1(c)(11). 13. Personal Protective Equipment for Haz-
ardous Materials Incidents: A Selection Guide;
APPENDIX D TO 1910.120REFERENCES U.S. Department of Health and Human Serv-
The following references may be consulted ices, Public Health Service, Centers for Dis-
for further information on the subject of this ease Control, National Institute for Occupa-
standard: tional Safety and Health; October 1984.
1. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2.70Janu- 14. Fire Service Emergency Management
ary 29, 1986, Special Emphasis Program: Haz- Handbook, International Association of Fire
ardous Waste Sites. Chiefs Foundation, 101 East Holly Avenue,
2. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 22.37A Unit 10B, Sterling, VA 22170, January 1985.
January 29, 1986, Technical Assistance and 15. Emergency Response Guidebook, U.S De-
Guidelines for Superfund and Other Hazardous partment of Transportation, Washington,
Waste Site Activities. DC, 1987.
403
16. Report to the Congress on Hazardous Ma- Hands-on training means training in a
terials Training, Planning and Preparedness, simulated work environment that permits
Federal Emergency Management Agency, each student to have experience performing
Washington, DC, July 1986. tasks, making decisions, or using equipment
17. Workbook for Fire Command, Alan V. appropriate to the job assignment for which
Brunacini and J. David Beageron, National the training is being conducted.
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Initial training means training required
Park, Quincy, MA 02269, 1985. prior to beginning work.
18. Fire Command, Alan V. Brunacini, Na- Lecture means an interactive discourse
tional Fire Protection Association, with a class lead by an instructor.
Batterymarch Park,, Quincy, MA 02269, 1985.
Proficient means meeting a stated level
19. Incident Command System, Fire Protec-
of achievement.
tion Publications, Oklahoma State Univer-
sity, Stillwater, OK 74078, 1983. Site-specific means individual training
20. Site Emergency Response Planning, Chem- directed to the operations of a specific job
ical Manufacturers Association, Washington, site.
DC 20037, 1986. Training hours means the number of
21. Hazardous Materials Emergency Planning hours devoted to lecture, learning activities,
Guide, NRT1, Environmental Protection small group work sessions, demonstration,
Agency, Washington, DC, March 1987. evaluations, or hands-on experience.
22. Community Teamwork: Working Together Suggested core criteria:
to Promote Hazardous Materials Transportation
1. Training facility. The training facility
Safety. U.S. Department of Transportation,
should have available sufficient resources,
Washington, DC, May 1983.
equipment, and site locations to perform di-
23. Disaster Planning Guide for Business and
dactic and hands-on training when appro-
Industry, Federal Emergency Management
priate. Training facilities should have suffi-
Agency, Publication No. FEMA 141, August
1987. cient organization, support staff, and serv-
ices to conduct training in each of the
(The Office of Management and Budget has courses offered.
approved the information collection require- 2. Training Director. Each training program
ments in this section under control number should be under the direction of a training
12180139) director who is responsible for the program.
The Training Director should have a min-
APPENDIX E TO 1910.120TRAINING imum of two years of employee education ex-
CURRICULUM GUIDELINES perience.
3. Instructors. Instructors should be deem
The following non-mandatory general cri-
competent on the basis of previous docu-
teria may be used for assistance in devel-
mented experience in their area of instruc-
oping site-specific training curriculum used
tion, successful completion of a train-the-
to meet the training requirements of 29 CFR
1910.120(e); 29 CFR 1910.120(p)(7), (p)(8)(iii); trainer program specific to the topics they
and 29 CFR 1910.120(q)(6), (q)(7), and (q)(8). will teach, and an evaluation of instruc-
These are generic guidelines and they are tional competence by the Training Director.
not presented as a complete training cur- Instructors should be required to maintain
riculum for any specific employer. Site-spe- professional competency by participating in
cific training programs must be developed on continuing education or professional devel-
the basis of a needs assessment of the haz- opment programs or by completing success-
ardous waste site, RCRA/TSDF, or emer- fully an annual refresher course and having
gency response operation in accordance with an annual review by the Training Director.
29 CFR 1910.120. The annual review by the Training Direc-
It is noted that the legal requirements are tor should include observation of an instruc-
set forth in the regulatory text of 1910.120. tors delivery, a review of those observations
The guidance set forth here presents a highly with the trainer, and an analysis of any in-
effective program that in the areas covered structor or class evaluations completed by
would meet or exceed the regulatory require- the students during the previous year.
ments. In addition, other approaches could 4. Course materials. The Training Director
meet the regulatory requirements. should approve all course materials to be
used by the training provider. Course mate-
Suggested General Criteria rials should be reviewed and updated at least
Definitions: annually. Materials and equipment should be
Competent means possessing the skills, in good working order and maintained prop-
knowledge, experience, and judgment to per- erly.
form assigned tasks or activities satisfac- All written and audio-visual materials in
torily as determined by the employer. training curricula should be peer reviewed by
Demonstration means the showing by technically competent outside reviewers or
actual use of equipment or procedures. by a standing advisory committee.
404
Reviews should possess expertise in the fol- 8. Course certificate. Written documentation
lowing disciplines were applicable: occupa- should be provided to each student who sat-
tional health, industrial hygiene and safety, isfactorily completes the training course.
chemical/environmental engineering, em- The documentation should include:
ployee education, or emergency response. a. Students name.
One or more of the peer reviewers should be b. Course title.
a employee experienced in the work activi- c. Course date.
ties to which the training is directed.
d. Statement that the student has success-
5. Students. The program for accepting stu- fully completed the course.
dents should include:
e. Name and address of the training pro-
a. Assurance that the student is or will be
vider.
involved in work where chemical exposures
are likely and that the student possesses the f. An individual identification number for
skills necessary to perform the work. the certificate.
b. A policy on the necessary medical clear- g. List of the levels of personal protective
ance. equipment used by the student to complete
6. Ratios. Student-instructor ratios should the course.
not exceed 30 students per instructor. Hands- This documentation may include a certifi-
on activity requiring the use of personal pro- cate and an appropriate wallet-sized lami-
tective equipment should have the following nated card with a photograph of the student
student-instructor ratios. For Level C or and the above information. When such
Level D personal protective equipment the course certificate cards are used, the indi-
ratio should be 10 students per instructor. vidual identification number for the training
For Level A or Level B personal protective certificate should be shown on the card.
equipment the ratio should be 5 students per 9. Recordkeeping. Training providers should
instructor. maintain records listing the dates courses
7. Proficiency assessment. Proficiency should were presented, the names of the individual
be evaluated and documented by the use of a course attenders, the names of those stu-
written assessment and a skill demonstra- dents successfully completing each course,
tion selected and developed by the Training and the number of training certificates
Director and training staff. The assessment issued to each successful student. These
and demonstration should evaluate the records should be maintained for a minimum
knowledge and individual skills developed in of five years after the date an individual par-
the course of training. The level of minimum ticipated in a training program offered by
achievement necessary for proficiency shall the training provider. These records should
be specified in writing by the Training Direc- be available and provided upon the students
tor. request or as mandated by law.
If a written test is used, there should be a 10. Program quality control. The Training
minimum of 50 questions. If a written test is Director should conduct or direct an annual
used in combination with a skills demonstra- written audit of the training program. Pro-
tion, a minimum of 25 questions should be gram modifications to address deficiencies, if
used. If a skills demonstration is used, the any, should be documented, approved, and
tasks chosen and the means to rate success- implemented by the training provider. The
ful completion should be fully documented audit and the program modification docu-
by the Training Director. ments should be maintained at the training
The content of the written test or of the facility.
skill demonstration shall be relevant to the
objectives of the course. The written test Suggested Program Quality Control Criteria
and skill demonstration should be updated as Factors listed here are suggested criteria
necessary to reflect changes in the cur- for determining the quality and appropriate-
riculum and any update should be approved ness of employee health and safety training
by the Training Director. for hazardous waste operations and emer-
The proficiency assessment methods, re- gency response.
gardless of the approach or combination of
approaches used, should be justified, docu- A. Training Plan.
mented and approved by the Training Direc- Adequacy and appropriateness of the train-
tor. ing programs curriculum development, in-
The proficiency of those taking the addi- structor training, distribution of course ma-
tional courses for supervisors should be eval- terials, and direct student training should be
uated and documented by using proficiency considered, including
assessment methods acceptable to the Train- 1. The duration of training, course content,
ing Director. These proficiency assessment and course schedules/agendas;
methods must reflect the additional respon- 2. The different training requirements of
sibilities borne by supervisory personnel in the various target populations, as specified
hazardous waste operations or emergency rein the appropriate generic training cur-
sponse. riculum;
405
3. The process for the development of cur- 4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
riculum, which includes appropriate tech- quality control and evaluations program to
nical input, outside review, evaluation, pro- account for instructor performance.
gram pretesting. 5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
4. The adequate and appropriate inclusion quality control and evaluation program to
of hands-on, demonstration, and instruction ensure appropriate course evaluation, feed-
methods; back, updating, and corrective action.
5. Adequate monitoring of student safety, 6. Adequacy and appropriateness of dis-
progress, and performance during the train- ciplines and expertise being used within the
ing. quality control and evaluation program.
7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
B. Program management, Training Director,
role of student evaluations to provide feed-
staff, and consultants.
back for training program improvement.
Adequacy and appropriateness of staff per-
formance and delivering an effective training D. Quality control and evaluation.
program should be considered, including Adequacy and appropriateness of quality
1. Demonstration of the training directors control and evaluation plans for training
leadership in assuring quality of health and programs should be considered, including:
safety training. 1. A balanced advisory committee and/or
2. Demonstration of the competency of the competent outside reviewers to give overall
staff to meet the demands of delivering high policy guidance;
2. Clear and adequate definition of the
quality hazardous waste employee health
composition and active programmatic role of
and safety training.
the advisory committee or outside reviewers.
3. Organization charts establishing clear
3. Adequacy of the minutes or reports of
lines of authority.
the advisory committee or outside reviewers
4. Clearly defined staff duties including the
meetings or written communication.
relationship of the training staff to the over- 4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
all program. quality control and evaluations program to
5. Evidence that the training organiza- account for instructor performance.
tional structure suits the needs of the train- 5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
ing program. quality control and evaluation program to
6. Appropriateness and adequacy of the ensure appropriate course evaluation, feed-
training methods used by the instructors. back, updating, and corrective action.
7. Sufficiency of the time committed by 6. Adequacy and appropriateness of dis-
the training director and staff to the train- ciplines and expertise being used within the
ing program. quality control and evaluation program.
8. Adequacy of the ratio of training staff to 7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
students. role of student evaluations to provide feed-
9. Availability and commitment of the back for training program improvement.
training program of adequate human and E. Students
equipment resources in the areas of Adequacy and appropriateness of the pro-
a. Health effects, gram for accepting students should be con-
b. Safety, sidered, including
c. Personal protective equipment (PPE), 1. Assurance that the student already pos-
d. Operational procedures, sess the necessary skills for their job, includ-
e. Employee protection practices/proce- ing necessary documentation.
dures. 2. Appropriateness of methods the program
10. Appropriateness of management con- uses to ensure that recruits are capable of
trols. satisfactorily completing training.
11. Adequacy of the organization and ap- 3. Review and compliance with any medical
propriate resources assigned to assure appro- clearance policy.
priate training. F. Institutional Environment and Administra-
12. In the case of multiple-site training tive Support
programs, adequacy of satellite centers man- The adequacy and appropriateness of the
agement. institutional environment and administra-
C. Training facilities and resources. tive support system for the training program
Adequacy and appropriateness of the facili- should be considered, including
ties and resources for supporting the train- 1. Adequacy of the institutional commit-
ing program should be considered, including, ment to the employee training program.
1. Space and equipment to conduct the 2. Adequacy and appropriateness of the ad-
training. ministrative structure and administrative
2. Facilities for representative hands-on support.
training. G. Summary of Evaluation Questions
3. In the case of multiple-site programs, Key questions for evaluating the quality
equipment and facilities at the satellite cen- and appropriateness of an overall training
ters. program should include the following:
406
1. Are the program objectives clearly stat- (9) Rights and responsibilities of employers
ed? and employees under applicable OSHA and
2. Is the program accomplishing its objec- EPA laws.
tives? b. Technical knowledge.
3. Are appropriate facilities and staff avail- (1) Type of potential exposures to chem-
able? ical, biological, and radiological hazards;
4. Is there an appropriate mix of classroom, types of human responses to these hazards
demonstration, and hands-on training? and recognition of those responses; prin-
5. Is the program providing quality em- ciples of toxicology and information about
ployee health and safety training that fully acute and chronic hazards; health and safety
meets the intent of regulatory requirements? considerations of new technology.
6. What are the programs main strengths? (2) Fundamentals of chemical hazards in-
7. What are the programs main weak- cluding but not limited to vapor pressure,
nesses? boiling points, flash points, ph, other phys-
8. What is recommended to improve the ical and chemical properties.
program? (3) Fire and explosion hazards of chemi-
9. Are instructors instructing according to cals.
their training outlines? (4) General safety hazards such as but not
10. Is the evaluation tool current and ap- limited to electrical hazards, powered equip-
propriate for the program content? ment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, walk-
11. Is the course material current and rel-
ing-working surface hazards, excavation haz-
evant to the target group?
ards, and hazards associated with working in
Suggested Training Curriculum Guidelines hot and cold temperature extremes.
(5) Review and knowledge of confined space
The following training curriculum guide- entry procedures in 29 CFR 1910.146.
lines are for those operations specifically (6) Work practices to minimize employee
identified in 29 CFR 1910.120 as requiring risk from site hazards.
training. Issues such as qualifications of in- (7) Safe use of engineering controls, equip-
structors, training certification, and similar ment, and any new relevant safety tech-
criteria appropriate to all categories of oper- nology or safety procedures.
ations addressed in 1910.120 have been cov- (8) Review and demonstration of com-
ered in the preceding section and are not re- petency with air sampling and monitoring
addressed in each of the generic guidelines. equipment that may be used in a site moni-
Basic core requirements for training pro- toring program.
grams that are addressed include
(9) Container sampling procedures and
1. General Hazardous Waste Operations
safeguarding; general drum and container
2. RCRA operationsTreatment, storage,
handling procedures including special re-
and disposal facilities.
quirement for laboratory waste packs,
3. Emergency Response.
shock-sensitive wastes, and radioactive
A. General Hazardous Waste Operations and wastes.
Site-specific Training (10) The elements of a spill control pro-
1. Off-site training.Training course content gram.
for hazardous waste operations, required by (11) Proper use and limitations of material
29 CFR 1910.120(e), should include the fol- handling equipment.
lowing topics or procedures: (12) Procedures for safe and healthful prep-
a. Regulatory knowledge. aration of containers for shipping and trans-
(1) An review of 29 CFR 1910.120 and the port.
core elements of an occupational safety and
(13) Methods of communication including
health program.
those used while wearing respiratory protec-
(2) The content of a medical surveillance
tion.
program as outlined in 29 CFR 1910.120(f).
(3) The content of an effective site safety c. Technical skills.
and health plan consistent with the require- (1) Selection, use maintenance, and limita-
ments of 29 CFR 1910.120(b)(4)(ii). tions of personal protective equipment in-
(4) Emergency response plan and proce- cluding the components and procedures for
dures as outlined in 29 CFR 1910.38 and 29 carrying out a respirator program to comply
CFR 1910.120(l). with 29 CFR 1910.134.
(5) Adequate illumination. (2) Instruction in decontamination pro-
(6) Sanitation recommendation and equip- grams including personnel, equipment, and
ment. hardware; hands-on training including level
(7) Review and explanation of OSHAs haz- A, B, and C ensembles and appropriate de-
ard-communication standard (29 CFR contamination lines; field activities includ-
1910.1200) and lock-out-tag-out standard (29 ing the donning and doffing of protective
CFR 1910.147). equipment to a level commensurate with the
(8) Review of other applicable standards in- employees anticipated job function and re-
cluding but not limited to those in the con- sponsibility and to the degree required by
struction standards (29 CFR Part 1926). potential hazards.
407
(3) Sources for additional hazard informa- monitoring conducted by the employer, con-
tion; exercises using relevant manuals and tinuous monitoring devices, visual appear-
hazard coding systems. ances, or other evidence (sight, sound or
d. Additional suggested items. smell) of hazardous chemicals being released,
(1) A laminated, dated card or certificate and applicable alarms from monitoring de-
with photo, denoting limitations and level of vices that record chemical releases.
protection for which the employee is trained (4) The physical and health hazards of sub-
should be issued to those students success- stances known or potentially present in the
fully completing a course. work area.
(2) Attendance should be required at all (5) The measures employees can take to
training modules, with successful comple- help protect themselves from work-site haz-
tion of exercises and a final written or oral ards, including specific procedures the em-
examination with at least 50 questions. ployer has implemented.
(3) A minimum of one-third of the program (6) An explanation of the labeling system
should be devoted to hands-on exercises. and material safety data sheets and how em-
(4) A curriculum should be established for ployees can obtain and use appropriate haz-
the 8-hour refresher training required by 29 ard information.
CFR 1910.120(e)(8), with delivery of such (7) The elements of the confined space pro-
courses directed toward those areas of pre- gram including special PPE, permits, moni-
vious training that need improvement or re- toring requirements, communication proce-
emphasis. dures, emergency response, and applicable
(5) A curriculum should be established for lock-out procedures.
the required 8-hour training for supervisors. b. The employer should provide hazardous
Demonstrated competency in the skills and waste employees information and training
knowledge provided in a 40-hour course and should provide a review and access to
should be a prerequisite for supervisor train- the site safety and plan as follows:
ing. (1) Names of personnel and alternate re-
sponsible for site safety and health.
2. Refresher training.
(2) Safety and health hazards present on
The 8-hour annual refresher training re-
the site.
quired in 29 CFR 1910.120(e)(8) should be con-
(3) Selection, use, maintenance, and limi-
ducted by qualified training providers. Re-
tations of personal protective equipment
fresher training should include at a min-
specific to the site.
imum the following topics and procedures:
(4) Work practices by which the employee
(a) Review of and retraining on relevant
can minimize risks from hazards.
topics covered in the 40-hour program, as ap-
(5) Safe use of engineering controls and
propriate, using reports by the students on
equipment available on site.
their work experiences.
(6) Safe decontamination procedures estab-
(b) Update on developments with respect to
lished to minimize employee contact with
material covered in the 40-hour course.
hazardous substances, including:
(c) Review of changes to pertinent provi-
(A) Employee decontamination,
sions of EPA or OSHA standards or laws.
(B) Clothing decontamination, and
(d) Introduction of additional subject areas
(C) Equipment decontamination.
as appropriate. (7) Elements of the site emergency re-
(e) Hands-on review of new or altered PPE sponse plan, including:
or decontamination equipment or proce- (A) Pre-emergency planning.
dures. Review of new developments in per- (B) Personnel roles and lines of authority
sonal protective equipment. and communication.
(f) Review of newly developed air and con- (C) Emergency recognition and prevention.
taminant monitoring equipment. (D) Safe distances and places of refuge.
3. On-site training. (E) Site security and control.
a. The employer should provide employees (F) Evacuation routes and procedures.
engaged in hazardous waste site activities (G) Decontamination procedures not cov-
with information and training prior to ini- ered by the site safety and health plan.
tial assignment into their work area, as fol- (H) Emergency medical treatment and first
lows: aid.
(1) The requirements of the hazard commu- (I) Emergency equipment and procedures
nication program including the location and for handling emergency incidents.
availability of the written program, required c. The employer should provide hazardous
lists of hazardous chemicals, and material waste employees information and training
safety data sheets. on personal protective equipment used at the
(2) Activities and locations in their work site, such as the following:
area where hazardous substance may be (1) PPE to be used based upon known or an-
present. ticipated site hazards.
(3) Methods and observations that may be (2) PPE limitations of materials and con-
used to detect the present or release of a haz- struction; limitations during temperature
ardous chemical in the work area (such as extremes, heat stress, and other appropriate
408
medical considerations; use and limitations (i) A review of medical surveillance pro-
of respirator equipment as well as docu- grams meeting the requirements of 29 CFR
mentation procedures as outlined in 29 CFR 1910.120(p)(3) including the recognition of
1910.134. signs and symptoms of overexposure to haz-
(3) PPE inspection procedures prior to, ardous substance including known syner-
during, and after use. gistic interactions.
(4) PPE donning and doffing procedures. (j) A review of decontamination programs
(5) PPE decontamination and disposal pro- and procedures meeting the requirements of
cedures. 29 CFR 1910.120(p)(4).
(6) PPE maintenance and storage. (k) A review of an employers requirements
(7) Task duration as related to PPE limita- to implement a training program and its ele-
tions. ments.
d. The employer should instruct the em- (l) A review of the criteria and programs
ployee about the site medical surveillance for proper selection and use of personal pro-
program relative to the particular site, in- tective equipment, including respirators.
cluding (m) A review of the applicable appendices
(1) Specific medical surveillance programs to 29 CFR 1910.120.
that have been adapted for the site. (n) Principles of toxicology and biological
(2) Specific signs and symptoms related to
monitoring as they pertain to occupational
exposure to hazardous materials on the site.
health.
(3) The frequency and extent of periodic
(o) Rights and responsibilities of employ-
medical examinations that will be used on
ees and employers under applicable OSHA
the site.
(4) Maintenance and availability of and EPA laws.
records. (p) Hands-on exercises and demonstrations
(5) Personnel to be contacted and proce- of competency with equipment to illustrate
dures to be followed when signs and symp- the basic equipment principles that may be
toms of exposures are recognized. used during the performance of work duties,
e. The employees will review and discuss including the donning and doffing of PPE.
the site safety plan as part of the training (q) Sources of reference, efficient use of
program. The location of the site safety plan relevant manuals, and knowledge of hazard
and all written programs should be discussed coding systems to include information con-
with employees including a discussion of the tained in hazardous waste manifests.
mechanisms for access, review, and ref- (r) At least 8 hours of hands-on training.
erences described. (s) Training in the job skills required for
B. RCRA Operations Training for Treatment, an employees job function and responsi-
Storage and Disposal Facilities. bility before they are permitted to partici-
1. As a minimum, the training course re- pate in or supervise field activities.
quired in 29 CFR 1910.120 (p) should include 2. The individual employer should provide
the following topics: hazardous waste employees with information
(a) Review of the applicable paragraphs of and training prior to an employees initial
29 CFR 1910.120 and the elements of the em- assignment into a work area. The training
ployers occupational safety and health plan. and information should cover the following
(b) Review of relevant hazards such as, but topics:
not limited to, chemical, biological, and ra- (a) The Emergency response plan and pro-
diological exposures; fire and explosion haz- cedures including first aid.
ards; thermal extremes; and physical haz- (b) A review of the employers hazardous
ards. waste handling procedures including the ma-
(c) General safety hazards including those terials handling program and elements of the
associated with electrical hazards, powered spill containment program, location of spill
equipment hazards, lock-out-tag-out proce- response kits or equipment, and the names of
dures, motor vehicle hazards and walking- those trained to respond to releases.
working surface hazards. (c) The hazardous communication program
(d) Confined-space hazards and procedures. meeting the requirements of 29 CFR
(e) Work practices to minimize employee 1910.1200.
risk from workplace hazards. (d) A review of the employers medical sur-
(f) Emergency response plan and proce- veillance program including the recognition
dures including first aid meeting the require- of signs and symptoms of exposure to rel-
ments of paragraph (p)(8). evant hazardous substance including known
(g) A review of procedures to minimize ex- synergistic interactions.
posure to hazardous waste and various type (e) A review of the employers decon-
of waste streams, including the materials tamination program and procedures.
handling program and spill containment pro- (f) An review of the employers training
gram. program and the parties responsible for that
(h) A review of hazard communication pro- program.
grams meeting the requirements of 29 CFR (g) A review of the employers personal
1910.1200. protective equipment program including the
409
proper selection and use of PPE based upon (B) Practical applications of hazard rec-
specific site hazards. ognition, including presentations on biology,
(h) All relevant site-specific procedures ad- chemistry, and physics.
dressing potential safety and health hazards. (2) Principles of toxicology, biological
This may include, as appropriate, biological monitoring, and risk assessment.
and radiological exposures, fire and explo- (3) Safe work practices and general site
sion hazards, thermal hazards, and physical safety.
hazards such as electrical hazards, powered (4) Engineering controls and hazardous
equipment hazards, lock-out-tag-out haz- waste operations.
ards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking- (5) Site safety plans and standard oper-
working surface hazards. ating procedures.
(i) Safe use engineering controls and equip- (6) Decontamination procedures and prac-
ment on site. tices.
(7) Emergency procedures, first aid, and
(j) Names of personnel and alternates re-
self-rescue.
sponsible for safety and health.
(8) Safe use of field equipment.
C. Emergency response training. (9) Storage, handling, use and transpor-
Federal OSHA standards in 29 CFR tation of hazardous substances.
1910.120(q) are directed toward private sector (10) Use, care, and limitations of personal
emergency responders. Therefore, the guide- protective equipment.
lines provided in this portion of the appendix (11) Safe sampling techniques.
are directed toward that employee popu- (12) Rights and responsibilities of employ-
lation. However, they also impact indirectly ees under OSHA and other related laws con-
through State OSHA or USEPA regulations cerning right-to-know, safety and health,
some public sector emergency responders. compensations and liability.
Therefore, the guidelines provided in this (13) Medical monitoring requirements.
portion of the appendix may be applied to (14) Community relations.
both employee populations. b. Suggested criteria for specific courses.
States with OSHA state plans must cover (1) First responder awareness level.
their employees with regulations at least as (A) Review of and demonstration of com-
effective as the Federal OSHA standards. petency in performing the applicable skills
Public employees in states without approved of 29 CFR 1910.120(q).
state OSHA programs covering hazardous (B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. De-
waste operations and emergency response partment of Transportations Emergency Re-
are covered by the U.S. EPA under 40 CFR sponse Guidebook (ERG) and familiarization
311, a regulation virtually identical to with OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910.1201.
1910.120. (C) Review of the principles and practices
for analyzing an incident to determine both
Since this is a non-mandatory appendix
the hazardous substances present and the
and therefore not an enforceable standard,
basic hazard and response information for
OSHA recommends that those employers,
each hazardous substance present.
employees or volunteers in public sector
(D) Review of procedures for implementing
emergency response organizations outside
actions consistent with the local emergency
Federal OSHA jurisdiction consider the fol-
response plan, the organizations standard
lowing criteria in developing their own
operating procedures, and the current edi-
training programs. A unified approach to
tion of DOTs ERG including emergency no-
training at the community level between
tification procedures and follow-up commu-
emergency response organizations covered
nications.
by Federal OSHA and those not covered di-
(E) Review of the expected hazards includ-
rectly by Federal OSHA can help ensure an
ing fire and explosions hazards, confined
effective community response to the release
space hazards, electrical hazards, powered
or potential release of hazardous substances
equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards,
in the community.
and walking-working surface hazards.
a. General considerations. (F) Awareness and knowledge of the com-
Emergency response organizations are re- petencies for the First Responder at the
quired to consider the topics listed in Awareness Level covered in the National
1910.120(q)(6). Emergency response organiza- Fire Protection Associations Standard No.
tions may use some or all of the following 472, Professional Competence of Responders to
topics to supplement those mandatory topics Hazardous Materials Incidents.
when developing their response training pro- (2) First responder operations level.
grams. Many of the topics would require an (A) Review of and demonstration of com-
interaction between the response provider petency in performing the applicable skills
and the individuals responsible for the site of 29 CFR 1910.120(q).
where the response would be expected. (B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. De-
(1) Hazard recognition, including: partment of Transportations Emergency Re-
(A) Nature of hazardous substances sponse Guidebook (ERG), manufacturer ma-
present, terial safety data sheets, CHEMTREC/
410
CANUTEC, shipper or manufacturer concluding extended emergency notification
tacts, and other relevant sources of informa- procedures and follow-up communications.
tion addressing hazardous substance re- (E) Review of the principles and practice
leases. Familiarization with OSHA standard for proper selection and use of personal pro-
29 CFR 1910.1201. tective equipment.
(C) Review of the principles and practices (F) Review of the principles and practices
for analyzing an incident to determine the of establishing exposure zones, proper decon-
hazardous substances present, the likely be- tamination and medical surveillance sta-
havior of the hazardous substance and its tions and procedures.
container, the types of hazardous substance (G) Review of the expected hazards includ-
transportation containers and vehicles, the ing fire and explosions hazards, confined
types and selection of the appropriate defen- space hazards, electrical hazards, powered
sive strategy for containing the release. equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards,
(D) Review of procedures for implementing and walking-working surface hazards.
continuing response actions consistent with (H) Awareness and knowledge of the com-
the local emergency response plan, the orga- petencies for the Hazardous Materials Tech-
nizations standard operating procedures, nician covered in the National Fire Protec-
and the current edition of DOTs ERG in- tion Associations Standard No. 472, Profes-
cluding extended emergency notification sional Competence of Responders to Hazardous
procedures and follow-up communications. Materials Incidents.
(E) Review of the principles and practice (4) Hazardous materials specialist.
for proper selection and use of personal pro- (A) Review of and demonstration of com-
tective equipment. petency in performing the applicable skills
(F) Review of the principles and practice of of 29 CFR 1910.120(q).
personnel and equipment decontamination. (B) Hands-on experience with retrieval and
(G) Review of the expected hazards includ- use of written and electronic information
ing fire and explosions hazards, confined relative to response decision making includ-
space hazards, electrical hazards, powered ing but not limited to the U.S. Department
equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, of Transportations Emergency Response
and walking-working surface hazards. Guidebook (ERG), manufacturer material
(H) Awareness and knowledge of the com- safety data sheets, CHEMTREC/CANUTEC,
petencies for the First Responder at the Op- shipper or manufacturer contacts, computer
erations Level covered in the National Fire data bases and response models, and other
Protection Associations Standard No. 472, relevant sources of information addressing
Professional Competence of Responders to Haz- hazardous substance releases. Familiariza-
ardous Materials Incidents. tion with OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910.1201.
(3) Hazardous materials technician. (C) Review of the principles and practices
(A) Review of and demonstration of com- for analyzing an incident to determine the
petency in performing the applicable skills hazardous substances present, their physical
of 29 CFR 1910.120(q). and chemical properties, and the likely be-
(B) Hands-on experience with written and havior of the hazardous substance and its
electronic information relative to response container, vessel, or vehicle.
decision making including but not limited to (D) Review of the principles and practices
the U.S. Department of Transportations for identification of the types of hazardous
Emergency Response Guidebook (ERG), manu- substance transportation containers, vessels
facturer material safety data sheets, and vehicles involved in the release; select-
CHEMTREC/CANUTEC, shipper or manufac- ing and using the various types of equipment
turer contacts, computer data bases and re- available for plugging or patching transpor-
sponse models, and other relevant sources of tation containers, vessels or vehicles; orga-
information addressing hazardous substance nizing and directing the use of multiple
releases. Familiarization with OSHA stand- teams of hazardous material technicians and
ard 29 CFR 1910.1201. selecting the appropriate strategy for ap-
(C) Review of the principles and practices proaching release sites and containing or
for analyzing an incident to determine the stopping the release.
hazardous substances present, their physical (E) Review of procedures for implementing
and chemical properties, the likely behavior continuing response actions consistent with
of the hazardous substance and its container, the local emergency response plan, the orga-
the types of hazardous substance transpor- nizations standard operating procedures, in-
tation containers and vehicles involved in cluding knowledge of the available public
the release, the appropriate strategy for ap- and private response resources, establish-
proaching release sites and containing the ment of an incident command post, direction
release. of hazardous material technician teams, and
(D) Review of procedures for implementing extended emergency notification procedures
continuing response actions consistent with and follow-up communications.
the local emergency response plan, the orga- (F) Review of the principles and practice
nizations standard operating procedures, for proper selection and use of personal pro-
and the current edition of DOTs ERG in- tective equipment.
411
(G) Review of the principles and practices 1910.121 [Reserved]
of establishing exposure zones and proper de-
contamination, monitoring and medical sur- DIPPING AND COATING OPERATIONS
veillance stations and procedures.
(H) Review of the expected hazards includ- SOURCE: 64 FR 13909, Mar. 23, 1999, unless
ing fire and explosions hazards, confined otherwise noted.
space hazards, electrical hazards, powered
equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, 1910.122 Table of contents.
and walking-working surface hazards.
(I) Awareness and knowledge of the com- This section lists the paragraph
petencies for the Off-site Specialist Em- headings contained in 1910.123
ployee covered in the National Fire Protec- through 1910.126.
tion Associations Standard No. 472, Profes-
1910.123 Dipping and coating operations:
sional Competence of Responders to Hazardous
Coverage and definitions.
Materials Incidents.
(5) Incident commander. (a) Does this rule apply to me?
The incident commander is the individual (b) What operations are covered?
who, at any one time, is responsible for and (c) What operations are not covered?
in control of the response effort. This indi- (d) How are terms used in 1910.123 through
vidual is the person responsible for the direc- 1910.126 defined?
tion and coordination of the response effort. 1910.124 General requirements for dipping and
An incident commanders position should be coating operations.
occupied by the most senior, appropriately
trained individual present at the response (a) What construction requirements apply to
site. Yet, as necessary and appropriate by dip tanks?
the level of response provided, the position (b) What ventilation requirements apply to
may be occupied by many individuals during vapor areas?
a particular response as the need for greater (c) What requirements must I follow to recir-
authority, responsibility, or training in- culate exhaust air into the workplace?
creases. It is possible for the first responder (d) What must I do when I use an exhaust
at the awareness level to assume the duties hood?
of incident commander until a more senior (e) What requirements must I follow when an
employee enters a dip tank?
and appropriately trained individual arrives
(f) What first-aid procedures must my em-
at the response site.
ployees know?
Therefore, any emergency responder ex-
(g) What hygiene facilities must I provide?
pected to perform as an incident commander (h) What treatment and first aid must I pro-
should be trained to fulfill the obligations of vide?
the position at the level of response they will (i) What must I do before an employee cleans
be providing including the following: a dip tank?
(A) Ability to analyze a hazardous sub- (j) What must I do to inspect and maintain
stance incident to determine the magnitude my dipping or coating operation?
of the response problem.
(B) Ability to plan and implement an ap- 1910.125 Additional requirements for dipping
propriate response plan within the capabili- and coating operations that use flammable or
ties of available personnel and equipment. combustible liquids.
(C) Ability to implement a response to fa- (a) What type of construction material must
vorably change the outcome of the incident be used in making my dip tank?
in a manner consistent with the local emer- (b) When must I provide overflow piping?
gency response plan and the organizations (c) When must I provide a bottom drain?
standard operating procedures. (d) When must my conveyer system shut
(D) Ability to evaluate the progress of the down automatically?
emergency response to ensure that the re- (e) What ignition and fuel sources must be
sponse objectives are being met safely, effec- controlled?
tively, and efficiently. (f) What fire protection must I provide?
(E) Ability to adjust the response plan to (g) To what temperature may I heat a liquid
the conditions of the response and to notify in a dip tank?
higher levels of response when required by
1910.126 Additional requirements for special
the changes to the response plan.
dipping and coating operations.
[54 FR 9317, Mar. 6, 1989, as amended at 55 FR (a) What additional requirements apply to
14073, Apr. 13, 1990; 56 FR 15832, Apr. 18, 1991; hardening or tempering tanks?
59 FR 43270, Aug. 22, 1994; 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, (b) What additional requirements apply to
1996] flow coating?
412
(c) What additional requirements apply to mersed) in a dip tank or it may be sus-
roll coating, roll spreading, or roll im- pended in a vapor coming from the
pregnating? tank.
(d) What additional requirements apply to
vapor degreasing tanks? Flammable liquid means a liquid hav-
(e) What additional requirements apply to ing a flashpoint below 100 F (37.8 C).
cyanide tanks? Flashpoint means the minimum tem-
(f) What additional requirements apply to perature at which a liquid gives off a
spray cleaning tanks and spray vapor in sufficient concentration to ig-
degreasing tanks?
(g) What additional requirements apply to
nite if tested in accordance with the
electrostatic paint detearing? definition of flashpoint in
1910.1200(c).
1910.123 Dipping and coating oper- Lower flammable limit (LFL) means
ations: Coverage and definitions. the lowest concentration of a material
(a) Does this rule apply to me? (1) that will propagate a flame. The LFL
This rule ( 1910.123 through 1910.126) is usually expressed as a percent by
applies when you use a dip tank con- volume of the material in air (or other
taining a liquid other than water. It oxidant).
applies when you use the liquid in the Vapor area means any space con-
tank or its vapor to: taining a dip tank, including its drain
(i) Clean an object; boards, associated drying or conveying
(ii) Coat an object; equipment, and any surrounding area
(iii) Alter the surface of an object; or where the vapor concentration exceeds
(iv) Change the character of an ob- 25% of the LFL of the liquid in the
ject. tank.
(2) This rule also applies to the drain- You means the employer, as defined
ing or drying of an object you have by the Occupational Safety and Health
dipped or coated. Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 651 et seq.).
(b) What operations are covered? Ex-
amples of covered operations are paint 1910.124 General requirements for
dipping, electroplating, pickling, dipping and coating operations.
quenching, tanning, degreasing, strip-
(a) What construction requirements
ping, cleaning, roll coating, flow coat-
apply to dip tanks? Any container that
ing, and curtain coating.
you use as a dip tank must be strong
(c) What operations are not covered?
enough to withstand any expected load.
You are not covered by this rule if your
dip-tank operation only uses a molten (b) What ventilation requirements
material (a molten metal, alloy, or apply to vapor areas? (1) The ventila-
salt, for example). tion that you provide to a vapor area
(d) How are terms used in 1910.123 must keep the airborne concentration
through 1910.126 defined? of any substance below 25% of its LFL.
Adjacent area means any area within (2) When a liquid in a dip tank cre-
20 feet (6.1 m) of a vapor area that is ates an exposure hazard covered by a
not separated from the vapor area by standard listed in subpart Z of this
tight partitions. part, you must control worker expo-
Approved means that the equipment sure as required by that standard.
so designated is listed or approved by a (3) You may use a tank cover or ma-
nationally recognized testing labora- terial that floats on the surface of the
tory, as defined by 1910.7. liquid in a dip tank to replace or sup-
Autoignition temperature means the plement ventilation. The method or
minimum temperature required to combination of methods you choose
cause self-sustained combustion, inde- must maintain the airborne concentra-
pendent of any other source of heat. tion of the hazardous material and the
Combustible liquid means a liquid hav- workers exposure within the limits
ing a flash point of 100 F (37.8 C) or specified in paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2)
above. of this section.
Dip tank means a container holding a (4) When you use mechanical ventila-
liquid other than water and that is tion, it must conform to the following
used for dipping or coating. An object standards that are incorporated by ref-
may be immersed (or partially im- erence as specified in 1910.6:
413
(i) ANSI Z9.21979, Fundamentals mit-Required Confined Spaces, as ap-

Governing the Design and Operation of plicable.
Local Exhaust Systems; (f) What first-aid procedures must my
(ii) NFPA 341995, Standard for Dip employees know? Your employees must
Tanks Containing Flammable or Com- know the first-aid procedures that are
bustible Liquids; appropriate to the dipping or coating
(iii) ACGIHs Industrial Ventilation: hazards to which they are exposed.
A Manual of Recommended Practice (g) What hygiene facilities must I
(22nd ed., 1995); or provide? When your employees work
(iv) ANSI Z9.11971, Practices for with liquids that may burn, irritate, or
Ventilation and Operation of Open-Sur- otherwise harm their skin, you must
face Tanks, and NFPA 341966, Stand- provide:
ard for Dip Tanks Containing Flam- (1) Locker space or other storage
mable or Combustible Liquids. space to prevent contamination of the
(5) When you use mechanical ventila- employees street clothes;
tion, it must draw the flow of air into (2) An emergency shower and eye-
a hood or exhaust duct. wash station close to the dipping or
(6) When you use mechanical ventila- coating operation. In place of this
tion, each dip tank must have an inde- equipment, you may use a water hose
pendent exhaust system unless the that is at least 4 feet (1.22 m) long and
combination of substances being re- at least 34 of an inch (18 mm) thick
moved will not cause a: with a quick-opening valve and car-
(i) Fire; rying a pressure of 25 pounds per
(ii) Explosion; or square inch (1.62 k/cm2) or less; and
(iii) Chemical reaction. (3) At least one basin with a hot-
(c) What requirements must I follow water faucet for every 10 employees
to recirculate exhaust air into the who work with such liquids. (See para-
workplace? (1) You may not recirculate graph (d) of 1910.141.)
exhaust air when any substance in that (h) What treatment and first aid
air poses a health hazard to employees must I provide? When your employees
or exceeds 25% of its LFL. work with liquids that may burn, irri-
(2) You must ensure that any exhaust tate, or otherwise harm their skin, you
air recirculated from a dipping or coat- must provide:
ing operation using flammable or com- (1) A physicians approval before an
bustible liquids is: employee with a sore, burn, or other
(i) Free of any solid particulate that skin lesion that requires medical treat-
poses a health or safety hazard for em- ment works in a vapor area;
ployees; and (2) Treatment by a properly des-
(ii) Monitored by approved equip- ignated person of any small skin abra-
ment. sion, cut, rash, or open sore;
(3) You must have a system that (3) Appropriate first-aid supplies that
sounds an alarm and automatically are located near the dipping or coating
shuts down the operation when the operation; and
vapor concentration for any substance (4) For employees who work with
in the exhaust airstream exceeds 25% chromic acid, periodic examinations of
of its LFL. their exposed body parts, especially
(d) What must I do when I use an ex- their nostrils.
haust hood? You must: (i) What must I do before an em-
(1) Provide each room having exhaust ployee cleans a dip tank? Before per-
hoods with a volume of outside air that mitting an employee to clean the inte-
is at least 90 percent of the volume of rior of a dip tank, you must:
the exhaust air; and (1) Drain the contents of the tank
(2) Ensure that the outside air supply and open the cleanout doors; and
does not damage exhaust hoods. (2) Ventilate and clear any pockets
(e) What requirements must I follow where hazardous vapors may have ac-
when an employee enters a dip tank? cumulated.
When an employee enters a dip tank, (j) What must I do to inspect and
you must meet the entry requirements maintain my dipping or coating oper-
of 1910.146, OSHAs standard for Per- ation? You must:
414
(1) Inspect the hoods and ductwork of fied in 1910.134, OSHAs Respiratory
the ventilation system for corrosion or Protection standard) to protect em-
damage: ployees in the vapor area from expo-
(i) At least quarterly during oper- sure to toxic substances released dur-
ation; and ing welding, burning, or open-flame
(ii) Prior to operation after a pro- work; and
longed shutdown. (5) Have dip tanks thoroughly
(2) Ensure that the airflow is ade- cleaned of solvents and vapors before
quate: permitting welding, burning, or open-
(i) At least quarterly during oper- flame work on them.
ation; and
(ii) Prior to operation after a pro- 1910.125 Additional requirements for
longed shutdown. dipping and coating operations that
(3) Periodically inspect all dipping use flammable or combustible liq-
and coating equipment, including cov- uids.
ers, drains, overflow piping, and elec- If you use flammable or combustible
trical and fire-extinguishing systems, liquids, you must comply with the re-
and promptly correct any deficiencies; quirements of this section as well as
(4) Provide mechanical ventilation or the requirements of sections 1910.123,
respirators (selected and used as speci- 1910.124, and 1910.126, as applicable.
You must comply with this section if: And:
The flashpoint of the flammable or combustible liq- The liquid is heated as part of the operation; or
uid is 200 F (93.3 C) or above.
A heated object is placed in the liquid.
(a) What type of construction mate- requirements of paragraph (f)(3) of this

rial must be used in making my dip section; or
tank? Your dip tank must be made of (ii) The viscosity of the liquid at nor-
noncombustible material. mal atmospheric temperature does not
(b) When must I provide overflow pip- allow the liquid to flow or be pumped
ing? (1) You must provide properly easily.
trapped overflow piping that discharges (2) You must ensure that the bottom
to a safe location for any dip tank hav- drain required by this section:
ing: (i) Will empty the dip tank during a
(i) A capacity greater than 150 gal- fire;
lons (568 L); or (ii) Is properly trapped;
(ii) A liquid surface area greater than (iii) Has pipes that permit the dip
10 feet 2 (0.95 m2). tanks contents to be removed within
(2) You must also ensure that: five minutes after a fire begins; and
(i) Any overflow piping is at least 3 (iv) Discharges to a safe location.
inches (7.6 cm) in diameter and has suf- (3) Any bottom drain you provide
ficient capacity to prevent the dip tank must be capable of manual and auto-
from overflowing; matic operation, and manual operation
(ii) Piping connections on drains and must be from a safe and accessible lo-
overflow pipes allow ready access to cation.
the interior of the pipe for inspection (4) You must ensure that automatic
and cleaning; and pumps are used when gravity flow from
(iii) The bottom of the overflow con- the bottom drain is impractical.
nection is at least 6 inches (15.2 cm) (d) When must my conveyor system
below the top of the dip tank. shut down automatically? If your con-
(c) When must I provide a bottom veyor system is used with a dip tank,
drain? (1) You must provide a bottom the system must shut down automati-
drain for dip tanks that contain more cally:
than 500 gallons (1893 L) of liquid, un- (1) If there is a fire; or
less: (2) If the ventilation rate drops below
(i) The dip tank is equipped with an what is required by paragraph (b) of
automatic closing cover meeting the 1910.124.
415
(e) What ignition and fuel sources (2) For every vapor area, you must
must be controlled? (1) In each vapor provide:
area and any adjacent area, you must (i) Manual fire extinguishers that are
ensure that: suitable for flammable and combus-
(i) All electrical wiring and equip- tible liquid fires and that conform to
ment conform to the applicable haz- the requirements of 1910.157; and
ardous (classified)-area requirements of (ii) An automatic fire-extinguishing
subpart S of this part (except as spe- system that conforms to the require-
cifically permitted in paragraph (g) of ments of subpart L of this part.
1910.126); and (3) You may substitute a cover that
(ii) There are no flames, spark-pro- is closed by an approved automatic de-
ducing devices, or other surfaces that vice for the automatic fire-extin-
are hot enough to ignite vapors. guishing system if the cover:
(2) You must ensure that any port- (i) Can also be activated manually;
able container used to add liquid to the (ii) Is noncombustible or tin-clad,
tank is electrically bonded to the dip with the enclosing metal applied with
tank and positively grounded to pre- locked joints; and
vent static electrical sparks or arcs. (iii) Is kept closed when the dip tank
(3) You must ensure that a heating is not in use.
system that is used in a drying oper- (g) To what temperature may I heat
ation and could cause ignition: a liquid in a dip tank? You must main-
(i) Is installed in accordance with tain the temperature of the liquid in a
NFPA 86A1969, Standard for Ovens and dip tank:
Furnaces (which is incorporated by ref- (1) Below the liquids boiling point;
erence in 1910.6 of this part); and
(ii) Has adequate mechanical ventila- (2) At least 100 F (37.8 C) below the
tion that operates before and during liquids autoignition temperature.
the drying operation; and
1910.126 Additional requirements for
(iii) Shuts down automatically if any special dipping and coating oper-
ventilating fan fails to maintain ade- ations.
quate ventilation.
In addition to the requirements in
(4) You also must ensure that:
1910.123 through 1910.125, you must
(i) All vapor areas are free of combus- comply with any requirement in this
tible debris and as free as practicable section that applies to your operation.
of combustible stock; (a) What additional requirements
(ii) Rags and other material contami- apply to hardening or tempering
nated with liquids from dipping or tanks?
coating operations are placed in ap- (1) You must ensure that hardening
proved waste cans immediately after or tempering tanks:
use; and (i) Are located as far as practicable
(iii) Waste can contents are properly from furnaces;
disposed of at the end of each shift. (ii) Are on noncombustible flooring;
(5) You must prohibit smoking in a and
vapor area and must post a readily (iii) Have noncombustible hoods and
visible No Smoking sign near each vents (or equivalent devices) for vent-
dip tank. ing to the outside. For this purpose,
(f) What fire protection must I pro- vent ducts must be treated as flues and
vide? (1) You must provide the fire pro- kept away from combustible materials,
tection required by this paragraph (f) particularly roofs.
for: (2) You must equip each tank with an
(i) Any dip tank having a capacity of alarm that will sound if the tempera-
at least 150 gallons (568 L) or a liquid ture of the liquid comes within 50 F (10
surface area of at least 4 feet 2 (0.38 C) of its flashpoint (the alarm set
m 1); and point).
(ii) Any hardening or tempering tank (3) When practicable, you must also
having a capacity of at least 500 gal- provide each tank with a limit switch
lons (1893 L) or a liquid surface area of to shut down the conveyor supplying
at least 25 feet 2 (2.37 m 2). work to the tank.
416
(4) If the temperature of the liquid other safeguard to prevent cyanide

can exceed the alarm set point, you from mixing with an acid if a dip tank
must equip the tank with a circulating fails.
cooling system. (f) What additional requirements
(5) If the tank has a bottom drain, apply to spray cleaning tanks and
the bottom drain may be combined spray degreasing tanks? If you spray a
with the oil-circulating system. liquid in the air over an open-surface
(6) You must not use air under pres- cleaning or degreasing tank, you must
sure when you fill the dip tank or agi- control the spraying to the extent fea-
tate the liquid in the dip tank. sible by:
(b) What additional requirements (1) Enclosing the spraying operation;
apply to flow coating? (1) You must use and
a direct low-pressure pumping system
(2) Using mechanical ventilation to
or a 10-gallon (38 L) or smaller gravity
provide enough inward air velocity to
tank to supply the paint for flow coat-
prevent the spray from leaving the
ing. In case of fire, an approved heat-
vapor area.
actuated device must shut down the
pumping system. (g) What additional requirements
(2) You must ensure that the piping apply to electrostatic paint detearing?
is substantial and rigidly supported. (1) You must use only approved electro-
(c) What additional requirements static equipment in paint-detearing op-
apply to roll coating, roll spreading, or erations. Electrodes in such equipment
roll impregnating? When these oper- must be substantial, rigidly supported,
ations use a flammable or combustible permanently located, and effectively
liquid that has a flashpoint below 140 insulated from ground by nonporous,
F (60 C), you must prevent sparking noncombustible, clean, dry insulators.
of static electricity by: (2) You must use conveyors to sup-
(1) Bonding and grounding all metal- port any goods being paint deteared.
lic parts (including rotating parts) and (3) You must ensure that goods being
installing static collectors; or electrostatically deteared are not
(2) Maintaining a conductive atmos- manually handled.
phere (for example, one with a high rel- (4) Between goods being electro-
ative humidity) in the vapor area. statically deteared and the electrodes
(d) What additional requirements or conductors of the electrostatic
apply to vapor degreasing tanks? (1) equipment, you must maintain a min-
You must ensure that the condenser or imum distance of twice the sparking
vapor-level thermostat keeps the vapor distance. This minimum distance must
level at least 36 inches (91 cm) or one- be displayed conspicuously on a sign
half the tank width, whichever is less, located near the equipment.
below the top of the vapor degreasing (5) You must ensure that the electro-
tank. static equipment has automatic con-
(2) When you use gas as a fuel to heat trols that immediately disconnect the
the tank liquid, you must prevent sol- power supply to the high-voltage trans-
vent vapors from entering the air-fuel
former and signal the operator if:
mixture. To do this, you must make
(i) Ventilation or the conveyors fail
the combustion chamber airtight (ex-
cept for the flue opening). to operate;
(3) The flue must be made of corro- (ii) A ground (or imminent ground)
sion-resistant material, and it must ex- occurs anywhere in the high-voltage
tend to the outside. You must install a system; or
draft diverter if mechanical exhaust is (iii) Goods being electrostatically
used on the flue. deteared come within twice the spark-
(4) You must not allow the tempera- ing distance of the electrodes or con-
ture of the heating element to cause a ductors of the equipment.
solvent or mixture to decompose or to (6) You must use fences, rails, or
generate an excessive amount of vapor. guards, made of conducting material
(e) What additional requirements and adequately grounded, to separate
apply to cyanide tanks? You must en- paint-detearing operations from stor-
sure that cyanide tanks have a dike or age areas and from personnel.
417
(7) To protect paint-detearing oper- which necessitate the use of personal

ations from fire, you must have in protective equipment (PPE). If such
place: hazards are present, or likely to be
(i) Automatic sprinklers; or present, the employer shall:
(ii) An automatic fire-extinguishing (i) Select, and have each affected em-
system conforming to the requirements ployee use, the types of PPE that will
of subpart L of this part. protect the affected employee from the
(8) To collect paint deposits, you hazards identified in the hazard assess-
must: ment;
(i) Provide drip plates and screens; (ii) Communicate selection decisions
and to each affected employee; and,
(ii) Clean these plates and screens in (iii) Select PPE that properly fits
a safe location. each affected employee.
NOTE: Non-mandatory Appendix B contains
Subpart IPersonal Protective an example of procedures that would comply
Equipment with the requirement for a hazard assess-
ment.
(2) The employer shall verify that the
AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8, Occupa-
tional Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
required workplace hazard assessment
U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labors has been performed through a written
Order No. 1271 (36 FR 8754), 876 (41 FR certification that identifies the work-
25059), 983 (48 FR 35736), 190 (55 FR 9033), or place evaluated; the person certifying
696 (62 FR 111), as applicable. that the evaluation has been per-
Sections 1910.132, 1910.134, and 1910.138 also formed; the date(s) of the hazard as-
issued under 29 CFR part 1911. sessment; and, which identifies the
Sections 1910.133, 1910.135, and 1910.136 also
issued under 29 CFR part 1911 and 5 U.S.C.
document as a certification of hazard
553. assessment.
(e) Defective and damaged equipment.
1910.132 General requirements. Defective or damaged personal protec-
(a) Application. Protective equipment, tive equipment shall not be used.
including personal protective equip- (f) Training. (1) The employer shall
ment for eyes, face, head, and extrem- provide training to each employee who
ities, protective clothing, respiratory is required by this section to use PPE.
devices, and protective shields and bar- Each such employee shall be trained to
riers, shall be provided, used, and know at least the following:
maintained in a sanitary and reliable (i) When PPE is necessary;
condition wherever it is necessary by (ii) What PPE is necessary;
reason of hazards of processes or envi- (iii) How to properly don, doff, ad-
ronment, chemical hazards, radio- just, and wear PPE;
logical hazards, or mechanical irri- (iv) The limitations of the PPE; and,
tants encountered in a manner capable (v) The proper care, maintenance,
of causing injury or impairment in the useful life and disposal of the PPE.
function of any part of the body (2) Each affected employee shall dem-
through absorption, inhalation or onstrate an understanding of the train-
physical contact. ing specified in paragraph (f)(1) of this
(b) Employee-owned equipment. Where section, and the ability to use PPE
employees provide their own protective properly, before being allowed to per-
equipment, the employer shall be re- form work requiring the use of PPE.
sponsible to assure its adequacy, in- (3) When the employer has reason to
cluding proper maintenance, and sani- believe that any affected employee who
tation of such equipment. has already been trained does not have
(c) Design. All personal protective the understanding and skill required by
equipment shall be of safe design and paragraph (f)(2) of this section, the em-
construction for the work to be per- ployer shall retrain each such em-
formed. ployee. Circumstances where retrain-
(d) Hazard assessment and equipment ing is required include, but are not lim-
selection. (1) The employer shall assess ited to, situations where:
the workplace to determine if hazards (i) Changes in the workplace render
are present, or are likely to be present, previous training obsolete; or
418
(ii) Changes in the types of PPE to be tic liquids, chemical gases or vapors, or
used render previous training obsolete; potentially injurious light radiation.
or (2) The employer shall ensure that
(iii) Inadequacies in an affected em- each affected employee uses eye pro-
ployees knowledge or use of assigned tection that provides side protection
PPE indicate that the employee has when there is a hazard from flying ob-
not retained the requisite under- jects. Detachable side protectors (e.g.
standing or skill. clip-on or slide-on side shields) meeting
(4) The employer shall verify that the pertinent requirements of this sec-
each affected employee has received
tion are acceptable.
and understood the required training
through a written certification that (3) The employer shall ensure that
contains the name of each employee each affected employee who wears pre-
trained, the date(s) of training, and scription lenses while engaged in oper-
that identifies the subject of the cer- ations that involve eye hazards wears
tification. eye protection that incorporates the
(g) Paragraphs (d) and (f) of this sec- prescription in its design, or wears eye
tion apply only to 1910.133, 1910.135, protection that can be worn over the
1919.136, and 1910.138. Parpagraphs (d) prescription lenses without disturbing
and (f) of this section do not apply to the proper position of the prescription
1910.134 and 1910.137. lenses or the protective lenses.
(4) Eye and face PPE shall be dis-
FR 16334, Apr. 6, 1994; 59 FR 33910, July 1, tinctly marked to facilitate identifica-
1994] tion of the manufacturer.
(5) The employer shall ensure that
1910.133 Eye and face protection. each affected employee uses equipment
(a) General requirements. (1) The em- with filter lenses that have a shade
ployer shall ensure that each affected number appropriate for the work being
employee uses appropriate eye or face performed for protection from inju-
protection when exposed to eye or face rious light radiation. The following is a
hazards from flying particles, molten listing of appropriate shade numbers
metal, liquid chemicals, acids or caus- for various operations.
419
Filter Lenses for Protection Against Radiant Energy
Electrode Size 1/32 Minimum* Pro-

Operations Arc Current
in. tective Shade
Shielded metal arc welding Less than 3 ............... Less than 60 ............. 7
3-5 ............................. 60-160 ....................... 8
5-8 ............................. 160-250 ..................... 10
More than 8 ............... 250-550 ..................... 11
Gas metal arc welding and less than 60 ............... 7

flux cored arc welding
60-160 ....................... 10
160-250 ..................... 10
250-500 ..................... 10
Gas Tungsten arc welding less than 50 ............... 8

50-150 ....................... 8
150-500 ..................... 10
Air carbon (Light) ........................ less than 500 ............. 10

Arc cutting (Heavy) ...................... 500-1000 ................... 11
Plasma arc welding less than 20 ............... 6

20-100 ....................... 8
100-400 ..................... 10
400-800 ..................... 11
Plasma arc cutting (light)** ....................... less than 300 ............. 8

(medium)** ................ 300-400 ..................... 9
(heavy)** .................... 400-800 ..................... 10
Torch brazing .................................... 3

Torch soldering .................................... 2
Carbon arc welding .................................... 14
Filter Lenses for Protection Against Radiant Energy
Plate thickness Minimum* Pro-

Operations Plate thicknessmm
inches tective Shade
Gas Welding:
Light Under 1/8 .................. Under 3.2 .................. 4
Medium 1/8 to 1/2 ................... 3.2 to 12.7 ................. 5
Heavy Over 1/2 .................... Over 12.7 .................. 6
Oxygen cutting:
Light Under 1 ..................... Under 25 ................... 3
Medium 1 to 6 ......................... 25 to 150 ................... 4
Heavy Over 6 ....................... Over 150 ................... 5
* As a rule of thumb, start with a shade that is too dark to see the weld zone. Then go to a
lighter shade which gives sufficient view of the weld zone without going below the minimum. In
oxyfuel gas welding or cutting where the torch produces a high yellow light, it is desirable to use
a filter lens that absorbs the yellow or sodium line in the visible light of the (spectrum) operation.
** These values apply where the actual arc is clearly seen. Experience has shown that lighter
filters may be used when the arc is hidden by the workpiece.
420
(b) Criteria for protective eye and face respiratory protection standard in this
devices. (1) Protective eye and face de- section.
vices purchased after July 5, 1994 shall Air-purifying respirator means a res-
comply with ANSI Z87.11989, Amer- pirator with an air-purifying filter,
ican National Standard Practice for cartridge, or canister that removes spe-
Occupational and Educational Eye and cific air contaminants by passing am-
Face Protection, which is incor- bient air through the air-purifying ele-
porated by reference as specified in ment.
1910.6, or shall be demonstrated by the Assigned protection factor (APF) [Re-
employer to be equally effective. served]
(2) Eye and face protective devices Atmosphere-supplying respirator means
purchased before July 5, 1994 shall com- a respirator that supplies the res-
ply with the ANSI USA standard for pirator user with breathing air from a
Occupational and Educational Eye and source independent of the ambient at-
Face Protection, Z87.11968, which is mosphere, and includes supplied-air
incorporated by reference as specified respirators (SARs) and self-contained
in 1910.6, or shall be demonstrated by breathing apparatus (SCBA) units.
the employer to be equally effective. Canister or cartridge means a con-
[59 FR 16360, Apr. 6, 1994; 59 FR 33911, July 1, tainer with a filter, sorbent, or cata-
1994, as amended at 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; lyst, or combination of these items,
61 FR 19548, May 2, 1996] which removes specific contaminants
from the air passed through the con-
1910.134 Respiratory protection. tainer.
This section applies to General In- Demand respirator means an atmos-
dustry (part 1910), Shipyards (part phere-supplying respirator that admits
1915), Marine Terminals (part 1917), breathing air to the facepiece only
Longshoring (part 1918), and Construc- when a negative pressure is created in-
tion (part 1926). side the facepiece by inhalation.
(a) Permissible practice. (1) In the con- Emergency situation means any occur-
trol of those occupational diseases rence such as, but not limited to,
caused by breathing air contaminated equipment failure, rupture of con-
with harmful dusts, fogs, fumes, mists, tainers, or failure of control equipment
gases, smokes, sprays, or vapors, the that may or does result in an uncon-
primary objective shall be to prevent trolled significant release of an air-
atmospheric contamination. This shall borne contaminant.
be accomplished as far as feasible by Employee exposure means exposure to
accepted engineering control measures a concentration of an airborne con-
(for example, enclosure or confinement taminant that would occur if the em-
of the operation, general and local ven- ployee were not using respiratory pro-
tilation, and substitution of less toxic tection.
materials). When effective engineering End-of-service-life indicator (ESLI)
controls are not feasible, or while they means a system that warns the res-
are being instituted, appropriate respirator user of the approach of the end
pirators shall be used pursuant to this of adequate respiratory protection, for
section. example, that the sorbent is approach-
(2) Respirators shall be provided by ing saturation or is no longer effective.
the employer when such equipment is Escape-only respirator means a res-
necessary to protect the health of the pirator intended to be used only for
employee. The employer shall provide emergency exit.
the respirators which are applicable Filter or air purifying element means a
and suitable for the purpose intended. component used in respirators to re-
The employer shall be responsible for move solid or liquid aerosols from the
the establishment and maintenance of inspired air.
a respiratory protection program Filtering facepiece (dust mask) means
which shall include the requirements a negative pressure particulate res-
outlined in paragraph (c) of this sec- pirator with a filter as an integral part
tion. of the facepiece or with the entire face-
(b) Definitions. The following defini- piece composed of the filtering me-
tions are important terms used in the dium.
421
Fit factor means a quantitative esti- independently provide, or be delegated

mate of the fit of a particular res- the responsibility to provide, some or
pirator to a specific individual, and all of the health care services required
typically estimates the ratio of the by paragraph (e) of this section.
concentration of a substance in ambi- Positive pressure respirator means a
ent air to its concentration inside the respirator in which the pressure inside
respirator when worn. the respiratory inlet covering exceeds
Fit test means the use of a protocol to the ambient air pressure outside the
qualitatively or quantitatively evalu- respirator.
ate the fit of a respirator on an indi-
Powered air-purifying respirator
vidual. (See also Qualitative fit test
(PAPR) means an air-purifying res-
QLFT and Quantitative fit test QNFT.)
Helmet means a rigid respiratory pirator that uses a blower to force the
inlet covering that also provides head ambient air through air-purifying ele-
protection against impact and penetra- ments to the inlet covering.
tion. Pressure demand respirator means a
High efficiency particulate air (HEPA) positive pressure atmosphere-supplying
filter means a filter that is at least respirator that admits breathing air to
99.97% efficient in removing the facepiece when the positive pres-
monodisperse particles of 0.3 microm- sure is reduced inside the facepiece by
eters in diameter. The equivalent inhalation.
NIOSH 42 CFR 84 particulate filters are Qualitative fit test (QLFT) means a
the N100, R100, and P100 filters. pass/fail fit test to assess the adequacy
Hood means a respiratory inlet cov- of respirator fit that relies on the indi-
ering that completely covers the head viduals response to the test agent.
and neck and may also cover portions Quantitative fit test (QNFT) means an
of the shoulders and torso. assessment of the adequacy of res-
Immediately dangerous to life or health pirator fit by numerically measuring
(IDLH) means an atmosphere that the amount of leakage into the res-
poses an immediate threat to life,
pirator.
would cause irreversible adverse health
effects, or would impair an individuals Respiratory inlet covering means that
ability to escape from a dangerous at- portion of a respirator that forms the
mosphere. protective barrier between the users
Interior structural firefighting means respiratory tract and an air-purifying
the physical activity of fire suppres- device or breathing air source, or both.
sion, rescue or both, inside of buildings It may be a facepiece, helmet, hood,
or enclosed structures which are in- suit, or a mouthpiece respirator with
volved in a fire situation beyond the nose clamp.
incipient stage. (See 29 CFR 1910.155) Self-contained breathing apparatus
Loose-fitting facepiece means a res- (SCBA) means an atmosphere-sup-
piratory inlet covering that is designed plying respirator for which the breath-
to form a partial seal with the face. ing air source is designed to be carried
Maximum use concentration (MUC) by the user.
[Reserved]. Service life means the period of time
Negative pressure respirator (tight fit- that a respirator, filter or sorbent, or
ting) means a respirator in which the other respiratory equipment provides
air pressure inside the facepiece is neg- adequate protection to the wearer.
ative during inhalation with respect to Supplied-air respirator (SAR) or airline
the ambient air pressure outside the
respirator means an atmosphere-sup-
respirator.
plying respirator for which the source
Oxygen deficient atmosphere means an
atmosphere with an oxygen content of breathing air is not designed to be
below 19.5% by volume. carried by the user.
Physician or other licensed health care This section means this respiratory
professional (PLHCP) means an indi- protection standard.
vidual whose legally permitted scope of Tight-fitting facepiece means a res-
practice (i.e., license, registration, or piratory inlet covering that forms a
certification) allows him or her to complete seal with the face.
422
User seal check means an action con- (vii) Training of employees in the
ducted by the respirator user to deter- respiratory hazards to which they are
mine if the respirator is properly seat- potentially exposed during routine and
ed to the face. emergency situations;
(c) Respiratory protection program. (viii) Training of employees in the
This paragraph requires the employer proper use of respirators, including
to develop and implement a written putting on and removing them, any
respiratory protection program with limitations on their use, and their
required worksite-specific procedures maintenance; and
and elements for required respirator (ix) Procedures for regularly evalu-
use. The program must be administered ating the effectiveness of the program.
by a suitably trained program adminis- (2) Where respirator use is not re-
trator. In addition, certain program quired:
elements may be required for vol- (i) An employer may provide res-
untary use to prevent potential haz- pirators at the request of employees or
ards associated with the use of the res- permit employees to use their own res-
pirator. The Small Entity Compliance pirators, if the employer determines
Guide contains criteria for the selec- that such respirator use will not in
tion of a program administrator and a itself create a hazard. If the employer
sample program that meets the re- determines that any voluntary res-
quirements of this paragraph. Copies of pirator use is permissible, the em-
the Small Entity Compliance Guide ployer shall provide the respirator
will be available on or about April 8, users with the information contained
1998 from the Occupational Safety and in Appendix D to this section (Infor-
Health Administrations Office of Pub- mation for Employees Using Res-
lications, Room N 3101, 200 Constitu- pirators When Not Required Under the
tion Avenue, NW, Washington, DC, Standard); and
20210 (2022194667). (ii) In addition, the employer must
(1) In any workplace where res- establish and implement those ele-
pirators are necessary to protect the ments of a written respiratory protec-
health of the employee or whenever tion program necessary to ensure that
respirators are required by the em- any employee using a respirator volun-
ployer, the employer shall establish tarily is medically able to use that res-
and implement a written respiratory pirator, and that the respirator is
protection program with worksite-spe- cleaned, stored, and maintained so that
cific procedures. The program shall be its use does not present a health hazard
updated as necessary to reflect those to the user. Exception: Employers are
changes in workplace conditions that not required to include in a written
affect respirator use. The employer respiratory protection program those
shall include in the program the fol- employees whose only use of res-
lowing provisions of this section, as ap- pirators involves the voluntary use of
plicable: filtering facepieces (dust masks).
(i) Procedures for selecting res- (3) The employer shall designate a
pirators for use in the workplace; program administrator who is qualified
(ii) Medical evaluations of employees by appropriate training or experience
required to use respirators; that is commensurate with the com-
(iii) Fit testing procedures for tight- plexity of the program to administer or
fitting respirators; oversee the respiratory protection pro-
(iv) Procedures for proper use of res- gram and conduct the required evalua-
pirators in routine and reasonably fore- tions of program effectiveness.
seeable emergency situations; (4) The employer shall provide res-
(v) Procedures and schedules for pirators, training, and medical evalua-
cleaning, disinfecting, storing, inspect- tions at no cost to the employee.
ing, repairing, discarding, and other- (d) Selection of respirators. This para-
wise maintaining respirators; graph requires the employer to evalu-
(vi) Procedures to ensure adequate ate respiratory hazard(s) in the work-
air quality, quantity, and flow of place, identify relevant workplace and
breathing air for atmosphere-supplying user factors, and base respirator selec-
respirators; tion on these factors. The paragraph
423
also specifies appropriately protective protect the health of the employee and
respirators for use in IDLH ensure compliance with all other OSHA
atmospheres, and limits the selection statutory and regulatory requirements,
and use of air-purifying respirators. under routine and reasonably foresee-
(1) General requirements. (i) The em- able emergency situations.
ployer shall select and provide an ap- (A) Assigned Protection Factors (APFs)
propriate respirator based on the res- [Reserved]
piratory hazard(s) to which the worker (B) Maximum Use Concentration (MUC)
is exposed and workplace and user fac- [Reserved]
tors that affect respirator performance (ii) The respirator selected shall be
and reliability. appropriate for the chemical state and
(ii) The employer shall select a physical form of the contaminant.
NIOSH-certified respirator. The res- (iii) For protection against gases and
pirator shall be used in compliance vapors, the employer shall provide:
with the conditions of its certification. (A) An atmosphere-supplying res-
(iii) The employer shall identify and pirator, or
evaluate the respiratory hazard(s) in (B) An air-purifying respirator, pro-
the workplace; this evaluation shall in- vided that:
clude a reasonable estimate of em- (1) The respirator is equipped with an
ployee exposures to respiratory haz- end-of-service-life indicator (ESLI) cer-
ard(s) and an identification of the con- tified by NIOSH for the contaminant;
taminants chemical state and physical or
form. Where the employer cannot iden- (2) If there is no ESLI appropriate for
tify or reasonably estimate the em- conditions in the employers work-
ployee exposure, the employer shall place, the employer implements a
consider the atmosphere to be IDLH. change schedule for canisters and car-
(iv) The employer shall select res- tridges that is based on objective infor-
pirators from a sufficient number of mation or data that will ensure that
respirator models and sizes so that the canisters and cartridges are changed
respirator is acceptable to, and cor- before the end of their service life. The
rectly fits, the user. employer shall describe in the res-
(2) Respirators for IDLH atmospheres. pirator program the information and
(i) The employer shall provide the fol- data relied upon and the basis for the
lowing respirators for employee use in canister and cartridge change schedule
IDLH atmospheres: and the basis for reliance on the data.
(A) A full facepiece pressure demand (iv) For protection against particu-
SCBA certified by NIOSH for a min- lates, the employer shall provide:
imum service life of thirty minutes, or (A) An atmosphere-supplying res-
(B) A combination full facepiece pres- pirator; or
sure demand supplied-air respirator (B) An air-purifying respirator
(SAR) with auxiliary self-contained air equipped with a filter certified by
supply. NIOSH under 30 CFR part 11 as a high
(ii) Respirators provided only for es- efficiency particulate air (HEPA) fil-
cape from IDLH atmospheres shall be ter, or an air-purifying respirator
NIOSH-certified for escape from the at- equipped with a filter certified for par-
mosphere in which they will be used. ticulates by NIOSH under 42 CFR part
(iii) All oxygen-deficient 84; or
(C) For contaminants consisting pri-
atmospheres shall be considered IDLH.
marily of particles with mass median
Exception: If the employer dem-
aerodynamic diameters (MMAD) of at
onstrates that, under all foreseeable
least 2 micrometers, an air-purifying
conditions, the oxygen concentration
respirator equipped with any filter cer-
can be maintained within the ranges
tified for particulates by NIOSH.
specified in Table II of this section
(i.e., for the altitudes set out in the TABLE IASSIGNED PROTECTION FACTORS
table), then any atmosphere-supplying [RESERVED]
respirator may be used.
(3) Respirators for atmospheres that are
not IDLH. (i) The employer shall pro-
vide a respirator that is adequate to
424
TABLE IASSIGNED PROTECTION FACTORS A of Appendix C or whose initial med-

[RESERVED]Continued ical examination demonstrates the
need for a follow-up medical examina-
tion.
TABLE II (ii) The follow-up medical examina-
Oxygen defi- tion shall include any medical tests,
cient consultations, or diagnostic procedures
Atmospheres
(% 02) for that the PLHCP deems necessary to
Altitude (ft.) which the make a final determination.
employer
may rely on (4) Administration of the medical ques-
atmosphere- tionnaire and examinations. (i) The med-
supplying
respirators ical questionnaire and examinations
shall be administered confidentially
Less than 3,001 ................................................ 16.019.5 during the employees normal working
3,0014,000 ...................................................... 16.419.5
4,0015,000 ...................................................... 17.119.5 hours or at a time and place conven-
5,0016,000 ...................................................... 17.819.5 ient to the employee. The medical
6,0017,000 ...................................................... 18.519.5 questionnaire shall be administered in
7,0018,0001 .................................................... 19.319.5. a manner that ensures that the em-
1 Above 8,000 feet the exception does not apply. Oxygen-
ployee understands its content.
enriched breathing air must be supplied above 14,000 feet.
(ii) The employer shall provide the
(e) Medical evaluation. Using a res- employee with an opportunity to dis-
pirator may place a physiological bur- cuss the questionnaire and examina-
den on employees that varies with the tion results with the PLHCP.
type of respirator worn, the job and (5) Supplemental information for the
workplace conditions in which the res- PLHCP. (i) The following information
pirator is used, and the medical status must be provided to the PLHCP before
of the employee. Accordingly, this the PLHCP makes a recommendation
paragraph specifies the minimum re- concerning an employees ability to use
quirements for medical evaluation that a respirator:
employers must implement to deter- (A) The type and weight of the res-
mine the employees ability to use a pirator to be used by the employee;
respirator. (B) The duration and frequency of
(1) General. The employer shall pro- respirator use (including use for rescue
vide a medical evaluation to determine and escape);
the employees ability to use a res- (C) The expected physical work ef-
pirator, before the employee is fit test- fort;
ed or required to use the respirator in (D) Additional protective clothing
the workplace. The employer may dis- and equipment to be worn; and
continue an employees medical eval- (E) Temperature and humidity ex-
uations when the employee is no longer tremes that may be encountered.
required to use a respirator. (ii) Any supplemental information
(2) Medical evaluation procedures. (i) provided previously to the PLHCP re-
The employer shall identify a physi- garding an employee need not be pro-
cian or other licensed health care provided for a subsequent medical evalua-
fessional (PLHCP) to perform medical tion if the information and the PLHCP
evaluations using a medical question- remain the same.
naire or an initial medical examination (iii) The employer shall provide the
that obtains the same information as PLHCP with a copy of the written res-
the medical questionnaire. piratory protection program and a
(ii) The medical evaluation shall ob- copy of this section.
tain the information requested by the NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (e)(5)(iii): When the
questionnaire in Sections 1 and 2, Part employer replaces a PLHCP, the employer
A of Appendix C of this section. must ensure that the new PLHCP obtains
this information, either by providing the
(3) Follow-up medical examination. (i)
documents directly to the PLHCP or having
The employer shall ensure that a fol- the documents transferred from the former
low-up medical examination is pro- PLHCP to the new PLHCP. However, OSHA
vided for an employee who gives a posi- does not expect employers to have employees
tive response to any question among medically reevaluated solely because a new
questions 1 through 8 in Section 2, Part PLHCP has been selected.
425
(6) Medical determination. In deter- negative or positive pressure tight-fit-

mining the employees ability to use a ting facepiece, the employee must be
respirator, the employer shall: fit tested with the same make, model,
(i) Obtain a written recommendation style, and size of respirator that will be
regarding the employees ability to use used. This paragraph specifies the
the respirator from the PLHCP. The kinds of fit tests allowed, the proce-
recommendation shall provide only the dures for conducting them, and how
following information: the results of the fit tests must be
(A) Any limitations on respirator use used.
related to the medical condition of the (1) The employer shall ensure that
employee, or relating to the workplace employees using a tight-fitting face-
conditions in which the respirator will piece respirator pass an appropriate
be used, including whether or not the qualitative fit test (QLFT) or quan-
employee is medically able to use the titative fit test (QNFT) as stated in
respirator; this paragraph.
(B) The need, if any, for follow-up (2) The employer shall ensure that an
medical evaluations; and employee using a tight-fitting face-
(C) A statement that the PLHCP has piece respirator is fit tested prior to
provided the employee with a copy of initial use of the respirator, whenever
the PLHCPs written recommendation. a different respirator facepiece (size,
(ii) If the respirator is a negative style, model or make) is used, and at
pressure respirator and the PLHCP least annually thereafter.
finds a medical condition that may
(3) The employer shall conduct an ad-
place the employees health at in-
ditional fit test whenever the employee
creased risk if the respirator is used,
reports, or the employer, PLHCP, su-
the employer shall provide a PAPR if
pervisor, or program administrator
the PLHCPs medical evaluation finds
makes visual observations of, changes
that the employee can use such a res-
in the employees physical condition
pirator; if a subsequent medical eval-
that could affect respirator fit. Such
uation finds that the employee is medi-
conditions include, but are not limited
cally able to use a negative pressure
respirator, then the employer is no to, facial scarring, dental changes, cos-
longer required to provide a PAPR. metic surgery, or an obvious change in
(7) Additional medical evaluations. At a body weight.
minimum, the employer shall provide (4) If after passing a QLFT or QNFT,
additional medical evaluations that the employee subsequently notifies the
comply with the requirements of this employer, program administrator, su-
section if: pervisor, or PLHCP that the fit of the
(i) An employee reports medical signs respirator is unacceptable, the em-
or symptoms that are related to ability ployee shall be given a reasonable op-
to use a respirator; portunity to select a different res-
(ii) A PLHCP, supervisor, or the respirator facepiece and to be retested.
pirator program administrator informs (5) The fit test shall be administered
the employer that an employee needs using an OSHA-accepted QLFT or
to be reevaluated; QNFT protocol. The OSHA-accepted
(iii) Information from the respiratory QLFT and QNFT protocols and proce-
protection program, including observa- dures are contained in Appendix A of
tions made during fit testing and pro- this section.
gram evaluation, indicates a need for (6) QLFT may only be used to fit test
employee reevaluation; or negative pressure air-purifying res-
(iv) A change occurs in workplace pirators that must achieve a fit factor
conditions (e.g., physical work effort, of 100 or less.
protective clothing, temperature) that (7) If the fit factor, as determined
may result in a substantial increase in through an OSHA-accepted QNFT pro-
the physiological burden placed on an tocol, is equal to or greater than 100 for
employee. tight-fitting half facepieces, or equal
(f) Fit testing. This paragraph requires to or greater than 500 for tight-fitting
that, before an employee may be re- full facepieces, the QNFT has been
quired to use any respirator with a passed with that respirator.
426
(8) Fit testing of tight-fitting atmos- the face or that interferes with valve
phere-supplying respirators and tight- function; or
fitting powered air-purifying res- (B) Any condition that interferes
pirators shall be accomplished by per- with the face-to-facepiece seal or valve
forming quantitative or qualitative fit function.
testing in the negative pressure mode, (ii) If an employee wears corrective
regardless of the mode of operation glasses or goggles or other personal
(negative or positive pressure) that is protective equipment, the employer
used for respiratory protection. shall ensure that such equipment is
(i) Qualitative fit testing of these res- worn in a manner that does not inter-
pirators shall be accomplished by tem- fere with the seal of the facepiece to
porarily converting the respirator the face of the user.
users actual facepiece into a negative (iii) For all tight-fitting respirators,
pressure respirator with appropriate the employer shall ensure that employ-
filters, or by using an identical nega- ees perform a user seal check each
tive pressure air-purifying respirator time they put on the respirator using
facepiece with the same sealing sur- the procedures in Appendix B1 or pro-
faces as a surrogate for the atmos- cedures recommended by the respirator
phere-supplying or powered air-puri- manufacturer that the employer dem-
fying respirator facepiece. onstrates are as effective as those in
(ii) Quantitative fit testing of these Appendix B1 of this section.
respirators shall be accomplished by (2) Continuing respirator effectiveness.
modifying the facepiece to allow sam- (i) Appropriate surveillance shall be
pling inside the facepiece in the maintained of work area conditions
breathing zone of the user, midway be- and degree of employee exposure or
tween the nose and mouth. This re- stress. When there is a change in work
quirement shall be accomplished by in- area conditions or degree of employee
stalling a permanent sampling probe exposure or stress that may affect res-
onto a surrogate facepiece, or by using pirator effectiveness, the employer
a sampling adapter designed to tempo- shall reevaluate the continued effec-
rarily provide a means of sampling air tiveness of the respirator.
from inside the facepiece. (ii) The employer shall ensure that
(iii) Any modifications to the res- employees leave the respirator use
pirator facepiece for fit testing shall be area:
completely removed, and the facepiece (A) To wash their faces and res-
restored to NIOSH-approved configura- pirator facepieces as necessary to pre-
tion, before that facepiece can be used vent eye or skin irritation associated
in the workplace. with respirator use; or
(g) Use of respirators. This paragraph (B) If they detect vapor or gas break-
requires employers to establish and im- through, changes in breathing resist-
plement procedures for the proper use ance, or leakage of the facepiece; or
of respirators. These requirements in- (C) To replace the respirator or the
clude prohibiting conditions that may filter, cartridge, or canister elements.
result in facepiece seal leakage, pre- (iii) If the employee detects vapor or
venting employees from removing res- gas breakthrough, changes in breath-
pirators in hazardous environments, ing resistance, or leakage of the face-
taking actions to ensure continued ef- piece, the employer must replace or re-
fective respirator operation throughout pair the respirator before allowing the
the work shift, and establishing proce- employee to return to the work area.
dures for the use of respirators in IDLH (3) Procedures for IDLH atmospheres.
atmospheres or in interior structural For all IDLH atmospheres, the em-
firefighting situations. ployer shall ensure that:
(1) Facepiece seal protection. (i) The (i) One employee or, when needed,
employer shall not permit respirators more than one employee is located out-
with tight-fitting facepieces to be worn side the IDLH atmosphere;
by employees who have: (ii) Visual, voice, or signal line com-
(A) Facial hair that comes between munication is maintained between the
the sealing surface of the facepiece and employee(s) in the IDLH atmosphere
427
and the employee(s) located outside employer to provide for the cleaning
the IDLH atmosphere; and disinfecting, storage, inspection,
(iii) The employee(s) located outside and repair of respirators used by em-
the IDLH atmosphere are trained and ployees.
equipped to provide effective emer- (1) Cleaning and disinfecting. The em-
gency rescue; ployer shall provide each respirator
(iv) The employer or designee is noti- user with a respirator that is clean,
fied before the employee(s) located out- sanitary, and in good working order.
side the IDLH atmosphere enter the The employer shall ensure that res-
IDLH atmosphere to provide emer- pirators are cleaned and disinfected
gency rescue; using the procedures in Appendix B2
(v) The employer or designee author-
of this section, or procedures rec-
ized to do so by the employer, once no-
ommended by the respirator manufac-
tified, provides necessary assistance
turer, provided that such procedures
appropriate to the situation;
(vi) Employee(s) located outside the are of equivalent effectiveness. The
IDLH atmospheres are equipped with: respirators shall be cleaned and dis-
(A) Pressure demand or other posi- infected at the following intervals:
tive pressure SCBAs, or a pressure de- (i) Respirators issued for the exclu-
mand or other positive pressure sup- sive use of an employee shall be
plied-air respirator with auxiliary cleaned and disinfected as often as nec-
SCBA; and either essary to be maintained in a sanitary
(B) Appropriate retrieval equipment condition;
for removing the employee(s) who (ii) Respirators issued to more than
enter(s) these hazardous atmospheres one employee shall be cleaned and dis-
where retrieval equipment would con- infected before being worn by different
tribute to the rescue of the employee(s) individuals;
and would not increase the overall risk (iii) Respirators maintained for
resulting from entry; or emergency use shall be cleaned and dis-
(C) Equivalent means for rescue infected after each use; and
where retrieval equipment is not re- (iv) Respirators used in fit testing
quired under paragraph (g)(3)(vi)(B). and training shall be cleaned and dis-
(4) Procedures for interior structural
infected after each use.
firefighting. In addition to the require-
ments set forth under paragraph (g)(3), (2) Storage. The employer shall ensure
in interior structural fires, the em- that respirators are stored as follows:
ployer shall ensure that: (i) All respirators shall be stored to
(i) At least two employees enter the protect them from damage, contamina-
IDLH atmosphere and remain in visual tion, dust, sunlight, extreme tempera-
or voice contact with one another at tures, excessive moisture, and dam-
all times; aging chemicals, and they shall be
(ii) At least two employees are lo- packed or stored to prevent deforma-
cated outside the IDLH atmosphere; tion of the facepiece and exhalation
and valve.
(iii) All employees engaged in inte- (ii) In addition to the requirements of
rior structural firefighting use SCBAs. paragraph (h)(2)(i) of this section,
NOTE 1 TO PARAGRAPH (g): One of the two emergency respirators shall be:
individuals located outside the IDLH atmos- (A) Kept accessible to the work area;
phere may be assigned to an additional role,
such as incident commander in charge of the
(B) Stored in compartments or in
emergency or safety officer, so long as this covers that are clearly marked as con-
individual is able to perform assistance or taining emergency respirators; and
rescue activities without jeopardizing the (C) Stored in accordance with any ap-
safety or health of any firefighter working at plicable manufacturer instructions.
the incident. (3) Inspection. (i) The employer shall
NOTE 2 TO PARAGRAPH (g): Nothing in this
section is meant to preclude firefighters ensure that respirators are inspected as
from performing emergency rescue activities follows:
before an entire team has assembled. (A) All respirators used in routine
(h) Maintenance and care of res- situations shall be inspected before
pirators. This paragraph requires the each use and during cleaning;
428
(B) All respirators maintained for use (i) Repairs or adjustments to res-
in emergency situations shall be in- pirators are to be made only by persons
spected at least monthly and in accord- appropriately trained to perform such
ance with the manufacturers rec- operations and shall use only the res-
ommendations, and shall be checked pirator manufacturers NIOSH-ap-
for proper function before and after proved parts designed for the res-
each use; and pirator;
(C) Emergency escape-only res- (ii) Repairs shall be made according
pirators shall be inspected before being to the manufacturers recommenda-
carried into the workplace for use. tions and specifications for the type
(ii) The employer shall ensure that and extent of repairs to be performed;
respirator inspections include the fol- and
lowing: (iii) Reducing and admission valves,
(A) A check of respirator function, regulators, and alarms shall be ad-
tightness of connections, and the con- justed or repaired only by the manufac-
dition of the various parts including, turer or a technician trained by the
but not limited to, the facepiece, head manufacturer.
straps, valves, connecting tube, and (i) Breathing air quality and use. This
cartridges, canisters or filters; and paragraph requires the employer to
provide employees using atmosphere-
(B) A check of elastomeric parts for
supplying respirators (supplied-air and
pliability and signs of deterioration.
SCBA) with breathing gases of high pu-
(iii) In addition to the requirements rity.
of paragraphs (h)(3)(i) and (ii) of this (1) The employer shall ensure that
section, self-contained breathing appa- compressed air, compressed oxygen,
ratus shall be inspected monthly. Air liquid air, and liquid oxygen used for
and oxygen cylinders shall be main- respiration accords with the following
tained in a fully charged state and specifications:
shall be recharged when the pressure (i) Compressed and liquid oxygen
falls to 90% of the manufacturers rec- shall meet the United States Pharma-
ommended pressure level. The em- copoeia requirements for medical or
ployer shall determine that the regu- breathing oxygen; and
lator and warning devices function (ii) Compressed breathing air shall
properly. meet at least the requirements for
(iv) For respirators maintained for Grade D breathing air described in
emergency use, the employer shall: ANSI/Compressed Gas Association
(A) Certify the respirator by docu- Commodity Specification for Air, G
menting the date the inspection was 7.11989, to include:
performed, the name (or signature) of (A) Oxygen content (v/v) of 19.5
the person who made the inspection, 23.5%;
the findings, required remedial action, (B) Hydrocarbon (condensed) content
and a serial number or other means of of 5 milligrams per cubic meter of air
identifying the inspected respirator; or less;
and (C) Carbon monoxide (CO) content of
(B) Provide this information on a tag 10 ppm or less;
or label that is attached to the storage (D) Carbon dioxide content of 1,000
compartment for the respirator, is kept ppm or less; and
with the respirator, or is included in (E) Lack of noticeable odor.
inspection reports stored as paper or (2) The employer shall ensure that
electronic files. This information shall compressed oxygen is not used in at-
be maintained until replaced following mosphere-supplying respirators that
a subsequent certification. have previously used compressed air.
(4) Repairs. The employer shall ensure (3) The employer shall ensure that
that respirators that fail an inspection oxygen concentrations greater than
or are otherwise found to be defective 23.5% are used only in equipment de-
are removed from service, and are dis- signed for oxygen service or distribu-
carded or repaired or adjusted in action.
cordance with the following proce- (4) The employer shall ensure that
dures: cylinders used to supply breathing air
429
to respirators meet the following re- with the NIOSH respirator certifi-
quirements: cation standard, 42 CFR part 84.
(i) Cylinders are tested and main- (j) Identification of filters, cartridges,
tained as prescribed in the Shipping and canisters. The employer shall en-
Container Specification Regulations of sure that all filters, cartridges and can-
the Department of Transportation (49 isters used in the workplace are labeled
CFR part 173 and part 178); and color coded with the NIOSH ap-
(ii) Cylinders of purchased breathing proval label and that the label is not
air have a certificate of analysis from removed and remains legible.
the supplier that the breathing air (k) Training and information. This
meets the requirements for Grade D paragraph requires the employer to
breathing air; and provide effective training to employees
(iii) The moisture content in the cyl- who are required to use respirators.
inder does not exceed a dew point of The training must be comprehensive,
50 F (45.6 C) at 1 atmosphere pres- understandable, and recur annually,
sure. and more often if necessary. This para-
(5) The employer shall ensure that graph also requires the employer to
compressors used to supply breathing provide the basic information on res-
air to respirators are constructed and pirators in Appendix D of this section
situated so as to: to employees who wear respirators
(i) Prevent entry of contaminated air when not required by this section or by
into the air-supply system; the employer to do so.
(ii) Minimize moisture content so (1) The employer shall ensure that
that the dew point at 1 atmosphere each employee can demonstrate knowl-
pressure is 10 degrees F (5.56 C) below edge of at least the following:
the ambient temperature; (i) Why the respirator is necessary
(iii) Have suitable in-line air-puri- and how improper fit, usage, or mainte-
fying sorbent beds and filters to fur- nance can compromise the protective
ther ensure breathing air quality. Sor- effect of the respirator;
bent beds and filters shall be main- (ii) What the limitations and capa-
tained and replaced or refurbished peri- bilities of the respirator are;
odically following the manufacturers (iii) How to use the respirator effec-
instructions. tively in emergency situations, includ-
(iv) Have a tag containing the most ing situations in which the respirator
recent change date and the signature of malfunctions;
the person authorized by the employer (iv) How to inspect, put on and re-
to perform the change. The tag shall be move, use, and check the seals of the
maintained at the compressor. respirator;
(6) For compressors that are not oil- (v) What the procedures are for main-
lubricated, the employer shall ensure tenance and storage of the respirator;
that carbon monoxide levels in the (vi) How to recognize medical signs
breathing air do not exceed 10 ppm. and symptoms that may limit or pre-
(7) For oil-lubricated compressors, vent the effective use of respirators;
the employer shall use a high-tempera- and
ture or carbon monoxide alarm, or (vii) The general requirements of this
both, to monitor carbon monoxide lev- section.
els. If only high-temperature alarms (2) The training shall be conducted in
are used, the air supply shall be mon- a manner that is understandable to the
itored at intervals sufficient to prevent employee.
carbon monoxide in the breathing air (3) The employer shall provide the
from exceeding 10 ppm. training prior to requiring the em-
(8) The employer shall ensure that ployee to use a respirator in the work-
breathing air couplings are incompat- place.
ible with outlets for nonrespirable (4) An employer who is able to dem-
worksite air or other gas systems. No onstrate that a new employee has re-
asphyxiating substance shall be intro- ceived training within the last 12
duced into breathing air lines. months that addresses the elements
(9) The employer shall use breathing specified in paragraph (k)(1)(i) through
gas containers marked in accordance (vii) is not required to repeat such
430
training provided that, as required by (iii) Proper respirator use under the
paragraph (k)(1), the employee can workplace conditions the employee en-
demonstrate knowledge of those ele- counters; and
ment(s). Previous training not repeated (iv) Proper respirator maintenance.
initially by the employer must be pro- (m) Recordkeeping. This section re-
vided no later than 12 months from the quires the employer to establish and
date of the previous training. retain written information regarding
(5) Retraining shall be administered medical evaluations, fit testing, and
annually, and when the following situ- the respirator program. This informa-
ations occur: tion will facilitate employee involve-
(i) Changes in the workplace or the ment in the respirator program, assist
type of respirator render previous the employer in auditing the adequacy
training obsolete; of the program, and provide a record
(ii) Inadequacies in the employees for compliance determinations by
OSHA.
knowledge or use of the respirator indi-
cate that the employee has not re- (1) Medical evaluation. Records of
tained the requisite understanding or medical evaluations required by this
skill; or section must be retained and made
available in accordance with 29 CFR
(iii) Any other situation arises in
1910.1020.
which retraining appears necessary to
(2) Fit testing. (i) The employer shall
ensure safe respirator use.
establish a record of the qualitative
(6) The basic advisory information on and quantitative fit tests administered
respirators, as presented in Appendix D to an employee including:
of this section, shall be provided by the
(A) The name or identification of the
employer in any written or oral for- employee tested;
mat, to employees who wear res-
(B) Type of fit test performed;
pirators when such use is not required
(C) Specific make, model, style, and
by this section or by the employer.
size of respirator tested;
(l) Program evaluation. This section
(D) Date of test; and
requires the employer to conduct eval-
(E) The pass/fail results for QLFTs or
uations of the workplace to ensure that
the fit factor and strip chart recording
the written respiratory protection pro-
or other recording of the test results
gram is being properly implemented,
for QNFTs.
and to consult employees to ensure
(ii) Fit test records shall be retained
that they are using the respirators
for respirator users until the next fit
properly.
test is administered.
(1) The employer shall conduct eval- (3) A written copy of the current res-
uations of the workplace as necessary pirator program shall be retained by
to ensure that the provisions of the the employer.
current written program are being ef-
(4) Written materials required to be
fectively implemented and that it con- retained under this paragraph shall be
tinues to be effective. made available upon request to af-
(2) The employer shall regularly con- fected employees and to the Assistant
sult employees required to use res- Secretary or designee for examination
pirators to assess the employees views and copying.
on program effectiveness and to iden- (n) Dates(1) Effective date. This sec-
tify any problems. Any problems that tion is effective April 8, 1998. The obli-
are identified during this assessment gations imposed by this section com-
shall be corrected. Factors to be as- mence on the effective date unless oth-
sessed include, but are not limited to: erwise noted in this paragraph. Compli-
(i) Respirator fit (including the abil- ance with obligations that do not com-
ity to use the respirator without inter- mence on the effective date shall occur
fering with effective workplace per- no later than the applicable start-up
formance); date.
(ii) Appropriate respirator selection (2) Compliance dates. All obligations
for the hazards to which the employee of this section commence on the effec-
is exposed; tive date except as follows:
431
(i) The determination that respirator instruction may not constitute the subjects
use is required (paragraph (a)) shall be formal training on respirator use, because it
completed no later than September 8, is only a review.
3. The test subject shall be informed that
1998. he/she is being asked to select the respirator
(ii) Compliance with provisions of that provides the most acceptable fit. Each
this section for all other provisions respirator represents a different size and
shall be completed no later than Octo- shape, and if fitted and used properly, will
ber 5, 1998. provide adequate protection.
(3) The provisions of 29 CFR 1910.134 4. The test subject shall be instructed to
and 29 CFR 1926.103, contained in the 29 hold each chosen facepiece up to the face and
CFR parts 1900 to 1910.99 and the 29 eliminate those that obviously do not give
an acceptable fit.
CFR part 1926 editions, revised as of 5. The more acceptable facepieces are
July 1, 1997, are in effect and enforce- noted in case the one selected proves unac-
able until October 5, 1998, or during any ceptable; the most comfortable mask is
administrative or judicial stay of the donned and worn at least five minutes to as-
provisions of this section. sess comfort. Assistance in assessing comfort
(4) Existing respiratory protection pro- can be given by discussing the points in the
grams. If, in the 12 month period pre- following item A.6. If the test subject is not
ceding April 8, 1998, the employer has familiar with using a particular respirator,
the test subject shall be directed to don the
conducted annual respirator training,
mask several times and to adjust the straps
fit testing, respirator program evalua- each time to become adept at setting proper
tion, or medical evaluations, the em- tension on the straps.
ployer may use the results of those ac- 6. Assessment of comfort shall include a re-
tivities to comply with the cor- view of the following points with the test
responding provisions of this section, subject and allowing the test subject ade-
providing that these activities were quate time to determine the comfort of the
conducted in a manner that meets the respirator:
(a) Position of the mask on the nose
requirements of this section. (b) Room for eye protection
(o) Appendices. (1) Compliance with (c) Room to talk
Appendix A, Appendix B1, Appendix B (d) Position of mask on face and cheeks
2, and Appendix C of this section is 7. The following criteria shall be used to
mandatory. help determine the adequacy of the res-
(2) Appendix D of this section is non- pirator fit:
mandatory and is not intended to cre- (a) Chin properly placed;
(b) Adequate strap tension, not overly
ate any additional obligations not oth-
tightened;
erwise imposed or to detract from any (c) Fit across nose bridge;
existing obligations. (d) Respirator of proper size to span dis-
tance from nose to chin;
APPENDIX A TO 1910.134FIT TESTING (e) Tendency of respirator to slip;
PROCEDURES (MANDATORY) (f) Self-observation in mirror to evaluate
fit and respirator position.
Part I. OSHA-Accepted Fit Test Protocols 8. The test subject shall conduct a user
seal check, either the negative and positive
A. Fit Testing ProceduresGeneral
pressure seal checks described in Appendix
Requirements
B1 of this section or those recommended by
The employer shall conduct fit testing the respirator manufacturer which provide
using the following procedures. The require- equivalent protection to the procedures in
ments in this appendix apply to all OSHA-ac- Appendix B1. Before conducting the nega-
cepted fit test methods, both QLFT and tive and positive pressure checks, the subject
QNFT. shall be told to seat the mask on the face by
1. The test subject shall be allowed to pick moving the head from side-to-side and up
the most acceptable respirator from a suffi- and down slowly while taking in a few slow
cient number of respirator models and sizes deep breaths. Another facepiece shall be se-
so that the respirator is acceptable to, and lected and retested if the test subject fails
correctly fits, the user. the user seal check tests.
2. Prior to the selection process, the test 9. The test shall not be conducted if there
subject shall be shown how to put on a resis any hair growth between the skin and the
pirator, how it should be positioned on the facepiece sealing surface, such as stubble
face, how to set strap tension and how to de- beard growth, beard, mustache or sideburns
termine an acceptable fit. A mirror shall be which cross the respirator sealing surface.
available to assist the subject in evaluating Any type of apparel which interferes with a
the fit and positioning of the respirator. This satisfactory fit shall be altered or removed.
432
10. If a test subject exhibits difficulty in end, a boiling pot of gold at one end. People
breathing during the tests, she or he shall be look, but no one ever finds it. When a man
referred to a physician or other licensed looks for something beyond reach, his
health care professional, as appropriate, to friends say he is looking for the pot of gold
determine whether the test subject can wear at the end of the rainbow.
a respirator while performing her or his du- (6) Grimace. The test subject shall grimace
ties. by smiling or frowning. (This applies only to
11. If the employee finds the fit of the res- QNFT testing; it is not performed for QLFT)
pirator unacceptable, the test subject shall (7) Bending over. The test subject shall
be given the opportunity to select a different bend at the waist as if he/she were to touch
respirator and to be retested. his/her toes. Jogging in place shall be sub-
12. Exercise regimen. Prior to the com- stituted for this exercise in those test envi-
mencement of the fit test, the test subject ronments such as shroud type QNFT or
shall be given a description of the fit test QLFT units that do not permit bending over
and the test subjects responsibilities during at the waist.
the test procedure. The description of the (8) Normal breathing. Same as exercise (1).
process shall include a description of the test
(b) Each test exercise shall be performed
exercises that the subject will be performing.
for one minute except for the grimace exer-
The respirator to be tested shall be worn for
cise which shall be performed for 15 seconds.
at least 5 minutes before the start of the fit
The test subject shall be questioned by the
test.
test conductor regarding the comfort of the
13. The fit test shall be performed while
the test subject is wearing any applicable respirator upon completion of the protocol.
safety equipment that may be worn during If it has become unacceptable, another
actual respirator use which could interfere model of respirator shall be tried. The res-
with respirator fit. pirator shall not be adjusted once the fit test
14. Test Exercises. (a) The following test exercises begin. Any adjustment voids the
exercises are to be performed for all fit test- test, and the fit test must be repeated.
ing methods prescribed in this appendix, ex-
B. Qualitative Fit Test (QLFT) Protocols
cept for the CNP method. A separate fit test-
ing exercise regimen is contained in the CNP 1. General
protocol. The test subject shall perform ex-
ercises, in the test environment, in the fol- (a) The employer shall ensure that persons
lowing manner: administering QLFT are able to prepare test
(1) Normal breathing. In a normal standing solutions, calibrate equipment and perform
position, without talking, the subject shall tests properly, recognize invalid tests, and
breathe normally. ensure that test equipment is in proper
(2) Deep breathing. In a normal standing working order.
position, the subject shall breathe slowly (b) The employer shall ensure that QLFT
and deeply, taking caution so as not to equipment is kept clean and well maintained
hyperventilate. so as to operate within the parameters for
(3) Turning head side to side. Standing in which it was designed.
place, the subject shall slowly turn his/her
head from side to side between the extreme 2. Isoamyl Acetate Protocol
positions on each side. The head shall be held
NOTE: This protocol is not appropriate to
at each extreme momentarily so the subject
use for the fit testing of particulate res-
can inhale at each side.
pirators. If used to fit test particulate res-
(4) Moving head up and down. Standing in
place, the subject shall slowly move his/her pirators, the respirator must be equipped
head up and down. The subject shall be in- with an organic vapor filter.
structed to inhale in the up position (i.e., (a) Odor Threshold Screening
when looking toward the ceiling).
(5) Talking. The subject shall talk out loud Odor threshold screening, performed with-
slowly and loud enough so as to be heard out wearing a respirator, is intended to de-
clearly by the test conductor. The subject termine if the individual tested can detect
can read from a prepared text such as the the odor of isoamyl acetate at low levels.
Rainbow Passage, count backward from 100, (1) Three 1 liter glass jars with metal lids
or recite a memorized poem or song. are required.
(2) Odor-free water (e.g., distilled or spring
Rainbow Passage water) at approximately 25 C (77 F) shall be
When the sunlight strikes raindrops in the used for the solutions.
air, they act like a prism and form a rain- (3) The isoamyl acetate (IAA) (also known
bow. The rainbow is a division of white light at isopentyl acetate) stock solution is pre-
into many beautiful colors. These take the pared by adding 1 ml of pure IAA to 800 ml
shape of a long round arch, with its path of odor-free water in a 1 liter jar, closing the
high above, and its two ends apparently be- lid and shaking for 30 seconds. A new solu-
yond the horizon. There is, according to leg- tion shall be prepared at least weekly.
433
(4) The screening test shall be conducted in odor threshold screening and respirator se-
a room separate from the room used for ac- lection, and shall be well-ventilated, as by an
tual fit testing. The two rooms shall be well- exhaust fan or lab hood, to prevent general
ventilated to prevent the odor of IAA from room contamination.
becoming evident in the general room air (4) A copy of the test exercises and any
where testing takes place. prepared text from which the subject is to
(5) The odor test solution is prepared in a read shall be taped to the inside of the test
second jar by placing 0.4 ml of the stock so- chamber.
lution into 500 ml of odor-free water using a (5) Upon entering the test chamber, the
clean dropper or pipette. The solution shall test subject shall be given a 6-inch by 5-inch
be shaken for 30 seconds and allowed to piece of paper towel, or other porous, absorb-
stand for two to three minutes so that the ent, single-ply material, folded in half and
IAA concentration above the liquid may wetted with 0.75 ml of pure IAA. The test
reach equilibrium. This solution shall be subject shall hang the wet towel on the hook
used for only one day. at the top of the chamber. An IAA test swab
(6) A test blank shall be prepared in a third or ampule may be substituted for the IAA
jar by adding 500 cc of odor-free water. wetted paper towel provided it has been dem-
(7) The odor test and test blank jar lids onstrated that the alternative IAA source
shall be labeled (e.g., 1 and 2) for jar identi- will generate an IAA test atmosphere with a
fication. Labels shall be placed on the lids so concentration equivalent to that generated
that they can be peeled off periodically and by the paper towel method.
switched to maintain the integrity of the (6) Allow two minutes for the IAA test con-
test. centration to stabilize before starting the fit
(8) The following instruction shall be typed test exercises. This would be an appropriate
on a card and placed on the table in front of time to talk with the test subject; to explain
the two test jars (i.e., 1 and 2): The purpose the fit test, the importance of his/her co-
of this test is to determine if you can smell operation, and the purpose for the test exer-
banana oil at a low concentration. The two cises; or to demonstrate some of the exer-
bottles in front of you contain water. One of cises.
these bottles also contains a small amount (7) If at any time during the test, the sub-
of banana oil. Be sure the covers are on ject detects the banana-like odor of IAA, the
tight, then shake each bottle for two sec- test is failed. The subject shall quickly exit
onds. Unscrew the lid of each bottle, one at from the test chamber and leave the test
a time, and sniff at the mouth of the bottle. area to avoid olfactory fatigue.
Indicate to the test conductor which bottle (8) If the test is failed, the subject shall re-
contains banana oil. turn to the selection room and remove the
(9) The mixtures used in the IAA odor de- respirator. The test subject shall repeat the
tection test shall be prepared in an area sep- odor sensitivity test, select and put on an-
arate from where the test is performed, in other respirator, return to the test area and
order to prevent olfactory fatigue in the sub- again begin the fit test procedure described
ject. in (b) (1) through (7) above. The process con-
(10) If the test subject is unable to cor- tinues until a respirator that fits well has
rectly identify the jar containing the odor been found. Should the odor sensitivity test
test solution, the IAA qualitative fit test be failed, the subject shall wait at least 5
shall not be performed. minutes before retesting. Odor sensitivity
(11) If the test subject correctly identifies will usually have returned by this time.
the jar containing the odor test solution, the (9) If the subject passes the test, the effi-
test subject may proceed to respirator selec- ciency of the test procedure shall be dem-
tion and fit testing. onstrated by having the subject break the
respirator face seal and take a breath before
(b) Isoamyl Acetate Fit Test exiting the chamber.
(1) The fit test chamber shall be a clear 55- (10) When the test subject leaves the cham-
gallon drum liner suspended inverted over a ber, the subject shall remove the saturated
2-foot diameter frame so that the top of the towel and return it to the person conducting
chamber is about 6 inches above the test sub- the test, so that there is no significant IAA
jects head. If no drum liner is available, a concentration buildup in the chamber during
similar chamber shall be constructed using subsequent tests. The used towels shall be
plastic sheeting. The inside top center of the kept in a self-sealing plastic bag to keep the
chamber shall have a small hook attached. test area from being contaminated.
(2) Each respirator used for the fitting and
3. Saccharin Solution Aerosol Protocol
fit testing shall be equipped with organic
vapor cartridges or offer protection against The entire screening and testing procedure
organic vapors. shall be explained to the test subject prior to
(3) After selecting, donning, and properly the conduct of the screening test.
adjusting a respirator, the test subject shall (a) Taste threshold screening. The sac-
wear it to the fit testing room. This room charin taste threshold screening, performed
shall be separate from the room used for without wearing a respirator, is intended to
434
determine whether the individual being test- (10) The test conductor will take note of
ed can detect the taste of saccharin. the number of squeezes required to solicit a
(1) During threshold screening as well as taste response.
during fit testing, subjects shall wear an en- (11) If the saccharin is not tasted after 30
closure about the head and shoulders that is squeezes (step 10), the test subject is unable
approximately 12 inches in diameter by 14 to taste saccharin and may not perform the
inches tall with at least the front portion saccharin fit test.
clear and that allows free movements of the
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH 3. (a): If the test sub-
head when a respirator is worn. An enclosure
ject eats or drinks something sweet before
substantially similar to the 3M hood assem-
the screening test, he/she may be unable to
bly, parts # FT 14 and # FT 15 combined, is
taste the weak saccharin solution.
adequate.
(2) The test enclosure shall have a 34-inch (12) If a taste response is elicited, the test
(1.9 cm) hole in front of the test subjects subject shall be asked to take note of the
nose and mouth area to accommodate the taste for reference in the fit test.
nebulizer nozzle. (13) Correct use of the nebulizer means
(3) The test subject shall don the test en- that approximately 1 ml of liquid is used at
closure. Throughout the threshold screening a time in the nebulizer body.
test, the test subject shall breathe through (14) The nebulizer shall be thoroughly
his/her slightly open mouth with tongue ex- rinsed in water, shaken dry, and refilled at
tended. The subject is instructed to report least each morning and afternoon or at least
when he/she detects a sweet taste. every four hours.
(4) Using a DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation (b) Saccharin solution aerosol fit test pro-
Medication Nebulizer or equivalent, the test cedure.
conductor shall spray the threshold check (1) The test subject may not eat, drink (ex-
solution into the enclosure. The nozzle is di- cept plain water), smoke, or chew gum for 15
rected away from the nose and mouth of the minutes before the test.
person. This nebulizer shall be clearly (2) The fit test uses the same enclosure de-
marked to distinguish it from the fit test so- scribed in 3. (a) above.
lution nebulizer. (3) The test subject shall don the enclosure
(5) The threshold check solution is pre- while wearing the respirator selected in sec-
pared by dissolving 0.83 gram of sodium sac- tion I. A. of this appendix. The respirator
charin USP in 100 ml of warm water. It can shall be properly adjusted and equipped with
be prepared by putting 1 ml of the fit test so- a particulate filter(s).
lution (see (b)(5) below) in 100 ml of distilled (4) A second DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation
water. Medication Nebulizer or equivalent is used
(6) To produce the aerosol, the nebulizer to spray the fit test solution into the enclo-
bulb is firmly squeezed so that it collapses sure. This nebulizer shall be clearly marked
completely, then released and allowed to to distinguish it from the screening test so-
fully expand. lution nebulizer.
(7) Ten squeezes are repeated rapidly and (5) The fit test solution is prepared by add-
then the test subject is asked whether the ing 83 grams of sodium saccharin to 100 ml of
saccharin can be tasted. If the test subject warm water.
reports tasting the sweet taste during the (6) As before, the test subject shall breathe
ten squeezes, the screening test is completed. through the slightly open mouth with tongue
The taste threshold is noted as ten regard- extended, and report if he/she tastes the
less of the number of squeezes actually com- sweet taste of saccharin.
pleted. (7) The nebulizer is inserted into the hole
(8) If the first response is negative, ten in the front of the enclosure and an initial
more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the concentration of saccharin fit test solution
test subject is again asked whether the sac- is sprayed into the enclosure using the same
charin is tasted. If the test subject reports number of squeezes (either 10, 20 or 30 squeez-
tasting the sweet taste during the second ten es) based on the number of squeezes required
squeezes, the screening test is completed. to elicit a taste response as noted during the
The taste threshold is noted as twenty re- screening test. A minimum of 10 squeezes is
gardless of the number of squeezes actually required.
completed. (8) After generating the aerosol, the test
(9) If the second response is negative, ten subject shall be instructed to perform the ex-
more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the ercises in section I. A. 14. of this appendix.
test subject is again asked whether the sac- (9) Every 30 seconds the aerosol concentra-
charin is tasted. If the test subject reports tion shall be replenished using one half the
tasting the sweet taste during the third set original number of squeezes used initially
of ten squeezes, the screening test is com- (e.g., 5, 10 or 15).
pleted. The taste threshold is noted as thirty (10) The test subject shall indicate to the
regardless of the number of squeezes actually test conductor if at any time during the fit
completed. test the taste of saccharin is detected. If the
435
test subject does not report tasting the sac- lapses completely, and is then released and
charin, the test is passed. allowed to fully expand.
(11) If the taste of saccharin is detected, (7) An initial ten squeezes are repeated rap-
the fit is deemed unsatisfactory and the test idly and then the test subject is asked
is failed. A different respirator shall be tried whether the Bitrex can be tasted. If the test
and the entire test procedure is repeated subject reports tasting the bitter taste dur-
(taste threshold screening and fit testing). ing the ten squeezes, the screening test is
(12) Since the nebulizer has a tendency to completed. The taste threshold is noted as
clog during use, the test operator must make ten regardless of the number of squeezes ac-
periodic checks of the nebulizer to ensure tually completed.
that it is not clogged. If clogging is found at (8) If the first response is negative, ten
the end of the test session, the test is in- more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the
valid. test subject is again asked whether the
Bitrex is tasted. If the test subject reports
4. BitrexTM (Denatonium Benzoate) Solution
tasting the bitter taste during the second
Aerosol Qualitative Fit Test Protocol
ten squeezes, the screening test is completed.
The BitrexTM (Denatonium benzoate) solu- The taste threshold is noted as twenty re-
tion aerosol QLFT protocol uses the pub- gardless of the number of squeezes actually
lished saccharin test protocol because that completed.
protocol is widely accepted. Bitrex is rou- (9) If the second response is negative, ten
tinely used as a taste aversion agent in more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the
household liquids which children should not test subject is again asked whether the
be drinking and is endorsed by the American Bitrex is tasted. If the test subject reports
Medical Association, the National Safety tasting the bitter taste during the third set
Council, and the American Association of of ten squeezes, the screening test is com-
Poison Control Centers. The entire screening pleted. The taste threshold is noted as thirty
and testing procedure shall be explained to regardless of the number of squeezes actually
the test subject prior to the conduct of the completed.
screening test. (10) The test conductor will take note of
(a) Taste Threshold Screening. the number of squeezes required to solicit a
The Bitrex taste threshold screening, per- taste response.
formed without wearing a respirator, is in- (11) If the Bitrex is not tasted after 30
tended to determine whether the individual squeezes (step 10), the test subject is unable
being tested can detect the taste of Bitrex. to taste Bitrex and may not perform the
(1) During threshold screening as well as Bitrex fit test.
during fit testing, subjects shall wear an en-
(12) If a taste response is elicited, the test
closure about the head and shoulders that is
subject shall be asked to take note of the
approximately 12 inches (30.5 cm) in diame-
taste for reference in the fit test.
ter by 14 inches (35.6 cm) tall. The front por-
(13) Correct use of the nebulizer means
tion of the enclosure shall be clear from the
that approximately 1 ml of liquid is used at
respirator and allow free movement of the
a time in the nebulizer body.
head when a respirator is worn. An enclosure
substantially similar to the 3M hood assem- (14) The nebulizer shall be thoroughly
bly, parts # FT 14 and # FT 15 combined, is rinsed in water, shaken to dry, and refilled
adequate. at least each morning and afternoon or at
(2) The test enclosure shall have a 34 inch least every four hours.
(1.9 cm) hole in front of the test subjects (b) Bitrex Solution Aerosol Fit Test Proce-
nose and mouth area to accommodate the dure.
nebulizer nozzle. (1) The test subject may not eat, drink (ex-
(3) The test subject shall don the test en- cept plain water), smoke, or chew gum for 15
closure. Throughout the threshold screening minutes before the test.
test, the test subject shall breathe through (2) The fit test uses the same enclosure as
his or her slightly open mouth with tongue that described in 4. (a) above.
extended. The subject is instructed to report (3) The test subject shall don the enclosure
when he/she detects a bitter taste. while wearing the respirator selected accord-
(4) Using a DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation ing to section I. A. of this appendix. The res-
Medication Nebulizer or equivalent, the test pirator shall be properly adjusted and
conductor shall spray the Threshold Check equipped with any type particulate filter(s).
Solution into the enclosure. This Nebulizer (4) A second DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation
shall be clearly marked to distinguish it Medication Nebulizer or equivalent is used
from the fit test solution nebulizer. to spray the fit test solution into the enclo-
(5) The Threshold Check Solution is pre- sure. This nebulizer shall be clearly marked
pared by adding 13.5 milligrams of Bitrex to to distinguish it from the screening test so-
100 ml of 5% salt (NaCl) solution in distilled lution nebulizer.
water. (5) The fit test solution is prepared by add-
(6) To produce the aerosol, the nebulizer ing 337.5 mg of Bitrex to 200 ml of a 5% salt
bulb is firmly squeezed so that the bulb col- (NaCl) solution in warm water.
436
(6) As before, the test subject shall breathe (b) Sensitivity Screening Check
through his or her slightly open mouth with The person to be tested must demonstrate
tongue extended, and be instructed to report his or her ability to detect a weak con-
if he/she tastes the bitter taste of Bitrex.. centration of the irritant smoke.
(7) The nebulizer is inserted into the hole (1) The test operator shall break both ends
in the front of the enclosure and an initial of a ventilation smoke tube containing
concentration of the fit test solution is stannic chloride, and attach one end of the
sprayed into the enclosure using the same smoke tube to a low flow air pump set to de-
number of squeezes (either 10, 20 or 30 squeez- liver 200 milliliters per minute, or an aspi-
es) based on the number of squeezes required rator squeeze bulb. The test operator shall
to elicit a taste response as noted during the cover the other end of the smoke tube with
screening test. a short piece of tubing to prevent potential
(8) After generating the aerosol, the test injury from the jagged end of the smoke
subject shall be instructed to perform the ex- tube.
ercises in section I. A. 14. of this appendix. (2) The test operator shall advise the test
(9) Every 30 seconds the aerosol concentra- subject that the smoke can be irritating to
the eyes, lungs, and nasal passages and in-
tion shall be replenished using one half the
struct the subject to keep his/her eyes closed
number of squeezes used initially (e.g., 5, 10
while the test is performed.
or 15).
(3) The test subject shall be allowed to
(10) The test subject shall indicate to the smell a weak concentration of the irritant
test conductor if at any time during the fit smoke before the respirator is donned to be-
test the taste of Bitrex is detected. If the come familiar with its irritating properties
test subject does not report tasting the and to determine if he/she can detect the ir-
Bitrex, the test is passed. ritating properties of the smoke. The test
(11) If the taste of Bitrex is detected, the operator shall carefully direct a small
fit is deemed unsatisfactory and the test is amount of the irritant smoke in the test sub-
failed. A different respirator shall be tried jects direction to determine that he/she can
and the entire test procedure is repeated detect it.
(taste threshold screening and fit testing).
(c) Irritant Smoke Fit Test Procedure
5. Irritant Smoke (Stannic Chloride) (1) The person being fit tested shall don the
Protocol respirator without assistance, and perform
This qualitative fit test uses a persons re- the required user seal check(s).
sponse to the irritating chemicals released (2) The test subject shall be instructed to
in the smoke produced by a stannic chlo- keep his/her eyes closed.
(3) The test operator shall direct the
ride ventilation smoke tube to detect leak-
stream of irritant smoke from the smoke
age into the respirator.
tube toward the faceseal area of the test sub-
(a) General Requirements and Precautions ject, using the low flow pump or the squeeze
bulb. The test operator shall begin at least 12
(1) The respirator to be tested shall be inches from the facepiece and move the
equipped with high efficiency particulate air smoke stream around the whole perimeter of
(HEPA) or P100 series filter(s). the mask. The operator shall gradually make
(2) Only stannic chloride smoke tubes shall two more passes around the perimeter of the
be used for this protocol. mask, moving to within six inches of the res-
(3) No form of test enclosure or hood for pirator.
the test subject shall be used. (4) If the person being tested has not had
an involuntary response and/or detected the
(4) The smoke can be irritating to the eyes,
irritant smoke, proceed with the test exer-
lungs, and nasal passages. The test con-
cises.
ductor shall take precautions to minimize
(5) The exercises identified in section I.A.
the test subjects exposure to irritant smoke.
14. of this appendix shall be performed by the
Sensitivity varies, and certain individuals test subject while the respirator seal is being
may respond to a greater degree to irritant continually challenged by the smoke, di-
smoke. Care shall be taken when performing rected around the perimeter of the respirator
the sensitivity screening checks that deter- at a distance of six inches.
mine whether the test subject can detect ir- (6) If the person being fit tested reports de-
ritant smoke to use only the minimum tecting the irritant smoke at any time, the
amount of smoke necessary to elicit a retest is failed. The person being retested must
sponse from the test subject. repeat the entire sensitivity check and fit
(5) The fit test shall be performed in an test procedure.
area with adequate ventilation to prevent (7) Each test subject passing the irritant
exposure of the person conducting the fit smoke test without evidence of a response
test or the build-up of irritant smoke in the (involuntary cough, irritation) shall be given
general atmosphere. a second sensitivity screening check, with
437
the smoke from the same smoke tube used ing the rise and fall of the test agent con-
during the fit test, once the respirator has centration with each inspiration and expira-
been removed, to determine whether he/she tion at fit factors of at least 2,000. Integra-
still reacts to the smoke. Failure to evoke a tors or computers that integrate the amount
response shall void the fit test. of test agent penetration leakage into the
(8) If a response is produced during this respirator for each exercise may be used pro-
second sensitivity check, then the fit test is vided a record of the readings is made.
passed. (5) The combination of substitute air-puri-
fying elements, test agent and test agent
C. Quantitative Fit Test (QNFT) Protocols concentration shall be such that the test
The following quantitative fit testing pro- subject is not exposed in excess of an estab-
cedures have been demonstrated to be ac- lished exposure limit for the test agent at
ceptable: Quantitative fit testing using a any time during the testing process, based
non-hazardous test aerosol (such as corn oil, upon the length of the exposure and the ex-
polyethylene glycol 400 [PEG 400], di-2-ethyl posure limit duration.
hexyl sebacate [DEHS], or sodium chloride) (6) The sampling port on the test specimen
generated in a test chamber, and employing respirator shall be placed and constructed so
instrumentation to quantify the fit of the that no leakage occurs around the port (e.g.,
respirator; Quantitative fit testing using am- where the respirator is probed), a free air
bient aerosol as the test agent and appro- flow is allowed into the sampling line at all
priate instrumentation (condensation nuclei times, and there is no interference with the
counter) to quantify the respirator fit; Quan- fit or performance of the respirator. The in-
titative fit testing using controlled negative mask sampling device (probe) shall be de-
pressure and appropriate instrumentation to signed and used so that the air sample is
measure the volumetric leak rate of a face- drawn from the breathing zone of the test
piece to quantify the respirator fit. subject, midway between the nose and mouth
and with the probe extending into the face-
1. General piece cavity at least 1/4 inch.
(a) The employer shall ensure that persons (7) The test setup shall permit the person
administering QNFT are able to calibrate administering the test to observe the test
equipment and perform tests properly, recog- subject inside the chamber during the test.
nize invalid tests, calculate fit factors prop- (8) The equipment generating the test at-
erly and ensure that test equipment is in mosphere shall maintain the concentration
proper working order. of test agent constant to within a 10 percent
(b) The employer shall ensure that QNFT variation for the duration of the test.
equipment is kept clean, and is maintained (9) The time lag (interval between an event
and calibrated according to the manufactur- and the recording of the event on the strip
ers instructions so as to operate at the pa- chart or computer or integrator) shall be
rameters for which it was designed. kept to a minimum. There shall be a clear
association between the occurrence of an
2. Generated Aerosol Quantitative Fit event and its being recorded.
Testing Protocol (10) The sampling line tubing for the test
(a) Apparatus. chamber atmosphere and for the respirator
(1) Instrumentation. Aerosol generation, sampling port shall be of equal diameter and
dilution, and measurement systems using of the same material. The length of the two
particulates (corn oil, polyethylene glycol lines shall be equal.
400 [PEG 400], di-2-ethyl hexyl sebacate (11) The exhaust flow from the test cham-
[DEHS] or sodium chloride) as test aerosols ber shall pass through an appropriate filter
shall be used for quantitative fit testing. (i.e., high efficiency particulate filter) before
(2) Test chamber. The test chamber shall release.
be large enough to permit all test subjects to (12) When sodium chloride aerosol is used,
perform freely all required exercises without the relative humidity inside the test cham-
disturbing the test agent concentration or ber shall not exceed 50 percent.
the measurement apparatus. The test cham- (13) The limitations of instrument detec-
ber shall be equipped and constructed so that tion shall be taken into account when deter-
the test agent is effectively isolated from mining the fit factor.
the ambient air, yet uniform in concentra- (14) Test respirators shall be maintained in
tion throughout the chamber. proper working order and be inspected regu-
(3) When testing air-purifying respirators, larly for deficiencies such as cracks or miss-
the normal filter or cartridge element shall ing valves and gaskets.
be replaced with a high efficiency particu- (b) Procedural Requirements.
late air (HEPA) or P100 series filter supplied (1) When performing the initial user seal
by the same manufacturer. check using a positive or negative pressure
(4) The sampling instrument shall be se- check, the sampling line shall be crimped
lected so that a computer record or strip closed in order to avoid air pressure leakage
chart record may be made of the test show- during either of these pressure checks.
438
(2) The use of an abbreviated screening for each test exercise except the grimace ex-
QLFT test is optional. Such a test may be ercise.
utilized in order to quickly identify poor fit- (ii) The average test chamber concentra-
ting respirators that passed the positive and/ tion shall be calculated as the arithmetic av-
or negative pressure test and reduce the erage of the concentration measured before
amount of QNFT time. The use of the CNC and after each test (i.e., 7 exercises) or the
QNFT instrument in the count mode is an- arithmetic average of the concentration
other optional method to obtain a quick esti- measured before and after each exercise or
mate of fit and eliminate poor fitting res- the true average measured continuously dur-
pirators before going on to perform a full ing the respirator sample.
QNFT. (iii) The concentration of the challenge
(3) A reasonably stable test agent con- agent inside the respirator shall be deter-
centration shall be measured in the test mined by one of the following methods:
chamber prior to testing. For canopy or (A) Average peak penetration method
shower curtain types of test units, the deter- means the method of determining test agent
mination of the test agents stability may be penetration into the respirator utilizing a
established after the test subject has entered strip chart recorder, integrator, or com-
the test environment. puter. The agent penetration is determined
(4) Immediately after the subject enters by an average of the peak heights on the
the test chamber, the test agent concentra- graph or by computer integration, for each
tion inside the respirator shall be measured exercise except the grimace exercise. Inte-
to ensure that the peak penetration does not grators or computers that calculate the ac-
exceed 5 percent for a half mask or 1 percent tual test agent penetration into the res-
for a full facepiece respirator. pirator for each exercise will also be consid-
(5) A stable test agent concentration shall ered to meet the requirements of the average
be obtained prior to the actual start of test- peak penetration method.
ing. (B) Maximum peak penetration method
(6) Respirator restraining straps shall not means the method of determining test agent
be over-tightened for testing. The straps penetration in the respirator as determined
shall be adjusted by the wearer without as- by strip chart recordings of the test. The
sistance from other persons to give a reason- highest peak penetration for a given exercise
ably comfortable fit typical of normal use. is taken to be representative of average pen-
The respirator shall not be adjusted once the etration into the respirator for that exercise.
fit test exercises begin. (C) Integration by calculation of the area
(7) The test shall be terminated whenever under the individual peak for each exercise
any single peak penetration exceeds 5 per- except the grimace exercise. This includes
cent for half masks and 1 percent for full computerized integration.
facepiece respirators. The test subject shall (D) The calculation of the overall fit factor
be refitted and retested. using individual exercise fit factors involves
(8) Calculation of fit factors. first converting the exercise fit factors to
(i) The fit factor shall be determined for penetration values, determining the average,
the quantitative fit test by taking the ratio and then converting that result back to a fit
of the average chamber concentration to the factor. This procedure is described in the fol-
concentration measured inside the respirator lowing equation:
Number of exercises
Overall Fit Factor =
1 ff1 + 1 ff2 + 1 ff3 + 1 ff4 + 1 ff5 + 1 ff7 + 1 ff8
Where ff1, ff2, ff3, etc. are the fit factors for 3. Ambient aerosol condensation nuclei
exercises 1, 2, 3, etc. counter (CNC) quantitative fit testing pro-
(9) The test subject shall not be permitted tocol.
The ambient aerosol condensation nuclei
to wear a half mask or quarter facepiece res-
counter (CNC) quantitative fit testing
pirator unless a minimum fit factor of 100 is (Portacount TM ) protocol quantitatively fit
obtained, or a full facepiece respirator unless tests respirators with the use of a probe. The
a minimum fit factor of 500 is obtained. probed respirator is only used for quan-
(10) Filters used for quantitative fit testing titative fit tests. A probed respirator has a
shall be replaced whenever increased breath- special sampling device, installed on the res-
ing resistance is encountered, or when the pirator, that allows the probe to sample the
test agent has altered the integrity of the air from inside the mask. A probed res-
filter media. pirator is required for each make, style,
model, and size that the employer uses and
439
ER08JA98.006</GPH>
can be obtained from the respirator manu- operator shall ensure that the pass or fail
facturer or distributor. The CNC instrument criterion meet the requirements for min-
manufacturer, TSI Inc., also provides probe imum respirator performance in this Appen-
attachments (TSI sampling adapters) that dix.
permit fit testing in an employees own res- (3) A record of the test needs to be kept on
pirator. A minimum fit factor pass level of file, assuming the fit test was successful.
at least 100 is necessary for a half-mask res- The record must contain the test subjects
pirator and a minimum fit factor pass level name; overall fit factor; make, model, style,
of at least 500 is required for a full facepiece and size of respirator used; and date tested.
negative pressure respirator. The entire 4. Controlled negative pressure (CNP)
screening and testing procedure shall be ex- quantitative fit testing protocol.
plained to the test subject prior to the con- The CNP protocol provides an alternative
duct of the screening test. to aerosol fit test methods. The CNP fit test
(a) Portacount Fit Test Requirements. (1) method technology is based on exhausting
Check the respirator to make sure the sam- air from a temporarily sealed respirator
pling probe and line are properly attached to facepiece to generate and then maintain a
the facepiece and that the respirator is fitted constant negative pressure inside the face-
with a particulate filter capable of pre- piece. The rate of air exhaust is controlled so
venting significant penetration by the ambi- that a constant negative pressure is main-
ent particles used for the fit test (e.g., tained in the respirator during the fit test.
NIOSH 42 CFR 84 series 100, series 99, or se- The level of pressure is selected to replicate
ries 95 particulate filter) per manufacturers the mean inspiratory pressure that causes
instruction. leakage into the respirator under normal use
(2) Instruct the person to be tested to don conditions. With pressure held constant, air
the respirator for five minutes before the fit flow out of the respirator is equal to air flow
test starts. This purges the ambient par- into the respirator. Therefore, measurement
ticles trapped inside the respirator and per- of the exhaust stream that is required to
mits the wearer to make certain the res- hold the pressure in the temporarily sealed
pirator is comfortable. This individual shall respirator constant yields a direct measure
already have been trained on how to wear of leakage air flow into the respirator. The
the respirator properly. CNP fit test method measures leak rates
(3) Check the following conditions for the through the facepiece as a method for deter-
adequacy of the respirator fit: Chin properly mining the facepiece fit for negative pres-
placed; Adequate strap tension, not overly sure respirators. The CNP instrument manu-
tightened; Fit across nose bridge; Respirator facturer Dynatech Nevada also provides at-
of proper size to span distance from nose to tachments (sampling manifolds) that replace
chin; Tendency of the respirator to slip; Self- the filter cartridges to permit fit testing in
observation in a mirror to evaluate fit and an employees own respirator. To perform
respirator position. the test, the test subject closes his or her
(4) Have the person wearing the respirator mouth and holds his/her breath, after which
do a user seal check. If leakage is detected, an air pump removes air from the respirator
determine the cause. If leakage is from a facepiece at a pre-selected constant pressure.
poorly fitting facepiece, try another size of The facepiece fit is expressed as the leak
the same model respirator, or another model rate through the facepiece, expressed as mil-
of respirator. liliters per minute. The quality and validity
(5) Follow the manufacturers instructions of the CNP fit tests are determined by the
for operating the Portacount and proceed degree to which the in-mask pressure tracks
with the test. the test pressure during the system measure-
(6) The test subject shall be instructed to ment time of approximately five seconds. In-
perform the exercises in section I. A. 14. of stantaneous feedback in the form of a real-
this appendix. time pressure trace of the in-mask pressure
(7) After the test exercises, the test subject is provided and used to determine test valid-
shall be questioned by the test conductor re- ity and quality. A minimum fit factor pass
garding the comfort of the respirator upon level of 100 is necessary for a half-mask res-
completion of the protocol. If it has become pirator and a minimum fit factor of at least
unacceptable, another model of respirator 500 is required for a full facepiece respirator.
shall be tried. The entire screening and testing procedure
(b) Portacount Test Instrument. shall be explained to the test subject prior to
(1) The Portacount will automatically stop the conduct of the screening test.
and calculate the overall fit factor for the (a) CNP Fit Test Requirements.
entire set of exercises. The overall fit factor (1) The instrument shall have a non-adjust-
is what counts. The Pass or Fail message able test pressure of 15.0 mm water pressure.
will indicate whether or not the test was (2) The CNP system defaults selected for
successful. If the test was a Pass, the fit test test pressure shall be set at 15 mm of water
is over. (-0.58 inches of water) and the modeled in-
(2) Since the pass or fail criterion of the spiratory flow rate shall be 53.8 liters per
Portacount is user programmable, the test minute for performing fit tests.
440
NOTE: CNP systems have built-in capa- clearly by the test conductor. The subject
bility to conduct fit testing that is specific can read from a prepared text such as the
to unique work rate, mask, and gender situa- Rainbow Passage, count backward from 100,
tions that might apply in a specific work- or recite a memorized poem or song for 1
place. Use of system default values, which minute. After the talking exercise, the sub-
were selected to represent respirator wear ject shall hold his or her head straight ahead
with medium cartridge resistance at a low- and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds dur-
moderate work rate, will allow inter-test ing the test measurement.
comparison of the respirator fit.) (6) Grimace. The test subject shall grimace
(3) The individual who conducts the CNP by smiling or frowning for 15 seconds.
fit testing shall be thoroughly trained to (7) Bending Over. The test subject shall
perform the test. bend at the waist as if he or she were to
(4) The respirator filter or cartridge needs touch his or her toes for 1 minute. Jogging in
to be replaced with the CNP test manifold. place shall be substituted for this exercise in
The inhalation valve downstream from the those test environments such as shroud-type
manifold either needs to be temporarily re- QNFT units that prohibit bending at the
moved or propped open. waist. After the bending over exercise, the
(5) The test subject shall be trained to hold subject shall hold his or her head straight
his or her breath for at least 20 seconds. ahead and hold his or her breath for 10 sec-
(6) The test subject shall don the test res- onds during the test measurement.
pirator without any assistance from the indi- (8) Normal Breathing. The test subject
vidual who conducts the CNP fit test. shall remove and re-don the respirator with-
(7) The QNFT protocol shall be followed ac- in a one-minute period. Then, in a normal
cording to section I. C. 1. of this appendix standing position, without talking, the sub-
with an exception for the CNP test exercises. ject shall breathe normally for 1 minute.
(b) CNP Test Exercises. After the normal breathing exercise, the sub-
(1) Normal breathing. In a normal standing ject shall hold his or her head straight ahead
position, without talking, the subject shall and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds dur-
breathe normally for 1 minute. After the ing the test measurement. After the test ex-
normal breathing exercise, the subject needs ercises, the test subject shall be questioned
to hold head straight ahead and hold his or by the test conductor regarding the comfort
her breath for 10 seconds during the test of the respirator upon completion of the pro-
measurement. tocol. If it has become unacceptable, another
(2) Deep breathing. In a normal standing model of a respirator shall be tried.
position, the subject shall breathe slowly (c) CNP Test Instrument.
and deeply for 1 minute, being careful not to (1) The test instrument shall have an effec-
hyperventilate. After the deep breathing ex- tive audio warning device when the test sub-
ercise, the subject shall hold his or her head ject fails to hold his or her breath during the
straight ahead and hold his or her breath for test. The test shall be terminated whenever
10 seconds during test measurement. the test subject failed to hold his or her
(3)Turning head side to side. Standing in breath. The test subject may be refitted and
place, the subject shall slowly turn his or her retested.
head from side to side between the extreme (2) A record of the test shall be kept on
positions on each side for 1 minute. The head file, assuming the fit test was successful.
shall be held at each extreme momentarily The record must contain the test subjects
so the subject can inhale at each side. After name; overall fit factor; make, model, style
the turning head side to side exercise, the and size of respirator used; and date tested.
subject needs to hold head full left and hold
his or her breath for 10 seconds during test Part II. New Fit Test Protocols
measurement. Next, the subject needs to A. Any person may submit to OSHA an ap-
hold head full right and hold his or her plication for approval of a new fit test pro-
breath for 10 seconds during test measure- tocol. If the application meets the following
ment. criteria, OSHA will initiate a rulemaking
(4) Moving head up and down. Standing in proceeding under section 6(b)(7) of the OSH
place, the subject shall slowly move his or Act to determine whether to list the new
her head up and down for 1 minute. The sub- protocol as an approved protocol in this Ap-
ject shall be instructed to inhale in the up pendix A.
position (i.e., when looking toward the ceil- B. The application must include a detailed
ing). After the moving head up and down ex- description of the proposed new fit test pro-
ercise, the subject shall hold his or her head tocol. This application must be supported by
full up and hold his or her breath for 10 sec- either:
onds during test measurement. Next, the 1. A test report prepared by an independent
subject shall hold his or her head full down government research laboratory (e.g., Law-
and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds dur- rence Livermore National Laboratory, Los
ing test measurement. Alamos National Laboratory, the National
(5) Talking. The subject shall talk out loud Institute for Standards and Technology)
slowly and loud enough so as to be heard stating that the laboratory has tested the
441
protocol and had found it to be accurate and onstrates that the manufacturers proce-
reliable; or dures are equally effective.
2. An article that has been published in a
peer-reviewed industrial hygiene journal de- APPENDIX B2 TO 1910.134: RESPIRATOR
scribing the protocol and explaining how test CLEANING PROCEDURES (MANDATORY)
data support the protocols accuracy and re-
These procedures are provided for em-
liability.
ployer use when cleaning respirators. They
C. If OSHA determines that additional in-
are general in nature, and the employer as
formation is required before the Agency
an alternative may use the cleaning rec-
commences a rulemaking proceeding under
ommendations provided by the manufacturer
this section, OSHA will so notify the appli-
of the respirators used by their employees,
cant and afford the applicant the oppor-
tunity to submit the supplemental informa- provided such procedures are as effective as
tion. Initiation of a rulemaking proceeding those listed here in Appendix B2. Equivalent
will be deferred until OSHA has received and effectiveness simply means that the proce-
evaluated the supplemental information. dures used must accomplish the objectives
set forth in Appendix B2, i.e., must ensure
APPENDIX B1 TO 1910.134: USER SEAL CHECK that the respirator is properly cleaned and
PROCEDURES (MANDATORY) disinfected in a manner that prevents dam-
age to the respirator and does not cause
The individual who uses a tight-fitting res- harm to the user.
pirator is to perform a user seal check to en-
sure that an adequate seal is achieved each I. Procedures for Cleaning Respirators
time the respirator is put on. Either the
positive and negative pressure checks listed A. Remove filters, cartridges, or canisters.
in this appendix, or the respirator manufac- Disassemble facepieces by removing speak-
turers recommended user seal check method ing diaphragms, demand and pressure-de-
shall be used. User seal checks are not sub- mand valve assemblies, hoses, or any compo-
stitutes for qualitative or quantitative fit nents recommended by the manufacturer.
tests. Discard or repair any defective parts.
B. Wash components in warm (43 C [110 F]
I. Facepiece Positive and/or Negative Pressure maximum) water with a mild detergent or
Checks with a cleaner recommended by the manu-
A. Positive pressure check. Close off the ex- facturer. A stiff bristle (not wire) brush may
halation valve and exhale gently into the be used to facilitate the removal of dirt.
facepiece. The face fit is considered satisfac- C. Rinse components thoroughly in clean,
tory if a slight positive pressure can be built warm (43 C [110 F] maximum), preferably
up inside the facepiece without any evidence running water. Drain.
of outward leakage of air at the seal. For D. When the cleaner used does not contain
most respirators this method of leak testing a disinfecting agent, respirator components
requires the wearer to first remove the exha- should be immersed for two minutes in one
lation valve cover before closing off the ex- of the following:
halation valve and then carefully replacing 1. Hypochlorite solution (50 ppm of chlo-
it after the test. rine) made by adding approximately one mil-
B. Negative pressure check. Close off the liliter of laundry bleach to one liter of water
inlet opening of the canister or cartridge(s) at 43 C (110 F); or,
by covering with the palm of the hand(s) or 2. Aqueous solution of iodine (50 ppm io-
by replacing the filter seal(s), inhale gently dine) made by adding approximately 0.8 mil-
so that the facepiece collapses slightly, and liliters of tincture of iodine (68 grams am-
hold the breath for ten seconds. The design monium and/or potassium iodide/100 cc of
of the inlet opening of some cartridges can- 45% alcohol) to one liter of water at 43 C
not be effectively covered with the palm of (110 F); or,
the hand. The test can be performed by cov- 3. Other commercially available cleansers
ering the inlet opening of the cartridge with of equivalent disinfectant quality when used
a thin latex or nitrile glove. If the facepiece as directed, if their use is recommended or
remains in its slightly collapsed condition approved by the respirator manufacturer.
and no inward leakage of air is detected, the E. Rinse components thoroughly in clean,
tightness of the respirator is considered sat- warm (43 C [110 F] maximum), preferably
isfactory. running water. Drain. The importance of
thorough rinsing cannot be overemphasized.
II. Manufacturers Recommended User Seal Detergents or disinfectants that dry on
Check Procedures facepieces may result in dermatitis. In addi-
The respirator manufacturers rection, some disinfectants may cause deterio-
ommended procedures for performing a user ration of rubber or corrosion of metal parts
seal check may be used instead of the posi- if not completely removed.
tive and/or negative pressure check proce- F. Components should be hand-dried with a
dures provided that the employer dem- clean lint-free cloth or air-dried.
442
G. Reassemble facepiece, replacing filters, 1. Do you currently smoke tobacco, or have
cartridges, and canisters where necessary. you smoked tobacco in the last month:
H. Test the respirator to ensure that all Yes/No
components work properly. 2. Have you ever had any of the following
conditions?
APPENDIX C TO 1910.134: OSHA RESPIRATOR a. Seizures (fits): Yes/No
MEDICAL EVALUATION QUESTIONNAIRE (MAN- b. Diabetes (sugar disease): Yes/No
DATORY) c. Allergic reactions that interfere with
your breathing: Yes/No
To the employer: Answers to questions in
d. Claustrophobia (fear of closed-in places):
Section 1, and to question 9 in Section 2 of
Yes/No
Part A, do not require a medical examina- e. Trouble smelling odors: Yes/No
tion. 3. Have you ever had any of the following pul-
To the employee: monary or lung problems?
Can you read (circle one): Yes/No a. Asbestosis: Yes/No
Your employer must allow you to answer b. Asthma: Yes/No
this questionnaire during normal working c. Chronic bronchitis: Yes/No
hours, or at a time and place that is conven- d. Emphysema: Yes/No
ient to you. To maintain your confiden- e. Pneumonia: Yes/No
tiality, your employer or supervisor must f. Tuberculosis: Yes/No
not look at or review your answers, and your g. Silicosis: Yes/No
employer must tell you how to deliver or h. Pneumothorax (collapsed lung): Yes/No
send this questionnaire to the health care i. Lung cancer: Yes/No
j. Broken ribs: Yes/No
professional who will review it.
k. Any chest injuries or surgeries: Yes/No
Part A. Section 1. (Mandatory) The fol-
l. Any other lung problem that youve been
lowing information must be provided by
told about: Yes/No
every employee who has been selected to use
4. Do you currently have any of the following
any type of respirator (please print).
symptoms of pulmonary or lung illness?
1. Todays date: lllllllllllllll a. Shortness of breath: Yes/No
2. Your name: llllllllllllllll b. Shortness of breath when walking fast
on level ground or walking up a slight
3. Your age (to nearest year): llllllll
hill or incline: Yes/No
4. Sex (circle one): Male/Female c. Shortness of breath when walking with
5. Your height: ll ft. ll in. other people at an ordinary pace on level
ground: Yes/No
6. Your weight: ll lbs.
d. Have to stop for breath when walking at
7. Your job title: llllllllllllll your own pace on level ground: Yes/No
8. A phone number where you can be reached e. Shortness of breath when washing or
by the health care professional who re- dressing yourself: Yes/No
views this questionnaire (include the Area f. Shortness of breath that interferes with
Code): lll your job: Yes/No
9. The best time to phone you at this num- g. Coughing that produces phlegm (thick
ber: ll sputum): Yes/No
10. Has your employer told you how to con- h. Coughing that wakes you early in the
tact the health care professional who will morning: Yes/No
review this questionnaire (circle one): Yes/ i. Coughing that occurs mostly when you
No are lying down: Yes/No
11. Check the type of respirator you will use j. Coughing up blood in the last month:
(you can check more than one category): Yes/No
k. Wheezing: Yes/No
a. ll N, R, or P disposable respirator (fil- l. Wheezing that interferes with your job:
ter-mask, non-cartridge type only). Yes/No
b. ll Other type (for example, half- or m. Chest pain when you breathe deeply:
full-facepiece type, powered-air puri- Yes/No
fying, supplied-air, self-contained breath- n. Any other symptoms that you think
ing apparatus). may be related to lung problems: Yes/No
12. Have you worn a respirator (circle one): 5. Have you ever had any of the following car-
Yes/No diovascular or heart problems?
7 If yes, what type(s): llllllllll a. Heart attack: Yes/No
b. Stroke: Yes/No
llllllllllllllllllllllll c. Angina: Yes/No
Part A. Section 2. (Mandatory) Questions 1 d. Heart failure: Yes/No
through 9 below must be answered by every e. Swelling in your legs or feet (not caused
employee who has been selected to use any by walking): Yes/No
type of respirator (please circle yes or f. Heart arrhythmia (heart beating irregu-
no). larly): Yes/No
443
g. High blood pressure: Yes/No b. Back pain: Yes/No
h. Any other heart problem that youve c. Difficulty fully moving your arms and
been told about: Yes/No legs: Yes/No
6. Have you ever had any of the following car- d. Pain or stiffness when you lean forward
diovascular or heart symptoms? or backward at the waist: Yes/No
a. Frequent pain or tightness in your e. Difficulty fully moving your head up or
chest: Yes/No down: Yes/No
b. Pain or tightness in your chest during f. Difficulty fully moving your head side to
physical activity: Yes/No side: Yes/No
c. Pain or tightness in your chest that g. Difficulty bending at your knees: Yes/No
interferes with your job: Yes/No h. Difficulty squatting to the ground: Yes/
d. In the past two years, have you noticed
No
your heart skipping or missing a beat:
i. Climbing a flight of stairs or a ladder
Yes/No
carrying more than 25 lbs: Yes/No
e. Heartburn or indigestion that is not re-
lated to eating: Yes/No j. Any other muscle or skeletal problem
f. Any other symptoms that you think may that interferes with using a respirator:
be related to heart or circulation prob- Yes/No
lems: Yes/No Part B Any of the following questions,
7. Do you currently take medication for any and other questions not listed, may be added
of the following problems? to the questionnaire at the discretion of the
a. Breathing or lung problems: Yes/No health care professional who will review the
b. Heart trouble: Yes/No questionnaire.
c. Blood pressure: Yes/No 1. In your present job, are you working at
d. Seizures (fits): Yes/No high altitudes (over 5,000 feet) or in a
8. If youve used a respirator, have you ever place that has lower than normal
had any of the following problems? (If amounts of oxygen: Yes/No
youve never used a respirator, check the If yes, do you have feelings of dizziness,
following space and go to question 9:)
shortness of breath, pounding in your
a. Eye irritation: Yes/No
chest, or other symptoms when youre
b. Skin allergies or rashes: Yes/No
working under these conditions: Yes/No
c. Anxiety: Yes/No
d. General weakness or fatigue: Yes/No 2. At work or at home, have you ever been
e. Any other problem that interferes with exposed to hazardous solvents, hazardous
your use of a respirator: Yes/No airborne chemicals (e.g., gases, fumes, or
9. Would you like to talk to the health care dust), or have you come into skin con-
professional who will review this ques- tact with hazardous chemicals: Yes/No
tionnaire about your answers to this If yes, name the chemicals if you know
questionnaire: Yes/No them: lllllllllllllllllll
Questions 10 to 15 below must be answered 3. Have you ever worked with any of the ma-
by every employee who has been selected to terials, or under any of the conditions,
use either a full-facepiece respirator or a listed below:
self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA). a. Asbestos: Yes/No
For employees who have been selected to use b. Silica (e.g., in sandblasting): Yes/No
other types of respirators, answering these c. Tungsten/cobalt (e.g., grinding or weld-
questions is voluntary. ing this material): Yes/No
10. Have you ever lost vision in either eye d. Beryllium: Yes/No
(temporarily or permanently): Yes/No e. Aluminum: Yes/No
11. Do you currently have any of the following f. Coal (for example, mining): Yes/No
vision problems? g. Iron: Yes/No
a. Wear contact lenses: Yes/No h. Tin: Yes/No
b. Wear glasses: Yes/No i. Dusty environments: Yes/No
c. Color blind: Yes/No j. Any other hazardous exposures: Yes/No
d. Any other eye or vision problem: Yes/No
12. Have you ever had an injury to your ears, If yes, describe these exposures: llll
including a broken ear drum: Yes/No llllllllllllllllllllllll
13. Do you currently have any of the following 4. List any second jobs or side businesses you
hearing problems? have: lllllllllllllllllll
a. Difficulty hearing: Yes/No
b. Wear a hearing aid: Yes/No
c. Any other hearing or ear problem: Yes/ 5. List your previous occupations: lllll
No llllllllllllllllllllllll
14. Have you ever had a back injury: Yes/No 6. List your current and previous hobbies: l
15. Do you currently have any of the following
musculoskeletal problems? llllllllllllllllllllllll
a. Weakness in any of your arms, hands, 7. Have you been in the military services?
legs, or feet: Yes/No Yes/No
444
If yes, were you exposed to biological or about 2 mph; climbing stairs with a heavy
chemical agents (either in training or load (about 50 lbs.).
combat): Yes/No 13. Will you be wearing protective clothing
8. Have you ever worked on a HAZMAT and/or equipment (other than the res-
team? Yes/No pirator) when youre using your res-
9. Other than medications for breathing and pirator: Yes/No
lung problems, heart trouble, blood pres- If yes, describe this protective clothing
sure, and seizures mentioned earlier in and/or equipment: lllllllllllll
this questionnaire, are you taking any llllllllllllllllllllllll
other medications for any reason (includ-
ing over-the-counter medications): Yes/ 14. Will you be working under hot conditions
No (temperature exceeding 77 F): Yes/No
15. Will you be working under humid condi-
If yes, name the medications if you tions: Yes/No
know them: llllllllllllllll 16. Describe the work youll be doing while
10. Will you be using any of the following youre using your respirator(s):
items with your respirator(s)? llllllllllllllllllllllll
a. HEPA Filters: Yes/No
b. Canisters (for example, gas masks): Yes/
No 17. Describe any special or hazardous condi-
c. Cartridges: Yes/No tions you might encounter when youre
11. How often are you expected to use the using your respirator(s) (for example,
respirator(s) (circle yes or no for all confined spaces, life-threatening gases):
answers that apply to you)?: llllllllllllllllllllllll
a. Escape only (no rescue): Yes/No llllllllllllllllllllllll
b. Emergency rescue only: Yes/No
18. Provide the following information, if you
c. Less than 5 hours per week: Yes/No know it, for each toxic substance that
d. Less than 2 hours per day: Yes/No youll be exposed to when youre using
e. 2 to 4 hours per day: Yes/No your respirator(s):
f. Over 4 hours per day: Yes/No
12. During the period you are using the res- Name of the first toxic substance: llll
pirator(s), is your work effort: Estimated maximum exposure level per
a. Light (less than 200 kcal per hour): Yes/ shift: lllllllllllllllllll
No Duration of exposure per shift llllll
If yes, how long does this period last dur- Name of the second toxic substance: lll
ing the average Estimated maximum exposure level per
shift:llllllhrs.llllllmins. shift: lllllllllllllllllll
Examples of a light work effort are sitting Duration of exposure per shift: llllll
while writing, typing, drafting, or per-
Name of the third toxic substance: llll
forming light assembly work; or standing
while operating a drill press (13 lbs.) or con- Estimated maximum exposure level per
trolling machines. shift: lllllllllllllllllll
b. Moderate (200 to 350 kcal per hour): Yes/ Duration of exposure per shift: llllll
No The name of any other toxic substances
If yes, how long does this period last that youll be exposed to while using
during the average your respirator:
shift:llllllhrs.llllllmins. llllllllllllllllllllllll
Examples of moderate work effort are sit- llllllllllllllllllllllll
ting while nailing or filing; driving a truck or llllllllllllllllllllllll
bus in urban traffic; standing while drilling, 19. Describe any special responsibilities
nailing, performing assembly work, or trans- youll have while using your respirator(s)
ferring a moderate load (about 35 lbs.) at that may affect the safety and well-being
trunk level; walking on a level surface about of others (for example, rescue, security):
2 mph or down a 5-degree grade about 3 mph;
or pushing a wheelbarrow with a heavy load
(about 100 lbs.) on a level surface. APPENDIX D TO 1910.134 (MANDATORY) INFOR-
c. Heavy (above 350 kcal per hour): Yes/No MATION FOR EMPLOYEES USING RESPIRATORS
If yes, how long does this period last WHEN NOT REQUIRED UNDER THE STANDARD
during the average Respirators are an effective method of pro-
shift:llllllhrs.llllllmins. tection against designated hazards when
Examples of heavy work are lifting a heavy properly selected and worn. Respirator use is
load (about 50 lbs.) from the floor to your encouraged, even when exposures are below
waist or shoulder; working on a loading dock; the exposure limit, to provide an additional
shoveling; standing while bricklaying or chip- level of comfort and protection for workers.
ping castings; walking up an 8-degree grade However, if a respirator is used improperly
445
or not kept clean, the respirator itself can (2) Protective helmets purchased be-
become a hazard to the worker. Sometimes, fore July 5, 1994 shall comply with the
workers may wear respirators to avoid expo- ANSI standard American National
sures to hazards, even if the amount of haz-
Standard Safety Requirements for In-
ardous substance does not exceed the limits
set by OSHA standards. If your employer dustrial Head Protection, ANSI Z89.1
provides respirators for your voluntary use, 1969, which is incorporated by reference
of if you provide your own respirator, you as specified in 1910.6, or shall be dem-
need to take certain precautions to be sure onstrated by the employer to be equal-
that the respirator itself does not present a ly effective.
hazard.
You should do the following: [59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994, as amended at 61
1. Read and heed all instructions provided FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 61 FR 19548, May 2, 1996]
by the manufacturer on use, maintenance,
cleaning and care, and warnings regarding 1910.136 Foot protection.
the respirators limitations. (a) General requirements. The em-
2. Choose respirators certified for use to ployer shall ensure that each affected
protect against the contaminant of concern. employee uses protective footwear
NIOSH, the National Institute for Occupa-
tional Safety and Health of the U.S. Depart-
when working in areas where there is a
ment of Health and Human Services, cer- danger of foot injuries due to falling or
tifies respirators. A label or statement of rolling objects, or objects piercing the
certification should appear on the respirator sole, and where such employees feet
or respirator packaging. It will tell you what are exposed to electrical hazards.
the respirator is designed for and how much (b) Criteria for protective footwear. (1)
it will protect you. Protective footwear purchased after
3. Do not wear your respirator into July 5, 1994 shall comply with ANSI
atmospheres containing contaminants for
which your respirator is not designed to pro-
Z411991, American National Standard
tect against. For example, a respirator de- for Personal ProtectionProtective
signed to filter dust particles will not pro- Footwear, which is incorporated by
tect you against gases, vapors, or very small reference as specified in 1910.6, or
solid particles of fumes or smoke. shall be demonstrated by the employer
4. Keep track of your respirator so that to be equally effective.
you do not mistakenly use someone elses (2) Protective footwear purchased be-
respirator. fore July 5, 1994 shall comply with the
[63 FR 1270, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR 20098, 20099, ANSI standard USA Standard for
Apr. 23, 1998] Mens Safety-Toe Footwear, Z41.1
1967, which is incorporated by reference
1910.135 Head protection. as specified in 1910.6, or shall be dem-
(a) General requirements. (1) The em- onstrated by the employer to be equal-
ployer shall ensure that each affected ly effective.
employee wears a protective helmet [59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994; 59 FR 33911, July 1,
when working in areas where there is a 1994, as amended at 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996;
potential for injury to the head from 61 FR 19548, May 2, 1996; 61 FR 21228, May 9,
falling objects. 1996]
(2) The employer shall ensure that a
protective helmet designed to reduce 1910.137 Electrical protective equip-
electrical shock hazard is worn by each ment.
such affected employee when near ex- (a) Design requirements. Insulating
posed electrical conductors which blankets, matting, covers, line hose,
could contact the head. gloves, and sleeves made of rubber
(b) Criteria for protective helmets. (1) shall meet the following requirements:
Protective helmets purchased after (1) Manufacture and marking. (i) Blan-
July 5, 1994 shall comply with ANSI kets, gloves, and sleeves shall be pro-
Z89.11986, American National Stand- duced by a seamless process.
ard for Personnel ProtectionProtec- (ii) Each item shall be clearly
tive Headwear for Industrial Workers- marked as follows:
Requirements, which is incorporated (A) Class 0 equipment shall be
by reference as specified in 1910.6, or marked Class 0.
shall be demonstrated to be equally ef- (B) Class 1 equipment shall be
fective. marked Class 1.
446
(C) Class 2 equipment shall be may exceed the values given in Table I
marked Class 2. 2 by not more than 2 milliamperes.
(D) Class 3 equipment shall be (iii) Equipment that has been sub-
marked Class 3. jected to a minimum breakdown volt-
(E) Class 4 equipment shall be age test may not be used for electrical
marked Class 4. protection. (See the note following
(F) Non-ozone-resistant equipment paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.)
other than matting shall be marked (iv) Material used for Type II insu-
Type I. lating equipment shall be capable of
(G) Ozone-resistant equipment other withstanding an ozone test, with no
than matting shall be marked Type II. visible effects. The ozone test shall re-
(H) Other relevant markings, such as liably indicate that the material will
the manufacturers identification and resist ozone exposure in actual use.
the size of the equipment, may also be Any visible signs of ozone deterioration
provided. of the material, such as checking,
(iii) Markings shall be nonconducting cracking, breaks, or pitting, is evi-
and shall be applied in such a manner dence of failure to meet the require-
as not to impair the insulating quali- ments for ozone-resistant material.
ties of the equipment. (See the note following paragraph
(iv) Markings on gloves shall be con- (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.)
fined to the cuff portion of the glove. (3) Workmanship and finish. (i) Equip-
(2) Electrical requirements. (i) Equip- ment shall be free of harmful physical
ment shall be capable of withstanding irregularities that can be detected by
the a-c proof-test voltage specified in the tests or inspections required under
Table I2 or the d-c proof-test voltage this section.
specified in Table I3. (ii) Surface irregularities that may
(A) The proof test shall reliably indi- be present on all rubber goods because
cate that the equipment can withstand of imperfections on forms or molds or
the voltage involved. because of inherent difficulties in the
(B) The test voltage shall be applied manufacturing process and that may
continuously for 3 minutes for equip- appear as indentations, protuberances,
ment other than matting and shall be or imbedded foreign material are ac-
applied continuously for 1 minute for ceptable under the following condi-
matting. tions:
(C) Gloves shall also be capable of (A) The indentation or protuberance
blends into a smooth slope when the
withstanding the a-c proof-test voltage
material is stretched.
specified in Table I2 after a 16-hour
(B) Foreign material remains in
water soak. (See the note following
place when the insulating material is
paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.)
folded and stretches with the insu-
(ii) When the a-c proof test is used on
lating material surrounding it.
gloves, the 60-hertz proof-test current
may not exceed the values specified in NOTE: Rubber insulating equipment meet-
Table I2 at any time during the test ing the following national consensus stand-
period. ards is deemed to be in compliance with
paragraph (a) of this section:
(A) If the a-c proof test is made at a
frequency other than 60 hertz, the per- American Society for Testing and Mate-
missible proof-test current shall be rials (ASTM) D 12087, Specification for Rub-
computed from the direct ratio of the ber Insulating Gloves.
ASTM D 17893 (or D 17888) Specification
frequencies. for Rubber Insulating Matting.
(B) For the test, gloves (right side ASTM D 104893 (or D 104888a) Specifica-
out) shall be filled with tap water and tion for Rubber Insulating Blankets.
immersed in water to a depth that is in ASTM D 104993 (or D 104988) Specification
accordance with Table I4. Water shall for Rubber Insulating Covers.
be added to or removed from the glove, ASTM D 105090, Specification for Rubber
Insulating Line Hose.
as necessary, so that the water level is
ASTM D 105187, Specification for Rubber
the same inside and outside the glove. Insulating Sleeves.
(C) After the 16-hour water soak spec- These standards contain specifications for
ified in paragraph (a)(2)(i)(C) of this conducting the various tests required in
section, the 60-hertz proof-test current paragraph (a) of this section. For example,
447
the a-c and d-c proof tests, the breakdown NOTE: Extra care is needed in the visual ex-
test, the water soak procedure, and the amination of the glove and in the avoidance
ozone test mentioned in this paragraph are of handling sharp objects.
described in detail in the ASTM standards. (B) Any other class of glove may be
(b) In-service care and use. (1) Elec- used for similar work without pro-
trical protective equipment shall be tector gloves if the employer can dem-
maintained in a safe, reliable condi- onstrate that the possibility of phys-
tion. ical damage to the gloves is small and
(2) The following specific require- if the class of glove is one class higher
ments apply to insulating blankets, than that required for the voltage in-
covers, line hose, gloves, and sleeves volved. Insulating gloves that have
made of rubber: been used without protector gloves
(i) Maximum use voltages shall con- may not be used at a higher voltage
form to those listed in Table I5. until they have been tested under the
provisions of paragraphs (b)(2)(viii) and
(ii) Insulating equipment shall be in-
(b)(2)(ix) of this section.
spected for damage before each days
(viii) Electrical protective equipment
use and immediately following any in-
shall be subjected to periodic electrical
cident that can reasonably be sus-
tests. Test voltages and the maximum
pected of having caused damage. Insu-
intervals between tests shall be in ac-
lating gloves shall be given an air test,
cordance with Table I5 and Table I6.
along with the inspection.
(ix) The test method used under para-
(iii) Insulating equipment with any graphs (b)(2)(viii) and (b)(2)(ix) of this
of the following defects may not be section shall reliably indicate whether
used: the insulating equipment can with-
(A) A hole, tear, puncture, or cut; stand the voltages involved.
(B) Ozone cutting or ozone checking NOTE: Standard electrical test methods
(the cutting action produced by ozone considered as meeting this requirement are
on rubber under mechanical stress into given in the following national consensus
a series of interlacing cracks); standards:
(C) An embedded foreign object; American Society for Testing and Mate-
rials (ASTM) D 12087, Specification for Rub-
(D) Any of the following texture ber Insulating Gloves.
changes: swelling, softening, hard- ASTM D 104893, Specification for Rubber
ening, or becoming sticky or inelastic. Insulating Blankets.
(E) Any other defect that damages ASTM D 104993, Specification for Rubber
the insulating properties. Insulating Covers.
ASTM D 105090, Specification for Rubber
(iv) Insulating equipment found to Insulating Line Hose.
have other defects that might affect its ASTM D 105187, Specification for Rubber
insulating properties shall be removed Insulating Sleeves.
from service and returned for testing ASTM F 47892, Specification for In-Serv-
under paragraphs (b)(2)(viii) and ice Care of Insulating Line Hose and Covers.
(b)(2)(ix) of this section. ASTM F 47993, Specification for In-Serv-
ice Care of Insulating Blankets.
(v) Insulating equipment shall be
ASTM F 49693b Specification for In-Serv-
cleaned as needed to remove foreign ice Care of Insulating Gloves and Sleeves.
substances. (x) Insulating equipment failing to
(vi) Insulating equipment shall be pass inspections or electrical tests may
stored in such a location and in such a not be used by employees, except as
manner as to protect it from light, follows:
temperature extremes, excessive hu- (A) Rubber insulating line hose may
midity, ozone, and other injurious sub- be used in shorter lengths with the de-
stances and conditions. fective portion cut off.
(vii) Protector gloves shall be worn (B) Rubber insulating blankets may
over insulating gloves, except as fol- be repaired using a compatible patch
lows: that results in physical and electrical
(A) Protector gloves need not be used properties equal to those of the blan-
with Class 0 gloves, under limited-use ket.
conditions, where small equipment and (C) Rubber insulating blankets may
parts manipulation necessitate unusu- be salvaged by severing the defective
ally high finger dexterity. area from the undamaged portion of
448
the blanket. The resulting undamaged between the wrist and the reinforced
area may not be smaller than 22 inches edge of the opening.
by 22 inches (560 mm by 560 mm) for (xi) Repaired insulating equipment
Class 1, 2, 3, and 4 blankets. shall be retested before it may be used
(D) Rubber insulating gloves and by employees.
sleeves with minor physical defects, (xii) The employer shall certify that
such as small cuts, tears, or punctures, equipment has been tested in accord-
may be repaired by the application of a ance with the requirements of para-
compatible patch. Also, rubber insu- graphs (b)(2)(viii), (b)(2)(ix), and
(b)(2)(xi) of this section. The certifi-
lating gloves and sleeves with minor
cation shall identify the equipment
surface blemishes may be repaired with
that passed the test and the date it was
a compatible liquid compound. The
tested.
patched area shall have electrical and NOTE: Marking of equipment and entering
physical properties equal to those of the results of the tests and the dates of test-
the surrounding material. Repairs to ing onto logs are two acceptable means of
gloves are permitted only in the area meeting this requirement.
TABLE I2AC PROOF-TEST REQUIREMENTS
Maximum proof-test current, mA (gloves only)
Proof-test
Class of equipment voltage 267-mm 356-mm 406-mm 457-mm
rms V (10.5-in) (14-in) (16-in) (18-in)
glove glove glove glove
0 .............................................................................................. 5,000 8 12 14 16
1 .............................................................................................. 10,000 .................. 14 16 18
2 .............................................................................................. 20,000 .................. 16 18 20
3 .............................................................................................. 30,000 .................. 18 20 22
4 .............................................................................................. 40,000 .................. .................. 22 24
TABLE I3DC PROOF-TEST REQUIREMENTS

Proof-test
Class of equipment voltage
0 ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 20,000
1 ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 40,000
2 ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 50,000
3 ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 60,000
4 ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 70,000
NOTE: The dc voltages listed in this table ment can be safely used at the voltages list-
are not appropriate for proof testing rubber ed in Table I4. See ASTM D 105090 and
insulating line hose or covers. For this ASTM D 104988 for further information on
equipment, dc proof tests shall use a volt- proof tests for rubber insulating line hose
age high enough to indicate that the equip- and covers.
TABLE I4GLOVE TESTSWATER LEVEL 1, 2
AC proof test DC proof test
Class of glove
mm. in. mm. in.
0 .................................................................................................................................................... 38 1.5 38 1.5

1 .................................................................................................................................................... 38 1.5 51 2.0
2 .................................................................................................................................................... 64 2.5 76 3.0
3 .................................................................................................................................................... 89 3.5 102 4.0
4 .................................................................................................................................................... 127 5.0 153 6.0
water level is given as the clearance from the cuff of the glove to the water line, with a tolerance of 13 mm. (0.5 in.).
1 The
2 If atmospheric conditions make the specified clearances impractical, the clearances may be increased by a maximum of 25
mm. (1 in.).
449
TABLE I5RUBBER INSULATING EQUIPMENT VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS

Maximum use Retest volt- Retest volt-
Class of equipment voltage 1 a age 2 ac age 2 dc
crms rms avg
0 ......................................................................................................................... 1,000 5,000 20,000

1 ......................................................................................................................... 7,500 10,000 40,000
2 ......................................................................................................................... 17,000 20,000 50,000
3 ......................................................................................................................... 26,500 30,000 60,000
4 ......................................................................................................................... 36,000 40,000 70,000
1 The maximum use voltage is the ac voltage (rms) classification of the protective equipment that designates the maximum
nominal design voltage of the energized system that may be safely worked. The nominal design voltage is equal to the phase-to-
phase voltage on multiphase circuits. However, the phase-to-ground potential is considered to be the nominal design voltage:
(1) If there is no multiphase exposure in a system area and if the voltage exposure is limited to the phase-to-ground potential,
or
(2) If the electrical equipment and devices are insulated or isolated or both so that the multiphase exposure on a grounded
wye circuit is removed.
2 The proof-test voltage shall be applied continuously for at least 1 minute, but no more than 3 minutes.
TABLE I6RUBBER INSULATING EQUIPMENT TEST INTERVALS

Type of equipment When to test
Rubber insulating line hose ......................................................... Upon indication that insulating value is suspect.
Rubber insulating covers ............................................................. Upon indication that insulating value is suspect.
Rubber insulating blankets .......................................................... Before first issue and every 12 months thereafter.1
Rubber insulating gloves ............................................................. Before first issue and every 6 months thereafter.1
Rubber insulating sleeves ........................................................... Before first issue and every 12 months thereafter.1
1 If the insulating equipment has been electrically tested but not issued for service, it may not be placed into service unless it
has been electrically tested within the previous 12 months.
[59 FR 4435, Jan. 31, 1994; 59 FR 33662, June 30, 1994]
1910.138 Hand protection. with harmful dusts, fogs, fumes, mists,

(a) General requirements. Employers gases, smokes, sprays, or vapors, the
shall select and require employees to primary objective shall be to prevent
use appropriate hand protection when atmospheric contamination. This shall
employees hands are exposed to haz- be accomplished as far as feasible by
ards such as those from skin absorp- accepted engineering control measures
tion of harmful substances; severe cuts (for example, enclosure or confinement
or lacerations; severe abrasions; punc- of the operation, general and local ven-
tures; chemical burns; thermal burns; tilation, and substitution of less toxic
and harmful temperature extremes. materials). When effective engineering
(b) Selection. Employers shall base controls are not feasible, or while they
the selection of the appropriate hand are being instituted, appropriate res-
protection on an evaluation of the per- pirators shall be used pursuant to the
formance characteristics of the hand following requirements.
protection relative to the task(s) to be (2) Respirators shall be provided by
performed, conditions present, dura- the employer when such equipment is
tion of use, and the hazards and poten- necessary to protect the health of the
tial hazards identified. employee. The employer shall provide
[59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994; 59 FR 33911, July 1, the respirators which are applicable
1994] and suitable for the purpose intended.
The employer shall be responsible for
1910.139 Respiratory protection for the establishment and maintenance of
M. tuberculosis. a respiratory protective program which
This section applies only to res- shall include the requirements outlined
piratory protection against M. tuber- in paragraph (b) of this section.
culosis and applies in lieu of 1910.134. (3) The employee shall use the pro-
(a) Permissible practice. (1) In the con- vided respiratory protection in accord-
trol of those occupational diseases ance with instructions and training re-
caused by breathing air contaminated ceived.
450
(b) Requirements for a minimal accept- requirements of the United States

able program. (1) Written standard oper- Pharmacopoeia for medical or breath-
ating procedures governing the selec- ing oxygen. Breathing air shall meet at
tion and use of respirators shall be es- least the requirements of the specifica-
tablished. tion for Grade D breathing air as de-
(2) Respirators shall be selected on scribed in Compressed Gas Association
the basis of hazards to which the work- Commodity Specification G7.11966.
er is exposed. Compressed oxygen shall not be used in
(3) The user shall be instructed and supplied-air respirators or in open cir-
trained in the proper use of respirators cuit self-contained breathing apparatus
and their limitations. that have previously used compressed
(4) [Reserved] air. Oxygen must never be used with
(5) Respirators shall be regularly air line respirators.
cleaned and disinfected. Those used by (2) Breathing air may be supplied to
more than one worker shall be thor- respirators from cylinders or air com-
oughly cleaned and disinfected after pressors.
each use. (i) Cylinders shall be tested and
(6) Respirators shall be stored in a maintained as prescribed in the Ship-
convenient, clean, and sanitary loca- ping Container Specification Regula-
tion. tions of the Department of Transpor-
(7) Respirators used routinely shall tation (49 CFR part 178).
be inspected during cleaning. Worn or (ii) The compressor for supplying air
deteriorated parts shall be replaced. shall be equipped with necessary safety
Respirators for emergency use such as and standby devices. A breathing air-
self-contained devices shall be thor- type compressor shall be used. Com-
oughly inspected at least once a month pressors shall be constructed and situ-
and after each use. ated so as to avoid entry of contami-
(8) Appropriate surveillance of work nated air into the system and suitable
area conditions and degree of emin-line air purifying sorbent beds and
ployee exposure or stress shall be filters installed to further assure
maintained. breathing air quality. A receiver of suf-
(9) There shall be regular inspection ficient capacity to enable the res-
and evaluation to determine the con- pirator wearer to escape from a con-
tinued effectiveness of the program. taminated atmosphere in event of com-
(10) Persons should not be assigned to pressor failure, and alarms to indicate
tasks requiring use of respirators un- compressor failure and overheating
less it has been determined that they shall be installed in the system. If an
are physically able to perform the oil-lubricated compressor is used, it
work and use the equipment. The local shall have a high-temperature or car-
physician shall determine what health bon monoxide alarm, or both. If only a
and physical conditions are pertinent. high-temperature alarm is used, the air
The respirator users medical status from the compressor shall be fre-
should be reviewed periodically (for in- quently tested for carbon monoxide to
stance, annually). insure that it meets the specifications
(11) Respirators shall be selected in paragraph (d)(1) of this section.
from among those jointly approved by (3) Air line couplings shall be incom-
the Mine Safety and Health Adminis- patible with outlets for other gas sys-
tration and the National Institute for tems to prevent inadvertent servicing
Occupational Safety and Health under of air line respirators with nonres-
the provisions of 30 CFR part 11. pirable gases or oxygen.
(c) Selection of respirators. Proper se- (4) Breathing gas containers shall be
lection of respirators shall be made ac- marked in accordance with American
cording to the guidance of American National Standard Method of Marking
National Standard Practices for Res- Portable Compressed Gas Containers to
piratory Protection Z88.21969. Identify the Material Contained, Z48.1
(d) Air quality. (1) Compressed air, 1954; Federal Specification BBA1034a,
compressed oxygen, liquid air, and liq- June 21, 1968, Air, Compressed for
uid oxygen used for respiration shall be Breathing Purposes; or Interim Federal
of high purity. Oxygen shall meet the Specification GGB00675b, April 27,
451
1965, Breathing Apparatus, Self-Con- quent random inspections shall be con-

tained. ducted by a qualified individual to as-
(e) Use of respirators. (1) Standard pro- sure that respirators are properly se-
cedures shall be developed for res- lected, used, cleaned, and maintained.
pirator use. These should include all (5) For safe use of any respirator, it
information and guidance necessary for is essential that the user be properly
their proper selection, use, and care. instructed in its selection, use, and
Possible emergency and routine uses of maintenance. Both supervisors and
respirators should be anticipated and workers shall be so instructed by com-
planned for. petent persons. Training shall provide
(2) The correct respirator shall be the men an opportunity to handle the
specified for each job. The respirator respirator, have it fitted properly, test
type is usually specified in the work its face-piece-to-face seal, wear it in
procedures by a qualified individual su- normal air for a long familiarity pe-
pervising the respiratory protective riod, and, finally, to wear it in a test
program. The individual issuing them atmosphere.
shall be adequately instructed to in- (i) Every respirator wearer shall re-
sure that the correct respirator is ceive fitting instructions including
issued. demonstrations and practice in how
(3) Written procedures shall be pre- the respirator should be worn, how to
pared covering safe use of respirators adjust it, and how to determine if it
in dangerous atmospheres that might fits properly. Respirators shall not be
be encountered in normal operations or worn when conditions prevent a good
in emergencies. Personnel shall be fa- face seal. Such conditions may be a
miliar with these procedures and the growth of beard, sideburns, a skull cap
available respirators. that projects under the facepiece, or
(i) In areas where the wearer, with temple pieces on glasses. Also, the ab-
failure of the respirator, could be over- sence of one or both dentures can seri-
come by a toxic or oxygen-deficient at- ously affect the fit of a facepiece. The
mosphere, at least one additional man workers diligence in observing these
shall be present. Communications (vis- factors shall be evaluated by periodic
ual, voice, or signal line) shall be main- check. To assure proper protection, the
tained between both or all individuals facepiece fit shall be checked by the
present. Planning shall be such that wearer each time he puts on the res-
one individual will be unaffected by pirator. This may be done by following
any likely incident and have the proper the manufacturers facepiece fitting in-
rescue equipment to be able to assist structions.
the other(s) in case of emergency. (ii) Providing respiratory protection
(ii) When self-contained breathing for individuals wearing corrective
apparatus or hose masks with blowers glasses is a serious problem. A proper
are used in atmospheres immediately seal cannot be established if the temple
dangerous to life or health, standby bars of eye glasses extend through the
men must be present with suitable res- sealing edge of the full facepiece. As a
cue equipment. temporary measure, glasses with short
(iii) Persons using air line respirators temple bars or without temple bars
in atmospheres immediately hazardous may be taped to the wearers head.
to life or health shall be equipped with Wearing of contact lenses in contami-
safety harnesses and safety lines for nated atmospheres with a respirator
lifting or removing persons from haz- shall not be allowed. Systems have
ardous atmospheres or other and equiv- been developed for mounting corrective
alent provisions for the rescue of per- lenses inside full facepieces. When a
sons from hazardous atmospheres shall workman must wear corrective lenses
be used. A standby man or men with as part of the facepiece, the facepiece
suitable self-contained breathing appa- and lenses shall be fitted by qualified
ratus shall be at the nearest fresh air individuals to provide good vision,
base for emergency rescue. comfort, and a gas-tight seal.
(4) Respiratory protection is no bet- (iii) If corrective spectacles or gog-
ter than the respirator in use, even gles are required, they shall be worn so
though it is worn conscientiously. Fre- as not to affect the fit of the facepiece.
452
Proper selection of equipment will pairs beyond the manufacturers rec-

minimize or avoid this problem. ommendations. Reducing or admission
(f) Maintenance and care of respirators. valves or regulators shall be returned
(1) A program for maintenance and to the manufacturer or to a trained
care of respirators shall be adjusted to technician for adjustment or repair.
the type of plant, working conditions, (5)(i) After inspection, cleaning, and
and hazards involved, and shall include necessary repair, respirators shall be
the following basic services: stored to protect against dust, sun-
(i) Inspection for defects (including a
light, heat, extreme cold, excessive
leak check),
(ii) Cleaning and disinfecting, moisture, or damaging chemicals. Res-
(iii) Repair, pirators placed at stations and work
(iv) Storage areas for emergency use should be
quickly accessible at all times and
Equipment shall be properly main- should be stored in compartments built
tained to retain its original effective- for the purpose. The compartments
ness. should be clearly marked. Routinely
(2)(i) All respirators shall be in- used respirators, such as dust res-
spected routinely before and after each pirators, may be placed in plastic bags.
use. A respirator that is not routinely
Respirators should not be stored in
used but is kept ready for emergency
such places as lockers or tool boxes un-
use shall be inspected after each use
and at least monthly to assure that it less they are in carrying cases or car-
is in satisfactory working condition. tons.
(ii) Self-contained breathing appa- (ii) Respirators should be packed or
ratus shall be inspected monthly. Air stored so that the facepiece and exhala-
and oxygen cylinders shall be fully tion valve will rest in a normal posi-
charged according to the manufactur- tion and function will not be impaired
ers instructions. It shall be deter- by the elastomer setting in an abnor-
mined that the regulator and warning mal position.
devices function properly. (iii) Instructions for proper storage of
(iii) Respirator inspection shall in- emergency respirators, such as gas
clude a check of the tightness of con- masks and self-contained breathing ap-
nections and the condition of the face- paratus, are found in use and care
piece, headbands, valves, connecting instructions usually mounted inside
tube, and canisters. Rubber or elas- the carrying case lid.
tomer parts shall be inspected for pli-
(g) Identification of gas mask canisters.
ability and signs of deterioration.
Stretching and manipulating rubber or (1) The primary means of identifying a
elastomer parts with a massaging ac- gas mask canister shall be by means of
tion will keep them pliable and flexible properly worded labels. The secondary
and prevent them from taking a set means of identifying a gas mask can-
during storage. ister shall be by a color code.
(iv) A record shall be kept of inspec- (2) All who issue or use gas masks
tion dates and findings for respirators falling within the scope of this section
maintained for emergency use. shall see that all gas mask canisters
(3) Routinely used respirators shall purchased or used by them are properly
be collected, cleaned, and disinfected labeled and colored in accordance with
as frequently as necessary to insure these requirements before they are
that proper protection is provided for placed in service and that the labels
the wearer. Respirators maintained for and colors are properly maintained at
emergency use shall be cleaned and dis- all times thereafter until the canisters
infected after each use. have completely served their purpose.
(4) Replacement or repairs shall be
(3) On each canister shall appear in
done only by experienced persons with
bold letters the following:
parts designed for the respirator. No
attempt shall be made to replace com- (i)
ponents or to make adjustment or re- Canister for lllllllllllllllll
453
Pt. 1910, Subpt. I, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7102 Edition)
(Name for atmospheric contaminant) ter dioctyl phthalate (DOP) smoke at a
flow rate of 85 liters per minute.
or
(5) Each canister shall have a label
Type N Gas Mask Canister warning that gas masks should be used
only in atmospheres containing suffi-
(ii) In addition, essentially the following cient oxygen to support life (at least 16
wording shall appear beneath the appro- percent by volume), since gas mask
priate phrase on the canister label: For res- canisters are only designed to neu-
piratory protection in atmospheres con- tralize or remove contaminants from
taining not more than ll ll lll per- the air.
cent by volume of ll ll ll ll ll ll
ll.
(6) Each gas mask canister shall be
(Name of atmospheric contaminant)
painted a distinctive color or combina-
tion of colors indicated in Table I1.
(4) Canisters having a special high- All colors used shall be such that they
efficiency filter for protection against are clearly identifiable by the user and
radionuclides and other highly toxic clearly distinguishable from one an-
particulates shall be labeled with a other. The color coating used shall
statement of the type and degree of offer a high degree of resistance to
protection afforded by the filter. The chipping, scaling, peeling, blistering,
label shall be affixed to the neck end fading, and the effects of the ordinary
of, or to the gray stripe which is atmospheres to which they may be ex-
around and near the top of, the can- posed under normal conditions of stor-
ister. The degree of protection shall be age and use. Appropriately colored
marked as the percent of penetration pressure sensitive tape may be used for
of the canister by a 0.3micron-diame- the stripes.
TABLE I1
Atmospheric contaminants to be protected against Colors assigned 1
Acid gases ................................................................................... White.

Hydrocyanic acid gas .................................................................. White with 12-inch green stripe completely around the canister
near the bottom.
Chlorine gas ................................................................................ White with 12-inch yellow stripe completely around the canister
near the bottom.
Organic vapors ............................................................................ Black.
Ammonia gas ............................................................................... Green.
Acid gases and ammonia gas ..................................................... Green with 12-inch white stripe completely around the canister
near the bottom.
Carbon monoxide ........................................................................ Blue.
Acid gases and organic vapors ................................................... Yellow.
Hydrocyanic acid gas and chloropicrin vapor ............................. Yellow with 12-inch blue stripe completely around the canister
near the bottom.
Acid gases, organic vapors, and ammonia gases ...................... Brown.
Radioactive materials, excepting tritium and noble gases .......... Purple (Magenta).
Particulates (dusts, fumes, mists, fogs, or smokes) in combina- Canister color for contaminant, as designated above, with 12-
tion with any of the above gases or vapors. inch gray stripe completely around the canister near the top.
All of the above atmospheric contaminants ................................ Red with 12-inch gray stripe completely around the canister
near the top.
1 Gray shall not be assigned as the main color for a canister designed to remove acids or vapors.
NOTE: Orange shall be used as a complete body, or stripe color to represent gases not included in this table. The user will
need to refer to the canister label to determine the degree of protection the canister will afford.
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 FR 49748, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984;
49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993. Redesignated and amended at 63 FR 1270,
Jan. 8, 1998]
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART I OF PART 1. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). Ac-

1910REFERENCES FOR FURTHER IN- cidents Involving Eye Injuries. Report 597,
FORMATION (NON-MANDATORY) Washington, D.C.: BLS, 1980.
2. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). Ac-
The documents in appendix A provide incidents Involving Face Injuries. Report 604,
formation which may be helpful in under- Washington, D.C.: BLS, 1980.
standing and implementing the standards in
Subpart I.
454
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1910, Subpt. I, App. B
3. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). Ac- tures that could result in burns, eye injury
cidents Involving Head Injuries. Report 605, or ignition of protective equipment, etc.; (c)
Washington, D.C.: BLS, 1980. types of chemical exposures; (d) sources of
4. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). Ac- harmful dust; (e) sources of light radiation,
cidents Involving Foot Injuries. Report 626, i.e., welding, brazing, cutting, furnaces, heat
Washington, D.C.: BLS, 1981. treating, high intensity lights, etc.; (f)
5. National Safety Council. Accident sources of falling objects or potential for
Facts, Annual edition, Chicago, IL: 1981. dropping objects; (g) sources of sharp objects
6. Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS). Oc- which might pierce the feet or cut the hands;
cupational Injuries and Illnesses in the (h) sources of rolling or pinching objects
United States by Industry, Annual edition, which could crush the feet; (i) layout of
Washington, D.C.: BLS. workplace and location of co-workers; and (j)
7. National Society to Prevent Blindness. any electrical hazards. In addition, injury/ac-
A Guide for Controlling Eye Injuries in In- cident data should be reviewed to help iden-
dustry, Chicago, Il: 1982. tify problem areas.
c. Organize data. Following the walk-
[59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994] through survey, it is necessary to organize
the data and information for use in the as-
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART I TO PART sessment of hazards. The objective is to pre-
1910NON-MANDATORY COMPLIANCE pare for an analysis of the hazards in the en-
GUIDELINES FOR HAZARD ASSESS- vironment to enable proper selection of pro-
MENT AND PERSONAL PROTECTIVE tective equipment.
EQUIPMENT SELECTION d. Analyze data. Having gathered and orga-
nized data on a workplace, an estimate of
This appendix is intended to provide com- the potential for injuries should be made.
pliance assistance for employers and employ- Each of the basic hazards (paragraph 3.a.)
ees in implementing requirements for a haz- should be reviewed and a determination
ard assessment and the selection of personal made as to the type, level of risk, and seri-
protective equipment. ousness of potential injury from each of the
1. Controlling hazards. PPE devices alone hazards found in the area. The possibility of
should not be relied on to provide protection exposure to several hazards simultaneously
against hazards, but should be used in con- should be considered.
junction with guards, engineering controls, 4. Selection guidelines. After completion of
and sound manufacturing practices. the procedures in paragraph 3, the general
2. Assessment and selection. It is necessary procedure for selection of protective equip-
to consider certain general guidelines for as- ment is to: a) Become familiar with the po-
sessing the foot, head, eye and face, and hand tential hazards and the type of protective
hazard situations that exist in an occupa- equipment that is available, and what it can
tional or educational operation or process, do; i.e., splash protection, impact protection,
and to match the protective devices to the etc.; b) compare the hazards associated with
particular hazard. It should be the responsi- the environment; i.e., impact velocities,
bility of the safety officer to exercise com- masses, projectile shape, radiation inten-
mon sense and appropriate expertise to ac- sities, with the capabilities of the available
complish these tasks. protective equipment; c) select the protec-
3. Assessment guidelines. In order to assess tive equipment which ensures a level of pro-
the need for PPE the following steps should tection greater than the minimum required
be taken: to protect employees from the hazards; and
a. Survey. Conduct a walk-through survey d) fit the user with the protective device and
of the areas in question. The purpose of the give instructions on care and use of the PPE.
survey is to identify sources of hazards to It is very important that end users be made
workers and co-workers. Consideration aware of all warning labels for and limita-
should be given to the basic hazard cat- tions of their PPE.
egories: 5. Fitting the device. Careful consideration
(a) Impact must be given to comfort and fit. PPE that
(b) Penetration fits poorly will not afford the necessary pro-
(c) Compression (roll-over) tection. Continued wearing of the device is
(d) Chemical more likely if it fits the wearer comfortably.
(e) Heat Protective devices are generally available in
(f) Harmful dust a variety of sizes. Care should be taken to
(g) Light (optical) radiation ensure that the right size is selected.
b. Sources. During the walk-through survey 6. Devices with adjustable features. Adjust-
the safety officer should observe: (a) sources ments should be made on an individual basis
of motion; i.e., machinery or processes where for a comfortable fit that will maintain the
any movement of tools, machine elements or protective device in the proper position. Par-
particles could exist, or movement of per- ticular care should be taken in fitting de-
sonnel that could result in collision with sta- vices for eye protection against dust and
tionary objects; (b) sources of high tempera- chemical splash to ensure that the devices
455
Pt. 1910, Subpt. I, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7102 Edition)
are sealed to the face. In addition, proper fit- 8. Selection chart guidelines for eye and face
ting of helmets is important to ensure that protection. Some occupations (not a complete
it will not fall off during work operations. In list) for which eye protection should be rou-
some cases a chin strap may be necessary to tinely considered are: carpenters, elec-
keep the helmet on an employees head. tricians, machinists, mechanics and repair-
(Chin straps should break at a reasonably ers, millwrights, plumbers and pipe fitters,
low force, however, so as to prevent a stran- sheet metal workers and tinsmiths, assem-
gulation hazard). Where manufacturers in-
blers, sanders, grinding machine operators,
structions are available, they should be fol-
lathe and milling machine operators, saw-
lowed carefully.
7. Reassessment of hazards. It is the respon- yers, welders, laborers, chemical process op-
sibility of the safety officer to reassess the erators and handlers, and timber cutting and
workplace hazard situation as necessary, by logging workers. The following chart pro-
identifying and evaluating new equipment vides general guidance for the proper selec-
and processes, reviewing accident records, tion of eye and face protection to protect
and reevaluating the suitability of pre- against hazards associated with the listed
viously selected PPE. hazard source operations.
EYE AND FACE PROTECTION SELECTION CHART

Source Assessment of Hazard Protection
IMPACTChipping, grinding machining, masonry Flying fragments, objects, Spectacles with side protection, goggles,
work, woodworking, sawing, drilling, chiseling, large chips, particles sand, face shields. See notes (1), (3), (5), (6),
powered fastening, riveting, and sanding. dirt, etc. (10). For severe exposure, use
faceshield.
HEATFurnace operations, pouring, casting, hot Hot sparks ............................... Faceshields, goggles, spectacles with side
dipping, and welding. protection. For severe exposure use
faceshield. See notes (1), (2), (3).
Splash from molten metals ..... Faceshields worn over goggles. See notes
(1), (2), (3).
High temperature exposure .... Screen face shields, reflective face
shields. See notes (1), (2), (3).
CHEMICALSAcid and chemicals handling, Splash ..................................... Goggles, eyecup and cover types. For se-
degreasing plating. vere exposure, use face shield. See
notes (3), (11).
Irritating mists .......................... Special-purpose goggles.
DUST Woodworking, buffing, general dusty con- Nuisance dust ......................... Goggles, eyecup and cover types. See
ditions. note (8).
LIGHT and/or RADIATION.
Welding: Electric arc Optical radiation ...................... Welding helmets or welding shields. Typ-
ical shades: 10-14. See notes (9), (12)
Welding: Gas Optical radiation ...................... Welding goggles or welding face shield.
Typical shades: gas welding 4-8, cutting
3-6, brazing 3-4. See note (9)
Cutting, Torch brazing, Torch soldering Optical radiation ...................... Spectacles or welding face-shield. Typical
shades, 1.5-3. See notes (3), (9)
Glare Poor vision .............................. Spectacles with shaded or special-purpose
lenses, as suitable. See notes (9), (10).
Notes to Eye and Face Protection Selection Chart:
(1) Care should be taken to recognize the possibility of multiple and simultaneous exposure to a variety of hazards. Adequate
protection against the highest level of each of the hazards should be provided. Protective devices do not provide unlimited pro-
tection.
(2) Operations involving heat may also involve light radiation. As required by the standard, protection from both hazards must
be provided.
(3) Faceshields should only be worn over primary eye protection (spectacles or goggles).
(4) As required by the standard, filter lenses must meet the requirements for shade designations in 1910.133(a)(5). Tinted
and shaded lenses are not filter lenses unless they are marked or identified as such.
(5) As required by the standard, persons whose vision requires the use of prescription (Rx) lenses must wear either protective
devices fitted with prescription (Rx) lenses or protective devices designed to be worn over regular prescription (Rx) eyewear.
(6) Wearers of contact lenses must also wear appropriate eye and face protection devices in a hazardous environment. It
should be recognized that dusty and/or chemical environments may represent an additional hazard to contact lens wearers.
(7) Caution should be exercised in the use of metal frame protective devices in electrical hazard areas.
(8) Atmospheric conditions and the restricted ventilation of the protector can cause lenses to fog. Frequent cleansing may be
necessary.
(9) Welding helmets or faceshields should be used only over primary eye protection (spectacles or goggles).
(10) Non-sideshield spectacles are available for frontal protection only, but are not acceptable eye protection for the sources
and operations listed for impact.
(11) Ventilation should be adequate, but well protected from splash entry. Eye and face protection should be designed and
used so that it provides both adequate ventilation and protects the wearer from splash entry.
(12) Protection from light radiation is directly related to filter lens density. See note (4) . Select the darkest shade that allows
task performance.
456
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1910, Subpt. I, App. B
9. Selection guidelines for head protection. All clerks, stock clerks, carpenters, electricians,
head protection (helmets) is designed to pro- machinists, mechanics and repairers, plumb-
vide protection from impact and penetration ers and pipe fitters, structural metal work-
hazards caused by falling objects. Head pro- ers, assemblers, drywall installers and lath-
tection is also available which provides pro- ers, packers, wrappers, craters, punch and
tection from electric shock and burn. When stamping press operators, sawyers, welders,
selecting head protection, knowledge of po- laborers, freight handlers, gardeners and
tential electrical hazards is important. Class grounds-keepers, timber cutting and logging
A helmets, in addition to impact and pene- workers, stock handlers and warehouse la-
tration resistance, provide electrical protec- borers.
tion from low-voltage conductors (they are 11. Selection guidelines for hand protection.
proof tested to 2,200 volts). Class B helmets, Gloves are often relied upon to prevent cuts,
in addition to impact and penetration resist- abrasions, burns, and skin contact with
ance, provide electrical protection from chemicals that are capable of causing local
high-voltage conductors (they are proof test- or systemic effects following dermal expo-
ed to 20,000 volts). Class C helmets provide sure. OSHA is unaware of any gloves that
impact and penetration resistance (they are provide protection against all potential hand
usually made of aluminum which conducts hazards, and commonly available glove ma-
electricity), and should not be used around terials provide only limited protection
electrical hazards. against many chemicals. Therefore, it is im-
Where falling object hazards are present, portant to select the most appropriate glove
helmets must be worn. Some examples infor a particular application and to determine
clude: working below other workers who are how long it can be worn, and whether it can
using tools and materials which could fall; be reused.
working around or under conveyor belts It is also important to know the perform-
which are carrying parts or materials; work- ance characteristics of gloves relative to the
ing below machinery or processes which specific hazard anticipated; e.g., chemical
might cause material or objects to fall; and hazards, cut hazards, flame hazards, etc.
working on exposed energized conductors.
These performance characteristics should be
Some examples of occupations for which
assessed by using standard test procedures.
head protection should be routinely consid-
Before purchasing gloves, the employer
ered are: carpenters, electricians, linemen,
should request documentation from the man-
mechanics and repairers, plumbers and pipe
ufacturer that the gloves meet the appro-
fitters, assemblers, packers, wrappers, saw-
priate test standard(s) for the hazard(s) an-
yers, welders, laborers, freight handlers, tim-
ticipated.
ber cutting and logging, stock handlers, and
warehouse laborers. Other factors to be considered for glove se-
10. Selection guidelines for foot protection. lection in general include:
Safety shoes and boots which meet the ANSI (A) As long as the performance character-
Z411991 Standard provide both impact and istics are acceptable, in certain cir-
compression protection. Where necessary, cumstances, it may be more cost effective to
safety shoes can be obtained which provide regularly change cheaper gloves than to
puncture protection. In some work situa- reuse more expensive types; and,
tions, metatarsal protection should be pro- (B) The work activities of the employee
vided, and in other special situations elec- should be studied to determine the degree of
trical conductive or insulating safety shoes dexterity required, the duration, frequency,
would be appropriate. and degree of exposure of the hazard, and the
Safety shoes or boots with impact protec- physical stresses that will be applied.
tion would be required for carrying or han- With respect to selection of gloves for pro-
dling materials such as packages, objects, tection against chemical hazards:
parts or heavy tools, which could be dropped; (A) The toxic properties of the chemical(s)
and, for other activities where objects might must be determined; in particular, the abil-
fall onto the feet. Safety shoes or boots with ity of the chemical to cause local effects on
compression protection would be required for the skin and /or to pass through the skin and
work activities involving skid trucks (man- cause systemic effects;
ual material handling carts) around bulk (B) Generally, any chemical resistant
rolls (such as paper rolls) and around heavy glove can be used for dry powders;
pipes, all of which could potentially roll over (C) For mixtures and formulated products
an employees feet. Safety shoes or boots (unless specific test data are available), a
with puncture protection would be required glove should be selected on the basis of the
where sharp objects such as nails, wire, chemical component with the shortest
tacks, screws, large staples, scrap metal etc., breakthrough time, since it is possible for
could be stepped on by employees causing a solvents to carry active ingredients through
foot injury. polymeric materials; and,
Some occupations (not a complete list) for (D) Employees must be able to remove the
which foot protection should be routinely gloves in such a manner as to prevent skin
considered are: shipping and receiving contamination.
457
12. Cleaning and maintenance. It is impor- Toilet room, means a room maintained
tant that all PPE be kept clean and properly within or on the premises of any place
maintained. Cleaning is particularly impor- of employment, containing toilet fa-
tant for eye and face protection where dirty
or fogged lenses could impair vision.
cilities for use by employees.
For the purposes of compliance with Toxic material means a material in
1910.132 (a) and (b), PPE should be inspected, concentration or amount which ex-
cleaned, and maintained at regular intervals ceeds the applicable limit established
so that the PPE provides the requisite pro- by a standard, such as 1910.1000 and
tection. 1910.1001 or, in the absence of an appli-
It is also important to ensure that con- cable standard, which is of such tox-
taminated PPE which cannot be decontami-
nated is disposed of in a manner that pro-
icity so as to constitute a recognized
tects employees from exposure to hazards. hazard that is causing or is likely to
cause death or serious physical harm.
[59 FR 16362, Apr. 6, 1994]
Urinal means a toilet facility main-
tained within a toilet room for the sole
Subpart JGeneral Environmental purpose of urination.
Controls Water closet means a toilet facility
maintained within a toilet room for
AUTHORITY: Secs. 4, 6, and 8, Occupational the purpose of both defecation and uri-
Safety and Health Act of 1970, 29 U.S.C. 653, nation and which is flushed with water.
655, 657; Secretary of Labors Order No. 1271 Wet process means any process or op-
(36 FR 8754), 876 (41 FR 25059), 983 (48 FR eration in a workroom which normally
35736), 190 (55 FR 9033), or 696 (62 FR 111), as
results in surfaces upon which employ-
applicable.
Sections 1910.141, 1910.142, 1910.145, 1910.146, ees may walk or stand becoming wet.
and 1910.147 also issued under 29 CFR part (3) Housekeeping. (i) All places of em-
1911. ployment shall be kept clean to the ex-
tent that the nature of the work al-
1910.141 Sanitation. lows.
(a) General(1) Scope. This section (ii) The floor of every workroom shall
applies to permanent places of employ- be maintained, so far as practicable, in
ment. a dry condition. Where wet processes
(2) Definitions applicable to this section. are used, drainage shall be maintained
Nonwater carriage toilet facility, means and false floors, platforms, mats, or
a toilet facility not connected to a other dry standing places shall be pro-
sewer. vided, where practicable, or appro-
Number of employees means, unless priate waterproof footgear shall be pro-
otherwise specified, the maximum vided.
number of employees present at any (iii) To facilitate cleaning, every
one time on a regular shift. floor, working place, and passageway
Personal service room, means a room shall be kept free from protruding
used for activities not directly con- nails, splinters, loose boards, and un-
nected with the production or service necessary holes and openings.
function performed by the establish- (4) Waste disposal. (i) Any receptacle
ment. Such activities include, but are used for putrescible solid or liquid
not limited to, first-aid, medical serv- waste or refuse shall be so constructed
ices, dressing, showering, toilet use, that it does not leak and may be thor-
washing, and eating. oughly cleaned and maintained in a
Potable water means water which sanitary condition. Such a receptacle
meets the quality standards prescribed shall be equipped with a solid tight-fit-
in the U.S. Public Health Service ting cover, unless it can be maintained
Drinking Water Standards, published in a sanitary condition without a
in 42 CFR part 72, or water which is ap- cover. This requirement does not pro-
proved for drinking purposes by the hibit the use of receptacles which are
State or local authority having juris- designed to permit the maintenance of
diction. a sanitary condition without regard to
Toilet facility, means a fixture main- the aforementioned requirements.
tained within a toilet room for the pur- (ii) All sweepings, solid or liquid
pose of defecation or urination, or wastes, refuse, and garbage shall be re-
both. moved in such a manner as to avoid
458
creating a menace to health and as premises and personal service rooms:

often as necessary or appropriate to Provided, That this nonpotable water
maintain the place of employment in a does not contain concentrations of
sanitary condition. chemicals, fecal coliform, or other sub-
(5) Vermin control. Every enclosed stances which could create insanitary
workplace shall be so constructed, conditions or be harmful to employees.
equipped, and maintained, so far as (c) Toilet facilities(1) General. (i) Ex-
reasonably practicable, as to prevent cept as otherwise indicated in this
the entrance or harborage of rodents, paragraph (c)(1)(i), toilet facilities, in
insects, and other vermin. A con- toilet rooms separate for each sex,
tinuing and effective extermination shall be provided in all places of em-
program shall be instituted where their ployment in accordance with table J1
presence is detected. of this section. The number of facilities
(b) Water supply(1) Potable water. (i) to be provided for each sex shall be
Potable water shall be provided in all based on the number of employees of
places of employment, for drinking, that sex for whom the facilities are fur-
washing of the person, cooking, wash- nished. Where toilet rooms will be oc-
ing of foods, washing of cooking or eat- cupied by no more than one person at a
ing utensils, washing of food prepara- time, can be locked from the inside,
tion or processing premises, and per- and contain at least one water closet,
sonal service rooms. separate toilet rooms for each sex need
(ii) [Reserved] not be provided. Where such single-oc-
(iii) Portable drinking water dis- cupancy rooms have more than one toi-
pensers shall be designed, constructed, let facility, only one such facility in
and serviced so that sanitary condi- each toilet room shall be counted for
tions are maintained, shall be capable the purpose of table J1.
of being closed, and shall be equipped
with a tap. TABLE J1
(iv) [Reserved] Minimum
(v) Open containers such as barrels, Number of employees number of
pails, or tanks for drinking water from water clos-
ets 1
which the water must be dipped or
poured, whether or not they are fitted 1 to 15 ................................................................. 1
16 to 35 ............................................................... 2
with a cover, are prohibited. 36 to 55 ............................................................... 3
(vi) A common drinking cup and 56 to 80 ............................................................... 4
other common utensils are prohibited. 81 to 110 ............................................................. 5.
(2) Nonpotable water. (i) Outlets for 111 to 150 ........................................................... 6
Over 150 .............................................................. (2)
nonpotable water, such as water for in-
1 Where toilet facilities will not be used by women, urinals
dustrial or firefighting purposes, shall
may be provided instead of water closets, except that the
be posted or otherwise marked in a number of water closets in such cases shall not be reduced to
manner that will indicate clearly that less than 23 of the minimum specified.
2 1 additional fixture for each additional 40 employees.
the water is unsafe and is not to be
used for drinking, washing of the per- (ii) The requirements of paragraph
son, cooking, washing of food, washing (c)(1)(i) of this section do not apply to
of cooking or eating utensils, washing mobile crews or to normally unat-
of food preparation or processing prem- tended work locations so long as em-
ises, or personal service rooms, or for ployees working at these locations
washing clothes. have transportation immediately
(ii) Construction of nonpotable water available to nearby toilet facilities
systems or systems carrying any other which meet the other requirements of
nonpotable substance shall be such as this subparagraph.
to prevent backflow or backsiphonage (iii) The sewage disposal method
into a potable water system. shall not endanger the health of em-
(iii) Nonpotable water shall not be ployees.
used for washing any portion of the (2) Construction of toilet rooms. (i)
person, cooking or eating utensils, or Each water closet shall occupy a sepa-
clothing. Nonpotable water may be rate compartment with a door and
used for cleaning work premises, other walls or partitions between fixtures
than food processing and preparation sufficiently high to assure privacy.
459
(ii) [Reserved] (g) Consumption of food and beverages

(d) Washing facilities(1) General. on the premises(1) Application. This
Washing facilities shall be maintained paragraph shall apply only where em-
in a sanitary condition. ployees are permitted to consume food
(2) Lavatories. (i) Lavatories shall be or beverages, or both, on the premises.
made available in all places of employ- (2) Eating and drinking areas. No em-
ment. The requirements of this sub- ployee shall be allowed to consume
division do not apply to mobile crews food or beverages in a toilet room nor
or to normally unattended work loca- in any area exposed to a toxic mate-
tions if employees working at these lo- rial.
cations have transportation readily (3) Waste disposal containers. Recep-
available to nearby washing facilities tacles constructed of smooth, corrosion
which meet the other requirements of resistant, easily cleanable, or dispos-
this paragraph. able materials, shall be provided and
(ii) Each lavatory shall be provided used for the disposal of waste food. The
with hot and cold running water, or number, size, and location of such re-
tepid running water. ceptacles shall encourage their use and
(iii) Hand soap or similar cleansing not result in overfilling. They shall be
agents shall be provided. emptied not less frequently than once
(iv) Individual hand towels or sec- each working day, unless unused, and
tions thereof, of cloth or paper, warm shall be maintained in a clean and san-
air blowers or clean individual sections itary condition. Receptacles shall be
of continuous cloth toweling, conven- provided with a solid tight-fitting
ient to the lavatories, shall be pro- cover unless sanitary conditions can be
vided. maintained without use of a cover.
(3) Showers. (i) Whenever showers are (4) Sanitary storage. No food or bev-
required by a particular standard, the erages shall be stored in toilet rooms
showers shall be provided in accord- or in an area exposed to a toxic mate-
ance with paragraphs (d)(3) (ii) through rial.
(v) of this section.
(h) Food handling. All employee food
(ii) One shower shall be provided for
service facilities and operations shall
each 10 employees of each sex, or nu-
be carried out in accordance with
merical fraction thereof, who are re-
sound hygienic principles. In all places
quired to shower during the same shift.
of employment where all or part of the
(iii) Body soap or other appropriate
food service is provided, the food dis-
cleansing agents convenient to the
pensed shall be wholesome, free from
showers shall be provided as specified
spoilage, and shall be processed, pre-
in paragraph (d)(2)(iii) of this section.
pared, handled, and stored in such a
(iv) Showers shall be provided with
manner as to be protected against con-
hot and cold water feeding a common
tamination.
discharge line.
(v) Employees who use showers shall [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40
be provided with individual clean tow- FR 18446, April 28, 1975; 40 FR 23073, May 28,
els. 1975; 43 FR 49748, Oct. 24, 1978; 63 FR 33466,
(e) Change rooms. Whenever employ- June 18, 1998]
ees are required by a particular stand-
ard to wear protective clothing because 1910.142 Temporary labor camps.
of the possibility of contamination (a) Site. (1) All sites used for camps
with toxic materials, change rooms shall be adequately drained. They shall
equipped with storage facilities for not be subject to periodic flooding, nor
street clothes and separate storage fa- located within 200 feet of swamps,
cilities for the protective clothing pools, sink holes, or other surface col-
shall be provided. lections of water unless such quiescent
(f) Clothes drying facilities. Where water surfaces can be subjected to mos-
working clothes are provided by the quito control measures. The camp shall
employer and become wet or are be located so the drainage from and
washed between shifts, provision shall through the camp will not endanger
be made to insure that such clothing is any domestic or public water supply.
dry before reuse. All sites shall be graded, ditched, and
460
rendered free from depressions in which can be opened for purposes of ventila-
water may become a nuisance. tion.
(2) All sites shall be adequate in size (8) All exterior openings shall be ef-
to prevent overcrowding of necessary fectively screened with 16mesh mate-
structures. The principal camp area in rial. All screen doors shall be equipped
which food is prepared and served and with self-closing devices.
where sleeping quarters are located (9) In a room where workers cook,
shall be at least 500 feet from any area live, and sleep a minimum of 100 square
in which livestock is kept. feet per person shall be provided. Sani-
(3) The grounds and open areas sur- tary facilities shall be provided for
rounding the shelters shall be main- storing and preparing food.
tained in a clean and sanitary condi- (10) In camps where cooking facilities
tion free from rubbish, debris, waste are used in common, stoves (in ratio of
paper, garbage, or other refuse. one stove to 10 persons or one stove to
(b) Shelter. (1) Every shelter in the two families) shall be provided in an
camp shall be constructed in a manner enclosed and screened shelter. Sanitary
which will provide protection against facilities shall be provided for storing
the elements. and preparing food.
(2) Each room used for sleeping pur- (11) All heating, cooking, and water
poses shall contain at least 50 square heating equipment shall be installed in
feet of floor space for each occupant. accordance with State and local ordi-
At least a 7foot ceiling shall be pro- nances, codes, and regulations gov-
vided. erning such installations. If a camp is
(3) Beds, cots, or bunks, and suitable used during cold weather, adequate
storage facilities such as wall lockers heating equipment shall be provided.
for clothing and personal articles shall (c) Water supply. (1) An adequate and
be provided in every room used for convenient water supply, approved by
sleeping purposes. Such beds or similar the appropriate health authority, shall
facilities shall be spaced not closer be provided in each camp for drinking,
than 36 inches both laterally and end cooking, bathing, and laundry pur-
to end, and shall be elevated at least 12 poses.
inches from the floor. If double-deck (2) A water supply shall be deemed
bunks are used, they shall be spaced adequate if it is capable of delivering 35
not less than 48 inches both laterally gallons per person per day to the camp-
and end to end. The minimum clear site at a peak rate of 212 times the av-
space between the lower and upper erage hourly demand.
bunk shall be not less than 27 inches. (3) The distribution lines shall be ca-
Triple-deck bunks are prohibited. pable of supplying water at normal op-
(4) The floors of each shelter shall be erating pressures to all fixtures for si-
constructed of wood, asphalt, or con- multaneous operation. Water outlets
crete. Wooden floors shall be of smooth shall be distributed throughout the
and tight construction. The floors shall camp in such a manner that no shelter
be kept in good repair. is more than 100 feet from a yard hy-
(5) All wooden floors shall be ele- drant if water is not piped to the shel-
vated not less than 1 foot above the ters.
ground level at all points to prevent (4) Where water under pressure is
dampness and to permit free circula- available, one or more drinking foun-
tion of air beneath. tains shall be provided for each 100 oc-
(6) Nothing in this section shall be cupants or fraction thereof. The con-
construed to prohibit banking with struction of drinking fountains shall
earth or other suitable material around comply with ANSI Standard Specifica-
the outside walls in areas subject to ex- tions for Drinking Fountains, Z4.21942,
treme low temperatures. which is incorporated by reference as
(7) All living quarters shall be pro- specified in 1910.6. Common drinking
vided with windows the total of which cups are prohibited.
shall be not less than one-tenth of the (d) Toilet facilities. (1) Toilet facilities
floor area. At least one-half of each adequate for the capacity of the camp
window shall be so constructed that it shall be provided.
461
(2) Each toilet room shall be located of lighting at all hours of the day and
so as to be accessible without any indi- night.
vidual passing through any sleeping (9) An adequate supply of toilet paper
room. Toilet rooms shall have a win- shall be provided in each privy, water
dow not less than 6 square feet in area closet, or chemical toilet compart-
opening directly to the outside area or ment.
otherwise be satisfactorily ventilated. (10) Privies and toilet rooms shall be
All outside openings shall be screened kept in a sanitary condition. They
with 16mesh material. No fixture, shall be cleaned at least daily.
water closet, chemical toilet, or urinal (e) Sewage disposal facilities. In camps
shall be located in a room used for where public sewers are available, all
other than toilet purposes. sewer lines and floor drains from build-
(3) A toilet room shall be located ings shall be connected thereto.
within 200 feet of the door of each (f) Laundry, handwashing, and bathing
sleeping room. No privy shall be closer facilities. (1) Laundry, handwashing,
than 100 feet to any sleeping room, din- and bathing facilities shall be provided
ing room, lunch area, or kitchen. in the following ratio:
(4) Where the toilet rooms are shared, (i) Handwash basin per family shelter
such as in multifamily shelters and in or per six persons in shared facilities.
barracks type facilities, separate toilet (ii) Shower head for every 10 persons.
rooms shall be provided for each sex. (iii) Laundry tray or tub for every 30
These rooms shall be distinctly marked persons.
for men and for women by signs (iv) Slop sink in each building used
printed in English and in the native for laundry, hand washing, and bath-
language of the persons occupying the ing.
camp, or marked with easily under- (2) Floors shall be of smooth finish
stood pictures or symbols. If the facili- but not slippery materials; they shall
ties for each sex are in the same build- be impervious to moisture. Floor
ing, they shall be separated by solid drains shall be provided in all shower
walls or partitions extending from the baths, shower rooms, or laundry rooms
floor to the roof or ceiling. to remove waste water and facilitate
(5) Where toilet facilities are shared, cleaning. All junctions of the curbing
the number of water closets or privy and the floor shall be coved. The walls
seats provided for each sex shall be and partitions of shower rooms shall be
based on the maximum number of per- smooth and impervious to the height of
sons of that sex which the camp is de- splash.
signed to house at any one time, in the (3) An adequate supply of hot and
ratio of one such unit to each 15 per- cold running water shall be provided
sons, with a minimum of two units for for bathing and laundry purposes. Fa-
any shared facility. cilities for heating water shall be pro-
(6) Urinals shall be provided on the vided.
basis of one unit or 2 linear feet of uri- (4) Every service building shall be
nal trough for each 25 men. The floor provided with equipment capable of
from the wall and for a distance not maintaining a temperature of at least
less than 15 inches measured from the 70 F. during cold weather.
outward edge of the urinals shall be (5) Facilities for drying clothes shall
constructed of materials impervious to be provided.
moisture. Where water under pressure (6) All service buildings shall be kept
is available, urinals shall be provided clean.
with an adequate water flush. Urinal (g) Lighting. Where electric service is
troughs in privies shall drain freely available, each habitable room in a
into the pit or vault and the construc- camp shall be provided with at least
tion of this drain shall be such as to ex- one ceiling-type light fixture and at
clude flies and rodents from the pit. least one separate floor- or wall-type
(7) Every water closet installed on or convenience outlet. Laundry and toilet
after August 31, 1971, shall be located rooms and rooms where people con-
in a toilet room. gregate shall contain at least one
(8) Each toilet room shall be lighted ceiling- or wall-type fixture. Light lev-
naturally, or artificially by a safe type els in toilet and storage rooms shall be
462
at least 20 foot-candles 30 inches from (2) Such facilities shall be in charge

the floor. Other rooms, including of a person trained to administer first
kitchens and living quarters, shall be aid and shall be readily accessible for
at least 30 foot-candles 30 inches from use at all times.
the floor. (l) Reporting communicable disease. (1)
(h) Refuse disposal. (1) Fly-tight, ro- It shall be the duty of the camp super-
dent-tight, impervious, cleanable or intendent to report immediately to the
single service containers, approved by local health officer the name and ad-
the appropriate health authority shall dress of any individual in the camp
be provided for the storage of garbage. known to have or suspected of having a
At least one such container shall be communicable disease.
provided for each family shelter and (2) Whenever there shall occur in any
shall be located within 100 feet of each camp a case of suspected food poi-
shelter on a wooden, metal, or concrete soning or an unusual prevalence of any
stand. illness in which fever, diarrhea, sore
(2) Garbage containers shall be kept throat, vomiting, or jaundice is a
clean. prominent symptom, it shall be the
(3) Garbage containers shall be duty of the camp superintendent to re-
emptied when full, but not less than port immediately the existence of the
twice a week. outbreak to the health authority by
telegram or telephone.
(i) Construction and operation of kitch-
ens, dining hall, and feeding facilities. (1) [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 47
In all camps where central dining or FR 14696, Apr. 6, 1982; 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30,
multiple family feeding operations are 1984; 61 FR 9238, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33466,
permitted or provided, the food han- June 18, 1998]
dling facilities shall comply with the 1910.143 Nonwater carriage disposal
requirements of the Food Service systems. [Reserved]
Sanitation Ordinance and Code, Part
V of the Food Service Sanitation 1910.144 Safety color code for mark-
Manual, U.S. Public Health Service ing physical hazards.
Publication 934 (1965), which is incor- (a) Color identification(1) Red. Red
porated by reference as specified in shall be the basic color for the identi-
1910.6. fication of:
(2) A properly constructed kitchen (i) Fire protection equipment and appa-
and dining hall adequate in size, sepa- ratus. [Reserved]
rate from the sleeping quarters of any (ii) Danger. Safety cans or other port-
of the workers or their families, shall able containers of flammable liquids
be provided in connection with all food having a flash point at or below 80 F,
handling facilities. There shall be no table containers of flammable liquids
direct opening from living or sleeping (open cup tester), excluding shipping
quarters into a kitchen or dining hall. containers, shall be painted red with
(3) No person with any communicable some additional clearly visible identi-
disease shall be employed or permitted fication either in the form of a yellow
to work in the preparation, cooking, band around the can or the name of the
serving, or other handling of food, food- contents conspicuously stenciled or
stuffs, or materials used therein, in painted on the can in yellow. Red
any kitchen or dining room operated in lights shall be provided at barricades
connection with a camp or regularly and at temporary obstructions, as spec-
used by persons living in a camp. ified in ANSI Safety Code for Building
(j) Insect and rodent control. Effective Construction, A10.21944, which is in-
measures shall be taken to prevent incorporated by reference as specified in
festation by and harborage of animal 1910.6. Danger signs shall be painted
or insect vectors or pests. red.
(k) First aid. (1) Adequate first aid fa- (iii) Stop. Emergency stop bars on
cilities approved by a health authority hazardous machines such as rubber
shall be maintained and made available mills, wire blocks, flat work ironers,
in every labor camp for the emergency etc., shall be red. Stop buttons or elec-
treatment of injured persons. trical switches which letters or other
463
markings appear, used for emergency hazard against which proper precaution
stopping of machinery shall be red. should be taken.
(2) [Reserved] (3) Safety instruction signs. Safety in-
(3) Yellow. Yellow shall be the basic struction signs shall be used where
color for designating caution and for there is a need for general instructions
marking physical hazards such as: and suggestions relative to safety
Striking against, stumbling, falling, measures.
tripping, and caught in between. (d) Sign design(1) Design features. All
(b) [Reserved] signs shall be furnished with rounded
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 or blunt corners and shall be free from
FR 49748, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, sharp edges, burrs, splinters, or other
1984; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996] sharp projections. The ends or heads of
bolts or other fastening devices shall
1910.145 Specifications for accident be located in such a way that they do
prevention signs and tags. not constitute a hazard.
(a) Scope. (1) These specifications (2) Danger signs. The colors red,
apply to the design, application, and black, and white shall be those of
use of signs or symbols (as included in opaque glossy samples as specified in
paragraphs (c) through (e) of this sec- Table 1 of Fundamental Specification
tion) intended to indicate and, insofar of Safety Colors for CIE Standard
as possible, to define specific hazards of Source C, American National Stand-
a nature such that failure to designate ard Z53.11967, which is incorporated by
them may lead to accidental injury to reference as specified in 1910.6.
workers or the public, or both, or to (3) [Reserved]
property damage. These specifications (4) Caution signs. Standard color of
are intended to cover all safety signs the background shall be yellow; and
except those designed for streets, high- the panel, black with yellow letters.
ways, railroads, and marine regula- Any letters used against the yellow
tions. These specifications do not apply background shall be black. The colors
to plant bulletin boards or to safety shall be those of opaque glossy samples
posters. as specified in Table 1 of American Na-
(2) All new signs and replacements of tional Standard Z53.11967.
old signs shall be in accordance with (5) [Reserved]
these specifications. (6) Safety instruction signs. Standard
(b) Definitions. As used in this sec- color of the background shall be white;
tion, the word sign refers to a surface and the panel, green with white letters.
on prepared for the warning of, or safe- Any letters used against the white
ty instructions of, industrial workers background shall be black. The colors
or members of the public who may be shall be those of opaque glossy samples
exposed to hazards. Excluded from this as specified in Table 1 of American Na-
definition, however, are news releases, tional Standard, Z53.11967.
displays commonly known as safety (7)(9) [Reserved]
posters, and bulletins used for em- (10) Slow-moving vehicle emblem. This
ployee education. emblem (see fig. J7) consists of a fluo-
(c) Classification of signs according to rescent yellow-orange triangle with a
use(1) Danger signs. (i) There shall be dark red reflective border. The yellow-
no variation in the type of design of orange fluorescent triangle is a highly
signs posted to warn of specific dangers visible color for daylight exposure. The
and radiation hazards. reflective border defines the shape of
(ii) All employees shall be instructed the fluorescent color in daylight and
that danger signs indicate immediate creates a hollow red triangle in the
danger and that special precautions are path of motor vehicle headlights at
necessary. night. The emblem is intended as a
(2) Caution signs. (i) Caution signs unique identification for, and it shall
shall be used only to warn against po- be used only on, vehicles which by de-
tential hazards or to caution against sign move slowly (25 m.p.h. or less) on
unsafe practices. the public roads. The emblem is not a
(ii) All employees shall be instructed clearance marker for wide machinery
that caution signs indicate a possible nor is it intended to replace required
464
lighting or marking of slow-moving ve- used to identify hazardous conditions

hicles. Neither the color film pattern and provide a message to employees
and its dimensions nor the backing with respect to hazardous conditions as
shall be altered to permit use of adver- set forth in paragraph (f)(3) of this sec-
tising or other markings. The material, tion, or to meet the specific tagging re-
location, mounting, etc., of the em- quirements of other OSHA standards.
blem shall be in accordance with the (ii) This paragraph (f) does not apply
American Society of Agricultural En- to construction, maritime or agri-
gineers Emblem for Identifying Slow- culture.
Moving Vehicles, ASAE R276, 1967, or (2) Definitions. Biological hazard or
ASAE S276.2 (ANSI B114.11971), which BIOHAZARD means those infectious
are incorporated by reference as speci- agents presenting a risk of death, in-
fied in 1910.6. jury or illness to employees.
Major message means that portion of
a tags inscription that is more specific
than the signal word and that indicates
the specific hazardous condition or the
instruction to be communicated to the
employee. Examples include: High
Voltage, Close Clearance, Do Not
Start, or Do Not Use or a cor-
responding pictograph used with a
written text or alone.
Pictograph means a pictorial rep-
resentation used to identify a haz-
ardous condition or to convey a safety
instruction.
Signal word means that portion of a
tags inscription that contains the
word or words that are intended to cap-
ture the employees immediate atten-
FIGURE J7.SLOW-MOVING VEHICLE EMBLEM tion.
NOTE: All dimensions are in inches. Tag means a device usually made of
(e) Sign wordings. card, paper, pasteboard, plastic or
(1) [Reserved] other material used to identify a haz-
(2) Nature of wording. The wording of ardous condition.
any sign should be easily read and con- (3) Use. Tags shall be used as a means
cise. The sign should contain sufficient to prevent accidental injury or illness
information to be easily understood. to employees who are exposed to haz-
The wording should make a positive, ardous or potentially hazardous condi-
rather than negative suggestion and tions, equipment or operations which
should be accurate in fact. are out of the ordinary, unexpected or
(3) [Reserved] not readily apparent. Tags shall be
(4) Biological hazard signs. The bio- used until such time as the identified
logical hazard warning shall be used to hazard is eliminated or the hazardous
signify the actual or potential presence operation is completed. Tags need not
of a biohazard and to identify equip- be used where signs, guarding or other
ment, containers, rooms, materials, ex- positive means of protection are being
perimental animals, or combinations used.
thereof, which contain, or are contami- (4) General tag criteria. All required
nated with, viable hazardous agents. tags shall meet the following criteria:
For the purpose of this subparagraph (i) Tags shall contain a signal word
the term biological hazard, or bio- and a major message.
hazard, shall include only those infec- (A) The signal word shall be either
tious agents presenting a risk or poten- Danger, Caution, or Biological
tial risk to the well-being of man. Hazard, BIOHAZARD, or the bio-
(f) Accident prevention tags(1) Scope logical hazard symbol.
and application. (i) This paragraph (f) (B) The major message shall indicate
applies to all accident prevention tags the specific hazardous condition or the
465
EC27OC91.028
instruction to be communicated to the

employee.
(ii) The signal word shall be readable
at a minimum distance of five feet (1.52
m) or such greater distance as war-
ranted by the hazard.
(iii) The tags major message shall be
presented in either pictographs, writ-
ten text or both.
(iv) The signal word and the major
message shall be understandable to all
employees who may be exposed to the
identified hazard.
(v) All employees shall be informed
as to the meaning of the various tags
used throughout the workplace and
what special precautions are necessary.
(vi) Tags shall be affixed as close as
safely possible to their respective haz-
ards by a positive means such as
string, wire, or adhesive that prevents
their loss or unintentional removal.
(5) Danger tags. Danger tags shall be BIOLOGICAL HAZARD SYMBOL CONFIGURATION
used in major hazard situations where
(9) Other tags. Other tags may be used
an immediate hazard presents a threat
in addition to those required by this
of death or serious injury to employ-
paragraph (f), or in other situations
ees. Danger tags shall be used only in
where this paragraph (f) does not re-
these situations.
quire tags, provided that they do not
(6) Caution tags. Caution tags shall be detract from the impact or visibility of
used in minor hazard situations where the signal word and major message of
a non-immediate or potential hazard or any required tag.
unsafe practice presents a lesser threat
of employee injury. Caution tags shall APPENDICES TO 1910.145(f),
be used only in these situations. ACCIDENT PREVENTION TAGS
(7) Warning tags. Warning tags may
be used to represent a hazard level be- APPENDIX A TO 1910.145(f)RECOMMENDED
tween Caution and Danger, in- COLOR CODING
stead of the required Caution tag, While the standard does not specifically
provided that they have a signal word mandate colors to be used on accident pre-
of Warning, an appropriate major vention tags, the following color scheme is
message, and otherwise meet the gen- recommended by OSHA for meeting the re-
eral tag criteria of paragraph (f)(4) of quirements of this section:
this section. DANGERRed, or predominantly red,
(8) Biological hazard tags. (i) Biologi- with lettering or symbols in a contrasting
cal hazard tags shall be used to iden- color.
CAUTIONYellow, or predominantly
tify the actual or potential presence of
yellow, with lettering or symbols in a con-
a biological hazard and to identify trasting color.
equipment, containers, rooms, experi- WARNINGOrange, or predominantly
mental animals, or combinations orange, with lettering or symbols in a con-
thereof, that contain or are contami- trasting color.
nated with hazardous biological agents. BIOLOGICAL HAZARDFluorescent or-
(ii) The symbol design for biological ange or orange-red, or predominantly so,
hazard tags shall conform to the design with lettering or symbols in a contrasting
shown below: color.
466
EC27OC91.086
APPENDIX B TO 1910.145(f)REFERENCES FOR Acceptable entry conditions means the
FURTHER INFORMATION conditions that must exist in a permit
The following references provide informa- space to allow entry and to ensure that
tion which can be helpful in understanding employees involved with a permit-re-
the requirements contained in various sec- quired confined space entry can safely
tions of the standard: enter into and work within the space.
1. Bresnahan, Thomas F., and Bryk, Jo- Attendant means an individual sta-
seph, The Hazard Association Values of Ac- tioned outside one or more permit
cident Prevention Signs, Journal of Amer- spaces who monitors the authorized en-
ican Society of Safety Engineers; January 1975. trants and who performs all attend-
2. Dreyfuss, H., Symbol Sourcebook, McGraw
Hill; New York, NY, 1972.
ants duties assigned in the employers
3. Glass, R.A. and others, Some Criteria for permit space program.
Colors and Signs in Workplaces, National Bu- Authorized entrant means an em-
reau of Standards, Washington DC, 1983. ployee who is authorized by the em-
4. Graphic Symbols for Public Areas and Oc- ployer to enter a permit space.
cupational Environments, Treasury Board of Blanking or blinding means the abso-
Canada, Ottawa, Canada, July 1980. lute closure of a pipe, line, or duct by
5. Howett, G.L., Size of Letters Required for the fastening of a solid plate (such as a
Visibility as a Function of Viewing Distance spectacle blind or a skillet blind) that
and Observer Acuity, National Bureau of
Standards, Washington DC, July 1983.
completely covers the bore and that is
6. Lerner, N.D. and Collins, B.L., The As- capable of withstanding the maximum
sessment of Safety Symbol Understandability by pressure of the pipe, line, or duct with
Different Testing Methods, National Bureau of no leakage beyond the plate.
Standards, Washington DC, 1980. Confined space means a space that:
7. Lerner, N.D. and Collins, B.L., Workplace (1) Is large enough and so configured
Safety Symbols, National Bureau of Stand- that an employee can bodily enter and
ards, Washington DC, 1980. perform assigned work; and
8. Modley, R. and Meyers, W.R., Handbook
(2) Has limited or restricted means
of Pictorial Symbols, Dover Publication, New
York, NY, 1976. for entry or exit (for example, tanks,
9. Product Safety Signs and Labels, FMC Cor- vessels, silos, storage bins, hoppers,
poration, Santa Clara, CA, 1978. vaults, and pits are spaces that may
10. Safety Color Coding for Marking Physical have limited means of entry.); and
Hazards, Z53.1, American National Standards (3) Is not designed for continuous em-
Institute, New York, NY, 1979. ployee occupancy.
11. Signs and Symbols for the Occupational Double block and bleed means the clo-
Environment, Can. 3Z32177, Canadian sure of a line, duct, or pipe by closing
Standards Association, Ottawa, September
1977.
and locking or tagging two in-line
12. Symbols for Industrial Safety, National valves and by opening and locking or
Bureau of Standards, Washington DC, April tagging a drain or vent valve in the
1982. line between the two closed valves.
13. Symbol Signs, U.S. Department of Trans- Emergency means any occurrence (in-
portation, Washington DC, November 1974. cluding any failure of hazard control or
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 monitoring equipment) or event inter-
FR 49749, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51759, Nov. 7, nal or external to the permit space
1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 33260, that could endanger entrants.
Sept. 19, 1986; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996] Engulfment means the surrounding
and effective capture of a person by a
1910.146 Permit-required confined liquid or finely divided (flowable) solid
spaces. substance that can be aspirated to
(a) Scope and application. This section cause death by filling or plugging the
contains requirements for practices respiratory system or that can exert
and procedures to protect employees in enough force on the body to cause
general industry from the hazards of death by strangulation, constriction,
entry into permit-required confined or crushing.
spaces. This section does not apply to Entry means the action by which a
agriculture, to construction, or to ship- person passes through an opening into
yard employment (Parts 1928, 1926, and a permit-required confined space.
1915 of this chapter, respectively). Entry includes ensuing work activities
(b) Definitions. in that space and is considered to have
467
occurred as soon as any part of the en- (5) Any other atmospheric condition
trants body breaks the plane of an that is immediately dangerous to life
opening into the space. or health.
Entry permit (permit) means the writ- NOTE: For air contaminants for which
ten or printed document that is pro- OSHA has not determined a dose or permis-
vided by the employer to allow and sible exposure limit, other sources of infor-
control entry into a permit space and mation, such as Material Safety Data Sheets
that contains the information specified that comply with the Hazard Communica-
in paragraph (f) of this section. tion Standard, 1910.1200 of this part, pub-
Entry supervisor means the person lished information, and internal documents
(such as the employer, foreman, or can provide guidance in establishing accept-
able atmospheric conditions.
crew chief) responsible for determining
Hot work permit means the employers
if acceptable entry conditions are
written authorization to perform oper-
present at a permit space where entry
ations (for example, riveting, welding,
is planned, for authorizing entry and
cutting, burning, and heating) capable
overseeing entry operations, and for
of providing a source of ignition.
terminating entry as required by this
Immediately dangerous to life or health
section.
(IDLH) means any condition that poses
NOTE: An entry supervisor also may serve
as an attendant or as an authorized entrant, an immediate or delayed threat to life
as long as that person is trained and or that would cause irreversible ad-
equipped as required by this section for each verse health effects or that would
role he or she fills. Also, the duties of entry interfere with an individuals ability to
supervisor may be passed from one indi- escape unaided from a permit space.
vidual to another during the course of an NOTE: Some materialshydrogen fluoride
entry operation. gas and cadmium vapor, for examplemay
Hazardous atmosphere means an at- produce immediate transient effects that,
mosphere that may expose employees even if severe, may pass without medical at-
to the risk of death, incapacitation, tention, but are followed by sudden, possibly
impairment of ability to self-rescue fatal collapse 1272 hours after exposure. The
(that is, escape unaided from a permit victim feels normal from recovery from
transient effects until collapse. Such mate-
space), injury, or acute illness from one rials in hazardous quantities are considered
or more of the following causes: to be immediately dangerous to life or
(1) Flammable gas, vapor, or mist in health.
excess of 10 percent of its lower flam- Inerting means the displacement of
mable limit (LFL); the atmosphere in a permit space by a
(2) Airborne combustible dust at a noncombustible gas (such as nitrogen)
concentration that meets or exceeds its to such an extent that the resulting at-
LFL; mosphere is noncombustible.
NOTE: This concentration may be approxi- NOTE: This procedure produces an IDLH ox-
mated as a condition in which the dust ob- ygen-deficient atmosphere.
scures vision at a distance of 5 feet (1.52 m) Isolation means the process by which
or less.
a permit space is removed from service
(3) Atmospheric oxygen concentra-
and completely protected against the
tion below 19.5 percent or above 23.5
release of energy and material into the
percent;
space by such means as: blanking or
(4) Atmospheric concentration of any
blinding; misaligning or removing sec-
substance for which a dose or a permis-
tions of lines, pipes, or ducts; a double
sible exposure limit is published in
block and bleed system; lockout or
Subpart G, Occupational Health and En-
tagout of all sources of energy; or
vironmental Control, or in Subpart Z,
blocking or disconnecting all mechan-
Toxic and Hazardous Substances, of this
ical linkages.
part and which could result in em-
Line breaking means the intentional
ployee exposure in excess of its dose or
opening of a pipe, line, or duct that is
permissible exposure limit;
or has been carrying flammable, corro-
NOTE: An atmospheric concentration of
any substance that is not capable of causing
sive, or toxic material, an inert gas, or
death, incapacitation, impairment of ability any fluid at a volume, pressure, or tem-
to self-rescue, injury, or acute illness due to perature capable of causing injury.
its health effects is not covered by this pro- Non-permit confined space means a
vision. confined space that does not contain
468
or, with respect to atmospheric haz- trants and to determine if acceptable entry
ards, have the potential to contain any conditions are present immediately prior to,
hazard capable of causing death or seri- and during, entry.
ous physical harm. (c) General requirements. (1) The em-
Oxygen deficient atmosphere means an ployer shall evaluate the workplace to
atmosphere containing less than 19.5 determine if any spaces are permit- re-
percent oxygen by volume. quired confined spaces.
Oxygen enriched atmosphere means an NOTE: Proper application of the decision
atmosphere containing more than 23.5 flow chart in appendix A to 1910.146 would
facilitate compliance with this requirement.
percent oxygen by volume.
(2) If the workplace contains permit
Permit-required confined space (permit
space) means a confined space that has spaces, the employer shall inform ex-
one or more of the following character- posed employees, by posting danger
istics: signs or by any other equally effective
(1) Contains or has a potential to means, of the existence and location of
contain a hazardous atmosphere; and the danger posed by the permit
(2) Contains a material that has the spaces.
potential for engulfing an entrant; NOTE: A sign reading DANGERPERMIT-
REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE, DO NOT
(3) Has an internal configuration
ENTER or using other similar language
such that an entrant could be trapped would satisfy the requirement for a sign.
or asphyxiated by inwardly converging (3) If the employer decides that its
walls or by a floor which slopes down- employees will not enter permit
ward and tapers to a smaller cross- sec- spaces, the employer shall take effec-
tion; or tive measures to prevent its employees
(4) Contains any other recognized se- from entering the permit spaces and
rious safety or health hazard. shall comply with paragraphs (c)(1),
Permit-required confined space program (c)(2), (c)(6), and (c)(8) of this section.
(permit space program) means the em- (4) If the employer decides that its
ployers overall program for control- employees will enter permit spaces, the
ling, and, where appropriate, for pro-
employer shall develop and implement
tecting employees from, permit space
a written permit space program that
hazards and for regulating employee
complies with this section. The written
entry into permit spaces.
program shall be available for inspec-
Permit system means the employers
tion by employees and their authorized
written procedure for preparing and
representatives.
issuing permits for entry and for re-
(5) An employer may use the alter-
turning the permit space to service fol-
nate procedures specified in paragraph
lowing termination of entry.
Prohibited condition means any condi- (c)(5)(ii) of this section for entering a
tion in a permit space that is not al- permit space under the conditions set
lowed by the permit during the period forth in paragraph (c)(5)(i) of this sec-
when entry is authorized. tion.
Rescue service means the personnel (i) An employer whose employees
designated to rescue employees from enter a permit space need not comply
permit spaces. with paragraphs (d) through (f) and (h)
Retrieval system means the equipment through (k) of this section, provided
(including a retrieval line, chest or that:
full-body harness, wristlets, if appro- (A) The employer can demonstrate
priate, and a lifting device or anchor) that the only hazard posed by the per-
used for non-entry rescue of persons mit space is an actual or potential haz-
from permit spaces. ardous atmosphere;
Testing means the process by which (B) The employer can demonstrate
the hazards that may confront entrants that continuous forced air ventilation
of a permit space are identified and alone is sufficient to maintain that
evaluated. Testing includes specifying permit space safe for entry;
the tests that are to be performed in (C) The employer develops moni-
the permit space. toring and inspection data that sup-
NOTE: Testing enables employers both to ports the demonstrations required by
devise and implement adequate control paragraphs (c)(5)(i)(A) and (c)(5)(i)(B) of
measures for the protection of authorized en- this section;
469
(D) If an initial entry of the permit (2) The forced air ventilation shall be
space is necessary to obtain the data so directed as to ventilate the imme-
required by paragraph (c)(5)(i)(C) of diate areas where an employee is or
this section, the entry is performed in will be present within the space and
compliance with paragraphs (d) shall continue until all employees have
through (k) of this section; left the space;
(E) The determinations and sup- (3) The air supply for the forced air
porting data required by paragraphs ventilation shall be from a clean
(c)(5)(i)(A), (c)(5)(i)(B), and (c)(5)(i)(C) source and may not increase the haz-
of this section are documented by the ards in the space.
employer and are made available to (F) The atmosphere within the space
each employee who enters the permit shall be periodically tested as nec-
space under the terms of paragraph essary to ensure that the continuous
(c)(5) of this section or to that employ- forced air ventilation is preventing the
ees authorized representative; and
accumulation of a hazardous atmos-
(F) Entry into the permit space
phere. Any employee who enters the
under the terms of paragraph (c)(5)(i)
space, or that employees authorized
of this section is performed in accord-
representative, shall be provided with
ance with the requirements of para-
an opportunity to observe the periodic
graph (c)(5)(ii) of this section.
testing required by this paragraph.
NOTE: See paragraph (c)(7) of this section
for reclassification of a permit space after (G) If a hazardous atmosphere is de-
all hazards within the space have been elimi- tected during entry:
nated. (1) Each employee shall leave the
(ii) The following requirements apply space immediately;
to entry into permit spaces that meet (2) The space shall be evaluated to
the conditions set forth in paragraph determine how the hazardous atmos-
(c)(5)(i) of this section. phere developed; and
(A) Any conditions making it unsafe (3) Measures shall be implemented to
to remove an entrance cover shall be protect employees from the hazardous
eliminated before the cover is removed. atmosphere before any subsequent
(B) When entrance covers are re- entry takes place.
moved, the opening shall be promptly
(H) The employer shall verify that
guarded by a railing, temporary cover,
the space is safe for entry and that the
or other temporary barrier that will
pre-entry measures required by para-
prevent an accidental fall through the
graph (c)(5)(ii) of this section have been
opening and that will protect each em-
taken, through a written certification
ployee working in the space from for-
eign objects entering the space. that contains the date, the location of
(C) Before an employee enters the the space, and the signature of the per-
space, the internal atmosphere shall be son providing the certification. The
tested, with a calibrated direct-reading certification shall be made before
instrument, for oxygen content, for entry and shall be made available to
flammable gases and vapors, and for each employee entering the space or to
potential toxic air contaminants, in that employees authorized representa-
that order. Any employee who enters tive .
the space, or that employees author- (6) When there are changes in the use
ized representative, shall be provided or configuration of a non-permit con-
an opportunity to observe the pre- fined space that might increase the
entry testing required by this para- hazards to entrants, the employer shall
graph. reevaluate that space and, if necessary,
(D) There may be no hazardous at- reclassify it as a permit-required con-
mosphere within the space whenever fined space.
any employee is inside the space. (7) A space classified by the employer
(E) Continuous forced air ventilation as a permit-required confined space
shall be used, as follows: may be reclassified as a non-permit
(1) An employee may not enter the confined space under the following pro-
space until the forced air ventilation cedures:
has eliminated any hazardous atmos- (i) If the permit space poses no actual
phere; or potential atmospheric hazards and if
470
all hazards within the space are elimi- (iii) Apprise the contractor of any
nated without entry into the space, the precautions or procedures that the host
permit space may be reclassified as a employer has implemented for the pro-
non-permit confined space for as long tection of employees in or near permit
as the non-atmospheric hazards remain spaces where contractor personnel will
eliminated. be working;
(ii) If it is necessary to enter the per- (iv) Coordinate entry operations with
mit space to eliminate hazards, such the contractor, when both host em-
entry shall be performed under para- ployer personnel and contractor per-
graphs (d) through (k) of this section. sonnel will be working in or near per-
If testing and inspection during that mit spaces, as required by paragraph
entry demonstrate that the hazards (d)(11) of this section; and
within the permit space have been (v) Debrief the contractor at the con-
eliminated, the permit space may be clusion of the entry operations regard-
reclassified as a non-permit confined ing the permit space program followed
space for as long as the hazards remain and regarding any hazards confronted
eliminated. or created in permit spaces during
NOTE: Control of atmospheric hazards entry operations.
through forced air ventilation does not con- (9) In addition to complying with the
stitute elimination of the hazards. Para-
permit space requirements that apply
graph (c)(5) covers permit space entry where
the employer can demonstrate that forced to all employers, each contractor who
air ventilation alone will control all hazards is retained to perform permit space
in the space. entry operations shall:
(iii) The employer shall document (i) Obtain any available information
the basis for determining that all haz- regarding permit space hazards and
ards in a permit space have been elimi- entry operations from the host em-
nated, through a certification that con- ployer;
tains the date, the location of the (ii) Coordinate entry operations with
space, and the signature of the person the host employer, when both host em-
making the determination. The certifi- ployer personnel and contractor per-
cation shall be made available to each sonnel will be working in or near per-
employee entering the space or to that mit spaces, as required by paragraph
employees authorized representative. (d)(11) of this section; and
(iv) If hazards arise within a permit (iii) Inform the host employer of the
space that has been declassified to a permit space program that the con-
non-permit space under paragraph tractor will follow and of any hazards
(c)(7) of this section, each employee in confronted or created in permit spaces,
the space shall exit the space. The em- either through a debriefing or during
ployer shall then reevaluate the space the entry operation.
and determine whether it must be re- (d) Permit-required confined space pro-
classified as a permit space, in accord- gram (permit space program). Under
ance with other applicable provisions the permit space program required by
of this section. paragraph (c)(4) of this section, the em-
(8) When an employer (host employer shall:
ployer) arranges to have employees of (1) Implement the measures nec-
another employer (contractor) perform essary to prevent unauthorized entry;
work that involves permit space entry, (2) Identify and evaluate the hazards
the host employer shall: of permit spaces before employees
(i) Inform the contractor that the enter them;
workplace contains permit spaces and (3) Develop and implement the
that permit space entry is allowed only means, procedures, and practices nec-
through compliance with a permit essary for safe permit space entry oper-
space program meeting the require- ations, including, but not limited to,
ments of this section; the following:
(ii) Apprise the contractor of the ele- (i) Specifying acceptable entry condi-
ments, including the hazards identified tions;
and the host employers experience (ii) Providing each authorized en-
with the space, that make the space in trant or that employees authorized
question a permit space; representative with the opportunity to
471
observe any monitoring or testing of system (such as a sewer), pre-entry

permit spaces; testing shall be performed to the ex-
(iii) Isolating the permit space; tent feasible before entry is authorized
(iv) Purging, inerting, flushing, or and, if entry is authorized, entry condi-
ventilating the permit space as nections shall be continuously monitored
essary to eliminate or control atmos- in the areas where authorized entrants
pheric hazards; are working;
(v) Providing pedestrian, vehicle, or (ii) Test or monitor the permit space
other barriers as necessary to protect as necessary to determine if acceptable
entrants from external hazards; and entry conditions are being maintained
(vi) Verifying that conditions in the during the course of entry operations;
permit space are acceptable for entry and
throughout the duration of an author- (iii) When testing for atmospheric
ized entry. hazards, test first for oxygen, then for
(4) Provide the following equipment combustible gases and vapors, and then
(specified in paragraphs (d)(4)(i) for toxic gases and vapors.
through (d)(4)(ix) of this section) at no (iv) Provide each authorized entrant
cost to employees, maintain that or that employees authorized rep-
equipment properly, and ensure that resentative an opportunity to observe
employees use that equipment prop- the pre-entry and any subsequent test-
erly: ing or monitoring of permit spaces;
(i) Testing and monitoring equipment (v) Reevaluate the permit space in
needed to comply with paragraph (d)(5) the presence of any authorized entrant
of this section; or that employees authorized rep-
(ii) Ventilating equipment needed to resentative who requests that the em-
obtain acceptable entry conditions; ployer conduct such reevaluation be-
(iii) Communications equipment nec- cause the entrant or representative has
essary for compliance with paragraphs reason to believe that the evaluation of
(h)(3) and (i)(5) of this section; that space may not have been ade-
(iv) Personal protective equipment quate;
insofar as feasible engineering and
(vi) Immediately provide each au-
work practice controls do not ade-
thorized entrant or that employees au-
quately protect employees;
thorized representative with the re-
(v) Lighting equipment needed to en-
sults of any testing conducted in ac-
able employees to see well enough to
cord with paragraph (d) of this section.
work safely and to exit the space
quickly in an emergency; NOTE: Atmospheric testing conducted in
accordance with appendix B to 1910.146
(vi) Barriers and shields as required would be considered as satisfying the re-
by paragraph (d)(3)(iv) of this section; quirements of this paragraph. For permit
(vii) Equipment, such as ladders, space operations in sewers, atmospheric test-
needed for safe ingress and egress by ing conducted in accordance with appendix
authorized entrants; B, as supplemented by appendix E to
(viii) Rescue and emergency equip- 1910.146, would be considered as satisfying
ment needed to comply with paragraph the requirements of this paragraph.
(d)(9) of this section, except to the ex- (6) Provide at least one attendant
tent that the equipment is provided by outside the permit space into which
rescue services; and entry is authorized for the duration of
(ix) Any other equipment necessary entry operations;
for safe entry into and rescue from per- NOTE: Attendants may be assigned to mon-
mit spaces. itor more than one permit space provided the
(5) Evaluate permit space conditions duties described in paragraph (i) of this sec-
tion can be effectively performed for each
as follows when entry operations are
permit space that is monitored. Likewise, at-
conducted: tendants may be stationed at any location
(i) Test conditions in the permit outside the permit space to be monitored as
space to determine if acceptable entry long as the duties described in paragraph (i)
conditions exist before entry is author- of this section can be effectively performed
ized to begin, except that, if isolation for each permit space that is monitored.
of the space is infeasible because the (7) If multiple spaces are to be mon-
space is large or is part of a continuous itored by a single attendant, include in
472
the permit program the means and pro- (14) Review the permit space pro-
cedures to enable the attendant to re- gram, using the canceled permits re-
spond to an emergency affecting one or tained under paragraph (e)(6) of this
more of the permit spaces being mon- section within 1 year after each entry
itored without distraction from the at- and revise the program as necessary, to
tendants responsibilities under para- ensure that employees participating in
graph (i) of this section; entry operations are protected from
(8) Designate the persons who are to permit space hazards.
have active roles (as, for example, au- NOTE: Employers may perform a single an-
nual review covering all entries performed
thorized entrants, attendants, entry
during a 12-month period. If no entry is per-
supervisors, or persons who test or formed during a 12-month period, no review
monitor the atmosphere in a permit is necessary.
space) in entry operations, identify the Appendix C to 1910.146 presents exam-
duties of each such employee, and pro- ples of permit space programs that are
vide each such employee with the considered to comply with the require-
training required by paragraph (g) of ments of paragraph (d) of this section.
this section; (e) Permit system. (1) Before entry is
(9) Develop and implement proce- authorized, the employer shall docu-
dures for summoning rescue and emer- ment the completion of measures re-
gency services, for rescuing entrants quired by paragraph (d)(3) of this sec-
from permit spaces, for providing nection by preparing an entry permit.
essary emergency services to rescued NOTE: Appendix D to 1910.146 presents ex-
employees, and for preventing unau- amples of permits whose elements are con-
thorized personnel from attempting a sidered to comply with the requirements of
rescue; this section.
(10) Develop and implement a system (2) Before entry begins, the entry su-
for the preparation, issuance, use, and pervisor identified on the permit shall
cancellation of entry permits as re- sign the entry permit to authorize
quired by this section; entry.
(3) The completed permit shall be
(11) Develop and implement proce-
made available at the time of entry to
dures to coordinate entry operations
all authorized entrants or their author-
when employees of more than one em-
ized representatives, by posting it at
ployer are working simultaneously as the entry portal or by any other equal-
authorized entrants in a permit space, ly effective means, so that the entrants
so that employees of one employer do can confirm that pre-entry prepara-
not endanger the employees of any tions have been completed.
other employer; (4) The duration of the permit may
(12) Develop and implement proce- not exceed the time required to com-
dures (such as closing off a permit plete the assigned task or job identi-
space and canceling the permit) nec- fied on the permit in accordance with
essary for concluding the entry after paragraph (f)(2) of this section.
entry operations have been completed; (5) The entry supervisor shall termi-
(13) Review entry operations when nate entry and cancel the entry permit
the employer has reason to believe that when:
the measures taken under the permit (i) The entry operations covered by
space program may not protect em- the entry permit have been completed;
ployees and revise the program to cor- or
rect deficiencies found to exist before (ii) A condition that is not allowed
subsequent entries are authorized; and under the entry permit arises in or
NOTE: Examples of circumstances requiring near the permit space.
the review of the permit space program are: (6) The employer shall retain each
any unauthorized entry of a permit space, canceled entry permit for at least 1
the detection of a permit space hazard not year to facilitate the review of the per-
covered by the permit, the detection of a
mit-required confined space program
condition prohibited by the permit, the oc-
currence of an injury or near-miss during required by paragraph (d)(14) of this
entry, a change in the use or configuration section. Any problems encountered
of a permit space, and employee complaints during an entry operation shall be
about the effectiveness of the program. noted on the pertinent permit so that
473
appropriate revisions to the permit (14) Any other information whose in-
space program can be made. clusion is necessary, given the cir-
(f) Entry permit. The entry permit cumstances of the particular confined
that documents compliance with this space, in order to ensure employee
section and authorizes entry to a per- safety; and
mit space shall identify: (15) Any additional permits, such as
(1) The permit space to be entered; for hot work, that have been issued to
(2) The purpose of the entry; authorize work in the permit space.
(3) The date and the authorized dura- (g) Training. (1) The employer shall
tion of the entry permit; provide training so that all employees
(4) The authorized entrants within whose work is regulated by this section
the permit space, by name or by such acquire the understanding, knowledge,
other means (for example, through the and skills necessary for the safe per-
use of rosters or tracking systems) as formance of the duties assigned under
will enable the attendant to determine this section.
quickly and accurately, for the dura- (2) Training shall be provided to each
tion of the permit, which authorized affected employee:
entrants are inside the permit space;
(i) Before the employee is first as-
NOTE: This requirement may be met by in-
serting a reference on the entry permit as to
signed duties under this section;
the means used, such as a roster or tracking (ii) Before there is a change in as-
system, to keep track of the authorized en- signed duties;
trants within the permit space. (iii) Whenever there is a change in
(5) The personnel, by name, currently permit space operations that presents a
serving as attendants; hazard about which an employee has
(6) The individual, by name, cur- not previously been trained;
rently serving as entry supervisor, (iv) Whenever the employer has rea-
with a space for the signature or ini- son to believe either that there are de-
tials of the entry supervisor who origi- viations from the permit space entry
nally authorized entry; procedures required by paragraph (d)(3)
(7) The hazards of the permit space to of this section or that there are inad-
be entered; equacies in the employees knowledge
(8) The measures used to isolate the or use of these procedures.
permit space and to eliminate or con- (3) The training shall establish em-
trol permit space hazards before entry; ployee proficiency in the duties re-
NOTE: Those measures can include the quired by this section and shall intro-
lockout or tagging of equipment and proce-
duce new or revised procedures, as nec-
dures for purging, inerting, ventilating, and
flushing permit spaces. essary, for compliance with this sec-
(9) The acceptable entry conditions; tion.
(10) The results of initial and periodic (4) The employer shall certify that
tests performed under paragraph (d)(5) the training required by paragraphs
of this section, accompanied by the (g)(1) through (g)(3) of this section has
names or initials of the testers and by been accomplished. The certification
an indication of when the tests were shall contain each employees name,
performed; the signatures or initials of the train-
(11) The rescue and emergency serv- ers, and the dates of training. The cer-
ices that can be summoned and the tification shall be available for inspec-
means (such as the equipment to use tion by employees and their authorized
and the numbers to call) for sum- representatives.
moning those services; (h) Duties of authorized entrants. The
(12) The communication procedures employer shall ensure that all author-
used by authorized entrants and at- ized entrants:
tendants to maintain contact during (1) Know the hazards that may be
the entry; faced during entry, including informa-
(13) Equipment, such as personal pro- tion on the mode, signs or symptoms,
tective equipment, testing equipment, and consequences of the exposure;
communications equipment, alarm sys- (2) Properly use equipment as re-
tems, and rescue equipment, to be pro- quired by paragraph (d)(4) of this sec-
vided for compliance with this section; tion;
474
(3) Communicate with the attendant uate the permit space immediately
as necessary to enable the attendant to under any of the following conditions;
monitor entrant status and to enable (i) If the attendant detects a prohib-
the attendant to alert entrants of the ited condition;
need to evacuate the space as required (ii) If the attendant detects the be-
by paragraph (i)(6) of this section; havioral effects of hazard exposure in
(4) Alert the attendant whenever: an authorized entrant;
(i) The entrant recognizes any warn- (iii) If the attendant detects a situa-
ing sign or symptom of exposure to a tion outside the space that could en-
dangerous situation, or danger the authorized entrants; or
(ii) The entrant detects a prohibited (iv) If the attendant cannot effec-
condition; and tively and safely perform all the duties
(5) Exit from the permit space as required under paragraph (i) of this
quickly as possible whenever: section;
(i) An order to evacuate is given by (7) Summon rescue and other emer-
the attendant or the entry supervisor, gency services as soon as the attendant
(ii) The entrant recognizes any warn- determines that authorized entrants
ing sign or symptom of exposure to a may need assistance to escape from
dangerous situation, permit space hazards;
(iii) The entrant detects a prohibited (8) Takes the following actions when
condition, or unauthorized persons approach or enter
(iv) An evacuation alarm is acti- a permit space while entry is under-
vated. way:
(i) Warn the unauthorized persons
(i) Duties of attendants. The employer
that they must stay away from the per-
shall ensure that each attendant:
mit space;
(1) Knows the hazards that may be
(ii) Advise the unauthorized persons
faced during entry, including informa-
that they must exit immediately if
tion on the mode, signs or symptoms,
they have entered the permit space;
and consequences of the exposure;
and
(2) Is aware of possible behavioral ef- (iii) Inform the authorized entrants
fects of hazard exposure in authorized and the entry supervisor if unauthor-
entrants; ized persons have entered the permit
(3) Continuously maintains an accu- space;
rate count of authorized entrants in (9) Performs non-entry rescues as
the permit space and ensures that the specified by the employers rescue pro-
means used to identify authorized en- cedure; and
trants under paragraph (f)(4) of this (10) Performs no duties that might
section accurately identifies who is in interfere with the attendants primary
the permit space; duty to monitor and protect the au-
(4) Remains outside the permit space thorized entrants.
during entry operations until relieved (j) Duties of entry supervisors. The em-
by another attendant; ployer shall ensure that each entry su-
NOTE: When the employers permit entry pervisor:
program allows attendant entry for rescue,
(1) Knows the hazards that may be
attendants may enter a permit space to at-
tempt a rescue if they have been trained and faced during entry, including informa-
equipped for rescue operations as required by tion on the mode, signs or symptoms,
paragraph (k)(1) of this section and if they and consequences of the exposure;
have been relieved as required by paragraph (2) Verifies, by checking that the ap-
(i)(4) of this section. propriate entries have been made on
(5) Communicates with authorized the permit, that all tests specified by
entrants as necessary to monitor en- the permit have been conducted and
trant status and to alert entrants of that all procedures and equipment
the need to evacuate the space under specified by the permit are in place be-
paragraph (i)(6) of this section; fore endorsing the permit and allowing
(6) Monitors activities inside and out- entry to begin;
side the space to determine if it is safe (3) Terminates the entry and cancels
for entrants to remain in the space and the permit as required by paragraph
orders the authorized entrants to evac- (e)(5) of this section;
475
(4) Verifies that rescue services are NOTE to paragraph (k)(1): Non-mandatory
available and that the means for sum- appendix F contains examples of criteria
moning them are operable; which employers can use in evaluating pro-
spective rescuers as required by paragraph
(5) Removes unauthorized individuals
(k)(1) of this section.
who enter or who attempt to enter the
permit space during entry operations; (2) An employer whose employees
and have been designated to provide permit
(6) Determines, whenever responsi- space rescue and emergency services
bility for a permit space entry oper- shall take the following measures:
ation is transferred and at intervals (i) Provide affected employees with
dictated by the hazards and operations the personal protective equipment
performed within the space, that entry (PPE) needed to conduct permit space
operations remain consistent with rescues safely and train affected em-
terms of the entry permit and that ac- ployees so they are proficient in the
ceptable entry conditions are main- use of that PPE, at no cost to those
tained. employees;
(k) Rescue and emergency services. (ii) Train affected employees to per-
(1) An employer who designates res- form assigned rescue duties. The em-
cue and emergency services, pursuant ployer must ensure that such employ-
to paragraph (d)(9) of this section, ees successfully complete the training
shall: required to establish proficiency as an
(i) Evaluate a prospective rescuers authorized entrant, as provided by
ability to respond to a rescue summons paragraphs (g) and (h) of this section;
in a timely manner, considering the (iii) Train affected employees in
hazard(s) identified; basic first-aid and cardiopulmonary re-
suscitation (CPR). The employer shall
NOTE to paragraph (k)(1)(i): What will be
considered timely will vary according to the ensure that at least one member of the
specific hazards involved in each entry. For rescue team or service holding a cur-
example, 1910.134, Respiratory Protection, rent certification in first aid and CPR
requires that employers provide a standby is available; and
person or persons capable of immediate ac- (iv) Ensure that affected employees
tion to rescue employee(s) wearing res- practice making permit space rescues
piratory protection while in work areas de- at least once every 12 months, by
fined as IDLH atmospheres.
means of simulated rescue operations
(ii) Evaluate a prospective rescue in which they remove dummies, mani-
services ability, in terms of pro- kins, or actual persons from the actual
ficiency with rescue-related tasks and permit spaces or from representative
equipment, to function appropriately permit spaces. Representative permit
while rescuing entrants from the par- spaces shall, with respect to opening
ticular permit space or types of permit size, configuration, and accessibility,
spaces identified; simulate the types of permit spaces
(iii) Select a rescue team or service from which rescue is to be performed.
from those evaluated that: (3) To facilitate non-entry rescue, re-
(A) Has the capability to reach the trieval systems or methods shall be
victim(s) within a time frame that is used whenever an authorized entrant
appropriate for the permit space haz- enters a permit space, unless the re-
ard(s) identified; trieval equipment would increase the
(B) Is equipped for and proficient in overall risk of entry or would not con-
performing the needed rescue services; tribute to the rescue of the entrant.
(iv) Inform each rescue team or serv- Retrieval systems shall meet the fol-
ice of the hazards they may confront lowing requirements.
when called on to perform rescue at the (i) Each authorized entrant shall use
site; and a chest or full body harness, with a re-
(v) Provide the rescue team or serv- trieval line attached at the center of
ice selected with access to all permit the entrants back near shoulder level,
spaces from which rescue may be nec- above the entrants head, or at another
essary so that the rescue service can point which the employer can establish
develop appropriate rescue plans and presents a profile small enough for the
practice rescue operations. successful removal of the entrant.
476
Wristlets may be used in lieu of the written information shall be made

chest or full body harness if the em- available to the medical facility treat-
ployer can demonstrate that the use of ing the exposed entrant.
a chest or full body harness is infeasi- (l) Employee participation. (1) Employ-
ble or creates a greater hazard and that ers shall consult with affected employ-
the use of wristlets is the safest and ees and their authorized representa-
most effective alternative. tives on the development and imple-
(ii) The other end of the retrieval line mentation of all aspects of the permit
shall be attached to a mechanical de- space program required by paragraph
vice or fixed point outside the permit (c) of this section.
space in such a manner that rescue can (2) Employers shall make available
begin as soon as the rescuer becomes to affected employees and their author-
aware that rescue is necessary. A me- ized representatives all information re-
chanical device shall be available to required to be developed by this section.
trieve personnel from vertical type per-
mit spaces more than 5 feet (1.52 m) APPENDICES TO 1910.146PERMIT-
deep. REQUIRED CONFINED SPACES
(4) If an injured entrant is exposed to NOTE: Appendices A through F serve to
a substance for which a Material Safe- provide information and non-mandatory
ty Data Sheet (MSDS) or other similar guidelines to assist employers and employees
written information is required to be in complying with the appropriate require-
kept at the worksite, that MSDS or ments of this section.
477
APPENDIX A TO 1910.146PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE DECISION FLOW CHART
APPENDIX B TO 1910.146PROCEDURES FOR ceptable entry conditions for entry into that
ATMOSPHERIC TESTING space exist.
(1) Evaluation testing. The atmosphere of a
Atmospheric testing is required for two
confined space should be analyzed using
distinct purposes: evaluation of the hazards
equipment of sufficient sensitivity and speci-
of the permit space and verification that ac-
ficity to identify and evaluate any hazardous
478
EC27OC91.029</GPH>
atmospheres that may exist or arise, so that Presence of explosive/flammable gases. Equal to
appropriate permit entry procedures can be or greater than 10% of the lower flammable
developed and acceptable entry conditions limit (LFL).
stipulated for that space. Evaluation and in- Oxygen Deficiency. A concentration of oxygen
terpretation of these data, and development in the atmosphere equal to or less than 19.5%
of the entry procedure, should be done by, or by volume.
reviewed by, a technically qualified profes- A. Entry Without Permit/Attendant
sional (e.g., OSHA consultation service, or
Certification. Confined spaces may be entered
certified industrial hygienist, registered
without the need for a written permit or at-
safety engineer, certified safety professional,
tendant provided that the space can be main-
certified marine chemist, etc.) based on eval-
tained in a safe condition for entry by me-
uation of all serious hazards.
chanical ventilation alone, as provided in
(2) Verification testing. The atmosphere of a 1910.146(c)(5). All spaces shall be considered
permit space which may contain a hazardous permit-required confined spaces until the
atmosphere should be tested for residues of pre-entry procedures demonstrate otherwise.
all contaminants identified by evaluation Any employee required or permitted to pre-
testing using permit specified equipment to check or enter an enclosed/confined space
determine that residual concentrations at shall have successfully completed, -as a min-
the time of testing and entry are within the imum, the training as required by the fol-
range of acceptable entry conditions. Results lowing sections of these procedures. A written
of testing (i.e., actual concentration, etc.) copy of operating and rescue procedures as re-
should be recorded on the permit in the quired by these procedures shall be at the work
space provided adjacent to the stipulated ac- site for the duration of the job. The Confined
ceptable entry condition. Space Pre-Entry Check List must be com-
(3) Duration of testing. Measurement of val- pleted by the LEAD WORKER before entry
ues for each atmospheric parameter should into a confined space. This list verifies com-
be made for at least the minimum response pletion of items listed below. This check list
time of the test instrument specified by the shall be kept at the job site for duration of
manufacturer. the job. If circumstances dictate an interrup-
(4) Testing stratified atmospheres. When tion in the work, the permit space must be
monitoring for entries involving a descent re-evaluated and a new check list must be
into atmospheres that may be stratified, the completed.
atmospheric envelope should be tested a dis- Control of atmospheric and engulfment hazards.
tance of approximately 4 feet (1.22 m) in the Pumps and Lines. All pumps and lines which
direction of travel and to each side. If a sam- may reasonably cause contaminants to flow
pling probe is used, the entrants rate of into the space shall be disconnected, blinded
progress should be slowed to accommodate and locked out, or effectively isolated by
the sampling speed and detector response. other means to prevent development of dan-
(5) Order of testing. A test for oxygen is per- gerous air contamination or engulfment. Not
formed first because most combustible gas all laterals to sewers or storm drains require
meters are oxygen dependent and will not blocking. However, where experience or
provide reliable readings in an oxygen defi- knowledge of industrial use indicates there
cient atmosphere. Combustible gasses are is a reasonable potential for contamination
tested for next because the threat of fire or of air or engulfment into an occupied sewer,
explosion is both more immediate and more then all affected laterals shall be blocked. If
life threatening, in most cases, than expo- blocking and/or isolation requires entry into
sure to toxic gasses and vapors. If tests for the space the provisions for entry into a
toxic gasses and vapors are necessary, they permit- required confined space must be im-
are performed last. plemented.
Surveillance. The surrounding area shall be
APPENDIX C TO 1910.146EXAMPLES OF surveyed to avoid hazards such as drifting
PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE PROGRAMS vapors from the tanks, piping, or sewers.
Example 1. Testing. The atmosphere within the space
will be tested to determine whether dan-
Workplace. Sewer entry. gerous air contamination and/or oxygen defi-
Potential hazards. The employees could be ex- ciency exists. Detector tubes, alarm only gas
posed to the following: monitors and explosion meters are examples
of monitoring equipment that may be used
Engulfment. to test permit space atmospheres. Testing
Presence of toxic gases. Equal to or more than shall be performed by the LEAD WORKER
10 ppm hydrogen sulfide measured as an 8- who has successfully completed the Gas De-
hour time-weighted average. If the presence tector training for the monitor he will use.
of other toxic contaminants is suspected, The minimum parameters to be monitored
specific monitoring programs will be devel- are oxygen deficiency, LFL, and hydrogen
oped. sulfide concentration. A written record of
479
the pre-entry test results shall be made and the gas detector training for the monitor he
kept at the work site for the duration of the will use. The minimum parameters to be
job. The supervisor will certify in writing, monitored are oxygen deficiency, LFL and
based upon the results of the pre-entry test- hydrogen sulfide concentration. A written
ing, that all hazards have been eliminated. record of the pre- entry test results shall be
Affected employees shall be able to review made and kept at the work site for the dura-
the testing results. The most hazardous con- tion of the job. Affected employees shall be
ditions shall govern when work is being per- able to review the testing results. The most
formed in two adjoining, connecting spaces. hazardous conditions shall govern when
Entry Procedures. If there are no non-atmos- work is being performed in two adjoining,
pheric hazards present and if the pre-entry connected spaces.
tests show there is no dangerous air con- Space Ventilation. Mechanical ventilation
tamination and/or oxygen deficiency within systems, where applicable, shall be set at
the space and there is no reason to believe 100% outside air. Where possible, open addi-
that any is likely to develop, entry into and tional manholes to increase air circulation.
work within may proceed. Continuous test- Use portable blowers to augment natural cir-
ing of the atmosphere in the immediate vi- culation if needed. After a suitable ven-
cinity of the workers within the space shall tilating period, repeat the testing. Entry
be accomplished. The workers will imme- may not begin until testing has dem-
diately leave the permit space when any of onstrated that the hazardous atmosphere has
the gas monitor alarm set points are reached been eliminated.
as defined. Workers will not return to the Entry Procedures. The following procedure
area until a SUPERVISOR who has com- shall be observed under any of the following
pleted the gas detector training has used a conditions: 1.) Testing demonstrates the ex-
direct reading gas detector to evaluate the istence of dangerous or deficient conditions
situation and has determined that it is safe and additional ventilation cannot reduce
to enter. concentrations to safe levels; 2.) The atmos-
Rescue. Arrangements for rescue services are phere tests as safe but unsafe conditions can
not required where there is no attendant. reasonably be expected to develop; 3.) It is
See the rescue portion of section B., below, not feasible to provide for ready exit from
for instructions regarding rescue planning spaces equipped with automatic fire suppres-
where an entry permit is required. sion systems and it is not practical or safe to
B. Entry Permit Required deactivate such systems; or 4.) An emer-
Permits. Confined Space Entry Permit. All gency exists and it is not feasible to wait for
spaces shall be considered permit-required pre-entry procedures to take effect.
confined spaces until the pre-entry proce- All personnel must be trained. A self con-
dures demonstrate otherwise. Any employee tained breathing apparatus shall be worn by
required or permitted to pre-check or enter a any person entering the space. At least one
permit-required confined space shall have worker shall stand by the outside of the
successfully completed, as a minimum, the space ready to give assistance in case of
training as required by the following sec- emergency. The standby worker shall have a
tions of these procedures. A written copy of self contained breathing apparatus available
operating and rescue procedures as required by for immediate use. There shall be at least
these procedures shall be at the work site for the one additional worker within sight or call of
duration of the job. The Confined Space Entry the standby worker. Continuous powered
Permit must be completed before approval communications shall be maintained be-
can be given to enter a permit-required con- tween the worker within the confined space
fined space. This permit verifies completion and standby personnel.
of items listed below. This permit shall be If at any time there is any questionable ac-
kept at the job site for the duration of the tion or non- movement by the worker inside,
job. If circumstances cause an interruption a verbal check will be made. If there is no re-
in the work or a change in the alarm condi- sponse, the worker will be moved imme-
tions for which entry was approved, a new diately. Exception: If the worker is disabled
Confined Space Entry Permit must be com- due to falling or impact, he/she shall not be
pleted. removed from the confined space unless
there is immediate danger to his/her life.
Control of atmospheric and engulfment hazards.
Local fire department rescue personnel shall
Surveillance. The surrounding area shall be be notified immediately. The standby worker
surveyed to avoid hazards such as drifting may only enter the confined space in case of
vapors from tanks, piping or sewers. an emergency (wearing the self contained
Testing. The confined space atmosphere shall breathing apparatus) and only after being re-
be tested to determine whether dangerous lieved by another worker. Safety belt or har-
air contamination and/or oxygen deficiency ness with attached lifeline shall be used by
exists. A direct reading gas monitor shall be all workers entering the space with the free
used. Testing shall be performed by the SU- end of the line secured outside the entry
PERVISOR who has successfully completed opening. The standby worker shall attempt
480
to remove a disabled worker via his lifeline 7. Electrically shocked by faulty equipment
before entering the space. taken into the cooker/dryer;
When practical, these spaces shall be en- 8. Burned or overcome by fire or products of
tered through side openingsthose within 3 combustion; or
1/2 feet (1.07 m) of the bottom. When entry 9. Overcome by fumes generated by welding
must be through a top opening, the safety or cutting done on grease covered surfaces.
belt shall be of the harness type that sus-
pends a person upright and a hoisting device Permits. The supervisor in this case is always
or similar apparatus shall be available for present at the cooker/dryer or other permit
lifting workers out of the space. entry confined space when entry is made.
In any situation where their use may en- The supervisor must follow the pre-entry iso-
danger the worker, use of a hoisting device lation procedures described in the entry per-
or safety belt and attached lifeline may be mit in preparing for entry, and ensure that
discontinued. the protective clothing, ventilating equip-
When dangerous air contamination is at- ment and any other equipment required by
tributable to flammable and/or explosive the permit are at the entry site.
substances, lighting and electrical equip- Control of hazards. Mechanical. Lock out
ment shall be Class 1, Division 1 rated per main power switch to agitator motor at
National Electrical Code and no ignition main power panel. Affix tag to the lock to
sources shall be introduced into the area. inform others that a permit entry confined
Continuous gas monitoring shall be per- space entry is in progress.
formed during all confined space operations.
Engulfment. Close all valves in the raw mate-
If alarm conditions change adversely, entry
rial blow line. Secure each valve in its closed
personnel shall exit the confined space and a
new confined space permit issued. position using chain and lock. Attach a tag
to the valve and chain warning that a permit
Rescue. Call the fire department services for entry confined space entry is in progress.
rescue. Where immediate hazards to injured The same procedure shall be used for secur-
personnel are present, workers at the site ing the fat recycle valve.
shall implement emergency procedures to fit
the situation. Burns and heat stress. Close steam supply
valves to jacket and secure with chains and
Example 2. tags. Insert solid blank at flange in cooker
Workplace. Meat and poultry rendering vent line to condenser manifold duct system.
plants. Vent cooker/dryer by opening access door at
Cookers and dryers are either batch or con- discharge end and top center door to allow
tinuous in their operation. Multiple batch natural ventilation throughout the entry. If
cookers are operated in parallel. When one faster cooling is needed, use an portable ven-
unit of a multiple set is shut down for re- tilation fan to increase ventilation. Cooling
pairs, means are available to isolate that water may be circulated through the jacket
unit from the others which remain in oper- to reduce both outer and inner surface tem-
ation. peratures of cooker/dryers faster. Check air
Cookers and dryers are horizontal, cylin- and inner surface temperatures in cooker/
drical vessels equipped with a center, rotat- dryer to assure they are within acceptable
ing shaft and agitator paddles or discs. If the limits before entering, or use proper protec-
inner shell is jacketed, it is usually heated tive clothing.
with steam at pressures up to 150 psig (1034.25 Fire and fume hazards. Careful site prepara-
kPa). The rotating shaft assembly of the tion, such as cleaning the area within 4
continuous cooker or dryer is also steam inches (10.16 cm) of all welding or torch cut-
heated. ting operations, and proper ventilation are
Potential Hazards. The recognized hazards as- the preferred controls. All welding and cut-
sociated with cookers and dryers are the risk ting operations shall be done in accordance
that employees could be: with the requirements of 29 CFR Part 1910,
1. Struck or caught by rotating agitator; Subpart Q, OSHAs welding standard. Proper
2. Engulfed in raw material or hot, recycled ventilation may be achieved by local exhaust
fat; ventilation, or the use of portable ventila-
3. Burned by steam from leaks into the cook- tion fans, or a combination of the two prac-
er/dryer steam jacket or the condenser duct tices.
system if steam valves are not properly Electrical shock. Electrical equipment used in
closed and locked out; cooker/dryers shall be in serviceable condi-
4. Burned by contact with hot metal sur- tion.
faces, such as the agitator shaft assembly, or
inner shell of the cooker/dryer; Slips and falls. Remove residual grease before
5. Heat stress caused by warm atmosphere entering cooker/dryer.
inside cooker/dryer; Attendant. The supervisor shall be the at-
6. Slipping and falling on grease in the cook- tendant for employees entering cooker/dry-
er/dryer; ers.
481
Permit. The permit shall specify how isola- er, dry bulk trailer or truck, etc. meet per-
tion shall be done and any other prepara- mit requirements before authorizing entry.
tions needed before making entry. This is es- Attendant. The area supervisor shall des-
pecially important in parallel arrangements ignate an employee to maintain communica-
of cooker/dryers so that the entire operation tion by employer specified means with em-
need not be shut down to allow safe entry ployees working in tanks to ensure their
into one unit. safety. The attendant may not enter any
Rescue. When necessary, the attendant shall permit entry confined space to rescue an en-
call the fire department as previously ar- trant or for any other reason, unless author-
ranged. ized by the rescue procedure and, and even
then, only after calling the rescue team and
Example 3. being relieved by as attendant by another
Workplace. Workplaces where tank cars, worker.
trucks, and trailers, dry bulk tanks and Communications and observation. Communica-
trailers, railroad tank cars, and similar port- tions between attendant and entrant(s) shall
able tanks are fabricated or serviced. be maintained throughout entry. Methods of
A. During fabrication. These tanks and dry- communication that may be specified by the
bulk carriers are entered repeatedly permit include voice, voice powered radio,
throughout the fabrication process. These tapping or rapping codes on tank walls, sig-
products are not configured identically, but nalling tugs on a rope, and the attendants
the manufacturing processes by which they observation that work activities such as
are made are very similar. chipping, grinding, welding, spraying, etc.,
Sources of hazards. In addition to the me- which require deliberate operator control
chanical hazards arising from the risks that continue normally. These activities often
an entrant would be injured due to contact generate so much noise that the necessary
with components of the tank or the tools hearing protection makes communication by
being used, there is also the risk that a voice difficult.
worker could be injured by breathing fumes Rescue procedures. Acceptable rescue proce-
from welding materials or mists or vapors dures include entry by a team of employee-
from materials used to coat the tank inte- rescuers, use of public emergency services,
rior. In addition, many of these vapors and and procedures for breaching the tank. The
mists are flammable, so the failure to prop- area permit specifies which procedures are
erly ventilate a tank could lead to a fire or available, but the area supervisor makes the
explosion. final decision based on circumstances. (Cer-
Control of hazards. tain injuries may make it necessary to
Welding. Local exhaust ventilation shall be breach the tank to remove a person rather
used to remove welding fumes once the tank than risk additional injury by removal
or carrier is completed to the point that through an existing manhole. However, the
workers may enter and exit only through a supervisor must ensure that no breaching
manhole. (Follow the requirements of 29 CFR procedure used for rescue would violate
1910, Subpart Q, OSHAs welding standard, at terms of the entry permit. For instance, if
all times.) Welding gas tanks may never be the tank must be breached by cutting with a
brought into a tank or carrier that is a per- torch, the tank surfaces to be cut must be
mit entry confined space. free of volatile or combustible coatings with-
Application of interior coatings/linings. At- in 4 inches (10.16 cm) of the cutting line and
mospheric hazards shall be controlled by the atmosphere within the tank must be
forced air ventilation sufficient to keep the below the LFL.
atmospheric concentration of flammable ma- Retrieval line and harnesses. The retrieval
terials below 10% of the lower flammable lines and harnesses generally required under
limit (LFL) (or lower explosive limit (LEL), this standard are usually impractical for use
whichever term is used locally). The appro- in tanks because the internal configuration
priate respirators are provided and shall be of the tanks and their interior baffles and
used in addition to providing forced ventila- other structures would prevent rescuers from
tion if the forced ventilation does not main- hauling out injured entrants. However, un-
tain acceptable respiratory conditions. less the rescue procedure calls for breaching
Permits. Because of the repetitive nature of the tank for rescue, the rescue team shall be
the entries in these operations, an Area trained in the use of retrieval lines and har-
Entry Permit will be issued for a 1 month nesses for removing injured employees
period to cover those production areas where through manholes.
tanks are fabricated to the point that entry B. Repair or service of used tanks and bulk
and exit are made using manholes. trailers.
Authorization. Only the area supervisor may Sources of hazards. In addition to facing the
authorize an employee to enter a tank with- potential hazards encountered in fabrication
in the permit area. The area supervisor must or manufacturing, tanks or trailers which
determine that conditions in the tank trail- have been in service may contain residues of
482
dangerous materials, whether left over from (Follow the requirements of 29 CFR 1910,
the transportation of hazardous cargoes or Subpart Q, OSHAs welding standard, at all
generated by chemical or bacterial action on times.)
residues of non-hazardous cargoes. Permits. An entry permit valid for up to 1
Control of atmospheric hazards. A used tank year shall be issued prior to authorization of
shall be brought into areas where tank entry entry into used tank trailers, dry bulk trail-
is authorized only after the tank has been ers or trucks. In addition to the pre-entry
emptied, cleansed (without employee entry) cleaning requirement, this permit shall re-
of any residues, and purged of any potential quire the employee safeguards specified for
atmospheric hazards. new tank fabrication or construction permit
Welding. In addition to tank cleaning for areas.
control of atmospheric hazards, coating and Authorization. Only the area supervisor may
surface materials shall be removed 4 inches authorize an employee to enter a tank trail-
(10.16 cm) or more from any surface area er, dry bulk trailer or truck within the per-
where welding or other torch work will be mit area. The area supervisor must deter-
done and care taken that the atmosphere mine that the entry permit requirements
within the tank remains well below the LFL. have been met before authorizing entry.
483
APPENDIX D TO 1910.146SAMPLE PERMITS
484
EC27OC91.030</GPH>
APPENDIX E TO 1910.146SEWER SYSTEM exists any way to completely isolate the

ENTRY space (a section of a continuous system) to
be entered; second, because isolation is not
Sewer entry differs in three vital respects
complete, the atmosphere may suddenly and
from other permit entries; first, there rarely
485
EC27OC91.031</GPH>
unpredictably become lethally hazardous entry. Only the employer can decide, based
(toxic, flammable or explosive) from causes upon his or her knowledge of, and experience
beyond the control of the entrant or em- with permit spaces in sewer systems, what
ployer, and third, experienced sewer workers the best type of testing instrument may be
are especially knowledgeable in entry and for any specific entry operation.
work in their permit spaces because of their The selected testing instrument should be
frequent entries. Unlike other employments carried and used by the entrant in sewer line
where permit space entry is a rare and excep- work to monitor the atmosphere in the en-
tional event, sewer workers usual work entrants environment, and in advance of the
vironment is a permit space. entrants direction of movement, to warn the
(1) Adherence to procedure. The employer entrant of any deterioration in atmospheric
should designate as entrants only employees conditions. Where several entrants are work-
who are thoroughly trained in the employing together in the same immediate loca-
ers sewer entry procedures and who dem- tion, one instrument, used by the lead en-
onstrate that they follow these entry proce- trant, is acceptable.
dures exactly as prescribed when performing (3) Surge flow and flooding. Sewer crews
sewer entries. should develop and maintain liaison, to the
(2) Atmospheric monitoring. Entrants should extent possible, with the local weather bu-
be trained in the use of, and be equipped reau and fire and emergency services in their
with, atmospheric monitoring equipment area so that sewer work may be delayed or
which sounds an audible alarm, in addition interrupted and entrants withdrawn when-
to its visual readout, whenever one of the ever sewer lines might be suddenly flooded
following conditions are encountered: Oxy- by rain or fire suppression activities, or
gen concentration less than 19.5 percent; whenever flammable or other hazardous ma-
flammable gas or vapor at 10 percent or more terials are released into sewers during emer-
of the lower flammable limit (LFL); or hy- gencies by industrial or transportation acci-
drogen sulfide or carbon monoxide at or dents.
above 10 ppm or 35 ppm, respectively, meas- (4) Special Equipment. Entry into large bore
ured as an 8-hour time-weighted average. At- sewers may require the use of special equip-
mospheric monitoring equipment needs to be ment. Such equipment might include such
calibrated according to the manufacturers items as atmosphere monitoring devices
instructions. The oxygen sensor/broad range with automatic audible alarms, escape self-
sensor is best suited for initial use in situa- contained breathing apparatus (ESCBA) with
tions where the actual or potential contami- at least 10 minute air supply (or other
nants have not been identified, because NIOSH approved self-rescuer), and water-
broad range sensors, unlike substance-spe- proof flashlights, and may also include boats
cific sensors, enable employers to obtain an and rafts, radios and rope stand-offs for pull-
overall reading of the hydrocarbons ing around bends and corners as needed.
(flammables) present in the space. However,
such sensors only indicate that a hazardous APPENDIX F TO 1910.146RESCUE TEAM OR
threshold of a class of chemicals has been ex- RESCUE SERVICE EVALUATION CRITERIA
ceeded. They do not measure the levels of (NON-MANDATORY)
contamination of specific substances. There- (1) This appendix provides guidance to em-
fore, substance-specific devices, which meas- ployers in choosing an appropriate rescue
ure the actual levels of specific substances, service. It contains criteria that may be used
are best suited for use where actual and po- to evaluate the capabilities both of prospec-
tential contaminants have been identified. tive and current rescue teams. Before a res-
The measurements obtained with substance- cue team can be trained or chosen, however,
specific devices are of vital importance to a satisfactory permit program, including an
the employer when decisions are made con- analysis of all permit-required confined
cerning the measures necessary to protect spaces to identify all potential hazards in
entrants (such as ventilation or personal those spaces, must be completed. OSHA be-
protective equipment) and the setting and lieves that compliance with all the provi-
attainment of appropriate entry conditions. sions of 1910.146 will enable employers to
However, the sewer environment may sud- conduct permit space operations without re-
denly and unpredictably change, and the sub- course to rescue services in nearly all cases.
stance-specific devices may not detect the However, experience indicates that cir-
potentially lethal atmospheric hazards cumstances will arise where entrants will
which may enter the sewer environment. need to be rescued from permit spaces. It is
Although OSHA considers the information therefore important for employers to select
and guidance provided above to be appro- rescue services or teams, either on-site or
priate and useful in most sewer entry situa- off-site, that are equipped and capable of
tions, the Agency emphasizes that each em- minimizing harm to both entrants and res-
ployer must consider the unique cir- cuers if the need arises.
cumstances, including the predictability of (2) For all rescue teams or services, the
the atmosphere, of the sewer permit spaces employers evaluation should consist of two
in the employers workplace in preparing for components: an initial evaluation, in which
486
employers decide whether a potential rescue potential bottlenecks or traffic congestion
service or team is adequately trained and that might be encountered in transit, the re-
equipped to perform permit space rescues of liability of the rescuers vehicles, and the
the kind needed at the facility and whether training and skill of its drivers.
such rescuers can respond in a timely man- 3. What is the availability of the rescue
ner, and a performance evaluation, in which service? Is it unavailable at certain times of
employers measure the performance of the the day or in certain situations? What is the
team or service during an actual or practice likelihood that key personnel of the rescue
rescue. For example, based on the initial service might be unavailable at times? If the
evaluation, an employer may determine that rescue service becomes unavailable while an
maintaining an on-site rescue team will be entry is underway, does it have the capa-
more expensive than obtaining the services bility of notifying the employer so that the
of an off-site team, without being signifi- employer can instruct the attendant to abort
cantly more effective, and decide to hire a the entry immediately?
rescue service. During a performance evalua- 4. Does the rescue service meet all the re-
tion, the employer could decide, after ob- quirements of paragraph (k)(2) of the stand-
serving the rescue service perform a practice ard? If not, has it developed a plan that will
rescue, that the services training or pre- enable it to meet those requirements in the
paredness was not adequate to effect a time- future? If so, how soon can the plan be imple-
ly or effective rescue at his or her facility mented?
and decide to select another rescue service, 5. For off-site services, is the service will-
or to form an internal rescue team. ing to perform rescues at the employers
workplace? (An employer may not rely on a
A. Initial Evaluation rescuer who declines, for whatever reason, to
I. The employer should meet with the pro- provide rescue services.)
spective rescue service to facilitate the eval- 6. Is an adequate method for communica-
uations required by 1910.146(k)(1)(i) and tions between the attendant, employer and
1910.146(k)(1)(ii). At a minimum, if an off- prospective rescuer available so that a res-
site rescue service is being considered, the cue request can be transmitted to the res-
employer must contact the service to plan cuer without delay? How soon after notifica-
and coordinate the evaluations required by tion can a prospective rescuer dispatch a res-
the standard. Merely posting the services cue team to the entry site?
number or planning to rely on the 911 emer- 7. For rescues into spaces that may pose
gency phone number to obtain these services significant atmospheric hazards and from
at the time of a permit space emergency which rescue entry, patient packaging and
would not comply with paragraph (k)(1) of retrieval cannot be safely accomplished in a
the standard. relatively short time (1520 minutes), em-
II. The capabilities required of a rescue ployers should consider using airline res-
service vary with the type of permit spaces pirators (with escape bottles) for the res-
from which rescue may be necessary and the cuers and to supply rescue air to the patient.
hazards likely to be encountered in those If the employer decides to use SCBA, does
spaces. Answering the questions below will the prospective rescue service have an ample
assist employers in determining whether the supply of replacement cylinders and proce-
rescue service is capable of performing res- dures for rescuers to enter and exit (or be re-
cues in the permit spaces present at the em- trieved) well within the SCBAs air supply
ployers workplace. limits?
1. What are the needs of the employer with 8. If the space has a vertical entry over 5
regard to response time (time for the rescue feet in depth, can the prospective rescue
service to receive notification, arrive at the service properly perform entry rescues? Does
scene, and set up and be ready for entry)? the service have the technical knowledge
For example, if entry is to be made into an and equipment to perform rope work or ele-
IDLH atmosphere, or into a space that can vated rescue, if needed?
quickly develop an IDLH atmosphere (if ven- 9. Does the rescue service have the nec-
tilation fails or for other reasons), the rescue essary skills in medical evaluation, patient
team or service would need to be standing by packaging and emergency response?
at the permit space. On the other hand, if 10. Does the rescue service have the nec-
the danger to entrants is restricted to me- essary equipment to perform rescues, or
chanical hazards that would cause injuries must the equipment be provided by the em-
(e.g., broken bones, abrasions) a response ployer or another source?
time of 10 or 15 minutes might be adequate. B. Performance Evaluation
2. How quickly can the rescue team or
service get from its location to the permit Rescue services are required by paragraph
spaces from which rescue may be necessary? (k)(2)(iv) of the standard to practice rescues
Relevant factors to consider would include: at least once every 12 months, provided that
the location of the rescue team or service the team or service has not successfully per-
relative to the employers workplace, the formed a permit space rescue within that
quality of roads and highways to be traveled, time. As part of each practice session, the
487
service should perform a critique of the prac- that are worst-case or most restrictive
tice rescue, or have another qualified party with respect to internal configuration, ele-
perform the critique, so that deficiencies in vation, and portal size. The following charac-
procedures, equipment, training, or number teristics of a practice space should be consid-
of personnel can be identified and corrected. ered when deciding whether a space is truly
The results of the critique, and the correc- representative of an actual permit space:
tions made to respond to the deficiencies (1) Internal configuration.
identified, should be given to the employer (a) Openthere are no obstacles, barriers,
to enable it to determine whether the rescue or obstructions within the space. One exam-
service can quickly be upgraded to meet the ple is a water tank.
employers rescue needs or whether another (b) Obstructedthe permit space contains
service must be selected. The following ques- some type of obstruction that a rescuer
tions will assist employers and rescue teams would need to maneuver around. An example
and services evaluate their performance. would be a baffle or mixing blade. Large
1. Have all members of the service been equipment, such as a ladder or scaffold,
trained as permit space entrants, at a min- brought into a space for work purposes
imum, including training in the potential would be considered an obstruction if the po-
hazards of all permit spaces, or of represent- sitioning or size of the equipment would
ative permit spaces, from which rescue may make rescue more difficult.
be needed? Can team members recognize the (2) Elevation.
signs, symptoms, and consequences of expo- (a) Elevateda permit space where the en-
sure to any hazardous atmospheres that may trance portal or opening is above grade by 4
be present in those permit spaces? feet or more. This type of space usually re-
2. Is every team member provided with, quires knowledge of high angle rescue proce-
and properly trained in, the use and need for dures because of the difficulty in packaging
PPE, such as SCBA or fall arrest equipment, and transporting a patient to the ground
which may be required to perform permit from the portal.
space rescues in the facility? Is every team (b) Non-elevateda permit space with the
member properly trained to perform his or entrance portal located less than 4 feet above
her functions and make rescues, and to use grade. This type of space will allow the res-
any rescue equipment, such as ropes and cue team to transport an injured employee
backboards, that may be needed in a rescue normally.
attempt? (3) Portal size.
3. Are team members trained in the first
(a) RestrictedA portal of 24 inches or less
aid and medical skills needed to treat vic-
in the least dimension. Portals of this size
tims overcome or injured by the types of
are too small to allow a rescuer to simply
hazards that may be encountered in the per-
enter the space while using SCBA. The por-
mit spaces at the facility?
tal size is also too small to allow normal spi-
4. Do all team members perform their func-
nal immobilization of an injured employee.
tions safely and efficiently? Do rescue serv-
(b) UnrestrictedA portal of greater than
ice personnel focus on their own safety be-
24 inches in the least dimension. These por-
fore considering the safety of the victim?
tals allow relatively free movement into and
5. If necessary, can the rescue service prop-
out of the permit space.
erly test the atmosphere to determine if it is
(4) Space access.
IDLH?
(a) HorizontalThe portal is located on
6. Can the rescue personnel identify infor-
the side of the permit space. Use of retrieval
mation pertinent to the rescue from entry
lines could be difficult.
permits, hot work permits, and MSDSs?
(b) VerticalThe portal is located on the
7. Has the rescue service been informed of
top of the permit space, so that rescuers
any hazards to personnel that may arise
must climb down, or the bottom of the per-
from outside the space, such as those that
mit space, so that rescuers must climb up to
may be caused by future work near the
enter the space. Vertical portals may require
space?
8. If necessary, can the rescue service prop- knowledge of rope techniques, or special pa-
erly package and retrieve victims from a tient packaging to safely retrieve a downed
permit space that has a limited size opening entrant.
(less than 24 inches (60.9 cm) in diameter), [58 FR 4549, Jan. 14, 1993; 58 FR 34845, 34846,
limited internal space, or internal obstacles June 29, 1993, as amended at 59 FR 26114, May
or hazards? 19, 1994; 63 FR 66038, 66039, Dec. 1, 1998]
9. If necessary, can the rescue service safe-
ly perform an elevated (high angle) rescue? 1910.147 The control of hazardous
10. Does the rescue service have a plan for energy (lockout/tagout).
each of the kinds of permit space rescue op-
erations at the facility? Is the plan adequate (a) Scope, application and purpose(1)
for all types of rescue operations that may Scope. (i) This standard covers the serv-
be needed at the facility? Teams may prac- icing and maintenance of machines and
tice in representative spaces, or in spaces equipment in which the unexpected
488
energization or start up of the ma- ment is controlled by the unplugging of

chines or equipment, or release of the equipment from the energy source
stored energy could cause injury to em- and by the plug being under the exclu-
ployees. This standard establishes min- sive control of the employee per-
imum performance requirements for forming the servicing or maintenance.
the control of such hazardous energy. (B) Hot tap operations involving
(ii) This standard does not cover the transmission and distribution systems
following: for substances such as gas, steam,
(A) Construction, agriculture and water or petroleum products when they
maritime employment; are performed on pressurized pipelines,
(B) Installations under the exclusive provided that the employer dem-
control of electric utilities for the pur- onstrates that (1) continuity of service
pose of power generation, transmission is essential; (2) shutdown of the system
and distribution, including related is impractical; and (3) documented pro-
equipment for communication or me- cedures are followed, and special equip-
tering; and ment is used which will provide proven
(C) Exposure to electrical hazards effective protection for employees.
from work on, near, or with conductors (3) Purpose. (i) This section requires
or equipment in electric utilization in- employers to establish a program and
stallations, which is covered by sub- utilize procedures for affixing appro-
part S of this part; and priate lockout devices or tagout de-
(D) Oil and gas well drilling and serv- vices to energy isolating devices, and
icing. to otherwise disable machines or equip-
(2) Application. (i) This standard ap- ment to prevent unexpected
plies to the control of energy during energization, start-up or release of
servicing and/or maintenance of ma- stored energy in order to prevent in-
chines and equipment. jury to employees.
(ii) Normal production operations are (ii) When other standards in this part
not covered by this standard (See sub- require the use of lockout or tagout,
part 0 of this part). Servicing and/or they shall be used and supplemented by
maintenance which takes place during the procedural and training require-
normal production operations is cov- ments of this section.
ered by this standard only if;: (b) Definitions applicable to this sec-
(A) An employee is required to re- tion.
move or bypass a guard or other safety Affected employee. An employee whose
device; or job requires him/her to operate or use a
(B) An employee is required to place machine or equipment on which serv-
any part of his or her body into an area icing or maintenance is being per-
on a machine or piece of equipment formed under lockout or tagout, or
where work is actually performed upon whose job requires him/her to work in
the material being processed (point of an area in which such servicing or
operation) or where an associated dan- maintenance is being performed.
ger zone exists during a machine oper- Authorized employee. A person who
ating cycle. locks out or tags out machines or
NOTE: Exception to paragraph (a)(2)(ii): equipment in order to perform serv-
Minor tool changes and adjustments, and icing or maintenance on that machine
other minor servicing activities, which take or equipment. An affected employee be-
place during normal production operations, comes an authorized employee when
are not covered by this standard if they are
that employees duties include per-
routine, repetitive, and integral to the use of
the equipment for production, provided that forming servicing or maintenance cov-
the work is performed using alternative ered under this section.
measures which provide effective protection Capable of being locked out. An energy
(See subpart 0 of this part). isolating device is capable of being
(iii) This standard does not apply to locked out if it has a hasp or other
the following. means of attachment to which, or
(A) Work on cord and plug connected through which, a lock can be affixed, or
electric equipment for which exposure it has a locking mechanism built into
to the hazards of unexpected it. Other energy isolating devices are
energization or start up of the equip- capable of being locked out, if lockout
489
can be achieved without the need to specting, modifying, and maintaining

dismantle, rebuild, or replace the en- and/or servicing machines or equip-
ergy isolating device or permanently ment. These activities include lubrica-
alter its energy control capability. tion, cleaning or unjamming of ma-
Energized. Connected to an energy chines or equipment and making ad-
source or containing residual or stored justments or tool changes, where the
energy. employee may be exposed to the unex-
Energy isolating device. A mechanical pected energization or startup of the
device that physically prevents the equipment or release of hazardous en-
transmission or release of energy, in- ergy.
cluding but not limited to the fol- Setting up. Any work performed to
lowing: A manually operated electrical prepare a machine or equipment to per-
circuit breaker; a disconnect switch; a
form its normal production operation.
manually operated switch by which the
Tagout. The placement of a tagout
conductors of a circuit can be discon-
nected from all ungrounded supply con- device on an energy isolating device, in
ductors, and, in addition, no pole can accordance with an established proce-
be operated independently; a line dure, to indicate that the energy iso-
valve; a block; and any similar device lating device and the equipment being
used to block or isolate energy. Push controlled may not be operated until
buttons, selector switches and other the tagout device is removed.
control circuit type devices are not en- Tagout device. A prominent warning
ergy isolating devices. device, such as a tag and a means of at-
Energy source. Any source of elec- tachment, which can be securely fas-
trical, mechanical, hydraulic, pneu- tened to an energy isolating device in
matic, chemical, thermal, or other en- accordance with an established proce-
ergy. dure, to indicate that the energy iso-
Hot tap. A procedure used in the relating device and the equipment being
pair, maintenance and services activi- controlled may not be operated until
ties which involves welding on a piece the tagout device is removed.
of equipment (pipelines, vessels or (c) General(1) Energy control pro-
tanks) under pressure, in order to in- gram. The employer shall establish a
stall connections or appurtenances. It program consisting of energy control
is commonly used to replace or add procedures, employee training and
sections of pipeline without the inter- periodic inspections to ensure that be-
ruption of service for air, gas, water, fore any employee performs any serv-
steam, and petrochemical distribution icing or maintenance on a machine or
systems. equipment where the unexpected ener-
Lockout. The placement of a lockout
gizing, start up or release of stored en-
device on an energy isolating device, in
ergy could occur and cause injury, the
accordance with an established proce-
machine or equipment shall be isolated
dure, ensuring that the energy iso-
from the energy source, and rendered
lating device and the equipment being
inoperative.
controlled cannot be operated until the
lockout device is removed. (2) Lockout/tagout. (i) If an energy iso-
Lockout device. A device that utilizes lating device is not capable of being
a positive means such as a lock, either locked out, the employers energy con-
key or combination type, to hold an trol program under paragraph (c)(1) of
energy isolating device in a safe posi- this section shall utilize a tagout sys-
tion and prevent the energizing of a tem.
machine or equipment. Included are (ii) If an energy isolating device is
blank flanges and bolted slip blinds. capable of being locked out, the em-
Normal production operations. The uti- ployers energy control program under
lization of a machine or equipment to paragraph (c)(1) of this section shall
perform its intended production func- utilize lockout, unless the employer
tion. can demonstrate that the utilization of
Servicing and/or maintenance. Work- a tagout system will provide full em-
place activities such as constructing, ployee protection as set forth in para-
installing, setting up, adjusting, in- graph (c)(3) of this section.
490
(iii) After January 2, 1990, whenever icing or maintenance; (5) a single lockout de-
replacement or major repair, renova- vice will achieve a locked-out condition; (6)
tion or modification of a machine or the lockout device is under the exclusive
control of the authorized employee per-
equipment is performed, and whenever forming the servicing or maintenance; (7)
new machines or equipment are in- the servicing or maintenance does not create
stalled, energy isolating devices for hazards for other employees; and (8) the em-
such machine or equipment shall be de- ployer, in utilizing this exception, has had
signed to accept a lockout device. no accidents involving the unexpected acti-
(3) Full employee protection. (i) When a vation or reenergization of the machine or
tagout device is used on an energy iso- equipment during servicing or maintenance.
lating device which is capable of being (ii) The procedures shall clearly and
locked out, the tagout device shall be specifically outline the scope, purpose,
attached at the same location that the authorization, rules, and techniques to
lockout device would have been at- be utilized for the control of hazardous
tached, and the employer shall dem- energy, and the means to enforce com-
onstrate that the tagout program will pliance including, but not limited to,
provide a level of safety equivalent to the following:
that obtained by using a lockout pro- (A) A specific statement of the in-
gram. tended use of the procedure;
(ii) In demonstrating that a level of (B) Specific procedural steps for
safety is achieved in the tagout pro- shutting down, isolating, blocking and
gram which is equivalent to the level securing machines or equipment to
of safety obtained by using a lockout control hazardous energy;
program, the employer shall dem- (C) Specific procedural steps for the
onstrate full compliance with all placement, removal and transfer of
tagout-related provisions of this stand- lockout devices or tagout devices and
ard together with such additional ele- the responsibility for them; and
ments as are necessary to provide the (D) Specific requirements for testing
equivalent safety available from the a machine or equipment to determine
use of a lockout device. Additional and verify the effectiveness of lockout
means to be considered as part of the devices, tagout devices, and other en-
demonstration of full employee protec- ergy control measures.
tion shall include the implementation (5) Protective materials and hardware.
of additional safety measures such as (i) Locks, tags, chains, wedges, key
the removal of an isolating circuit ele- blocks, adapter pins, self-locking fas-
ment, blocking of a controlling switch, teners, or other hardware shall be pro-
opening of an extra disconnecting de- vided by the employer for isolating, se-
vice, or the removal of a valve handle curing or blocking of machines or
to reduce the likelihood of inadvertent equipment from energy sources.
energization. (ii) Lockout devices and tagout de-
(4) Energy control procedure. (i) Proce- vices shall be singularly identified;
dures shall be developed, documented shall be the only devices(s) used for
and utilized for the control of poten- controlling energy; shall not be used
tially hazardous energy when employ- for other purposes; and shall meet the
ees are engaged in the activities cov- following requirements:
ered by this section. (A) Durable. (1) Lockout and tagout
NOTE: Exception: The employer need not devices shall be capable of with-
document the required procedure for a par- standing the environment to which
ticular machine or equipment, when all of they are exposed for the maximum pe-
the following elements exist: (1) The ma- riod of time that exposure is expected.
chine or equipment has no potential for (2) Tagout devices shall be con-
stored or residual energy or reaccumulation structed and printed so that exposure
of stored energy after shut down which could to weather conditions or wet and damp
endanger employees; (2) the machine or locations will not cause the tag to de-
equipment has a single energy source which
teriorate or the message on the tag to
can be readily identified and isolated; (3) the
isolation and locking out of that energy
become illegible.
source will completely deenergize and de- (3) Tags shall not deteriorate when
activate the machine or equipment; (4) the used in corrosive environments such as
machine or equipment is isolated from that areas where acid and alkali chemicals
energy source and locked out during serv- are handled and stored.
491
(B) Standardized. Lockout and tagout include a review, between the inspector
devices shall be standardized within and each authorized and affected em-
the facility in at least one of the fol- ployee, of that employees responsibil-
lowing criteria: Color; shape; or size; ities under the energy control proce-
and additionally, in the case of tagout dure being inspected, and the elements
devices, print and format shall be set forth in paragraph (c)(7)(ii) of this
standardized. section.
(C) Substantial(1) Lockout devices. (ii) The employer shall certify that
Lockout devices shall be substantial the periodic inspections have been per-
enough to prevent removal without the formed. The certification shall identify
use of excessive force or unusual tech- the machine or equipment on which
niques, such as with the use of bolt the energy control procedure was being
cutters or other metal cutting tools. utilized, the date of the inspection, the
(2) Tagout devices. Tagout devices, in- employees included in the inspection,
cluding and their means of attachment, and the person performing the inspec-
shall be substantial enough to prevent tion.
inadvertent or accidental removal. (7) Training and communication. (i)
Tagout device attachment means shall The employer shall provide training to
be of a non-reusable type, attachable ensure that the purpose and function of
by hand, self-locking, and non-releas- the energy control program are under-
able with a minimum unlocking stood by employees and that the
strength of no less than 50 pounds and knowledge and skills required for the
having the general design and basic safe application, usage, and removal of
characteristics of being at least equiv- the energy controls are acquired by
alent to a one-piece, all-environment- employees. The training shall include
tolerant nylon cable tie. the following:
(D) Identifiable. Lockout devices and
(A) Each authorized employee shall
tagout devices shall indicate the iden-
receive training in the recognition of
tity of the employee applying the de-
applicable hazardous energy sources,
vice(s).
the type and magnitude of the energy
(iii) Tagout devices shall warn
available in the workplace, and the
against hazardous conditions if the ma-
methods and means necessary for en-
chine or equipment is energized and
ergy isolation and control.
shall include a legend such as the fol-
lowing: Do Not Start, Do Not Open, Do (B) Each affected employee shall be
Not Close, Do Not Energize, Do Not Oper- instructed in the purpose and use of
ate. the energy control procedure.
(6) Periodic inspection. (i) The em- (C) All other employees whose work
ployer shall conduct a periodic inspec- operations are or may be in an area
tion of the energy control procedure at where energy control procedures may
least annually to ensure that the probe utilized, shall be instructed about
cedure and the requirements of this the procedure, and about the prohibi-
standard are being followed. tion relating to attempts to restart or
(A) The periodic inspection shall be reenergize machines or equipment
perfomed by an authorized employee which are locked out or tagged out.
other than the ones(s) utilizing the en- (ii) When tagout systems are used,
ergy control procedure being inspected. employees shall also be trained in the
(B) The periodic inspection shall be following limitations of tags:
conducted to correct any deviations or (A) Tags are essentially warning de-
inadequacies identified. vices affixed to energy isolating de-
(C) Where lockout is used for energy vices, and do not provide the physical
control, the periodic inspection shall restraint on those devices that is pro-
include a review, between the inspector vided by a lock.
and each authorized employee, of that (B) When a tag is attached to an en-
employees responsibilities under the ergy isolating means, it is not to be re-
energy control procedure being in- moved without authorization of the au-
spected. thorized person responsible for it, and
(D) Where tagout is used for energy it is never to be bypassed, ignored, or
control, the periodic inspection shall otherwise defeated.
492
(C) Tags must be legible and under- elements and actions and shall be done
standable by all authorized employees, in the following sequence:
affected employees, and all other em- (1) Preparation for shutdown. Before
ployees whose work operations are or an authorized or affected employee
may be in the area, in order to be effec- turns off a machine or equipment, the
tive. authorized employee shall have knowl-
(D) Tags and their means of attach- edge of the type and magnitude of the
ment must be made of materials which energy, the hazards of the energy to be
will withstand the environmental con- controlled, and the method or means to
ditions encountered in the workplace. control the energy.
(E) Tags may evoke a false sense of (2) Machine or equipment shutdown.
security, and their meaning needs to be The machine or equipment shall be
understood as part of the overall en- turned off or shut down using the pro-
ergy control program. cedures established for the machine or
(F) Tags must be securely attached equipment. An orderly shutdown must
to energy isolating devices so that they be utilized to avoid any additional or
cannot be inadvertently or acciden- increased hazard(s) to employees as a
tally detached during use. result of the equipment stoppage.
(iii) Employee retraining. (3) Machine or equipment isolation. All
(A) Retraining shall be provided for energy isolating devices that are need-
all authorized and affected employees
ed to control the energy to the ma-
whenever there is a change in their job
chine or equipment shall be physically
assignments, a change in machines,
located and operated in such a manner
equipment or processes that present a
as to isolate the machine or equipment
new hazard, or when there is a change
from the energy source(s).
in the energy control procedures.
(4) Lockout or tagout device applica-
(B) Additional retraining shall also
tion. (i) Lockout or tagout devices shall
be conducted whenever a periodic in-
be affixed to each energy isolating de-
spection under paragraph (c)(6) of this
vice by authorized employees.
section reveals, or whenever the em-
ployer has reason to believe, that there (ii) Lockout devices, where used,
are deviations from or inadequacies in shall be affixed in a manner to that
the employees knowledge or use of the will hold the energy isolating devices
energy control procedures. in a safe or off position.
(C) The retraining shall reestablish (iii) Tagout devices, where used, shall
employee proficiency and introduce be affixed in such a manner as will
new or revised control methods and clearly indicate that the operation or
procedures, as necessary. movement of energy isolating devices
(iv) The employer shall certify that from the safe or off position is
employee training has been accom- prohibited.
plished and is being kept up to date. (A) Where tagout devices are used
The certification shall contain each with energy isolating devices designed
employees name and dates of training. with the capability of being locked, the
(8) Energy isolation. Lockout or tag attachment shall be fastened at the
tagout shall be performed only bythe same point at which the lock would
authorized employees who are per- have been attached.
forming the servicing or maintenance. (B) Where a tag cannot be affixed di-
(9) Notification of employees. Affected rectly to the energy isolating device,
employees shall be notified by the em- the tag shall be located as close as
ployer or authorized employee of the safely possible to the device, in a posi-
application and removal of lockout de- tion that will be immediately obvious
vices or tagout devices. Notification to anyone attempting to operate the
shall be given before the controls are device.
applied, and after they are removed (5) Stored energy. (i) Following the ap-
from the machine or equipment. plication of lockout or tagout devices
(d) Application of control. The estab- to energy isolating devices, all poten-
lished procedures for the application of tially hazardous stored or residual en-
energy control (the lockout or tagout ergy shall be relieved, disconnected, re-
procedures) shall cover the following strained, and otherwise rendered safe.
493
(ii) If there is a possibility of re- (i) Verfication by the employer that

accumulation of stored energy to a the authorized employee who applied
hazardous level, verification of isola- the device is not at the facility;
tion shall be continued until the serv- (ii) Making all reasonable efforts to
icing or maintenance is completed, or contact the authorized employee to in-
until the possibility of such accumula- form him/her that his/her lockout or
tion no longer exists. tagout device has been removed; and
(6) Verification of isolation. Prior to (iii) Ensuring that the authorized
starting work on machines or equip- employee has this knowledge before he/
ment that have been locked out or she resumes work at that facility.
tagged out, the authorized employee (f) Additional requirements(1) Testing
shall verify that isolation and or positioning of machines, equipment or
components thereof. In situations in
deenergization of the machine or
which lockout or tagout devices must
equipment have been accomplished.
be temporarily removed from the en-
(e) Release from lockout or tagout. Be- ergy isolating device and the machine
fore lockout or tagout devices are re- or equipment energized to test or posi-
moved and energy is restored to the tion the machine, equipment or compo-
machine or equipment, procedures nent thereof, the following sequence of
shall be followed and actions taken by actions shall be followed:
the authorized employee(s) to ensure (i) Clear the machine or equipment of
the following: tools and materials in accordance with
(1) The machine or equipment. The paragraph (e)(1) of this section;
work area shall be inspected to ensure (ii) Remove employees from the ma-
that nonessential items have been re- chine or equipment area in accordance
moved and to ensure that machine or with paragraph (e)(2) of this section;
equipment components are operation- (iii) Remove the lockout or tagout
ally intact. devices as specified in paragraph (e)(3)
(2) Employees. (i) The work area shall of this section;
be checked to ensure that all employ- (iv) Energize and proceed with test-
ees have been safely positioned or re- ing or positioning;
moved. (v) Deenergize all systems and re-
(ii) After lockout or tagout devices apply energy control measures in ac-
have been removed and before a ma- cordance with paragraph (d) of this sec-
chine or equipment is started, affected tion to continue the servicing and/or
employees shall be notified that the maintenance.
(2) Outside personnel (contractors, etc.).
lockout or tagout device(s) have been
(i) Whenever outside servicing per-
removed.
sonnel are to be engaged in activities
(3) Lockout or tagout devices removal. covered by the scope and application of
Each lockout or tagout device shall be this standard, the on-site employer and
removed from each energy isolating de- the outside employer shall inform each
vice by the employee who applied the other of their respective lockout or
device. Exception to paragraph (e)(3): tagout procedures.
When the authorized employee who ap- (ii) The on-site employer shall ensure
plied the lockout or tagout device is that his/her employees understand and
not available to remove it, that device comply with the restrictions and prohi-
may be removed under the direction of bitions of the outside employers en-
the employer, provided that specific ergy control program.
procedures and training for such re- (3) Group lockout or tagout. (i) When
moval have been developed, docu- servicing and/or maintenance is per-
mented and incorporated into the em- formed by a crew, craft, department or
ployers energy control program. The other group, they shall utilize a proce-
employer shall demonstrate that the dure which affords the employees a
specific procedure provides equivalent level of protection equivalent to that
safety to the removal of the device by provided by the implementation of a
the authorized employee who applied personal lockout or tagout device.
it. The specific procedure shall include (ii) Group lockout or tagout devices
at least the following elements: shall be used in accordance with the
494
procedures required by paragraph (c)(4) quire additional training and more rigorous
of this section including, but not nec- periodic inspections. When tagout is used
essarily limited to, the following spe- and the energy isolating devices are lock-
able, the employer must provide full em-
cific requirements:
ployee protection (see paragraph (c)(3)) and
(A) Primary responsibility is vested additional training and more rigorous peri-
in an authorized employee for a set odic inspections are required. For more com-
number of employees working under plex systems, more comprehensive proce-
the protection of a group lockout or dures may need to be developed, documented
tagout device (such as an operations and utilized.
lock);
Lockout Procedure
(B) Provision for the authorized em-
ployee to ascertain the exposure status Lockout procedure for
of individual group members with re- llllllllllllllllllllllll
gard to the lockout or tagout of the (Name of Company for single procedure or
machine or equipment and identification of equipment if multiple pro-
(C) When more than one crew, craft, cedures are used)
department, etc. is involved, assign-
ment of overall job-associated lockout Purpose
or tagout control responsibility to an This procedure establishes the minimum
authorized employee designated to co- requirements for the lockout of energy iso-
ordinate affected work forces and en- lating devices whenever maintenance or
sure continuity of protection; and servicing is done on machines or equipment.
(D) Each authorized employee shall It shall be used to ensure that the machine
or equipment is stopped, isolated from all
affix a personal lockout or tagout de- potentially hazardous energy sources and
vice to the group lockout device, group locked out before employees perform any
lockbox, or comparable mechanism servicing or maintenance where the unex-
when he or she begins work, and shall pected energization or start-up of the ma-
remove those devices when he or she chine or equipment or release of stored en-
stops working on the machine or equip- ergy could cause injury.
ment being serviced or maintained.
Compliance With This Program
(4) Shift or personnel changes. Specific
procedures shall be utilized during All employees are required to comply with
shift or personnel changes to ensure the restrictions and limitations imposed
the continuity of lockout or tagout upon them during the use of lockout. The au-
thorized employees are required to perform
protection, including provision for the the lockout in accordance with this proce-
orderly transfer of lockout or tagout dure. All employees, upon observing a ma-
device protection between off-going chine or piece of equipment which is locked
and oncoming employees, to minimize out to perform servicing or maintenance
exposure to hazards from the unex- shall not attempt to start, energize or use
pected energization or start-up of the that machine or equipment.
machine or equipment, or the release llllllllllllllllllllllll
of stored energy. Type of compliance enforcement to be taken
NOTE: The following appendix to 1910.147 for violation of the above.
services as a non-mandatory guideline to as-
sist employers and employees in complying Sequence of Lockout
with the requirements of this section, as well (1) Notify all affected employees that serv-
as to provide other helpful information. icing or maintenance is required on a ma-
Nothing in the appendix adds to or detracts chine or equipment and that the machine or
from any of the requirements of this section. equipment must be shut down and locked out
to perform the servicing or maintenance.
APPENDIX A TO 1910.147TYPICAL MINIMAL llllllllllllllllllllllll
LOCKOUT PROCEDURE
Name(s)/Job Title(s) of affected employees
General and how to notify.
The following simple lockout procedure is (2) The authorized employee shall refer to
provided to assist employers in developing the company procedure to identify the type
their procedures so they meet the require- and magnitude of the energy that the ma-
ments of this standard. When the energy iso- chine or equipment utilizes, shall understand
lating devices are not lockable, tagout may the hazards of the energy, and shall know
be used, provided the employer complies the methods to control the energy.
with the provisions of the standard which re- llllllllllllllllllllllll
495
Type(s) and magnitude(s) of energy, its haz- (5) Notify affected employees that the serv-
ards and the methods to control the energy. icing or maintenance is completed and the
(3) If the machine or equipment is oper- machine or equipment is ready for use.
ating, shut it down by the normal stopping [54 FR 36687, Sept. 1, 1989, as amended at 54
procedure (depress stop button, open switch, FR 42498, Oct. 17, 1989; 55 FR 38685, 38686,
close valve, etc.). Sept. 20, 1990]
Type(s) and location(s) of machine or equip- Subpart KMedical and First Aid
ment operating controls.
(4) De-activate the energy isolating de- AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-
vice(s) so that the machine or equipment is pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
isolated from the energy source(s). U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labors
llllllllllllllllllllllll Order No. 1271 (36 FR 8754), 876 (41 FR
Type(s) and location(s) of energy isolating 25059), 983 (48 FR 35736), or 696 (62 FR 111),
devices. as applicable, 29 CFR part 1911.
(5) Lock out the energy isolating device(s) 1910.151 Medical services and first
with assigned individual lock(s). aid.
(6) Stored or residual energy (such as that
in capacitors, springs, elevated machine (a) The employer shall ensure the
members, rotating flywheels, hydraulic sys- ready availability of medical personnel
tems, and air, gas, steam, or water pressure, for advice and consultation on matters
etc.) must be dissipated or restrained by of plant health.
methods such as grounding, repositioning, (b) In the absence of an infirmary,
blocking, bleeding down, etc. clinic, or hospital in near proximity to
llllllllllllllllllllllll the workplace which is used for the
Type(s) of stored energymethods to dis- treatment of all injured employees, a
sipate or restrain. person or persons shall be adequately
(7) Ensure that the equipment is discon- trained to render first aid. Adequate
nected from the energy source(s) by first first aid supplies shall be readily avail-
checking that no personnel are exposed, then able.
verify the isolation of the equipment by op- (c) Where the eyes or body of any per-
erating the push button or other normal op- son may be exposed to injurious corro-
erating control(s) or by testing to make cer- sive materials, suitable facilities for
tain the equipment will not operate.
quick drenching or flushing of the eyes
CAUTION: Return operating control(s) to and body shall be provided within the
neutral or off position after verifying the
work area for immediate emergency
isolation of the equipment.
use.
Method of verifying the isolation of the APPENDIX A TO 1910.151FIRST AID KITS
equipment. (NON-MANDATORY)
(8) The machine or equipment is now First aid supplies are required to be readily
locked out. available under paragraph 1910.151(b). An
Restoring Equipment to Service. When the example of the minimal contents of a generic
servicing or maintenance is completed and first aid kit is described in American Na-
the machine or equipment is ready to return tional Standard (ANSI) Z308.11978 Min-
to normal operating condition, the following imum Requirements for Industrial Unit-Type
steps shall be taken. First-aid Kits. The contents of the kit list-
(1) Check the machine or equipment and ed in the ANSI standard should be adequate
the immediate area around the machine or for small worksites. When larger operations
equipment to ensure that nonessential items or multiple operations are being conducted
have been removed and that the machine or at the same location, employers should de-
equipment components are operationally in- termine the need for additional first aid kits
tact. at the worksite, additional types of first aid
(2) Check the work area to ensure that all equipment and supplies and additional quan-
employees have been safely positioned or re- tities and types of supplies and equipment in
moved from the area. the first aid kits.
(3) Verify that the controls are in neutral. In a similar fashion, employers who have
(4) Remove the lockout devices and reener- unique or changing first-aid needs in their
gize the machine or equipment. workplace may need to enhance their first-
NOTE: The removal of some forms of block- aid kits. The employer can use the OSHA 200
ing may require reenergization of the ma- log, OSHA 101s or other reports to identify
chine before safe removal. these unique problems. Consultation from
496
the local fire/rescue department, appropriate (3) Approved means acceptable to the
medical professional, or local emergency Assistant Secretary under the fol-
room may be helpful to employers in these lowing criteria:
circumstances. By assessing the specific
needs of their workplace, employers can en-
(i) If it is accepted, or certified, or
sure that reasonably anticipated supplies are listed, or labeled or otherwise deter-
available. Employers should assess the spe- mined to be safe by a nationally recog-
cific needs of their worksite periodically and nized testing laboratory; or
augment the first aid kit appropriately. (ii) With respect to an installation or
If it is reasonably anticipated that employ- equipment of a kind which no nation-
ees will be exposed to blood or other poten- ally recognized testing laboratory ac-
tially infectious materials while using first cepts, certifies, lists, labels, or deter-
aid supplies, employers are required to pro-
mines to be safe, if it is inspected or
vide appropriate personal protective equip-
ment (PPE) in compliance with the provi- tested by another Federal agency and
sions of the Occupational Exposure to Blood found in compliance with the provi-
borne Pathogens standard, 1910.1030(d)(3) (56 sions of the applicable National Fire
FR 64175). This standard lists appropriate Protection Association Fire Code; or
PPE for this type of exposure, such as (iii) With respect to custom-made
gloves, gowns, face shields, masks, and eye equipment or related installations
protection.
which are designed, fabricated for, and
[39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 63 intended for use by its manufacturer
FR 33466, June 18, 1998] on the basis of test data which the em-
ployer keeps and makes available for
1910.152 [Reserved] inspection to the Assistant Secretary.
(iv) For the purposes of paragraph
Subpart LFire Protection (c)(3) of this section:
(A) Equipment is listed if it is of a
AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu- kind mentioned in a list which is pub-
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 lished by a nationally recognized test-
U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labors ing laboratory which makes periodic
Order No. 1271 (36 FR 8754), 876 (41 FR inspections of the production of such
25059), 983 (48 FR 35736), or 696 (62 FR 111) as equipment and which states that such
applicable; 29 CFR part 1911.
equipment meets nationally recognized
standards or has been tested and found
1910.155 Scope, application and defi-
nitions applicable to this subpart. safe for use in a specified manner;
(B) Equipment is labeled if there is
(a) Scope. This subpart contains re- attached to it a label, symbol, or other
quirements for fire brigades, and all identifying mark of a nationally recog-
portable and fixed fire suppression nized testing laboratory which makes
equipment, fire detection systems, and periodic inspections of the production
fire or employee alarm systems in- of such equipment, and whose labeling
stalled to meet the fire protection re- indicates compliance with nationally
quirements of 29 CFR part 1910. recognized standards or tests to deter-
(b) Application. This subpart applies mine safe use in a specified manner;
to all employments except for mari- (C) Equipment is accepted if it has
time, construction, and agriculture. been inspected and found by a nation-
(c) Definitions applicable to this sub- ally recognized testing laboratory to
part. (1) After-flame means the time a conform to specified plans or to proce-
test specimen continues to flame after dures of applicable codes; and
the flame source has been removed. (D) Equipment is certified if it has
(2) Aqueous film forming foam (AFFF) been tested and found by a nationally
means a fluorinated surfactant with a recognized testing laboratory to meet
foam stabilizer which is diluted with nationally recognized standards or to
water to act as a temporary barrier to be safe for use in a specified manner or
exclude air from mixing with the fuel is of a kind whose production is peri-
vapor by developing an aqueous film on odically inspected by a nationally rec-
the fuel surface of some hydrocarbons ognized testing laboratory, and if it
which is capable of suppressing the bears a label, tag, or other record of
generation of fuel vapors. certification.
497
(E) Refer to 1910.7 for definition of systematic instruction. It does not re-
nationally recognized testing labora- quire formal classroom instruction.
tory. (15) Enclosed structure means a struc-
(4) Assistant Secretary means the As- ture with a roof or ceiling and at least
sistant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- two walls which may present fire haz-
tional Safety and Health or designee. ards to employees, such as accumula-
(5) Automatic fire detection device tions of smoke, toxic gases and heat,
means a device designed to automati- similar to those found in buildings.
cally detect the presence of fire by (16) Extinguisher classification means
heat, flame, light, smoke or other prod- the letter classification given an extin-
ucts of combustion. guisher to designate the class or class-
(6) Buddy-breathing device means an es of fire on which an extinguisher will
accessory to self-contained breathing be effective.
apparatus which permits a second per- (17) Extinguisher rating means the nu-
son to share the same air supply as merical rating given to an extinguisher
that of the wearer of the apparatus. which indicates the extinguishing po-
(7) Carbon dioxide means a colorless, tential of the unit based on standard-
odorless, electrically nonconductive ized tests developed by Underwriters
inert gas (chemical formula CO2) that Laboratories, Inc.
is a medium for extinguishing fires by (18) Fire brigade (private fire depart-
reducing the concentration of oxygen ment, industrial fire department)
or fuel vapor in the air to the point means an organized group of employees
where conbustion is impossible. who are knowledgeable, trained, and
skilled in at least basic fire fighting
(8) Class A fire means a fire involving
operations.
ordinary combustible materials such as
(19) Fixed extinguishing system means
paper, wood, cloth, and some rubber
a permanently installed system that
and plastic materials.
either extinguishes or controls a fire at
(9) Class B fire means a fire involving the location of the system.
flammable or combustible liquids, (20) Flame resistance is the property of
flammable gases, greases and similar materials, or combinations of compo-
materials, and some rubber and plastic nent materials, to retard ignition and
materials. restrict the spread of flame.
(10) Class C fire means a fire involving (21) Foam means a stable aggregation
energized electrical equipment where of small bubbles which flow freely over
safety to the employee requires the use a burning liquid surface and form a co-
of electrically nonconductive extin- herent blanket which seals combus-
guishing media. tible vapors and thereby extinguishes
(11) Class D fire means a fire involving the fire.
combustible metals such as magne- (22) Gaseous agent is a fire extin-
sium, titanium, zirconium, sodium, guishing agent which is in the gaseous
lithium and potassium. state at normal room temperature and
(12) Dry chemical means an extin- pressure. It has low viscosity, can ex-
guishing agent composed of very small pand or contract with changes in pres-
particles of chemicals such as, but not sure and temperature, and has the abil-
limited to, sodium bicarbonate, potas- ity to diffuse readily and to distribute
sium bicarbonate, urea-based potas- itself uniformly throughout an enclo-
sium bicarbonate, potassium chloride, sure.
or monoammonium phosphate supple- (23) Halon 1211 means a colorless,
mented by special treatment to provide faintly sweet smelling, electrically
resistance to packing and moisture ab- nonconductive liquefied gas (chemical
sorption (caking) as well as to provide formula CBrC1F2) which is a medium
proper flow capabilities. Dry chemical for extinguishing fires by inhibiting
does not include dry powders. the chemical chain reaction of fuel and
(13) Dry powder means an compound oxygen. It is also known as
used to extinguish or control Class D bromochlorodifluoromethane.
fires. (24) Halon 1301 means a colorless,
(14) Education means the process of odorless, electrically nonconductive
imparting knowledge or skill through gas (chemical formula CBrF3) which is
498
a medium for extinguishing fires by in- the vapor barrier and liner and is usu-
hibiting the chemical chain reaction of ally constructed with a storm flap,
fuel and oxygen. It is also known as suitable closures, and pockets.
bromotrifluoromethane. (34) Positive-pressure breathing appa-
(25) Helmet is a head protective device ratus means self-contained breathing
consisting of a rigid shell, energy ab- apparatus in which the pressure in the
sorption system, and chin strap in- breathing zone is positive in relation to
tended to be worn to provide protection the immediate environment during in-
for the head or portions thereof, halation and exhalation.
against impact, flying or falling ob- (35) Pre-discharge employee alarm
jects, electric shock, penetration, heat means an alarm which will sound at a
and flame. set time prior to actual discharge of an
(26) Incipient stage fire means a fire extinguishing system so that employ-
which is in the initial or beginning ees may evacuate the discharge area
stage and which can be controlled or prior to system discharge.
extinguished by portable fire extin- (36) Quick disconnect valve means a
guishers, Class II standpipe or small device which starts the flow of air by
hose systems without the need for pro- inserting of the hose (which leads from
tective clothing or breathing appa- the facepiece) into the regulator of
ratus. self-contained breathing apparatus,
(27) Inspection means a visual check
and stops the flow of air by disconnec-
of fire protection systems and equip-
tion of the hose from the regulator.
ment to ensure that they are in place,
(37) Sprinkler alarm means an ap-
charged, and ready for use in the event
of a fire. proved device installed so that any wa-
(28) Interior structural fire fighting terflow from a sprinkler system equal
means the physical activity of fire sup- to or greater than that from single
pression, rescue or both, inside of automatic sprinkler will result in an
buildings or enclosed structures which audible alarm signal on the premises.
are involved in a fire situation beyond (38) Sprinkler system means a system
the incipient stage. of piping designed in accordance with
(29) Lining means a material perma- fire protection engineering standards
nently attached to the inside of the and installed to control or extinguish
outer shell of a garment for the pur- fires. The system includes an adequate
pose of thermal protection and pad- and reliable water supply, and a net-
ding. work of specially sized piping and
(30) Local application system means a sprinklers which are interconnected.
fixed fire suppression system which has The system also includes a control
a supply of extinguishing agent, with valve and a device for actuating an
nozzles arranged to automatically dis- alarm when the system is in operation.
charge extinguishing agent directly on (39) Standpipe systems. (i) Class I
the burning material to extinguish or standpipe system means a 212 (6.3 cm)
control a fire. hose connection for use by fire depart-
(31) Maintenance means the perform- ments and those trained in handling
ance of services on fire protection heavy fire streams.
equipment and systems to assure that (ii) Class II standpipe system means a
they will perform as expected in the 112 (3.8 cm) hose system which pro-
event of a fire. Maintenance differs vides a means for the control or extin-
from inspection in that maintenance guishment of incipient stage fires.
requires the checking of internal fit- (iii) Class III standpipe system means a
tings, devices and agent supplies. combined system of hose which is for
(32) Multipurpose dry chemical means a the use of employees trained in the use
dry chemical which is approved for use of hose operations and which is capable
on Class A, Class B and Class C fires. of furnishing effective water discharge
(33) Outer shell is the exterior layer of during the more advanced stages of fire
material on the fire coat and protec- (beyond the incipient stage) in the in-
tive trousers which forms the outer- terior of workplaces. Hose outlets are
most barrier between the fire fighter available for both 112 (3.8 cm) and 212
and the environment. It is attached to (6.3 cm) hose.
499
(iv) Small hose system means a system Secretary and by employees or their
of hose ranging in diameter from 58 designated representatives.
(1.6 cm up to 112 (3.8 cm) which is for (2) Personnel. The employer shall as-
the use of employees and which pro- sure that employees who are expected
vides a means for the control and ex- to do interior structural fire fighting
tinguishment of incipient stage fires. are physically capable of performing
(40) Total flooding system means a duties which may be assigned to them
fixed suppression system which is ar- during emergencies. The employer
ranged to automatically discharge a shall not permit employees with known
predetermined concentration of agent heart disease, epilepsy, or emphysema,
into an enclosed space for the purpose to participate in fire brigade emer-
of fire extinguishment or control. gency activities unless a physicians
(41) Training means the process of certificate of the employees fitness to
making proficient through instruction participate in such activities is pro-
and hands-on practice in the operation vided. For employees assigned to fire
of equipment, including respiratory brigades before September 15, 1980, this
protection equipment, that is expected paragraph is effective on September 15,
to be used and in the performance of 1990. For employees assigned to fire
assigned duties. brigades on or after September 15, 1980,
(42) Vapor barrier means that mate- this paragraph is effective December
rial used to prevent or substantially in- 15, 1980.
hibit the transfer of water, corrosive (c) Training and education. (1) The
liquids and steam or other hot vapors employer shall provide training and
from the outside of a garment to the education for all fire brigade members
wearers body. commensurate with those duties and
[45 FR 60704, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 53 functions that fire brigade members
FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988] are expected to perform. Such training
and education shall be provided to fire
1910.156 Fire brigades. brigade members before they perform
(a) Scope and application(1) Scope. fire brigade emergency activities. Fire
This section contains requirements for brigade leaders and training instruc-
the organization, training, and per- tors shall be provided with training
sonal protective equipment of fire bri- and education which is more com-
gades whenever they are established by prehensive than that provided to the
an employer. general membership of the fire brigade.
(2) Application. The requirements of (2) The employer shall assure that
this section apply to fire brigades, in- training and education is conducted
dustrial fire departments and private frequently enough to assure that each
or contractual type fire departments. member of the fire brigade is able to
Personal protective equipment require- perform the members assigned duties
ments apply only to members of fire and functions satisfactorily and in a
brigades performing interior structural safe manner so as not to endanger fire
fire fighting. The requirements of this brigade members or other employees.
section do not apply to airport crash All fire brigade members shall be pro-
rescue or forest fire fighting oper- vided with training at least annually.
ations. In addition, fire brigade members who
(b) Organization(1) Organizational are expected to perform interior struc-
statement. The employer shall prepare tural fire fighting shall be provided
and maintain a statement or written with an education session or training
policy which establishes the existence at least quarterly.
of a fire brigade; the basic organiza- (3) The quality of the training and
tional structure; the type, amount, and education program for fire brigade
frequency of training to be provided to members shall be similar to those con-
fire brigade members; the expected ducted by such fire training schools as
number of members in the fire brigade; the Maryland Fire and Rescue Insti-
and the functions that the fire brigade tute; Iowa Fire Service Extension;
is to perform at the workplace. The or- West Virginia Fire Service Extension;
ganizational statement shall be avail- Georgia Fire Academy, New York
able for inspection by the Assistant State Department, Fire Prevention and
500
Control; Louisiana State University structural fire fighting. After July 1,

Firemen Training Program, or Wash- 1985, the employer shall assure that all
ington States Fire Service Training fire brigade members wear protective
Commission for Vocational Education. clothing meeting the requirements of
(For example, for the oil refinery in- this paragraph when performing inte-
dustry, with its unique hazards, the rior structural fire fighting.
training and education program for (ii) The employer shall assure that
those fire brigade members shall be protective clothing protects the head,
similar to those conducted by Texas A body, and extremities, and consists of
& M University, Lamar University, at least the following components: foot
Reno Fire School, or the Delaware and leg protection; hand protection;
State Fire School.) body protection; eye, face and head
(4) The employer shall inform fire protection.
brigade members about special hazards (2) Foot and leg protection. (i) Foot
such as storage and use of flammable and leg protection shall meet the re-
liquids and gases, toxic chemicals, ra- quirements of paragraphs (e)(2)(ii) and
dioactive sources, and water reactive (e)(2)(iii) of this section, and may be
substances, to which they may be ex- achieved by either of the following
posed during fire and other emer- methods:
gencies. The fire brigade members shall (A) Fully extended boots which pro-
also be advised of any changes that vide protection for the legs; or
occur in relation to the special haz- (B) Protective shoes or boots worn in
ards. The employer shall develop and combination with protective trousers
make available for inspection by fire that meet the requirements of para-
brigade members, written procedures graph (e)(3) of this section.
that describe the actions to be taken in (ii) Protective footwear shall meet
situations involving the special haz- the requirements of 1910.136 for Class
ards and shall include these in the 75 footwear. In addition, protective
training and education program. footwear shall be water-resistant for at
(d) Fire fighting equipment. The em- least 5 inches (12.7 cm) above the bot-
ployer shall maintain and inspect, at tom of the heel and shall be equipped
least annually, fire fighting equipment with slip-resistant outer soles.
to assure the safe operational condi- (iii) Protective footwear shall be
tion of the equipment. Portable fire ex- tested in accordance with paragraph (1)
tinguishers and respirators shall be in- of appendix E, and shall provide protec-
spected at least monthly. Fire fighting tion against penetration of the midsole
equipment that is in damaged or un- by a size 8D common nail when at least
serviceable condition shall be removed 300 pounds (1330 N) of static force is ap-
from service and replaced. plied to the nail.
(e) Protective clothing. The following (3) Body protection. (i) Body protec-
requirements apply to those employees tion shall be coordinated with foot and
who perform interior structural fire leg protection to ensure full body pro-
fighting. The requirements do not tection for the wearer. This shall be
apply to employees who use fire extin- achieved by one of the following meth-
guishers or standpipe systems to con- ods:
trol or extinguish fires only in the in- (A) Wearing of a fire-resistive coat
cipient stage. meeting the requirements of paragraph
(1) General. (i) The employer shall (e)(3)(ii) of this section in combination
provide at no cost to the employee and with fully extended boots meeting the
assure the use of protective clothing requirements of paragraphs (e)(2)(ii)
which complies with the requirements and (e)(2)(iii) of this section; or
of this paragraph. The employer shall (B) Wearing of a fire-resistive coat in
assure that protective clothing ordered combination with protective trousers
or purchased after July 1, 1981, meets both of which meet the requirements of
the requirements contained in this paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of this section.
paragraph. As the new equipment is (ii) The performance, construction,
provided, the employer shall assure and testing of fire-resistive coats and
that all fire brigade members wear the protective trousers shall be at least
equipment when performing interior equivalent to the requirements of the
501
National Fire Protection Association (ii) Exterior materials of gloves shall

(NFPA) standard NFPA No. 19711975, be flame resistant and shall be tested
Protective Clothing for Structural in accordance with paragraph (3) of ap-
Fire Fighting, which is incorporated pendix E. Maximum allowable
by reference as specified in 1910.6, (See afterflame shall be 2.0 seconds, and the
appendix D to subpart L) with the fol- maximum char length shall be 4.0
lowing permissible variations from inches (10.2 cm).
those requirements: (iii) When design of the fire-resistive
(A) Tearing strength of the outer coat does not otherwise provide protec-
shell shall be a minimum of 8 pounds tion for the wrists, protective gloves
(35.6 N) in any direction when tested in shall have wristlets of at least 4.0
accordance with paragraph (2) of ap- inches (10.2 cm) in length to protect
pendix E; and the wrist area when the arms are ex-
(B) The outer shell may discolor but tended upward and outward from the
shall not separate or melt when placed body.
in a forced air laboratory oven at a (5) Head, eye and face protection. (i)
temperature of 500 F (260 C) for a pe- Head protection shall consist of a pro-
riod of five minutes. After cooling to tective head device with ear flaps and
ambient temperature and using the chin strap which meet the perform-
test method specified in paragraph (3) ance, construction, and testing require-
of appendix E, char length shall not ex- ments of the National Fire Safety and
ceed 4.0 inches (10.2 cm) and after- Research Office of the National Fire
flame shall not exceed 2.0 seconds. Prevention and Control Administra-
(4) Hand protection. (i) Hand protection, U.S. Department of Commerce
tion shall consist of protective gloves (now known as the U.S. Fire Adminis-
or glove system which will provide pro- tration), which are contained in
tection against cut, puncture, and heat Model Performance Criteria for
penetration. Gloves or glove system
Structural Firefighters Helmets (Au-
shall be tested in accordance with the
gust 1977) which is incorporated by ref-
test methods contained in the National
erence as specified in 1910.6, (See ap-
Institute for Occupational Safety and
pendix D to subpart L).
Health (NIOSH) 1976 publication, The
Development of Criteria for Fire Fight- (ii) Protective eye and face devices
ers Gloves; Vol. II, Part II: Test Meth- which comply with 1910.133 shall be
ods, which is incorporated by refused by fire brigade members when per-
erence as specified in 1910.6, (See ap- forming operations where the hazards
pendix D to subpart L) and shall meet of flying or falling materials which
the following criteria for cut, puncture, may cause eye and face injuries are
and heat penetration: present. Protective eye and face de-
(A) Materials used for gloves shall re- vices provided as accessories to protec-
sist surface cut by a blade with an edge tive head devices (face shields) are per-
having a 60 included angle and a .001 mitted when such devices meet the re-
inch (.0025 cm.) radius, under an ap- quirements of 1910.133.
plied force of 16 lbf (72N), and at a slic- (iii) Full facepieces, helmets, or
ing velocity of greater or equal to 60 in/ hoods of breathing apparatus which
min (2.5 cm./sec); meet the requirements of 1910.134 and
(B) Materials used for the palm and paragraph (f) of this section, shall be
palm side of the fingers shall resist acceptable as meeting the eye and face
puncture by a penetrometer (simu- protection requirements of paragraph
lating a 4d lath nail), under an applied (e)(5)(ii) of this section.
force of 13.2 lbf (60N), and at a velocity (f) Respiratory protection devices. (1)
greater or equal to 20 in/min (.85 cm./ General requirements. (i) The employer
sec); and must ensure that respirators are pro-
(C) The temperature inside the palm vided to, and used by, fire brigade
and gripping surface of the fingers of members, and that the respirators
gloves shall not exceed 135 F (57 C) meet the requirements of 29 CFR
when gloves or glove system are ex- 1910.134 and this paragraph.
posed to 932 F (500 C) for five seconds (ii) Approved self-contained breath-
at 4 psi (28 kPa) pressure. ing apparatus with full-facepiece, or
502
with approved helmet or hood configu- (ii) This paragraph does not prohibit
ration, shall be provided to and worn the use of a self-contained breathing
by fire brigade members while working apparatus where the apparatus can be
inside buildings or confined spaces switched from a demand to a positive-
where toxic products of combustion or pressure mode. However, such appa-
an oxygen deficiency may be present. ratus shall be in the positive-pressure
Such apparatus shall also be worn dur- mode when fire brigade members are
ing emergency situations involving performing interior structural fire
toxic substances. fighting operations.
(iii) Approved self-contained breath- [45 FR 60706, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May
ing apparatus may be equipped with ei- 1, 1981; 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; 61 FR 9239,
ther a buddy-breathing device or a Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 1284, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR
quick disconnect valve, even if these 33467, June 18, 1998]
devices are not certified by NIOSH. If
these accessories are used, they shall PORTABLE FIRE SUPPRESSION
not cause damage to the apparatus, or EQUIPMENT
restrict the air flow of the apparatus,
or obstruct the normal operation of the 1910.157 Portable fire extinguishers.
apparatus. (a) Scope and application. The require-
(iv) Approved self-contained comments of this section apply to the
pressed air breathing apparatus may be placement, use, maintenance, and test-
used with approved cylinders from ing of portable fire extinguishers pro-
other approved self-contained com- vided for the use of employees. Para-
pressed air breathing apparatus pro- graph (d) of this section does not apply
vided that such cylinders are of the to extinguishers provided for employee
same capacity and pressure rating. All use on the outside of workplace build-
compressed air cylinders used with ings or structures. Where extinguishers
self-contained breathing apparatus are provided but are not intended for
shall meet DOT and NIOSH criteria. employee use and the employer has an
(v) Self-contained breathing emergency action plan and a fire pre-
apparatuses must have a minimum vention plan which meet the require-
service-life rating of 30 minutes in ac- ments of 1910.38, then only the re-
cordance with the methods and requirements of paragraphs (e) and (f) of
quirements specified by NIOSH under this section apply.
42 CFR part 84, except for escape self- (b) Exemptions. (1) Where the em-
contained breathing apparatus ployer has established and imple-
(ESCBAs) used only for emergency es- mented a written fire safety policy
cape purposes. which requires the immediate and total
(vi) Self-contained breathing appa- evacuation of employees from the
ratus shall be provided with an indi- workplace upon the sounding of a fire
cator which automatically sounds an alarm signal and which includes an
audible alarm when the remaining emergency action plan and a fire pre-
service life of the apparatus is reduced vention plan which meet the require-
to within a range of 20 to 25 percent of ments of 1910.38, and when extin-
its rated service time. guishers are not available in the work-
(2) Positive-pressure breathing appa- place, the employer is exempt from all
ratus. (i) The employer shall assure requirements of this section unless a
that self-contained breathing appa- specific standard in part 1910 requires
ratus ordered or purchased after July 1, that a portable fire extinguisher be
1981, for use by fire brigade members provided.
performing interior structural fire (2) Where the employer has an emer-
fighting operations, are of the pres- gency action plan meeting the require-
sure-demand or other positive-pressure ments of 1910.38 which designates cer-
type. Effective July 1, 1983, only pres- tain employees to be the only employ-
sure-demand or other positive-pressure ees authorized to use the available
self-contained breathing apparatus portable fire extinguishers, and which
shall be worn by fire brigade members requires all other employees in the fire
performing interior structural fire area to immediately evacuate the af-
fighting. fected work area upon the sounding of
503
the fire alarm, the employer is exempt area to any extinguisher is 50 feet (15.2
from the distribution requirements in m) or less.
paragraph (d) of this section. (5) The employer shall distribute
(c) General requirements. (1) The em- portable fire extinguishers used for
ployer shall provide portable fire extin- Class C hazards on the basis of the ap-
guishers and shall mount, locate and propriate pattern for the existing Class
identify them so that they are readily A or Class B hazards.
accessible to employees without sub- (6) The employer shall distribute
jecting the employees to possible in- portable fire extinguishers or other
jury. containers of Class D extinguishing
(2) Only approved portable fire extin- agent for use by employees so that the
guishers shall be used to meet the re- travel distance from the combustible
quirements of this section. metal working area to any extin-
(3) The employer shall not provide or guishing agent is 75 feet (22.9 m) or
make available in the workplace port- less. Portable fire extinguishers for
able fire extinguishers using carbon Class D hazards are required in those
tetrachloride or chlorobromomethane combustible metal working areas
extinguishing agents. where combustible metal powders,
(4) The employer shall assure that flakes, shavings, or similarly sized
portable fire extinguishers are main- products are generated at least once
tained in a fully charged and operable every two weeks.
condition and kept in their designated
(e) Inspection, maintenance and testing.
places at all times except during use.
(1) The employer shall be responsible
(5) The employer shall remove from
for the inspection, maintenance and
service all soldered or riveted shell
testing of all portable fire extin-
self-generating soda acid or self-gener-
guishers in the workplace.
ating foam or gas cartridge water type
portable fire extinguishers which are (2) Portable extinguishers or hose
operated by inverting the extinguisher used in lieu thereof under paragraph
to rupture the cartridge or to initiate (d)(3) of this section shall be visually
an uncontrollable pressure generating inspected monthly.
chemical reaction to expel the agent. (3) The employer shall assure that
(d) Selection and distribution. (1) Port- portable fire extinguishers are sub-
able fire extinguishers shall be projected to an annual maintenance
vided for employee use and selected check. Stored pressure extinguishers
and distributed based on the classes of do not require an internal examina-
anticipated workplace fires and on the tion. The employer shall record the an-
size and degree of hazard which would nual maintenance date and retain this
affect their use. record for one year after the last entry
(2) The employer shall distribute or the life of the shell, whichever is
portable fire extinguishers for use by less. The record shall be available to
employees on Class A fires so that the the Assistant Secretary upon request.
travel distance for employees to any (4) The employer shall assure that
extinguisher is 75 feet (22.9 m) or less. stored pressure dry chemical extin-
(3) The employer may use uniformly guishers that require a 12-year hydro-
spaced standpipe systems or hose sta- static test are emptied and subjected
tions connected to a sprinkler system to applicable maintenance procedures
installed for emergency use by employ- every 6 years. Dry chemical extin-
ees instead of Class A portable fire ex- guishers having non-refillable dispos-
tinguishers, provided that such sys- able containers are exempt from this
tems meet the respective requirements requirement. When recharging or hy-
of 1910.158 or 1910.159, that they pro- drostatic testing is performed, the 6-
vide total coverage of the area to be year requirement begins from that
protected, and that employees are date.
trained at least annually in their use. (5) The employer shall assure that al-
(4) The employer shall distribute ternate equivalent protection is pro-
portable fire extinguishers for use by vided when portable fire extinguishers
employees on Class B fires so that the are removed from service for mainte-
travel distance from the Class B hazard nance and recharging.
504
(f) Hydrostatic testing. (1) The em- listed in paragraphs (f)(2)(i)(v) of this
ployer shall assure that hydrostatic section.
testing is performed by trained persons (5) The employer shall assure that
with suitable testing equipment and fa- hydrostatic tests are performed on ex-
cilities. tinguisher hose assemblies which are
(2) The employer shall assure that equipped with a shut-off nozzle at the
portable extinguishers are discharge end of the hose. The test in-
hydrostatically tested at the intervals terval shall be the same as specified for
listed in Table L1 of this section, ex- the extinguisher on which the hose is
cept under any of the following condi- installed.
tions: (6) The employer shall assure that
(i) When the unit has been repaired carbon dioxide hose assemblies with a
by soldering, welding, brazing, or use of shut-off nozzle are hydrostatically
patching compounds; tested at 1,250 psi (8,620 kPa).
(ii) When the cylinder or shell (7) The employer shall assure that
threads are damaged; dry chemical and dry powder hose as-
(iii) When there is corrosion that has semblies with a shut-off nozzle are
caused pitting, including corrosion hydrostatically tested at 300 psi (2,070
under removable name plate assem- kPa).
blies;
(8) Hose assemblies passing a hydro-
(iv) When the extinguisher has been
static test do not require any type of
burned in a fire; or
recording or stamping.
(v) When a calcium chloride extin-
guishing agent has been used in a (9) The employer shall assure that
stainless steel shell. hose assemblies for carbon dioxide ex-
(3) In addition to an external visual tinguishers that require a hydrostatic
examination, the employer shall assure test are tested within a protective cage
that an internal examination of cyl- device.
inders and shells to be tested is made (10) The employer shall assure that
prior to the hydrostatic tests. carbon dioxide extinguishers and nitro-
gen or carbon dioxide cylinders used
TABLE L1 with wheeled extinguishers are tested
every 5 years at 5/3 of the service pres-
Test
inter- sure as stamped into the cylinder. Ni-
Type of extinguishers val trogen cylinders which comply with 49
(years)
CFR 173.34(e)(15) may be
Soda acid (soldered brass shells) (until 1/1/82) ........ (1) hydrostatically tested every 10 years.
Soda acid (stainless steel shell) ................................ 5 (11) The employer shall assure that
Cartridge operated water and/or antifreeze ............... 5
Stored pressure water and/or antifreeze ................... 5 all stored pressure and Halon 1211 types
Wetting agent ............................................................. 5 of extinguishers are hydrostatically
Foam (soldered brass shells) (until 1/1/82) ............... (1) tested at the factory test pressure not
Foam (stainless steel shell) ....................................... 5
Aqueous Film Forming foam (AFFF) ......................... 5 to exceed two times the service pres-
Loaded stream ........................................................... 5 sure.
Dry chemical with stainless steel ............................... 5
Carbon dioxide ........................................................... 5
(12) The employer shall assure that
Dry chemical, stored pressure, with mild steel, acceptable self-generating type soda
brazed brass or aluminum shells ........................... 12 acid and foam extinguishers are tested
Dry chemical, cartridge or cylinder operated, with at 350 psi (2,410 kPa).
mild steel shells ...................................................... 12
Halon 1211 ................................................................. 12 (13) Air or gas pressure may not be
Halon 1301 ................................................................. 12 used for hydrostatic testing.
Dry powder, cartridge or cylinder operated with mild
steel shells .............................................................. 12
(14) Extinguisher shells, cylinders, or
cartridges which fail a hydrostatic
1 Extinguishershaving shells constructed of copper or brass
joined by soft solder or rivets shall not be hydrostatically test- pressure test, or which are not fit for
ed and shall be removed from service by January 1, 1982. testing shall be removed from service
(Not permitted)
and from the workplace.
(4) The employer shall assure that (15)(i) The equipment for testing
portable fire extinguishers are hydro- compressed gas type cylinders shall be
statically tested whenever they show of the water jacket type. The equip-
new evidence of corrosion or mechan- ment shall be provided with an expan-
ical injury, except under the conditions sion indicator which operates with an
505
accuracy within one percent of the the designated group of employees and
total expansion or .1cc (.1mL) of liquid. at least annually thereafter.
(ii) The equipment for testing non- [45 FR 60708, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May
compressed gas type cylinders shall 1, 1981, as amended at 51 FR 34560, Sept. 29,
consist of the following: 1986; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]
(A) A hydrostatic test pump, hand or
power operated, capable of producing 1910.158 Standpipe and hose systems.
not less than 150 percent of the test (a) Scope and application(1) Scope.
pressure, which shall include appro- This section applies to all small hose,
priate check valves and fittings; Class II, and Class III standpipe sys-
(B) A flexible connection for attach- tems installed to meet the require-
ment to fittings to test through the ex- ments of a particular OSHA standard.
tinguisher nozzle, test bonnet, or hose (2) Exception. This section does not
apply to Class I standpipe systems.
outlet, as is applicable; and
(b) Protection of standpipes. The em-
(C) A protective cage or barrier for ployer shall assure that standpipes are
personal protection of the tester, de- located or otherwise protected against
signed to provide visual observation of mechanical damage. Damaged
the extinguisher under test. standpipes shall be repaired promptly.
(16) The employer shall maintain and (c) Equipment(1) Reels and cabinets.
provide upon request to the Assistant Where reels or cabinets are provided to
Secretary evidence that the required contain fire hose, the employer shall
hydrostatic testing of fire extin- assure that they are designed to facili-
guishers has been performed at the tate prompt use of the hose valves, the
time intervals shown in Table L1. hose, and other equipment at the time
Such evidence shall be in the form of a of a fire or other emergency. The em-
certification record which includes the ployer shall assure that the reels and
date of the test, the signature of the cabinets are conspicuously identified
person who performed the test and the and used only for fire equipment.
serial number, or other identifier, of (2) Hose outlets and connections. (i)
the fire extinguisher that was tested. The employer shall assure that hose
Such records shall be kept until the ex- outlets and connections are located
tinguisher is hydrostatically retested high enough above the floor to avoid
at the time interval specified in Table being obstructed and to be accessible
L1 or until the extinguisher is taken to employees.
out of service, whichever comes first. (ii) The employer shall standardize
(g) Training and education. (1) Where screw threads or provide appropriate
the employer has provided portable fire adapters throughout the system and
extinguishers for employee use in the assure that the hose connections are
workplace, the employer shall also pro- compatible with those used on the sup-
vide an educational program to famil- porting fire equipment.
iarize employees with the general prin- (3) Hose. (i) The employer shall assure
ciples of fire extinguisher use and the that every 112 (3.8 cm) or smaller hose
outlet used to meet this standard is
hazards involved with incipient stage
equipped with hose connected and
fire fighting.
ready for use. In extremely cold cli-
(2) The employer shall provide the mates where such installation may re-
education required in paragraph (g)(1) sult in damaged equipment, the hose
of this section upon initial employ- may be stored in another location pro-
ment and at least annually thereafter. vided it is readily available and can be
(3) The employer shall provide em- connected when needed.
ployees who have been designated to (ii) Standpipe systems installed after
use fire fighting equipment as part of January 1, 1981, for use by employees,
an emergency action plan with train- shall be equipped with lined hose. Un-
ing in the use of the appropriate equip- lined hose may remain in use on exist-
ment. ing systems. However, after the effec-
(4) The employer shall provide the tive date of this standard, unlined hose
training required in paragraph (g)(3) of which becomes unserviceable shall be
this section upon initial assignment to replaced with lined hose.
506
(iii) The employer shall provide hose the employer shall remove it from
of such length that friction loss result- service immediately and replace it
ing from water flowing through the with equivalent protection such as ex-
hose will not decrease the pressure at tinguishers and fire watches.
the nozzle below 30 psi (210 kPa). The (v) The employer shall assure that
dynamic pressure at the nozzle shall be hemp or linen hose on existing systems
within the range of 30 psi (210 kPa) to is unracked, physically inspected for
125 psi (860 kPa). deterioration, and reracked using a dif-
(4) Nozzles. The employer shall assure ferent fold pattern at least annually.
that standpipe hose is equipped with The employer shall assure that defec-
shut-off type nozzles. tive hose is replaced in accordance
(d) Water supply. The minimum water with paragraph (c)(3)(ii) of this section.
supply for standpipe and hose systems, (vi) The employer shall designate
which are provided for the use of em- trained persons to conduct all inspec-
ployees, shall be sufficient to provide tions required under this section.
100 gallons per minute (6.3 l/s) for a pe- [45 FR 60710, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 61
riod of at least thirty minutes. FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]
(e) Tests and maintenance(1) Accept-
ance tests. (i) The employer shall assure FIXED FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT
that the piping of Class II and Class III
systems installed after January 1, 1981, 1910.159 Automatic sprinkler sys-
including yard piping, is tems.
hydrostatically tested for a period of at (a) Scope and application. (1) The re-
least 2 hours at not less than 200 psi quirements of this section apply to all
(1380 kPa), or at least 50 psi (340 kPa) automatic sprinkler systems installed
in excess of normal pressure when such to meet a particular OSHA standard.
pressure is greater than 150 psi (1030 (2) For automatic sprinkler systems
kPa). used to meet OSHA requirements and
(ii) The employer shall assure that installed prior to the effective date of
hose on all standpipe systems installed this standard, compliance with the Na-
after January 1, 1981, is hydrostatically tional Fire Protection Association
tested with couplings in place, at a (NFPA) or the National Board of Fire
pressure of not less than 200 psi (1380 Underwriters (NBFU) standard in effect
kPa), before it is placed in service. at the time of the systems installation
This pressure shall be maintained for will be acceptable as compliance with
at least 15 seconds and not more than this section.
one minute during which time the hose (b) Exemptions. Automatic sprinkler
shall not leak nor shall any jacket systems installed in workplaces, but
thread break during the test. not required by OSHA, are exempt
(2) Maintenance. (i) The employer from the requirements of this section.
shall assure that water supply tanks (c) General requirements(1) Design. (i)
are kept filled to the proper level ex- All automatic sprinkler designs used to
cept during repairs. When pressure comply with this standard shall pro-
tanks are used, the employer shall as- vide the necessary discharge patterns,
sure that proper pressure is maintained densities, and water flow characteris-
at all times except during repairs. tics for complete coverage in a par-
(ii) The employer shall assure that ticular workplace or zoned subdivision
valves in the main piping connections of the workplace.
to the automatic sources of water sup- (ii) The employer shall assure that
ply are kept fully open at all times ex- only approved equipment and devices
cept during repair. are used in the design and installation
(iii) The employer shall assure that of automatic sprinkler systems used to
hose systems are inspected at least an- comply with this standard.
nually and after each use to assure (2) Maintenance. The employer shall
that all of the equipment and hose are properly maintain an automatic sprin-
in place, available for use, and in serv- kler system installed to comply with
iceable condition. this section. The employer shall assure
(iv) When the system or any portion that a main drain flow test is per-
thereof is found not to be serviceable, formed on each system annually. The
507
inspectors test valve shall be opened through the system equal to the flow
at least every two years to assure that from a single sprinkler.
the sprinkler system operates properly. (10) Sprinkler spacing. The employer
(3) Acceptance tests. The employer shall assure that sprinklers are spaced
shall conduct proper acceptance tests to provide a maximum protection area
on sprinkler systems installed for em- per sprinkler, a minimum of inter-
ployee protection after January 1, 1981, ference to the discharge pattern by
and record the dates of such tests. building or structural members or
Proper acceptance tests include the building contents and suitable sensi-
following: tivity to possible fire hazards. The
(i) Flushing of underground connec- minimum vertical clearance between
tions; sprinklers and material below shall be
(ii) Hydrostatic tests of piping in sys- 18 inches (45.7 cm).
tem; (11) Hydraulically designed systems.
(iii) Air tests in dry-pipe systems; The employer shall assure that hydrau-
(iv) Dry-pipe valve operation; and lically designed automatic sprinkler
(v) Test of drainage facilities. systems or portions thereof are identi-
(4) Water supplies. The employer shall fied and that the location, number of
assure that every automatic sprinkler sprinklers in the hydraulically de-
system is provided with at least one signed section, and the basis of the de-
automatic water supply capable of pro- sign is indicated. Central records may
viding design water flow for at least 30 be used in lieu of signs at sprinkler
minutes. An auxiliary water supply or valves provided the records are avail-
equivalent protection shall be provided able for inspection and copying by the
when the automatic water supply is Assistant Secretary.
out of service, except for systems of 20 [45 FR 60710, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May
or fewer sprinklers. 1, 1981]
(5) Hose connections for fire fighting
use. The employer may attach hose 1910.160 Fixed extinguishing sys-
connections for fire fighting use to wet tems, general.
pipe sprinkler systems provided that (a) Scope and application. (1) This sec-
the water supply satisfies the combined tion applies to all fixed extinguishing
design demand for sprinklers and systems installed to meet a particular
standpipes. OSHA standard except for automatic
(6) Protection of piping. The employer sprinkler systems which are covered by
shall assure that automatic sprinkler 1910.159.
system piping is protected against (2) This section also applies to fixed
freezing and exterior surface corrosion. systems not installed to meet a par-
(7) Drainage. The employer shall as- ticular OSHA standard, but which, by
sure that all dry sprinkler pipes and means of their operation, may expose
fittings are installed so that the sys- employees to possible injury, death, or
tem may be totally drained. adverse health consequences caused by
(8) Sprinklers. (i) The employer shall the extinguishing agent. Such systems
assure that only approved sprinklers are only subject to the requirements of
are used on systems. paragraphs (b)(4) through (b)(7) and (c)
(ii) The employer may not use older of this section.
style sprinklers to replace standard (3) Systems otherwise covered in
sprinklers without a complete engi- paragraph (a)(2) of this section which
neering review of the altered part of are installed in areas with no employee
the system. exposure are exempted from the re-
(iii) The employer shall assure that quirements of this section.
sprinklers are protected from mechan- (b) General requirements. (1) Fixed ex-
ical damage. tinguishing system components and
(9) Sprinkler alarms. On all sprinkler agents shall be designed and approved
systems having more than twenty (20) for use on the specific fire hazards they
sprinklers, the employer shall assure are expected to control or extinguish.
that a local waterflow alarm is pro- (2) If for any reason a fixed extin-
vided which sounds an audible signal guishing system becomes inoperable,
on the premises upon water flow the employer shall notify employees
508
and take the necessary temporary pre- the life of the container, whichever is
cautions to assure their safety until less.
the system is restored to operating (10) The employer shall train employ-
order. Any defects or impairments ees designated to inspect, maintain, op-
shall be properly corrected by trained erate, or repair fixed extinguishing sys-
personnel. tems and annually review their train-
(3) The employer shall provide a dis- ing to keep them up-to-date in the
tinctive alarm or signaling system functions they are to perform.
which complies with 1910.165 and is ca- (11) The employer shall not use
pable of being perceived above ambient chlorobromomethane or carbon tetra-
noise or light levels, on all extin- chloride as an extinguishing agent
guishing systems in those portions of where employees may be exposed.
the workplace covered by the extin- (12) The employer shall assure that
guishing system to indicate when the systems installed in the presence of
extinguishing system is discharging. corrosive atmospheres are constructed
Discharge alarms are not required on of non-corrosive material or otherwise
systems where discharge is imme- protected against corrosion.
diately recognizable. (13) Automatic detection equipment
(4) The employer shall provide effec- shall be approved, installed and main-
tive safeguards to warn employees tained in accordance with 1910.164.
against entry into discharge areas (14) The employer shall assure that
where the atmosphere remains haz- all systems designed for and installed
ardous to employee safety or health. in areas with climatic extremes shall
operate effectively at the expected ex-
(5) The employer shall post hazard
treme temperatures.
warning or caution signs at the en-
trance to, and inside of, areas pro-
at least one manual station is provided
tected by fixed extinguishing systems
for discharge activation of each fixed
which use agents in concentrations
extinguishing system.
known to be hazardous to employee
safety and health.
manual operating devices are identified
(6) The employer shall assure that as to the hazard against which they
fixed systems are inspected annually will provide protection.
by a person knowledgeable in the de- (17) The employer shall provide and
sign and function of the system to as- assure the use of the personal protec-
sure that the system is maintained in tive equipment needed for immediate
good operating condition. rescue of employees trapped in haz-
(7) The employer shall assure that ardous atmospheres created by an
the weight and pressure of refillable agent discharge.
containers is checked at least semi-an- (c) Total flooding systems with poten-
nually. If the container shows a loss in tial health and safety hazards to employ-
net content or weight of more than 5 ees. (1) The employer shall provide an
percent, or a loss in pressure of more emergency action plan in accordance
than 10 percent, it shall be subjected to with 1910.38 for each area within a
maintenance. workplace that is protected by a total
(8) The employer shall assure that flooding system which provides agent
factory charged nonrefillable con- concentrations exceeding the max-
tainers which have no means of pres- imum safe levels set forth in para-
sure indication are weighed at least graphs (b)(5) and (b)(6) of 1910.162.
semi-annually. If a container shows a (2) Systems installed in areas where
loss in net weight or more than 5 per- employees cannot enter during or after
cent it shall be replaced. the systems operation are exempt
(9) The employer shall assure that in- from the requirements of paragraph (c)
spection and maintenance dates are re- of this section.
corded on the container, on a tag at- (3) On all total flooding systems the
tached to the container, or in a central employer shall provide a pre-discharge
location. A record of the last semi-an- employee alarm which complies with
nual check shall be maintained until 1910.165, and is capable of being per-
the container is checked again or for ceived above ambient light or noise
509
levels before the system discharges, 1910.162 Fixed extinguishing sys-

which will give employees time to safe- tems, gaseous agent.
ly exit from the discharge area prior to (a) Scope and application(1) Scope.
system discharge. This section applies to all fixed extin-
(4) The employer shall provide auto- guishing systems, using a gas as the
matic actuation of total flooding sys- extinguishing agent, installed to meet
tems by means of an approved fire de- a particular OSHA standard. These sys-
tection device installed and inter- tems shall also comply with 1910.160.
connected with a pre-discharge em- In some cases, the gas may be in a liq-
ployee alarm system to give employees uid state during storage.
time to safely exit from the discharge (2) Application. The requirements of
area prior to system discharge. paragraphs (b)(2) and (b)(4) through
(b)(6) shall apply only to total flooding
[45 FR 60711, Sept. 12, 1980] systems.
(b) Specific requirements. (1) Agents
1910.161 Fixed extinguishing sys-
tems, dry chemical. used for initial supply and replenish-
ment shall be of the type approved for
(a) Scope and application. This section the systems application. Carbon diox-
applies to all fixed extinguishing sys- ide obtained by dry ice conversion to
tems, using dry chemical as the extin- liquid is not acceptable unless it is
guishing agent, installed to meet a par- processed to remove excess water and
ticular OSHA standard. These systems oil.
shall also comply with 1910.160. (2) Except during overhaul, the em-
(b) Specific requirements. (1) The employer shall assure that the designed
ployer shall assure that dry chemical concentration of gaseous agents is
agents are compatible with any foams maintained until the fire has been ex-
or wetting agents with which they are tinguished or is under control.
used. (3) The employer shall assure that
(2) The employer may not mix to- employees are not exposed to toxic lev-
gether dry chemical extinguishing els of gaseous agent or its decomposi-
agents of different compositions. The tion products.
employer shall assure that dry chem- (4) The employer shall assure that
the designed extinguishing concentra-
ical systems are refilled with the
tion is reached within 30 seconds of ini-
chemical stated on the approval name-
tial discharge except for Halon systems
plate or an equivalent compatible ma- which must achieve design concentra-
terial. tion within 10 seconds.
(3) When dry chemical discharge may (5) The employer shall provide a dis-
obscure vision, the employer shall pro- tinctive pre-discharge employee alarm
vide a pre-discharge employee alarm capable of being perceived above ambi-
which complies with 1910.165 and ent light or noise levels when agent de-
which will give employees time to safe- sign concentrations exceed the max-
ly exit from the discharge area prior to imum safe level for employee exposure.
system discharge. A pre-discharge employee alarm for
(4) The employer shall sample the dry alerting employees before system dis-
chemical supply of all but stored pres- charge shall be provided on Halon 1211
sure systems at least annually to as- and carbon dioxide systems with a de-
sure that the dry chemical supply is sign concentration of 4 percent or
free of moisture which may cause the greater and for Halon 1301 systems with
supply to cake or form lumps. a design concentration of 10 percent or
(5) The employer shall assure that greater. The pre-discharge employee
the rate of application of dry chemicals alarm shall provide employees time to
is such that the designed concentration safely exit the discharge area prior to
system discharge.
of the system will be reached within 30
(6)(i) Where egress from an area can-
seconds of initial discharge.
not be accomplished within one
[45 FR 60712, Sept. 12, 1980] minute, the employer shall not use
510
Halon 1301 in concentrations greater ly as possible after each test or alarm.

than 7 percent. Spare detection devices and compo-
(ii) Where egress takes greater than nents which are normally destroyed in
30 seconds but less than one minute, the process of detecting fires shall be
the employer shall not use Halon 1301 available on the premises or from a
in a concentration greater than 10 per- local supplier in sufficient quantities
cent. and locations for prompt restoration of
(iii) Halon 1301 concentrations great- the system.
er than 10 percent are only permitted (c) Maintenance and testing. (1) The
in areas not normally occupied by em-
employer shall maintain all systems in
ployees provided that any employee in
an operable condition except during re-
the area can escape within 30 seconds.
The employer shall assure that no un- pairs or maintenance.
protected employees enter the area (2) The employer shall assure that
during agent discharge. fire detectors and fire detection sys-
tems are tested and adjusted as often
[45 FR 60712, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May as needed to maintain proper reli-
1, 1981]
ability and operating condition except
1910.163 Fixed extinguishing sys- that factory calibrated detectors need
tems, water spray and foam. not be adjusted after installation.
(a) Scope and application. This section (3) The employer shall assure that
applies to all fixed extinguishing sys- pneumatic and hydraulic operated de-
tems, using water or foam solution as tection systems installed after January
the extinguishing agent, installed to 1, 1981, are equipped with supervised
meet a particular OSHA standard. systems.
These systems shall also comply with (4) The employer shall assure that
1910.160. This section does not apply to the servicing, maintenance and testing
automatic sprinkler systems which are of fire detection systems, including
covered under 1910.159. cleaning and necessary sensitivity ad-
(b) Specific requirements. (1) The em- justments are performed by a trained
ployer shall assure that foam and person knowledgeable in the operations
water spray systems are designed to be and functions of the system.
effective in at least controlling fire in (5) The employer shall also assure
the protected area or on protected that fire detectors that need to be
equipment. cleaned of dirt, dust, or other particu-
(2) The employer shall assure that lates in order to be fully operational
drainage of water spray systems is di- are cleaned at regular periodic inter-
rected away from areas where employ- vals.
ees are working and that no emergency
(d) Protection of fire detectors. (1) The
egress is permitted through the drain-
age path. employer shall assure that fire detec-
tion equipment installed outdoors or in
[45 FR 60712, Sept. 12, 1980] the presence of corrosive atmospheres
be protected from corrosion. The em-
OTHER FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
ployer shall provide a canopy, hood, or
1910.164 Fire detection systems. other suitable protection for detection
equipment requiring protection from
(a) Scope and application. This section
the weather.
applies to all automatic fire detection
systems installed to meet the require- (2) The employer shall locate or oth-
ments of a particular OSHA standard. erwise protect detection equipment so
(b) Installation and restoration. (1) The that it is protected from mechanical or
employer shall assure that all devices physical impact which might render it
and equipment constructed and in- inoperable.
stalled to comply with this standard (3) The employer shall assure that de-
are approved for the purpose for which tectors are supported independently of
they are intended. their attachment to wires or tubing.
(2) The employer shall restore all fire (e) Response time. (1) The employer
detection systems and components to shall assure that fire detection systems
normal operating condition as prompt- installed for the purpose of actuating
511
fire extinguishment or suppression sys- (2) The employee alarm shall be capa-
tems shall be designed to operate in ble of being perceived above ambient
time to control or extinguish a fire. noise or light levels by all employees
(2) The employer shall assure that in the affected portions of the work-
fire detection systems installed for the place. Tactile devices may be used to
purpose of employee alarm and evacu- alert those employees who would not
ation be designed and installed to pro- otherwise be able to recognize the
vide a warning for emergency action audibile or visual alarm.
and safe escape of employees. (3) The employee alarm shall be dis-
(3) The employer shall not delay tinctive and recognizable as a signal to
alarms or devices initiated by fire de- evacuate the work area or to perform
tector actuation for more than 30 sec- actions designated under the emer-
onds unless such delay is necessary for gency action plan.
the immediate safety of employees. (4) The employer shall explain to
When such delay is necessary, it shall each employee the preferred means of
be addressed in an emergency action reporting emergencies, such as manual
plan meeting the requirements of pull box alarms, public address sys-
1910.38. tems, radio or telephones. The em-
(f) Number, location and spacing of de- ployer shall post emergency telephone
tecting devices. The employer shall as- numbers near telephones, or employee
sure that the number, spacing and lo- notice boards, and other conspicuous
cation of fire detectors is based upon locations when telephones serve as a
design data obtained from field experi- means of reporting emergencies. Where
ence, or tests, engineering surveys, the a communication system also serves as
manufacturers recommendations, or a the employee alarm system, all emer-
recognized testing laboratory listing. gency messages shall have priority
over all non-emergency messages.
[45 FR 60713, Sept. 12, 1980] (5) The employer shall establish pro-
cedures for sounding emergency alarms
1910.165 Employee alarm systems.
in the workplace. For those employers
(a) Scope and application. (1) This sec- with 10 or fewer employees in a par-
tion applies to all emergency employee ticular workplace, direct voice commu-
alarms installed to meet a particular nication is an acceptable procedure for
OSHA standard. This section does not sounding the alarm provided all em-
apply to those discharge or supervisory ployees can hear the alarm. Such work-
alarms required on various fixed extin- places need not have a back-up system.
guishing systems or to supervisory (c) Installation and restoration. (1) The
alarms on fire suppression, alarm or employer shall assure that all devices,
detection systems unless they are in- components, combinations of devices
tended to be employee alarm systems. or systems constructed and installed to
(2) The requirements in this section comply with this standard are ap-
that pertain to maintenance, testing proved. Steam whistles, air horns,
and inspection shall apply to all local strobe lights or similar lighting de-
fire alarm signaling systems used for vices, or tactile devices meeting the re-
alerting employees regardless of the quirements of this section are consid-
other functions of the system. ered to meet this requirement for ap-
(3) All pre-discharge employee alarms proval.
installed to meet a particular OSHA (2) The employer shall assure that all
standard shall meet the requirements employee alarm systems are restored
of paragraphs (b)(1) through (4), (c), and to normal operating condition as
(d)(1) of this section. promptly as possible after each test or
(b) General requirements. (1) The em- alarm. Spare alarm devices and compo-
ployee alarm system shall provide nents subject to wear or destruction
warning for necessary emergency ac- shall be available in sufficient quan-
tion as called for in the emergency ac- tities and locations for prompt restora-
tion plan, or for reaction time for safe tion of the system.
escape of employees from the work- (d) Maintenance and testing. (1) The
place or the immediate work area, or employer shall assure that all em-
both. ployee alarm systems are maintained
512
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, App. A
in operating condition except when un- 2. Pre-fire planning. It is suggested that pre-
dergoing repairs or maintenance. fire planning be conducted by the local fire
department and/or the workplace fire bri-
(2) The employer shall assure that a gade in order for them to be familiar with
test of the reliability and adequacy of the workplace and process hazards. Involve-
non-supervised employee alarm sys- ment with the local fire department or fire
tems is made every two months. A dif- prevention bureau is encouraged to facilitate
ferent actuation device shall be used in coordination and cooperation between mem-
each test of a multi-actuation device bers of the fire brigade and those who might
system so that no individual device is be called upon for assistance during a fire
emergency.
used for two consecutive tests.
3. Organizational statement. In addition to
(3) The employer shall maintain or the information required in the organiza-
replace power supplies as often as is tional statement, paragraph 1910.156(b)(1), it
necessary to assure a fully operational is suggested that the organizational state-
condition. Back-up means of alarm, ment also contain the following information:
such as employee runners or tele- a description of the duties that the fire bri-
phones, shall be provided when systems gade members are expected to perform; the
line authority of each fire brigade officer;
are out of service. the number of the fire brigade officers and
(4) The employer shall assure that number of training instructors; and a list
employee alarm circuitry installed and description of the types of awards or rec-
after January 1, 1981, which is capable ognition that brigade members may be eligi-
of being supervised is supervised and ble to receive.
that it will provide positive notifica- 4. Physical capability. The physical capa-
bility requirement applies only to those fire
tion to assigned personnel whenever a brigade members who perform interior struc-
deficiency exists in the system. The tural fire fighting. Employees who cannot
employer shall assure that all super- meet the physical capability requirement
vised employee alarm systems are test- may still be members of the fire brigade as
ed at least annually for reliability and long as such employees do not perform inte-
adequacy. rior structural fire fighting. It is suggested
(5) The employer shall assure that that fire brigade members who are unable to
perform interior structural fire fighting be
the servicing, maintenance and testing assigned less stressful and physically de-
of employee alarms are done by persons manding fire brigade duties, e.g., certain
trained in the designed operation and types of training, recordkeeping, fire preven-
functions necessary for reliable and tion inspection and maintenance, and fire
safe operation of the system. pump operations.
(e) Manual operation. The employer Physically capable can be defined as being
able to perform those duties specified in the
shall assure that manually operated training requirements of section 1910.156(c).
actuation devices for use in conjunc- Physically capable can also be determined
tion with employee alarms are unob- by physical performance tests or by a phys-
structed, conspicuous and readily ac- ical examination when the examining physi-
cessible. cian is aware of the duties that the fire bri-
gade member is expected to perform.
[45 FR 60713, Sept. 12, 1980] It is also recommended that fire brigade
members participate in a physical fitness
APPENDICES TO SUBPART L TO program. There are many benefits which can
PART 1910 be attributed to being physically fit. It is be-
lieved that physical fitness may help to re-
NOTE: The following appendices to subpart duce the number of sprain and strain injuries
L, except appendix E, serve as nonmandatory as well as contributing to the improvement
guidelines to assist employers in complying of the cardiovascular system.
with the appropriate requirements of subpart 5. Training and education. The paragraph on
L. training and education does not contain spe-
cific training and education requirements
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART L OF PART because the type, amount, and frequency of
1910FIRE PROTECTION training and education will be as varied as
are the purposes for which fire brigades are
1910.156 Fire brigades. organized. However, the paragraph does re-
1. Scope. This section does not require an quire that training and education be com-
employer to organize a fire brigade. How- mensurate with those functions that the fire
ever, if an employer does decide to organize brigade is expected to perform; i.e., those
a fire brigade, the requirements of this sec- functions specified in the organizational
tion apply. statement. Such a performance requirement
513
Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7102 Edition)
provides the necessary flexibility to design a ommended qualifications of fire brigade
training program which meets the needs of training instructors.
individual fire brigades. In order to be effective, fire brigades must
At a minimum, hands-on training is re- have competent leadership and supervision.
quired to be conducted annually for all fire It is important for those who supervise the
brigade members. However, for those fire bri- fire brigade during emergency situations,
gade members who are expected to perform e.g., fire brigade chiefs, leaders, etc., to re-
interior structural fire fighting, some type of ceive the necessary training and education
training or education session must be pro- for supervising fire brigade activities during
vided at least quarterly. these hazardous and stressful situations.
In addition to the required hands-on train- These fire brigade members with leadership
ing, it is strongly recommended that fire bri- responsibilities should demonstrate skills in
gade members receive other types of training strategy and tactics, fire suppression and
and education such as: classroom instruc- prevention techniques, leadership principles,
tion, review of emergency action procedures, pre-fire planning, and safety practices. It is
pre-fire planning, review of special hazards again suggested that fire service training
in the workplace, and practice in the use of sources be consulted for determining the
self-contained breathing apparatus. kinds of training and education which are
necessary for those with fire brigade leader-
It is not necessary for the employer to du-
ship responsibilities.
plicate the same training or education that a
It is further suggested that fire brigade
fire brigade member receives as a member of
leaders and fire brigade instructors receive
a community volunteer fire department, res-
more formalized training and education on a
cue squad, or similar organization. However,
continuing basis by attending classes pro-
such training or education must have been
vided by such training sources as univer-
provided to the fire brigade member within
sities and university fire extension services.
the past year and it must be documented The following recommendations should not
that the fire brigade member has received be considered to be all of the necessary ele-
the training or education. For example: ments of a complete comprehensive training
there is no need for a fire brigade member to program, but the information may be helpful
receive another training class in the use of as a guide in developing a fire brigade train-
positive-pressure self-contained breathing ing program.
apparatus if the fire brigade member has re- All fire brigade members should be famil-
cently completed such training as a member iar with exit facilities and their location,
of a community fire department. Instead, the emergency escape routes for handicapped
fire brigade member should receive training workers, and the workplace emergency ac-
or education covering other important equip- tion plan.
ment or duties of the fire brigade as they re- In addition, fire brigade members who are
late to the workplace hazards, facilities and expected to control and extinguish fires in
processes. the incipient stage should, at a minimum, be
It is generally recognized that the effec- trained in the use of fire extinguishers,
tiveness of fire brigade training and edu- standpipes, and other fire equipment they
cation depends upon the expertise of those are assigned to use. They should also be
providing the training and education as well aware of first aid medical procedures and
as the motivation of the fire brigade mem- procedures for dealing with special hazards
bers. Fire brigade training instructors must to which they may be exposed. Training and
receive a higher level of training and edu- education should include both classroom in-
cation than the fire brigade members they struction and actual operation of the equip-
will be teaching. This includes being more ment under simulated emergency conditions.
knowledgeable about the functions to be per- Hands-on type training must be conducted at
formed by the fire brigade and the hazards least annually but some functions should be
involved. The instructors should be qualified reviewed more often.
to train fire brigade members and dem- In addition to the above training, fire bri-
onstrate skills in communication, methods gade members who are expected to perform
of teaching, and motivation. It is important emergency rescue and interior structural fire
for instructors and fire brigade members fighting should, at a minimum, be familiar
alike to be motivated toward the goals of the with the proper techniques in rescue and fire
fire brigade and be aware of the importance suppression procedures. Training and edu-
of the service that they are providing for the cation should include fire protection courses,
protection of other employees and the work- classroom training, simulated fire situations
place. including wet drills and, when feasible, ex-
It is suggested that publications from the tinguishment of actual mock fires. Fre-
International Fire Service Training Associa- quency of training or education must be at
tion, the National Fire Protection Associa- least quarterly, but some drills or classroom
tion (NFPA1041), the International Society training should be conducted as often as
of Fire Service Instructors and other fire monthly or even weekly to maintain the pro-
training sources be consulted for rec- ficiency of fire brigade members.
514
There are many excellent sources of train- tivities. It is important that the protective
ing and education that the employer may clothing to be worn during these types of fire
want to use in developing a training program fighting operations reflect the hazards which
for the workplace fire brigade. These sources are expected to be encountered by fire bri-
include publications, seminars, and courses gade members.
offered by universities. (B) Foot and leg protection. Section 1910.156
There are also excellent fire school courses permits an option to achieve foot and leg
by such facilities as Texas A and M Univer- protection.
sity, Delaware State Fire School, Lamar The section recognizes the interdependence
University, and Reno Fire School, that deal of protective clothing to cover one or more
with those unique hazards which may be en- parts of the body. Therefore, an option is
countered by fire brigades in the oil and given so that fire brigade members may
chemical industry. These schools, and oth- meet the foot and leg requirements by either
ers, also offer excellent training courses wearing long fire-resistive coats in combina-
which would be beneficial to fire brigades in tion with fully extended boots, or by wearing
other types of industries. These courses shorter fire-resistive costs in combination
should be a continuing part of the training with protective trousers and protective shoes
program, and employers are strongly encour- or shorter boots.
aged to take advantage of these excellent re- (C) Body protection. Paragraph (e)(3) of
sources. 1910.156 provides an option for fire brigade
It is also important that fire brigade mem- members to achieve body protection. Fire
bers be informed about special hazards to brigade members may wear a fire-resistive
which they may be exposed during fire and coat in combination with fully extended
other emergencies. Such hazards as storage boots, or they may wear a fire-resistive coat
and use areas of flammable liquids and gases, in combination with protective trousers.
toxic chemicals, water-reactive substances, Fire-resistive coats and protective trousers
etc., can pose difficult problems. There must meeting all of the requirements contained in
be written procedures developed that de- NFPA 19711975 Protective Clothing for
scribe the actions to be taken in situations Structural Fire Fighters, are acceptable as
involving special hazards. Fire brigade mem- meeting the requirements of this standard.
bers must be trained in handling these spe- The lining is required to be permanently
cial hazards as well as keeping abreast of attached to the outer shell. However, it is
any changes that occur in relation to these permissible to attach the lining to the outer
special hazards. shell material by stitching in one area such
6. Fire fighting equipment. It is important as at the neck. Fastener tape or snap fas-
that fire fighting equipment that is in dam- teners may be used to secure the rest of the
aged or unserviceable condition be removed lining to the outer shell to facilitate clean-
from service and replaced. This will prevent ing. Reference to permanent lining does not
fire brigade members from using unsafe refer to a winter liner which is a detachable
equipment by mistake. extra lining used to give added protection to
Fire fighting equipment, except portable the wearer against the effects of cold weath-
fire extinguishers and respirators, must be er and wind.
inspected at least annually. Portable fire ex- (D) Hand protection. The requirements of
tinguishers and respirators are required to the paragraph on hand protection may be
be inspected at least monthly. met by protective gloves or a glove system.
7. Protective clothing. (A) General. Para- A glove system consists of a combination of
graph (e) of 1910.156 does not require all fire different gloves. The usual components of a
brigade members to wear protective cloth- glove system consist of a pair of gloves,
ing. It is not the intention of these standards which provide thermal insulation to the
to require employers to provide a full ensem- hands, worn in combination with a second
ble of protective clothing for every fire bri- pair of gloves which provide protection
gade member without consideration given to against flame, cut, and puncture.
the types of hazardous environments to It is suggested that protective gloves pro-
which the fire brigade member might be ex- vide dexterity and a sense of feel for objects.
posed. It is the intention of these standards Criteria and test methods for dexterity are
to require adequate protection for those fire contained in the NIOSH publications, The
brigade members who might be exposed to Development of Criteria for Firefighters
fires in an advanced stage, smoke, toxic Gloves; Vol. I: Glove Requirements and
gases, and high temperatures. Therefore, the Vol. II: Glove Criteria and Test Methods.
protective clothing requirements only apply These NIOSH publications also contain a
to those fire brigade members who perform permissible modified version of Federal Test
interior structural fire fighting operations. Method 191, Method 5903, (paragraph (3) of
Additionally, the protective clothing re- appendix E) for flame resistance when
quirements do not apply to the protective gloves, rather than glove material, are test-
clothing worn during outside fire fighting ed for flame resistance.
operations (brush and forest fires, crash crew (E) Head, eye, and face protection. Head pro-
operations) or other special fire fighting ac- tective devices which meet the requirements
515
contained in NFPA No. 1972 are acceptable as device or an escape self-contained breathing
meeting the requirements of this standard apparatus (ESCBA). The ESCBA is a short-
for head protection. duration respiratory protective device which
Head protective devices are required to be is approved for only emergency escape pur-
provided with ear flaps so that the ear flaps poses. It is suggested that if ESCBA units
will be available if needed. It is rec- are used, that they be of at least 5 minutes
ommended that ear protection always be service life.
used while fighting interior structural fires. Quick-disconnect valves are devices which
Many head protective devices are equipped start the flow of air by insertion of the hose
with face shields to protect the eyes and (which leads to the facepiece) into the regu-
face. These face shields are permissible as lator of self-contained breathing apparatus,
meeting the eye and face protection require- and stop the flow of air by disconnecting the
ments of this paragraph as long as such face hose from the regulator. These devices are
shields meet the requirements of 1910.133 of particularly useful for those positive-pres-
the General Industry Standards. sure self-contained breathing apparatus
Additionally, full facepieces, helmets or which do not have the capability of being
hoods of approved breathing apparatus which switched from the demand to the positive-
meet the requirements of 1910.134 and para- pressure mode.
graph (f) of 1910.156 are also acceptable as
The use of a self-contained breathing appa-
meeting the eye and face protection require-
ratus where the apparatus can be switched
ments.
from a demand to a positive-pressure mode is
It is recommended that a flame resistant
acceptable as long as the apparatus is in the
protective head covering such as a hood or
positive-pressure mode when performing in-
snood, which will not adversely affect the
seal of a respirator facepiece, be worn during terior structural fire fighting operations.
interior structural fire fighting operations to Also acceptable are approved respiratory
protect the sides of the face and hair. protective devices which have been con-
8. Respiratory protective devices. Respiratory verted to the positive-pressure type when
protection is required to be worn by fire bri- such modification is accomplished by trained
gade members while working inside build- and experienced persons using kits or parts
ings or confined spaces where toxic products approved by NIOSH and provided by the
of combustion or an oxygen deficiency is manufacturer and by following the manufac-
likely to be present; respirators are also to turers instructions.
be worn during emergency situations involv- There are situations which require the use
ing toxic substances. When fire brigade of respirators which have a duration of 2
members respond to emergency situations, hours or more. Presently, there are no ap-
they may be exposed to unknown contami- proved positive-pressure apparatus with a
nants in unknown concentrations. Therefore, rated service life of more than 2 hours. Con-
it is imperative that fire brigade members sequently, negative-pressure self-contained
wear proper respiratory protective devices breathing apparatus with a rated service life
during these situations. Additionally, there of more than 2 hours and which have a min-
are many instances where toxic products of imum protection factor of 5,000 as deter-
combustion are still present during mop-up mined by an acceptable quantitative fit test
and overhaul operations. Therefore, fire bri- performed on each individual, will be accept-
gade members should continue to wear res- able for use during situations which require
pirators during these types of operations. long duration apparatus. Long duration ap-
Self-contained breathing apparatus are not paratus may be needed in such instances as
required to be equipped with either a buddy- working in tunnels, subway systems, etc.
breathing device or a quick-disconnect valve. Such negative-pressure breathing apparatus
However, these accessories may be very use- will continue to be acceptable for a max-
ful and are acceptable as long as such acces- imum of 18 months after a positive-pressure
sories do not cause damage to the apparatus, apparatus with the same or longer rated
restrict the air flow of the apparatus, or ob- service life of more than 2 hours is certified
struct the normal operation of the appa- by NIOSH/MSHA. After this 18 month phase-
ratus. in period, all self-contained breathing appa-
Buddy-breathing devices are useful for ratus used for these long duration situations
emergency situations where a victim or an- will have to be of the positive-pressure type.
other fire brigade member can share the Protection factor (sometimes called fit fac-
same air supply with the wearer of the appa- tor) is defined as the ratio of the contami-
ratus for emergency escape purposes. nant concentrations outside of the respirator
The employer is encouraged to provide fire to the contaminant concentrations inside
brigade members with an alternative means the facepiece of the respirator.
of respiratory protection to be used only for
emergency escape purposes if the self-con- Concentration outside respirator
tained breathing apparatus becomes inoper- PF=
ative. Such alternative means of respiratory Concentration inside facepiece
protection may be either a buddy-breathing
516
Protection factors are determined by quan- quantitative fit test procedures which in-
titative fit tests. An acceptable quantitative clude these elements are acceptable for de-
fit test should include the following ele- termining protection factors. Procedures for
ments: a quantitative fit test are required to be
1. A fire brigade member who is physically available for inspection by the Assistant
and medically capable of wearing res- Secretary or authorized representative.
pirators, and who is trained in the use of res- Organizations such as Los Alamos Sci-
pirators, dons a self-contained breathing ap- entific Laboratory, Lawrence Livermore
paratus equipped with a device that will Laboratory, NIOSH, and American National
monitor the concentration of a contaminant Standards Institute (ANSI) are excellent
inside the facepiece. sources for additional information con-
2. The fire brigade member then performs a cerning qualitative and quantitative fit test-
qualitative fit test to assure the best face to ing.
facepiece seal as possible. A qualitative fit
test can consist of a negative-pressure test, 1910.157 Portable fire extinguishers.
positive-pressure test, isoamyl acetate vapor
(banana oil) test, or an irritant smoke test. 1. Scope and application. The scope and ap-
For more details on respirator fitting see the plication of this section is written to apply
NIOSH booklet entitled A Guide to Indus- to three basic types of workplaces. First,
trial Respiratory Protection June, 1976, and there are those workplaces where the em-
HEW publication No. (NIOSH) 76189. ployer has chosen to evacuate all employees
3. The wearer should then perform physical from the workplace at the time of a fire
activity which reflects the level of work ac- emergency. Second, there are those work-
tivity which would be expected during fire places where the employer has chosen to per-
fighting activities. The physical activity mit certain employees to fight fires and to
should include simulated fire-ground work evacuate all other non-essential employees
activity or physical exercise such as run- at the time of a fire emergency. Third, there
ning-in-place, a step test, etc.
are those workplaces where the employer has
4. Without readjusting the apparatus, the
chosen to permit all employees in the work-
wearer is placed in a test atmosphere con-
place to use portable fire extinguishers to
taining a non-toxic contaminant with a
fight fires.
known, constant, concentration.
The protection factor is then determined The section also addresses two kinds of
by dividing the known concentration of the work areas. The entire workplace can be di-
contaminant in the test atmosphere by the vided into outside (exterior) work areas and
concentration of the contaminant inside the inside (interior) work areas. This division of
facepiece when the following exercises are the workplace into two areas is done in rec-
performed: ognition of the different types of hazards em-
(a) Normal breathing with head motionless ployees may be exposed to during fire fight-
for one minute; ing operations. Fires in interior workplaces,
(b) Deep breathing with head motionless pose a greater hazard to employees; they can
for 30 seconds; produce greater exposure to quantities of
(c) Turning head slowly from side to side smoke, toxic gases, and heat because of the
while breathing normally, pausing for at capability of a building or structure to con-
least two breaths before changing direction. tain or entrap these products of combustion
Continue for at least one minute; until the building can be ventilated. Exterior
(d) Moving head slowly up and down while work areas, normally open to the environ-
breathing normally, pausing for at least two ment, are somewhat less hazardous, because
breaths before changing direction. Continue the products of combustion are generally
for at least two minutes; carried away by the thermal column of the
(e) Reading from a prepared text, slowly fire. Employees also have a greater selection
and clearly, and loudly enough to be heard of evacuation routes if it is necessary to
and understood. Continue for one minute; abandon fire fighting efforts.
and In recognition of the degree of hazard
(f) Normal breathing with head motionless present in the two types of work areas, the
for at least one minute. standards for exterior work areas are some-
The protection factor which is determined what less restrictive in regards to extin-
must be at least 5,000. The quantitative fit guisher distribution. Paragraph (a) explains
test should be conducted at least three this by specifying which paragraphs in the
times. It is acceptable to conduct all three section apply.
tests on the same day. However, there should 2. Portable fire extinguisher exemptions. In
be at least one hour between tests to reflect recognition of the three options given to em-
the protection afforded by the apparatus dur- ployers in regard to the amount of employee
ing different times of the day. evacuation to be carried out, the standards
The above elements are not meant to be a permit certain exemptions based on the
comprehensive, technical description of a number of employees expected to use fire ex-
quantitative fit test protocol. However, tinguishers.
517
Where the employer has chosen to totally tional Fire Protection Associations Stand-
evacuate the workplace at the time of a fire ard No. 10, Portable Fire Extinguishers.
emergency and when fire extinguishers are 4. Selection and distribution. The employer
not provided, the requirements of this sec- is responsible for the proper selection and
tion do not apply to that workplace. distribution of fire extinguishers and the de-
Where the employer has chosen to par- termination of the necessary degree of pro-
tially evacuate the workplace or the effected tection. The selection and distribution of fire
area at the time of a fire emergency and has extinguishers must reflect the type and class
permitted certain designated employees to of fire hazards associated with a particular
remain behind to operate critical plant oper- workplace.
ations or to fight fires with extinguishers, Extinguishers for protecting Class A haz-
then the employer is exempt from the dis- ards may be selected from the following
tribution requirements of this section. Em- types: water, foam, loaded stream, or multi-
ployees who will be remaining behind to per- purpose dry chemical. Extinguishers for pro-
form incipient fire fighting or members of a tecting Class B hazards may be selected from
fire brigade must be trained in their duties. the following types: Halon 1301, Halon 1211,
The training must result in the employees carbon dioxide, dry chemicals, foam, or load-
becoming familiar with the locations of fire ed stream. Extinguishers for Class C hazards
extinguishers. Therefore, the employer must may be selected from the following types:
locate the extinguishers in convenient loca- Halon 1301, Halon 1211, carbon dioxide, or dry
tions where the employees know they can be chemical.
found. For example, they could be mounted Combustible metal (Class D hazards) fires
in the fire truck or cart that the fire brigade pose a different type of fire problem in the
uses when it responds to a fire emergency. workplace. Extinguishers using water, gas,
They can also be distributed as set forth in or certain dry chemicals cannot extinguish
the National Fire Protection Associations or control this type of fire. Therefore, cer-
Standard No. 10, Portable Fire Extin- tain metals have specific dry powder extin-
guishing agents which can extinguish or con-
guishers.
trol this type of fire. Those agents which
Where the employer has decided to permit
have been specifically approved for use on
all employees in the workforce to use fire ex-
certain metal fires provide the best protec-
tinguishers, then the entire OSHA section tion; however, there are also some uni-
applies. versal type agents which can be used effec-
3. Portable fire extinguisher mounting. Pre- tively on a variety of combustible metal
vious standards for mounting fire extin- fires if necessary. The universal type
guishers have been criticized for requiring agents include: Foundry flux, Lith-X powder,
specific mounting locations. In recognition TMB liquid, pyromet powder, TEC powder,
of this criticism, the standard has been re- dry talc, dry graphite powder, dry sand, dry
written to permit as much flexibility in ex- sodium chloride, dry soda ash, lithium chlo-
tinguisher mounting as is acceptable to as- ride, zirconium silicate, and dry dolomite.
sure that fire extinguishers are available Water is not generally accepted as an ef-
when needed and that employees are not sub- fective extinguishing agent for metal fires.
jected to injury hazards when they try to ob- When applied to hot burning metal, water
tain an extinguisher. will break down into its basic atoms of oxy-
It is the intent of OSHA to permit the gen and hydrogen. This chemical breakdown
mounting of extinguishers in any location contributes to the combustion of the metal.
that is accessible to employees without the However, water is also a good universal cool-
use of portable devices such as a ladder. This ant and can be used on some combustible
limitation is necessary because portable de- metals, but only under proper conditions and
vices can be moved or taken from the place application, to reduce the temperature of the
where they are needed and, therefore, might burning metal below the ignition point. For
not be available at the time of an emer- example, automatic deluge systems in mag-
gency. nesium plants can discharge such large quan-
Employers are given as much flexibility as tities of water on burning magnesium that
possible to assure that employees can obtain the fire will be extinguished. The National
extinguishers as fast as possible. For exam- Fire Protection Association has specific
ple, an acceptable method of mounting ex- standards for this type of automatic sprin-
tinguishers in areas where fork lift trucks or kler system. Further information on the
tow-motors are used is to mount the units on control of metal fires with water can be
retractable boards which, by means of found in the National Fire Protection Asso-
counterweighting, can be raised above the ciations Fire Protection Handbook.
level where they could be struck by vehic- An excellent source of selection and dis-
ular traffic. When needed, they can be low- tribution criteria is found in the National
ered quickly for use. This method of mount- Fire Protection Associations Standard No.
ing can also reduce vandalism and unauthor- 10. Other sources of information include the
ized use of extinguishers. The extinguishers National Safety Council and the employers
may also be mounted as outlined in the Na- fire insurance carrier.
518
5. Substitution of standpipe systems for port- of the U.S. Department of Transportation
able fire extinguishers. The employer is per- (DOT) or State licensed extinguisher serv-
mitted to substitute acceptable standpipe icing firms or recognized by the National As-
systems for portable fire extinguishers under sociation of Fire Equipment Distributors in
certain circumstances. It is necessary to as- Chicago, Illinois, are generally acceptable
sure that any substitution will provide the for performing this service.
same coverage that portable units provide. 8. Training and education. This part of the
This means that fire hoses, because of their standard is of the utmost importance to em-
limited portability, must be spaced through- ployers and employees if the risk of injury or
out the protected area so that they can reach death due to extinguisher use is to be re-
around obstructions such as columns, ma- duced. If an employer is going to permit an
chinery, etc. and so that they can reach into employee to fight a workplace fire of any
closets and other enclosed areas. size, the employer must make sure that the
6. Inspection, maintenance and testing. The employee knows everything necessary to as-
ultimate responsibility for the inspection, sure the employees safety.
maintenance and testing of portable fire ex- Training and education can be obtained
tinguishers lies with the employer. The ac- through many channels. Often, local fire de-
tual inspection, maintenance, and testing partments in larger cities have fire preven-
may, however, be conducted by outside con- tion bureaus or similar organizations which
tractors with whom the employer has ar- can provide basic fire prevention training
ranged to do the work. When contracting for programs. Fire insurance companies will
such work, the employer should assure that have data and information available. The
the contractor is capable of performing the National Fire Protection Association and
work that is needed to comply with this the National Safety Council will provide, at
standard. a small cost, publications that can be used in
If the employer should elect to perform the a fire prevention program.
inspection, maintenance, and testing re- Actual fire fighting training can be ob-
quirements of this section in-house, then the tained from various sources in the country.
employer must make sure that those persons The Texas A & M University, the University
doing the work have been trained to do the of Marylands Fire and Rescue Institute,
work and to recognize problem areas which West Virginia Universitys Fire Service Ex-
could cause an extinguisher to be inoperable. tension, Iowa State Universitys Fire Service
The National Fire Protection Association Extension and other State training schools
provides excellent guidelines in its standard and land grant colleges have fire fighting
for portable fire extinguishers. The employer programs directed to industrial applications.
may also check with the manufacturer of the Some manufacturers of extinguishers, such
unit that has been purchased and obtain as the Ansul Company and Safety First, con-
guidelines on inspection, maintenance, and duct fire schools for customers in the proper
testing. Hydrostatic testing is a process that use of extinguishers. Several large corpora-
should be left to contractors or individuals tions have taken time to develop their own
using suitable facilities and having the on-site training programs which expose em-
training necessary to perform the work. ployees to the actual feeling of fire fight-
Anytime the employer has removed an ex- ing. Simulated fires for training of employ-
tinguisher from service to be checked or re- ees in the proper use of extinguishers are
paired, alternate equivalent protection must also an acceptable part of a training pro-
be provided. Alternate equivalent protection gram.
could include replacing the extinguisher In meeting the requirements of this sec-
with one or more units having equivalent or tion, the employer may also provide edu-
equal ratings, posting a fire watch, restrict- cational materials, without classroom in-
ing the unprotected area from employee ex- struction, through the use of employee no-
posure, or providing a hose system ready to tice campaigns using instruction sheets or
operate. flyers or similar types of informal programs.
7. Hydrostatic testing. As stated before, the The employer must make sure that employ-
employer may contract for hydrostatic test- ees are trained and educated to recognize not
ing. However, if the employer wishes to pro- only what type of fire is being fought and
vide the testing service, certain equipment how to fight it, but also when it is time to
and facilities must be available. Employees get away from it and leave fire suppression
should be made aware of the hazards associ- to more experienced fire fighters.
ated with hydrostatic testing and the impor-
tance of using proper guards and water pres- 1910.158 Standpipe and hose systems.
sures. Severe injury can result if extin- 1. Scope and application. This section has
guisher shells fail violently under hydro- been written to provide adequate coverage of
static pressure. those standpipe and hose systems that an
Employers are encouraged to use contrac- employer may install in the workplace to
tors who can perform adequate and reliable meet the requirements of a particular OSHA
service. Firms which have been certified by standard. For example, OSHA permits the
the Materials Transportation Board (MTB) substitution of hose systems for portable fire
519
extinguishers in 1910.157. If an employer hose to extremely cold climates, the em-
chooses to provide hose systems instead of ployer may store the hose in houses or simi-
portable Class A fire extinguishers, then lar protective areas and connect it to the
those hose systems used for substitution outlet when needed.
would have to meet the applicable require- There is approved lined hose available that
ments of 1910.157. All other standpipe and can be used to replace unlined hose which is
hose systems not used as a substitute would stored on racks in cabinets. The lined hose is
be exempt from these requirements. constructed so that it can be folded and
The section specifically exempts Class I placed in cabinets in the same manner as un-
large hose systems. By large hose systems, lined hose.
OSHA means those 212 (6.3 cm) hose lines Hose is considered to be unserviceable
that are usually associated with fire depart- when it deteriorates to the extent that it can
ments of the size that provide their own no longer carry water at the required pres-
water supply through fire apparatus. When sure and flow rates. Dry rotted linen or hemp
the fire gets to the size that outside protec- hose, cross threaded couplings, and punc-
tion of that degree is necessary, OSHA be- tured hose are examples of unserviceable
lieves that in most industries employees will hose.
have been evacuated from the fire area and 6. Nozzles. Variable stream nozzles can pro-
the professional fire fighters will take vide useful variations in water flow and
control. spray patterns during fire fighting oper-
2. Protection of standpipes. Employers must ations and they are recommended for em-
make sure that standpipes are protected so ployee use. It is recommended that 100 psi
that they can be relied upon during a fire (700kPa) nozzle pressure be used to provide
emergency. This means protecting the pipes good flow patterns for variable stream noz-
from mechanical and physical damage. There zles. The most desirable attribute for nozzles
are various means for protecting the equip- is the ability of the nozzle person to shut off
ment such as, but not limited to, enclosing the water flow at the nozzle when it is nec-
the supply piping in the construction of the essary. This can be accomplished in many
building, locating the standpipe in an area ways. For example, a shut-off nozzle with a
which is inaccessible to vehicles, or locating lever or rotation of the nozzle to stop flow
the standpipe in a stairwell. would be effective, but in other cases a sim-
3. Hose covers and cabinets. The employer ple globe valve placed between a straight
should keep fire protection hose equipment stream nozzle and the hose could serve the
in cabinets or inside protective covers which same purpose. For straight stream nozzles 50
will protect it from the weather elements, psi nozzle pressure is recommended. The in-
dirt or other damaging sources. The use of tent of this standard is to protect the em-
protective covers must be easily removed or ployee from run-away hoses if it becomes
opened to assure that hose and nozzle are ac- necessary to drop a pressurized hose line and
cessible. When the employer places hose in a retreat from the fire front and other related
cabinet, the employer must make sure that hazards.
the hose and nozzle are accessible to employ- 7. Design and installation. Standpipe and
ees without subjecting them to injury. In hose systems designed and installed in ac-
order to make sure that the equipment is cordance with NFPA Standard No. 14,
readily accessible, the employer must also Standpipe and Hose Systems, are consid-
make sure that the cabinets used to store ered to be in compliance with this standard.
equipment are kept free of obstructions and
other equipment which may interfere with 1910.159 Automatic sprinkler systems.
the fast distribution of the fire hose stored 1. Scope and application. This section con-
in the cabinet. tains the minimum requirements for design,
4. Hose outlets and connections. The em- installation and maintenance of sprinkler
ployer must assure that employees who use systems that are needed for employee safety.
standpipe and hose systems can reach the The Occupational Safety and Health Admin-
hose rack and hose valve without the use of istration is aware of the fact that the Na-
portable equipment such as ladders. Hose tional Board of Fire Underwriters is no
reels are encouraged for use because one em- longer an active organization, however,
ployee can retrieve the hose, charge it, and sprinkler systems still exist that were de-
place it into service without much difficulty. signed and installed in accordance with that
5. Hose. When the employer elects to pro- organizations standards. Therefore, OSHA
vide small hose in lieu of portable fire extin- will recognize sprinkler systems designed to,
guishers, those hose stations being used for and maintained in accordance with, NBFU
the substitution must have hose attached and earlier NFPA standards.
and ready for service. However, if more than 2. Exemptions. In an effort to assure that
the necessary amount of small hose outlets employers will continue to use automatic
are provided, hose does not have to be at- sprinkler systems as the primary fire protec-
tached to those outlets that would provide tion system in workplaces, OSHA is exempt-
redundant coverage. Further, where the ining from coverage those systems not re-
stallation of hose on outlets may expose the quired by a particular OSHA standard and
520
which have been installed in workplaces employers fire insurance company or from
solely for the purpose of protecting property. the National Fire Protection Associations
Many of these types of systems are installed Standard No. 13A, Sprinkler System, Main-
in areas or buildings with little or no em- tenance.
ployee exposure. An example is those ware- 5. Water supplies. The water supply to a
houses where employees may enter occasion- sprinkler system is one of the most impor-
ally to take inventory or move stock. Some tant factors an employer should consider
employers may choose to shut down those when evaluationg a system. Obviously, if
systems which are not specifically required there is no water supply, the system is use-
by OSHA rather than upgrade them to com- less. Water supplies can be lost for various
ply with the standards. OSHA does not in- reasons such as improperly closed valves, ex-
tend to regulate such systems. OSHA only cessive demand, broken water mains, and
intends to regulate those systems which are broken fire pumps. The employer must be
installed to comply with a particular OSHA able to determine if or when this type of con-
standard. dition exists either by performing a main
3. Design. There are two basic types of drain test or visual inspection. Another
sprinkler system design. Pipe schedule de- problem may be an inadequate water supply.
signed systems are based on pipe schedule ta- For example, a light hazard occupancy may,
bles developed to protect hazards with stand- through rehabilitation or change in tenants,
ard sized pipe, number of sprinklers, and pipe become an ordinary or high hazard occu-
lengths. Hydraulic designed systems are pancy. In such cases, the existing water sup-
based on an engineered design of pipe size ply may not be able to provide the pressure
which will produce a given water density or or duration necessary for proper protection.
flow rate at any particular point in the sys- Employers must assure that proper design
tem. Either design can be used to comply and tests have been made to assure an ade-
with this standard. quate water supply. These tests can be ar-
The National Fire Protection Associations ranged through the employers fire insurance
Standard No. 13, Automatic Sprinkler Sys-
carrier or through a local sprinkler mainte-
tems, contains the tables needed to design
nance company or through the local fire pre-
and install either type of system. Minimum
vention organization.
water supplies, densities, and pipe sizes are
given for all types of occupancies. Anytime the employer must shut down the
The employer may check with a reputable primary water supply for a sprinkler system,
fire protection engineering consultant or the standard requires that equivalent protec-
sprinkler design company when evaluating tion be provided. Equivalent protection may
existing systems or designing a new installa- include a fire watch with extinguishers or
tion. hose lines in place and manned, or a sec-
With the advent of new construction mate- ondary water supply such as a tank truck
rials for the manufacuture of sprinkler pipe, and pump, or a tank or fire pond with fire
materials, other than steel have been ap- pumps, to protect the areas where the pri-
proved for use as sprinkler pipe. Selection of mary water supply is limited or shut down.
pipe material should be made on the basis of The employer may also require evacuation of
the type of installation and the acceptability the workplace and have an emergency action
of the material to local fire and building offi- plan which specifies such action.
cials where such systems may serve more 6. Protection of piping. Piping which is ex-
than one purpose. posed to corrosive atmospheres, either chem-
Before new sprinkler systems are placed ical or natural, can become defective to the
into service, an acceptance test is to be con- extent that it is useless. Employers must as-
ducted. The employer should invite the insure that piping is protected from corrosion
staller, designer, insurance representative, by its material of construction, e.g., stain-
and a local fire official to witness the test. less steel, or by a protective coating, e.g.,
Problems found during the test are to be cor- paint.
rected before the system is placed into serv- 7. Sprinklers. When an employer finds it
ice. necessary to replace sprinkler system com-
4. Maintenance. It is important that any ponents or otherwise change a sprinklers de-
sprinkler system maintenance be done only sign, employer should make a complete fire
when there is minimal employee exposure to protection engineering survey of that part of
the fire hazard. For example, if repairs or the system being changed. This review
changes to the system are to be made, they should assure that the changes to the system
should be made during those hours when em- will not alter the effectiveness of the system
ployees are not working or are not occupying as it is presently designed. Water supplies,
that portion of the workplace protected by densities and flow characteristics should be
the portion of the system which has been maintained.
shut down. 8. Protection of sprinklers. All components of
The procedures for performing a flow test the system must be protected from mechan-
via a main drain test or by the use of an in- ical impact damage. This can be achieved
spectors test valve can be obtained from the with the use of mechanical guards or screens
521
or by locating components in areas where side effects. However, chlorobromomethane
physical contact is impossible or limited. has been accepted and may be used as an ex-
9. Sprinkler alarms. The most recognized plosion suppression agent in unoccupied
sprinkler alarm is the water motor gong or spaces. OSHA is permitting the use of this
bell that sounds when water begins to flow agent only in areas where employees will not
through the system. This is not however, the be exposed.
only type of acceptable water flow alarm. 2. Distinctive alarm signals. A distinctive
Any alarm that gives an indication that alarm signal is required to indicate that a
water is flowing through the system is ac- fixed system is discharging. Such a signal is
ceptable. For example, a siren, a whistle, a necessary on those systems where it is not
flashing light, or similar alerting device immediately apparent that the system is dis-
which can transmit a signal to the necessary charging. For example, certain gaseous
persons would be acceptable. The purpose of agents make a loud noise when they dis-
the alarm is to alert persons that the system charge. In this case no alarm signal is nec-
is operating, and that some type of planned essary. However, where systems are located
action is necessary. in remote locations or away from the general
10. Sprinkler spacing. For a sprinkler sys- work area and where it is possible that a sys-
tem to be effective there must be an ade- tem could discharge without anyone know-
quate discharge of water spray from the ing that it is doing so, then a distinctive
sprinkler head. Any obstructions which alarm is necessary to warn employees of the
hinder the designed density or spray pattern hazards that may exist. The alarm can be a
of the water may create unprotected areas bell, gong, whistle, horn, flashing light, or
which can cause fire to spread. There are any combination of signals as long as it is
some sprinklers that, because of the sys- identifiable as a discharge alarm.
tems design, are deflected to specific areas. 3. Maintenance. The employer is respon-
This type of obstruction is acceptable if the sible for the maintenance of all fixed sys-
systems design takes it into consideration tems, but this responsibility does not pre-
in providing adequate coverage. clude the use of outside contractors to do
such work. New systems should be subjected
1910.160 Fixed extinguishing systems, general. to an acceptance test before placed in serv-
1. Scope and application. This section con- ice. The employer should invite the installer,
tains the general requirements that are ap- designer, insurance representative and oth-
plicable to all fixed extinguishing systems ers to witness the test. Problems found dur-
installed to meet OSHA standards. It also ing the test need to be corrected before the
applies to those fixed extinguishing systems, system is considered operational.
generally total flooding, which are not re- 4. Manual discharge stations. There are in-
quired by OSHA, but which, because of the stances, such as for mechanical reasons and
agents discharge, may expose employees to others, where the standards call for a man-
hazardous concentrations of extinguishing ual back-up activation device. While the lo-
agents or combustion by-products. Employ- cation of this device is not specified in the
ees who work around fixed extinguishing sys- standard, the employer should assume that
tems must be warned of the possible hazards the device should be located where employ-
associated with the system and its agent. ees can easily reach it. It could, for example,
For example, fixed dry chemical extin- be located along the main means of egress
guishing systems may generate a large from the protected area so that employees
enough cloud of dry chemical particles that could activate the system as they evacuate
employees may become visually disoriented. the work area.
Certain gaseous agents can expose employees 5. Personal protective equipment. The em-
to hazardous by-products of combustion ployer is required to provide the necessary
when the agent comes into contact with hot personal protective equipment to rescue em-
metal or other hot surface. Some gaseous ployees who may be trapped in a totally
agents may be present in hazardous con- flooded environment which may be haz-
centrations when the system has totally dis- ardous to their health. This equipment
charged because an extra rich concentration would normally include a positive-pressure
is necessary to extinguish deep-seated fires. self-contained breathing apparatus and any
Certain local application systems may be de- necessary first aid equipment. In cases where
signed to discharge onto the flaming surface the employer can assure the prompt arrival
of a liquid, and it is possible that the liquid of the local fire department or plant emer-
can splatter when hit with the discharging gency personnel which can provide the equip-
agent. All of these hazards must be deter- ment, this can be considered as complying
mined before the system is placed into oper- with the standards.
ation, and must be discussed with employees.
1910.161 Fixed extinguishing systems, dry
Based on the known toxicological effects of
chemical.
agents such as carbon tetrachloride and
chlorobromomethane, OSHA is not permit- 1. Scope and application. The requirements
ting the use of these agents in areas where of this section apply only to dry chemical
employees can be exposed to the agent or its systems. These requirements are to be used
522
in conjunction with the requirements of a. Some foams are not acceptable for use
1910.160. on fires involving flammable gases and lique-
2. Maintenance. The employer is respon- fied gases with boiling points below ambient
sible for assuring that dry chemical systems workplace temperatures. Other foams are
will operate effectively. To do this, periodic not effective when used on fires involving
maintenance is necessary. One test that polar solvent liquids.
must be conducted during the maintenance b. Any agent using water as part of the
check is one which will determine if the mixture should not be used on fire involving
agent has remained free of moisture. If an combustible metals unless it is applied under
agent absorbs any moisture, it may tend to proper conditions to reduce the temperature
cake and thereby clog the system. An easy of burning metal below the ignition tempera-
test for acceptable moisture content is to ture. The employer should use only those
take a lump of dry chemical from the con- foams that have been tested and accepted for
tainer and drop it from a height of four this application by a recognized independent
inches. If the lump crumbles into fine par- testing laboratory.
ticles, the agent is acceptable. c. Certain types of foams may be incompat-
ible and break down when they are mixed to-
1910.162 Fixed extinguishing systems, gaseous gether.
agent. d. For fires involving water miscible sol-
vents, employers should use only those
1. Scope and application. This section ap-
foams tested and approved for such use. Reg-
plies only to those systems which use gas-
ular protein foams may not be effective on
eous agents. The requirements of 1910.160
such solvents.
also apply to the gaseous agent systems cov-
Whenever employers provide a foam or
ered in this section.
water spray system, drainage facilities must
2. Design concentrations. Total flooding gas- be provided to carry contaminated water or
eous systems are based on the volume of gas foam overflow away from the employee work
which must be discharged in order to areas and egress routes. This drainage sys-
produce a certain designed concentration of tem should drain to a central impounding
gas in an enclosed area. The concentration area where it can be collected and disposed
needed to extinguish a fire depends on sev- of properly. Other government agencies may
eral factors including the type of fire hazard have regulations concerning environmental
and the amount of gas expected to leak away considerations.
from the area during discharge. At times it
is necessary to super-saturate a work area 1910.164 Fire detection systems.
to provide for expected leakage from the en-
closed area. In such cases, employers must 1. Installation and restoration. Fire detec-
assure that the flooded area has been venti- tion systems must be designed by knowl-
lated before employees are permitted to re- edgeable engineers or other professionals,
enter the work area without protective with expertise in fire detection systems and
clothing and respirators. when the systems are installed, there should
be an acceptance test performed on the sys-
3. Toxic decomposition. Certain halogenated
tem to insure it operates properly. The man-
hydrocarbons will break down or decompose
ufacturers recommendations for system de-
when they are combined with high tempera-
sign should be consulted. While entire sys-
tures found in the fire environment. The
tems may not be approved, each component
products of the decomposition can include
used in the system is required to be ap-
toxic elements or compounds. For example,
proved. Custom fire detection systems
when Halon 1211 is placed into contact with
should be designed by knowledgeable fire
hot metal it will break down and form bro-
protection or electrical engineers who are fa-
mide or fluoride fumes. The employer must
miliar with the workplace hazards and condi-
find out which toxic products may result
tions. Some systems may only have one or
from decomposition of a particular agent
two individual detectors for a small work-
from the manufacturer, and take the nec-
place, but good design and installation is
essary precautions to prevent employee ex-
still important. An acceptance test should be
posure to the hazard.
performed on all systems, including these
1910.163 Fixed extinguishing systems, water smaller systems.
spray and foam. OSHA has a requirement that spare compo-
nents used to replace those which may be de-
1. Scope and application. This section ap- stroyed during an alarm situation be avail-
plies to those systems that use water spray able in sufficient quantities and locations for
or foam. The requirements of 1910.160 also prompt restoration of the system. This does
apply to this type of system. not mean that the parts or components have
2. Characteristics of foams. When selecting to be stored at the workplace. If the em-
the type of foam for a specific hazard, the ployer can assure that the supply of parts is
employer should consider the following limi- available in the local community or the gen-
tations of some foams. eral metropolitan area of the workplace,
523
then the requirements for storage and avail- seizures in some employees and that this
ability have been met. The intent is to make fact should be considered when selecting an
sure that the alarm system is fully oper- alarm device. Two way radio communica-
ational when employees are occupying the tions would be most appropriate for trans-
workplace, and that when the system oper- mitting emergency alarms in such work-
ates it can be returned to full service the places which may be remote or where tele-
next day or sooner. phones may not be available.
2. Supervision. Fire detection systems 3. Reporting alarms. Employee alarms may
should be supervised. The object of super- require different means of reporting, depend-
vision is detection of any failure of the cir- ing on the workplace involved. For example,
cuitry, and the employer should use any
in small workplaces, a simple shout through-
method that will assure that the systems
out the workplace may be sufficient to warn
circuits are operational. Electrically oper-
employees of a fire or other emergency. In
ated sensors for air pressure, fluid pressure,
or electrical circuits, can provide effective larger workplaces, more sophisticated equip-
monitoring and are the typical types of su- ment is necessary so that entire plants or
pervision. high-rise buildings are not evacuated for one
3. Protection of fire detectors. Fire detectors small emergency. In remote areas, such as
must be protected from corrosion either by pumping plants, radio communication with a
protective coatings, by being manufactured central base station may be necessary. The
from non-corrosive materials or by location. goal of this standard is to assure that all em-
Detectors must also be protected from me- ployees who need to know that an emergency
chanical impact damage, either by suitable exists can be notified of the emergency. The
cages or metal guards where such hazards method of transmitting the alarm should re-
are present, or by locating them above or out flect the situation found at the workplace.
of contact with materials or equipment Personal radio transmitters, worn by an
which may cause damage. individual, can be used where the individual
4. Number, location, and spacing of detectors. may be working such as in a remote loca-
This information can be obtained from the tion. Such personal radio transmitters shall
approval listing for detectors or NFPA send a distinct signal and should clearly in-
standards. It can also be obtained from fire dicate who is having an emergency, the loca-
protection engineers or consultants or manu- tion, and the nature of the emergency. All
facturers of equipment who have access to radio transmitters need a feedback system to
approval listings and design methods. assure that the emergency alarm is sent to
1910.165 Employee alarm systems. the people who can provide assistance.
For multi-story buildings or single story
1. Scope and application. This section is in- buildings with interior walls for subdivi-
tended to apply to employee alarm systems sions, the more traditional alarm systems
used for all types of employee emergencies are recommended for these types of work-
except those which occur so quickly and at
places. Supervised telephone or manual fire
such a rapid rate (e.g., explosions) that any
alarm or pull box stations with paging sys-
action by the employee is extremely limited
tems to transmit messages throughout the
following detection.
In small workplaces with 10 or less employ- building is the recommended alarm system.
ees the alarm system can be by direct voice The alarm box stations should be available
communication (shouting) where any one in- within a travel distance of 200 feet. Water
dividual can quickly alert all other employ- flow detection on a sprinkler system, fire de-
ees. Radio may be used to transmit alarms tection systems (guards supervisory station)
from remote workplaces where telephone or tour signal (watchmans service), or other
service is not available, provided that radio related systems may be part of the overall
messages will be monitored by emergency system. The paging system may be used for
services, such as fire, police or others, to in- nonemergency operations provided the emer-
sure alarms are transmitted and received. gency messages and uses will have prece-
2. Alarm signal alternatives. In recognition dence over all other uses of the system.
of physically impaired individuals, OSHA is 4. Supervision. The requirements for super-
accepting various methods of giving alarm vising the employee alarm system circuitry
signals. For example, visual, tactile or audi- and power supply may be accomplished in a
ble alarm signals are acceptable methods for variety of ways. Typically, electrically oper-
giving alarms to employees. Flashing lights ated sensors for air pressure, fluid pressure,
or vibrating devices can be used in areas steam pressure, or electrical continuity of
where the employer has hired employees circuitry may be used to continuously mon-
with hearing or vision impairments. Vibrat- itor the system to assure it is operational
ing devices, air fans, or other tactile devices and to identify trouble in the system and
can be used where visually and hearing im- give a warning signal.
paired employees work. Employers are cau-
tioned that certain frequencies of flashing [45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May
lights have been claimed to initiate epileptic 1, 1981]
524
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, App. C
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART L OF PART Subpart L section National consensus standard

1910NATIONAL CONSENSUS STANDARDS
ANSI/NFPA No. 17, Dry Chemical
The following table contains a cross-ref- Systems.
1910.162 .................. ANSI/NFPA No. 12, Carbon Dioxide
erence listing of those current national con- Systems.
sensus standards which contains information ANSI/NFPA No. 12A, Halon 1211
and guidelines that would be considered ac- Systems.
ceptable in complying with requirements in ANSI/NFPA No. 12B, Halon 1301
the specific sections of subpart L. Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 69, Explosion Sup-
Subpart L section National consensus standard pression Systems.
1910.163 .................. ANSI/NFPA No. 11, Foam Extin-
1910.156 .................. ANSI/NFPA No. 1972; Structural Fire guishing Systems.
Fighters Helmets. ANSI/NFPA No. 11A, High Expansion
ANSI Z88.5 American National Stand- Foam Extinguishing Systems.
ard, Practice for Respirator Protec- ANSI/NFPA No. 11B, Synthetic Foam
tion for the Fire Service. and Combined Agent Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 1971, Protective ANSI/NFPA No. 15, Water Spray
Clothing for Structural Fire Fighters. Fixed Systems.
NFPA No. 1041, Fire Service Instruc- ANSI/NFPA No. 16, Foam-Water
tor Professional Qualifications. Spray Systems.
1910.157 .................. ANSI/NFPA No. 10, Portable Fire Ex- ANSI/NFPA No. 18, Wetting Agents.
tinguishers. NFPA No. 26, Supervision of Valves.
1910.158 .................. ANSI/NFPA No. 18, Wetting Agents. 1910.164 .................. ANSI/NFPA No. 71, Central Station
ANSI/NFPA No. 20, Centrifugal Fire Signaling Systems.
Pumps. ANSI/NFPA No. 72A, Local Protective
NFPA No. 21, Steam Fire Pumps. Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 22, Water Tanks. ANSI/NFPA No. 72B, Auxiliary Sig-
NFPA No. 24, Outside Protection. naling Systems.
NFPA No. 26, Supervision of Valves. ANSI/NFPA No. 72D, Proprietary Pro-
NFPA No. 13E, Fire Department Op- tective Signaling Systems.
erations in Properties Protected by ANSI/NFPA No. 72E, Automatic Fire
Sprinkler, Standpipe Systems. Detectors.
ANSI/NFPA No. 194, Fire Hose Con- ANSI/NFPA No. 101, Life Safety
nections. Code.
NFPA No. 197, Initial Fire Attack, 1910.165 .................. ANSI/NFPA No. 71, Central Station
Training for. Signaling Systems.
NFPA No. 1231, Water Supplies for ANSI/NFPA No. 72A, Local Protective
Suburban and Rural Fire Fighting. Signaling Systems.
1910.159 .................. ANSI-NFPA No. 13, Sprinkler Sys- ANSI/NFPA No. 72B, Auxiliary Pro-
tems. tective Signaling Systems.
NFPA No. 13A, Sprinkler Systems, ANSI/NFPA No. 72C, Remote Station
Maintenance. Protective Signaling Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 18, Wetting Agents. ANSI/NFPA No. 72D, Proprietary Pro-
ANSI/NFPA No. 20, Centrifugal Fire tective Signaling Systems.
Pumps. ANSI/NFPA No. 101, Life Safety
ANSI/NFPA No. 22, Water Tanks. Code.
NFPA No. 24, Outside Protection. Metric Conversion .... ANSI/ASTM No. E380, American Na-
NFPA No. 26, Supervision of Valves. tional Standard for Metric Practice.
ANSI/NFPA No. 72B, Auxiliary Sig-
naling Systems. NFPA standards are available from the National Fire Pro-
NFPA No. 1231, Water Supplies for tection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
Suburban and Rural Fire Fighting. ANSI Standards are available from the American National
Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018.
1910.160 .................. ANSI/NFPA No. 11, Foam Systems.
ANSI/NFPA 11A, High Expansion
Foam Extinguishing Systems. [45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 58
ANSI/NFPA No. 11B, Synthetic Foam FR 35309, June 30, 1993]
and Combined Agent Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 12, Carbon Dioxide APPENDIX C TO SUBPART L OF PART
Systems.
ANSI/NFPA No. 12A, Halon 1301
1910FIRE PROTECTION REFERENCES
Systems. FOR FURTHER INFORMATION
ANSI/NFPA No. 12B, Halon 1211
Systems. I. Appendix general references. The following
ANSI/NFPA No. 15, Water Spray Sys- references provide information which can be
tems. helpful in understanding the requirements
ANSI/NFPA 16 Foam-Water Spray contained in all of the sections of subpart L:
Systems. A. Fire Protection Handbook, National Fire
ANSI/NFPA No. 17, Dry Chemical
Protection Association, Batterymarch Park,
Systems.
ANSI/NFPA 69, Explosion Suppres-
Quincy, MA 02269.
sion Systems. B. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial
1910.161 .................. ANSI/NFPA No. 11B, Synthetic Foam Operations, National Safety Council; 425
and Combined Agent Systems. North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, IL 60611.
525
Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7102 Edition)
C. Various associations also publish infor- 15. The Development of Criteria for Fire
mation which may be useful in under- Fighters Gloves; Vol. II: Glove Criteria and Test
standing these standards. Examples of these Methods; National Institute for Occupational
associations are: Fire Equipment Manufac- Safety and Health, Cincinnati, OH. 1976.
turers Association (FEMA) of Arlington, VA 16. Model Performance Criteria for Structural
22204 and the National Association of Fire Fire Fighters Helmets; National Fire Preven-
Equipment Distributors (NAFED) of Chi- tion and Control Administration, Wash-
cago, IL 60601. ington, DC. 1977.
II. Appendix references applicable to indi- 17. Firefighters; Job Safety and Health Mag-
vidual sections. The following references are azine, Occupational Safety and Health Ad-
grouped according to individual sections ministration, Washington, DC. June 1978.
contained in subpart L. These references pro- 18. Eating SmokeThe Dispensable Diet;
vide information which may be helpful in un- Utech, H.P. The Fire Independent, 1975.
derstanding and implementing the standards 19. Project MonoxideA Medical Study of an
of each section of subpart L. Occupational Hazard of Fire Fighters; Inter-
A. 1910.156. Fire brigades: national Association of Fire Fighters, Wash-
1. Private Fire Brigades, NFPA 27; National ington, DC.
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch 20. Occupational Exposures to Carbon Mon-
Park, Quincy, MA 02269 . oxide in Baltimore Firefighters; Radford and
2. Initial Fire Attack, Training Standard On, Levine. Johns Hopkins University, Balti-
NFPA 197; National Fire Protection Associa- more, MD. Journal of Occupational Medi-
tion, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 . cine, September, 1976.
3. Fire Fighter Professional Qualifications, 21. Fire Brigades; National Safety Council,
NFPA 1001; National Fire Protection Asso- Chicago, IL. 1966.
ciation, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 22. American National Standard, Practice for
02269 . Respiratory Protection for the Fire Service;
4. Organization for Fire Services, NFPA 1201; ANSI Z88.5; American National Standards
National Fire Protection Association, Institute, New York, NY 10018.
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 . 23. Respirator Studies for the Nuclear Regu-
5. Organization of a Fire Department, NFPA latory Commission; October 1, 1977September
1202; National Fire Protection Association, 30, 1978. Evaluation and Performance of Open
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 . Circuit Breathing Apparatus. NU REG/CR1235.
6. Protective Clothing for Structural Fire Los Alamos Scientific Laboratory; Los Ala-
Fighting, ANSI/NFPA 1971; . mos, NM. 87545, January, 1980.
7. American National Standard for Mens B. 1910.157. Portable fire extinguishers:
Safety-Toe Footwear, ANSI Z41.1; American 1. Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers,
National Standards Institute, New York, NY ANSI/NFPA 10; National Fire Protection As-
10018. sociation, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA
8. American National Standard for Occupa- 02269
tional and Educational Eye and Face Protec- 2. Methods for Hydrostatic Testing of Com-
tion, ANSI Z87.1; American National Stand- pressed Gas Cylinders, C1; Compressed Gas
ards Institute, New York, NY 10018. Association, 1235 Jefferson Davis Highway,
9. American National Standard, Safety Re- Arlington, VA 22202.
quirements for Industrial Head Protection, 3. Recommendations for the Disposition of Un-
ANSI Z89.1; American National Standards serviceable Compressed Gas Cylinders, C2;
Institute, New York, NY 10018. Compressed Gas Association, 1235 Jefferson
10. Specifications for Protective Headgear for Davis Highway, Arlington, VA 22202.
Vehicular Users, ANSI Z90.1; American Na- 4. Standard for Visual Inspection of Com-
tional Standards Institute, New York, NY pressed Gas Cylinders, C6; Compressed Gas
10018. Association, 1235 Jefferson Davis Highway,
11. Testing Physical Fitness; Davis and Arlington, VA 22202.
Santa Maria. Fire Command. April 1975. 5. Portable Fire Extinguisher Selection Guide,
12. Development of a Job-Related Physical National Association of Fire Equipment Dis-
Performance Examination for Fire Fighters; tributors; 111 East Wacker Drive, Chicago, IL
Dotson and Others. A summary report for 60601.
the National Fire Prevention and Control C. 1910.158. Standpipe and hose systems:
Administration. Washington, DC. March 1. Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler
1977. Systems, ANSI/NFPA 13; National Fire Pro-
13. Proposed Sample Standards for Fire Fight- tection Association, Batterymarch Park,
ers Protective Clothing and Equipment; Inter- Quincy, MA 02269.
national Association of Fire Fighters, Wash- 2. Standard of the Installation of Standpipe
ington, DC. and Hose Systems, ANSI/NFPA 14; National
14. A Study of Facepiece Leakage of Self-Con- Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch
tained Breathing Apparatus by DOP Man Tests; Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
Los Alamos Scientific Laboratory, Los Ala- 3. Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal
mos, NM. Fire Pumps, ANSI/NFPA 20; National Fire
526
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, App. C
Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, 6. Standard on Halon 1211, ANSI/NFPA 12B;
Quincy, MA 02269. National Fire Protection Association,
4. Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
Protection, ANSI/NFPA 22; National Fire Pro- 7. Standard for Water Spray Systems, ANSI/
tection Association, Batterymarch Park, NFPA 15; National Fire Protection Associa-
Quincy, MA 02269. tion, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
5. Standard for Screw Threads and Gaskets 8. Standard for Foam-Water Sprinkler Systems
for Fire Hose Connections, ANSI/NFPA 194; and Foam-Water Spray Systems, ANSI/NFPA
National Fire Protection Association, 16; National Fire Protection Association, Na-
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 . tional Fire Protection Association,
6. Standard for Fire Hose, NFPA 196; Na- Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269
tional Fire Protection Association, 9. Standard for Dry Chemical Extinguishing
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269. Systems, ANSI/NFPA 17; National Fire Pro-
7. Standard for the Care of Fire Hose, NFPA tection Association, Batterymarch Park,
198; National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA 02269.
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269. F. 1910.161. Fixed extinguishing systems
D. 1910.159. Automatic sprinkler systems: dry chemical:
1. Standard of the Installation of Sprinkler 1. Standard for Dry Chemical Extinguishing
Systems, ANSI-NFPA 13; National Fire Pro- Systems, ANSI/NFPA 17; National Fire Pro-
tection Association, Batterymarch Park, tection Association, Batterymarch Park,
Quincy, MA 02269. Quincy, MA 02269.
2. Standard for the Care and Maintenance of 2. National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70;
Sprinkler Systems, ANSI/NFPA 13A; National National Fire Protection Association,
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
Park, Quincy, MA 02269. 3. Standard for the Installation of Equipment
3. Standard for the Installation of Standpipe for the Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden
and Hose Systems, ANSI/NFPA 14; National Vapor from Commercial Cooking Equipment,
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch NFPA 96; National Fire Protection Associa-
Park, Quincy, MA 02269. tion, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
4. Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal G. 1910.162. Fixed extinguishing systems
Fire Pumps, ANSI/NFPA 20; National Fire gaseous agents:
Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, 1. Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing
Quincy, MA 02269 . Systems, ANSI/NFPA 12; National Fire Pro-
5. Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire tection Association, Batterymarch Park,
Protection, ANSI-NFPA 22; National Fire Quincy, MA 02269 .
Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, 2. Standard on Halon 1301, ANSI/NFPA 12B;
Quincy, MA 02269. National Fire Protection Association,
6. Standard for Indoor General Storage, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
ANSI/NFPA 231; National Fire Protection 3. Standard on Halon 1211, ANSI/NFPA 12B;
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, National Fire Protection Association,
MA 02269. Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
7. Standard for Rack Storage of Materials, 4. Standard on Explosion Prevention Systems,
ANSI/NFPA 231C; National Fire Protection ANSI/NFPA 69; National Fire Protection As-
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, sociation, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA
MA 02269. 02269 .
E. 1910.160. Fixed extinguishing systems 5. National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70;
general information: National Fire Protection Association,
1. Standard for Foam Extinguishing Systems, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 .
ANSI-NFPA 11; National Fire Protection As- 6. Standard on Automatic Fire Detectors,
sociation, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA ANSI/NFPA 72E; National Fire Protection
02269 . Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy,
2. Standard for HiExpansion Foam Systems, MA 02269 .
ANSI/NFPA 11A; National Fire Protection 7. Determination of Halon 1301/1211 Threshold
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Extinguishing Concentrations Using the Cup
MA 02269 . Burner Method; Riley and Olson, Ansul Re-
3. Standard on Synthetic Foam and Combined port AL530A.
Agent Systems, ANSI/NFPA 11B; National H. 1910.163. Fixed extinguishing systems
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch water spray and foam agents:
Park, Quincy, MA 02269. 1. Standard for Foam Extinguisher Systems,
4. Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing ANSI/NFPA 11; National Fire Protection As-
Systems, ANSI/NFPA 12; National Fire Pro- sociation, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA
tection Association, Batterymarch Park, 02269 .
Quincy, MA 02269 . 2. Standard for High Expansion Foam Sys-
5. Standard on Halon 1301, ANSI/NFPA 12A; tems, ANSI/NFPA 11A; National Fire Protec-
National Fire Protection Association, tion Association, Batterymarch Park, Quin-
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269. cy, MA 02269 .
527
Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, App. D 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7102 Edition)
3. Standard for Water Spray Fixed Systems for Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch
Fire Protection, ANSI/NFPA 15; National Fire Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, 7. Vocal Emergency Alarms in Hospitals and
Quincy, MA 02269 . Nursing Facilities: Practice and Potential. Na-
4. Standard for the Installation of Foam- tional Bureau of Standards. Washington,
Water Sprinkler Systems and Foam-Water Spray D.C., July 1977.
Systems, ANSI/NFPA 16; National Fire Pro- 8. Fire Alarm and Communication Systems.
tection Association, Batterymarch Park, National Bureau of Standards. Washington,
Quincy, MA 02269 . D.C., April 1978.
I. 1910.164. Fire Detection systems: [45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 58
1. National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70; FR 35309, June 30, 1993 ]
National Fire Protection Association,
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 . APPENDIX D TO SUBPART L OF PART
2. Standard for Central Station Signaling Sys- 1910AVAILABILITY OF PUBLICA-
tems, ANSI/NFPA 71; National Fire Protec-
TIONS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
tion Association, Batterymarch Park, Quin-
cy, MA 02269 . IN SECTION 1910.156 FIRE BRIGADES
3. Standard on Automatic Fire Detectors, The final standard for fire brigades, Sec-
ANSI/NFPA 72E; National Fire Protection tion 1910.156, contains provisions which in-
Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, corporate certain publications by reference.
MA 02269 . The publications provide criteria and test
J. 1910.165. Employee alarm systems: methods for protective clothing worn by
1. National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70; those fire brigade members who are expected
National Fire Protection Association, to perform interior structural fire fighting.
Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 . The standard references the publications as
2. Standard for Central Station Signaling sys- the chief sources of information for deter-
tems, ANSI/NFPA 71; National Fire Protec- mining if the protective clothing affords the
tion Association, Batterymarch Park, Quin- required level of protection.
cy, MA 02269. It is appropriate to note that the final
3. Standard for Local Protective Signaling standard does not require employers to pur-
Systems, ANSI/NFPA 72A; National Fire Pro- chase a copy of the referenced publications.
tection Association, Batterymarch Park, Instead, employers can specify (in purchase
Quincy, MA 02269. orders to the manufacturers) that the pro-
4. Standard for Auxiliary Protective Signaling tective clothing meet the criteria and test
Systems, ANSI/NFPA 72B; National Fire Pro- methods contained in the referenced publica-
tection Association, Batterymarch Park, tions and can rely on the manufacturers as-
Quincy, MA 02269. surances of compliance. Employers, however,
5. Standard for Remote Station Protective Sig- may desire to obtain a copy of the referenced
naling Systems, ANSI/NFPA 72C; National publications for their own information.
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch The paragraph designation of the standard
Park, Quincy, MA 02269 . where the referenced publications appear,
6. Standard for Proprietary Protective Sig- the title of the publications, and the
naling Systems, ANSI/NFPA 72D; National availablity of the publications are as follows:
Paragraph designation Referenced Publication Available From
1910.156(e)(3)(ii) .................... Protective Clothing for Structural Fire Fight- National Fire Protection Association,
ing, NFPA No. 1971 (1975). Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
1910.156(e)(4)(i) ..................... Development of Criteria for Fire Fighters U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington,
Gloves; Vol. II, Part II: Test Methods D.C. 20402. Stock No. for Vol. II is: 071
(1976). 03302011.
1910.156(e)(5)(i) ..................... Model Performance Criteria for Structural U.S. Fire Administration, National Fire Safety
Firefighters Helmets (1977). and Research Office, Washington, D.C.
20230.
The referenced publications (or a micro- fice (see telephone directories under United
fiche of the publications) are available for States Government-Labor Department).
review at many universities and public li-
[45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980, as amended at 58
braries throughout the country. These publi-
FR 33509, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7,
cations may also be examined at the OSHA
1996]
Technical Data Center, Room N2439Rear,
United States Department of Labor, 200 Con-
stitution Ave., N.W., Washington, D.C. 20210
(2022197500), or at any OSHA Regional Of-
528
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, App. E
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART L OF PART shall then be made in the center of a perpen-

1910TEST METHODS FOR PROTEC- dicular to the 1-inch (2.5 cm) edge.
TIVE CLOTHING B. Apparatus. (i) Six-ounce (.17 kg) weight
tension clamps shall be used so designed that
This appendix contains test methods which the six ounces (.17 kg) of weight are distrib-
must be used to determine if protective uted evenly across the complete width of the
clothing affords the required level of protec- sample.
tion as specified in 1910.156, fire brigades. (ii) The machine shall consist of three
(1) Puncture resistance test method for foot main parts: Straining mechanism, clamps
protection. for holding specimen, and load and elon-
A. Apparatus. The puncture resistance test gation recording mechanisms.
shall be performed on a testing machine hav- (iii) A machine wherein the specimen is
ing a movable platform adjusted to travel at held between two clamps and strained by a
14-inch/min (0.1 cm/sec). Two blocks of hard- uniform movement of the pulling clamp
wood, metal, or plastic shall be prepared as shall be used.
follows: the blocks shall be of such size and (iv) The machine shall be adjusted so that
thickness as to insure a suitable rigid test the pulling clamp shall have a uniform speed
ensemble and allow for at least one-inch of of 12 10.5 inches per minute (0.5 .02 cm/sec).
the pointed end of an 8D nail to be exposed (v) The machine shall have two clamps
for the penetration. One block shall have a with two jaws on each clamp. The design of
hole drilled to hold an 8D common nail firm- the two clamps shall be such that one grip-
ly at an angle of 98. The second block shall ping surface or jaw may be an integral part
have a maximum 12-inch (1.3 cm) diameter of the rigid frame of the clamp or be fastened
hole drilled through it so that the hole will to allow a slight vertical movement, while
allow free passage of the nail after it pene- the other gripping surface or jaw shall be
trates the insole during the test. completely moveable. The dimension of the
B. Procedure. The test ensemble consisting immovable jaw of each clamp parallel to the
of the sample unit, the two prepared blocks, application of the load shall measure one-
a piece of leather outsole 10 to 11 irons thick, inch, and the dimension of the jaw perpen-
and a new 8D nail, shall be placed as follows: dicular to this direction shall measure three
the 8D nail in the hole, the sample of outsole inches or more. The face of the movable jaw
stock superimposed above the nail, the area of each clamp shall measure one-inch by
of the sole plate to be tested placed on the three inches.
outsole, and the second block with hole so Each jaw face shall have a flat smooth,
placed as to allow for free passage of the nail gripping surface. All edges which might
after it passes through the outsole stock and cause a cutting action shall be rounded to a
sole plate in that order. The machine shall radius of not over 164-inch (.04 cm). In cases
be started and the pressure, in pounds re- where a cloth tends to slip when being test-
quired for the nail to completely penetrate ed, the jaws may be faced with rubber or
the outsole and sole plate, recorded to the other material to prevent slippage. The dis-
nearest five pounds. Two determinations tance between the jaws (gage length) shall be
shall be made on each sole plate and the re- one-inch at the start of the test.
sults averaged. A new nail shall be used for (vi) Calibrated dial; scale or chart shall be
each determination. used to indicate applied load and elongation.
C. Source. These test requirements are con- The machine shall be adjusted or set, so that
tained in Military Specification For Fire- the maximum load required to break the
mans Boots, MILB2885D (1973 and amend- specimen will remain indicated on the cali-
ment dated 1975) and are reproduced for your brated dial or scale after the test specimen
convenience. has ruptured.
(2) Test method for determining the strength (vii) The machine shall be of such capacity
of cloth by tearing: Trapezoid Method. that the maximum load required to break
A. Test specimen. The specimen shall be a the specimen shall be not greater than 85
rectangle of cloth 3-inches by 6-inches (7.6 percent or less than 15 percent of the rated
cm by 15.2 cm). The long dimension shall be capacity.
parallel to the warp for warp tests and par- (viii) The error of the machine shall not
allel to the filling for filling tests. No two exceed 2 percent up to and including a 50-
specimens for warp tests shall contain the pound load (22.6 kg) and 1 percent over a 50-
same warp yarns, nor shall any two speci- pound load (22.6 kg) at any reading within its
mens for filling tests contain the same fill- loading range.
ing yarns. The specimen shall be taken no (ix) All machine attachments for deter-
nearer the selvage than 110 the width of the mining maximum loads shall be disengaged
cloth. An isosceles trapezoid having an alti- during this test.
tude of 3-inches (7.6 cm) and bases of 1 inch C. Procedure. (i) The specimen shall be
(2.5cm) and 4 inches (10.2 cm) in length, re- clamped in the machine along the nonpar-
spectively, shall be marked on each speci- allel sides of the trapezoid so that these sides
men, preferably with the aid of a template. A lie along the lower edge of the upper clamp
cut approximately 38-inch (1 cm) in length and the upper edge of the lower clamp with
529
Pt. 1910, Subpt. L, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7102 Edition)
the cut halfway between the clamps. The burner edge with a pilot flame 18-inch (.3 cm)
short trapezoid base shall be held taut and long.
the long trapezoid base shall lie in the folds. (c) The necessary gas connections and the
(ii) The machine shall be started and the applicable plumbing shall be as specified in
force necessary to tear the cloth shall be ob- Figure L4 except that a solenoid valve may
served by means of an autographic recording be used in lieu of the stopcock valve to
device. The speed of the pulling clamp shall which the burner is attached. The stopcock
be 12 inches 0.5 inch per minute (0.5 .02 cm/ valve or solenoid valve, whichever is used,
sec). shall be capable of being fully opened or
(iii) If a specimen slips between the jaws, fully closed in 0.1-second.
breaks in or at the edges of the jaws, or if for (d) On the side of the barrel of the burner,
any reason attributable to faulty technique, opposite the pilot light there shall be a
an individual measurement falls markedly metal rod of approximately 18-inch (.3 cm)
below the average test results for the sample diameter spaced 12-inch (1.3 cm) from the
unit, such result shall be discarded and an- barrel and extending above the burner. The
other specimen shall be tested. rod shall have two 516-inch (.8 cm) prongs
(iv) The tearing strength of the specimen marking the distances of 34-inch (1.9 cm) and
shall be the average of the five highest peak 112 inches (3.8 cm) above the top of the burn-
loads of resistance registered for 3 inches (7.6 er.
cm) of separation of the tear. (e) The burner shall be fixed in a position
so that the center of the barrel of the burner
D. Report. (i) Five specimens in each of the
is directly below the center of the specimen.
warp and filling directions shall be tested
(iii) There shall be a control valve system
from each sample unit.
with a delivery rate designed to furnish gas
(ii) The tearing strength of the sample unit
to the burner under a pressure of 212 14 (psi)
shall be the average of the results obtained
(17.5 1.8 kPa) per square inch at the burner
from the specimens tested in each of the
inlet (see (g)(3)(vi)(A)). The manufacturers
warp and filling directions and shall be re- recommended delivery rate for the valve sys-
ported separately to the nearest 0.1-pound tem shall be included in the required pres-
(.05 kg). sure.
E. Source. These test requirements are con- (iv) A synthetic gas mixture shall be of the
tained in Federal Test Method Standard following composition within the following
191, Method 5136 and are reproduced for limits (analyzed at standard conditions): 55
your convenience. 3 percent hydrogen, 24 1 percent methane,
(3) Test method for determining flame resist- 3 1 percent ethane, and 18 1 percent carbon
ance of cloth; vertical. monoxide which will give a specific gravity
A. Test specimen. The specimen shall be a of 0.365 0.018 (air = 1) and a B.T.U. content
rectangle of cloth 234 inches (7.0 cm) by 12 of 540 20 per cubic foot (20.1 3.7 kJ/L)(dry
inches (30.5 cm) with the long dimension par- basis) at 69.8 F (21 C).
allel to either the warp or filling direction of (v) There shall be metal hooks and weights
the cloth. No two warp specimens shall con- to produce a series of total loads to deter-
tain the same warp yarns, and no two filling mine length of char. The metal hooks shall
specimens shall contain the same filling consist of No. 19 gage steel wire or equiva-
yarn. lent and shall be made from 3-inch (7.6 cm)
B. Number of determinations. Five specimens lengths of wire and bent 12-inch (1.3 cm) from
from each of the warp and filling directions one end to a 45 degree hook. One end of the
shall be tested from each sample unit. hook shall be fastened around the neck of
C. Apparatus. (i) Cabinet. A cabinet and ac- the weight to be used.
cessories shall be fabricated in accordance (vi) There shall be a stop watch or other
with the requirements specified in Figures device to measure the burning time to 0.2-
L1, L2, and L3. Galvanized sheet metal or second.
other suitable metal shall be used. The en- (vii) There shall be a scale, graduated in 0.1
tire inside back wall of the cabinet shall be inch (.3 cm) to measure the length of char.
painted black to facilitate the viewing of the D. Procedure. (i) The material undergoing
test specimen and pilot flame. test shall be evaluated for the characteris-
(ii) Burner. The burner shall be equipped tics of after-flame time and char length on
with a variable orifice to adjust the flame each specimen.
height, a barrel having a 38-inch (1 cm) inside (ii) All specimens to be tested shall be at
diameter and a pilot light. moisture equilibrium under standard atmos-
(a) The burner may be constructed by com- pheric conditions in accordance with para-
bining a 38-inch (1 cm) inside diameter barrel graph (3)C of this appendix. Each specimen
3 14 inches (7.6 .6 cm) long from a fixed ori- to be tested shall be exposed to the test
fice burner with a base from a variable ori- flame within 20 seconds after removal from
fice burner. the standard atmosphere. In case of dispute,
(b) The pilot light tube shall have a diame- all testing will be conducted under Standard
ter of approximately 116-inch (.2 cm) and Atmospheric Conditions in accordance with
shall be spaced 18-inch (.3 cm) away from the paragraph (3)C of this appendix.
530
(iii) The specimen in its holder shall be -inch (.6 cm) in from the lower end. A
14
suspended vertically in the cabinet in such a weight of sufficient size such that the weight
manner that the entire length of the speci- and hook together shall equal the total tear-
men is exposed and the lower end is 34-inch ing load required in Table L2 of this section
(1.9 cm) above the top of the gas burner. The shall be attached to the hook.
apparatus shall be set up in a draft free area. (viii) A tearing force shall be applied gent-
(iv) Prior to inserting the specimen, the ly to the specimen by grasping the corner of
pilot flame shall be adjusted to approxi- the cloth at the opposite edge of the char
mately 18-inch (.3 cm) in height measured from the load and raising the specimen and
from its lowest point to the tip. weight clear of the supporting surface. The
The burner flame shall be adjusted by end of the tear shall be marked off on the
means of the needle valve in the base of the edge and the char length measurement made
burner to give a flame height of 112 inches along the undamaged edge.
(3.8 cm) with the stopcock fully open and the Loads for determining char length applica-
air supply to the burner shut off and taped. ble to the weight of the test cloth shall be as
The 112-inch (3.8 cm) flame height is ob- shown in Table L2.
tained by adjusting the valve so that the up-
permost portion (tip) of the flame is level
with the tip of the metal prong (see Figure
TABLE L2 1
L2) specified for adjustment of flame Total tear-
height. It is an important aspect of the eval- ing weight
uation that the flame height be adjusted for deter-
Specified weight per square yard of cloth before
with the tip of the flame level with the tip of mining the
any fire retardant treatment or coatingounces charred
the metal prong. After inserting the speci- length
men, the stopcock shall be fully opened, and pound
the burner flame applied vertically at the
middle of the lower edge of the specimen for 2.0 to 6.0 ............................................................. 0.25
12 seconds and the burner turned off. The Over 6.0 to 15.0 .................................................. 0.50
cabinet door shall remain shut during test- Over 15.0 to 23.0 ................................................ 0.75
ing. Over 23.0 ............................................................. 1.0
(v) The after-flame shall be the time the 1 To change into S.I. (System International) units, 1
specimen continues to flame after the burner ounce=28.35 grams, 1 pound=453 grams, 1 yard=.91 metre.
flame is shut off.
(ix) The after-flame time of the specimen
(vi) After each specimen is removed, the
shall be recorded to the nearest 0.2-second
test cabinet shall be cleared of fumes and
and the char length to the nearest 0.1-inch (.3
smoke prior to testing the next specimen.
(vii) After both flaming and glowing have cm).
ceased, the char length shall be measured. E. Report. (i) The after-flame time and char
The char length shall be the distance from length of the sample unit shall be the aver-
the end of the specimen, which was exposed age of the results obtained from the indi-
to the flame, to the end of a tear (made vidual specimens tested. All values obtained
lengthwise) of the specimen through the cen- from the individual specimens shall be re-
ter of the charred area as follows: The speci- corded.
men shall be folded lengthwise and creased (ii) The after-flame time shall be reported
by hand along a line through the highest to the nearest 0.2-second and the char length
peak of the charred area. The hook shall be to the nearest 0.1-inch (.3 cm).
inserted in the specimen (or a hole, 14-inch F. Source. These test requirements are con-
(.6 cm) diameter or less, punched out for the tained in Federal Test Method Standard
hook) at one side of the charred area 14-inch 191, Method 5903 (1971) and are reproduced
(.6 cm) from the adjacent outside edge and for your convenience.
531
532
EC27OC91.032</GPH>
533
EC27OC91.033</GPH>
534
EC27OC91.034</GPH>
[45 FR 60715, Sept. 12, 1980; 46 FR 24557, May 1, 1981]
Subpart MCompressed Gas and This section is not intended to apply to

Compressed Air Equipment compressed air machinery and equip-
ment used on transportation vehicles
AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu- such as steam railroad cars, electric
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 railway cars, and automotive equip-
U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labors ment.
Order No. 1271 (36 FR 8754), 876 (41 FR (2) New and existing equipment. (i) All
25059), 983 (48 FR 35736), or 190 (55 FR 9033), new air receivers installed after the ef-
as applicable.
fective date of these regulations shall
1910.1661910.168 [Reserved] be constructed in accordance with the
1968 edition of the A.S.M.E. Boiler and
1910.169 Air receivers. Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII,
(a) General requirements(1) Applica- which is incorporated by reference as
tion. This section applies to compressed specified in 1910.6.
air receivers, and other equipment used (ii) All safety valves used shall be
in providing and utilizing compressed constructed, installed, and maintained
air for performing operations such as in accordance with the A.S.M.E. Boiler
cleaning, drilling, hoisting, and chip- and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII
ping. On the other hand, however, this Edition 1968.
section does not deal with the special (b) Installation and equipment require-
problems created by using compressed ments(1) Installation. Air receivers
air to convey materials nor the prob- shall be so installed that all drains,
lems created when men work in com- handholes, and manholes therein are
pressed air as in tunnels and caissons.
535
EC27OC91.035</GPH>
easily accessible. Under no cir- 1910.176 Handling materialsgen-

cumstances shall an air receiver be eral.
buried underground or located in an in- (a) Use of mechanical equipment.
accessible place. Where mechanical handling equipment
(2) Drains and traps. A drain pipe and is used, sufficient safe clearances shall
valve shall be installed at the lowest be allowed for aisles, at loading docks,
point of every air receiver to provide through doorways and wherever turns
for the removal of accumulated oil and or passage must be made. Aisles and
water. Adequate automatic traps may passageways shall be kept clear and in
be installed in addition to drain valves. good repair, with no obstruction across
The drain valve on the air receiver or in aisles that could create a hazard.
shall be opened and the receiver com- Permanent aisles and passageways
pletely drained frequently and at such shall be appropriately marked.
intervals as to prevent the accumula- (b) Secure storage. Storage of material
tion of excessive amounts of liquid in shall not create a hazard. Bags, con-
the receiver. tainers, bundles, etc., stored in tiers
(3) Gages and valves. (i) Every air re- shall be stacked, blocked, interlocked
ceiver shall be equipped with an indi- and limited in height so that they are
cating pressure gage (so located as to stable and secure against sliding or col-
be readily visible) and with one or lapse.
more spring-loaded safety valves. The (c) Housekeeping. Storage areas shall
total relieving capacity of such safety be kept free from accumulation of ma-
valves shall be such as to prevent pres- terials that constitute hazards from
tripping, fire, explosion, or pest harbor-
sure in the receiver from exceeding the
age. Vegetation control will be exer-
maximum allowable working pressure
cised when necessary.
of the receiver by more than 10 per-
(d) [Reserved]
cent.
(e) Clearance limits. Clearance signs to
(ii) No valve of any type shall be
warn of clearance limits shall be pro-
placed between the air receiver and its
vided.
safety valve or valves.
(f) Rolling railroad cars. Derail and/or
(iii) Safety appliances, such as safety bumper blocks shall be provided on
valves, indicating devices and control- spur railroad tracks where a rolling car
ling devices, shall be constructed, lo- could contact other cars being worked,
cated, and installed so that they can- enter a building, work or traffic area.
not be readily rendered inoperative by (g) Guarding. Covers and/or guard-
any means, including the elements. rails shall be provided to protect per-
(iv) All safety valves shall be tested sonnel from the hazards of open pits,
frequently and at regular intervals to tanks, vats, ditches, etc.
determine whether they are in good op-
erating condition.
FR 49749, Oct. 24, 1978]
FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996] 1910.177 Servicing multi-piece and
single piece rim wheels.
Subpart NMaterials Handling (a) Scope. (1) This section applies to
and Storage the servicing of multi-piece and single
piece rim wheels used on large vehicles
such as trucks, tractors, trailers, buses
AUTHORITY: Secs. 4, 6, 8, Occupational Safe-
and off-road machines. It does not
ty and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655,
apply to the servicing of rim wheels
657); Secretary of Labors Order No. 1271 (36
FR 8754), 876 (41 FR 25059), 983 (48 FR 35736), used on automobiles, or on pickup
190 (55 FR 9033) or 696 (62 FR 111), as appli- trucks and vans utilizing automobile
cable. tires or truck tires designated LT.
Sections 1910.176, 1910.177, 1910.178, 1910.179, (2) This section does not apply to em-
1910.180, 1910.181, and 1910.184 also issued ployers and places of employment reg-
under 29 CFR part 1911. ulated under the Construction Safety
536
Standards, 29 CFR part 1926; the Agri- sudden release of the contained air of a
culture Standards, 29 CFR part 1928; single piece rim wheel.
the Shipyard Standards, 29 CFR part Rim manual means a publication con-
1915; or the Longshoring Standards, 29 taining instructions from the manufac-
CFR part 1918. turer or other qualified organization
(3) All provisions of this section for correct mounting, demounting,
apply to the servicing of both single maintenance, and safety precautions
piece rim wheels and multi-piece rim peculiar to the type of wheel being
wheels unless designated otherwise. serviced.
(b) Definitions. Barrier means a fence, Rim wheel means an assemblage of
wall or other structure or object placed tire, tube and liner (where appro-
between a single piece rim wheel and priate), and wheel components.
an employee during tire inflation, to Service or servicing means the mount-
contain the rim wheel components in ing and demounting of rim wheels, and
the event of the sudden release of the related activities such as inflating, de-
contained air of the single piece rim flating, installing, removing, and han-
wheel. dling.
Charts means the U.S. Department of Service area means that part of an
Labor, Occupational Safety and Health employers premises used for the serv-
Administration publications entitled icing of rim wheels, or any other place
Demounting and Mounting Proce- where an employee services rim
dures for Truck/Bus Tires and Multi- wheels.
piece Rim Matching Chart, the Na- Single piece rim wheel means the as-
tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin- semblage of single piece rim wheel
istration (NHTSA) publications enti- with the tire and other components.
tled Demounting and Mounting Pro- Single piece wheel means a vehicle
cedures Truck/Bus Tires and Multi- wheel consisting of one part, designed
piece Rim Matching Chart, or any to hold the tire on the wheel when the
other poster which contains at least tire is inflated.
the same instructions, safety pre- Trajectory means any potential path
cautions and other information con- or route that a rim wheel component
tained in the charts that is applicable may travel during an explosive separa-
to the types of wheels being serviced. tion, or the sudden release of the pres-
Installing a rim wheel means the surized air, or an area at which an air-
transfer and attachment of an assem- blast from a single piece rim wheel
bled rim wheel onto a vehicle axle hub. may be released. The trajectory may
Removing means the opposite of install- deviate from paths which are perpen-
ing. dicular to the assembled position of the
Mounting a tire means the assembly rim wheel at the time of separation or
or putting together of the wheel and explosion. (See appendix A for exam-
tire components to form a rim wheel, ples of trajectories.)
including inflation. Demounting means Wheel means that portion of a rim
the opposite of mounting. wheel which provides the method of at-
Multi-piece rim wheel means the as- tachment of the assembly to the axle
semblage of a multi-piece wheel with of a vehicle and also provides the
the tire tube and other components. means to contain the inflated portion
Multi-piece wheel means a vehicle of the assembly (i.e., the tire and/or
wheel consisting of two or more parts, tube).
one of which is a side or locking ring (c) Employee training. (1) The em-
designed to hold the tire on the wheel ployer shall provide a program to train
by interlocking components when the all employees who service rim wheels
tire is inflated. in the hazards involved in servicing
Restraining device means an apparatus those rim wheels and the safety proce-
such as a cage, rack, assemblage of dures to be followed.
bars and other components that will (i) The employer shall assure that no
constrain all rim wheel components employee services any rim wheel un-
during an explosive separation of a less the employee has been trained and
multi-piece rim wheel, or during the instructed in correct procedures of
537
servicing the type of wheel being serv- rim wheel will be bolted onto a vehicle
iced, and in the safe operating proce- during inflation.
dures described in paragraphs (f) and (3) Restraining devices and barriers
(g) of this section. shall comply with the following re-
(ii) Information to be used in the quirements:
training program shall include, at a (i) Each restraining device or barrier
minimum, the applicable data con- shall have the capacity to withstand
tained in the charts (rim manuals) and the maximum force that would be
the contents of this standard. transferred to it during a rim wheel
(iii) Where an employer knows or has separation occurring at 150 percent of
reason to believe that any of his em- the maximum tire specification pres-
ployees is unable to read and under- sure for the type of rim wheel being
stand the charts or rim manual, the serviced.
employer shall assure that the em- (ii) Restraining devices and barriers
ployee is instructed concerning the shall be capable of preventing the rim
contents of the charts and rim manual wheel components from being thrown
in a manner which the employee is able outside or beyond the device or barrier
to understand. for any rim wheel positioned within or
(2) The employer shall assure that behind the device;
each employee demonstrates and main- (iii) Restraining devices and barriers
tains the ability to service rim wheels shall be visually inspected prior to
safely, including performance of the each days use and after any separation
following tasks: of the rim wheel components or sudden
(i) Demounting of tires (including de- release of contained air. Any restrain-
flation); ing device or barrier exhibiting damage
(ii) Inspection and identification of such as the following defects shall be
the rim wheel components; immediately removed from service:
(A) Cracks at welds;
(iii) Mounting of tires (including in-
(B) Cracked or broken components;
flation with a restraining device or
(C) Bent or sprung components
other safeguard required by this sec-
caused by mishandling, abuse, tire ex-
tion);
plosion or rim wheel separation;
(iv) Use of the restraining device or
(D) Pitting of components due to cor-
barrier, and other equipment required
rosion; or
by this section;
(E) Other structural damage which
(v) Handling of rim wheels; would decrease its effectiveness.
(vi) Inflation of the tire when a single (iv) Restraining devices or barriers
piece rim wheel is mounted on a vehi- removed from service shall not be re-
cle; turned to service until they are re-
(vii) An understanding of the neces- paired and reinspected. Restraining de-
sity of standing outside the trajectory vices or barriers requiring structural
both during inflation of the tire and repair such as component replacement
during inspection of the rim wheel fol- or rewelding shall not be returned to
lowing inflation; and service until they are certified by ei-
(viii) Installation and removal of rim ther the manufacturer or a Registered
wheels. Professional Engineer as meeting the
(3) The employer shall evaluate each strength requirements of paragraph
employees ability to perform these (d)(3)(i) of this section.
tasks and to service rim wheels safely, (4) The employer shall furnish and as-
and shall provide additional training as sure that an air line assembly con-
necessary to assure that each employee sisting of the following components be
maintains his or her proficiency. used for inflating tires:
(d) Tire servicing equipment. (1) The (i) A clip-on chuck;
employer shall furnish a restraining (ii) An in-line valve with a pressure
device for inflating tires on multi-piece gauge or a presettable regulator; and
wheels. (iii) A sufficient length of hose be-
(2) The employer shall provide a re- tween the clip-on chuck and the in-line
straining device or barrier for inflating valve (if one is used) to allow the em-
tires on single piece wheels unless the ployee to stand outside the trajectory.
538
(5) Current charts or rim manuals the tire, unless the tire or wheel manu-
containing instructions for the type of facturer recommends against it.
wheels being serviced shall be available (4) If a tire on a vehicle is under-
in the service area. inflated but has more than 80% of the
(6) The employer shall furnish and as- recommended pressure, the tire may be
sure that only tools recommended in inflated while the rim wheel is on the
the rim manual for the type of wheel vehicle provided remote control infla-
being serviced are used to service rim tion equipment is used, and no employ-
wheels. ees remain in the trajectory during in-
(e) Wheel component acceptability. (1) flation.
Multi-piece wheel components shall (5) Tires shall be inflated outside a
not be interchanged except as provided restraining device only to a pressure
in the charts or in the applicable rim sufficient to force the tire bead onto
manual. the rim ledge and create an airtight
(2) Multi-piece wheel components and seal with the tire and bead.
single piece wheels shall be inspected (6) Whenever a rim wheel is in a re-
prior to assembly. Any wheel or wheel straining device the employee shall not
component which is bent out of shape, rest or lean any part of his body or
pitted from corrosion, broken, or equipment on or against the restrain-
cracked shall not be used and shall be ing device.
marked or tagged unserviceable and re- (7) After tire inflation, the tire and
moved from the service area. Damaged wheel components shall be inspected
or leaky valves shall be replaced. while still within the restraining de-
(3) Rim flanges, rim gutters, rings, vice to make sure that they are prop-
bead seating surfaces and the bead erly seated and locked. If further ad-
areas of tires shall be free of any dirt, justment to the tire or wheel compo-
surface rust, scale or loose or flaked nents is necessary, the tire shall be de-
rubber build-up prior to mounting and flated by removal of the valve core be-
inflation. fore the adjustment is made.
(4) The size (bead diameter and tire/ (8) No attempt shall be made to cor-
wheel widths) and type of both the tire rect the seating of side and lock rings
and the wheel shall be checked for by hammering, striking or forcing the
compatibility prior to assembly of the components while the tire is pressur-
rim wheel. ized.
(f) Safe operating proceduremulti- (9) Cracked, broken, bent or other-
piece rim wheels. The employer shall es- wise damaged rim components shall
tablish a safe operating procedure for not be reworked, welded, brazed, or
servicing multi-piece rim wheels and otherwise heated.
shall assure that employees are in- (10) Whenever multi-piece rim wheels
structed in and follow that procedure. are being handled, employees shall stay
The procedure shall include at least out of the trajectory unless the em-
the following elements: ployer can demonstrate that perform-
(1) Tires shall be completely deflated ance of the servicing makes the em-
before demounting by removal of the ployees presence in the trajectory nec-
valve core. essary.
(2) Tires shall be completely deflated (11) No heat shall be applied to a
by removing the valve core before a multi-piece wheel or wheel component.
rim wheel is removed from the axle in (g) Safe operating proceduresingle
either of the following situations: piece rim wheels. The employer shall es-
(i) When the tire has been driven tablish a safe operating procedure for
underinflated at 80% or less of its rec- servicing single piece rim wheels and
ommended pressure, or shall assure that employees are in-
(ii) When there is obvious or sus- structed in and follow that procedure.
pected damage to the tire or wheel The procedure shall include at least
components. the following elements:
(3) Rubber lubricant shall be applied (1) Tires shall be completely deflated
to bead and rim mating surfaces during by removal of the valve core before de-
assembly of the wheel and inflation of mounting.
539
(2) Mounting and demounting of the (6) Tires may be inflated only when
tire shall be done only from the narrow contained within a restraining device,
ledge side of the wheel. Care shall be positioned behind a barrier or bolted on
taken to avoid damaging the tire beads the vehicle with the lug nuts fully
while mounting tires on wheels. Tires tightened.
shall be mounted only on compatible (7) Tires shall not be inflated when
wheels of matching bead diameter and any flat, solid surface is in the trajec-
width. tory and within one foot of the side-
(3) Nonflammable rubber lubricant wall.
shall be applied to bead and wheel mat- (8) Employees shall stay out of the
trajectory when inflating a tire.
ing surfaces before assembly of the rim
(9) Tires shall not be inflated to more
wheel, unless the tire or wheel manu-
than the inflation pressure stamped in
facturer recommends against the use of
the sidewall unless a higher pressure is
any rubber lubricant.
recommended by the manufacturer.
(4) If a tire changing machine is used, (10) Tires shall not be inflated above
the tire shall be inflated only to the the maximum pressure recommended
minimum pressure necessary to force by the manufacturer to seat the tire
the tire bead onto the rim ledge while bead firmly against the rim flange.
on the tire changing machine. (11) No heat shall be applied to a sin-
(5) If a bead expander is used, it shall gle piece wheel.
be removed before the valve core is in- (12) Cracked, broken, bent, or other-
stalled and as soon as the rim wheel be- wise damaged wheels shall not be re-
comes airtight (the tire bead slips onto worked, welded, brazed, or otherwise
the bead seat). heated.
540
APPENDIX B TO 1910.177ORDERING Truck/Bus Tires and Multi-piece Rim

INFORMATION FOR THE OSHA CHARTS Matching Chart, as part of a continuing
campaign to reduce accidents among em-
OSHA has printed two charts entitled
ployees who service large vehicle rim wheels.
Demounting and Mounting Procedures for
541
EC27OC91.036</GPH>
Reprints of the charts are available (4) Modifications and additions which
through the Occupational Safety and Health affect capacity and safe operation shall
Administration (OSHA) Area and Regional not be performed by the customer or
Offices. The address and telephone number of
the nearest OSHA office can be obtained by
user without manufacturers prior writ-
looking in the local telephone directory ten approval. Capacity, operation, and
under U.S. Government, U.S. Department of maintenance instruction plates, tags,
Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Ad- or decals shall be changed accordingly.
ministration. Single copies are available (5) If the truck is equipped with
without charge. front-end attachments other than fac-
Individuals, establishments and other or- tory installed attachments, the user
ganizations desiring single or multiple cop-
ies of these charts may order them from the
shall request that the truck be marked
OSHA Publications Office, U.S. Department to identify the attachments and show
of Labor, Room N3101, Washington, DC the approximate weight of the truck
20210, Telephone (202) 2194667. and attachment combination at max-
[49 FR 4350, Feb. 3, 1984, as amended at 52 FR imum elevation with load laterally
36026, Sept. 25, 1987; 53 FR 34737, Sept. 8, 1988; centered.
61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996] (6) The user shall see that all name-
plates and markings are in place and
1910.178 Powered industrial trucks. are maintained in a legible condition.
(a) General requirements. (1) This sec- (7) As used in this section, the term,
tion contains safety requirements re- approved truck or approved industrial
lating to fire protection, design, main- truck means a truck that is listed or
tenance, and use of fork trucks, trac- approved for fire safety purposes for
tors, platform lift trucks, motorized the intended use by a nationally recog-
hand trucks, and other specialized in- nized testing laboratory, using nation-
dustrial trucks powered by electric mo- ally recognized testing standards.
tors or internal combustion engines. Refer to 1910.155(c)(3)(iv)(A) for defini-
This section does not apply to com- tion of listed, and to 1910.7 for defini-
pressed air or nonflammable com- tion of nationally recognized testing
pressed gas-operated industrial trucks, laboratory.
nor to farm vehicles, nor to vehicles in- (b) Designations. For the purpose of
tended primarily for earth moving or this standard there are eleven different
over-the-road hauling. designations of industrial trucks or
(2) All new powered industrial trucks tractors as follows: D, DS, DY, E, ES,
acquired and used by an employer after EE, EX, G, GS, LP, and LPS.
the effective date specified in para- (1) The D designated units are units
graph (b) of 1910.182 shall meet the de- similar to the G units except that they
sign and construction requirements for are diesel engine powered instead of
powered industrial trucks established gasoline engine powered.
in the American National Standard (2) The DS designated units are diesel
for Powered Industrial Trucks, Part II, powered units that are provided with
ANSI B56.11969, which is incor- additional safeguards to the exhaust,
porated by reference as specified in fuel and electrical systems. They may
1910.6, except for vehicles intended be used in some locations where a D
primarily for earth moving or over-the- unit may not be considered suitable.
road hauling. (3) The DY designated units are die-
(3) Approved trucks shall bear a label sel powered units that have all the
or some other identifying mark indi- safeguards of the DS units and in addi-
cating approval by the testing labora- tion do not have any electrical equip-
tory. See paragraph (a)(7) of this sec- ment including the ignition and are
tion and paragraph 405 of American equipped with temperature limitation
National Standard for Powered Indus- features.
trial Trucks, Part II, ANSI B56.11969, (4) The E designated units are elec-
which is incorporated by reference in trically powered units that have min-
paragraph (a)(2) of this section and imum acceptable safeguards against in-
which provides that if the powered inherent fire hazards.
dustrial truck is accepted by a nation- (5) The ES designated units are elec-
ally recognized testing laboratory it trically powered units that, in addition
should be so marked. to all of the requirements for the E
542
units, are provided with additional trucks having greater safeguards may
safeguards to the electrical system to be used if desired.
prevent emission of hazardous sparks (2) For specific areas of use, see Table
and to limit surface temperatures. N1 which tabulates the information
They may be used in some locations contained in this section. References
where the use of an E unit may not be are to the corresponding classification
considered suitable. as used in subpart S of this part.
(6) The EE designated units are elec- (i) Power-operated industrial trucks
trically powered units that have, in ad- shall not be used in atmospheres con-
dition to all of the requirements for taining hazardous concentration of
the E and ES units, the electric motors acetylene, butadiene, ethylene oxide,
and all other electrical equipment hydrogen (or gases or vapors equiva-
completely enclosed. In certain loca- lent in hazard to hydrogen, such as
tions the EE unit may be used where manufactured gas), propylene oxide,
the use of an E and ES unit may not be acetaldehyde, cyclopropane, diethyl
considered suitable. ether, ethylene, isoprene, or unsym-
(7) The EX designated units are elec- metrical dimethyl hydrazine (UDMH).
trically powered units that differ from (ii)(a) Power-operated industrial
the E, ES, or EE units in that the elec- trucks shall not be used in
trical fittings and equipment are so de- atmospheres containing hazardous con-
signed, constructed and assembled that centrations of metal dust, including
the units may be used in certain aluminum, magnesium, and their com-
atmospheres containing flammable va- mercial alloys, other metals of simi-
pors or dusts. larly hazardous characteristics, or in
atmospheres containing carbon black,
(8) The G designated units are gaso-
coal or coke dust except approved
line powered units having minimum
power-operated industrial trucks des-
acceptable safeguards against inherent
ignated as EX may be used in such
fire hazards.
atmospheres.
(9) The GS designated units are gaso- (b) In atmospheres where dust of
line powered units that are provided magnesium, aluminum or aluminum
with additional safeguards to the ex- bronze may be present, fuses, switches,
haust, fuel, and electrical systems. motor controllers, and circuit breakers
They may be used in some locations of trucks shall have enclosures specifi-
where the use of a G unit may not be cally approved for such locations.
considered suitable. (iii) Only approved power-operated
(10) The LP designated unit is similar industrial trucks designated as EX
to the G unit except that liquefied pe- may be used in atmospheres containing
troleum gas is used for fuel instead of acetone, acrylonitrile, alcohol, ammo-
gasoline. nia, benzine, benzol, butane, ethylene
(11) The LPS designated units are liq- dichloride, gasoline, hexane, lacquer
uefied petroleum gas powered units solvent vapors, naphtha, natural gas,
that are provided with additional safe- propane, propylene, styrene, vinyl ace-
guards to the exhaust, fuel, and elec- tate, vinyl chloride, or xylenes in quan-
trical systems. They may be used in tities sufficient to produce explosive or
some locations where the use of an LP ignitable mixtures and where such con-
unit may not be considered suitable. centrations of these gases or vapors
(12) The atmosphere or location shall exist continuously, intermittently or
have been classified as to whether it is periodically under normal operating
hazardous or nonhazardous prior to the conditions or may exist frequently be-
consideration of industrial trucks cause of repair, maintenance oper-
being used therein and the type of in- ations, leakage, breakdown or faulty
dustrial truck required shall be as pro- operation of equipment.
vided in paragraph (d) of this section (iv) Power-operated industrial trucks
for such location. designated as DY, EE, or EX may be
(c) Designated locations. (1) The indus- used in locations where volatile flam-
trial trucks specified under subpara- mable liquids or flammable gases are
graph (2) of this paragraph are the min- handled, processed or used, but in
imum types required but industrial which the hazardous liquids, vapors or
543
gases will normally be confined within ure or abnormal operation of the ven-
closed containers or closed systems tilating equipment; or in locations
from which they can escape only in which are adjacent to Class I, Division
case of accidental rupture or break- 1 locations, and to which hazardous
down of such containers or systems, or concentrations of gases or vapors
in the case of abnormal operation of might occasionally be communicated
equipment; also in locations in which unless such communication is pre-
hazardous concentrations of gases or vented by adequate positive-pressure
vapors are normally prevented by posi- ventilation from a source of clear air,
tive mechanical ventilation but which and effective safeguards against ven-
might become hazardous through fail- tilation failure are provided.
544
VerDate Aug<2,>2002
08:14 Aug 03, 2002
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor

TABLE N1SUMMARY TABLE ON USE OF INDUSTRIAL TRUCKS IN VARIOUS LOCATIONS
Classes Unclassified Class I locations Class II locations Class III locations
Jkt 197107
Description of classes Locations not possessing Locations in which flammable gases or vapors Locations which are hazardous because of the Locations where easily ignitible
atmospheres as de- are, or may be, present in the air in quantities presence of combustible dust. fibers or flyings are present
scribed in other columns. sufficient to produce explosive or ignitible mix- but not likely to be in suspen-
tures. sion in quantities sufficient to
produce ignitible mixtures.
PO 00000
Groups in classes None A B C D E F G None
Examples of locations Piers and wharves inside Acetylene Hydrogen Ethyl ether Gasoline Metal dust Carbon Grain dust, flour dust, Baled waste, cocoa
or atmospheres in and outside general Naphtha black coal starch dust, organic fiber, cotton, excel-
classes and groups. storage, general indus- Alcohols dust, dust sior, hemp, istle,
Frm 00545
trial or commercial Acetone coke dust jute, kapok, oakum,

properties. Lacquer sisal, Spanish
solvent moss, synthetic fi-
Benzene bers, tow.
Fmt 8010
545
Sfmt 8010
TABLE N1SUMMARY TABLE ON USE OF INDUSTRIAL TRUCKS IN VARIOUS LOCATIONSCONTINUED

1 2 1 2 1 2
Divisions (nature of None Above condition exists Above condition may Explosive mixture may Explosive mixture not Locations in which eas- Locations in which eas-
Y:\SGML\197107T.XXX
hazardous condi- continuously, inter- occur accidentally as be present under normally present, but ily ignitible fibers or ily ignitible fibers are
tions) mittently, or periodi- due to a puncture of normal operating where deposits of materials producing stored or handled
cally under normal a storage drum. conditions, or where dust may cause heat combustible flyings (except in the proc-
operating conditions. failure of equipment rise in electrical are handled, manu- ess of manufacture).
may cause the con- equipment, or where factured, or used.
dition to exist simul- such deposits may
taneously with arcing be ignited by arcs or
or sparking of elec- sparks from electrical
trical equipment, or equipment.
where dusts of an
electrically con-
pfrm72
ducting nature may

be present.
1910.178
PsN: 197107T
VerDate Aug<2,>2002
08:14 Aug 03, 2002
1910.178
Authorized uses of trucks by types in groups of classes and divisions
Groups in classes None A B C D A B C D E F G E F G None None
Type of truck author-

Jkt 197107
ized:
Diesel:
Type D ................. D** ........... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .................
Type DS ............... ................. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... DS .... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... DS .... ................. DS
Type DY ............... ................. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... DY .... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... DY .... DY ........... DY
PO 00000
Electric:
Type E ................. E** ........... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ................. E
Type ES ............... ................. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ES .... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ES .... ................. ES
Type EE ............... ................. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... EE .... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... EE .... EE ........... EE
Frm 00546
Type EX ............... ................. .......... .......... .......... EX .... .......... .......... .......... EX .... .......... EX .... EX .... .......... .......... EX .... EX ........... EX
Gasoline:
Type G ................. G** .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .................
Type GS .............. ................. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... GS .... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... GS .... ................. GS
LPGas:
Fmt 8010
Type LP ............... LP** ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .................
Type LPS ............. ................. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... LPS .. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... LPS .. ................. LPS
Paragraph Ref. in No. 210.211 201 203 209 204 202 205 209 206 207(a) 208 (a)
546
505. (a) (a) (a) (a), (a) (a) (a) (a),

(b) (b)
Sfmt 8010
**Trucks conforming to these types may also be usedsee subdivision (c)(2)(x) and (c)(2)(xii) of this section.
29 CFR Ch. XVII (7102 Edition)

Y:\SGML\197107T.XXX
pfrm72
PsN: 197107T
(v) In locations used for the storage plants, malting plants, hay grinding
of hazardous liquids in sealed con- plants, and other occupancies of simi-
tainers or liquefied or compressed lar nature; coal pulverizing plants (ex-
gases in containers, approved power-op- cept where the pulverizing equipment
erated industrial trucks designated as is essentially dust tight); all working
DS, ES, GS, or LPS may be used. This areas where metal dusts and powders
classification includes locations where are produced, processed, handled,
volatile flammable liquids or flam- packed, or stored (except in tight con-
mable gases or vapors are used, but tainers); and other similar locations
which, would become hazardous only in where combustible dust may, under
case of an accident or of some unusual normal operating conditions, be
operating condition. The quantity of present in the air in quantities suffi-
hazardous material that might escape cient to produce explosive or ignitable
in case of accident, the adequacy of mixtures.
ventilating equipment, the total area (vii) Only approved power-operated
involved, and the record of the indus- industrial trucks designated as DY,
try or business with respect to explo- EE, or EX shall be used in atmospheres
sions or fires are all factors that should in which combustible dust will not nor-
receive consideration in determining mally be in suspension in the air or
whether or not the DS or DY, ES, EE, will not be likely to be thrown into
GS, LPS designated truck possesses suspension by the normal operation of
sufficient safeguards for the location. equipment or apparatus in quantities
Piping without valves, checks, meters sufficient to produce explosive or ignit-
and similar devices would not ordi- able mixtures but where deposits or ac-
narily be deemed to introduce a haz- cumulations of such dust may be ig-
ardous condition even though used for nited by arcs or sparks originating in
hazardous liquids or gases. Locations the truck.
used for the storage of hazardous liq- (viii) Only approved power-operated
uids or of liquified or compressed gases industrial trucks designated as DY,
in sealed containers would not nor- EE, or EX shall be used in locations
mally be considered hazardous unless which are hazardous because of the
subject to other hazardous conditions presence of easily ignitable fibers or
also. flyings but in which such fibers or
(vi)(a) Only approved power operated flyings are not likely to be in suspen-
industrial trucks designated as EX sion in the air in quantities sufficient
shall be used in atmospheres in which to produce ignitable mixtures.
combustible dust is or may be in sus- (ix) Only approved power-operated in-
pension continuously, intermittently, dustrial trucks designated as DS, DY,
or periodically under normal operating ES, EE, EX, GS, or LPS shall be used
conditions, in quantities sufficient to in locations where easily ignitable fi-
produce explosive or ignitable mix- bers are stored or handled, including
tures, or where mechanical failure or outside storage, but are not being proc-
abnormal operation of machinery or essed or manufactured. Industrial
equipment might cause such mixtures trucks designated as E, which have
to be produced. been previously used in these locations
(b) The EX classification usually in- may be continued in use.
cludes the working areas of grain han- (x) On piers and wharves handling
dling and storage plants, room con- general cargo, any approved power-op-
taining grinders or pulverizers, clean- erated industrial truck designated as
ers, graders, scalpers, open conveyors Type D, E, G, or LP may be used, or
or spouts, open bins or hoppers, mixers, trucks which conform to the require-
or blenders, automatic or hopper ments for these types may be used.
scales, packing machinery, elevator (xi) If storage warehouses and outside
heads and boots, stock distributors, storage locations are hazardous only
dust and stock collectors (except all- the approved power-operated industrial
metal collectors vented to the outside), truck specified for such locations in
and all similar dust producing machin- this paragraph (c)(2) shall be used. If
ery and equipment in grain processing not classified as hazardous, any ap-
plants, starch plants, sugar pulverizing proved power-operated industrial truck
547
designated as Type D, E, G, or LP may tilation for dispersal of fumes from

be used, or trucks which conform to gassing batteries.
the requirements for these types may (3) [Reserved]
be used. (4) A conveyor, overhead hoist, or
(xii) If general industrial or commer- equivalent material handling equip-
cial properties are hazardous, only ap- ment shall be provided for handling
proved power-operated industrial batteries.
trucks specified for such locations in (5) Reinstalled batteries shall be
this paragraph (c)(2) shall be used. If properly positioned and secured in the
not classified as hazardous, any ap- truck.
proved power-operated industrial truck (6) A carboy tilter or siphon shall be
designated as Type D, E, G, or LP may provided for handling electrolyte.
be used, or trucks which conform to (7) When charging batteries, acid
the requirements of these types may be shall be poured into water; water shall
used. not be poured into acid.
(d) Converted industrial trucks. Power- (8) Trucks shall be properly posi-
operated industrial trucks that have tioned and brake applied before at-
been originally approved for the use of tempting to change or charge bat-
gasoline for fuel, when converted to the teries.
use of liquefied petroleum gas fuel in (9) Care shall be taken to assure that
accordance with paragraph (q) of this vent caps are functioning. The battery
section, may be used in those locations (or compartment) cover(s) shall be
where G, GS or LP, and LPS des- open to dissipate heat.
ignated trucks have been specified in (10) Smoking shall be prohibited in
the preceding paragraphs. the charging area.
(e) Safety guards. (1) High Lift Rider (11) Precautions shall be taken to
trucks shall be fitted with an overhead prevent open flames, sparks, or electric
guard manufactured in accordance arcs in battery charging areas.
with paragraph (a)(2) of this section, (12) Tools and other metallic objects
unless operating conditions do not per- shall be kept away from the top of un-
mit. covered batteries.
(2) If the type of load presents a haz- (h) Lighting for operating areas.
ard, the user shall equip fork trucks (1) [Reserved]
with a vertical load backrest extension (2) Where general lighting is less
manufactured in accordance with para- than 2 lumens per square foot, auxil-
graph (a)(2) of this section. iary directional lighting shall be pro-
(f) Fuel handling and storage. (1) The vided on the truck.
storage and handling of liquid fuels (i) Control of noxious gases and fumes.
such as gasoline and diesel fuel shall be (1) Concentration levels of carbon mon-
in accordance with NFPA Flammable oxide gas created by powered industrial
and Combustible Liquids Code (NFPA truck operations shall not exceed the
No. 301969), which is incorporated by levels specified in 1910.1000.
reference as specified in 1910.6. (j) Dockboards (bridge plates). See
(2) The storage and handling of lique- 1910.30(a).
fied petroleum gas fuel shall be in ac- (k) Trucks and railroad cars. (1) The
cordance with NFPA Storage and Han- brakes of highway trucks shall be set
dling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases and wheel chocks placed under the rear
(NFPA No. 581969), which is incor- wheels to prevent the trucks from roll-
porated by reference as specified in ing while they are boarded with pow-
1910.6. ered industrial trucks.
(g) Changing and charging storage bat- (2) Wheel stops or other recognized
teries. (1) Battery charging installa- positive protection shall be provided to
tions shall be located in areas des- prevent railroad cars from moving dur-
ignated for that purpose. ing loading or unloading operations.
(2) Facilities shall be provided for (3) Fixed jacks may be necessary to
flushing and neutralizing spilled elec- support a semitrailer and prevent up-
trolyte, for fire protection, for pro- ending during the loading or unloading
tecting charging apparatus from dam- when the trailer is not coupled to a
age by trucks, and for adequate ven- tractor.
548
(4) Positive protection shall be pro- (C) Truck controls and instrumenta-
vided to prevent railroad cars from tion: where they are located, what they
being moved while dockboards or do, and how they work;
bridge plates are in position. (D) Engine or motor operation;
(l) Operator training. (1) Safe oper- (E) Steering and maneuvering;
ation. (i) The employer shall ensure (F) Visibility (including restrictions
that each powered industrial truck op- due to loading);
erator is competent to operate a pow- (G) Fork and attachment adaptation,
ered industrial truck safely, as dem- operation, and use limitations;
onstrated by the successful completion (H) Vehicle capacity;
of the training and evaluation specified
(I) Vehicle stability;
in this paragraph (l).
(J) Any vehicle inspection and main-
(ii) Prior to permitting an employee
tenance that the operator will be re-
to operate a powered industrial truck
quired to perform;
(except for training purposes), the em-
ployer shall ensure that each operator (K) Refueling and/or charging and re-
has successfully completed the train- charging of batteries;
ing required by this paragraph (l), ex- (L) Operating limitations;
cept as permitted by paragraph (l)(5). (M) Any other operating instruc-
(2) Training program implementation. tions, warnings, or precautions listed
(i) Trainees may operate a powered in- in the operators manual for the types
dustrial truck only: of vehicle that the employee is being
(A) Under the direct supervision of trained to operate.
persons who have the knowledge, train- (ii) Workplace-related topics:
ing, and experience to train operators (A) Surface conditions where the ve-
and evaluate their competence; and hicle will be operated;
(B) Where such operation does not (B) Composition of loads to be car-
endanger the trainee or other employ- ried and load stability;
ees. (C) Load manipulation, stacking, and
(ii) Training shall consist of a com- unstacking;
bination of formal instruction (e.g., (D) Pedestrian traffic in areas where
lecture, discussion, interactive com- the vehicle will be operated;
puter learning, video tape, written ma- (E) Narrow aisles and other re-
terial), practical training (demonstra- stricted places where the vehicle will
tions performed by the trainer and be operated;
practical exercises performed by the (F) Hazardous (classified) locations
trainee), and evaluation of the opera- where the vehicle will be operated;
tors performance in the workplace. (G) Ramps and other sloped surfaces
(iii) All operator training and evalua- that could affect the vehicles sta-
tion shall be conducted by persons who bility;
have the knowledge, training, and ex- (H) Closed environments and other
perience to train powered industrial areas where insufficient ventilation or
truck operators and evaluate their poor vehicle maintenance could cause a
competence. buildup of carbon monoxide or diesel
(3) Training program content. Powered exhaust;
industrial truck operators shall receive (I) Other unique or potentially haz-
initial training in the following topics, ardous environmental conditions in the
except in topics which the employer workplace that could affect safe oper-
can demonstrate are not applicable to ation.
safe operation of the truck in the em- (iii) The requirements of this section.
ployers workplace. (4) Refresher training and evaluation.
(i) Truck-related topics: (i) Refresher training, including an
(A) Operating instructions, warnings, evaluation of the effectiveness of that
and precautions for the types of truck training, shall be conducted as required
the operator will be authorized to oper- by paragraph (l)(4)(ii) to ensure that
ate; the operator has the knowledge and
(B) Differences between the truck skills needed to operate the powered
and the automobile; industrial truck safely.
549
(ii) Refresher training in relevant training in a topic specified in para-

topics shall be provided to the operator graph (l)(3) of this section, and such
when: training is appropriate to the truck
(A) The operator has been observed and working conditions encountered,
to operate the vehicle in an unsafe additional training in that topic is not
manner; required if the operator has been evalu-
(B) The operator has been involved in ated and found competent to operate
an accident or near-miss incident; the truck safely.
(C) The operator has received an (6) Certification. The employer shall
evaluation that reveals that the oper-
certify that each operator has been
ator is not operating the truck safely;
trained and evaluated as required by
(D) The operator is assigned to drive
a different type of truck; or this paragraph (l). The certification
(E) A condition in the workplace shall include the name of the operator,
changes in a manner that could affect the date of the training, the date of the
safe operation of the truck. evaluation, and the identity of the per-
(iii) An evaluation of each powered son(s) performing the training or eval-
industrial truck operators perform- uation.
ance shall be conducted at least once (7) Dates. The employer shall ensure
every three years. that operators of powered industrial
(5) Avoidance of duplicative training. If trucks are trained, as appropriate, by
an operator has previously received the dates shown in the following table.
If the employee was hired: The initial training and evaluation of that employee must be completed:
Before December 1, 1999 .......................... By December 1, 1999.

After December 1, 1999 ............................. Before the employee is assigned to operate a powered industrial truck.
(8) Appendix A to this section pro- more away from the vehicle which re-
vides non-mandatory guidance to assist mains in his view, or whenever the op-
employers in implementing this para- erator leaves the vehicle and it is not
graph (l). This appendix does not add in his view.
to, alter, or reduce the requirements of (iii) When the operator of an indus-
this section. trial truck is dismounted and within 25
(m) Truck operations. (1) Trucks shall ft. of the truck still in his view, the
not be driven up to anyone standing in load engaging means shall be fully low-
front of a bench or other fixed object. ered, controls neutralized, and the
(2) No person shall be allowed to brakes set to prevent movement.
stand or pass under the elevated por- (6) A safe distance shall be main-
tion of any truck, whether loaded or
tained from the edge of ramps or plat-
empty.
forms while on any elevated dock, or
(3) Unauthorized personnel shall not
platform or freight car. Trucks shall
be permitted to ride on powered indus-
not be used for opening or closing
trial trucks. A safe place to ride shall
freight doors.
be provided where riding of trucks is
authorized. (7) Brakes shall be set and wheel
(4) The employer shall prohibit arms blocks shall be in place to prevent
or legs from being placed between the movement of trucks, trailers, or rail-
uprights of the mast or outside the road cars while loading or unloading.
running lines of the truck. Fixed jacks may be necessary to sup-
(5)(i) When a powered industrial port a semitrailer during loading or un-
truck is left unattended, load engaging loading when the trailer is not coupled
means shall be fully lowered, controls to a tractor. The flooring of trucks,
shall be neutralized, power shall be trailers, and railroad cars shall be
shut off, and brakes set. Wheels shall checked for breaks and weakness be-
be blocked if the truck is parked on an fore they are driven onto.
incline. (8) There shall be sufficient head-
(ii) A powered industrial truck is un- room under overhead installations,
attended when the operator is 25 ft. or lights, pipes, sprinkler system, etc.
550
(9) An overhead guard shall be used (6) The driver shall be required to
as protection against falling objects. It look in the direction of, and keep a
should be noted that an overhead guard clear view of the path of travel.
is intended to offer protection from the (7) Grades shall be ascended or de-
impact of small packages, boxes, scended slowly.
bagged material, etc., representative of (i) When ascending or descending
the job application, but not to with- grades in excess of 10 percent, loaded
stand the impact of a falling capacity trucks shall be driven with the load up-
load. grade.
(10) A load backrest extension shall (ii) [Reserved]
be used whenever necessary to mini- (iii) On all grades the load and load
mize the possibility of the load or part engaging means shall be tilted back if
of it from falling rearward. applicable, and raised only as far as
(11) Only approved industrial trucks necessary to clear the road surface.
shall be used in hazardous locations. (8) Under all travel conditions the
(12) Whenever a truck is equipped truck shall be operated at a speed that
with vertical only, or vertical and hori- will permit it to be brought to a stop in
zontal controls elevatable with the lift- a safe manner.
ing carriage or forks for lifting per- (9) Stunt driving and horseplay shall
sonnel, the following additional pre- not be permitted.
cautions shall be taken for the protec- (10) The driver shall be required to
tion of personnel being elevated. slow down for wet and slippery floors.
(i) Use of a safety platform firmly se- (11) Dockboard or bridgeplates, shall
cured to the lifting carriage and/or be properly secured before they are
forks. driven over. Dockboard or bridgeplates
(ii) Means shall be provided whereby shall be driven over carefully and slow-
personnel on the platform can shut off ly and their rated capacity never ex-
power to the truck. ceeded.
(iii) Such protection from falling ob- (12) Elevators shall be approached
jects as indicated necessary by the op- slowly, and then entered squarely after
erating conditions shall be provided. the elevator car is properly leveled.
(13) [Reserved] Once on the elevator, the controls shall
(14) Fire aisles, access to stairways, be neutralized, power shut off, and the
and fire equipment shall be kept clear. brakes set.
(n) Traveling. (1) All traffic regula- (13) Motorized hand trucks must
tions shall be observed, including au- enter elevator or other confined areas
thorized plant speed limits. A safe dis- with load end forward.
tance shall be maintained approxi- (14) Running over loose objects on
mately three truck lengths from the the roadway surface shall be avoided.
truck ahead, and the truck shall be (15) While negotiating turns, speed
kept under control at all times. shall be reduced to a safe level by
(2) The right of way shall be yielded means of turning the hand steering
to ambulances, fire trucks, or other ve- wheel in a smooth, sweeping motion.
hicles in emergency situations. Except when maneuvering at a very
(3) Other trucks traveling in the low speed, the hand steering wheel
same direction at intersections, blind shall be turned at a moderate, even
spots, or other dangerous locations rate.
shall not be passed. (o) Loading. (1) Only stable or safely
(4) The driver shall be required to arranged loads shall be handled. Cau-
slow down and sound the horn at cross tion shall be exercised when handling
aisles and other locations where vision off-center loads which cannot be cen-
is obstructed. If the load being carried tered.
obstructs forward view, the driver shall (2) Only loads within the rated capac-
be required to travel with the load ity of the truck shall be handled.
trailing. (3) The long or high (including mul-
(5) Railroad tracks shall be crossed tiple-tiered) loads which may affect ca-
diagonally wherever possible. Parking pacity shall be adjusted.
closer than 8 feet from the center of (4) Trucks equipped with attach-
railroad tracks is prohibited. ments shall be operated as partially
551
loaded trucks when not handling a (6) Industrial trucks shall not be al-
load. tered so that the relative positions of
(5) A load engaging means shall be the various parts are different from
placed under the load as far as possible; what they were when originally re-
the mast shall be carefully tilted back- ceived from the manufacturer, nor
ward to stabilize the load. shall they be altered either by the ad-
(6) Extreme care shall be used when dition of extra parts not provided by
tilting the load forward or backward, the manufacturer or by the elimination
particularly when high tiering. Tilting of any parts, except as provided in
forward with load engaging means ele- paragraph (q)(12) of this section. Addi-
vated shall be prohibited except to pick tional counterweighting of fork trucks
up a load. An elevated load shall not be shall not be done unless approved by
tilted forward except when the load is the truck manufacturer.
in a deposit position over a rack or (7) Industrial trucks shall be exam-
stack. When stacking or tiering, only ined before being placed in service, and
enough backward tilt to stabilize the shall not be placed in service if the ex-
load shall be used. amination shows any condition ad-
(p) Operation of the truck. (1) If at any versely affecting the safety of the vehi-
time a powered industrial truck is cle. Such examination shall be made at
found to be in need of repair, defective, least daily.
or in any way unsafe, the truck shall Where industrial trucks are used on a
be taken out of service until it has round-the-clock basis, they shall be ex-
been restored to safe operating condi- amined after each shift. Defects when
tion. found shall be immediately reported
(2) Fuel tanks shall not be filled and corrected.
while the engine is running. Spillage (8) Water mufflers shall be filled
shall be avoided. daily or as frequently as is necessary
(3) Spillage of oil or fuel shall be to prevent depletion of the supply of
carefully washed away or completely water below 75 percent of the filled ca-
evaporated and the fuel tank cap re- pacity. Vehicles with mufflers having
placed before restarting engine. screens or other parts that may be-
(4) No truck shall be operated with a come clogged shall not be operated
leak in the fuel system until the leak while such screens or parts are clogged.
has been corrected. Any vehicle that emits hazardous
(5) Open flames shall not be used for sparks or flames from the exhaust sys-
checking electrolyte level in storage tem shall immediately be removed
batteries or gasoline level in fuel from service, and not returned to serv-
tanks. ice until the cause for the emission of
(q) Maintenance of industrial trucks. such sparks and flames has been elimi-
(1) Any power-operated industrial nated.
truck not in safe operating condition (9) When the temperature of any part
shall be removed from service. All re- of any truck is found to be in excess of
pairs shall be made by authorized per- its normal operating temperature, thus
sonnel. creating a hazardous condition, the ve-
(2) No repairs shall be made in Class hicle shall be removed from service and
I, II, and III locations. not returned to service until the cause
(3) Those repairs to the fuel and igni- for such overheating has been elimi-
tion systems of industrial trucks which nated.
involve fire hazards shall be conducted (10) Industrial trucks shall be kept in
only in locations designated for such a clean condition, free of lint, excess
repairs. oil, and grease. Noncombustible agents
(4) Trucks in need of repairs to the should be used for cleaning trucks. Low
electrical system shall have the bat- flash point (below 100 F.) solvents
tery disconnected prior to such repairs. shall not be used. High flash point (at
(5) All parts of any such industrial or above 100 F.) solvents may be used.
truck requiring replacement shall be Precautions regarding toxicity, ven-
replaced only by parts equivalent as to tilation, and fire hazard shall be con-
safety with those used in the original sonant with the agent or solvent used.
design. (11) [Reserved]
552
(12) Industrial trucks originally ap- Track is the distance between the wheels
proved for the use of gasoline for fuel on the same axle of the truck.
may be converted to liquefied petro- Wheelbase is the distance between the cen-
terline of the vehicles front and rear wheels.
leum gas fuel provided the complete
A2. General.
conversion results in a truck which A2.1. Determining the stability of a pow-
embodies the features specified for LP ered industrial truck is simple once a few
or LPS designated trucks. Such con- basic principles are understood. There are
version equipment shall be approved. many factors that contribute to a vehicles
The description of the component parts stability: the vehicles wheelbase, track, and
of this conversion system and the rec- height; the loads weight distribution; and
ommended method of installation on the vehicles counterweight location (if the
specific trucks are contained in the vehicle is so equipped).
A2.2. The stability triangle, used in
Listed by Report. most stability discussions, demonstrates sta-
bility simply.
APPENDIX A TO 1910.178STABILITY OF POW- A3. Basic Principles.
ERED INDUSTRIAL TRUCKS (NON-MANDATORY A3.1. Whether an object is stable depends
APPENDIX TO PARAGRAPH (L) OF THIS SEC- on the objects moment at one end of a sys-
TION) tem being greater than, equal to, or smaller
A1. Definitions. than the objects moment at the systems
The following definitions help to explain other end. This principle can be seen in the
the principle of stability: way a see-saw or teeter-totter works: that is,
Center of gravity is the point on an object if the product of the load and distance from
at which all of the objects weight is con- the fulcrum (moment) is equal to the mo-
centrated. For symmetrical loads, the center ment at the devices other end, the device is
of gravity is at the middle of the load. balanced and it will not move. However, if
Counterweight is the weight that is built there is a greater moment at one end of the
into the trucks basic structure and is used device, the device will try to move downward
to offset the loads weight and to maximize at the end with the greater moment.
the vehicles resistance to tipping over. A3.2. The longitudinal stability of a
Fulcrum is the trucks axis of rotation counterbalanced powered industrial truck
when it tips over. depends on the vehicles moment and the
Grade is the slope of a surface, which is loads moment. In other words, if the
usually measured as the number of feet of mathematic product of the load moment (the
rise or fall over a hundred foot horizontal distance from the front wheels, the approxi-
distance (the slope is expressed as a percent). mate point at which the vehicle would tip
Lateral stability is a trucks resistance to forward) to the loads center of gravity times
overturning sideways. the loads weight is less than the vehicles
Line of action is an imaginary vertical line moment, the system is balanced and will not
through an objects center of gravity. tip forward. However, if the loads moment is
Load center is the horizontal distance from greater than the vehicles moment, the
the loads edge (or the forks or other attach- greater load-moment will force the truck to
ments vertical face) to the line of action tip forward.
through the loads center of gravity. A4. The Stability Triangle.
Longitudinal stability is the trucks resist- A4.1. Almost all counterbalanced powered
ance to overturning forward or rearward. industrial trucks have a three-point suspen-
Moment is the product of the objects sion system, that is, the vehicle is supported
weight times the distance from a fixed point at three points. This is true even if the vehi-
(usually the fulcrum). In the case of a pow- cle has four wheels. The trucks steer axle is
ered industrial truck, the distance is meas- attached to the truck by a pivot pin in the
ured from the point at which the truck will axles center. When the points are connected
tip over to the objects line of action. The with imaginary lines, this three-point sup-
distance is always measured perpendicular to port forms a triangle called the stability tri-
the line of action. angle. Figure 1 depicts the stability triangle.
553
A4.2. When the vehicles line of action, or tion or the vehicle/load combination falls
load center, falls within the stability tri- outside the stability triangle, the vehicle is
angle, the vehicle is stable and will not tip unstable and may tip over. (See Figure 2.)
over. However, when the vehicles line of ac-
554
ER01DE98.002</GPH>
A5. Longitudinal Stability. mally rates the truck at a maximum load at

A5.1. The axis of rotation when a truck a given distance from the front face of the
tips forward is the front wheels points of forks. The specified distance from the front
contact with the pavement. When a powered face of the forks to the line of action of the
industrial truck tips forward, the truck will load is commonly called the load center. Be-
rotate about this line. When a truck is sta- cause larger trucks normally handle loads
ble, the vehicle-moment must exceed the that are physically larger, these vehicles
load-moment. As long as the vehicle-moment have greater load centers. Trucks with a ca-
is equal to or exceeds the load-moment, the pacity of 30,000 pounds or less are normally
vehicle will not tip over. On the other hand, rated at a given load weight at a 24-inch load
if the load moment slightly exceeds the vehi- center. Trucks with a capacity greater than
cle-moment, the truck will begin to tip for- 30,000 pounds are normally rated at a given
ward, thereby causing the rear to lose con- load weight at a 36- or 48-inch load center.
tact with the floor or ground and resulting in To safely operate the vehicle, the operator
loss of steering control. If the load-moment should always check the data plate to deter-
greatly exceeds the vehicle moment, the mine the maximum allowable weight at the
truck will tip forward. rated load center.
A5.2. To determine the maximum safe A5.3. Although the true load-moment dis-
load-moment, the truck manufacturer nor- tance is measured from the front wheels, this
555
ER01DE98.003</GPH>
distance is greater than the distance from precise rules can be formulated to cover all
the front face of the forks. Calculating the of these eventualities.
maximum allowable load-moment using the [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40
load-center distance always provides a lower FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 43 FR 49749, Oct. 24,
load-moment than the truck was designed to 1978; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10, 1984; 53 FR 12122,
handle. When handling unusual loads, such Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug 6, 1990; 61 FR
as those that are larger than 48 inches long 9239, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 66270, Dec. 1, 1998]
(the center of gravity is greater than 24
inches) or that have an offset center of grav- 1910.179 Overhead and gantry
ity, etc., a maximum allowable load-moment cranes.
should be calculated and used to determine (a) Definitions applicable to this sec-
whether a load can be safely handled. For ex- tion. (1) A crane is a machine for lifting
ample, if an operator is operating a 3000
and lowering a load and moving it hori-
pound capacity truck (with a 24-inch load
zontally, with the hoisting mechanism
center), the maximum allowable load-mo-
ment is 72,000 inch-pounds (3,000 times 24). If
an integral part of the machine. Cranes
a load is 60 inches long (30-inch load center), whether fixed or mobile are driven
then the maximum that this load can weigh manually or by power.
is 2,400 pounds (72,000 divided by 30). (2) An automatic crane is a crane
A6. Lateral Stability. which when activated operates through
A6.1. The vehicles lateral stability is de- a preset cycle or cycles.
termined by the line of actions position (a (3) A cab-operated crane is a crane
vertical line that passes through the com- controlled by an operator in a cab lo-
bined vehicles and loads center of gravity) cated on the bridge or trolley.
relative to the stability triangle. When the (4) Cantilever gantry crane means a
vehicle is not loaded, the trucks center of gantry or semigantry crane in which
gravity location is the only factor to be con- the bridge girders or trusses extend
sidered in determining the trucks stability. transversely beyond the crane runway
As long as the line of action of the combined on one or both sides.
vehicles and loads center of gravity falls (5) Floor-operated crane means a crane
within the stability triangle, the truck is which is pendant or nonconductive
stable and will not tip over. However, if the rope controlled by an operator on the
line of action falls outside the stability tri-
floor or an independent platform.
angle, the truck is not stable and may tip
over. Refer to Figure 2.
(6) Gantry crane means a crane simi-
A6.2. Factors that affect the vehicles lat-
lar to an overhead crane except that
eral stability include the loads placement the bridge for carrying the trolley or
on the truck, the height of the load above trolleys is rigidly supported on two or
the surface on which the vehicle is oper- more legs running on fixed rails or
ating, and the vehicles degree of lean. other runway.
A7. Dynamic Stability. (7) Hot metal handling crane means an
A7.1. Up to this point, the stability of a overhead crane used for transporting or
powered industrial truck has been discussed pouring molten material.
without considering the dynamic forces that (8) Overhead crane means a crane
result when the vehicle and load are put into with a movable bridge carrying a mov-
motion. The weights transfer and the result- able or fixed hoisting mechanism and
ant shift in the center of gravity due to the traveling on an overhead fixed runway
dynamic forces created when the machine is structure.
moving, braking, cornering, lifting, tilting, (9) Power-operated crane means a
and lowering loads, etc., are important sta- crane whose mechanism is driven by
bility considerations.
electric, air, hydraulic, or internal
A7.2. When determining whether a load
combustion means.
can be safely handled, the operator should
exercise extra caution when handling loads
(10) A pulpit-operated crane is a crane
that cause the vehicle to approach its max- operated from a fixed operator station
imum design characteristics. For example, if not attached to the crane.
an operator must handle a maximum load, (11) A remote-operated crane is a crane
the load should be carried at the lowest posi- controlled by an operator not in a pul-
tion possible, the truck should be acceler- pit or in the cab attached to the crane,
ated slowly and evenly, and the forks should by any method other than pendant or
be tilted forward cautiously. However, no rope control.
556
(12) A semigantry crane is a gantry (27) Conductors, bridge are the elec-
crane with one end of the bridge rigidly trical conductors located along the
supported on one or more legs that run bridge structure of a crane to provide
on a fixed rail or runway, the other end power to the trolley.
of the bridge being supported by a (28) Conductors, runway (main) are
truck running on an elevated rail or the electrical conductors located along
runway. a crane runway to provide power to the
(13) Storage bridge crane means a gan- crane.
try type crane of long span usually (29) The control braking means is a
used for bulk storage of material; the method of controlling crane motor
bridge girders or trusses are rigidly or speed when in an overhauling condi-
nonrigidly supported on one or more tion.
legs. It may have one or more fixed or (30) Countertorque means a method of
hinged cantilever ends. control by which the power to the
(14) Wall crane means a crane having motor is reversed to develop torque in
a jib with or without trolley and sup- the opposite direction.
ported from a side wall or line of col- (31) Dynamic means a method of con-
umns of a building. It is a traveling trolling crane motor speeds when in
type and operates on a runway at- the overhauling condition to provide a
tached to the side wall or columns. retarding force.
(15) Appointed means assigned spe- (32) Regenerative means a form of dy-
cific responsibilities by the employer namic braking in which the electrical
or the employers representative. energy generated is fed back into the
(16) ANSI means the American Na- power system.
tional Standards Institute. (33) Mechanical means a method of
(17) An auxiliary hoist is a supple- control by friction.
mental hoisting unit of lighter capac- (34) Controller, spring return means a
ity and usually higher speed than pro- controller which when released will re-
vided for the main hoist. turn automatically to a neutral posi-
(18) A brake is a device used for re- tion.
tarding or stopping motion by friction (35) Designated means selected or as-
or power means. signed by the employer or the employ-
(19) A drag brake is a brake which ers representative as being qualified to
provides retarding force without exter- perform specific duties.
nal control. (36) A drift point means a point on a
(20) A holding brake is a brake that travel motion controller which releases
automatically prevents motion when the brake while the motor is not ener-
power is off. gized. This allows for coasting before
(21) Bridge means that part of a crane the brake is set.
consisting of girders, trucks, end ties, (37) The drum is the cylindrical mem-
footwalks, and drive mechanism which ber around which the ropes are wound
carries the trolley or trolleys. for raising or lowering the load.
(22) Bridge travel means the crane (38) An equalizer is a device which
movement in a direction parallel to the compensates for unequal length or
crane runway. stretch of a rope.
(23) A bumper (buffer) is an energy ab- (39) Exposed means capable of being
sorbing device for reducing impact contacted inadvertently. Applied to
when a moving crane or trolley reaches hazardous objects not adequately
the end of its permitted travel; or when guarded or isolated.
two moving cranes or trolleys come in (40) Fail-safe means a provision de-
contact. signed to automatically stop or safely
(24) The cab is the operators com- control any motion in which a mal-
partment on a crane. function occurs.
(25) Clearance means the distance (41) Footwalk means the walkway
from any part of the crane to a point of with handrail, attached to the bridge
the nearest obstruction. or trolley for access purposes.
(26) Collectors current are contacting (42) A hoist is an apparatus which
devices for collecting current from run- may be a part of a crane, exerting a
way or bridge conductors. force for lifting or lowering.
557
(43) Hoist chain means the load bear- (60) A limit switch is a switch which is
ing chain in a hoist. operated by some part or motion of a
NOTE: Chain properties do not conform to power-driven machine or equipment to
those shown in ANSI B30.91971, Safety Code alter the electric circuit associated
for Slings. with the machine or equipment.
(44) Hoist motion means that motion (61) A main switch is a switch control-
of a crane which raises and lowers a ling the entire power supply to the
load. crane.
(45) Load means the total super- (62) A master switch is a switch which
imposed weight on the load block or dominates the operation of contactors,
hook. relays, or other remotely operated de-
(46) The load block is the assembly of vices.
hook or shackle, swivel, bearing, (63) The trolley is the unit which trav-
sheaves, pins, and frame suspended by els on the bridge rails and carries the
the hoisting rope. hoisting mechanism.
(47) Magnet means an electro- (64) Trolley travel means the trolley
magnetic device carried on a crane
movement at right angles to the crane
hook to pick up loads magnetically.
runway.
(48) Main hoist means the hoist mech-
(65) Truck means the unit consisting
anism provided for lifting the max-
of a frame, wheels, bearings, and axles
imum rated load.
which supports the bridge girders or
(49) A man trolley is a trolley having
trolleys.
an operators cab attached thereto.
(50) Rated load means the maximum (b) General requirements(1) Applica-
load for which a crane or individual tion. This section applies to overhead
hoist is designed and built by the man- and gantry cranes, including
ufacturer and shown on the equipment semigantry, cantilever gantry, wall
nameplate(s). cranes, storage bridge cranes, and oth-
(51) Rope refers to wire rope, unless ers having the same fundamental char-
otherwise specified. acteristics. These cranes are grouped
(52) Running sheave means a sheave because they all have trolleys and
which rotates as the load block is similar travel characteristics.
raised or lowered. (2) New and existing equipment. All
(53) Runway means an assembly of new overhead and gantry cranes con-
rails, beams, girders, brackets, and structed and installed on or after Au-
framework on which the crane or trol- gust 31, 1971, shall meet the design
ley travels. specifications of the American Na-
(54) Side pull means that portion of tional Standard Safety Code for Over-
the hoist pull acting horizontally when head and Gantry Cranes, ANSI B30.2.0
the hoist lines are not operated 1967, which is incorporated by reference
vertically. as specified in 1910.6.
(55) Span means the horizontal dis- (3) Modifications. Cranes may be
tance center to center of runway rails. modified and rerated provided such
(56) Standby crane means a crane modifications and the supporting
which is not in regular service but structure are checked thoroughly for
which is used occasionally or intermit- the new rated load by a qualified engi-
tently as required. neer or the equipment manufacturer.
(57) A stop is a device to limit travel The crane shall be tested in accordance
of a trolley or crane bridge. This device with paragraph (k)(2) of this section.
normally is attached to a fixed struc- New rated load shall be displayed in ac-
ture and normally does not have en- cordance with subparagraph (5) of this
ergy absorbing ability. paragraph.
(58) A switch is a device for making, (4) Wind indicators and rail clamps.
breaking, or for changing the connec- Outdoor storage bridges shall be pro-
tions in an electric circuit. vided with automatic rail clamps. A
(59) An emergency stop switch is a wind-indicating device shall be pro-
manually or automatically operated vided which will give a visible or audi-
electric switch to cut off electric power ble alarm to the bridge operator at a
independently of the regular operating predetermined wind velocity. If the
controls. clamps act on the rail heads, any beads
558
or weld flash on the rail heads shall be (3) Fire extinguisher. Carbon tetra-
ground off. chloride extinguishers shall not be
(5) Rated load marking. The rated load used.
of the crane shall be plainly marked on (4) Lighting. Light in the cab shall be
each side of the crane, and if the crane sufficient to enable the operator to see
has more than one hoisting unit, each clearly enough to perform his work.
hoist shall have its rated load marked (d) Footwalks and ladders(1) Location
on it or its load block and this marking of footwalks. (i) If sufficient headroom
shall be clearly legible from the ground is available on cab-operated cranes, a
or floor. footwalk shall be provided on the drive
(6) Clearance from obstruction. (i) Min- side along the entire length of the
imum clearance of 3 inches overhead bridge of all cranes having the trolley
and 2 inches laterally shall be provided running on the top of the girders.
and maintained between crane and ob- (ii) Where footwalks are located in no
structions in conformity with Crane case shall less than 48 inches of head-
Manufacturers Association of America, room be provided.
Inc., Specification No. 61, which is in- (2) Construction of footwalks. (i)
corporated by reference as specified in Footwalks shall be of rigid construc-
1910.6 (formerly the Electric Overhead tion and designed to sustain a distrib-
Crane Institute, Inc). uted load of at least 50 pounds per
(ii) Where passageways or walkways square foot.
are provided obstructions shall not be (ii) Footwalks shall have a walking
placed so that safety of personnel will surface of antislip type.
be jeopardized by movements of the NOTE: Wood will meet this requirement.
crane.
(iii) [Reserved]
(7) Clearance between parallel cranes. If
(iv) The inner edge shall extend at
the runways of two cranes are parallel,
least to the line of the outside edge of
and there are no intervening walls or
the lower cover plate or flange of the
structure, there shall be adequate
girder.
clearance provided and maintained be-
tween the two bridges. (3) Toeboards and handrails for
(8) Designated personnelOnly des- footwalks. Toeboards and handrails
ignated personnel shall be permitted to shall be in compliance with section
operate a crane covered by this section. 1910.23 of this part.
(c) Cabs(1) Cab location. (i) The gen- (4) Ladders and stairways. (i) Gantry
eral arrangement of the cab and the lo- cranes shall be provided with ladders or
cation of control and protective equip- stairways extending from the ground
ment shall be such that all operating to the footwalk or cab platform.
handles are within convenient reach of (ii) Stairways shall be equipped with
the operator when facing the area to be rigid and substantial metal handrails.
served by the load hook, or while fac- Walking surfaces shall be of an antislip
ing the direction of travel of the cab. type.
The arrangement shall allow the oper- (iii) Ladders shall be permanently
ator a full view of the load hook in all and securely fastened in place and shall
positions. be constructed in compliance with
(ii) The cab shall be located to afford 1910.27.
a minimum of 3 inches clearance from (e) Stops, bumpers, rail sweeps, and
all fixed structures within its area of guards(1) Trolley stops. (i) Stops shall
possible movement. be provided at the limits of travel of
(2) Access to crane. Access to the cab the trolley.
and/or bridge walkway shall be by a (ii) Stops shall be fastened to resist
conveniently placed fixed ladder, forces applied when contacted.
stairs, or platform requiring no step (iii) A stop engaging the tread of the
over any gap exceeding 12 inches. Fixed wheel shall be of a height at least equal
ladders shall be in conformance with to the radius of the wheel.
the American National Standard Safe- (2) Bridge bumpers(i) A crane shall
ty Code for Fixed Ladders, ANSI A14.3 be provided with bumpers or other
1956, which is incorporated by reference automatic means providing equivalent
as specified in 1910.6. effect, unless the crane travels at a
559
slow rate of speed and has a faster de- tors and hoisting ropes if they could
celeration rate due to the use of sleeve come into contact.
bearings, or is not operated near the (6) Guards for moving parts. (i) Ex-
ends of bridge and trolley travel, or is posed moving parts such as gears, set
restricted to a limited distance by the screws, projecting keys, chains, chain
nature of the crane operation and there sprockets, and reciprocating compo-
is no hazard of striking any object in nents which might constitute a hazard
this limited distance, or is used in under normal operating conditions
similar operating conditions. The shall be guarded.
bumpers shall be capable of stopping (ii) Guards shall be securely fastened.
the crane (not including the lifted (iii) Each guard shall be capable of
load) at an average rate of deceleration supporting without permanent distor-
not to exceed 3 ft/s/s when traveling in tion the weight of a 200pound person
either direction at 20 percent of the unless the guard is located where it is
rated load speed. impossible for a person to step on it.
(a) The bumpers shall have sufficient (f) Brakes(1) Brakes for hoists. (i)
energy absorbing capacity to stop the Each independent hoisting unit of a
crane when traveling at a speed of at crane shall be equipped with at least
least 40 percent of rated load speed. one self-setting brake, hereafter re-
(b) The bumper shall be so mounted ferred to as a holding brake, applied di-
that there is no direct shear on bolts. rectly to the motor shaft or some part
(ii) Bumpers shall be so designed and of the gear train.
installed as to minimize parts falling (ii) Each independent hoisting unit of
from the crane in case of breakage. a crane, except worm-geared hoists, the
(3) Trolley bumpers(i) A trolley shall angle of whose worm is such as to pre-
be provided with bumpers or other vent the load from accelerating in the
automatic means of equivalent effect, lowering direction shall, in addition to
unless the trolley travels at a slow rate a holding brake, be equipped with con-
of speed, or is not operated near the trol braking means to prevent over-
ends of bridge and trolley travel, or is speeding.
restricted to a limited distance of the (2) Holding brakes. (i) Holding brakes
runway and there is no hazard of strik- for hoist motors shall have not less
ing any object in this limited distance, than the following percentage of the
or is used in similar operating condi- full load hoisting torque at the point
tions. The bumpers shall be capable of where the brake is applied.
stopping the trolley (not including the (a) 125 percent when used with a con-
lifted load) at an average rate of decel- trol braking means other than mechan-
eration not to exceed 4.7 ft/s/s when ical.
traveling in either direction at one- (b) 100 percent when used in conjunc-
third of the rated load speed. tion with a mechanical control braking
(ii) When more than one trolley is op- means.
erated on the same bridge, each shall (c) 100 percent each if two holding
be equipped with bumpers or equiva- brakes are provided.
lent on their adjacent ends. (ii) Holding brakes on hoists shall
(iii) Bumpers or equivalent shall be have ample thermal capacity for the
designed and installed to minimize frequency of operation required by the
parts falling from the trolley in case of service.
age. (iii) Holding brakes on hoists shall be
(4) Rail sweeps. Bridge trucks shall be applied automatically when power is
equipped with sweeps which extend removed.
below the top of the rail and project in (iv) Where necessary holding brakes
front of the truck wheels. shall be provided with adjustment
(5) Guards for hoisting ropes. (i) If means to compensate for wear.
hoisting ropes run near enough to (v) The wearing surface of all hold-
other parts to make fouling or chafing ing-brake drums or discs shall be
possible, guards shall be installed to smooth.
prevent this condition. (vi) Each independent hoisting unit
(ii) A guard shall be provided to pre- of a crane handling hot metal and hav-
vent contact between bridge conduc- ing power control braking means shall
560
be equipped with at least two holding (6) Application of bridge brakes. (i) On
brakes. cab-operated cranes with cab on bridge,
(3) Control braking means. (i) A power a bridge brake is required as specified
control braking means such as regen- under paragraph (f)(4) of this section.
erative, dynamic or countertorque (ii) On cab-operated cranes with cab
braking, or a mechanically controlled on trolley, a bridge brake of the hold-
braking means shall be capable of ing type shall be required.
maintaining safe lowering speeds of (iii) On all floor, remote and pulpit-
rated loads. operated crane bridge drives, a brake of
(ii) The control braking means shall noncoasting mechanical drive shall be
have ample thermal capacity for the provided.
frequency of operation required by (g) Electric equipment(1) General. (i)
service. Wiring and equipment shall comply
(4) Brakes for trolleys and bridges. (i) with subpart S of this part.
Foot-operated brakes shall not require (ii) The control circuit voltage shall
an applied force of more than 70 pounds not exceed 600 volts for a.c. or d.c. cur-
to develop manufacturers rated brake rent.
torque. (iii) The voltage at pendant push-but-
(ii) Brakes may be applied by me- tons shall not exceed 150 volts for a.c.
chanical, electrical, pneumatic, hy- and 300 volts for d.c.
draulic, or gravity means. (iv) Where multiple conductor cable
(iii) Where necessary brakes shall be is used with a suspended pushbutton
provided with adjustment means to station, the station must be supported
compensate for wear. in some satisfactory manner that will
protect the electrical conductors
(iv) The wearing surface of all brake-
against strain.
drums or discs shall be smooth.
(v) Pendant control boxes shall be
(v) All foot-brake pedals shall be con-
constructed to prevent electrical shock
structed so that the operators foot
and shall be clearly marked for identi-
will not easily slip off the pedal.
fication of functions.
(vi) Foot-operated brakes shall be (2) Equipment. (i) Electrical equip-
equipped with automatic means for ment shall be so located or enclosed
positive release when pressure is re- that live parts will not be exposed to
leased from the pedal. accidental contact under normal oper-
(vii) Brakes for stopping the motion ating conditions.
of the trolley or bridge shall be of suffi- (ii) Electric equipment shall be pro-
cient size to stop the trolley or bridge tected from dirt, grease, oil, and mois-
within a distance in feet equal to 10 ture.
percent of full load speed in feet per (iii) Guards for live parts shall be
minute when traveling at full speed substantial and so located that they
with full load. cannot be accidently deformed so as to
(viii) If holding brakes are provided make contact with the live parts.
on the bridge or trolleys, they shall not (3) Controllers. (i) Cranes not equipped
prohibit the use of a drift point in the with spring-return controllers or mo-
control circuit. mentary contact pushbuttons shall be
(ix) Brakes on trolleys and bridges provided with a device which will dis-
shall have ample thermal capacity for connect all motors from the line on
the frequency of operation required by failure of power and will not permit
the service to prevent impairment of any motor to be restarted until the
functions from overheating. controller handle is brought to the
(5) Application of trolley brakes. (i) On off position, or a reset switch or but-
cab-operated cranes with cab on trol- ton is operated.
ley, a trolley brake shall be required as (ii) Lever operated controllers shall
specified under paragraph (f)(4) of this be provided with a notch or latch
section. which in the off position prevents
(ii) A drag brake may be applied to the handle from being inadvertently
hold the trolley in a desired position on moved to the on position. An off
the bridge and to eliminate creep with detent or spring return arrangement is
the power off. acceptable.
561
(iii) The controller operating handle in the leads from the runway conduc-
shall be located within convenient tors. This disconnect shall be mounted
reach of the operator. on the bridge or footwalk near the run-
(iv) As far as practicable, the move- way collectors. One of the following
ment of each controller handle shall be types of floor-operated disconnects
in the same general directions as the shall be provided:
resultant movements of the load. (a) Nonconductive rope attached to
(v) The control for the bridge and the main disconnect switch.
trolley travel shall be so located that (b) An undervoltage trip for the main
the operator can readily face the direc- circuit breaker operated by an emer-
tion of travel. gency stop button in the pendant push-
(vi) For floor-operated cranes, the button in the pendant pushbutton sta-
controller or controllers if rope oper- tion.
ated, shall automatically return to the (c) A main line contactor operated by
off position when released by the op- a switch or pushbutton in the pendant
erator. pushbutton station.
(vii) Pushbuttons in pendant stations (iv) The hoisting motion of all elec-
shall return to the off position when tric traveling cranes shall be provided
pressure is released by the crane oper- with an overtravel limit switch in the
ator. hoisting direction.
(viii) Automatic cranes shall be so
(v) All cranes using a lifting magnet
designed that all motions shall fail-
shall have a magnet circuit switch of
safe if any malfunction of operation oc-
the enclosed type with provision for
curs.
locking in the open position. Means for
(ix) Remote-operated cranes shall
discharging the inductive load of the
function so that if the control signal
magnet shall be provided.
for any crane motion becomes ineffec-
(6) Runway conductors. Conductors of
tive the crane motion shall stop.
the open type mounted on the crane
(4) Resistors. (i) Enclosures for resis-
runway beams or overhead shall be so
tors shall have openings to provide ade-
located or so guarded that persons en-
quate ventilation, and shall be in-
tering or leaving the cab or crane
stalled to prevent the accumulation of
footwalk normally could not come into
combustible matter too near to hot
contact with them.
parts.
(ii) Resistor units shall be supported (7) Extension lamps. If a service recep-
so as to be as free as possible from vi- tacle is provided in the cab or on the
bration. bridge of cab-operated cranes, it shall
(iii) Provision shall be made to pre- be a grounded three-prong type perma-
vent broken parts or molten metal fall- nent receptacle, not exceeding 300
ing upon the operator or from the volts.
crane. (h) Hoisting equipment(1) Sheaves. (i)
(5) Switches. (i) The power supply to Sheave grooves shall be smooth and
the runway conductors shall be con- free from surface defects which could
trolled by a switch or circuit breaker cause rope damage.
located on a fixed structure, accessible (ii) Sheaves carrying ropes which can
from the floor, and arranged to be be momentarily unloaded shall be pro-
locked in the open position. vided with close-fitting guards or other
(ii) On cab-operated cranes a switch suitable devices to guide the rope back
or circuit breaker of the enclosed type, into the groove when the load is ap-
with provision for locking in the open plied again.
position, shall be provided in the leads (iii) The sheaves in the bottom block
from the runway conductors. A means shall be equipped with close-fitting
of opening this switch or circuit break- guards that will prevent ropes from be-
er shall be located within easy reach of coming fouled when the block is lying
the operator. on the ground with ropes loose.
(iii) On floor-operated cranes, a (iv) Pockets and flanges of sheaves
switch or circuit breaker of the en- used with hoist chains shall be of such
closed type, with provision for locking dimensions that the chain does not
in the open position, shall be provided catch or bind during operation.
562
(v) All running sheaves shall be tive warning signal shall be provided
equipped with means for lubrication. for each crane equipped with a power
Permanently lubricated, sealed and/or traveling mechanism.
shielded bearings meet this require- (j) Inspection(1) Inspection classifica-
ment. tion. (i) Initial inspection. Prior to ini-
(2) Ropes. (i) In using hoisting ropes, tial use all new and altered cranes
the crane manufacturers recommenda- shall be inspected to insure compliance
tion shall be followed. The rated load with the provisions of this section.
divided by the number of parts of rope (ii) Inspection procedure for cranes in
shall not exceed 20 percent of the nomi- regular service is divided into two gen-
nal breaking strength of the rope. eral classifications based upon the in-
(ii) Socketing shall be done in the tervals at which inspection should be
manner specified by the manufacturer performed. The intervals in turn are
of the assembly. dependent upon the nature of the crit-
(iii) Rope shall be secured to the ical components of the crane and the
drum as follows: degree of their exposure to wear, dete-
(a) No less than two wraps of rope rioration, or malfunction. The two gen-
shall remain on the drum when the eral classifications are herein des-
hook is in its extreme low position. ignated as frequent and periodic
(b) Rope end shall be anchored by a with respective intervals between in-
clamp securely attached to the drum, spections as defined below:
or by a socket arrangement approved (a) Frequent inspectionDaily to
by the crane or rope manufacturer. monthly intervals.
(iv) Eye splices. [Reserved] (b) Periodic inspection1 to 12
(v) Rope clips attached with U-bolts month intervals.
shall have the U-bolts on the dead or (2) Frequent inspection. The following
short end of the rope. Spacing and items shall be inspected for defects at
number of all types of clips shall be in intervals as defined in paragraph
accordance with the clip manufactur- (j)(1)(ii) of this section or as specifi-
ers recommendation. Clips shall be cally indicated, including observation
drop-forged steel in all sizes manufac- during operation for any defects which
tured commercially. When a newly in- might appear between regular inspec-
stalled rope has been in operation for tions. All deficiencies such as listed
an hour, all nuts on the clip bolts shall shall be carefully examined and deter-
be retightened. mination made as to whether they con-
(vi) Swaged or compressed fittings stitute a safety hazard:
shall be applied as recommended by the (i) All functional operating mecha-
rope or crane manufacturer. nisms for maladjustment interfering
(vii) Wherever exposed to tempera- with proper operation. Daily.
tures, at which fiber cores would be (ii) Deterioration or leakage in lines,
damaged, rope having an independent tanks, valves, drain pumps, and other
wirerope or wire-strand core, or other parts of air or hydraulic systems.
temperature-damage resistant core Daily.
shall be used. (iii) Hooks with deformation or
(viii) Replacement rope shall be the cracks. Visual inspection daily; month-
same size, grade, and construction as ly inspection with a certification
the original rope furnished by the record which includes the date of in-
crane manufacturer, unless otherwise spection, the signature of the person
recommended by a wire rope manufac- who performed the inspection and the
turer due to actual working condition serial number, or other identifier, of
requirements. the hook inspected. For hooks with
(3) Equalizers. If a load is supported cracks or having more than 15 percent
by more than one part of rope, the ten- in excess of normal throat opening or
sion in the parts shall be equalized. more than 10 twist from the plane of
(4) Hooks. Hooks shall meet the man- the unbent hook refer to paragraph
ufacturers recommendations and shall (l)(3)(iii)(a) of this section.
not be overloaded. (iv) Hoist chains, including end con-
(i) Warning device. Except for floor- nections, for excessive wear, twist, dis-
operated cranes a gong or other effec- torted links interfering with proper
563
function, or stretch beyond manufac- graph (m)(2) of this section before plac-
turers recommendations. Visual ining in service.
spection daily; monthly inspection (ii) A crane which has been idle for a
with a certification record which in- period of over 6 months shall be given
cludes the date of inspection, the sig- a complete inspection conforming with
nature of the person who performed the requirements of paragraphs (j) (2) and
inspection and an identifier of the (3) of this section and paragraph (m)(2)
chain which was inspected. of this section before placing in serv-
(v) [Reserved] ice.
(vi) All functional operating mecha- (iii) Standby cranes shall be in-
nisms for excessive wear of compo- spected at least semi-annually in ac-
nents. cordance with requirements of para-
(vii) Rope reeving for noncompliance graph (j)(2) of this section and para-
with manufacturers recommendations. graph (m)(2) of this section.
(3) Periodic inspection. Complete in- (k) Testing(1) Operational tests. (i)
spections of the crane shall be per- Prior to initial use all new and altered
formed at intervals as generally de- cranes shall be tested to insure compli-
fined in paragraph (j)(1)(ii)(b) of this ance with this section including the
section, depending upon its activity, following functions:
severity of service, and environment, (a) Hoisting and lowering.
or as specifically indicated below. (b) Trolley travel.
These inspections shall include the re- (c) Bridge travel.
quirements of paragraph (j)(2) of this (d) Limit switches, locking and safe-
section and in addition, the following ty devices.
items. Any deficiencies such as listed (ii) The trip setting of hoist limit
shall be carefully examined and deter- switches shall be determined by tests
mination made as to whether they con- with an empty hook traveling in in-
stitute a safety hazard: creasing speeds up to the maximum
(i) Deformed, cracked, or corroded speed. The actuating mechanism of the
members. limit switch shall be located so that it
(ii) Loose bolts or rivets. will trip the switch, under all condi-
tions, in sufficient time to prevent con-
(iii) Cracked or worn sheaves and
tact of the hook or hook block with
drums.
any part of the trolley.
(iv) Worn, cracked or distorted parts
(2) Rated load test. Test loads shall
such as pins, bearings, shafts, gears,
not be more than 125 percent of the
rollers, locking and clamping devices.
rated load unless otherwise rec-
(v) Excessive wear on brake system ommended by the manufacturer. The
parts, linings, pawls, and ratchets. test reports shall be placed on file
(vi) Load, wind, and other indicators where readily available to appointed
over their full range, for any signifi- personnel.
cant inaccuracies. (l) Maintenance(1) Preventive mainte-
(vii) Gasoline, diesel, electric, or nance. A preventive maintenance pro-
other powerplants for improper per- gram based on the crane manufactur-
formance or noncompliance with appli- ers recommendations shall be estab-
cable safety requirements. lished.
(viii) Excessive wear of chain drive (2) Maintenance procedure. (i) Before
sprockets and excessive chain stretch. adjustments and repairs are started on
(ix) [Reserved] a crane the following precautions shall
(x) Electrical apparatus, for signs of be taken:
pitting or any deterioration of con- (a) The crane to be repaired shall be
troller contactors, limit switches and run to a location where it will cause
pushbutton stations. the least interference with other
(4) Cranes not in regular use. (i) A cranes and operations in the area.
crane which has been idle for a period (b) All controllers shall be at the off
of 1 month or more, but less than 6 position.
months, shall be given an inspection (c) The main or emergency switch
conforming with requirements of para- shall be open and locked in the open
graph (j)(2) of this section and para- position.
564
(d) Warning or out of order signs inspection and an identifier for the
shall be placed on the crane, also on ropes which were inspected shall be
the floor beneath or on the hook where kept on file where readily available to
visible from the floor. appointed personnel. Any deteriora-
(e) Where other cranes are in oper- tion, resulting in appreciable loss of
ation on the same runway, rail stops or original strength, shall be carefully ob-
other suitable means shall be provided served and determination made as to
to prevent interference with the idle whether further use of the rope would
crane. constitute a safety hazard. Some of the
(ii) After adjustments and repairs conditions that could result in an ap-
have been made the crane shall not be preciable loss of strength are the fol-
operated until all guards have been re- lowing:
installed, safety devices reactivated (i) Reduction of rope diameter below
and maintenance equipment removed. nominal diameter due to loss of core
(3) Adjustments and repairs. (i) Any support, internal or external corrosion,
unsafe conditions disclosed by the in- or wear of outside wires.
spection requirements of paragraph (j) (ii) A number of broken outside wires
of this section shall be corrected before and the degree of distribution or con-
operation of the crane is resumed. Ad- centration of such broken wires.
justments and repairs shall be done (iii) Worn outside wires.
only by designated personnel. (iv) Corroded or broken wires at end
(ii) Adjustments shall be maintained connections.
to assure correct functioning of compo- (v) Corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or
nents. The following are examples: improperly applied end connections.
(a) All functional operating mecha- (vi) Severe kinking, crushing, cut-
nisms. ting, or unstranding.
(b) Limit switches. (2) Other ropes. All rope which has
(c) Control systems. been idle for a period of a month or
(d) Brakes. more due to shutdown or storage of a
(e) Power plants. crane on which it is installed shall be
(iii) Repairs or replacements shall be given a thorough inspection before it is
provided promptly as needed for safe used. This inspection shall be for all
operation. The following are examples: types of deterioration and shall be per-
(a) Crane hooks showing defects deformed by an appointed person whose
scribed in paragraph (j)(2)(iii) of this approval shall be required for further
section shall be discarded. Repairs by use of the rope. A certification record
welding or reshaping are not generally shall be available for inspection which
recommended. If such repairs are at- includes the date of inspection, the sig-
tempted they shall only be done under nature of the person who performed the
competent supervision and the hook inspection and an identifier for the
shall be tested to the load require- rope which was inspected.
ments of paragraph (k)(2) of this sec- (n) Handling the load(1) Size of load.
tion before further use. The crane shall not be loaded beyond
(b) Load attachment chains and rope its rated load except for test purposes
slings showing defects described in as provided in paragraph (k) of this sec-
paragraph (j)(2) (iv) and (v) of this section.
tion respectively. (2) Attaching the load. (i) The hoist
(c) All critical parts which are chain or hoist rope shall be free from
cracked, broken, bent, or excessively kinks or twists and shall not be
worn. wrapped around the load.
(d) Pendant control stations shall be (ii) The load shall be attached to the
kept clean and function labels kept load block hook by means of slings or
legible. other approved devices.
(m) Rope inspection(1) Running (iii) Care shall be taken to make cer-
ropes. A thorough inspection of all tain that the sling clears all obstacles.
ropes shall be made at least once a (3) Moving the load. (i) The load shall
month and a certification record which be well secured and properly balanced
includes the date of inspection, the sig- in the sling or lifting device before it is
nature of the person who performed the lifted more than a few inches.
565
(ii) Before starting to hoist the fol- ate properly, the appointed person
lowing conditions shall be noted: shall be immediately notified.
(a) Hoist rope shall not be kinked. (ii) The hoist limit switch which con-
(b) Multiple part lines shall not be trols the upper limit of travel of the
twisted around each other. load block shall never be used as an op-
(c) The hook shall be brought over erating control.
the load in such a manner as to prevent (o) Other requirements, general(1)
swinging. Ladders. (i) The employer shall insure
(iii) During hoisting care shall be that hands are free from encumbrances
taken that: while personnel are using ladders.
(a) There is no sudden acceleration or (ii) Articles which are too large to be
deceleration of the moving load. carried in pockets or belts shall be lift-
(b) The load does not contact any ob- ed and lowered by hand line.
structions. (2) Cabs. (i) Necessary clothing and
(iv) Cranes shall not be used for side personal belongings shall be stored in
pulls except when specifically author- such a manner as not to interfere with
ized by a responsible person who has access or operation.
determined that the stability of the (ii) Tools, oil cans, waste, extra fuses,
crane is not thereby endangered and and other necessary articles shall be
that various parts of the crane will not stored in the tool box, and shall not be
be overstressed. permitted to lie loose in or about the
(v) While any employee is on the load cab.
or hook, there shall be no hoisting, (3) Fire extinguishers. The employer
lowering, or traveling. shall insure that operators are familiar
(vi) The employer shall require that with the operation and care of fire ex-
the operator avoid carrying loads over tinguishers provided.
people. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40
(vii) The operator shall test the FR 27400, June 27, 1975; 49 FR 5322, Feb. 10,
brakes each time a load approaching 1984; 51 FR 34560, Sept. 29, 1986; 55 FR 32015,
the rated load is handled. The brakes Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]
shall be tested by raising the load a few
inches and applying the brakes. 1910.180 Crawler locomotive and
(viii) The load shall not be lowered truck cranes.
below the point where less than two (a) Definitions applicable to this sec-
full wraps of rope remain on the hoist- tion. (1) A crawler crane consists of a ro-
ing drum. tating superstructure with power
(ix) When two or more cranes are plant, operating machinery, and boom,
used to lift a load one qualified respon- mounted on a base, equipped with
sible person shall be in charge of the crawler treads for travel. Its function
operation. He shall analyze the oper- is to hoist and swing loads at various
ation and instruct all personnel in- radii.
volved in the proper positioning, rig- (2) A locomotive crane consists of a ro-
ging of the load, and the movements to tating superstructure with power-
be made. plant, operating machinery and boom,
(x) The employer shall insure that mounted on a base or car equipped for
the operator does not leave his position travel on railroad track. It may be self-
at the controls while the load is sus- propelled or propelled by an outside
pended. source. Its function is to hoist and
(xi) When starting the bridge and swing loads at various radii.
when the load or hook approaches near (3) A truck crane consists of a rotat-
or over personnel, the warning signal ing superstructure with powerplant,
shall be sounded. operating machinery and boom, mount-
(4) Hoist limit switch. (i) At the begin- ed on an automotive truck equipped
ning of each operators shift, the upper with a powerplant for travel. Its func-
limit switch of each hoist shall be tried tion is to hoist and swing loads at var-
out under no load. Extreme care shall ious radii.
be exercised; the block shall be (4) A wheel mounted crane (wagon
inched into the limit or run in at crane) consists of a rotating super-
slow speed. If the switch does not oper- structure with powerplant, operating
566
machinery and boom, mounted on a (16) The boom stop is a device used to
base or platform equipped with axles limit the angle of the boom at the
and rubber-tired wheels for travel. The highest position.
base is usually propelled by the engine (17) A brake is a device used for re-
in the superstructure, but it may be tarding or stopping motion by friction
equipped with a separate engine con- or power means.
trolled from the superstructure. Its (18) A cab is a housing which covers
function is to hoist and swing loads at the rotating superstructure machinery
various radii. and/or operators station. On truck-
(5) An accessory is a secondary part or crane trucks a separate cab covers the
assembly of parts which contributes to drivers station.
the overall function and usefulness of a (19) The clutch is a friction, electro-
machine. magnetic, hydraulic, pneumatic, or
(6) Appointed means assigned specific positive mechanical device for engage-
responsibilities by the employer or the ment or disengagement of power.
employers representative. (20) The counterweight is a weight
(7) ANSI means the American Na- used to supplement the weight of the
tional Standards Institute. machine in providing stability for lift-
(8) An angle indicator (boom) is an ac- ing working loads.
cessory which measures the angle of (21) Designated means selected or as-
the boom to the horizontal. signed by the employer or the employ-
(9) The axis of rotation is the vertical ers representative as being qualified to
axis around which the crane super- perform specific duties.
structure rotates.
(22) The drum is the cylindrical mem-
(10) Axle means the shaft or spindle
bers around which ropes are wound for
with which or about which a wheel ro-
raising and lowering the load or boom.
tates. On truck- and wheel-mounted
(23) Dynamic (loading) means loads
cranes it refers to an automotive type
introduced into the machine or its
of axle assembly including housings,
components by forces in motion.
gearing, differential, bearings, and
mounting appurtenances. (24) The gantry (A-frame) is a struc-
(11) Axle (bogie) means two or more tural frame, extending above the super-
automotive-type axles mounted in tan- structure, to which the boom support
dem in a frame so as to divide the load ropes are reeved.
between the axles and permit vertical (25) A jib is an extension attached to
oscillation of the wheels. the boom point to provide added boom
(12) The base (mounting) is the trav- length for lifting specified loads. The
eling base or carrier on which the ro- jib may be in line with the boom or off-
tating superstructure is mounted such set to various angles.
as a car, truck, crawlers, or wheel plat- (26) Load (working) means the exter-
form. nal load, in pounds, applied to the
(13) The boom (crane) is a member crane, including the weight of load-at-
hinged to the front of the rotating su- taching equipment such as load blocks,
perstructure with the outer end sup- shackles, and slings.
ported by ropes leading to a gantry or (27) Load block (upper) means the as-
A-frame and used for supporting the sembly of hook or shackle, swivel,
hoisting tackle. sheaves, pins, and frame suspended
(14) The boom angle is the angle be- from the boom point.
tween the longitudinal centerline of (28) Load block (lower) means the as-
the boom and the horizontal. The boom sembly of hook or shackle, swivel,
longitudinal centerline is a straight sheaves, pins, and frame suspended by
line between the boom foot pin (heel the hoisting ropes.
pin) centerline and boom point sheave (29) A load hoist is a hoist drum and
pin centerline. rope reeving system used for hoisting
(15) The boom hoist is a hoist drum and lowering loads.
and rope reeving system used to raise (30) Load ratings are crane ratings in
and lower the boom. The rope system pounds established by the manufac-
may be all live reeving or a combina- turer in accordance with paragraph (c)
tion of live reeving and pendants. of this section.
567
(31) Outriggers are extendable or fixed load capacity and higher speed than
metal arms, attached to the mounting provided by the main hoist.
base, which rest on supports at the (48) A winch head is a power driven
outer ends. spool for handling of loads by means of
(32) Rail clamp means a tong-like friction between fiber or wire rope and
metal device, mounted on a locomotive spool.
crane car, which can be connected to (b) General requirements(1) Applica-
the track. tion. This section applies to crawler
(33) Reeving means a rope system in cranes, locomotive cranes, wheel
which the rope travels around drums mounted cranes of both truck and self-
and sheaves. propelled wheel type, and any vari-
(34) Rope refers to a wire rope unless ations thereof which retain the same
otherwise specified. fundamental characteristics. This sec-
(35) Side loading means a load applied tion includes only cranes of the above
at an angle to the vertical plane of the types, which are basically powered by
boom. internal combustion engines or electric
(36) A standby crane is a crane which motors and which utilize drums and
is not in regular service but which is ropes. Cranes designed for railway and
used occasionally or intermittently as automobile wreck clearances are ex-
required. cepted. The requirements of this sec-
(37) A standing (guy) rope is a sup- tion are applicable only to machines
porting rope which maintains a con- when used as lifting cranes.
stant distance between the points of (2) New and existing equipment. All
attachment to the two components new crawler, locomotive, and truck
connected by the rope. cranes constructed and utilized on or
(38) Structural competence means the after August 31, 1971, shall meet the de-
ability of the machine and its compo- sign specifications of the American Na-
nents to withstand the stresses im- tional Standard Safety Code for Crawl-
posed by applied loads. er, Locomotive, and Truck Cranes,
(39) Superstructure means the rotating ANSI B30.51968, which is incorporated
upper frame structure of the machine by reference as specified in 1910.6.
and the operating machinery mounted Crawler, locomotive, and truck cranes
thereon. constructed prior to August 31, 1971,
(40) Swing means the rotation of the should be modified to conform to those
superstructure for movement of loads design specifications by February 15,
in a horizontal direction about the axis 1972, unless it can be shown that the
of rotation. crane cannot feasibly or economically
(41) Swing mechanism means the ma- be altered and that the crane substan-
chinery involved in providing rotation tially complies with the requirements
of the superstructure. of this section.
(42) Tackle is an assembly of ropes (3) Designated personnel. Only des-
and sheaves arranged for hoisting and ignated personnel shall be permitted to
pulling. operate a crane covered by this section.
(43) Transit means the moving or (c) Load ratings(1) Load ratings
transporting of a crane from one job- where stability governs lifting perform-
site to another. ance. (i) The margin of stability for de-
(44) Travel means the function of the termination of load ratings, with
machine moving from one location to booms of stipulated lengths at stipu-
another, on a jobsite. lated working radii for the various
(45) The travel mechanism is the ma- types of crane mountings, is estab-
chinery involved in providing travel. lished by taking a percentage of the
(46) Wheelbase means the distance be- loads which will produce a condition of
tween centers of front and rear axles. tipping or balance with the boom in
For a multiple axle assembly the axle the least stable direction, relative to
center for wheelbase measurement is the mounting. The load ratings shall
taken as the midpoint of the assembly. not exceed the following percentages
(47) The whipline (auxiliary hoist) is a for cranes, with the indicated types of
separate hoist rope system of lighter mounting under conditions stipulated
568
in paragraphs (c)(1) (ii) and (iii) of this competent operation. All of these shall
section. be taken into account by the user.
(2) Load rating chart. A substantial
Maximum
load rat- and durable rating chart with clearly
Type of crane mounting ings (per- legible letters and figures shall be pro-
cent of tip-
ping loads) vided with each crane and securely
fixed to the crane cab in a location eas-
Locomotive, without outriggers: ily visible to the operator while seated
Booms 60 feet or less .................................. 1 85
Booms over 60 feet ...................................... 1 85 at his control station.

Locomotive, using outriggers fully extended ....... 80 (d) Inspection classification(1) Initial
Crawler, without outriggers .................................. 75 inspection. Prior to initial use all new
Crawler, using outriggers fully extended ............. 85
Truck and wheel mounted without outriggers or and altered cranes shall be inspected to
using outriggers fully extended ........................ 85 insure compliance with provisions of
1 Unless this results in less than 30,000 pound-feet net sta- this section.
bilizing moment about the rail, which shall be minimum with (2) Regular inspection. Inspection pro-
such booms.
cedure for cranes in regular service is
(ii) The following stipulations shall divided into two general classifications
govern the application of the values in based upon the intervals at which in-
paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section for lo- spection should be performed. The in-
comotive cranes: tervals in turn are dependent upon the
(a) Tipping with or without the use of nature of the critical components of
outriggers occurs when half of the the crane and the degree of their expo-
wheels farthest from the load leave the sure to wear, deterioration, or mal-
rail. function. The two general classifica-
(b) The crane shall be standing on tions are herein designated as fre-
track which is level within 1 percent quent and periodic, with respective
grade. intervals between inspections as de-
(c) Radius of the load is the hori- fined below:
zontal distance from a projection of the (i) Frequent inspection: Daily to
axis of rotation to the rail support sur- monthly intervals.
face, before loading, to the center of (ii) Periodic inspection: 1- to 12-
vertical hoist line or tackle with load month intervals, or as specifically rec-
applied. ommended by the manufacturer.
(d) Tipping loads from which ratings (3) Frequent inspection. Items such as
are determined shall be applied under the following shall be inspected for de-
static conditions only, i.e., without dy- fects at intervals as defined in para-
namic effect of hoisting, lowering, or graph (d)(2)(i) of this section or as spe-
swinging. cifically indicated including observa-
(e) The weight of all auxiliary han- tion during operation for any defects
dling devices such as hoist blocks, which might appear between regular
hooks, and slings shall be considered a inspections. Any deficiencies such as
part of the load rating. listed shall be carefully examined and
(iii) Stipulations governing the appli- determination made as to whether they
cation of the values in paragraph constitute a safety hazard:
(c)(1)(i) of this section for crawler, (i) All control mechanisms for mal-
truck, and wheel-mounted cranes shall adjustment interfering with proper op-
be in accordance with Crane Load-Sta- eration: Daily.
bility Test Code, Society of Auto- (ii) All control mechanisms for exces-
motive Engineers (SAE) J765, which is sive wear of components and contami-
incorporated by reference as specified nation by lubricants or other foreign
in 1910.6. matter.
(iv) The effectiveness of these pre- (iii) All safety devices for malfunc-
ceding stability factors will be influ- tion.
enced by such additional factors as (iv) Deterioration or leakage in air or
freely suspended loads, track, wind, or hydraulic systems: Daily.
ground conditions, condition and infla- (v) Crane hooks with deformations or
tion of rubber tires, boom lengths, cracks. For hooks with cracks or hav-
proper operating speeds for existing ing more than 15 percent in excess of
conditions, and, in general, careful and normal throat opening or more than 10
569
twist from the plane of the unbent (4) of this section and paragraph
hook. (g)(2)(ii) of this section before placing
(vi) Rope reeving for noncompliance in service.
with manufacturers recommendations. (iii) Standby cranes shall be in-
(vii) Electrical apparatus for mal- spected at least semiannually in ac-
functioning, signs of excessive deterio- cordance with requirements of para-
ration, dirt, and moisture accumula- graph (d)(3) of this section and para-
tion. graph (g)(2)(ii) of this section. Such
(4) Periodic inspection. Complete in- cranes which are exposed to adverse en-
spections of the crane shall be per- vironment should be inspected more
formed at intervals as generally de- frequently.
fined in paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of this sec- (6) Inspection records. Certification
tion depending upon its activity, sever- records which include the date of in-
ity of service, and environment, or as spection, the signature of the person
specifically indicated below. These in- who performed the inspection and the
spections shall include the require- serial number, or other identifier, of
ments of paragraph (d)(3) of this sec- the crane which was inspected shall be
tion and in addition, items such as the made monthly on critical items in use
following. Any deficiencies such as list- such as brakes, crane hooks, and ropes.
ed shall be carefully examined and de- This certification record shall be kept
termination made as to whether they readily available.
constitute a safety hazard: (e) Testing(1) Operational tests. (i) In
(i) Deformed, cracked, or corroded addition to prototype tests and qual-
members in the crane structure and ity-control measures, each new produc-
boom. tion crane shall be tested by the manu-
(ii) Loose bolts or rivets. facturer to the extent necessary to in-
(iii) Cracked or worn sheaves and sure compliance with the operational
drums. requirements of this paragraph includ-
(iv) Worn, cracked, or distorted parts ing functions such as the following:
such as pins, bearings, shafts, gears, (a) Load hoisting and lowering mech-
rollers and locking devices. anisms.
(v) Excessive wear on brake and (b) Boom hoisting and lower mecha-
clutch system parts, linings, pawls, and nisms.
ratchets. (c) Swinging mechanism.
(vi) Load, boom angle, and other indi-
(d) Travel mechanism.
cators over their full range, for any
(e) Safety devices.
significant inaccuracies.
(vii) Gasoline, diesel, electric, or (ii) Where the complete production
other power plants for improper per- crane is not supplied by one manufac-
formance or noncompliance with safety turer such tests shall be conducted at
requirements. final assembly.
(viii) Excessive wear of chain-drive (iii) Certified production-crane test
sprockets and excessive chain stretch. results shall be made available.
(ix) Travel steering, braking, and (2) Rated load test. (i) Written reports
locking devices, for malfunction. shall be available showing test proce-
(x) Excessively worn or damaged dures and confirming the adequacy of
tires. repairs or alterations.
(5) Cranes not in regular use. (i) A (ii) Test loads shall not exceed 110
crane which has been idle for a period percent of the rated load at any se-
of one month or more, but less than 6 lected working radius.
months, shall be given an inspection (iii) Where rerating is necessary:
conforming with requirements of para- (a) Crawler, truck, and wheel-mount-
graph (d)(3) of this section and para- ed cranes shall be tested in accordance
graph (g)(2)(ii) of this section before with SAE Recommended Practice,
placing in service. Crane Load Stability Test Code J765
(ii) A crane which has been idle for a (April 1961).
period of six months shall be given a (b) Locomotive cranes shall be tested
complete inspection conforming with in accordance with paragraph (c)(1) (i)
requirements of paragraphs (d) (3) and and (ii) of this section.
570
(c) Rerating test report shall be read- rioration and shall be performed by an
ily available. appointed or authorized person whose
(iv) No cranes shall be rerated in ex- approval shall be required for further
cess of the original load ratings unless use of the rope. A certification record
such rating changes are approved by which includes the date of inspection,
the crane manufacturer or final assem- the signature of the person who per-
bler. formed the inspection, and an identi-
(f) Maintenance procedureGeneral. fier for the rope which was inspected
After adjustments and repairs have shall be prepared and kept readily
been made the crane shall not be oper- available.
ated until all guards have been re- (iii) Particular care shall be taken in
installed, safety devices reactivated, the inspection of nonrotating rope.
and maintenance equipment removed. (h) Handling the load(1) Size of load.
(g) Rope inspection(1) Running ropes. (i) No crane shall be loaded beyond the
A thorough inspection of all ropes in rated load, except for test purposes as
use shall be made at least once a provided in paragraph (e) of this sec-
month and a certification record which tion.
includes the date of inspection, the sig- (ii) When loads which are limited by
nature of the person who performed the structural competence rather than by
inspection and an identifier for the stability are to be handled, it shall be
ropes shall be prepared and kept on file ascertained that the weight of the load
where readily available. All inspections has been determined within plus or
shall be performed by an appointed or minus 10 percent before it is lifted.
authorized person. Any deterioration, (2) Attaching the load. (i) The hoist
resulting in appreciable loss of original rope shall not be wrapped around the
strength shall be carefully observed load.
and detemination made as to whether (ii) The load shall be attached to the
further use of the rope would con- hook by means of slings or other ap-
stitute a safety hazard. Some of the proved devices.
conditions that could result in an ap- (3) Moving the load. (i) The employer
preciable loss of strength are the fol- shall assure that:
lowing: (a) The crane is level and where nec-
(i) Reduction of rope diameter below essary blocked properly.
nominal diameter due to loss of core
(b) The load is well secured and prop-
support, internal or external corrosion,
erly balanced in the sling or lifting de-
or wear of outside wires.
vice before it is lifted more than a few
(ii) A number of broken outside wires
inches.
and the degree of distribution of con-
(ii) Before starting to hoist, the fol-
centration of such broken wires.
lowing conditions shall be noted:
(iii) Worn outside wires.
(iv) Corroded or broken wires at end (a) Hoist rope shall not be kinked.
connections. (b) Multiple part lines shall not be
(v) Corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or twisted around each other.
improperly applied end connections. (c) The hook shall be brought over
(vi) Severe kinking, crushing, cut- the load in such a manner as to prevent
ting, or unstranding. swinging.
(2) Other ropes. (i) Heavy wear and/or (iii) During hoisting care shall be
broken wires may occur in sections in taken that:
contact with equalizer sheaves or other (a) There is no sudden acceleration or
sheaves where rope travel is limited, or deceleration of the moving load.
with saddles. Particular care shall be (b) The load does not contact any ob-
taken to inspect ropes at these loca- structions.
tions. (iv) Side loading of booms shall be
(ii) All rope which has been idle for a limited to freely suspended loads.
period of a month or more due to shut- Cranes shall not be used for dragging
down or storage of a crane on which it loads sideways.
is installed shall be given a thorough (v) No hoisting, lowering, swinging,
inspection before it is used. This in- or traveling shall be done while anyone
spection shall be for all types of dete- is on the load or hook.
571
(vi) The operator should avoid car- shall be in accord with his determina-
rying loads over people. tions.
(vii) On truck-mounted cranes, no (xv) A crane with or without load
loads shall be lifted over the front area shall not be traveled with the boom so
except as approved by the crane manu- high that it may bounce back over the
facturer. cab.
(viii) The operator shall test the (xvi) When rotating the crane, sudden
brakes each time a load approaching starts and stops shall be avoided. Rota-
the rated load is handled by raising it tional speed shall be such that the load
a few inches and applying the brakes. does not swing out beyond the radii at
(ix) Outriggers shall be used when the which it can be controlled. A tag or re-
load to be handled at that particular straint line shall be used when rotation
radius exceeds the rated load without of the load is hazardous.
outriggers as given by the manufac- (xvii) When a crane is to be operated
turer for that crane. Where floats are at a fixed radius, the boom-hoist pawl
used they shall be securely attached to or other positive locking device shall
the outriggers. Wood blocks used to be engaged.
support outriggers shall: (xviii) Ropes shall not be handled on
(a) Be strong enough to prevent a winch head without the knowledge of
crushing. the operator.
(b) Be free from defects. (xix) While a winch head is being
(c) Be of sufficient width and length used, the operator shall be within con-
to prevent shifting or toppling under venient reach of the power unit control
load. lever.
(x) Neither the load nor the boom (4) Holding the load. (i) The operator
shall be lowered below the point where shall not be permitted to leave his po-
less than two full wraps of rope remain sition at the controls while the load is
on their respective drums. suspended.
(xi) Before lifting loads with loco- (ii) No person should be permitted to
motive cranes without using out- stand or pass under a load on the hook.
riggers, means shall be applied to pre- (iii) If the load must remain sus-
vent the load from being carried by the pended for any considerable length of
truck springs. time, the operator shall hold the drum
(xii) When two or more cranes are from rotating in the lowering direction
used to lift one load, one designated by activating the positive controllable
person shall be responsible for the op- means of the operators station.
eration. He shall be required to analyze (i) Other requirements(1) Rail clamps.
the operation and instruct all per- Rail clamps shall not be used as a
sonnel involved in the proper posi- means of restraining tipping of a loco-
tioning, rigging of the load, and the motive crane.
movements to be made. (2) Ballast or counterweight. Cranes
(xiii) In transit the following addi- shall not be operated without the full
tional precautions shall be exercised: amount of any ballast or counter-
(a) The boom shall be carried in line weight in place as specified by the
with the direction of motion. maker, but truck cranes that have
(b) The superstructure shall be se- dropped the ballast or counterweight
cured against rotation, except when ne- may be operated temporarily with spe-
gotiating turns when there is an oper- cial care and only for light loads with-
ator in the cab or the boom is sup- out full ballast or counterweight in
ported on a dolly. place. The ballast or counterweight in
(c) The empty hook shall be lashed or place specified by the manufacturer
otherwise restrained so that it cannot shall not be exceeded.
swing freely. (3) Cabs. (i) Necessary clothing and
(xiv) Before traveling a crane with personal belongings shall be stored in
load, a designated person shall be re- such a manner as to not interfere with
sponsible for determining and control- access or operation.
ling safety. Decisions such as position (ii) Tools, oil cans, waste, extra fuses,
of load, boom location, ground support, and other necessary articles shall be
travel route, and speed of movement stored in the tool box, and shall not be
572
permitted to lie loose in or about the

cab.
(4) Refueling. (i) Refueling with small
portable containers shall be done with
an approved safety type can equipped
with an automatic closing cap and
flame arrester. Refer to 1910.155(c)(3)
for definition of approved.
(ii) Machines shall not be refueled
with the engine running.
(5) Fire extinguishers. (i) A carbon di-
oxide, dry chemical, or equivalent fire
extinguisher shall be kept in the cab or
vicinity of the crane.
(ii) Operating and maintenance per- (3) A basket derrick is a derrick with-
sonnel shall be made familiar with the out a boom, similar to a gin pole, with
use and care of the fire extinguishers its base supported by ropes attached to
provided. corner posts or other parts of the
(6) Swinging locomotive cranes. A loco- structure. The base is at a lower ele-
motive crane shall not be swung into a vation than its supports. The location
position where railway cars on an adja- of the base of a basket derrick can be
cent track might strike it, until it has changed by varying the length of the
been ascertained that cars are not rope supports. The top of the pole is se-
being moved on the adjacent track and cured with multiple reeved guys to po-
proper flag protection has been estab- sition the top of the pole to the desired
lished. location by varying the length of the
(j) Operations near overhead lines. For upper guy lines. The load is raised and
operations near overhead electric lines, lowered by ropes through a sheave or
see 1910.333(c)(3). block secured to the top of the pole.
FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 34561, Sept. 29,
1986; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015,
Aug 6, 1990; 61 FR 9239, Mar. 7, 1996]
1910.181 Derricks.
(a) Definitions applicable to this sec-
tion. (1) A derrick is an apparatus con-
sisting of a mast or equivalent member
held at the head by guys or braces,
with or without a boom, for use with a
hoisting mechanism and operating
ropes.
(2) A-frame derrick means a derrick in
which the boom is hinged from a cross
member between the bottom ends of
two upright members spread apart at (4) Breast derrick means a derrick
the lower ends and joined at the top; without boom. The mast consists of
the boom point secured to the junction two side members spread farther apart
of the side members, and the side mem- at the base than at the top and tied to-
bers are braced or guyed from this gether at top and bottom by rigid
junction point. members. The mast is prevented from
EC27OC91.038</GPH>
573
EC27OC91.037</GPH>
tipping forward by guys connected to

its top. The load is raised and lowered
by ropes through a sheave or block se-
cured to the top crosspiece.
(7) Guy derrick means a fixed derrick

consisting of a mast capable of being
rotated, supported in a vertical posi-
tion by guys, and a boom whose bottom
end is hinged or pivoted to move in a
(5) Chicago boom derrick means a vertical plane with a reeved rope be-
boom which is attached to a structure, tween the head of the mast and the
boom point for raising and lowering
an outside upright member of the
the boom, and a reeved rope from the
structure serving as the mast, and the
boom point for raising and lowering
boom being stepped in a fixed socket the load.
clamped to the upright. The derrick is
complete with load, boom, and boom
point swing line falls.
(8) Shearleg derrick means a derrick

without a boom and similar to a breast
derrick. The mast, wide at the bottom
and narrow at the top, is hinged at the
EC27OC91.042</GPH>
bottom and has its top secured by a
multiple reeved guy to permit handling
loads at various radii by means of load
tackle suspended from the mast top.
(9) A stiffleg derrick is a derrick simi-
(6) A gin pole derrick is a derrick with- lar to a guy derrick except that the
EC27OC91.041</GPH>
out a boom. Its guys are so arranged mast is supported or held in place by
from its top as to permit leaning the two or more stiff members, called
mast in any direction. The load is stifflegs, which are capable of resisting
raised and lowered by ropes reeved either tensile or compressive forces.
through sheaves or blocks at the top of Sills are generally provided to connect
EC27OC91.040</GPH>
the mast. the lower ends of the stifflegs to the

foot of the mast.
574
EC27OC91.039</GPH>
plane held in place by the same cheek

plates.
(19) The foot bearing or foot block (sill
block) is the lower support on which
the mast rotates.
(20) A gudgeon pin is a pin connecting
the mast cap to the mast allowing ro-
tation of the mast.
(21) A guy is a rope used to steady or
secure the mast or other member in
the desired position.
(22) Load, working means the external
load, in pounds, applied to the derrick,
including the weight of load attaching
equipment such as load blocks, shack-
les, and slings.
(10) Appointed means assigned spe- (23) Load block, lower means the as-
cific responsibilities by the employer sembly of sheaves, pins, and frame sus-
or the employers representative. pended by the hoisting rope.
(11) ANSI means the American Na- (24) Load block, upper means the as-
tional Standards Institute. sembly of sheaves, pins, and frame sus-
(12) A boom is a timber or metal sec- pended from the boom.
tion or strut, pivoted or hinged at the (25) Mast means the upright member
heel (lower end) at a location fixed in of the derrick.
height on a frame or mast or vertical (26) Mast cap (spider) means the fit-
member, and with its point (upper end) ting at the top of the mast to which
supported by chains, ropes, or rods to the guys are connected.
the upper end of the frame, mast, or (27) Reeving means a rope system in
vertical member. A rope for raising and which the rope travels around drums
lowering the load is reeved through and sheaves.
sheaves or a block at the boom point. (28) Rope refers to wire rope unless
The length of the boom shall be taken otherwise specified.
as the straight line distance between (29) Safety Hook means a hook with a
the axis of the foot pin and the axis of latch to prevent slings or load from ac-
the boom point sheave pin, or where cidentally slipping off the hook.
used, the axis of the upper load block (30) Side loading is a load applied at
attachment pin. an angle to the vertical plane of the
(13) Boom harness means the block boom.
and sheave arrangement on the boom (31) The sill is a member connecting
point to which the topping lift cable is the foot block and stiffleg or a member
reeved for lowering and raising the connecting the lower ends of a double
boom. member mast.
(14) The boom point is the outward (32) A standby derrick is a derrick not
end of the top section of the boom. in regular service which is used occa-
(15) Derrick bullwheel means a hori- sionally or intermittently as required.
zontal ring or wheel, fastened to the (33) Stiffleg means a rigid member
foot of a derrick, for the purpose of supporting the mast at the head.
turning the derrick by means of ropes (34) Swing means rotation of the mast
leading from this wheel to a powered and/or boom for movements of loads in
drum. a horizontal direction about the axis of
(16) Designated means selected or as- rotation.
signed by the employer or employers (b) General requirements(1) Applica-
representative as being qualified to tion. This section applies to guy,
perform specific duties. stiffleg, basket, breast, gin pole, Chi-
(17) Eye means a loop formed at the cago boom and Aframe derricks of the
end of a rope by securing the dead end stationary type, capable of handling
to the live end at the base of the loop. loads at variable reaches and powered
(18) A fiddle block is a block con- by hoists through systems of rope
sisting of two sheaves in the same reeving, used to perform lifting hook
575
EC27OC91.043</GPH>
work, single or multiple line bucket degree of their exposure to wear, dete-
work, grab, grapple, and magnet work. rioration, or malfunction. The two gen-
Derricks may be permanently installed eral classifications are herein des-
for temporary use as in construction ignated as frequent and periodic with
work. The requirements of this section respective intervals between inspec-
also apply to any modification of these tions as defined below:
types which retain their fundamental (a) Frequent inspectionDaily to
features, except for floating derricks. monthly intervals.
(2) New and existing equipment. All (b) Periodic inspection1- to 12-
new derricks constructed and installed month intervals, or as specified by the
on or after August 31, 1971, shall meet manufacturer.
the design specifications of the Amer- (2) Frequent inspection. Items such as
ican National Standard Safety Code for the following shall be inspected for de-
Derricks, ANSI B30.61969, which is in- fects at intervals as defined in para-
corporated by reference as specified in graph (d)(1)(ii)(a) of this section or as
1910.6. specifically indicated, including obser-
(3) Designated personnel. Only des- vation during operation for any defects
ignated personnel shall be permitted to which might appear between regular
operate a derrick covered by this sec- inspections. Deficiencies shall be care-
tion. fully examined for any safety hazard:
(c) Load ratings(1) Rated load mark- (i) All control mechanisms: Inspect
ing. For permanently installed derricks daily for adjustment, wear, and lubri-
with fixed lengths of boom, guy, and cation.
mast, a substantial, durable, and clear- (ii) All chords and lacing: Inspect
ly legible rating chart shall be pro- daily, visually.
vided with each derrick and securely
(iii) Tension in guys: Daily.
affixed where it is visible to personnel
(iv) Plumb of the mast.
responsible for the safe operation of
the equipment. The chart shall include (v) Deterioration or leakage in air or
the following data: hydraulic systems: Daily.
(i) Manufacturers approved load rat- (vi) Derrick hooks for deformations
ings at corresponding ranges of boom or cracks; for hooks with cracks or
angle or operating radii. having more than 15 percent in excess
(ii) Specific lengths of components on of normal throat opening or more than
which the load ratings are based. 10 twist from the plane of the unbent
(iii) Required parts for hoist reeving. hook, refer to paragraph (e)(3)(iii) of
Size and construction of rope may be this section.
shown either on the rating chart or in (vii) Rope reeving; visual inspection
the operating manual. for noncompliance with derrick manu-
(2) Nonpermanent installations. For facturers recommendations.
nonpermanent installations, the manu- (viii) Hoist brakes, clutches, and op-
facturer shall provide sufficient infor- erating levers: check daily for proper
mation from which capacity charts can functioning before beginning oper-
be prepared for the particular installa- ations.
tion. The capacity charts shall be lo- (ix) Electrical apparatus for malfunc-
cated at the derricks or the jobsite of- tioning, signs of excessive deteriora-
fice. tion, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
(d) Inspection(1) Inspection classifica- (3) Periodic inspection. (i) Complete in-
tion. (i) Prior to initial use all new and spections of the derrick shall be per-
altered derricks shall be inspected to formed at intervals as generally de-
insure compliance with the provisions fined in paragraph (d)(1)(ii)(b) of this
of this section. section depending upon its activity, se-
(ii) Inspection procedure for derricks verity of service, and environment, or
in regular service is divided into two as specifically indicated below. These
general classifications based upon the inspections shall include the require-
intervals at which inspection should be ments of paragraph (d)(2) of this sec-
performed. The intervals in turn are tion and in addition, items such as the
dependent upon the nature of the crit- following. Deficiencies shall be care-
ical components of the derrick and the fully examined and a determination
576
made as to whether they constitute a (2) Maintenance procedure. (i) Before

safety hazard: adjustments and repairs are started on
(a) Structural members for deforma- a derrick the following precautions
tions, cracks, and corrosion. shall be taken:
(b) Bolts or rivets for tightness. (a) The derrick to be repaired shall be
(c) Parts such as pins, bearings, arranged so it will cause the least in-
shafts, gears, sheaves, drums, rollers, terference with other equipment and
locking and clamping devices, for wear, operations in the area.
cracks, and distortion. (b) All hoist drum dogs shall be en-
(d) Gudgeon pin for cracks, wear, and gaged.
distortion each time the derrick is to (c) The main or emergency switch
be erected. shall be locked in the open position, if
(e) Powerplants for proper perform- an electric hoist is used.
ance and compliance with applicable (d) Warning or out of order signs
safety requirements. shall be placed on the derrick and
(f) Hooks. hoist.
(e) The repairs of booms of derricks
(ii) Foundation or supports shall be
shall either be made when the booms
inspected for continued ability to sus-
are lowered and adequately supported
tain the imposed loads.
or safely tied off.
(4) Derricks not in regular use. (i) A
(f) A good communication system
derrick which has been idle for a period
shall be set up between the hoist oper-
of 1 month or more, but less than 6
ator and the appointed individual in
months, shall be given an inspection
charge of derrick operations before any
conforming with requirements of para-
work on the equipment is started.
graph (d)(2) of this section and para-
(ii) After adjustments and repairs
graph (g)(3) of this section before plac-
have been made the derrick shall not
ing in service.
be operated until all guards have been
(ii) A derrick which has been idle for reinstalled, safety devices reactivated,
a period of over 6 months shall be given and maintenance equipment removed.
a complete inspection conforming with (3) Adjustments and repairs. (i) Any
requirements of paragraphs (d) (2) and unsafe conditions disclosed by inspec-
(3) of this section and paragraph (g)(3) tion shall be corrected before operation
of this section before placing in serv- of the derrick is resumed.
ice. (ii) Adjustments shall be maintained
(iii) Standby derricks shall be in- to assure correct functioning of compo-
spected at least semiannually in ac- nents.
cordance with requirements of para- (iii) Repairs or replacements shall be
graph (d)(2) of this section and para- provided promptly as needed for safe
graph (g)(3) of this section. operation. The following are examples
(e) Testing(1) Operational tests. Prior of conditions requiring prompt repair
to initial use all new and altered der- or replacement:
ricks shall be tested to insure compli- (a) Hooks showing defects described
ance with this section including the in paragraph (d)(2)(vi) of this section
following functions: shall be discarded.
(i) Load hoisting and lowering. (b) All critical parts which are
(ii) Boom up and down. cracked, broken, bent, or excessively
(iii) Swing. worn.
(iv) Operation of clutches and brakes (c) [Reserved]
of hoist. (d) All replacement and repaired
(2) Anchorages. All anchorages shall parts shall have at least the original
be approved by the appointed person. safety factor.
Rock and hairpin anchorages may re- (g) Rope inspection(1) Running ropes.
quire special testing. A thorough inspection of all ropes in
(f) Maintenance(1) Preventive mainte- use shall be made at least once a
nance. A preventive maintenance pro- month and a certification record which
gram based on the derrick manufactur- includes the date of inspection, the sig-
ers recommendations shall be estab- nature of the person who performed the
lished. inspection, and an identifier for the
577
ropes which were inspected shall be (2) Attaching the load. (i) The hoist
prepared and kept on file where readily rope shall not be wrapped around the
available. Any deterioration, resulting load.
in appreciable loss of original strength (ii) The load shall be attached to the
shall be carefully observed and deter- hook by means of slings or other suit-
mination made as to whether further able devices.
use of the rope would constitute a safe- (3) Moving the load. (i) The load shall
ty hazard. Some of the conditions that be well secured and properly balanced
could result in an appreciable loss of in the sling or lifting device before it is
strength are the following: lifted more than a few inches.
(i) Reduction of rope diameter below (ii) Before starting to hoist, the fol-
nominal diameter due to loss of core lowing conditions shall be noted:
support, internal or external corrosion, (a) Hoist rope shall not be kinked.
or wear of outside wires. (b) Multiple part lines shall not be
(ii) A number of broken outside wires twisted around each other.
and the degree of distribution or con- (c) The hook shall be brought over
centration of such broken wires. the load in such a manner as to prevent
(iii) Worn outside wires. swinging.
(iv) Corroded or broken wires at end (iii) During hoisting, care shall be
connections. taken that:
(v) Corroded, cracked, bent, worn, or (a) There is no sudden acceleration or
improperly applied end connections. deceleration of the moving load.
(vi) Severe kinking, crushing, cut- (b) Load does not contact any ob-
ting, or unstranding. structions.
(2) Limited travel ropes. Heavy wear (iv) A derrick shall not be used for
and/or broken wires may occur in sec- side loading except when specifically
tions in contact with equalizer sheaves authorized by a responsible person who
or other sheaves where rope travel is has determined that the various struc-
limited, or with saddles. Particular tural components will not be over-
care shall be taken to inspect ropes at stressed.
these locations. (v) No hoisting, lowering, or swinging
(3) Idle ropes. All rope which has been shall be done while anyone is on the
idle for a period of a month or more load or hook.
due to shutdown or storage of a derrick (vi) The operator should avoid car-
on which it is installed shall be given a rying loads over people.
thorough inspection before it is used. (vii) The operator shall test the
This inspection shall be for all types of brakes each time a load approaching
deterioration. A certification record the rated load is handled by raising it
shall be prepared and kept readily a few inches and applying the brakes.
available which includes the date of in- (viii) Neither the load nor boom shall
spection, the signature of the person be lowered below the point where less
who performed the inspection, and an than two full wraps of rope remain on
identifier for the ropes which were in- their respective drums.
spected. (ix) When rotating a derrick, sudden
(4) Nonrotating ropes. Particular care starts and stops shall be avoided. Rota-
shall be taken in the inspection of non- tional speed shall be such that the load
rotating rope. does not swing out beyond the radius
(h) Operations of derricks. Derrick op- at which it can be controlled.
erations shall be directed only by the (x) Boom and hoisting rope systems
individual specifically designated for shall not be twisted.
that purpose. (4) Holding the load. (i) The operator
(i) Handling the load(1) Size of load. shall not be allowed to leave his posi-
(i) No derrick shall be loaded beyond tion at the controls while the load is
the rated load. suspended.
(ii) When loads approach the max- (ii) People should not be permitted to
imum rating of the derrick, it shall be stand or pass under a load on the hook.
ascertained that the weight of the load (iii) If the load must remain sus-
has been determined within plus or pended for any considerable length of
minus 10 percent before it is lifted. time, a dog, or pawl and ratchet, or
578
other equivalent means, rather than ings shall be stored in such a manner
the brake alone, shall be used to hold as to not interfere with access or oper-
the load. ation.
(5) Use of winch heads. (i) Ropes shall (ii) Tools, oilcans, waste, extra fuses,
not be handled on a winch head with- and other necessary articles shall be
out the knowledge of the operator. stored in the toolbox, and shall not be
(ii) While a winch head is being used, permitted to lie loose in or about the
the operator shall be within convenient cab or operating enclosure.
reach of the power unit control lever. [37 FR 22102, Oct. 18, 1972, as amended at 38
(6) Securing boom. Dogs, pawls, or FR 14373, June 1, 1973; 43 FR 49750, Oct. 24,
other positive holding mechanism on 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 51 FR 34561,
the hoist shall be engaged. When not in Sept. 29, 1986; 53 FR 12122, Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR
use, the derrick boom shall: 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996]
(i) Be laid down;
(ii) Be secured to a stationary mem- 1910.183 Helicopters.
ber, as nearly under the head as pos- (a) [Reserved]
sible, by attachment of a sling to the (b) Briefing. Prior to each days oper-
load block; or ation a briefing shall be conducted.
(iii) Be hoisted to a vertical position This briefing shall set forth the plan of
and secured to the mast. operation for the pilot and ground per-
(j) Other requirements(1) Guards. (i) sonnel.
Exposed moving parts, such as gears, (c) Slings and tag lines. Loads shall be
ropes, setscrews, projecting keys, properly slung. Tag lines shall be of a
chains, chain sprockets, and recipro- length that will not permit their being
cating components, which constitute a drawn up into the rotors. Pressed
hazard under normal operating condi- sleeve, swedged eyes, or equivalent
tions shall be guarded. means shall be used for all freely sus-
(ii) Guards shall be securely fastened. pended loads to prevent hand splices
(iii) Each guard shall be capable of from spinning open or cable clamps
supporting without permanent distor- from loosening.
tion, the weight of a 200pound person (d) Cargo hooks. All electrically oper-
unless the guard is located where it is ated cargo hooks shall have the elec-
impossible for a person to step on it. trical activating device so designed and
(2) Hooks. (i) Hooks shall meet the installed as to prevent inadvertent op-
manufacturers recommendations and eration. In addition, these cargo hooks
shall not be overloaded. shall be equipped with an emergency
(ii) Safety latch type hooks shall be mechanical control for releasing the
used wherever possible. load. The employer shall ensure that
(3) Fire extinguishers. (i) A carbon di- the hooks are tested prior to each days
oxide, dry chemical, or equivalent fire operation by a competent person to de-
extinguisher shall be kept in the imme- termine that the release functions
diate vicinity of the derrick. properly, both electrically and me-
(ii) Operating and maintenance per- chanically.
sonnel shall be familiar with the use (e) Personal protective equipment. (1)
and care of the fire extinguishers pro- Personal protective equipment shall be
vided. provided and the employer shall ensure
(4) Refueling. (i) Refueling with port- its use by employees receiving the
able containers shall be done with ap- load. Personal protective equipment
proved safety type containers equipped shall consist of complete eye protec-
with automatic closing cap and flame tion and hardhats secured by chin-
arrester. Refer to 1910.155(c)(3) for def- straps.
inition of Approved. (2) Loose-fitting clothing likely to
(ii) Machines shall not be refueled flap in rotor downwash, and thus be
with the engine running. snagged on the hoist line, may not be
(5) Operations near overhead lines. For worn.
operations near overhead electric lines, (f) Loose gear and objects. The em-
see 1910.333(c)(3). ployer shall take all necessary pre-
(6) Cab or operating enclosure. (i) Nec- cautions to protect employees from
essary clothing and personal belong- flying objects in the rotor downwash.
579
All loose gear within 100 feet of the cautions shall also be taken by the em-
place of lifting the load or depositing ployer to eliminate, as far as practical,
the load, or within all other areas sus- the dust or other conditions reducing
ceptible to rotor downwash, shall be se- the visibility.
cured or removed. (n) Signal systems. The employer shall
(g) Housekeeping. Good housekeeping instruct the aircrew and ground per-
shall be maintained in all helicopter sonnel on the signal systems to be used
loading and unloading areas. and shall review the system with the
(h) Load safety. The size and weight employees in advance of hoisting the
of loads, and the manner in which loads load. This applies to both radio and
are connected to the helicopter shall be hand signal systems. Hand signals,
checked. A lift may not be made if the where used, shall be as shown in Figure
helicopter operator believes the lift N1.
cannot be made safely. (o) Approach distance. No employee
(i) Hooking and unhooking loads. When shall be permitted to approach within
employees perform work under hov- 50 feet of the helicopter when the rotor
ering craft, a safe means of access shall blades are turning, unless his work du-
be provided for employees to reach the ties require his presence in that area.
hoist line hook and engage or dis-
(p) Approaching helicopter. The em-
engage cargo slings. Employees may
ployer shall instruct employees, and
not be permitted to perform work
shall ensure, that whenever approach-
under hovering craft except when nec-
ing or leaving a helicopter which has
essary to hook or unhook loads.
(j) Static charge. Static charge on the its blades rotating, all employees shall
suspended load shall be dissipated with remain in full view of the pilot and
a grounding device before ground per- keep in a crouched position. No em-
sonnel touch the suspended load, unless ployee shall be permitted to work in
protective rubber gloves are being worn the area from the cockpit or cabin
by all ground personnel who may be re- rearward while blades are rotating, un-
quired to touch the suspended load. less authorized by the helicopter oper-
(k) Weight limitation. The weight of an ator to work there.
external load shall not exceed the heli- (q) Personnel. Sufficient ground per-
copter manufacturers rating. sonnel shall be provided to ensure that
(l) Ground lines. Hoist wires or other helicopter loading and unloading oper-
gear, except for pulling lines or con- ations can be performed safely.
ductors that are allowed to pay out (r) Communications. There shall be
from a container or roll off a reel, shall constant reliable communication be-
not be attached to any fixed ground tween the pilot and a designated em-
structure, or allowed to foul on any ployee of the ground crew who acts as
fixed structure. a signalman during the period of load-
(m) Visibility. Ground personnel shall ing and unloading. The signalman shall
be instructed and the employer shall be clearly distinguishable from other
ensure that when visibility is reduced ground personnel.
by dust or other conditions, they shall (s) Fires. Open fires shall not be per-
exercise special caution to keep clear mitted in areas where they could be
of main and stabilizing rotors. Pre- spread by the rotor downwash.
580
EC27OC91.044</GPH><CITA TYPE=W>[40 FR 13440, Mar. 26, 1975, as amended at 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998]
[40 FR 13440, Mar. 26, 1975, as amended at 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998]
581
1910.184 Slings. Coating is an elastomer or other suit-

(a) Scope. This section applies to able material applied to a sling or to a
slings used in conjunction with other sling component to impart desirable
material handling equipment for the properties.
movement of material by hoisting, in Cross rod is a wire used to join spirals
employments covered by this part. The of metal mesh to form a complete fab-
types of slings covered are those made ric. (See Fig. N1842.)
from alloy steel chain, wire rope, metal Designated means selected or assigned
mesh, natural or synthetic fiber rope by the employer or the employers rep-
(conventional three strand construc- resentative as being qualified to per-
tion), and synthetic web (nylon, poly- form specific duties.
ester, and polypropylene). Equivalent entity is a person or orga-
(b) Definitions. Angle of loading is the nization (including an employer)
inclination of a leg or branch of a sling which, by possession of equipment,
measured from the horizontal or technical knowledge and skills, can
vertical plane as shown in Fig. N1845; perform with equal competence the
provided that an angle of loading of same repairs and tests as the person or
five degrees or less from the vertical organization with which it is equated.
may be considered a vertical angle of Fabric (metal mesh) is the flexible por-
loading.
tion of a metal mesh sling consisting of
Basket hitch is a sling configuration
a series of transverse coils and cross
whereby the sling is passed under the
rods.
load and has both ends, end attach-
ments, eyes or handles on the hook or Female handle (choker) is a handle
a single master link. with a handle eye and a slot of such di-
Braided wire rope is a wire rope mension as to permit passage of a male
formed by plaiting component wire handle thereby allowing the use of a
ropes. metal mesh sling in a choker hitch.
Bridle wire rope sling is a sling com- (See Fig. N1841.)
posed of multiple wire rope legs with Handle is a terminal fitting to which
the top ends gathered in a fitting that metal mesh fabric is attached. (See
goes over the lifting hook. Fig. N1841.)
Cable laid endless sling-mechanical Handle eye is an opening in a handle
joint is a wire rope sling made endless of a metal mesh sling shaped to accept
by joining the ends of a single length of a hook, shackle or other lifting device.
cable laid rope with one or more metal- (See Fig. N1841.)
lic fittings. Hitch is a sling configuration where-
Cable laid grommet-hand tucked is an by the sling is fastened to an object or
endless wire rope sling made from one load, either directly to it or around it.
length of rope wrapped six times Link is a single ring of a chain.
around a core formed by hand tucking
Male handle (triangle) is a handle with
the ends of the rope inside the six
a handle eye.
wraps.
Cable laid rope is a wire rope com- Master coupling link is an alloy steel
posed of six wire ropes wrapped around welded coupling link used as an inter-
a fiber or wire rope core. mediate link to join alloy steel chain
Cable laid rope sling-mechanical joint is to master links. (See Fig. N1843.)
a wire rope sling made from a cable Master link or gathering ring is a
laid rope with eyes fabricated by press- forged or welded steel link used to sup-
ing or swaging one or more metal port all members (legs) of an alloy
sleeves over the rope junction. steel chain sling or wire rope sling.
Choker hitch is a sling configuration (See Fig. N1843.)
with one end of the sling passing under Mechanical coupling link is a non-
the load and through an end attach- welded, mechanically closed steel link
ment, handle or eye on the other end of used to attach master links, hooks,
the sling. etc., to alloy steel chain.
582
583
EC27OC91.045</GPH>
584
EC27OC91.046</GPH>
Proof load is the load applied in per- Spiral is a single transverse coil that
formance of a proof test. is the basic element from which metal
Proof test is a nondestructive tension mesh is fabricated. (See Fig. N1842.)
test performed by the sling manufac- Strand laid endless sling-mechanical
turer or an equivalent entity to verify joint is a wire rope sling made endless
construction and workmanship of a from one length of rope with the ends
sling. joined by one or more metallic fittings.
Rated capacity or working load limit is Strand laid grommet-hand tucked is an
the maximum working load permitted endless wire rope sling made from one
by the provisions of this section. length of strand wrapped six times
Reach is the effective length of an around a core formed by hand tucking
alloy steel chain sling measured from the ends of the strand inside the six
the top bearing surface of the upper wraps.
terminal component to the bottom Strand laid rope is a wire rope made
bearing surface of the lower terminal with strands (usually six or eight)
component. wrapped around a fiber core, wire
Selvage edge is the finished edge of strand core, or independent wire rope
synthetic webbing designed to prevent core (IWRC).
unraveling. Vertical hitch is a method of sup-
Sling is an assembly which connects porting a load by a single, vertical part
the load to the material handling or leg of the sling. (See Fig. N1844.)
equipment. (c) Safe operating practices. Whenever
Sling manufacturer is a person or or- any sling is used, the following prac-
ganization that assembles sling compo- tices shall be observed:
nents into their final form for sale to (1) Slings that are damaged or defec-
users. tive shall not be used.
585
EC27OC91.047</GPH>
(2) Slings shall not be shortened with be determined on the basis of (A) fre-
knots or bolts or other makeshift de- quency of sling use; (B) severity of
vices. service conditions; (C) nature of lifts
(3) Sling legs shall not be kinked. being made; and (D) experience gained
(4) Slings shall not be loaded in ex- on the service life of slings used in
cess of their rated capacities. similar circumstances. Such inspec-
(5) Slings used in a basket hitch shall tions shall in no event be at intervals
have the loads balanced to prevent slip- greater than once every 12 months.
page. (ii) The employer shall make and
(6) Slings shall be securely attached maintain a record of the most recent
to their loads. month in which each alloy steel chain
(7) Slings shall be padded or pro- sling was thoroughly inspected, and
tected from the sharp edges of their shall make such record available for
loads. examination.
(8) Suspended loads shall be kept (iii) The thorough inspection of alloy
clear of all obstructions. steel chain slings shall be performed by
(9) All employees shall be kept clear a competent person designated by the
of loads about to be lifted and of sus- employer, and shall include a thorough
pended loads. inspection for wear, defective welds,
(10) Hands or fingers shall not be deformation and increase in length.
placed between the sling and its load Where such defects or deterioration are
while the sling is being tightened present, the sling shall be immediately
around the load. removed from service.
(11) Shock loading is prohibited. (4) Proof testing. The employer shall
(12) A sling shall not be pulled from ensure that before use, each new, re-
under a load when the load is resting paired, or reconditioned alloy steel
on the sling. chain sling, including all welded com-
(d) Inspections. Each day before being ponents in the sling assembly, shall be
used, the sling and all fastenings and proof tested by the sling manufacturer
attachments shall be inspected for or equivalent entity, in accordance
damage or defects by a competent per- with paragraph 5.2 of the American So-
son designated by the employer. Addi- ciety of Testing and Materials Speci-
tional inspections shall be performed fication A39165, which is incorporated
during sling use, where service condi- by reference as specified in 1910.6
tions warrant. Damaged or defective (ANSI G61.1 1968). The employer shall
slings shall be immediately removed retain a certificate of the proof test
from service. and shall make it available for exam-
(e) Alloy steel chain slings. (1) Sling ination.
identification. Alloy steel chain slings (5) Sling use. Alloy steel chain slings
shall have permanently affixed durable shall not be used with loads in excess
identification stating size, grade, rated of the rated capacities prescribed in
capacity, and reach. Table N1841. Slings not included in
(2) Attachments. (i) Hooks, rings, ob- this table shall be used only in accord-
long links, pear shaped links, welded or ance with the manufacturers rec-
mechanical coupling links or other at- ommendations.
tachments shall have a rated capacity (6) Safe operating temperatures. Alloy
at least equal to that of the alloy steel steel chain slings shall be permanently
chain with which they are used or the removed from service if they are heat-
sling shall not be used in excess of the ed above 1000 F. When exposed to serv-
rated capacity of the weakest compo- ice temperatures in excess of 600 F,
nent. maximum working load limits per-
(ii) Makeshift links or fasteners mitted in Table N1841 shall be re-
formed from bolts or rods, or other duced in accordance with the chain or
such attachments, shall not be used. sling manufacturers recommenda-
(3) Inspections. (i) In addition to the tions.
inspection required by paragraph (d) of (7) Repairing and reconditioning alloy
this section, a thorough periodic in- steel chain slings. (i) Worn or damaged
spection of alloy steel chain slings in alloy steel chain slings or attachments
use shall be made on a regular basis, to shall not be used until repaired. When
586
welding or heat testing is performed, (8) Effects of wear. If the chain size at
slings shall not be used unless repaired, any point of any link is less than that
reconditioned and proof tested by the stated in Table N1842, the sling shall
sling manufacturer or an equivalent be removed from service.
entity. (9) Deformed attachments. (i) Alloy
(ii) Mechanical coupling links or low steel chain slings with cracked or de-
carbon steel repair links shall not be formed master links, coupling links or
used to repair broken lengths of chain. other components shall be removed
from service.
TABLE N1841RATED CAPACITY (WORKING LOAD LIMIT), FOR ALLOY STEEL CHAIN SLINGS
Rated Capacity (Working Load Limit), Pounds
[Horizontal angles shown in parentheses]
Single Double sling vertical angle (1) Triple and quadruple sling (3)
branch vertical angle (1)
Chain size, inches sling 30 45 60
90 30 45 60
(60) (45) (30)
loading (60) (45) (30)
.............................................................................
14 3,250 5,650 4,550 3,250 8,400 6,800 4,900
.............................................................................
38 6,600 11,400 9,300 6,600 17,000 14,000 9,900
.............................................................................
12 11,250 19,500 15,900 11,250 29,000 24,000 17,000
58 ............................................................................. 16,500 28,500 23,300 16,500 43,000 35,000 24,500
34 ............................................................................. 23,000 39,800 32,500 23,000 59,500 48,500 34,500
78 ............................................................................. 28,750 49,800 40,600 28,750 74,500 61,000 43,000
1 .............................................................................. 38,750 67,100 5,800 38,750 101,000 82,000 58,000
118 ........................................................................... 44,500 77,000 63,000 44,500 115,500 94,500 66,500
114 ........................................................................... 57,500 99,500 61,000 57,500 149,000 121,500 86,000
138 ........................................................................... 67,000 116,000 94,000 67,000 174,000 141,000 100,500
112 ........................................................................... 80,000 138,000 112,900 80,000 207,000 169,000 119,500
134 ........................................................................... 100,000 172,000 140,000 100,000 258,000 210,000 150,000
(1) Rating of multileg slings adjusted for angle of loading measured as the included angle between the inclined leg and the
vertical as shown in Figure N1845.
(2) Rating of multileg slings adjusted for angle of loading between the inclined leg and the horizontal plane of the load, as
shown in Figure N1845.
(3) Quadruple sling rating is same as triple sling because normal lifting practice may not distribute load uniformly to all 4 legs.
TABLE N1842MINIMUM ALLOWABLE CHAIN shall be used only in accordance with

SIZE AT ANY POINT OF LINK the manufacturers recommendations.
Minimum allowable chain
(2) Minimum sling lengths. (i) Cable
Chain size, inches laid and 619 and 637 slings shall have
size, inches
a minimum clear length of wire rope 10

14
13 64

38
19 64 times the component rope diameter be-

12
25 64
tween splices, sleeves or end fittings.
58 3164
34 1932 (ii) Braided slings shall have a min-
78 4564 imum clear length of wire rope 40 times
1 1316
the component rope diameter between
118 2932
114 1 the loops or end fittings.

138 1332 (iii) Cable laid grommets, strand laid
112 1316
134 11332
grommets and endless slings shall have
a minimum circumferential length of
(ii) Slings shall be removed from 96 times their body diameter.
service if hooks are cracked, have been (3) Safe operating temperatures. Fiber
opened more than 15 percent of the nor- core wire rope slings of all grades shall
mal throat opening measured at the be permanently removed from service
narrowest point or twisted more than if they are exposed to temperatures in
10 degrees from the plane of the unbent excess of 200 F. When nonfiber core
hook. wire rope slings of any grade are used
(f) Wire rope slings. (1) Sling use. Wire at temperatures above 400 F or below
rope slings shall not be used with loads minus 60 F, recommendations of the
in excess of the rated capacities shown sling manufacturer regarding use at
in Tables N1843 through N18414. that temperature shall be followed.
Slings not included in these tables
587
(4) End attachments. (i) Welding of end manufacturer or equivalent entity at

attachments, except covers to thim- twice their rated capacity prior to ini-
bles, shall be performed prior to the as- tial use. The employer shall retain a
sembly of the sling. certificate of the proof test, and make
(ii) All welded end attachments shall it available for examination.
not be used unless proof tested by the
TABLE N1843RATED CAPACITIES FOR SINGLE LEG SLINGS
619 and 637 Classification Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope With Fiber Core (FC)
Rope Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb)
Vertical Choker Vertical basket 1

Dia Constr
(inches) HT MS S HT MS S HT MS S
14 619 0.49 0.51 0.55 0.37 0.38 0.41 0.99 1.0 1.1

5 16 619 0.76 0.79 0.85 0.57 0.59 0.64 1.5 1.6 1.7
38 619 1.1 1.1 1.2 0.80 0.85 0.91 2.1 2.2 2.4

7 16 619 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.1 1.1 1.2 2.9 3.0 3.3
12 619 1.8 2.0 2.1 1.4 1.5 12.6 3.7 3.9 4.3

9 16 619 2.3 2.5 2.7 1.7 1.9 2.0 4.6 5.0 5.4
58 619 2.8 3.1 3.3 2.1 2.3 2.5 5.6 6.2 6.7
34 619 3.9 4.4 4.8 2.9 3.3 3.6 7.8 8.8 9.5
78 619 5.1 5.9 6.4 3.9 4.5 4.8 10.0 12.0 13.0
1 619 6.7 7.7 8.4 5.0 5.8 6.3 13.0 15.0 17.0
118 619 8.4 9.5 10.0 6.3 7.1 7.9 17.0 19.0 21.0
1 4
1 637 9.8 11.0 12.0 7.4 8.3 9.2 20.0 22.0 25.0
138 637 12.0 13.0 15.0 8.9 10.0 11.0 24.0 27.0 30.0
112 637 14.0 16.0 15.0 10.0 12.0 13.0 28.0 32.0 35.0
158 637 16.0 18.0 21.0 12.0 14.0 15.0 33.0 27.0 41.0
134 637 19.0 21.0 24.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 38.0 43.0 48.0
2 637 25.0 28.0 31.0 18.0 21.0 23.0 49.0 55.0 62.0
HT = Hand Tucked Splice and Hidden Tuck Splice. For hidden tuck splice (IWRC) use values in HT columns.
MS = Mechanical Splice.
S = Swaged or Zinc Poured Socket.
1 These values only apply when the D/d ratio for HT slings is 10 or greater, and for MS and S slings is 20 or greater where:
D=Diameter of curvature around which the body of the sling is bent; d=Diameter of rope.

619 and 637 Classification Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope With Independent Wire Rope Core (IWRC)
Vertical Choker Vertical basket 1

Dia Constr
(inches) HT MS S HT MS S HT MS S
14 619 0.53 0.56 0.59 0.40 0.42 0.44 1.0 1.1 1.2

5 16 619 0.81 0.87 0.92 0.61 0.65 0.69 1.6 1.7 1.8
38 619 1.1 1.2 1.3 0.86 0.93 0.98 2.3 2.5 2.6

7 16 619 1.5 1.7 1.8 1.2 1.3 1.3 3.1 3.4 3.5
12 619 2.0 2.2 2.3 1.5 1.6 1.7 3.9 4.4 4.6

9 16 619 2.5 2.7 2.9 1.8 2.1 2.2 4.9 5.5 5.8
58 619 3.0 3.4 3.6 2.2 2.5 2.7 6.0 6.8 7.2
34 619 4.2 4.9 5.1 3.1 3.6 3.8 8.4 9.7 10.0
78 619 5.5 6.6 6.9 4.1 4.9 5.2 11.0 13.0 14.0
1 619 7.2 8.5 9.0 5.4 6.4 6.7 14.0 17.0 18.0
1 8
1 619 9.0 10.0 11.0 6.8 7.8 8.5 18.0 21.0 23.0
114 637 10.0 12.0 13.0 7.9 9.2 9.9 21.0 24.0 26.0
138 637 13.0 15.0 16.0 9.6 11.0 12.0 25.0 29.0 32.0
112 637 15.0 17.0 19.0 11.0 13.0 14.0 30.0 35.0 38.0
158 637 18.0 20.0 22.0 13.0 15.0 17.0 35.0 41.0 44.0
134 637 20.0 24.0 26.0 15.0 18.0 19.0 41.0 47.0 51.0
2 637 26.0 30.0 33.0 20.0 23.0 25.0 53.0 61.0 66.0
HT = Hand Tucked Splice. For hidden tuck splice (IWRC) use Table I values in HT column.
MS = Mechanical Splice.
S = Swaged or Zinc Poured Socket.
1 These values only apply when the D/d ratio for HT slings is 10 or greater, and for MS and S Slings is 20 or greater where:
D=Diameter of curvature around which the body of the sling is bent; d=Diameter of rope.
588

Cable Laid RopeMechanical Splice Only
777&719 Constructions Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope
7619 IWRC Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
Vertical
Dia (inches) Constr Vertical Choker basket 1
.....................................................
14 777 .................................................................... 0.50 0.38 1.0
.....................................................
38 777 .................................................................... 1.1 0.81 2.0
.....................................................
12 777 .................................................................... 1.8 1.4 3.7
58 ..................................................... 777 .................................................................... 2.8 2.1 5.5
34 ..................................................... 777 .................................................................... 3.8 2.9 7.6
58 ..................................................... 7719 .................................................................. 2.9 2.2 5.8
34 ..................................................... 7719 .................................................................. 4.1 3.0 8.1
78 ..................................................... 7719 .................................................................. 5.4 4.0 11.0
1 ....................................................... 7719 .................................................................. 6.9 5.1 14.0
118 ................................................... 7719 .................................................................. 8.2 6.2 16.0
114 ................................................... 7719 .................................................................. 9.9 7.4 20.0
34 ..................................................... 7619 IWRC ........................................................ 3.8 2.8 7.6
78 ..................................................... 7619 IWRC ........................................................ 5.0 3.8 10.0
1 ....................................................... 7619 IWRC ........................................................ 6.4 4.8 13.0
118 ................................................... 7619 IWRC ........................................................ 7.7 5.8 15.0
114 ................................................... 7619 IWRC ........................................................ 9.2 6.9 18.0
1516 ................................................. 7619 IWRC ........................................................ 10.0 7.5 20.0
138 ................................................... 7619 IWRC ........................................................ 11.0 8.2 22.0
112 ................................................... 7619 IWRC ........................................................ 13.0 9.6 26.0
1 These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 10 or greater where: D=Diameter of curvature around which the body of the
sling is bent; d=Diameter of rope.

8-Part and 6-Part Braided Rope
67 and 619 Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
77 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope
Component ropes Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb)
Basket, vertical
Vertical Choker to 30 1
Diameter (inches) Constr
8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part
.........................................................................................
3 32 67 0.42 0.32 0.32 0.24 0.74 0.55
18 ........................................................................................... 67 0.75 0.57 0.57 0.42 1.3 0.98
316 ......................................................................................... 67 1.7 1.3 1.3 0.94 2.9 2.2
332 ......................................................................................... 77 0.51 0.39 0.38 0.29 0.89 0.67
18 ........................................................................................... 77 0.95 0.7 0.71 0.53 1.6 1.2
316 ......................................................................................... 77 2.1 1.5 1.5 1.2 3.6 2.7
316 ......................................................................................... 619 1.7 1.3 1.3 0.98 3.0 2.2
14 ........................................................................................... 619 3.1 2.3 2.3 1.7 5.3 4.0
516 ......................................................................................... 619 4.8 3.6 3.6 2.7 8.3 6.2
38 ........................................................................................... 619 6.8 5.1 5.1 3.8 12.0 8.9
716 ......................................................................................... 619 9.3 6.9 6.9 5.2 16.0 12.0
12 ........................................................................................... 619 12.0 9.0 9.0 6.7 21.0 15.0
916 ......................................................................................... 619 15.0 11.0 11.0 8.5 26.0 20.0
58 ........................................................................................... 619 19.0 14.0 14.0 10.0 32.0 24.0
34 ........................................................................................... 619 27.0 20.0 20.0 15.0 46.0 35.0
78 ........................................................................................... 619 36.0 27.0 27.0 20.0 62.0 47.0
1 ............................................................................................ 619 47.0 35.0 35.0 26.0 81.0 61.0
1 These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 20 or greater where: D=Diameter of curvature around which the body of the
sling is bent; d=Diameter of component rope.
589
TABLE N1847RATED CAPACITIES FOR 2-LEG AND 3-LEG BRIDLE SLINGS

619 and 637 Classification Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope With Fiber Core (FC)
2-Leg bridle slings 3-Leg bridle slings

Dia Constr 30 (60) 45 angle 60 (30) 30 (60) 45 angle 60 (30)
(in.)
HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS
14 619 0.85 0.83 0.70 0.72 0.49 0.51 1.3 1.3 1.0 1.1 0.74 0.76

5 16 619 1.3 1.4 1.1 1.1 0.76 0.79 2.0 2.0 1.6 1.7 1.1 1.2
38 619 1.8 1.9 1.5 1.6 1.1 1.1 2.8 2.9 2.3 2.4 1.6 1.7

7 16 619 2.5 2.6 2.0 2.2 1.4 1.5 3.7 4.0 3.0 3.2 2.1 2.3
12 619 3.2 3.4 2.6 2.8 1.8 2.0 4.8 5.1 3.9 4.2 2.8 3.0

9 16 619 4.0 4.3 3.2 3.5 2.3 2.5 6.0 6.5 4.9 5.3 3.4 3.7

58 619 4.8 5.3 4.0 4.4 2.8 3.1 7.3 8.0 5.9 6.5 4.2 4.6

34 619 6.8 7.6 5.5 6.2 3.9 4.4 10.0 11.0 8.3 9.3 5.8 6.6

78 619 8.9 10.0 7.3 8.4 5.1 5.9 13.0 15.0 11.0 13.0 7.7 8.9
1 619 11.0 13.0 9.4 11.0 6.7 7.7 17.0 20.0 14.0 16.0 10.0 11.0
118 619 14.0 16.0 12.0 13.0 8.4 9.3 22.0 24.0 18.0 20.0 13.0 14.0
114 637 17.0 19.0 14.0 16.0 9.8 11.0 25.0 29.0 21.0 23.0 15.0 17.0
138 637 20.0 23.0 17.0 19.0 12.0 13.0 31.0 35.0 25.0 28.0 18.0 20.0
112 637 24.0 27.0 20.0 22.0 14.0 16.0 36.0 41.0 30.0 33.0 21.0 24.0
158 637 28.0 32.0 23.0 26.0 16.0 18.0 43.0 48.0 35.0 39.0 25.0 28.0
134 637 33.0 37.0 27.0 30.0 19.0 21.0 49.0 56.0 40.0 45.0 28.0 32.0
2 637 43.0 48.0 35.0 39.0 25.0 28.0 64.0 72.0 52.0 59.0 37.0 41.0
HT=Hand Tucked Splice. MS=Mechanical Splice.

619 and 637 Classification Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope With Independent Wire Rope Core (IWRC)

(in.)
HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS
14 619 0.92 0.97 0.75 0.79 0.53 0.56 1.4 1.4 1.1 1.2 0.79 0.84

5 16 619 1.4 1.5 1.1 1.2 0.81 0.87 2.1 2.3 1.7 1.8 1.2 1.3
38 619 2.0 2.1 1.6 1.8 1.1 1.2 3.0 3.2 2.4 2.6 1.7 1.9

7 16 619 2.7 2.9 2.2 2.4 1.5 1.7 4.0 4.4 3.3 3.6 2.3 2.5
12 619 3.4 3.8 2.8 3.1 2.0 2.2 5.1 5.7 4.2 4.6 3.0 3.3

9 16 619 4.3 4.8 3.5 3.9 2.5 2.7 6.4 7.1 5.2 5.8 3.7 4.1

58 619 5.2 5.9 4.2 4.8 3.0 3.4 7.8 8.8 6.4 7.2 4.5 5.1

34 619 7.3 8.4 5.9 6.9 4.2 4.9 11.0 13.0 8.9 10.0 6.3 7.3

78 619 9.6 11.0 7.8 9.3 5.5 6.6 14.0 17.0 12.0 14.0 8.3 9.9
1 619 12.0 15.0 10.0 12.0 7.2 8.5 19.0 22.0 15.0 18.0 11.0 13.0
118 619 16.0 18.0 13.0 15.0 9.0 10.0 23.0 27.0 19.0 22.0 13.0 16.0
114 637 18.0 21.0 15.0 17.0 10.0 12.0 27.0 32.0 22.0 26.0 16.0 18.0
138 637 22.0 25.0 18.0 21.0 13.0 15.0 33.0 38.0 27.0 31.0 19.0 22.0
112 637 26.0 30.0 21.0 25.0 15.0 17.0 39.0 45.0 32.0 37.0 23.0 26.0
158 637 31.0 35.0 25.0 29.0 18.0 20.0 46.0 53.0 38.0 43.0 27.0 31.0
134 637 35.0 41.0 29.0 33.0 20.0 24.0 53.0 61.0 43.0 50.0 31.0 35.0
2 637 46.0 53.0 37.0 43.0 26.0 30.0 68.0 79.0 56.0 65.0 40.0 46.0
HT=Hand Tucked Splice. MS=Mechanical Splice.

777 and 7719 Constructions Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope
2-Leg bridle sling 3-Leg bridle sling

Dia (inches) Constr 30 45 60 30 45 60
(60) angle (30) (60) angle (30)
...................................
14 777 ......................................................... 0.87 0.71 0.50 1.3 1.1 0.75
590
TABLE N1849RATED CAPACITIES FOR 2-LEG AND 3-LEG BRIDLE SLINGSContinued

777 and 7719 Constructions Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope
2-Leg bridle sling 3-Leg bridle sling

Dia (inches) Constr 30 45 60 30 45 60
(60) angle (30) (60) angle (30)
...................................
38 777 ......................................................... 1.9 1.5 1.1 2.8 2.3 1.6
...................................
12 777 ......................................................... 3.2 2.6 1.8 4.8 3.9 2.8
...................................
58 777 ......................................................... 4.8 3.9 2.8 7.2 5.9 4.2
34 ................................... 777 ......................................................... 6.6 5.4 3.8 9.9 8.1 3.7
58 ................................... 7719 ....................................................... 5.0 4.1 2.9 7.5 6.1 4.3
34 ................................... 7719 ....................................................... 7.0 5.7 4.1 10.0 8.6 6.1
78 ................................... 7719 ....................................................... 9.3 7.6 5.4 14.0 11.0 8.1
1 .................................... 7719 ....................................................... 12.0 9.7 6.9 18.0 14.0 10.0
118 ................................. 7719 ....................................................... 14.0 12.0 8.2 21.0 17.0 12.0
114 ................................. 7719 ....................................................... 17.0 14.0 9.9 26.0 21.0 15.0
34 ................................... 7619 IWRC ............................................ 6.6 5.4 3.8 9.9 8.0 5.7
78 ................................... 7619 IWRC ............................................ 8.7 7.1 5.0 13.0 11.0 7.5
1 .................................... 7619 IWRC ............................................ 11.0 9.0 6.4 17.0 13.0 9.6
118 ................................. 7619 IWRC ............................................ 13.0 11.0 7.7 20.0 16.0 11.0
114 ................................. 7619 IWRC ............................................ 16.0 13.0 9.2 24.0 20.0 14.0
1516 ............................... 7619 IWRC ............................................ 17.0 14.0 10.0 26.0 21.0 15.0
138 ................................. 7619 IWRC ............................................ 19.0 15.0 11.0 28.0 23.0 16.0
112 ................................. 7619 IWRC ............................................ 22.0 18.0 13.0 33.0 27.0 19.0

8-Part and 6-Part Braided Rope
67 and 619 Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope

(in.)
8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part

3 32 67 0.74 0.55 0.60 0.45 0.42 0.32 1.1 0.83 0.90 0.68 0.64 0.48
18 67 1.3 0.98 1.1 0.80 0.76 0.57 2.0 1.5 1.6 1.2 1.1 0.85

3 16 67 2.9 2.2 2.4 1.8 1.7 1.3 4.4 3.3 3.6 2.7 2.5 1.9

3 32 77 0.89 0.67 0.72 0.55 0.51 0.39 1.3 1.0 1.1 0.82 0.77 0.58
18 77 1.6 1.2 1.3 1.0 0.95 0.71 2.5 1.8 2.0 1.5 1.4 1.1

3 16 77 3.6 2.7 2.9 2.2 2.1 1.5 5.4 4.0 4.4 3.3 3.1 2.3

3 16 619 3.0 2.2 2.4 1.8 1.7 1.3 4.5 3.4 3.7 2.8 2.6 1.9
14 619 5.3 4.0 4.3 3.2 3.1 2.3 8.0 6.0 6.5 4.9 4.6 3.4

5 16 619 8.3 6.2 6.7 5.0 4.8 3.6 12.0 9.3 10.0 7.6 7.1 5.4
38 619 12.0 8.9 9.7 7.2 6.8 5.1 18.0 13.0 14.0 11.0 10.0 7.7

7 16 619 16.0 12.0 13.0 9.8 9.3 6.9 24.0 18.0 20.0 15.0 14.0 10.0
12 619 21.0 15.0 17.0 13.0 12.0 9.0 31.0 23.0 25.0 19.0 18.0 13.0

9 16 619 26.0 20.0 21.0 16.0 15.0 11.0 39.0 29.0 32.0 24.0 23.0 17.0
58 619 32.0 24.0 26.0 20.0 10.0 14.0 48.0 36.0 40.0 30.0 28.0 21.0
34 619 46.0 35.0 38.0 28.0 27.0 20.0 69.0 52.0 56.0 42.0 40.0 30.0
78 619 62.0 47.0 51.0 38.0 36.0 27.0 94.0 70.0 76.0 57.0 54.0 40.0
1 619 81.0 61.0 66.0 50.0 47.0 35.0 122.0 91.0 99.0 74.0 70.0 53.0
591
TABLE N18411RATED CAPACITIES FOR TABLE N18413RATED CAPACITIES FOR

STRAND LAID GROMMETHAND TUCKED STRAND LAID ENDLESS SLINGSMECHANICAL
Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope JOINTContinued
Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
Rope body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb)
Dia Vertical
Constr Vertical Choker
(inches) basket 1 Dia Vertical
(inches) basket 1
14 719 0.85 0.64 1.7

5 16 719 1.3 1.0 2.6 1 2 619 14.0 10.0 28.0
38 719 1.9 1.4 3.8 118 2 619 18.0 13.0 35.0

7 16 719 2.6 1.9 5.2 114 2 637 21.0 15.0 41.0
12 719 3.3 2.5 6.7 138 2 637 25.0 19.0 50.0

9 16 719 4.2 3.1 8.4 112 2 637 29.0 22.0 59.0
58 719 5.2 3.9 10.0
1 These
values only apply when the D/d ratio is 5 or greater
34 719 7.4 5.6 15.0
78 719 10.0 7.5 20.0 where: D=Diameter of curvature around which rope is bent.
d=Diameter of rope body.
1 719 13.0 9.7 26.0 2 IWRC.
118 719 16.0 12.0 32.0
114 737 18.0 14.0 37.0
138 737 22.0 16.0 44.0 TABLE N18414RATED CAPACITIES FOR
112 737 26.0 19.0 52.0 CABLE LAID ENDLESS SLINGSMECHANICAL
1 These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 5 or greater JOINT
where: D=Diameter of curvature around which rope is bent. 777 and 7719 Constructions Galvanized Aircraft Grade
d=Diameter of rope body. Rope
TABLE N18412RATED CAPACITIES FOR
CABLE LAID GROMMETHAND TUCKED Cable body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb)
767 and 7619 Constructions Improved Plow Steel Grade Dia Vertical
Rope Constr Vertical Choker
(inches) basket 1
14 777 0.83 0.62 1.6
Cable body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb)
38 777 1.8 1.3 3.5
12 777 3.0 2.3 6.1
Dia Vertical 58 777 4.5 3.4 9.1
(inches) basket 1 34 777 6.3 4.7 12.0
58 7719 4.7 3.5 9.5
38 767 1.3 0.95 2.5 34 7719 6.7 5.0 13.0

9 16 767 2.8 2.1 5.6 78 7719 8.9 6.6 18.0

58 767 3.8 2.8 7.6 1 7719 11.0 8.5 22.0
38 777 1.6 1.2 3.2 118 7719 14.0 10.0 28.0
916 777 3.5 2.6 6.9 114 7719 17.0 12.0 33.0
58 777 4.5 3.4 9.0 34 2 7619 6.2 4.7 12.0
58 7619 3.9 3.0 7.9 78 2 7619 8.3 6.2 16.0
34 7619 5.1 3.8 10.0 1 2 7619 10.0 7.9 21.0
1516 1 8
1 2 7619 13.0 9.7 26.0
7619 7.9 5.9 16.0
114 2 7619 16.0 12.0 31.0
1 8
1 7619 11.0 8.4 22.0
138 2 7619 18.0 14.0 37.0
1516 7619 15.0 11.0 30.0
112 2 7619 22.0 16.0 43.0
112 7619 19.0 14.0 39.0
11116 7619 24.0 18.0 49.0 1 These values only apply when the D/d value is 5 or great-
178 7619 30.0 22.0 60.0 er where: D=Diameter of curvature around which cable body
214 7619 42.0 31.0 84.0 is bent. d=Diameter of cable body.
2 IWRC.
258 7619 56.0 42.0 112.0
1 These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 5 or greater
(5) Removal from service. Wire rope
where: D=Diameter of curvature around which cable body is
bent. d=Diameter of cable body. slings shall be immediately removed
from service if any of the following
TABLE N18413RATED CAPACITIES FOR conditions are present:
STRAND LAID ENDLESS SLINGSMECHANICAL (i) Ten randomly distributed broken
JOINT wires in one rope lay, or five broken
Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope wires in one strand in one rope lay.
(ii) Wear or scraping of one-third the
original diameter of outside individual
Dia Constr Vertical Choker Vertical wires.
(inches) basket 1
(iii) Kinking, crushing, bird caging or

14 2 619 0.92 0.69 1.8 any other damage resulting in distor-

38 2 619 2.0 1.5 4.1
2 619
tion of the wire rope structure.

12 3.6 2.7 7.2
58 2 619 5.6 4.2 11.0
(iv) Evidence of heat damage.
34 2 619 8.0 6.0 16.0 (v) End attachments that are
78 2 619 11.0 8.1 21.0 cracked, deformed or worn.
592
(vi) Hooks that have been opened (8) Repairs. (i) Metal mesh slings
more than 15 percent of the normal which are repaired shall not be used
throat opening measured at the nar- unless repaired by a metal mesh sling
rowest point or twisted more than 10 manufacturer or an equivalent entity.
degrees from the plane of the unbent (ii) Once repaired, each sling shall be
hook. permanently marked or tagged, or a
(vii) Corrosion of the rope or end at- written record maintained, to indicate
tachments. the date and nature of the repairs and
(g) Metal mesh slings(1) Sling mark- the person or organization that per-
ing. Each metal mesh sling shall have formed the repairs. Records of repairs
permanently affixed to it a durable shall be made available for examina-
marking that states the rated capacity tion.
for vertical basket hitch and choker (9) Removal from service. Metal mesh
hitch loadings. slings shall be immediately removed
(2) Handles. Handles shall have a from service if any of the following
rated capacity at least equal to the conditions are present:
metal fabric and exhibit no deforma- (i) A broken weld or broken brazed
tion after proof testing. joint along the sling edge.
(3) Attachments of handles to fabric. (ii) Reduction in wire diameter of 25
The fabric and handles shall be joined per cent due to abrasion or 15 per cent
so that: due to corrosion.
(i) The rated capacity of the sling is (iii) Lack of flexibility due to distor-
not reduced. tion of the fabric.
(ii) The load is evenly distributed
across the width of the fabric. TABLE N18415RATED CAPACITIES
(iii) Sharp edges will not damage the Carbon Steel and Stainless Steel Metal Mesh Slings
fabric.
(4) Sling coatings. Coatings which di- Effect of angle on rated ca-
Sling
minish the rated capacity of a sling width Vertical Vertical pacities in basket hitch
or chok-
shall not be applied. in er basket 30 45 60
inches
(5) Sling testing. All new and repaired (60) (45) (30)
metal mesh slings, including handles, Heavy Duty10 Ga 35 Spirals/Ft of sling width
shall not be used unless proof tested by
the manufacturer or equivalent entity 2 1,500 3,000 2,600 2,100 1,500
at a minimum of 112 times their rated 3 2,700 5,400 4,700 3,800 2,700
capacity. Elastomer impregnated 4 4,000 8,000 6,900 5,600 4,000
6 6,000 12,000 10,400 8,400 6,000
slings shall be proof tested before coat- 8 8,000 16,000 13,800 11,300 8,000
ing. 10 10,000 20,000 17,000 14,100 10,000
(6) Proper use of metal mesh slings. 12 12,000 24,000 20,700 16,900 12,000
14 14,000 28,000 24,200 19,700 14,000
Metal mesh slings shall not be used to 16 16,000 32,000 27,700 22,600 16,000
lift loads in excess of their rated capac- 18 18,000 36,000 31,100 25,400 18,000
ities as prescribed in Table N18415. 20 20,000 40,000 34,600 28,200 20,000
Slings not included in this table shall
Medium Duty12 Ga 43 Spirals/Ft of sling width
be used only in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations. 2 1,350 2,700 2,300 1,900 1,400
(7) Safe operating temperatures. Metal 3 2,000 4,000 3,500 2,800 2,000
mesh slings which are not impregnated 4 2,700 5,400 4,700 3,800 2,700
with elastomers may be used in a tem- 6 4,500 9,000 7,800 6,400 4,500
8 6,000 12,000 10,400 8,500 6,000
perature range from minus 20 F to 10 7,500 15,000 13,000 10,600 7,500
plus 550 F without decreasing the 12 9,000 18,000 15,600 12,700 9,000
working load limit. Metal mesh slings 14 10,500 21,000 18,200 14,800 10,500
16 12,000 24,000 20,800 17,000 12,000
impregnated with polyvinyl chloride or 18 13,500 27,000 23,400 19,100 13,500
neoprene may be used only in a tem- 20 15,000 30,000 26,000 21,200 15,000
perature range from zero degrees to
plus 200 F. For operations outside Light Duty14 Ga 59 Spirals/Ft of sling width
these temperature ranges or for metal
2 900 1,800 1,600 1,300 900
mesh slings impregnated with other 3 1,400 2,800 2,400 2,000 1,400
materials, the sling manufacturers 4 2,000 4,000 3,500 2,800 2,000
recommendations shall be followed. 6 3,000 6,000 5,200 4,200 3,000
593
TABLE N18415RATED CAPACITIES (vi) A 15 percent reduction of the

Continued original cross sectional area of metal
Carbon Steel and Stainless Steel Metal Mesh Slings at any point around the handle eye.
[Horizontal angles shown in parentheses] (vii) Distortion of either handle out
Effect of angle on rated ca- of its plane.
Sling Vertical pacities in basket hitch (h) Natural and synthetic fiber rope
width Vertical
or chok-
in basket slings(1) Sling use. (i) Fiber rope
er 30 45 60
inches (60) (45) (30) slings made from conventional three
8 4,000 8,000 6,900 5,700 4,000 strand construction fiber rope shall not
10 5,000 10,000 8,600 7,100 5,000 be used with loads in excess of the
12 6,000 12,000 10,400 8,500 6,000
14 7,000 14,000 12,100 9,900 7,000
rated capacities prescribed in Tables
16 8,000 16,000 13,900 11,300 8,000 N18416 through N18419.
18 9,000 18,000 15,600 12,700 9,000 (ii) Fiber rope slings shall have a di-
20 10,000 20,000 17,300 14,100 10,000
ameter of curvature meeting at least
(iv) Distortion of the female handle the minimums specified in Figs. N184
so that the depth of the slot is in- 4 and N1845.
creased more than 10 per cent. (iii) Slings not included in these ta-
(v) Distortion of either handle so bles shall be used only in accordance
that the width of the eye is decreased with the manufacturers recommenda-
more than 10 per cent. tions.
594
595
EC27OC91.048</GPH>
596
EC27OC91.049</GPH>
VerDate Aug<2,>2002
08:14 Aug 03, 2002

TABLE N18416MANILA ROPE SLINGS
[Angle of rope to vertical shown in parentheses]
Eye and eye sling Endless sling

Nominal
Jkt 197107
Rope dia. wt. per 100

nominal in Basket hitch; Angle of rope to horizontal Basket hitch; Angle of rope to horizontal
ft in Vertical Choker Vertical Choker
inches
pounds hitch hitch hitch hitch
90 (0) 60 (30) 45 (45) 30 (60) 90 (0) 60 (30) 45 (45) 30 (60)
12 7.5 480 240 960 830 680 480 865 430 1,730 1,500 1,220 865
PO 00000
9 16
10.4 620 310 1,240 1,070 875 620 1,120 560 2,230 1,930 1,580 1,120
58 13.3 790 395 1,580 1,370 1,120 790 1,420 710 2,840 2,460 2,010 1,420
34 16.7 970 485 1,940 1,680 1,370 970 1,750 875 3,490 3,020 2,470 1,750
13 16
19.5 1,170 585 2,340 2,030 1,650 1,170 2,110 1,050 4,210 3,650 2,980 2,110
78 22.5 1,390 695 2,780 2,410 1,970 1,390 2,500 1,250 5,000 4,330 3,540 2,500
1 27.0 1,620 810 3,240 2,810 2,290 1,620 2,920 1,460 5,830 5,050 4,120 2,920
Frm 00597
1116 31.3 1,890 945 3,780 3,270 2,670 1,890 3,400 1,700 6,800 5,890 4,810 3,400
118 36.0 2,160 1,080 4,320 3,740 3,050 2,160 3,890 1,940 7,780 6,730 5,500 3,890
114 41.7 2,430 1,220 4,860 4,210 3,440 2,430 4,370 2,190 8,750 7,580 6,190 4,370
1516 47.9 2,700 1,350 5,400 4,680 3,820 2,700 4,860 2,430 9,720 8,420 6,870 4,860
112 59.9 3,330 1,670 6,660 5,770 4,710 3,330 5,990 3,000 12,000 10,400 8,480 5,990
Fmt 8010
158 74.6 4,050 2,030 8,100 7,010 5,730 4,050 7,290 3,650 14,600 12,600 10,300 7,290
134 89.3 4,770 2,390 9,540 8,260 6,740 4,770 8,590 4,290 17,200 14,900 12,100 8,590
2 107.5 5,580 2,790 11,200 9,660 7,890 5,580 10,000 5,020 20,100 17,400 14,200 10,000
218 125.0 6,480 3,240 13,000 11,200 9,160 6,480 11,700 5,830 23,300 2,0,200 16,500 11,700
597
1
2 4 146.0 7,380 3,690 14,800 12,800 10,400 7,380 13,300 6,640 26,600 23,000 18,800 13,300
Sfmt 8010
212 166.7 8,370 4,190 16,700 14,500 11,800 8,370 15,100 7,530 30,100 26,100 21,300 15,100
258 190.8 9,360 4,680 18,700 16,200 13,200 9,360 16,800 8,420 33,700 29,200 23,800 16,800
See Figs. N1844 and N1845 for sling configuration descriptions.
TABLE N18417NYLON ROPE SLINGS

Y:\SGML\197107T.XXX

Nominal
inches pounds hitch hitch hitch hitch
90 (0) 60 (30) 45 (45) 30 (60) 90 (0) 60 (30) 45 (45) 30 (60)
12 6.5 635 320 1,270 1,100 900 635 1,140 570 2,290 1,980 1,620 1,140
9 16
8.3 790 395 1,580 1,370 1,120 790 1,420 710 2,840 2,460 2,010 1,420
58 10.5 1,030 515 2,060 1,780 1,460 1,030 1,850 925 3,710 3,210 2,620 1,850
pfrm72
34 14.5 1,410 705 2,820 2,440 1,990 1,410 2,540 1,270 5,080 4,400 3,590 2,540
13 16
17.0 1,680 840 3,360 2,910 2,380 1,680 3,020 1,510 6,050 5,240 4,280 3,020
1910.184
78 20.0 1,980 990 3,960 3,430 2,800 1,980 3,560 1,780 7,130 6,170 5,040 3,560
1 26.0 2,480 1,240 4,960 4,300 3,510 2,480 4,460 2,230 8,930 7,730 6,310 4,460
PsN: 197107T
1116 29.0 2,850 1,430 5,700 4,940 4,030 2,850 5,130 2,570 10,300 8,890 7,260 5,130
1
1 8 34.0 3,270 1,640 6,540 5,660 4,620 3,270 5,890 2,940 11,800 10,200 8,330 5,890
114 40.0 3,710 1,860 7,420 6,430 5,250 3,710 6,680 3,340 13,400 11,600 9,450 6,680
1516 45.0 4,260 2,130 8,520 7,380 6,020 4,260 7,670 3,830 15,300 13,300 10,800 7,670
VerDate Aug<2,>2002
08:14 Aug 03, 2002
1910.184
TABLE N18417NYLON ROPE SLINGSContinued

Nominal
Jkt 197107

90 (0) 60 (30) 45 (45) 30 (60) 90 (0) 60 (30) 45 (45) 30 (60)
12
1 55.0 5,250 2,630 10,500 9,090 7,420 5,250 9,450 4,730 18,900 16,400 13,400 9,450
PO 00000
158 68.0 6,440 3,220 12,900 11,200 9,110 6,440 11,600 5,800 23,200 20,100 16,400 11,600
134 83.0 7,720 3,860 15,400 13,400 10,900 7,720 13,900 6,950 27,800 24,100 19,700 13,900
2 95.0 9,110 4,560 18,200 15,800 12,900 9,110 16,400 8,200 32,800 28,400 23,200 16,400
218 109.0 10,500 5,250 21,000 18,200 14,800 10,500 18,900 9,450 37,800 32,700 26,700 18,900
1
2 4 129.0 12,400 6,200 24,800 21,500 17,500 12,400 22,300 11,200 44,600 38,700 31,600 22,300
Frm 00598
212 149.0 13,900 6,950 27,800 24,100 19,700 13,900 25,000 12,500 50,000 43,300 35,400 25,000
258 168.0 16,000 8,000 32,000 27,700 22,600 16,000 28,800 14,400 57,600 49,900 40,700 28,800
TABLE N18418POLYESTER ROPE SLINGS

Fmt 8010

598
Nominal
Sfmt 8010

90 (0) 60 (30) 45 (45) 30 (60) 90 (0) 60 (30) 45 (45) 30 (60)
12 8.0 635 320 1,270 1,100 900 635 1,140 570 2,290 1,980 1,620 1,140

9 16
10.2 790 395 1,580 1,370 1,120 790 1,420 710 2,840 2,460 2,010 1,420
Y:\SGML\197107T.XXX
58 13.0 990 495 1,980 1,710 1,400 990 1,780 890 3,570 3,090 2,520 1,780
34 17.5 1,240 620 2,480 2,150 1,750 1,240 2,230 1,120 4,470 3,870 3,160 2,230
13 16
21.0 1,540 770 3,080 2,670 2,180 1,540 2,770 1,390 5,540 4,800 3,920 2,770
78 25.0 1,780 890 3,560 3,080 2,520 1,780 3,200 1,600 6,410 5,550 4,530 3,200
1 30.5 2,180 1,090 4,360 3,780 3,080 2,180 3,920 2,960 7,850 6,800 5,550 3,920
1 16
1 34.5 2,530 1,270 5,060 4,380 3,580 2,530 4,550 2,280 9,110 7,990 6,440 4,550
118 40.0 2,920 1,460 5,840 5,060 4,130 2,920 5,260 2,630 10,500 9,100 7,440 5,260
114 46.3 3,290 1,650 6,580 5,700 4,650 3,290 5,920 2,960 11,800 10,300 8,380 5,920
1516 52.5 3,710 1,860 7,420 6,430 5,250 3,710 6,680 3,340 13,400 11,600 9,450 6,680
112 66.8 4,630 2,320 9,260 8,020 6,550 4,630 8,330 4,170 16,700 14,400 11,800 8,330
158 82.0 5,640 2,820 11,300 9,770 7,980 5,640 10,200 5,080 20,300 17,600 14,400 10,200
pfrm72
134 98.0 6,710 3,360 13,400 11,600 9,490 6,710 12,100 6,040 24,200 20,900 17,100 12,100
2 118.0 7,920 3,960 15,800 13,700 11,200 7,920 14,300 7,130 28,500 24,700 20,200 14,300
218 135.0 9,110 4,460 18,200 15,800 12,900 9,110 16,400 8,200 32,800 28,400 23,200 16,400
PsN: 197107T
214 157.0 10,600 5,300 21,200 18,400 15,000 10,600 19,100 9,540 38,200 33,100 27,000 19,100
212 181.0 12,100 6,050 24,200 21,000 17,100 12,100 21,800 10,900 43,600 37,700 30,800 21,800
258 205.0 13,600 6,800 27,200 23,600 19,200 13,600 24,500 12,200 49,000 42,400 34,600 24,500
VerDate Aug<2,>2002
08:14 Aug 03, 2002

TABLE N18419POLYPROPYLENE ROPE SLINGS
Rope Eye and eye sling Endless sling

Jkt 197107
Nominal
dia. wt. per
nominal Basket hitch; Angle of rope to horizontal Basket hitch; Angle of rope to horizontal
100 ft in Vertical Choker Vertical
in Choker hitch
pounds hitch hitch hitch
inches 90 (0) 60 (30) 45 (45) 30 (60) 90 (0) 60 (30) 45 (45) 30 (60)
12 4.7 645 325 1,290 1,120 910 645 1,160 580 2,320 2,010 1,640 1,160
PO 00000
9 16
6.1 780 390 1,560 1,350 1,100 780 1,400 700 2,810 2,430 1,990 1,400
58 7.5 950 475 1,900 1,650 1,340 950 1,710 855 3,420 2,960 2,420 1,710
34 10.7 1,300 650 2,600 2,250 1,840 1,300 2,340 1,170 4,680 4,050 3,310 2,340
13 16
12.7 1,520 760 3,040 2,630 2,150 1,520 2,740 1,370 5,470 4,740 3,870 2,740
78 15.0 1,760 880 3,520 3,050 2,490 1,760 3,170 1,580 6,340 5,490 4,480 3,170
Frm 00599
1 18.0 2,140 1,070 4,280 3,700 3,030 2,140 3,850 1,930 7,700 6,670 5,450 3,860
1 16
1 20.4 2,450 1,230 4,900 4,240 3,460 2,450 4,410 2,210 8,820 7,640 6,240 4,410
118 23.7 2,800 1,400 5,600 4,850 3,960 2,800 5,040 2,520 10,100 8,730 7,130 5,400
114 27.0 3,210 1,610 6,420 5,560 4,540 3,210 5,780 2,890 11,600 10,000 8,170 5,780
1516 30.5 3,600 1,800 7,200 6,240 5,090 3,600 6,480 3,240 13,000 11,200 9,170 6,480
Fmt 8010
112 38.5 4,540 2,270 9,080 7,860 6,420 4,540 8,170 4,090 16,300 14,200 11,600 8,170
158 47.5 5,510 2,760 11,000 9,540 7,790 5,510 9,920 4,960 19,800 17,200 14,000 9,920
599
134 57.0 6,580 3,290 13,200 11,400 9,300 6,580 11,800 5,920 23,700 20,500 16,800 11,800
2 69.0 7,960 3,980 15,900 13,800 11,300 7,960 14,300 7,160 28,700 24,800 20,300 14,300
Sfmt 8010
218 80.0 9,330 4,670 18,700 16,200 13,200 9,330 16,800 8,400 33,600 29,100 23,800 16,800
214 92.0 10,600 5,300 21,200 18,400 15,000 10,600 19,100 9,540 38,200 33,100 27,000 19,100
212 107.0 12,200 6,100 24,400 21,100 17,300 12,200 22,000 11,000 43,900 38,000 31,100 22,000
258 120.0 13,800 6,900 27,600 23,900 19,600 13,800 24,800 12,400 49,700 43,000 35,100 24,800
Y:\SGML\197107T.XXX

pfrm72
1910.184
PsN: 197107T
(2) Safe operating temperatures. Nat- contact with the rope have sharp edges
ural and synthetic fiber rope slings, ex- or projections.
cept for wet frozen slings, may be used (5) Removal from service. Natural and
in a temperature range from minus 20 synthetic fiber rope slings shall be im-
F to plus 180 F without decreasing the mediately removed from service if any
working load limit. For operations out- of the following conditions are present:
side this temperature range and for wet (i) Abnormal wear.
frozen slings, the sling manufacturers (ii) Powdered fiber between strands.
recommendations shall be followed. (iii) Broken or cut fibers.
(3) Splicing. Spliced fiber rope slings (iv) Variations in the size or round-
shall not be used unless they have been ness of strands.
spliced in accordance with the fol- (v) Discoloration or rotting.
lowing minimum requirements and in (vi) Distortion of hardware in the
accordance with any additional rec- sling.
ommendations of the manufacturer: (6) Repairs. Only fiber rope slings
(i) In manila rope, eye splices shall made from new rope shall be used. Use
consist of at least three full tucks, and of repaired or reconditioned fiber rope
short splices shall consist of at least slings is prohibited.
six full tucks, three on each side of the (i) Synthetic web slings(1) Sling iden-
splice center line. tification. Each sling shall be marked or
(ii) In synthetic fiber rope, eye coded to show the rated capacities for
splices shall consist of at least four full each type of hitch and type of syn-
tucks, and short splices shall consist of thetic web material.
at least eight full tucks, four on each (2) Webbing. Synthetic webbing shall
side of the center line. be of uniform thickness and width and
(iii) Strand end tails shall not be selvage edges shall not be split from
trimmed flush with the surface of the the webbings width.
rope immediately adjacent to the full (3) Fittings. Fittings shall be:
tucks. This applies to all types of fiber (i) Of a minimum breaking strength
rope and both eye and short splices. equal to that of the sling; and
For fiber rope under one inch in diame- (ii) Free of all sharp edges that could
ter, the tail shall project at least six in any way damage the webbing.
rope diameters beyond the last full (4) Attachment of end fittings to web-
tuck. For fiber rope one inch in diame- bing and formation of eyes. Stitching
ter and larger, the tail shall project at shall be the only method used to at-
least six inches beyond the last full tach end fittings to webbing and to
tuck. Where a projecting tail interferes form eyes. The thread shall be in an
with the use of the sling, the tail shall even pattern and contain a sufficient
be tapered and spliced into the body of number of stitches to develop the full
the rope using at least two additional breaking strength of the sling.
tucks (which will require a tail length (5) Sling use. Synthetic web slings il-
of approximately six rope diameters lustrated in Fig. N1846 shall not be
beyond the last full tuck). used with loads in excess of the rated
(iv) Fiber rope slings shall have a capacities specified in Tables N18420
minimum clear length of rope between through N18422. Slings not included
eye splices equal to 10 times the rope in these tables shall be used only in ac-
diameter. cordance with the manufacturers rec-
(v) Knots shall not be used in lieu of ommendations.
splices. (6) Environmental conditions. When
(vi) Clamps not designed specifically synthetic web slings are used, the fol-
for fiber ropes shall not be used for lowing precautions shall be taken:
splicing. (i) Nylon web slings shall not be used
(vii) For all eye splices, the eye shall where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or
be of such size to provide an included liquids of acids or phenolics are
angle of not greater than 60 degrees at present.
the splice when the eye is placed over (ii) Polyester and polypropylene web
the load or support. slings shall not be used where fumes,
(4) End attachments. Fiber rope slings vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of
shall not be used if end attachments in caustics are present.
600
(iii) Web slings with aluminum fit- vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of
tings shall not be used where fumes, caustics are present.
EC27OC91.051</GPH>
601
EC27OC91.050</GPH>
VerDate Aug<2,>2002
08:14 Aug 03, 2002
1910.184
TABLE N18420SYNTHETIC WEB SLINGS1,000 POUNDS PER INCH OF WIDTHSINGLE-PLY
[Rated capacity in pounds]
TriangleChoker slings, type I: TriangleTriangle Endless slings, type V Return eye slings, type VI
Jkt 197107
slings, type II: Eye and eye with flat eye slings, type
III: Eye and eye with twisted eye slings, type IV
Sling body width, Vert. 30 45 60
inches Vert. 30 45 60 Chok-
45 Vert. Choker Vert. bas- bas- bas- bas-
Chok- Vert. 30 60 basket basket basket basket er
Vert. basket ket ket ket
er basket basket basket
ket
PO 00000
1 ................................. 1,000 750 2,000 1,700 1,400 1,000 1,600 1,300 3,200 2,800 2,300 1,600 800 650 1,600 1,400 1,150 800
2 ................................. 2,000 1,500 4,000 3,500 2,800 2,000 3,200 2,600 6,400 5,500 4,500 3,200 1,600 1,300 3,200 2,800 2,300 1,600
3 ................................. 3,000 2,200 6,000 5,200 4,200 3,000 4,800 3,800 9,600 8,300 6,800 4,800 2,400 1,950 4,800 4,150 3,400 2,400
4 ................................. 4,000 3,000 8,000 6,900 5,700 4,000 6,400 5,100 12,800 11,100 9,000 6,400 3,200 2,600 6,400 5,500 4,500 3,200
5 ................................. 5,000 3,700 10,000 8,700 7,100 5,000 8,000 6,400 16,000 13,900 11,300 8,000 4,000 3,250 8,000 6,900 5,650 4,000
Frm 00602
6 ................................. 6,000 4,500 12,000 10,400 8,500 6,000 9,600 7,700 19,200 16,600 13,600 9,600 4,800 3,800 9,600 8,300 6,800 4,800
NOTES: 1. All angles shown are measured from the vertical.
2. Capacities for intermediate widths not shown may be obtained by interpolation.

Fmt 8010
602
slings, type II: Eye and eye with flat eye slings, type III:
Sling body Eye and eye with twisted eye slings, type IV
Sfmt 8010
width, Vert. 30 45 60 Vert. 30 45 60

inches Vert. Choker Vert. Choker
Vert. 30 45 60 basket basket basket basket basket basket basket basket
Vert. Choker basket basket basket basket
1 ............... 1,200 900 2,400 2,100 1,700 1,200 1,900 1,500 3,800 3,300 2,700 1,900 950 750 1,900 1,650 1,350 950

Y:\SGML\197107T.XXX
2 ............... 2,400 1,800 4,800 4,200 3,400 2,400 3,800 3,000 7,600 6,600 5,400 3,800 1,900 1,500 3,800 3,300 2,700 1,900
3 ............... 3,600 2,700 7,200 6,200 5,100 3,600 5,800 4,600 11,600 10,000 8,200 5,800 2,850 2,250 5,700 4,950 4,050 2,850
4 ............... 4,800 3,600 9,600 8,300 6,800 4,800 7,700 6,200 15,400 13,300 10,900 7,700 3,800 3,000 7,600 6,600 5,400 3,800
5 ............... 6,000 4,500 12,000 10,400 8,500 6,000 9,600 7,700 19,200 16,600 13,600 9,600 4,750 3,750 9,500 8,250 6,750 4,750
6 ............... 7,200 5,400 14,400 12,500 10,200 7,200 11,500 9,200 23,000 19,900 16,300 11,500 5,800 4,600 11,600 10,000 8,200 5,800

pfrm72
slings, type II: Eye and eye with flat eye slings, type
Sling body III: Eye and eye with twisted eye slings, type IV
width, Vert. 30 45 60 Vert. 30 45 60
PsN: 197107T
inches Vert. Choker Vert. Choker

Chok- Vert. 30 45 60 basket basket basket basket basket basket basket basket
Vert. er basket basket basket basket
1 ................. 1,600 1,200 3,200 2,800 2,300 1,600 2,600 2,100 5,200 4,500 3,700 2,600 1,050 1,050 2,600 2,250 1,850 1,300
VerDate Aug<2,>2002
08:14 Aug 03, 2002

2 ................. 3,200 2,400 6,400 5,500 4,500 3,200 5,100 4,100 10,200 8,800 7,200 5,100 2,600 2,100 5,200 4,500 3,700 2,600
3 ................. 4,800 3,600 9,600 8,300 6,800 4,800 7,700 6,200 15,400 13,300 10,900 7,700 3,900 3,150 7,800 6,750 5,500 3,900
4 ................. 6,400 4,800 12,800 11,100 9,000 6,400 10,100 8,200 20,400 17,700 14,400 10,200 5,100 4,100 10,200 8,800 7,200 5,100
5 ................. 8,000 6,000 16,000 13,800 11,300 8,000 12,800 10,200 25,600 22,200 18,100 12,800 6,400 5,150 12,800 11,050 9,050 6,400
Jkt 197107
6 ................. 9,600 7,200 19,200 16,600 13,600 9,600 15,400 12,300 30,800 26,700 21,800 15,400 7,700 6,200 15,400 13,300 10,900 7,700
PO 00000
Frm 00603
Fmt 8010
603
Sfmt 8010
Y:\SGML\197107T.XXX
pfrm72
1910.184
PsN: 197107T
(7) Safe operating temperatures. Syn- ing, or forming is accomplished upon

thetic web slings of polyester and the stock.
nylon shall not be used at tempera- (2) Push stick means a narrow strip of
tures in excess of 180 F. Polypropylene wood or other soft material with a
web slings shall not be used at tem- notch cut into one end and which is
peratures in excess of 200 F. used to push short pieces of material
(8) Repairs. (i) Synthetic web slings through saws.
which are repaired shall not be used (3) Block means a short block of
unless repaired by a sling manufac- wood, provided with a handle similar to
turer or an equivalent entity. that of a plane and a shoulder at the
(ii) Each repaired sling shall be proof rear end, which is used for pushing
tested by the manufacturer or equiva- short stock over revolving cutters.
lent entity to twice the rated capacity (b) As used in 1910.215 unless the
prior to its return to service. The em- context clearly requires otherwise, the
ployer shall retain a certificate of the following abrasive wheel machinery
proof test and make it available for ex- terms shall have the meanings pre-
amination. scribed in this paragraph.
(iii) Slings, including webbing and (1) Type 1 straight wheels means
fittings, which have been repaired in a wheels having diameter, thickness, and
temporary manner shall not be used. hole size dimensions, and they should
(9) Removal from service. Synthetic be used only on the periphery. Type 1
web slings shall be immediately re- wheels shall be mounted between
moved from service if any of the fol- flanges.
lowing conditions are present:
LIMITATION: Hole dimension (H) should not
(i) Acid or caustic burns; be greater than two-thirds of wheel diameter
(ii) Melting or charring of any part of dimension (D) for precision, cylindrical,
the sling surface; centerless, or surface grinding applications.
(iii) Snags, punctures, tears or cuts; Maximum hole size for all other applications
(iv) Broken or worn stitches; or should not exceed one-half wheel diameter.
(v) Distortion of fittings.
FIGURE NO. 01.TYPE 1 STRAIGHT
[40 FR 27369, June 27, 1975, as amended at 40 WHEELS
FR 31598, July 28, 1975; 41 FR 13353, Mar. 30,
1976; 58 FR 35309, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9240,
Mar. 7, 1996]
Subpart OMachinery and

Machine Guarding
AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu- TYPE 1STRAIGHT WHEEL

pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labors Peripheral grinding wheel having a
Order No. 1271 (36 FR 8754), 876 (41 FR diameter, thickness and hole.
25059), 983 (48 FR 35736), or 190 (55 FR 9033),
as applicable; 29 CFR part 1911. (2) Type 2 cylinder wheels means
wheels having diameter, wheel thick-
1910.211 Definitions. ness, and rim thickness dimensions.
(a) As used in 1910.213 and 1910.214 Grinding is performed on the rim face
unless the context clearly requires oth- only, dimension W. Cylinder wheels
erwise, the following woodworking ma- may be plain, plate mounted, inserted
chinery terms shall have the meaning nut, or of the projecting stud type.
prescribed in this paragraph. LIMITATION: Rim height, T dimension, is
(1) Point of operations means that generally equal to or greater than rim thick-
point at which cutting, shaping, bor- ness, W dimension.
604
EC27OC91.052
FIGURE NO. 02.TYPE 2 CYLINDER thickness, hole size, rim and back
WHEELS thickness dimensions. Grinding is al-
ways performed on rim face, W dimen-
sion. Type 11 wheels are subject to all
limitations of use and mounting listed
for type 6 straight sided cup wheels def-
inition.
LIMITATION: Minimum back thickness, E
dimension, should not be less than one-
fourth T dimension. In addition when un-
threaded hole wheels are specified the inside
flat, K dimension, shall be large enough to
TYPE 2CYLINDER WHEEL accommodate a suitable flange.
Side grinding wheel having a diameter, thick-
ness and wallwheel is mounted on the diame- FIGURE NO. 04.TYPE 11 FLARING
ter. CUP WHEELS
(3) Type 6 straight cup wheels means
wheels having diameter, thickness,
hole size, rim thickness, and back
thickness dimensions. Grinding is al-
ways performed on rim face, W dimen-
sion.
LIMITATION: Minimum back thickness, E
dimension, should not be less than one-
fourth T dimension. In addition, when un-
threaded hole wheels are specified, the inside
flat, K dimension, must be large enough to
accommodate a suitable flange.
TYPE 11FLARING-CUP WHEEL
FIGURE NO. 03.TYPE 6 STRAIGHT Side grinding wheel having a wall flared or ta-
pered outward from the back. Wall thickness at
CUP WHEELS the back is normally greater than at the grind-
ing face (W).
(5) Modified types 6 and 11 wheels (ter-
razzo) mean some type 6 and 11 cup
wheels used in the terrazzo trade hav-
ing tapered K dimensions to match a
special tapered flange furnished by the
machine builder.
LIMITATION: These wheels shall be mounted
only with a special tapered flange.
FIGURE NO. 05
TYPE 6STRAIGHT-CUP WHEEL
Side grinding wheel having a diameter, thick-
ness and hole with one side straight or flat and
the opposite side recessed. This type, however,
differs from Type 5 in that the grinding is per-
formed on the wall of the abrasive created by
the difference between the diameter of the recess
and the outside diameter of the wheel. There-
fore, the wall dimension W takes precedence
Typical examples of modified types 6 and 11
EC27OC91.056
over the diameter of the recess as an essential

wheels (terrazzo) showing tapered K dimen-
intermediate dimension to describe this shape
sions.
type.
(6) Types 27 and 28 depressed center
EC27OC91.055
(4) Type 11 flaring cup wheels mean wheels mean wheels having diameter,
wheels having double diameter dimen- thickness, and hole size dimensions.
sions D and J, and in addition have Both types are reinforced, organic
EC27OC91.054
605
EC27OC91.053
bonded wheels having offset hubs which is broken in operation. See paragraph
permit side and peripheral grinding op- (b) of 1910.215.
erations without interference with the (13) Cutting off wheels means wheels
mounting. Type 27 wheels are manufac- having diameter thickness and hole
tured with flat grinding rims permit- size dimensions and are subject to all
ting notching and cutting operations. limitations of mounting and use listed
Type 28 wheels have saucer shaped for type 1 wheels, the definition in sub-
grinding rims. paragraph (1) of this paragraph and
(i) Limitations: Special supporting, paragraph (d) of 1910.215. They may be
back adapter and inside flange nuts are steel centered, diamond abrasive or or-
required for the proper mounting of ganic bonded abrasive of the plain or
these types of wheels subject to limita- reinforced type.
tions of 1910.215(c)(4) (i) and (ii). (i) Limitation: Cutting off wheels are
(ii) Mounts which are affixed to the recommended only for use on specially
wheel by the manufacturer may not re- designed and fully guarded machines
quire an inside nut and shall not be re- and are subject to the following max-
used. imum thickness and hole size limita-
(7) Type 27A depressed center, cutting- tions.
off wheels mean wheels having diame-
ter, thickness, and hole size dimen- Wheel diameter Max. thick-
ness (inch)
sions. They are reinforced, organic
bonded, offset hub type wheels, usually 6 inch and smaller ...............................................
3 18
16 inches diameter and larger, specially Larger than 6 inches to 12 inches ...................... 14
designed for use on cutting-off ma- Larger than 12 inches to 23 inches .................... 38
chines where mounting nut or outer Larger than 23 inches ......................................... 12
flange interference cannot be toler-
ated. (ii) Maximum hole size for cutting-off
wheels should not be larger than 14-
LIMITATIONS: See 1910.215(c)(1). wheel diameter.
(8) Surface feet per minute (s.f.p.m.) (14) Abrasive wheel means a cutting
means the distance in feet any one ab- tool consisting of abrasive grains held
rasive grain on the peripheral surface together by organic or inorganic bonds.
of a grinding wheel travels in 1 minute. Diamond and reinforced wheels are in-
cluded.
Surface Feet Per Minute= 3.1416diameter in
inchesr.p.m.12 or .262diameter in (15) Organic wheels means wheels
inchesr.p.m. which are bonded by means of an or-
ganic material such as resin, rubber,
Examples: (a) 24-inch diameter wheel, 1,000
revolutions per minute. Surface Feet per
shellac, or other similar bonding agent.
minute .262241,000=6,288 s.f.p.m. (16) Inorganic wheels means wheels
(b) 12-inch diameter wheel, 1,000 revolu- which are bonded by means of inor-
tions per minute. Surface Feet per minute ganic material such as clay, glass, por-
.262121,000=3,144 s.f.p.m. celain, sodium silicate, magnesium
(9) Flanges means collars, discs or oxychloride, or metal. Wheels bonded
plates between which wheels are with clay, glass, porcelain or related
mounted and are referred to as adap- ceramic materials are characterized as
tor, sleeve, or back up type. See para- vitrified bonded wheels.
graph (c) of 1910.215 for full descrip- (c) As used in 1910.216, unless the
tion. context clearly requires otherwise, the
(10) Snagging means grinding which following mills and calenders in the
removes relatively large amounts of rubber and plastic industries terms
material without regard to close toler- shall have the meanings prescribed in
ances or surface finish requirements. this paragraph.
(11) Off-hand grinding means the (1) Bite means the nip point between
grinding of any material or part which any two inrunning rolls.
is held in the operators hand. (2) Calender means a machine
(12) Safety guard means an enclosure equipped with two or more metal rolls
designed to restrain the pieces of the revolving in opposite directions and
grinding wheel and furnish all possible used for continuously sheeting or ply-
protection in the event that the wheel ing up rubber and plastics compounds
606
and for frictioning or coating materials (8) Concurrent means acting in con-
with rubber and plastics compounds. junction, and is used to describe a situ-
(3) Mill means a machine consisting ation wherein two or more controls
of two adjacent metal rolls, set hori- exist in an operated condition at the
zontally, which revolve in opposite di- same time.
rections (i.e., toward each other as (9) Continuous means uninterrupted
viewed from above) used for the me- multiple strokes of the slide without
chanical working of rubber and plastics intervening stops (or other clutch con-
compounds. trol action) at the end of individual
(d) As used in 1910.217, unless the strokes.
context clearly requires otherwise, the (10) Counterbalance means the mecha-
following power press terms shall have nism that is used to balance or support
the meaning prescribed in this para- the weight of the connecting rods,
graph. slide, and slide attachments.
(1) Antirepeat means the part of the (11) Device means a press control or
clutch/brake control system designed attachment that:
to limit the press to a single stroke if (i) Restrains the operator from inad-
the tripping means is held operated. vertently reaching into the point of op-
Antirepeat requires release of all trip- eration, or
ping mechanisms before another stroke (ii) Prevents normal press operation
if the operators hands are inadvert-
can be initiated. Antirepeat is also
ently within the point of operation, or
called single stroke reset or reset cir-
(iii) Automatically withdraws the op-
cuit.
erators hands if the operators hands
(2) Brake means the mechanism used
are inadvertently within the point of
on a mechanical power press to stop
operation as the dies close, or
and/or hold the crankshaft, either di-
(iv) Prevents the initiation of a
rectly or through a gear train, when
stroke, or stops of stroke in progress,
the clutch is disengaged.
when there is an intrusion through the
(3) Bolster plate means the plate at- sensing field by any part of the opera-
tached to the top of the bed of the tors body or by any other object.
press having drilled holes or T-slots for (12) Presence sensing device means a
attaching the lower die or die shoe. device designed, constructed and ar-
(4) Clutch means the coupling mecha- ranged to create a sensing field or area
nism used on a mechanical power press that signals the clutch/brake control to
to couple the flywheel to the crank- deactivate the clutch and activate the
shaft, either directly or through a gear brake of the press when any part of the
train. operators body or a hand tool is within
(5) Full revolution clutch means a type such field or area.
of clutch that, when tripped, cannot be (13) Gate or movable barrier device
disengaged until the crankshaft has means a movable barrier arranged to
completed a full revolution and the enclose the point of operation before
press slide a full stroke. the press stroke can be started.
(6) Part revolution clutch means a type (14) Holdout or restraint device means a
of clutch that can be disengaged at any mechanism, including attachments for
point before the crankshaft has com- operators hands, that when anchored
pleted a full revolution and the press and adjusted prevent the operators
slide a full stroke. hands from entering the point of oper-
(7) Direct drive means the type of ation.
driving arrangement wherein no clutch (15) Pull-out device means a mecha-
is used; coupling and decoupling of the nism attached to the operators hands
driving torque is accomplished by and connected to the upper die or slide
energization and deenergization of a of the press, that is designed, when
motor. Even though not employing a properly adjusted, to withdraw the op-
clutch, direct drives match the oper- erators hands as the dies close, if the
ational characteristics of part revolu- operators hands are inadvertently
tion clutches because the driving within the point of operation.
power may be disengaged during the (16) Sweep device means a single or
stroke of the press. double arm (rod) attached to the upper
607
die or slide of the press and designed to iliary means controlled by operator on
move the operators hands to a safe po- each stroke of the press.
sition as the dies close, if the opera- (29) Manual feeding means feeding
tors hands are inadvertently within wherein the material or part being
the point of operation. processed is handled by the operator on
(17) Two hand control device means a each stroke of the press.
two hand trip that further requires (30) Foot control means the foot oper-
concurrent pressure from both hands of ated control mechanism designed to be
the operator during a substantial part used with a clutch or clutch/brake con-
of the die-closing portion of the stroke trol system.
of the press. (31) Foot pedal means the foot oper-
(18) Die means the tooling used in a
ated lever designed to operate the me-
press for cutting or forming material.
chanical linkage that trips a full revo-
An upper and a lower die make a com-
lution clutch.
plete set.
(19) Die builder means any person who (32) Guard means a barrier that pre-
builds dies for power presses. vents entry of the operators hands or
(20) Die set means a tool holder held fingers into the point of operation.
in alignment by guide posts and bush- (33) Die enclosure guard means an en-
ings and consisting of a lower shoe, an closure attached to the die shoe or
upper shoe or punch holder, and guide stripper, or both, in a fixed position.
posts and bushings. (34) Fixed barrier guard means a die
(21) Die setter means an individual space barrier attached to the press
who places or removes dies in or from frame.
mechanical power presses, and who, as (35) Interlocked press barrier guard
a part of his duties, makes the nec- means a barrier attached to the press
essary adjustments to cause the tool- frame and interlocked so that the press
ing to function properly and safely. stroke cannot be started normally un-
(22) Die setting means the process of less the guard itself, or its hinged or
placing or removing dies in or from a movable sections, enclose the point of
mechanical power press, and the proc- operation.
ess of adjusting the dies, other tooling (36) Adjustable barrier guard means a
and safeguarding means to cause them barrier requiring adjustment for each
to function properly and safely. job or die setup.
(23) Die shoe means a plate or block (37) Guide post means the pin at-
upon which a die holder is mounted. A tached to the upper or lower die shoe
die shoe functions primarily as a base operating within the bushing on the
for the complete die assembly, and, opposing die shoe, to maintain the
when used, is bolted or clamped to the alignment of the upper and lower dies.
bolster plate or the face of slide.
(38) Hand feeding tool means any hand
(24) Ejector means a mechanism for
held tool designed for placing or re-
removing work or material from be-
tween the dies. moving material or parts to be proc-
(25) Face of slide means the bottom essed within or from the point of oper-
surface of the slide to which the punch ation.
or upper die is generally attached. (39) Inch means an intermittent mo-
(26) Feeding means the process of tion imparted to the slide (on machines
placing or removing material within or using part revolution clutches) by mo-
from the point of operation. mentary operation of the Inch oper-
(27) Automatic feeding means feeding ating means. Operation of the Inch op-
wherein the material or part being erating means engages the driving
processed is placed within or removed clutch so that a small portion of one
from the point of operation by a meth- stroke or indefinite stroking can occur,
od or means not requiring action by an depending upon the length of time the
operator on each stroke of the press. Inch operating means is held operated.
(28) Semiautomatic feeding means feed- Inch is a function used by the die setter
ing wherein the material or part being for setup of dies and tooling, but is not
processed is placed within or removed intended for use during production op-
from the point of operation by an aux- erations by the operator.
608
(40) Jog means an intermittent mo- (51) Slide means the main recipro-
tion imparted to the slide by momen- cating press member. A slide is also
tary operation of the drive motor, after called a ram, plunger, or platen.
the clutch is engaged with the flywheel (52) Stop control means an operator
at rest. control designed to immediately de-
(41) Knockout means a mechanism for activate the clutch control and acti-
releasing material from either die. vate the brake to stop slide motion.
(42) Liftout means the mechanism (53) Stripper means a mechanism or
also known as knockout. die part for removing the parts or ma-
(43) Operators station means the com- terial from the punch.
plete complement of controls used by (54) Stroking selector means the part of
or available to an operator on a given the clutch/brake control that deter-
operation for stroking the press. mines the type of stroking when the
(44) Pinch point means any point operating means is actuated. The
other than the point of operation at stroking selector generally includes
which it is possible for a part of the positions for Off (Clutch Control),
body to be caught between the moving Inch, Single Stroke, and Contin-
parts of a press or auxiliary equipment, uous (when Continuous is furnished).
or between moving and stationary (55) Trip or (tripping) means activa-
parts of a press or auxiliary equipment tion of the clutch to run the press.
or between the material and moving (56) Turnover bar means a bar used in
part or parts of the press or auxiliary die setting to manually turn the crank-
equipment. shaft of the press.
(45) Point of operation means the area (57) Two-hand trip means a clutch ac-
of the press where material is actually tuating means requiring the concur-
positioned and work is being performed rent use of both hands of the operator
during any process such as shearing, to trip the press.
punching, forming, or assembling. (58) Unitized tooling means a type of
(46) Press means a mechanically pow- die in which the upper and lower mem-
ered machine that shears, punches, bers are incorporated into a
forms or assembles metal or other ma- selfcontained unit so arranged as to
terial by means of cutting, shaping, or hold the die members in alignment.
combination dies attached to slides. A (59) Control system means sensors,
press consists of a stationary bed or manual input and mode selection ele-
anvil, and a slide (or slides) having a ments, interlocking and decision-mak-
controlled reciprocating motion to- ing circuitry, and output elements to
ward and away from the bed surface, the press operating mechanism.
the slide being guided in a definite (60) Brake monitor means a sensor de-
path by the frame of the press. signed, constructed, and arranged to
(47) Repeat means an unintended or monitor the effectiveness of the press
unexpected successive stroke of the braking system.
press resulting from a malfunction. (61) Presence sensing device initiation
(48) Safety block means a prop that, means an operating mode of indirect
when inserted between the upper and manual initiation of a single stroke by
lower dies or between the bolster plate a presence sensing device when it
and the face of the slide, prevents the senses that work motions of the oper-
slide from falling of its own dead- ator, related to feeding and/or remov-
weight. ing parts, are completed and all parts
(49) Single stroke means one complete of the operators body or hand tools are
stroke of the slide, usually initiated safely clear of the point of operation.
from a full open (or up) position, fol- (62) Safety system means the inte-
lowed by closing (or down), and then a grated total system, including the per-
return to the full open position. tinent elements of the press, the con-
(50) Single stroke mechanism means an trols, the safeguarding and any re-
arrangement used on a full revolution quired supplemental safeguarding, and
clutch to limit the travel of the slide their interfaces with the operator, and
to one complete stroke at each engage- the environment, designed, constructed
ment of the clutch. and arranged to operate together as a
609
unit, such that a single failure or sin- (1) Forging means the product of work
gle operating error will not cause in- on metal formed to a desired shape by
jury to personnel due to point of oper- impact or pressure in hammers, forging
ation hazards. machines (upsetters), presses, rolls,
(63) Authorized person means one to and related forming equipment. Forg-
whom the authority and responsibility ing hammers, counterblow equipment
to perform a specific assignment has and high-energy-rate forging machines
been given by the employer. impart impact to the workpiece, while
(64) Certification or certify means, in most other types of forging equipment
the case of design certification/valida- impart squeeze pressure in shaping the
tion, that the manufacturer has re- stock. Some metals can be forged at
viewed and tested the design and man- room temperature, but the majority of
ufacture, and in the case of installation metals are made more plastic for forg-
certification/validation and annual re- ing by heating.
certification/revalidation, that the em- (2) Open framehammers (or blacksmith
ployer has reviewed and tested the in- hammers) mean hammers used pri-
stallation, and concludes in both cases marily for the shaping of forgings by
that the requirements of 1910.217 (a) means of impact with flat dies. Open
through (h) and appendix A have been frame hammers generally are so con-
met. The certifications are made to the structed that the anvil assembly is sep-
validation organization. arate from the operating mechanism
(65) Validation or validate means for and machine supports; it rests on its
PSDI safety systems that an OSHA own independent foundation. Certain
recognized third-party validation orga- exceptions are forging hammers made
nization: with frame mounted on the anvil; e.g.,
(i) For design certification/validation the smaller, single-frame hammers are
has reviewed the manufacturers cer- usually made with the anvil and frame
tification that the PSDI safety system in one piece.
meets the requirements of 1910.217 (a) (3) Steam hammers mean a type of
through (h) and appendix A and the un- drop hammer where the ram is raised
derlying tests and analyses performed for each stroke by a double-action
by the manufacturer, has performed steam cylinder and the energy deliv-
additional tests and analyses which ered to the workpiece is supplied by
may be required by 1910.217 (a) the velocity and weight of the ram and
through (h) and appendix A, and con- attached upper die driven downward by
cludes that the requirements of steam pressure. Energy delivered dur-
1910.217 (a) through (h) and appendix A ing each stroke may be varied.
have been met; and (4) Gravity hammers mean a class of
(ii) For installation certification/val- forging hammer wherein energy for
idation and annual recertification/re- forging is obtained by the mass and ve-
validation has reviewed the employers locity of a freely falling ram and the
certification that the PSDI safety sys- attached upper die. Examples: board
tem meets the requirements of hammers and air-lift hammers.
1910.217 (a) through (h) and appendix A (5) Forging presses mean a class of
and the underlying tests performed by forging equipment wherein the shaping
the employer, has performed additional of metal between dies is performed by
tests and analyses which may be re- mechanical or hydraulic pressure, and
quired by 1910.217 (a) through (h) and usually is accomplished with a single
appendix A, and concludes that the re- workstroke of the press for each die
quirements of 1910.217 (a) through (h) station.
and appendix A have been met. (6) Trimming presses mean a class of
(66) Certification/validation and certify/ auxiliary forging equipment which re-
validate means the combined process of moves flash or excess metal from a
certification and validation. forging. This trimming operation can
(e) As used in 1910.218, unless the also be done cold, as can coining, a
context clearly requires otherwise, the product sizing operation.
following forging and hot metal terms (7) High-energy-rate forging machines
shall have the meaning prescribed in mean a class of forging equipment
this paragraph. wherein high ram velocities resulting
610
from the sudden release of a com- mounted and revolving on crankshaft

pressed gas against a free piston im- of engine or other shafting.
part impact to the workpiece. (6) Maintenance runway means any
(8) Forging rolls mean a class of auxil- permanent runway or platform used for
iary forging equipment wherein stock oiling, maintenance, running adjust-
is shaped between power driven rolls ment, or repair work, but not for pas-
bearing contoured dies. Usually used sageway.
for preforming, roll forging is often (7) Nip-point belt and pulley guard
employed to reduce thickness and in- means a device which encloses the pul-
crease length of stock. ley and is provided with rounded or
(9) Ring rolls mean a class for forging rolled edge slots through which the
equipment used for shaping weldless belt passes.
rings from pierced discs or thick- (8) Point of operation means that
walled, ring-shaped blanks between point at which cutting, shaping, or
rolls which control wall thickness, ring forming is accomplished upon the
diameter, height and contour. stock and shall include such other
(10) Bolt-headers mean the same as an points as may offer a hazard to the op-
upsetter or forging machine except erator in inserting or manipulating the
that the diameter of stock fed into the stock in the operation of the machine.
machine is much smaller, i.e., com- (9) Prime movers include steam, gas,
monly three-fourths inch or less. oil, and air engines, motors, steam and
(11) Rivet making machines mean the hydraulic turbines, and other equip-
same as upsetters and boltheaders ment used as a source of power.
when producing rivets with stock di- (10) Sheaves mean grooved pulleys,
ameter of 1-inch or more. Rivet making and shall be so classified unless used as
with less than 1-inch diameter is usu- flywheels.
ally a cold forging operation, and
therefore not included in this subpart. [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 39
(12) Upsetters (or forging machines, FR 41846, Dec. 3, 1974; 53 FR 8353, Mar. 14,
or headers) type of forging equipment, 1988]
related to the mechanical press, in
1910.212 General requirements for all
which the main forming energy is ap- machines.
plied horizontally to the workpiece
which is gripped and held by prior ac- (a) Machine guarding(1) Types of
tion of the dies. guarding. One or more methods of ma-
(f) As used in 1910.219, unless the chine guarding shall be provided to
context clearly requires otherwise, the protect the operator and other employ-
following mechanical power-trans- ees in the machine area from hazards
mission guarding terms shall have the such as those created by point of oper-
meaning prescribed in this paragraph. ation, ingoing nip points, rotating
(1) Belts include all power trans- parts, flying chips and sparks. Exam-
mission belts, such as flat belts, round ples of guarding methods arebarrier
belts, V-belts, etc., unless otherwise guards, two-hand tripping devices, elec-
specified. tronic safety devices, etc.
(2) Belt shifter means a device for me- (2) General requirements for machine
chanically shifting belts from tight to guards. Guards shall be affixed to the
loose pulleys or vice versa, or for shift- machine where possible and secured
ing belts on cones of speed pulleys. elsewhere if for any reason attachment
(3) Belt pole (sometimes called a belt to the machine is not possible. The
shipper or shipper pole,) means a device guard shall be such that it does not
used in shifting belts on and off fixed offer an accident hazard in itself.
pulleys on line or countershaft where (3) Point of operation guarding. (i)
there are no loose pulleys. Point of operation is the area on a ma-
(4) Exposed to contact means that the chine where work is actually performed
location of an object is such that a per- upon the material being processed.
son is likely to come into contact with (ii) The point of operation of ma-
it and be injured. chines whose operation exposes an em-
(5) Flywheels include flywheels, bal- ployee to injury, shall be guarded. The
ance wheels, and flywheel pulleys guarding device shall be in conformity
611
with any appropriate standards there- ator being able to control each stroke
for, or, in the absence of applicable spe- shall not be used.
cific standards, shall be so designed (5) Saw frames or tables shall be con-
and constructed as to prevent the oper- structed with lugs cast on the frame or
ator from having any part of his body with an equivalent means to limit the
in the danger zone during the operating size of the saw blade that can be
cycle. mounted, so as to avoid overspeed
(iii) Special handtools for placing and caused by mounting a saw larger than
removing material shall be such as to intended.
permit easy handling of material with- (6) Circular saw fences shall be so
out the operator placing a hand in the constructed that they can be firmly se-
danger zone. Such tools shall not be in cured to the table or table assembly
lieu of other guarding required by this without changing their alignment with
section, but can only be used to supple- the saw. For saws with tilting tables or
ment protection provided. tilting arbors the fence shall be so con-
(iv) The following are some of the structed that it will remain in a line
machines which usually require point parallel with the saw, regardless of the
of operation guarding: angle of the saw with the table.
(a) Guillotine cutters. (7) Circular saw gages shall be so con-
(b) Shears. structed as to slide in grooves or
(c) Alligator shears. tracks that are accurately machined,
(d) Power presses. to insure exact alignment with the saw
(e) Milling machines. for all positions of the guide.
(8) Hinged saw tables shall be so con-
(f) Power saws.
structed that the table can be firmly
(g) Jointers.
secured in any position and in true
(h) Portable power tools. alignment with the saw.
(i) Forming rolls and calenders. (9) All belts, pulleys, gears, shafts,
(4) Barrels, containers, and drums. Re- and moving parts shall be guarded in
volving drums, barrels, and containers accordance with the specific require-
shall be guarded by an enclosure which ments of 1910.219.
is interlocked with the drive mecha- (10) It is recommended that each
nism, so that the barrel, drum, or con- power-driven woodworking machine be
tainer cannot revolve unless the guard provided with a disconnect switch that
enclosure is in place. can be locked in the off position.
(5) Exposure of blades. When the pe- (11) The frames and all exposed, non-
riphery of the blades of a fan is less current-carrying metal parts of port-
than seven (7) feet above the floor or able electric woodworking machinery
working level, the blades shall be operated at more than 90 volts to
guarded. The guard shall have openings ground shall be grounded and other
no larger than one-half (12) inch. portable motors driving electric tools
(b) Anchoring fixed machinery. Ma- which are held in the hand while being
chines designed for a fixed location operated shall be grounded if they op-
shall be securely anchored to prevent erate at more than 90 volts to ground.
walking or moving. The ground shall be provided through
use of a separate ground wire and po-
1910.213 Woodworking machinery re- larized plug and receptacle.
quirements.
(12) For all circular saws where con-
(a) Machine construction general. (1) ditions are such that there is a possi-
Each machine shall be so constructed bility of contact with the portion of
as to be free from sensible vibration the saw either beneath or behind the
when the largest size tool is mounted table, that portion of the saw shall be
and run idle at full speed. covered with an exhaust hood, or, if no
(2) Arbors and mandrels shall be con- exhaust system is required, with a
structed so as to have firm and secure guard that shall be so arranged as to
bearing and be free from play. prevent accidental contact with the
(3) [Reserved] saw.
(4) Any automatic cutoff saw that (13) Revolving double arbor saws
strokes continuously without the oper- shall be fully guarded in accordance
612
with all the requirements for circular mounting shall be arranged so that the
crosscut saws or with all the require- hood will automatically adjust itself to
ments for circular ripsaws, according the thickness of and remain in contact
to the kind of saws mounted on the ar- with the material being cut but it shall
bors. not offer any considerable resistance to
(14) No saw, cutter head, or tool col- insertion of material to saw or to pas-
lar shall be placed or mounted on a ma- sage of the material being sawed. The
chine arbor unless the tool has been ac- hood shall be made of adequate
curately machined to size and shape to strength to resist blows and strains in-
fit the arbor. cidental to reasonable operation, ad-
(15) Combs (featherboards) or suitable justing, and handling, and shall be so
jigs shall be provided at the workplace designed as to protect the operator
for use when a standard guard cannot from flying splinters and broken saw
be used, as in dadoing, grooving, joint- teeth. It shall be made of material that
ing, moulding, and rabbeting. is soft enough so that it will be un-
(b) Machine controls and equipment. (1) likely to cause tooth breakage. The
A mechanical or electrical power con- hood shall be so mounted as to insure
trol shall be provided on each machine that its operation will be positive, reli-
to make it possible for the operator to able, and in true alignment with the
cut off the power from each machine saw; and the mounting shall be ade-
without leaving his position at the quate in strength to resist any reason-
point of operation. able side thrust or other force tending
(2) On machines driven by belts and to throw it out of line.
shafting, a locking-type belt shifter or (2) Each hand-fed circular ripsaw
an equivalent positive device shall be shall be furnished with a spreader to
used. prevent material from squeezing the
(3) On applications where injury to saw or being thrown back on the oper-
the operator might result if motors ator. The spreader shall be made of
were to restart after power failures, hard tempered steel, or its equivalent,
provision shall be made to prevent ma- and shall be thinner than the saw kerf.
chines from automatically restarting It shall be of sufficient width to pro-
upon restoration of power. vide adequate stiffness or rigidity to
(4) Power controls and operating con- resist any reasonable side thrust or
trols should be located within easy blow tending to bend or throw it out of
reach of the operator while he is at his position. The spreader shall be at-
regular work location, making it un- tached so that it will remain in true
necessary for him to reach over the alignment with the saw even when ei-
cutter to make adjustments. This does ther the saw or table is tilted. The pro-
not apply to constant pressure controls vision of a spreader in connection with
used only for setup purposes. grooving, dadoing, or rabbeting is not
(5) On each machine operated by elec- required. On the completion of such op-
tric motors, positive means shall be erations, the spreader shall be imme-
provided for rendering such controls or diately replaced.
devices inoperative while repairs or ad- (3) Each hand-fed circular ripsaw
justments are being made to the ma- shall be provided with nonkickback
chines they control. fingers or dogs so located as to oppose
(6) Each operating treadle shall be the thrust or tendency of the saw to
protected against unexpected or acci- pick up the material or to throw it
dental tripping. back toward the operator. They shall
(7) Feeder attachments shall have the be designed to provide adequate hold-
feed rolls or other moving parts so cov- ing power for all the thicknesses of ma-
ered or guarded as to protect the oper- terials being cut.
ator from hazardous points. (d) Hand-fed crosscut table saws. (1)
(c) Hand-fed ripsaws. (1) Each circular Each circular crosscut table saw shall
hand-fed ripsaw shall be guarded by a be guarded by a hood which shall meet
hood which shall completely enclose all the requirements of paragraph (c)(1)
that portion of the saw above the table of this section for hoods for circular
and that portion of the saw above the ripsaws.
material being cut. The hood and (2) [Reserved]
613
(e) Circular resaws. (1) Each circular (2) Each swing cutoff saw shall be
resaw shall be guarded by a hood or provided with an effective device to re-
shield of metal above the saw. This turn the saw automatically to the back
hood or shield shall be so designed as of the table when released at any point
to guard against danger from flying of its travel. Such a device shall not
splinters or broken saw teeth. depend for its proper functioning upon
(2) Each circular resaw (other than any rope, cord, or spring. If there is a
self-feed saws with a roller or wheel at counterweight, the bolts supporting
back of the saw) shall be provided with the bar and counterweight shall be pro-
a spreader fastened securely behind the vided with cotter pins; and the coun-
saw. The spreader shall be slightly terweight shall be prevented from drop-
thinner than the saw kerf and slightly ping by either a bolt passing through
thicker than the saw disk. both the bar and counterweight, or a
(f) Self-feed circular saws. (1) Feed bolt put through the extreme end of
rolls and saws shall be protected by a the bar, or, where the counterweight
hood or guard to prevent the hands of does not encircle the bar, a safety
the operator from coming in contact chain attached to it.
with the in-running rolls at any point. (3) Limit chains or other equally ef-
The guard shall be constructed of fective devices shall be provided to pre-
heavy material, preferably metal, and vent the saw from swinging beyond the
the bottom of the guard shall come front or back edges of the table, or be-
down to within three-eighths inch of yond a forward position where the gul-
the plane formed by the bottom or lets of the lowest saw teeth will rise
working surfaces of the feed rolls. This above the table top.
distance (three-eighths inch) may be (4) Inverted swing cutoff saws shall
increased to three-fourths inch, probe provided with a hood that will cover
vided the lead edge of the hood is ex- the part of the saw that protrudes
tended to be not less than 512 inches in above the top of the table or above the
front of the nip point between the front material being cut. It shall automati-
roll and the work. cally adjust itself to the thickness of
(2) Each self-feed circular ripsaw and remain in contact with the mate-
shall be provided with sectional non- rial being cut.
kickback fingers for the full width of (h) Radial saws. (1) The upper hood
the feed rolls. They shall be located in shall completely enclose the upper por-
front of the saw and so arranged as to tion of the blade down to a point that
be in continual contact with the wood will include the end of the saw arbor.
being fed. The upper hood shall be constructed in
(g) Swing cutoff saws. The require- such a manner and of such material
ments of this paragraph are also appli- that it will protect the operator from
cable to sliding cutoff saws mounted flying splinters, broken saw teeth, etc.,
above the table. and will deflect sawdust away from the
(1) Each swing cutoff saw shall be operator. The sides of the lower ex-
provided with a hood that will composed portion of the blade shall be
pletely enclose the upper half of the guarded to the full diameter of the
saw, the arbor end, and the point of op- blade by a device that will automati-
eration at all positions of the saw. The cally adjust itself to the thickness of
hood shall be constructed in such a the stock and remain in contact with
manner and of such material that it stock being cut to give maximum pro-
will protect the operator from flying tection possible for the operation being
splinters and broken saw teeth. Its performed.
hood shall be so designed that it will (2) Each radial saw used for ripping
automatically cover the lower portion shall be provided with nonkickback
of the blade, so that when the saw is fingers or dogs located on both sides of
returned to the back of the table the the saw so as to oppose the thrust or
hood will rise on top of the fence, and tendency of the saw to pick up the ma-
when the saw is moved forward the terial or to throw it back toward the
hood will drop on top of and remain in operator. They shall be designed to
contact with the table or material provide adequate holding power for all
being cut. the thicknesses of material being cut.
614
(3) An adjustable stop shall be pro- erably metal, and the edge of the guard
vided to prevent the forward travel of shall come to within three-eighths inch
the blade beyond the position nec- of the plane formed by the inside face
essary to complete the cut in repetitive of the feed roll in contact with the
operations. stock being cut.
(4) Installation shall be in such a (j) Jointers. (1) Each hand-fed planer
manner that the front end of the unit and jointer with horizontal head shall
will be slightly higher than the rear, so be equipped with a cylindrical cutting
as to cause the cutting head to return head, the knife projection of which
gently to the starting position when shall not exceed one-eighth inch be-
released by the operator. yond the cylindrical body of the head.
(5) Ripping and ploughing shall be (2) The opening in the table shall be
against the direction in which the saw kept as small as possible. The clear-
turns. The direction of the saw rota- ance between the edge of the rear table
tion shall be conspicuously marked on and the cutter head shall be not more
the hood. In addition, a permanent than one-eighth inch. The table throat
label not less than 112 inches by 34 inch opening shall be not more than 212
shall be affixed to the rear of the guard inches when tables are set or aligned
at approximately the level of the arbor, with each other for zero cut.
reading as follows: Danger: Do Not (3) Each hand-fed jointer with a hori-
Rip or Plough From This End.
zontal cutting head shall have an auto-
(i) Bandsaws and band resaws. (1) All
matic guard which will cover all the
portions of the saw blade shall be en-
section of the head on the working side
closed or guarded, except for the work-
of the fence or gage. The guard shall ef-
ing portion of the blade between the
fectively keep the operators hand from
bottom of the guide rolls and the table.
coming in contact with the revolving
Bandsaw wheels shall be fully encased.
knives. The guard shall automatically
The outside periphery of the enclosure
adjust itself to cover the unused por-
shall be solid. The front and back of
tion of the head and shall remain in
the band wheels shall be either en-
contact with the material at all times.
closed by solid material or by wire
mesh or perforated metal. Such mesh (4) Each hand-fed jointer with hori-
or perforated metal shall be not less zontal cutting head shall have a guard
than 0.037 inch (U.S. Gage No. 20), and which will cover the section of the
the openings shall be not greater than head back of the gage or fence.
three-eighths inch. Solid material used (5) Each wood jointer with vertical
for this purpose shall be of an equiva- head shall have either an exhaust hood
lent strength and firmness. The guard or other guard so arranged as to en-
for the portion of the blade between close completely the revolving head,
the sliding guide and the upper-saw- except for a slot of such width as may
wheel guard shall protect the saw blade be necessary and convenient for the ap-
at the front and outer side. This por- plication of the material to be jointed.
tion of the guard shall be self-adjusting (k) Tenoning machines. (1) Feed chains
to raise and lower with the guide. The and sprockets of all double end
upper-wheel guard shall be made to tenoning machines shall be completely
conform to the travel of the saw on the enclosed, except for that portion of
wheel. chain used for conveying the stock.
(2) Each bandsaw machine shall be (2) At the rear ends of frames over
provided with a tension control device which feed conveyors run, sprockets
to indicate a proper tension for the and chains shall be guarded at the sides
standard saws used on the machine, in by plates projecting beyond the periph-
order to assist in the elimination of ery of sprockets and the ends of lugs.
saw breakage due to improper tension. (3) Each tenoning machine shall have
(3) Feed rolls of band resaws shall be all cutting heads, and saws if used, cov-
protected with a suitable guard to pre- ered by metal guards. These guards
vent the hands of the operator from shall cover at least the unused part of
coming in contact with the in-running the periphery of the cutting head. If
rolls at any point. The guard shall be such a guard is constructed of sheet
constructed of heavy material, pref- metal, the material used shall be not
615
less than one-sixteenth inch in thick- (3) All double-spindle shapers shall be
ness, and if cast iron is used, it shall be provided with a spindle starting and
not less than three-sixteenths inch in stopping device for each spindle.
thickness. (n) Planing, molding, sticking, and
(4) Where an exhaust system is used, matching machines. (1) Each planing,
the guard shall form part or all of the molding, sticking, and matching ma-
exhaust hood and shall be constructed chine shall have all cutting heads, and
of metal of a thickness not less than saws if used, covered by a metal guard.
that specified in subparagraph (3) of If such guard is constructed of sheet
this paragraph. metal, the material used shall be not
(l) Boring and mortising machines. (1) less than 116 inch in thickness, and if
Safety-bit chucks with no projecting cast iron is used, it shall be not less
set screws shall be used. than three-sixteenths inch in thick-
(2) Boring bits should be provided ness.
with a guard that will enclose all por- (2) Where an exhaust system is used,
tions of the bit and chuck above the the guards shall form part or all of the
material being worked. exhaust hood and shall be constructed
(3) The top of the cutting chain and of metal of a thickness not less than
driving mechanism shall be enclosed. that specified in paragraph (h)(1) of
(4) If there is a counterweight, one of this section.
the following or equivalent means shall (3) Feed rolls shall be guarded by a
be used to prevent its dropping: hood or suitable guard to prevent the
hands of the operator from coming in
(i) It shall be bolted to the bar by
contact with the in-running rolls at
means of a bolt passing through both
any point. The guard shall be fastened
bar and counterweight;
to the frame carrying the rolls so as to
(ii) A bolt shall be put through the
remain in adjustment for any thick-
extreme end of the bar;
ness of stock.
(iii) Where the counterweight does (4) Surfacers or planers used in
not encircle the bar, a safety chain thicknessing multiple pieces of mate-
shall be attached to it; rial simultaneously shall be provided
(iv) Other types of counterweights with sectional infeed rolls having suffi-
shall be suspended by chain or wire cient yield in the construction of the
rope and shall travel in a pipe or other sections to provide feeding contact
suitable enclosure wherever they might pressure on the stock, over the permis-
fall and cause injury. sible range of variation in stock thick-
(5) Universal joints on spindles of ness specified or for which the machine
boring machines shall be completely is designed. In lieu of such yielding sec-
enclosed in such a way as to prevent tional rolls, suitable section kickback
accidental contact by the operator. finger devices shall be provided at the
(6) Each operating treadle shall be infeed end.
covered by an inverted U-shaped metal (o) Profile and swing-head lathes and
guard, fastened to the floor, and of ade- wood heel turning machine. (1) Each pro-
quate size to prevent accidental trip- file and swing-head lathe shall have all
ping. cutting heads covered by a metal
(m) Wood shapers and similar equip- guard. If such a guard is constructed of
ment. (1) The cutting heads of each sheet metal, the material used shall be
wood shaper, hand-fed panel raiser, or not less than one-sixteenth inch in
other similar machine not automati- thickness; and if cast iron is used, it
cally fed, shall be enclosed with a cage shall not be less than three-sixteenths
or adjustable guard so designed as to inch in thickness.
keep the operators hand away from (2) Cutting heads on wood-turning
the cutting edge. The diameter of cir- lathes, whether rotating or not, shall
cular shaper guards shall be not less be covered as completely as possible by
than the greatest diameter of the cut- hoods or shields.
ter. In no case shall a warning device of (3) Shoe last and spoke lathes,
leather or other material attached to doweling machines, wood heel turning
the spindle be acceptable. machines, and other automatic wood-
(2) [Reserved] turning lathes of the rotating knife
616
type shall be equipped with hoods en- (q) Veneer cutters and wringers. (1) Ve-
closing the cutter blades completely neer slicer knives shall be guarded to
except at the contact points while the prevent accidental contact with knife
stock is being cut. edge, at both front and rear.
(4) Lathes used for turning long (2) Veneer clippers shall have auto-
pieces of wood stock held only between matic feed or shall be provided with a
the two centers shall be equipped with guard which will make it impossible to
long curved guards extending over the place a finger or fingers under the
tops of the lathes in order to prevent knife while feeding or removing the
the work pieces from being thrown out stock.
of the machines if they should become (3) Sprockets on chain or slat-belt
loose. conveyors shall be enclosed.
(5) Where an exhaust system is used, (4) Where practicable, hand and
the guard shall form part or all of the footpower guillotine veneer cutters
exhaust hood and shall be constructed shall be provided with rods or plates or
of metal of a thickness not less than other satisfactory means, so arranged
that specified in subparagraph (1) of on the feeding side that the hands can-
this paragraph. not reach the cutting edge of the knife
(p) Sanding machines. (1) Feed rolls of while feeding or holding the stock in
self-feed sanding machines shall be pro- place.
tected with a semicylindrical guard to (5) Power-driven guillotine veneer
prevent the hands of the operator from cutters, except continuous feed trim-
coming in contact with the in-running mers, shall be equipped with:
rolls at any point. The guard shall be (i) Starting devices which require the
constructed of heavy material, pref- simultaneous action of both hands to
erably metal, and firmly secured to the start the cutting motion and of at least
frame carrying the rolls so as to re- one hand on a control during the com-
main in adjustment for any thickness plete stroke of the knife; or
of stock. The bottom of the guard (ii) An automatic guard which will
should come down to within three- remove the hands of the operator from
eighths inch of a plane formed by the the danger zone at every descent of the
bottom or contact face of the feed roll blade, used in conjunction with one-
where it touches the stock. hand starting devices which require
(2) Each drum sanding machine shall two distinct movements of the device
have an exhaust hood, or other guard if to start the cutting motion, and so de-
no exhaust system is required, so ar- signed as to return positively to the
ranged as to enclose the revolving nonstarting position after each com-
drum, except for that portion of the plete cycle of the knife.
drum above the table, if a table is used, (6) Where two or more workers are
which may be necessary and conven- employed at the same time on the
ient for the application of the material same power-driven guillotine veneer
to be finished. cutter equipped with two-hand control,
(3) Each disk sanding machine shall the device shall be so arranged that
have the exhaust hood, or other guard each worker shall be required to use
if no exhaust system is required, so ar- both hands simultaneously on the con-
ranged as to enclose the revolving disk, trols to start the cutting motion, and
except for that portion of the disk at least one hand on a control to com-
above the table, if a table is used, plete the cut.
which may be necessary for the appli- (7) Power-driven guillotine veneer
cation of the material to be finished. cutters, other than continuous trim-
(4) Belt sanding machines shall be mers, shall be provided, in addition to
provided with guards at each nip point the brake or other stopping mecha-
where the sanding belt runs on to a nism, with an emergency device which
pulley. These guards shall effectively will prevent the machine from oper-
prevent the hands or fingers of the op- ating in the event of failure of the
erator from coming in contact with the brake when the starting mechanism is
nip points. The unused run of the sand- in the nonstarting position.
ing belt shall be guarded against acci- (r) Miscellaneous woodworking ma-
dental contact. chines. (1) The feed rolls of roll type
617
glue spreaders shall be guarded by a (7) All cracked saws shall be removed
semicylindrical guard. The bottom of from service.
the guard shall come to within three- (8) The practice of inserting wedges
eighths inch of a plane formed by bot- between the saw disk and the collar to
tom or contact face of the feed roll form what is commonly known as a
where it touches the stock. wobble saw shall not be permitted.
(2) Drag saws shall be so located as to (9) Push sticks or push blocks shall
give at least a 4-foot clearance for pas- be provided at the work place in the
sage when the saw is at the extreme several sizes and types suitable for the
end of the stroke; or if such clearance work to be done.
is not obtainable, the saw and its driv- (10)(11) [Reserved]
ing mechanism shall be provided with a (12) The knife blade of jointers shall
standard enclosure. be so installed and adjusted that it
(3) For combination or universal does not protrude more than one-
woodworking machines each point of eighth inch beyond the cylindrical
operation of any tool shall be guarded body of the head. Push sticks or push
as required for such a tool in a separate blocks shall be provided at the work
machine. place in the several sizes and types
(4) The mention of specific machines suitable for the work to be done.
in paragraphs (a) thru (q) and this (13) Whenever veneer slicers or rotary
paragraph (r) of this section, inclusive, veneer-cutting machines have been
is not intended to exclude other wood- shutdown for the purpose of inserting
working machines from the require- logs or to make adjustments, operators
ment that suitable guards and exhaust shall make sure that machine is clear
hoods be provided to reduce to a min- and other workmen are not in a haz-
imum the hazard due to the point of ardous position before starting the ma-
operation of such machines. chine.
(s) Inspection and maintenance of (14) Operators shall not ride the car-
woodworking machinery. (1) Dull, badly riage of a veneer slicer.
set, improperly filed, or improperly [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43
tensioned saws shall be immediately FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10,
removed from service, before they 1984]
begin to cause the material to stick,
jam, or kick back when it is fed to the 1910.214 Cooperage machinery. [Re-
saw at normal speed. Saws to which served]
gum has adhered on the sides shall be
immediately cleaned. 1910.215 Abrasive wheel machinery.
(2) All knives and cutting heads of (a) General requirements(1) Machine
woodworking machines shall be kept guarding. Abrasive wheels shall be used
sharp, properly adjusted, and firmly se- only on machines provided with safety
cured. Where two or more knives are guards as defined in the following para-
used in one head, they shall be properly graphs of this section, except:
balanced. (i) Wheels used for internal work
(3) Bearings shall be kept free from while within the work being ground;
lost motion and shall be well lubri- (ii) Mounted wheels, used in portable
cated. operations, 2 inches and smaller in di-
(4) Arbors of all circular saws shall be ameter; and
free from play. (iii) Types 16, 17, 18, 18R, and 19
(5) Sharpening or tensioning of saw cones, plugs, and threaded hole pot
blades or cutters shall be done only by balls where the work offers protection.
persons of demonstrated skill in this (2) Guard design. The safety guard
kind of work. shall cover the spindle end, nut, and
(6) Emphasis is placed upon the im- flange projections. The safety guard
portance of maintaining cleanliness shall be mounted so as to maintain
around woodworking machinery, par- proper alignment with the wheel, and
ticularly as regards the effective func- the strength of the fastenings shall ex-
tioning of guards and the prevention of ceed the strength of the guard, except:
fire hazards in switch enclosures, bear- (i) Safety guards on all operations
ings, and motors. where the work provides a suitable
618
measure of protection to the operator, paragraphs (b) (3) through (8) of this
may be so constructed that the spindle section shall not be exceeded. Visors or
end, nut, and outer flange are exposed; other accessory equipment shall not be
and where the nature of the work is included as a part of the guard when
such as to entirely cover the side of the measuring the guard opening, unless
wheel, the side covers of the guard may such equipment has strength equal to
be omitted; and that of the guard.
(ii) The spindle end, nut, and outer (3) Bench and floor stands. The angu-
flange may be exposed on machines de- lar exposure of the grinding wheel pe-
signed as portable saws.
riphery and sides for safety guards used
(3) Flanges. Grinding machines shall
on machines known as bench and floor
be equipped with flanges in accordance
with paragraph (c) of this section. stands should not exceed 90 or one-
(4) Work rests. On offhand grinding fourth of the periphery. This exposure
machines, work rests shall be used to shall begin at a point not more than 65
support the work. They shall be of above the horizontal plane of the wheel
rigid construction and designed to be spindle. (See Figures O6 and O7 and
adjustable to compensate for wheel paragraph (b)(9) of this section.)
wear. Work rests shall be kept adjusted
closely to the wheel with a maximum
opening of one-eighth inch to prevent
the work from being jammed between
the wheel and the rest, which may
cause wheel breakage. The work rest
shall be securely clamped after each
adjustment. The adjustment shall not
be made with the wheel in motion.
(5) Excluded machinery. Natural sand-
stone wheels and metal, wooden, cloth, FIGURE NO. O6 FIGURE NO. O7
or paper discs, having a layer of abra- Wherever the nature of the work re-
sive on the surface are not covered by quires contact with the wheel below
this section. the horizontal plane of the spindle, the
(b) Guarding of abrasive wheel machin- exposure shall not exceed 125. (See
ery(1) Cup wheels. Cup wheels (Types
Figures O8 and O9.)
6 and 11) shall be protected by:
(i) Safety guards as specified in para-
graphs (b) (1) through (10) of this sec-
tion;
(ii) Band type guards as specified in
paragraph (b)(11) of this section; and
(iii) Special Revolving Cup Guards
which mount behind the wheel and
turn with it. They shall be made of
steel or other material with adequate
strength and shall enclose the wheel FIGURE NO. O8 FIGURE NO. O9
sides upward from the back for one- (4) Cylindrical grinders. The maximum
third of the wheel thickness. The angular exposure of the grinding wheel
mounting features shall conform with periphery and sides for safety guards
all requirements of this section. It is
used on cylindrical grinding machines
necessary to maintain clearance be-
shall not exceed 180. This exposure
tween the wheel side and the guard.
This clearance shall not exceed one- shall begin at a point not more than 65
sixteenth inch. above the horizontal plane of the wheel
(2) Guard exposure angles. The max- spindle. (See Figures O10 and O11 and
imum exposure angles specified in subparagraph (9) of this paragraph.)
EC27OC91.058
619
EC27OC91.057
(8) Top grinding. Where the work is

applied to the wheel above the hori-
zontal centerline, the exposure of the
grinding wheel periphery shall be as
small as possible and shall not exceed
60. (See Figures O16 and O17.)
FIGURE NO. O10 FIGURE NO. O11

(5) Surface grinders and cutting-off ma-
chines. The maximum angular exposure
of the grinding wheel periphery and
sides for safety guards used on cutting-
off machines and on surface grinding
machines which employ the wheel pe-
riphery shall not exceed 150. This ex- FIGURE NO. O16 FIGURE NO. O17
posure shall begin at a point not less (9) Exposure adjustment. Safety guards
than 15 below the horizontal plane of of the types described in subparagraphs
the wheel spindle. (See Figures O12 (3) and (4) of this paragraph, where the
and O13) operator stands in front of the opening,
shall be constructed so that the periph-
eral protecting member can be ad-
justed to the constantly decreasing di-
ameter of the wheel. The maximum an-
gular exposure above the horizontal
plane of the wheel spindle as specified
in paragraphs (b) (3) and (4) of this sec-
tion shall never be exceeded, and the
distance between the wheel periphery
and the adjustable tongue or the end of
FIGURE NO. O12 FIGURE NO. O13
the peripheral member at the top shall
(6) Swing frame grinders. The max-
never exceed one-fourth inch. (See Fig-
imum angular exposure of the grinding
ures O18, O19, O20, O21, O22, and O
wheel periphery and sides for safety
23.)
guards used on machines known as
swing frame grinding machines shall (10) Material requirements and min-
not exceed 180, and the top half of the imum dimensions. (i) See Figures O36
wheel shall be enclosed at all times. and O37 and Table O9 for minimum
(See Figures O14 and O15.) basic thickness of peripheral and side
members for various types of safety
guards and classes of service.
(ii) If operating speed does not exceed
8,000 surface feet per minute cast iron
safety guards, malleable iron guards or
other guards as described in paragraph
(b)(10)(iii) of this section shall be used.
(iii) Cast steel, or structural steel,
safety guards as specified in Figures O
36 and O37 and Table O9 shall be used
FIGURE NO. O14 FIGURE NO. O15 where operating speeds of wheels are
(7) Automatic snagging machines. The faster than 8,000 surface feet per
maximum angular exposure of the minute up to a maximum of 16,000 sur-
EC27OC91.062
grinding wheel periphery and sides for face feet per minute.
safety guards used on grinders known (iv) For cutting-off wheels 16 inches
as automatic snagging machines shall diameter and smaller and where speed
EC27OC91.061
not exceed 180 and the top half of the does not exceed 16,000 surface feet per
wheel shall be enclosed at all times. minute, cast iron or malleable iron
(See Figures O14 and O15.) safety guards as specified in Figures O
EC27OC91.060
620
EC27OC91.059
36 and O37, and in Table O9 shall be ified in Figures O36 and O37, and in
used. Table O9 shall be used.
(11) Band type guardsgeneral speci-
fications. Band type guards shall con-
form to the following general specifica-
tions:
(i) The bands shall be of steel plate or
other material of equal or greater
strength. They shall be continuous, the
ends being either riveted, bolted, or
welded together in such a manner as to
FIGURE NO. O18 FIGURE NO. O19 leave the inside free from projections.
(ii) The inside diameter of the band
CORRECT shall not be more than 1 inch larger
than the outside diameter of the wheel,
Showing adjustable tongue giving re-
and shall be mounted as nearly concen-
quired angular protection for all sizes
tric with the wheel as practicable.
of wheel used.
(iii) The band shall be of sufficient
width and its position kept so adjusted
that at no time will the wheel protrude
beyond the edge of the band a distance
greater than that indicated in Figure
O29 and in Table O2 or the wall thick-
ness (W), whichever is smaller.
(12) Guard design specifications. Abra-
sive wheel machinery guards shall
FIGURE NO. O20 FIGURE NO. O21 meet the design specifications of the
American National Standard Safety
CORRECT Code for the Use, Care, and Protection
of Abrasive Wheels, ANSI B7.11970,
Showing movable guard with opening which is incorporated by reference as
small enough to give required protec- specified in 1910.6. This requirement
tion for smallest size wheel used. shall not apply to natural sandstone
wheels or metal, wooden, cloth, or
paper discs, having a layer of abrasive
on the surface.
(c) Flanges(1) General requirements.
All abrasive wheels shall be mounted
between flanges which shall not be less
than one-third the diameter of the
wheel.
(i) Exceptions:
FIGURE NO. O22 FIGURE NO. O23 (a) Mounted wheels.
(b) Portable wheels with threaded in-
INCORRECT
serts or projecting studs.
Showing movable guard with size of open- (c) Abrasive discs (inserted nut, in-
ing correct for full size wheel but too serted washer and projecting stud
large for smaller wheels. type).
(d) Plate mounted wheels.
(v) For cutting-off wheels larger than (e) Cylinders, cup, or segmental
16 inches diameter and where speed wheels that are mounted in chucks.
does not exceed 14,200 surface feet per (f) Types 27 and 28 wheels.
minute, safety guards as specified in (g) Certain internal wheels.
Figures O27 and O28, and in Table O (h) Modified types 6 and 11 wheels
1 shall be used. (terrazzo).
(vi) For thread grinding wheels not
EC27OC91.065
(i) Cutting-off wheels, Types 1 and

exceeding 1 inch in thickness cast iron 27A (see paragraphs (c)(1) (ii) and (iii)
or malleable iron safety guards as spec- of this section).
EC27OC91.064
621
EC27OC91.063
(ii) Type 1 cutting-off wheels are to maining subdivisions of this subpara-

be mounted between properly relieved graph.
flanges which have matching bearing (ii) Type 27 and Type 28 wheels, be-
surfaces. Such flanges shall be at least cause of their shape and usage, require
one-fourth the wheel diameter. specially designed adaptors. The back
(iii) Type 27A cutting-off wheels are flange shall extend beyond the central
designed to be mounted by means of hub or raised portion and contact the
flat, not relieved, flanges having wheel to counteract the side pressure
matching bearing surfaces and which on the wheel in use. The adaptor nut
may be less than one-third but shall which is less than the minimum one-
not be less than one-fourth the wheel third diameter of wheel fits in the de-
diameter. (See Figure O24 for one such pressed side of wheel to prevent inter-
type of mounting.) ference in side grinding and serves to
(iv) There are three general types of drive the wheel by its clamping force
flanges: against the depressed portion of the
(a) Straight relieved flanges (see Fig- back flange. The variance in flange di-
ure O32); ameters, the adaptor nut being less
(b) Straight unrelieved flanges (see than one-third wheel diameter, and the
Figure O30); use of side pressure in wheel operation
limits the use to reinforced organic
(c) Adaptor flanges (see Figures O33
bonded wheels. Mounts which are af-
and O34);
fixed to the wheel by the manufacturer
(v) Regardless of flange type used, shall not be reused. Type 27 and Type
the wheel shall always be guarded. 28 wheels shall be used only with a
Blotters shall be used in accordance safety guard located between wheel and
with paragraph (c)(6) of this section. operator during use. (See Figure O24
A.)
FIGURE NO. O24A

Types 27 and 28 wheels, because of their
FIGURE NO. O24 shape, require specially designed
The Type 27 A Wheel is mounted between adaptors.
flat non-relieved flanges of equal
bearing surfaces. (iii) Modified Types 6 and 11 wheels
(terrazzo) with tapered K dimension.
(2) [Reserved] (5) Recess and undercut. (i) Straight
(3) Finish and balance. Flanges shall relieved flanges made according to
be dimensionally accurate and in good Table O6 and Figure O32 shall be re-
balance. There shall be no rough sur- cessed at least one-sixteenth inch on
faces or sharp edges. the side next to the wheel for a dis-
(4) Uniformity of diameter. (i) Both tance as specified in Table O6.
flanges, of any type, between which a (ii) Straight flanges of the adaptor or
wheel is mounted, shall be of the same sleeve type (Table O7 and Figures O33
diameter and have equal bearing sur- and O34) shall be undercut so that
face. Exceptions are set forth in the re- there will be no bearing on the sides of
EC27OC91.067
622
EC27OC91.066
the wheel within one-eighth inch of the (9) Repairs and maintenance. All
arbor hole. flanges shall be maintained in good
(6) Blotters. (i) Blotters (compressible condition. When the bearing surfaces
washers) shall always be used between become worn, warped, sprung, or dam-
flanges and abrasive wheel surfaces to aged they should be trued or refaced.
insure uniform distribution of flange When refacing or truing, care shall be
pressure. (See paragraph (d)(5) of this exercised to make sure that proper re-
section.) lief and rigidity is maintained as speci-
(ii) Exception: fied in paragraphs (c) (2) and (5) of this
(a) Mounted wheels. section and they shall be replaced when
(b) Abrasive discs (inserted nut, in- they do not conform to these subpara-
serted washer, and projecting stud graphs and Table O4, Figure O30,
type). Table O5, Figure O31, Table O6, Fig-
(c) Plate mounted wheels. ure O32, and Table O8, Figure O35.
(d) Cylinders, cups, or segmental Failure to observe these rules might
wheels that are mounted in chucks. cause excessive flange pressure around
(e) Types 27 and 28 wheels. the hole of the wheel. This is especially
(f) Certain Type 1 and Type 27A cut- true of wheel-sleeve or adaptor flanges.
ting-off wheels. (d) Mounting(1) Inspection. Imme-
(g) Certain internal wheels. diately before mounting, all wheels
(h) Type 4 tapered wheels. shall be closely inspected and sounded
(i) Diamond wheels, except certain by the user (ring test) to make sure
vitrified diamond wheels. they have not been damaged in transit,
(j) Modified Types 6 and 11 wheel (ter- storage, or otherwise. The spindle
razzo)blotters applied flat side of speed of the machine shall be checked
wheel only. before mounting of the wheel to be cer-
(7) Driving flange. The driving flange tain that it does not exceed the max-
shall be securely fastened to the spin- imum operating speed marked on the
dle and the bearing surface shall run wheel. Wheels should be tapped gently
true. When more than one wheel is with a light nonmetallic implement,
mounted between a single set of such as the handle of a screwdriver for
flanges, wheels may be cemented to- light wheels, or a wooden mallet for
gether or separated by specially de- heavier wheels. If they sound cracked
signed spacers. Spacers shall be equal (dead), they shall not be used. This is
in diameter to the mounting flanges known as the Ring Test.
and have equal bearing surfaces. (See (i) Wheels must be dry and free from
paragraph (d)(6) of this section.) sawdust when applying the ring test,
(8) Dimensions. (i) Tables O4 and O6 otherwise the sound will be deadened.
and Figures O30 and O32 show min- It should also be noted that organic
imum dimensions for straight relieved bonded wheels do not emit the same
and unrelieved flanges for use with clear metallic ring as do vitrified and
wheels with small holes that fit di- silicate wheels.
rectly on the machine spindle. Dimen-
sions of such flanges shall never be less
than indicated.
(ii) Table O5, and Table O7 and Fig-
ures O31, O33, O34 show minimum di-
mensions for straight adaptor flanges
for use with wheels having holes larger
than the spindle. Dimensions of such
adaptor flanges shall never be less than
indicated.
(iii) Table O8 and Figure O35 show
minimum dimensions for straight
flanges that are an integral part of
wheel sleeves which are frequently
used on precision grinding machines.
Dimensions of such flanges shall never
be less than indicated. FIGURE NO. O25 FIGURE NO. O26
623
EC27OC91.068
(ii) Tap wheels about 45 each side quired, they shall cover entire contact
of the vertical centerline and about 1 area of wheel flanges. Blotters need not
or 2 inches from the periphery as indi- be used with the following types of
cated by the spots in Figure O25 and wheels:
Figure O26. Then rotate the wheel 45 (i) Mounted wheels.
and repeat the test. A sound and (ii) Abrasive discs (inserted nut, in-
undamaged wheel will give a clear me- serted washer, and projecting-stud
tallic tone. If cracked, there will be a type).
dead sound and not a clear ring. (iii) Plate mounted wheels.
(2) Arbor size. Grinding wheels shall (iv) Cylinders, cups, or segmental
fit freely on the spindle and remain wheels that are mounted in chucks.
free under all grinding conditions. A
(v) Types 27 and 28 wheels.
controlled clearance between the wheel
(vi) Certain Type 1 and Type 27A cut-
hole and the machine spindle (or wheel
sleeves or adaptors) is essential to ting-off wheels.
avoid excessive pressure from mount- (vii) Certain internal wheels.
ing and spindle expansion. To accom- (viii) Type 4 tapered wheels.
plish this, the machine spindle shall be (ix) Diamond wheels, except certain
made to nominal (standard) size plus vitrified diamond wheels.
zero minus .002 inch, and the wheel (6) Multiple wheel mounting. When
hole shall be made suitably oversize to more than one wheel is mounted be-
assure safety clearance under the con- tween a single set of flanges, wheels
ditions of operating heat and pressure. may be cemented together or separated
(3) Surface condition. All contact sur- by specially designed spacers. Spacers
faces of wheels, blotters and flanges shall be equal in diameter to the
shall be flat and free of foreign matter. mounting flanges and have equal bear-
(4) Bushing. When a bushing is used ing surfaces. When mounting wheels
in the wheel hole it shall not exceed which have not been cemented to-
the width of the wheel and shall not gether, or ones which do not utilize
contact the flanges. separating spacers, care must be exer-
(5) Blotters. When blotters or flange cised to use wheels specially manufac-
facings of compressible material are re- tured for that purpose.
624
EC27OC91.069</GPH>
TABLE O1MINIMUM BASIC THICKNESS FOR PERIPHERAL AND SIDE MEMBERS FOR SAFETY
GUARDS USED WITH CUTTING-OFF WHEELS
Cutting off wheel diameters
Material used in Maximum thick- Speed not to 6 to 11 Over 11 to Over 20 to Over 30 to Over 48 to
construction of ness of cutting exceed inches 20 inches 30 inches 48 inches 72 inches
guard off wheel
A B A B A B A B A B
Structural steel inch or less

12 14,200 SFPM ..
1 16
1 16
3 32
3 32 18 18
3 16
3 16 14 14
(min. tensile
strength
60,000 p.s.i.).
inch or less
12 16,000 SFPM ..
3 32 18 18 18
3 16 18 14
3 16
5 16 14
TABLE O3GUIDE FOR CONSTRUCTION OF BAND TYPE GUARDS

[Maximum Wheel Speed 7,000 SFPM]
Maximum
Minimum Minimum distance
Minimum material specifications Diameter of wheel thickness diameter of between
of band A rivets centers of
rivets
Inches
Hot rolled steel SAE 1008 .......................... Under 8 ......................................................

1 16 3 16
34
8 to 24 ........................................................
18
14 1
Over 24 to 30 ............................................. 14 38 114
EC27OC91.071</GPH>
625
EC27OC91.070</GPH>
TABLE O5MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR STRAIGHT ADAPTOR FLANGEFOR ORGANIC BONDED

WHEELS OVER 114 INCHES THICK 1
[In inches]
EMin-
D
BMin- imum
Minimun F 1(DE)
Wheel hole imum thickness
Wheel diameter thickness minimum
diameter flange di- of flange at
of flange at thickness
ameter edge of
bore undercut
12 to 14 ................................................................................... 4 6
78
38
12
5 7 78
38
12
6 8 78 38 12
Larger than 14 to 18 ............................................................... 4 6 78 38 12
5 7 78 38 12
6 8 78 38 12
7 9 78 38 12
8 10 78 38 12
Larger than 18 to 24 ............................................................... 6 8 1 12 12
7 9 1 12 12
8 10 1 12 12
10 12 1 12 12
12 14 1 12 12
Larger than 24 to 30 ............................................................... 12 15 1 12 12
Larger than 30 to 36 ............................................................... 12 15 1 8

3 78 12
1 For wheels under 114 inches thick F dimension shall not exceed 40 percent of wheel thickness.
TABLE O6MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR STRAIGHT RELIEVED FLANGES 1

[In inches]
CRadial width of bear- EMin-

BMin- DMin-
ing surface imum
imum out- imum thickness
ADiameter of wheel side di- thickness of flange at
ameter of of flange at
Minimum Maximum edge of re-
flanges bore cess
1 ..............................................................................................
38
1 16 18
1 16
1 16
2 ..............................................................................................
34 18
3 16 18
3 32
3 .............................................................................................. 1 18 316
3 16
3 32
4 .............................................................................................. 138 18 316 316 18

5 .............................................................................................. 134 316 14 14 18
6 .............................................................................................. 2 14 12 38
3 16
7 .............................................................................................. 212 14 12 38
3 16
8 .............................................................................................. 3 14 12 38
3 16
10 ............................................................................................ 312 516 58 38 14
12 ............................................................................................ 4 516 58 12
5 16
14 ............................................................................................ 412 38 34 12
5 16
16 ............................................................................................ 5 2
1 12 1 12 516
18 ............................................................................................ 6 12 1 58 38
20 ............................................................................................ 7 58 114 58 38
22 ............................................................................................ 712 58 114 58 716
24 ............................................................................................ 8 34 114 58 716
26 ............................................................................................ 812 34 114 58 12
28 ............................................................................................ 10 78 112 34 12
30 ............................................................................................ 10 78 112 34 58
36 ............................................................................................ 12 1 2 78 34
42 ............................................................................................ 14 1 2 78 34
48 ............................................................................................ 16 114 2 118 1

60 ............................................................................................ 20 114 2 114 118
72 ............................................................................................ 24 112 212 138 114
1 Flanges for wheels under 2 inches diameter may be unrelieved and shall be maintained flat and true.
626
EC27OC91.072</GPH>
TABLE O7MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR STRAIGHT FLANGESFOR MECHANICAL GRINDERS 12,500

S.F.P.M. TO 16,5 S.F.P.M.1
DMinimum thick- EMinimum thick-
Wheel hole diame- BMinimum flange F 2(DE) min-
Wheel diameter ness of flange at ness of flange at
ter diameter imum thickness
bore edge of undercut
20 6 8 1
12
12
20 8 10 112
34
34
24 12 15 2 1 1
30 12 15 2 1 1
36 12 15 2 1
1 Flanges shall be of steel, quality SAE 1040 or equivalent, annealed plate, heat treated to R. 2530.
2 For wheels under 114 inch thick F dimension shall not exceed 40 percent of wheel thickness.
TABLE O8MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR STRAIGHT FLANGES USED AS WHEEL SLEEVES FOR
PRECISION GRINDING ONLY
[In inches]
EMin-
BMin- DMin- imum
imum out- imum
Wheel hole thickness
Wheel diameter side di- thickness
diameter of flange at
ameter of of flange at edge of
flange bore undercut
12 to 14 ......................................................................................................... 5 7
12
7 16
Larger than 14 to 20 ..................................................................................... 5 7

58
7 16
6 8 58 716
8 10 58 716
10 11 2
1 58 716
12 1312 58 716
Larger than 20 to 30 ..................................................................................... 8 10 34 12
10 1112 34 12
12 1312 34 12
16 1712 34 12
Larger than 30 to 42 ..................................................................................... 12 1312 34 12
16 1712 34 12
18 1912 34 12
20 2112 34 12
Larger than 42 to 60 ..................................................................................... 16 20 1 34
20 24 1 34
24 29 118 78
EC27OC91.074</GPH>
NOTE: These flanges may be clamped together by means of a central nut, or by a series of bolts or some other equivalent
means of fastening. For hole sizes smaller than shown in this table, use table 12.
627
EC27OC91.073</GPH>
628
EC27OC91.075</GPH>
VerDate Aug<2,>2002
08:14 Aug 03, 2002

TABLE O9MINIMUM BASIC THICKNESSES OF PERIPHERAL AND SIDE MEMBERS FOR SAFETY GUARDS
[In inches]
Max- Grinding wheel diameters

Jkt 197107
imum
thick- Over 6 to 12 Over 12 to 16 Over 16 to 20 Over 20 to 24 Over 24 to 30 Over 30 to 48
Material used in construction of guard ness of 3 to 6 inches inches inches inches inches inches inches
grind-
ing
A B A B A B A B A B A B A B
wheel
PO 00000
Material 2 14 14 38
5 16
12 38
58 12 78
58 1 34
114 1
satis- 4 5 16 5 16
38
5 16
12 38
34 58 1 58 118 34
138 1
factory 1 6 38 516 12 716 58 12 1 58 118 34 114 78 112 118
for 8 58 916 78 34 1 34 1
1 8 34 114 78 112 1
1 8
speeds 10 34 1116 78 34 1 34 118 34 114 78 112 118
Frm 00629
up to 16 118 1 114 1 1516 1 1716 1116 134 138

8,000 20 138 1
1 8 138 1
1 8 112 138 2 158
SFPM.
Cast iron (min. tensile strength 20,000 p.s.i.) Class 20.
Fmt 8010
Material 2 14 14 38
5 16
12
38
58
12
34
58
78 34
1 78
satis- 4 5 16 5 16
38
5 16
12
38
58
12
34
58
78 34
118 78
factory 1 6 38 516 12 716 58 12 34 58 78 58 1 34 114 78
for 8 12 716 58 12 34 58 78 58 1 34 114 78

629
speeds 10 12 716 58 12 34 58 78 58 1 34 114 78

Sfmt 8010
up to 16 1316 1116 1316 1116 1 34 118 78 138 1

9,000 20 78 34 1 34 118 78 112 118
SFPM.
Malleable iron (min. tensile strength 50,000 p.s.i.) Grade
32510.
Materials 2 14 14 5 16 5 16
38 38 12 7 16
58 12 34 58
78 34
Y:\SGML\197107T.XXX
satis- 4 14 14 12
12
12 12 9 16
12 58 12 34 58 1 34
factory 1 6 38 14 34
58
34 58 34 58 13 16
11 16
13 16
11 16
118 34
for 8 78 34 78 34 78 34 78 34 1516 1316 138 1
speeds 10 1 78 1 78 1 78 118 15 16
118 1 1716 1116
up to 16 114 118 114 118 114 1 18 114 118 11316 1716
16,000 20 138 114 138 114 1716 1516 2116 11116
SFPM.
Steel castings (min. tensile strength 60,000 p.s.i.) Grade
V6030.
Structural 2 18 1 16 5 16 14 5 16
14 5 16
14 5 16
14 38 5 16
12
38
pfrm72
steel 4 18 1 16 38
5 16
38 5 16
38 5 16
38 5 16
38 5 16
12
38
1910.215
(min. 6 3 16 1 16 12
38 7 16
38 7 16
38 7 16
38 7 16
38 34
12
tensile 8 12 38 9 16
7 16
9 16
7 16
9
PsN: 197107T
strength 10 9 16 7 16 58 12 58
12 58
12
58
12
78 58
60,000 16 58 9 16
34 58 34 58 13 16
11 16
1116 13 16

p.s.i.) 20 1316 1116 1316 1116 78 34 1316 15 16

1 The recommendations listed in the above table are guides for the conditions stated. Other material, designs or dimensions affording equal or superior protection are also acceptable.
TABLE O2EXPOSURE VERSUS WHEEL having a 46-inch roll height or over.

THICKNESS These bars shall operate readily by
[In inches] pressure of the mill operators body.
(ii) Safety triprod. Installed in the
Maximum
exposure front and in the back of each mill and
Overall thickness of wheel (T) of wheel located within 2 inches of a vertical
(C)
plane tangent to the front and rear
.........................................................................
12
14 rolls. The top rods shall be not more
1 ...........................................................................
12
than 72 inches above the level on which
2 ...........................................................................
34
3 ........................................................................... 1 the operator stands. The triprods shall

4 ........................................................................... 112 be accessible and shall operate readily
5 and over ........................................................... 2 whether the rods are pushed or pulled.
(iii) Safety tripwire cable or wire center
TABLE O4MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR cord. Installed in the front and in the
STRAIGHT UNRELIEVED FLANGES FOR WHEELS back of each mill and located within 2
WITH THREADED INSERTS OR PROJECTING inches of a vertical plane tangent to
STUDS the front and rear rolls. The cables
shall not be more than 72 inches above
B 1Minimum out-
ADiameter of side diameter of TMinimum thick- the level on which the operator stands.
wheel ness of flange
flange The tripwire cable or wire center cord
1
58 18
shall operate readily whether cable or
2 1 18 cord is pushed or pulled.
3 1
3 16
(2) [Reserved]
4 1 38
3 16
5 134 14
(3) Auxiliary equipment. All auxiliary
6 2 38 equipment such as mill divider, support
1 NOTE: Must be large enough to extend beyond the bush- bars, spray pipes, feed conveyors, strip
ing. Where prong anchor or cupback bushing are used, this knives, etc., shall be located in such a
footnote does not apply.
manner as to avoid interference with
access to and operation of safety de-
FR 49750, Oct. 24, 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, vices.
1984; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996] (c) Calender safety controls(1) Safety
trip, face. A safety triprod, cable, or
1910.216 Mills and calenders in the wire center cord shall be provided
rubber and plastics industries. across each pair of in-running rolls ex-
(a) General requirements tending the length of the face of the
(1)(2) [Reserved] rolls. It shall be readily accessible and
(3) Auxiliary equipment. Mechanical operate whether pushed or pulled. The
and electrical equipment and auxil- safety tripping devices shall be located
iaries shall be installed in accordance within reach of the operator and the
with this section and Subpart S of this bite.
part. (2) Safety trip, side. On both sides of
(4) Mill roll heights. All new mill in- the calender and near each end of the
stallations shall be installed so that face of the roll, there shall be a cable
the top of the operating rolls is not less or wire center cord connected to the
than 50 inches above the level on which safety trip. They shall operate readily
the operator stands, irrespective of the when pushed or pulled.
size of the mill. This distance shall (d) Protection by location(1) Mills.
apply to the actual working level, Where a mill is so installed that per-
whether it be at the general floor level, sons cannot normally reach through,
in a pit, or on a platform. over, under, or around to come in con-
(b) Mill safety controls(1) Safety trip tact with the roll bite or be caught be-
control. A safety trip control shall be tween a roll and an adjacent object,
provided in front and in back of each then, provided such elements are made
mill. It shall be accessible and shall op- a fixed part of a mill, safety control de-
erate readily on contact. The safety vices listed in paragraph (b) of this sec-
trip control shall be one of the fol- tion shall not apply.
lowing types or a combination thereof: (2) Calenders. Where a calender is so
(i) Pressure-sensitive body bars. In- installed that persons cannot normally
stalled at front and back of each mill reach through, over, under, or around
630
to come in contact with the roll bite or mers, riveting machines and similar
be caught between a roll and an adja- types of fastener applicators are ex-
cent object, then, provided such ele- cluded from the requirements of this
ments are made a fixed part of a cal- section.
ender, safety control devices listed in (b) Mechanical power press guarding
paragraph (c) of this section shall not and construction, general(1) Hazards to
apply. personnel associated with broken or fall-
(e) Trip and emergency switches. All ing machine components. Machine com-
trip and emergency switches shall not ponents shall be designed, secured, or
be of the automatically resetting type,
covered to minimize hazards caused by
but shall require manual resetting.
breakage, or loosening and falling or
(f) Stopping limits(1) Determination of
release of mechanical energy (i.e. bro-
distance of travel. All measurements on
mills and calenders shall be taken with ken springs).
the rolls running empty at maximum (2) Brakes. Friction brakes provided
operating speed. Stopping distances for stopping or holding a slide move-
shall be expressed in inches of surface ment shall be inherently self-engaging
travel of the roll from the instant the by requiring power or force from an ex-
emergency stopping device is actuated. ternal source to cause disengagement.
(2) Stopping limits for mills. All mills Brake capacity shall be sufficient to
irrespective of the size of the rolls or stop the motion of the slide quickly
their arrangement (individually or and capable of holding the slide and its
group-driven) shall be stopped within a attachments at any point in its travel.
distance, as measured in inches of sur- (3) Machines using full revolution posi-
face travel, not greater than 112 per- tive clutches. (i) Machines using full
cent of the peripheral no-load surface revolution clutches shall incorporate a
speeds of the respective rolls as deter- single-stroke mechanism.
mined in feet per minute. (ii) If the single-stroke mechanism is
(3) Stopping limits for calenders. (i) All dependent upon spring action, the
calenders, irrespective of size of the spring(s) shall be of the compression
rolls or their configuration, shall be type, operating on a rod or guided
stopped within a distance, as measured within a hole or tube, and designed to
in inches of surface travel, not greater prevent interleaving of the spring coils
than 134 percent of the peripheral no- in event of breakage.
load surface speeds of the respective
(4) Foot pedals (treadle). (i) The pedal
calender rolls as determined in feet per
mechanism shall be protected to pre-
minute.
vent unintended operation from falling
(ii) Where speeds above 250 feet per
or moving objects or by accidental
minute as measured on the surface of
the drive roll are used, stopping dis- stepping onto the pedal.
tances of more than 134 percent are (ii) A pad with a nonslip contact area
permissible. Such stopping distances shall be firmly attached to the pedal.
shall be subject to engineering deter- (iii) The pedal return spring(s) shall
mination. be of the compression type, operating
on a rod or guided within a hole or
tube, or designed to prevent inter-
FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 61 FR 9240, Mar. 7, 1996]
leaving of spring coils in event of
1910.217 Mechanical power presses. breakage.
(a) General requirements. (iv) If pedal counterweights are pro-
(1)(3) [Reserved] vided, the path of the travel of the
(4) Reconstruction and modification. It weight shall be enclosed.
shall be the responsibility of any per- (5) Hand operated levers. (i) Hand-
son reconstructing, or modifying a me- lever-operated power presses shall be
chanical power press to do so in accord- equipped with a spring latch on the op-
ance with paragraph (b) of this section. erating lever to prevent premature or
(5) Excluded machines. Press brakes, accidental tripping.
hydraulic and pneumatic power press- (ii) The operating levers on hand-
es, bulldozers, hot bending and hot tripped presses having more than one
metal presses, forging presses and ham- operating station shall be interlocked
631
to prevent the tripping of the press ex- (a) Each hand control shall be pro-
cept by the concurrent use of all le- tected against unintended operation
vers. and arranged by design, construction,
(6) Two-hand trip. (i) A two-hand trip and/or separation so that the concur-
shall have the individual operators rent use of both hands is required to
hand controls protected against unin- trip the press.
tentional operation and have the indi- (b) The control system shall be de-
vidual operators hand controls ar- signed to permit an adjustment which
ranged by design and construction and/ will require concurrent pressure from
or separation to require the use of both both hands during the die closing por-
hands to trip the press and use a con- tion of the stroke.
trol arrangement requiring concurrent (c) The control system shall incor-
operation of the individual operators porate an antirepeat feature.
hand controls. (d) The control systems shall be de-
(ii) Two-hand trip systems on full signed to require release of all opera-
revolution clutch machines shall incor- tors hand controls before an inter-
porate an antirepeat feature. rupted stroke can be resumed. This re-
(iii) If two-hand trip systems are used quirement pertains only to those sin-
on multiple operator presses, each op- gle-stroke, two-hand controls manufac-
erator shall have a separate set of con- tured and installed on or after August
trols. 31, 1971.
(7) Machines using part revolution (vi) [Reserved]
clutches. (i) The clutch shall release (vii) Controls for more than one oper-
and the brake shall be applied when the ating station shall be designed to be
external clutch engaging means is reactivated and deactivated in complete
moved, deactivated, or deenergized. sets of two operators hand controls per
(ii) A red color stop control shall be operating station by means capable of
provided with the clutch/brake control being supervised by the employer. The
system. Momentary operation of the clutch/brake control system shall be
stop control shall immediately deacti- designed and constructed to prevent
vate the clutch and apply the brake. actuation of the clutch if all operating
The stop control shall override any stations are bypassed.
other control, and reactuation of the (viii) Those clutch/brake control sys-
clutch shall require use of the oper- tems which contain both single and
ating (tripping) means which has been continuous functions shall be designed
selected. so that completion of continuous cir-
(iii) A means of selecting Off, Inch, cuits may be supervised by the em-
Single Stroke, and Continuous (when ployer. The initiation of continuous
the continuous function is furnished) run shall require a prior action or deci-
shall be supplied with the clutch/brake sion by the operator in addition to the
control to select type of operation of selection of Continuous on the stroking
the press. Fixing of selection shall be selector, before actuation of the oper-
by means capable of supervision by the ating means will result in continuous
employer. stroking.
(iv) The Inch operating means (ix) If foot control is provided, the se-
shall be designed to prevent exposure lection method between hand and foot
of the workers hands within the point control shall be separate from the
of operation by: stroking selector and shall be designed
(a) Requiring the concurrent use of so that the selection may be supervised
both hands to actuate the clutch, or by the employer.
(b) Being a single control protected (x) Foot operated tripping controls, if
against accidental actuation and so lo- used, shall be protected so as to pre-
cated that the worker cannot reach vent operation from falling or moving
into the point of operation while oper- objects, or from unintended operation
ating the single control. by accidental stepping onto the foot
(v) Two-hand controls for single control.
stroke shall conform to the following (xi) The control of air-clutch ma-
requirements: chines shall be designed to prevent a
632
significant increase in the normal stop- with an isolated secondary. Higher

ping time due to a failure within the voltages that may be necessary for op-
operating value mechanism, and to in- eration of machine or control mecha-
hibit further operation if such failure nisms shall be isolated from any con-
does occur. This requirement shall trol mechanism handled by the oper-
apply only to those clutch/brake air- ator, but motor starters with integral
valve controls manufactured and in- Start-Stop buttons may utilize line
stalled on or after August 31, 1971, but voltage control. All d.c. control cir-
shall not apply to machines intended cuits shall be powered by not more
only for continuous, automatic feeding than a nominal 240-volt d.c. supply iso-
applications. lated from any higher voltages.
(xii) The clutch/brake control shall (v) All clutch/brake control electrical
incorporate an automatic means to circuits shall be protected against the
prevent initiation or continued activa- possibility of an accidental ground in
tion of the Single Stroke or Contin- the control circuit causing false oper-
uous functions unless the press drive ation of the press.
motor is energized and in the forward (vi) Electrical clutch/brake control
direction. circuits shall incorporate features to
(xiii) The clutch/brake control shall minimize the possibility of an unin-
automatically deactivate in event of tended stroke in the event of the fail-
failure of the power or pressure supply ure of a control component to function
for the clutch engaging means. Reac- properly, including relays, limit
tivation of the clutch shall require res- switches, and static output circuits.
toration of normal supply and the use (9) Slide counterbalance systems. (i)
of the tripping mechanism(s). Spring counterbalance systems when
(xiv) The clutch/brake control shall used shall incorporate means to retain
automatically deactivate in event of system parts in event of breakage.
failure of the counterbalance(s) air (ii) Spring counterbalances when
supply. Reactivation of the clutch shall used shall have the capability to hold
require restoration of normal air sup- the slide and its attachments at
ply and use of the tripping mecha- midstroke, without brake applied.
nism(s). (iii) Air counterbalance cylinders
(xv) Selection of bar operation shall shall incorporate means to retain the
be by means capable of being super- piston and rod in case of breakage or
vised by the employer. A separate loosening.
pushbutton shall be employed to acti- (iv) Air counterbalance cylinders
vate the clutch, and the clutch shall be shall have adequate capability to hold
activated only if the driver motor is the slide and its attachments at any
deenergized. point in stroke, without brake applied.
(8) Electrical. (i) A main power dis- (v) Air counterbalance cylinders shall
connect switch capable of being locked incorporate means to prevent failure of
only in the Off position shall be pro- capability (sudden loss of pressure) in
vided with every power press control event of air supply failure.
system. (10) Air controlling equipment. Air con-
(ii) The motor start button shall be trolling equipment shall be protected
protected against accidental operation. against foreign material and water en-
(iii) All mechanical power press con- tering the pneumatic system of the
trols shall incorporate a type of drive press. A means of air lubrication shall
motor starter that will disconnect the be provided when needed.
drive motor from the power source in (11) Hydraulic equipment. The max-
event of control voltage or power imum anticipated working pressures in
source failure, and require operation of any hydraulic system on a mechanical
the motor start button to restart the power press shall not exceed the safe
motor when voltage conditions are re- working pressure rating of any compo-
stored to normal. nent used in that system.
(iv) All a.c. control circuits and sole- (12) Pressure vessels. All pressure ves-
noid value coils shall be powered by sels used in conjunction with power
not more than a nominal 120-volt a.c. presses shall conform to the American
supply obtained from a transformer Society of Mechanical Engineers Code
633
for Pressure Vessels, 1968 Edition, following design, construction, applica-

which is incorporated by reference as tion, and adjustment requirements:
specified in 1910.6. (a) It shall prevent entry of hands or
(13) Control reliability. When required fingers into the point of operation by
by paragraph (c)(5) of this section, the reaching through, over, under or
control system shall be constructed so around the guard;
that a failure within the system does (b) It shall conform to the maximum
not prevent the normal stopping action permissible openings of Table O10;
from being applied to the press when (c) It shall, in itself, create no pinch
required, but does prevent initiation of point between the guard and moving
a successive stroke until the failure is machine parts;
corrected. The failure shall be detect- (d) It shall utilize fasteners not read-
able by a simple test, or indicated by ily removable by operator, so as to
the control system. This requirement minimize the possibility of misuse or
does not apply to those elements of the removal of essential parts;
control system which have no effect on (e) It shall facilitate its inspection,
the protection against point of oper- and
ation injuries. (f) It shall offer maximum visibility
(14) Brake system monitoring. When re- of the point of operation consistent
quired by paragraph (c)(5) of this sec- with the other requirements.
tion, the brake monitor shall meet the (ii) A die enclosure guard shall be at-
following requirements: tached to the die shoe or stripper in a
(i) Be so constructed as to automati- fixed position.
cally prevent the activation of a suc- (iii) A fixed barrier guard shall be at-
cessive stroke if the stopping time or tached securely to the frame of the
braking distance deteriorates to a press or to the bolster plate.
point where the safety distance being (iv) An interlocked press barrier
utilized does not meet the require- guard shall be attached to the press
ments set forth in paragraph frame or bolster and shall be
(c)(3)(iii)(e) or (c)(3)(vii)(c) of this sec- interlocked with the press clutch con-
tion. The brake monitor used with the trol so that the clutch cannot be acti-
Type B gate or movable barrier device vated unless the guard itself, or the
shall be installed in a manner to detect hinged or movable sections of the
slide top-stop overrun beyond the nor- guard are in position to conform to the
mal limit reasonably established by requirements of Table O10.
the employer. (v) The hinged or movable sections of
(ii) Be installed on a press such that an interlocked press barrier guard shall
it indicates when the performance of not be used for manual feeding. The
the braking system has deteriorated to guard shall prevent opening of the
the extent described in paragraph interlocked section and reaching into
(b)(14)(i) of this section; and the point of operation prior to die clo-
(iii) Be constructed and installed in a sure or prior to the cessation of slide
manner to monitor brake system per- motion. See paragraph (c)(3)(ii) of this
formance on each stroke. section regarding manual feeding
(c) Safeguarding the point of oper- through interlocked press barrier de-
ation(1) General requirements. (i) It vices.
shall be the responsibility of the em- (vi) The adjustable barrier guard
ployer to provide and insure the usage shall be securely attached to the press
of point of operation guards or prop- bed, bolster plate, or die shoe, and shall
erly applied and adjusted point of oper- be adjusted and operated in conformity
ation devices on every operation per- with Table O10 and the requirements
formed on a mechanical power press. of this subparagraph. Adjustments
See Table O10. shall be made only by authorized per-
(ii) The requirement of paragraph sonnel whose qualifications include a
(c)(1)(i) of this section shall not apply knowledge of the provisions of Table O
when the point of operation opening is 10 and this subparagraph.
one-fourth inch or less. See Table O10. (vii) A point of operation enclosure
(2) Point of operation guards. (i) Every which does not meet the requirements
point of operation guard shall meet the of this subparagraph and Table O10
634
shall be used only in conjunction with (a) The device may not be used on
point of operation devices. machines using full revolution clutch-
(3) Point of operation devices. (i) Point es.
of operation devices shall protect the (b) The device may not be used as a
operator by: tripping means to initiate slide mo-
(a) Preventing and/or stopping nor- tion, except when used in total con-
mal stroking of the press if the opera- formance with paragraph (h) of this
tors hands are inadvertently placed in section.
the point of operation; or (c) The device shall be constructed so
that a failure within the system does
(b) Preventing the operator from in-
not prevent the normal stopping action
advertently reaching into the point of from being applied to the press when
operation, or withdrawing his hands if required, but does prevent the initi-
they are inadvertently located in the ation of a successive stroke until the
point of operation, as the dies close; or failure is corrected. The failure shall
(c) Preventing the operator from in- be indicated by the system.
advertently reaching into the point of (d) Muting (bypassing of the protec-
operation at all times; or tive function) of such device, during
(d) [Reserved] the upstroke of the press slide, is per-
(e) Requiring application of both of mitted for the purpose of parts ejec-
the operators hands to machine oper- tion, circuit checking, and feeding.
ating controls and locating such con- (e) The safety distance (Ds) from the
trols at such a safety distance from the sensing field to the point of operation
point of operation that the slide com- shall be greater than the distance de-
pletes the downward travel or stops be- termined by the following formula:
fore the operator can reach into the Ds = 63 inches/second Ts
point of operation with his hands; or
where:
(f) Enclosing the point of operation
before a press stroke can be initiated, Ds = minimum safety distance (inches);
and maintaining this closed condition 63 inches/second=hand speed con-
until the motion of the slide had stant;
ceased; or and
(g) Enclosing the point of operation Ts = stopping time of the press meas-
before a press stroke can be initiated, ured at approximately 90 position of
so as to prevent an operator from crankshaft rotation (seconds).
reaching into the point of operation (f) Guards shall be used to protect all
prior to die closure or prior to ces- areas of entry to the point of operation
sation of slide motion during the down- not protected by the presence sensing
ward stroke. device.
(ii) A gate or movable barrier device (iv) The pull-out device shall protect
shall protect the operator as follows: the operator as specified in paragraph
(a) A Type A gate or movable barrier (c)(3)(i)(b) of this section, and shall in-
device shall protect the operator in the clude attachments for each of the oper-
manner specified in paragraph ators hands.
(a) Attachments shall be connected
(c)(3)(i)(f) of this section, and
to and operated only by the press slide
(b) A Type B gate or movable barrier or upper die.
device shall protect the operator in the (b) Attachments shall be adjusted to
manner specified in paragraph prevent the operator from reaching
(c)(3)(i)(g) of this section. into the point of operation or to with-
(iii) A presence sensing point of oper- draw the operators hands from the
ation device shall protect the operator point of operation before the dies close.
as provided in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(a) of (c) A separate pull-out device shall be
this section, and shall be interlocked provided for each operator if more than
into the control circuit to prevent or one operator is used on a press.
stop slide motion if the operators hand (d) Each pull-out device in use shall
or other part of his body is within the be visually inspected and checked for
sensing field of the device during the proper adjustment at the start of each
downstroke of the press slide. operator shift, following a new die set-
635
up, and when operators are changed. for each operator, and shall be designed
Necessary maintenance or repair or to require concurrent application of all
both shall be performed and completed operators to activate the slide.
before the press is operated. Records of (b) Each two hand trip shall meet the
inspections and maintenance shall be construction requirements of para-
kept in accordance with paragraph (e) graph (b)(6) of this section.
of this section. (c) The safety distance (Dm) between
(v) The sweep device may not be used the two hand trip and the point of op-
for point of operation safeguarding. eration shall be greater than the dis-
(vi) A holdout or a restraint device tance determined by the following for-
shall protect the operator as specified mula:
in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(c) of this section
and shall include attachments for each Dm = 63 inches/second X Tm;
of the operators hands. Such attach- where:
ments shall be securely anchored and Dm = minimum safety distance (inches); 63
adjusted in such a way that the oper- inches/second=hand speed constant;
ator is restrained from reaching into and
the point of operation. A separate set Tm = the maximum time the press takes for
of restraints shall be provided for each the die closure after it has been tripped
operator if more than one operator is (seconds). For full revolution clutch press-
required on a press. es with only one engaging point Tm is
(vii) The two hand control device equal to the time necessary for one and
shall protect the operator as specified one-half revolutions of the crankshaft. For
full revolution clutch presses with more
in paragraph (c)(3)(i)(e) of this section. than one engaging point, Tm shall be cal-
(a) When used in press operations re- culated as follows:
quiring more than one operator, sepa- Tm = [12 + (1 Number of engaging points per
rate two hand controls shall be pro- revolution)] time necessary to complete
vided for each operator, and shall be one revolution of the crankshaft (seconds).
designed to require concurrent applica- (d) Two hand trips shall be fixed in
tion of all operators controls to acti- position so that only a supervisor or
vate the slide. The removal of a hand safety engineer is capable of relocating
from any control button shall cause the controls.
the slide to stop. (4) Hand feeding tools. Hand feeding
(b) Each two hand control shall meet tools are intended for placing and re-
the construction requirements of para- moving materials in and from the
graph (b)(7)(v) of this section. press. Hand feeding tools are not a
(c) The safety distance (Ds) between point of operation guard or protection
each two hand control device and the device and shall not be used in lieu of
point of operation shall be greater than the guards or devices required in
the distance determined by the fol- this section.
lowing formula: (5) Additional requirements for safe-
guarding. Where the operator feeds or
Ds = 63 inches/second Ts;
where: removes parts by placing one or both
hands in the point of operation, and a
Ds = minimum safety distance (inches); 63
inches/second=hand speed constant; two hand control, presence sensing de-
and vice of Type B gate or movable barrier
Ts = stopping time of the press measured at (on a part revolution clutch) is used for
approximately 90 position of crankshaft safeguarding:
rotation (seconds). (i) The employer shall use a control
(d) Two hand controls shall be fixed system and a brake monitor which
in position so that only a supervisor or comply with paragraphs (b) (13) and (14)
safety engineer is capable of relocating of this section;
the controls. (ii) The exception in paragraph
(viii) The two hand trip device shall (b)(7)(v)(d) of this section for two hand
protect the operator as specified in controls manufactured and installed
paragraph (c)(3)(i)(e) of this section. before August 31, 1971 is not applicable
(a) When used in press operations re- under this paragraph (c)(5);
quiring more than one operator, sepa- (iii) The control of air clutch ma-
rate two hand trips shall be provided chines shall be designed to prevent a
636
significant increase in the normal stop- (7) Die fastening. Provision shall be
ping time due to a failure within the made in both the upper and lower shoes
operating valve mechanism, and to infor securely mounting the die to the
hibit further operation if such failure bolster and slide. Where clamp caps or
does occur, where a part revolution setscrews are used in conjunction with
clutch is employed. The exception in punch stems, additional means of se-
paragraph (b)(7)(xi) of this section for curing the upper shoe to the slide shall
controls manufactured and installed be used.
before August 31, 1971, is not applicable (8) Die handling. Handling equipment
under this paragraph (c)(5). attach points shall be provided on all
(d) Design, construction, setting and dies requiring mechanical handling.
feeding of dies(1) General requirements. (9) Diesetting. (i) The employer shall
The employer shall: (i) Use dies and op- establish a diesetting procedure that
erating methods designed to control or will insure compliance with paragraph
eliminate hazards to operating per- (c) of this section.
sonnel, and (ii) furnish and enforce the (ii) The employer shall provide spring
use of hand tools for freeing and re- loaded turnover bars, for presses de-
moving stuck work or scrap pieces signed to accept such turnover bars.
from the die, so that no employee need (iii) The employer shall provide die
reach into the point of operation for stops or other means to prevent losing
such purposes. control of the die while setting or re-
(2) [Reserved] moving dies in presses which are in-
clined.
(3) Scrap handling. The employer
(iv) The employer shall provide and
shall provide means for handling scrap
enforce the use of safety blocks for use
from roll feed or random length stock
whenever dies are being adjusted or re-
operations. Scrap cutters used in con-
paired in the press.
junction with scrap handling systems
(v) The employer shall provide brush-
shall be safeguarded in accordance with
es, swabs, lubricating rolls, and auto-
paragraph (c) of this section and with
matic or manual pressure guns so that
1910.219.
operators and diesetters shall not be
(4) Guide post hazard. The hazard cre-
required to reach into the point of op-
ated by a guide post (when it is located
eration or other hazard areas to lubri-
in the immediate vicinity of the oper-
cate material, punches or dies.
ator) when separated from its bushing
(e) Inspection, maintenance, and modi-
by more than one-fourth inch shall be
fication of presses(1) Inspection and
considered as a point of operation haz-
maintenance records. (i) It shall be the
ard and be protected in accordance responsibility of the employer to estab-
with paragraph (c) of this section. lish and follow a program of periodic
(5) Unitized tooling. If unitized tooling and regular inspections of his power
is used, the opening between the top of presses to ensure that all their parts,
the punch holder and the face of the auxiliary equipment, and safeguards
slide, or striking pad, shall be safe- are in a safe operating condition and
guarded in accordance with the re- adjustment. The employer shall main-
quirements of paragraph (c) of this sec- tain a certification record of inspec-
tion. tions which includes the date of inspec-
(6) Tonnage, stroke, and weight des- tion, the signature of the person who
ignation. All dies shall be: performed the inspection and the serial
(i) Stamped with the tonnage and number, or other identifier, of the
stroke requirements, or have these power press that was inspected.
characteristics recorded if these (ii) Each press shall be inspected and
records are readily available to the die tested no less than weekly to deter-
setter; mine the condition of the clutch/brake
(ii) Stamped to indicate upper die mechanism, antirepeat feature and sin-
weight when necessary for air counter- gle stroke mechanism. Necessary
balance pressure adjustment; and maintenance or repair or both shall be
(iii) Stamped to indicate complete performed and completed before the
die weight when handling equipment press is operated. These requirements
may become overloaded. do not apply to those presses which
637
comply with paragraphs (b) (13) and (14) (f) Operation of power presses(1) [Re-
of this section. The employer shall served]
maintain a certification record of in- (2) Instruction to operators. The em-
spections, tests and maintenance work ployer shall train and instruct the op-
which includes the date of the inspec- erator in the safe method of work be-
tion, test or maintenance; the signa- fore starting work on any operation
ture of the person who performed the covered by this section. The employer
inspection, test, or maintenance; and shall insure by adequate supervision
the serial number or other identifier of that correct operating procedures are
the press that was inspected, tested or being followed.
maintained. (3) Work area. The employer shall
provide clearance between machines so
(2) Modification. It shall be the re-
that movement of one operator will not
sponsibility of any person modifying a interfere with the work of another.
power press to furnish instructions Ample room for cleaning machines,
with the modification to establish new handling material, work pieces, and
or changed guidelines for use and care scrap shall also be provided. All sur-
of the power press so modified. rounding floors shall be kept in good
(3) Training of maintenance personnel. condition and free from obstructions,
It shall be the responsibility of the em- grease, oil, and water.
ployer to insure the original and con- (4) Overloading. The employer shall
tinuing competence of personnel caring operate his presses within the tonnage
for, inspecting, and maintaining power and attachment weight ratings speci-
presses. fied by the manufacturer.
Explanation of above diagram: The various openings are such that for av-
This diagram shows the accepted safe erage size hands an operators fingers wont
openings between the bottom edge of a guard reach the point of operation.
and feed table at various distances from the After installation of point of operation
danger line (point of operation). guards and before a job is released for oper-
The clearance line marks the distance re- ation a check should be made to verify that
quired to prevent contact between guard and the guard will prevent the operators hands
moving parts. from reaching the point of operation.
The minimum guarding line is the distance
between the infeed side of the guard and the
danger line which is one-half inch from the
danger line.
638
EC27OC91.076</GPH>
TABLE O10 erators provided with controls and

[In inches] safeguards.
(h) Presence sensing device initiation
Maximum
Distance of opening from point of operation haz- width of (PSDI)(1) General. (i) The require-
ard opening ments of paragraph (h) shall apply to
all part revolution mechanical power
to 112 ..............................................................
12 14
112 to 212 ............................................................ 38 presses used in the PSDI mode of oper-
212 to 312 ............................................................ 12 ation.
312 to 512 ............................................................ 58
(ii) The relevant requirements of
512 to 612 ............................................................ 34
paragraphs (a) through (g) of this sec-
612 to 712 ............................................................ 78
712 to 1212 .......................................................... 1 4

1 tion also shall apply to all presses used
1212 to 1512 ........................................................ 112 in the PSDI mode of operation, wheth-
1512 to 1712 ........................................................ 178 er or not cross referenced in this para-
1712 to 3112 ........................................................ 218 graph (h). Such cross-referencing of
specific requirements from paragraphs
This table shows the distances that guards
shall be positioned from the danger line in
(a) through (g) of this section is in-
accordance with the required openings. tended only to enhance convenience
and understanding in relating to the
(g) Reports of injuries to employees op- new provisions to the existing stand-
erating mechanical power presses. (1) The ard, and is not to be construed as lim-
employer shall, within 30 days of the iting the applicability of other provi-
occurrence, report to either the Direc- sions in paragraphs (a) through (g) of
tor of the Directorate of Safety Stand- this section.
ards Programs, OSHA, U.S. Depart- (iii) Full revolution mechanical
ment of Labor, Washington, D.C. 20210, power presses shall not be used in the
or the State agency administering a PSDI mode of operation.
plan approved by the Assistant Sec- (iv) Mechanical power presses with a
retary of Labor for Occupational Safe- configuration which would allow a per-
ty and Health, all point of operation son to enter, pass through, and become
injuries to operators or other employ- clear of the sensing field into the haz-
ees. The following information shall be ardous portion of the press shall not be
included in the report: used in the PSDI mode of operation.
(i) Employers name, address and lo- (v) The PSDI mode of operation shall
cation of the workplace (establish- be used only for normal production op-
ment). erations. Die-setting and maintenance
(ii) Employees name, injury sus- procedures shall comply with para-
tained, and the task being performed graphs (a) through (g) of this section,
(operation, set-up, maintenance, or and shall not be done in the PSDI
other). mode.
(iii) Type of clutch used on the press (2) Brake and clutch requirements. (i)
(full revolution, part revolution, or di- Presses with flexible steel band brakes
rect drive). or with mechanical linkage actuated
(iv) Type of safeguard(s) being used brakes or clutches shall not be used in
(two hand control, two hand trip, pull- the PSDI mode.
outs, sweeps, or other). If the safeguard (ii) Brake systems on presses used in
is not described in this section, give a the PSDI mode shall have sufficient
complete description. torque so that each average value of
(v) Cause of the accident (repeat of stopping times (Ts) for stops initiated
press, safeguard failure, removing at approximately 45 degrees, 60 degrees,
stuck part or scrap, no safeguard pro- and 90 degrees, respectively, of crank-
vided, no safeguard in use, or other). shaft angular position, shall not be
(vi) Type of feeding (manual with more than 125 percent of the average
hands in dies or with hands out of dies, value of the stopping time at the top
semiautomatic, automatic, or other). crankshaft position. Compliance with
(vii) Means used to actuate press this requirement shall be determined
stroke (foot trip, foot control, hand by using the heaviest upper die to be
trip, hand control, or other). used on the press, and operating at the
(viii) Number of operators required fastest press speed if there is speed se-
for the operation and the number of op- lection.
639
(iii) Where brake engagement and justed during installation certification

clutch release is effected by spring ac- to prevent successive stroking of the
tion, such spring(s) shall operate in press if increases in stopping time
compression on a rod or within a hole cause an increase in the safety distance
or tube, and shall be of non-inter- above that required by paragraph
leaving design. (h)(9)(v) of this section.
(3) Pneumatic systems. (i) Air valve (ii) Once the PSDI safety system has
and air pressure supply/control. been certified/validated, adjustment of
(A) The requirements of paragraphs the brake monitor shall not be done
(b)(7)(xiii), (b)(7)(xiv), (b)(10), (b)(12) without prior approval of the valida-
and (c)(5)(iii) of this section apply to tion organization for both the brake
the pneumatic systems of machines monitor adjustment and the cor-
used in the PSDI mode. responding adjustment of the safety
(B) The air supply for pneumatic distance. The validation organization
clutch/brake control valves shall incor- shall in its installation validation,
porate a filter, an air regulator, and, state that in what circumstances, if
when necessary for proper operation, a any, the employer has advance ap-
lubricator. proval for adjustment, when prior oral
(C) The air pressure supply for approval is appropriate and when prior
clutch/brake valves on machines used approval must be in writing. The ad-
in the PSDI mode shall be regulated to justment shall be done under the super-
pressures less than or equal to the air vision of an authorized person whose
pressure used when making the stop qualifications include knowledge of
time measurements required by para- safety distance requirements and expe-
graph (h)(2)(ii) of this section. rience with the brake system and its
(ii) Air counterbalance systems. adjustment. When brake wear or other
(A) Where presses that have slide factors extend press stopping time be-
counterbalance systems are used in the yond the limit permitted by the brake
PSDI mode, the counterbalance system monitor, adjustment, repair, or main-
shall also meet the requirements of tenance shall be performed on the
paragraph (b)(9) of this section. brake or other press system element
(B) Counterbalances shall be adjusted that extends the stopping time.
in accordance with the press manufac- (iii) The brake monitor setting shall
turers recommendations to assure cor- allow an increase of no more than 10
rect counterbalancing of the slide at- percent of the longest stopping time
tachment (upper die) weight for all op- for the press, or 10 milliseconds, which-
erations performed on presses used in ever is longer, measured at the top of
the PSDI mode. The adjustments shall the stroke.
be made before performing the stop- (6) Cycle control and control systems. (i)
ping time measurements required by The control system on presses used in
paragraphs (h)(2)(ii), (h)(5)(iii), and the PSDI mode shall meet the applica-
(h)(9)(v) of this section. ble requirements of paragraphs (b)(7),
(4) Flywheels and bearings. Presses (b)(8), (b)(13), and (c)(5) of this section.
whose designs incorporate flywheels (ii) The control system shall incor-
running on journals on the crankshaft porate a means of dynamically moni-
or back shaft, or bull gears running on toring for decoupling of the rotary po-
journals mounted on the crankshaft, sition indicating mechanism drive
shall be inspected, lubricated, and from the crankshaft. This monitor
maintained as provided in paragraph shall stop slide motion and prevent
(h)(10) of this section to reduce the pos- successive press strokes if decoupling
sibility of unintended and uncontrolled occurs, or if the monitor itself fails.
press strokes caused by bearing sei- (iii) The mode selection means of
zure. paragraph (b)(7)(iii) of this section
(5) Brake monitoring. (i) Presses oper- shall have at least one position for se-
ated in the PSDI mode shall be lection of the PSDI mode. Where more
equipped with a brake monitor that than one interruption of the light sens-
meets the requirements of paragraphs ing field is used in the initiation of a
(b)(13) and (b)(14) of this section. In ad- stroke, either the mode selection
dition, the brake monitor shall be ad- means must have one position for each
640
function, or a separate selection means trol system compliance with the re-
shall be provided which becomes oper- quirements of this section.
able when the PSDI mode is selected. (xi) Where there is more than one op-
Selection of PSDI mode and the num- erator of a press used for PSDI, each
ber of interruptions/withdrawals of the operator shall be protected by a sepa-
light sensing field required to initiate rate, independently functioning, pres-
a press cycle shall be by means capable ence sensing device. The control sys-
of supervision by the employer. tem shall require that each sensing
(iv) A PSDI set-up/reset means shall field be interrupted the selected num-
be provided which requires an overt ac- ber of times prior to initiating a
tion by the operator, in addition to stroke. Further, each operator shall be
PSDI mode selection, before operation provided with a set-up/reset means that
of the press by means of PSDI can be
meets the requirements of paragraph
started.
(h)(6) of this section, and which must
(v) An indicator visible to the oper-
be actuated to initiate operation of the
ator and readily seen by the employer
press in the PSDI mode.
shall be provided which shall clearly
indicate that the system is set-up for (xii) [Reserved]
cycling in the PSDI mode. (xiii) The Control system shall incor-
(vi) The control system shall incorporate interlocks for supplemental
porate a timer to deactivate PSDI guards, if used, which will prevent
when the press does not stroke within stroke initiation or will stop a stroke
the period of time set by the timer. in progress if any supplemental guard
The timer shall be manually adjust- fails or is deactivated.
able, to a maximum time of 30 seconds. (xiv) The control system shall per-
For any timer setting greater than 15 form checks for proper operation of all
seconds, the adjustment shall be made cycle control logic element switches
by the use of a special tool available and contacts at least once each cycle.
only to authorized persons. Following a Control elements shall be checked for
deactivation of PSDI by the timer, the correct status after power on and be-
system shall make it necessary to reset fore the initial PSDI stroke.
the set-up/reset means in order to reac- (xv) The control system shall have
tivate the PSDI mode. provisions for an inch operating
(vii) Reactivation of PSDI operation means meeting the requirements of
following deactivation of the PSDI paragraph (b)(7)(iv) of this section. Die-
mode from any other cause, such as ac- setting shall not be done in the PSDI
tivation of the red color stop control mode. Production shall not be done in
required by paragraph (b)(7)(ii) of this the inch mode.
section, interruption of the presence
(xvi) The control system shall permit
sensing field, opening of an interlock,
only a single stroke per initiation com-
or reselection of the number of sensing
field interruptions/withdrawals re- mand.
quired to cycle the press, shall require (xvii) Controls with internally stored
resetting of the set-up/reset means. programs (e.g., mechanical, electro-me-
(viii) The control system shall incor- chanical, or electronic) shall meet the
porate an automatic means to prevent requirements of paragraph (b)(13) of
initiation or continued operation in this section, and shall default to a pre-
the PSDI mode unless the press drive determined safe condition in the event
motor is energized in the forward direc- of any single failure within the system.
tion of crankshaft rotation. Programmable controllers which meet
(ix) The control design shall preclude the requirements for controls with in-
any movement of the slide caused by ternally stored programs stated above
operation of power on, power off, or se- shall be permitted only if all logic ele-
lector switches, or from checks for ments affecting the safety system and
proper operations as required by para- point of operation safety are internally
graph (h)(6)(xiv) of this section. stored and protected in such a manner
(x) All components and subsystems of that they cannot be altered or manipu-
the control system shall be designed to lated by the user to an unsafe condi-
operate together to provide total con- tion.
641
(7) Environmental requirements. Con- must certify that these requirements

trol components shall be selected, con- and all the other applicable require-
structed, and connected together in ments of this section are met and these
such a way as to withstand expected certifications must be validated by an
operational and environmental OSHA-recognized third-party valida-
stresses, at least including those out- tion organization to meet these addi-
lined in appendix A. Such stresses shall tional requirements and all the other
not so affect the control system as to applicable requirements of paragraphs
cause unsafe operation. (a) through (h) and appendix A of this
(8) Safety system. (i) Mechanical section. Three months prior to the op-
power presses used in the PSDI mode eration of any alternative system, the
shall be operated under the control of a employer must notify the OSHA Direc-
safety system which, in addition to torate of Safety Standards Programs of
meeting the applicable requirements of the name of the system to be installed,
paragraphs (b)(13) and (c)(5) and other the manufacturer and the OSHA-recog-
applicable provisions of this section, nized third-party validation organiza-
shall function such that a single failure tion immediately. Upon request, the
or single operating error shall not employer must make available to that
cause injury to personnel from point of office all tests and analyses for OSHA
operation hazards. review.
(ii) The safety system shall be de- (iii) Individual sensing fields of pres-
signed, constructed, and arranged as an ence sensing devices used to initiate
integral total system, including all ele- strokes in the PSDI mode shall cover
ments of the press, the controls, the only one side of the press.
safeguarding and any required supple- (iv) Light curtains used for PSDI op-
mental safeguarding, and their inter- eration shall have minimum object
faces with the operator and that part sensitivity not to exceed one and one-
of the environment which has effect on fourth inches (31.75 mm). Where light
the protection against point of oper- curtain object sensitivity is user-ad-
ation hazards. justable, either discretely or continu-
(9) Safeguarding the point of operation. ously, design features shall limit the
(i) The point of operation of presses op- minimum object sensitivity adjust-
erated in the PSDI mode shall be safe- ment not to exceed one and one-fourth
guarded in accordance with the re- inches (31.75 mm). Blanking of the
quirements of paragraph (c) of this sec- sensing field is not permitted.
tion, except that the safety distance (v) The safety distance (Ds) from the
requirements of paragraph (h)(9)(v) of sensing field of the presence sensing
this section shall be used for PSDI op- device to the point of operation shall
eration. be greater than or equal to the dis-
(ii)(A) PSDI shall be implemented tance determined by the formula:
only by use of light curtain (photo- Ds = Hs(Ts+Tp+Tr+2Tm)+Dp
electric) presence sensing devices Where:
which meet the requirements of para- Ds = Minimum safety distance.
graph (c)(3)(iii)(c) of this section unless Hs = Hand speed constant of 63 inches per
the requirements of the following para- second (1.6 m/s).
graph have been met. Ts = Longest press stopping time, in seconds,
computed by taking averages of multiple
(B) Alternatives to photo-electric
measurements at each of three positions
light curtains may be used for PSDI (45 degrees, 60 degrees, and 90 degrees) of
when the employer can demonstrate, crankshaft angular position; the longest of
through tests and analysis by the em- the three averages is the stopping time to
ployer or the manufacturer, that the use. (Ts is defined as the sum of the kinetic
alternative is as safe as the photo-elec- energy dissipation time plus the pneu-
tric light curtain, that the alternative matic/magnetic/hydraulic reaction time of
meets the conditions of this section, the clutch/brake operating mechanism(s).)
Tp = Longest presence sensing device re-
has the same long term reliability as
sponse time, in seconds.
light curtains and can be integrated Tr = Longest response time, in seconds, of all
into the entire safety system as pro- interposing control elements between the
vided for in this section. Prior to use, presence sensing device and the clutch/
both the employer and manufacturer brake operating mechanism(s).
642
Tm = Increase in the press stopping time at Dp = Penetration depth factor, required to
the top of the stroke, in seconds, allowed provide for possible penetration through
by the brake monitor for brake wear. The the presence sensing field by fingers or
time increase allowed shall be limited to hand before detection occurs. The penetra-
no more than 10 percent of the longest tion depth factor shall be determined from
press stopping time measured at the top of Graph h1 using the minimum object sensi-
the stroke, or 10 milliseconds, whichever is tivity size.
longer.
643
(vi) The presence sensing device loca- in location to provide a safety distance
tion shall either be set at each tool greater than or equal to the minimum
change and set-up to provide at least safety distance for all tooling set-ups
the minimum safety distance, or fixed which are to be used on that press.
644
EC27OC91.077</GPH>
(vii) Where presence sensing device the presence sensing device(s) used to
location is adjustable, adjustment shall initiate press strokes; or
require the use of a special tool avail- (B) The length of the hand tool shall
able only to authorized persons. be such as to ensure that the operators
(viii) Supplemental safeguarding hand will be detected for any safety
shall be used to protect all areas of ac- distance required by the press set-ups.
cess to the point of operation which are (10) Inspection and maintenance. (i)
unprotected by the PSDI presence sens- Any press equipped with presence sens-
ing device. Such supplemental safe- ing devices for use in PSDI, or for sup-
guarding shall consist of either addi- plemental safeguarding on presses used
tional light curtain (photo-electric) in the PSDI mode, shall be equipped
presence sensing devices or other types with a test rod of diameter specified by
of guards which meet the requirements the presence sensing device manufac-
of paragraphs (c) and (h) of this sec- turer to represent the minimum object
tion. sensitivity of the sensing field. Instruc-
(A) Presence sensing devices used as tions for use of the test rod shall be
supplemental safeguarding shall not noted on a label affixed to the presence
initiate a press stroke, and shall con- sensing device.
form to the requirements of paragraph (ii) The following checks shall be
(c)(3)(iii) and other applicable provi- made at the beginning of each shift and
sions of this section, except that the whenever a die change is made.
safety distance shall comply with para- (A) A check shall be performed using
graph (h)(9)(v) of this section. the test rod according to the presence
(B) Guards used as supplemental safe- sensing device manufacturers instruc-
guarding shall conform to the design, tions to determine that the presence
construction and application require- sensing device used for PSDI is oper-
ments of paragraph (c)(2) of this sec- ational.
tion, and shall be interlocked with the (B) The safety distance shall be
press control to prevent press PSDI op- checked for compliance with (h)(9)(v) of
eration if the guard fails, is removed, this section.
or is out of position. (C) A check shall be made to deter-
(ix) Barriers shall be fixed to the mine that all supplemental safe-
press frame or bolster to prevent per- guarding is in place. Where presence
sonnel from passing completely sensing devices are used for supple-
through the sensing field, where safety mental safeguarding, a check for prop-
distance or press configuration is such er operation shall be performed using
that personnel could pass through the the test rod according to the presence
PSDI presence sensing field and assume sensing device manufacturers instruc-
a position where the point of operation tions.
could be accessed without detection by (D) A check shall be made to assure
the PSDI presence sensing device. As that the barriers and/or supplemental
an alternative, supplemental presence presence sensing devices required by
sensing devices used only in the safe- paragraph (h)(9)(ix) of this section are
guard mode may be provided. If used, operating properly.
these devices shall be located so as to (E) A system or visual check shall be
detect all operator locations and posi- made to verify correct counterbalance
tions not detected by the PSDI sensing adjustment for die weight according to
field, and shall prevent stroking or the press manufacturers instructions,
stop a stroke in process when any sup- when a press is equipped with a slide
plemental sensing field(s) are inter- counterbalance system.
rupted. (iii) When presses used in the PSDI
(x) Hand tools. Where tools are used mode have flywheel or bullgear run-
for feeding, removal of scrap, lubrica- ning on crankshaft mounted journals
tion of parts, or removal of parts that and bearings, or a flywheel mounted on
stick on the die in PSDI operations: back shaft journals and bearings, peri-
(A) The minimum diameter of the odic inspections following the press
tool handle extension shall be greater manufacturers recommendations shall
than the minimum object sensitivity of be made to ascertain that bearings are
645
in good working order, and that auto- recertified by the employer and revali-
matic lubrication systems for these dated by an OSHA-recognized third-
bearings (if automatic lubrication is party validation organization to meet
provided) are supplying proper lubrica- all applicable requirements of para-
tion. On presses with provision for graphs (a) through (h) and appendix A
manual lubrication of flywheel or of this section. Any press whose safety
bullgear bearings, lubrication shall be system has not been recertified and re-
provided according to the press manu- validated within the preceding 12
facturers recommendations. months shall be removed from service
(iv) Periodic inspections of clutch in the PSDI mode until the safety sys-
and brake mechanisms shall be per- tem is recertified and revalidated.
formed to assure they are in proper op- (iii) A label shall be affixed to the
erating condition. The press manufac- press as part of each installation cer-
turers recommendations shall be fol- tification/validation and the most re-
lowed. cent recertification/revalidation. The
(v) When any check of the press, in- label shall indicate the press serial
cluding those performed in accordance number, the minimum safety distance
with the requirements of paragraphs (Ds) required by paragraph (h)(9)(v) of
(h)(10)(ii), (iii) or (iv) of this section, this section, the fulfillment of design
reveals a condition of noncompliance, certification/validation, the employers
improper adjustment, or failure, the signed certification, the identification
press shall not be operated until the of the OSHA-recognized third-party
condition has been corrected by adjust-
validation organization, its signed vali-
ment, replacement, or repair.
dation, and the date the certification/
(vi) It shall be the responsibility of
validation and recertification/revalida-
the employer to ensure the competence
tion are issued.
of personnel caring for, inspecting, and
maintaining power presses equipped for (iv) Records of the installation cer-
PSDI operation, through initial and tification and validation and the most
periodic training. recent recertification and revalidation
(11) Safety system certification/valida- shall be maintained for each safety sys-
tion. (i) Prior to the initial use of any tem equipped press by the employer as
mechanical press in the PSDI mode, long as the press is in use. The records
two sets of certification and validation shall include the manufacture and
are required: model number of each component and
(A) The design of the safety system subsystem, the calculations of the safe-
required for the use of a press in the ty distance as required by paragraph
PSDI mode shall be certified and vali- (h)(9)(v) of this section, and the stop-
dated prior to installation. The manu- ping time measurements required by
facturers certification shall be vali- paragraph (h)(2)(ii) of this section. The
dated by an OSHA-recognized third- most recent records shall be made
party validation organization to meet available to OSHA upon request.
all applicable requirements of para- (v) The employer shall notify the
graphs (a) through (h) and appendix A OSHA-recognized third-party valida-
of this section. tion organization within five days
(B) After a press has been equipped whenever a component or a subsystem
with a safety system whose design has of the safety system fails or modifica-
been certified and validated in accord- tions are made which may affect the
ance with paragraph (h)(11)(i) of this safety of the system. The failure of a
section, the safety system installation critical component shall necessitate
shall be certified by the employer, and the removal of the safety system from
then shall be validated by an OSHA- service until it is recertified and re-
recognized third-party validation orga- validated, except recertification by the
nization to meet all applicable require- employer without revalidation is per-
ments of paragraphs (a) through (h) mitted when a non-critical component
and appendix A of this section. or subsystem is replaced by one of the
(ii) At least annually thereafter, the same manufacture and design as the
safety system on a mechanical power original, or determined by the third-
press used in the PSDI mode shall be party validation organization to be
646
equivalent by similarity analysis, as (D) The requirements for hand tools

set forth in appendix A. that may be used in the PSDI mode.
(vi) The employer shall notify the (E) The severe consequences that can
OSHA-recognized third-party valida- result if he or she attempts to cir-
tion organization within five days of cumvent or by-pass any of the safe-
the occurrence of any point of oper- guard or operating functions of the
ation injury while a press is used in the PSDI system.
PSDI mode. This is in addition to the (ii) The employer shall certify that
report of injury required by paragraph employees have been trained by pre-
(g) of this section; however, a copy of paring a certification record which in-
that report may be used for this pur- cludes the identity of the person
pose. trained, the signature of the employer
(12) Die setting and work set-up. (i) Die or the person who conducted the train-
setting on presses used in the PSDI ing, and the date the training was com-
mode shall be performed in accordance pleted. The certification record shall
with paragraphs (d) and (h) of this sec- be prepared at the completion of train-
tion. ing and shall be maintained on file for
(ii) The PSDI mode shall not be used the duration of the employees employ-
for die setting or set-up. An alternative ment. The certification record shall be
manual cycle initiation and control made available upon request to the As-
means shall be supplied for use in die sistant Secretary for Occupational
setting which meets the requirements Safety and Health.
of paragraph (b)(7) of this section.
(iii) Following a die change, the safe- APPENDIX A TO 1910.217MANDATORY RE-
QUIREMENTS FOR CERTIFICATION/VALIDATION
ty distance, the proper application of
OF SAFETY SYSTEMS FOR PRESENCE SENSING
supplemental safeguarding, and the DEVICE INITIATION OF MECHANICAL POWER
slide counterbalance adjustment (if the PRESSES
press is equipped with a counter-
balance) shall be checked and main- Purpose
tained by authorized persons whose The purpose of the certification/validation
qualifications include knowledge of the of safety systems for presence sensing device
safety distance, supplemental safe- initiation (PSDI) of mechanical power press-
guarding requirements, and the manu- es is to ensure that the safety systems are
facturers specifications for counter- designed, installed, and maintained in ac-
balance adjustment. Adjustment of the cordance with all applicable requirements of
29 CFR 1910.217 (a) through (h) and this ap-
location of the PSDI presence sensing
pendix A.
device shall require use of a special
tool available only to the authorized General
persons.
The certification/validati

Osha 1910 General Industry PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Osha 1910 General Industry PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

29

Parts 1900 to 1910.999

Containing a codification of documents

A Special Edition of the Federal Register

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office

Subtitle BRegulations Relating to Labor (Continued)

Chapter XVIIOccupational Safety and Health Administration,

Material Approved for Incorporation by Reference ............................ 923

Table of CFR Titles and Chapters ....................................................... 933

Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR ......................... 951

List of CFR Sections Affected ............................................................. 961

To cite the regulations in

SUBTITLE BREGULATIONS RELATING TO LABOR (CONTINUED)

CHAPTER XVIIOccupational Safety and Health Administra-

1902.10 Submission. 1902.47 Reconsideration of an affirmative

1902.17 The proceeding.

is considered to include State develop- schedule for their accomplishment not

(c) Enforcement. (1) The indices for against discharge or discrimination in

standards, by such means as provisions 1902.6 Consultation with the Na-

1902.14 Formal hearing. (3) For any other reason.

1902.34 Certification of completion of completed all the developmental steps

judicial review of adverse adjudica- 1902.39 Completion of evaluation.

Where a portion of a plan is in issue for 1902.40 Informal hearing.

reasonable time, generally not less determination, he shall publish a no-

furnished by the Occupational Safety tablishment, to the extent that such

1903.5 Entry not a waiver. tion. An employer who fails to comply

exposures and the attachment of per- ployer and employee representative

that could reasonably be expected to (1) A copy of such petition shall be

penalty shall be deemed to be the final material. Notices of de minimis viola-

(ii) The cited equipment has been llllllllllllllllllllllll

Sec. 1904.43 Summary and posting of year 2000

Subpart BScope Subpart GDefinitions

Subpart CRecordkeeping Forms and Subpart APurpose

SIC code Industry description SIC code Industry description

Subpart CRecordkeeping Forms (b) Implementation. (1) What sections of

1904.5 Determination of work-relat- the work environment as the estab-

1904.5(b)(2) You are not required to record injuries and illnesses if . . .

(3) How do I handle a case if it is not (iv) Medical treatment in a case

You may use the following to determine if an injury or illness is

transfer or restriction in the same way (B) Administering tetanus immuniza-

Subpart EReporting Fatality, In- (4) Do I have to report a fatality or mul-

number of employees, their wages and You. You means an employer as

Subpart EEffect of Initial Decisions shall be deemed to be a party without

1905.7 Form of documents; subscrip- protect employees against the hazard

authority having jurisdiction over em- 1905.16 Consolidation of proceedings.

(3) To provide for discovery and to or regulating the contents of the

decision to become final 20 days after PART 1906ADMINISTRATION WIT-

be at least as effective as the section questing the service, subject to sched-

is a recognized labor organization rep- under a Plan approved under section 18

of employment which is safe and fices. It may, under limited conditions

followed by a written report to the em- objection to a joint conference, the

and provide advice on modifications or fected employees for 3 working days, or

to eliminate serious hazards,) para- is issued, onsite consultation shall only

provisions of 1908.6(e)(7), (e)(8), (f)(3), identified as a result of a consultative

All consultants shall be selected in ac- (ii) A performance evaluation of each

Subpart DWalking-Working Surfaces DIPPING AND COATING OPERATIONS

1910.21 Definitions. 1910.122 Table of contents.

1910.9011910.999 [Reserved] 1910.2 Definitions.

greatest protection of the safety or (d) In the event a standard protects

(c)(15)(iv), (f)(4), and (j)(2); (33) ANSI C171 National Electrical

I. Annual Review of Fee Schedule

Approximate dates Action required

II. Application Processing Fees